《The Return of The Crazy Demon》 Chapter 1 - Among Them, I am the Most… Most martial artists are crazy. They train day and night to kill others; they skip meals and avoid relieving themselves to increase their internal energy. Just how crazy is a martial artist? A martial artist is like a monkey wielding a sword all day to kill other monkeys or sitting cross-legged without moving to improve their skills. A sword-wielding mad monkey. A crazy monkey that practices the art of meditation. That is the essence of a martial artist. There is no difference between chivalrous heroes who sought only to help others and the Murim Alliance, who considered themselves justice incarnate. No matter their background, martial artists are people who are obsessed with becoming superior to others in martial arts. In that sense, martial arts drove the crazy bastards even deeper into madness. Just as there is no end to learning, there is no end to learning martial arts. Since the path to their ultimate destination is endless, it is no surprise that martial artists on this path fall even faster into madness. There are even times when both their bodies and minds break at the same time, causing a martial artist to enter a state of Qi Deviation (߻ħ). Of course, Ive also been there. An ancient saying stated, Pass To The Qualified (˲). The saying means not to teach those unqualified, but for martial artists, it is intended as a warning not to teach those crazy bastards who can barely be considered human. What would a crazy bastard do with a powerful martial art technique? They would release their innate desires with no inhibitions. Kangho is a place where perverts and blood-thirsty monsters spread like an infectious disease as they sate their desires, and people are trained in martial arts to hunt down and kill them. Therefore, the phrase the principles of Kangho have sunk to the ground shows that the world is filled with more madmen driven mad by martial arts than ordinary people. The cycle of insanity in Kangho continues to this day. Even the chivalrous heroes who hunt down the crazy bastards descend into madness. In a place like this, I lived my life taking down those crazy bastards. These crazy bastards exist in both the Orthodox and Unorthodox factions, hidden among the various sects of both sides. Then there are the Demon Cultists who openly compete to determine who is the craziest among them. Ive made many enemies all over the place because I attacked those who deserve to die regardless of their association; however, I hate Demon Cultists the most. Some chivalrous warriors in Orthodox factions try to deal with everything themselves. Some spirited men in the Unorthodox factions also try not to cross the line. However, Demon Cultists are a bunch of monkeys whove lost their wits, spew poison, shoot thunder from swords, appear out of nowhere, use strange tricks to make everything around them freeze, and cause people to suffer. These crazy monkeys spread like a plague in Kangho, sowing chaos and causing people to call it the Demon Cults World. I would beat those crazy beasts to death by any means. Nevertheless, there are still too many monkeys that I need to deal with. . . . I am the Crazy Demon (ħ). Chapter 2 - Escapes Final Destination Everyone grows old. Including me. I never felt any fatigue in the past, not even after fleeing from the Murim Alliance for seven days straight. Yet now it feels like Ive aged ten years since these bastards started hunting me. If I knew this would happen, I would have trained harder. Yet humans repeat the same mistakes only to end up with regrets. Since I didnt have a destination in mind, I lost my way while fleeing. Along the way, the colorful variety of curses from my pursuers became ever more audible. Words cursing me as a son of a bitch, a bastard, a motherfucker, and a parent-less orphan filled the air. Well, I am an orphan, that much is true. Nevertheless, curses about my parents were added to the variety. Its crazy how there are people who would swear at the parents of an orphan like me. Thats just how crazy this world has become. I have killed quite a few people for daring to speak to me like that in the past, but now that the number of voices cursing at me has multiplied, I found it best to run away. I cant believe a man like me is running How shameful. But that is just proof of how intimidating the Demon Cult (ħ) is. Even though I have killed so many during my escape, there are still numerous martial masters in the Cult who could fight me on equal footing. When I was a naive young man, I aspired to become the God of Martial Arts (). Why did I recall my old aspirations in the middle of this chase? I dont know either. Whenever I talked about my dream, the people around me would tell me I was delusional. Telling me that my dream of becoming a Martial God was a futile and vain pursuit. Yet if it was easily achievable, it wouldnt be a dream, right? A dream must always be a challenge to fulfill. Its always the same, even now. Isnt it because I set my aims and standards high that the Demon Cult, the evil of all evils and one of the three prominent factions of Murim, is chasing me? Being chased by the Demon Cult marks you as a true man. Perhaps because they are chasing me like a bunch of hound dogs, the feeling was more exhilarating than ever. Just the other day, I was being chased by the Murim Alliance, and now I am being pursued by the Demon Cult. Though I could not become a Martial God, I have achieved something that ordinary men would never even dream of doing. This item I stole from the Demon Cult must be extraordinary. If not, why else would those crazy scumbags be hunting me down so desperately? I knew it would be very amusing to harass the Demon Cult. Even if I had known this in the past, however, I would never have dared to attempt it because I was not strong enough at the time. Even now, I think I should have trained a little more before doing this. Humans indeed always make the same mistakes. Damn it I have always had pride in my talents. A man good with mind games, schemes, tactics, strategies, lies, never falling for honey traps, and a high level in movement skills. The craziest and most versatile man in all of Kangho, one who kept his talents hidden from sight. In particular, honey traps never worked on me because attractive women didnt like me in the first place. My past experiences proved it. Seeing haze appearing in front of me as I ran, I figured that the place I was approaching was where fog often appeared. Where in the world was I running to? Judging from the area, the cliff in front of me looked like a particularly infamous valley. This spot is famous because the masters of the Demon Cult and Orthodox faction competed against each other on both sides of the carved canyon in the center. Had the Orthodox faction won then, perhaps the Demon Cult would not be pursuing me so furiously. As if declaring a truce, both sides cut off the only remaining path that crossed the canyon, the Echoing Sword Bridge. Since the Echoing Sword Bridge was destroyed, there was no way for me to cross this valley anymore. The place I arrived at in my flight was a cliff, a far cry from a safe haven. After I fled from the Demon Cults headquarters, I crossed over the Tae-ul Mountain, Myeong-ri Mountain, Chu-hun Mountain, and many other nameless mountains and rivers. As I fled, I also cut my left arm, suffered a stab to my face, and injured my left shoulder. As I look down the cliff with a sorrowful gaze, I realize it was as empty as my life. Contemplating the valley below, I wonder why I never got to date a beautiful woman before all this. It is said that when a person is about to die, the person they miss the most will flash before their eyes, and yet none appeared before mine. A sigh escaped from my mouth. I should have at least gone on a date with someone. I lived too seriously. I wish someone would write this on my tombstone. The Crazy Demon died while immersed in serious thoughts Someone arrives with the sound of the wind cutting the grass behind me. With that level of skill, it could only be the Left Hand of Illuminating Light (ʹ), one of the strongest masters of the Demon Cult. He is also a master of trickery who appears at decisive moments after ordering his subordinates to chase first. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light is just as notorious as I am in Kangho. Before joining the Demon Cult, he was known as the Pervert (ɫħ) in Kangho. He gained notoriety as a perverted sadist who preyed upon the beautiful wives of the Noble Families of Murim, with his victims including ladies from the Namgoong, Seo-Moon, and Baek-Ri families. But while equally notorious, it doesnt mean that Im also a pervert. I never got the chance to be one. Was it just my imagination, or did a sudden surge of anger rise from the depths of my heart. Was it because of the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights arrival? Or was it because of his dirty past? Despite being the man most feared by female warriors of the Orthodox faction, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light lands on the ground with an incredibly cool posture. Do you have to be handsome to also be a pervert? Damn good-looking dirtbag. Looking at this almost-scary looking man, one with a notably high nose bridge, who chased me all the way here, I realize again why you shouldnt mess with the Demon Cult. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light approaches me with his hands behind his back and lowers his voice. I cant believe youre making me suffer so much. Damned bastard. Ill admit that your movement skill is much more advanced than what was rumored. I respond to the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights serious nonsense with a nonchalant expression. Youre here, pervert. Ive never seen a pervert run that hard. Very impressive. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light replies to me with a troubled expression, doubtless frustrated after being forced to chase me for three days and three nights. Shut up, you psycho. This isnt the time for jokes. Acting all calm while standing on the edge of a cliff? Read the room. Whether its a cliff or a paradise, youre still a pervert. And teach your men some manners. Im not a bitch, and definitely not a bastard. But I am an orphan. The atmosphere became solemn for a moment. Swearing at the parents Ive never met before, you fucking rascals? Thats why youre called the Demon Cult. Stop bullshitting and hand over the thing you stole. I snort back in reply. If I give it back to you, you should call me an errand boy instead of Crazy Demon. What are you talking about? Im saying I used to be an errand boy. Haaah The Left Hand of Illuminating Light lets out a tired sigh. Meanwhile, the troops of the Demon Cult arrive and slowly gather around like dark clouds before a storm. Why do they like black clothes so much? The Demon Cult troops gather like storm clouds, closing in and surrounding the area while waiting for the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights orders. Everyones eyes are razor-sharp. More than a hundred people died by my hands during the chase, so Im sure they are extremely fired up. If I caused such a severe blow to the Demon Cult, shouldnt the Murim Alliance hand me the Hero of the Year award? Looking back at my past, I almost forgot that I had caused a lot of accidents and became Murims public enemy. Even my rank in the public enemy list is higher than the pervert in front of me. Even the nickname Crazy Demon was first given by the Orthodox factions. First of all, the Hero of the Year award is already impossible for me. Watching my smiling face, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light said. How can you laugh in this situation, Crazy Demon? Have you gone nuts? Thats too bad, What? You must have held back your laughter when your Sect Leader farted. Thats your limit. Im sure you also forced yourself to laugh every time the Sect Leader makes a lame joke. Thats not true. Shut up! Thats rich coming from someone like you. I always laugh as I please. Are you that scared of your Sect Leader, you ass-kisser? The Left Hand of Illuminating Light replies with a begrudging look. Is there anyone in Kangho who is not afraid of our Sect Leader? No. Look at the leaders who always avoid our leaders suggestion of a one-on-one duel. Even if there is a powerful master stronger than the Sect Leader in Kangho, there is none around who dont fear him. You know this, right? What are you yapping about? Im right here. When was I ever afraid of your Sect Leader? Then why did you waste everyones time and run all the way here? Im not afraid of the Sect Leader, Im scared of you perverts. Itd be good for your mental health to leave the Cult and focus more on your perversions that have nothing to do with your leader. Oh, Left Hand, that man behind you is smiling. I point my finger at the Demon Cult troops, but the gaze of the Left Hand of Illuminating Light fixates itself on me. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light says with a stern look. Thats not gonna work. I nod. That cant be helped. You guys chased me because of this, right? I carefully took the Heavenly Pearl () out and held it out to the Left Hand of Illuminating Light. The Left Hand of Illuminating Lights round eyes turn sharp like a wild cats that had starved for three days. ! I made a suggestion to the Left Hand. Seeing how your eyes twinkled as soon as you saw this Heavenly Pearl, you must be after it too. I thought it was strange for the Left Hand of Illuminating Light himself to come all the way here. Good thing were far from your headquarters. Since its like this, how about splitting this between us? We can split Kangho between us. Then you can fulfill all of your perverted desires. I gently try to persuade the Left Hand, but his reaction is not positive. It belongs to the Sect Leader. But why are your eyes so greedy? Listen to me, Demon Cultists. The Left Hand has malicious intent toward your Sect Leader. One of you should go back first and report back to your Sect Leader. The Left Hand is trying to stir up a rebellion by taking the Heavenly Pearl. Who wants to contribute? No one? Cowards. Baiting is always fun, it might not work on the Demon Cult, but I am always persistent. Everyone, look at your superior. The Left Hand cant even answer me because hes troubled by my words. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light says in reply. Stop the crap and hand over the Heavenly Pearl. Just give it back, and well step down for now. We didnt want to kill you from the start. Oh, really? As I said, the Heavenly Pearl is more important than your life. I will visit you personally later and punish you for your sins. Ill even fight you one on one. Theres a lying tongue over there. In a one on one fight? Yes. Should you be saying that after cornering me? If you had agreed to duel me from the start, a hundred of your men wouldnt have died. An idiot pervert like you always messes things up. Id rather become a monk than believe you. Everybody, get out of the way. This Heavenly Pearl is round in shape and makes a clear sound every time you tap it, it makes a great wooden bell. A monk will never let go of his wooden bell. Then Ill have no choice but to kill you. Bring it on, you bastards. I shall become a Mad Monk (ɮ) today! Contrary to my words, I raise my hand as if I am about to throw the Heavenly Pearl down the valley. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light extends his hand in a hurry. D-dont! Seeing the surprise and panic flash across the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights face, I thought it was a rewarding day. It became clear. What I had stolen was indeed both tremendous and formidable. Even if I still dont know what this is. If I throw the Heavenly Pearl down the valley, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light and his subordinates would have to jump down the cliff. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light tries to appease me with some fast talking. Whats wrong with you? The reason why I closed one eye to your nonsense and let you live is that you can keep tormenting the Murim Alliance Leader. We always favor Murims enemies. But this changes things. Ive been courteous enough to ask you to join us, but instead you stole a sacred object? Repaying my goodwill with stealing? Thats inhumane. But I cant give it back because you swore at my parents. I apologize. We are not afraid of you but we cannot disobey our leaders commands, so please return the sacred item to us. Is that how you should beg? Is that how a thief should speak? My arm extends toward the valley again. Ill throw it away now. Lets go for a real round. I apologize. Wait a minute. Lets talk this through. I nod. Well, then, tell me what this Heavenly Pearl is. Dont try to lie, tell me the truth. Come on, man! Im dying of curiosity. Chapter 3 Chapter 3 C Tell Your Cult Leader Im Sorry The Left Hand of Illuminating Lights face becomes sullen at my words. I only called it a sacred item, how did you know that its called the Heavenly Pearl? Do you think all I did these past three days was run? I also had a great time eating, taking a dump, reciting poems, and torturing your men. I even went sailing, it was a fulfilling time. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light glares at his men waiting behind him and then asks. You weaklings couldnt even handle his torture? Your men should know what this is, but they know nothing. I must know what this is before I die. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light replies to me in a low tone. Crazy Demon, that is a special supplement made for the Cult Leader. If other people consume it, their limbs will melt, so dont even think about it. Its method of creation is complex and precise. Thats why I came personally to retrieve it. Stop lying through your teeth. Do I look like an innocent lady from the Namgoong Family? Or a Baek-ri Family beauty that lightens up mens faces? You fucking pervert. You dont believe me when I tell you the truth. It is called a sacred item because the Cult Leader has to take it. You have to believe me. Thats strange. If this is a supplement, wouldnt that old man take this before starting close-door training? Everyone has their own circumstances. His martial arts training has its own strict order. How did you make it? It looks refined instead of being found in nature. Will you give it to me if I tell you? Instead of answering, I look into the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights eyes. Nope. Knowing the evil deeds that the Demon Cult had committed so far, I could roughly guess how it was made. Moreover, the color of the Heavenly Pearl changes depending on the surrounding temperature and sunlight. It was as if extreme Yang and extreme Yin energies were mixing inside. If I had to describe it, the Pearls structure was in a Yin and Yang pattern. In the Demon Cults terms, its a reverse Yin and Yang. It also means that the supplement is no ordinary medicine because it is instilled with both Yin and Yang energies. It wouldnt be strange if Kangho faced destruction if this made it to the hands of the Demon Cults Leader. Damn it the Murim Alliance has to hand me that Hero of the Year award for this. Fuckers. My predictions came true. Ah, I get it now. I think Im a genius. Let me guess. This is why you guys attack different sects and declare wars with the Murim Alliance all the time. I dont know how, but you took out the essence of living warriors and distilled it into this pill. It probably wasnt easy to make either, since you had to extract both extreme Yin and extreme Yang energy. While I was explaining, I realized the Cult Leaders underlying intentions. Only if the person has a Yin and Yang body, or have their Dantian balanced with extreme Yin and extreme Yang energy can maximize its effects. Ah, is that why the old man did closed-door training? Was I wrong? Or was the old geezer planning to change to a different body? The supplement would be more effective when taken in a new body. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light smiles as he listens to my explanation. Damned bastard, I thought you were just a brainless freak. Youre welcome. Think what you want. Even if you knew the truth, it still costs more than your life. Right. You dont have a Yin and Yang Body, so give it to me. If the Cult Leader takes this, he will become invincible. Hes already powerful enough, just how much stronger does he plan to be? I cant give it to you, thats how a lone hero does things. I was joking, but Left Hand didnt laugh at all. This is why the Demon Cult and I cant get along. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light continues to stare at me. He must be scared I will fall down into the valley if we fight. In fact, its too much of a hassle to jump into the valley myself. What kind of idiot would jump off a cliff? Unless a miracle is waiting below, that is. Then, the only answer is to do something that annoys the Left Hand of Illuminating Light in this situation. My injuries are severe anyway, so I swallow the Heavenly Pearl without much thought. Watching as the Heavenly Pearl goes down my esophagus with a gulp, the Left Hands face turns pale white. Savoring the taste of Heavenly Pearl, I say. Its sweet. It tastes like peaches and has a refreshing aftertaste. Did you mix peaches in for the old Cult Leaders sake? Bahahahaha. Not only the Left Hand of Illuminating Light but his subordinates are also staring at me with wide eyes. To exaggerate it a little, every one of them looked like they were about to faint. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light points at me and stutters in disbelief. Y-y-you ate it? My face becomes slightly grim. You said it was a supplement, crazy bastard. Supplements are good for the body. I wish you the misfortune of the old Cult Leaders commands. Relax. Your men will report what they exactly saw. Or maybe Ill kill you all with my own hands. Left Hand stomps his feet in anger and yells. You crazy punk! That-! I act like a fool on purpose. Should I have given it to the Cult Leader? But its already gone into my stomach. Keurgh! The sensation of the Heavenly Pearl entering my stomach is strange. Im not joking, but it weirdly tastes like a large peach. However, my body was feeling even stranger. I frown and touch my lower abdomen. It feels like my Dantian is being forcefully torn into two. From the Demon Cult troops perspective, my face must have been slowly becoming paler. I am experiencing the bizarre feeling of my Dantian forcefully becoming half extreme Yin and half extreme Yang. Its not a painful process, so it must just be the effect of a sacred item. Grinding his teeth, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light orders his men. Kill him! No. Catch him alive. Ill grind him alive and present him to the Cult Leader. Roger! I hold out my hand and frown as if I am about to say something. Wait! Roger my ass. I have something to say. I feel sick. Wait, I think I have to spit it out. I look at the Left Hand with the most serious expression in the world. Hearing that Im about to spit the Heavenly pearl out, Left Hand raises his hand and puts his men on standby. Halt! The Left Hand holds his breath. I continue with a serious expression. My Dantian What about your Dantian? Its heating up and cooling down back and forth, I think I have an upset stomach. This supplement doesnt work well with my body. In fact, every time I farted, it rang like a thunderstorm, causing the troops to frown and cover their noses. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light covers his nose with his hand and says. Spit it out already. I also cover my nose and reply. Stop whining like a baby, and I never said Id spit it out. I have to take a shit You guys head down the mountain first. Im a gentleman, so I cant let you see me take a dump. What? As I watch Left Hands face grow white, I calmly say. Tell the Cult Leader that Im sorry, and that he can come back later and dig through my shit. My shit will contain answers to becoming a Demon God (ħ). Ah, he will become the first person to become a grand Demon Cult Leader using poop. At last, the man named the Crazy Demon took the greatest dump in the world. How legendary. After trying to listen to me seriously, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light eventually loses his reason and shoots energy through his palms at me. Damn it! I have no choice but to counteract the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights attack with the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique (b). Immense palm-shaped energies collide in the air. Boooooooooooooooom! The Left Hand of Illuminating Light was knocked back at a tremendous speed, and I got pushed back three or four steps out over the valleys gaping mouth. At that moment, I learned for the first time that the Left Hand of Illuminating Light had mastered an extremely cold-natured martial arts technique. So this bastard mastered Ice Qi (깦). The Left Hand was pushed back a little further than I, but my pride is hurt because of my severe injuries. I become momentarily flustered as I feel my body begin falling down the cliff. Things never go as planned. Watching the Demon Cult members getting further away as I fall, I laugh. Wuhahahahaha. My laughter echoes throughout the valley, and before I knew it, it rang so loud that it filled the Heavens and Earth. Did my laughter become this loud because of Heavenly Pearl? Also, the valley is profoundly deep. I continue to laugh as I fall endlessly into the valleys abyss. While my legs were fine, the strange energy of Heavenly Pearl crawling in my Dantian is causing my strength to overflow despite my exhaustion. This wasnt planned either. Just before hitting the floor, the force of my fall is offset by my Smiling Windstorm (LһЦ) technique. My body flips three and a half times before landing lightly on the ground. An almost perfect landing. Hehehehe. I look up and see the Left Hand of Illuminating Light and his low-ranking troops, who might die as they fall from that height, had also jumped down into the valley and are running toward me. They might be my enemies, but seeing how the whole group jumped down at a single command is so impressive that I cant help but admire and give them applause. Woah those damned lunatics. The Demon Cult is indeed the Demon Cult. They would do anything to follow an order; thats why the Murim Alliance could never penetrate through to the Demon Cults headquarters. But half of them will die from fracturing their bodies. Several die instantly after hitting the bottom of the cliff or protruding rocks, filling the valley with their screams. As I watch them die, I understand Left Hands words that there is no one in this world who does not fear the Cult Leader. The Demon Cult is a terrifying organization. Although their official name was the Heavenly Demon Cult, only the cultists themselves call it that. Then suddenly, the valley, the blue sky, and even the Demon Cult believers falling through the air disappear as everything turns white. Hm? Oh my goodness. Everything is pure white. A man then floats down the air in front of me, his face being obscured from my sight by a peculiarly brilliant light. Damn, I wasnt expecting this kind of a surprise. Just who is this guy? I have a hunch that my life () is in his hands from this moment on. To my surprise, I can no longer hear the wind. As if the world had stopped, a mysterious man slowly descends to the ground in silence. What the hell? What kind of martial arts is that? Im surprised that a man can descend from that height with his hands behind his back. As I quickly scan the surroundings, I notice that even the bottom of the valley is pure white. The man with an overwhelming presence approaches me with his hands behind his back and says. I cant believe you swallowed an item with souls inside it so easily. You must be crazy. I shudder the moment I hear his voice. It is a strange voice mixed with a martial artists confidence, courage, and dignity. A voice that transcends the mundanity of existence. This man is on a different level. I ask him. I am indeed crazy, but who are you? Only then did I get a close look at the mysterious man. He wore the same attire as a martial artist like me, but they are way out of fashion. It gives the impression of an absolute martial master that had walked out of an ancient painting. Even the best masters of this era would not be able to maintain their sanity in front of this overwhelming presence. Im well informed of all the true masters of Kangho, but the identity of this man is a mystery to me. I voice out my innermost thoughts. Youre strong. Im sure Ive never praised anyone like this before. I am surprised that I didnt know of such a man present in Kangho. The man replies to me with a hesitant look. Indeed. Youre holding out well in front of me, too. Thats good. But why did you swallow the Heavenly Pearl? Numerous souls of incredible martial artists are locked up in the Heavenly Pearl and now they cant ascend. Do you understand this? Do you take me as a fool? The man touches his chin for a while and agonizes before continuing. Those souls are unable to ascend, and are now stuck to your soul. What? If you sleep, the souls will wake you, and if you eat, they will share the essence of the food, and the spirits will cling onto whoever you touch. And your Qi will go berserk and explode. In the midst of that, I note some pleasant words. Oh, I like the sound of that about my Qi. The man continues. You are now a living Heavenly Pearl and a half-ghost. Theres no longer a chance for you to live a normal life. I never lived a normal life in the first place. So it seems. Youve been through a lot of Qi Deviation. How did you know that? If you have time, look in the mirror. Your eyes arent normal Qi Deviation often comes with mental illnesses. What if the Cult Leader had eaten this Heavenly Pearl instead? I didnt eat it because I wanted to. I didnt want the Cult Leader to have it. The man smiles. Did you eat it with good intentions? Thats right. Its the truth. Somehow this guy seems to have the ability to see through lies. Thats also why he knows Im not lying. The man sighs and continues. It seems you are speaking the truth. The Heavenly Pearl is an item that goes against nature. If the Cult Leader had taken this, I would have been punished for my involvement in what came after. But things never go as planned in this world. Such is the nature of this scary world, that even such a great man can have something unexpected happen to them. He continues. Even so, those souls must ascend. That way, their past lifes mistakes will be considered and individually judged in the afterworld. Many people who have lived a fairly good life are locked in there and they must be freed. What should I do then? It sounds like youre asking me to die faster. I cant do that. Why dont you take me to the Cult Leader? I think Ill be able to die in peace if I at least die with that old geezer, Ill kill him and then end myself. The man responds with a smile. Dont play tricks on me. Im caught already? Youre quick-witted. Why do you hate the Cult Leader so much? Dont even start. Why? Why? The Cult Leader doesnt see people as equal to him. My lifes long-cherished desire was to beat the Cult Leader to death. I raise my finger as I am about to reply to his question. But the man seems to already know my answer. The man replies. Because he doesnt see others as human? I nod while maintaining eye contact with the man. Exactly, and that was the entire reason I wanted to kill him. The man folds his arms and smiles faintly. Thats a good reason. A good reason? I stare at the man. Strangely, he is a man I could converse normally with. I couldnt believe it initially, but this man must have been close to God. The man unfolds his arms and sighs as if giving up on something before pointing his finger at me and saying. Lee Zaha I widen my eyes. He knows my name? The man continues. This is your final chance. Dont swallow the Heavenly Pearl again. Ill be serving my punishment, so I wont be able to help you. Whatever the result, Ill treat you with kindness. This is the best choice I can give and the best gift you will receive. The man reaches out to me. For a moment, I wonder if I am about to die. Given the circumstances, I probably wont. As soon as a light flashes from the mans extended hand, I wonder what the hell it was as my five senses disappear. Huh? It seems like my consciousness is about to be cut off. . . . Am I dead? It feels like my whole body is falling apart, but there is no pain. My soul whispers just before I lose consciousness. I dont want to die yet. Oh, I Ive never been with a beautiful woman Damn it! Chapter 4 Chapter 4 C Why Did I End Up As An Errand Boy Again? A quiet dawn. I awake to the sound of rain hitting the roof of a building. I can see the yellowish wallpaper on the ceiling and smell the faint scent of mold permeating the room, but it feels strange that the migraine I had all my life is just gone. Even stranger is just how familiar the sight before me is. This is my old home, a place that radiates the atmosphere of a poor shabby house, a sight that does not change no matter how many times I blink. I am in the small room at the back of the Zaha Inn that had been passed down to me by my grandfather. And my name is Lee Zaha because of this inn. Why am I here? I could never be mistaken because I never lived in a decent house again after the inn burned down. Suddenly I remember the mysterious mans words. This is your final chance. Dont swallow Heavenly Pearl again. How would I swallow Heavenly Pearl again? Unless I was sent back to the past, its not possible. Huh? Wait, the past? Come to think of it, my bodys condition is much better. Amazingly, my headache is gone, and the injury suffered while penetrating the Demon Cults Heaven and Earth Net also vanished completely. However, my face stings as if someone had punched me. When I open the door to find out what has happened, I am greeted by the pitiful, ramshackle sight of the Zaha Inn. Considering the mans words and where I am now, he must have meant that I should not swallow the Heavenly Pearl again after returning to the past. If thats the case, then the current present is clearly my past. I was so bewildered that I didnt realize that the current situation was a blessing. Wow, what the hell? I always thought the Zaha Inn was a dull and messy place, but the current sight of the inn after so long is peaceful and quiet. Beyond the inn entrance, dawn breaks upon the ridge as the rain stops. Hmm I stare at the scenery until the sun that is rising begins to spread its light dimly inside the inn Its been a long time since Ive felt this peaceful. But it is a little disappointing. Why did it have to be at this point in the past? I couldnt find my grandfather anywhere in the inn. I also think about how nice it wouldve been to go back further in time and see my parents. My mood sours somewhat as I recall my grandfather telling me about how my parents died of poor health. There is nothing I can do about the sudden rush of emotions. While looking at the scenery outside the inn for a long time, my right eye was throbbing furiously. It feels like its bruised. Since there are no mirrors, I had no choice but to leave the inn. My old memories are either scattered in pieces or lost in oblivion, and looking around the inn isnt helping me recall them! So, I rush to the stream and check my face. The sight of it surprises me. The scars had vanished from my face, giving it a shockingly soft appearance. However, my right eye is bruised and blue, and my lips are torn as if I had been punched. When did I get beaten up like this? It is the face I had in my early twenties. During this time, I got beat up often, so I am confused as to which incident caused this. As I look at my reflection on the calm waters, memories of the past come rushing back. This is definitely my hometown at the southern edge of the Ilyang Prefecture. Kangho grows around where people live. No reputable sects or noble families live here, but this is a place where the Orthodox and Unorthodox factions clashed with each other. By the time I was named Crazy Demon, this place was infested with crazy scumbags. Ilyang Prefecture, in particular, has a large number of them. It is because pleasure pavilions are flourishing here. Since I was young, it has been a place where rogues would gang up together and commit crimes that not even low-class sects would do. These rogues also dream of entering Unorthodox faction sects outside the Prefecture. I look over the tranquil countryside and shout out. Im back! Motherfuckers! Its dawn, so I am expecting everyone to be asleep, yet a nearby man yells back in reply. Be quiet! You crazy punk! If youre drunk, go home. Ugh, fuck. Youre awake? Get some fucking sleep. A man who is barely asleep at dawn shouts from his house. The curses make me realize that I have indeed returned to the past. Was I lucky because I fought with the Demon Cult or encountered the mysterious man? It may have been a combination of luck and not letting the Demon Cult have their way. I was pretending to be an errand boy during this time. I might have gotten in trouble if it was revealed that a young man was the owner of Zaha Inn, so I often lie and say that the inn was passed down to an older relative. Of course, the neighbors close to my grandfather know that Im not just an errand boy but the inns owner, so they stayed silent. People called me Lee Zaha, combining the inns name with my real name. Memories of days when I couldnt even reveal my status as an inn owner flash through my mind. Only then did I smile. Its nice to be back. I am itching at the thought of being able to relive my life again. The previous age from when I started to learn martial arts is still a long way off. I cant even predict how much stronger I can become this time around. I will start a full seven, eight years earlier than in my previous life. Since errand boys are easily ignored, insulted, humiliated, and bullied, my position is at the bottom in Kangho. But I wont be bullied again. After all, this errand boy had once grown into a man who picked fights with the Murim Alliance and the Demon Cult. I decided to go for a walk around the Ilyang Prefecture to refresh my memory. Forgotten memories slowly come back whenever my eyes fall on different parts of the familiar streets. The dirty alleyway, the fishy smell from the fish shop, the cauldron lid in front of the dumpling restaurant, the windshield covering the sign, and the unique Rice Soup (??) restaurant I visited often. The ordinary sights and smells of the street keep bringing back memories. And the forgotten emotions also came rushing back alongside. Funnily enough, there are a lot of shops here. Still, the only place I liked to visit occasionally was the Chunyang Restaurant. While walking around alleys and streets, I often twist my lips. I had no choice but to cherish it because I didnt have any money. The miserable feeling I felt when I was robbed of my salary. As I pass through the alley, there arent any precious memories I can recall. I might be a young inn owner, but I had to live a life like a beggar to make ends meet. Because I had never spent money on anything, customers often teased me for being a penny pincher. It is also the reason why I have bruises on my face now. A customer once asked me what I would spend all my savings on. To be honest, the question caught me by surprise. Im saving up desperately because Im an orphan; how could I spend as much money as you, who works as a pavilion guard, I thought then. At that time, I tried to joke about it I said I was trying to save money to listen to Chae Hyang of Plum Blossom Pavilion sing a song. I swear to the heavens, it was just a joke. As I expected, people had a good laugh, but the reply I made in jest started to spread. It was then that I realized the true nature of rumors and how words can change their meanings as they pass through human mouths. The phrase I wanted to listen to a song suddenly changed to I want to sleep with Chae Hyang. Isnt that a surprise? These rumors spread like wildfire all around Ilyang Prefecture, but there was no mention of it being a joke anymore. I heard hes been saving up all his money to sleep with Chae Hyang. What a psycho. No wonder hes been saving up so meticulously. Loser. But that guy should know his place. Chae Hyang isnt even a prostitute; she must feel awful. Shes quite prideful, yet so many guys are after her. The thought of it still makes me sick. Jeez, it was just a joke, you damned bastards. Ugh Every time the rumor circulated and returned to my ears, I felt the urge to tear my hair out. Wasnt it both a silly and interesting story? The words I spoke in jest as the reason I was saving money spread throughout Ilyang Prefecture and suddenly became a legend. At that rate, it might have even reached the Murim Alliance. I stop briefly at Plum Blossom Pavilion, where a blue lantern (i) was hanging in front. If there is a blue lantern, it meant prostitutes are available. If a red light was hanging, it meant that none were available. Of course, the meaning in each region varies, and meanings change over time, but this place is like that. Past memories fill my mind like the light of those lanterns. Upon hearing a rumor that an errand boy wanted to sleep with Chae Hyang, the Plum Blossom Pavilion guards came to the inn to make fun of me, but because my expression was so stiff, I was suddenly hit in the face and kicked by them. There might have been many reasons for that. They might have been angry that Chae Hyang was treated as a prostitute. It may have been the ugly behavior of men trying to look good to Chae Hyang. Judging from the condition of my face, the incident was just a few days ago. This happened so long ago, so I didnt want to dwell on it, but as I am now back in the past, I have no choice but to keep reflecting on it. At that time, my face hardened because they brought Chae Hyang to tease me on purpose. How can I express the frustration and shame of that time? It didnt matter to them whether it was a joke or a truth. They were just displeased that an errand boy was looking at the most beautiful woman in Plum Blossom Pavilion. That was the first time I saw Chae Hyang. Shes very beautiful, but there is nothing more humiliating than looking at a womans face filled with anger and contempt. As I recall these emotions, a smile comes to my lips. Since they shamed me when people were watching, I will visit Plum Blossom Pavilion in the evening when it is most crowded. I have to turn the rumor back into a joke. I look at the pavilion for a long time and turn around when the man who works at the cloth shop across the street approaches me and says. Are you going to start a fire out of anger? What are you staring at? What a loser. It is the most pathetic voice in the world. Of course, the current me is also a pathetic man. That fact is more important, I am still pathetic right now. Chapter 5 Chapter 5 C Im Not Who I Used To Be A man, whose name I cant recall, approaches me with a spiteful look on his face and spits out. Dont even think about making a move on Chae Hyang. Itll make me feel disgusted, too. If word gets out you did something to Chae Hyang, shell have to retire. Do you understand me? Fucking Zaha. I tilt my head. What was your name again? I cant remember. He had been so unmemorable in the past that I cant even recall his name. What? My hand flew out and made contact with his puzzled face. With a thud, he falls backward. Did I use too much force? I look at my hand and think about the unexpected sensation of the punch. I should have no internal cultivation at this point, yet the power behind the punch is strong. Come to think of it, my Dantian feels strange. I havent even started using a Qi breathing technique, yet my Dantain was already formed. Ill check that later; as for now The man, who I had punched, scrambles up and swears at me as he rushes in. You little rascal! An opening will become too big if you curse while making an attack. As I dodge his sloppy fist, I hit him in the back of the head. Smack! This time, he falls forward instead. The guy from the linen shop, what is his name again? I kick him in the face as he tries to get up, forcing him to roll sideways. Jeez, hes gonna die at this rate. I should stop. I could do more to mock him. It must have felt mortifying to be beaten by an errand boy, but he still didnt speak up. Feeling mortified? You should be if you got beaten up by a mere errand boy. But, so what He should feel lucky not to die by my hands today. I grab and pull the mans hair and look him in the eye. Hey. After returning to the past, did my years of intense training in Kangho remain in my gaze, or is it just an errand boys plain, innocent eyes? Theres emotion in his eyes. He flinches slightly as I look at him while momentarily considering crushing his face completely. I ask again. Whats your name? Why my name all of a sudden? Just answer the question. My hand swung up, and only then did I get an answer. Its Myung-gon. Oh, I remember. Damn, Myung-gon. Why do you put fuck in front of my name? Why did you do that? Say it again. Zaha. Again. Zaha. Only then did I let go of his hair. Just say my name properly. Dont stick a curse word in front of it if you dont want to die. If his eyes and tone became soft with just a light beating, then hes not a man from Ilyang Prefecture. Myung-gon stands up with spite still in his eyes and lets out a long breath. Haa I give Myung-gon another chance. If you feel wronged, then come at me again. Myung-gon nods and immediately rushes toward me. As expected of a guy from Ilyang Prefecture. But this time, my fist is also swinging. I didnt feel anything. Because I am from Ilyang Prefecture as well. Myung-gon would rather get knocked out than get beaten up by an errand boy. His feelings will change once he wakes up. He would have fainted first if he realized he could have died. A brawl with no rules or dignity. Punch! I punch Myung-gon again as he rushed in, and he falls back and faints. I shake him a bit and ask. Myung-gon? There is no answer, but he is breathing; I walk away after watching his chest heave up and down steadily. Just sleep. Heading back to the inn, I think. Just because Ive returned to the past, doesnt mean my personality will go back to the days of an errand boy. As I walk back into the inn, I mutter, Im not who I used to be. Also, my Dantian is definitely in a strange state. Feeling something might happen, I organize the inns chairs and tables, push them inside, and put up a Closed sign at the entrance. In this situation, its best not to be open for business. In my days as an errand boy, I had no internal cultivation. But now, I can feel a large amount of underlying Yang energy in my Dantian. The energy isnt in the state of an active soldier who is entering the battlefield but that of a trainee soldier waiting in the main camp. It feels similar to taking supplements. Only by using a Qi breathing technique can you accumulate the supplements effects as internal cultivation. In fact, there is a lot of Yang energy floating in my Dantian. Why is that? When I return to the small room of Zaha Inn, I sit down cross-legged and contemplate this problem. The method to check my internal cultivation is simple. All I have to do is re-learn the Strolling Golden Turtle Cultivation Technique. The Strolling Golden Turtle Technique is a unique and rare martial art in Kangho. Starting from its name, it has the crazy meaning of a steel turtle reaching an impenetrable () state, allowing it to stride around as it pleases. The first stage is similar to a beginners martial arts, allowing me to reach it quickly. Halfway through, it is similar to a long-established sects martial arts technique, so the process becomes slower. Ultimately, the pursuit of the indestructible () state becomes extremely difficult. To master its final level requires the realization of the impossible. Moments after starting, the internal energies floating calmly inside my Dantian begins to move through my veins. Internal Energy generally takes on two main paths. Internal Energy that starts from the perineum, ascends the spine to the crown of the head, and arrives at the lips is called the Governing Vessel. Internal Energy that starts from the lips, passes through the chest, stomach, and belly button, and arrives back at the perineum is called the Conception Vessel. Just as methods of ascension vary, every sect has a different way of mastering this path. This is why each sect has its own internal cultivation methods. The common point between them is that once a sects cultivation method begins, it is very difficult to stop in the middle. Forcefully stopping this process is akin to stopping food from going down the esophagus and can lead to a state of Qi Deviation. Fortunately for me, very few customers visit my inn, so no one bothers to come when the closed sign is up. Food digested incorrectly would only lead to indigestion, but if the flow of Internal Energy is managed incorrectly, it can severely damage the body. Something that I had experienced before. Even before I can solve the problem of the inner energy located in my Dantian, I open my eyes after I finish cultivating the first stage of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique, the Wooden Chicken (ľa), perfectly in one attempt. I dont know how much time had passed, but I am now the monkey who sat down without eating and ignoring the call of nature. I felt very strange and peculiar. However, as soon as I realize that there are no side effects, I feel a pleasant shiver run down my back. I summarize my current situation as follows: First, before falling off the cliff, the Heavenly Pearl had greatly improved my internal cultivation. Second, when my internal cultivation improved, I clearly felt that the Yin and Yang energy was divided in my Dantian. Third, I was brought back to the past by the mysterious man. Fourth, the souls in the Heavenly Pearl that were attached to me would have either ascended or returned to their original bodies because I returned to the past. However, my final conclusion is that the unknown spirits contained in the Heavenly Pearl also came back with me. The cult leader wouldnt have eaten the Heavenly Pearl for spirits. Martial artists only make these things to improve their cultivation. Then whats the conclusion? I ingested the Heavenly Pearl, and the side effects of the souls were removed when I returned to the past. Even though Im back in the past, I still have both my memories and the unknown spirits of the Heavenly Pearl. Otherwise, I wouldnt have been able to break through the first stage of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique in one attempt. Of course, not all of my questions have been answered. I have a groundless hunch that the energy wasnt purely just for inner cultivation. Suddenly, I remember the mans words. This is the best choice I can give and the best gift you will ever receive. Then The best choice was to return to the past. The best gift was the Heavenly Pearl. This current situation only makes sense if I interpret it that way. However, there are still questions I need to answer. About half of the potential energy did not respond to Strolling Golden Turtle Technique. Propping my hands on my chin, I become lost in thought. Why in the world is the other half not reacting? After much consideration, I come to a simple conclusion. This is clearly the power left by the Heavenly Pearl, so the potential is also divided into Yin and Yang. The Strolling Golden Turtle Technique was initially a martial art that purely utilizes Yang energy. So it is natural that the extreme Yin energy would not react. If so, I would have to look for a technique that uses extreme Yin energy in the future. In other words, I have something exciting ahead of me. Im already halfway through finding martial arts that could utilize extreme Yang and Yin energies. Its not in my character to think about my problems for too long, so I conclude my thinking session here. I sit there in an excellent mood. So good, in fact, that I had almost forgotten that I was insane before. People seem to feel satisfied only after certain conditions are met. Hehehe In fact, martial arts is not wholly about internal cultivation. Skills, mind games, wisdom, fighting instincts, and luck determine the results of fights between great masters. Yet the most critical factor from start to finish is internal cultivation. I have returned with full possession of the other aspects of martial arts, experience becoming my potential. I also have a trait in my body that I would not trade for all the gold in the world. Even with just the first level of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique, no one in my hometown can hope to match me. Honestly, I feel full even though I have not eaten, but the bodys hunger cant be denied My stomach rumbles I cant starve to death. Besides, a good meal is necessary before I go and beat up the bastards at the Plum Blossom Pavilion. Cold rice, side dishes, and seasoning are put in a large pot in the inns kitchen and mixed together well. As I mix it around, the bibimbap is complete. Although it looks similar to dog food, it tastes good. I didnt want to throw away the side dishes, so I added them to complete my meal. The bibimbap made with leftover side dishes of the inn is a true delicacy after such a long time. I grin as I savor the nostalgic taste. I live by myself, so I thought it would be difficult to live sanely. But this is bearable. I used to be crazy, so I was very accustomed to being alone. Instead, it was much more important that the foes I fight in the future be completely insane. In the middle of eating the bibimbap, I recall the powerful masters of my time. My background is poor when you compare me to the Murim martial artists of the central district. There were so many great masters that it was common for even skilled fighters to choose to run. Therefore, I developed movement skills before martial arts for survival. My jaw constantly tightens as I chew rice when I think back to those times. After eating bibimbap, I drink the alcohol that should have been sold to customers with abandon. Burp how nice. Excess is always thrilling. It is a wonderful evening. I grab the alcohol and pour it into a gourd-shaped bottle, then I shove a sickle for cutting grass into my clothes and leave the inn. Since I am full, I am confident that I can beat everyone to death even if all the men in Ilyang Prefecture came for me at the same time. I am going to a place where a joke changed into a truth and will spit out a truth that is certain to sound like a joke. I keep drinking as I walk towards the Plum Blossom Pavilion. The eyes of the man guarding the Plum Blossom Pavilions entrance widens as soon as he sees my face. Hey, you crazy bastard. What are you doing here? Dont make any trouble and leave. Is this how you talk to your customers? You crazy bastard! Suddenly, he raises his arms. I grab the mans hand with my left hand and hit him in the face with the bottle. Punch! Then I grab him by the collar and throw him to the ground. I knock him out with a kick to the face and look at the Plum Blossom Pavilion. Their customer service is a mess. Are they insane? Still, it is a noisy place with the sound of pouring and drinking, so they did not notice the commotion at the entrance. Laughter is heard from here and there. What are you guys so happy about? Why do you always have fun without me? The gatekeeper is out cold, so I open the door with my own hands and go in. As I enter, I shout out my intent. Come serve your guest! You dimwits! As the drunk Zaha Inn errand boy appears, the expressions of the Plum Blossom Pavilion employees serving the guests becomes stiff.. Isnt that the Zaha Inn bastard? Where does he think this is? Hearing all the murmurs, I reply. What do you mean where? Isnt it a place where you can drink? Did I come to the wrong place? Hahaha. Looking at me from the railing on the second floor, Cha Sung-tae (܇̫) laughs loudly. Youre right. Its a place to drink. His subordinates then ask. Shall I get rid of him? Cha Sung-tae, who is smiling, waves at me. No, send him up. By the way, whats with your eye? Did someone hit you? I didnt hit him. Rumored to be the most cunning man in Ilyang Prefecture, Cha Sung-tae smiles as he looks at me. We cant turn away customers. Welcome. Being sly is one thing, but if a fight breaks out, there are not many people who can beat Cha Sung-tae except for the three Cho brothers in the southern part of Ilyang Prefecture. Similar to Cha Sung-tae, two other managers play the role of Family Lead (I, a manager in concept) in the other pavilions. To be precise, I had been beaten up by Cha Sung-taes men. For that reason, I am thinking about bullying Cha Sung-tae for not being able to manage his subordinates. Unless he does something atrocious before I leave Ilyang Prefecture, I have no reason to kill him. As I climb the stairs, Cha Sung-tae says from the second floor. Get the Zaha Inn errand boy a nice table and some drinks. When will he ever come to a place like this again? Lets all serve him sincerely. A customer is a customer. Yes sir. As I go up to the second floor, I am guided further in. This way. I follow the hallway and am led to an empty room. It is a strangely structured room. There is a drinking table in the center, and the bottom was shaped so that you could place your feet under it. It is a secret room where about six people could sit around and drink alcohol with places where music performers (ˇ, musically trained Gisaeng) would usually sit. The guide asks in an almost rude tone. What kind of drinks do you want? I dont know much about alcohol. So just get me anything expensive. The staff suddenly stares at me and asks in a different tone. But why are you speaking informally I answer as I sit down on the seat. Im sorry to drop the honorifics. You son of a bitch, fetch me a drink. The staff glares at me with fierce eyes, looking like he might try to kill me right away. Is he crazy? However, he closes the door without saying a word because he knows why the higher-ups received the errand boy as a guest. I like that look. Anger and hatred, murderous and bloodlust-filled eyes. Its not a big deal once you know. Once they get beaten up, their eyes become mournful and beg for mercy. I wait with folded arms for a drink and touch my eyes again. My patience is wearing thin. Chapter 6 Chapter 6 C Jokes and Truths A series of side dishes that I didnt order and a bottle of alcohol sealed with a red thread appear on the table. Whats that? A woman in her late twenties reply with a bright smile. This is top quality Dukuang Liquor. Is it really top quality liquor? Of course. Ill pour you a drink. I stretch out my arm as she opens the bottle and starts to pour the liquor into my glass. No way youll use alcohol to deceive an errand boy, right? It smells too strong. The womans face stiffens slightly at my words. Trying to maintain her composure, she replies. Why would we use alcohol to deceive? Now, are you looking for any girl in particular? Yes. Chae-hyang is here tonight right? Shes probably here. Yes, but Chae-hyang has a lot of prior appointments, so Ill look into it. Shes busy huh? I only need a minute. Of course, shes the busiest. If Chae-hyang cant be here, is it okay to bring someone else? No. Ill serve you for the time being and bring her over when shes free. Many customers are here to watch Chae-hyang perform even if its one song. I dont want to hear a song, I just need to talk with Chae-hyang for a moment. By the way, you dont seem to know who I am. Who are you? I rarely leave the pavilion, so Im not aware. Pointing my finger at my eye, I say. Cant you see? Your eye is bruised? The rumored Zaha Inn errand boy, the bastard trying hard to save money just to sleep with Chae-hyang. Thats me. Ah so thats why it was so noisy downstairs. The expression of the woman in front of me changes quickly. Her eyes narrow, and ridicule lingers in her eyes. So today is the day. Are you really going to see Chae-hyang? What? Am I not allowed to see her? The owner will get mad. You got beaten up a few days ago, didnt you? I think it was a sign to tell you not to find Chae-hyang in our pavilion. Didnt you consider that? The woman speaks in a quiet tone to me. Well, I havent thought about that. By the way, our middle-aged ajumma here is very fluent.1 Middle-aged? Im not even thirty yet. Besides, werent your words about Chae-hyang a joke? Wait! So you knew I was joking? The woman looks at me and nods. Yes. Then why did I get beaten up? Probably because you joked about it. The woman smiles, and a dimple digs deep on one side of her cheek. I point my finger at the woman. You sure are a sly ajumma, pretending to be an innocent lady. Please understand. I was just kidding. While the joke is taken seriously, I wonder if it wasnt a joke. The meaning of words often changes arbitrarily. Thats why words are scary. After the chatty women disappear, I take a whiff of the Dukuang liquor. She said it was a top-quality liquor, but its not even third-rate. Look at this place and their wicked ways, trying to rip me off by charging me the price of top-quality liquor. Jokes are treated as facts, and fake goods are treated as genuine. This is what people who constantly live at the expense of others do. Are they seriously messing with me from the start? This is not top-quality liquor. How dare you try to deceive an inns errand boy with alcohol Thats how low Kangho has become. I fill my glass with third-rate quality liquor and drink it. The thumping of footsteps emanates from the hallway as the alcohol wash down my throat for the third time. Rumors that the Zaha Inn errand boy made his way to Plum Blossom Pavilion seem to have finally reached the ears of those who participated in the assault. Those footsteps also brought with them some harsh feelings. Bang! The door opens, and as soon as someone recognizes me, they start swearing. Hey, you son of a bitch. How dare you barge in here? Are you crazy? I let out a sigh. Is it so wrong for an errand boy to come to a pavilion? Why do they call me a son of a bitch when I have a pretty name? Still, they didnt swear at my parents, so they are still better than the monkeys in the Demon Cult. I look at the mans face. I know his face and name since I can always identify the men who had habitually beaten me up. I beckon the fellow named Dong-gwak to come in. Im just here to buy myself a drink, so whats all the fuss? Come on in. Ill pour you a glass. The man is rendered speechless. Thats understandable. An errand boy who had been beaten up a few days ago suddenly speaks informally, makes a cocky gesture, and says hell pour him a drink, so of course, hed be speechless. Dong-gwak comes in and sits across from me. Did you eat something wrong today? I had bibimbap. What? As I pour him a cup of liquor, Dong-gwak grabs the cup and says. Dont cause a scene and get out of here when youre done drinking. After pouring myself a cup, I say to Dong-gwak. Dong-gwak, you punk. Dong-gwak stands up from his seat and swings his right hand at my cheek when I talk to him with a mix of informality and curses. I grab Dong-gwaks hand with my left hand and slam it on the table; I then strike the chopsticks I am holding through the back of his hand. Plork! Urgh. Oops, Im sorry. Why are the chopsticks so sharp? I didnt actually intend to do that. It is just an instinctive reaction that came from living a long life as a martial artist. It took a while for Dong-gwak to understand the situation, his face slowly distorting as his brain tried to process what just happened. Then I pull out the sickle from my clothes and tap the chopsticks on the back of his hand. Tap, tap. The back of your hand can heal, but you cant do anything if your hand is cut off. So Ill cut it off for you. Wait, dont. No? Dont do it. I point at Dong-gwak with the sickle. I was planning to drink quietly and see Chae-hyang before I leave. So why do you keep barking like a dog? Will the Plum Blossom Pavilion go out of business if I see her? The door opens again, and the Chae-hyang in question appears and looks at what happened at the table. Brother Dong-gwak, please wait outside. Im here now. I look at Chae-hyang. Its been a while. Having seen all the rumored pretty ladies in the central district, Chae-hyang from the countryside only looks like a normal, feisty, girl. Seeing the angry expression on her face, she looked like she was ordered here to collect the money for the drinks. But because Dong-gwak couldnt move, I kindly pulled out the chopsticks. Urk. When the blood gushes from the back of his hand, I hold out a cup and accurately collect the blood. It is a meaningless action. However, it is different for Dong-gwak. As he holds the back of his hand and leaves without saying a word, Chae-hyang sits across from me, taking his place in turn.. As soon as I see Chae-hyang, I cant help but smile. Why are you smiling? Chase-hyangs question annoys me slightly. I didnt think Id repeat what I said to the Left Hand of Illuminating Light to a pavilion music performer. I smile when I want to. Why? Does an errand boy need to control his emotions in a place like this? Do you think this is funny? Oh, I do. Why did you do that to Brother Dong-gwaks hand? Do you think Seong-tae or the owner will stay put? Would they be men of Ilyang Prefecture if they stayed put? No, they wont. Ill say this for your own sake. The moment I walked in, your bill went up. The price of alcohol is quite high because its Dukuang liquor. Add to that the treatment bill for Brother Dong-gwaks injury. Just pay up and leave. Im saying this for your sake. Why is she so angry? Stop whining. How much money do you think I have? Not much. Rumor has it the noodles in your inn taste like trash. A smile graces my mouth. I dont know why youre so popular. Your face is pretty, but your thoughts, speech, facial expressions, and gaze. Theyre all How should I say this? I dont mean to threaten such a fragile woman, so I speak calmly. Rely on your pretty face, and dont be too proud. You dont have any other merits. Chae-hyangs eyes widen, and her anger reminds me of a master from the Emei Sect. Merit? Did you just say merit to me? Your tone is uglier than an ugly woman who was rumored to be ugly. Haha. Unexpectedly, Chae-hyang bursts into laughter at my words. Did you feel it was unfair that you got beaten up the other day? Youre wasting all the money youve saved up so far just to say this? Why would I sleep with you? Even if you pay me a whole sack of gold and silver, I will not sleep with you. Did you think I was a woman who slept with anyone? Ive never done anything like that. Do you think music performers go sleeping around with whoever? Chae-hyang cries out in anger. Ah, I was wondering why she was so angry with me, but Chae-hyang also has her perspective as a lady. Sell Art, Not Body (uˇu), right? When I ask if she meant selling talent and not her body, Chae-hyang shakes her head. Dont say that phrase. Im sorry. Anyway, thats how I live. Not all music performers are prostitutes. I hold out the Dukuang liquor bottle to Chae-hyang, who is very angry. I see. I never thought of you as someone who sleeps around. Ill pour you a drink as an apology. When Chae-hyang holds out her cup, I pour a drink and say, Let me make this clear, I never said I was going to save up to sleep with you. All I said was that I wanted to hear one song from you. As you said, youre a performer. I said that for laughs in the inn, but it was clearly a joke. I never actually thought about it nor am I in a situation to do that. Huh? But I heard Dont interrupt me. I guess the joke was funny, but it got bigger. Everyone would have laughed except for you. It was funny, so it must have spread far and wide. But the joke suddenly became a truth that I couldnt change. Words can be distorted and a truth cant be easily turned back into a joke again. This is the case where words can kill people. Look at my eye, I almost lost it. Im not saying this to Chae-hyang, its just a monologue that I recall from my past. As she listens to my words, Chae-hyang looks at me with a puzzled expression. I think she understands most of it, but I was different before, so her confusion is understandable Drink. I drink a cup with Chae-hyang with no emotion. But the phrase Sell Art, Not Body is funny since you work in a pavilion. Now, Ive told you what I needed to say, so get out. What? This time, I only pour the liquor into my cup. Get out, before I drag you out by the hair. Chae-hyang sees the sickle on the table. Then she checks my expression and my eyes. Shes not naive. Yes, I understand. But I didnt enter the pavilion by my own will. Stop talking nonsense. Its true. At this time, Chae-hyangs voice overlaps with the sound of mens footsteps. Since the back of their colleagues hand was pierced, the other guards must have come up here to avenge him. Sensing a fight that is about to occur, Chae-hyang flees the room. In an instant, three men arrive and barge in through the door. Anyway, why are they so angry? They looked so happy when they beat me up. A fellow named Won Han-yeol says. Zaha, do you have a death wish? You should have brought a sword with you instead of a sickle if you wanted to fight. Oh wait, you cant afford one can you? The guy beside him adds. Lets go outside. Its hard to clean this place when its bloody. Without answering back, I smell the third-rate Dukuang liquor in my glass. Suddenly, it smells like top-quality liquor. The taste of alcohol depends on the mood. Its clear that if he just continues drinking without answering, their fists would come flying shortly. While I wash the liquor down my throat, my eyes are on the three of them. When I read their faces, I can sense they were wondering whether to kill me here or not. I say calmly to the riled-up men. Youre confident in taking out someone like me, arent you? Let me finish this before heading out. Theres no rush, gentlemen. Calm down In fact, I think I should hit them with a calm mind so things would end with less violence. Only my hands would get dirty if I killed them after all. Chapter 7 Chapter 7 C The Errand Boys Violence The three sit across me and naturally shower me with taunts and threats. Mr. Zaha, I think thats your last glass. So hurry up and drink. This guy sure is a real man. He came in here proudly, drank alcohol, and even called for Chae-hyang like a man. Wow, if I knew this guy was a real man, I would have beaten him harder. I regret it now. If you regret it, just beat him properly this time. Hes already made a fool of Dong-gwak. It would only be fair to get beaten up again. Aint that right, Zaha? I hold out the liquor bottle as the three continue with their threats. You want a drink? However, the three did not raise a glass, suspecting that I might have poisoned the drink. Too bad, but I end up drinking alone. One of the men then urges. If youre done, lets go outside. Hey, get up. I keep drinking without replying. And occasionally, I look at their faces in turn. Silence is an effective way to set the tone. Now the three of them arent saying much either. The current situation must have felt off. A simple errand boy would not be able to drink so calmly in front of such blatant hostility. All they see is a man without a shred of fear. There isnt much alcohol left to begin with, so I finish up the last glass, grab the sickle, and say. My old friends, am I that big of a joke to you? I wonder if I was this petty in the past, but I know I was definitely a pathetic wretch then. Arent you supposed to be? The three men pull out hidden knives, each longer than a dagger. You couldve ended it with just a beating, but here you are making things worse. Brothers, since he beat up Dong-gwak like that, this is only a fair response. While I smirk like a madman, the corners of their mouths also start to rise until the four of us end up laughing together like old drinking friends. Hehehehehehe. When I suddenly raise the sickle, all three throw their knives in surprise. At that moment, I flip the table over with a little forceful push using my thumb. Boom! In an instant, three knives strike the table. Thud, thud, thud! As the blades strike the table, I stand up and kick the table away with my right foot. Boooom! All three fall backwards as the table crashes into them, and I aim my sickle toward their lower bodies. Three pairs of feet wriggle uncontrollably, doing whatever they could to push the table away, reminding me of snake heads as I swing the sickle. After the Zaha Inn was burned down, one of the things I did to make a living was guard cemeteries. I spent all year round cutting the lush grass around the cemetery with a sickle. It was a sickeningly long and tedious time. At some point, I reached enlightenment with the sickle. Im probably the only man in Kangho to gain enlightenment when using a tool to cut grass. A sickle is basically a single blade tool, so it is closer to a Knife () than Sword (). The blade was in the reverse direction, so you had to be careful when it swung outwards. All of these things became imprinted in my memory. In short, Im a sickle expert. My scythe left none of their exposed legs untouched, stabbing and cutting at their knees, toes, ankles, and calves. Their arms, exposed from behind the table, were also not spared. You beat me up with your stupid limbs, didnt you? The screams of the three overlap against each other. Arghhhhhhh! The room instantly fills with their voices. I then kick the table at the right moment and crush their faces. A single kick yields three pleasantly thumping blows. It is an efficient and one-sided assault. When the eloquent yet rude woman opens the door again, they have utterly lost their fighting spirit. The room is a complete mess, alcohol, and blood covering it all. Still holding the bloody sickle, I say to the woman. Ahjumma, bring me more of that third-rate liquor. The woman glares at me. Pointing the sickle at the womans mouth, I say. I dont usually hit women, but you better think before you open that mouth of yours. Bring in the liquor first, and bring in more of these morons. Ill rip your mouth off if you open that big mouth again. My personal code was not to touch women who dont know martial arts unless there is a particular reason. This also applies to Chae-hyang and that rude woman. But I also made a hobby of making threats. When the woman disappears, I remove the smashed pieces of the table and look at the three men. Their wrecked state, covered with spilled food, is nice to see. I say with a smile. Smile, you fuckers. Why arent you laughing in front of a funny guy? They cant laugh now, but I can. Congratulations on your ruined legs. Youll need to take a long time to heal, so is there any part of you still intact? The three are silent in the face of this merciful errand boy. Then I speak in a different tone, as if turning into a madman. Hey, you bastards, shouldnt you start begging if you want me to spare you? Should I kill you all? Help me. Save me. Lets end it here. We didnt mean to kill you. I nod my head. Oh, really? The speed and accuracy of their words is like watching a well-rehearsed choir. I pull out a knife from the table and hold it in my left hand. You guys synchronize well with your mouths. Tch more of them are here. This time, dozens of people are coming from the hallway. Perhaps all the fighters the pavilion could mobilize are coming. In the uproar, I can hear the voice of Cha Sung-tae, who was the only one who had welcomed me. Get lost! The hallway becomes quiet instantly, and Cha Sung-tae appears and looks around the room. Cha Sung-tae is a man with slit eyes, his eyes become straight when he smiles or frowns, and thats the case right now. Cha Sung-tae tells me with a bewildered look. Zaha-ya, youre going to die at this rate. Im going to die? Yes. Watching Cha Sung-taes ugly eyes, I put some force into my left hand and sent the knife flying. Shriek! The knife I threw arrived before Cha Sung-taes hand could reach his face, hitting him handle-first on the eye. Smack! Keurgh! Cha Sung-tae fell flat on his back with a groan. Holding out the bloody sickle to the guys behind me, I say. An eye for an eye. Anyone else? Cha Sung-tae, who gingerly stands back up, calmly orders. Report to the Plum Blossom Pavilion owner. The rest of you guard outside. Dont let him get out. Grimacing at the side of his bleeding eye, Cha Sung-tae pulls out a straight sword from his waist in one swift movement. Si-ling! After Cha Sung-tae pulls out the sword, I bite back with his own words. Sung tae-ah, think before you act. Or else youll die. Whats with the most quick-witted man of Ilyang Prefecture? Do you think the state of your eye was just luck? No, its not. Do you think these three were just unlucky enough to end up covered in food and drinks? No, they werent, so think before you act. Hmm. While Cha Sung-tae stands there in indecision, I move to address the guys blocking the hallway. Cha Sung-tae ended up like this in one blow. Do you think the order to stop me makes sense? Lets do this. If you guys continue staying in my way, Cha Sung-tae will die first. Here we go. Though not effective on his subordinates, this threat is effective on Cha Sung-tae. The quick-witted Cha Sung-tae speaks hurriedly to his subordinates. Everyone, go down and wait. Zaha, I think we need to meet the owner. Didnt you come here for an apology? Or were you planning to leave after drinking? Lets hear the answer. I nod at Cha Sung-tae. That Cho guy has to come. Then Ill call the owner first. Hell be here soon, so lets wait together. Cha Sung-tae looks at his palm while speaking and sees it covered in blood. I ask. Did you lose your eyesight? Cha Sung-tae blinks while wiping the blood around his eyes and replies. I dont think its that severe. I can see. Thats a relief. Bring me some alcohol. Lets have a drink while we wait for the owner. Cha Sung-tae tells the trembling woman standing at the end of the hallway. Bring us some booze. No need for snacks. Well move to the next room. Zaha, lets move rooms. If youre not going to kill these guys, let us treat them. Isnt it too much to kill your fellow townspeople? When I look back, the three are already on the verge of losing consciousness. Certainly, Cha Sung-tae has a different way of dealing with his subordinates. Even if he is bleeding from one eye, he still wraps up the situation neatly. The talkative woman comes up with short strides and points politely at the next room with both hands. I said I would tear her mouth open if she spoke, so she remained silent until the end. The survival instincts of bottom feeders are exquisitely fine. Walking into the empty room, I put down the bright red sickle on the table and sit down. After a while, Cha Sung-tae, who had wiped the blood away with a cloth, sits across from me and lets out a long sigh. Did you get lucky or something? What the hell is this mess? It happened so suddenly. As soon as Cha Sung-taes words end, a young womans voice is heard outside. The drinks are here. Come on in. Looking at the alcohol being served, I laugh. It is indeed Dukuang liquor, but the sealing condition is completely different from the one given to me. In short, it is a more luxurious type of Dukuang liquor. Is this top-quality Dukuang liquor? Cha Sung-tae nods. Ah, are the third rates sold out? Oh, Im sorry. You should only sell those to common people to make a profit. This is the real Dukuang liquor. Let me pour you a drink. I was one of those common people then? Not anymore. Im sorry. I take the liquor bottle from Cha Sung-taes hand. After tearing off the seal, I stare at Cha Sung-tae and sniff at the bottle. If its poisoned, Ill pour it all in your nostrils. Cha Sung-tae touches his nose by reflex. Im going to drink it too, why would I poison it? Mrs. Son, its not poisoned, is it? Mrs. Son, waiting in the hallway, sticks her head in and shakes her head toward Cha Sung-tae. No. When Mrs. Son moves her lips without any sound, Cha Sung-tae askes back with a confused look. Are you mute? Why arent you talking? I asked if its poisoned? Then Mrs. Son crosses her fingers over her mouth. A sign that she cant speak. I said Id rip her mouth open if she talked. Then Cha Sung-tae nods and says to Mrs. Son. Then keep your mouth shut. If you dont want your mouth ripped off. Mrs. Son bows her head toward Cha Sung-tae and me before disappearing into the hallway to wait for any other commands. Even Cha Sung-tae doesnt know when the owner is coming. Mrs. Sons words do carry some sting to them. Cha Sung-tae then says to Mrs. Son, a thought evidently on his mind. Mrs. Son, go and get Chae-hyang. Tell her to serve us a drink. Mrs. Sons footsteps are heard in the hallway. This time, Cha Sung-tae speaks again while pouring Dukuang liquor into the glass. Ill drink first. Its been so chaotic recently. Drink. I drink after watching Cha Sung-tae drink. Cha Sung-tae then asks a question, the alcohol seemingly giving him back some sense. Were you always that good at fighting? Ive never heard about it. I held myself back because my grandfather told me not to fight. That kind of lie wont work on me. First of all, I apologize for what happened earlier. I fully understand that you are doing this because you were humiliated by my men. Thank you, you rascal. For being understanding. Thats considerate of you. I snort. Cha Sung-tae is buying time by making all kinds of small talk. I roll up my sleeves and say. But now that I think about it, Im getting annoyed. Sung-tae, you son of a bitch. Is this how you apologize? Should I break a few bones to change that? Cha Sung-tae quickly kneels down as he sees me grab my sickle. Im sorry. I sincerely apologize. Ive never knelt before in my life. Im sorry. Cha Sung-taes attitude change is swift and accurate, as if he were mimicking the tactical changes of absolute martial masters. Cha Sung-tae bows his head deeply as he kneels on his knees. Chae-hyang arrives at the door. As soon as she sees Cha Sung-tae kneeling, Chae-hyangs pupil starts shaking. ! Cha Sung-tae turns his head and says to Chae-hyang with an intimidating gaze. Stop staring and serve the booze. I told you to control your emotions. When Chae-hyang naturally heads to Cha Sung-taes side with a frozen expression, Cha Sung-tae squeaks. Are you crazy? Get a grip and sit over there. Who asked you to serve me? Chae-hyangs face becomes pale. I look at Chae-hyang sitting next to me with a pale face and say. Oh, youre here? There are always two kinds of people. Those who hold grudges and those who dont hold grudges. In my case Chapter 8 Chapter 8 C Theres a Chance Theyll Be Offended Chae-hyang is on the verge of tears when she sees blood flowing down Cha Sung-taes eye. After the pavilion owner, Cha Sung-tae is the scariest man here. Cha Sung-tae kneeling on the ground with blood dripping from his eye to the floor terrifies her. Chae-hyang serves the liquor with trembling hands when I hold out my empty glass. Chae-hyang. Yes. I say with an intentionally warm smile. Even an errand boy has pure love. Cha Sung-tae stares at Chae-hyang as if saying she has to answer appropriately. Chae-hyang, who believes that things would resolve when the owner arrives, replies with a nod. Yes. I wipe the smile off my face and reply. But that love was never directed at you. Ive made myself clear, right? Youre ruining the mood, so get out. Chae-hyang looks at me with wide eyes and then looks at Cha Sung-tae, wondering if leaving was okay. Cha Sung-tae nods, signaling her to get out. I repeated my order again when Chae-hyang didnt stand up. Get out. Only after I said it twice did Chae-hyang get up and rush out to the hallway. Having never heard such rude orders in her life, Chae-hyang manages to hold back her tears until she leaves the room before letting her tears fall. I look over to Cha Sung-tae and say. Brats who only rely on their looks are the worst. They think crying will solve everything. Dont you think so? Cha Sung-tae answers. Thats true. I speak to Cha Sung-tae, who senselessly uses informal language. Dont speak informally to me. Your slit eye is so annoying that I feel uncomfortable when you speak informally. Cha Sung-tae stammers slightly. Ah, yes. I understand. Do you think the situation will be resolved when the owner comes? Or will he be kneeling there beside you? Honestly, Im not sure since you and the owner are both outstanding at martial arts. Of course, since theres an incident in Plum Blossom Pavilion, owner Cho Yi-gyul will come. Though hes been busy with the Black Rabbit Union for the past few days. Youre good at speaking formally. Thank you. Hes dealing with the Black Rabbit Union? Yes, Ilyang Prefecture will soon establish a union with the approval of Black Rabbit Union. But if such bad news is reported as soon as the union is established, there is a possibility that the Black Rabbit Union will become very unhappy, complicating the relationship. Unhappy? Yes. We cant have that. So what youre saying is even if I subdue the pavilion owner, the problem Ive caused will be sorted out by the Black Rabbit Union. Is that right? Cha Sung-tae nods honestly. Thats right. The Black Rabbit Union is a formidable group that even all the tough men of Ilyang Prefecture together cant deal with. So what, you rascal. When the owner comes, you want me to have a nice drink with the owner and leave? You think thatd solve everything? Of course not. What would you like to do? Have the Cho family serve as my underlings. Isnt that a little impossible? Theres a possibility hell be offended. Ill create a sect in Ilyang Prefecture myself, and you can all come under me. Brats in the pavilion will join the Rebirth Sect (T), or should we shorten it to Life Sect (T)? So all Ilyang Prefectures crazy bastards can be reborn like me. Cha Sung-tae also nods as if he understands. Great, we do need a refresh. And congratulations on your rebirth. Sung-tae. Please go ahead. Isnt the owner a little late? Thats right. As I said, hes attending the masters of Black Rabbit Union at Pear Blossom Pavilion. Itll be hard for him to come right away. Theyre important guests. After gulping down Dukuang liquor, I stand up and look down at Cha Sung-tae. Tell the owner bastard. Ill save all of you if you all come under me. Of course, theres no chance of that because it sounds like nonsense. I should give you a chance. Tell him Ill fight him whenever he comes to Zaha Inn. And I am going to give Cha Sung-tae a chance, too. Think carefully. If you think the Black Rabbit Union will win, you can stand by your owners side and fight against me. If you dont think hell win, then join the Rebirth Sect. Thanks for the fine liquor. Put it on the tab. Would you like to wait a little longer? Do you think Im running away? Cha Sung-tae nods. Yes. I kicked Cha Sung-tae in the face, sending him flying to the corner of the room. You sure know how to ask for a beating. I point at Cha Sung-tae with my finger. A man should know how to earn a beating. Ill see you around. Cha Sung-tae responds by touching his face. Please have a safe trip back. Ill put it on the tab. Do as you please. The entire Ilyang Prefecture will come under me anyway, so I dont have to care whether my name is in the books or not. As I walk down the hall, people move to the side. Even though theyd already stepped aside, I still wanted to say this at least once. Make way, peasants. When I go down the stairs to the first floor, the doorkeeper, who I had knocked out earlier, yells a curse as he sees me, clearly not having grasped the current situation. Hey, you damned bastard! I slap him across the face and walk past him. The gatekeeper crashes into the wall and collapses with a loud sound. I then tell the others. Why didnt you tell him what happened? He ended up getting beaten up and passed out again. What a bunch of heartless punks. I pause at the entrance to look around the Plum Blossom workers. In an instant, the whole Plum Blossom Pavilion becomes silent. I wave my hand and speak in a blunt tone. The errand boy had a good time. Those bastards made silent curses with their mouths and rude hand gestures behind my back as I turned around. If you swear at others, its only natural that you get cursed at in return. I didnt care, so I got out of Plum Blossom Pavilion and stretched my body. That wasnt so bad. Curses are curses, jokes are jokes, and truths are truths. Of course, mountains are mountains, and water is water. Such things wouldnt have happened if people had clearly separated their meanings. Of course, the three Cho brothers, who ran the Plum Blossom, Pear Blossom, and Cherry Blossom Pavilions, would not be able to believe it. Their family werent the original owners of the Pavillions. Ilyang Prefecture was a chaotic place, so the three Cho brothers took over the pavilions by force sometime in the past. To those who are wary of competitors, the reports of their subordinates will probably sound like a joke. There was an accident at Plum Blossom Pavilion. An errand boy came alone and caused a big mess. What errand boy? The errand boy from Zaha Inn. Zaha Inn? Are you kidding me? If the report reaches the top, I think this kind of conversation will occur. While walking down the street, I suddenly take out the sickle hanging around my waist and look at it. Dealing with the three Cho brothers with this shabby sickle is one thing, but itd be inefficient to go against the Black Rabbit Union with just this. Its time to visit the Dragon Head Smithy. Dragon Head Smithy is a blacksmith shop known for making dragon head-shaped handles. Some might even say they focused more on making dragon head handles than making good blades. A smithy where their handles are of better quality than their blades. Dragon Head Smithy, where their products are more style than practical substance. Weapons made at the Dragon Head Smithy tend to have extravagant names that dont quite match their quality. The White Dragon Sword (), Azure Dragon Blade (i), Black Dragon Whip (), and Double Dragon Sickle (p`). They always add dragon () to their creations and sell them this way. The names made each weapon sound like something a top ten master in Kangho would possess. Thanks to this, multiple dragons tend to appear when a fight breaks out in Ilyang Prefecture. My hometown is the birthplace of the White Dragon Sword that cuts through the wind, the Azure Dragon Blade that falls from the moonlight, and the Black Dragon Whip that separates blood from flesh. Looking closer, theyre just a bunch of incompetents. On the way, I take out the money hidden near the furnace of Zaha Inn and head to the Dragon Head Smithy. Even if Im skilled in martial arts, its business ethics to pay for these transactions honestly. Thats how sane I am. Welcome Lee Zaha? Are you here to pay your tab? Or do we owe you money? Many eyes are questioning why an errand boy would come to a blacksmith shop. I look around the Dragon Head Smithy and say. Im here to buy some weapons. What is it for? Oh, did you come to buy a sickle? Our sickles are a little expensive. I fold my arms for a moment and make up a short answer to convince them. Im thinking of going to war with the Cho family, so Im here to buy a few weapons. So suddenly?! As the workers of Dragon Head Smithy look at each other and tilt their heads, the vice master of the Dragon Head Smithy, Kwak Yong-gae says. Look, young man. Youre free to fight, but can you handle it? I heard you got beaten up a few days ago, so dont throw your precious life away. I used to like the chicken noodle soup your grandfather made, but youre a terrible cook. Nows not time to talk about how my chicken noodle soup tasted. Kwak Yong-gae is picking a fight with the customer. If I dont talk about the taste of noodle soup with the errand boy, what should we talk about? I take out my money pouch. Shut up. Ive got plenty of money. So show me your weapons. What are you going to buy? I answer back with a finger held out. A light sword, a tough whip, or a fairly sharp dagger would do. Do you have something like an Azure Dragon Sickle? I cant get my primary weapon right away, so I will only get temporary ones. Vice master Kwak Yong-gae scratches his head. Youre going to use all of them? Please respect my preferences. Vice master Kwak Yong-gae flicks his finger at his subordinates and orders. Go get the Black Dragon Sword, White Dragon Whip, and Sky Dragon Dagger. We dont have an Azure Dragon Sickle, so dont go looking for one. The men of the Dragon Head Smithy promptly respond to the vice masters orders. Got it. Kwak Yong-gae says. No one in this town can handle an Azure Dragon Sickle, so we didnt make one. Please understand. It is disappointing news. The Azure Dragon Sickle is a really cool weapon. Do you have the Eight Inch Snake Spear then? I told you that we dont have one. What about a Double Crescent Halberd? I dont have that kind of weapon, so stop asking. Dont push too far. Vice master Kwak Yong-gae looks me up and down as he strokes his beard. How old are you this year? Over twenty. And Im over thirty. Are you going to keep talking to me in that manner? I roll up my sleeves. Fight me if youre not happy about it. Vice master Kwak Yong-gae waves his hand. Forget it. I cant beat up an innocent errand boy. What a gentleman. As his men line up after returning with weapons in their hands, Kwak Yong-gae says. Have a look. Im busy, so Ill just buy everything. Okay, Itll be 90 nyangs. Are you crazy? Its too expensive. I gave you a big discount since youre from here. I continue to bargain with folded arms. Well, lets do this. Ill give you 50 nyangs for you to loan them to me. Loan? What are you talking about? I mean, Ill use it and return it. Ho, thats no different from robbery. I said Id give it back after I finish. How is that robbery? As the noise of our discussion spills outside, the smith master of the Dragon Head Smithy, Geum Chul-yong appears. Geum Chul-yong is a man with sharp eyes, and his appearance and name fits as an owner and master of a smithy. The place was named after him, after all. Whats all this fuss about? His entrance is quite notable, perhaps all the years of bluffing has transformed into actual gravitas over time. Kwak Yong-gae and everyone bows slightly toward Geum Chul-yong. Boss, this young fella is going to start a war with the three Cho brothers. Geum Chul-yong looks at me. War? He wants to take all these weapons for it, but he doesnt have enough money to buy them directly. What should we do? Geum Chul-yong seems to have finally remembered who I was. Come to think of it, arent you the grandchild of the old man who owned Zaha Inn? Long time no see, Mister Geum. Geum Chul-yong sighs and says in a serious tone. I loved the chicken noodle soup your grandfather made for a long time, yet your cooking is terrible. What did you learn from your grandfather? You lack touch and sincerity. Its only a matter of time before Zaha Inn goes out of business. I sigh and fold my arms. My grandfathers chicken noodle soup is indeed delicious. Ill admit that. But I didnt come here to talk about soup, so lets stop talking about it. Kwak Yong-gae tells Geum Chul-yong. Boss, I said that to him already. Geum Chul-yong nods. Good. By the way, I can smell blood from your waistband. Did your war start already? I have no choice but to change my evaluation of Geum Chul-yong of the Dragon Head Smithy. This guy has the nose of a dog. Chapter 9 Chapter 9 C Whats The Name of Our Union? Showing the sickle on my waist to Geum Chul-yong, I say. I shed some blood in the Plum Blossom Pavilion. Goodness, how many did you kill? None of them died. Geum Chul-yong tilts his head. Im glad, but did you master any martial arts? I did. Thats why the noodle soup tasted terrible. Fair enough. Your grandfather lived a decent life cooking chicken noodle soup, so thats not unusual. If the Cho brothers keep messing with you, Ill make them stop. Its getting worse here by the day. If they refuse to stop, Ill protect you here. Theres no need to make things worse. No matter how insistent those bastards are, they cant do anything as long as this Geum Chul-yong is still in the Dragon Head Smithy. Did Mister Geum always have this side to him? How unexpected. Why didnt he intervene in my previous life? Looking back through my memories, Geum Chul-yong was the first to meet his downfall, although the timing was slightly different then. This man indeed tried to keep his word. I answer Geum Chul-yongs kindness with a smile. Thank you for your kindness. Youre welcome. I then continue with a serious tone. Im going to establish a federation of affiliated sects here in Ilyang Prefecture. The first sect to be created will be called the Rebirth Sect and focus on workers from the Pavilions. Mister Geum, instead of a smithy, you should establish a sect and join me. Of course, I will be the union leader. Were already strong enough as a smithy, so why join a faction? Gather all the blacksmiths in the area and build the Steel Dragon Sect (FT). Anything else wont be enough. If the Cho brothers establish a union, the dues they charge will increase. I will create a union in Ilyang Prefecture strong enough so that the neighboring Unorthodox faction sects cant bother us. Whats a union? Those in the Plum Blossom Pavilion will belong to the Rebirth Sect. Blacksmiths will unite under the Steel Dragon Sect. Architects will be in the Architectural Sect (BT). I will rally the rest of the forces under their specialities and create more sects accordingly. This is not meant as a means to dictate others. Geum Chul-yong listens to me with a stern look. Theres no dues. No sect will be superior to one another. The union atmosphere will be a mess, but that doesnt matter. All I care about is not having our hard-earned money taken away. The forces of the union will randomly increase in power. The union will start small and then extend throughout Kangho. If this union makes someone less likely to bully the weak, the merchants or errand boys, then my intentions are fulfilled. Its a union where the weak can come together and protect their hard-earned money. Geum Chul-yong reflects on my words for quite some time before replying. What a sloppy and grand plan. Whats the name of the union? I answer back while making eye contact with Geum Chul-yong. The Low-Down Sect (›AT). Geum Chul-yong looks at me for a long time with folded arms. The Low-Down Sect Low place (); far end, nasty, dirty (A). This combination of meanings refers to those of low status and the weak. However, the Low-Down Sect also uses Sect (T), which symbolizes power, giving the name a contradictory charm. When Geum Cheol-yong remains silent, the whole Dragon Head Smithy also follows suit. After long contemplation, Geum Cheol-yong replies to me. Its interesting to hear an errand boy speak about creating a faction. Are you sure you can survive against the Cho brothers? Youll see. Geum Chul-yong says to vice master Yong-gae. Give him the weapons. Kwak Yong-gae asks with a shocked look. What? Not even loaning them to him? Geum Chul-yong stares at Kwak Yong-gae with a frown. Is that how you respond to your boss? Kwak Yong-gae lowers his head and replies. I apologize. As expected, theres a quirky side to Geum Chul-yongs bravado. Maintaining his stern look, Geum Chul-yong addresses me. Well continue this talk if you survive. Sure. Tell me if you need any help. The weapons with exaggerated handles will do. Is that an insult or a compliment? An insult? After having a staring contest with Geum Chul-yong for a while, I leave the Dragon Head Smithy with a bundle of weapons. A buzz of conversation begins inside the Dragon Head Smithy once the man who got free weapons leaves. Ya think hes gonna make it out alive? The errand boy has it all planned out. Hell make it right? Who knew a guy who cant even make noodles properly would do this. How unexpected. I know right. He said he was concentrating on training in martial arts. Thats why the noodles tasted like shit. Thats true. It was awful, and the inn will go out of business sooner or later since hes so bad at it. I guess the inn closing down was also part of the plan. Should I have let him pay for the weapons? I have some regrets now. I gave him weapons that dont sell well anyway. They were too flashy. Geum Chul-yong smiles pleasantly. Good job. We got rid of unwanted stock and earned his trust. So it wasnt a total loss. Thats right. So hes going to be the union leader? Once he survives anyway, until then hes still an errand boy. Suddenly, laughter erupts from the Dragon Head Smithy. Hahahahaha. Youre too loud. Sorry. The laughter stops abruptly. Kwak Yong-gae asks Geum Chul-yong. Boss, what are you thinking so deeply about? Geum Cheol-yong strokes his chin and says. Steel Dragon Sect. Immersed in his imagination, Geum Chul-yong murmurs once again. Steel Dragon Sect Leader, Geum Chul-yong. Placing the bloody sickle and weapons from the Dragon Head Smithy on the table, I put the dagger on my waistband. Theres no need to train with swords and whips, but I have to get used to the weight and grip. After familiarizing the weapons with my hands and eyes, I enter the small room in the back. It was quite possible that the Cho brothers would arrive soon. I close my eyes and focus on breathing without using the Qi breathing technique. After two hours, I hear an exhausted voice from the entrance of the inn.. As I walk outside I see Cho Yi-gyul, the second brother of the Cho brothers, sitting in a chair, and men with black masks waiting with shovels and bags. Sitting there with an annoyed expression on his face, Cho Yi-gyul is thinner than I remembered. I used to think he hated making eye contact with people, but now its simply absurd. He arrived late after hearing from Cha Sung-tae, but he looked like he had too much to drink. As I come out, Cho Yi-gyul orders his men. Dig a hole. A deep one. Yes, my lord. When I approach, Cho Yi-gyul takes a dagger, stabs it on the table, and says, Sit down. Stabbing a dagger on the table is a common fighting method to solve a dispute between two parties. Its a matter of life and death. I also stab the Sky Dragon Dagger on the table and sit across from him. The rules are straightforward. When someone grabs the dagger during the talk, the fight begins. Whether they get killed or injured, this fight is between two people, and family members or colleagues can not interfere. Cho Yi-gyul, who has fast hands, has beaten many of his opponents in Ilyang Prefecture in this way. While his men continue their digging, Cho Yi-gyul stares at me and say, I got permission from Black Rabbit Union. Really? A union will soon be established in Ilyang Prefecture. Its been a while since the three of us were mocked by members of the Unorthodox faction for running pavilions, but now we can save face. With a cold look on my face, I deliberately choose to reply respectfully. Congratulations. Cho Yi-gyul nods and continues. Yes, its worth celebrating. What does that make me then if you cause a scene at the pavilion on the day it was decided? Consider yourself lucky that it didnt reach Black Rabbit Unions ears, you damn scumbag. Cho Yi-gyul then says as he points to his digging underlings. Do you know what that hole is for? My grave? Cho Yi-gyul nods. Glad youre aware. Tell me three reasons why I should keep you alive before they finish digging. Like youll be the gatekeeper of the upcoming sect. Or follow me around to change my shoes. If youre going to be a dog or a horse, Ill change my mind. Zaha, we grew up in the same town. Isnt it too heartless to kill someone just because they caused some trouble? I think to myself. Are you going to kill me or not? Just choose. Bastard. However, what Cho Yi-gyul is doing is amusing, so I choose to play along. So heartless. Looking at the sword and whip on the table, Cho Yi-gyul says. Oh. Would you look at that, you pathetic bastard. Cho Yi-gyul sighs and calls my name again. Zaha. I sigh and reply. Sounds like my name. Whats up? Whats up? Whats up? Killing intent radiates from Cho Yi-gyuls body. He is impatient, and I know precisely what Cho Yi-gyul will do. I say, What, you bastard? Spit it out. Cho Yi-gyul pulls out his dagger and heads straight for my neck. A metallic sound fills the air before the daggers tip could reach my Adams apple. Thump! The Sky Dragon Dagger that I picked up from the table blocks Cho Yi-gyuls dagger; his daggers point stopped by my daggers broadside. I push the dagger away slowly and look at Cho Yi-gyul. Ah, you scared me. I almost got stabbed. Only then did Cho Yi-gyul look at me with surprise.. ! I stab my dagger on the table and say. Is there a reason why I should spare you? Tell me one reason why. If I kill you, I will also have to kill your brothers. If I want to kill you, all of you must die; if I want to save you, I will save all three. Life or death? Jeez, how dare an idiot who cant throw a punch threaten me. You bastard, try talking shit again. Cho Yi-gyul stabs the dagger on the table and folds his arms like me. Cho Yi-gyul then says with a bitter face. Looks like you gained enlightenment somewhere. Congratulations. Then, the underlings who are still digging stupidly ask Cho Yi-gyul. Boss, were almost done digging. Cho Yi-gyul replies. Dig deeper. Roger. Cho Yi-gyul didnt want to show his shameful state to his underlings. When I grab the Sky Dragon Dagger again, I beckon him to try and stop me. Shoulder. As soon as I finish my sentence, Cho Yi-gyul grabs his dagger. However, I had already stabbed the Sky Dragon Dagger through his shoulder and pulled it back out. Plorkk! As if it wanted to see the outside world, blood spills out along with my dagger. Tuk-tuk-tuk-tuk While grabbing his dagger, Cho Yi-gyul was looking at his shoulder. Only then did he realize the severe difference in our speed. Watching Cho Yi-gyul turn pale, I say. Why are you so slow? You lived like a king here in Ilyang Prefecture. How does it feel to get stabbed by an errand boy? Our beloved pavilion master that loves digging graves. Ilyang Prefecture men do not back down from this. Cho Yi-gyul clenches his teeth tightly and pulls out the dagger to stab me in the shoulder. This time, I can clearly see Cho Yi-gyuls technique. It is a trick to aim for the shoulder, and the following attack is the one that contained killing intent. I grab Cho Yi-gyuls wrist with my left hand and extend Sky Dragon Dagger toward the palm of Cho Yi-gyuls incoming hand. Plorkk! Cho Yi-gyul hurriedly retrieves his injured palm with his face twisting in pain. The table below begins to be soaked with blood. Then, as tradition, our respective daggers are stabbed on the table again. Plorkk! Plorkk! Its time for the weak to shut his mouth, so I say. Forget my feelings. Is there a reason why I should keep you alive? Not only did you take part in human trafficking, but youve also killed a number of my childhood friends. And the union? Fucking bullshit. Didnt Black Rabbit Union allow it so they can extort money? Thats- Shut up. Youll start extorting merchants for protection money. If angry merchants resist and fight back, the Black Rabbit Union will come and deal with it. The young people from the blacksmiths and the shops will fight to the death. This works to Black Rabbit Unions advantage. If bloodshed takes place, Ilyang Prefecture wont be able to even squeak and be forced to pay up. The Black Rabbit Union needs a justification because other Unorthodox faction forces are also targeting Ilyang Prefecture. Uniquely enough, Ilyang Prefecture was heavily targeted in the past and was temporarily excluded as an area of dispute. The three Cho brothers were the ones who took advantage of that situation. This led to the blood of the men of Ilyang Prefecture being spilled and the profits reaped by the Black Rabbit Union and the Cho brothers. Thats the future I knew. Cho Yi-gyul answers. There are a lot of passionate youths in Ilyang Prefecture. First, Ill build a sect, increase our strength, and fight the Black Rabbit Union with my brothers. With that kind of skill level? Who will take responsibility for the merchants and craftsmen who will be broken by then? The Black Rabbit Union is intimidating because of their Sect Leaders status. Can you even handle it? How do you know that? Sometimes news travels faster to me than to the Murim Alliance. Cho Yi-gyul then reaches out his bloody hand and says. The more reason we should work together. I dont know how youve become strong, but it doesnt matter. Zaha, youll never be able to deal with Black Rabbit Union alone. I click my tongue and point my finger at Cho Yi-gyuls men. They were still digging enthusiastically. I ask. What was that for again? A threat. A natural reply flows out of my mouth. Its okay. Now its your grave. I give Cho Yi-gyul a smile as I stare into his eyes. Chapter 10 Chapter 10 C Im So Thoughtful Cho Yi-gyul speaks as if he is revealing a secret. The Black Rabbit Union Leader is part of a group called the Twelve Generals. Very few know exactly where he ranks in that group. Additionally, I heard that a mad master leads them. Cho Yi-gyul is talking about something that I already knew about. Cho Yi-gyul thumps his chest. If you touch me, youll step into a terrifying world I stab the Sky Dragon Dagger into the palm of the hand that Cho Yi-gyul is holding against his chest. Plorkk! Keurgh! The Sky Dragon Dagger pierces through his hand and into his chest. I reply to Cho Yi-gyuls last words in an aloof voice. You talk too much. You came here with threats when you shouldve begged me to spare you instead. Cho Yi-gyul looks at me with incredulous eyes as I say this. When the Sky Dragon Dagger is pulled out, Cho Yi-gyul collapses in his own pool of blood. Thud! Blood splashes from the table. I whisper a hint of the futures truth to Cho Yi-gyuls corpse. I was the craziest person in that terrifying world. I then speak to Cho Yi-gyuls underlings, who are still digging. Stop digging. The subordinates comply, thinking they were orders from Cho Yi-gyul. Yes. Come and clean this up. As soon as three black-clad men approach, their expressions changes. Gasp Euk! The corpse that awaited them, to their shock, was not that of the errand boy but was Cho Yi-gyuls instead. I look at the three of them and say. Why are you so surprised? He played with a knife and died on his own. One of the men tried to pull out a knife before the one next to him persuaded against it. It was a good move because Cho Yi-gyuls martial arts skills were superior to theirs. I look at the guy who had tried to pull out a knife and say. Why did you stop? Go ahead and pull it out. No, it was just a reflex. Are you stronger than Cho Yi-gyul? No, Im not. If you were stronger, Cho Yi-gyul wouldve been the one digging. Otherwise, why were you digging, you dog? Open your eyes. Yes. Take off your masks. Let me see if I know any of you. When the three take off their masks, their sweaty faces are revealed. I have never seen them before, but they must have been rookies not much older than twenty. Ive never seen you guys around Ilyang Prefecture. Are you from the Black Rabbit Union? No, sir. We come from outside the region and are currently working in the Pear Blossom Pavilion. Really? Since I didnt know their faces, these guys might die soon. Is that so? You are ordinary workers in the Pear Blossom Pavilion. Cho Yi-gyul ordered a body to be buried today, so ordinary mindless dudes were just here to dig like moles. Will all three of you die here, or will you bury the corpse and return to your hometowns? One of them answers first. We will go back to our hometowns if you let us live. I cant go back to my hometown due to personal reasons, but I wont step foot into the Pear Blossom Pavilion ever again. I wont show my face again if you let me live. I nod my head. Then take care of the corpse and scram. Wavering before their escape, one of them asks the wrong question Sorry, but who are you? I wonder why he would ask that question. Who am I? Yes. Im an errand boy from Zaha Inn, of course. I dont believe that. They must be thinking a countryside inns errand boy would never be able to kill Cho Yi-gyul. I order the guy that asked the stupid question to wipe the blood off the floor and table and the other two to move the body. The young man found the mop himself, brought an empty bucket, wiped the blood, and squeezed the mop repeatedly. I ask the guy who was squeezing blood out of the mop. Wheres the youngest owner? I havent seen him lately. Do you know what the youngest owner does? The man stops his actions and looks at me. Yes, I know. Tell me. He kidnaps young and poor women from far away. You can say that he supplies and trains entertainers for the pavilions. What an evil asshole. The man says after swallowing his saliva. Am I going to die, too? Youll die one day. If you meet someone like me again. What about today? Not today. Thank you. Ill serve you from today on, sir. Im not gonna keep a dumbass like you as a brother. I mean it. To be my brother, you need to be distinguished, whether in martial arts or whatever. Im sorry. For what? For being a dumbass. I burst out laughing at the reply. His expression did not change at all even as he said something so self-deprecating. Oh, that came from nowhere. I smile and say to the young brat. If youre done cleaning, scram. Do you happen to need any kitchen staff? I have no way to make a living if I dont work at the Pear Blossom Pavilion. The biggest problem for young people here has always been to make ends meet. I tilt my head and ask. Are you good at cooking? Yes. Can you make chicken noodle soup? Isnt chicken noodle soup the most basic of basic dishes? Hm. Suddenly I became a guy who couldnt even do the basics. I do need someone skilled, but not now. I do need one, but not now. Youll get killed by the Cho brothers guys if you stay here. Why? I speak with a serious look and tone. Thats your destiny. After all, the three of you conspired to kill and bury Cho Yi-gyul. What? What do you plan to do from now on? I Cho Il-sum is very cruel. A guy with no blood or tears. Hell find you even if you hide yourselves in the Demon Cults lavatories. The young mens faces turned pale. But all we did was dig a grave. Oh, it was for you guys. Cho Yi-gyul didnt die because of the three of us. You think its easy to survive in Kangho? All you did was bury his corpse after doing nothing to help him. You dont think thats enough to put all the blame on you? If you dont want to die then go. And take your friends. Were not friends. What will you do if they report back to the Pear Blossom Pavilion? I point at the weapons on the table. What do you think that is? A sword and a whip. Theres also a bloody sickle. What do you think that means? I dont know. It means Im ready for war. You bastard. The young man looks at me like I have gone mad. Anyway. Yes. If you three are itching for revenge, come back with the Cho brothers men. Well settle our scores when the time comes. Then I will show you Kanghos true merciless nature. The aspiring cook says. Ill pass on that. By the way, boss, I havent introduced myself. Shut up and scram. Yes. Despite being told to get lost, the aspiring cook lowers his head in front of the inn after returning and organizing the cleaning supplies. Ill try to make chicken noodle soup next time. Just worry about your life for now. Ah, I understand. Then please have a good rest, sir. The aspiring cook then runs into the darkness. . . . After a while, the men who buried Cho Yi-gyul in the pit disappeared, and the Zaha inn was left silent. A night like this is perfect for eating chicken noodle soup. Tsk Looking at the darkness outside the inn, I say. Are you a rat? In the dark, a rat with an eye patch over one eye walks out and replies. What are you going to do now? I look at Cha Sung-taes eye patch. I thought your eyes were fine? Cha Sung-tae points to his eye patch. Its just for mind games. And not just to look cool? Its part of my plan. After reporting an eye injury, I rushed to the doctors and watched the situation from there. Otherwise, Id also be digging here. Thats how resourceful I am. You know? Yeah, well done. Thank you. I have no choice unless I want to survive. By the way, what are you going to do now? Are you going to fight Cho Il-sum right away? Or will you wait here. Did you tell him my words exactly? What did you say? I may have heard it wrong. I said Ill spare him if he came under me, but Cho Yi-gyul came with a knife. I know, right. He ordered his men arrogantly only to dig his own grave. Thats how he ended up. Will Cho Il-sum be any different? Isnt Cho Il-sum the most wicked? Look at how he assigned the worst job to the youngest and all the fighting to the second. He hides whenever something bad happens and reports to the Black Rabbit Union. Thats why he could live after opening three pavilions. Hes the worst villain in Ilyang Prefecture. Hey, Sung-tae. Yes? I say, looking at the darkened street. Buy me some sweet and sour pork. Why? Weve got liquor but no side dishes to pair with it. All of a sudden? We were just talking about Cho Il-sum Just think of him as dead already. Isnt he still alive and well? Hes out of my sight, so hes dead already. How is Cho Il-sum any different? If I let him be, Ilyang Prefecture will suffer. Im going to kill him. He orders the youngest to traffick women and the second to murder, so the only outcome is to kill him. They are bastards who presented the Ilyang Prefecture to the Black Rabbit Union on a silver platter. Cha Sung-tae asks with a puzzled look. Are there no side dishes in the inn? What a funny inn. Ill be back, so give me some money. I shook my head. I dont have that either. Cha Sung-tae looks around with a bitter look and sighs. Do you have anything here? Theres nothing. I made bibimbap with the leftover side dishes. This place used to be famous for having delicious chicken noodle soup, but how did it fall to this extent? Such as ugly downfall. What else do you need? His words stung. Still, it must have been unpleasant for the manager of Plum Blossom Pavilion to run an errand for an errand boy. I reply in respect of Cha Sung-tae. All I need to do is sweet and sour pork. Buy the side dishes you like. Buy enough. If we have any leftovers, well eat them tomorrow. See how considerate I am? Ill buy plenty. As soon as I see Cha Sung-tae grumbling along, I speak in a cold tone. Sung-tae. Why? Why are you walking so slowly? Are you going for a walk? Are you crawling? Are you a turtle? Ugh, damn it! Cha Sung-tae began running as he swallowed the urge to curse at me. That fucking bastard. Cha Sung-taes face turns red. He never imagined going on an errand for an errand boy in his life. I say again to Cha Sung-tae, who is disappearing into the darkness of the night. I asked if youre going for a walk? In the dark, an angry expletive breaks the silence. Chapter 11 Chapter 11 C Are You Guan Yu? As the table fills up with my ordered snacks, I say. Eat a lot. You bought it with your precious money. Its the money you got from exploiting young women. No? Ah, you bought these with money made by ripping people off by selling third-rate liquor as top-quality liquor. Our Plum Blossom Pavilion manager, make sure you shove it down your fucking throat. Yeah yeah, Im already eating a lot. Theres no poison in the food, right? Were eating together. Why are you paranoid? I see. Two bottles of alcohol are already emptied alongside the snacks Cha Sung-tae bought. Im a good drinker, but Cha Sung-tae also drinks a lot. In this serious and violent atmosphere, snacks and alcohol are consumed at an amazing rate. Cha Sung-taes pride is hurt, so he keeps drinking, and I am eating excessively because I am too skinny. Once I gain weight, I will train with external martial arts. I have a perfect solution, so I am eating like a pig. After finishing this urgent matter, I am going to focus on training my martial arts. Cha Sung-tae says while picking up the snacks. If Cho Yi-gyul dies and Cho Il-sum follows suit, Im worried how the Black Rabbit Union might react. If youre worried, train yourself to be stronger, you bastard. You always worry with your mouth. Im worried. What should we do? What should I do? Stop being ridiculous and build your worries in your Dantian. Why do you have so many goddamn worries? Cha Sung-tae is a man of character. As I continue to mock him, his expressions change, and he replies impetuously. Who the hell are you? Youre not Zaha, you punk. Take off your mask. When I raise one of my fists, Cha Sung-tae hurriedly changes his tone. I see. If you get into a fight with the shitty Black Rabbit Union, you can just kill them all. I will also work harder on my martial arts training. Can you handle it with your skills? Then can you handle it, Mr. Zaha? The words Mr. Zaha makes me smile. Perhaps because I had returned to my days as an errand boy. Cha Sung-taes attitude makes me realize my situation again. It is undoubtedly an advantage to look weak because Im an errand boy. I need to quickly improve my mastery of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique. That way, the advantage of being treated lightly will become more prevalent. While drinking, I say to Cha Sung-tae. Let me finish this and Ill go kill Cho Il-sum. I should get rid of him quickly now that his death is decided. Are you Guan Yu or something? Deciding so suddenly? Even after drinking so much, Cha Sung-tae still looks at me with surprise. The youngest brother Cho Sam-pyung travelling outside the province is the bigger problem. Where can I find him? Its about time for him to return. Can you handle it when you get back? Youre just a piece of trash. Cha Sung-tae replies with an angry look. Im Cha Sung-tae. So what? I can handle the youngest on my own. But I think it will be a little difficult because I hurt my eye. Just do one thing, you punk. Can you handle it or not? Stop confusing me. Ill watch for an opportunity and launch a surprise attack. Havent you heard of Stealth Cha Sung-tae? My nickname is Captain Stealth. Captain Stealth. What a childish nickname. Cha Sung-tae said it to make me laugh, but I didnt. If I want to go up against the Black Rabbit Union, Ill need time to train. Im curious if you can take over the rest if I kill Cho Il-sum. Three pavilions, can you handle them? What if I can? My eyes twinkle. Handle it in a normal way. What if I operate in a normal way? Since people are making a living in pavilions, its impossible to get rid of them. Give the workers their fair and exact pay. Stop scamming customers by selling third-rate liquor as top-quality liquor. Well take care of the ill, and if anyone wants to go back to their hometown, we will let them. This is a reasonable change. Thats how reasonable I am. Cha Sung-taes response is rather negative. Thats difficult. Even if its difficult, we have to do it. And whys that? Its better than having our Captain Stealth die by my hands. I point at Cha Sung-taes eye patch. If things are still a mess after I put you in charge, Ill make sure you reunite with the Cho brothers in the afterlife. Cha Sung-tae puts down his chopsticks and says. Ah, fuck all of this. No, damn it. I do one thing, and you threaten to kill me. Ill just retire and go into the mountains. Whatever you say. Hm. I throw a bait at Cha Sung-tae. Anyway, if we succeed, we will run three pavilions, but if you have no ambition and arrangements, go into a cave in the mountains, eat wild vegetables and meditate. Try not to crawl out of the cave. Why? Ill kill you if you run into me while I look for medicine. All right? If youre going to run away, just live deep in the mountains while choking yourself with spring water. I got up after the final drink and began taking off my clothes. Cha Sung-tae asks with a perplexed look. What are you doing? Take off your clothes, you rascal. So I can wear them. What a fucking thief Cha Sung-tae continues his complaints even as he takes off his clothes. About Cho Il-sum. That lame-ass bandit. Put on my clothes and kill him. Hes in the Pear Blossom Pavilion. Youll stand out too much if you wear your shabby clothes. Its best to change. I put on Cha Sung-taes clothes and say. Give me that robe, too. This is a little expensive. Its my favorite outfit. When I grab the whip on the table, Cha Sung-tae quickly hands over the robe. Please take care of it. I planned to wrap the dragon whip around my waist after changing into Cha Sung-taes fine clothes. After wrapping the whip around my waist three times, the dragon whip becomes a belt, completely hiding its nature as a weapon. Extending my arms, I ask Cha Sung-tae. How do I look? Oh, how dashing. Youre an errand boy, but you dont look like one at all. Now that I look at you, youve got a good figure. Our Zaha Inn errand boy looked like a beggar because he only wore ragged clothes. Wow, the clothes are wings! Just like faeries wings I hit Cha Sung-tae on the head. Watch your mouth. Yes. You fall back to your old ways so easily now that Im a little nicer to you. Do you get why you got hit? Stop hitting me. This makes me want to hit him again. I hit him again. Only then did Cha Sung-tae speak in a tone of reflection. Ill be careful. But can you go and kill Cho Il-sum alone? He has many underlings. Why would I kill his underlings? Ill only target Cho Il-sum if possible. Theyre all from around the province, but if they die during the fight, I cant help it. When I leave the inn and begin heading to the Pear Blossom Pavilion, Cha Sung-tae says with surprise. Wait, you should at least sober up. I smell like alcohol, dressed up nicely, and have no money. Its a perfect day to go to a pleasure pavilion. Why would you go to a pavilion if youre broke? Cha Sung-tae keeps his thoughts silent, fearing that uttering them would make the errand boy come back. Cha Sung-tae then says softly as the errand boy disappears into the dark road. I wish you good luck. Lee Zaha, you fucking bastard. Suddenly left alone, Cha Sung-tae takes one last drink and looks around the inn. Why did he have a sinking feeling that he just became an errand boy? He got hit on the head for mere words, and just so happens to be wearing the clothes of an errand boy. Im learning another thing today. Cha Sung-tae stands up to return to the Plum Blossom Pavilion but stops and sits down on the road. His shame makes him unable to go back. Suddenly, Cha Sung-tae grabs his forehead. Come to think of it, the purse with his hidden money is inside the inner pocket of his robe. Damn it. I arrive at the entrance of the Pear Blossom Pavilion and stare at the gatekeeper. He appraises my appearance and then looks into my eyes. As I glare with furrowing brows, the doorkeeper lowers his gaze and says. Welcome. The doorkeeper gave no choice but to feel intimidated as I am wearing fine clothing with a sword hanging around my waist. I didnt enter the pavilion right away but rather angrily spoke to him. Is the owner, Cho Il-sum, here? At last, the startled doorkeeper bows his head and says. The owner is here. May I ask where you are from? Its the Black Rabbit Unions messenger Lee Zaha. Take me to Cho Il-sum. Lee Zaha? As soon as the doorkeeper tries to look up, my hand flies out and slaps his cheek. Take me to him you punk. Im busy, so stop babbling. My apologies. The doorkeeper, who got slapped, turns around and opens the door. Then he grabs the guide and whispers. The Black Rabbit Union is here. Guide him to the owner. I look at everyone I meet with malice in my eyes. Now that the news that the Black Rabbit Union is here, most of them are avoiding my eyes. All they can see is the lower part of my chest, a fairly expensive-looking robe, and a sword handle shaped like a dragon. Once again, the handle carvings of Dragon Head Smithy are exaggerated, making it look luxurious at first glance. I will notify the owner. Please wait a moment. Tell him to come out quickly. Before I burn this place down. Yes. As I follow the guide to the top of the building, I am led to a spacious banquet hall. Inside, extravagant yoke-back chairs where Sect Leaders and Noble Family Clan Heads would sit are in place. Looks like they were impatient to make this union. While looking around the banquet hall, I tell the waiting women. I will talk to the owner privately, get out. Yes. As soon as the maidens leave, I sit in a yoke-back chair and wait for Cho Il-sum. In my errand boy days, I had never spoken to Cho Il-sum face-to-face and could not look him properly in the eyes whenever I passed by. While sitting on a yoke-back chair, memories start coming back as I wait for him. I remember this guy being buff. Cho Il-sum is one of those men who overwhelmed others with his large physique. Soon Cho Il-sums footsteps reach the room, and he enters with an unpleasant look as he straightens his robes. Somehow, he is much smaller than I remembered. Cho Il-sum looks at me and says. Its my first time meeting you. My sudden unannounced arrival at this late time, followed by not bothering to greet him and sitting in his designated chair, must have left Cho Il-sum flustered. My first words go as follows. Cho Il-sum. Yes. This wild pig with oil dripping down his ugly face. Long time no see. Ho, hohohohoho Cho Il-sum tilts his head and walks into the room. Lets start introducing ourselves properly. That was quite the insult. Ah, please understand. I came in a hurry. While talking, Cho Il-sum grabs a long sword hanging on the wall and turns around. He is a cautious man. As you already know, Im Cho Il-sum. Pardon the late introduction. Cho Il-sum looks at me as he waits for my name. I am curious about Cho Il-sums reaction, so I introduce myself this way. I am Baek Yu (). Baek Yu? If you dont mind me asking, may I know what your rank is in the Black Rabbit Union? I give a faint smile. Who said I was from the Black Rabbit Union? Thats what was reported to me. I am curious about Cho Il-sums reaction to the Twelve Generals, so I introduce myself like this. Listen carefully. I am Baek Yu of the Twelve Generals. What? Cho Il-sums eyes widen, and he kneels awkwardly. Cho Il-sum greets Baek Yu of the Twelve Generals. Wow, that worked? I just said it casually, but Cho Il-sum is kneeling. Looks like the Twelve Generals are feared in these parts. Chapter 12 Chapter 12 C I Heard Someone Died Because They Didnt Clean Up? The Twelve Generals vary in their level of martial arts. Still, they are respected as part of the Black Rabbit Union. Cho Il-sum is unable to raise his head. Why is one the Twelve Generals here As soon as he heard Baek Yus name, it became appropriate to greet him as if he were dealing with the Black Rabbit Union. Baek Yu is a problematic opponent for Cho Il-sum as hes been close to Heuk Myo (î, black rabbit) of the Twelve Generals. Naturally, Baek Yu, with whom he has bad blood, will be offended. However, being so low on the hierarchy means that Cho Il-sum has never met him in person. Cho Il-sums thoughts race. Are you here to deliver a command? Yes. Feel free to tell me. Kill yourself. Cho Il-sum clenches his teeth and does not answer. Who would accept such an order even if the other person is one of the Twelve Generals? Cho Il-sum says. If you just say that out of the blue Its a joke. Hm. I continue with a smirk. Being part of the Twelve Generals is a lie, Im from the Ilyang Prefecture. Why are you so gullible, pavilion owner? Cho Il-sums expression suddenly changes as anger rises in him. Ilyang Prefecture? Cho Il-sum is relieved that he is from the Ilyang Prefecture, and at the same time, his temper begins to rise. I make eye contact with Cho Il-sum and say, Its dark in here. Come and look closer. Its me. Cho Il-sum looks at my face carefully as he approaches with his sword in his hand. His quickly-changing expression is genuinely remarkable. An expression of incredulity is quickly replaced by anger on Cho Il-sums face. Slowly pulling out his sword, Cho Il-sum says. Are you the Zaha Inns bastard errand boy? I reply with a smile. You finally recognize me. Did you ever pass by and have a bowl of tasteless chicken noodle soup? How did it taste, Sir Cho Il-sum? Ominous thoughts then cross Cho Il-sums mind. What about my brother? What about him? He went out to kill you. Where is he? I reply with a stern look on my face. He stopped by. Spit it out. He didnt come to eat noodles. He came to talk about some unimportant shit. Ah, I remember. He was digging his own grave all of a sudden. I dont know why your brother came to Zaha Inn and dug his own grave. If youre curious, ask your brother in the afterlife. Dont ask me. Cho Il-sum narrows the distance and raises his sword to my face in anger. A solid stabbing attack that leaves little space for a counterattack. I pull out my own sword and block his attack. With a clang sparks fly. As the two swords collide, energy surges through each of our arms. Muscles, internal energy, speed, and the sturdiness of the sword. Cho Il-sum is a swordsman in his late thirties who had wielded a sword for twenty years. His is a sword honed not by formally-learned martial arts but through the act of killing people. His sword techniques, undoubtedly, are a glaring weakness. His attacks combine both external and internal martial arts. His killing intent is also vicious, proof of how many he had killed in the past. However, across the vastness of Kangho, his is at most a third-rate sword technique. Furthermore, even though I only have entered the Wooden Chicken, the first stage of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique, my internal cultivation is much more refined than Cho Il-sums. Just half of the Heavenly Pearls energy in my Dantian makes it fundamentally different from Cho Il-sums. Not to mention fighting skills, experience, and general handling of battle. It would have been better for you to kill yourself. I fight back with a calm look on my face. Cho Il-sum and I repeatedly widen and narrow the distance between us as two swords clash in the large banquet hall. Cho Il-sums expression darkens by the minute, his instincts telling him to run away. He questions when the errand boy even learned how to use a sword. Just fighting with the local inns errand boy makes this a mortifyingly embarrassing situation. Soon Cho Il-sum is overwhelmed by my internal energy and falls backward. I then throw my sword at him without hesitation. Whikkkk! Surprised, Cho Il-sum manages to block the sword as it flies at him. I unleash the whip from my waist and grab Cho Il-sums sword handle. As I inject the Wooden Chickens force into the arm holding the whip, Cho Il-sum gets dragged in like a pig being sent to the slaughterhouse. At that moment, Cho Il-sum decides to flee, drops his sword, and uses his movement skill to head toward the door. But my whip is even faster. I turn my body as the whip latches onto Cho Il-sums waist and shortens the distance even as I pull him closer. Cho Il-sum turns around and extends both his palms as I draw closer. In response, I use the Wooden Chicken Finger (ľaָ) technique to strike Cho Il-sums palms. Either my hand will break from the impact of the internal energy, or Cho Il-sum will suffer internal injuries due to the penetrating palm force. Naturally, the room fills with the sound of bursting leather, and Cho Il-sum flies across the room, vomiting dark-colored blood. He looks at me and says incredulously. How did you How did I learn martial arts? Once again, I inject the Strolling Golden Turtle Techniques energy into my whip and swing it. Cho Il-sum, who is suffering from internal injuries, resists by moving both hands recklessly, but there is no way to block the incoming whip. Every time the whip moves, a red line carves itself on Cho Il-sums body. Cho Il-sum screams as he is whipped. Zaha! You damned thing, Zaha! Wait! I wrap my whip around Cho Il-sums neck, then I inject my Wooden Chicken Palm Force (ľa) into the whip and pull. With a crack, his neck snaps audibly. When Cho Il-sums bulky body collapses to the floor, the entire Pear Blossom Pavilion shakes. Plop! The death of Cho Il-sum isnt something I find amusing. After confirming that Cho Il-sum is dead, I pick up the Black Dragon Sword. Cho Il-sums guards wait in the hallway, but they cant enter without permission. I speak to the door with my sword and whip in my hand. Open the door. As the door creaks open, the soldiers wait on high alert with swords in their hands. The reason why they couldnt enter is simple. According to the report, Cho Il-sum fought with the Black Rabbit Union. Its difficult for them to determine who they should listen to. Without being able to decide, personal safety became paramount. The pavilion owner, Cho Il-sum, may look scary, but they were aware that the three Cho brothers had invited the masters of the Black Rabbit Union and hosted them. Without officially declaring a sect, they are nothing but local thugs. I can imagine what it must be like for them. I glare at a few people as everyone avoids eye contact. I state the reason for the killing is an order from the Black Rabbit Union. The Black Rabbit Union Leader has changed his mind and decided to delay the creation of a union in Ilyang Prefecture. Since Ive decided to use Cho Il-sum as an example, youll end up like him if anyone decides to question the decision. Get out of my way if you want to live. The people filling the hall open a path as they stand against the left and right walls. Some go to the entrance to look at Cho Il-sums body. As I walk down the hall, I deliver the following command. Report whats going on at the pavilions to Cha Sung-tae at Plum Blossom Pavilion for the time being. As I turn around when I arrive at the end of the hallway, responses begin to flow out from behind me. I understand. The funeral is to be held as simply as it can. These three pavilions have ruined many poor lives. Hell have enough money to get to hell. The moment I turn around, someone says. Arent you the errand boy of Zaha Inn? The words are said as clearly as day for the crowd to hear. ! Silence is followed by a murmur. I pause, and the warriors holding their swords raise their heads one by one and stare at my back. The errand boy of Zaha Inn? Are you sure? Im certain. Hes just wearing different clothes. I see him often, so I know his face well. Someone must recognize me. I turn around, cracking my neck from side to side. Now everyone is looking at my face and eyes. I grin as I look at them. Thats right. So what? Does me being an errand boy make you more daring? If you want to die, come forward. Of course, no one came forward. If you want to follow Cho Il-sum to hell and lick his feet, come out. Ill do it for you. If you would like to obey him like a dog in the underworld, Im sure hed be fucking happy. Anyone? More than thirty people line the halls, yet no one dares to step up. I say again. Bitches who have lost their owners sure know their place. Those who dare to take revenge would not be working in a pavilion. Somebody asks. Why did you suddenly kill the owner? Why? I dont need an excuse. Why dont you ask Cho Il-sum why? If youre curious, come to me anytime. Im not going anywhere. I turn around, but no one moves. Even if they attack my back, there is no way a surprise attack by those who are weaker than the three Cho brothers would even reach me. When I return, Cha Sung-tae flinches and hiccups with surprise in his eyes as if he is seeing a ghost. Huh? What about Cho Il-sum? Hes dead. Liar! Cha Sung-tae, drunk, jumps up and starts running to the Pear Blossom Pavilion, the news shocking him greatly. As I sit back and drink my seventh glass while eating the cold side dishes, Cha Sung-tae returns and shakes his head as he breathes hard. Oh, God. This is crazy! Cho Il-sum is dead! Cho Il-sum! Are you drunk? Ah, I feel like throwing up after running. Cha Sung-tae continues as he sits down. I mean, I heard no one else was killed. How did you manage to only kill Cho Il-sum? Pointing my finger at Cha Sung-tae, I say. The pavilions, take care of them properly. There are some who probably wont listen to me, but sure. You can leave that to me. The two other pavilion managers are in the same hierarchy as Cha Sung-tae, though he considers himself stronger. The owners of the Plum Blossom and the Pear Blossom Pavilions are dead; the only one left is the youngest Cho, owner of the Cherry Blossom Pavilion and supplier of entertainers. Cha Sung-tae asks. What are you going to do now? I have to kill the trafficker, too. Ill let you know as soon as he arrives. Of course, I was planning to train, but I didnt tell Cha Sung-tae that. I can train in the Zaha Inn or retreat to a quiet mountain. What I need now is not swordsmanship training. Instead, the most important thing is an internal cultivation method that can draw and use the Yin energy waiting in my Dantian. After quietly watching Ilyang Prefectures situation for a few days, I will decide whether to choose to go into seclusion or continue my training here. I look at the mess on the table and say, Be sure to clean this up and go. Cha Sung-tae is about to say something but closes his mouth. He knows he might get hit if he refuses. Instead, Cha Sung-tae comes up with a good idea and carefully speaks. I will send someone famous for cleaning. They are in the top three for being the best in Ilyang Prefecture. Take some glue off that wall, dust it off. Whats this on the floor? The kitchen is a mess, right? Thats why the business is so bad. Ill send them right away, so please wait. Have you ever heard of a man who died because he didnt clean up? There was a story like that? Its an urban legend in Ilyang Prefecture. Was there a story like that? I had no idea. Ill clean up the table first. Why dont you stay at Plum Blossom Pavilion? Its more comfortable there, and there are guards Without answering, I go into the small room and sit cross-legged. Cha Sung-tae sighs and looks around for a mop. Fucking bastard dares to order THE Cha Sung-tae to clean up? Ha. Cha Sung-tae has no choice but to start cleaning. Chapter 13 Chapter 13 C There Was A Foul Smell The Strolling Golden Turtle Technique I am using for cultivation was made by a master named Ki Sung-ja (ӛ). It is a strange martial art developed from the training of fighting cocks. Ki Sung-ja, while an excellent martial master, was unlike other martial masters who traveled around Kangho and showed off their skills. Masters from martial art families typically learn martial arts with the hopes of living a long life rather than using it to hurt others. Among them, Ki Sung-ja was a martial master who was not even intimated before the famed King Xuan of the Zhou Dynasty. The Strolling Golden Turtle Technique that he left behind is something very few could properly master. Due to its nature, it is simply very difficult to complete. This is because the ultimate goal of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique is to gain immortality. To explain it in terms used in Kangho, the ultimate goal is to reach a state of Impenetrability (). In other words, it is a martial art where the turtle achieves an Impenetrable state and strolls around leisurely (b, go wherever it pleases). There are five stages to the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique. Wood Chicken (ľa, wooden chicken). Fire Chicken (a, fire-breathing chicken). Fighting Chicken (^a, fighting chicken). Super Chicken (a, superior chicken) Golden Turtle (, steel turtle). A manual(z) exists for each stage that illustrates the palm and sword techniques in detail. Since I didnt lose my memory after regression, I just focus on the cultivation method that improves internal energy. When I first heard of the techniques stage classifications, I was surprised. Why would a chicken gain enlightenment and break its limits to become a turtle of steel? Ki Sung-jas hobby was to breed chickens for fighting, but perhaps he thought Kangho martial artists and fighting cocks were similar. Its the same as how I see them as crazy monkeys. Mad monkeys or fighting chickens both sound the same to me. The Wooden Chicken stage focuses on the stillness of the mind (), allowing complete control of the mind as its basis. This gives me the ideal method to deal with any Qi Deviation. Once you reach the second stage of the technique, the Fire Chicken, internal energy can be used to wrap both fists and weapons in intense heat. The Strolling Golden Turtle Technique is a martial art based on internal cultivation that favors extreme Yang energy. I began to gain notoriety when I broke through the Fire Chicken stage, and I gained the skills enough to be called a master when I broke through the Fighting Chicken stage. My exact level of mastery before regression was achieving the Super Chicken stage, but I could not break through to the final Golden Turtle stage. The Super Chicken stage is one where you can breathe and move with ease; fighting no longer needs to follow principles, but the principles themselves can freely change. I worked tirelessly to break through into the Golden Turtle stage. Yet just as its effects of changing the body to becoming impenetrable are mind-boggling, trying to achieve the Golden Turtle stage is a tiring and difficult process. But this time, itll be different. Its only a feeling, but I feel really good about this. I have only repeated the entire cycle of the first stage of cultivation a dozen times in the back room. Yet, the level of the Wooden Chicken is rising surprisingly quickly. There is momentum and speed enough to break through to the Fire Chicken stage in just a short amount of time. I open my eyes again after locking myself in the backroom to circulate my internal energy continuously. Before I know it, it is dawn again. The Zaha Inn is enveloped by a sense of tranquility. My five senses develop as internal energy begins to circulate throughout my veins. I focus to check for any persons presence or breathing before falling into a trance for some rest. I still have enemies lurking about, so I didnt plan to sleep comfortably for the time being. As I close my eyes in a trance state, the masters in my previous life come to mind. Even masters who were active before I became one myself I feel the corners of my mouth go up. I will fully repay all those who helped me and crush all those who were my enemies. To do so, I have no choice but to continue cultivating, skipping meals, ignoring my bodily functions, and sitting cross-legged to the point of death. Inner cultivation only blooms through patience and endurance while resisting the call of nature. It might be bizarre, but its the truth. As soon as I wake up at noon from the trance, I feel hungry. The side dishes Cha Sung-tae bought yesterday are tucked away nicely. Maybe because my stomach is empty, I recall the rice soup from the Chunyang Restaurant. I should get a bowl of rice soup. When I search inside Cha Sung-taes long robe, I find a heavy pouch. Seeing that the shape of the pouch is unfamiliar, it must be Cha Sung-taes, not mine. Lucky me. After washing up and cleaning my eyes, I look around the neighborhood as I head to the Chunyang Restaurant. Even though Cho Il-sum and Cho Yi-gyul died last night, Ilyang Prefecture is quiet and peaceful as if nothing happened. However, rumors spread last night that I killed Cho Il-sum, so people are staring at me like a ghost as I pass by. All of them stay silent, with not even one greeting me. As I enter the Chunyang Restaurant, the owner Jang Deuk-soo (ˮ), looks at me with surprise. Oh, youre here. Brother Deuk-soo, rice soup. Ah, sure. Grab a seat. After a moment, a massive bowl of rice soup was served. This rice soup, coupled with plenty of meat with some thinly sliced vegetables and spicy seasoning, is simply called Chunyang Rice Soup. I havent eaten this rice soup since I left Ilyang Prefecture. This is not a delicacy of the central district but food that the Yue people living in the land of Baekwol enjoyed by mixing a bowl of rice in noodle soup. Its not a sign of how poor I am, but I nearly cry as I eat this rice soup that can only be found in the Ilyang Prefectures Chunyang Restaurant. Since Jang Deuk-soo is looking at me, I say, Its a bit spicy today. My eyes are sweating. Oh, really? I put in more spice today. Was it too much? Just right. Jang Deuk-soo grins. The rice soup is definitely spicier, warmer, and tastier than I remembered. While filling my stomach with rice soup, Jang Deuk-soo whispers. I heard you killed the Cho brothers. Is it true? Yeah. Jang Deuk-soo says as if he cant believe it. How did you kill him? Cho Il-sum is the strongest around here. What do you mean? We fought with knives, and the loser died. Jang Deuk-soo and I laugh. What about Cho Yi-gyul? He came to the inn to kill me, but he ended up in a grave he told his men to dig up. Damn bastards, theyve been killing people late at night. Serves them right. Ill send word if Cho Sam-pyung returns. I should tell the other store owners in advance. How dare a human trafficking scumbag roam around a peaceful neighborhood like this. Do you want anything else? No need. When I take out the money from Cha Sung-taes pouch and raise it to pay for the meal, surprise flashes through Jang Deuk-soos face. What? You always eat for free. When did I always eat for free? I pay sometimes. Didnt we call it even with chicken noodle soup? I recall the good old days and grin. Cmon, you said you couldnt eat it because it was so bad. Then I should pay for it. Hah, youve changed. All right, go ahead. After eating rice soup, I go around Ilyang Prefecture as if I am patrolling. I want to check if the people were safe and if anything would interfere with my training. Nothing much will happen until Cho Sam-pyung arrives. Jang Deuk-soo also confirms that the new situation was something everyone was happy with. Had the Cho brothers established their sect, they would have been charged exorbitant protection fees after all. So I lock myself in the inns backroom and focus on the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique. I also thought about finding a quiet mountain and going into seclusion for a while. Still, considering the variables, this shabby Zaha Inn is safer. I devote myself to the cultivation method all day long to build up internal energy. Sometimes, when I am hungry, I go to the Chunyang Restaurant and eat rice soup. Building internal energy, eating, and shitting. This is how difficult it is to become a master. How can a normal human being not go crazy? Sometimes when I feel my back and legs getting too stiff from sitting too long, I take a walk and inspect every corner of Ilyang Prefecture. Suppressing my emotions like a Wooden Chicken (ľa), I throw myself into training. In the meantime, my internal energy is accumulating steadily and rapidly. Compared to the past, the development of my internal energy is bafflingly fast. Twenty days have passed since I locked myself in the Zaha Inn. The lack of sleep leaves me slightly tired, but I manage to break through the Wooden Chicken stage and enter the Fire Chicken stage. The speed of this is nothing short of miraculous. Of course, I know I could reach this stage quicker due to my past lifes intensive training. However, during the training process, the backroom I am staying in has become as dirty as a rats nest. All the impurities flow out of my body as I enter the Fire Chicken stage. The room smells like hell. But this unbearable stench is a sign of my accomplishment. This proves how clean my body is. As each stage progresses, the body will become as purified as clean water, so I will never have to smell this stench again. When I look at myself, my skin is glossy, my hair becomes softer, and my eyesight is much better as my eyes become clearer. My five senses () improves as I break through the stages. Unlike internal and external martial arts, the five senses are closely related to evaluation and survival, so it is crucial to surviving in Kangho. When I clench my fist and inject internal energy, my spine flexes. I became stronger much faster than expected. In the past, I thought the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique was a great way to treat Qi Deviation, but this changed my mind. Im certain I can grow stronger than before. Certainly, warriors of Kangho feel the happiest and most satisfied when they achieve achievement in martial arts. I idly think that I could become a celestial at this rate. At this time, I hear Cha Sung-taes voice from outside. Ark! Whats this smell? I could smell something rotting. Ugh When I come out of the backroom, Cha Sung-tae is stunned and looks like he is about to faint. Did you shit yourself? Urk Cha Sung-tae covers his mouth with his hands as if he is about to vomit and runs out of the inn. This bastard. Wow I am speechless for a moment.. As I see Cha Sung-tae who is gagging outside the inn, I think this, Ill have to live my life to torment him. At that moment, Cha Sung-tae vomits with a disgusting sound. I walk outside, feeling the killing intent () rising from deep within. Chapter 14 Chapter 14 C I Went to See The Fire The fact that I want to hit Cha Sung-tae whenever I see his face ranks him up there with the Left Hand of Illuminating Light in my personal punchability list. Following that train of thought, I briefly remember the Left Hand of Illuminating Light. The man gained fame in the Demon Cult due to his peerless wisdom. He was the youngest Left Hand of Illuminating Light in the history of the Demon Cult when he was promoted, being two to three years younger than I was. Left Hand wasnt someone who was raised inside the Demon Clan but was recruited from outside of the cult. He was from an Unorthodox Sect in the Murim. He was forced to throw his lot with the Demon Cult due to rumors of his sexual harassment of women from notable clans, making him a public enemy. In this life, I am planning to stop the Left Hand of Illuminating Light before he joins the cult. Although he is a pervert, he is very good at martial arts. Ill just beat him up if he does anything perverted. Im improving much faster than my past self, so I am thinking of gathering manpower by meeting the talents I know of in advance. I will then make them my underlings, harass them like Cha Sung-tae, or enslave them like Left Hand. I will also eliminate those who could not be rehabilitated in the Orthodox and Unorthodox factions or the Demon Cult. Those who find themselves in a bind in Kangho tend to join the Demon Cult. At the same time, those who fall out of favor with the Cult Leader often surrender to the Murim Alliance. It is pretty common for talented people to join opposite factions. I will make it my mission to interject this process and steal these talents. The so-called Divide the World into Three Plan (֮Ӌ). Kangho, once separated between only the Demon Cult and the Murim Alliance, will become a three-way battle with me joining the foray. This kind of stuff isnt really my thing, but a man has to dream big. Cha Sung-tae comes in after he finishes vomiting, pinches his nose, and says in a nasal voice. We need to close this inn. The reason for closure is the bad odor. I try to recall how Cha Sung-tae died in his previous life. He wasnt very famous, so theres no way of knowing even if I tried to remember. But one things for sure. Cha Sung-tae was probably beaten to death because of his mouth. Sung-tae. Explain the smell please. I was training in martial arts. I didnt shit myself. Its not something a bastard like you would understand. Smelling like shit due to martial arts training is unheard of. Dont lie to me. For the dignity of the Ilyang Prefecture the Zaha Inn will be closed down as of today. Ill send people who are good at cleaning, so please choose another place to stay. Then close it. Lets go to the Plum Blossom Pavilion first. Why? I have to wash up. Ew, it smells. Just wash up in the stream. I forcibly grab Cha Sung-tae, who is still covering his nose, and put my arms around his shoulders, causing his face to scrunch up. Urk Behave yourself. Yes. Cha Sung-tae breaths through his mouth and says. Why are you putting your hands around me? Were not even close. Ah, Im getting angry. As I make a straight face, Cha Sung-tae flinches. Im sorry. I glare at Cha Sung-tae and say. Lets switch clothes. Take it off. Cha Sung-tae looks me in the eye and replies. Hey, you bastard. Just put your arms around me. I punch Cha Sung-tae once and head to the Plum Blossom Pavilion like close brothers. When I arrive at the Plum Blossom Pavilion, the doorkeeper who I beat up the other day covers his nose with his hand and says. I can accept drunk people, but I cant accept people who shit their pants. Cha Sung-tae answers back. Do you want to die? Step aside. When I look at the doorkeeper, he avoids my gaze with a bitter expression, probably still holding a grudge that I beat him up the other day. This is what I like about my hometown. Very few people here get intimidated by just a few punches. Maybe thats why a guy like me suddenly appeared in Kangho. When Cha Sung-tae and I enter the Plum Blossom Pavilion, the women who came to greet us screams and runs away due to the stench. Cha Sung-tae is enjoying the situation, probably finding it funny. Get out of my way. I took a dump. I mean, I shat my pants. Hehehe. I held my tongue in my mouth because I didnt want to laugh out loud. As expected, I cant act carelessly around this bastard even for a moment. I wash my body a few times with pails of water before dipping into the wooden bathtub. As I enter the steamy hot water, all the fatigue in my body disappears. Uggghhhhh An unintelligible noise escapes my mouth. This is a celebratory gift for breaking through to the Fire Chicken stage. Suddenly, the bathroom door slides open, and Chae-hyang appears with a large towel in her hand. Im here to help you with your bath. I look at Chae-hyang approaching me in the bathtub and wave my hand. Why is a music performer helping with my bath? Forget it. Sung-tae asked me to, so I came. Ill wipe you dry after youre done. It wont work. What? What do you mean? Honey traps dont work on me. I have hands and feet. I can even wipe the water off my body with my feet, so leave the towel here. Males and females over seven dont sleep in the same bed. Even Zhu Bajie did not bathe with spider goblins. What? The errand boy of Zaha Inn and the Plum Blossom Pavilions most popular Chae-hyang in the same bath, what kind of absurd situation is that? If you receive another order next time, just say I told you not to come. Ill tell Cha Sung-tae about this too. You should act more like the performer you are. Some people do things they arent ordered to, and Cha Sung-tae is one of them. Chae-hyang replies with a slight bow. Thank you. And Im sorry about the other day. Its only natural to accept a clean apology. Its fine. As I wonder why she was so polite, Chae-hyang reveals her true feelings. But youre going to get rid of Cho Sam-pyung, right? Im curious. Why? Should I keep him alive? Ah, no. I was dragged here by Cho Sam-pyung. Im not originally from here. You should go back if you can. It wasnt a comfortable place. I didnt want to go back because I was so poor. Tell the other women here. If they want to leave, then leave. Tell them the errand boy of Zaha Inn said so. If youre this strong, then why did you decide to get hit back then? Its awkward for me if you keep asking such sharp questions. Resting my head at the edge of the bathtub, I answer. I have to get beaten so I can seek revenge. Chae-hyang smiles at my reply. No way. There is a saying when it comes to a noblemans revenge, ten years isnt too late. An errand boys revenge begins the moment they get hit. You should read, too. Dont just practice singing. You have to read more books to sing better. Really? No, I just made it up. Chae-hyang tilts her head. Hm. When I wave my hand for her to leave, Chae-hyang places the towel on the floor and leaves. What I wanted Honey traps dont work on me. Dangerous moments always come suddenly like this. Its said that the elderly, children, and women are the three things you have to be wary of in Kangho, though my opinion is slightly different. After all, aside from those three, there are also healthy men. A healthy man has a high chance of becoming a warrior in Kangho. But watch out for the rest as well? That just means you have to be careful of everything. This will apply to me until I complete my martial arts. If I neglect my training due to Cha Sung-taes honey trap now, Ill be at a disadvantage against top masters later on. Im sure that it was not Cha Sung-taes intention but rather a honey trap that life threw my way. Nows not the time anyway. Once I wipe myself clean and change into new clothes, the way people look at me changes slightly from before. No one thinks that I am the errand boy from the Zaha Inn. When you become strong in martial arts at a young age, your appearance and impression change. In the past, I wasnt aware of this because Id only grown stronger as I got older. Ive gotten more handsome than before, but Im still not as pretty as the Demon Cults perverted Left Hand. Since Im not someone who seeks women through martial arts, desire, status, and coercion, I leave the pavilion and immediately head back to the Zaha Inn. On my way back, I can see smoke rising ahead. People are crowding up to see the fire. Looks like theres a fire. As I go up and push the spectators away, I see that the place burning down was none other than the Zaha Inn. I am so bewildered that I could only laugh. I never thought Id see my house burn twice. The words flow out on their own. Why is my house always set on fire? The house did nothing wrong. Did even a simple inn have a destiny? The burning flames seem to talk to me. As if telling me Ill never have a cozy home again in this life. Of course, theres no way Cha Sung-tae did this. Cho Sam-pyung, the Cherry Blossom Pavilion owner, has apparently returned and is looking at the Zaha Inn as his underlings throw burning torches at the inn. Cho Sam-pyung is the better-looking one out of the three Cho brothers. His face is why he ended up being tasked with luring innocent women after all. Seeing his face for the first time in a while makes me feel even unluckier. A voice says from the crowd. What are you going to do if Zaha comes back? You cant just burn the place down! How dare you burn peoples houses like that? You will be punished! Cho Sam-pyung turns to the source of the voice and says. Bring Lee Zaha to me. Where is he? The Ilyang Prefecture crowd is daring. Someone in the crowd replies. You fucking pimp. Who said that? Dont hide like a rat and come out! You fucking bastards. When Cho Sam-pyung shouts, silence falls. I wonder why Cho Sam-pyung came out so confidently. An unfamiliar man in black robes watches from nearby with a stern look. He certainly seems stronger than Cho Sam-pyung. I open my mouth while watching the inn burn. Sam-pyung, your brothers grave is right behind the inn. Is it a good idea to burn it before retrieving the body? Cho Sam-pyung whips his head in my direction and glares. Who said that!? I push people aside and step forward. Its me, you fucker. Scanning me up and down, Cho Sam-pyung doesnt recognize me and asks. Who the fuck are you? Does this guy not recognize me? Or is the beautifying effect of martial arts this great? I look at Cho Sam-pyung and say calmly. Why did you burn down my house? How are you going to pay for it? Only then did a look of surprise show on his face. Is it you, Lee Zaha? Whats with you fucker? What happened? Whats wrong with your tone? In the meantime, Cho Sam-pyung speaks to the man next to him, as if he was tattling to a teacher. Senior Neung, this is the guy. The man named Neung tilts his head with a dissatisfied expression and says in a quiet tone. Cho Sam-pyung. Yes, sir. What am I supposed to do? What? Are you telling me to kill a mere errand boy? I came to celebrate you three brothers establishment of a sect, but this is a big disappointment. Dont tell me youre going to set up a sect when you cant even kill an errand boy? The whole of Kangho would laugh. I would never let my name be brought up in such a farce. The man in the black robe looks at me and says to Cho Sam-pyung. Kill him. If youre so weak that you cant take care of a single errand boy, you should just join your brothers. No matter how much you admire Kangho, you should at least have a conscience. Cho Sam-pyung replies with a look of panic. No, senior Neung. And why am I your senior? Ive never had a junior like you. What the man in the black robe said is correct, so I add. Hes right, Cho Sam-pyung. You have to have a conscience. Lets just say the loser died in the fire. Come here. The atmosphere turns grim at my words. Chapter 15 Chapter 15 C The Weakest Organization in Kangho As I declare a duel with Cho Sam-pyung, the black-robed man looks at the crowd around us. Everyone, step back and stay out of the fight. The Zaha Inn errand boy and the Cherry Blossom Pavilion owner Cho Sam-pyung will have a duel. I, Neung Ji-seok of the Dark Hurricane Castle (ȱ), shall be the witness. The Dark Hurricane Castle is a fairly prominent group in Ilyang Prefecture. They are an Unorthodox Sect that profits from gambling and auctions. As everyone, including Cho Sam-pyungs men, moves back, a ring forms in front of the still-blazing Zaha Inn. While Cho Sam-pyung draws his sword with a sour look, I look at Neung Ji-seok. He spoke as if hed given Cho Sam-pyung a fair chance, but he wasnt. He wants to gauge my skills while I fight against Cho Sam-pyeong to figure out his chances if he chooses to step in. This kind of sly behavior is common in Kangho. I might not know how to make basic chicken noodle soup, but I know these tricks very well. For a moment, I watch the Zaha Inn as it is engulfed in flames before drawing the whip from around my waist. Alert flashes across Cho Sam-pyungs face as I ask. What? Whats with the whip? Draw your sword. This is perfect for a dog. Ignoring Cho Sam-pyungs nonsense, I swing the whip. SwishCrack! The whip flashes between Cho Sam-pyungs feet at speed, causing him to jump up and down like a crazed dog. I crack the whip with a stern look but purposefully miss his body. Since I am using the Wood Chickens energy in the attack, any contact would have torn off his flesh. But I need to hide my skills from Neung Ji-seok so I swing the whip roughly with just a bit of internal energy. This is why a whip is excellent. It looks threatening even if you swing it roughly once you support it with internal energy. I will only pull out my sword if Neung Ji-seok interferes. Cho Sam-pyung tries to narrow the distance by jumping around. Still, his sword techniques are shallow, and his internal cultivation is lacking compared to mine. Theyre all the same, whether its Cho Il-sum or Cho Sam-pyung. I use the whip as if I am beating a crazy monkey that came to terrorize the town. Its best for people like you to disappear from this town forever. Once I am confident that Neung Ji-seok will not interfere, my whip begins to lash directly at Cho Sam-pyung. Whip! Slap! Slap! Slap! As the buzz of spectators begins to quiet, only the screams of Cho Sam-pyung being whipped is heard. His face and clothes turn ragged. I whip Cho Sam-pyungs sword away and exchange glances with Neung Ji-seok. Seeing that I am overwhelming Cho Sam-pyung with my skills, Neung Ji-seok smirks and gestures for me to do whatever I please. It looks like a gesture asking if I could kill Cho Sam-pyung. Or it could also mean something else. Whatever it means, I have no intention of keeping Cho Sam-pyung alive. I grab and pull the struggling Cho Sam-pyung by the neck with the whip and lash out at the top of his forehead. Plop! Cho Sam-pyungs body collapses to the ground as he dies instantly. Confirming the death of Cho Sam-pyung, Neung Ji-seok says in a deliberately nonchalant voice. Ill admit, that was quite the duel. One day, well meet again. I swing the whip as soon as Neung Ji-seok attempts to walk away. Swoooooop! I aim the curved whip at Neung Ji-seoks neck, making him urgently pull out his sword to block it. As the whip wraps around the long sword, I tighten it horizontally. Neung Ji-seok looks at me with shock in his eyes. What? How dare you touch the Black Hurricane Castles Neung Ji-seok hurriedly closes his mouth as my energy shoots through the whip. Looking at Neung Ji-seok, I say. I dont care who you are Im not the kind of person wholl just let a guy watch and then sneak out of my sight. Whats more, hes a bastard who watched the inn burn down. Even if Cho Sam-pyung raped or killed a woman, he would probably stand and watch. Hes an opportunist, so its even more disgusting. Above all, I have no intention of letting him go because I already know all of the Black Hurricane Castles sins. At that moment, I channel the energy of the Fire Chicken through my whip and into Neung Ji-seoks sword.. Subsequently, a reddish light begins to radiate from the surface of the whip, and the color of Neung Ji-seoks sword also begins to change. In addition, my eyes also become similar in color to the burning Zaha Inn. As Neung Ji-seok confirms that his internal cultivation is weaker than mine, his face trembles. This wont do. Neung Ji-seok drops his sword and runs as he utilizes his movement skill. His life is more important than the sword. Showing his experience, he seizes the momentary opening when the whip collides with his internal energy. I jump straight into the air. Neung Ji-seok seems to try to hide and disappear within the crowd, which is a fatal mistake. I step on the shoulders of the onlookers. After stepping on five or six shoulders, I outpace the escaping Neung Ji-seok. With a light push on a mans shoulder, I land in front of Neung Ji-seok. Neung Ji-seok gathers all of his internal energy and launches it at me through both of his palms in a concentrated blow. I draw my sword diagonally and channel the Fire Chickens energy through its blade, covering it with a tornado of flame. Neung Ji-seoks attack covers my vision momentarily before being split by my sword. The two of us make eye contact for the last time. As soon as Neung Ji-seok prepares for a counterattack, I draw the sword diagonally again. A long bloody line forms, and Neung Ji-seoks body splits into two and drops to the floor with a splattering sound. I glare at both halves of Neung Ji-seok. I could feel the crowds gaze looking at both the body and myself. As I shake the blood off the sword, I tell the onlookers. The fire show is over. Everyone go home. At that moment, I did not forget about Cho Sam-pyungs underlings. Cho Sam-pyungs men, stay. Ill go after you and send you to your boss if you run. Those who open stores must go to bed and get up early. The citizens scatter away in a hurry, and Cho Sam-pyungs henchmen remain. All seven of them. I sit in a chair that remains intact outside the inn and stare at Cho Sam-pyungs dogs. Since I beat Cho Sam-pyung and Neung Ji-seok to death, they are trembling from head to toe. I suddenly thought. These bastards are just as problematic as Cho Sam-pyung. They are dumbasses who would kill someone because they are scared of their boss and burn down other peoples houses just because they are ordered to. Naturally, my Crazy Demon voice flows out. Dont just stand there and get down on your knees, you fucking bastards, if you dont want to follow Cho Sam-pyung. All seven fall to their knees at the same time. Why did you burn someone elses house? An eye for an eye, a tooth for a tooth. Do you want me to burn you too? Spare us. Answer me. Why did you set someone elses house on fire? We were ordered to do so. Im sorry. We didnt have any bad intentions. Similar answers come from their mouths. You cant burn someone elses house without feeling anything. Should I also kill you guys without feeling anything? Im sorry. If I hadnt killed Cho Sam-pyung, you would have had to lick his boots for the rest of your life. These guys are men who have never been responsible for anything in their lives. Because they are scared, they follow everything Cho Sam-pyung ordered and allow him to commit evil deeds to his hearts content. It is worthless to kill these guys. But there is something they need to do. I want you to rebuild the Zaha Inn completely. Cha Sung-tae and all the guys in the pavilions will all come together and help as well. Everyone looks puzzled when they are told to rebuild it, but its what I said. The Zaha Inn is at a good spot where the sunrise and sunset can be easily seen and is also my home. Although I didnt make good chicken noodle soup, there is no need for the inn to be demolished. Now that it is burned down, I will make it into a better inn. If someone sets it on fire again, I will catch the culprit and have them restore it again. If the Zaha Inn burns down ten times, I will rebuild it ten times. Thats where my past and present are different. It was up to them to set the fire, but if I caught them, they would have to clean the ashes first and then restore it the same way. The seven of them agonize over the order. How are we supposed to rebuild it? What do you mean, how? You carry the stones, build the walls, and spread the soil yourself. Cha Sung-tae will pay for the necessary expenses. If we dont have enough men, the guys in the pavilion will help. Late to the scene, Cha Sung-tae finally approaches and replies to my words. Is Cho Sam-pyung dead? I point to Cho Sam-pyungs body with my chin. As Cha Sung-tae looks at the corpse, he also discovers the remnants of the Zaha Inn. Its completely burnt down. The usually playful Cha Sung-tae becomes serious for a moment. The outcome he is unsure and wary of happened in the end. The errand boy won. I cant believe my eyes. I call Cha Sung-tae, who is staring at the Zaha Inn. Hey, Sung-tae. Cha Sung-tae turns around with a smile. Yes, go ahead. I point to the seven people and say. Do you know all of them? Of course. Theyre guys that are much, much, lower in rank than me. Manage the restoration of the Zaha Inn. Take all your men and rebuild my Zaha Inn. Perfectly. Why me? Cha Sung-taes words make me smirk. A joke is a joke, and the truth is the truth, but Im not joking. Cha Sung-tae looks at my serious eyes and lowers his head slightly. We will rebuild it and make it better than before. The land here is quite big. Shall we rebuild it in the form of a pavilion? Or should we restore it to an inn where anyone can come and go comfortably like before? It used to be one-story, but well restore it to a magnificent two-story building. Lets build the walls around the outside to make space inside. We will. Build a training hall and a backyard. Do you mean were making a Murim Clan house and not a guest inn? Have you never made a Murim Clan house thats like a guest inn? Is there anything you can do? Can it work that way too? Then Ill create a guest inn-like Murim Clan, the Zaha Inn School (ϼͱKT). Cha Sung-tae checks on the seven peoples conditions. They are all terrorized and in bad shape. Since Cha Sung-tae and the scum are together, I have to make things certain. Those who remain in the pavilion will move to the Rebirth Sect. Im saying this again, we wont hold back those who want to leave. Get them out of here after theyve completed building the inn. Tell them if they run away. Ill hunt them down until the end of the world. All right. Here is the first principle of an organization, starting from its foundation. A place where people who have nowhere to go and have hit rock bottom can gather. Not a gathering of crazies, but a space for those who have nowhere else to go. Thats the Low-Down Sect Id imagined. In other words, it is a group of weak people who belong nowhere else. Creating an organization like this would make the Low-Down Sect the weakest organization in Kangho. But it doesnt matter. I just need to be stronger. Human trash and those who reached rock bottom will come to me, and only my hands will be dirtied. Thats the duty of the Low-Down Sects Leader. Chapter 16 Chapter 16 C A Good Drinkers Threat (1) Cha Sung-tae asks me, Since the inn has burnt to the ground, where will you sleep now? The pavilions are made up of nothing but rooms. Why are you even asking? Im asking if you wanted to use one of the rooms previously occupied by the three late owners. Those are very good rooms after all. Ill sleep in one of them then, get rid of them first. Cha Sung-tae then looks at the kneeling men and says threateningly. Dont go to the Cherry Blossom Pavilion today. Stay at the Plum Blossom Pavilion. Come see me later. Yes. They all have families and are residents of Ilyang Prefecture, so they wont run away. Cha Sung-tae looks at me as the frightened scum scatters away. Is there anything else I look at the remnants of the Zaha Inn briefly and say. Make sure you build it correctly. Im not joking when I asked you to rebuild it. Ill keep that in mind. When youre working on the building (B), keep an eye out for any talented workers and report to me. That person will lead Architectural Sect (BT). Architectural Sect? I will be in charge of the Rebirth Sect in the Pavilion, Mister Geum Chul-yong will head the Blacksmith Sect, and the head of Architectural Sect will lead men who focus on construction. Rebirth Sect, Architectural Sect, Blacksmith Sect Is there more? Of course. The Rebirth Sect will be where people join first, and then theyll be moved to either the Architectural or Blacksmith Sects depending on their preference. The Low-Down Sect will be established to ensure that people find employment and make a living. You have to work to live. If theres no work, the Low-Down Sect will provide jobs. This is the founding purpose of why the sect was created. My ambition and duty as Sect Leader will be to help solve any disputes and deal with any harassment. I will gain strength in the future while I fulfil this ambition and repay all the favours given to me in my past life. Cha Sung-tae answers. Oh thats a good idea. Is it like a union? I reply in a low voice. Its a union of ordinary working people. Cha Sung-tae smiles bashfully, a different smile than before. Sounds good. But when the scale gets bigger, the discipline and atmosphere will be a mess. It doesnt matter even if its a mess. Its an organization, after all. After all, I had made enemies of both the Murim Alliance and the Demon Cult in Kangho. Creating my own sect is a way to show that there is no need to follow those bastards. The organization Im going to build just needs to remain in Kangho for a long time. Thats all I want. Im not going to create a great empire, but the messiest sect to ever stand in Kanghos damned state. Cha Sung-tae bites back an expletive. The fuck is he talking about. Once the Low-Down Sect begins running properly, he thought of other things he can do. Do you think the Black Rabbit Union will stand back and do nothing? I reply to Cha Sung-taes question with a smile. The sect will be such a mess that they wont even know where to start dealing with it. Thats the point. Everyone in the sect will live by doing what they can while the Sect Leader takes care of the aftermath. What about the martial arts organization? Well need someone skilled. Thats for later. Hm. Well establish the Kill Sect (T) once we have enough talent. You can say that Im currently a One Man Leader (һT). The members under me will be recruited from the talents that I know from the future. I also plan to gather those adept in collecting information and form the Ear Sect (T) separately. In this way, there will be the Rebirth Sect, the Blacksmith Sect, the Architectural Sect, the Kill Sect, the Ear Sect The rest of the sects will be randomly added in the future. I will leave the group relatively unattended so that everyone can focus on their respective work. The Low-Down Sect is created with no plans and regulations, but its members can reach out when help is needed. I will only make sure that no one starves to death. No one but me could do such a crazy thing in Kangho I think. If a problem arises, the major forces of Kangho will look for the Low-Down Sect Leader, and I will come forward. Just like how I was Murims public enemy in the past, Ill turn the place upside down again this time. Itd be nice to have at least one guy in the heartless Kangho that brings justice to the weak. Thats all I want. With my nosy character, its only a matter of time before I become Murims public enemy again. The Low-Down Sect and I will develop and grow at a similar pace. Cha Sung-tae has an unfamiliar expression and suddenly talks informally to me. Zaha, can I say something? Sure. Cha Sung-tae says with a strange expression. I apologize for the past. I was wrong about you. I even thought you had a great master to back you up, but its not like that. Youre the one whos changed. What, thats it? Cha Sung-tae nods and asks. Yeah. Whats the name of our union? The Low-Down Sect. The Low-Down Sect is the first organization I created. Naturally, Cha Sung-tae doesnt know of it yet. Cha Sung-tae lowers his head slightly and says in a small voice. The Low-Down Union. Should I call you Union Leader from now on? Cha Sung-taes tone changes, and I reply with a nod. Up to you. Cha Sung-tae then asks directly. But why did you let me live? I still dont get it. So I can mess with you. Cha Sung-tae seems to understand what I am saying right away. I see. Thats better than dying, I suppose. I got it. Thats true. Life is like that. I take a look at the Zaha Inns burnt ruins and stand up. Lets go. Quickly sorting himself out, Cha Sung-tae replies in a different tone. Lets go, Union Leader. My choices are to either roam and look at the empty plot where the Zaha Inn used to be or go into an empty room in the Pavilion to immerse myself again in the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique. I need to cultivate more energy, even if its just one drop. That one drop of internal energy could be enough to save my life, as it did in my past life. Its not just about training internal cultivation. I also need to adjust both my palm and finger techniques. However, using my legs is a challenge due to my days as an errand boy causing stiffness around my waist, legs, and knees. Thus, I immerse myself in training while staying at all the Pavilions, devoting 80% of my time to the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique and 20% to physical martial arts. In the meantime, Cha Sung-tae handles everything outside. Its not like I trust Cha Sung-tae that deeply. Cha Sung-tae doesnt like me very much either. But we manage to get along, and time inevitably passes. Cha Sung-tae was introduced to a young architect who had recently gained fame and sent a request for him to come. While waiting for the architect to come and inspect the work site, unemployed men and Cho Sam-pyungs ex-henchmen are made to build the outer wall of the Zaha Inn together. In a blink of an eye, twenty days have passed. I hear from Cha Sung-tae that people from the Black Rabbit Union have come. I think off-handedly that the people who are supposed to come have finally arrived. Who came? They always come here for entertainment, but it looks like theyve heard a little bit about whats happened after dropping by the Pear Blossom Pavilion yesterday. The three Cho brothers always attended to them. How many? Theres two of them. I have let them inside the Pear Blossom Room. What should we do now? Lets go see them. Cha Sung-tae asks with a troubled expression. Are you planning to fight? Theyll turn a blind eye to me killing the Cho brothers and have me pay the dues. Theyll also suggest that I join Black Rabbit Union and introduce myself. Thats probably what theyll say. What happens if they do? I dont think were in the position to fight the Black Rabbit Union right now. Itll be hard for you, not me. Are you telling us to all die? Theyll try to kill me first. But I wont die. Where is the Plum Blossom Room? Its on the third floor. But I think its better to try sweet talking with them Ill decide after we meet. And how can they be sweet-talked? I killed all three brothers. Thats true. But considering their nature, theyre probably driven by money. Oh, thats what they want? I am lost in old memories for a moment. Money I am very familiar with the Black Rabbit Union, which often visited the Ilyang Province. Unlike the future I know of, though, the person in charge could have changed. In particular, several familiar faces come to mind once I hear that theyre likely driven by money. Cha Sung-tae bows his head and says. Then, take your time. As I enter the Plum Blossom Room and plop down in an empty seat, the two people looks at me slowly as if they were dissecting me and introduce themselves. Black Rabbit Union Gold Peak Office Affiliate, Jeon Pung. Gold Peak Office, Han Go-wook. Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook introduce themselves in an intimidating manner. It is probably a natural way of speaking because they didnt care about the three Cho brothers. I also knew these two as the Collection Officers(չ) of Black Rabbit Union. A Collection Officer might sound like a job of note, but they are just collectors who went around extorting money. Even though it was nice to see them again after so long, I chose to shut them up with a surge of killing intent. The reason for radiating killing intent is simple. Zaha Inn was originally burned by either their successors or colleagues. We meet now earlier than we did in my past life, and they are still just money collectors. Jeon Pung continues. I heard you killed the Cho brothers. Is it true? Glaring at both of them, I reply. Its true. Why? Explain it to us fully. Hearing the request to explain in detail made my will to desire evaporate. They died trying to kill me, I was simply stronger. Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook senses the strange atmosphere as I continue to glare at them. I continue to speak to the two seriously. The two of you arent judges or the Cho brothers relatives, so why should I tell you more? Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook look at each other. The absurdity of the situation renders the room silent. Then I look at two people. What? Say it. If Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook attacked me right now, I would have no choice but to kill them here. Grave silence. These two are collectors that roam around the Ilyang Prefecture. They have accumulated a lot of wealth with the money they extorted and made enough payments to the Black Rabbit Union to get promoted to middle management. They were promoted due to their administrative contributions rather than their martial arts. In short, they are just money-crazy monkeys. Jeon Pung says. We gave the Cho brothers permission to establish a sect here, but youve killed them. I reply in a sour tone. So? If we report this to the Black Rabbit Union, things will become difficult for you. You are disrupting the activities of the Black Rabbit Union. Do you want us to go back and report? These guys have nothing but money in their heads. If I gave them a bribe, theyd probably even put in a good word to their superiors for me. I understand what you mean. Ill have to bribe you. Lets have a drink first. Miss Son? Miss Son opens the door of the Plum Blossom Room and looks at me. Bring me the shitty Dukuang liquor and some side dishes. Miss Son nods and goes back out. Shitty Dukuang liquor meant third-rate Dukuang liquor. These guys wont pay for the drinks anyway. Its a waste to host them with high-quality ones. As Miss Son disappears back into the hallway without a word, Jeon Pung curiously asks. Is that lady a mute? No. But why isnt she talking? I said Id rip off her mouth if she said the wrong thing, and shes been keeping her mouth shut ever since. I stare at them and point my finger at their mouths. In Kangho, men and women need to watch their mouths. Dont you think so? The two men avoid my gaze for a moment. The two of them, who tried to extort money by intimidation, had no choice but to revise their strategy. Chapter 17 Chapter 17 C A Good Drinkers Threat (2) I will mess with these bastards for a bit with some alcohol. By the way, do you have plenty of time to drink today? We have a lot to discuss, and youll have to put in a lot of good words to the Black Rabbit Union. Han Go-wook smiles. I see youre not as stiff of a guy as I thought! We have plenty of time. We were mainly hosted at the Pear Blossom Brothel, but its not bad here either. I take the initiative. Lets look at the flowers after drinking. Yes. The flower refers to the entertainers. Forget the entertainers, though; I will get them drunk. How much alcohol am I going to make them drink? I am going to make them drink until the point of death. Im a good drinker. I have always been the best at drinking, even without needing to purge the effects of alcohol using internal energy. Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook also turn out to be quite good drinkers. However, as they successfully gulp down alcohol with some poor conversation in the first hour, the two are slowly having a hard time. The third-rate liquor that the two are drinking also doesnt help. Additionally, the fact that I keep making the atmosphere solemn and somber probably makes them unable to digest any of the food they are eating alongside. Jeon Pung shakes his head and says. The Dukuang liquor is pretty strong today. Thats just stating the obvious. Its poor-quality liquor, after all. I laugh as I look at Jeon Pung. Stop being so fussy. Han Go-wook, whose face is turning red, also guffaws and says. Im not exaggerating. Call the ladies over. I heard Chae-hyang and So-Ok are pretty and good at singing and dancing. Bring them here. I shake my hand and say. Itll only ruin the mood. Here, take this. I pour more liquor into their glasses. Only then did their expressions become bitter. They are already very drunk, so they reject the drink. Dont you think weve drunk too much? Ill have to take a break. I laugh out loud again and say. Are you going to die or drink? Choose. Theres no other choice. Jeon Pung widens his eyes and says. Youre drunk, you punk. Zaha, stop drinking. Youre very drunk. Rude bastard. Youve got a bright future, but what a bad drinking habit. Han Go-wook also thumps the table with his hand and says. Thats right. That attitude of yours is the problem. Even when you drink with the Black Rabbit Union executives, youll be killed if you use that tone. Remember that. I answer back while eating a snack. Is the Black Rabbit Union Leader that great? What! Youre crossing the line. I look at the two serious faces with a calm expression. Are you two drunk? As you can see, Im not drunk. If the Black Rabbit Union Leader is such a great man, he could probably save you two right now. Let me make this clear. Ive never lived my life thinking about the consequences. Would you like to die in my hands or drink the liquor? Choose between the two. Miss Son! At the end of the sentence, I raise my voice and summon Miss Son. The door suddenly opens, and Miss Son looks at me for orders. I command. Bring me my sword. Miss Son disappears again after nodding her head. I point my finger at them before they can say anything. Ill give you some time until Miss Son brings the sword. If you dont drink it, Ill take it as you two choosing to start a fight right here. I assume the two of you have better skills than the Cho brothers right? Of course, you do since youre the masters from the Black Rabbit Union. The two of them turn white as I speak. They are people who are not confident of beating me even if they are not drunk, but now they are even more intimidated because they are drunk. I glare at them with sober eyes. Decide now. I hear footsteps. Thud, thud, thud. Shes almost here. They can hear Miss Sons footsteps approaching. The door opens with a swish, and the two quickly down their drink. Krrgh Keurgh Their faces scrunch up in pain. It is understandable since the Dukuang liquor burns their throats as it hits. I put the sword Miss Son brings on the table and pour the liquor again. Good job, Miss Son. Miss Son looks at me with her hands politely folding forward. I point my finger at Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook and say. My precious guests are looking down on me. Still, an errand boy does tend to get ignored. Miss Son was like that, too, I think? Miss Son nods. Maybe its because you believe that the Black Rabbit Union has your back. If I were afraid of the Black Rabbit Union, I wouldnt have taken down the Cho brothers. Dont you think so? Miss Son nods. Thats right. I point again to their glasses. Lets have a drink. Miss Son, tell this to Cha Sung-tae. Gather the warriors of all three pavilions and have them wait downstairs. If our brothers Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook try to run away, kill them on the spot or bring them back to me. Then Ill punish them. Miss Son nods her head knowingly and leaves. Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook are so drunk that they can barely stand. In the meantime, they know very well they will die if they try to attack me. Jeon Pung says. I need to go to the bathroom for a moment. Looking at his expression, I ask. Youre going to throw up? To pee. Seeing how you still have the will to go to the toilet, youre not drunk enough. You sure dont know how to take the lead. Miss Son, bring more alcohol before you go tell the men. Miss Son, who had returned to the hallway, appears again, nods intently with her mouth shut, and closes the door. Perhaps because Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook are drunk, they think Miss Son, who never opened her mouth, is terrifying. Maybe they are scared because they believe Miss Sons mouth might get ripped open one day. The two are in a state of confusion. Miss Son enters the room a while later with two more bottles of third-rate Dukuang liquor. Putting down the alcohol, Miss Son frowns and communicates to the two with hand gestures. [Please, do not, vomit here.] When Miss Son goes back out, I pour a drink and say. Come, lets drink. The two men hurriedly shut themselves up at this remark. They are on the verge of passing out. I also drink the same amount of alcohol as the two. This time, I am forced to drink alone and say to them. Brother Jeon and brother Han. Please put in good words for us in the Black Rabbit Union. The two keep nodding their heads even though it is unclear what they are asked to actually say good words about. Ill be sure to tell them. It wont be a big deal. It doesnt matter if you say anything bad. Its alright for a Union Leader to ignore me. But if things go wrong and we fight, I promise you this one thing. If I catch you two again, Ill make you drink until you die. I wont hit you nor order my men to assassinate you. Keep in mind that the day I catch you, youll have to drink way more than you have today until you die. I know I should be mindful of the Black Rabbit Union Leader, but not you. So lets make our differences clear first before we part. Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook nod enthusiastically. I cheekily poke at the two with my fingers as I say. Now it looks like were on the same boat. So last glass? Oh, thats okay. Han Go-wook says pleadingly. I think we can stop drinking. We had enough. What should I call you from now on? Oh, Ill put it nicely to the superiors. So please stop drinking, owner please. I like the change in their attitudes and tone. All right. Ill try to create a nice sect in Ilyang Prefecture. Ive already decided on a name. Were also building a pretty good place for it. Of course, its at the Zaha Inn. Until then, I dont want the Black Rabbit Union to ask us to pay dues. Is that happening right away? I nod my head. The sect door is not even built, but paying dues already? What kind of bullshit is that? Let us grow quietly. Ill tell the Black Rabbit Union when we meet. This is great news. So, another glass? No, what you said is definitely a good idea. We shouldnt collect payment when there isnt even a main door. Thats not the principle of Kangho. I nod with satisfaction. Well said. Lets live according to Kanghos principles. All people should live by Kanghos principles. Heres what I want you to say about the killing of the Cho brothers. Do tell. Lee Zaha of Ilyang Prefecture killed the three brothel owners because they didnt follow Kanghos principles. Ill be sure to deliver the message word for word. I drink again while the two of them begin to sober up. Now they are frowning every time I drink. A severe headache must be flooding in. I mutter like a drunk. Thats how Ive begun my journey of being a hero. I think youre drunk, so go home now. Ill have another drink as a mouth refresher. Oh, thank you. It was a very pleasant drinking party today. I agree. As the two help each other stand, I say out the door. The guest is leaving. At this time, Miss Son appears, looks at me, and draws a hand gesture around her neck. [Should we kill them?] I shake my head. Why kill them? Theyre valuable guests, so treat them well. Guide them politely to the entrance. Miss Son nods and holds out her hand as if she will guide the two. I suddenly think Miss Son doesnt seem to be in her right mind. Maybe those bothered a lot of young ladies in the pavilion in the past, but I chose to not ask. Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook barely reach the Plum Blossom Brothel entrance with staggering steps. Two people who are carefully going down the stairs stop at the same time. A large number of young men from the Ilyang Prefecture, each wearing different clothing and carrying various weapons, are crowding the bottom of the stairs. Some are squatting, laughing, and playing around, but when the two appear, all look at them with murderous eyes. Cha Sung-tae walks out of the paved passageway and asks toward the Plum Blossom Pavilion entrance from the gap. Did he say to kill them? Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook look back, wondering who he was talking to. Behind them, Miss Son stands scarily, looking like the ghost of an old maiden who forgot how to speak. Chapter 18 Chapter 18 C Man Of Rain And Steel (1) Jeon Pung and Han Go-wood suddenly become very afraid of the Ilyang Prefecture. Everything here is always somewhat ridiculous, but the degree of the ridiculousness is becoming strangely frightening to them. As Miss Son continues to say nothing, Jeon Pung walks forward to try and explain the situation to the crowd. He never said to kill us. Im telling you, go upstairs and ask him. Cha Sung-tae asks Miss Son as if he didnt believe it. But why did Miss Son come out? Miss Son replies with an indifferent expression. I went out to get some fresh air. Keeping my mouth shut makes me feel like dying. Did he order to send them off? Miss Son nods. Yes. Cha Sung-tae finally opens the way and says. Have a safe trip. Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook quietly walk by the terrifyingly quiet men of the Ilyang Prefecture. Cha Sung-taes voice emanates from the back of the crowd. Please come back for another drink. Jeon Pung answers. That wont happen. Cha Sung-tae asks me with worry in his voice. Is it okay for us to let them go? If things are to progress as Cha Sung-tae plans, the Black Rabbit Union will retaliate in a few days. Forces under the Twelve Generals tend to always be in chaos, competing, allying and antagonizing each other. As such, they can not devote too much energy to a village this size. The most fearsome man from the Twelve Generals in the area is Dae Na-chal (_x), and there is no need to draw his attention as of yet. Of course, I dont see a need to explain this to Cha Sung-tae. It will be pretty hard for the drunkards to report back because theyre scared. Theyre too scared of being reprimanded to plot revenge. Those who go around collecting money tend to be good at calculation after all. Hmm, I see. Ilyang Prefecture will be peaceful for now. I will start training again. Where? Anywherecollect and manage all of the former owners fortures, and temporarily take over as the manager of the Low-Down Sect. If you embezzle the public funds, keep in mind that Ill dismiss you from your position. Having a bad feeling about this, Cha Sung-tae asks as if he was digging up information. What happens if I am dismissed? I reply, Dismissal means the death penalty. Cha Sung-tae looks at me with widened eyes. Ill face the death penalty? Was there a law like that? Im the Sect Leader, after all. The law is up to me. . I congratulate Cha Sung-tae on his promotion with a tap on his shoulder. In celebration of becoming the manager, have a drink. I pour third-rate Dukuang liquor for Cha Sung-tae. Cha Sung-tae looks at the ceiling and forces himself to drink. Ugh, its third-rate liquor. Our Manager Cha will do well because he is competent. I can trust you, right, Manager Cha? Ah, yes. Why is your answer insincere? Do you want to be fired? Oh, no. I love the promotion. Ill do my best. I dont want to be left behind. Do well. Ill support you later on. Ilyang Prefectures Best Swordsman Cha Sung-tae. Youll earn a nickname like that soon. Trust me. Cha Sung-tae replies with a dejected voice. I use sabers. Oh, then Ilyang Prefectures Best Fencer. Also, dont worry about the Black Rabbit Union. All the surviving Twelve Generals will kneel before me to get slapped in due time. Of course, thats not happening now, so I need to buy time first. I stand up to cure my hangover. Lets work hard. Yes, take care on your way back. Cha Sung-tae sighs and drinks a glass of the remaining Dukuang liquor. Im going to empty my drink. Suddenly, Cha Sung-tae could feel the bitter taste of Kanghos life in his mouth. Even though he was promoted, a strange sense of grief surges instead. Maybe because his superior is a younger person. Life in Kangho is not easy. Or perhaps its because his superior was previously an errand boy. After leaving the pavilion, I look around the Ilyang Prefectures panorama with little thought in my head. I look around the various shops as I walk down the street. Those who are just living their lives look at me as I pass. Those who have heard the rumours of my killing of the Cho brothers have shocked expressions on their faces. Not that I care about what had happened. These ordinary peoples daily lives are the same, so I keep walking on this path. When I arrive at the Chunyang Restaurant, Geum Chul-yong of the Dragon Head Smithy is inside eating noodles alone. Mister Geum. Geum Chul-yong nods and gestures. Youve already had a drink. I came here since you said you come here often. I didnt go near the pavilions. Its not because Im scared of the people inside. Of course you did. The Chunyang Restaurant owner, Jang Deuk-soo asks. Shall I cook up a bowl? Noodles, please. Got it. Geum Chul-yong puts down a bowl of noodles and says. You killed them all. From Cho Il-seom, Cho Yi-gyul, to Cho Sam-pyung. Lets discuss what we promised before. Sure. Geum Chul-yong asks with some worry. By the way, wont the Black Rabbit Union come after you? If that happens, many young people in this town will die. Do you have a plan? I fully understand Geum Chul-yongs concerns. This guy strongly opposed paying the protection fees in my past life, after all. They wont come right away. Even if they do and a fight breaks out, Im the only one who started it, so the others will be fine. Geum Chul-yong asks, tilting his head. Can you handle it alone? Yes. Geum Chul-yong shakes his head. Its hard to believe a bluff like that. Are you sure you dont have a master or have met a secluded eccentric hermit? Think whatever you want. Anyway, you will find it difficult to believe what I plan to do in the future. How amusing. Still in one day, the errand boy of the Zaha Inn suddenly kills the Cho brothers. Its hard to believe already. Is there anything I can help with? Yes, but I dont know if Mister Geum can do it. Geum Chul-yong replies with a smile. We dont trust each other yet. But at least let me say this. The guys I used to regard as eyesores are now gone, so I can at least do this much without complaining. Thinking about what task I should assign to Geum Chul-yong for the time being, I open my mouth. I think the most difficult thing to make in the world is a weapon that is both light and sharp and can be held in one hand. What do you think, Mister Geum? Thats usually the case for Famous Swords (). Its a bit different for sabers. You need to have a certain amount of weight to complement the technique. Experts who combine physical martial arts and inner cultivation prefer a heavier saber. I did hear that if they get better, they wont even need a weapon. But thats unrealistic. Have you ever made such famous swords or mystical sabers in the Dragon Head Smithy? Of course not. Is there a reason? Geum Chul-yong answers clearly. The best reason is that it doesnt make money. Who would even buy a Famous Sword if it was even made? Only a master that suits the sword will buy it. What if hes an Unorthodox Faction master? Or one of the Twelve Generals heard a rumor and stopped by? I would be doubtful about even getting paid. Its already be a good result if the martial master didnt just kill everyone in the smithy and take the weapon. I see. It is a reasonable thought. But lets say youre lucky enough to get paid. What happens after that? The rival of the person who bought the sword or another Unorthodox faction master will come and threaten me to make a similar sword. Looks like you understand it well. Building a reputation by making good weapons is a sure path to being visited by scary people. The relationships that follow would be more bad than good. When a Famous Sword appears in Kangho, people will kill and die just to possess it. Is that why youre not interested in making famous swords? That sounds like a cowardly excuse. There are many different ways of life. Some people want fame, others value survival. Our Dragon Head Smithy is quite old, but it lasted for a long time because we made and sold solid weapons. Im just trying to make ends meet. Whats the point of fame? Geum Chul-yong asks Jang Deuk-soo with a smile. Deuk-soo, dont you think so? Jang Deuk-soo replies with a nod. Yes, sir. Tapping his finger on the clean bowl of noodles, Geum Chul-yong says. Look at Deuk-soos cooking skills. The store might be shabby, but his cooking is the best in the Ilyang Prefecture. Lets say Deuk-soo comes to work as a chef in a famous Murim Clan. If the clan gets involved in a dispute and gets destroyed, Deuk-soo will also die. Hell die because of his great cooking skills. This is also the same for smithies. I nod to Geum Chul-yongs words. Thank you for the explanation. Anyway, the weapon Im looking for is As I said, Famous Swords Its not a sword. And Im not asking you to make a Famous Sword or a luxury item. Hear me out. Alright. I take a sip of the soup and continue. I dont need a sharp weapon. It doesnt have to be light. Geum Chul-yong answers. Then its not a luxury item. Thats right. Then what do you want me to make? I reply, I give up on sharpness. The weight doesnt matter. The weapon I want is something that will not break, bend, or be destroyed by anything. Geum Chul-yong folds his arms like he is listening, and I continue. For example, I dont care if I have to carry a whole ingot of Thousand Years Iron around. Thats why Im going to give up sharpness and weight. This is not a request to make a luxury item. Even if its coarse and rough, it just needs to stay solid even if a sword tries to cut it. What I want is something similar to the Monkey Kings iron staff[^n1]. Geum Chul-yong furrows his brow while listening to me. Like the Monkey Kings iron staff? Thats correct, in a manner of speaking. I mean, it doesnt matter if its a staff (), a rod (), or a spear (). Even the shape doesnt matter. I just want it to be solid. What are you going to do with it? For training. Training to become a man of steel. I cant bring up the words Turtle of Steel in this atmosphere. Geum Chul-yong, Jang Deuk-soo, and I say nothing for a moment. Geum Chul-yong is immersed in his thoughts, and Jang Deuk-soo remains silent to avoid disturbing him. After a long while, Jang Deuk-soo looks outside and says, Its raining. The three of us watch the pouring rain in silence. The eyes of the rice soup restaurant owner, the man who used to be an errand boy, and the man who touches iron every day are staring at the rain for a long time. At this moment, there is no need for words. I also watch the pouring rain, forgetting about Kangho for a moment. [^n1] : (Monkey King aka Sun Wukong. The Journey to the West (1592) describes the Monkey Kings iron staff. It has the magic power to shrink and grow, control the ocean, astral project and entangle with Monkeys spirit, multiply endlessly, pick locks, and transform into various objects. Chapter 19 Chapter 19 C Man Of Rain And Steel (2) I cant get the weapon that I used in the past. Therefore, I have to find a temporary replacement until then. The key is whether Mister Geum Chul-yong can make it. Truth is, its alright if he cant make it. I hope Geum Chul-yong would not stop at just making weapons with fancy handles but become known as a craftsman who will craft something more valuable. . . . While we watch the rain, Geum Chul-yong tells me, Its not easy. Thats right. Above all, its going to be hard to find such hard iron. As you say, using the Thousand Years Iron will solve everything. But finding Thousand Years Iron is as hard as finding Azurite[^n1] for Kangho warriors. Thats right. But if its difficult, we can go take a look at the Black Market (). The Black Market is a generic term for where Unorthodox faction masters purchase their weapons. The place has both auction houses and forges where weapons are made. Geum Chul-yongs suggestion to go to the black market doesnt mean that he will look for ready-made weapons, but rather to buy steel. And I remain silent. It is Geum Chul-yongs responsibility, who has run a smithy for a long time, to make weapons. It is not my part to interfere. However, if Geum Chul-yong can produce a weapon I can be satisfied with, it will be both Geum Chul-yongs fate and my boon. Until now, masters of Kangho seem to be afraid of making their own weapons, but I will break this taboo. Im protecting the Dragon Head Smithy if anything happens anyway. Geum Chul-yong asks me. Do you have a name in mind? I answer the name of the weapon immediately. Its name will be the Crazy Blade(). It is the blade() of a madman(). Geum Chul-yong repeats the meaning of the sword. A crazy blade? You said the shape wont matter. I assume youll be using the sword to tear your opponents apart? Thats about right. Is it alright to make it into a straight blade (ֱ) then? If you dont want to use specific sword techniques, straight blades are the best. A straight blade refers to a straight knife with no curves or bends on its edge. Its even better if its straight (ֱ). Men always go straight (ֱM). At my random nonsense, Geum Chul-yong glares at me for a moment and says. Ill do that then. Ill make it into a straight blade. The name will be the Crazy Blade, and it will contain the unbreakable faith of Geum Chul-yong. I smile softly. All right. Jang Deuk-soo, who is listening quietly, adds. Crazy Blade thats a terrifying name. Imagining the weapon he has to make, Geum Chul-yong asks. Whens the deadline? The deadline is set by the craftsman (), not the client. Will the craftsman make a finished product faster if I whine? Time is not a problem. In fact, Geum Chul-yong has never been a true craftsman, but I will treat him like one. Geum Chul-yong strokes his chin. Thats true. Its hard to predict when we can get the material. Someday I will ask you to come and just give the Crazy Blade to you. Thats how it will be. Yes. Geum Chul-yong points to an empty bowl and says. You should pay for the noodles today. Thanks for the meal. You want a broke errand boy to pay for your meal? Geum Chul-yong looks at me with an incredulous expression. Youre not an errand boy. I dont know when things started becoming like this but Im being treated to a meal by the Low-Down Sect Leader. Jang Deuk-soo, who is cleaning bowls, asks curiously. Low-Down Sect? Whats that? Did Zaha create it? I answer. Brother Deuk-soo. What? Youre part of the Low-Down Sect, too. Jang Deuk-soo replies with a look of surprise. Huh? Me? Since when? Everyone I know is already a part of it. Aha. So, you should always offer free noodles to your leader. Got it? Jang Deuk-soo glares at me like a tiger and says with a stern face. But youre a customer. What are you talking about? Anyways, this kind of trick doesnt work with men of the Ilyang Prefecture. I have no choice but to take money out of my pouch and place it on the table. Suddenly, my eyes turn to the outside of the Chunyang Restaurant. Both Geum Chul-yong and Jang Deuk-soo follow my gaze and look outside. Several men are standing in the rain. Geum Chul-yong says worriedly. Well, an uninvited guest in the rain. Its your enemy, right? Ive never committed a crime nor have I been in the pavilions after all. Jang Deuk-soos eyes become humble at once. I want to help, but I cant fight. I cant run my business if I hurt my hand. At the same time, Jang Deuk-soo eyes his sharpest kitchen knife. The restaurant owner also plans to fight if they storm into the Chunyang Restaurant. I shake my head and say. Is there any indication that theyve come for me? At this time, outside, they speak into the Chunyang Restaurant. Lee Zaha I know youre in there. Come out. Jang Deuk-soo nods. Leader, theyre calling for you. Jang Deuk-soo upgrades me directly from customer to leader and speaks to me seriously as I look at him. Be careful. Geum Chul-yong also sincerely worries for me. Be careful, Leader. My back hurts when it rains its an old condition. I stand up, loosening the whip from my waist. Leave it to me. Its raining outside, you assholes. Geum Chul-yong says to Jang Deuk-soo when I leave the store. You assholes sound like hes referring to us. Jang Deuk-soo shakes his head. No, it doesnt. It doesnt? Yes. Why? Im older than him. Zaha is not that kind of guy. The one stronger in martial arts is the elder in Kangho. Then are you also Zahas younger brother? Deuk-soo, are you going to rank me by skill when were more than ten years apart? Lets move on. Yes. I go out and look at the pest standing in the rain. One person out of the group has the aura of a master. He is a bald man with a cape covering his whole body and his eyes barely visible. Sure enough, the bald man wearing a cape opens his mouth. Is it this scrawny bastard? Another man replies. Yes. There is savageness in the eyes of the caped man looking at me. They say you killed the Black Hurricane Castles Neung Ji-seok. Is that true? I tilt my head. I think Ive heard the name Neung Ji-seok before. Of course, I know it is the guy who died in my hands near Zaha Inn. When I look at the other dogs standing in the crowd, quite a few familiar faces are there. It is a group of warriors from the Cherry Blossom Brothel. That means they are Cho Sam-pyungs other minions. I ask the man in a cape. Is our baldy standing in the rain Neung Ji-seoks senior? Im Wi Sun-woo of the Black Hurricane Castle. As soon as I hear the name Wi Sun-woo, a nickname crosses my mind. If its Wi Sun-woo, then its the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade. What kind of fate is this? During my past days as the Low-Down Sect Leader, two of the guys I killed were the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade. The two martial artists, Wi Sun-woo and Gu Yang-su are known as the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade. Only now do I discover they are from the Black Hurricane Castle. They might have left Black Hurricane Castle since the organization isnt united in the future. In another time, the men who exterminated forty to fifty masters of both the Unorthodox and Orthodox factions during a dispute over a treasure map were these two. Of course, the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade died by my hands, and the treasure pointed in the treasure map also became mine. Wi Sun-woo takes off his cape and reveals his face. This man who once died by my hands looks distinctly younger and is staring at me. Of course, it does not rule out the possibility that Gu Yang-su is hidden nearby. Holding a whip in my hand, I say. Bastards from the Cherry Blossom Brothel, you better step back if you dont want to die. Wi Sun-woo is preoccupied with the idea of killing me, so he doesnt even pay attention to the scum. The Cherry Blossom Brothel pests slip away from the scene and move to a far distance, though still visible as they are curious about the fights outcome. Wi Sun-woo asks. Rookie, why did you kill Neung Ji-seok? I answer briefly. He burnt down my house. Wi Sun-woo grins. Thats a good reason. Though youll die for it. Has everything always gone your way? Nothing will go as you wish, not even your hair. A vein rises on Wi Sun-woos forehead. I better rip your mouth off first. At this moment, the sky flashes. As soon as Wi Sun-woo and I clearly see each others faces, we smile simultaneously. Wi Sun-woo gets into a fighting stance, holding two ringed blades. He is stronger when Gu Yang-su joins him than when he fights alone. Its a pity for the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed blade, but I know their techniques well. I have had many fights with these two and the Murim Alliance, and I am more likely to recognize martial masters the better their skills are. Now, I have the power of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique made from the Heavenly Pearl and the experience of a past life. Because of that, this is just a rainy days game. Wi Sun-woo, youre cutting your life short. If you didnt meet me, you couldve lived out your life. What a shame. It is a reference to his past lifes fate. Wi Sun-woo snorts at my words with no understanding of what I mean. Crazy bastard. Youre sharp. In the meantime, it started raining heavier. Shaaaaaaaaa! Wi Sun-woo comes running furiously, his steps bouncing off the rainwater. As my whip snaps, Wi Sun-woo avoids the whip by sliding and narrows the distance instantly as he wields the two ringed swords. Its a movement made to kill a whip-wielding opponent. Of course, I didnt intend to make the distance wider. On the contrary, I secure a distance that a whip could hit as I ship sideways. For a moment, we move in circles as we continue our duels prelude. We are soaked by the rain as we decide who will take the lead. While moving, I step on the water puddles and deliberately splash them into Wi Sun-woos incoming path. In reply, Wi Sun-woo swings his ringed sword and blocks the rainwater with the blades flat surface. My strategy in this skirmish is to maintain a sense of tension with Wi Sun-woo. That way, there will be a high probability that Gu Yang-su, waiting nearby, will appear. For this reason, I deliberately focus on defence. In the meantime, the sky flashes thrice in a row, and thunder rings in the distant sky. I hear a clapping sound from somewhere, and suddenly Cha Sung-tae arrives with a sword. I warn Cha Sung-tae as soon as he arrives. Wait. Hes a master. Yes. Cha Sung-tae briefly replies and removes the eye patch he had been wearing. He couldnt see well because of the heavy rain. I manage to give Cha Sung-tae more info as I prevent Wi Sun-woos attack. Theres another one nearby. Be careful. Cha Sung-tae is startled and looks around in the pouring rain, his grasp on his sword becoming stronger. All right. Cha Sung-tae says a moment later. There are only the Cherry Blossom Brothel bastards, though? Before Cha Sung-tae can finish his sentence, a black object swirls from the pouring rain. What? Then, as the two blades unfold from side to side, Gu Yang-su, with a dark complexion, appears and joins Wi Sun-woo. Cha Sung-tae looks very surprised and spits out curse words. Shit, there really is a second one. I laugh as soon as I see Gu Yang-sus face for the first time in a while. Hehe. There is no need to save strength since both members of the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade are present. I immediately cover the whip with the Fire Chickens energy. The whip that is moving in the rain like a snake becomes red. Gu Yang-su spits out a brief warning. Senior Brother, he is a hidden master. Be careful. Yes. Wi Sun-woo and Gu Yang-su surge from side to side and wield their double swords to entrap me from both sides. I check my strength and move to a formation of my choosing to prolong the fight. Since a whip returns to its master slower than other weapons, the response made by the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed blade is appropriate. One would be planning to entangle my whip with both blades while the other launches a surprise attack from behind. As I read the intentions of the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade, a Water Fight(ˮБ) breaks out. [^n1] : A precious gemstone Chapter 20 Chapter 20 C This Is Why My Name Is Zaha Despite his obvious fear of the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade, Cha Sung-tae stays at the front and murmurs at his opponent. Hey, baldy. Watch your back. Im joining in. Do you know what my nickname is? Youll know once I stab you. You dont have to know now. Cmon, bring it on. Cha Sung-tae takes several steps as if trying to rush in with the sabre and stops. It is obviously a bluff, but the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade cant be sure of that. I smirk while swinging my whip as I find Cha Sung-taes behaviour funny. Crazy bastard. Cha Sung-tae also keeps sneering while swinging the sabre, continuing to threaten the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade. Thats right, Im joining in. Lets play fair and square. Here we go. Baldy, Im going to split you open first. Its a surprise attack! Wi Sun-woo, who wields two ringed blades, swings his weapon back as I retrieve my whip. Whoosh! The Blade Wind (L) cuts through the rain and rushes towards Cha Sung-tae. Cha Sung-tae yells in surprise and swings his sabre. His sabre makes contact with the Blade Wind with a loud sound, causing him to fall and roll on the ground several times before coming to a stop. Cha Sung-tae did not move as if the attack knocked him out. Cha Sung-tae is, of course, just pretending to faint as part of his scheme, the plan being to launch a surprise attack depending on how the fight progresses. As I am fending off the attack of Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade, I tell Cha Sung-tae. Im not buying it, so get up. Cha Sung-tae raises his head in a hurry. Oh, really? Wi Sun-woo isnt putting much effort into dealing with me, though there is a warning in his moves that he will kill me even if he has to go that extra length. Still, Cha Sung-taes actions manage to distract the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade. The rain I had watched with Geum Chul-yong and Jang Deuk-soo was quite picturesque. Geum Chul-yong must have been watching the rain while thinking about what kind of weapon to present to me. Jang Deuk-soo also watched the rain while listening to our conversation. I look at the rain, thinking about a life progressing differently from my past life. Maybe it feels sentimental because the three of us watched the rain together. But the rain now is different. The rain we watched peacefully from the restaurant has become part of the fight where the enemy must be killed. Someone will die under this rain. Of course, it wont be me. The Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade were the ones who had died by my hands in an alternate future where they werent rookies like they are now. Anyways Why is it so fun to fight? Once again, the lightning briefly cuts through the sky, highlighting our three faces expressions. Wi Sun-woo and Gu Yang-su see that I am still smiling. Gu Yang-su says. Start from the whip. That short sentence suggests taking action to deprive me of my whip, either by cutting or snatching it away. In response, Wi Sun-woo says. Sword at his waist, too. In the ensuing fight, Gu Yang-su grabs my whip with his ringed blades, and Wi Sun-woo rushes in and cuts the middle point of the whip using his internal energy. The whip would not have been cut if it was just a fight of internal energies. Still, since there are two opponents, I retreat momentarily. Somehow, the whip has become rather short. After a brief lull, the confrontation continues I show Geum Chul-yong the broken whip and say. An unbreakable belief this isnt it. Geum Chul-yong must hear me clearly from where he is watching inside the Chunyang Restaurant. If the weapons of the Dragon Head Smithy are so easily broken, it would be expected for Geum Chul-yong to be seething. As soon as I throw the shortened whip, I pull out the Black Dragon Sword from my waist. As the sword is drawn, my two opponents stop as if the tables have turned. Youre in big trouble now. Im more skilled at using a sword than a whip. Cha Sung-tae interrupts me. Then you shouldve used the sword. Why Its my last piece of conscience. Cha Sung-tae swallows the curse words back into his mouth. What is he up to? The truth is, my thoughts are on the harsh fate of killing again the men who died by my hands in that different future. Now that it has come to this, I have no choice. I have to kill them again. Contemplation done. When I hold the sword upright, the Fire Chicken energy covers the blade (). The sword is tinged with red. Water droplets evaporate with a sizzling sound every time raindrops fall upon my blade. Both Cha Sung-tae and the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade look at my blade in surprise. To be honest, this was a little troubling for me as this level of martial arts is clearly too advanced for someone who was just a simple errand boy not too long ago. I need to come up with a reason. Can you see it? My sword Cha Sung-tae responds in a rapt tone. I see it. It is glowing red I nod and come up with an excuse. This is why my name is Zaha (ϼ, purple sunset). In truth, my sword is shining like the glow of the sunset. Raindrops that hit the blade change into a strange colour of smoke, dispersing like hazy clouds in front of the setting sun. Even though this is all a lie, I briefly wonder if this is the reason why my name is Zaha. Anyways, Zaha of the Zaha Inn, thats me. Its time to die you fucking morons. My curse signals the restart of the conflict. The Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade and I rush at each other. Their ringed blades are a type of large knife weapon () and have a wide range of trajectories in their swings. Saying that, this two-on-one fight does not just put me at a disadvantage. Because of their wide range, the blade they wield can also hurt each other depending on my movements. This is possible because I have a good grasp of their technique. Wielding my crimson-dyed sword, I launch a sword wind attack containing the energy of the Fire Chicken in their faces. Sword Wind is basically just wind, but it contains heat transferred from inner energy. When the concentration of the energy is further compressed, Sword Wind (L) becomes Sword Energy (). Although Sword Energy is a higher ranking skill, there are times when Sword Wind is useful. Sword Energy, which uses more internal energy, can be the more practical choice depending on the situation. In situations where its necessary to conserve internal strength, sometimes the accurate answer is to just wield a sword without using either attack. Of course, there are more advanced types of attacks above Sword Energy, but those specialities vary depending on the faction. For that reason, many decisions have to be made during a fight. Since its also a factor in victory or defeat, it is essential to build both practical skills and martial arts. I plan with this in mind while blocking the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blades twin pair of swords. At this time, Cha Sung-tae takes a stance as if he is about to pull out a knife again. He only raises his killing intent with his mouth firmly shut this time. He is going to make a surprise attack. The Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade have no awareness of Cha Sung-taes skills. With a twisted face, Wi Sun-woo takes a step back and swings the ringed blade in his right hand toward Cha Sung-tae. I immediately notice why Wi Sun-woo is moving back as I block Gu Yang-sus blade. I also move slightly and swing my sword. As soon as Wi Sun-woos shoots a Sword Wind toward Cha Sung-tae, I swing my sword out simultaneously and cut off his forearm. Pa-chak! Cha Sung-tae rushes fiercely through the rain puddles with his sabre held low in his right hand. The momentum shows that he plans to finish off Wi Sun-woo, so I turn to face Gu Yang-su one-on-one. Cha Sung-tae deals with Wi Sun-woo, who only has one arm left. I dodge Gu Yang-sus twin blades and counter with a Flicking Technique (ָ) by injecting the Fire Chickens Energy (a). The moment Gu Yang-soo uses his blade to evade Fire Chicken Flicking Technique, both he and his weapons shake from the impact. I relax my arms as I become engrossed in only stabbing. I avoid Gu Yang-sus twin swords and stab at him, aiming at his neck and arms. The Phantom Sword is a technique that exists across multiple factions and has the principle of leaving weak Qi () around the sword like an afterimage. When these afterimages increase in number from three to four, warriors in Kangho usually refer to it as the Three Phantom Swords (Ӱ). Naturally, the number increases as the speed of the blade goes up. In other words, the Phantom Sword is a technique often seen multiple times across all the martial factions. I use my Phantom Sword to create nine afterimages in the rain, three at a time with each movement, as I attack Gu Yang-su with the Black Dragon Sword and finish him off with a stab through the neck. Plorkk! The twin blades, which arrive half a beat slower than my sword, stop near my chest and fall to the ground. When I pull out my bloody sword, the sky thunders loudly. As I turn my head, I see Cha Sung-tae piercing through Wi Sun-woos limp body with his sabre. A strange feeling flashes through me as I see that Wi Sun-woo had been killed by Cha Sung-tae rather than by my own sword. This moment makes me see clearly that both mine and Cha Sung-taes fates have changed. Until this moment, I had thought that both of the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed blade would die at my hands. Cha Sung-tae points at the body with his sabre and asks. Who were these guys? Theyre bastards from the Black Hurrican Castle. The Black Hurricane Castle Cha Sung-tae sighs and barks at the scum spectating the fight. Why did you bring these guys here? Do you want to die? As Cha Sung-tae approaches them with his bloody sabre, the scum steps back. One guy tries to make an excuse as if he feels the accusation is unfair. We were threatened, so we brought them here. Otherwise, wed all be dead. Cha Sung-tae looks back at me. Youre going to take these guys and run the Low-Down Sect? Do you think itll work? I snort at Cha Sung-taes words. Why are you asking me that? What? Youre the leader. You take care of those who need rehabilitation. Youre the leader of the Rebirth Sect, Sung-tae, you punk. Why dont you educate the guys down there? Do you want to die? Cha Sung-tae looks at me with his mouth agape. Oh Cha Sung-tae shakes his head several times before bowing it slightly and saying. Ill sort this out. Lets talk. Mister Geum is inside the restaurant. Good work. Yes. I enter the Chunyang Restaurant while Cha Sung-tae orders the scum to clean up the bodies. Jang Deuk-soo and Geum Chul-yong, who are still watching comfortably from the store, greet me. Welcome back. You did a great job. Geum Chul-yong raises his thumb. Leader, youre extremely skilled, but it was great that you hid your skills and lured out his accomplice. How did you know there was another person nearby? I tilt my head. Why is he so observant? I answer roughly. I just had a hunch. How fascinating. My clothes are too wet. As the water drips on the restaurant floor, I tell Geum Chul-yong. Mister Geum. Yes? Ill be waiting for the Crazy Blade. If anything happens in the meantime, please reach out to Cha Sung-tae or me. Geum Chul-yong nods and says. Okay. I look down at my wet state and bid the two goodbye. Im going to go wash the blood off. Jang Deuk-soo tilts his head when he hears my words because there is no blood on me. As I return to the Plum Blossom Pavilion, I suddenly remember the treasure map that the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade had once wanted. I dont have the treasure map right now, but I havent forgotten the location on the map. However, the place is quite far from here, so I have to think more about the timing of departure and collection. The maps discovery is still far in the future, so it doesnt matter much when I decide to go. Now the number of enemies I need to deal with immediately has increased by one, with both the Black Rabbit Union and the Black Hurricane Castle now coming, but this is not a big deal. This barely qualifies as a warm-up compared to my suffering under the Demon Cults Heaven and Earth Net. I open the main gate of the Plum Blossom Pavilion and then turn around to look at the panoramic view of the Ilyang Prefecture as it is being covered by the pouring rain. Not only me, but it feels like the whole of Ilyang Prefecture was soaked in the rain. It is late at night, so the number of lights on the streets is reduced. It is an indifferent scene as if the streets have no interest in the death of two Kangho martial artists who had wielded twin-ringed blades. After all, martial artists of Kangho simply repeat the cycle of killing each other over and over again. Just another common occurrence on a rainy day I stand in front of the Plum Blossom Pavilions front door for a moment longer and watch the pouring rain. After coming back stronger, everything looks beautiful. I suddenly have a thought. Am I half-crazy like I was in my past life? Or did I turn back to normal after going insane? The answer eludes me. Chapter 21 Chapter 21 C So Cold Soaking in a hot tub while listening to the sound of rain is like heaven. The sound of the heavy rain outside dies down when I close my eyes. After some time, the hallway grows quieter than before, and the noise from downstairs subsides. . According to my five senses and experience, I sense something is amiss in the unusual silence. Is it an ambush? If it is, I think I might have to attack the attackers unarmed and naked. It is unusual for the pavilion to be so quiet in the first place. However, I wait in the bathtub without ordering anyone to bring in a weapon. I wonder if anyone wants to pay me a visit after the death of the Cho Brothers and the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade. It wont be the Black Rabbit Union. Their underlings are scared, so theres no way a master would be on their way to find me right now. If not them, then it must be someone from the Ilyang Prefecture. I recall the second-in-commands who have skills in fighting in the Plum Blossom Pavilion and the Pear Blossom Pavilion. Im not a prophet, so I cant know for sure. But a conclusion can be made since I know what kind of people are in the Ilyang Prefecture from my experiences in the future. This is all just speculation, so I am still dubious, but I hear the sound of footsteps in the hallway, and the door of the bath busts open. I look at the two intruders and say. Is it you guys? Of course, I know these faces well since theyre from around here. Song U-geum of the Pear Blossom Pavilion and Yoo Jun-gu of the Plum Blossom Pavilion. Alongside Cha Sung-tae, these three are the pavilion supervisors, and managers called the Tae Geum Gu by their subordinates. Upon confirming I am still unclothed in the bathtub, Song U-geum and Yoo Jun-gu rush in with swords without saying a word. At the moment, I think. Its only natural to keep killing in Kangho. Im currently naked and unarmed... But theres a bathtub. I gather the Fire Chicken Energy in my hand, rip a board out of the bathtub with two hands, and wield them like wooden swords. At the same time, the pressure of the energy explodes, causing water and the broken bathtub remnants to explode at Song U-geum and Yoo Jun-gu. The wreckage and water of the bathtub flood toward Song Wu-geum and Yoo Jun-gu from all directions. Then I swing the wooden sword ripped out of the bathtub while still naked. They are just as skilled as Cha Sung-tae. Which means they are not even a threat. However, they have weapons. When Song U-geums sword cut the wooden sword I wielded, I hit his abdomen with my left foot. Bang! Swinging my head to avoid Yoo Jun-gus sword, I strike his hand with the wooden sword. Having been kicked in the stomach, Song U-geum rushes at me with a red face, and Yoo Jun-gu also attacks me as if hell fight with his fists after letting go of his sword. I keep my distance. As I step back to maintain distance, I inject the Fire Chicken Energy into my temporary wooden sword and swing it indiscriminately. The wooden sword makes a loud sound as I slash against Song U-geum and Yoo Jun-gus faces. The wooden board is too broad to be called a sword, so I slash at both men wildly. In an instant, six or seven attacks leave gashes on their faces, upper bodies, and arms. Each attack leaves blood splattering all around the bath area. I hope their corpse will serve as a warning to others. I swing the board until the two are left as bloodied corpses and throw the remaining pieces away. At the same time, the two dead bastards collapse from their standing position onto the floor. Red blood stains the room as trails of it make their way into the drainage pipes and the sewers below. Song U-geum and Yoo Jun-gu die in a bath of their own blood. I pick up a blade that fell on the floor and walk out of the bath into the hall naked. Sung-tae. Did these guys plot this with Sung-tae? It occurs to me that he might not have been in on the plot. Hes either dead or being beaten up by these bastards underlings. I walk down the hall without remembering to dress, and my state of nakedness causes one of the women walking in the hallway to scream and cover her mouth. I speak calmly to the startled maiden Bring me some clothes. Fast. Yes. I look around as I pass through several rooms and say. Where is Miss Son? Miss Son. From behind me, the maiden returns with some pants she found in her hands. I only found pants. Please wear this first I put on the pants that she brings and asks. Did you see Miss Son? No. Did she notice early and went to hide? There was nothing Miss Son could do, but she didnt have to run away. Maybe Miss Son told them I was taking a leisure bath, so I would find her first. Looking at the shaking maiden, I smile. Miss Son is such a cold person. Isnt she? Ah, yeah, thats right. Still topless, I quickly descend the stairs with the blade in my hand. If Cha Sung-tae is dead, I will find all the people who killed Cha Sung-tae and kill them. If hes still alive, then Ill go help him. Song U-geum and Yoo Jun-gu must have chosen to make an ambush. They sent their underlings to Cha Sung-tae, who was working for me, and those two came at me because they were the captains. I only realize that I am not wearing shoes as I walk down the wet road Meanwhile, the pants also keep slipping off. I stop and place the knife on the ground to adjust the pants to prevent it from dropping. Cha Sung-tae. I mutter his name as I use my inner cultivation to listen to the air. Faintly, I hear the sounds of someone shouting curses from the direction of the Zaha Inn. With a blade in my hand, I utilize my movement skills and dash toward the Zaha Inn. Cha Sung-tae finds himself cornered against an alley wall, and blood runs down his face. The dagger in his left hand was being held against a mans neck, and his right hand held a sword used to keep the people cornering him at bay. Cha Sung-tae speaks as if he is chewing something in his mouth. Did Jun-gu send you? You morons More than ten people are surrounding Cha Sung-tae. While looking like he had been run over by a bull, Cha Sung-tae had still managed to kill seven of his pursuers while running towards the Zaha Inn. Surprisingly, he is still alive despite being outnumbered one to seventeen. Naturally, Cha Sung-tae wouldnt be suffering like this if his underlings had also been present. Since he was ambushed while disposing of the bodies of the Twin Ghosts of the Ringed Blade with the Pear Blossom Pavilion scum, they decided to turn their backs on him and join in the attack. Thats how much of a mess this town is. This is Cha Sung-taes mistake because he should have been careful enough. Cha Sung-tae always thought he was stronger than Song U-geum and Yoo Jun-gu. Their underlings and their fighting skills were all so-so. However, Cha Sung-tae lacks experience dealing with so many enemies alone. Sensing these guys have no intention of stepping down, Cha Sung-tae stabs the dagger into the neck of the man he was holding, swings the sword, and moves forward. He is bleeding, so he has no chance of surviving unless all ten people are killed. Cha Sung-tae attacks his enemies limbs and faces at random. While his arm is cut, he stabs the dagger in the opponents face, and when he flies back after being kicked, he rolls on the ground and swings the sword at every ankle he can see. A scream is heard again. Cha Sung-tae stands up with a face covered with rain, blood, and mud and yells loudly. Bring it on, you bastards! In any case, attitude is essential in fighting lowlifes. These guys are not leaders such as Song U-geum or Yoo Jun-gu, so the momentum in this fight is critical. At this time, a man with no sense of comradeship pushes his injured colleague toward Cha Sung-tae and barks out an order. Knock him out in one go. When Cha Sung-taes knife pierces the heart of the man pushed towards him, the rest of the group rushes in simultaneously with long swords in hand. Shit. Cha Sung-tae is not a fool either. He backtracks and retreats. He steels himself to fight when the situation reverses itself yet again. Then, he hears a puk! sound. He cant see well in the dark, but with another puk! sound, one of the men sinks to the floor. Then he heard a pu-ak! sound, and a human head shoots into the air. Only then did Cha Sung-tae hear the damn errand boys voice. Rebirth Union Leader, youre alive? Wow, thats amazing. Cha Sung-tae roars. Save me! Cha Sung-tae is very excited to see him, yet a whisper trails at the end of his sentence. you bastard. I feel nothing for Song U-geum and Yoo Jun-gus underlings. But I cant watch them trying to kill the Rebirth Union Leader. With the idea of taking them out quickly, I cut or stab parts of their body with my blade and kill them immediately. When only three or four people are left, Cha Sung-tae joins in, shouting like a madman. When I pull out the sword, Cha Sung-tae runs like a madman and enacts his own revenge. With the sound of blows and Cha Sung-taes swears, we finish them off together. . . . The body count around the Zaha Inn is constantly increasing. Cha Sung-tae, who finishes off all of the scum, collapses and drops the sword on the floor, heaving loudly. Gasp Gasp..Gasp Haa Haa. Then Cha Sung-tae looks up at me. I hold my pants in my left hand to keep them from dropping. I am also barefoot and topless. Anyone could tell that I had just run out of the bath. Cha Sung-tae looks at me like this for a while and asks. Did you take a bath? I nod and look up at the sky. The heavy rain is slowing down, but it is still drizzling. Im gonna take a bath many times today. Cha Sung-tae finally relaxes and laughs in despair. Ha I hold out my knife and lift up Cha Sung-taes chin. Sung-tae. Yes. I look down at Cha Sung-tae and ask. Do you still think Im a joke? For being an errand boy? Cha Sung-tae looks at me with surprise because he has done nothing wrong. But I need to educate Cha Sung-tae a little bit more clearly. To prevent the incident today from repeating itself. Chapter 22 Chapter 22 C Hang The Red Lanterns Looking at the sword on his chin, Cha Sung-tae answers. Whats with you? I have nothing to do with these guys. They were always hanging out with U-geum and Jun-gu. You saw me kill them with my own hands. I didnt know this would happen so suddenly. I answer. Think it over. If youre not at fault. Cha Sung-tae contemplates the situation with a serious look before replying in a subdued tone. I dont think so Wait, there is something. What is it? Cha Sung-tae says honestly. That errand boy bastard suddenly became stronger. Be careful. I think I said this a few times to them. I was really careful, but I dont think these guys took it very seriously. Come to think of it, it was my fault. Cha Sung-tae seems well aware. I ask. Whats your plan? I dont think this will stop until I kill half of the guys in the Ilyang Prefecture at this rate. Do you want me to do that? You dont have to. What should I do? Please tell me. I answer. I told you before. Dont speak informally to me. Not just me, but the others as well. All the Ilyang Prefecture men know me as the errand boy of the Zaha Inn. I will build the Low-Down Sect in the future, but if you keep this up, we wont be able to make it, and Ill have to keep killing. I dont mind. Theres no way Ill get killed. But you kept regarding me so lightly that the ones who didnt have to die ended up dying. Youre right. I admit it. From now on, let me set the tone. Im terrifying and those whove seen me all died anyway. Thats true. Exaggerate it. Be more dramatic. Make me even more evil than people think, that Im a relentless, crazy bastard. Stronger than anyone even suspects. And make that the truth. Yes, sir. You should be scared of me first so your underlings would follow. In the present, and in the future. Perfectly understood. I dont have to demonstrate all my skills in this kind of town. If you dont want to live your whole life cleaning up dead bodies, do a good job. Yes. I said do a good job this time. I will do a good job. I finally retrieve the sword and tell Cha Sung-tae. Give me some outerwear. Cha Sung-taes veins pop up on his forehead. What? At the moment, Cha Sung-tae, who thought this mistake had caused this situation, hurriedly adds. Ah, alright. Ill take my robe off for you. I keep saying the wrong things. Cha Seong-tae slaps himself in the face and hands me his robe. I look at the bodies as I put on his robe. Theyre all amateurs. Who knows what will happen in a fight. Cha Sung-tae asks. What happened to U-geum and Jun-gu? They had some business in the afterworld and left in a hurry. Ah, I see. Theyre busy. Cha Sung-tae is mourning the death of his acquaintances. U-geum and Jun-gu once told me to gather a group to kill the three Cho brothers. If I hadnt stopped them, they would have died. Really? Yes, they started this crap without telling me this time. This is proof that I wasnt close to them. Good for you. We arrive at the Plum Blossom Pavilion moments later, and Cha Sung-tae says. Go in and take a rest. Ill send people to dispose of the bodies. At this rate, a plague will spread with so many bodies around. It wont. I go up the stairs and look around the messy Plum Blossom Pavilion. Fights kept breaking out, and hence the customers had stopped visiting. Its partly my fault, too. However, it is a pain I have to go through. All the people cleaning or dealing with the bodies pause and look at me as I walk up the stairs. I stop at the railing and speak to them. What? Nothing. Tell everyone you know. Youll end up like this if you come at me again. At least dont even try to in Ilyang Prefecture. As you can see, this is the result. Close the pavilion today. Dont even sell alcohol. We should mourn in peace. Got it, sir. The Plum Blossom Pavilion falls silent. I wash up again before entering Cho Yi-gyuls room. I still think of this as his room as I plan to return to the Zaha Inn once it is restored anyway. Sitting in a lotus position with my eyes closed, I hear a song from somewhere within the Plum Blossom Pavilion. The voice is lovely. Ive heard this song before, and the voice belongs to Chae-hyang. The title of the song is Green, Green, Grass on the Riverbank ([[ϲ). A beautiful woman sitting in a pavilion applies red powder and holds her pale hand by the moonlit window. The woman used to be an entertainer and is now the wife of a wanderer The song portrays the difficulty of sleeping in an empty bed alone because even the wanderer has not returned. In the lyrics, there are expressions such as Green ([[), Lush (dd), Full (ӯӯ), Bright (), Beautiful (), Delicate (ww).1 These are not easy concepts to communicate. With the right tone, a womans subtle characteristics are expressed vividly, allowing the listener to imagine her curves and private places. The song also communicates the atmosphere of the night, the delicate tension, and a womans subtle seduction. Of course, this is not the only interpretation. However, the phrase an empty bed is hard to bear alone (մy) is the highlight of the song. Suppose it is difficult to sleep on an empty bed alone after singing Green, Lush, Full, Bright, Beautiful, Delicate in a beautiful voice. Whats the meaning behind that? This song of temptation is known in Kangho as a Hypnotizing Technique (Իg). Pretty monkeys belonging to the Unorthodox factions often sing Green, Green, Grass on the Riverbank after putting on makeup and rob innocent men from the Orthodox factions. Theyd be lucky if they were only robbed, but they are also almost always killed. Either way, I focus on my breathing again, knowing that honey traps dont work on me. And by my standards, Chae-hyang is not a beauty. Only a lady with a kind heart can be considered beautiful. I thought the singing would end with just Green, Green, Grass on the Riverbank, but it continues. After becoming distracted, I open my eyes and yell. Shut up! The singing stops as the shout mixed with internal energy rings throughout the Plum Blossom Pavilion. I order everyone in the building with the same voice so that everyone hears me. Take down the blue lanterns and hang the red lanterns. Cha Sung-tae, who just got back after relaying orders, shouts again when he hears me from the first floor. Take down the blue lanterns and hang the red lanterns. He gives the order again. Entertainers can stay, but women who worked as prostitutes (潋D) will have to find another job. The Plum Blossom Pavilion, Pear Blossom Pavilion, and Cherry Blossom Pavilion will operate as Red Pavilions (t). If any guests come in looking for prostitutes, report to me. Cha Sung-tae only repeats the last part. We will operate as a red pavilion from now on. Although the meaning differs from region to region, red pavilions typically adhere strictly to the principle of Sell Art, Not Body (uˇu). I may be a crazy bastard, but Ive never been crazy about money. There is no need for women to work as prostitutes (潼) in my places. Sung-tae. Cha Sung-tae, who answers briefly from downstairs, runs up the stairs. Cha Sung-tae, who reaches the top in four steps, says in front of the door. Did you call for me? What about the bodies? I ordered them to be disposed of before returning. The Pear Blossom Pavilion and the Cherry Blossom Pavilion will also operate as red pavilions. Yes. Give those people who have places to return to generous severance pay from the Cho brothers fortune. Especially those who worked as prostitutes. Only women who want to learn to be entertainers or do chores can stay. I got it. Tell the men working on the construction. I will kill them if they get in trouble. I repeat, rebuild the Zaha Inn quickly. This room smells weird, and the expensive bedding is uncomfortable to sleep on. I will relay the message. Now buzz off. Yes, I will disappear from your sight. As soon as I send Cha Sung-tae back, I resume my Qi Breathing Technique. Everything leaves my mind in a flash. The Black Rabbit Union, the Black Hurricane Castle, the Master of Twelve Generals, the deceased three Cho brothers, and the Twin Ghosts come to mind, but I soon tear them apart with an imaginary sword and erase their presence. I repeat multiple full circuits of meditation until dawn breaks, and only when the sun rises do I lie down in my bed and fall asleep. I thought maybe I could get a good nights sleep today. Perhaps the saying an empty bed is hard to bear alone (մy) is useless in the face of fatigue. I sleep until noon. I met a mysterious man in my dream, and he was locked up. I cant remember the conversation, but one things for sure. That man must be locked up for a long time because of me. I feel sorry for the man and wake up from the dream. It took more than thirty days before the new foundational structure of the Zaha Inn was complete. The land is wide, so the scale of the inn is becoming rather large. In the meantime, the architectural head was replaced, but I havent met him yet. However, just looking at the groundwork of the newly divided sections, the structure of the building is so delicately done that you can picture it in your head. It feels like theyd finally found talent. The Zaha Inn that used to smell like mold everywhere had disappeared, and now the largest inn in Ilyang Prefecture is being built. An inn originally serves as accommodation. The Zaha Inn only had cheap rooms that were sometimes given to merchants, but the new Zaha Inn is being expanded up to the point where a large group of soldiers could stay. In addition, this place will be the temporary headquarters of the Low-Down Sect. I can imagine this even while standing on this still-vacant lot. The sight of Low-Down Sect members gathering and sharing alcohol and food. There will be a rival from my past life, an opponent, and even old enemies among the members. I will catch all these crazy monkeys and make them stay as members of the Low-Down Sect. All to change the fate of the monkeys and turn Kangho upside down. What are you thinking so deeply about? Cha Sung-tae approaches from behind me and looks at the vacant lot. I ask. When will it be completed? The scale is much larger, so it could take up a year. Is it too slow? What if we add more people? Randomly adding more men wont speed up the process. The construction might speed up depending on who the architectural head is. You should meet the new head. Cha Sung-tae calls out to a man standing with the construction workers. The leader is here. Come and say hello. I smile as soon as I see the approaching mans face. Yeon Ja-seong (), its been a while since Ive seen him. The famous architect from when I was the Low-Down Sect Leader is approaching with a younger face. PR/N: for more details/context, click here ?? Chapter 23 Chapter 23 C Head Of The Architectural Sect There is always a lot of construction work in Kangho. This is because there are frequent cases of sects being completely wrecked due to attacks by their enemies. Proper crafting techniques and machine tools are also part of the construction process. The combination of both of these things in harmony is not something done by martial artists. It is all done by the architects. Furthermore, when fights involve large factions in Kangho, it is common for the factions and sub-faction facilities to end up being burnt down. Minor factions might face their end completely, but major sects, as well as prominent clans in Kangho, will instead invest a lot of money into magnificent rebuildings. Through this process, skilful architects develop their own reputation, and those architects who are proficient with mechanical devices are treated as craftsmen in Kangho. Yeon Ja-seong was one of the three most powerful architects during the years I was known as the Low-Down Sect Leader in Kangho. He was one of the craftsmen often invited to work on large-scale construction. Of course, hes now twenty years younger, just like me. Other than having a tanned face, Yeon Ja-seong, who approaches and greets me, is a young man who looks one or two years younger than me. Yeon Ja-seong looks me in the eye and says. Im Yeon Ja-seong. I am working on this project through the recommendation of Mister Geum Chul-yong. I greet Yeon Ja-seong with a grin. I am the owner of the Zaha Inn. When I introduce myself as the owner of the Zaha Inn, Yeon Ja-seongs reaction is different. Our leader is indeed young like what Id heard. Our leader? When Cha Sung-tae and I look at each other, Yeon Ja-seong says with a firm look. Mister Geum told me to call you Leader. He said if I did well, I might become the head of the Architectural Sect. He also said we wouldnt have to pay dues to the sect. Is that true, Leader? I nod my head. Yes. Yeon Ja-seong smiles. Great. I like the sound of that. I will make the Zaha Inn magnificent, so do let me lead the Architectural Sect. It will mean as much as architecture to me. Perfect, welcome. And I know better than anyone how much it will mean to him. As I smile, Yeon Ja-seong looks at the open space and says. A small inn used to be here, but the site is very spacious and nice. Its a good place to build an inn. Theres a slight hill, so the evening view will be marvelous. You can leave the construction entirely up to me, Leader. Yeon Ja-sung looks back at me and asks. I heard you will protect those who work hard from now on. Is that right? I nod, and Yeon Ja-sung says with a refreshing smile. I want to clarify that this project will be done with huge discounts under the leaders command. Cha Sung-tae and I laugh at this. Haha. Yeon Ja-seong points to one side of the vacant lot and says, Well set up makeshift barracks over there for accommodation and meals. Although there are basic cooking utensils, there is a limit to prepping every time. I would really appreciate it if you could sometimes provide us food at your expense. Yeon Ja-seong is an eloquent man. And he always asks for what he needs in confidence. He is a man who knows how to survive in the gap between factions in Kangho with clear words and actions. In fact, Kangho warriors respect eloquent people. Those of the Unorthodox factions do not kill those of the Orthodox factions. In some cases, those of the Orthodox factions also do not kill the Unorthodox faction members. However, this is limited to when they like the others words, actions and character. Since this is Yeon Ja-seongs character, he would have been on a roll and built extensive networks within Kangho. Hes a smart guy. After the conversation, I have a stronger will to not lose Yeon Ja-seong to any forces after positioning him as the Architectural Sect Leader. I nod and look at Yeon Ja-seong. Youre a part of Low-Down Sect now. I give an immediate order. Sung-tae. Yes, Leader. Send those who work at the Plum Blossom Pavilion, Pear Blossom Pavilion, and Persimmon Blossom Pavilion here every evening. And serve them delicious food. Also where are the scumbags that burnt down Zaha Inn? Ive ordered them to do the toughest job, so dont worry. As the Rebirth Sect Leader, Ill take care of it. Yeon Ja-sung looks at Cha Sung-tae with surprise. Rebirth Sect? Cha Sung-tae nods, perhaps feeling a bit competitive. I forgot to mention. Im the head of the Rebirth Sect. You can think of it as a sub-sect consisting of those that work in the pavilions. Yeon Ja-sung nods. Oh, I see. Understood. Anyway, youre below our Sect Leader Zaha, right? Sect Leader Zaha? Thats a new nickname. Cha Sung-tae admits right away. Of course. The Rebirth Sect, the Architectural Sect, the Blacksmith Sect Theyre all a coalition under the Low-Down Sect. I ask. When did you two start talking informally to each other? When I point it out, Yeon Ja-sung speaks as if he had forgotten to mention it. Ah, Sung-tae told me to speak comfortably because he is older than me. As far as I know, Leader is older than me. Please treat me comfortably. I give a reply without much thought. All right, Ja-seong. When I speak informally to him immediately, Yeon Ja-sung replies, slightly flustered. Yes, big brother. It was nice to see you, Ja-seong. See you. I mean it when I said it was nice to see him. I finally scored the man who would become famous for his architecture. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks I should treat Mister Geum to another bowl of rice soup at the Chunyang Restaurant. Furthermore, I am curious how he managed to recruit him. Geum Chul-young would be the guy to have more connections than pavilion manager Cha Sung-tae, but I cant help but wonder. How was Ja-seong? Hes a good-natured man. I like him. I knew you would. Thats what I predicted. I ask while eating rice soup with Mister Geum. Where did you get a talent like him? I am really curious. Geum Chul-yong is far from a household name since hed only crafted dragon head sword heads his whole life. Hed done an excellent job running the smithy, but Yeon Ja-seong is in a different league. Geum Chul-yong says. Ja-seong is a man who goes around day and night looking for work. He visited the Dragon Head Smithy the other day and asked about work. He asked if I wanted to expand the smithy. I wasnt planning to, nor was I in a position to do it. Isnt it because you dont want to stand out? That, too. I rejected the offer, but he still came to greet me often. He knows how to survive as a merchant. Of course, I should call him a craftsman, not a merchant. I felt sorry and curious, so I arranged projects in other places a few times, and now hes calling me big boss. I see. Hes been roaming around to get a job. Yeon Ja-seong later became famous, and Kangho warriors would come to him for projects, but that is not how it is now. Its a blessing for me that Yeon Ja-seong got to know Geum Chul-yong while diligently finding work. Hows the progress for the Crazy Blade? While drinking the soup, Geum Chul-yong smiles at my words. Theres not much progress. But it was fun to work on it and also a concern. My routine has been the same every day, but I think Ive gained more energy thinking of the Crazy Blade. The same goes for the vice master. Can we ever produce an unbreakable weapon? Weve been thinking over and over. It looks like the whole smithy is on a mission. I nod my head. Thats wonderful. Watch and wait. People think Im only good at making handles. Ill prove them wrong. Can Geum Chul-yong make one? Thats not something I can predict. However, it did not feel so bad to see Geum Chul-yong be on a mission, unlike in his past life. Jang Deuk-soo, who is cleaning the bowls while listening in, says. No wonder the Ilyang Prefecture seems rather lively. I passed by the construction site, and the Zaha Inn seemed to have expanded. I look at Mister Geum and Jang Deuk-soo because it looks like they had something to say. Jang Deuk-soo continues. Why dont we have a banquet? To celebrate the death of the Cho brothers. Banquet? Jang Deuk-soo wipes the water off his hands and turns around. At the Zaha Inn, I mean. Youre building it with the Cho brothers money anyway. The Cho brothers had caused a lot of trouble in Ilyang Prefecture. Itd be nice to gather the adults in the neighborhood to celebrate. I can discuss it with the restaurants and inn owners if you want. Well have to make the food anyway. Geum Chul-yong nods. Thats nice. We need to get together to see each others faces. There used to be a lot of banquets like this. Its so bleak right now. I tilt my head and look at Jang Deuk-soo. Is that all you have to say? Jang Deuk-soo pauses and replies. If you dont have the right person to take charge, I was thinking of becoming the head of the Vendor Sect (T). There should be an organization for errand boys, inn owners, shop owners, and teahouse owners1. Geum Chul-yong makes a pft sound and spits water on Jang Deuk-soo. Oh my, Im sorry. Jang Deuk-soo answers as he wipes his face. Its okay. I say. The Rebirth Sect Leader Cha Sung-tae, the Blacksmith Sect Leader Geum Chul-yong, the Architectural Sect Leader Yeon Ja-seong, and the Vendor Sect Leader Jang Deuk-soo. Its nothing much, but I dont know why I find it funny. Jang Deuk-soo looks at my expression and asks. Are you laughing? You think Im a joke? No, Im sure youll do a good job. Lets do that. Including the Kill Sect, the foundation of the Low-Down Sect (›AT) is temporarily complete as the Low Five Sects (T). I want this Low-Down Sect to last a long time. Plus, it was about time to find the head of the Vendor Sect. While talking to Mister Geum and Jang Deuk-soo, I reviewed my memory to find a good candidate for the head of Kill Sect. Who would be a good fit? I know most of the masters of my time and the incidents happening in Kangho right now. Hence, there is a lot to think about. After a while, Geum Chul-yong says as if he wants to end the chat. Well, now that weve eaten our fill, lets go back to work. Thanks for the meal. Jang Deuk-soo asks with a smile. Yes, sir. Whos paying? Of course, our leader should pay. Ive introduced you to a great guy. I should be treated to a meal for the next ten years. I should be paying today, but it is strange because it seems like I am the only one paying. Still, I take the money out of the purse and pay for the rice soup. Brother Deuk-soo, thank you for the food. Jang Deuk-soo answers as he takes the money. Dont mention it. Please come again. I got up and told them. Then, Ill see you soon, leaders. Mister Geum boasts. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only Ill be waiting. I will give you unbreakable faith in me I answer with a nod. Ill look forward to it. While I leave the Chunyang Restaurant and return to the Plum Blossom Pavilion, men blocking my path appear before me. An establishment that primarily serves tea and other light refreshments ?? Chapter 24 Chapter 24 C Law Of Equivalent Exchange Is there a law of equivalent exchange that I am unaware of in this world? As if to balance out my luck after meeting a good person like Yeon Ja-seong, unwelcome guests appear in front of me. Two people in matching clothes are blocking the road, and the younger of the two asks me. Are you Sect Leader Lee Zaha? I shake my head and reply. No, Im an errand boy. Hearing the answer, the man sighs. My name is Hyeok Ryeon-hong, the Black Rabbit Union messenger. I came to deliver a message from my superior. The Black Rabbit Union again? I check for weapons on the two of them and spot one of them carrying something under a large cloth. There is a high probability the thing under the cloth is either a special tool or assassination weapon. If its not either, then it must be a human head. Hyeok Ryeon-hong says in a serious voice. The Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader(Pw) would like to see you. And whos that? Tell him I dont want to see him. It sounds like a stinky middle-aged man crazy for money from the name Golden Phoenix. Hyeok Ryeon-hong does not respond to my rude remarks. Actually, I already know about the leader of the Golden Phoenix Pavilion. His name is Ban Sa-woong (˼). Ive never seen him, but Ive often heard his name. The person who was investigated for secretly siphoning off the funds of the Black Rabbit Union and ended up being dismembered into five pieces, the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader Ban Sa-woong. All in all, hes a money freak. The Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader is a man in charge of the interests of the Black Rabbit Union and is a leading figure regardless of his martial art ranking. Hes a special case who got promoted to a pavilion leader at a young age because he bribed his way up to the upper echelons. It is not dramatic to say Ilyang Prefecture got into trouble later because of this guys commands. His terrible treatment of his men led to them lashing out at the weak, causing a domino effect. A person who makes money in an Unorthodox Faction is bound to be familiar with cruelty. Besides, it is known that Ban Sa-woong also accumulates money through a murder contract business unrelated to the Black Rabbit Union. Ban Sa-woong is a man who did everything he was eventually condemned for. Its no surprise to find these bastards in Unorthodox Factions. Hyeok Ryeon-hong coaxes me. He didnt send anyone armed, so it would be wise not to refuse the invitation. Assassins will come if I return alone, Sect Leader Lee Zaha. Hyeok Ryeon-hong smirks as he speaks, probably finding it amusing how he is speaking formally to me. Looks like I have no choice. Thats right. When does he want to see me? Hes hunting nearby. The sooner, the better. Its better to leave to see him this evening at the latest. As I am curious about the cloth, I ask the two about it. What are you holding? I think you brought it to show me. Ah, youre right. Hyeok Ryeon-hong looks at the man holding a cloth and points with his chin. Then the man walks forward and opens the cloth to show what is inside. Inside are heads of people I didnt expect. Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook. It seems like theyd brought the heads as a threat, but it has no effect on me. How can you kill my drinking friends so recklessly. Hyeok Ryeon-hong says. These two knew about the incident in the Ilyang Prefecture and covered it up. Its a sin to know such big news late, so their state is thanks to you. The story was ridiculous when I heard it while torturing them. I heard you only made them drink liquor, is that right? When I nod, Hyuk Ryeon-hong grins and says. That saved you. The leader finds that part amusing. The reason why he didnt send assassins right away was that you piqued his interest. I think for a moment about whether to kill or let them go. I only think of killing them briefly, but the guard holding the box suddenly grabs Hyuk Ryeon-hongs shoulder and steps back with a movement skill. Pa-ba-ba-bak. Their footsteps are loud and clumsy. Hyeok Ryeon-hong says after widening some distance Sect Leader? Were only here to deliver the message. Thats some serious murderous intent. Fuss I scan the two of them and say. Must I go after youd brutally murdered Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook? I have no plans to return as a dead body. Hyeok Ryeon-hong scratches his head and replies. If youre scared, you can run away instead. Quite a few people ran away because they didnt want to get involved with th Black Rabbit Union. Its good for both sides, and there wouldnt be any senseless killings in the Ilyang Prefecture. If I want to continue to be the boss in Ilyang Prefecture, I need to bow my head to the Black Rabbit Union. Thats a hint they will spare me if I run away and get out of Ilyang Prefecture. Run away? Hyeok Ryeon-hong smiles. Yes. That wont be manly. Hyeok Ryeon-hong asks. So? Should I give you some time until this evening? Or would you like to go now? The Black Rabbit Union is so good at their job that they bargained and left no room for rejection. As I keep my mouth shut, Hyeok Ryeon-hong says. Also, we wont be drinking with you. What a shame. Perhaps no one in the Black Rabbit Union will ever drink with me again. If this is how the Black Rabbit Union comes forward, theres nothing I can do. I have no choice but to meet them. I extend my arms as if for them to look at my outfit and say. I cant meet them in this attire. We can leave once I get a better fit. Im going to meet a big shot of the Black Rabbit Union, so I should dress for the occasion. I look like an errand boy right now. Hyeok Ryeon-hong nods. Thats true. You do look like an errand boy. Lead the way. Ill follow you. Having these two follow behind me like tails, we head for the Plum Blossom Pavilion. After changing into decent clothes, I inform Cha Sung-tae where I will be going. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks I have to meet the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader of the Black Rabbit Union. The chief of Golden Phoenix Pavilion? Isnt he a money-crazed murderer? Cha Sung-tae looks at me with surprise in his eyes. Jeon Pung and Han Go-wook, who visited last time, are dead with their heads chopped off. And yet youre still meeting him? He didnt call for me. Im going because I want to. Cha Sung-tae says with excitement. You dont have to go alone. Im going to call everyone together. Lets fight this war. I sigh as I look at Cha Sung-tae. How childish. If someone in town dies or gets hurt, aside from making things dull, there will be no place to eat rice soup, no place to drink alcohol, no place to make weapons, and no one to steal clothes from. Its already so boring to breathe. If these guys disappear, I would have to paste the nickname Crazy Demon (ħ) on my forehead. Forget it. Im going alone. Have you lost your mind? If you go, youll almost certainly die. Cha Sung-tae continues with a grim look. Ill go with you. Are you serious? Looking at the ground for a moment, Cha Sung-tae replies with a troubled look. To be honest, Im not. I hit Cha Sung-tae on the head for the first time in a while. Watch that mouth of yours. Stay here and recover. Cha Sung-tae suddenly takes off his robe and dresses me. I always steal his clothes, and this time he gave them away first. I ask. Is this another one of your precious clothes? You have so many. Of course, theyre precious. It could get torn. Its alright if it came back as rags. I pat Cha Sung-tae on the shoulder and leave the room. Ill be back. Cha Sung-tae says as he takes the lead. Rebirth. The word rebirth sounds like some kind of slogan. Cha Seong-tae has a mission to transform the three pavilions that used to be blue pavilions into red pavilions. Yeon Ja-seong is at a period of devoting his blood, sweat, and tears to building the new Zaha Inn from scratch. And Geum Chul-yong will probably still contemplate how to make the Crazy Blade and present it as a gift to me. Jang Deuk-soo will be making rice soup again today to earn a living. While theyre doing what they can. Once again, I have become a Sect Leader that conducts a One Person Extermination (һ˚T). People should do what theyre good at. Hyeok Ryeon-hong looks at my new attire and says, Now you look dashing. Lets go. Lets go, pawns of the Black Rabbit Union. What? I said lets go. Hyeok Ryeon-hong tries to say something, but he swallows it with a cough. Since the order of his superiors was to bring him back, it was Hyeok Ryeon-hongs responsibility to not let his personal feelings get in the way. While we walk, no one speaks a word. As I look around, I speak for the first time in an hour. Are we going to Jeongho Mountain? Thats right. We wouldve gone to the headquarters if the Union Leader summoned you, but since you are on your way to meet the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader, itd be a cabin near the hunting grounds. We dont just let anyone inside the headquarters. I reply with what I already know. Because of the Twelve Generals? Hyeok Ryeon-hong pauses in his tracks and looks at me. Yes, thats correct. The members of Twelve Generals are currently present in the headquarters. Now that I see it, youre well versed about Kangho for a young leader. As he resumes climbing the mountain path again, I say. When you sell alcohol in an inn, you hear news and stories. Hyeok Ryeon-hong smirks. How can an errand boy of an inn know about Twelve Generals? That makes no sense. Anyway, can a member of the Black Rabbit Union own a private cabin? Why not? He owned it before joining the Black Rabbit Union. He likes hunting, so he has several cabins in various places. I see, so hes rich. Of course. Thats why were also living comfortably. He gathers us underlings and grills meat for us, and if he wants to relax for a day, he stays in the cabin. The Black Rabbit Union Leader would be pleased to know about that. The Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader is killed by the Black Rabbit Union Leader, so I cant help but be sarcastic. Hyeok Ryeon-hong says while smiling. Please refrain from saying that in front of the Pavilion Leader. He has a fiery personality He has a fiery personality? I had no choice but to smirk like Hyeok Ryeon-hong. The private cabin of the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader is used for many purposes. As Hyeok Ryeon-hong said, it is a vacation spot, a place to bury or incinerate elimination targets, and a secret spot where extorted funds are hidden. Ordinary people would not understand it, but the Black Rabbit Union is an Unorthodox Faction. No wonder the people who belong to the group commit all sorts of outrageous things. After walking through the woods for about an hour, we arrived at the cabins entrance. A high iron gate stands in the centre, and the wall leading from the iron gate is covered with vines, making it hard to see inside. It is more like a fortress with its back against the cliff rather than a mountain cabin. With the iron gate and vines in place, it looks more like a safe house (). It is a place fit for evil deeds. Hyeok Ryeon-hong reports in front of the iron gate. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only Hyeok Ryeon-hong is back. I brought Sect Leader Lee Zaha with me. The iron door opens without a reply from the inside. When I follow Hyeok Ryeon-hong inside, the atmosphere changes instantly. More people are walking around the cabin than I anticipated, and a bonfire is at the centre of a wide seating area. I see a man of sturdy build sitting in a chair next to the bonfire. From the first impression, it is evident that he is a ruthless human being. Chapter 25 Chapter 25 C The Reason Why I Exist Hyeok Ryeon-hong introduces me to the man who is enjoying the bonfire alone. Lord (f), we brought Sect Leader Lee Zaha. Only Pavilion Leaders are usually called Lord here. Since his lackey is calling him this, I can see that he is an ambitious man. Of course, this ambition ended with him being cut into five pieces. The Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader Ban Sa-woong, wearing an outer jacket made of animal skin, puts down the bow he was trimming and says. Was it you? The one who pocketed all three pavilions? You look younger and more arrogant than I expected. Come closer. I am curious about Ban Sa-woongs personality, so I give him a short answer to keep my own personality hidden. Yes, thats me. After looking through the cabin for a moment, I move up slowly. The overall atmosphere is heavy and dull, perhaps because many people have died here. It feels like the wandering souls are watching us in the dark. Ban Sa-woongs appearance resembles that of a boar, similar to the ones he hunts. It feels like a boar is hunting boar with a bow, so the corner of my mouth raises momentarily. The boar, no, Ban Sa-woong, opens his smelly mouth. Close the door. As soon as he finishes speaking, bang the iron door slams shut. I bring a chair nearby and put it down in front of the bonfire. When I naturally sit across, Ban Sa-woong says. Who told you to sit? Are you crazy? Staring hard at Ban Sa-woongs face, I retort. Yes. Ban Sa-woong orders his lackey. Oh, yeah, hes gone insane. A mad dog would be the answer to a madman. Bring the hungry fellow. A man walks up with a large dog. The black and valiant-looking dog is surprisingly calm and waits quietly with its butt stuck to the ground. The man who brings the dog taps it on the head with his knife, so it would look at me. Ban Sa-woong says to me. You sit like that dog. Ah, really? I look at the hungry dog, the man who trained the hungry dog, and Ban Sa-woong, who is treating me like the trainer would a dog. People who wonder what I will do next look at me from some distance. When I dont get out of the chair, Ban Sa-woong orders. Bite. The trainer repeats. Bite! The black dog makes a loud growling sound and comes running at me with ferocity. When the dog gets close to me, I flick out a finger and hit it directly on the nose. The dog is flung back from my flick and sweeps through the floor, writhing in agony as if someone is dragging him away. It must have been excruciating because it was a finger flick that I reinforced with the Fiery Chickens energy. Silence falls as the people in the cabin look at the black dog struggling on the floor. . . . After handling the dog, I turn to Ban Sa-woong and tell him. What can you do for me to spare you? Lets cool down and think calmly. I speak with my palms laid out like a dog. Perhaps if you pant like a dog? Maybe if you give me all the money hidden in the manor? Or if you swear to be my spy inside the Black Rabbit Union? Im not sure if theres an answer here. You fucking Unorthodox Sect pest. While I ramble on with my nonsense, the men preparing the meat and carrying the food and everyone else begins to gather around. They became alert as if preparing for a siege. Ban Sa-woong smiles and waves his hand. Youre a funny guy. We need to talk more, so you guys do your own thing. The men reply in a dispirited tone. Yes. I laugh softly for a long time. I think about how ironic fate is. The man whose previous fate was to die by being severed into five body parts still has the fate to die brutally in this life. I just wonder if there is anything to gain after killing this guy. Money? Or shitty minions? Or maybe a few hounds? Ban Sa-woong asks me as he loses himself in thought. You look young. How old are you? You certainly didnt call me here to ask my age. Im younger than you. Isnt it obvious? Ban Sa-woong laughs as he hits his knee. Hahahaha. Only then did I get up from the chair. I know a bit about face reading, and youre the one who will get caught by the Black Rabbit Union while trying to steal money and have your limbs torn in a painful death. This is what a greedy boars face reading is like. Ill spare you if you offer a hefty amount for the reading fee. What do you say? Laughing and getting up from his seat, Ban Ji-woong shakes his head. I wanted to spare your life, but it looks like thatll be tough now. I look around and say. Do you want to die alone? Or do you want me to kill your subordinates first? But if youre the leader of a group, you should think about your subordinates. Before you die Ban Sa-woong replies. Im not as nice as I lo- Before Ban Sa-woong finishes speaking, I kick his chest with my left foot. Ban Sa-woong has no time to draw his sword, so he crosses his arms to block my kick. With a boom Ban Sa-woongs body flies off in an arc and is thrown back. He is quite strong. Ban Sa-woong curses as he pulls out the sword at his waist. All I grab in response is a blazing tree branch from the edge of the bonfire. There is no reason to pull the sword out of my waist right now. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks The flame burns even brighter when the tree branch is infused with Fire Chicken Energy. Fwhoooosh! Ban Sa-woongs eyes grow wide. With my mouth shut, I swing the flaming tree branch and begin fighting with Ban Sa-woong. Advanced tactics from a third-rate Unorthodox Faction member arent enough to win against me. The lower rank they are, the cruder the technique. Whether the Black Rabbit Union or the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader, the level is inevitably inferior to the swordsmen of famous factions and clans I fought against in my other life. In my opinion, these are the pros and cons of Unorthodox and Orthodox Factions. Orthodox Sects may have excellent techniques but only have experience in duels, meaning they lack experience in real battle. This is because of their isolation. In addition, theres bound to be competition within the faction itself. Unless theyre a famous master, they are inept in coping with various situations. In some cases, good sword technique cant be put into practice during a real fight, an inevitable habit of young Orthodox Faction disciples. On the other hand, Unorthodox Factions learn lower-class martial arts compared to more prominent Orthodox Factions. However, due to the nature of Unorthodox Factions, they have a lot of practical experience. This is because they have to fight for their lives. Even if you use ordinary swordsmanship, there are cases in which you become stronger with experience gained in fights. If you gain decent martial arts in the future, your skills will improve exponentially. The way of living and the method of obtaining martial arts differ for the Demon Cult and the Unorthodox and Orthodox Factions. When you add martial arts learning on top, you will become invincible. I was a man who tried to reach that invincibility, and the Ban Sa-woong Im dealing with right now is not. In conclusion, hes nothing but third-rate. Ban Sa-woong relies on hands-on experience and manages to stop my attacks more than a dozen times. I make a surprise attack with my left palm and strike the tree branch in my right hand diagonally down. Busy defending, Ban Sa-woong is forced to defend directly and raises his sword to block the tree branch. At that moment, I take the strength I have injected into the tree branch and force the sword to stab into the tree branch. Puk! The tree branch collides against the sword and goes through it, surprising my opponent. At that moment, I draw the sword on my waist and aim for the exposed sword. Anticipating Ban Sa-woong being able to block the sword narrowly, I advance. It didnt matter if he could block my sword. Like a bow caught in a bowstring, his sword bounces off from the sword I had infused with sword energy. It is thinly curved sword energy similar to the crescent moon in the sky. Ban Sa-woong, who had moved his head to avoid my sword, cannot dodge the energy that I release from it as it hits his face. Euk! The moment the sword mark engraves itself on Ban Sa-woongs face, my follow-up attacks continue. Ban Sa-woong never wouldve imagined an errand boy to be able to use sword energy like this. It is a clear defeat for him. When the injured Ban Sa-woong staggers without being able to control his body, I swing my sword from side to side and slash at Ban Sa-woongs body. With each swing, a long slashing blood mark forms. Despite his serious injury, Ban Sa-woong manages to hold out. Hes like a boar. In the midst of this, I hear the dog trainer trying to make a surprise attack from behind, and I swing my sword horizontally as I rotate my body. Pu-chak! The trainers head flies into the air. I turn around, run to the critically injured Ban Sa-woong and stamp on his body with my foot. One side of his shoulder dips with a cracking sound, and Ban Sa-woong collapses. I keep stepping on Ban Sa-woongs body with stomping legs (). I step on his head, torso, and lower body and ram him to the ground. At the same time, the ground where Ban Sa-woong is beginning to be buried in cracks in a circular shape. Watching the faces of the crowd, I stomp on the ground after instilling a lot of internal energy through my foot. Boooooooooooooooom! Ban Sa-woong doesnt need a tomb. I have to imprint on the memory of his subordinates how their leader died while trying to mess with an Ilyang Prefecture errand boy. So on purpose, I kill him brutally. There are many reasons for that. This guy makes money from loan sharks, private loans, and murder contracts without remaining loyal to the Black Rabbit Union. This type of person betrays wherever he belongs, and this is the case. I killed him brutally, so no one dared to attack me rashly. I scratched the dirt several times with my feet and covered the pit, glaring at the paled Ban Sa-woongs subordinates. Everyone is looking at me with bated breath. These scums feared the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader. Ban Sa-woong died without being able to resist properly, so the fear doubles. I ask them. Who wants to die after Ban Sa-woong? Someone asks. How are you going to deal with the Leader? The Black Rabbit Union Leader? Yes. I look at the man who made the question and reply. Why do you care? Youre all going to die right here, right now. You third-rate Unorthodox Faction bastards. Your fate is determined in a split second. Get on your knees before I count to three. Anyone still standing will be sent to Ban Sa-woong. One, two, three. The scared ones got on their knees first. The people who are trying to decide to move after watching the situation also quickly kneel. There is a slight delay, but eventually, all Ban Sa-woongs men are on their knees. I like this atmosphere. This feeling is why I went around beating up the crazy monkeys of Kangho in my previous life. This atmosphere is why I trained in martial arts despite going into Qi Deviation. This is why I didnt eat or relieve myself while sitting with crossed legs for hours on end. I think the whole process of suffering exists for this moment. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only I think this is why I exist. . . . Or maybe not. Chapter 26 Chapter 26 C The Errand Boy Concealed His Abilities Unorthodox Factions all share one thing in common when they emerge as one of the most fearsome forces in Kangho. The hierarchy within the faction thinks of each other as brothers (ֵ). It is difficult to measure the forces of the Unorthodox Factions just using a simple headcount as they are a force that fights violently when they lose their brothers. I think This is the essence of Unorthodox Factions. The power of Kangho warriors can be classified mainly into internal and external cultivation. Still, the power induced by human anger cannot be understood rationally. But of course, these guys kneeling in front of me are not strong enough to consider each other brothers. No one will step up even if the leader is dead. Looking at the table, the food is steadily becoming colder by the minute. Lets talk after filling my stomach. Wow, its a feast. I taste the food spread with chopsticks in my hand and watch the kneeling men. A man asks me in a cautious tone. Are you going to spare us? Munching at the meat of a whole roast chicken, I reply. Thatll make things difficult for me. Why should I? When I state that it would be difficult, a few exchange glances. Watching them do so, I warn. I wont beat up dogs when I eat. If you make me into a crazy dog during the meal, Ill kill you in a crueler way than your leader over there. Calm down if you dont want to die now. As soon as they hear my unusual threat, they become silent and wait. The guy who opened his mouth earlier asks again. Is there anything you want? If you try to kill us all, we will have no choice but to fight to the death. Please let us go. I look at the man whose words are a mixture of a clever suggestion and a threat. Are you a negotiator? Why dont you tell me who you are first and come up with a proposal? A ponytailed-man, his appearance being relatively plain for an Unorthodox Faction member, answers my question. My name is Sima Bi (˾Rw), a secret inspector. Sima Bi I go through the memory of my past life for a moment. These guys originally died for crimes related to the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader, so there wasnt much information about them. I know most of the future, so the less prominent they are, the more likely I dont know anything about them. Ponytail, what do you think is happening? Sima Bi answers honestly to survive. It seems like something completely unexpected has happened. You never thought Id win. Yes. To tell you the truth, if we were as skilled as our leader, we would have joined in and overpowered you. But? I didnt think that was the full extent of your skills, so I had to restrain a few men who wanted to jump in. Not bad. You saw through my tricks. This errand boy conceals his martial art abilities. Hmm I was like that too in my previous life. Hiding my actual skills is always effective and fun at the same time. I scan Sima Bis gaze and face and say, Was it Sima Bi? You look like you could be a military advisor (܊). Despite hearing praise, Sima Bis expression is grim. Do you know physiognomy? I point at Sima Bi with a chicken bone. Your face looks like a military advisor, so Ill spare you. Its human nature to survive if youre quick-witted. You pass. Sima Bi replies with a startled look. Huh? What about the rest? Who do you think will report this to the Black Rabbit Union? We will never report it. Impossible. If all-out war breaks out with the Black Rabbit Union, Ill get tired out. The rest of you, bring it on. You can come at me all at once. I throw chicken bones everywhere as if I am about to fight again. Wait! Sima Bi exclaims hastily and, after trying to calm down his riled-up colleague, says. What if no one informs the Black Rabbit Union about what happened? I reply with a cold expression. How can I believe that? Its impossible. Do you trust me? I glare at Sima Bi. Youll go report it? Whether its from your eloquent speech or looks, something tells me youre the next leader in charge Thats correct. Do you think youll survive if you report it to your higher-ups? Even if you survived, youd be treated like an imbecile. You watched the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader die without a single scratch. Youll die if you return to the Black Rabbit Union. Well, the rest might rise in the Black Rabbit Union. Half of them are traitors anyway. Only then is Sima Bi hit by the harsh reality. It goes without saying, this is how the Black Rabbit Union operates. Moreover, Sima Bi had closed one eye to the pavilion leaders embezzlement even though he was an inspector. Hence his sins arent any lighter than the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader. When I try to draw my sword, Sima Bi says urgently. I have an idea! Please listen to what I have to say and then decide. Im begging you. I respond with a smile. Oh, already? I thought only the reincarnation of Zhuge Liang and Sima Yi would be able to think of an idea so fast. We can step up and embezzle the money in the cabin. Well be committing a crime. All together. As soon as Sima Bi finishes, a chilly wind blows. Sima Bi continues desperately. Theres a lot of money that the leader embezzled hidden in the cabin. If it reaches the higher-ups, everyone in the Golden Phoenix Pavilion will die since we cooperated. How can we let them know the money was embezzled? Well take the money to the Ilyang Prefecture. Were moving the money together, so we become accomplices. Theres no way for us to escape. If word gets out, the Black Rabbit Union will come after us, though? Sima Bi says. This is how well burn the bridges. Didnt you brace yourself for this when you killed the leader? Well join the burning bridge too. If we keep our mouths shut to live, well be able to buy some time. All of this is better than dying here right now. This guy seems to be mistaken. Even if the whole Black Rabbit Union comes at me, they wont be able to catch me anyway. Compared to the Murim Alliances Heaven and Earth Net, they are just at the level of aspiring Kangho warriors bragging in martial arts schools and academies. Compared to the Demon Cults version of the Heaven and Earth Net, theyre not even worth a speck of dust. I was the one who ate three meals a day inside the Murim Alliance and Demon Cults nets. Theres no need to say this aloud as a boast, though. Thats also true. Its bound to happen anyway now that the leader is dead. Then Ill keep an eye on the procession, you guys carry the money. We should commit crimes together. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Thinking he had just saved his colleagues, Sima Bi happily advises him like a loyal soldier. There are several ways to weave about the missing leader. His relationship is turning sour with the Black Hurricane Castle recently and they also have the Twelve Generals. Advisor Sima, dont get involved with the Twelve Generals, theyre trouble. Advisor? I look at Sima Bi seriously. You said your surname is Sima. Yes. Then youre Advisor Sima. Although youre not an Advisor General (܊) yet. Hm. Traditionally, when a sect recruits an advisor, those from the Sima or Zhuge families are the best.[^n1] I dont know why. How can I know everything about the world? Whether Sima Bi likes it or not, I am recruiting this guy as an advisor. I will arrive in Ilyang Prefecture within one hour. Advisor Sima, join me in overseeing the procession. You take the lead, and Ill secure the back. If bandits get in the way, Ill kill them. Lets go. Sima Bi replies. Yes, sir. Sima Bi assembles his colleagues for a moment and consoles them as if to dissolve the chaotic atmosphere. This is our only way to survive. Its been a close call lately anyway. The cabin would have been robbed if we got a leader from another faction to take over. We will die since our leader died anyway. What do you all think? Sima Bi is a man who had no way out after receiving bribes from the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader. Lets do that. I leave the slush fund operation to Sima Bi, lift my chopsticks again, and resume eating. Then, I call Hyeok Ryeon-hong, who is walking around with a pale expression. Messenger Hyeok Ryeon-hong, its nice to see you again alive like this. Come here. Ah, yes. Hyeok Ryeon-hong, whod once presented himself as a messenger, approaches timidly. He is intimidated after watching the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader die without much struggle. I ask. Are you going to run when you see a chance? Your eyes are wavering. No, I have no intention to do so. Right? You better not. Im way faster than you. The only place you can run to is the afterlife. The weather is sunny today, so Im ending my killing with the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader. Dont try to show off your agility here, or else someone will die. Yes. As you know, I feel sick when I see blood when I eat. Hyeok Ryeon-hongs expression turns ghastly. This is for the best. I can only kill all of you if anything goes wrong. If youve killed as much as your leader, Id be annoyed since I have to keep killing sloppy bastards. So dont push it. Do you understand? I understand. I am not exactly happy because Im not interested in money. Hence, this money will be spent on rebuilding the Zaha Inn to resemble a Murim Clan building, with the remainder going into buying placebo supplements to serve as a palate cleanser. Money will be distributed to moneymakers, like petals flowing down the sky. Money isnt important to a Kangho warrior who might lose their life someday. Remember. Money is to be earned and spent. I would be satisfied if I could just eat rice soup for every meal and beat up crazy bastards every day. This is what seeking pleasure in poverty means. I return with the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leaders subordinates and wealth like a triumphant general. All the merchants came out to see the prizes I came back with. While the slush fund is safely transferred to the Plum Blossom Pavilion, I tell Sima Bi. The embezzlement plan was a success. Sima Bi replies. Yes, now that weve moved the money we took together, theres no reason for us to go back. Thank you for your generosity. I reply in an aloof tone. You dont have to thank me. I dont intend to spare anyone who causes trouble under my nose. Ill keep everyone in check so it wont happen. You should also think about what these useless bastards will work on at this point. What jobs are available? The market here is currently developing, so they cant focus only on training martial arts like members of the Unorthodox Factions. They can work in vendor shops, smithies, inns, and construction. They cant work in the pavilions since many women work there, as theres bound to be a problem. Go discuss with those morons. Yes. I have a lot of sub-sects under me. Please note if more people from Unorthodox Factions want to join us in the future, we will create a temporary Black Sect (T). Until then, well operate normally. For useless idiots who cant do anything normal My stomach prickles as I say those words. It prickles as I am reminded of chicken noodle soup. Understood. You said there were many sub-sects. Whats the name of the main sect? I look at Sima Bis face and say. We are the unrivaled Low-Down Sect. The Low-Down Sect Ive never heard of it before. Furrowing my brows, I reply. Is that so? Youve never heard of it? Ah, yes. My apologies. Im not very knowledgeable about things like these Its okay. Its a sect I threw together not long ago. But the point is I created it, I didnt just make it up randomly. Sima Bi, who did not understand what I was saying, hurriedly puts his expression under control and replies. Oh, I see. The name Low-Down gives a connotation of a nasty and low status making Sima Bi think that it is unfit for s factions name, but he couldnt voice this thought out loud. As Sima Bi is wearing a blank expression, I ask him. What are you thinking about? Ah, yes I was thinking how you said it was unrivaled. I mean that no one in this world can stoop lower than us. Sima Bi immediately understands. Ah What? You dont agree? No, that applies to me. Im the same. Ranked at the bottom. I nod with a serious look on my face. Then thats fine. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only I then added after a moment. You passed. Sima Bi smiles for the first time and then responds, hurriedly trying to control his expression. Thank you. [^n1]: Sima Yi and Zhuge Liang are famous military advisors in the Chinese dynasty. Chapter 27 Chapter 27 C At Least Say Something Sensible Having witnessed many riches and possessions entering the Plum Blossom Pavilion, Cha Sung-tae appears with an ashen face. Whats that stuff thats moving from outside? Where did you get all that? Have you started stealing, too? Its the funds hoarded by the chief of the Golden Phoenix Pavilion. That money will also go into construction of buildings, like the inn. You brought the money from the Black Rabbit Union here? Cha Sung-tae is puzzled. Yes. Why? Because I wanted to. As an errand boy, the leader of the Low-Down Sect, and a thief. I understand where youre coming from, but what if the Black Rabbit Union invades Ilyang Province because of this? The Black Rabbit Union takes money, theyre not the ones to be stolen from. Theyre the type of people that beat the money out of thieves. Im good at beating, too, wouldnt it be okay? Ha I have killed the Cho brothers, the Black Hurricane Castle scums, and the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader, but I have yet to break a sweat. Furthermore, now is a time when the Black Rabbit Union Leader could not be bothered with the Ilyang Prefecture. He probably doesnt even have enough time to train. But the situation will only become stranger if I have to make long explanations about this, so I need to change the topic. If the Black Rabbit Union marches in, Ill just beat up their leader. Beat up? Sounds good. I can also bind and torture the Union Leader. Or make the Union Leader work under me. Work under you? What a great idea. Torture? Woah, thats brilliant. I shouldnt have been worried. Or I can kill him. I have many ways to handle him. While everyone who overhears me sighs and avoids my eyes, Cha Sung-tae mutters blankly. At least say something sensible to put us at ease. Sigh I look at Cha Sung-tae and reply briefly. I can do it. Im used to getting doubtful stares, but theres a need to reassure people. Very well. Our pitiful peasants must be worried. I understand. Tell the heads of the Low-Down Sect sub-sects to meet me at the empty space of the inn. Ill have to ease your anxiety. Wait, who are the heads? Im still not quite sure yet. In fact, just like Cha Sung-tae, I still have no idea who the heads are in the future. Ill be busy walking around and recruiting people from the lower class. The Low-Down Sect will be composed of working people. In that sense, its also a Labor Sect (ڄT). There is no distinction of class (Fv) in work. However, there are many class and power distinctions in Kangho, so it is regarded as the norm. Thats why most of Kangho is my enemy. First is Jang Deuk-soo, head of the Vendor Sect. Huh? Brother Deuk-soo? Are you looking down on him? Oh, not at all. His rice soups are delicious. Mister Geum Chul-yong of the Blacksmith Sect, and Yeon Ja-seong of the Architectural Sect. Bring these three. Hm, then whos in charge of the procession earlier? Forget it. We have to wait and see. Understood. A bonfire is lit in the empty lot of Zaha Inn, where construction is taking place, and the sub-sect leaders and I sit in a circle. Geum Chul-yong says. I heard you have something to tell us. Thats right. I choose to speak formally because Geum Chul-yong is present. Id like to tell you the code of conduct of the Low-Down Sect. Please excuse me if I ramble on. This is not me trying to play nice. I just hope everyone can share the same sentiments with me. Do tell. As I watch the firewood crackle, I say. Going forward, anything that happens in the Low-Down Sect will be my responsibility. If a problem arises, say that it was your leaders doing. If someone comes and asks about my whereabouts, just tell them. If someone interrogates you about something, say that only the Low-Down Sect Leader knows. This is the first rule of the Low-Down Sects code of conduct. In short, everything is my responsibility. I finish speaking and look at the leaders for a moment. As I expected, they are glancing at each other with expressions that say, what the hell is he talking about?. Geum Chul-yong, the eldest of the bunch, asks for confirmation. You want us to blame you for everything? Yes. Geum Chul-yong then tilts his head and says. How can you possibly call that a code of conduct? Explain. Okay, hear me out. Im no good at making chicken noodle soup, so I devoted myself to training martial arts. Is that true? Lets move on. Mister Geum, who runs the smithy, and Deuk-soo hyung, who runs the Chunyang Restaurant, will have no business in Kangho. Not now, and not in the future. Isnt that right? Both of them nod. Why would we be involved with Kangho? I wouldnt dream of it. I then look at Yeon Ja-sung and Cha Sung-tae and say. The same goes for these two. Cha Sung-tae thinks to himself, Not me? but he doesnt open his mouth because of the atmosphere. This also applies to the majority of the Low-Down Sect. But Im different. With that being said, errand boys of the world, bodyguards, wagoners, those who make weaponry, food, and daily necessities, and merchants have died endlessly in the hands of the warriors of Kangho. The injustice is immeasurable. And it will probably be the same in the future. Through the Low-Down Sect not just one or two people but I want to stop all the killing if possible. Whenever people die unjustly, I will face the adversaries, whoever it might be. When I was still the Crazy Demon, countless innocent people died whenever a fight broke out between the Demon Cult and the Murim Alliance or the Unorthodox and Orthodox Factions. In many cases, they were just collateral damage. I have no sympathy for the mad monkeys fighting and dying among themselves. However, I cannot accept the senselessness of an errand boy who only serves alcohol and snacks that gets beaten to death for no particular reason. Geum Chul-yong asks. I do get what you mean, but what does it have to do with Kangho? Geum Chul-yong still seems confused at my explanation. I continue my words. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks It does. Ill know if the injured or the dead are part of the Low-Down Sect. If someone is killed by the Unorthodox Faction, I will kill them in return. If he killed them, I would kill them before they can bring it up to the Murim Alliance. Thats how Ill guard over ordinary working people. Its just that I take a look at those in front of me. I know that by protecting the weak we will inevitably run into problems with established factions. No matter who I fight against, I can make a name for myself. Because I will be a spokesperson for the weak. In my past life, I gained the name Crazy Demon without much pretext. Thanks to this, I was too easily criticized and blamed for no reason. People said I was insane no matter what I did, and I was accused of crimes I didnt even commit. To be honest, there are many times when I didnt even bother to clear my name. On top of that, I had quite a temper and became an enemy of the alliance in no time. But I dont want that anymore. Who could understand why I was training to kill the Demon Cult Leader while running away from the Murim Alliance? Things are different now. If you dont seize the rare opportunity, youre a fool, not a madman. Yeon Ja-seong replies first. I understand. Cha Sung-tae raises his hand and says. Theres something I dont understand Wouldnt the leader have to be incredibly strong for the code of conduct to mean anything? Lets say the Black Rabbit Union comes marching in tomorrow. According to the code of conduct, we must confess that this was all done by the leader. No, forget about the Black Rabbit Union. How will you deal with all the sects and masters out there? Fair point. I hold my breath, glance at those waiting for my answer, and blurt out something rather outrageous. As long as I am unrivaled, there wont be any problems. Grave silence falls over the group. Cha Sung-tae hurriedly covers his hand over his mouth but fails to conceal the pfft sound from his mouth. As a signal, Geum Chul-yong bursts into laughter, Jang Deuk-soo laughs as he hugs his stomach, and even Yeon Ja-sung smiles. Subsequently, as Cha Sung-tae bursts into laughter as if he had gained courage, the sub-sect leaders break into a huge fit of laughter. Bahahahahaha. Kyahahahahaha. In the Ilyang Prefecture Unrivaled An errand boy bastard Ah, Im sorry. I smile gently as I watch the leaders laugh. Actually, I find it funny, too. An errand boy becoming unrivalled Eventually, I burst into laughter with the leaders. Hahahaha I laughed for a long time before turning dour at Cha Sung-tae. You should laugh moderately. Do you have a death wish? This bastard even teared up. Yes. Geum Chul-yong says as if hed felt better from just listening to me. Youre still young, so if you work hard every day, youll be a master famous throughout Kangho in a few decades. After all, a man should have great ambitions. I support our leader. Yeon Ja-seong says with innocent eyes as if he held no doubts. Ill support you too. Be unrivaled. I will be a loyal supporter of the Low-Down Sect and its leader. Since Yeon Ja-seongs ambition is to be the best in architecture, I am determined to support this mindset. My eyes turn to Jang Deuk-soo, who is staying silent. This is how Jang Deuk-soo felt. Its not like being unrivaled is a childs joke. I watch Jang Deuk-soos complicated expression and say, Looks like Brother Deuk-soo thinks its impossible. Jang Deuk-soo is an honest man, so he answers with a nod. Dont you think so? What do you mean? There are countless sects, powerful masters, and established clans in Kangho, not to mention martial art prodigies. I heard most of them train in martial arts before they could even walk. Thats generally true. Jang Deuk-soo expresses his thoughts in words he must have heard from somewhere. They say that he who is unrivaled is sent by the heavens. Thats right. The unrivalled is the man who has descended from heaven. And the man picked by the mysterious man in the sky is me. Thats me. The mindset is more important than the outcome. Actually, its not important whether I become unrivaled or not. The only thing that matters is how hard I work for it. A true man sets his goals and sticks to them. Lee Zaha, the errand boy, will strive to be the best in the world, but what will you all aim to become? I point my finger at the leaders and say. Please give it some serious thought. I suddenly wonder if I am still the man called the Crazy Demon at this point. However, I am who I am. I didnt have any plans in my past life, but this time I do. I have to take good care of the Low-Down Sect, so it is ready to fight the Murim Alliance and take on the Demon Cult. If I represent the weak, I will not become the alliances enemy as I did before. Only with a purpose I can fight alongside the Orthodox Faction for justice. And go against the crazed monkeys of the Demon Cult. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only I can then either beat those in the Unorthodox Factions to death or keep them as my subordinates. This is the power of having a purpose. When someone pushes a different belief from the rest of the world. Success leads to revolution, and failure leads to madness. In this lifetime, I will become a successful madman. Chapter 28 Chapter 28 C A Fate of Getting His Ass Kicked The Black Rabbit Union (î). Wearing a black rabbit mask with eyeholes, the leader of Black Rabbit Union seats himself in a yoke-back chair and says. Manager Byuk, any news about the leader of the Golden Phoenix Pavilion? We found a secret safe house. Judging from the situation, it looks like he was attacked and buried while present there. No other bodies were found, only traces of the fight with a master were evident on the ground. Upon investigation, it seems he died without much resistance. The Black Rabbit Union Leader then asks. What about his subordinates? We think only the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader died. The leader is dead, but why did none of them return? The rest of them were taken by a man named Lee Zaha from the Ilyang Prefecture. The Black Rabbit Union Leader looks around and says. Who is this Lee Zaha? Ive never heard of him. The executives cannot answer immediately and bow their heads in an apparent apology. Speak. They say hes an errand boy from the Ilyang Prefecture. A suffocating silence envelops the room. An errand boy? The Black Rabbit Union Leader lifts his mask in frustration. The executives bow their heads to avoid looking directly at the leader. Apologies, Leader The Black Rabbit Union Leader speaks with displeasure evident on his face. Theres no way a pavilion leader under the Black Rabbit Union can be beaten to death by an errand boy. Is there any possibility of it being the other Generals? Thats not the case, sir. The pavilion owner, who we had allowed to set up a sect in Ilyang Prefecture, was also killed by him alongside all his brothers. I suppose it might be a master from another region posing as an errand boy. They say hes an errand boy born and raised in Ilyang Prefecture. How skilled was the Golden Phoenix Pavilion again? Hes ranked 9th place for us, sir. Rather high for a man who only manages money. Doesnt that mean theres a high chance all of you will fail if you go? The executives answer in unison. Please allow me to go. Leader, Ill make sure hes dealt with. The Black Rabbit Union Leader remains quiet without delivering any orders. In the meantime, a man named So Gun-pyeong (۬Bƽ), leader of the Golden Dragon Pavilion, keeps his mouth closed. The Black Rabbit Union Leader turns his eyes towards So Gun-pyeong. The man is a repulsive subordinate that never takes the initiative. The Black Rabbit Unions forces were pulled in by Dae Na-chal by force and dumped onto his disciples. Hence, the bond between Union Leaders and subordinates typically is not great. The executives breathe out a sigh of relief when their leader puts the mask back on. One subordinate belatedly reports. Sir, while investigating the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leaders disappearance, there was evidence of embezzlement. It seems Lee Zaha took the money and returned to the Ilyang Prefecture. The Black Rabbit Union Leader glares at his subordinates with fierce eyes. Embezzlement? Yes. The Black Rabbit Union Leader finally realizes how much his subordinates had deceived him. It was a mistake to leave the sects affairs entirely to these executives as he devoted his time to martial arts training. If this continues, theres a high chance the master will strip him of his title. The official who reported the incident says in a serious tone. If you send me to the Ilyang Prefecture, Ill take care of the errand boy and retrieve all the stolen money. However, the Black Rabbit Union Leaders eyes focus on the silent So Gun-pyeong. Not you. Chief So. So Gun-pyeong answers plainly. Yes, Leader. Why do you keep silent whenever something happens? Everyone said they would go, so I stayed quiet. Ive been told youve been training very hard recently. I have been training as much as usual. If you fought against the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader who you disliked, how many hits would it take for you to win? I am aware you are more skilled than him. So Gun-pyeong becomes lost in thought momentarily. His competitor, the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader, is not skilled in martial arts. Still, they ranked the same in the Black Rabbit Union. However, the gap in martial arts skills between them was wide. The Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader was crazy for money. At the same time, he focuses only on martial arts training, so its offensive to be compared. In So Gun-pyeongs judgment, he thought he only needed il-da-kyung (һ, time taken to drink a cup of tea) to win. However, thinking it will be better to keep his skills hidden, So Gun-pyeong responds. Im not sure since I have never sparred with him, but Im sure I can defeat him. If he took the money straight to the Ilyang Prefecture without moving it somewhere else, he must be confident in taking on anyone from the Black Rabbit Union. Id like to put your skills to the test this time. So Gun-pyeong replies. Understood. As you know, the target is an errand boy. If you fail Yes. You must end your own life. But if you succeed, I will put you in charge of the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leaders duties. At these words, So Gun-pyeong shoots his head up and stares at the eyes through the Black Rabbit Union Leaders mask. Are you serious? You want me to die? As soon as he looks into the eyes of the Black Rabbit Union Leader, he can tell that the mans words are serious. It becomes hard to manage his facial expression, so he bows and replies. If I lose, Ill die anyway. Then Ill do as you say, Leader. Contrary to what he said, So Gun-pyeong has no intention of throwing himself into the fire. So Gun-pyeong began considering discussing the issue with his subordinates, but then the Black Rabbit Union Leader said. Theres no need to drag your subordinates and cause a scene. Handle it alone. The order is also unexpected for So Gun-pyeong. What? Do we need to cause a ruckus to kill a mere errand boy? If youre not confident, Ill send someone else. So Gun-pyeong replies in a reluctant voice. Not at all. Then Ill do as promised. If you die in the hands of the errand boy and dont return, I will avenge you myself. Dont let your guard down. The Black Rabbit Union Leader makes the order, but he is internally curious about this errand boy. Is this a joke from one of the generals? But I cant think of anyone doing this. The Black Rabbit Union Leader carefully looks at the faces of his subordinates through his mask. Perhaps because the master built the troops by force, it is more challenging to bond with these subordinates than to train in martial arts. The Black Rabbit Union Leader waves his hand and says. You can leave now. Yes, sir. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks The Golden Dragon Pavilion Leader So Gun-pyeong remains alone in the main hall until everyone has left and looks around the Black Rabbit Union. So this is how it feels to be thrown out like an old shoe. He wants to at least spit on the floor, but So Gun-pyeong manages to hold back. I continue my seclusion in the pavilions and proceed to throw myself into training. Ilyang Prefecture has been too quiet, so it will not be strange if something happens soon. My daily life is monotonous. Train, meditate, take a walk, eat, train, sleep, meditate and take another walk. I eat most of my meals in the Chunyang Restaurant, so after a walk around Ilyang Prefecture, I head there as always. Perhaps because it is early in the evening, only one other man is in the shop. Jang Deuk-soo puts down a bowl of noodles in front of the customer and looks at me nervously. Long time no see. What can I get for you? Ill have something different instead of my usual rice soup. Make it spicy. Spicy, huh? Coming right up. I sit at an empty table and look at the man dressed in black. Strangely, people who like to wear black clothes have greater odds of being beaten up by me. This man, who I see for the first time in Ilyang Province, has placed a unique-looking katana () on the table. In that very short moment, I realize that the man seems fairly skilful. Wow I also realize the nature of the mans katana. I didnt know the man, but Ive heard about that unique katana many times. I was wondering who it was. So it was 18,000 Years (ټ) from the Unorthodox Faction. 18,000 Years does not refer to his inner cultivation but is instead a nickname due to his strangely long life. His nickname was derived from Shuo Dongfangs nickname, a man who lived a very long life. This guy isnt much right now, but the man that became a big shot in the Unorthodox Faction in a different future is sitting here eating noodles in the Chunyang Restaurant. He slurps the noodles and calls for Jang Deuk-soo in the kitchen. Hey, owner. Jang Deuk-soo answers back. Yes, do you need anything else? I heard theres a guy named Lee Zaha in this town, do you know where I can find him? Jang Deuk-soo answers after a pause. Oh him? Im not sure. I havent seen him around lately. Why? Did something happen to him? Ah, he caused a lot of trouble around here. I suspect hed run somewhere far away. So, why are you looking for Lee Zaha? Should I ask around for him? The head of the Vendor Sect is wise indeed. Even though I am sitting across from the man, Jang Deuk-soo casually says that he hasnt seen me recently. I make intense eye contact with 18,000 Years. He suddenly says with a smile. Lee Zaha is right in front of me, how dare you lie to my face? So the rumors are true, the people of the Ilyang Prefecture have really lost their minds. No sound is heard from the kitchen. Amid the silence, Jang Deuk-soo reaches out for a pot lid. Hell use it to protect himself if a hidden weapon comes flying his way. The guy named 18,000 Years asks me while eating noodles. Errand boy, do you know who I am? Naturally, he thinks I wouldnt recognize who he is. Unfortunately, I am the informant of the Low-Down Sect, the prophet of the Low-Down Sect, the head of the Low-Down Sect, the founder of the Low-Down Sect, and a person who knows the future inside and out. Especially those who are famous or will become famous in the future in Kangho. I was already very interested in Kangho masters even when I was still an errand boy or a cemetery caretaker. I reply in an aloof tone. Youre So Gun-pyeong of the Black Rabbit Union, son of a bitch. Where are your manners? ! So Gun-pyeong looks surprised, as if he has been caught stealing something. Actually, it isnt that hard to guess it was the Black Rabbit Union, but he never could have imagined that I would get his name right. So Gun-pyeong, who had arrived in the Ilyang Prefecture alone after being discarded like an old shoe, asks me with eyes as big as a saucer. Who the hell are you? I stare at So Gun-pyeong. I dont know if the guy destined to live up to 18,000 years is aware hes facing the biggest crisis of his life. Seeing how he is still looking at me with rude eyes, he doesnt seem to know yet. As if he is curious about my identity, So Gun-pyeong asks again. Who are you really? I am Lee Zaha and Lee Zaha is an errand boy. Thats who I am. Youve come to the right place, is that what youre asking? What, is that a riddle? Or was it a profound question? If so, then Im not sure. Its so profound Ill need to think deep. Who am I? Crazy bastard. Meanwhile, So Gun-pyeong eats the noodles with a slurping sound as if hell finish the noodles even if the sky collapses. I speak towards the inanimate kitchen. Owner, are the spicy noodles not ready yet? Im hungry. Jang Deuk-soo, holding the lid tightly like a shield, frowns. This bastard is gonna die any minute, yet he still wants spicy noodles? Jang Deuk-soo replies after a pause. We just ran out of noodles, sir. The heck, is this how you do business? So Gun-pyeong, who is eating noodles, sneers. What a funny little town. I proceed to correct the remark from So Gun-pyeong. This town isnt funny. Ill make sure no Unorthodox Faction can even step foot into this place. So Gun-pyeong rinses his mouth with water and spits it on the floor. Its never too late to say that crap after beating me. Owner, bill please. Jang Deuk-soo replies from the kitchen, thinking he would die if he took the money. Oh, dont worry about it. Im glad you enjoyed the noodles. Im sorry I didnt recognize you, and I overly jested with you. Please pardon me. So Gun-pyeong smiles. I ate, so I have to pay. Come and get it. I snort. Hes in the kitchen. Jang Deuk-soo replies to my words in a distant tone. W-Well Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only Only then does So Gun-pyeong direct his eyes at me. However, unlike the usual Unorthodox Faction behaviour, So Gun-pyeong takes out money and calmly places it on the table. Anyhow, he pays for his meal. I dont know if this guy knows about his own fate. His fate has changed from being beaten half-dead to getting just his ass kicked Chapter 29 Chapter 29 C Sharp-Tongued Man So Gun-pyeong places the money on the table, then stands up and says. Hey errand boy, theres no space in here. Lets go outside. And you, owner. Yes? The noodles were delicious. Ill come again. Still locking himself in the kitchen, the head of the Vendor Sect replies. Dont mention it, do come again next time. When So Gun-pyeong leaves the Chunyang Restaurant in a relaxed manner, Jang Deuk-soo asks me without looking up. Zaha, what now? Are you going to be okay? He looks too dangerous. Then why did you joke with the said dangerous customer? I was nervous, so I just babbled. What did you say to him? The blade looked strange so I said it looks like it was brought from Nanman (U). It is indeed a blade from the South. Shit. Nanman refers to the barbarians living in the south. Jang Deuk-soo couldve lost his head due to the offensive remark if the other party had actually been from the south. Jang Deuk-soo grips the pot lid tightly with both hands without realizing it. I say. I dont know what will happen, so make sure you hold it at all times. Jang Deuk-soo nods his head up and down. Okay, please dont die. That wont happen. Ah, get me a knife from the kitchen. A knife? Why? I didnt bring a weapon. Its better than nothing. Jang Deuk-soo hurriedly takes a large chopping knife and hands it over to me. Here. I take the big knife and say to Jang Deuk-soo. See you later. Can I watch? I point to the lid and say. Dont come out. Just keep holding on to this and watch. Okay. Facing So Gun-pyeong in his early 20s in the town I grew up in is a new experience for me. In another future, So Gun-pyeong becomes a man who makes quite a name in the Unorthodox Faction. Still, it falls short compared to my notoriety. A thought suddenly crosses my mind. At the very least, the masters of big and small factions around the Ilyang Prefecture wont be able to kill me. Unless someone incredibly famous is to appear, no one could make me nervous or tense. This isnt about inner cultivation or martial art abilities. Its about whether they have experience fighting a famous big shot. At this point in time, the Black Rabbit Union Leader had to fight aggressively just because of the Cho brothers, so hes just an amateur compared to me. And this 18,000 Years fellow who will become known for his tenacious lifespan is the subordinate of said amateur. In short, hes unfit to be my opponent. Is this really fair? So Gun-pyeong and I are going against each other thanks to that amateur. I ask So Gun-pyeong. Hey, Gun-pyeong. Why did you come alone without any lackeys? Did you come as a sacrifice? So Gun-pyeongs relaxed expression soon becomes distorted. Why would we make such a fuss just to deal with a mere errand boy? And dont call my name like that. Its embarrassing Are you ashamed to fight me? Shut up. Isnt it the Unorthodox Factions charm to move in groups? Seeing how your face turned sour, your leader sent you to your death, didnt he? I dont know why a village errand boy is so arrogant. I also dont know why a third-rate Unorthodox Faction nobody is acting so cocky. So Gun-pyeong draws his sword, the Night Blade (ҹ). Thats the weapon I recognize. The Night Blade is a deformed sword (ε) with a narrow-width blade (), and it is a weapon with an excessive curve on its blade. I dont know how it was acquired, but it was made in the South. It was also known as a legendary sword () since it was a weapon used by a man famous for surviving a tenacious life. Perhaps that blade saved So Gun-pyeongs life many times in another lifetime. So Gun-pyeong asks me when he sees me holding a kitchen knife. What are you doing with that kitchen knife? I sniff at the kitchen knife. Huh, it still smells like garlic. Just know itll hurt like hell if garlic seeps into your wounds, and itll sting. So Gun-pyeong cant help but laugh inside. His own Night Blade can cut through ordinary weaponry like its mere tofu. I warn So Gun-pyeong, who has a confident look on his face. Remember this, you third-rate Unorthodox Faction jackass. If you mess with the errand boy, youll be taken out by a knife that smells like garlic. Pressing his mouth into a firm line, So Gun-pyeong narrows the distance with an expressionless face. The Night Blade is sharp and sturdy, so naturally, the kitchen knife is at a disadvantage. If their blades clash a couple of times, the kitchen knife will be damaged. It can be overcome by enhancing the knife with internal energy, but thatll be a waste. Thats why I only defend with the kitchen knife only when its necessary. While watching So Gun-pyeong fight, I observe his moves while maintaining our distance. Of course, the Night Blade doesnt touch my body. No matter how much he uses tricks, fake moves, or makes any fatal blows, I easily avoid them. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Regardless of the internal energy that I can manifest, the eyes and experiences that I see the battle through are no different from the days I was the Crazy Demon. So Gun-pyeong and I have a big difference in hands-on experience. However, it is worth watching So Gun-pyeong fight. Perhaps because he is young like me, he is overflowing with fighting spirit. But if he is smart enough, he should realize why I am only defending instead of attacking. So Gun-pyeong, who had been one-sidedly attacking for a long time, gradually becomes stiff as a chill runs down his spine. His overflowing murderous intent and fighting spirit gradually subside as cold reason cools his body. He does have some sense, huh. As such, I monitor the changes in his mental state and atmosphere. So Gun-pyeong, who has been attacking like crazy, suddenly stops. Who are you? How can you predict all my movements? Like I said, Im the errand boy. Shut up, you damned errand boy. Thats not what Im asking. Are you one of the Twelve Generals like our master? Youre going to ask who I am and then tell me to shut up? You must be out of your mind. Just take it that youre sloppy. Sloppy? You mastered a crappy technique taught to the slaves of the Unorthodox Faction. Slaves of the Unorthodox Faction? What youre using is not a proper sword technique, nor an actual fighting style. Youre just relying on experience and waving your sword around like a dance. So Gun-pyeong has never heard anything like this in his life. But he notes that the word selection is a little strange. Slave of the Unorthodox Faction? So Gun-pyeong asks me. Why did you call my swordsmanship martial arts for slaves? I have a long-standing belief since my past life that all the forces led by the Twelve Generals are just Dae Na-chals slaves. Actually, the word slave is too generous. Youre not like the other members of the Unorthodox Faction. Youre all his puppets, his pawns, his fighting cocks, his playthings, his clean-up crew, a gang that supplies him women and money, and kisses his ass Shut up! Look at how pathetic the Twelve Generals are. Youll wear those lame masks if he tells you to, kill who he says to kill, train who he says to train, run sects if he asks, have competitions to determine the ranks solely to entertain him and shower him with money and women. What a bunch of scumbags. Among them, you are a low-ranking slave ordered by a slightly higher-ranking slave, a hopeless, trashy Unorthodox Faction, a slave rabbit when alive, and discarded when you serve no purpose. You might think youre somebody, but youre just the jackass who cant even win against an errand boy. As he hears the whirlwind of insults, So Gun-pyeongs eyes become bloodshot. His legs buckle at that moment as if internal energy is escaping from his body. Why? Did you think the Unorthodox Faction was cool or something? I insult him with words before actually punching him. You dont have to be so upset. Dae Na-chal, that sick pervert will die by my hand later. At this time, Jang Deuk-soo, who is watching, exclaims. That was one hell of an insult. So Gun-pyeongs sharp ears do not miss the remark, and he glances at Jang Deuk-soo. Jang Deuk-soo raises the pot lid in reflex, but thankfully, So Gun-pyeong did not launch an attack. The words slave, puppet, pawn, fighting cock, and plaything linger in So Gun-pyeongs mind. It is the first time he has ever faltered due to someone elses words, so he feels even more flustered. Taking deep breaths to calm himself, So Gun-pyeong stares at me and says, Keep yapping. Wont you look at that? Im the man who can infuriate a high priest with slander until they vomit blood. I grin. The Twelve Generals battle to decide the ranks, whoever comes first learns directly from Dae Na-chal. But whats the point of learning from him? Youre just idiots thinking you got to learn some superior technique. Dae Na-chal is just one of the many masters in the Unorthodox Faction. Is he at least the best master? Hell no. Do you think a guy as selfish as Dae Na-chal would pass on his technique so easily? Youre nothing but his pawns and playthings. Like I said, youre just a slave of a slave. A life so pathetic its rare to find. Is that all you have to say? If you were that good, you wouldnt just avoid my attacks. Lets put an end to this. When So Gun-pyeong, who manages to regain his breath, prepares another attack, I respond further. Gun-pyeong, an upright man does not live like a slave. I guess you need to take a few punches to come to your senses. I injected Fire Chicken energy into the chopping knife that was handed to me by Jang Deuk-soo. The kitchen knife burns red as the energy engulfs it. Fwhoooooosh! The energy blazes bright red and unfurls like haze after the kitchen knife, which is a little larger than my palm, turns bright crimson. The result of my continuous cultivation of the Fire Chicken makes its debut as the kitchen knife shines. So Gun-pyeong, who is about to launch a preemptive attack, watches the flaring kitchen knife with surprise in his eyes. The red light emitting from the kitchen knife is shaped like a long sword. So Gun-pyeong realizes he cant win as soon as he sees that. But he is too prideful to step down right now. I speak to So Gun-pyeong. Do I still look like a moron? You can kneel and surrender now. Or youre going to get beat to a pulp. You slave rabbit lackey. The Fire Chickens secret weapon, the Fiery Fragrance, mixes its scent with the sword energy on the kitchen knife. The techniques official name is Fiery Fragrance, but I call this secret weapon the Taste of Fire. The aroma resembles the smoky taste that subtly seeps into fried rice. My posture and appearance might seem funny to those who dont know martial arts. I am holding the kitchen knife with my right hand held high. But Im sure this isnt funny to So Gun-pyeong. When he is told to kneel, veins pop on So Gun-pyeongs forehead. What kind of man of the Unorthodox Faction would kneel before a young man who was recently just an errand boy? Bracing himself that he would die fighting me, So Gun-pyeong injects his greatest internal energy into the Night Blade and launches it at me. Coarse, muddy-colored energy swirls around the Night Blade and shoots toward me. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only It is a sword wind (L) containing a rather menacing spirit. Not bad for vermin. There is undoubtedly momentum (). I shoot the kitchen knife enveloped with the Fiery Fragrance at the surging sword wind. The ordinary kitchen knife splits the sword wind with a loud, terrifying sound. Was it just my imagination, or did the Sword Echo(Q) sounds like a raging cry from an errand boy of a past life? Chapter 30 Chapter 30 C The Low-Down Sect Knows All The only person who can view this fight objectively is Jang Deuk-soo. He is surprised when grayish energy flashes like a gust of wind from So Gun-pyeongs sword. But the sword of the neighborhood guy who was an errand boy until not long ago is even more remarkable. The kitchen knife he had used to cut garlic into thin pieces shreds off the gusty wind with a wave of red energy, like that of marinated sauce. In Jang Deuk-soos eyes Is it because the kitchen knife won? The sight is beautiful. The sight Jang Deuk-soo, who didnt master martial arts, sees at the end of due is So Gun-pyeong getting knocked out by a kitchen knife while holding onto his bizarre Nanman sword. At the same time, Jang Deuk-soo drops the pot lid and covers his ears with both hands. So Gun-pyeongs body shoots off like an arrow due to the shock, hits the ground, and rolls around. Woah It is an incredible sight for Jang Deuk-soo. That was so cool. Jang Deuk-soo will not have found it surprising if the fight ends right there. Unexpectedly, So Gun-pyeong is still alive. The errand-boy-turned-clan-leader rushes in like a bull and proceeds to beat up So Gun-pyeong, who had managed to get to his feet. Punch, punch, punch, punch, punch, punch, punch The battle of the great masters degrades to a fight between local thugs. He sure is beating him to a pulp. Jang Deuk-soo then notices that something strange is happening. Jang Deuk-soo has an eye for it now. The reason why such a strong-looking Unorthodox Faction master is now being beaten unilaterally is probably because he is suffering from internal injuries, as the Kangho warriors say. In the meantime, his neighborhood brother, a former errand boy, continues to rough up the Unorthodox Faction master mercilessly. He is muttering something to So Gun-pyeong while beating him, but Jang Deuk-soo cant hear him from this distance. Hes out of his mind, too. Whats he doing? Having no understanding of the unfolding situation, Jang Deuk-soo steps forward and says. Jeez, Zaha. You can stop now. Hes gonna die. His attempt to stop him is also due to thinking that his neighborhood brother might have fallen into hysteria (֢). However, it is not an everyday sight for the owner of the Chunyang Restaurant, which sells rice soup, to try and stop the fight between a former errand boy and an Unorthodox Faction master. I grab onto So Gun-pyeongs hair and pull him up. Pretty tough, huh? Meanwhile, So Gun-pyeong looks at me with an expression that seems to ask what the heck am I talking about. I tighten my grip and say. Unorthodox Faction jackass, do you want to come to your senses? I sweep my hand across his cheek when he does not respond, and Jang Deuk-soo comes close and says, Are you trying to kill him? I find Jang Deuk-soos words funny, as he worries about the Black Rabbit Union master and a man later known as 18,000 Years. This is how most people who are only busy making a living are. They are people far detached from the world of Kangho. Being able to dodge the Fiery Fragrance proves So Gun-pyeong is indeed a professional. However, this guy survived because I intentionally reduced the force injected into the Fiery Fragrance. Gun-pyeong, do you feel like surrendering now? So Gun-pyeong grins at me. Give up? Do I look that pathetic to you? You look super pathetic. How can I surrender to an errand boy? Hit me as much as you want. I grin as I grasp So Gun-pyeongs cheeks. What an amusing dude. Did he survive so long because he always held his head high? I use the hand clutching So Gun-pyeongs cheek to slap him. With a loud smack, So Gun-pyeongs face slams on the floor, and then he faints. Strong-willed, I see. I like him. Jang Deuk-soo asks me as he watches the unconscious man. You beat him up, and yet you like him? I beat him up and he still didnt back down. A mans true worth is shown after being beaten up. And a person is about to die from revealing that true worth. How are we going to do business now? He looks like an official of the Black Rabbit Union. At that, I make eye contact with Jang Deuk-soo and say. I told you, code of conduct. All of this Is the Clan Leaders doing? It would be nice if that would make things easier for me. Then, hearing that a fight had broken out, Cha Sung-tae approaches us and asks. Leader, who are you beating up in daylight this time? I watch Cha Sung-tae blankly for a moment. Is it because this town is small? This guy always appears like a ghost at the end of every fight. I ask. Do you know him? No, who is he? He looks pretty hot-tempered. Its the Unorthodox Faction, isnt it? Hes the Golden Dragon Pavilion Leader of Black Rabbit Union. Cha Sung-tae mutters. If hes the Golden Dragon Pavilion Leader, then he ranks pretty high. But why did he come alone? His face is squished flat. I look at the man who passed out and predict. He must have come alone under the leaders order. Why? Itll be embarrassing if he came with support. Because Im an errand boy. Aha. And hes probably testing the waters. How notorious would the men of Ilyang Prefecture be? Perhaps Cha Sung-tae has grown some guts these days. He sticks out his foot and touches So Gun-pyeongs body. Hes still breathing. Should we kill him? I look at Cha Sung-tae. Now that he asked me to kill him, I suddenly didnt want to kill him anymore. Fate is mysterious. And it just feels somewhat awkward to kill the guy with the nickname 18,000 Years with my own hands. It would feel like killing a turtle that lived for hundreds of years. If hed survived so long in his previous life, doesnt it mean he had a life worth living? The life expectancy of Unorthodox Faction warriors is short, after all. Take him to an empty pavilion room. Ah, youre going to torture and kill him? I hit Cha Sung-tae on the head for the first time in a while. Why does the chief of the Rebirth Sect (T) keep talking about killing? Cha Sung-tae replies with a deadpan look while rubbing his head. Ah, thats what the Rebirth Sect is? I got it. Drag him. Also, take his sword. Understood. When Cha Sung-tae disappears with the unconscious So Gun-pyeong and his sword, Jang Deuk-soo picks up the kitchen knife on the floor, looks at it, and says in a surprised voice. Gasp! Look at this. Jang Deuk-soo says as he holds out the kitchen knife. Hes indeed a great master. I look at the crooked kitchen knife and say. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Not bad. Ill buy you a new kitchen knife. Its fine. I can fix it at the smithy. Its not like Mister Geum and I dont know each other. Do whatever you want. Jang Deuk-soo says worriedly. Isnt Ilyang Prefecture doomed? No way. The Black Rabbit Union will be doomed. Just focus on yourself. Ill do that. I look around the Zaha Inn construction site after parting with Jang Deuk-soo. To not bother the workers on site, I watch Yeon Ja-seong supervise the construction from a distance and head towards the Plum Blossom Pavilion. At this point, I wonder if I should barge into the Black Rabbit Union first. I dont want to cause damage to those who are just busy making ends meet. Not all of the Black Rabbit Union know how to pay for their meals like So Gun-pyeong. I say to Cha Sung-tae, who is standing watch by So Gun-pyeongs bed. Wake him up. Yes. Cha Sung-tae kicks the bed and says, Wake up, asshole. You think this is your house? The unconscious So Gun-pyeong opens his eyes quietly as if he is waking up and suddenly sits up, startled. Gah! So Gun-pyeong looks around with astonished eyes and gulps down his saliva. Why am I alive? I ask the guy who hasnt come to his senses yet. Gun-pyeong, where is that insane Dae Na-chal? I have no idea. How would I know? Even our master doesnt know. So Gun-pyeong frowns and touches his face while talking. His cheeks are swollen. What about the leader of the Black Rabbit Union? He watches over his own clan. Im asking what hes up to these days. Hes in training. Is it another ranking match again? So Gun-pyeong looks at me, stunned as if asking how I knew that information. Why? Is it strange that I know? Of course, its strange. The Low-Down Sect knows everything, except the things we dont. So Gun-pyeong furrows his brows because he cant understand what is being said in his state of confusion. What? I am a little proud after I said it. I have known about it since I returned to the past. I will pass on all the future information and knowledge in my brain to the Low-Down Sect. Only then will the Low-Down Sect become the strongest sect in Kangho. Its all thanks to my return anyway. Cha Sung-tae echoes what I say while glaring at So Gun-pyeong. The Low-Down Sect knows everything. I correct Cha Sung-taes words. Thats not true. We dont know what we dont know. Oh, really? The important thing is that were able to find out what we dont know quickly. Thats right. Cha Sung-tae suddenly nags at So Gun-pyeong. Do you understand? We find out about what we dont know. In the end, theres nothing the Low-Down Sect wont know. The most powerful intelligence group, thats us. However, So Gun-pyeong doesnt know what kind of organization the Low-Down Sect is. So Gun-pyeong looked at me and said, Just as I expected, youre no ordinary man. Youre a mole for the Low-Down Sect, right? Mole? You said you were an errand boy. Cha Sung-tae smacks So Gun-pyeongs head. With a slap sound, Cha Sung-tae yells at So Gun-pyeong, who has sprawled on the bed again. How dare a rude bastard call our leader an errand boy? Are you out of your mind? Cha Sung-tae continues as he looks at me. Leader, this bastard has quite the talent. I suddenly look at Cha Sung-tae and worry briefly if he might become a stereotypical henchman later. When So Gun-pyeong jumps up angrily, Cha Sung-tae steps back with a startled look. Ah, that scared me. So Gun-pyeong seems to have a robust natural body, but his resilience isnt average either. So Gun-pyeong is not a man Cha Sung-tae can handle alone. However, Sung-tae, who is likely to become a typical henchman in the future, doesnt back down because I am here as well. What are you going to do glaring at me like that? Do you want to die here? I then say to Cha Sung-tae. Leave us for a bit. Cha Sung-tae replies politely. Yes, Leader. So Gun-pyeong looks me up and down with new consideration and says. Youre the Low-Down Sect Leader? I thought you were an errand boy. I look at So Gun-pyeong for a long time and then say, Gun-pyeong, cut the nonsense. Have you considered joining me? I ask him the question with no expectations. So Gun-pyeong immediately replies. No. How can a wolf pup Join a dog; knowing the end of the sentence, I immediately cut him off. Shut up, before I rip off your mouth. It is only natural because this is a sloppy sect, So Gun-pyeong had never heard of it. I glare at So Gun-pyeong for a moment without saying a word and then ask an emotionless and stiff question. You look like youll live a long life. Should I just kill you right now? I slowly approach So Gun-pyeong. So Gun-pyeong cant answer. He thinks he will die right away if he replies to my question. I then say with a grin. No need to be formal. Answer me carefully. If you want to be killed, Ill kill you right away. Wolf pup, what? Were you trying to say how you cant go under a dog? Who made this up? Ill go find and kill them. I think that this is a word that lingers in my mind. I dont know why. I have secret know-how in making him my subordinate. It is a very effective and historically verified method. The prime method of collecting disobedient people as subordinates is inspired by when Zhuge Liang caught Meng Huo. The so-called Capture and Release Seven Times (߿v). Capture, beat them, let them go, and beat them up again. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only My conclusion is that So Gun-pyeong has only been beaten up once. I utter the thought that is going through my mind. This is why men should read the Three Kingdoms. So Gun-pyeong, who does not understand the context of the conversation, is looking at me with fear for the first time. Chapter 31 Chapter 31 C How dare you guys leave me out? Answer me. At my urging, So Kun-pyeong speaks in a subdued voice. Spare me. Perhaps hes a man who knows how to feel shame, but his face turns red. I ask. Why? Do you have an old mother or a cute daughter at home? Then Ill spare you. Its not like that. Otherwise, itll be a little difficult. If you have a cute daughter, its a free pass. So Gun-pyeong tries to say, What the heck? but swallows it back quickly. She may be somewhere, but not officially. You punk its a joke. Im sorry. I was going to make you a sub-sect chief if you join me, but you refuse, and yet you want me to spare your life, is that it? So Gun-pyeong, who is intimidated and ashamed, barely utters out. Im a man of my word. If you let me live, I will never go near the Low-Down Sect again. I swear, I will not use my power on you or anyone related to you. I swear on my sword. I am thinking of taking this guy under my wing in the future, so Im gonna let him go for now. Applying what my respectable mentor Zhuge Liang said, I can make even the most strong-headed jackass my subordinate if I catch and beat them seven times. The crucial point here is to let them go. Because the other person has no intention of coming under me yet. Zhuge Liang is a great man not for the act of Capture and Release Seven Times itself but because he could read peoples minds. Honestly, I am curious how this guy could survive in my other life for so long. And I am someone who has to find answers if I have a question. Go. Itd be better if you come back stronger. Youll be under me anyway. We need to work together for our fates to reach us, but the time is not now. Hell live a long life in the Unorthodox Faction, so well meet again someday. So Gun-pyeong frowns and answers. Where do you want me to go? Just get the hell out, fucker. So Gun-pyeong looks startled and asks. Ah, can I really leave? So Gun-pyeong probably thought he would be tortured or beaten to death, so he cant help but be astounded. Unorthodox Faction members always imagine the worst, so his words and behaviour are rough. I wave my hands again, motioning for him to get out. So Gun-pyeong cant help but open his mouth because he could not understand why he is being spared. Why are you sparing my life? Gun-pyeong, the only Kangho warrior who survived in the Ilyang Prefecture now is me. How did I get here? I killed the pimp, buried the useless bastard, and killed all the bastards that operated the pavilions. Its common for Kangho warriors to fight like this. Ill happily accept a rematch when you get stronger and return. However I scowl at So Gun-pyeong. If I hear any more rumours of you killing merchants and ordinary people, I will send a million members of the Low-Down Sect to find you and tear you from limb to limb. Or bury you alive like the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader. A million? Why? You dont think I would? All the merchants in the world, whether they know it or not, theyre part of the Low-Down Sect. Thats what I decided. Ill keep that in mind. As soon as So Gun-pyeong stands up and opens the door, Cha Sung-tae hurriedly peeks in his head and asks me. Are you letting him go? Let him go. Hm roger. So Gun-pyeong bows slightly in front of the door. Thank you for letting me live despite the defeat. I will keep my promise until the day I die. I watch So Gun-pyeong walk out and then mutter to myself. Thats right. Lunatics should fight lunatics. While I mutter this, Cha Sung-tae, who is habitually shaking his legs by the door, stares at me. I ask Cha Sung-tae. Dont you think so? What you say makes good sense. Lunatics fighting with lunatics. Cha Sung-tae points at me with his finger, then points at himself and nods his head once. I am slightly offended. Dont point at me, you jerk. Im sorry. What are you sorry about? Pointing my finger at you. I lecture Cha Sung-tae on one of the ways of Kangho. Sung-tae, you dont know why pointing fingers is bad? Apart from courtesy. Oh, what Is there something else? I lift an index finger and aim a Finger Wind (ָL) attack at Cha Sung-tae. My fingers begin to turn red as the energy of the Fire Chicken swirls. Cha Sung-tae raises his hands with a pale face. Oh, apologies. Ill be careful from now on. Dont point fingers at anyone. You can be set on fire. A master can mistake you for a master of a Finger Technique (ָ). Do you understand? Ill keep that in mind. Never provoke the lunatics. The only thing waiting for you on the other side is not curses or assault, but death. Also Manager Cha. Yes. Its been a while since I put you in charge of the general affairs. Arent you going to report to me? What report The total amount of hidden funds, the Cho brothers wealth, how much investment is going into the sect, daily meal expenses, miscellaneous expenses, cleaning expenses, as well as updates on the men who joined from the Black Rabbit Union. Report everything. Arrange it nicely in a document. If you cant handle it alone, part of your job is to find someone good at this. Cha Sung-tae stands in front of the door for a moment with a lost look. Cha Sung-tae then replies with unfocused eyes. Did you say once Im fired, I will be executed? I cant remember clearly. You have a good memory. Is there anything else besides the death penalty? Yeah, what can it be? I point at Cha Sung-tae with my finger. To be fired, to be pointed at. Choose. Im such a considerate leader even giving his lackeys a choice. Cha Sung-tae punches his fist into his palm and answers me with a serious look. Leader, Ill organize and report it to you. Instead Instead what? Please set the highest monthly salary for managers and chiefs. I cant work in this manner. There goes this brat again. I click my tongue once and approve his request, acting as if I cant ignore it. Okay, go ahead. Thank you. I wont spend any money anyway, so its not a bad deal. Arriving safely outside the Plum Blossom Pavilion, So Gun-pyeong looks around with a stern look. The Black Rabbit Union Leaders words appear in his mind. [The target is an errand boy. If you fail, you must end your own life.] So Gun-pyeong murmurs. I mean, I dont intend to die. Why should I? His life was given by his parents, not the Black Rabbit Union. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Before he knows it, the sky is becoming dark, and So Gun-pyeong is hungry again. While walking, he incidentally makes eye contact with Jang Deuk-soo in front of the Chunyang Restaurant. Jang Deuk-soo is surprised as if he had seen a ghost and says. Ah, so youre alive. Jang Deuk-soo slaps a hand over his mouth as soon as the words leave his mouth. Remembering the Low-Down Sect Leaders words, So Gun-pyeong replies carefully. Our discussion is over now. By the way, can I get a bowl of noodles? So Gun-pyeong has nowhere to go right now. He is hungry and can feel pain throbbing in places where the Low-Down Sect Leader had beat him. Jang Deuk-soo smiles awkwardly as he looks at So Gun-pyeong. Im sorry, but were all out. Hmm. So Gun-pyeong sighs while looking at Jang Deuk-soo and throws a string of silver coins to him just in case. Jang Deuk-soo, who catches the string of silver coins with both hands, stands in surprise as So Gun-pyeong says. Ill pay upfront. Jang Deuk-soo looks around and replies to So Gun-pyeong in a low voice. Right this way, sir. Jang Deuk-soo thinks. Business is always about risking your life. So Gun-pyeong then says to Jang Deuk-soo while he is eating his noodles. I thought I was going to die, but he spared me. Ah, really? Jang Deuk-soo watches So Gun-pyeong eat noodles with little emotion on his face. So Gun-pyeong then asks a question out of curiosity. Have you lived in this town for a long time? That person, he wasnt an errand boy at first, was he? He was an errand boy. Positive. Hm, then where did he start learning martial arts? His skills are good Jang Deuk-soo answers as he washes the dishes. Thats what Im saying. We dont know either. He suddenly acted like a different person one day. Zaha has been running his inn poorly since his grandfather died, and Im just guessing its because hes been training hard. I heard the sect is called the Low-Down Sect. Did you know that? Yes, Im also part of the Low-Down Sect. So Gun-pyeong tilts his head. I thought it was an organization full of masters because it was called a sect (T). Thats not the case. They are normal people like me. Most of us are working people. Thats why he said he was the only Kangho master. After finishing the noodles, So Gun-pyeong sighs deeply without leaving his chair. Jang Deuk-soo cant help but feel uncomfortable. Ugh, just get out of here. So Gun-pyeong, who read Jang Deuk-soos thoughts, asks for understanding first. Im sorry. I need to think about something. Can I leave later? Sure. Jang Deuk-soo had received a silver coin for one bowl of noodles, so he couldnt just kick him out due to his conscience. Is there anything else I can make for you? You overpaid Oh, can I get something else? Of course. Anything is fine. Jang Deuk-soo tries to answer back with careful words. We dont have anything here. As So Gun-pyeong looks at Jang Deuk-soo, Jang Deuk-soo lowers his head slightly and says, Im kidding. Ill go prepare something for you then. Jang Deuk-soo goes into the kitchen and boils the broth again. Meanwhile, So Gun-pyeong ponders over his failure and thinks about the subordinates he left behind in the Black Rabbit Union. If he returns, hell be killed by the leader. He thinks it will be unbecoming if he leaves without saying goodbye to his men, so he falls into a deep state of worry. So Gun-pyeong murmurs without realizing. Life isnt easy. So Gun-pyeong thinks he is talking to himself, but Jang Deuk-soo in the kitchen replies. Its the same for everyone. Believe me. You, too? I earn a day and live a day. But I can still get by now that the punks demanding bribes are gone. Zaha- no, the Sect Leader created this sect for that sole purpose. For that sole purpose? Jang Deuk-soo sticks his head out of the kitchen and says, The guardian of the ordinary working class, thats what the Low-Down Sect is was what Zaha said. When Jang Deuk-soo heads back into the kitchen to cook, So Gun-pyeong becomes lost in thought with his arms folded. He thinks of the whole problem and the Low-Down Sect Leader. Hes not completely lost after all Jang Deuk-soo boils whole pork ribs in rice soup. It is a simple dish that uses leftover rice soup broth. A while later, Jang Deuk-soo comes out of the kitchen and gives three large pork rib bones to So Gun-pyeong with three more ribs in a bowl and says. Enjoy. So Gun-pyeong says as he looks at the boiled pork ribs. What is this? It looks like pork bones. Jang Deuk-soo replies as he tears the flesh off of the pork rib. Why would it have a name? Its just pork ribs. Tastes good, though. So Gun-pyeong grabs chopsticks as his mouth waters even though he has just eaten noodles. Then, Jang Deuk-soo says, Please eat this with your hands. If my hands get greasy, itll be difficult to hold the sword. The only master in this town is Lee Zaha. And youve already lost to Zaha. Feel free to eat it with your hands. Youre right. Ive already lost. I know. Like Jang Deuk-soo, So Gun-pyeong also grabs the pork rib with his bare hands and eats it. He then folds his arms with admiration on his face as he feels something profound. Wow, this is Wow. What do you think? This is really good. Ive never tasted a delicacy like this before. Jang Deuk-soo grins. Thats a relief. I guess its worth selling noodles. As soon as So Gun-pyeong gulps and grabs another pork rib to deliver it to his mouth The door of the Chunyang Restaurant opens with a chilling sound. Creakkk! Holding a rib bone in his hand, So Gun-pyeong makes eye contact with the Low-Down Sect Leader. ! . Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only . . I stare at the pork ribs So Gun-pyeong and Jang Deuk-soo are eating and growl. These bastards How dare you eat pork ribs without me After hearing what I said, So Gun-pyeong calmly puts down the pork rib bones that he hadnt bitten into. Chapter 32 Chapter 32 C Axes are great for setting the mood The reason why I am back at the Chunyang Restaurant is simple. Because I havent eaten yet. How will you make rice soup if you use up all the ingredients? You said you ran out of noodles. Is this how youre going to do business? Jang Deuk-soo answers. I havent run out of noodles yet. You said it ran out earlier. Thats because he was lying. All of the chief of the Vendor Sects words are lies. Get me a bowl. I took one of Jang Deuk-soos pork ribs, put it in a bowl, and took one of the pork ribs So Gun-pyeong was eating and sat across from him. Jang Deuk-soo asked as I grabbed the pork ribs with my hand and began nibbling. Is that all youre having? Do you want some noodles? Forget it, lets just eat. When I rip off the flesh of the pork rib, Jang Deuk-soo also proceeds to dig in. As soon as the two started digging in, So Gun-pyeong is also forced to bite into his own pork ribs. The hands of the three are soon covered in pork grease. I ask So Gun-pyeong while eating pork ribs. Is it good? Theyre very delicious. Its only for regulars, but youre not a regular. Why are you eating it? So Gun-pyeong taps his chest as if his lungs are stifled by something. Then Jang Deuk-soo clicks his tongue and nags. Za-ha, you said you dont mess with dogs when you eat, so let him eat in peace. Biting meat off the bone, I retort. This guy came all the way here to kill me. And I spared his life. But he doesnt want to join the Low-Down Sect. Hes still getting treated like a regular when he doesnt even dine here. Have the ways of Kangho fallen this low? Suddenly, I notice the Night Blade that So Gun-pyeong placed on the table. This is quite the famous sword in the Unorthodox Faction, so I want to take a look. Lets take a look at your sword. Hand it over. So Gun-pyeong says with a startled look. I cant. This is like my life. I wont take it away. So let me have a look. So Gun-pyeong is nervous as if his lover is being forcibly taken away. He carefully pushes the Night Blade to me. He looks nervous like he is really giving up his life. I wipe the oil off my hands casually on my clothes. After completely removing the grease, I pull out the Night Blade and look at the sharp blade. This is a good sword. I flick the blade while slightly channeling Qi into it with my fingers. Thung! Firm and resilient Although So Gun-pyeong lacks internal strength compared to me, the kitchen knife would have been cut like a dumpling if I hadnt been careful. Returning the Night Blade to So Gun-pyeong, I say. This is a rare legendary sword (). So Gun-pyeong nods at the comment. Indeed. But this sword isnt as good as a kitchen knife. Hahaha. Jang Deuk-soo, who had witnessed the fight, also laughs loudly as I break into laughter. Wahahahahaha. Then, as soon as Jang Deuk-soo meets So Gun-pyeongs eyes, he flinches and stops laughing. I say while glaring at So Gun-pyeong. Who said you can glare at the owner of my favorite restaurant? I wasnt glaring. I was just looking at him. Look at him with manners. Yes. We continue eating the pork ribs. I always have a habit of thinking about the relationship between a weapon and a person. In my opinion If an incompetent Kangho warrior has an excellent weapon, the owner will likely suffer an untimely death. This is because he is killed by masters who want that weapon. On the other hand, there is a high possibility that even if you possess a weapon far below your skills, you will die after being defeated. During a fight, they will be defeated by the relative merits of the weapon. Its also a problem if the weapon is way too good for them to handle. Another problem is not being able to find a weapon that matches their skills. Hence, life in Kangho is so problematic. From that point of view, So Gun-pyeong and the Night Blade have good compatibility. It looked like a weapon barbarians or bandits would use. After swiftly polishing off the pork ribs, I turn and ask So Gun-pyeong. You must have nowhere to go, huh? I have something on my mind, so Im just here for a bit. Youre thinking about your men who are still in the union? Yes. You guys are close? So Gun-pyeong, who has been staring at me for a while, replies. Thats right, I think of many of them as my brothers. Oh. Im not sure if youre aware, but most of the men in the Black Rabbit Union are those who surrendered to Dae Na-chal after he killed our former leader. Myself included. We had no choice. He made an example of our officials by killing them. The casualties in the Golden Dragon Pavilion were not great, so Dae Na-chal didnt mix his goons with us. I reply with a grave look. How did you survive? I wasnt a high-ranking member back then. I think this guy must have been one hell of a lucky man. Even now, I have no fear of the Twelve Generals, but Dae Na-chal is different. This is because he is an old Kangho warrior. Someone who had jumped into Kangho decades earlier and survives to this day. It is difficult for me to accurately gauge his skills because, in my past life, Dae Na-chal was not killed by me but by the Poison Demon (ħ). I briefly recall the story of the Poison Demon that I know of and review my plans. If So Gun-pyeong doesnt return, there is a high possibility the leader of the Black Rabbit Union himself will come after me. Being attacked is not my hobby. I conclude that it would be better for me to see the Black Rabbit Union before they could come to the Ilyang Prefecture. So Gun-pyeong. What is it? Take me to see the Black Rabbit Union after this. So Gun-pyeongs eyes widen. Youre asking me to tag along? Listen, Im being serious. If I go alone, I might kill not just the leader but all of the Black Rabbit Union warriors. If the fight escalates into a war, you can step in at the right moment, at least collect your men, so they dont die. This is the best I can do. It was clear that if I killed all of So Gun-pyeongs underlings, there was no way that he would join me. Even if we make an invasion, our best shot is to only take out the Black Rabbit Union Leader. However, how can we accurately predict the outcome of the fight against the Unorthodox Faction? So Gun-pyeong asks a question while being flustered. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks When are we leaving? Ill grab a decent weapon from the smithy to set the mood. Lets go as soon as I come back. Wait here. Jang Deuk-soo asks. A decent weapon to set the mood? What is that? I stand up and answer briefly. An axe. Jang Deuk-soo will soon find out how an axe can split someones head. Leader, what brings you here? When I appear in Dragon Head Smithy, Geum Chul-yong greets me. Are you here to ask about the Crazy Blade? No, thats not why Im here. Then theres another fight. I answer Geum Chul-yong honestly. The Black Rabbit Union sent an assassin. So Im thinking of returning the favor. Assassin? Who? I point my thumb at my chest. Me. Hows the progress on the Crazy Blade? Im not pestering, just curious. Geum Chul-yong crosses his arms and says. The vice master said hell go down south and ask around the Yue Black Market (Խ). Acquiring good iron is much harder than making a sword or blade. Well hear news from him soon. The Yue Black Market is an exclusive market run by the Yue people, a minority ethnic group. Specifically, they do not do any business with the Kangho warriors in the central district. The vice master is of the Yue, which is why he could go there. If youre planning to go as an assassin, what weapons do you need? Get me a good broadaxe (, a large axe). The bigger and heavier, the better. Its the first time Ive heard of an assassin using an axe. The more skillful the assassins are, the less likely they are to rely on weapons. They can fight amateurs with chopsticks. I see. Leader, I just thought of this, but Ill ask for your opinion. Go ahead. Why dont we run a black market in the Low-Down Sect, too? I think itll be more profitable than a blacksmith shop. Ive been running out of work lately. Please dont. I understand. Geum Chul-yong gives up instantly. Still, he is curious about the reason. Is there a reason why we shouldnt do it? You arent even willing to make a blade, yet you want to run a black market to do business with Kangho warriors? A black market involving Kangho warriors. Youll have to make money by cleaning up corpses. Can you handle it? What if the Low-Down Sect expands bigger? Still, you cant. There is also a line you shouldnt cross even in the Low-Down Sect. Keeping the line if we want to last a long time in this field is correct. Geum Chul-yong says with a grin. I get it. You should ask Yeon Ja-seong of the Architectural Sect if he needs any help. Building tools, equipment, and materials will need your skills. Small clans in the Low-Down Sect can help each other from the start. However, the request cost should be appropriate and transparent. Geum Chul-yongs face brightens. Why havent I thought of this? I see. Ill bring over one broadaxe for our leader. While waiting for the axe, Geum Chul-yong asks. But how are you going to deal with the Black Rabbit Union? Are you going to gather Sung-tae and the other armed men? No matter how I think about it, youre losing in terms of numbers. Im going alone. And I might return a little late. Geum Chul-yong stares at me and says. Make sure you dont die. If anything happens to the sect leader we of the Blacksmith Sect will have to join the Black Rabbit Union. I wont, but thank you for the advice. Just as I dont know how to make a weapon, Geum Chul-yong doesnt know about martial arts. After we glance at each other and nod a few times, an eerie-looking axe with a dragon head handle arrives. The appearance is indeed superb, but the connectors seem a little shaky. Ill have to use it moderately. The axe has a terrifying exterior like the weapons that Xu Huang or Li Kui of the Water Margin Bandits would have used, so I am pleased. . . . So Gun-pyeong, lead the way. So Gun-pyeong, waiting at the Chunyang Restaurant, jumps from his seat. Are you two really going together? Of course, you wanna join us? I carry the big axe on my shoulder and say goodbye to Jang Deuk-soo. Deuk-soo hyung, if I dont make it back on time, tell Sung-tae. Jang Deuk-soo replies with a worried look. What do you want me to say? I think about it for a while and say. Dont slack off and write the report meticulously. Im not sure when Ill be back. I have a rough plan for dealing with the Black Rabbit Union. However, the plan does not account for the time of my return. Ill have to go and fight first. Jang Deuk-soo says. Arent you being a little rash? Ambushes are supposed to be done rashly. The Ilyang Prefecture is only safe when I attack. After saying goodbye to Jang Deuk-soo, So Gun-pyeong and I begin to move quickly. I point at the Zaha Inn that is under construction and says. This is the Zaha Inn that will become the headquarters of the Low-Down Sect in the future. So Gun-pyeong replies without much thought, but he checks the construction in progress and stops in his tracks. Why is it so massive? I walk three or four steps and call out to So Gun-pyeong, who is not catching up. What are you doing? I told you to lead the way. Im sorry, but youre very rich. I never knew Me? Who else is here? Gun-pyeong, do you think Im a saint? What do you mean? Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only I point to the Zaha Inn, which is under construction, and tell him. This is built using your slush funds. What? Its your money. The Black Rabbit Union money, the Black Rabbit Unions secret funds, secret funds of the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader, money extorted from others, money the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader got from threatening the weak. Ah, wealth from the pavilion owners, too. Thats how the money ends up here. Follow me and watch how I rob from the Unorthodox Faction. Lets go. As I move again with urgent steps, So Gun-pyeong hurries alongside. Chapter 33 Chapter 33 C Youll die if you interfere Small clans of the Unorthodox Faction often reside in areas with busy shopping districts, but the Black Rabbit Union is different. They are located a little away from the shopping districts, in a place like a mansion for high-ranking scholars. I am looking at the front gate of Black Rabbit Union and say to So Gun-pyeong. Wait here for a bit. Wouldnt it be better to go in together? Well have to fight anyway. I look at So Gun-pyeong. You said the leader of the Black Rabbit Union has orders to kill me immediately. I have no choice then but to kill everyone who approaches. So lets do it my way for now. If I scratch the leaders pride, I can have a one-on-one match with him. Itll be better for you to step up when things go wrong or when the right time comes. Do you understand? So Gun-pyeong must understand my actions because hes been verbally abused and provoked by me. I understand. So Gun-pyeong moves first toward the wall, and I walk proudly with the broadaxe on my shoulder and knock on the gates of the Black Rabbit Union. The center of the wooden gate opens with a screech, and two eyes appear in a small rectangular space. Who is it? Lee Zaha of the Ilyang Prefecture. The mans eyes examine my face. Who is Lee Zaha? I sigh briefly and reply. Stop asking questions and open the door before I smash it open. What a shit joke. The gatekeeper snorts and shouts inside. Is there anyone who knows Lee Zaha from the Ilyang Prefecture, a pale-faced young man who is arrogant and rude? I sigh a little, but it is a proper introduction. But I dont have the patience to wait for the door to open. I leap up with the broadaxe and land lightly on the front gate. I could see a panoramic view of the large Black Rabbit Union mansion. While I think they are well off regardless of their influence, I am strangely upset. Youre doing well. Living well No matter how I look at it, the building structure is unfit as an Unorthodox Faction headquarters. But its not surprising to think that the Black Rabbit Union Leader probably stole it from someone else in the past. I stand on the gate with a broadaxe on my shoulder, and the men who found me approach with shouts and furrowed brows. Its been ages since Ive heard so many curses. Son of a bitch, how should I break this whelp, should I stab his stomach a series of threats continues. Of course, its the Unorthodox Faction; what can you expect? After hearing a full stomach of curses, I land in the center of the spacious outer courtyard. I grab a round chair that is in the middle path, place it down in the center of the courtyard, put the axe upside down in front of it, and sit down. My expression and presence. The act of walking leisurely with a large axe on my back and settling down in the middle. And if my silence isnt working, I will attack the scum staring at me right now. But all this catches their attention. I then exchange glances with the Unorthodox Faction dirtbags that are doing nothing to get in the way. In the meantime, the officials appear one by one. Officials arrive one after another at the podium inside the courtyard. The waiting subordinates settle as if they are building a siege line. The old man that arrives last asks me. Youre Lee Zaha of the Ilyang Prefecture? I nod as I look at the old man who seems to have rotted for a long time in the Unorthodox Faction. Thats me. Are you here alone? Im not here to talk to you, old fart. Tell the rabbit-masked fellow to come out. Just in time, a deep voice rings from inside the main building. Whos here? Lee Zaha, who killed the Golden Dragon Pavilion Leader, came in person. A man wearing a rabbit mask walks out, and the officials make way by moving aside. I look at the posture and atmosphere of the Black Rabbit Union Leader. His physique is average, and I feel nothing from his presence. Looking down at me, the leader of Black Rabbit Union says. Are you the errand boy? When waging a war of nerves, the way of Kangho is to answer a question with a question. So youre the slave rabbit of that idiotic old man, Dae Na-chal? Should I call you a rabbit slave instead of a slave rabbit? Anyway. As the officials eyes widen, grave silence follows. Their leaders expression cannot be seen because of the mask. My words continue before the Black Rabbit Union Leader could muster his own words. How dare you, a slave playing at being a general in a rural village, send a killer after me? If you run away right now and have all your men come at me, will your escape succeed, or not? You insolent black rabbit. Now open that damned mouth of yours. Someone next to the leader judges my words and says. Hes not just a normal lunatic. I speak with great effort in a clear, articulate voice. Listen up, Black Rabbit Union. If your leader agrees to fight against me, hes a worthy leader regardless of his skills. But if he tries to test how skilled I am by ordering all of you to attack me first, hes not worth being your leader. Then hes merely a dirtbag of the Unorthodox Faction, a vermin, a coward So Gun-pyeong, listening to this near the wall, shakes his head. Dae Na-chals slave, an incompetent, presumptuous moron, a rat bastard hiding behind his mask, a nobody who makes you comply with Dae Na-chals prestige. An utterly useless son of a bitch. As the criticism floods like a storm, a completely different silence falls. Meanwhile, some of the subordinates eyes turn slightly to their leader. In fact, my words arent false if the curses are taken out. Everyone present is hoping their leader will step out this time. I extended my hand to the Black Rabbit Union Leader. Do you not know what this silence means? He is not the man of the Unorthodox Faction but a fool. Who said that? These are the words of the errand boy of the Ilyang Prefecture, Leader of the Low-Down Sect, a secluded master who cant find a decent opponent. The common saying that Kangho is wide and has a lot of masters doesnt apply to me, so keep that in mind. I let out a low laugh as soon as I finished my words. The Black Rabbit Union Leader finally opens his mouth. Who do you think you are to determine the nature of the Unorthodox Faction? It is the Unorthodox Faction way to lick where its told to lick and bark when told to bark. Thats what the Unorthodox Faction is. Oh, yeah? Thats how the Unorthodox Faction is. Did you get the wrong education? I guess thats how Dae Na-chal raised you. Like a dog so you ended up like this. At that moment, several officials almost laugh and hurriedly try to manage their facial expressions. When the angry Black Rabbit Union Leader looks around at the surrounding officials, the subordinates already manage to keep a stiff expression on their faces. I laugh as I shake my shoulders at the leader and his subordinates. Ah, thats why Kangho is a funny place. Your men cant even laugh as they please. Kangho is indeed a place where one can die if they laugh. There is no funnier place in the world than this. The Black Rabbit Union Leader then says. So, youre asking for a one-on-one match. What kind of sect leader would be easily swayed by your taunts? Your thoughts are just as naive as your face. Your plan is just as sloppy as your mind. Perhaps because youre a countryside bumpkin? Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Bastard, wont you look at that flow? Suddenly, he notices how his subordinates want him to come forward and have a one-on-one match as he looks around. He sighs. The Black Rabbit Union Leader glances at me with fury. Very well, Ill accept your challenge. Oh Instead, those who made the wrong choice on who would win the match must die. Those of you who think Im going to lose, move behind the errand boy. Wouldnt that be more interesting, errand boy? The Black Rabbit Union Leader says as he looks around. Dont look at me, and get moving. Do you think youll only die? Of course, no one is moving yet. Suppose the Ilyang Prefectures errand boy and the Black Rabbit Union leader are to compete. In that case, it is natural to think the latter would win. The Black Rabbit Union Leader looks at me and jeers. This is your reality, errand boy. Do you understand? Then, a man jumps from the wall and lands lightly on the courtyard floor. Peoples eyes direct themselves to the man who suddenly appears. Brief exclamations of surprise mixed with various emotions are heard from the crowd. Ah. Huh? Of course, it was the Golden Dragon Pavilion Leader and future 18,000 Years of the Low-Down Sect, So Gun-pyeong. The Black Rabbit Union Leader scoffs at So Gun-pyeongs unexpected appearance. How are you still alive, Chief So? I believe I ordered you to end your own life if you fail. Did you beg him to spare you? Having determined his life path, So Gun-pyeong replies plainly in response to the leaders question. Who cares if I begged him or not? My life is now my own, Leader. Do you think theres some kind of deep affection and loyalty between us? Dont just decide on your own. I dont think were that close. I break into their conversation with a quick word. He has a point. The eyes of the Black Rabbit Union Leader turn to me. Why did you spare him? I speak to answer the Black Rabbit Union Leaders curiosity. Im not you, shithead. So Gun-pyeong and I shared pork ribs. Didnt we? As I suddenly look at So Gun-pyeong while talking about pork ribs, So Gun-pyeong nods dumbly. Ah, yes. So Gun-pyeong tries to turn the mood around as he faces the Black Rabbit Union Leader. Anyway you two will have a one-on-one match. My fate will be decided based on the result. Men of the Golden Dragon Pavilion, join me. I bet my life that the leader of the Low-Down Sect will win. So Gun-pyeong thinks that he will know whether or not he has lived a proper life depending on how his subordinates make their choice. The Black Rabbit Union Leader ridicules him. Would there even be any? A moment later, a subordinate of the Golden Dragon Pavilion tells Black Rabbit Union Leader. Goodbye, Leader. Im going over that side. The young swordsman says as he heads straight to So Gun-pyeong. Leader, whats wrong with your face? So Gun-pyeong greets his men with a smile. What do you mean? Of course, its because I got my ass kicked. Im glad youre alive. Its good to see your ass-kicked face. The Black Rabbit Union Leader had no choice but to become angry. Its just one person. As soon as the leader finishes his words, another swordsman of the Golden Dragon Pavilion opens his mouth again. Only two people. As soon as he walks to where So Gun-pyeong is standing, five or six people follow him. When one of them draws a sword, So Gun-pyeong stops him. Put the sword back in. As I said, this is a one-on-one duel. Really? Understood. So Gun-pyeong remains expressionless, but he is delighted. All the subordinates hed shared his joys and sorrows under the Golden Dragon Pavilion came to his side. So Gun-pyeong asks me who is sitting in a chair. Leader, are you confident? If we lose, well all die. What confidence? Of course Shut up. I grab the axe and stand up. This is a one-on-one match between that rabbit bastard and me. I dont care if anyone intervenes. Theyll have to die too, this is my promise Although I have not finished speaking, something cuts through the wind from the left and flies toward my forehead. Shi-ing! I quickly turn my head back before figuring out the hidden weapon. The weapon whirls by, like lightning, and strikes the wall. ! Everyone shut their mouths in shock. Someone attacked before I could even face the Black Rabbit Union Leader. Even the officials of the Black Rabbit Union are frowning and uttering. How despicable Who was it? Doing something you werent ordered to. I immediately discover the man whose movements become exaggerated as he throws a side glance at the hidden weapon. I dont know who ordered him to make a surprise attack. Maybe he decided on his own and struck. In this case, I had no choice but to forget what I was going to say. I channel the force of my entire body and throw the axe like lightning at the man who hurled the hidden weapon. Shi-inggggggggggg! The man who threw the hidden weapons body is hit by the broadaxe and split grotesquely. Pswark! The broadaxe flies fiercely while blood is soaring high in the air. It then strikes the wall with a loud bang. When I follow the urges of my temper, the axe provided by the Dragon Head Smithy leaves my hand for the first time. However, the dragon head handle that I was worried about and the axe head separates and breaks into two as it plunges into the wall. The axe was used for intimidation anyway, so I didnt mind. Looking at the grotesquely torn body, I say in a low voice. Youll die if you butt in. I dont know why youre taking precious lives for granted. Is this the nature of the Unorthodox Faction? Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only While the atmosphere subsides heavily, So Gun-pyeong speaks in a serious tone. Dont butt in again. The officials too Please. So Gun-pyeong knows best that Im not lying. If they dont stop it at the right moment Then the whole of the Black Rabbit Union will be exterminated. Chapter 34 Chapter 34 C Thats What I Decided The existence of the Black Rabbit Union Leader, who strikes fear in the Black Rabbit Union vermin, and my suggestion to have a life-or-death fight are slowly dictating the opinion in the courtyard. No, the more they look at the mangled body, the greater my suggestion and presence become. Now, those who want to survive will have to be prudent. They realize through the atmosphere that the Black Rabbit Union Leader also has to fight his own battles. How aggressive of you, errand boy. Suddenly, the gaze of the Black Rabbit Union Leader turns to the wall. Later, a loud crackling sound can be heard ringing like a thunderbolt as cracks form from where the axe was struck. So Gun-pyeong approaches and asks in a polite tone. Leader, do you need a sword? Why? Aside from palm techniques, finger techniques, leg techniques, sword techniques, saber techniques, spear techniques, and sickles, I have learned many other things. So Gun-pyeong holds out his treasured Night Blade. Well, you can take my Night Blade. The leaders sword is just as sharp. I glance at So Gun-pyeongs expression at his sudden suggestion. The restless man who turned timid when I asked to look at his sword came forward to lend me his weapon first I only have to say a word of thanks, but I just have to answer like a crooked man, as is my nature. Its better than a kitchen knife. Give it here. So Gun-pyeong, who is handing over his katana, peeks at me. What? Nothing. Its better than a kitchen knife, so please handle it with care. While I unsheathe the Night Blade, I hear So Gun-pyeong, and his men behind me talk. What does he mean its better than a kitchen knife? Shut up. Im asking you out of curiosity Why are you angry? Its nothing. Jeez, okay. I speak to Black Rabbit Union Leader, who looks deep in thought. My new weapon is here, so lets get started. I launch a Sword Wind at him before the Black Rabbit Union Leader can pull out any of his petty tricks. Sword Wind is a technique used to break the opponents balance or block their movement during a fight, rather than making the final blow. Therefore, it is better to deal with it properly. If they do not respond accordingly, all that waits is eventual defeat. The officials instinctively avoid getting caught up in the Sword Wind. At the same time, the Black Rabbit Union Leader splits the incoming attack upfront by pulling out the black sword from his waist. Meanwhile, I quickly narrow the distance with a single leap to the yoke-back chair of the podium and aim for the abdomen of the Black Rabbit Union Leader. Clang! The two of us face off as the Black Rabbit Union Leader hits the Night Blade straight on with his sword. In a split second, he and I look into each others eyes. His eyes contain myriad emotions, but the only thing we have in common is that we do not show fear. The gaze of those who have killed many of their opponents. The battle between the Black Rabbit Union Leader, which began on the stairs and me, continues as it moves to the centre of the spacious courtyard. The sword and katana have already clashed more than thirty times, and the information I obtain piles slowly up in my head. The Black Rabbit Union Leaders sword technique is highly refined. His movements focus shifts exquisitely between defence and offence while leaving fake tiny openings with every technique to set a trap for his opponent. On the other hand, my fighting style and attack patterns are indefinite. After figuring out the merits of the opponents mindset or martial arts, I respond accordingly. This is the main focus of the next cultivation stage after the Fire Chicken, the Fighting Chicken (^a). However, finding enlightenment in Conception (ĵ) before reaching the state of mental cultivation is a separate problem. Now that we have exchanged blows Compared to the union leader, my sword techniques are faster and more refined, and the energy I cultivated with the help of the Heavenly Pearl is way deeper. Ultimately, its a fight with no chance of defeat for me. But I memorize his sword technique for a variety of reasons. One, its so I could get a taste of Dae Na-chals martial arts techniques. In addition, I have a different reason why I have to learn his sword techniques by heart. Its all part of the plan. I slowly enhance the katana with internal energy when I have perfectly memorized his technique. Then, the Black Rabbit Union Leaders complexion gradually becomes paler. He realizes I have been fighting using only half of my internal cultivation. I can understand his astonishment. There is a limit to what Kangho warriors under 25 can accumulate. Most people who reach that limit are the best disciples of the famous families, Murim Clan successors, and young warriors who had gained rare opportunities. Other than that, the depth of internal cultivation can be estimated through their age and origin. And the Black Rabbit Union Leader looked at me with that assumption He can feel the growing power with each sword clash, so he cant help but feel flustered. How can he anticipate and cope with the power and opportunity granted by the Heavenly Pearl? I relax my stiff expression and sneer. Leader, its too late. Its too late to run away now. I also mean its too late to try and discover my true abilities. Still, the Black Rabbit Union Leader understands immediately since hes on the brink of death. However, I cant see the change in his expression due to the mask. Using a mask seems to have its perks. In the meantime, his attacks become increasingly violent, like a beast trying to escape from the hunter. Whether a Kangho warrior or a beast, theyre bound to struggle once cornered. I watch this pathetic sight and return his earlier words. Will you be able to lick when I tell you to lick, bite if I tell you to bite or bark if I ask you to? When you join me, of course. The Black Rabbit Union Leader desperately tries to dig up every last bit of internal energy in him, leaving him no room to respond. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks No reply? Is that hard for you? I thought you said thats just how the Unorthodox Faction is. While mocking him, I swing my sword around to remove any escape openings. I notice the union leaders steps are slowly turning, probably intending to flee once he spots the best opportunity. It isnt hard to figure out since I have gotten used to his movement and sword techniques. As I wield my sword to block the Black Rabbit Union Leaders movements, the keen-eyed So Gun-pyeong intervenes. Leader, you told me to kill myself if I fail. And yet youre acting so petty? Dont tell me youre escaping..? At So Gun-pyeongs words, the union leader loses his composure. He swings his sword in a large movement and shoots sword energies forward as he orders his subordinates in a haggard voice. Kill him! When the officials are about to follow his orders, So Gun-pyeong quickly interrupts. Everyone, stand down. This is a one-on-one battle, but if you want to interrupt, I have no choice but to intervene. If you ignore orders and stay still, Ill make sure no one will die. If youre scared, look at the body split on the ax. Like the Low-Down Sect Leader said, you will die if you butt in. Hearing So Gun-pyeongs warning, the eyes of officials goes to the grotesquely bisected body. It is a horrifying corpse to look at. The body is a warning to those alive that tells them to not die like him. Trying to clutch at straws when a person is in a corner is natural. The Black Rabbit Union Leader dodges the katana and retreats hastily, saying. Sect Leader Wait! I can see three or four openings through the union leaders shaky breath through my eyes. It is also funny that the way he addresses me changes from errand boy to Sect Leader. This brat After initiating non-stop sword attacks, I wield the Fire Chicken with the Night Blade and smash into Black Rabbit Union Leaders sword. As the loud clash rings throughout the courtyard, the face of the Black Rabbit Union Leader turns distorted. Blood is already flowing from the grasp of the union leader, who hasnt noticed his hands are injured. Growing desperate, the Black Rabbit Union Leader clenches his sword with both hands and shoots his Sword Energy (), putting all his energy into one blow. Slashhhhhhhhh! The intention is quite blatant. If I dodge it, Gun-pyeong and his men will be hit by the energy coming from the sword. It is a wicked move to kill me with this final blow or take out Gun-pyeong and his subordinates. I have no intention of avoiding it, so I wield the katana and launch the Fiery Fragrance to block it. A strangely shaped sword energy that is too vague to describe collides with a streak of blazing flame. If our skills are on par, then the explosive sound will spread out in a circular manner The Fiery Fragrance I shoot rips through the Black Rabbit Union Leaders sword energy and blows his body to the wall with just the remaining energy. Engulfed in hot energy that chars his skin, the union leader crashes into the wall with his limbs extended like a star and vomits blood from his mouth. Cough His body is half-buried in the wall. The blood he vomits out is dripping down his mask. When I once hit a wall with many internal injuries, I could not extricate myself from its surface. The Black Rabbit Union Leader similarly is stuck to the wall, like a character in a wall-carved painting. So Gun-pyeong and his men will be happy with this outcome. And the men who stood down from So Gun-pyeongs words will breathe a sigh of relief I wasnt particularly happy since I already knew the results of this fight. I announce the results while looking around the Black Rabbit Union warriors watching the fight. The errand boy won. From the Unorthodox Factions perspective, it is a truly insulting victory declaration. Forget about the victory; I havent even started what I originally came here to do. So Gun-pyeong. So Gun-pyeong meets my eyes and uses honorifics for the first time. Yes, Leader. What a wicked bastard. He saved many with that sharp tongue of his. Thanks to your forewarning, I was able to save my men. I am utterly grateful, Leader. Waving my blade at the Black Rabbit officials, who are suddenly mute, I say. Ive got energy left if any of you guys want to challenge me. So, whats the plan? I can respect a mans need for revenge. Step up if you feel wronged about your leaders death. I will humbly send you to the afterlife. But I wont go easy this time. None of your sword techniques are worth watching anyway. The observant ones can conclude that I didnt go all out in killing the Black Rabbit Union Leader. I scratch my skin and say. Oh, no one wants to ascend, praying that its the perfect day to die? Its not like you get a chance to take on an errand boy every day. No one comes forward even if I give them a slight provocation. I laugh as I watch some of the officials faces flush red. This is your last chance to take on an errand boy. What a shame. While no one seems to understand my words, I approach the dying Black Rabbit Union Leader and look at him. He is barely breathing. I grab the Black Rabbit Union Leaders mask and pull it off. I see his face as he is about to die, and only then did he finally convey his words with moving lips. Help Help? Thats unexpected. If youre going to live the rest of your life as an Ilyang Prefecture errand boy, Ill save you. In exchange, you must abandon martial arts. One day, you might get killed accidentally by a Kangho warrior while cooking noodles, organizing tables, or mopping. Thats the essence of Kangho, so you better brace yourself. You have no options. You must have the courage to live as an errand boy The Black Rabbit Union Leader dies while listening to me. you dont have it. I wasnt planning to save him anyway. As I said earlier, I have no sympathy for trained monkeys fighting and dying among themselves. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only Thats too bad now that youre dead. You think anyone can become an errand boy? Anyways I turn around with the Black Rabbit Union Leaders mask in my hand and stare at the group of silent men. This situation is where the foundation is fairly well laid out now that a few are dead. I place the rabbit mask, still wet with the previous leaders blood, on my face and declare. From now on, Im the leader of Black Rabbit Union. I declare as I wear the black rabbit mask. Whether you like it or not. Thats what I decided. Chapter 35 Chapter 35 C Lets start the meeting After promoting myself to Black Rabbit Union Leader, I toss the Night Blade to So Gun-pyeong and take the former leaders sword. It is a good sword, considering the blade did not get damaged after clashing with the Night Blade. Above all, it looks better than the weapons from the Dragon Head Smithy. Now that your former leaders legacy has ended, mine is starting. Now keep this in mind. Nothing happened in the Black Rabbit Union. No one could figure out what I meant, so they wisely kept their mouths shut. I ask my subordinates with the tone of a long-standing leader. Whats the name of this sword? I cant seem to recall clearly. So Gun-pyeong replies. It is called the Black Hares Tooth. The name means that its a black rabbits incisors. What a ridiculous name. Wait, no. I take it back. Now that its mine, I shouldnt call it ridiculous. Everyones expression immediately tenses at my change of attitude, but no one refutes it. Their fearful leader just died with his mangled body still stuck on the wall, so it is only natural. Also, I must still seem like a lunatic with severe mood swings, so they must watch what they say. I inspect the Black Hares Tooth and naturally give out orders. Get rid of the corpse of your former leader, who foolishly sought to oppose me. Clean the walls and the floor as well. If you want to succeed in the Unorthodox Faction, you need to be good at cleaning. Throw away that axe over there. All the officials must gather in the hall. To commemorate a new beginning, we shall be holding a meeting. So Gun-pyeong quickly steps up. I will take care of things here and join you, so the rest of the officials should head to the hall first. As I declared before, I am the Black Rabbit Union Leader from today. Not yesterday, but today. A persons fate is ever-changing. The leaders inauguration is a hassle, so Im thinking of skipping it, but my ruling period is decided. At least, until Dae Na-chal catches wind about it. As of now, its unknown whether my term will be short or long. I am just someone who knows what I know and doesnt know things I dont know. The officials head to the main hall, and, as So Gun-pyeong orders his subordinates around, I wield the Black Hares Tooth in a sword dance. The Black Rabbit Union lackeys that have started with the cleaning peek at my movement, but I flaunt the sword technique without any care. Fully immersed in my thoughts, I resume the sword dance again. Meanwhile, some of the more discerning among them must be in quite a state of surprise. This is because my movements are similar to that of their dead leader. As they expect, I briefly swing my sword in a wide area and train in the dead mans technique as quickly as possible. Eating, shitting, manifesting internal cultivation, and training in a dead mans sword technique. This is what a wise Unorthodox Faction life is like. Lets start with the report on the unions current situation. I sit at the seat of honor as I say this out suddenly to the waiting officials. So Gun-pyeong asks. Sect Leader, which one do you want to see first? Chief So, its union leader, not sect leader. Since when have we become the Black Rabbit Sect? Dont forget your identity. Apologies. I fully understand, sir. So Gun-pyeong gives a reasonable opinion. As far as I know, many warriors of the Golden Phoenix Pavilion are alive and in the Ilyang Prefecture, thanks to you. Please advise on what we should do with them. I applaud So Gun-pyeongs question. Clap, clap, clap. How wise, Chief So. Just as I expected, lets all learn from Chief So. He cares about his colleagues and subordinates, and he bravely stood out to save your asses. He is loyal, smart, and even resilient, which is rare these days. He can take a good beating. While I am speaking, So Gun-pyeong scratches his forehead. Im saying this because Ive dealt with both the rabbit bastard and Chief So. Chief So does lack slightly. Chief So is the brains and talent of the Black Rabbit Union. He will be the representative official of the clan forward. Continue to train hard, Chief So. I shall reward you today with a gift of money for your excellent work. Not like its my money anyway. In any case, So Gun-pyeong replies with renewed courage. I will give my best to serve you. I applaud again and say to the officials. Now, lets give up a round of applause. Before I break your wrists. Other officials also applaud So Gun-pyeong with awkward expressions. Clap, clap, clap, clap, clap, clap, clap, clap. Watching the rotten Black Rabbit officials, I nag. Thats enough. You must encourage each other, motivate each other, train together, fight together and become stronger as one. Thats what the Unorthodox Faction is all about. You may develop a brotherhood of affection, hate, and a desire to beat each other that you didnt know existed. Thats what makes an Unorthodox Faction powerful. At least in my experience. Reading boredom on some of their faces, I stop talking. Am I boring you? When I stare at an official whose name I didnt know, he shakes his head and replies. N-No, not at all. If youre bored, get the hell out, you asshole. Go play outside. You dont have to be an official. Go clean the dirt off the walls with the other lackeys, or go get rid of the corpse. It wasnt boring at all, sir. Cant you see your leader is speaking? Tsk Even a higher-up should know their place. Thats how deeply I practice self-introspection. Chief So is rather skilled in martial arts and is doing a good job as the middle-man in an Unorthodox Faction. A general in the front line should listen to his staff and soldiers. Sure enough, So Gun-pyeong cheers for his leader at the right time. Feel free to continue, sir. Now, where was I? You were saying thats what makes an Unorthodox Faction powerful Yes, Sima Bi and Hyeok Ryeon-hong are alive in Ilyang. If Chief So wants to expand the pavilion and recruit the men of the Golden Phoenix Pavilion, feel free to come by anytime. I will entrust you with creating the Dragon Phoenix Pavilion, a merger of the Golden Phoenix and the Golden Dragon. I will gladly take care of it. I say as I look around the officials. Whos our manager? As expected, the oldest official bows and replies. Please call me Manager Byuk. Manager Byuk, please send some money to the Dragon Phoenix Pavilion Leader. I need to know about our financial situation, so please report to me once youve compiled all the necessary information. If I discover there has been any embezzlement or laundering of the unions funds, you will die first. Yes, Leader. I look at Manager Byuks grim expression and say threateningly. Manager Byuk, do you know why the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader died? Im not sure. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks He died because he embezzled money. I have never committed such a thing, but Ill keep that in mind. Youre right. Having a bright heart and mind is as valuable as owning a precious mirror (a). [^n1] Some of the officials faces became red upon hearing my wise saying. I bring up the next agenda. I forgot about the ranking battle. When was it again? Everyone cant hide their surprise when I speak as though I have been in the Black Rabbit Union for years. So Gun-pyeong replies. While the date for the match is not set, the most likely challenger is one of the lower-ranking, General Hong Shin (t, red monkey). In case youre thinking of increasing your rank, you would have to go up against General Baek Yu. Baek Yu, the man whose identity I used when I killed Cho Il-sum. What rank am I in right now? You are fifth out of the Twelve Generals. I am somewhat taken aback. Huh, that moron is pretty high in rank after all. Its amazing how he ranks in the top 5 with that crappy skill. Who is stronger than Baek Yu? There is Baek In (), Cheong Jin (i), and Jeok Sa (). If we include General Baek Yu, they are called the Four Generals (). So there is a white tiger, a blue dragon, a red snake, and a white rooster. Above all, the most important person is still Dae Na-chal. Where is our revered master these days? This time, Manager Byuk replies. General Jeok Sa offered him a blue-eyed beauty and presented her to Master Dae Na-chal. Hes probably with her now. I scoff. That old geezer sure has a lot of stamina if hes laying his hands on a blue-eyed woman. Im suddenly feeling pissed. When I call him master and then old geezer, the subordinates cant hide their expressions. What? Did I say something wrong? No, you did not. I say with a click of my tongue. Hes still using his disciples to mess with those poor women. Why isnt the Murim Alliance doing anything about it? They need to take him out. Jeez Everyone either looks at the ceiling or lowers their heads. From now on, I will teach you the new code of conduct of the Black Rabbit Union. Please enlighten us. Dae Na-chal may be my master, but the old geezer has fallen deep into debauchery. I plan to start a rebellion. I wont spare anyone that sides with Dae Na-chal or interfere with my plans. You and I have to apply the ways of Kangho to this scheme. Betrayal in wartime (r) is death. Do you understand? Yes. Dae Na-chal must be a much scarier figure than I am to you. I get it, but youll have to follow the right person to live long in Kangho. Keep in mind that your predictions may be wrong. Whether Dae Na-chal or I will die, its not something you can predict. You should have realized how its nature was when your former leader died earlier. Just like how our smart Chief So had realized it way before. The officials all nod at my words. I understand. We dont have any reason to like Dae Na-chal either. We were brought here against our will. This meeting is childish, disoriented, and has concluded in gibberish, but I keep a close eye on the faces and tones of the officials through the mask. Wearing a mask certainly has its advantages. How is the Black Hurricane Castle doing these days? Even though I suddenly changed the subject, So Gun-pyeong calmly replies. From what I know, they are still busy with gambling dens and auction houses. At this rate, no one in town will be able to match them in terms of wealth. Are they still auctioning people? Yes. Its not a human auction. Its slave auction. Slave auctioneers, thats who the Black Hurricane Castle is. I nod and set a short to mid-term goal for the Black Rabbit Union. I beat up some of the Black Hurricane Castle folks to death just the other day. He died after watching my place burn. I was upset, but thats good. As the leader of an Unorthodox Faction, I cant overlook the evil conduct of selling people as slaves in this day and age. I will exterminate the Black Hurricane Castle someday, so the officials should concentrate on training. I will rectify the principles of the Unorthodox Faction. The officials feel the urge to ask, Does the Unorthodox Faction have any principles? but they didnt say it out loud. I express my aspirations in a determined voice. From now on, we of the Black Rabbit Union will be the vanguard of the Kangho Slave Liberation Front. A senior official asks cautiously. I dont understand why youve suddenly decided to strike at the Black Hurricane Castle Do you think its right to buy and sell people? Of course not. I mockingly say as I look around at the officials of Black Rabbit Union. Why did you guys take up martial arts, huh? You morons. You stand up for injustice when you see one. That is the duty of those who walk in the night, empowered by their blades. From now on, those who defy me will be executed and will be stabbed to death if you even dare to retort. Answer me when I talk to you. Youre leaving me hanging. Ah, suddenly my temper The officials answer in unison. Understood. We will keep that in mind. After constantly threatening, cursing, and assaulting the sect after holding the whole Black Rabbit Union hostage, I conclude that it is time to stabilize my image as a disorienting leader. Whether its Dae Na-chal or the Black Hurricane Castle, Ill take them down one day. For that cause, Ill use whatever resources in the Black Rabbit Unions possession at my discretion. This includes a stockpile of medicine, capital, and so on. If you have a complaint, lets settle our differences in a one-on-one duel. Would anyone like to come forward? The officials look at the ground. None of you? Thats good. I wave my right hand and say. Im glad my hands wont be stained with the blood of my officials. I dont miss the things that I have to do. During the leader adjustment period, Chief So should have the Dragon Phoenix elites be on full alert inside and outside the Black Rabbit Union. Those who escaped without filing a report will be executed immediately. If someone suddenly wishes to go home, catch them and bring them to me. So Gun-pyeong understands what I mean and nods. We will maintain a strict vigilance. From the officials standpoint, the Black Rabbit Union Leader has suddenly been replaced, but there is no improvement. Come to think of it, the Golden Phoenixs slush funds went to the Ilyang Prefecture, and now their main possessions are being robbed. All they can do is mutter curses under their breaths. Of course, its none of my business. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only Not in the past, and not now. Im not part of the Unorthodox Faction. Im a man who beats and robs from the Unorthodox Faction. Anyway, my first day as the Black Rabbit Union Leader ends peacefully. [^n1] : Lee Zaha refers to the ancient Chinese book Mingxin baojian, containing famous quotes. Chapter 36 Chapter 36 C First Night As Leader The meeting concludes peacefully, just like my mind. Thats how good I am at running fruitful meetings. I send the officials on their way, and while So Gun-pyeong takes the Golden Dragon Pavilion men to the iron fence, I am faced with a quiet and serene night. It is also the day I am overflowing with the energy of the Heavenly Pearl. As I am breathing quietly in the hall with a mask on, a servant approaches and asks. Leader, would you like to have a meal? Or should I prepare a bath? Does the servant know their leader has changed? Or are they not aware? If they are only staying indoors and doing chores, its natural not to know. I reply to let them hear my voice. No need for the bath. I had pork ribs earlier, so Ill pass. I got blood on my face, so bring me some water. Yes, Ill be right back. The servant does not notice the difference and hurries somewhere. I am lost in thought for a moment. Is my voice similar to the rabbit bastards? We both have low-pitched voices but have very different vocal tones. I take off my mask while watching the servant walk over with a basin. The servant is shocked as they look at my face and drop the basin full of water on the floor. The servants eyes widened in surprise. I glance at the water spilled by the servant and say in a low voice. Go get a new bowl of water. Clean the floor as well. That was quite the reaction. Ah, yes Dont freak out. Dont spill it this time. I apologize. Ill be mindful next time. After a few moments, the servant brings another wash basin with trembling hands, and as soon as he places it on the table, he bows his head. You dont have to be scared. No harm will come your way. I am the new Black Rabbit Union Leader. Yes, Leader. Nice to meet you. I wipe the bloodstains off my face and then ask the servant as I wipe the bloody mask clean. Is my voice similar to the former leaders? Not anymore. Not anymore? Yes, I didnt realize the difference because his voice changes slightly when using the mask. I guess it sounds similar when I speak in the mask. Yes. Looking at it now, the insides of the mask are made of a hard material, and the mouth area has holes that allow air to escape. Still, the voice seems to be altered due to the enclosed design. If so, its safe to assume that just my voice wont reveal my identity. So its possible, to some extent, to imitate the voice or tone of the former leader. As the servant keeps stealing glances at me, I ask. Why? Am I that handsome? For you to keep staring? My apologies. Hm. Why did he apologize? I couldnt tell if he apologized because I wasnt handsome or for staring at his leader. As you know, today is my first day as union leader. Please show me around. And let me know where my sleeping chamber, personal training hall, and medicine storage room are. Lead the way. Yes, Leader. I follow the servant and check out the various places that belong to the leader. Nothing is lacking in the luxurious building. There are fitting rooms, two bedrooms, a private bathroom, and an area with only one wooden bed. Whats with this room? Theres only one bed in here. The previous leader would come here to loosen his muscles on days of physical training. Who gives him a massage? The servants come together and massage him. Why is he doing useless things instead of training The place I am then led to is a room serving as a personal training chamber and a medicine storage room. I order the servant. Call all the servants and tell them to wait at a place further away. You dont have to stop anyone that comes near. Just ask them what brings them here, and Ill take care of the rest. You understand what I mean, right? Yes, Leader. I dismiss the servant and close the door. The room contains rarities that some may go their lives without seeing. Some of the medicine here includes those that are common, popular, and obscure. Very few people have access to these panaceas. Clan heirs, sect successors, Kangho warriors in their primes who gain rare medicines through fate Combining them all, there are not many. Therefore, most Kangho warriors live and die after just taking the ones that are widely accessible. The widely accessible type of medicine is a high-quality oriental medicine made by physicians. For this reason, Kangho warriors sometimes use the word Great Doctor (t) to refer to a person who is good at making high-quality panaceas. I happen to know a guy like that. He is a very problematic and very miserable man. On top of that, he is one of the guys I must seek out first, alongside the Left Hand of Illuminating Light. I dont want him to die a miserable death again. This guy will run into problems with Dae Na-chal in the future. Whats clear is that the sooner I kill Dae Na-chal, the less likely this guy is to live a miserable life. However, considering the timeline of my past life, I am still at the time of being an Ilyang Prefecture errand boy, so there is time to spare. I open each small drawer and check all the popular panaceas. There are diverse types of panaceas to be found inside. Panaceas heal internal injuries and antidotes mixed with antiseptics, so I cant ingest them thoughtlessly. This is how they are classified, and there are more detailed classifications. Among them, the most representative is Beast Panaceas (ݫF`ˎ). Beasts in this case include both birds and land animals. These medicines are fed to carrier pigeons (F, a pigeon that delivers messages) or to horses (R) to permanently increase their endurance and explosive power. Perhaps the Black Rabbit Union uses carrier pigeons since these panaceas are included here. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks The reason why the Murim Alliance is powerful is that they mass-produce these popular panaceas. Relying on their strong funding, word of mouth about consuming these panaceas spread throughout the realm. They used this excuse to operate an unofficial cavalry made up of men from Kangho. The Demon Cult is even worse. They never see humans as humans in the first place, so they hunt animals and conduct inhumane experiments on them. All these experiments are done to deal with the elite cavalry of the Murim Alliance, resulting in the enormous sacrifice of innocent beasts. While fumbling through the drawers, I finally find three of the Flaming Heart Pill (ğ), a high-quality and popular panacea. The reason why its still here is simple. Just like the saying that taking one pill of the Flaming Heart Pill is plenty, the pill has severe after-effects of fever as if one has caught the flu. I have my fair share of knowledge on the Flaming Heart Pill as Id suffered many fevers and suffered from Qi Deviation. The best time to take the Flaming Heart Pill is when I have accumulated too much extreme Yang energy. Coincidentally, thats the current condition I am in right now. I listen closely to my surroundings and swallow all three Flaming Heart Pills simultaneously. Sometime after, my body begins to heat up. With a flushed face, I sit down in a lotus position to meditate with the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique. Now that I have reached the state of the Fire Chicken, the heat from Flaming Heart Pill is gradually subdued. I close my eyes for a moment and am briefly caught in a strange imagination. I can vividly visualize the process of my heat consuming the heat from the pills before I can even execute the technique. It is a scene where masters trapped in the Heavenly Pearl pounce and rush forward like beasts to eat up the heat of the Flaming Heart Pill. I jolt internally. Damn, that gave me a fright Even before I can start the complete circulation process, I can faintly feel the energy of the Heavenly Pearl becoming more intense. The panaceas energy instantly combines with the Heavenly Pearl as if it is being absorbed. It feels strange, so I reach out, drawing from the Strolling Golden Turtle Techniques essence, and channel it through my hand. I extract the Wooden Chickens energy in my hand and then convert it to the Fire Chickens energy. As the flames condense, my palm () is gradually dyed red. This is strange. I cant exactly put my finger on what feels off about my energy. The Heavenly Pearl is created by absorbing and accumulating Qi, vitality, and essence of living martial art warriors. But suddenly, in my body, or more specifically in the Heavenly Pearl that Ive absorbed Doubts begin to arise in me on whether or not the Heavenly Pearl has some bizarre ability () to absorb other energy. I murmur with a rapt look on my face. No, that cant be. All I want is to live my life as a lunatic. I have no intentions of going overboard and becoming a monster-like cult leader. I take a deep breath with my eyes closed and calm my mind like a chicken turning into wood. Meanwhile, I hope nothing is wrong with my body. Because there are still too many monkey butts that I need to kick. But just to be sure I think I should give it a name if I really have this strange ability. Absorption Technique, Energy Absorption Technique, Heavenly Absorption Technique, Heavenly Pearl Absorption Technique Heavenly Pearl Ultimate Absorption Technique, Heavenly Pearl Demonic Absorption Technique, Crazy-Demon Heavenly-Pearl Ultimate Absorption Technique Absorb () Forget it. As expected, naming is the most challenging thing in any profession. No name with the word absorption rolls off the tongue. I decide to think about it later as I contemplate it further. I dont think I have an accurate understanding of this bizarre ability yet. I didnt execute any Qi breathing techniques in the personal training chamber. I have only been repeatedly channeling the Fire Chicken energy through my palm to check this bizarre ability. Realizing this isnt working, I quietly meditate in a cross-legged position. The Left Hand of Illuminating Lights words and my prediction are fusing together. I explore the nature of the Heavenly Pearl with reasoning and imagination. I also quietly observe the condition of my body. Then I put myself in the Demon Cult Leaders shoes. What would the cult leader do as soon as he got his hands on Heavenly Pearl? Perhaps, it is a matter of great importance that the Cult Leader is unrivaled. The Demon Cult wouldve been more thoroughly guarded than ever. The guards would have waited nervously and held their breath around the cult leader. Would he only use a Qi breathing technique? Probably not. The Cult Leader wouldve carried out the Great Magic () at the same time to become the Demon God (ħ). The martial arts of the Demon Path (ħ) are remarkably different from regular sects, after all. My imagination restores the image of the Cult Leader. Perhaps he would use the Heavenly Pearl and apply the Great Magic simultaneously. If he had succeeded, he wouldve become an other-worldly monster that no one can defeat. So I must have been given an unbelievable opportunity to return back in time. After meditating, I contemplate with my arms folded for some time and channel palm force using the Absorption () principle of the Assisting Hand Technique. I extend my hand out to the drawers containing the panaceas. For a long time, nothing happened. Though nothing is happening, I review my strategy with my hands stretched out like a fool and go through the process of using my flexible mind to identify all the different variables. Inventing martial arts that are never seen in this world is something only lunatics would do anyway. Only without following other peoples thoughts and ideas can things created from nothing appear. Even though Im not capable of levitating objects (̓Քz) at my current martial arts state and level of Qi, I re-evaluate all my knowledge about the world of martial arts I have learned. As I continue to think, my hands are still held out like a statue. And I throw away all the martial arts theory I had built up till now. On a blank slate (׼), I inscribe the power of the Heavenly Pearl and the principle of absorption with an imaginary brush and invoke its profound power, dyeing my hand red again. Then, with a rattling sound, a small drawer storing a panacea surges through the air and falls into my palm. Thud! I quickly grab the drawer and breathe in and out, calming my restless heart. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only Haa. The enlightenment comes in a flash. In addition, I came up with the name of the ability immediately. The Great Absorption Technique of the Heavenly Pearl (Ǵ). However, since the Heavenly Pearl is a secret that I cant tell anyone, I will omit the last part. On my first night as the leader of the Black Rabbit Union, I thought of nothing but martial arts. Chapter 37 Chapter 37 C Leaders Schooling The Great Absorption Technique is, of course, a martial art derived from the Heavenly Pearl. Its ability to pull objects would count as a type of levitation. Considering the process where the Heavenly Pearl consumed the panaceas energy, it is a bizarre ability. Aside from gaining an unexpected ability, I cant fall asleep because the leaders bed I am using is unfamiliar. Furthermore, the servants are a hassle. Leader? Which maid would you like to serve you today? Although the leader has changed, the questions the servants always ask can not be evaded. Attend how? Yes? Thats Looks like the dead rabbit spent his nights with the maids. Only then did I find another reason the Black Rabbit Union Leader had to die by my hands. It would be hard for the bastard, far from the peak, to improve and get stronger since hes sleeping with so many women without completing his cultivation. Frequent nocturnal activities during the training process can cause muscle loss (pʧ). The term muscle loss is not used by prestigious sects and clans, nor is it found in most martial art manuals. There are a few men Im close with even when the Low-Down Sect I had built in my past life was demolished. I gained enemies in the process, always sizing me up at a time when my nickname was the Crazy Nutjob. The Punch King (ȭ) often used the unique expression of muscle loss. There are a few idiots I like in Kangho, and Punch King is one of them. A nutjob is very close to idiots. I, too, dont exactly know why we were close. If theres anything we share in common, its that we arent calculating and selfish. It wasnt until I remembered the term muscle loss that I recalled the Punch King, whose stupidity is at the brink of humanity. While looking at the ceiling, a smile naturally hangs around my mouth. Stupid idiot, you must be training somewhere. It wont be easy to re-gather the people who were connected to my past life. Since I dont know about their past lives, it requires time and effort to go looking for them one by one. Fortunately, Im not lagging behind my competitors, whether they are my enemies or allies, which is a relief. I speak to the servant waiting outside. Did the former leader order you to do strange things every night? It is a question I ask because I think it is strange for the servants to ask so nonchalantly. Yes, well keep you cool in the summer with a big fan all night. Well keep you warm during winter. When you cant sleep, we will massage you all night. I sigh. I wont ask you to do these things, so go to bed. Now that the leader has changed, your daily life will be better from now on. So go to bed. Yes, Leader. The servants, who are very anxious about the new leader, can not hide their happy faces as they exchange glances. I joke that we would stand on the frontline of the Kangho Slave Liberation Front, but this place is already full of them. Not all Unorthodox Factions behave like this, but its not just Dae Na-chal. His disciples are no better. If this is the case, I cant help it. I have no choice but to properly educate in the name of the Black Rabbit Union Leader. I finally sleep in the leaders bedroom, which is in the deepest part of the Black Rabbit Union. The long day is finally engulfed in darkness along with the Unorthodox Faction. Initially, the biggest threat to the Ilyang Prefecture was the Black Rabbit Union. Now that Ive become the leader of the Black Rabbit Union, there is no need to rush back to Ilyang. So I have breakfast with the officials of the Black Rabbit Union and brief them during a short breakfast meeting. Is it because all the officials are gathered here? A subordinate enters the hall and announces that there is a visitor. There is a woman here. She said she came to deliver some news about the Ilyang Prefecture. If it were about something else, I wouldve sent her away. But I thought you might want to hear news about Ilyang How should we proceed? The guy who delivers the report is one of So Gun-pyeongs men, who is standing guard outside the door. Is it just one person? Yes. So Gun-pyeong asks. Should I tell her to come in? As soon as I nod, So Gun-pyeong nods slightly to his men. Whats the news about the Ilyang Prefecture? No matter how I think about it, I cant guess since it didnt seem like anything had happened. In any case, it wasnt something I could brush over since it concerns where the Low-Down Sect is located, my hometown, and where the Zaha Inn was. Theres a possibility that the Black Hurricane Castle is terrorizing the town. But as soon as I see the woman that the Golden Dragon Pavilion warriors bring in, I realize what is happening. Ms. Son of the Plum Blossom Pavilion, who had utterly vanished, approaches with a slightly frightened look. Was it you? Im obviously wearing the Black Rabbit Union Leader mask right now. When I cross my arms, So Gun-pyeong asks her a question instead. Tell our leader exactly what happened. Ms. Son opens her mouth in a trembling tone. Yes, Im Son So-so of Ilyang. This is the first time I have heard Ms. Sons name. What a pretty name. At my remark, Ms. Son glances at me and continues. Perhaps nervous, her words are not clear at all. In short, she is delivering the good news that the Zaha Inns errand boy had killed the pavilion owners and is currently reigning over Ilyang. In technical terms, shes one step behind. Those living at rock bottom also have a despicable side to them. But I am generous. I objectively listened to what I had done, nodded a few times while wearing my mask, and gave a brief reply. I see. Thats good news. The officials who are listening with me are also doubting their ears. Of course, the errand boy of Ilyang was me. In other words, shes snitching on crimes that the current leader committed to said current leaders face. Even So Gun-pyeong is looking at my face with a puzzled expression. But I ask Ms. Son in a friendly voice as if I am meeting her for the first time. Youre a brave woman. Do you have anywhere to go? No, I do not. What a shame. How about I let you stay here and work as the head maid? Ms. Son asks back as her face brightens. Really? If you dont mind, you can come work for the Black Rabbit Union. Youre old enough, and if youve worked at the Plum Blossom Pavilion, you probably have plenty of experience. Youre perfect for the job. Ill do my best if you put me in charge, Leader. In return, you must promise me two things. Yes. Betrayal is death. Without question. I point my finger at Ms. Sons mouth and kindly give her the second condition. Be especially careful with that mouth of yours, got it? Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks At first glance, it seems like a strange request, but Ms. Son nods. Yes, Leader. Then its settled. You passed. Ms. Son, who has successfully gotten a new job, holds her hands together and replies with a beaming smile. Thank you very much. Leader, I will do my utmost best to serve you. You should be grateful. Im giving you a second chance. Lets do well in the future. Our Son So-so, Ms. Son what a pretty name. Haha. As I am talking, I take off the Black Rabbit Union Leader mask. At that moment, Ms. Son, who finally sees my face, lets out a strange and brief scream and faints. Thanks to her, the atmosphere suddenly becomes cold. Is this the trend these days? Why did she pass out? An official puts his finger under Ms. Sons nose. Leader, I think she fainted out of shock. Her breathing is normal. Good. Have the maids take care of her. How dare she pass out as soon as she looks at her leaders face? How presumptuous. After a few moments, the maids flock out and drag the unconscious Ms. Son away. Still, I am slightly glad to see Ms. Son alive. Shes a woman with nowhere to go, so who will if I dont take her in? I am such a merciful and benevolent man. Again, thats what the Low-Down Sect is for. I call up all the Unorthodox Faction men who have nothing to do to gather in the courtyard. The key to creating a powerful organization is group practice, group physical training, group exercise, and group mentality training. Sharing hardships will help build comradeship. Only when they are trained as elite will they stand a chance against the Black Hurricane Castle. They arent my men from the beginning, so I plan to be even harsher. So Unorthodox Factions can go up against Unorthodox Factions From the standpoint of becoming their leader, Ill have to make sure we incur minimal casualties. Therefore, training is the answer. As the leader of this bunch, I have a small hope that I wont let them live tragic lives. I climb on the podium alone and look at the Unorthodox Faction weasels on standby. Todays your first day, so Ill supervise the training only for today. The officials should also adhere to my training methods exactly as they are. The first is practice, the second is training, and the third is sparring. Well spend every second focusing on becoming stronger, except when were eating, shitting, and sleeping. Everyone will have to do physical training with no exceptions, so keep that in mind. I say it is physical training, but I expect intense training. They are people who rob others and fight for their lives, so I have no intentions of going easy on them. At this moment, I can feel the gaze of Manager Byuk, the eldest in the Black Rabbit Union, looking at me, and I lend him a helping hand. The old Manager Byuk shall be exempted from physical training. Manager Byuks face lightens up. Thank you, Leader. I give training orders to the Black Rabbit Union troops standing in line. Everyone except the members of the Golden Dragon Pavilion, get into a push-up position and start. Those of you in the Golden Dragon Pavilion, go fill some sandbags in the backyard, bring them back here, and put them on the backs of your peers doing the push-ups. So Gun-pyeong, accompany them and get them ready. So Gun-pyeong replies. Understood. It is a big mistake to think that Kangho warriors only get stronger solely based on amassing internal Qi. External martial arts is an essential component of fighting. Theres no special trick to learning the basics of external martial arts. The only way is to push the body to the limit and repeat the process. The Punch Kings usual theory is to increase the weight to the limit to achieve a simple and quick way to break ones limits. Simply put, the training I am giving Black Rabbit Union is an incomprehensible training method that the Punch King had systematically created. While the Golden Dragon Pavilion is off making sandbags, the warriors of the Black Rabbit Union begin to do push-ups with incredulous faces. The guys who start the push-ups arent serious, but I am strict. From now on, begin your 500 rounds of push-ups. ! Only those who complete 500 rounds can take a break in a squatting stance. Officials can start with 100 push-ups and once youre done, grab a wooden sword. Hit whoever is slacking off mercilessly. I also give Manager Byuk, who is enjoying himself with a satisfied expression, an order. Manager Byuk. Yes, Leader. Dont just stand there snickering. Go in and write a report. Ah, as you wish. I say as I look at the warriors slowing down in the far back. The first five people to complete 500 laps will receive a bonus. Money is always the strongest motivator. It wasnt my money, so I could throw money like flower petals to my hard-working subordinates. They may be part of the Unorthodox Faction, but everyone is just trying to make a living. Faster, faster, more accurately, faster. Officials, remember what we did in todays training. You will act as the instructor starting next time. The officials push-ups are incredibly fast. Instantly, the officials who finish 100 repetitions stand up here and there, and I order them immediately. The officials can grab a wooden sword and hit those slacking off. Its fine if you end up breaking a few bones or even beating them to the brink of death. Perhaps excited at the thought of beating their subordinates, the officials race to get the swords, even using their movement skills. The Unorthodox Faction is just made up of a bunch of weirdos. Meanwhile, I did not lax on my threats. You should try finishing your 500 push-ups as quickly as possible. The Golden Dragon Pavilion will come back soon with the sandbags. That means you have to complete the set with sandbags on your back. Which one will be easier? Without sandbags, obviously. Faster, faster, pick up the pace! At this time, someone screams like an animal. Arggghhhh! I nod my head. Good, excellent. Just now that was a good scream at expressing your pain. Ill allow you to scream from the exhaustion and pain. Whats important is that you finish the 500 push-ups quickly and accurately. Unorthodox Faction bastards struggling to finish 500 rounds of push-ups? How lame. As soon as I finish speaking, I snicker. The officials suddenly rush in with wooden swords and begin to flail at their mens buttocks. Whack! Thwack! Whack! Thwack! After watching it for a while, I give another order. Officials. Yes, Leader. Only flog your immediate subordinates. Dont flog those from another affiliate you hold a personal grudge against or share bad blood with. Thats how fair and reasonable I am. Yes, we understand. Only then did the flogging subside a little. It seems like these jackasses are only beating up other peoples minions. But the pain is just getting started. I speak to the warriors who have somehow done 300 push-ups. So Gun-pyeong will soon be here to give away the sandbags. Ah, Im looking forward to it. So thrilling. You better hurry up. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only When So Gun-pyeong appears with his subordinates and the sandbags, I raise my hands to So Gun-pyeong and prompt them to hold on. Wait. While So Gun-pyeong and his subordinates wait quietly, push-ups, screams, and flogging sound beautifully blend with the sweat flowing and dripping from the mens bodies. Establishing the Low-Down Sect, training the Unorthodox Faction minions, meeting past life connections, and I also have to scold the Twelve Generals and Dae Na-chal sooner or later. What a hectic life. And yet all this felt peaceful in my mind. Chapter 38 Chapter 38 C Twelve Generals Strategy Guide I stayed in Black Rabbit Union and trained my new subordinates day and night. I wasnt expecting their skills to improve immediately. Still, I hope their mental state would become similar to that of a Rakshasa1, a fiend, or an Asura2. In short, I want their mentality to be both elite and evil. They mistakenly think I would eventually let them off to some extent. I have no intention of easing off my training for them. Gaining a name as a member of the Unorthodox Factions means they have committed heinous things. In the sense of atonement, I train myself, the officials, and subordinates with ferocity as if we are going to break our bodies over and over again. The same applies to me. External martial arts training is inherently painful. Much like how life is all about pain and suffering. I often exercise and train together with my subordinates. If the leader is in training, no subordinates will dare to express their reluctance. With this, Ive thoroughly integrated myself into the Black Rabbit Union. I am so engrossed in training that I cant remember whether I was originally the Low-Down Sect Leader, the Black Rabbit Union Leader, an errand boy, or a training instructor. We are simply trash that is spending all our time practicing martial arts, training, eating, and shitting every day with the aim of eliminating monkeys like Dae Na-chals forces and the Black Hurricane Castle. Thats who we are. As I am taking a break in the main hall after wrapping up a long morning training session, Manager Byuk, whom I havent seen for a while, approaches me with a large number of documents. Leader, I have something to report to you. I reply while looking at the pile of papers in the hands of Manager Byuk. Why are there so many? Please, allow me to explain. Manager Byuk sits down and explains the documents. In summary, the documents are reports that summarize the ledger, the current status of the workforce, and business. Honestly speaking, I am not very interested. When did he take the time to do all this? However, I compliment Manager Byuk in acknowledgment of his hard work. Formidable, indeed. Our Manager Byuk is an excellent talent that serves as the brain, the general, the administrator, and the financial head of the Black Rabbit Union. I need to add another position for you as the finance officer. Its too much of a waste to leave you as a mere manager. Ive done everything in my power. I just say a few words of praise, but Manager Byuks expression brightens like a sunflower. Even as the one who complimented him, I am puzzled. Thank you, Leader. I was able to work on this happily when you gave me an exemption from the training. I nod my head. Hmm, no wonder. But there is something else that Manager Byuk wants to report. Please take a look at this as well. I tried to summarize it extensively in one volume. I open the book Manager Byuk hands to me, and this time I am in shock due to the extraordinary title. Twelve General Strategy Guide (Ӽ) ! A volume is usually a book containing poems and paragraphs. Therefore, the title itself assumes that valuable information, methods, and recommended strategies regarding the Twelve Generals are contained within. I flip through the book with a serious expression and remain in awe. Not only does the volume have detailed writings, but there are also illustrations. The quality is as remarkable as a prestigious faction or clans secret scripture. Manager Byuk, you have excellent drawing skills. Manager Byuk briefly explains the strategy guide with a pleased expression. I figured that you might be curious about the physique, the masks, martial arts techniques, and weaponry of the Twelve Generals. I organized everything I knew and wrote it down. I included illustrations as well. It wouldve taken a long time to just write the information, but it wasnt difficult to compile them all since I enjoy drawing. Listening to Manager Byuk, I study the strategy guide avidly. The portraits of the Twelve Generals are drawn inside in the style of heroes and generals from the Water Margin and the Records of the Three Kingdoms3. In addition, their weaponry, their respective martial arts technique, and their characteristics are also described. I know a lot about them, but theres a lot here that I didnt know about the Twelve Generals since I was never personally involved with them. In particular, I didnt know that Hong-shin (t), the red monkey) is a woman. Hong-shin is a woman? Yes, as I have stated in there, shes a kleptomaniac, so shes probably stealing from somewhere right now. Hong-shin is a unique disciple who steals items Dae Na-chal commissions her for and uses the commission fee she earned to study martial arts. Hong-shin is known to only train on her movement skills, so you should be careful of her. Although her rank is lower than yours, all the generals take her seriously, as shes agile and quick on her feet. I see. Is she really that good? Theres bound to be some prodigies who are very talented in one aspect. It seems Hong-shin has a natural talent in agility. At that moment, So Gun-Pyeong sticks his head out of the main hall, and I take the chance to say to him. Take over the afternoon training, Chief So. Ill listen to the moans and cries from here. So Gun-pyeong replies. Understood. As So Gun-pyeong closes the main hall doors and leaves, Manager Byuk says. Leader, allow me to be frank with you. Go ahead. I think were starting to look more like a proper group of the Unorthodox Faction. And Ive been working happily lately. I smile internally and reply. Our Manager Byuk is excellent as well. Today, I will thoroughly study this book inside out. Did you include information about Dae Na-chal, too? Manager Byuk replies with a rather proud look. Information is typically saved for last (ĩβ). Its at the end of the book. As expected, the final boss is saved for last. Very well. Ill reward you accordingly. Twice the amount from what So Gun-pyeong received. Thank you, Leader. Though I didnt gather information to get money, I gladly accept your gift. As I finish speaking to him, Manager Byuk and I break into laughter together. Hahahaha... I didnt know Black Rabbit Union had such a talent in place. A talented man like him should be utilized proactively. As I finish organizing the documents, I give Manager Byuk his next task. Hes the type of man who would probably just roam around with a smile if I leave him idle. Of course, it is a crucial issue, so my voice naturally turns serious. Manager Byuk, I have a task for you. I am all ears. I am a man of great ambition. Manager Byuk is like the Zhuge Liang to my Liu Bei, the Guo Jia to my Cao Cao, and just as outstanding as Lu Su of Wu. Manager Byuk answers with a fist and palm salute. Im flattered. It doesnt matter if money goes into this. After hiring more people to gather information, organize the current status of the forces surrounding the Black Rabbit Union, the map of the sect forces, as well as a list of important masters and their characteristics. Organize and write up a big plan for me to be the conqueror of the region. Now, the point here is to organize it however you like. Draw and write to your hearts content without conforming to any format or structure. Ill be the judge. Im not a man who believes in information when I simply see it. But I think Manager Byuks skills will be of great help. Despite what I said, Manager Byuk grins without muttering a response. Why are you smiling again? At my question, Manager Byuk replies to me with a look of dignity. I am already preparing for it. Before realizing it, I let out a loud exclamation as if I had just downed a shot of alcohol. I then applaud him and say Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Good. Thats all for today. Ah, when you hire people. Yes. Bring this with you to Ilyang and use it. There are many idlers there. This is why the hometown is always the problem. Im quite adaptable. Lets do that. I will report to you soon. It is not until Manager Byuk steps away that Ms. Son, who is waiting nearby, speaks to me in a nervous voice. Leader, this is Ms. Son. Hm, yes. Our head maid, Son So-so. Whats the matter? Our eloquent Ms. Son, what brings you here? Someone wearing a mask is waiting for you outside. Theyre looking for you. What sort of mask? At that moment, the main hall door opens, and So Gun-pyeong, who has come to make the same report, says. Leader, Hong-shin (t) is here to see you. All right, Ill be out soon. Before leaving the main hall, I quickly scan through the Hong-shin page of the strategy guide. Obsessed with movement skills Known to be a pathological kleptomaniac. Assumed to have substantial wealth in possession. The most recent general to become a disciple but is rapidly rising in rank by winning against some of the generals. Has the audacity to claim a draw by using her movement skill to run away from a fight if she is at a disadvantage. Rumored to have accumulated Qi by stealing and consuming panaceas. Entered into an agreement with Dae Na-chal to help him steal desirable goods in exchange for a secret martial arts scripture of her choice Assume that her movement skill is on par with the Four Generals. I slowly close the strategy guide and put a cold smile on my face. Familiarization, done. As I expect, there is not a single factor that can drive me to defeat. I walk up to the podium and look at Hong-shin, who has come alone without fear. Hong-shin is dressed in a red-colored attire with a thin piece of outerwear. Since she is wearing a monkey mask, I cant confirm whether her real face is as ugly as a monkey. However, her natural body curves and pelvis make clear the fact that she is a woman. Hong-shin speaks in a stiff voice from under her mask. Brother Rabbit, are you doing well? I reply with information from the strategy guide without much thought. Its been a while, you thieving bitch. Excuse me? Thieving bitch? Thats rather offensive. I guess they didnt have that kind of relationship. I put my hand inside the mask momentarily and scratch my chin. That came out wrong. I must be tired from training lately. Please understand. Judging from her sharp voice, it is evidence that Hong-shin is ambitious, competitive, and does not easily open up to others. By the way, are you here to challenge me? I came to say hello. Why? Are you afraid that Ill challenge you? I tilt my head. Afraid? Hong-shin continues to run her mouth. Of course youre scared. Youll be up against the shrewd Brother Baek Yu soon. If you give me a hefty allowance like last time, Ill step down for today. Ive just realized Hong-shins method of extorting money is very strategic. It seems like shes well aware that this isnt the time for me to overexert myself before my showdown with Baek Yu. . A Junior Sister that extorts money from her Senior Brother, how ridiculous. The Unorthodox Faction is a total mess. Hong-shin crosses her arms and says, Isnt my skill similar to Brother Rabbit to begin with? Youll go up against Brother Baek Yu soon, and if you get hurt fighting me, your chances to go up the top four will go up in smoke. Isnt that so? Are you a beggar? Why do you keep talking about money? Youre going too far today. Ha! I guess well have to settle our score with a fight. Hong-shin cheekily holds her hands together and cracks her knuckles before saying. Are you ready? Junior Sister, how much do you want? Hong-shins tone changes instantly at my question. Hm, since you earn a lot. Is this how you rob off all your brothers? Hong-shin tilts her head and says. Brother Rabbit, you have spoken rather harshly to me today. Your voice sounds off. I come up with a random excuse. Recently, I have been trying to learn an extreme Yang martial art style, but I injured my throat because I couldnt control the Qi in my body. My voice has become like this after coming down with a fever. Really? Indeed, this woman has an incredible side to her. I can only see her eyes since shes wearing a mask, but those two eyes are smiling. She must be happy to hear that I have been injured. Hong-shin suddenly changes her demeanor. Since I came all the way here, I have to challenge you myself. If you dont want to face me, Ill take 30 silvers (y) instead! I wont even show my face around here in a while. Your stupid subordinates cant catch me even if you order them to. You know that. I snort and slowly loosen the muscles around my mouth. Monkey Sister, did you fully understand? I said I mastered an extreme Yang martial arts style. What does that have to do with anything? Master told us to use all means to become stronger. Congratulations on learning a new martial arts style. The extreme Yang martial arts style Ive learned are literally flames. Everything I touch can be set ablaze. Your thin coat and form-fitting red attire will be burned and expose your naked body. It will be a feast for my men. How dare you challenge me? At the threat of burning all her clothes if she challenges me, Hong-shin stares at me for a long time. So what? Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only The men standing around nearby also look at me with anticipation. So what? Ill be rooting for you. A demon or evil spirit of Hindu mythology ?? Superhuman demigods or demons of Hindu & Persian mythology ?? Water Margin and Records of the Three Kingdoms are both examples of Chinese historical literature. ?? Chapter 39 Chapter 39 C The Winner Does Not Take Off Their Mask. Glaring at Hong-shin, I say. If you hand over all your money right now, Ill send you off with limbs intact today and show mercy, for we are fellow generals. I say this, but Im not planning to let Hong-shin go from the start. I wont accept your challenges unless you bring me loads of money. But, if you defeat me, even just once, Ill return it all to you. Not sure if youve ever heard of a Sparring Gamble (ـ) Sparring Gamble. As the word suggests, it means betting money on a sparring match. Stealing and gambling are one and the same, so it would be a tempting suggestion for Hong-shin. Hong-shins eyes immediately change. Are you serious? I provoke her, smiling from my eyes within the mask. Sister, be glad you arent dead yet. If youre scared, hand over your money and scram. This way, she has no choice but to accept. Right? Hong-shin replies. A Sparring Gamble Brother isnt going to come up with the rules of challenging his Junior Sister, are you? You decide. I am going to beat up Hong-shin if she loses the bet anyway. In her mind, Hong-shin is surprised. Then lets cut to the chase. If you manage to take off my mask in 7 minutes by using any means and methods, I lose. Were disciples of the same clan. It wouldnt be noble for us to use fists. But if we are competing in running, I have an advantage. So setting a time limit would be fair. The bet is to take off my mask. How about that? I nod my head. Fair enough. I have already seen the strategy guide, so Id expected her to suggest a match of agility. But this is working out in my favor. To clarify. You can use any tools and strategies. The location is the Black Rabbit Union, as long as you dont leave the perimeter. If you go over the wall, you lose. Any tools, which means it includes throwing a hidden weapon or making smoke screens. She will try to fill up the time using absurd tricks and movement skills. I yawn lazily and retort. Lets get started. Ill have to take a nap after the match. Hong-shin leaps on the wall with a peculiar laugh and throws a small hourglass at my subordinates. Referee, turn it upside down, and once the sand runs out, itll be exactly 7 minutes. We are starting now. Hong-shin wriggles her finger at me. Come. Brother. I saunter up to Hong-shin with my hands behind my back. Cocky. Hong-shin says with a smile. Are you a snail? What are you up to? Playing hide and seek. Since I am approaching so slowly, Hong-shin has no reason to scurry off. Hong-shin stares at me then retreat and leap on top of the wall. I am barely watching Hong-shin and am catching up to her. I reach out my hands on the wall and climb up normally and slowly. Up, I go Hong-shin still speaks in a puzzled tone. Seven minutes isnt a long time. Shut up. How dare you lecture your brother. I roll up my sleeves and say to Hong-shin. Today, I will teach you a lesson. I said Id let you go if you left your money behind, yet you simply dont understand your place. I approach Hong-shin with a scowl. I didnt have to run fast from the start to catch the fleeing Hong-shin. Hong-shin is now taking a step backward to check my position. Perhaps thinking she didnt need to step on the wall or the roof, she lightly jumps and lands in the wide center of the courtyard. You seemed very relaxed. I also land in the courtyard and go after Hong-shin at what must seem to be the slowest speed in the world. A slow and frustrating speed, as if a turtle is approaching its prey. This is, of course, psychological warfare. I am so slow that Hong-shin doesnt have to demonstrate any of her tricks. The moment of truth will happen in a moment anyway, and by then, my hands will be faster than Hong-shins eyes. You still have time. If you give me all the money, I wont humiliate you in front of my men. Oh man, Im scared~. I stop in my tracks and look at Hong-shin. The distance between Hong-shin and I is about three jangs (, around 9m). Hong-shin steps back, slowly widening the distance, and says. Bro- When Hong-shin is about to say something, I shoot through the air like a thunderbolt and rush diagonally over Hong-shins head. Hong-shin, who couldnt even utter the word Brother, reacts quickly as if she had disappeared. Its normal to turn your back and run away, but she is backing away as if she couldnt miss out on watching my strange behavior. If this happens, I will catch Hong-shin even faster. My speed right now exceeds hers. I leap, curving my path, and narrow the distance from three jangs to one jang in a heartbeat. As the gap grows further apart, I kick the ground and catch up to her like a bowstring returning to its original position. Hong-shin inserts her arms in her pocket and tosses white powder in the air. Right before my vision turns white I scatter the white powder with a shot of Palm Wind, estimate the sound of her movements, and kick the ground again. I narrow the distance like a ghost and immediately catch up to Hong-shin. Hong-shin suddenly shrieks and then turns and soars into the air with all her might. At that moment, the gap between my hand stretching out in the air at Hong-shins feet as she leaps forward is very narrow. I note that Hong-shin is about to escape out of my grasp I deliberately mutter the name of the new martial arts I acquired in the medicine storage room. Great Absorption Technique. I declare the name of my technique aloud. It is taboo and childish to shout out a techniques name during a fight in Kangho. However, this shameless shout of my techniques name is proof that you can fool your opponent. Hong-shins ankle, trying to narrowly escape, is pulled into my hand as I catch her. Terrified that she might die, Hong-shin twirls her body around and fires palm force from one hand. Holding onto her ankles, I swing my arm and slam Hong-shin on the floor. Hong-shin hurriedly reaches out both her hands, pushes against the floor, and yells. Help... Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Surprisingly, Hong-shin bounces off the floor using her palm force, bounces off with a flip and extends a vigorous-looking palm toward my face. This also counts as part of use any means anyway. I calmly strike Hongshins palm with a finger technique infused with the Fiery Fragrance. At the same time, I also use my absorption technique with my left hand and pull off Hong-shins mask. Boom a loud drumming sound rings through the courtyard, and Hong-shins body is hurled into the air and becomes enveloped in flames. Hong-shins top is burnt to pieces and flutters away, revealing her naked flesh. However, as she is a woman rumored to be a thief, she wears a protective layer of tough material over her undergarments. The subordinates let out a strange exclamation at the sight. Oh, lord. Her body lays itself out like a starfish. Hong-shins clothes are also seared off, exposing her bare skin. But it never crosses my mind that Hong-shin might die. When her attack collided with my finger technique, I felt the attack power was no less powerful than the former Black Rabbit Union Leader. Pretty impressive. Her data in the book mentions that she has accumulated a considerable amount of internal Qi through stealing and consuming panacea. While my subordinates are gawking at Hong-shins exposed skin, I grab the nape of a black robe with my fingers and fly toward Hong-shin. The fluttering black robe is spread and covers Hong-shins body. Only then did I ask the subordinates to snap out of it. Stop staring. Yes, Leader. I say as I examine the red mask in my hand. I won easily, leisurely, instantaneously, without even the slightest danger of losing. Congratulations. Dont mention it. I expect Hongshin to regain consciousness already. And yet she hasnt woken up. In this regard, I kindly explain the psychological warfare in Kangho to my subordinates. Everyone, take a look at Red Sister. Is she still passed out? Yes. Wrong. She will be carried off in a stretcher and wake up in the middle of the night. Then shell steal from the medicine storage room, rob the Black Rabbit Unions funds, and slip away into the night like a thief. But that doesnt work on me. Always watch out for honey traps. Especially in Unorthodox Factions. As soon as I finish speaking, Hong-shin springs up like a ghost and hurriedly puts on the black robe I had covered her with. Brother, Im learning a lot from you today. Only then did the Black Rabbit Union warriors see Hong-shins face without a mask. I realize that her taking off the mask itself is a honey trap. It is a pretty face that nine out of ten men would fall for. Moreover, most female masters mastering martial arts are in good shape. She is certainly a desirable woman from the perspective of trashy Unorthodox Faction men. Sure enough, the eyes of my subordinates are filled with sympathy. Tsk. This is why honey traps are scary. Sister, dont think about running away. Kneel. Im faster than you anyway. The moment you are caught, I will strip you from that black robe. Hong-shin, who has her legs flexed, stumbles unconsciously and calmly kneels. Brother, I have been rather rude to you today. I didnt know your martial art skills had advanced so fast. Cut the crap. Youve lost, so hand it over. Hong-shin stares at me and takes a heavy pouch out of her pocket. Slowly approaching, I reach for the pouch before Hong-shin can resist, and as soon as I hold my arms out, I use The Great Absorption Technique. Swoosh! The pouch, pulled with the strange phenomenon of a reverse whirlwind, is brought to the palm of my hand. The more I utilize The Great Absorption Technique, which is created from half of the Heavenly Pearls Qi, the more I get used to it. This is awesome The pouch is quite heavy. When I open it, it is filled with thin rectangular gold and silver coins commonly used as currency in the region. As expected, our sister is rich. Hong-shin asks as she looks up at me. Also, Brother, whats The Great Absorption Technique? The Great Absorption Technique is just The Great Absorption Technique. Its a martial art I created. Why? Are there no better martial arts suited for stealing than this? Still, if you learned my technique, you wouldve been crowned the Great Thief (I). However, this is a martial art no one can learn since Im the only one who possesses Heavenly Pearl. Although this will happen in the future, if the cult leader tries to do this again, I will kill him myself. There is still plenty of time. Hong-shin suddenly speaks in a pleading tone. Brother, could you teach that technique to your pretty Sister? Ill get whatever you want and bring it to you. You know, my skills Youll never get to learn that technique. Wake up. I cant teach you even if you stole the world and laid it at my feet. Youre so mean. It just looks like a type of levitating skill you can learn naturally with sufficient Qi. Think as you please. Tell the other low-ranking generals as well. Our level of difference has widened, so dont bother me from now on. Hong-shin replies as if shes given up completely. Ill inform them. And thank you for sparing my life. I examine Hong-shins mask. Like the black rabbit mask, it is a mask that is crafted with considerable effort. Brother, please return my mask. I wonder what this mask means to her and say. For free? No way. Exchange this for 100 silvers. Ill keep it safe for you. Hong-shin replies coldly. Are you really going to do this? 200 silvers. You know Im close to the Four General Brothers, right? And Im even closer to Brother Baek Yu. 300 silvers. Please give it back. 400. Ill tell the master. As soon as she mentions Dae Na-chals name as if she is throwing a fit, I turn around and approach her instantly. I then tap both sides of her pressure points with the Wood Chicken Finger Technique. Hong-shins body turns as stiff as a chicken transformed into wood. I order my men. Lock her up in the barn. Ill torture her myself. I glare at her to watch Sisters reaction in her stiffened state. Only then did Hong-shin speak in a subdued tone as if she could look into my eyes hidden behind my mask. Who are you? Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only As I give her an eye smile, I smack Hong-shin across the cheek. The slap echoes through the Black Rabbit Union. How dare you speak so rudely to your Brother? You must think Im easy just because I call you sister. Take her away. The men lift the frozen red monkey and head for the barn. Making sure that the officials are staring at me, I say. Youve got enough rest now, havent you? Start the afternoon training. Then, I let out a yawn. I have been studying The Great Absorption Technique until late at night for the past few days, so I havent been able to sleep well. Chapter 40 Chapter 40 C Be Nice When He Smiles At You. With her pressure points sealed and bound tightly in ropes, Hong-shin could not move at all. Furthermore, the place she is being kept in is a shabby barn. Rather than feeling scared, she sighs instead. If she had noticed her opponents character earlier, she would have run away. Amid her captivity, she racks her mind to figure out how to persuade her captor. Then the man posing as the Black Rabbit Union Leader appears. But she still has no good ideas. Looking at the unfamiliar eyes closely, she gets a strange feeling. I dont think hes a normal nutjob. It is also the first time Hong-shin senses such an unusual madness from a persons eyes. It is also strange that those eyes didnt seem to only be filled with sheer madness. A sense of arrogance that is mixed with confidence and pride. Also, there is a stubbornness that refuses to listen to others. Is that all? Whether he is joking or being serious is uncertain. The vagueness appears not only in his eyes but also in his voice. In short, Hong-shin concludes that the man is no ordinary lunatic. The judgment isnt made just based on his gaze, but she reaches a conclusion after having sparred and talked to the man. However, a moment later, it isnt the fake leader of the Black Rabbit Union who appears. Instead, it is Manager Byuk, who she has met before. Feeling a sense of foreboding, Hong-shin opens her mouth. Manager Byuk, what are you doing here? Manager Byuk answers as he enters. Im here under the orders of our leader. Excuse my rudeness. If you think its rude, why dont you leave already? Can a person under orders do that? I have to do what Im told. Then other people also come in, placing a small desk and chair, before leaving as abruptly as they came. Manager Byuk takes a seat and takes out a thin brush and paper. Hong-shin asks in astonishment. What are you doing? Manager Byuk grins while holding his brush. Our leader instructed me to draw a portrait of your face, General Hong-shin. Im too old to protest. If he asks me to draw, I draw. Hes more terrifying than you would expect. Im only following orders, so please dont hate me for it. Hong-shin shouts. Why my face? Suddenly, Hong-shin eyes Manager Byuk as if he is an old pervert. Manager Byuk replies while sticking out his brush to measure her by eye and estimate the angles. If you flee from the Twelve Generals or refuse to cooperate with the Black Rabbit Union, I will hand this wanted poster to the Murim Alliance. Have you heard of the anonymity report center of the Murim Alliance? Im going to deliver it there. Youve earned a reputation for stealing, havent you? Hold still. Ill draw you in detail. I dont know if I can say this What? You have a great body. Shut up! Manager Byuk laughs like a maniac with a brush in his hand. Hehehehe, I mean, as a work of art. Dont get me wrong. Lets get started. What the hell are you staring at? How can I draw you without looking at you? To draw mountains, you have to look at mountains. To draw water, you have to look at water, no? Hong-shin feels her skin break out in goosebumps as she listens to Manager Byuks garbage. Manager Byuk, please call Brother here. Hell be here in time after his nap. Please dont whine. Hey! Though youre a general ranking about the same as our leader, I do not appreciate hearing someone my granddaughters age speak informally to me. Its very unpleasant. So what if its unpleasant? Hong-shin spits out venomous words in anger before realizing her mistake. Manager Byuk then threatens Hong-shin with a look of pity. Should I draw a nude portrait? Hong-shin finally quiets down. Manager Byuk grins. All right. That was a joke. Itll only take a moment, so dont resent me for it. If I want to live, I have no choice but to do this. Picking up his brush again, Manager Byuk observes her intently, measuring her angles from side to side before saying. Seeing as I have managed to survive long here, let me give you a word of advice. I dont need it. Even though she didnt need it, Manager Byuk smiles and whispers to Hong-shin in a small voice. As you may have noticed, the former leader I served is dead. Hong-shin gulps and listens to Manager Byuk. The voice that comes out of Manager Byuk is bleak, like a strange old man who guards an abandoned shrine alone is speaking to her. He was sent flying to the wall, crushing the bones in his limbs without being able to defend himself, and he died. We didnt have time to mourn. It wasnt that sad. I didnt serve him because I liked him anyway. I caught a glimpse of you earlier. You barely got a slap on the face Listen when he talks with a smile. I havent figured out the new leaders personality yet. Honestly, I expected General Hong-shin to have your limbs torn off and die. Be nice when he smiles at you. Manager Byuk takes his eyes off the painting and stares at Hong-shin. Do you understand? Hong-shin nods once. Manager Byuk uses his brush to measure again and says in his usual voice. Very well. Your posture is perfect. Stay just like that. As soon as I wake up to the loud drum in the training ground, I give orders to So Gun-pyeong and stagger to the barn. Wearing the black robe I gave her, Hong-shin is perched with a spaced-out expression on her face. Looking at Hong-shin and Manager Byuk, I say. What? Whats wrong with her? Did she steal something again? Hong-shin replies. I didnt steal anything. Brother, you came. Yeah. As I look at Manager Byuks sketch, he asks with a happy look. What do you think, Leader? I nod my head approvingly. Youve moved Red Sister into a painting. Hahaha. Thank you. If she ever acts out of line, make multiple copies of the portrait and send them to the Murim Alliance, as well as any factions and noble families looking for thieves. Shell have a bounty put on her head. Without a question, Leader. All right, off you go. Yes, Leader. I squat down and look into Hong-shins eyes. Want me to let you go? Yes. I cant do that. The pressure points are wearing off soon. Hong-shin then speaks with a tone of resignation. Who are you anyway? Your martial art styles are different, fighting stances are different, your voice is different, and your personalities are different. Above all, your gaze, eye shape, and even your eyes are different from Brother Rabbit. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Is it because youre a thief? You have sharp eyes. You cant hide your identity with a mask. Who do you think you are to disrespect Dae Na-chals disciples? You think you can handle his wrath? If I was afraid of Dae Na-chal, I wouldnt have done any of this in the first place. Red Sister. Dont call me Sister. Thieving bitch. Fine, just call me sister. Anyway, Brother. You kept me alive because you want something from me, right? Nothing is more important to me than money. With enough compensation, I can cooperate in whatever you have planned. Hong-shin smiles as she drags out her sentence. Im not a man who over-calculates situations, so I go straight to the point. Im going to kill Dae Na-chal. Hong-shins expression suddenly drops. Master Dae Na-chal is powerful. Hes stronger than most Kangho warriors think. He hides his true abilities with his notoriety. I dont think youre skilled enough for that, brother. Well, Ill try to keep your trivial opinion in mind. Im an honest man. I just need to check whether you have it in you to betray Dae Na-chal. I wont believe you even if you say youd betray him right now. Then what am I supposed to do? You wont believe me even if I say Ill betray him. What do you mean? Either Ill kill all Twelve Generals or lock them up in this barn and strike at Dae Na-chal directly. Arent you supposed to cut the limbs first before getting into the real deal? Like you did to Brother Rabbit? I answer as I get up. Should I send you to that rabbit bastard? No, how long will you keep me locked up here? Chief So will soon bring a poison that he brewed. Who do you think will be drinking it? Of course, itll be you, Red Sister. Turning pale, Hong-shin says in a voice that seeks to appeal to me. Brother, dont do this. Please just give me an order instead. I will not betray you and carry it out thoroughly. You even have a wanted poster of me. Mmm, I dont believe you. In any case, you cant trust the Unorthodox Factions, and they are a species that cant be trusted. In particular, I know that every word that this woman is spewing is a lie. At this time, So Gun-pyeong comes in with a black pill enclosed in a white cloth. Leader, here is the Violet Mist Poison. Feed it to her. So Gun-pyeong approaches without saying a word, opens Hong-shins mouth with his hands, and shoves Violet Mist Poison in. So Gun-pyeong then asks while looking at Hong-shin. Shes not swallowing. What should we do? Beat her until she swallows. As soon as I finish my words, Hong-shin gulps down the poison. Hong-shin then speaks with a defeated look. Start talking. What do you want? I give the order based on what I remembered from the Twelve Generals Strategy Guide and what I learned in my past life. You have ten days. Until then, you can come back and take the antidote. Kill the White Rat (), Yellow Horse (S), and Green Dog (G). Do you know why I only asked you to kill these three? Hong-shin naturally knows what these three generals have in common. They are notoriously known for their depravity, murder, and theft. But its impossible to kill three people in ten days. Just kill me now. Dont say anything you dont mean. With your skills, its enough to take out one. One? If you bring one of the three within ten days, Ill give you the antidote. And then well continue our conversation from there. Free her. So Gun-pyeong approaches and releases the rope that was tightly tied around her. I approach Hong-shin, still trapped in a frozen state as shes still immobilized, and say. You know how to assassinate someone as you have mastered stealing. Honestly, you can do it in ten days if you set your mind to it. The Twelve Generals can fight one another to death, so it wont put you in danger from Dae Na-Chal. Why dont you kill them yourself? Youre good enough anyway. It is inefficient for a chief commander to do what a general can do. Of course, you should be the one to do it, Sister. I finally release Hong-shins pressure points as I finish speaking. She then begins to stretch around before asking me a question. Now, tell me who you are. I just cant seem to figure it out. Are you part of the Murim Alliance? Im just an errand boy from the next town over. So Gun-pyeong must be thinking that I am revealing my identity too easily, so he hurriedly looks at me. ! Hong-shin replies. I supposed you dont want to tell me. I understand. Ill kill one of the three generals and return. We can talk then. When Hong-shin gives a bizarre response to my answer, So Gun-pyeong quickly turns his face to Hong-shin, this time with a look of surprise. ! I call out to Hong-shin, who is leaving the barn in haste. Sister. Yes? You like gambling, right? Of course. When is the most exciting moment in gambling? When you win with a reverse bet. I have tied Hong-shins interest and the direction of her life with a gamblers reverse bet. It doesnt matter if you have already taken the violet mist poison; the decision is still yours to make. You can side with Dae Na-chal, take the antidote, and reveal my identity. The compensation isnt much if you win this war with me. Hong-shin looks back at me. What will I gain if you win against him, Brother? Nothing much. If its nothing much, why should I side with you? You wont have to see the pathetic sight of Dae Na-chal ordering his disciple around, asking them to bring him woman and fortune, kill people and steal. Itd be tough to kill him, though? With the Four Generals and guards. I push my finger at Hong-shins forehead and say. I know thats why its a reverse bet. You have ten days to think about it. Im off. Hong-shin, who walks a few steps from the barn, suddenly sprints using her movement skill and disappears beyond the wall. So Gun-pyeong asks with a sour face. I made the Violet Mist Poison in a rush. Will it be okay? What did you use? Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only I just mixed laxatives and digestive medicine together with my hands. She might wet her pants on the way. As expected, Chief So. Youre as meticulous as ever. What if she noticed its not poison (M)? I lift my mask and grin. Thats all right. The only poison to a gambler is a reverse bet after all. Chapter 41 Chapter 41 C Red Sister Escaping The Crisis Hong-shin quickly uses her movement skills and runs as far as she can from the Black Rabbit Union. She fears that the nut job might change his mind and give orders to bring her back. She has no way to read whats in her fake brothers mind. Hence her fear only grows bigger and bigger as she flees. Naturally, she heads for a place she assumes is out of reach for the Black Rabbit Union. Hong-shin, who has been running fiercely for some time, frowns and gradually reduces the speed of her movement skill. Then, one word pops up in her mind. Diarrhea? Then another thought follows after that conclusion. No way. She wonders if hell come after her. As if diarrhea and no way have bad blood with each other, her stomach grumbles and a drop of sweat drips down her forehead. Why here of all places? Is it the poison? Hong-shin walks with her hands on her stomach. Poison comes in various types, but most will have bugs (M, insects) grow in the hosts body after a certain amount of time passes. The principle is if the insects are not killed with an antidote, the ingester will die. The reason why this dangerous poison is not widely used is simple. The production process is troublesome. However, Hong-shin cant doubt whether the poison is real or fake since she doesnt know who her fake brother is. Her life is on the line. So, thats why the sudden stomach ache is making her even more flustered. Shes never ingested poison before, so she cant know if one of the effects includes diarrhea. However, she assumes that it is natural to hurt this much since shed taken the poison on an empty stomach. Hong-shin swallows her saliva and staggers as she looks around. Please. Please. Ill be good for the rest of my life. Please. She cant find a single bathroom. Hong-shin, who is about to cry tears in frustration, hurriedly calms down. Thats because she thinks that she might shit her pants earlier if she bursts into tears. She struggles to find a bathroom or a deserted forest while holding onto her senses, which she loses for brief moments. Whenever that happens, a couple of the peddlers passing by will eye Hong-shin strangely. This causes Hong-shin to flee the scene using her movement skill with a bright red face. Please anybody, help me. And she again stops her movement skill in a place where theres no one around. She might really wet her pants if she continues running. On the secluded road, Hong-shin takes a deep breath and simultaneously squeezes her sphincter. Perhaps she might have already lost control if she hadnt mastered martial arts. In any case, Hong-shin manages to prevent this ill fortune with the resistance of a body she had trained mercilessly. Then, Hong-shin notices someone running fast enough to cause a dust storm on the road she is running on. As fast as the wind. Hong-shin thinks that her footwork is outstanding, but that speed is one she cant win against even if she is in perfect condition. From top to bottom, a man dressed in prim white clothes () passes by momentarily and glances at her. Hong-shin swallows as the man passes by. A master! At that instant, the nobleman in white (¹) stops his movement skill a distance away and asks Hong-shin. Miss, is everything alright? You look quite pale. Hearing the rich, deep voice, Hong-shin hesitates before replying with a tired voice. Poison As soon as the word leaves her mouth, Hong-shin becomes horrified. Ugh, what am I doing? The opponent here is a Kangho warrior. How can she tell them shes been poisoned? Regardless, Hong-shin is in such a bad condition that she couldnt care less and says. Im looking... for the bathroom. The man strides up and says with the most serious expression. To put it simply, you were poisoned, and youre in a hurry to go to the bathroom? Hop on. I was on my way to my favorite place, and if you dont want to handle your business in the woods, Ill take you there quickly. You look pale. Hurry up. The man shows his back without questioning Hong-shin at all. Hes such a generous man. Hong-shin asks, thinking about what she can do if he is ambushed. Is it close? Ill run at full speed. Id appreciate that. After getting on the mans back, Hong-shin tightens her sphincter. If she had slacked off in training, she would have wet her pants then and there on his back. Running as fast as a wild horse, the man says. Hold tight. While Hong-shin barely answers with a frown, the surrounding countryside is passing by quickly. Thank you. It is a tremendous speed, but the mans voice is even calm. Stay calm. You can overcome anything if youre calm. After a while, the man enters a neighborhood with a scattering of small shops. He quickly drifts through the construction site, letting Hong-shin down as soon as he arrives at the bathroom behind his favorite store. Hurry in. Ill be at the store, so make yourself. Hong-shin finally arrives at salvation with a pale face. As soon as the man disappears, Hong-shin lowers her pants and relieves the crisis. She is once again impressed by the mans kindness. Maybe because its diarrhea, but the sound is too loud. It is, no doubt, the biggest crisis of her life. Hong-shin thinks as she pinches her nose. Im beyond grateful, but I dont think I can look at him in the face. Hong-shin unknowingly sheds a tear. She doesnt know why she is crying. There is a continuous clatter of splashes below her. Hong-shin feels like shell burst into tears from a range of unknown emotions, so she puts her fist in her mouth and manages to hold back her tears. But she still thinks that it is a relief. Plop by the time the sound dies down, Hong-shin is making an exhausted face. Life isnt a big deal after all. After avoiding the crisis perfectly, Hong-shin walks around the town to get rid of the smell and occasionally exhales a long breath to recover her breath. It feels like she is slowly regaining reason. Hong-shin, who looks around the town from afar, snoops in front of the store where she had used the bathroom and looks inside. The nobleman in white is eating something with his back turned, and sometimes he looks up and talks to the store owner. After contemplating for a long time, Hong-shin opens the door to the store and enters after gaining an epiphany that life is no big deal. The normal-looking nobleman in white turns his head and asks indifferently. Are you all right? The store owner bows his head. Welcome. Hong-shin replies. Yes, all thanks to you. Thank you very much. Suddenly, Hong-shin reaches out to the front of her arms to compensate him before belatedly realizing her money had been seized by the Black Rabbit Union. Oops... Seeing that, the nobleman in white says. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Dont mention it. If you dont mind, have a bowl of warm noodles. The soup is clear, so your stomach will feel better. No thanks. I dont feel like eating right now. If you insist. Hongshin feels her legs buckling, so she rests on a chair for a while. As the nobleman in white slurps the noodles, the owner says. Did you starve? Youre eating well. Please wait a moment. The nobleman in white responds. Oh, can I look forward to it? The owner comes out of the kitchen with a warm smile, placing chunks of meat with grease oozing out from it on the noblemans table. Rubbing his palms, the nobleman in white says. I must be lucky. Having these with soup is a delicacy of its own. Eat up. I would have made these into rice soup if you hadnt come in today. Youve been blessed when it comes to food. I know, right. I should at least have luck in food if Im living a poor life. Hong-shin looks at the glossy meat and asks while swallowing her saliva. Whats that? Ill love to try them upon my next visit. The owner tells Hong-shin. These are pork ribs. As the nobleman in white grabs the meat with his bare hands and tears the meat off with his mouth, he looks at Hong-shin and says, as if asking her to remember. Pork ribs. I see. The owner, perhaps being generous, says to her. Dont just stand there. Come and have a bite. Hong-shin waves her hands. No, Im just. Oh, its no big deal. Youll want to come back once you try one. The owner puts the pork ribs from the kitchen in a small bowl and places them on Hong-shins table. Dont use chopsticks, have it with your bare hands. Its well seasoned, so you dont need to dip it in anything. Just grab both sides of the ribs and munch on them. Feeling her mouth watering, Hong-shin replies. Well, you really dont have to be so kind. Is she the woman who just crashed in the bathroom not long ago? Hong-shin begins to munch on the pork ribs. The owner and the nobleman in white chat among themselves, turning their eyes as if they dont want to burden her. Did something happen? Why do you think something happened? It was so quiet that I got bored. Its good that its quiet. Thats true. How about you? Oh, theres no place like our hometown. The food doesnt taste good. What a clever trick people are doing. Old and young, there are too many snakes around. At least the food works well on your physique. Meanwhile, Hong-shin is eating all the flesh of the pork ribs and even nibbling the corners of the bone. She must be hungry after having her stomach emptied clean. Only then did the owner speak to her. Is it good? Hong-shin raises her thumb instead because she cant express her feelings in words. The owner smiles. Come often. But we dont serve pork ribs every day. Try our soup noodles. The rice soup is just as good. Hong-shin nods her head with grease around her lips and looks around the shabby store. This store is a hole in the wall. The store might close if you come later, so please keep that in mind. Hong-shin asks. Ah, are you moving? Pointing outside, the owner asks. Didnt you see the construction site on your way here? I saw it. Well be moving there once construction is done. I see. The site was enormous. What is it built for? The owner grins and replies. Were building a large inn, and it will be a local specialty. Hong-shins eyes widen as she responds. Wow, the scale of the guest inn is big, though? Thats incredible. This must be a rich neighborhood. The nobleman in white takes out a pouch from his arms and hands over three silvers to the owner. The owners candid expression brightens at once. Woah, as expected, you must wait for people to succeed. Does this solve all the past tabs? More than plenty. Hahaha. While Hong-shin thinks that the nobleman was generous, like the thief she is, she does not lose the opportunity to take a good look at the pouch going back to his pocket. At that moment, Hong-shins expression hardens as she notices something. In the silence, the sound of Hong-shin gulping down her saliva echoes. At the sound of the gulp, the nobleman in white turns his head and silently looks at Hong-shin. Only then did Hong-shin confirm the noblemans gaze again. Are you? She has doubts that hell come here just to catch her again. Unaware of the situation, Jang Deuk-soo looks between the two of them and asks. So, who is she? The nobleman in white calls Hong-shin with a blank expression and a subdued voice. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only Sister. The second Hong-shin hears the word sister, memories of the Violet Mist Poison, fake brother, diarrhea, bathroom, plop, pork ribs, pouch various flashbacks and voices overlap and cause her to pass out. Instantaneous state of Qi Deviation. As her consciousness fades to the size of a rats dropping, she hears the voice of her brother whispering nearby. You have ten days left. Then, Hong-shins senses are cut off. Chapter 42 Chapter 42 C Errand Boy Wins! Jang Deuk-soo asks me a question as he looks at Hong-shin, who had collapsed face-first into the table. She passed out just from the word sister? She isnt dead, is she? I look at Hong-shins scruff and shake my head. I was never told you had a sister? I didnt have one, but I got one. Im now the leader of the Black Rabbit Union. What? When Jang Deuk-soo looks at me with surprise in his eyes, I repeat my statement. I am the Black Rabbit Union Leader. Reminded of what I had done in the past, Jang Deuk-soo immediately understood. Ah, congrats. Dont mention it. And this woman is Hong-shin, one of the Twelve Generals. I see, so thats what you meant by sister. Weve both Dae Na-chals disciples. This fight is, how should I put it? This is a fight to determine who is scarier between Dae Na-chal and me. Having learned the situation, Jang Deuk-soo clicks his tongue and says. Look at her fainting in a heartbeat. Apparently, youre scarier. Be nice to the sister you dont even have in this life. Shes pretty, too. I turn my head quickly and check Jang Deuk-soos gaze and expression. Dont tell me... What? Why? Did you fall in love? At first sight? In a moment? Predetermined fate? Jang Deuk-soo avoids my gaze and replies. Dont be ridiculous. Hey, Jang Deuk-soo. Stop right there. It must be hard to keep a straight face, huh? Im doing the dishes. As Jang Deuk-soo enters the kitchen, I can hear Hong-shin clearly breathing. The more you cultivate Qi, the more sensitive you are to sound. Hong-shin is still lying face down on the table. I stare at Hong-shin and mutter. Did she pass out from tasting heaven after devouring two pork ribs? Jang Deuk-soo, who is washing the dishes in the kitchen, laughs. So, you have control over the Black Rabbit Union? Of course I do. I can spot a few wretches, but I dont think itll be a problem. So Gun-pyeong is meticulous anyway. Ah, the guy who lost to a kitchen knife? Hm, that guy. How long do you plan to hide your identity? Until I kill Dae Na-chal. You sure are busy. I speak casually to Hong-shin, who is still lying on the table. You have ten days. Are you sure you wanna sleep? Hong-shin springs up like a ghost and replies. No, Ill be finished before the ten days are up. Poking his head out of the kitchen, Jang Deuk-soo looks at Hong-shin with a stunned look. Although she might be one of the Twelve Generals, Hong-shin bows her head to Jang Deuk-soo, who is able to chat casually with me. Looks like shes adopting an attitude of indefinite cautiousness toward those around me. Thank you so much for the pork ribs. Dont mention it. Please come again. Well, Im off. Bowing with a palm in fist salute, Hong-shin takes off from the Chunyang Restaurant as if she is running away. Hong-shin runs away with large steps before turning her head casually and looking back into the store. Her brother is staring at her. Then her fake brother slowly put both of his hands up. Upon close inspection, it is a clear sign telling her she has ten days left. Then, when her fake brother uses his hand to draw a line over his neck, Hong-shin hurriedly turns her head as her fear of him becomes reaffirmed in her thoughts. Hong-shin flees at a rapid speed and continues to look back. Whenever she hears a sound, her body flinches as if she is having a seizure. Gasp! Its nothing. Its just a leaf. A moment later, as soon as she hears a rustling in the woods, Hong-shin says in a startled tone. Brother? Brother, is that you? It is not until she sees a wildcat running away that she breathes a sigh of relief. No, the wildcat is brother. Hong-shin, who is about to move again cautiously, instead begins running back with all her might to her safe house (). Scary, hes really scary. A well-known thief tends to have safe houses all over the place, and Hong-shin is no different. She plans to go back to the nearest safe house and relax today. This is because the sensation of Qi Deviation flowing back from her stomach is already reaching her chin. Hong-shin, who has been running at her lifes top speed, passes through a bustling street, wanders around the alley, and then calmly enters an ordinary house with an epiphany. As expected, home is the best. Home is the best. It is a cozy, safe house consisting of a small pond, a yard, a training site surrounded by high walls, and a main house separate from the outbuilding. It is a house she bought with money collected from indiscriminate theft. However, as if the flower of doubt has sprouted, Hong-shin quickly examines every corner of the house. Somehow she is afraid someone might be hiding inside. Despite confirming that no one is there, she sits on the floor doing nothing and blabbers. Brother? Are you here? If youre here, come in and have a cup of tea. Haha, ha. Sure that her surroundings are quiet, Hong-shin eases her pretentious laughter and looks at her condition calmly. If this goes on, I will go insane. This isnt right. Lets keep our wits together. At this time, someone knocks on the one-sided door that appears normal from the outside. Knock, knock, knock. Hong-shin asks in astonishment. Who is it? Knock, knock, knock. Who are you! Im not buying! Suddenly, Hong-shin takes a deep breath to calm herself down. She stands up with a resigned expression and heads for the door. Ah, is it you, brother? Just a minute. Hong-shin thinks it would not be difficult for her fake brother to follow her since his movement skill is superior to hers. When she opens the door, a young man shed never seen before stares back at her. Hong-shin frowns and says. Whore you? Why are you knocking on the door without saying anything? Do you want to die? A young man holding something tightly in both hands parts his dry lips. You have ten days left. I dont know anything! The man scurries away. His mannerisms suggest that they have not learned martial arts. Hong-shin looks at the fleeing person with a blank expression. That filthy scum The fleeing young man bumps into someone clumsily and drops what he has in his hand on the floor. The young man hurriedly picks up the silver on the floor and runs away. Ah, my money Suddenly, a high-pitched ringing sound rings in Hong-shins head, causing her to grab her forehead. People are adaptive animals. Come and read on our website wuxia worldsite. Thanks Hong-shin presses her hand against her heaving chest and takes a deep breath. The money was taken because you lost. Forget it. Lets forget it. Its not my money. Peace of mind, huu Hong-shin speaks to herself as she closes the door on her way inside. You can earn it again. Suddenly, someones laughter from afar echoes for a long time. The laughter seems to originate from a high place, maybe a nearby rooftop. The sound is long at first and gradually thins out. Using his light footwork to cause the laughter to echo is just a simple if strange, trick. Of course, with that skill level, it is none other than her fake brother. Suddenly, Hong-shin sweeps her hair up with a serious look. Subsequently, Hong-shins eyes fall into a straight line, and her expression turns stone cold. What is the right word to describe this change? To put it in a similar context, these are the eyes and expressions of a woman that has gone insane. With her eyes filled with madness, Hong-shin declares in a cold voice. I will kill you. Has she finally come to her senses? Or is it a declaration of war on her fake brother? This is what she says next. White Rat, Yellow Horse, Green Dog, you are all dead in my hands. Ohohohohoho. Hong-shins laughter also stretches long like her fake brothers. How far can a person fall into insanity? You can never know. In any case, Hong-shin has also taken the first step into that world. Madness is an infectious disease. Hong-shin is not an ordinary woman, but the order of invisible madness is being put together in this way. The errand boy wins! Its been a while since I had practiced my footwork, so I feel refreshed. I ran at full speed from the path to the Black Rabbit Union to Ilyang and from Ilyang to Magnolia Street, where Hong-shins safe house is hidden. Helping my sister with her upset stomach and finding a bathroom on my way back are all part of the practice. Practice should not be cut short, even for a moment. In particular, it is necessary to quickly raise my movement skill to their peak. The advantages are endless. Above all, it is also an essential escape technique for survival and can help when someone faces a diarrhea crisis. When ones movement skill is at its peak, only then can one be admitted to a mysterious faction that even Kangho warriors do not know of, the Nimble Guild (h). Since ancient times, there have been lunatics in Kangho who only trained to the death on their movement skills. They hold secret gatherings and compete against each other, regardless of their factions. All to gain one title given to one person. The Quickest One (µһ). Or the Nimble Master () or Nimble Leader (h). I dont know when the meetings started. At first, the meetings started small and were held irregularly. But over the years, this gathering of lunatics transcended to become a gathering of the Unorthodox and Orthodox (аħ). It became a mysterious force that even the Murim Alliance couldnt identify. As I was rather agile in my previous life, I was a member of the Nimble Guild, but I was never able to be the Nimble Master. The world is big, and many masters are roaming it. In particular, it is challenging to overpower those lunatics who treat killing-oriented martial arts like a devoted partner while only training to run fast. I got to know several masters in the guild. They could not escape their childhood factions because of their birth and blood ties, but they dreamed of deviance while acting as a guild member. Recalling the gathering with the masters of the guild, I sprint back to Ilyang with all my might. Nothing comes free in this world. It is the joy of life to step into a world that doesnt even acknowledge your existence until you become stronger and faster. Thats why Im currently running. Even helping my sister find the bathroom has a deep, meaningful agenda. After leaving the rough Unorthodox Faction, which only uses petty tricks all the time, I clasp my hands behind my back with a satisfied expression. The construction of the Zaha Guest Inn is going smoothly. As I look at the construction site with a happy smile, Yeon Ja-seong, informed by his workers, comes up to me with a white band on his head. Leader, youre back. I nod my head. Good job so far. Its nothing. Can I call you brother in a place like this? Of course. Where have you been? Seong-tae told me you infiltrated the Black Rabbit Union. I reply in an indifferent voice. The leader of Black Rabbit Union has business in the afterlife, and now the responsibility is mine. I have to go back and forth between Ilyang and the union for the time being, so it will be difficult to see you often. Ah, I see. Did any of the guys make any trouble? I was a little concerned about the Black Hurricane Castle. You know Sima Bi, with the ponytail? He often patrols Ilyang with his lackeys. They look terrifying and are armed, so no one dared to cause trouble, even if they wanted to. Ah, yes. Sima Bi. Sometimes I forget peoples existence. What about Cha Seong-tae? As soon as I ask, Yeon Ja-seong smiles and reports on the incident. He sparred against Sima with a wooden sword, and got his ass kicked, so hes training these days. Hed already lost (ȫ) all ten battles (ʮ). These days, it has become quite the spectacle. Crowds gather every time they spar. Where are they sparring? Pointing at the wide-open space in front of the construction site, Yeon Ja-seong says. This is a big place, so they always spar here. I guffaw and reply. The leader of the Rebirth Sect getting his ass kicked every day? Pathetic. In short, it is good news that Sama Bi and his lackey have adjusted well to Ilyang. He is skilled, so even if the Black Hurricane Castle invades, Sama Bi and his men can handle them. Holding a busy person for a long time is not polite, so I take out the money pouch. Yeon Ja-seong grabs me by the arm. Ah, brother. Its fine. You dont have to do this. The wages you pay are plenty enough. I make a sound with my mouth and elbows out of his grasp. Sseub, tsk. I take out five pieces of gold from Hong-shins pouch and hand them to Yeon Ja-seong. Take it. And make sure to buy everyone a round of drinks when you see fit. Everyones just trying to live. Theyll wear themselves out if they work too hard. Go have fun. Keep it. This seems like way too much. You dont get to see gold so often. The Architectural Sect has a lot of men. Yeon Ja-seong grabs the gold pieces and says apologetically. Apologies, you must have earned this the hard way. I will buy snacks and alcohol from time to time. Ill use it well. Its not that hard to earn anyway. Use it as you see fit. Im off. Have a safe trip, sir. Read latest Chapters at Wuxia World . Site Only I walk away with a wave. Money is earned and used. So, for the time being, I have no choice but to make money by beating up Unorthodox Factions. Theyre the ones extorting ordinary people in the first place. Sometimes, the world needs some revenge and payback. The corners of my mouth raise up at the sudden cheers of the workers from the construction site. Chapter 43 Published on Jul 25, 2022 ?12 min read?250 views After losing ten times to Sim Bi, Cha Sung-tae does not even bother to retort. Sima Bi is the stronger of the two, so it was a given. Accept the humiliating defeat and improve. Or accept it as an inevitable result and settle. Thats up to Cha Sung-tae. If Cha Sung-tae accepts the humiliating defeats and works on himself, I thought of helping him. Until then, I wont pay attention to him. If a person wants to change, they must take the first step on their own. Upon arrival, I look around the Plum Blossom Pavilion from a small distance away and pass through the Dragon Head Smithy nearby. While the people of my hometown are doing their own things, I turn back to the Black Rabbit Union. What the Low-Down Sect leader has to do now is in the Unorthodox Faction. I have to start crushing and organizing the Unorthodox Faction forces surrounding Ilyang. I had flaunted my footwork excessively due to Hong-shin, so at this time, I chose to walk slowly on the way back. As I enter the deserted path, a dozen Kangho warriors approach me from the opposite direction. Everyone seems to be silently moving in the direction I came from, that is, towards Ilyang. I look at the group of Kangho warriors, and as the group passes, they all look at me in unison. A dozen men cross over as if they are switching places with me, and as they take three to four more steps towards me The group of Kangho warriors stops their steps first. I, too, turn around. When I turn, they look both murderous and intimidating. While I stare at the crowd, a man takes something out of his arms and checks it. I think he is likely looking at a bounty poster. Sure enough, the person checking the poster raises his head and scans my face again. Looks like Lee Zaha to me. Three or four people gather at the man with the poster and check as well. The leader of the groups complexion darkens as he asks his men. Is it him? Yep, its him. How come were seeing him outside of Ilyang? What is he doing here? I have no idea. What kind of conversation is this? The guys looking for me are on their way to Ilyang, where Im not present. I ask the head of the pack. Arent you scumbags from the Black Hurricane Castle? The leader answers my question with a retort. Youre Lee Zaha, right? A question with a question, but there are no answers. The atmosphere is different from that of the Twelve Generals subordinates. The Black Hurricane Castle has its own, more distant vibe. The Black Hurricane Castle gives off a vibe like they are leaving a gambling den with weapons after rotting inside for about a dozen days. One of the men asks his leader. What should we do? I didnt expect Zaha to be here. I snort without realizing it. To interpret those words, it seems like they were on the move to cause trouble in Ilyang. It feels weird. Should I say my feelings are sinking in a complicated way? After returning to the past, it felt like the madness Id suffered had never existed. The fact that I returned to the past itself felt like a fun game. The head of the pack, who is watching my expression, steps forward. Im Dokgo Saeng () of the Black Hurricane Castle. I heard you killed Neung Ji-seok, Wi Sun-woo, and Gu Yang-soo. The leader of the Black Hurricane Castle has put a bounty of 30 golds on your head. This is requested by the Roaring Tiger Clan ([) and Blade Trading Triad (u). We were on our way to Ilyang to post a wanted poster (), but Ill read it to you myself instead. As Dokgo Saeng nods to his subordinate, a man comes to me and offers a written wanted poster. Its common practice not to accept anything the Unorthodox Faction tries to give you. When I dont take the poster, Dokgo Saeng continues. Weve been searching for you since we heard you had disappeared from Ilyang. Suppose youre brave enough to meet the Black Hurricane Castle face to face. In that case, the leader will reasonably compensate the Roaring Tiger Clan and Blade Trading Triad and remove you from his wanted list. So, what do you say? This is a classic tactic of the Unorthodox Faction. They torment the people around their victims, so they have nowhere to run. These guys probably wouldve made a scene in Ilyang and then put up the poster. The more confident the Unorthodox Faction is, the more likely the parties would meet face-to-face to reach a solution. A prime example is the Golden Phoenix Pavilion Leader, who died after summoning me. I do a head count and respond. Theres eleven of you. It looks like you brought a lot of men just to hang a wanted poster. Dokgo Saeng replies. We heard you were powerful, so we travel in packs. Thats a pretty good excuse. Its too much work for me to see your leader right now. But Ill visit him soon. Dokgo Saeng glares. If you dont come with us, well head down to Ilyang. I scratch my chin with a calm expression. I told you Id go later. It would be best for you to come with us now. I reply while picking my nose with my pinky. Dokgo Saeng, why are you trying to kill your subordinates? Lets hear your reason. You killed Neung Ji-seok, Wi Sun-woo, and Gu Yang-soo. Were not gonna tolerate that attitude. You cant just say youll visit later and walk away. Thats not the point right now. Some days I feel strange. There are days when I dont feel any emotions, even after killing heaps of people. There are also days when I want to avoid killing recklessly, and today is one of the latter days. I dont know why. But I wouldnt have been called Crazy Demon if my moves were predictable. Im the one who lives according to my mood day by day and becomes the Crazy Demon. Maybe because I often imagine leading the Black Rabbit Union forces to war with Black Hurricane Castle. But things in the world dont go how you want them to. Dokgo Saeng isnt afraid of death. There is no difference, whether you kill us now and visit the Black Hurricane Castle later or go with us now. If you go later, you will have to deal with the Roaring Tiger Clan and the Blade Trading Triad. Its troublesome regardless of your choice. Lee Zaha. And here, I decide. Fine. Lets go to the Black Hurricane Castle. A headwind (L) blows in my heart. Should I say that my feeling of not wanting to kill is gradually being suppressed by something else that is rising? The one changing his mind here and there is also me. When I wear a mask, I become the leader of the Black Rabbit Union and build up the power of the Unorthodox Faction. If I take my mask off, Ill become the Crazy Demon once again. Though I became the leader of the Low-Down Sect, the further the Black Rabbit Union strays farther away from Ilyang, the less I can think rationally. When bad thoughts and the errand boy Lee Zaha meets, the Crazy Demon is born. What a tragic event. My previous lifes misdeeds were considerable, but Im not sure how I can handle this lifes transgressions. I suddenly remember the mysterious man rumored to be confined in Heavens Prison. As expected, Id probably take the room next to the mans prison cell. Thats how sinful I am. The act of protecting the weak mostly involves killing people. I understand why the Murim Alliance hated me so much in my previous life. With the Black Hurricane Castle troops, I arrive downstream of the Hornless Dragon River () and ride a boat. After looking at the waves crashing for a long time, I wave at Ilyang, which is getting smaller as we sail away. Farewell, my hometown. Im off to make money. Ill be back after I find success. Welcome me with open arms when I come back. And with that, this errand boy sails off. As I wave my hands continuously toward my hometown and mutter bullshit, the Black Hurricane Castle troops look at me with a frown. I can hear their thoughts like clear hallucinations. Is he out of his mind? I look at the Black Hurricane Castles pawns one by one with an aloof look on my face and say. You are all so hideous. Do you commit such ugly acts because you yourselves are so ugly? The world is such a mysterious place. No one responds, but I continue saying what I want to say. Though there is one handsome man known for his ugly, perverse behavior. Perhaps an ugly appearance has nothing to do with ugly behavior. Even considering that, its amusing how you all can look so ugly. Is it because you are rotting in a gambling den? Come to think of it. You wouldnt have looked so fucking ugly when you were young. Maybe seeing disgusting things around you every day has affected how you look. You know, like the slave trade. One of the guys who is listening while holding back his anger says. Cant you shut the hell up? I retort by examining his physiognomy. Where are your eyebrows? You have the face of a rat. Your eyes are dingy, with skin like a battlefield. When you open your mouth, the rotten smell comes up all the way here. Why are you staying in the Black Hurricane Castle? If you want to make a living, you have to work. What goes through your mind when you see slaves being bought and sold? He replies. I think I should make money and buy a slave. Thats what I think. The Black Hurricane Castles pawns burst into laughter at the same time. Hahahaha. I suddenly look at Dokgo Saengs expression. Dokgo Saeng didnt join in the laughing at all. Why dont you laugh, Dokgo Saeng? When I ask him this, Dokgo Saeng swears at his subordinates. Shut up, morons, before I kill you right here. Hes the guy our leader will be dealing with, and you morons laugh? Ill cut off your arm if you dare open your mouth before we arrive. The pawns all shut up at Dokgo Saengs threat. Dokgo Saeng says to me. Keep talking. Thats a nice voice. I nod and asks Dokgo Saeng. How old are you? 25 years old. Married? Dokgo Saeng sighs. Married? I live in the Unorthodox Faction. It is an I might suddenly die one day, and youre asking if Im married kind of response. This guy isnt in his right mind either. Sure enough, as if his temper has reached its limit, Dokgo Saeng looks at me and curses. How old are you? Whyre you asking if Im married, you lunatic? Why did you kill those three? Why are you causing so much trouble by killing them? Are you that good at fighting? Youre crazy, arent you? Youre good enough to kill all the morons and me, right? I get it. But how can you kill someone without hesitation and deal with the whole Black Hurricane Castle alone? You crazy punk. Do you know how many members of the Black Hurricane Castle there are? I reply briefly. How many? I dont know, you little brat. Maybe over 500 people. The man next to Dokgo Saeng intervenes. Its over 600. Then, Dokgo Saeng hits the head of the man who replies to him continuously without saying a word. He punches the man until his face is covered with blood and then says. Youll get it if you open your mouth. I asked you to shut up, didnt I? In a moment, Dokgo Saeng suddenly grabs the bloody man by the collar and throws him into the Hornless Dragon River. Splash he cries as soon as the sound rings out. Leader! Help! I cant swim Dokgo Saeng shouts. If you cant swim, you die. You punk. I watch the man floundering in the river along with the Black Hurricane Castle troops. The river looks deep. I look at the drowning man with pity. Fishes have to eat and live, too. Rest in peace, you cruel Unorthodox Faction bastard. I am too lazy to save him. Dokgo Saeng asks his subordinates. Anyone else wants to open their mouths? I reply to Dokgo Saeng instead. What do you think? I sigh deeply as I look at the waves of the Hornless Dragon River. Ah, I shouldve barged in coolly with the Black Rabbit Union and made an entrance. Or fight Dae Na-chal and try to aim for mutual destruction. In the end, this is how things turn out. People are unpredictable. At this time, Dokgo Saeng takes out a small tool (ʲ) that is made of something like daylilies (n) or marijuana (X) and skillfully lights it up before taking a hit. The white smoke that escapes from Dokgo Saengs mouth scatters over the waves of the Hornless Dragon River. Having taken a few deep puffs and breathing in the smoke, Dokgo Saeng asks me. So, Lee Zaha, are you planning to spare us? While waiting for my answer, Dokgo Saeng takes another puff. After asking a question that does not match his tone or mannerisms, he waits for my response. It is the attitude that I expected from the first time I met him. Dokgo Saeng asks again. I said, are you gonna let us live? I shake my head and look out over the shimmering river. I try to erase bad ideas to calm my madness. If a person is to change, they must take the first step on their own. Determined not to live like the Crazy Demon in my past life, I reply. Ill let the last man standing live. You have my word. Decide among yourselves It means they have to kill each other. Did it work? As soon as I finish speaking, everyone, including Dokgo Saeng, is holding their swords to kill each other. This is what the Unorthodox Faction is. Chapter 44 I havent seen many Unorthodox Factions that kill their subordinates like this. The fight begins messily after I said I would only spare one person and ends after Dokgo Saeng kills all his subordinates. He looks back at me with blood on his face and fringe. I killed them all. Will you spare me as promised? This guy doesnt believe me to the end. He might even jump into the river after weighing the situation. I think Dokgo Saengs psyche is impressive. Ill spare you. Only then did Dokgo Saeng slump down on the deck and exhale a sigh of relief. Phew. How is the Black Hurricane Castle these days? Dokgo Saeng replies in his usual sharp voice. How else? Its full of idiots. Can I run away now? Or should I keep cleaning up after you? Where do you think youre going? I kept you alive to guide me. All right. What about the sailors? Dokgo Saeng points at the trembling sailors with his bloody sword. He is asking me if he should kill them all. Of course, I shake my head. Dont kill those who are doing their job. Dokgo Saeng nods, gets up as if the break is over, and throws the dead men into the river. A series of thumps sound continuously. I have one question about Dokgo Saengs strange way of handling things. You said there are 600 people? Did you expect me to survive in the Black Hurricane Castle? Dokgo Saeng replies as he throws the bodies into the river. How will I know? As soon as I saw you, I knew you were crazy. I thought you would kill us all. I dont know what will happen next. Indeed, admitting not knowing what will happen next is an answer by a true man. A while later, the ship docks near the Ancient Black Sand Fortress (ɰų). After Dokgo Saeng and I get off the ship, we head for the Black Hurricane Castle. The quarters of the Black Hurricane Castle are laid out like a clan village inside a massive wall built by ethnic minorities to fight against foreign powers. It is said that old sailors and fishermen gathered in twos and threes and spent time gambling during days of rough weather. Surprisingly, the Black Hurricane Castle started from that small gambling den. At first, the founder of the Black Hurricane Castle operated to protect fishermen before focusing on the gambling business. Their intention to protect the fishermen is similar to why I created the Low-Down Sect. However, the business that started as a gambling den has expanded to include control of auctions, gambling, and blocking waterways to collect tolls. So, the Black Hurricane Castle is both an Unorthodox Faction and a pirate crew. Looking back to the beginning of the force that now extorts the powerless shows that they were once powerless as well. Dokgo Saeng holds out his sword to his subordinates who are guarding the fortress gate. I brought Lee Zaha, as the leader ordered. Open the door. The gatekeeper hurriedly opens the door without saying a word. Dokgo Saeng must be quite the big shot in the Black Hurricane Castle. As he enters the precincts of the Black Hurricane Castle, Dokgo Saeng asks. How long should I accompany you? Id like to leave in advance. Do it until I leave the Black Hurricane Castle. Dokgo Saeng replies with a frown. Understood. The unusual thing about Dokgo Saeng is that while he is afraid of me, he never speaks formally and maintains an attitude of a man who would keep his word unconditionally. When someone talked to me or asked me who I was, Dokgo Saeng would draw out his bloody sword first. Were busy, so mind your own business. Get out of the way before I carve up your faces, go, shoo! Dokgo Saeng goes through the precincts of the Black Hurricane Castle in a straight line, much like how Guan Yu overcame all obstacles. There are certainly a lot of people inside the Black Hurricane Castle. People keep asking who I am and sometimes ask me to stop, but Dokgo Saeng makes them step back by drawing his sword and swearing. It is true that there are 600 people, but not all of them are warriors. If all 600 people in here were Kangho warriors, the Black Hurricane Castle wouldve become one of the most powerful Unorthodox forces in the central district. But the 600 mentioned by the dead man on the boat include those who simply make a living in the precincts. Dokgo Saeng finally points to a building ahead and says. Ill go ahead and report first, so take your time. I wont run away. If you survive and escape the Black Hurricane Castle, you must save me as promised. Should I say he has a strong will to survive? Or should I say that its the eccentricity of a crazy bastard? Dokgo Saeng picks up his pace. He is probably expected to give notice inside of my arrival, and so I stay nearby. The guard at the entrance to the main quarters says to Dokgo Saeng. Chief Dokgo, whats going on? I brought Lee Zaha here. Tell the leader. Who is Lee Zaha? The one who killed Chief Wi. Ah! I look around and enter the largest building in the precincts. Perhaps because they are people who make money through gambling, the atmosphere inside the shabby fortress walls is brighter than expected. The atmosphere seems to have been excessively built to save the leaders face. However, the main hall is as empty as looking inside a barracks set up on a battlefield. The head seat for the commander-in-chief is provided, with chairs lining up to the left and right. All kinds of weapons are also displayed on the left wall. Perhaps a meeting has just ended. The Black Hurricane Castle officials are talking in hushed murmurs inside the hall. I scan the inside and say. Theyre all a bunch of old geezers. It is an atmosphere of an elders gathering instead of normal officials. An official who has been briefed tells his subordinate. Inform the leader he has to come back here. Yes. The noisy atmosphere quickly clears up, and everyone sits in their chairs with their mouths shut or moves to the wall to wait like guards. I am looking for a chair and will speak to the official at the very end. Give me your chair. I whack the guy looking up at me without a word and toss him out of his chair. With a crash, the man rolls to the floor and jumps up. As I drag the chair to the center, a man seated near the seat of honor speaks. You, stand at the back. The man whose chair was snatched gently backs away to the wall and stares at me silently. As I remain in my seat and look around, I spot Dokgo Saeng leaning against the wall. Not long afterward, the leader of the Black Hurricane Castle walks out. Looking over the age of 60, he has dark skin and white eyebrows. The officials look at me all at once, and the Black Hurricane Castle Leader also looks at me as he sits on the high seat. Lee Zaha, thank you for coming all the way here. I nod and reply. I said Id come next time, but your men had to drag me here. Who brought you here? Leaning against the wall, Dokgo Saeng replies. Its me, Leader. The Black Hurricane Castle Leader looks at Dokgo Saeng and says, Youve done well, Dokgo Saeng. Good work. To my surprise, Dokgo Saeng responds. Stop joking around. Its lame. As Dokgo Saeng utters nonsense, the other officials curse at him in unison. Will that rude fellow finally come to his senses when his mouth is torn? The leader raises his hand and quells the commotion. Lee Zaha of Ilyang is here, so lets hear what we should do about him. Everyone suddenly shut their mouths at the leaders question. If you have none, I will take care of it. Please do. Lee Zaha, you killed three Black Hurricane Castle members. I was told your house was burned down, is that correct? Maybe. I, too, have a faint memory of the incident. Its not a big deal, so it doesnt dwell in my memory. The Black Hurricane Castle Leader says. Our men made the first move, so we will let you off after taking three of your fingers. What kind of weird judgment is this? I lift three of my fingers and reply. You cant just cut off the fingers my parents have given me. Pass. The Black Hurricane Castle Leader nods. Then lets settle with one hundred gold pieces and one finger. Lee Zaha, you should repay us the damages under our supervision. That will be all. It seems that the Black Hurricane Castle Leader lives like a king. He waves his hand a few times as if to motion me out since the ruling is over. I let out a sigh. Fellow Kangho comrades, this world is full of nutjobs. The other officials comply with their leaders ruling as if the small trial has ended smoothly. Thank you for your hard work. I sigh and say. I dont have that kind of money. Even if I did, I wouldnt give it to you either way. The officials raise their hips off the chair before sitting back down, glaring at me. This time, the Black Hurricane Castle Leader also stares at me with an unpleasant look. Lee Zaha, did you come here without knowing what this place is? I didnt. Thats why I came by boat. The Black Hurricane Castle will get our money, one way or another. Your family is going to have to pay for it. Is that alright with you? I dont have a family. I long for family. And some noodles, too. If you dont have a family, we will take it from the people of Ilyang. Is that what you want? Tsk. I call out to Dokgo Saeng, who is leaning against the wall. Dokgo Saeng, you son of a gun, come here. Dokgo Saeng replies with a frown. Why the heck did you call for me? I extend my hand to Dokgo Saeng and say. Give it to me. Dokgo Saeng strides up and hands me the sword while grumbling before returning to the wall. I speak to the Black Hurricane Castle Leader while holding Dokgo Saengs sword. Old man, are you crazy? . These guys are crazy to the point where I am slightly flustered despite having lived as the Crazy Demon in my past life. I look at the officials and say/ Youre just a whole bunch of whackjobs. Meanwhile, Black Hurricane Castle Leader says calmly. Its been more than a decade since the officials and I saw blood in person. An official interrupts. Not me. Shut up. But I was never one to back down from a fight. Without making other suggestions. Do you want to end it like this? Looking at it now, all the people in the official chairs look well over 40. Most of the guys waiting near the wall are young. Is this an Unorthodox Faction that respects elders? It seems they have thoroughly blocked the outside world and made laws to follow among themselves. I ask. How many officials are here? Dokgo Saeng replies instantly. Including the leader, 21 people. I get up with the sword and say to Black Hurricane Castle Leader. Old man, you can either crawl over with your knees or lick my feet. Or all 21 people will die. Make your choice. I suddenly feel irritated that my past life memories are a blur. The Black Hurricane Castle was exterminated by a master while studying martial arts, but I cant remember who it was. It wasnt me anyway. At that time, I was dragged around by a problematic person to learn martial arts. These guys are a force worthy of being exterminated. Their ancestors built walls near the river to block foreign invasion, which is unique and unusual. It is safe to say that these peoples attitude of convicting outsiders naturally was not an Unorthodox Factions attitude but of a small dictatorship. I feel like Im in a kingdom full of crazy people. When the Black Hurricane Castle Leader rises, two waiting subordinates approach and hold out a gourd each. The leader clicks his tongue after holding a gourd in both hands. Young man, is it really necessary to see blood? The rest of the elders get up from their chairs and walks to where the weapons are displayed before taking one each. I watch the weapons the elders are holding with a blank face. Three Spike Sword, Ring Blade, Saber, Long sword, Judges Pen, Cheolgon, Nangabong Peak, Gu Gyeomchang. As most of them turn around, they are holding onto something like an iron skewer. That is probably a harpoon. Dokgo Saeng says. This place is small as heck. Do you have to fight here? At this time, an elder holding a steel skewer throws it toward Dokgo Saengs forehead. As Dokgo Saeng dodges to the side, the stick is stuck in the wall with a thump. Dokgo Saeng says with his eyes wide open. You bloody old man. The elder who threw the skewer replies with a calm expression. Shut up. Before I kill you. Then, Dokgo Saeng says the words that are sent straight to my ears. Try me. Youve only got seven fingers left anyway. If the Black Hurricane Castle kills one of their own, they cut off one finger. I cant tell whether this is the right decision or not. Anyway, I am greatly impressed by all these Black Hurricane Castle shenanigans. Wow, you guys are seriously nutjobs. As many as 20 old Kangho warriors rush toward me while the Black Hurricane Castle Leader stands still like a chief commander. As the weapons come crashing in, Three Spike Sword, Ring Blade, sticks, swords. Ugh, whatever. I wield the sword, too. Chapter 45 Chapter 45 C A Gamblers Wrist The men in the front advance, the men in the middle, make way to the side, and the men in the back crack their necks and prepare hidden weapons. I differentiate these guys as I would weapons. I do not fight with people but classify and respond accordingly to the incoming Three Spike Swords, Straight Swords, Long Swords, and Judges Pen flying to kill me. I have no choice but to wield my sword and step back naturally. Long harpoons, dagger-axes, and spiked bats rush to me as they cut through the wind, and the hidden weapons that fail to clash into my body are stuck to the ground and walls. I am cornered towards the hall door, then I hit the door with my back foot and retreat outside. Thinking the air outside is fresh, I take a deep breath. In the main hall, the foul smell from the greedy old men and Dokgo Saeng is mixing, making breathing unpleasant. I look around with a sword in my hand. The strange civilians of the fortress are starting to crowd, but they dont look all too excited. Its been a while since a fight broke out. Should I say everyone has that kind of expression? However, when the Black Hurricane Castles executives appear holding weapons together, only then did everyones eyes grow wide. The officials instantly surround me in a square formation. The Black Hurricane Castle Leader says as he walks out. My officials, hes a master, so dont let your guard down. Dont rush in, chiefs. Those who die or are injured will end here now. I look at the hands of the officials holding their weapons. Most of them have missing fingers. Suddenly, I remember what my grandfather sometimes murmured. A gamblers wrists should be cut off. He didnt explain why it needed to be cut or what led him to say this. He would seldom bring it up when gambling was mentioned in the guest inn. Suddenly, my grandfathers words linger in my ears. As the fight continues, I deal with it using the mentality of the Fighting Chicken. Stab when an opening is visible. Ignore the bait when it is an obvious trick. Direct attacks are warded off, and irregular attacks are dealt with selectively. The officials offensive attacks also grow more and more intense. All of a sudden, powder scatters in front of my face. The number of hidden weapons also increases. Screams are growing louder and longer too. Hidden weapons that didnt hit me fly past and strike a bystander in the throat. As soon as one guy is covered in the powder, he screams and runs off somewhere. I intentionally shift my body often to evaluate the condition from all sides. As I firmly block 20 peoples worth of ferocious attacks, the officials eyes start to grow anxious. As soon as I sense a change in their mental state, I reduce my defensive plays and switch to offense. As soon as I switch to offense, I open my mouth like a reflex. The gamblers wrists should be cut off. I move lighter and faster than when I played defense. I then grab the middle of a harpoon surging past me with my left hand and swing my sword to cut off the officials wrist. Pwark! I cant afford to watch the expression of pain on the guys face. While avoiding the long swords and spiked bats, I see a guy extending his Three Spike Sword using Finger Wind with my eyes. As soon as his head tilts back, I quickly cut off the wrist of his hand holding the Three Spike Sword and shift again. A Judges Pen draws a stroke, and the other brush draws one dot (һc) and pushes it toward me. The stroke indicates trickery, and one dot is a lethal move. I spring upwards, escaping from the trajectory of the trick and deadly tactics trajectory, and jab his pressure points from an upside-down position. The man with two Judges Pens stiffens and involuntarily protects my back for a while. A short moment later, hidden weapons that look like hooks fly through the hair. It is a hidden weapon that spreads on the ground and can stab through my feet even if I avoid it. I grab the stiffened man by his nape, turn him around, and hold him forward like a shield. Babababababak C the sound of hooks as it pierces flesh, though others fall off and rolls on the floor. In the meantime, a weapon falls from behind to my shoulder. I squeeze the sword I am holding in my right hand between my left armpit and fire off a blast of energy. With a wet sound, a man rushing in with a sword has his neck butchered by the swords energy. Krrgh! Once again, I look around to grasp the situation. Five or six people have been killed or injured while the Black Hurricane Castle Leader stays still like the king on the Korean chess board, and the rest of the people continue to spectate. When will the king start to move? I have no idea. Maybe he is just waiting until the end to maintain his demeanor as king. I shake the blood off my sword and look at the man standing behind me. He tries to stop blood from flowing from his neck with his hand after dropping his weapon. I kick him in the stomach to stop any incoming hidden weapons, then spin back and shoot out a long sword energy. Swoooosh! Three men who are approaching with harpoons block the attack and fall back at the same time. Gradually, the officials lose stamina and cant fend off the sword energy properly as they start running out of internal Qi. Beyond that, I briefly make eye contact with Dokgo Saeng, who has his arms crossed. In the meantime, Dokgo Saeng turns his eyes toward the Black Hurricane Castle Leader, who still stands in place. Even though his officials are dying, the Black Hurricane Castle Leader doesnt give any orders to the other chiefs. Is he going to kill me after were done fighting? I predict the Black Hurricane Castle Leaders thoughts and cut off the wrists of the rest of the officials without much difficulty. When 20 people come at me all at once, I focus on defense, and when half of them are seriously injured or dead, the tables turn. I usually chase after them, clashing swords once or twice before cutting off their wrists. After decapitating the remaining officials wrists, I look at Black Hurricane Castle Leader. The painful moans and cries of the elders of the Black Hurricane Castle blend in the air. The Black Hurricane Castle Leader, watching his officials being defeated, finally speaks. Great work. I dont know if he is saying that to the officials or me. But as soon as I see the expression of the Black Hurricane Castle Leader, I realize he is referring to everyone. The Black Hurricane Castle Leader, who holds a podao in both hands, runs toward me and shoots a Wu-shaped (W) Blade Wind. After offsetting the surging Blade Wind with my own Blade Wind, I then avert the leaders podao that is hurling a blast of wind. The attack is ferocious and vigorous enough to make me disregard the officials as punching bags. As I deflect the podao, I think. This geezer must have been as much of a scumbag as Dokgo Saeng when he was younger. As I use the sword more than 20 times, the blade of Dokgo Saengs sword that I am wielding gradually becomes duller. In terms of lifespan, it is more decrepit than the Black Hurricane Castle Leader. Unlike its rugged appearance, the Black Hurricane Castle Leaders podao is as solid as a young mans muscle. In the end, my blunt sword finally breaks first during the fight. At that moment, I push off the ground with my right foot in the air and slide back. Black Hurricane Castle Leader then warns his surroundings. The one who gives Lee Zaha another weapon I stretch my hands to my sides and use The Great Absorption Technique. Two weapons are sucked into my hands with the whooshing sound of a small whirlwind. A spiked bat in my right hand. A Judges Pen is in my left. I shake my head slightly. This is a bit I shouldve pulled only after seeing what was there. Ive never heard of a Kangho warrior who wields both a spiked bat and a Judges Pen simultaneously. Not classy, not cool, and Im just repeating mistakes, shit. Without giving me a chance to change my weapons, the Black Hurricane Castle Leader rushes back in again. Even with plenty of experience, I am growing anxious without having previously fought using a spiked bat and a Judges Pen. The opponent is a veteran of Kangho in his sixties. Ordinary people who live that long will suffer from joint pain, chronic disease, ouch my back, farsightedness, energy loss, etc., but a warrior of Kangho in his 60s, who spent his life in Kangho, has accumulated internal Qi to offset old ages suffering and pain. Sparks fly every time the spiked bat and podao collide. The judges pen that stretches out like a kitchen knife also blocks the podao every time. In a word, the Black Hurricane Castle Leader is skilled. It is as if Dokgo Saeng had trained in blade techniques for 40 years. He is incredibly good at wielding the double sword, and his footwork is natural. His attack and defense are in good balance. Not a single childish cheap trick is used. He is wielding his sword ever so dauntlessly without losing dignity. Whether this guy is crazy or not, he is the king of the Black Hurricane Castle. Yet, panic flashes on the Black Hurricane Castle Leaders face when I use various techniques that I did not show when fighting the officials. I reduce my jumbled thoughts as I engage in an intense fight with him. As I focus all my attention on the fight, unnecessary sounds around me fade out. ! I can clearly hear the footsteps of the Black Hurricane Castle Leader, the flutter of his robes, the clinks of his weapon, and the sound of our breaths. As soon as I hear his breath, I remember the daylilies that Dokgo Saeng smoked and notice that he suffers from lung disease. Phlegm has risen to his throat during the fight. After exchanging three or four clashes leisurely, I step back deliberately. At that moment, the Black Hurricane Castle Leader spits habitually. Ptui! Before the yellow sputum can reach the ground, I throw the Judges Pen. When I hear the clashing of podao and Judges Pen Clang! I jump into the air and narrow the distance. I then inject internal Qi into the spiked bat and slash viciously. Realizing my attack is unusual, the Black Hurricane Castle Leader counters the falling spiked bat with his podao. Boooooooooom! An explosive sound rings out I pull the nearby Judges Pen back using The Great Absorption Technique, and when it comes close, I turn my wrist and push it with a palm technique. The direction has changed, and the palm force makes its speed greater. Plorkk! Keurgh! Where did the Judges Pen hit? After I swing the spiked bat again, I confirm that the Judges Pen is now lodged in the chest of the Black Hurricane Castle Leader. I strike the spiked bat vertically as I press the Black Hurricane Castle Leader, causing him to step back. I keep his hands and feet busy, so he cant pull out the Judges Pen stuck in his chest. After averting my attack three times, he eventually lets go of both podao and falls on his butt. His blood and energy seem tangled from trying to gather Qi after being injured. Then, blood spurts from Black Hurricane Castle Leaders mouth. Holding my spiked bat on my back, I approach and look down at the leader. Leader, cant you get up? Black Hurricane Castle Leader nods with a tired look and orders. Stop. How long has he played at being king for him to order me in this state? I am not your slave. Watch your tone. Yet, the person who points out the tone of speech of a dying man is me. The Black Hurricane Castle Leader smiles as he reveals his bloody teeth. If you let my men heal me, Ill appoint you as the next leader. You have nothing to lose. And youll soon have everything in the Black Hurricane Castle. I cant hear him well because his voice is small, but that is roughly what he meant. I do not accept his offer. No thanks. No thanks? Theyre all imbeciles. Imbeciles that cant move forward without me giving orders. Accept it. Is this the perspective of the person who auctions slaves? The Black Hurricane Castle Leader is dying, so I ask for his will. Leader, say something before you die. The Black Hurricane Castle Leader barely raises his head and leaves this message to the people of the Black Hurricane Castle. You imbeciles, youve done well. As he laughs, a peculiar laugh that sounds like the screeching of metal, I smash the leaders brains with the bat. Smash! He sure spews nonsense until the end. I smack the same place again on behalf of the slaves sold for money. Thinking about these imbeciles who waste money on gambling by stealing daily expenses, debt money, family money, friends money, and the money of a granny next door to her in-laws, I swing the bat again. Still, thinking about how hed spent his days eating delicious food, sleeping comfortably at night, and being cooped up cozily has me swinging the bat over and over again. Blood and pieces of flesh splatter on my face. Since hes dead, I think hitting the spiked bat once more wont deepen my sins, so I hit him again with anger. This time, the sound of the spiked bat crashing into the ground is even louder. Banggggggggggggg! I look around the Black Hurricane Castle with a bloody face. . Chapter 46 Chapter 46 C Reason Why Clan Leaders Often Have White Hair After confirming that the Black Hurricane Castle Leader is dead, Dokgo Saeng strides somewhere and stands before an official that had been throwing a harpoon at me. The official is bleeding from his cut-off wrists and glances at Dokgo Saeng. Dokgo Saeng kneels on one knee and stares at the official. Then, the official slaps Dokgo Saeng with his intact hand. Slap! Everyone expects Dokgo Saeng to kill the official, and so do I. However, Dokgo Saeng, who was slapped in the face, smiles and gets up again. Now that the elders hand is cut off, Dokgo Saeng must be thinking he is not worth the trouble. What a strange man he is. Dokgo Saeng looks at me. Lee Zaha, you should be the next master of our fort. I wiggle my fingers, beckoning Dokgo Saeng to come forward. Dokgo Saeng trods up and receives a slap from me. With a slap Dokgo Saeng tumbles over. I approach Dokgo Saeng and grip him by his hair. Why are you fucking with me? Shall I send you next to your leader? Dokgo Saeng and I glare at each other with murderous looks. No matter who stares better, Dokgo Saeng will be the one who dies. Dokgo Saeng says. What am I supposed to do, now that our master is dead? Frankly, this is the most shocking thing Dokgo Saeng has said since I arrived at the Black Hurricane Castle. People live their own lives. Is it because hed lived under a person who gave him orders since birth? He cant get over the idea that they cant function without a leader. Even for the ever-rebellious and unyielding Dokgo Saeng this is something he needs. What a problematic clan. I release my grip from Dokgo Saengs head and look around as I get up. Ugh, this is troublesome. If this is a force composed of Kangho warriors like the Black Rabbit Union, I can blend in accordingly. However, regular civilians are also involved in this clan, so it is hard to differentiate who is a Kangho warrior and who isnt. Since were in a strange situation, mixing them with the Low-Down Sect members is impossible. What should I do at times like this? After I killed the leader to liberate the clan, they are now just slaves waiting for the next leader. I am probably the most responsible if this is how the situation progresses. Anyhow, I have beaten the Black Hurricane Castle Leader to his death. Damn it After much thinking, I decided to take responsibility. Now that I am guilty of beating someone to death, I should bear the consequences. Dokgo Saeng, gather everyone working directly under the officials and meet me in the hall. Treat the elders who made it out alive. After all, those who survive shall live. With a few hand gestures, a few chin gestures, and two or three words, Dokgo Saeng clears up the situation, shoo-ing with his hands as if to usher the chiefs into the hall. I watched the chiefs come in from my spot at the head seat where the Black Hurricane Castle Leader had sat. Some sit confidently, while others look around carefully before taking a seat at the rear end. Anyway, the only thing the Black Hurricane Castle Leader did right is to spare them their lives. Maybe he had anticipated his defeat. Thats why he followed those elders to the afterlife. Or maybe not. By the way, are these guys sitting according to their ranks? Dokgo Saeng is sitting on my left. Is everyone here? The youngest chief at the bottom row replies. Yes, all the chiefs are here. I exhale for a moment and clear my mind. There is only one thing I want to tell them. Even if it wasnt for me, youre still in danger of being exterminated by other masters in the future. But I cant say this out loud since I know for sure Id be treated like a nutjob. I might be crazy, but telling a story of things that havent happened yet would just result in it being ignored. I say. For me, the best option is to appoint a new leader and have the entire Black Hurricane Castle come under my command. Though people have questions, no one dares to ask because of the messy dogfight I had committed outside. I also ask a question. Is there anyone stronger than Dokgo Saeng? As soon as my question is over, Dokgo Saeng scowls at the other chiefs. Wow, why is this guy so ill-tempered? Indeed, the other chiefs can not come forward so easily since hes the type to swear at the elders. Dokgo Saeng will be the next leader. Dokgo Saeng looks like he has a lot to say, so I point my finger at him. Do as I say. Dokgo Saeng shuts his mouth. I give out orders to make changes in the Black Hurricane Castle. Your first mission as the new leader is mobilizing everyone available to break down the ramparts. Dokgo Saeng responds. Starting with the ramparts? Wow, how should I explain this? Its just how I feel am I supposed to tell him this? Holding my temper, I ask the other chiefs. Do I have to explain why? The chiefs answer in unison. Yes. I clap my forehead with my hand and explain. The walls are too confined. You may think the walls keep you safe, but it doesnt work against Kangho masters. Even your leader, the strongest amongst you, couldnt save his own life. And thats one of the normal tactics. You guys are only fixated on yourselves, binding each other with strange rules. Is that a problem? I nod my head. Indeed. How so? You dont communicate with people beyond the walls. Its too closed off. Shouldnt you try understanding my words for things to change? Ugh, this is exhausting. I take a break while trying to regain my breath. I am distracted by the foul smell in my mouth and the unpleasant body odour from the chiefs. After another slap to my cheek, I continue. Start by breaking down the ramparts. Go outside more often, too. The world is wider than the Black Hurricane Castle. If the wall disappears, well have to get rid of the word castle (). The word fort also means a miniature castle. The name likely comes from within the ramparts where the clan was founded. The word heukseon means a black fan, but it also refers to the shape of the rampart. If I see any of you conducting slave trades, going around collecting gambling debts during my next visit, or doing anything that annoys me, Ill start by killing Dokgo Saeng and all the chiefs I remember. Youll go to the afterlife and greet your former leader. Have you been well? Youll probably say that kind of bullshit. One of the chiefs asks. Please specify the details, sir. I dont know, you punk. Ask yourselves. Isnt that your job to think more specifically? What is this punks name? The other chiefs inform me of his name, clan, and rank. I point at him. Ask him for the details and proceed. Ordinary people are mixed in the bunch, so running my mouth for a bit is necessary. Get rid of the name Black Hurricane Castle and report to me once you decide on a new name. And dont use the word black (), assholes. You black-hearted, yellow swine. A slightly naive-looking fellow who is seated near the middle replies. Then can we use white ()? I answer without breaking eye contact. You. Dont ask me questions until the meeting is over. Understood. God damn it, he broke my flow out of nowhere. . I would let it slide, but my patience is stretched thin, causing me to lash out at him. Fuck, do you come from the Orthodox Faction? No, thats not it. There are protocols when it comes to naming clans. I understand. I speak to officials as I cool my head. If you have any questions, ask away. We only know your name, but we have no idea who you are. I scratch my forehead for a moment. Lets introduce myself to an Unorthodox Faction. Starting now. As for me. Yes. I am Lee Zaha, an errand boy from Ilyang. Im currently the leader of the Low-Down Sect. A regular at the Chunyang Restaurant. Lets skip the Black Rabbit Union. What else is there? Im also not a fake brother. As I continue worrying about useless things, one of the chiefs intervenes. Thats enough. Is that so? By the way, how many laws do you all have? A lot. We have over a hundred. I order Dokgo Saeng. Reduce the rules to three. A hundred to three? I glare at Dokgo Saeng and say. Start with three. If you need to add more, discuss the pros and cons and add accordingly. Do it after youre done tearing the walls down. The other chiefs reply. We understand. This meeting is more difficult than a fight. They and I live in different worlds. There is a reason why past Murim Alliance Leaders often appear with white hair. Your hair will turn white if you gather these bastards and try to gather their opinions. If its this tough to have a meeting with these morons, how much harder would it be for the Murim Alliance Leader? A meeting with an intelligent bunch of people would be even more draining. Folks from prestigious sects engaging in a war of nerves will say, Leader, thats a little. Elders from murim clans will then go, Please reconsider. The smartest soldier of the central district will also say, But Im a little concerned about this. Whenever I hear this crap, I feel the urge to pull out a sword. But Im the leader. Lets hold it in, I need to hold back, and thats how their hair turns white. I murmur my train of thought out loud. These are all the reasons why Kangho warriors should use knives. That idiotic chief opens his mouth once again. Thats right. I let out a sigh. I have to put up with this. Suppressing my desire to flee, I tell the chiefs. Remember. I know its hard for all of us to gather around here, so we can have a meal together today before I leave. Cook up a meal. Lets eat together. But the former leader never eats with us. I snap my finger. Good. Then, from now on, all chiefs have to gather up and eat three meals together. Get rid of the tolls and release the hostages. Burn all the documents related to the bounty, and dont pocket all the valuables from the leaders storage. Spend it on people who are having a tough time. And seriously, design proper houses. Hire outsiders and pay them rightfully to build buildings. Even wandering beggars have more hygiene than you. Speaking of which, this is a rather difficult task. I naturally shift the responsibility to Dokgo Saeng. Got it? Unexpectedly, Dokgo Saeng nods and replies. Ill do that. I know what you mean. I ask him with a slightly perplexed look. You understood? Dokgo Saeng answers back calmly. Thats right, but theres nothing you cant do. Did this fellow suddenly gain enlightenment? You understand human language. Why dont you summarize what I said. Other chiefs then stare at Dokgo Saeng in unison. Dokgo Saeng sums up my words in his pissed voice. Tear down the wall. I reply. And. Go outside more often. Correct. Continue. Live with the people of the world. I watch Dokgo Saeng wordlessly like the other chiefs. Dokgo Saeng carries on. Stop kidnapping people and selling them as slaves. Dont gamble. Dont extort the toll from other sailors. Live with good hygiene. Tear down the old houses and build new ones. Use the necessary expenses from the former leaders wealth. Dont pocket the money. At that moment, I cant see why the atmosphere among the chiefs is becoming so serious. Regardless, Dokgo Saeng continues. Give up the name Black Hurricane Castle and come up with a new one. Chiefs have meals together. Reduce the rules. Discuss and add one at a time. Why is the atmosphere so solemn? All of this starts after the walls are broken down. I look around and say. Great job. Whats with the sudden atmosphere? A tactless chief tells me. Chief Dokgo used to say this often. Though its not the same, hed come close. Am I right? Youve heard of this before, correct? Ive heard of it from time to time. I close my mouth and stare at Dokgo Saeng. And Dokgo Saeng is still staring at me. This guy is always angry and irritated. And countless tales and stories are in that gaze of his. When I make eye contact with Dokgo Saeng, we converse more in silence than when I spoke in a chatty way. I am suddenly reminded of a conversation I had with Dokgo Saeng. How is the Black Hurricane Castle these days? It doesnt matter. Its full of idiots. Lee Zaha, I think you should be the next leader. What am I supposed to do now that youve killed the leader? During this vague and awkward silence, the idiotic chief breaks the silence. Excuse me, should I prepare the meal right now? All of the chiefs wait for my answer. I sigh briefly and then reply. Forget about the meal. Bring me some booze. I really need a drink today. Chapter 47 Chapter 47 C Mindset Of Not Giving Even If I Had Them After I change out of my bloodstained clothes and clean my face, I sit around with the chiefs and start drinking. When I start losing count of how many glasses I have been drinking, Dokgo Saeng, who has been drinking with a tense look, begins to laugh alone. I watch Dokgo Saeng with a deadpan look. Are you out of your mind? Why are you laughing all of a sudden? The officials shake their heads as if they dont know. I dont know. Its our first time seeing it, too. I am witnessing a strange scene. Dokgo Saeng laughs so awkwardly. He is forcing himself to make a sound. It is as if he is practicing how to laugh. The view is so bizarre that I swallow back my curse. Gosh, crazy bastard. After bursting into laughter several times, Dokgo Saeng resumes drinking with his usual tense look. In the end, he doesnt even say half a word about what he is thinking and why he laughed. I dont ask either. You can laugh if its funny. Its not a big deal. Perhaps he is feeling embarrassed for no reason, but then he says. I won. Win what? I was brought here when I was kidnapped at a young age. I cant believe this day has come. I look at Dokgo Saeng and the chiefs. All the people captured alongside me are dead. Some sank with ships in the sea, and some were killed. My only goal was to survive. My wish was to survive longer than the geezers. If I were lucky enough to be stronger, Id kill them with my own hands. I feel like someone snatched that purpose from me, but in the end, I won. If surviving is winning, then Dokgo Saeng is right. Dokgo Saeng asks me. What kind of force is the Low-Down Sect? Ive never heard of it. I take a sip of my glass and reply. People work in brothels, errand boys, restaurant owners, smithies, architecture, even Unorthodox Factions. There are people who have nothing to do, as well as people who have a lot to do. What a total mess. Of course it is. The stupid chief interrupts. Were a mess, too. Everyone nods and admits it. Thats true. Even I, who is talkative, listen to many stories from the chiefs while I drink. Dokgo Saeng seemed to be a lonely leader, much like his last name, Dokgo (). If the people he killed on the boat were on the same side as the elders, he wouldnt have hesitated to kill. But I dont bother to ask. This is the kind of person Dokgo Saeng is. I stand up as soon as I decide it is the right time to leave. You should drink moderately, too. Elders who had their wrist cut off may have other ideas. Dokgo Saeng shakes his head as if it is impossible. You have already cut off the wrist of all the next strongest elders anyway. They wont win even if they bring all their lackeys, So he had this all planned out. Thats why he went to the elder who was cut off earlier and mocked them. Im off. Dokgo Saeng stands up and dismisses the drinking party before telling the chiefs. Im going to see him off. No one stops him. I watch the compound and realize I have to take a boat if I want to get back quickly. Dokgo Saeng says he would see me off at the lower stream of the Hornless Dragon River and boards the boat with me. Can I come to Ilyang to report the situation when its sorted out? Come to the Black Rabbit Union first, then Ilyang if Im not present. The Black Rabbit Union? I am the Black Rabbit Union Leader. Are you a member of the Twelve Generals? No, Im pretending to be one. Dokgo Saeng asks. To kill Dae Na-chal? When I nod, Dokgo Saengs face lights up. Hes strong. I suppose so. What happens if you die? Can we really open up the precincts and live, just like you said? Do you think Im going to die? Dokgo Saeng glances at me once and replies dryly. I dont think so. You have to return the favor if you receive one and pay it back twice over if you have a grudge. If you need help facing Dae Na-chal, you can call me up. Youre going to help me? Are you looking down at me? Its better if you stay alive. If you die, the Black Hurricane Castle will be in chaos. Survive in your own way. Im going to survive on my own. I get off the boat downstream of the Hornless Dragon River, and Dokgo Saeng remains. On the boat, Dokgo Saeng does not utter a word of goodbye. Would our lives improve if we broke down the ramparts? You may not see instant change. Is that so? I saw a lot of children on my way to the main hall. They will be better off than you guys. Dokgo Saeng nods back. Then thats fine. This may be sudden, but the force once known as the Black Hurricane Castle is now under Dokgo Saengs lead. I nod as I look at Dokgo Saengs worried expression. See you again if I make it out alive. I turn around, walk for a time, and look back as I feel a burning stare at the back of my head. Dokgo Saeng is staring at me with folded arms while sitting on the bow of a boat. That scared me. Dokgo Saeng releases his arms and waves his hand twice. Ive never seen someone greet me so awkwardly. When the ship departs, Dokgo Saeng suddenly shouts. Lee Zaha! What? Dokgo Saengs mouth goes up awkwardly. Its okay to talk down to me from now on. Take care. As the ship moves further, Dokgo Saengs figure also disappears from the boats bow. I murmur as I walk on the passage from the mouth of the Hornless Dragon River to the Black Rabbit Union. Rude bastard. As I arrive near the Black Rabbit Union, I sense something is off. Even though it is evening, I dont hear any screams from the subordinates in training. Is someone here? I try to get on the wall but stop. A master will notice immediately. I knock on the gate like when I first visited the Black Rabbit Union. Sometime later, a rectangular space opens with a rattle, and a pair of eyes appears. His eyes widen as soon as he sees me, and he opens the door without saying a word. As I walk in, my subordinate looks me up and down. The leader left dressed in pristine, white clothes and appears back in shabby clothes, so it can only come off as a surprise. I ask in a low voice. Whos here? Geum-hae () is here. So youre saying the Gold Boar belonging to the Twelve Generals is here? According to the strategy guide, no one knows if he was given the name Gold Boar because of his gluttony or if hes gluttonous because hes the Gold Boar. A fellow who ranks 7th and 8th place back to back. He is known to have become Dae Na-chals disciple due to his natural strength and physical abilities. Manager Byuk also added that he became a disciple because Geum Haes family is well-off. His house is presumed to be a merchant group (̈F). In other words, Geum Hae is a young master who offers the most money to Dae Na-chal. Perhaps because his interests are only food, there are no records of his causing ruckus like the Yellow Horse, Green Dog, or White Rat. Though the strategy guide is thoroughly organized from Manager Byuks point of view, it is also relatively objective. I know about most of them to some extent. A surprise awaits me when I enter the main hall across from the outer and inner courtyard. A feast is being served at the long table in the main hall. A man with a golden pig mask over his head is eating. The artist who performed Face-Changing (׃, swipe mask instantly) seems to have taken off their mask for a while for a break, but it also looks like they were sitting down like Zhu Bajie in Journey to the West. Geum-hae, who must have thought that I am a servant of the Black Rabbit Union, smacks his lips and says, Fetch me water over there. I answer immediately because pouring water is a specialty of a former errand boy. Yes. As I approach with a kettle, Geum-hae, eating at the end of the table, pinches his nose. What is this fishy smell? Put the water down there. Yes. Go away. Ugh, disgusting. What is your deal? You have to answer well at times like this, but I know the answer because I am an errand boy. Im sorry. Ah, that was shockingly unpleasant. Shoo, go. I back away. You also have no idea where Brother Rabbit has gone? Yes, I dont know. The answer that he went to heaven almost rises past my throat. For a moment, Geum-hae puts down his chopsticks and covers his nose with his hands. A nasal sound comes out of his mouth. Do the servants here not wash up? This is why you end up as a servant. I cant wash up if Im busy, damn it. He waves his hand as if to tell me to get lost. Go inside and wash up. Tell the others to wait on you. Where did everyone go? I suppose. Where are they? Its dinner time, so they are probably gathered in the corner of the kitchen eating cold rice with the leftover side dishes. Thats what I used to do. As I babble for a long time for a servant, Geum-hae becomes flustered. Jeez Then Ill go wash up. You dont have to come. Dont ever show up in front of me again. Geum-hae gobbles down enough food for 10 people to eat heartily, almost non-stop. I go straight to the private bathroom, wash up, head to the changing room, and change into fresh clothes. I have an idea where my men had disappeared to. If So Gun-pyeong had teamed up with a few officials, they would be able to handle Geum-hae. With my absence and seeing as Geum-hae is Dae Na-chals disciple, they must be hiding somewhere after cooking up a storm for him. Curious about Geum-haes purpose for this visit, I wear the Black Rabbit Union Leader mask, take Black Hares Tooth, and head back to the main hall. Letting out a loud burp, Geum-hae proceeds to look at me. Long time no see, Brother Rabbit. What is the relationship between the Black Rabbit and Gold Boar like? Gold Boar doesnt seem to be afraid of Black Rabbit at all. I point at the food with my chin and then say shortly. Eat comfortably. I dont bother to ask what brought him here because he seems talkative. Geum-hae mumbles words while shoving food in his mouth at the same time. Your maids are great cooks. I always eat so much whenever I come here. Hearing this out of the blue, I think I should move the maids to Zaha Guest Inn in the future and put them under Jang Deuk-soo. The inn is enormous anyway, so theyll be short of staff. Geum-hae drinks water and makes a gulping sound as he swallows. You havent fought with Brother Baek Yu yet, have you? Our merchant group has obtained a herb. Its from the West. But. No buts. Hell snatch them away if this reaches the masters ear. Your battle with Brother Baek Yu is approaching. I thought Id ask if you have any intentions to buy them at an affordable price. What is it? We bought White Flame Herbs (ײ) in bulk, wow Some 100-year () White Flame Herbs are also included. I have called an expert for an inspection, and they think it is around 300~400 years, not 100 years. Rather than the herb, my ears perk up at the word expert. Whos the expert? Theres a smart guy in my town. So, whos the expert? No, why are you interested in a practitioner but not the herbs? How do I know if the man who tested the drug is a quack or not? You think business is run in a day or two? Youre pissing me off. Dont buy it if you doubt it. Many people are willing to buy it. But I came here to ask you first because I think youll need it the most. You dont even recognize my sincerity. How much is it? At my question, Geum-hae pulls the mask over his head and his face. Geum-hae answers with a smile inside his mask. A 300-year White Flame Herb would skyrocket off the roof. Youve been a trustworthy customer, so lets settle nicely at 50 gold pieces. Ill throw in ten boxes of regular White Flame Herbs for you. Give them to your subordinates. Bring them to me. Geum-hae answers as he stands up. Great choice. Im sorry to say this, but I was going to make the same deal to Brother Baek Yu if you refused. Ill help you delay the battle no matter what, so make sure you eat it and fight. Geum-hae suddenly mimics fist punches with his hands, making whoosh whoosh sounds with his mouth. Go ahead and get the Qi breathing technique ready. Go. Perhaps because hes the son of a merchant group, he is rather persuasive. I look at the table after Geum-hae disappears. It feels like a piglet trampled all over the table. Plus, I dont have any money. I just dont. Even if I do, I dont. Though its not a public organization, I am an underpass beggar when it comes to calculating. I close my eyes briefly and erase the wealth in Ilyang and the Black Rabbit Union assets from my mind. The errand boy is a beggar. A mindset of not giving money even if I have them. My heart feels at peace. Chapter 48 Chapter 48 C You Know What I Mean? I look at the boxes of White Flame Herbs with my hand propping my chin. The tiny boxes contain 100-year-old White Flame Herbs, and the two large boxes contain regular White Flame Herbs. Having stayed for quite some time in his carriage, Geum-hae strides back into the hall. Brother, you should at least check the quality. Geum-hae sits across from me and opens the large box first. Oh, these herbs are hard to come by as of recently. Geum-hae fans his hands to smell the herbs. Ah, you can smell the blazing heat. Its tricky to preserve them, so it would be best to finish up as soon as possible. I glance at the regular White Flame Herbs. They dont stand out as anything special for a tonic. Like wild ginseng, they look just like the veggies you serve as side dishes on the table. The place where the herbs are found is more important than the shape. Just as how people change depending on what environment they grew up in. Instead of the western regions, the White Flame Herbs is a herb that can only be retrieved from the Nammok Forest of Tibet. It is a tonic that helps improve internal cultivation without any side effects. Hence the older it gets, the more expensive it becomes. I pick up a regular White Flame Herb, tuck it under my mask, and chew it slowly. Assuming I will buy them all, Geum-hae asks. What do you think? I nod my head. Its alright. I see. Has brother tried White Flame Herbs in the past? My period of learning martial arts was relatively short compared to the top masters of Kangho in my previous life. So, of course, I have tried a good majority of herbs and tonics. Obviously, I have never tried an extreme Yin type of drug such as Snow Ginseng (ѩQ). However, I was dragged up to the Nammok Forrest to try the White Flame Herb, so theres no way I would forget the taste. This White Flame Herb is genuine. But the problem is the 100-year-old White Flame Herb When I try to open the box containing century-old White Flame Herb, Geum-hae presses the box with his fingers. Brother, though were close, shouldnt you leave some money before checking? Not that I dont trust you, but thats just the basics of doing business. Manager Byuk, bring the money. Yes, Leader. Always keep things clear and simple. While Manager Byuk is hauling a box filled with gold, I say. Still, we have to check the quality. Manager Byuk, you examine it. Manager Byuk answers as he places a box of gold on the table. Shall we? Geum-hae glances at Manager Byuk. You know how to examine herbs? Well yes, of course. I point at Manager Byuk and say. He is a veteran of Kangho who has dedicated over 30 years of his life to Kangho. Hes a legendary tonic taster, tonic expert, wizard of tonics, the know-it-all master (fώ) of the tonic field, tonic genius, a man who can discover tonics 100 miles above the sky and smell them a 100 miles away. A man who became a Kangho warrior just to appraise tonics. That man is Manager Byuk. Manager Byuk answers as he bows with a fist and palm salute. Thank you for the high praise. That is indeed high praise. Geum-hae smiles and looks at Manager Byuk. Really? Thats formidable of you, Manager Byuk. Please take a look. Manager Byuk opens the box and flares his nostrils. I see. It has three roots. The smell is accurate. But if you look right here, this part of the root is awkwardly cut, as if someone had bit it off. Manager Byuk finishes speaking and looks at Geum-hae. Geum-hae replies. I told you to appraise, but what are you spouting? Just evaluate if the product is genuine. Im being generous to handle over three roots for 50 gold. Why do you keep ticking me off? Now I have more reasons to give this to Brother Baek Yu. As Geum-hae throws a dramatic fit, Manager Byuk bows his head slightly. I apologize. Manager Byuk then tells me. Still, the decision is still our leaders to make. This is indeed high-quality White Flame Herb. Even if hed sent someone to Nammok Forest, getting so many herbs of this quality wouldnt be easy. Most of all, the transport wouldve been difficult, so General Geum-hae is right. If there were five or six roots, he would have asked for 100 gold. I nod my head. Is that so? Geum-hae guffaws as if he is feeling better. I thought you were just some perverted artist, Manager Byuk, but you have profound knowledge of tonics. I point to the box. Confirm the money and take it. Opening the box of gold, Geum-hae carefully inspects the pieces by fumbling them with his hands. Im sure its right. Brother Rabbit is going to win this round, but thats such a bummer. How so? No, its nothing. Say it. Geum-hae tilts his head and says. I mean, you know. If a sparring gamble takes place, isnt the crowd going to mostly bet on Brother Baek Yu? And youll be the reverse bet. If you take this, youll at least get a draw and win in the end. If this fight garners attention, the 50 gold pieces will be nothing to you You get what I mean, right? Turning a fight between the Twelve Generals into a sparring gamble? Geum-hae points at me with his finger. Thats why its a big deal. You understand, right? Besides, Brother Baek Yu is one of the Four Generals. I cant think of a way right now, so let me think about it. Ah, its a shame that this fight will be a major event. If you win, youll get 50 gold, no, at least 500 gold pieces. Thats equivalent to Brother having these tonics for free. I express slight interest. Hows our master? Geum-hae responds. Master? What do you mean by how? Im still taking good care of him as usual. Hahaha. When Geum-hae laughs, Manager Byuk also laughs along beside him. Hahaha, so it was true that General Geum-hae is the most contentious among the Twelve Generals. I am surprised. Geum-hae eyes Manager Byuk. Manager Byuk. Yes. Who told you to flatter yourself like that? Manager Byuk puts his hands together politely. Im very sorry for the many errors today. I have crossed the line. I speak in a low voice as I think Geum-hae is about to act out of line. Brother, you should also watch out. Geum-hae answers as he stands up. Then Ill be on my way. Brother, it would be ideal to eat them now. The tonic wont be as effective after being exposed to air. Manager Byuk. Yes. Brother Rabbit would have to cultivate all day, so make sure to tighten the security. Not even an ant can get out of this place. I will keep that in mind. See you. As Geum-hae turns around and walks toward the main door, I call him. Wait. Geum-hae turns his head and looks at me. I place the 100 years old three-rooted White Flame Herb under my mask and chew on it right away. . In fact, I dont have to use the Qi breathing technique right away because of the Heavenly Pearl. The Heavenly Pearl will absorb the tonics energy. Whenever I have time, I can suck Qi out of the Heavenly Pearl through the breathing technique to help amass internal Qi. I might be the only Kangho warrior in the world to build internal Qi this way. I say with a nod. Indeed. This is White Flame Herb is authentic. Geum-hae says farewell with an eye smile. Congratulations in advance, Brother. Ill see you next time. As soon as Geum-hae disappears, Manager Byuk asks. Is this really okay? For you not to begin cultivation right away. I answer after taking off my mask. Its fine. Where are the rest of the officials? They are all on standby at different parts of the route. Even if you took off the mask to go deal with him, wont Geum-hae see your real face? Hes a smart pig, so hell probably remember. Wouldnt that be an issue? General Geum-hae also has sufficient manpower in his merchant group. Putting down the Black Hares Tooth, I change out of my clothes and say. Manager Byuk, Im not a calculating guy. But whats more important. Yes. Its about having the courage to steal the money back. The will to steal it back no matter what. Courage and spirit, bravery, aggression, and confidence. The plan isnt that important. The mind is always more important. And worries are useless thoughts that have a lower priority than planning. Remember that. Yes, Leader. When a servant brings me a fresh set of clothes, he lowers his head as soon as he spots me naked. Changing into neat, white clothes, I order Manager Byuk. Be on your guard. Because the leader has just officially begun his cultivation. Roger that. Ah, are you not bringing a sword along? Why would a lowly servant have a sword? As soon as Geum-hae boards his carriage and removes his mask, he tells the guard sitting opposite him. Moron, he had so many suspicions. How annoying. A guard with a sword against his chest replies with a smile. Well done, sir. Where would you like to go? Lets head for birdbrain brother. Its a busy day. The guard raises his voice slightly as he looks at the coach box seat. Lets head to General Baek Yu. In the rattling carriage, Geum-hae suddenly tilts his head. I feel like the atmosphere is strange. Whats the matter? This is not a lame joke. I think my heads gotten weird. Geum-hae rolls his temple with his fingers. Competing with Brother Baek Yu must have made you anxious and sensitive. Is that so? Did he say hell participate in the sparring match? Im not sure yet. As if he likes what Geum-hae has planned, the guard makes a slip of the tongue. Selling three roots to Black Rabbit and four roots to White Rooster. If we successfully create the sparring gamble and raise the stakes as always, our young masters plans are flawless. Geum-hae nods. If I had to pick a side, of course, Id choose the Four Generals. The rabbit wont even know why he was defeated again. Once hes hurt badly, Ill bribe the master. Do you think I should compete in the ranking match? If so, will you jump rank to 5th place all at once? Will things be different if I get up to 5th place? The guard shakes his head. Young master, how are you satisfied coming in 5th? If you get rid of one of the Four Generals, you can be promoted to one of the Four Generals. Geum-hae points his finger at the guard and says. You are too impatient. The Four Generals arent an easy mark. We have to see the big picture. How much money have I lost to Dae Na-chal? There is no need to rush. My family has never lived at a loss. In the end, everything can be recovered. Then, the coachman yells woah woah and the carriage shakes vigorously. On top of that, the sound of galloping hooves echoes outside, and the horses neigh sorrowfully along with a rattle. As soon as Geum-hae looks out of the small window, he shouts. Are they nuts!? Geum-hae gets out of the carriage with a flustered look on his face. They almost bump into a wagon that suddenly pops out on the right. The surprised horses are running wild. It is an accident that would never happen unless the coachman is drunk. The guard comforts the angry Geum-hae. Young master, please put your mask on. Ill take care of it. I mean, what the hell are they doing on this wide road? Go check if the coachman was drunk. Yes. If hes drunk, give him 20 slaps. Understood. I confirm their location as I watch the fireworks burst in the air. Whether Geum-hae is returning home or on his way to a brothel to spend the money he just earned, the officials hiding on every important street will block his carriage by any means to stop him and buy time. I will catch up by checking the direction of the fireworks while the officials buy me time. However, looking at the firecrackers position, Geum-hae hasnt gone very far. I start picking up the pace and sprint toward where my brother is. There are so many things I want to say. First, my money. When he asked me to bring him water, it was so annoying to answer with honorifics that it weighed on my mind. Come to think of it, he didnt pay for his food either. It was a grand feast. He cant do that to me. I would also like to ask him to shed some weight for better health. And most of all, the fact that he was being too arrogant for a brother. As I sprint fiercely, I realize Im not wearing a mask at the moment. Then Im now The errand boy of Ilyang, the leader of the Low-Down Sect, a liberator of the Black Hurricane Castle, a servant of the Black Rabbit Union, and Lee Zaha of the Zaha Guest Inn. What does this mean? Whatever this is, I look forward to meeting the young master. Is it because I am running? Suddenly, anger is boiling inside me. I run as I tear through the wind. Wait for me, Brother. Here I. come. Chapter 49 Chapter 49 C Todays Humiliation The carriage Geum-hae is riding in is intercepted by the Black Rabbit Union lackeys carriage. In the entangled chaos of people soothing the surprised horses and yelling, some guy is slapping my subordinate, who is disguised as a coachman. Im infuriated not because my subordinate is being slapped. But because coachmen are also a part of the Low-Down Sect. Therefore, instead of a Black Rabbit Unions lackey, it feels like an ordinary coachman is getting beaten up. Without losing speed in my footwork, I leap into the air. The Flying kick is an attack skill ordinary boys between 7 and 8 can learn and a tactic that can be easily used until the age of 80. No wonder it is called the representative martial arts of incompetent people. And as the representative of the incompetent, of course, I use the flying kick. Extend the right leg while your body is flying in the air. Fold the left foot slightly to shift your weight to maintain balance. It is better to stretch your right arm parallel to your right foot. With the fist of your left hand slightly curled, pull it like a bow as if you are preparing for a counterattack. Getting into this position will become a perfect flying kick that can render even Murim Alliance instructors speechless. With a sound of a slap, the guy slapping my subordinate across the face is hurled far away, capturing everyones attention. Geum-hae is wearing a mask, so I cant see his expression, but he is looking at me anyway. Whats a stinky servant doing here? Stinky servant Youre right. But I cant stand your mockery, especially when I came here after washing up. Geum-hae replies. What are you going on about? You think Ill let you off just because youre Brothers servant? Then, the man who got hurled by my flying kick that had no internal Qi approaches me. I will take it from here, young master. With my arms crossed, I move tremendously fast and kick the approaching swordsman sideways. The swordsman manages to draw his sword out halfway but gets kicked once again. He soars through the air and lands on the floor. Perhaps hed passed out this time as he lays there quietly. No internal Qi was injected into the flying kick, but internal Qi was channeled in the side kick. Thats the difference. If he didnt understand that I let him off the hook, Id have to hit him for real. Geum-hae scratches his cheeks that are sticking out of his mask. He seems to be worried about something upon seeing my skills. Im going to report your antics to Brother. Sensing something is off, Geum-hae carefully scans the coachmens faces and atmosphere and says. So youre doing this on purpose. You must know that I am Master Dae Na-chals disciple and a member of the Gold Mountain Guild (ɽ̈F). If you are Brother Rabbits men, the whole Black Rabbit Union will have to bear my masters wrath. If you are paid to do this, our guild will find out. I have an appointment today. Just know youre lucky to get away today. Now leave. Geum-hae points his finger at me. And you, you dont seem like a servant at all. I can easily find out who you are with money anyway. Geum-hae must think I am a spy who infiltrated the Black Rabbit Union from the outside. If hes smart, he wouldve come up with various variables. I nod as I approach Geum-hae. Do as you please. Dont come near me. You stink. I say as I walk nearer to Geum-hae. I told you I washed up. Youre clearly asking for it. Corner him, dont let him get away. The men back away and get in position at different corners. In the meantime, Geum-hae and I have a staring contest. If Geum-haes martial art skills are at about the 7th or 8th place, it means he ranks around the middle amongst the Twelve Generals. Geum-hae looks at me and quickly stretches his right palm. Instantly, I also extend my left palm in response. With a tearing sound, the palm duel begins. The two of us withdraw internal Qi forcefully at the same time, unleashing gusts of wind. The hem of Geum-haes flabby clothes expands instantaneously as if filled with air. The reason why Geum-hae decides to go for a palm duel is that hes the son of the merchant group. What I mean by this is Hes the young master of a well-off family, so he is more confident in a fight using internal cultivation than a physical one. Of course, that is a grave mistake as he doesnt know who I am. The problem is Geum-hae doesnt expect it, and I didnt see it coming either The Heavenly Pearls absorption phenomenon is happening. Is it because the opponents palm (, the center of the palm) and my palm are precisely facing each other? Geum-haes internal Qi is absorbed in a moment through my palm. Startled, Geum-hae swings his left palm, causing me to counter it using my right palm. Whoosh! The speed at which the internal Qi is being absorbed becomes faster. Both of our feet sink in the aftermath of the shock. In the process of two powerful palm forces being interlocked, fused, and absorbed, even if hes about to faint from the shock, Geum-hae has no choice but to go all out. As Geum-haes body trembles, b-zak the golden pig mask cracks with a tearing sound. Only then am I able to see Geum-haes face. His face, which looks like it never went through any hardships, is pouring with sweat. He finally opens his mouth. Let Let go! Here I notice the selfish nature of the Heavenly Pearl. It is simply inhaling the opponents internal Qi mercilessly. However, if I halt the process on a whim, I might sustain internal injuries from Geum-haes extended palms. Because of that, I can come to my senses. If I dont stop this soon, Geum-hae will lose his life. I did say I would get rid of the Twelve Generals, so killing Geum-hae isnt a big deal. But I dont want this guys spirit or ghost to be stuck in the Heavenly Pearl. If that happens, Ill be no better than the Demon Cult Leader. All I am is a man who wants to live my way. I dont want to be a monster like the Demon Cult Leader. Fortunately, when Geum-haes internal Qi is absorbed into the Heavenly Pearl to some degree, the palm force Geum-hae unleashes weakens significantly. Without much effort, I cease Heavenly Pearls absorption on my own. Then, staggering backward, Geum-hae falls on his butt. Thump I scratch the back of my head for a moment. I came here to steal money, but I ended up stealing internal Qi. Geum-hae looks at me like he has just lost everything. What the heck did you do? Does he even know that I kindly went out of my way to save him? Can there be another hero as chivalrous as me, I wonder? I tell Geum-hae. You were the one who attacked first. And I blocked it. You would have died if I hadnt pushed you away because of my unique martial arts. You should know better that I stopped the palm duel on purpose. Do you want me to absorb the rest of your Qi? I squat down and look into his eyes. Geum-hae looks at me with a rattled expression. I order my subordinates. Check the carriage. We should see it to the end now that were here. Geum-hae says. Stop! There are things in there that go to General Baek Yu. Do you think you can handle the consequences? To General Baek Yu? Is Geum-hae trying to threaten me, or is it a slip of the tongue? I reply while listening to the reports from my subordinates. Bring me that little box. A guy runs over with a small box and opens it even though I dont ask him to. It has the same century-old White Flame Herb I bought, but four roots are inside. I say with a startled look. You have a nasty way of doing business. Sell three roots to Black Rabbit, and sneak four roots to the White Rooster. So youre going to kick start the sparring gamble and destroy the Black Rabbit Union once and for all. Is that it?. Geum-hae responds with a smirk. Do you have proof? I say as I slap Geum-hae across the face. I dont, you jerk. What do you guys think? My subordinates answer. Isnt that match-fixing, instead of determining ranks with martial art? I cant believe there is a merchant who would play such a sick joke. This is despicable even if were part of the Unorthodox Faction. My subordinates hit the nail on the head. I say while scowling at Geum-hae. I was just going to rob you. But at this rate, youll infuriate the leader of the Black Rabbit Union and Dae Na-chal. And the Gold Mountain Guild will be thrown into chaos. Suppose the Black Rabbit Union Leader finds out. In that case, he will mobilize the entire clan to exterminate Gold Mountain, and Dae Na-chal will do nothing. Do you know why? A smart subordinate replies. Wouldnt he stay still if you offer him half the Gold Mountain Guilds assets? Geum-hae is more afraid of damaging his familys Gold Mountain Guild than getting humiliated. His face turns pale white. Geum-hae doesnt seem to know how to make threats, so I show him an example. Should I rat you out to the Black Rabbit Union Leader? Or should I tell Dae Na-chal? You choose. I dont mind both. How about you guys? The subordinates retort here and there. We like it, too. Sounds good. What if we tell both? I shake my head. It would be boring that way. Im trying to live a fun life, but doing that will spoil the fun. General Geum-hae, times up. Which is it. I say as I pretend to tap a little drum with my hand. Drum roll, hurry up, and choose. Geum-hae continues with a troubled look. If you hold a grudge against me, Id already be dead by now. Youre humiliating me not because of hate but my familys fortune. Lets be honest about what we want. If you dont tell the master, Ill bring you as much money as you want. Before I can answer, I hear an exhausted voice across the street. Brother, Im back. The eyes of the subordinates shift in unison. Hong-shin is walking with a tired face and holding someones mask in her hands. Hong-shin doesnt look well. Blood is stained on the forearm and parts of her clothes. Even Geum-hae looks at Hong-shin with astonishment. Why are you here? Hong-shin replies as she looks at Geum-hae. Did you get caught, too? Hong-shin hands over the blood-stained mask of Green Dog (G). The raid failed, but I fought him and sorted the ranks. Hes in heaven. Can you take pity on your poor sister and give me the antidote? I couldnt fight him properly because I had to use the bathroom. Please have mercy. Diarrhea keeps I reply as I stand up. Good work, Red Sister. Ill keep my promise. Geum-hae glances at me again and asks. Who are you? As soon as I glower at Geum-hae, Hong-shin, who has dark under-eyes from diarrhea, slaps Geum-hae. How dare you talk down to your brother? I nod as I look at Hong-shin. Good job, Sister. Thank you. I look around and wrap up the situation. Good. Now load all the boxes back into Geum-haes carriage. Clean up the rest and head back. Take the unconscious guy with you and free him later. Red Sister, Geum-hae, and I have somewhere to go, so lets part here. I kick Geum-haes butt and say. Call your coachman over. We have a place to go. When Geum-hae tries to retort with that mouth of his, I look at Hong-shin. Then Hong-shin raises her hand without saying a word. Gold Pig, dont ever question your brother. Despite not saying a word as he stands up, Geum-hae gets another slap from Hong-shin. Slap! I look back and forth between Geum-hae and Hong-shin. Was Geum-hae always under Hong-shins thumb? Or is he holding back after having his internal Qi stolen? In any case, Hong-shin is lashing out at Geum-hae after what shed experienced from me. I interrupt the childish duo with a gentle voice. Disciples shouldnt beat each other so much. Geum-hae looks at me with his hands on his cheek while Hong-shin lowers her head slightly. I will keep that in mind. The three of us enter the carriage. Hong-shin and Geum-hae sit side by side while I sit across them. The coachman asks. Where would you like to go? I reply in a dignified tone. Red Sister just used her sword, and Gold Brother is injured. Of course, we should head for the clinic. Which clinic should I go to? Im sure theres one your young master frequents. Oh, I will take you there. I reach out to Hong-shin, and she places Green Dogs mask on my hand. Has she reached the point of knowing what I want by looking at my eyes? She gets it right away. I wear Green Dogs mask slowly on purpose.. Hong-shin bows in a fist and palm salute and says. Greetings, Green Brother. Having witnessed the scene, Geum-haes eyes are shaking. ! Still, in the same fist and palm salute, Hong-shin stares at Geum-hae with a frown. Thinking he might get slapped again if this keeps up, he wriggles himself into an awkward position and salutes. Greetings, Green Brother. I reply with a stern face and an authoritative voice. Raise. Yes. Yes. Chapter 50 Chapter 50 C Though Ill End Up As Crazy Demon Again Geum-hae always thought he was as smart as anyone, but even he couldnt understand what was happening. He cant understand how the foul-smelling Black Rabbit Union servant is so strong. Hes even more confused when Hong-shin appears out of nowhere, is extremely afraid of the servant, and calls him Brother. Hong-shins personality is cocky, to begin with. She wasnt this afraid when she met the Four Generals. Hong-shin is a woman who says whatever she wants, even in front of Dae Na-chal. But Hong-shin is terrified of that servant guy. Who the hell is this guy? No matter how much he uses his head, Geum-hae does not have a single clue who this servant is. On our way to the clinic that Geum-hae knows of, I recall the memories of my past life. Theres a great chance it will be a clinic I know of. Suddenly, I look at Geum-hae, whose expression is becoming more complicated as we sit in the clattering carriage. Pig. Geum-hae unintentionally answers with honorifics. Yes, sir? I can hear your thoughts from here. Clear your mind for a moment. Put down your greed, and accept the situation. Youre smart but you cant figure out everything in the world. As he ponders how to answer my statement, Hong-shin raises one hand with a blank expression. Slap! Geum-hae barely answers as his head spins. I-I understand. I will clear my head. Geum-hae seems out of breath for a moment, as if his condition is worsening. I click my tongue as soon as I recognize Geum-haes condition. Breathe. Or else youll fall into a state of Qi Deviation. Yes. If you fall into Qi Deviation, youll have to go into the afterlife without being able to use the money from that rich family of yours. Get a grip. Geum-hae hurriedly closes his eyes and slowly gathers his breath back. Hearing that drives him crazier. Whether hes a servant, a lunatic, or Green Brother, he will fall into Qi Deviation if he doesnt control his breathing calmly at this moment. Taking the White Flame Herb and money with me, I get off the carriage with Hong-shin. The coachman assists the pale Geum-hae. It just so happens that I am bringing a patient in a serious condition. Truthfully though, Internal Demons (ħ) are not much of a big deal. When you lose whats most important to you, the Internal Demons can come in any form. The most important thing to Geum-hae is money and the skill accumulated with the tonics bought with it. Having these two things snatched from him suddenly, not to mention Sister Hong-shins sudden appearance and getting slapped by her constantly, is enough for his Internal Demons to develop into a state of Qi Deviation. In short, it means hes about to go berserk. Go in first. I let Hong-shin, Geum-hae, and the coachman go in first and then stood to look at the sign from outside. Moyong Infirmary (Ľt) If its an infirmary (t) run by someone with an unusual surname, such as Moyong, then we have come to the right place. This reunion is very meaningful to me. I dont know how this relationship will continue in the future. When I enter, the young owner of Moyong Infirmary greets the patient himself. Escort the young master inside. The nurses help Geum-hae into the infirmary. I dont approach for a second and stare at the young man with a white band on his head. Neat clothes, clean faces, and the occasional smiles are unfamiliar to me. I think briefly, So he also had a point in his life that was happy and normal. When the coachmans briefing is finished, Hong-shin says. Doc, listen to our Brothers explanation too. I call Hong-shin. Red Sister. Yes, Brother. Always use honorifics to Doctor Moyong. Hong-shin replies with an anxious look. I understand, Brother. The physician glances at me and sorts things out. Since the young master of Gold Mountain suffered internal injuries, lets start with Qi breathing. A nurse replies. Yes. Dont talk to him, and please refrain from letting anyone near me. Ive never seen you before, Sir General. Are you feeling unwell? It isnt until I am asked a question that I take off my mask. He and I look at each other for a long time. This is the first time were meeting in this lifetime, so theres no way he would recognize me. I speak in a tone that is my calmest ever. I am Lee Zaha, of Ilyang. I am the leader of a small clan called the Low-Down Sect. Doctor Moyong replies with a puzzled look. You are not one of the Twelve Generals? I glance at the mask and reply. Our small Low-Down Sect is currently at war with Dae Na-chal. Hong-shin killed the original owner of this mask. When Doctor Moyong hears that we are at war with Dae Na-chal, his eyes widen. Oh, I see. Anyway, I will take it from here. General Hong-shin, please go inside and lie down. And are you feeling unwell, clan leader? Im just here to pay. I dont feel unwell anywhere. Ive heard about your exceptional skills, so I was curious. He smiles awkwardly and introduces himself. Oh, I see. Pardon the late introduction. My name is Moyong Baek (Ľݰ). As Moyong Baek delegates tasks to the nurses, the nurses guide Hong-shin and the coachman inside. Even when a nurse takes her, she does not forget to speak with me. Brother, Ill be back after treatment. Go on. As the crowd disappears, I am left alone with Moyong Baek. Moyong Baek asks. Is it true that youre fighting with Dae Na-chal? I nod and call Moyong Baek to the table with a box of White Flame Herbs. Doctor, please come here for a second. When I open the box, Moyong Baeks eyes widen. Why are these here? Did you appraise this, Doctor? Moyong Baek replies as he sits across from me. Yes, this is authentic. What year did you estimate them to be? Judging from the width of the roots and the number of sprigs, it would be at least 100 years. Are these not 300, 400 years old? Thats a bit of a stretch. These are expensive. Even if theyre found in tough terrains, they will be dug up and sent to the Central District. Even the 100-year ones are rare these days. That means Geum-hae lied to me. I have already eaten three roots. And also absorbed Geum-haes internal Qi. Moyong Baek looks at me with surprise. Ah, congratulations. I ask a question. Are you in training too, Doctor? Since I have to treat Kangho warriors, I have to do research. Im honing my internal Qi and also doing other training. Kangho warriors injuries differ from ordinary patients, so they are much tougher to treat. Things get complicated when patients ingest weird poisons. I sign inwardly. I cant believe this guy was so normal. I suddenly look around inside the clinic. It is a neat and clean house. Placing my interlocked fingers to my forehead, I become momentarily lost in thought. I remember Dokgo Saengs saying to return the favor if you receive one and pay it back twice if you have a grudge. Actually, Im not much different. Leader, are you feeling ill? When I shake my head, Moyong Baek points at White Flame Herbs and says. As you may know, White Flame Herbs boosts extreme Yang energy, so you must be aware of the Fiery Disease () after taking it. I raise my head and reply. Im very fiery myself, so its fine. Leader, if youre fiery, you should be extra careful. Im all right. I have been relieving my anger appropriately. Moyong Baek asks with some curiosity. How do you relieve it? Right, how did I solve it again? Can I be honest? Those who have learned medicine shall not divulge the patients secrets without permission. You can be honest with me. I tap my fingers on the table and say. My house burned down not long ago. It was an inn and a house. I was in a rage. Thats why I killed the guy who set my house on fire. And I felt refreshed Moyong Baek, who never expected this kind of confession, becomes flustered. Ah, I see. Turns out the people I killed were the ones who tried to build a new unorthodox clan with the Black Rabbit Unions permission. Thats why the Black Rabbit Union came for me. They called me over and insulted me, asking me to kneel like a dog. Thats why I killed them. I was relieved Moyong Baek instantly straightens his back. Ah, yes. I see. And once I did, they sent an assassin. The Black Rabbit Union did? The assassin had guts, and so I spared him. We shared pork ribs and stormed into the Black Rabbit Union after. Honestly, I was excited. Moyong Baek gulps down his saliva. Though I had the slightest intention of sparing the leader of Black Rabbit Union, what was it I said to him? Lick where youre told to lick and bark when asked to bark or something like that. When I sent him flying across the wall, I asked him if he could lick if I asked him to, then he ascended. Ah, does it mean the Black Rabbit Union Leader is dead? Not officially. Im posing as the Black Rabbit Union Leader. I then tap the Green Dog mask and say. Like now. Im the Black Rabbit and the Green Dog. Are you following? Moyong Baek speaks as if he is amused. Youre good at venting your anger as it comes. Im relieving it, so I dont get depressed due to my anger. Moyong Baek lowers his voice with a serious look. Im not sure if I can ask you this. Feel free to ask me anything. Doctor Moyong. Moyong Baek whispers. Youre enemies with Dae Na-chal, but youre here to treat his disciples? Thats a good point. I look at Moyong Baek with a serious look and imitate legs with two fingers on the table. There was a Kangho warrior. As he walked down the street, he killed everyone he met, killed because of diarrhea, for letting out a fart, killed people worth saving, and killed strangers. Do you know what happened when he killed them all? Im listening. He became demonic (ħ). My finges go back to their original positions and walks toward Moyong Baek. He killed the man who burned down his house and killed the vicious men but spared those who are useful. He spared the woman who said mean things, the assassin who paid for his meal, the man who was kidnapped as a child and had difficulty understanding the world. Though there are some embellishments there, Moyong Baek understands the context of the words. What is it? Is that Unorthodox (ڵ)? No, this is a man who handles the Unorthodox Faction. Handling people in hopes they can start over. Even if Im betrayed again, Ill be able to handle it later. Moyong Baek stares at me. Then are you part of the Orthodox (׵)? A chivalrous hero, or at least thats what the people call someone like that. Im not part of the Orthodox Faction. Its already too late for that. Why is that? Theres no virtue. Not all Orthodox Factions are virtuous. That I agree with. Most of their clans or their founding fathers are mostly virtuous. And they are skilled. They become an Orthodox Faction because of their disciples and their next generation of disciples. Its the power of tradition. On the other hand, thats not me. My burnt house was an inn, and I was an errand boy. I have no roots, so it takes time and effort to become an Orthodox Faction. What about the Low-Down Sect I created it. This is how counseling is done. Moyong Baek, who is so into my story, barely leaves the chair at the nurses request to tend to his patient. Leader, lets continue later. Im sorry. No problem, please see to your work. Theres a reason why I explained demonic, Orthodox, and Unorthodox to this guy. I want Moyong Baek to know the clear difference between them early on. Moyong Baek saved me in my past life from Qi Deviation using the medical knowledge he had. In fact, presenting him with a whole box of four-rooted White Flame Herbs and gold isnt anywhere near enough if I want to properly repay the kindness. I cant predict how Moyong Baeks fate might change in the future. But Im changing our fates right now. It was like this in my previous life. Moyong Baek, who made a name for himself, enough to be crowned as the Great Doctor, fell into a dispute with Dae Na-chal and lost his entire family. But the Great Doctor Moyong Baek survived And became the Poison Demon (ħ) Moyong Baek. And just like I said earlier, the Poison Demon killed Dae Na-chal. This is what Kangho is like. An errand boy becomes the Crazy Demon. An outstanding doctor becomes the Poison Demon. This is why I dropped everything just to come to see this man. If I can stop the tragedy and misfortune of the person who once helped me. I will leave the days I have spent with the man named Poison Demon only in my memories. Though I will likely become the Crazy Demon (ħ) again. There is no need for him to become Poison Demon once more. Its enough for me to become crazy alone. Chapter 51 Chapter 51 C It Was Nice To See Him Smile How scary will a man who used to save lives become if he starts bearing animosity? The prime example of this is the Poison Demon. The Poison Demon grew stronger through his knowledge of anatomy and medicine and began studying poisons when that wasnt enough. The feet that had been busy scurrying around his clinic while trying to save his suffering patients transformed into ones that searched for poisons growing in hazardous terrains. The Poison Demon even tested poison on his body as he was unsatisfied in his preparations to take down Dae Na-Chal alone. After persevering through a constant cycle of poisoning and treatment, he eventually killed Dae Na-chal. Would a person seeking vengeance be satisfied? By the time of our first encounter, the Poison Demon had already killed Dae Na-chal. However, the Poison Demon did not go easy on Dae Na-chals disciples either. He killed them by pursuing them and tracking them down. Even former disciples who had abandoned their life as the Twelve Generals and were living their lives as ordinary people were caught and slaughtered. When I met him, the Poison Demon not only resented Kangho warriors but also loathed humans in general. He had cured and treated countless patients. Afraid of Dae Na-chal and his wrath, no one stepped up to help him as he fell into a delirium. That was how Moyong Baek slowly immersed himself into the world of Kangho in another lifetime. I learned the details about his hatred during a drinking session with the Poison Demon. During his time as an ordinary practitioner, he once treated Dae Na-chal when he was seriously injured. He also saved the Twelve Generals from the verge of death on multiple occasions. Eventually, Moyong Baek killed all of his ungrateful patients with poison. When I met the Poison Demon, the expression on his face was always bleak. When burning vengeance died after getting rid of all his hated enemies. What would he live for? His loved ones were no longer by his side, and all the bastards he had to kill were gone for good. The Poison Demon continued to study poison and cultivated martial arts without finding a proper answer. He spent his days imagining that someone would come to avenge Dae Na-chal. And I was grateful for that Poison Demon. Swearing not to save another life again, Poison Demon broke his oath to save me from Qi Deviation with his past medical knowledge. The man who had been slowly losing reason may have sympathized with me, who had already gone crazy long ago. This must be the empathy that is shared between lunatics. I cant help but recall the old days as I sit alone in the waiting area. Moyong Baek, who reappears after looking after his patients, sits down again and explains the patients condition. Dont worry, neither of them have any serious injuries. Im not worried, but I still nod solemnly. Apparently, Moyong Baek thinks that I am the guardian of the two patients. Moyong Baek continues. To my surprise, their injuries are mild, but they displayed symptoms of being mentally disturbed as well as anxiety. Especially General Hong-shin, she looks like she hasnt slept for a few days. She also kept badgering around about what someone was doing, as well as complaining that she was suffering from diarrhea. In her half-asleep state, her words become honest. Moyong Baek stares at me as if he wants an explanation of how they ended up in that state. Is diarrhea a serious disease? Sometimes. In which aspect? Youre in Kangho. Diarrhea might cause one to lose against an enemy. Its life-threatening, so its considered a serious illness. Hm. I never thought Id return to the past and have such a deep conversation about diarrhea with the once terrifying Poison Demon. As I know Moyong Baeks character, I resolve his curiosity. The truth is, I told her it was poison and gave her laxatives. I then ordered her to promptly kill one of the Twelve Generals Green Dog, Yellow Horse, or White Rat. If Hong-shin had continued to defy me, I would have had no choice but to kill her like the Black Rabbit Union Leader. Thus, the laxatives I gave her saved her life! I retort using my Introduction to Diarrhea Studies (йaWՓ). Once he figures out what is going on, Moyong Baek tries to hold back his laughter and flares his nostrils. I see. Then I will prescribe medicine to stop diarrhea. I snap my fingers and say. You will soon gain a reputation for treating poison. That will be formidable. Thank you, but I will have to refuse. Anyway, I promised to treat her since she got rid of Green Dog. Shell be in your care, Doctor Moyong. I see. Its not difficult, so leave it to me. How did the atmosphere turn solemn on the topic of stopping diarrhea? Exchanging glances with Moyong Baek for a moment, I give him a nod. Lets move on from the diarrhea topic. Of course. Also, it appears that General Geum-hae is suffering from psychological shock. I throw a question over to Moyong Baek. Do you know what he likes the most? I dont mean any offense, but they would be money, drugs, and gluttony. Good catch. During the fight, hed lost a considerable amount of internal Qi, and I also stole his money. Right. Those who are successful tend to take failure more personally. I nod and point to the patients room. Let me go save Hong-shin from the depths of despair. Ill be back. As I stare at Moyong Baeks back, I think. The saying that successful people tend to take failures more personally also applies to him. But it doesnt apply to me. I have few memories of gaining success. The guest inn was destroyed, I was kicked out by my employer when I worked as a cemetery caretaker, and I had lost all my bets on sparring gambles. I strayed off the path while learning martial arts and plagued myself in Qi Deviation, and the Low-Down Sect was terminated as soon as it was built. Whether it was learning martial arts or taking panaceas, nothing went smoothly. A life marked with failure; that was my past life. Because Id lived such a ruined life, I ended up being chased down by both the Murim Alliance and the Demon Cult. In the end, I swallowed the Heavenly Pearl Failure is just a process. What matters most is to make it out without getting hurt. I can suddenly hear Hong-shins voice from within the patients room. Thank you! Thats right. You have to live with gratitude. The hope that diarrhea will stop and the expectation that one thick shit will come out instead. The word doctor seems to naturally come out of Hong-shins mouth now. How can a respectable doctor such as Moyong Baek be so horribly betrayed by his patients? The nickname Great Doctor vanished, and the Poison Demon was born. Therefore, Dae Na-chal must die in my hands before Moyong Baek goes feral. My flow of consciousness seems to flow back to shit as I sit alone, engrossed in my thoughts, so I try to calm my mind. Whenever the nurses walk by, I lower my head slightly. My face is pale, my outfit is pure white, and yet my head is full of poop, so I feel sorry for the nurses. Terrible. Having briefed the nurses about the precautions and treatments, Moyong Baek strides back out. Leader, Im afraid General Hong-shin needs to have some rest. The waiting time will be delayed as General Geum-haes treatment will also be prolonged. You can come back tomorrow. Doctor, are you busy? Not at all. I point to the chair across from me. After I watch Moyong Baek take a seat, I push the box of gold to him. Moyong Baek looks at the box and asks. What is this? Treatment fee. Can I open it? Of course. As soon as he opens the box, Moyong Baek confirms that it is full of gold currency. This is too much. How many are there in total? 50 gold pieces. Why are you giving me so much? Actually, its time for me to do some cultivation. While I wait for them to get treated, please prepare a quiet place for me to rest. That wont be a problem, so Moyong Baek takes three gold pieces out of the box and pushes the box back to me. Even this is too much. A quarrel breaks out. Please, accept it. I refuse. I am quickly reminded that Poison Demon was extremely stubborn in the past. Moyong Baek says with a relaxed expression. Leader, I treat my patients regardless of who they are because I am a medical practitioner. However, I am also human with likes and dislikes. Use this money for what you have planned. I have received 50 of them, but I will return 47 to fund your agenda. I earn money so I can make it rain. And Mo Yong-baek is gathering the money back in his hands and throwing it back at my face. Moreover, if you look closely at his words meaning, it contains hints that I should use the money to kill Dae Na-chal. If you insist, I will take them back. Yes. But you must accept these. Round Two has begun. I hold out a box of four-rooted White Flame Herbs to Moyong Baek. I preemptively say something in case he brings up whatever reason he has to refuse. A doctor needs to be healthy to help save more lives. Moyong Baek laughs without opening the box of White Flame Herbs. Leader. Yes? For me to completely absorb these White Flame Herbs, it would take more than 10 days for me to cultivate. Patients come every day. I cant possibly leave my position to ingest these. Rather, arent these essential to you? I am grateful you regard this shabby clinic so highly. Please eat these right now and begin your cultivation, and I will prepare a remedy to help your body regain its balance. This is the kind of guy I am facing. Ive lost a quarrel. . While contemplating what to say after running out of cool words, Moyong Baek calls out to the nurses and gives several orders. Take the leader to the room in the far end. He will start cultivating once he takes the herbs, so be mindful. Yes. And put up a sign saying I will be out until tomorrow morning and close the clinic early today. I have something to do. I understand. While the nurses and the clinic are now moving in sync, I wait patiently. Leader? You can go in now. Gosh. This makes me wonder if I can do this for only 3 gold pieces. Moyong Baek says with a smile. Getting to know a master more skilled than the Black Rabbit Union Leader is good for us. Im looking forward to working with you, Leader. Eventually, the man whose head is filled with thoughts about shit follows the nurses inside. Moyong Baek, who is left alone, looks at the busy nurses walking around and enters his office with his hands behind his back. Taking off his sweaty headband, Moyong Baek washes his hands and face and wears a new headband on his forehead. Subsequently, he retrieves ingredients one by one from the drawer where drugs and herbs are stored and places them on the table. In the meantime, he recalls the clan leaders mannerisms, gaze, complexion, and breathing, while thinking about materials that could neutralize the energy of the White Flame Herb. He then mumbles. I think he has basic anger issues. Moyong Baek thinks that he shouldnt believe everything a patient says. Some ingredients have to be finely ground into powder, so Moyong Baek sits at his desk, takes the utensils in his hand, and begins preparing the ingredients himself. Its also a very long process. However, the drugs efficacy can be increased according to these trivial actions and sincerity. The nurses usually do this, but today, he is preparing medicinal herbs on his own. Naturally, he has no choice but to reflect on the patients condition while making the medicine. In Moyong Baeks eyes, the leader of the Low-Down Sect is an impressive man that shows very few emotions. He often makes jokes, but its just a facade. His nature is that of a level-headed person who never rejoices nor gets angry. Based on research and books he has read on human personalities and personal thoughts, he interprets the Low-Down Sect Leader in this way. A man who will fight wars and turn the world into his enemy if things dont work out. A man who will lead and protect many people if things work out well. The point is, whether its going to war or protecting people, he is definitely not an ordinary man who can spend his days peacefully. To classify him as a personality type, he is a man of war, a Colonel () type. No matter how things progress, he will be the leader of an army. Thats why Moyong Baek works harder to prepare the medicine. He hopes that the leader of the Low-Down Sect will spend more money on something more meaningful, overcome his anger issues, get over his Internal Demons (ħ) that might develop in the future, win against Dae Na-chal, and also hopes that the clan leader will soar in his career and protect Moyong Clinic. He collects herbs and ingredients and carefully grinds them into powder. As he immerses himself in the preparation process, the corners of Moyong Baeks mouth go up slightly. Having burst into laughter alone, Moyong Baek has no choice but to take a small break. Ugh, I cant stop thinking about his diarrhea story. The man who was once the Poison Demon laughs with a bright expression. Chapter 52 Chapter 52 C Freed Woman, Reformed Man The busy footsteps of the nurses gradually die down, while the sound of Moyong Baek grinding herbs continues. I sit in a lotus position on the bed. I can hear the sound of Hong-shins snoring and Geum-haes occasional sighs. Although there is some background noise, I enjoy the peace and quiet in the Moyong Infirmary. This is nice. After returning to the past, I realized that the Poison Demon Moyong Baek sometimes laughed like that in his younger days. Some people laugh even if theyd gone insane, like me. There are also people who dont laugh at all after going insane. As if the feeling of happiness itself has been extracted from their brain. Therefore, in my eyes, the young practitioner Moyong Baek looked much happier than when he was the Poison Demon. With a faint smile on my lips, I start the cultivation. The energy of seven White Flame Herbs has already been absorbed into the Heavenly Pearl. As usual, I convert the energy of the Heavenly Pearl into internal Qi. There is no need to rush. Having gone through Qi Deviation multiple times, I know my body. In some cases, you can fall into a Qi Deviation state due to anxiousness and impatience, so I am thorough and calm when cultivating martial arts, like a turtle taking a leisure stroll outside. For that reason, I dont stay up circulating Qi all night. After concentrating for two hours, I lie on the bed and look up at the ceiling. Since I am lying down, I focus on the noise around me, like a person unfurling a protection technique, and fall into a trance. Between the boundaries of memory and dream, I am looking at a flight of stairs. A skinny man in a yellow chogyu (, attire monks wear) is climbing up the stairs slowly with a corpse in each hand. At the top of the stairs, a bulky man with large beads around his neck looks down alongside other monks with a blunt expression. The faces of the people above the stairs are melancholic and sad, but the bulky man does not show any emotions on his face. Checking the bodys condition, the bulky man says a brief farewell to the other monks and slowly descends the stairs alone. As the man descends the stairs, his expression changes with each passing moment. His calm expression disappears. He is abandoning all the empty formalities and breaking the Buddhist precepts. His expression changes like the Buddha statue of Acalantha (). The monks on the stairs are shouting for him to come back. The bulky man, who declares his departure from the precepts, takes one final step down the stairs with an unfaltering look. Originally, dreams dont always make sense. The bulky man who comes down the stairs strolls in the dark. Even in my dream, I sigh as soon as I see the mans unusual outfit. Why is he looking at me again? The bulky man who is wearing thick beads around his neck is a Warrior Monk (ɮ) of Vajrayana Buddhism (sܔ), which is a branch of a type of Tibetan Buddhism. A man of such rank is commonly known as the Grandmaster of Vajrayana (s). The man walks out of the darkness while waving his hand. He looks at me and smiles with a bizarre expression. Its been a long time, my student. I open my eyes automatically and wake up from my sleep. Ugh, damn it To sum up, it was a nightmare. The White Flame Herbs seem to have an associative effect and appear in my dreams. I had consumed the White Flame Herb while being dragged around by this crazy apostate monk. No words could describe the hardships I had suffered at the time. In terms of past lives, he was the former Crazy Demon. He was also my master, who was the Grandmaster of Vajrayana. However, due to my masters former title, attire and demeanor, he was named the Crazy Monk (ɮ) by our enemies. There are several men that Kangho warriors actively avoid like the plague as much as possible, and the Crazy Monk is one of them. Whenever I thought of the mentor I had shared a brief connection with, I felt nauseated. Wishing to get a taste of the White Flame Herb. I was dragged from the central district to Tibet. Curious as to what fish lived on the coast of Zhejiang, we traveled from Tibet across Sichuan, Chongqing, Hubei, and Anhui, to reach Zhejiang. All the Unorthodox or demonic factions we encountered along the way were killed by Crazy Monk. I never called him master while I was being dragged around. He called me his student the whole time. Later, when I looked back on my life after becoming Crazy Demon, he was definitely my master. With that memory, I make a careful promise to myself. I will not become his disciple this time. Many times, I almost died from getting led around by the nose. He was the previous generations Crazy Demon. Of course, hes a maniac. If he hadnt returned to Tibet after gaining enlightenment one day, half of the masters in the central district wouldve died at his hands. Moyong Baek, who wakes up early in the morning without making a sound, discovers that I am already awake. Leader, are you up already? When I nod, Moyong Baek says. Ill bring in the tonic in a bit. As soon as I see Moyong Baeks face, I can immediately tell he had stayed up all night. Moyong Baek quickly brings in a bowl of tonic. A black potion given by the Poison Demon. Even though Im aware that this guy is not the Poison Demon, it still makes my knees buckle. Moyong Baek thrusts the bowl of the unappetizing concoction that looks like poison with innocent eyes. Leader, please drink this. What is this made of, Doctor? Suppressing the strong desire to ask, I down the bowl in one go. As it is going down my esophagus smoothly, it seems that its not poisonous. How do you feel? Well, nothing else other than my chest feeling a little refreshed. It feels like instant relief, right? May I check your pulse? When I stretch out my wrist, Moyong Baek confirms my pulse and tilts his head slightly. Did you face any difficulty in accumulating your Qi? Not really. For a moment, Moyong Baek hurriedly removes his hand with a surprised look. I can feel a power absorbing. The doctors internal Qi? Yes. Moyong Baek describes what he feels while rubbing his finger that felt for my pulse. It feels like its being burned and absorbed. I presume. Is this what happened to General Geum-hae? I smile and look at Moyong Baek. The man in front of me has figured out everything. Did you mean General Geum-haes Qi went into your dantian when you said he lost his internal Qi? Thats correct. Did you use a traditional method, perhaps obtain an ancient martial arts technique? Or did you obtain it through the form of an opportunity? I would say its an opportunity. Then I suggest it would be ideal to refrain from absorbing others internal Qi until you can fathom whats going on. Actually, Id planned to do that. Where do you usually live? Somewhere in the Black Rabbit Union or Ilyang Be sure to stop by even if youre busy. I frankly reveal my whereabouts. I will return with a lighter heart once I get rid of Dae Na-chal. Getting rid of Dae Na-chal means reigning in almost all of the Unorthodox Factions in the southern region, including Ilyang. Accomplishing this means no sudden misfortune will happen to Moyong Baek in the future. After treating Hong-shin and Geum-hae until the following day, I look at Moyong Baek again as I bid him farewell by the carriage. Have a good rest, Doctor Moyong. Thank you for the past two days. Moyong Baek replies with a smile. All the best, Leader. Feel free to come back whenever you feel unwell. I also give him a word of caution. Be careful of Kangho warriors, Doctor. Contact me if anything happens. I will drop by personally. What could possibly happen to a practitioner? Thank you for your concern. As soon as the carriage kicks off, I sigh a little. Im at war to ensure nothing will happen, you punk Geum-haes complexion looks better than yesterday. However, next to him is Hong-shin, who has finally overcome her diarrhea, and I am sitting across from them. Geum-hae, still extremely wary of getting slapped, speaks to me cautiously. Green Brother. Can I please return home? I nod my head. Homes nice. Thank you. No can do. This time, Hong-shin clasps her hands together and says with googly eyes. Youll give me the antidote, right, Brother? I already did. You did? When? Violet Mist Poison is a laxative. And Doctor Moyong has already treated you. I look at Hong-shins dumbfounded expression and say. Sister, manage your facial expression, wont you? Hong-shin smiles brightly. Though she is putting on a big smile, fire seems to be burning in her eyes. Red Sister, Gold Brother. Yes, sir. Do you find it funny that an utter stranger like me suddenly calls you Sister and Brother? No, its not. Its not funny at all. What about your real master? Nothing is more precious than the fate of a person who is alive. If you two are going to stand by Dae Na-chal and go against me, I will stop the carriage right now. Your poison has been cured, and your internal injuries have been treated to an extent. It wont be much of a problem, so lets get off and go our separate ways. Hm. Im not getting off, though? Im not fond of both of you yet. I can easily beat you to death in front of Dae Na-chal as if weve never met. Live your lives as you please. Just like me. Hong-shin and Geum-hae stare at me. I add. Youre neither my slaves nor Dae Na-chals, so youre free to go. Geum-hae says. Brother, I could have my family destroyed if I go against Dae Na-chal. Can you at least tell me how skilled you are and how great your manpower is? Its not just my life thats on the line. I suddenly remembered Moyong Baeks words. After Dae Na-chals death, the disciple who abandoned his identity as part of the Twelve Generals and lived a normal life, that guy might have been Geum-hae. This guy is a young master from a well-off family, so its possible. If thats the case, this guy was treated by someone who killed him in his past life. The corners of my mouth tilt. Seriously, life is Indeed, youre not a merchant for nothing. Youre going to compare our powers and enumerate thoroughly? Geum-hae lowers his head slightly. Im sorry, if only it was just me involved Nothing is more futile than trying to calculate a comparison of powers in Kangho. A fight cannot be predicted with such estimations. I explain it to them in my own words. Think of it this way. Lets say I lose since Dae Na-chal has many disciples. Its a given that I will get overpowered. Assuming that my manpower is not enough due to both Hong-shin and Geum-haes absence. I am defeated because both of you have joined Dae Na-chal once again. Do you think you will be satisfied when that happens? The two are unable to answer me for a moment. Hell still ask you to steal, to bring him money. I saw earlier that Moyong Infirmarys nurses are very pretty. If they catch Dae Na-chals eye, even Moyong Baek would have to offer him the nurses. Thats what he is. Youd have no choice but to plug away as his slave until he dies. I shake my head. Whats important isnt comparing forces. Even if Im weak, will you continue to live as slaves? Or will you not? Thats important. After a while, the carriage stops, and the coachman informs us. Weve arrived at the Black Rabbit Union. I say this to Geum-hae, who has followed me all the way here. Geum-hae, you were born into a rich family and grew up with everything you need. You may be proud of your clan but look at you now. Do you think the money is yours? Your whole family is nothing but his money dispenser. If youre truly rich, wouldnt it be far more critical to figure out what to invest your money in than grub for money? I wonder. Geum-hae avoids giving a fast retort to my words and replies. Im sorry, Brother, but can I have another meal? I ask Hong-shin. How about you, Sister? Hong-shin asks back with a puzzled look. What, me? A meal? Im hungry, actually. Geum-hae elbows Hong-shin in the ribs. Hes asking me if youre going to side with Dae Na-chal. Unlike Geum-hae, Hong-shin gives a clear-cut answer. I will side with Brother no matter what. Geum-hae asks the question for me. Why? Hong-shin answers. He carried me to the bathroom and even took me to the doctor. We also had pork ribs together. Though I was troubled about the poison, it turned out to be laxatives. And if it was Dae Na-chal who gave me poison? I wouldve died from a real poison. He would never take me to the bathroom either, which means I couldve ended up shitting my pants in the woods. Once again, I have captured a maidens heart with a laxative. Lets go grab a meal. We get off the wagon with the coachman and enter the Black Rabbit Union together. I see all my subordinates training when I throw the gates wide open. When I appear without a mask, So Gun-pyeong bows with a fist and palm salute and says. Greetings, Leader. Subsequently, the subordinates also greet me while maintaining a painful training posture. Greetings, Leader! With Hong-shin to my left and Geum-hae on my right, I nod my head and walk through the crowd. Meanwhile, Geum-hae glances around him with a face that shows he couldnt understand why the subordinates here called me leader and halts his steps. Green Brother is Brother Rabbit? B-Brother Rabbit was the servant. Or was it Green Brother? Were you the servant, Leader? I turn around and look at Geum-hae. Oh man, look at him. Hes tripping into Qi Deviation again. Red Sister. Got it. Understanding right away, Hong-shin slaps the dubious Geum-hae on the cheek. Get your shit together! Geum-hae returns from the gates of hell, holding his cheeks with his hands. How many slaps did he suffer from in the past two days? I say to him while clicking my tongue. My, my. What should I do with this rich young master? I speak to those freed from diarrhea and those who received a revival through slaps. Lets go eat. Surviving in Kang-ho is no easy feat. Chapter 53 Chapter 53 C Invalid Match List During the meal, I keep my eye on both Hong-shin and Geum-hae. I want to see if they are enjoying the meal and am curious if they can properly ingest their food when with me. Hong-shin and Geum-hae are filling up their dishes and mouths as if digging into the ground. Some people work all day to eat just one meal, and I wonder what these two, who threw themselves into Kangho, feel when they eat. But I dont bother to ask. It may end up as an insignificant meal one must eat every day. Though Im not as much of a big eater as Geum-hae, I eat aggressively like a soldier on the battlefield while praising the maids excellent cooking. This is tasty, that is tasty, everything is tasty. Thats true. Hong-shins appetite isnt lacking either since her diarrhea has been resolved. I dont know what was going through their minds, but the three of us gobble down everything prepared by the maids anyway. After a while, the three of us breathe out a sigh of satisfaction. We sit around as if we are in a lull after a round of battle has ended. Damned bastards Hong-shin asks curiously. What do you plan to do now, Brother? I have to fight Baek Yu, but thats a useless fight. I plan to kill Dae Na-chal anyway. Whats the point of becoming one of the Four Generals? Recite the evil deeds you know Dae Na-chal has committed. I feel like my martial arts skills will progress rapidly when I hear that. Hong-shin replies. Your martial arts skills will improve if you hear about his evil deeds? How come? Side-eyeing Hong-shin, I retort. You have to put your emotions into it to fight well. Im so pissed off that Im about to go crazy. Then you might make a mistake. You just need to consciously spray cold water in that state. If you get worked up, youll lose. Lets calm down. Lay the feeling of anger at the bottom of your heart, and cover it with a frozen blanket. Just as ice and fire coexist in the heart, like the synergy between extreme Yin and Yang Qi. Geum-hae asks with a perplexed look. Did you master the martial arts of extreme Ying energy? I dont know why I feel my stomach sink whenever this rich young master asks me a question. He is the son of a merchant group, so he has no choice but to have a wide circle of acquaintances. I reply with hope in my voice. No? I really want to learn it, but I havent had a chance yet. Do you know a good way? Geum-hae says. Extreme Yin martial arts are rare. All I know is I look at Geum-hae with my ears open. A woman who used to be a Holy Maiden of the Heavenly Demon Cult became independent and built the Okhwa Palace (񻯌m). It was made up of only women, but it was quite powerful because all of them had mastered the Ice Technique and the Cult Leader was especially powerful. As soon as the Heavenly Demon Cult cleared up its complicated power struggle, the independent Okhwa Palace collapsed. Okhwa Palace then asked the Orthodox factions for help. The forces that responded advanced into Okhwa Mountain, and the Okhwa Orthodox Alliance was formed. It was about 20 years ago that this alliance faced the Heavenly Demon Cult. Oh, would you look at that? Coincidentally, its a story I have no recollection of because it happened around when I was born. No one was kind enough to teach Kangho history to an errand boy. But? The damage on both sides was severe, but the Heavenly Demon Cult won. Okhwa Palace was engulfed in a fire, and the Orthodox factions retreated. There was a survivor. Afraid to be taken as holy maidens, all of the forces that were part of Okhwa Orthodox Union were married off. But the Okhwa Ice Technique did not end here. This is not a happy story. Some of the disciples were married off as second wives just so they could lose their status as holy maidens. As far as I know, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light is one such indirect descendant. I ask the most important thing. Is there anyone famous who comes from that background? Not yet. Theyre hiding the Ice Technique very thoroughly. Not only did it cause great damage to the Orthodox faction, but their children would be branded as an apostates child to the Heavenly Demon Cult. So, the Left Hand of the Illuminating Light is the son of an apostate, and he still immersed himself into the Demon Cult? From the Demon Cults point of view, the descendants of the holy maidens indicate the return of the Ice Technique, so theres no way they would refuse his admittance. If so, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light must be the son of a concubine, a child of an apostate, or a descendant of the Okhwa Palace that has greatly damaged the Orthodox faction. He would be treated like an eyesore by the Orthodox factions and an apostate by the demonic factions. He must have been treated as a bastard at home, so he had to grow up in an environment where his personality inevitably became twisted and perverted. He was a problematic person whose situation involved isolation. Whether hell become twisted or not, I will not let him commit any deviancy this time. He was in his mid-to-late 20s when he was denounced as the public enemy for harassing young women, so he has yet to enact his perversions. Kill Dae Na-chal, stop the perversions, and avoid the past generations Crazy Demon. I think that it is a very exciting and busy day. This is why Kangho people need to grow stronger. If I was weak, I wouldnt be able to kill Dae Na-chal. A pervert would also go around harassing young women, and the former Crazy Demon would drag me to go see the fish in Zhejiang again. Damned fish, turtles, and sea fishing. If you see a monk fishing by the sea, youll end up contemplating how heaven and Earth were created. If said monk is curious about the fishes in Zhejiang, desires to smell the flowers in a volcano, or wants to go look for the mythical *Peng[^n1], I would instead ask them to memorize the Buddhist scriptures. Every time, the former Gwangma will repeatedly say that he had forgotten the Buddhist scriptures because he was an apostate monk. Sister, Brother. Yes, Brother. You must become stronger. Theres nothing more miserable than being weak in Kangho. Do you know what kind of fish live off the coast of Zhejiang? We dont know. Is there a difference? I am about to tell a story that the two of them wouldnt believe, but then the hall door opens, and So Gun-pyeong appears. Leader, General Hwang-oh, Baek-ja, Hyun-chuk () and Ju-mi (δ) are outside. All of a sudden? Have I been discovered? Im not sure yet. What about their forces? The generals are alone. I ask Geum-hae for his opinion on why this is happening now. Why did they gather here? Geum-hae answers. Perhaps General White Rooster is on his way. The rest must be here to witness the match between the top four heavenly generals. Lets go. I tell Geum-hae and Hong-shin while they are standing up. You dont have your masks with you, so mix in with my subordinates and watch. We understand. The sight of Yellow Horse, Black Ox, White Rat and Red Goat gathering and chatting is like watching a masquerade. When I appear wearing the Black Rabbit mask, the crowd of four simultaneously salutes with their fist and palm. Brother Rabbit. Long time no see. There is no tension in the voice of the four. That makes me think that Baek Yu must be really coming. Then, one of the guys remarks sarcastically out of the blue. Is it finally time for one of the Four Generals to step down today? Im looking forward to it. I speak to So Gun-pyeong without replying to his nonsense. Dont be hasty and stand by like a mountain (ɽ). Isnt the leader stronger than General Baek Yu? A comment that indicates that they wont stand a chance. I look at the carefree scumbags and reply. It doesnt look like it now. Anyhow, just keep that in mind. Yes. Everyone has their masks on, so I cant see their expressions. A while later, a general with a white mask engraved with the chicken crest leaps on the wall. Those who had greeted me without sincerity showed respect to Baek Yu politely. Greetings, Brother Baek Yu. Baek Yu shakes his hand once and orders the four. Clear out the space in the middle. As the people disperse, the space for the sparring match is secured. Baek Yu sits on the wall and asks me. How have you been, Brother Rabbit? I reply briefly. Im all the same. And you, Brother Chicken? Nothing much. I was sure when I saw Baek Yu sitting on the wall. We have more visitors. Behind me stood the officials of the Black Rabbit Union, and around the courtyard walls stand all the scumbag generals. It seems like someone else has taken over the seat on the other walls. So Gun-pyeong must have noticed as well. I think all of the Four Generals are present. I know, right. A moment later, White Tiger, Blue Dragon, and Red Snake, who has a greater presence than White Rooster, arrive almost simultaneously and also leap on the wall. It seems like they have occupied a good place to spectate that also serves as an angle to ensure no one could escape. In any case, all of the Twelve Generals who are still alive are gathered here. The low-ranking scumbags are busy greeting each of the Four Generals as they appear. However, all the Four Generals do is either blatantly ignore it or reply with a brief nod. I keep my eyes on the front without greeting the Four Generals. The sound of the main gate to the Black Rabbit Union opening wide is followed by the main entrance of the courtyard swinging open. Then, as soon as the inner courtyard door opens, I keep my gaze staring ahead. Perhaps the entourage came first and opened the door ahead of the main guest. A skinny, black-haired man makes an abrupt entrance at the gate. His hair is dangling, and the sleeves on his right arm flap in the wind. It looks like his forearm is missing. There are many tiny bumps on his face. His lips are thick, his cheekbones protrude outward, and his bulging forehead stands out along with his carp-like eyes. A piercing gaze (۹) along the greasy-looking face. I cant tell whether he is a wise person or a foolish person at first glance, but anyone could tell that he seems extremely stubborn. He looks to be at least 50 years old. Overall, it looks like a rhinoceros beetle is walking toward me. Once Dae Na-chal enters the inner courtyard, all Twelve Generals greet him. Greetings, Master. I am a man of manners, so I also bow in a fist and palm salute. When an accompanying servant holds out a chair, Dae Na-chal plops down without looking. As he keeps an intent eye on me, Dae Na-chal says. I came here because I was bored. Fight. Yes. After responding, I descend down the steps of the platform. Then, General Baek Yu, who is scheduled to be in the match, also rises from the wall. Dae Na-chal says to Baek Yu. Fourth. Yes, Master. Dae Na-chal shakes his head and says. Hes not someone you can handle, sit down. Baek Yu coughs and sits back down on the wall. In the meantime, I stand in the center of the courtyard and stare at Dae Na-chal. Dae Na-chal points his finger at me and says. The match list is mistaken. Baek In. Yes. Cheong Jin. Yes, Master. And Jeok Sa the three of you, face him all at once. Thatll be worth watching. The three men who receive their orders from Dae Na-chal step down to the center of the courtyard without question. Dae Na-chal says hoarsely. Today, three of the Four Heavenly Generals will take on the fifth, who has made rapid progress in his martial arts skills, all at once. The sparring match today is a death match, kill or be killed. No disciples shall interfere in the battle. I cant help but admire the words of Dae Na-chal. Look at this cunning Kangho veteran. I dont know how he caught wind of the mishap, but it seems like hes here to clean up internal problems publicly. It is a strategic move for the general to rush in, surround the perimeter instantly, and come forward personally since he doesnt trust anyone. The only coincidence is that I also used the word rapid progress, so Dae Na-chal mentioning it is rather memorable. I raise my hand to oppose his suggestion. Master? In fact, Dae Na-chal does not dismiss my words. Yes, fifth. Is there something you would like to add shamelessly? I answer with my hands in a polite sault. I think the match list is faulty. Really? Do you want me to take one out? Or do you want me to add White Rooster? Suit yourself. I raise my voice. Damn. Tsk. . This time I speak in an admonishing voice. Thats not it. In a deathmatch, the master should come forward. Youre so annoyingly absurd, old geezer. Silence falls. The atmosphere is so calm that it makes me look around behind my Black Rabbit mask. No one dares to open their mouths. My shoulders shake as I burst into laughter. It is awkward because no one is laughing with me, but I laugh as long as I can with the mentality that I should laugh whenever I want. Later, after letting out a few mirroring laughs, Dae Na-chal says. You caught me. It was going so well. I send an eye smile toward Dae Na-chal. [^n1] : Peng is a giant bird that transforms from a Kun (giant fish) in Chinese mythology Chapter 54 Chapter 54 C Shh Dae Na-chal eventually laughs. Thats certainly not something a disciple of mine can say. Bastard, show your face. Its no use covering your face anymore. I get an even stronger desire not to take it off when I hear his order. The person who never listens to bossy demands, thats me. I am not your slave. Its not like Ill take it off just cause Im told to. Why are you making someone you just met take something off, perverted old man? Calling him a pervert is just a distraction. Its calling him old that is the trump card. Whether its the dead or the master, all of you think like morons. Kekeke The way he smiles is quite revolting, so I mutter shortly. Ugh, so creepy. Ive met many demonic factions in my past life, so Ive seen a lot of people whose appearances become uncanny as they learn martial arts. Nevertheless, his laughter is enough to place him atop the list of the peculiar people I hate to see. Probably because he often orders people to kill after he laughs like that. Hes not Dae Na-chal for nothing. His appearance and presence itself are menacing enough. Sure enough, he announces my death sentence. All Four Generals, come forward. I reply before the Four Generals can even stand up. Dae Na-chal, are you really going to be this pathetic? . If the Four Generals cornered me all at once, Ill run away. Just so you know, my footwork is better than my martial arts. Lets play a game of tag through heaven and earth. But if you challenge me alone, Ill take up this 1:1 match like a real man. Anyway, Ill run away if his subordinates come at me. Ill fight if the ringleader challenges me. Even I think that this is a nonsensical response. But I am confident of breaking through the siege of the Twelve Generals. Thanks to the mask, they still dont know my face. If I change my outfit, throw my mask away, and am seen mopping up in a guest inn, at least the Four Generals and Dae Na-chal wont be able to recognize me. Its a secret weapon (z) where the errand boy disguises himself as an errand boy. If I succeed in running away, I wont show up for quite some time. Ill have to at least gain a miraculous opportunity from falling off a cliff to reappear before you. Will it be Heavens Net or a 1:1 duel? Choose. Just so you know, rumors that you avoided the 1:1 duel will spread throughout the southern region. Im quite the big mouth, you see. I giggle and scan the atmosphere of the Twelve Generals. You should never let your guard down in Kangho. There is a chance that the Four Generals will not try to stop their masters death. Those who have endured under the wing of an abnormal master for a long time cannot be normal either. Unexpectedly, Dae Na-chal does not make an immediate decision and tries to churn his thoughts. Granted, its not like my mouth will miss this kind of timing. Twelve Generals, you guys better listen up. Why do you think your foolish master wants you to step up first? This is all so he can find out if I use palm techniques or whether I am skilled with swords. He wants to see the extent of my internal Qi, how I fight, and what weaknesses I have. Of course, if I fight with you, those pros and cons will be revealed. Instead, Ill kill you like the Black Rabbit Union Leader. You have no idea how much your master geezer enjoys degenerate acts in wealth and honor after sending his disciples to hell. Suddenly I realize one thing as I look around at the low-ranking scumbag generals. All your disciples look young, yet the master is so old. Maybe he had previous disciples before you? Your mask and position will be passed on to someone else when you die. Hey, you Black Ox over there, how old exactly are you? The peoples eyes turn to Hyun-chuk, the Black Ox of the Twelve Generals, at the corner seat. His face cant be seen, but his physique clearly shows that he started training in martial arts not long ago. Of course, our master will not care about the death of his disciples. Raise your hand if you think Im wrong. In order to lead them on, I also raise my hand. Its bait for them to raise their hands silently, but no one falls for it. Anyway Dae Na-chal smiles in a relaxed manner as if he is just watching his grandchilds talent show. A crazy fellow is pretending to be my disciple. I reply in a serious voice. I agree. Masks can aggravate madness, so please beware, Brothers. The old man stands up from his chair. Very well, lets do it. Ill challenge you. While talking, Dae Na-chal glances at the Four Generals. Its unknown if this is accidental or intentional. Maybe its just a harmless glance. But theres no way that look is unintentional at this moment. Things will get complicated if Dae Na-chal deals with me directly and then have the Four General ambush me during the fight. Thus, it is dangerous to have a silent battle using internal Qi. Now I understand a little bit about Dae Na-chals true nature. He is a man who uses his head to plot insidious acts. If this continues, my list of opponents will become a bigger mess. That means I have to face Dae Na-chal, White Rat, Blue Dragon, Red Snake, and White Rooster all by myself. After scratching the back of my head, I fling myself towards the wall where Baek Yu is positioned. I dash in the air and pull Black Hares Tooth from my waist. As I wield the sword at Baek Yu with a terrifying momentum, Baek Yu is clearly surprised and takes a defensive posture with his War Fan (F, fan made of steel iron). I only use a method of fakes and truths and wield my sword, pretending that I am about to shoot out sword energy. While Baek Yu is on the defensive, I step on the ground and put Black Hares Tooth back into its sheath. I then execute my movement skill at lightning speed. Baek In, Cheong-jin, and Jeok-sa spring over on the wall from behind. Then Baek Yu and the other Twelve Generals who are deceived by me also fly over the wall and follow me. Again, another war of nerves. If I run too far, Dae Na-chals squad may give up on pursuing me altogether. I slowly turn my head and look at the fiercely dashing Twelve Generals. As I stand with my hands behind my back, out of the blue Baek-in, Cheong-jin, and Jeok-sa, who have been running side by side as if they were in an agility race, also halt simultaneously. I ask in a serious voice. Brothers, where is our master? Oh, hes coming out now. Dae Na-chal stands above the wall. As I look at Dae Na-chal, I whisper in a low voice to the Four Generals. Brothers, you dont have to worry. Ill kill the master. So react accordingly. The whisper sounds very tiny to even the sharp-eared Dae Na-chal. It is as if Ive been conspiring with the Four Heavenly Generals from the beginning. In fact, it is hilarious since the Four Generals are just looking at me. Sure enough, Dae Na-chal raises his voice. Dont just stare at him! Damn geezer. At that moment, Jeok-sa attacks first. Subsequently, the rest of the Four Generals pull out their respective weapons and rush in. I race through the tight alley I initially aimed for like a bullet from a gun. The reason why Im good at footwork is simple. I was dragged from the central district to Tibet and from Tibet to Zhejiang for absolutely no reason. Initially, those who are excellent in martial arts often use their movement skills because they feel frustrated during the traveling process. My skills were inept compared to the Crazy Monk, so I had no choice but to run fervently. If you had to travel across the world just to go see fish, your skills would inevitably improve. Turtles ran. They keep running and get lost in the flower scent. Fishing rods twirl in the air when youre bored, so you run while tapping at a wooden table. I couldnt run away from the Crazy Monk, to begin with, so I followed him against my will. Wanting to check my brothers footwork and avoid causing trouble to ordinary people, I soar into the air by kicking both walls of the narrow alley. As I step on the roof, I can see the whole area of the southern region at a glance. As I gesture my hands to my forehead to look afar, I find Ilyang. Looking from high above, it feels like I am unexpectedly close. Once again, I whistle as I run across the roofs. Maybe they think that it is stupid to follow me in a straight line, and after a while, my masked brothers spring up from various places across the roofs. I make small talk with my brothers for a moment. Youre doing well, guys. Hang in there. Maybe it is hard to bear, but hidden weapons surge from different places. Pointy, round, ugly, and needle-shaped weapons that are so small that they are hardly visible fly under the sunlight. Im such an oppressed man. This is why I am being chased in 80% of my dreams. The remaining 20% have beautiful women in them Dreaming is not a crime. Anyhow, a man who is always chased, a pitiful man, a man who eats and throws hidden weapons. This man is chased by his brothers. A man who is pursued in his dreams by a monk twirling a fishing rod Poor thing, this human me. As I am jumping between the gaps of the roofs, a dagger flies in. I strike away the dagger with the Black Hares Tooth I had pulled out as I turn and land. It is a sunny day with beautiful white clouds floating above. It is also a day when the laundry dries well, nice and smooth. Wow, the clouds I memorize and trace all of the positions of my brothers from where they are throwing their hidden weapons. I memorize everything, the location of the building and the laundry. I then cross the roof again and fall as if Id lost my footing. As soon as I snatch the laundry from the air, I kick the wall and enter the open window across. Twisting my body, so I dont get stuck between the windows is the basis of escape. In a small empty bedroom, I put the black robe and the Black Rabbit mask under the bed and changed into nicely dried and fuzzy clothes. Fuzzily, brightly, confidently. Judging from the rooms atmosphere, this is not a mans room. When I open the drawer, I hide the Black Hares Tooth in a sea of womens underwear. This doesnt mean Im a pervert. It can happen if youre preoccupied. Red Sister will take care of the retrieval later. She should use that skill of hers at times like this after learning how to steal. I walk out of the room like a thief and hear someones voice. Where are you off to, not studying at this hour? I see an old lady weaving with her back facing me. Praying that this house was home to a pathetic guy who only plays and eats, I answer. Ill be back early, Grandma. Grandma says in a worried voice. Drink moderately, alright? I reply in a calm voice before leaving the house. Yes, Grandma. After observing the street for a while, I slowly walk over to the guest inn on the opposite side. Sensing a fight somewhere, the errand boys eyes are darting rapidly from roof to roof. I take a seat after patting the errand boy on the shoulder. It is an outdoor seat where passersby can be seen. Do you have Dukuang liquor? Yes, of course. Please wait a moment. The errand boy admires the masked masters flying on the roof and exclaims. Wow Ill bring it to you soon. He is a rude fellow who is watching the fight while finishing preparing orders at the same time. After a while, the errand boy half-heartedly places down the Dukuang liquor and free, complimentary dried snacks and glances around again. I pour the Dukuang liquor into an empty glass and say. Did a fight break out? The errand boy nods. It looks like a huge fight. So many of the Twelve Generals are here. After drinking Dukuang liquor and chewing on the dry snacks, I tell the errand boy, who is busy spectating. Have a drink. Ah, yes. The errand boy naturally sits across from me and holds out an empty cup. I pour the liquor for the errand boy and say. The neighborhood is so boisterous. Yes, I suppose so. We both down a shot of liquor in one go and watch the streets with slanted postures as we chew on the dry snacks. The errand boy also complains about the Unorthodox Faction members wandering around while he chews on his snacks. Look at them. The disciples are overexerting themselves. Pathetic bastards, doing dumb shit day in and day out. Suddenly, when the masked people appear before them, the errand boy, who was chewing on snacks, naturally looks down. I stare at a man who is of the same kind as me. He is a master of survival and worldly matters. Meanwhile, the scumbag generals glare at us and walk past. I mutter as I look at my desperate brothers. People have to live with ease. Thats right. While chewing on dry snacks, the errand boy holds out the empty cup to me without an ounce of awkwardness. This errand boy has reached the highest proficiency (t) in the art of naturally bludging off his customers alcohol. I have no choice but to pour him a cup because I understand perfectly how he feels. The errand boy whispers after drinking. The whole neighborhood gets quiet when Dae Na-chal is fuming. Look at this. Its already quiet. Oh, please dont talk about it anywhere. Just keep it to yourself. General Yellow Horse has been assassinated. I also reply in a low voice. Wasnt it the Green Dog? Oh, right. It was Green Dog. How did you know? Yellow Horse just walked past us just now. Oh, really? Suddenly, the errand boy looks into my eyes, and his expression grows tense. He then swallows once and straightens his posture. This guy is really quick-witted. I look at the errand boy and put a finger to my mouth. Shh. The errand boy and I both give a knowing nod as we look at each other. Chapter 55 Chapter 55 C Where Will I End Up In? Coming out of the weaving grandmas house, General Yellow Horse walks straight to the guest inn. Hwang-oh, who arrives while I am pouring the errand boy a drink, suddenly grabs the boys hair and asks. Have you seen a guy coming out of there? The errand boy replies in surprise. Ah, yes. No one left there. I havent. Yellow Horse looks at me. And you? I stretch out my left hand and point behind Hwang-oh. Not this way, that way. When Hwang-oh turns his head slightly, I pull him in using the Absorption Method and grab him by the neck. Kergh! Yellow Horse is a general Id told Hong-shin to get rid of due to his viciousness anyway. How dare he grab an errand boy by the nape in front of me. I use the grasping power of my left hand to grab Hwang-ohs neck and strike the mask with my right fist. Punch! My punch smashes his mask and reveals his face. Looking into his eyes, I launch my fist to his face non-stop. Whenever whack! whack! sounds fill the air, a bone in his face breaks. I crush Hwang-ohs face while monitoring the streets and send him flying off into the middle of the road. Hwang-ohs body makes a thudding sound as it hits the ground and rolls several times. The errand boy who is watching is also trembling. Dont be surprised. This is how things are in Kangho. I wipe the blood off my fist using the Dukuang liquor. I pour the rest of the alcohol into my glass and extend it to the errand boy. Lets have a glass. Yes, sir. The errand boy, who always held out his glass with one hand, holds out his glass with two hands this time. I didnt bring it up because its just the way to live in society. Still, he is so shocked that I feel the need to calm him down. Green Dog died before that, and hes Yellow Horse. Oh, yes. I see. If we had competed properly in a fight, Hwang-oh wouldve fought back ferociously with his entire body. Still, he was not wary of me as I was already here drinking with the errand boy. The errand boy and I down the glass of Dukuang liquor. Perhaps still anxious, the errand boys complexion gradually pales. I tell the errand boy. Oh man, go and get some rest. Ill send my subordinate to pay for the drinks next time. Ill finish the rest by myself. Yes, I understand. Well, then. While the errand boy hurries back into the inn as if he is running away, two other scumbag generals rush over to look at Hwang-ohs body and say. He must be nearby. I look at Black Ox and Red Goat as I chew on the dry snacks. Among them, General Hyun-chuk looks at me and yells. The hell youre looking at, bastard? I shift my gaze and pull one chopstick out of the chopstick can. After injecting Wood Chicken energy into my thumb and index finger, I toss it at Black Oxs face. As soon as I throw it, pshook the chopstick pierces his forehead. Choosing to flee the scene, Red Goat opens his mouth as he initiates his movement skill. Brother! Over he-! Pwark! The tall and narrow Dukuang bottle with some alcohol left in it smashes into the back of his head. As General Ju-mi falls forward, I pull another chopstick and send it darting to the prone General Red Goats skull. Once again, the chopstick hit the bullseye. A situation has arisen in which the bodies of the Twelve Generals lay in the middle of the road. Hwang-oh died in vain when he let his guard down. Hyun-chuk and Ju-mi belonged to the bottom ranks of the Twelve Generals. Hence they lacked skills from the start. Hong-shin and Geum-hae were lucky enough to eat, ride a carriage, and visit the clinic. However, war is cruel. I stand up, chewing on dry snacks, and walk to the middle of the road. I can see General Baek-ja running up to us from the front. After making brief eye contact with Baek-ja, I go into the alley to the right and lean my back against the wall for a moment. While I wait with folded arms, White Rat returns and appears in the alley as he begins to suspect me. However, surprised to see me standing near the entrance, he shoots energy from his right palm. Seeing how hes reacting like that instinctively, he must be well-trained in palm techniques. Plorkk! After mirroring his attack with my left palm, I turn my wrist and clasp fingers with Baek-ja. I absorb Baek-jas internal Qi in a flash using the Great Absorption Method. I then dash through the alley. When Baek-jas strength, which I had forcibly wrung out, starts to slacken, I pull him back and punch him in the throat. Kngh! I strike him once again using my thumb and index finger. I then walk through the alley while carrying White Rats body. As I stop to listen to the sounds around me, I take off Baek-jas mask and change into his white robe. I stare at the deceased Baek-jas face, lay him down in the corner of the alley, and cover him with a straw mat used by local beggars. Dont meet a guy like me in your next life. Adjusting the prim white robe for a moment, I also touch where the mask sits on my face. If anyone notices that my bottoms are different from what White Rat wore, theyll have my acknowledgement. The important thing is to add confusion instead of dealing with it meticulously. This is because war is originally chaotic. Counting all the people Id killed, all thats left are the Four Generals and Dae Na-chal. I check the match list for a moment in my mind. The match list still stands at a disagreeable 5:1 match. Based on the skills of Black Rabbit, its possible to roughly infer the Four Generals abilities to some extent. Still, Dae Na-chals skills have yet to be revealed, so Ill have to wait out one last time. Lets kill one more. On the flip side, I try to calm myself down as my stomach boils. Instantly, all my useless thoughts are erased like a chicken made of wood as I use Wood Chickens mental enlightenment. When I leave the alley again, the Four Generals are talking while looking at our dead brothers. As I approach, I hear White Roosters voice. We cant catch him. He is faster than us anyway. He must be planning to lure us in one by one and then kill us. What should we do? At this rate, were at a disadvantage. Blue Dragon nods. The Four Generals should stick together. He cant do anything if the four of us stick together. Without saying a word, I stand next to General Jeok-sa and look at the dead brothers. I mutter to myself. I cant believe they died so futilely. Jeok-sa gives another suggestion. Lets return to our master. I glance sideways at Red Snake. This guy was the first one to attack me earlier. Even at this moment, hes still thinking about Dae Na-chal. Is he loyal or a mere slave to the core? You never know. Cheong-jin objects. If we return right now, the Master will not be pleased. I stay silent as the guys from the animal kingdom voice their opinions. General White Tiger and White Rooster remain silent until the end. Then they look at Baek-in as if asking him to make a decision. Please decide, Brother. The eldest of the Twelve Generals, Baek-in says. Lets continue with the pursuit. Like Blue Dragon said, the four of us should stick together. White Rat, notify our master of our brothers deaths. Tell him were chasing him down. I reply shortly to his order. Yes. Blue Dragon asks. So, do you mean the master should stay back? Baek-in lowers his voice and says. Hes targeting our master anyway. He wouldnt have done this if he wanted to eliminate us from the start. I thought he was just running his mouth, but those with a few screws loose often mean what they say. He was serious when he asked us to bear with him? I think so. Then why did he kill our brothers? Baek-in sees past my true nature. Because hes crazy. I also nod at White Tigers words. The other brothers seem to agree as well. At least hes wise as the eldest. As these useless men engage in a serious discussion on how theyll survive in front of their dead brothers, Baek-in continues. If the four of us are together, he wont come attacking us hastily. However, seeing how he proposed for a 1:1 duel, hell likely appear when the master is alone. Do you get what I mean? Master doesnt like to use his footwork, so hell be at the Black Rabbit Union. Hearing White Tigers words, I think. Does he have back problems? Considering that his arm is cut off, he mustve incurred more than one or two injuries if hes lived this long. The brothers peek at Baek-in. Hes saying this because he can take over everything once Dae Na-chal dies. Surprisingly, Baek-in tries to appease me. We can promote White Rat to the Four Generals. We can start over on our own. Hes right. How long are we going to be his slaves? I dont want to see him mistreat young people any longer. Pretending to agree, I nod several times. I could just nod in agreement, yet I open my mouth unknowingly. So what if I just kill the master? That will be the end of it, right? Baek-in, Cheong-jin, Jeok-sa and Baek-yu turn their heads simultaneously and look at me. I suddenly sigh. I muddled the Lee Zaha and General White Rat identities. The saying that masks exacerbate insanity is not a lie. Take me, for example. Jeok-sa is right next to me. I trigger the Wood Chicken Finger Technique in my left hand to charge at Jeok-sa, and at the same time, I shoot a Fiery Fowl Palm Force (a) to the front. In an instant, a palm force that grows like the Buddhas palm spreads from my red-coloured palm. Baek-in, Cheong-jin and Baek-yu all counter with double-handed attacks at once. Boooooooooooooom! The impact differs depending on the depth of internal Qi. First, Baek-yu sprawls out in a straight line and rolls on the ground. Baek-in and Cheong-jin only retreat, reeling back six or seven steps. With his pressure points sealed, Jeok-sa is frozen in place. I take off Red Snakes mask and cover his face with the White Rats mask that I had on. I tell the Four Generals that I am currently facing. I have Black Rabbit, Green Dog, White Rat, and Red Snakes masks. Do you think youll be any different? The rest of the Four Generals can not launch an attack as I hold Jeok-sa hostage. Ive always liked 1:1 duels, so you better not provoke me any further. You all fight really lamentably for an Unorthodox faction. Isnt it all settled if the battle ends with me or Dae Na-chal dead? Things were supposed to be this simple. Youll end up dead if you make things complicated. White Tiger, what will you do? Baek-in replies right away. We wont go near the Black Rabbit Union today, so spare Red Snake. Stroking Jeok-sas head, I reply. I cant let Red Snake go. Why? Hes the one who kidnaps poor women and presents them to Dae Na-chal. Of course, those in the bottom ranks have done the same. Nonetheless, hes the instigator. The moment Baek-in goes speechless, I grab the back of the man who is immobilized from his sealed blood points and throw him into the wall. Flying face first, Jeok-sa crashes with a thud and collapses by the wall. Of course, thats not the only reason why I killed him. Earlier, he launched a preemptive attack on me, and it was written that he is the most devoted to Dae Na-chal in the strategy guide. The list of his crimes continues. Just look at the fact that he presented a blue-eyed beauty very recently. I look at the three men standing stiffly and say. The Four Generals are now just Three Generals. I point my finger at White Tiger, Blue Dragon, and White Rooster. If you dont wish to live on, we can have a 4:1 match. If you die, you die, and if youre lucky enough to live, just live on as Dae Na-chals slave. Im off. I turn around and head for Black Rabbit Union while wearing the mask of Red Snake. The three of them could have made a surprise attack from behind, but I kept walking. Though I would like to turn around and get the weapons on Jeok-sas body, I decide against it since itll make me lose swagger. In a moment like this, a man cannot turn his back. Feeling a blaring stare on the back of my head, I walk straight to the Black Rabbit Union. In fact, if they pushed me even after all this explanation, these guys would genuinely be hopeless. The gate is still wide open when I arrive in front of the Black Rabbit Union. I mutter as much as I can and head for Dae Na-chal. Master, your disciple has returned. Red Snake is here. White Rat is here. After sending Black Ox and Red Goat off, Zaha came back alive. Yellow Horse is in a burning hell (تz), and Red Snake is in a veriest hell (ǵتz), and where will I end up in Master? Where is our shitty master? When I enter the inner courtyard, our positions change. Dae Na-chal is sitting on the platform, and all of the subordinates are kneeling at my side. It seems that he was playing master and slave again in that short time. I stare at Dae Na-chal through the mask of Red Snake and call out to him sorrowfully. Master Chapter 56 Chapter 56 C Live Without A Mask Dae Na-chal sits with the aura of someone sitting up high instead of being just a leader of a small Unorthodox Faction. He then looks at me and extends his hand. Welcome back. As I think about the recently-deceased Jeok Sa, I greet Dae Na-chal. Master, how is your back these days? Dae Na-chal nods. Not bad. Do you feel any discomfort on your leg? It is uncomfortable, but you must live with it as you age. Im okay during fights, so theres nothing to worry about. I see. How about your sleep? Living in Kangho is draining, so getting enough sleep is important. Dae Na-chal nods in agreement. My sleep gets shorter as I grow old. You dont have to worry too much. Ill be asleep long enough when I die. Who else did you kill along the way? Dae Na-chal is treating me as if I am Red Snake. I have beaten some of the guys running helplessly to their deaths. Dae Na-chal then sighs shortly and says. Now that my beloved disciples are dead, I must avenge them. Of course, you should. What were Red Snakes last moments? I threw him against the wall, and his head cracked open. Hes probably lining up somewhere at hells entrance. How unfortunate. He was my favorite disciple. I ask Dae Na-chal about something I have been curious about. Theres something Ive always wondered about. Please enlighten me. Ask away. Why are we wearing these masks? It looks like Red Snake was also curious about this until the moment he died. Dae Na-chal smiles widely as he shows his teeth. Oh, how fascinating. Not once has anyone specifically asked me that in detail, even though I had many disciples. Its simple. Hiding behind a mask makes doing bad things more natural. The fine line separating your true self from the mask when you commit evil becomes vague. From his sitting position, Dae Na-chal thrusts his face forward. Only those who are chosen by me can wear a mask. If we throw in a ranking system, they will resort to anything just to compete against each other. This is the nature of the benighted. Baring his large teeth, Dae Na-chal then laughs. Also, this is an old tradition. My masters master also used masks. Only with a mask on can I continue to live. But he got kicked out because he couldnt get used to the art of changing masks instantly. It was my master who was kicked out. Jeez. The anger of the weak spreads like an infectious disease bothering an unspecified number of people and was also the root cause for creating such a man. Dae Na-chal smiles and says. Now that I have told you the secret of the mask, show me your face. One of us is going to die anyway. This much is fine, isnt it? Ah my face. I give him a retort while smoothing Jeok-sas mask. Im going to do bad things, so I cant do that now. My laughter mixes with Dae Na-chals laughter. The rhinoceros beetle laughs, the dead Red Snake laughs from somewhere, and I laugh too. We laugh while thinking about each others demise. Dae Na-chal stands up. A man like you shouldve been my disciple. Even if I was, I wouldve escaped and become an errand boy. Why take such a crude job? The job doesnt matter. Im sure I will keep thinking of my foolish master while mopping. Eventually, I would have somehow mastered the martial arts and come back to kill you. And like today, I wouldve asked you why you made me wear a mask. Dae Na-chal nods. Good. Thats how a man should live. While Dae Na-chal descends the stairs, his sleeves flutter in the wind. As I am looking closely at his sleeves, Dae Na-chal approaches me. He can close the distance because he is confident. This is also a psychological game. The moment I stepped back to widen the distance, Dae Na-chal would have launched an attack from his forward position. Dae Na-chal is shorter than me. And he is ugly. I know guys who look as hideous as Dae Na-chal. But I also know that the face is not everything to a persons charm. Its just like how I wasnt popular with normal, attractive women, even though Im on the handsome side. All of a sudden, anger Dae Na-chal grins. What would you like to compete with, disciple? Palms, fists, blade, sword, internal Qi. You name it. As a senior who has trained in martial arts longer, I will let you choose. What are you confident in? Of course, its internal Qi for the elderly. This will be a fight against you, so choose another one. Dae Na-chal smiles as if he is playing another one of his mind games. I nod my head. Then lets go with internal Qi for now. My heart flutters at the thought of a battle using internal Qi. Dae Na-chal lets out a hearty laugh and slowly holds out his left hand. If you wont regret this, then hold out your hand. A battle of internal Qi is typically done by high-ranking nutjobs. No soldier or man in any nation will resort to this kind of fight. Only crazy monkeys will risk their lives, blindly believing in their internal Qi despite their incompetence. While observing Dae Na-chals expression, I slowly move my right hand. Since we are close together, it wouldnt be strange if one of us broke the agreement and initiated a surprise attack. But Dae Na-chal and I put our palms together without making a sneak attack. Dae Na-chals palm is as hard as a rhinoceros beetles carapace. Both of us say nothing. As if we have determined the rules of this internal Qi battle on the spot, the amount of Qi injected into our palms gradually increases. If two adult men stand with hands held together, they will look like morons to ordinary people who do not know martial arts. But if you look closely, they are worse than just being mere idiots. Because theyre risking their lives. Concurrently, I am also wary of Dae Na-chals right arm. He could have attached a sharp awl on his severed forearm and attempted to stab me right away. Our two hands that are in contact begin to tremble. Dae Na-chals smiling face begins to shake like the waters surface (ˮ). Red Snakes mask, which I am wearing, is also shaking. His eyes shift to my left hand as I look at his empty sleeves. The intensity of the force in our palms spikes slightly. I am preparing for a long battle with the power of the Wood Chicken, and then I switch to the Fire Chickens Energy. As my palm slowly becomes stained with red, Dae Na-chal turns his eyes toward our contending hands. All the tendons on his left hand are becoming swollen as if it is going to explode. Dae Na-chal naturally moves his right arm. If you swing one arm like this during a battle, it means you still have the strength to spare. Of course, I have plenty of strength left. Dodging my head to the right, I grab Dae Na-chals forearm. A silver blade stretches closely beside my neck, leaving a narrow gap. Looks like the blade is attached to the severed forearm. I hold onto Dae Na-chals hand and forearm and inject my internal Qi. Dae Na-chal sneers, but sneering doesnt make one win every fight. Anyhow, the person with more Qi wins an internal Qi battle. When I inject the Fire Chickens force into my left hand that is holding his forearm, his sleeves burn as if they are slowly roasting on a fire. Only then did I check the shape of his forearm. Something like an iron cover is attached to the severed stump of his hand, and a blade is attached above it. A blitz blade specially crafted for Dae Na-chal to use for ambushes. As I glance at Dae Na-chal, I unfold the Fire Chicken palm force on my left and the Great Absorption technique on my right. Just a basic multi-tasking technique (Ĺ) that dimwits cant even start to hone. Dae Na-chals internal Qi flows through my left side, and the Fire Chicken is burning Dae Na-chals arm on my right. My regret towards the incomplete Ice Technique flashes briefly. Deciding to use Dae Na-chal to prolong my training, I unfurl the Great Absorption Method in my right hand and the Fire Chicken palm force on my left. His decapitated forearm is defenseless, and the right hem of Dae Na-chals outerwear gradually burns away. This is right. Dae Na-chals internal Qi level isnt inferior to mine. Still, he is visibly overwhelmed when I multi-tasked using the uncommon Great Absorption Method. Furthermore, he is clearly at a disadvantage with his disability. He would have often won with that blade in a battle of internal Qi. Meanwhile, Dae Na-chal is holding out with his Qi that has been amassed for decades. At this time, a clicking sound resonates from inside Dae Na-chals mouth. Its either poison or a poisoned needle. Often, there are people who hide poison pills around their gums. As soon as Dae Na-chal breathes in and out I tug both his hands and smash my head into Dae Na-chals mouth. Crash! Red Snakes mask cracks. Crash! This time, White Rats mask broke. Crash! This time, my forehead crushes Dae Na-chals nose. Only then do I check Dae Na-chals blood-ridden face that Ive bludgeoned using my face. His front teeth are all broken, and his nose is shattered. Ive never killed a person with a head butt, so I unfurl the Great Absorption Method on both of my hands. Losing his composure as his blood pressure is beginning to destabilize, Dae Na-chals amassed Qi begins to flow out like a collapsed dam. I adhere to my own personal rule when using this Great Absorption Technique that I obtained through coincidence and necessity. Never use this to take a life. After throwing exactly half the energy Dae Na-chal has as feed to the Heavenly Pearl, I let go of my hands. As soon as I let go, Dae Na-chal collapses on the floor. He is still breathing. Dae Na-chals eyes are running across my face as if his curiosity has finally been solved. Looking down at Dae Na-chal, I speak in a serious voice. Pleased to meet you. I am Lee Zaha of the Low-Down Sect. Dae Na-chal murmurs as if he has never heard my name before. Lee Zaha If we have fought like this from the beginning, you couldve saved a few more of your ignorant disciples. Spitting out a lot of blood from his mouth, Dae Na-chal then asks. And who is your Master? Perhaps my brief question came off too strong for him to understand. I squat down and make eye contact with Dae Na-chal. I dont have any. Youre lying. Now, Ill take over everything youve managed, including the Twelve Generals. You didnt deserve to be the leader of those fools. Though everything will come under the Low-Down Sect, even if you say no, say something to your disciples as the sect leader. You killed them all. Where else would they be? Amongst the crowd of the Black Rabbit Union subordinates, Red Monkey and Gold Boar appear with a complicated look. Around the same time, the surviving White Tiger, Blue Dragon, and White Rooster appear on the wall. They have no intention of interrupting the duel. Still, they seem to be listening in from over the wall because they are curious about the outcome. Dae Na-chal exclaims, looking around his still-alive disciples, and speaks frankly. You have spared quite a number of them, formidable indeed. I confirm that Dae Na-chals eyes are brightening again like before. This is the phenomenon of Terminal Lucidity (عⷵ). Dae Na-chal straightens his back in his position and tells his remaining disciples. You have worked hard in taking care of your incompetent master. From now on, devote yourselves to serving the leader of the Low-Down Sect. From now on, you may live without your masks. More than me Dae Na-chal does not finish his sentence. He dies with his eyes open. I stare at the formerly-alive Dae Na-chal for a long time. Peace finally appears on his wicked face. Still, thinking that at least hed said words of kindness to his disciples at his last moment, I reach out and close Dae Na-chals eyes that are looking at the world. Dae Na-chals eyes close. Chapter 57 Chapter 57 C Feels Like I Have Become Small Na-chal An old Kangho veteran called Dae Na-chal has died. He died at the hands of an errand boy of Ilyang, leader of the Low-Down Sect, Emancipator of the Black Hurricane Castle, the Black Rabbit Union Leader, a regular of the Chunyang Inn, and a patient of Moyong Baek. This can be considered a considerable improvement. I think I am doing a good job. It isnt easy to refrain from killing his disciples. I wouldve already dragged those who had lost their morale by the hair and beaten them to death in my past life. If I do the same thing again in this life, I will probably acquire the nickname Crazy Demon in no time. I cant do that. I intend to delay that as much as possible. This is because the Crazy Monk, who is said to be the former Crazy Demon, has yet to arrive in the central district. Suppose rumors start circulating that I am the Crazy Demon. In that case, there is a high possibility that the Crazy Monk would come looking for me. I dont want to get dragged to Zhejiang to see fishes before I can find my footing around Ilyang. Though Im strong enough to kill Dae Na-chal, the Crazy Monk wouldnt even notice the difference in me. Because I know better than anyone the power of that man. I suddenly look at White Tiger, Blue Dragon, and White Rooster, who still remain without running away. The three seem to be waiting with the thought of recovering Dae Na-chals body and holding a funeral. But they cant move a muscle as I am still looking at Dae Na-chal. I speak to the three. You guys recover the body. Only then did the three of them jump down from the wall and walk up to where I was standing. Anyway, having known the extent of my movement skills, the three have no intention of running away. Take off your masks as per your masters will. Giving up, Baek-jin nods and takes off his mask. Cheong-jin and Baek-yu also comply. Remembering the faces of the three men, I tell Manager Byuk. Manager Byuk, if any of the generals go against their masters will, put up their wanted posters everywhere. Can you draw them? Manager Byuk nods while looking at the three unmasked generals. That wont be difficult. I also make orders to clear the in-house disorganization. Black Rabbit Union, organize the interior of the black grave and take care of the corpses lying on the streets. As for the Twelve Generals, lets have a chat. Once were done talking, you can recover the body. Manager Byuk, Hong-shin, Geum-hae, you may join as well. I take the seat of honor as I look at the disciples also taking their seats to my left and right and say. From now on, Im the Big Brother. . If there is anything you want to learn from me, Ill be your master, but as you can see, I am visibly younger, so being the Big Brother is just right. Any objections? Perhaps because Dae Na-chal just passed, the atmosphere is somber. White Tiger, who appears to be around 26-27 years of age, replies alone. Since it was the masters will, I shall comply. Hong-shin and Geum-hae, who almost fell into a state of Qi Deviation while eating and talking with me, understand my nature more. In other words, the setup I am talking about now will work well for Hong-shin and Geum-hae, and it will sound like a madmans ramblings to the other Generals. But thats okay. This is how I do things; it takes time for people to understand each other. The only thing that matters is that Dae Na-chal is dead, and these guys can now take off their masks. Now, I will tell my fellow disciples what you need to do. If you make me repeat it twice, Ill challenge you to a duel, so open your ears and listen carefully. Red Monkey replies bravely on her own. Yes, Big Brother. People who have shared a bowl of pork ribs indeed share a deep bond. Geum-hae fears me; perhaps he was always afraid of Baek-in, so he remains silent. Brother Baek-in, do you respect Dae Na-chal? It was more love and hate than respect. Which aspect of it is love, not hate? White Tiger then says. Other Unorthodox Factions do not dare to cross over to the southern sea. Even though there were more powerful factions around us, our master had a reputation as a valiant leader. Thats what the masks mean, too. Dont touch me because I have raised my disciples and may send them as assassins. Hence, despite all our shortcomings, no Unorthodox Factions are permitted to cross over the south. In short, although his private life was a mess, he did a good job as the leader of an Unorthodox Faction. Is that what you mean? Baek-in nods. I converse with the disciples to identify their personalities. White Tiger is calm at all times, and Blue Dragon seems to be a soldier () of a few words. At least White Rooster seems to be the quick-witted type, but he is much lacking compared to White Tiger and Blue Dragon in terms of skills. Due to the tension of a long-standing hierarchy, the atmosphere right now is too awkward. Even Hong-shin, whos typically cheeky and playful, prefers to remain silent. Feeling this awkward atmosphere, I blab on. Disciples, now that Master Dae Na-chal is gone, lets get comfortable with each other. Now that the master is dead and they are suddenly being asked to get comfortable, naturally, the generals faces turn grim. But Im not a tactful person, so I say it again with a straight face. I said lets get com.for.ta.ble. Yes. I understand. I dont know how big each of your factions is, nor how many subordinates you have. After Dae Na-chals funeral, clear up all your dirty work. An Unorthodox Faction cannot become an Orthodox Faction overnight. But lets wash our hands from the dirty name of the Unorthodox Faction. Geum-hae, who has been quiet all this while, replies. Is there such a way? All you have to do is join the Low-Down Sect. Its not an Orthodox nor an Unorthodox Faction. It is not in the past and will always stay that way. Its just the Low-Down Sect. A sect that houses workers. A secretive, lousy, complicated, and chaotic organization. The forces under the Four Generals will be transferred to my disposal. Since its a faction for working people, what should you do first? No one responds right away. There are so many things to do, so they dont know where to start. Actually, I dont know either. I have no choice but to leave it to them. You can report your visits often. You can also come to me when a problem arises. Im going to let you guys take over, for now, so do as you see fit. However, wrap up all your Unorthodox Faction doings. I didnt even bring any of my direct subordinates when I infiltrated the Black Rabbit Union. For example, Cha Sung-tae is my direct subordinate. I think about it for a while, but I decide to swallow my words since there is nothing left to discuss. Anyway, if I dont like something, Ill bring all the troops of the Low-Down Sect and destroy you and then leave your businesses to the local errand boys. Now that I have given you a chance to live, I hope you dont make me your enemy again. At least the calm Baek-in replies alone. Well sort it out. I dont like the answer, so I nod half-heartedly and threaten them. Well, its pointless to order grown adults around. Since youve taken off your mask, change on your own. Im not a good person. Neither am I a man of great patience. I had to repeat it dozens of times to myself to spare someone. Just like when I kept you three alive, White Tiger, Blue Dragon, White Rooster. Cheong-jin replies. We can just throw away the things we did along with the mask. Thats right. Is it that hard? This time, Baek-yu replies. Not that there werent any. Tell me, which part is difficult? Master has enemies and allies. The Elder Hornless Dragon (Ͼ) is a particularly close friend of his. Hed received both money and women often from master. So Elder Hornless Dragon might be the most furious. Who else? Theres the Cloud Rain League (). They were on the worst terms with the master. Overall, their forces were similar to ours, and our masters right arm was cut off by their leader. The league leader will be happy to hear that the master has fallen. In addition, many others hold a grudge against our old master, and we cant predict how theyll react. I am relieved for a moment. Phew, thats a relief. Hong-shin responds instantly. Big Brother, whats a relief? I reply in an indifferent voice. I have more people to kill. Also, could the Cloud Rain of Cloud Rain League refer to the term copulation (֮) that I know of? Yes. I tilt my head slightly. Joy of Cloud and Rain refers to the joyous copulation between a man and woman. I have never heard the name of such a blatant and perverted faction, not even in my past life. Suddenly remembering something, I ask the generals. Whats the leaders name? Its Seomun Su-kyung (TˮR). I recall his nickname first. Is Mister Su (ˮ) perhaps his nickname? Yes, do you know him? Ive only heard of his name. So his faction is the Cloud Rain League. There was an incident where members of the Murim Alliance were heavily criticized for the killing of a dozen people downtown, including Mister Su. Later, it was found out that the Murim Alliance had laid no such order. Instead, it was the doings of one of the members who staged a revenge play alone due to a personal vendetta. I call out to Manager Byuk, who is seated quietly beside me while making illustrations of the generals. Manager Byuk, look for Elder Hornless Dragon first. Understood. And write up a personal letter in the name of the Black Rabbit Union to the Cloud Rain League. What should I write in the letter? I cant think of anything, so I leave the contents of that letter to Manager Byuk. Well, tell them to stop messing around and live nobly. Manager Byuk, youre more proficient than me, so figure it out yourself. Manager Byuk nods while holding his brush. So, should I include a declaration of war under the guise of a personal letter? Bingo. Manager Byuk smiles bashfully and resumes drawing the generals portraits seriously. Baek-yu opens his mouth again. The Cloud Rain League isnt a small faction. Do you have to go out of our way to provoke Brother Chicken. Yes? Shut up. Their faction name is so offensive, Im not going to just let it slide. White Rooster shuts his mouth grimly. I look around at their faces and say. Plus, if theyd severed our masters arm, isnt it only natural to get revenge? White Tiger narrows his brows slightly and nods as he looks at me. Youre right. This guy was the oldest disciple of Dae Na-chal, so he seems to hold some past grudge towards the leader of the Cloud Rain League. Considering the concerns of the generals, Manager Byuk answers cleverly. Can I send the letter after the situation calms down to some extent? For now, Ill focus on finding the Elder Hornless Dragon. And, Brother Baek-in, Cheong-jin, Baek-yu, make sure the funeral goes well. The three of you correct our masters unethical actions. If your anger or hatred towards me grows in the process, you can leave me and join the Elder Hornless Dragon or the Cloud Rain League. I convey my innermost thoughts to my fellow disciples, including Hong-shin and Geum-hae. By then, you dont have to treat me as your brother. The three of you can leave first. The three of them stand up and glance at the mask on the table. Looking at the mask as well, I say. Leave it behind. Lets use it when we do something bad. Big Brother, Ill be leaving first. Were leaving too. When the trio finally leave the room, Geum-hae speaks to me. Can we trust the Four Generals? It doesnt matter if we can trust them or not. All I believe in is martial arts. If you become stronger daily, all the plotting, conspiracy, betrayal, and rebellion becomes moot. For the Low-Down Sect to improve, Id rather have a traitor gather a bunch of disgruntled followers against me. Lets go with the flow. Cheerfully. Hong-shin nods. Lets do this cheerfully. Only then am I reminded of what I need to ask of Hong-shin. Was it Il-pyeong Inn? Anyway, Red Sister, go there and pay for my tab. Manager Byuk will take care of the money. And there is a house in front of it where a weaver grandma lives. Ask her politely and find the Black Hares Tooth and my mask in the womans room. I placed it under the drawer and the bed. Dont forget to give them some pocket money. Understood. I look at Geum-hae. Gold Brother, you dont have to offer money as you did to Dae Na-chal anymore. All right. Geum-hae swallows once and says something he didnt mean. Do I pass it to Big Brother from now on? No, you dont have to. Then? Use all the money youve given to Dae Na-chal and make yourself stronger. If you were strong, your family wouldnt have to hand over their hard-earned money in the first place. Brother Baek-in is much stronger than you. Do some training. Geum-hae answers. Thank you. Dont mention it. And your internal Qi I regret it as soon as I say it. Uhm, Im sorry about that. Yes. Im sorry, but I cant return it back to you. Strangely, the martial arts I learned can take but cant give. I just cant. At least you didnt die like Dae Na-chal. Accept it cheerfully. As soon as I throw those words, it feels like I am becoming a Small Na-chal (С_ɲ)[^n1]. [^n1]: Dae means big, So means small Chapter 58 Chapter 58 C Mentality of Doing Nothing It is the day after Dae Na-chal passed away. I begin my daily life as the Black Rabbit Union Leader with the utmost diligence. The merit of being a leader is that on days when you dont want to do anything, you dont have to do anything. I will not bully my men, threaten them, or give out any orders today. I wash up as soon as I wake up, and I do absolutely nothing after having breakfast. As I am determined not to do anything today, I go to the inner courtyard while wearing the union leaders black robe. The subordinates who have finished their meals in the morning are training under So Gun-pyeongs eagle eye. I ignore the greetings from both So Gun-pyeong and my other subordinates. With my hands behind my back, I just watch the subordinates train without saying a word. It is a sunny day. Whenever the wind blows, petals of a flower that I dont recognize flutter in the air. For a moment, I look up at some trees planted in the inner courtyards outer areas. It is a beautiful tree with flowers blooming in a mix of white and pink. I dont know the name of the tree. I know a lot of technical names of martial arts and tactics, but I always forget the names of flowers and trees. I cant memorize them at all. Worst comes to worst, Ill forget the name of a flower even when I see it again mere days later. The same applies to the flower trees in the inner courtyard of the Black Rabbit Union. Im just looking because they are pretty. As my subordinates keep looking at me as I stand under the flower tree, So Gun-pyeong chides them. Focus. Yes. I also look up at the flower tree with concentration on my face. Many flower petals have dropped on the courtyard floor. I stroll around, avoiding the petals. My lackeys resume their training, and I move from place to place as I am greeted by scattered petals whenever the wind blows. Who planted such a pretty flower in the inner courtyard? I dont know who, but they were geniuses. When my subordinates start to sweat, I sit cross-legged and close my eyes at a spot where the petals are fluttering the most. I then start my Qi breathing technique. Not long after, I start becoming stronger. My subordinates, too, are getting stronger as they continue training in physical martial arts. I pull energy from the Heavenly Pearl, open a new path with enlightenment, circulate the energy throughout my body, and slowly stack it in my dantian. Some petals flutter and fall on my head. Over time, I hear So Gun-pyeong holler out several times, and the screams from the subordinates deepen. Life is pain. How much time has passed? The moment I become bored with circulating my Qi, I immediately stop and open my eyes. It is just in time as my subordinates are also resting on the floor while taking a break. Time seems to have passed. I get up and pull out Black Hares Tooth. As I draw my saber out of the blue, the eyes of my men widen. As I hold Black Hares Tooth in my hand, I move the sword here and there in the rain of flower petals. The petals fall without any rules, so sometimes the petals are caught by my blade. A vain and meaningless movement. But its okay. Everything starts without meaning. In front of my men, I swing the saber and dance with the petals. I continue to wield the saber even when So Gun-pyeong resumes the training session a while later. I poke between and through the petals. Chasing after the petals, I pick them up on the back of my saber. Then, as I slash through the petals that fall, I feel exceptionally lonely as I stand alone with Black Hares Tooth. The petals laugh at me as they wither away. Life is a series of failures. So I slash, graze, and hit the petals. They land on my blade, and I repeatedly move my saber through the air. The wind blows once, causing a small whirlwind to blow from the bottom of the flurry of petals as they fly away. I pull the scattering petals back to my blade. The method is simple. I lightly use the absorption method while holding Black Hares Tooth in my hand. The blade, which now has a slightly stronger suction power than the wind, advances as the leader of the petals. After a while, I hear So Gun-pyeongs voice addressing my subordinates who have become too distracted. Pause. Lets take a break. Now, So Gun-pyeong also sits down with the other subordinates to watch me. I mix the absorption method with the blade technique, then remove the blade technique and the absorption technique. I just continue to move joyfully and cheerfully with the fluttering petals. When I think I have gotten used to the petals weight, movement, and the wind to some extent, I begin to cut down the falling petals with the Wood Chicken energy infused into my blade. Cut the pink petals in half. Cut the white petals in half. Using the flying flower petals as I control them with the Sword Wind, I carve letters into the air. һ, , . (One, Two, Three). It is easy up to here, but I give up on trying to make Four (). Again, I successfully draw the characters for human () and heart () but give up trying to draw Sky () because it is difficult. My sword technique has not reached the sky yet. I swing the saber as far as I can. Then I repeat the stabbing movements. I stab the petals with the tip of Black Hares Tooth, but the petal manages to escape every time. Its hard to catch a petal. The petals are so light that it is hard to triumph over them. And this kind of stabbing movement does not mesh well with a saber (). I fail dozens of stabs and then place Black Hares Tooth back into the sheath. So Gun-pyeong, who is watching, calls out to me. Here you go, Leader. When I turn around, So Gun-pyeong throws a sword at me. As soon as I catch the sword that So Gun-pyeong threw at me, I unsheathe it. It is an ordinary long sword that feels much lighter than the heavy Black Hares Tooth. As I wield the sword, I focus and begin to stab the petals. I start with the Wood Chicken, transitioning to the Fire Chicken before switching to the conceptualization of the Fighting Chicken. When I fail three times in a row, I move lightly without injecting any energy. Move like a flower petal. Swirl like the wind. Sway as if inviting the petals to play. I stab the center of the falling petals that tilt their heads at me, and all my movements and breathing stop. A flower petal is stuck at the tip of the sword. As I lower my sword and look at my men, they are all smiling wordlessly. I smile too. If a failing person succeeds, they smile. I look at the flower tree that has worked hard to scatter petals for me. What flower tree is this? Perhaps because it is such a ridiculous question, the same answer can be heard from various directions. Its a Plum Blossom Tree. Oh, really? I chose a simple name so that I wont forget the moment I spent stabbing plum trees and flower petals. Then, lets call it the Plum Blossom Sword Technique (÷). So Gun-pyeong asks with curiosity. Did you complete a new sword technique on the spot? I look at So Gun-pyeong and my other subordinates and say. No, its just the beginning. I thought it suits the flower petals well, but Im just getting a feel for it. Theres no completion to martial arts. Youll improve little by little if you swing your sword repeatedly every day. Try practicing when the petals fall. Instead of a saber, its better to use a sword. So Gun-pyeong, who uses the Night Blade, asks me. Is it hard to use a saber? As long as you dont use it to stab, its doable. But the focus of the process I had in the overall flow involved stabs. Still, it doesnt matter whether you swing a sword or a saber. What matters most is to swing it every day. Feeling hungry, I ask them. Im hungry. Is it time to eat? Yes, its already lunch. Lets go eat. So Gun-pyeong looks around and says. Im sure the meal is ready inside. Please head in first. I try to enter the hall, but my steps halt in surprise. Sitting at the podium, Hong-shin seems to have been watching the whole time. Red Sister. Yes, Big Brother. How dare you steal a glance at my exclusive martial arts. You thieving Bitch, but I cant bring myself to say that. Hong-shin replies. Plum Blossom Sword Technique? Doesnt it sound too weak for a sword technique? Should I call it Na-chal Sword Technique? I guess Plum Blossom will go a long way. Lets just eat. Hong-shin looks over at the falling petals before replying. Ill enjoy the view a little longer. Please go ahead. As I watch Red Monkey, who looks like she would run off at any minute, I enter the hall. The meal is already ready. However, Geum-hae, who is staying for a day like a house guest alongside Hong-shin, is waiting for me in front of the feast. You didnt even spare time away from food to witness my exclusive martial arts, you The word damned pig is about to fly out of my mouth, but it goes back in. Isnt it natural for a Pig Brother to just watch over the food? The word pig doesnt escape my mouth. Geum-hae nods. Have a meal, Big Brother. We have a whole new set of side dishes today. The man who visits the Black Rabbit Union just for the food; thats Gold Boar. Anyway, I decided not to bother my subordinates and to leave the disciples alone. I sit down properly at the table and start eating. Geum-hae asks me while we are eating. Is Red Sister not eating? I reply with a puzzled look. You were the older sibling? He nods naturally. Yes. Then why did you let her slap you so many times? Ive been thinking about that too, about whether all of this is normal or not. No, this wouldnt happen in a renowned sect. A junior sister slapping her senior brother? She would be excommunicated. But then again, were not a renowned clan, are we? Were just an Unorthodox Faction. A junior sister to her senior brother in an Unorthodox Faction? How dare she? Ill have to give her a good mouthful later. Its not that I never thought of it, but my internal Qi was stolen by Big Brother. Red Sister has a rather deep internal Qi. This wont be easy. I doze off as I eat. I wouldnt have dozed off if I had concentrated on eating, but listening to Geum-hae made me sleepy. I vaguely hear Gold Boars voice. Big Brother?? Hm, hmm? You must be exhausted. Ah, sorry. Lets eat. While eating, I think of Geum-haes words and ask him. So, in summary, you like Hong-shin? Geum-hae replies with a puzzled look. Were you dreaming? You dont? Of course not. Who would want a fat guy like me? Are you serious? Do you know how a fat person feels, Big Brother? Ill know if Im fat. Then dont talk over me. After a while, I glance at Geum-hae. Wow, you sure know how to stuff your face. Geum-hae moves his chopsticks even faster, spitting rice grains from his mouth as he replies to me. Since Big Brother stole my internal Qi, I should eat to make up for it. Thats the only option. The Fattys invincible logic is impeccable. That just means youre gonna eat regardless. Invincible logic? We havent even started. I was born in a family called Gold Mountain Guild. I have bottomless wealth, and Im the youngest son. I possess both money and martial arts. Imagine if I lose weight. No woman or man across the land would be able to handle it. If I have everything, jealousy and envy will ensue. So I should keep it moderate. Youre the youngest son of a noble family? Yes. You seem like the youngest. No wonder you were slapped. It hasnt even been half a day since I decided to do nothing, yet here I am, roasting my brother. After I finish my meal, I go back to the podium in the inner courtyard. Geum-hae puts down his chopsticks and follows me as if he is suffering from withdrawal symptoms after deciding to lose weight. I fold my arms as I observe the situation in the inner courtyard for a moment. Geum-hae, who follows behind me, watches with a blank expression. Whats up with your subordinates? All my lackeys returning from lunch are waving swords as they try to slash flower petals during their break. Even So Gun-pyeong and Hong-shin are in the crowd So Gun-pyeong has a serious look on his face at the place where the petals are falling the most. Hong-shin is waving a sword with a flower on her head. Geum-hae lets out a long sigh. The whole group has gone insane. I sit down on the platform and look at my insane subordinates with a feeling of bliss under a serious face. Good. Youre doing great. Gold Boar sits next to me and says. They look like the Crazy Rabbit Union (î). I hum cheerfully while looking at my perfect subordinates and sister. In the swaying flowers, I can smell the scent of plum blossoms. [^n1] Geum-hae, who has nothing to do, listens next to me, nods a few times, and claps to the beat. My subordinates, their swords dancing in the petals. And I sing a song. The chubby brother applauds to add to the atmosphere. How cheerful. [^n1]: this is a pun intended to reference the Korean song Your Shampoo Scent in the Flowers by Jang Beom June Chapter 59 Chapter 59 C First of All, He Looks Like a Womanizer Is it because the weather is nice? My lackeys petal slashing activities went on for four days straight, so I had no choice but to call So Gun-pyeong. Chief So. Yes. You and Hong-shin might have learned something from playing around with flower petals, but its still too early for them. As Gold Brother said, it is nothing but a waste of time. Try holding them back a bit now that weve set the tone. So Gun-pyeong also nods in agreement. I was thinking the same, but they were so into it I had to think about how to respond. Youre in charge as the head trainer. Isnt it better not to listen to them? Like how? Be harsher to them. With a wooden sword, you can beat those bastards immersed in the scent of plum blossoms. They think theyve learned something, but you know its absurd. Show them the difference in your skills. Looks like I was worried for nothing. I shall let you hear some painful groans today. This time, Manager Byuk is the one approaching me. Leader, this is Manager Byuk. Did you manage to find him? Manager Byuk replies. Originally, the Elder Hornless Dragons residence was at a fixed place. However, though I am not sure if he is spending money or meeting up with acquaintances, it is said that he is at the Flower Villa (ɽf), meeting with a few wanderers and warriors from Kangho yesterday and the day before. Ill call all the officials and explain everything at once. Not long after, the officials enter the hall. Meanwhile, Manager Byuk hangs a blank sheet of paper on a board as if it is a situation board and holds up a brush. He is like an old soldier who has finally been selected to explain a wartime situation for the first time in his life. When the officials finally gather, Manager Byuk writes the word Rabbit (î) in the center and writes other nicknames, such as the Elder Hornless Dragon, on the right. The Silver Phantom (y), Yoo Sa-cheong (˼i), was also spotted. In addition, there were also the Meteor Wanderers () who get paid to cause trouble. There were also other unidentified Kangho warriors. The reason for this meet-up is simple. Were the only ones whove made noise in the area as of recently. They must have gathered, thinking the southern region has weakened. Presumably, the news about the death of Dae Na-chal and some of the Twelve Generals have spread around. I ask the obvious question. They know there is a guy who killed Dae Na-chal, and yet they think the region has fallen? Are they stupid? Manager Byuk replies with a smile. Greed sometimes blinds rationality. After drawing a large circle, Manager Byuk writes Mister Sus name and draws a line to connect it to the Elder Hornless Dragon. This is how I see it. Even Mister Su? Yes. The Elder Hornless Dragon was close to Dae Na-chal, and Mister Su was on bad terms with him. Mister Su wanted to destroy Dae Na-chal, but he couldnt win Elder Hornless Dragons trust. Though Elder Hornless Dragon had received a lot from Dae Na-chal, hes gone now. So its natural for those two to come together like a man and a woman. If they gather as many as they can and divide the southern region into two, it will be a great benefit for both of them. Though, Im not sure whos the ringleader. I look at the names on the situation board. There are names I know and names I dont know. First of all, the Meteor Wanderers are a group of people who use hurling weapons called meteor hammers. They are a drifting force that numbers between 50 to 100 at the very least. They live like theres no tomorrow and often intervene to fight for various Unorthodox Factions interests. The Silver Phantom, Yoo Sa-cheong, is a name I have never heard of, so the name stands out from Mister Su and Elder Hornless Dragon. Whos Yoo Sa-cheong? Manager Byuk replies. While he might seem like an arbitrator on the outside, hes just a gambler who enjoys looking for high stakes. Hes more like a problem spreader. Hes affiliated to no one but makes a lot of money since hes involved in the conflict of various factions. Hes skilled enough as well. The fact that I wasnt aware of his name meant that he died violently after getting involved in an Unorthodox Faction conflict in my past life. Then, two subordinates who are dressed as hawkers appear in the main hall and report what they have learned. Mister Su led his men directly into the Flower Villa, and later the disciples of Green Mount Sect (ï[T) also entered the Flower Villa. I saw Lady Iron Toad (F) heading to the Flower Villa with her disciples. I think that it is meaningless to hear these reports. You may go now and rest. Yes. Should I say that it feels like I need to ask about atoning for Dae Na-chals misdeeds? Manager Byuk draws a slightly smaller circle than Mister Sus and writes the names of the Green Mount Sect and Lady Iron Toad. I had predicted Mister Su, but I did not expect to see the Green Mount Sect and Lady Iron Toad. This could happen with the Green Mount Sect. The Green Mount Sect is an organization between Unorthodox and Orthodox factions. Kangho uses the expression Between Good and Evil to describe these guys, but theyre just snakes. Lady Iron Toad is a middle-aged female Unorthodox Faction master who uses an iron toad as her hidden weapon. Manager Byuk then says. Ill contact the Twelve Generals. If Elder Hornless Dragons strategy is to divide the southern region between themselves, the Twelve Generals wont be safe either. I look at the circles on the board and say. Use all of the Four Generals forces and members of the Black Rabbit Union. Lets match the number of people on the Elder Hornless Dragons side. Yes. Manager Byuk takes the brush and continues to add numbers to the situation board. Hong-shin and Geum-hae both have nothing to add to the calculation because they have no lackeys. Hong-shin always does things alone, and theres no need to mobilize troops from the merchant group. The total number of troops from the Four Generals that Manager Byuk is recording, when added to the Black Rabbit Unions soldiers, is less than 250. However, when the Elder Hornless Dragon side is counted, they have well over 400. I can handle it somehow even if I go stupid. Still, the quantity will make the subordinates lose spirit. We cant lose in terms of numbers. I glance at the Black Rabbit Union officials and say. One of you, go to Ilyang and send word to Sima Bi and Cha Sung-tae. Tell them to gather people who are bored and join me. Another one of you, head to the Black Hurricane Castle. So Gun-pyeong replies. Black Hurricane Castle? Tell a man named Dokgo Saeng to bring about 100 elites. Would the Black Hurricane Castle come? Tell him the Low-Down Sect Leader made the request. Theyll come. I think the numbers would be even. If there is a head-on war, our men will not be discouraged by just sheer numbers. Also, the Black Hurricane Castle folks are completely insane, so be careful not to provoke them. Theyre crazy. So Gun-pyeong replies as the appointed representative. Understood. Officials Yes, Leader. Is there anyone on the Elder Hornless Dragons side I mustnt kill? Whether its a relative unluckily involved or an old friend. Tell me in advance. I add to my words while the officials look at each other. Dont resent me after I killed them all. So Gun-pyeong scans the officials and then replies. There is none. I then dismiss the meeting. Everyone, now go. Summon the Twelve Generals first. Ill personally go to whoever didnt answer my call and send them to their death. The strong need to lose sleep, so less of the weak die. After sending the officials off, I put my feet on the table and doze off. Ive been devoting myself to Qi circulation recently, so I doze off occasionally. It feels like my energy and mental power are being drained quickly. Sometimes, I think this state feels like what I feel before falling asleep. Ah, if I sleep, I think Ill have a silly dream? I feel tired when I wake up, and it feels icky to keep sleeping. Thats how I feel right now. I have a silly dream. I witness the Crazy Monk running around with a smile. Innocent people bump into the Crazy Monks shoulders and fly off to the sides, but he still continues to laugh. Hahahaha I quickly grab a rag and wipe the table. Damn it. I pray that he would just pass by, but the Crazy Monk stops in his footwork and asks me. Hey, errand boy. The word errand boy makes my stomach boil. Yes? Which is the way to Zhejiang? I reply calmly, despite my astonishment. Cant you just keep going east? Crazy Monk blinks his large eyes and replies. Youre saying I should move east? Thats correct, for now. Will you take responsibility if I dont reach Zhejiang after moving east? My breathing becomes rugged at that moment as I feel like I have no way of escaping, no matter how I answer. If I say, Ill take responsibility, Ill be dragged along with the words Okay, take responsibility. If I say, Why do I have to take responsibility? I feel like I would get dragged for making him feel an unpleasant feeling. Which is the correct answer? Suppressing my annoyance, I respond to the Crazy Monk. What brings you to Zhejiang? I heard there is a fish as big as a Peng off the coast of Zhejiang. My dead brother was not a liar, so that must be true. I think its true, too. Youve seen it? I throw a rag at the table and reply. Ive never seen it. Why? How rude Is it because its a dream? I lash out like I always do. I roll up my sleeves and say to the Crazy Monk. Youre picking a fight with me, so lets fight. The Crazy Monk giggles and laughs at the suggestion of a fight. Laughter soon leads to a lions roar. The Crazy Monk, who has been measuring my internal Qi, snorts after a long laugh and says. What a hilarious errand boy. Ill let you off since you made me laugh. Keep up with the training. Well meet again soon. Crazy Monk speeds off, leaving only dust flying in the wind. Only when the Crazy Monk disappears, do I let out a smile. Coward It is fortunate I have been training hard in martial arts. Then, I hear a familiar and unpleasant voice in the inn. Dont stand there like a moron, errand boy. Get me a drink. What? When I turn my head towards the voice, I see the Demon Cults Left Hand of Illuminating Light sitting with a beautiful woman at a table. Where do you think this place is, you lunatic? With a swear, I kick the Left Hand of Illuminating Light in the chest. Its only normal for the Left Hand of Illuminating Light to make a counterattack, but instead, he shrieks loudly and rolls on the ground several times. The atmosphere turns cold. What are you doing! My body suddenly floats into the air as the woman tries to push me away. When I turn my head, I see the Crazy Monk, who has a bigger head than me, holding me by the nape of my neck. Crazy Monk grins as he says. Youre a bad guy, arent you? What the hell are you talking about? That guy is a pervert (ɫħ). Hes the guy who becomes the Left Hand of Illuminating Light in the future. Let go of me! You sure blabber on when you kicked him first. Lets beat you up first. Beat me Damn it. Im not who I used to be. As the surrounding scenery changes rapidly, I compete with the Crazy Monk using hundreds of tactics. When I show off the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique, the Great Absorption Technique, and the Plum Blossom Sword Technique alongside the Heavenly Pearls power, the Crazy Monk is clearly shocked. However, after letting out a burst of energy as if he had freed his accumulated power all at once, the Crazy Monks presence is gradually turning into that of *Acalanatha ().[^n1] Ah, fuck. At that moment, I found a man watching the fight with a smile on his face standing at the entrance to the alley. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light, who received a kick and fell on purpose, is watching the fight with a grin. At that moment, I jolt as if I have just been flicked in the forehead. It is only then that I become wide awake. As soon as I open my eyes, I sigh. How dare he bother me even in my dreams. While trying to catch my breath, I shout out. Manager Byuk! Before long, Manager Byuk rushes over and replies. Ah, yes, Leader. What can I do for you? I wave my hand since Ive gotten worked up and voice my thoughts. This might be a hard request, but can you draw a wanted poster based on just a description? Manager Byuk nods. I will try. I need to find this man. Ah, is there a guy like that? I will do everything I can to find him. It wouldve been easy to know his name. But he was just the Left Hand of Illuminating Light, and I was the Crazy Demon. We werent interested in each others real names. I recite whatever details come to my mind to Manager Byuk. First of all, he looks like a womanizer. Pardon me? Im talking about his impression. Hes like a womanizer. Do you know what I mean? Hes good-looking, pale, and all that kind of stuff? He can also make a dashing eye smile. One corner of Manager Byuks mouth goes up. I can sense it. Already? Yes, please dont worry and continue the description. I will catch this womanizer with my painting. Manager Byuk smiles confidently. [^n1]: Acalanatha is a Buddhist God that reflects the unshakable and boundless wisdom he possesses, in addition to his ability to command and control wealth, authority, and health. He is mainly worshiped in Nepal, Tibet, China, and Japan Chapter 60 Chapter 60 C Im Here to Collect Debt Drawing is the same as martial arts. Countless drawings have to be thrown away to craft the perfect piece. The same applies to a wanted poster. Manager Byuk has drawn the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights face but didnt like any of them, so I had to throw this and abandon that. Whatever happens, to gain a better outcome, I have to keep throwing them away. When the neighbouring Unorthodox Factions gather in Flower Villa to discuss how to defeat me, I am working hard to make a wanted poster with Manager Byuk. Manager, his cheekbones arent that high. His jawline is quite similar to mine. Do it again. Manager Byuk examines my jawline and says, Hair also determines the impression. Its important whether its curly or hair as smooth as a womans. What is his hair like? His hair was smooth. How about the eyebrows? Overall, its straight like a straight line, and the tip is curved like a feather. He trimmed his eyebrows carefully with a knife. Its a very serious womanizer fashion. Manager Byuk recapitulates all he has heard so far and proceeds to redraw. Not long after, a wanted poster with a face very similar to the Left Hand of Illuminating Light is finally completed. Manager Byuk then asks me with a grin. Do you like it? Nice. Lets find him with this. I only know hes a collateral descendant of a family clan. He should be in his late 20s. Its simple for family clans. How so? The martial artists of family clans care about their appearance and never walk around in shabby clothes. If hes a womanizer, hell stand out. Once we narrow it down to the prestigious family clans. We can narrow it down further by age and judge them by their clothes using the wanted poster. It wont take long. How are his martial arts skills? Hes strong, even among prestigious family clan elites of similar age. It is only then Manager Byuks eyes widen. Then he must be a great master. So just find his whereabouts and let me know. Hes a guy none of the subordinates can deal with. I understand. Come to think of it, not only is he from an indirect line of a prestigious family clan, but hes also strong in martial arts and causes trouble. He must have been hated by the masters of his family. If the masters of the main family thought of the Left Hand as the next leaders main competitor, they would have repressed him perfectly so he could never resurface. Naturally, he can only throw his lot with the Demon Cult. Focus on finding this guy, Manager. Leave the fighting to me. Im more comfortable with that. As you wish. I look at the board that Manager Byuk has drawn. By tonight, the leaders will be sharing their opinions in Flower Villa, right? They will also likely be drinking. Most likely so. If they bring up matters on territory division and what to do with the money, the meeting wont become any shorter. Should I say this is a chronic disease of Unorthodox Factions? In fact, an Unorthodox Faction that doesnt discuss these matters would only be the powerful, high-ranking Unorthodox Factions. Regardless of man and power, its all the same. Those with real skills are not very interested in money. Sitting in the hall, I scratch my head for a moment. Some of my men have left for Ilyang and the Black Hurricane Castle. I also have to wait until evening to gather all my troops. As I become lost in thought, Manager Byuk says to me. Leader, may I say something out of line? Anytime. Were an Unorthodox Faction. People in the south will be familiar with our faction anyway. Theyll welcome us even more, especially since weve stopped all of Dae Na-chals doings. If other Unorthodox forces take over, many things will change again. More people will die or get hurt. Fortunately, many of the Twelve Generals are still alive, and Leaders forces arent small either. So please consider the figureheads responsibility and deal with this carefully. Did he catch a glimpse of the unprovoked rebellion of youth from my eyes? I nod with a firm look, but the word carefully enters through one ear before flowing out of my other ear. Of course, I need to be careful. Just because the enemys heads are gathered in the Flower Villa, I shouldnt rush in and raid by myself. Am I right? Manager Byuk bows slightly as he looks at me. Thank you for your understanding. You mean I shouldnt commit an immature act like shooting a fire arrow at the Flower Villa and starting a forest fire, like how I organized an archery competition with the Twelve Generals. Is that right? Flowers and trees are precious. It is a brilliant plan, but its a little far from what a general with a group of troops can do. They have a number of masters on their side, so youll end up fighting with swords. Flowers and trees are precious, too. I look at Manager Byuk and nod. Ive been itching a little, but Manager Byuk is giving me insight. This is why our Manager Byuk is living up to his role as the pillar and the great general of the Black Rabbit Union. If you find the womanizer, you will receive a bonus. You can write it down in the ledger and take the money yourself. Manager Byuk gathers his hands with a pleased expression on his face. Thank you, Leader. It will take some time for the troops to gather, so I will drop by the Moyong Clinic for a while. To see the face of our doctor. Oh, did you become friends with the young doctor of the Moyong Clinic? Were like brothers. I see. Then Ill pay attention to the Moyong Clinic from time to time. And Leader, please use a carriage in a time like this. Ill have it ready for you. Okay. As I head to the waiting carriage, I mutter under my breath. If youre going to tell me what to do, why dont you be the leader yourself. The waiting coachman must think I am talking to him and answer with a question. Sorry? No, its nothing. Once I enter the carriage, the coachman, who has received word in advance, announces the destination. Leader, Ill take you to the Moyong Clinic. Lets go. As soon as the carriage begins moving and takes a corner, I say to the coachman. I changed my mind. Since the wind is cool and refreshing, lets not go to the Moyong Clinic. Yes. You can come back after dropping me off near the Cloud Rain Society. The leader of the Cloud Rain Society is Mister Su, who should be in the Flower Villa now. The coachman does not answer for a moment. . The coachman asks me again as if to double-check. Leader, can I go back and report this to the officials and Manager Byuk and take off? The Cloud Rain Society is dangerous. Maybe we should inform them. Thinking that I should not scold those who are simply saying what is right, I reply. Lets go to the Cloud Rain Society, the faction that uses cloud and rain derived from the Joy of Cloud and Rain in its name. Im offended that they keep copulating without me. I understand. Riding a carriage is always fun. While enjoying the outside scenery, I head for Ihwa Prefecture, where the Cloud Rain Society is located. On a day when the spring sunshine feels warm, my madness is blown away by the cool wind. My mood is good as it feels like I am going on vacation. The coachman still seems worried, so I try to relieve his mind. Mister Su is busy attending work matters in the Flower Villa, so dont worry too much. Yes. In the carriage, I imagine the incident that may have happened between Mister Su and the Murim Alliance in my past life. What crime could he possibly commit to the alliance members that he ended up being decapitated in the streets? An alliance member was also imprisoned for that crime? Was that alliance member someone I know? I dont know. During my time as the Crazy Demon, the alliance member would already have been out of prison. A Murim alliance member would not have been imprisoned for long for killing a member of an Unorthodox Faction. Though I am back in the past now There are times when I only know the process without knowing the result. In other cases, only the results were known, and the process was completely unknown. Since Im curious and bored, Im going somewhere near the Cloud Rain Society. Leader, we have arrived in Ihwa Prefecture. When I get off, the coachman tactfully parks in a quiet place. I warn the coachman. You parked in the right place. Its boring to wait here, so go back. Instead, tell them Im over at the Moyong Clinic. Understood, Leader. Take this. I take off my black robe and hand it to the coachman. I am wearing plain martial art attire, so it isnt a very noticeable outfit. It is an instinct for Kangho warriors to wear black robes even on a sunny day. You can hide a few weapons, and the clothes offer camouflage even if you get stabbed. Wearing fluttery clothes like a robe might cause hidden weapons to lash out suddenly if internal Qi is injected, so it is useful one way or another. However, the black jangsam certainly stands out because it is clearly a combat uniform. After I send the coachman off, I walk around Ihwa Prefecture. I am also curious about the fact that Mister Sus power is on the same level as the late Dae Na-chal. I wonder what kind of business the Cloud Rain Society does to make money? I am also utterly curious as to why it is named the Cloud Rain Society. Im a person with many questions. Rather than coming here with specific plans to deal with the Cloud Rain Society, I just came here out of curiosity. The streets scenery is no different from the view in the southern region. The larger the Unorthodox Faction force, the greater the population in the region tends to be. Basically, an Unorthodox Faction is a group of people who somehow extorts money from those who make a living. In a heartbeat, I feel unpleasant when I think about how the Black Rabbit Union I control was also like that once upon a time. I walk around Ihwa with the thought of doing a simple cross-inspection. Its a simple inspection. I can tell by the expressions of the owners. Whether a business is going well these days and if there are no bullies around, I can see it. This is a matter of pride. If ordinary people in the south walk around with worried faces after I become the leader of the Black Rabbit Union, then its my fault. What kind of Unorthodox Faction does Mister Su have here? I snoop from place to place. I go to the guest inn and also go into the tea house. There are especially many street vendors here. These people tend to work hard even in tough times, so I cant find out much. This is what happens when you look down on the working class. After I finish my tour of Ihwa, I head to the Cloud Rain Society. I stand in thought as I look at their main gates. Those who do bad things tend to have a little window on their gate, similar to when I saw the Black Rabbit Unions main gate for the first time. Thud thud thud! A small door opens with a rattle when I knock with my fist. Who is it? I look at the man who is speaking with only his eyes showing. He looks like a prisoner. I asked, who is it? I make a tsk sound and then reply. Im here to collect a debt. With a loud thud, the small door closes, and the front door opens wide with a squeak. This makes me realize that these guys didnt pay their bills well. The door opening process is quick, accurate, and repetitive. Furthermore, irritation is mixed in even when the door opens or closes. I understand this mentality. A mentality that serves to half-threaten the person who came to collect a debt. The man who opened the door looks at me with a tilt of his head. Come on in. I respond with a stiff expression. If I came in at a bad time, I can come to get it next time. He answers right away. I said come on in, you punk. Yes, of course. I should go in. This is the difference between Orthodox and Unorthodox factions. Just as how the words came to collect debt is sometimes used as a secret code (Z) in Unorthodox factions. However, orthodox factions do not give out credits in the first place. Here, orthodox factions can be classified into factions and murim clans. Murim clans are rich in the first place, so they dont need to borrow credit. Hence theres no way this kind of secret code will work there. In the case of prestigious sects, they live and die by honour, so if theyre broke, theyd rather dig up wild vegetables and eat them, but they wont eat anything on credit. So, thats why many large sects are based in the mountains (ɽ). This is why Orthodox factions are a more terrifying force no matter how bad Unorthodox factions are. Whether you live in a mountain or a city, you have endless pride and esteem. The gatekeeper interrupts my thoughts. Whose debt is it? Dont tell me its the society leader. Is it for the vice leaders drinks? I follow the gatekeeper and murmur softly. So damn scary. What? The gatekeeper turns around and looks at me with a mixed expression of anger and fluster. What did you just say? I reply in a calm voice. No, I was talking to myself. Has the gatekeeper been training confidently? The palm of the hand aimed at the face of the person who came to collect debt swings in a curved line and arrives. I grab the gatekeeper by the wrist and tell him nicely. I said I was talking to myself. I let go of the gatekeepers hand and started a staring contest with him. the one who blinks first loses. The loser gets a flick on the forehead. For your information, I also learned Finger Techniques. My finger flicks arent just finger flicks. Its a wake-up flick. It is called the Violet Mist Finger Flicking Technique (ϼָ), one of the big three finger flicking techniques in Kangho. The gatekeeper glares at me. Whatever the current situation, his gaze contains his determination to not close his eyes first. He then asks me with his bloodshot eyes. Where did you come from? Chapter 61 Chapter 61 C Crush With A Reliable Axe It doesnt matter where Im from. . What matters right now is that you dont blink. Now his eyes are bloodshot. After a while, I see a tear flow down his face and warn him. Kanghos Three Great Finger Flicking Technique. Making a surprise visit to Cloud Rain League and starting a staring contest with the gatekeeper? Thats me. Where am I from? Its a long story. I was born to my parents, but I guess you werent asking about my origin. What town am I from? I dont think youre asking for a geographical location either. Which faction am I from? Thats probably what youre asking, but that is also quite a long story. So Running out of patience, the gatekeeper swallows and says. Please spare me. Spare you? Yes. Nope. A staring contest is a staring contest, a game is a game, and a forehead flick is a forehead flick. Anticipating the winner to be decided soon, I gather up my thumb and index finger, bring them close to my mouth, and blow hot air on them. Losing his composure, he starts uttering nonsense. Let me pay for the credit. I dont need it. The moment his eyes blinked, I hit his forehead with a flick. Tak! The gatekeeper somersaults backwards and lays on the floor unconscious. I win. After my victory over the gatekeeper, I walk inside and follow along the stone path. As I walk inside, I think of how insidious the structure of the quarters here is. Perhaps because many of Mister Sus followers are absent, the space is rather empty. I stop by a small pond and look at the fish inside. Small fish swim around in it, whose names I do not recall. Amusingly, they are gathering at my feet as I look down at them, acting as if they are asking for food. A weakling inevitably ends up begging others for food and is confined in a narrow place. The Crazy Monk had suddenly gone on a mission to look for a Dapeng (i) 1 I thought it was a journey to see what masters there are in the sea since his skills and ego were as big as a Dapeng. All the major guys get noticed during the trip from Tibet to Zhejiang anyway. I lose interest in the fish instantly and glance at my surroundings. Perhaps the garden is spacious because the quarters are built in the shape of a villa. I can spot small houses, warehouses, and incinerators built for unknown purposes around the space. I go to an incinerator and ask the man whose back is facing me. What are you burning here? A large man who is eating something at a small table looks up and down at me and asks. Who might you be? Im here to see Mister Su. Oh, hes out right now. I look at the eating man. Youre in the middle of a meal. Yes. Is anyone else here now? Is the vice leader here? Only guests are present. The vice leader is also out. I then point at the large incinerator and ask. What do you burn here? Bodies, what else would we burn? Why do you have to burn bodies? The large man replies as he chews his meat with a bitter look. We burn them if they dont pay their debts. I dont know anything. Im just doing what Im told. I look at the man as he munches on his meat enthusiastically and sighs. It feels strange trying to kill someone in the middle of a meal. Only then does he stop using his chopsticks and stare at me. I point to the food that he had been eating and say. Eat up. After he turns around to check the guests identity, the man stops eating, stands up, and walks to the incinerator. As I turn around to look at him, he looks at me with an axe in his hand. Youre not a guest, are you? With the axe still in his hand, he approaches me. How many people has he killed to resort to killing so easily? Maybe his intellect is also low as he repeats the same words and swings his axe. Youre not a guest, are you!? Looking at his posture while wielding the axe, I judge that he has attained enough physical skills and strength to take out dozens of third-rate warriors in Kangho. I dont want to touch his body, so I target his eyes with the Wooden Fowl Flicking Technique. Tak! The moment his eyeballs explode, and he tries to scream, I kick his abdomen and send him flying into the incinerator. Having dropped his axe, the man tries to get out by grabbing the sides of the incinerator door with both hands. I quickly rush in and shove him inside the incinerator. Slam! Slam! Slam! He screams, yet no one is rushing out from any of the buildings. I pick up the axe from the floor and head for the main quarters. The closer I approach, the louder the music sounds from inside the main building. When I open the door, I am greeted by the spacious interior of the main building. No one looks at me as I make my entrance. On the centre stage, dancers dressed in see-through clothes are dancing awkwardly, while below them, Kangho men dressed in ragged clothes are watching. I walk up to the stage with an axe in my hand. Only then do the dancers scream and leave, and I take over as the star of the stage. I stand with the axe next to me and look at the audience. Lights are shining on the stage, and the building windows are sealed, making the audience seats look rather dark. The music then stops, followed by a grave silence. I look around from the stage and say. Somebody, turn on the lights. It is a strange thing. Everyone is taking out their weapons with no one trying to scurry away Why is that? I plant the bloody axe vertically next to me and sit in a lotus position. Looks like they had mistaken me for a member of the Murim Alliance. It had taken me a while to kill the audience members who came at me with a read-to-die attitude. As the blood-covered axe stands beside me, I ponder what the Cloud Rain Society is really about for a moment. I didnt get the chance to talk to them, so I have no information. I dont even want to ask the dancers. When I open my eyes to ask someone, all I see are corpses lying around. I close my eyes again. I am left in a situation where I have no choice but to wait for the vice leader to return. All the guests had been decapitated by a strict member of the Murim Alliance, so this wont be a misdeed that can be easily dismissed. As I listen to my surroundings with my eyes closed, I can hear the shallow footsteps of people walking around. But I cant hear a thing from outside the walls. My martial arts skills have yet to reach the state of a turtle of steel or a big Peng. When I focus on my sense of smell, only the metallic smell of blood filters in first. As I concentrate, I can distinguish a hint of powder and perfume from the smell of blood. Quite a few Unorthodox Factions use poison in the form of sprays (F), so it is necessary to always distinguish odours. While I have my eyes closed, my thoughts race. First of all, the dancers dance was a mess. Should I conclude that they probably only learned dancing recently? This means they are not professional dancers. And all of the people that died by my axe looked well-off. As such, I find myself concluding that the reason why they had attacked me in that manner. If they were from Unorthodox Factions, they wouldve asked me who I was, fled, or stayed to observe the situation. If so, theres a possibility that most of the audience were martial artists originating from family clans (). Its nothing unusual for wealthy elites to mingle with the Unorthodox Faction. In fact, it is common. Unorthodox Factions do anything for money, and the rich have no place to spend money, so they grow increasingly twisted. The only people who are always suffering and dying in this world are those who make money by doing honest work. That is why many members of the Unorthodox Factions died by my hands in my past life. Since I didnt discriminate, I was able to shoot through the ranks and become Murims Public Enemy. It was to the point where these guys had to use the Heavens Net to capture me. Even if I return to the past, history is bound to repeat itself. But its okay. Because Im growing stronger. I open my eyes again as I hear several footsteps. The door of the main quarters opens, and the hosts, who had organized the performance, witness the scene with a look of bewilderment on their faces. Is it because this faction is strict? The vice leader asks me a question even while his scumbag lackeys remain tight-lipped. Who are you? My field of view brightens as soon as the lackeys remove the seals from the windows. The vice leader is a rather calm man. Calmness is written all over his face, and he looks younger than I expected. As I remain silent, the vice leader approaches the stage and looks at me. Which Unorthodox Faction are you from? You think you can survive against our leader? I dont think this conversation would be interesting, so I respond plainly. Im here to collect a debt. How much is the debt for you to do this How much can you offer? After contemplating for a moment, the vice leader gives a surprising answer. Will 300 gold be enough? What a surprise, it exactly matches the amount that the Black Hurricane Castle Leader had asked me to pay back. The vice leader replies with a sneer. Ah, you must be indebted to the Black Hurricane Castle Leader. Then you can get 300 from me and settle the debt. The Black Hurricane Castle is as good as us at chasing payments. Its fine. I dont have to pay him back. And why is that? I explain the situation where I had crushed the Black Hurricane Castle Leaders head with my own hands. Did I swing the spiked bat four times to his head? If you smash his brain, hell forget all about the debt. He wont recall to who he lent money. You should thank me if you owe the Black Hurricane Castle any money. The vice leader then goes radio silent. I cant predict what the vice leader is thinking right now, so I tell him nicely. Dont run away because Ill spare your lackeys and chase you down. Dont even give orders for them to fight. Ill ignore it and kill you. Then what am I supposed to do? Bring you the money? Dont do that either. Your forces must be somewhere else because of how empty this place is. Im afraid your troops would swarm in while you are off getting the money. Just stay here. Lets take time to do some self-reflection. Mourn for the dead, and think deeply about how we ended up here. We were never born evil, so how did we get to this point? At this moment, the door to the main quarters swings open again, and people holding swords enter quietly. Despite the arrival of dozens more men, the vice leaders expression remains stiff. I speak to the vice leader with a solemn face. Do you hate talking to me? You want to do things the hard way? The vice leader suddenly rolls his mouth round and exhales loudly. He raises his hand as if to signal an attack and says. All of you, stay outside. With the vice leaders silent gesture, all of his subordinates leave. Looking as if hed fought an intense fight for a short period of time, he replies to me with a resigned look. I have sent them out, so please calm down, tell me what you want. Lets talk it out from start to finish. Im willing to cooperate, betray, kneel down and beg for my life. Lets just talk for now. I nod and reply. Kneel. The vice leader climbs to the edge of the stage and kneels. The vice leader of the Cloud Rain Society prays and prays again and again with both of his hands clasped together. He is very certain. He is currently in the hands of an absolute lunatic. He could tell during the conversation. After looking at his gaze, he was convinced. And the state of the guests bodies also tells him that his guess is not wrong. It is normal for limbs to be severed when the killings made with an axe, but most of the corpses have their heads split in half. Just by looking at the condition of the bodies, he can gauge the lunatics abilities. Thinking that he should at least walk out of here alive, the vice leader then says. Name your price Fortunately, the leader is away, so you can tell me anything. Im sure youre not interested in money or women, but its best if you tell me what you want. I answer the question of the kneeling vice leader. When is Mister Su coming? Probably during supper. Will you be able to kill him? I cant do it alone. Though its hard, I can kill him if my lackeys and I attack all at once. Poison, hidden weapons, a joint attack, ambush. Hell also return drunk. Itll be easier than usual. I can do it. I can kill him. Please believe me. If I cant do it, you can kill me then. You were planning to kill Mister Su anyway. You can get rid of us all by then. So youre a traitor. I get up with the axe and approach the vice leader. I approach him in anticipation of retaliation, but the vice leader does not move at all. I stroke the vice leaders head with my left hand and hold the axe closely. Mister Su is as strong as Dae Na-chal. Are you sure you can handle him? Thats only in official battles I swing the axe and split the vice leaders head in half. Come to think of it, the whole of the Cloud Rain Society is made up of trash, so theres no one useful here. The body of the traitor, who is strong against the weak and weak against the strong, collapses on the stage. A giant bird that transforms from a giant fish in Chinese mythology ?? Chapter 62 Chapter 62 C Lets Do It Next Time Welcome, Leader. The bewildered Moyong Baek scans me, who had made a sudden visit, up and down. He caught me rubbing the blood off my shoes in the dirt. Doctor, is my visit too late into the day? Mo Yong-baek shakes his head. Not at all. Please come in. Arent you on your way out? Its alright. I thought Id get some dumplings, but Ill eat them next time. Did something happen? Lets go in. As soon as Moyong Baek takes his seat, he extends his hands. Let me check your pulse. I hold out my wrists meekly. Moyong Baek observes my eyes, complexion, and the blood stains on my clothes as he weighs my pulse. Do you have any injuries? Nope. It doesnt seem like you have any problems, but you do look tired. You must have exerted yourself. Did you get into a fight? I get into a lot of fights. Its a daily routine. I nod my head. Lets have a cup of warm tea. Lets do that. Moyong Baek requests his nurses to bring us some tea before asking me. Who did you fight today? Have you heard the news about Dae Na-chals death? How could I not know? Now that Dae Na-chal is dead, the unorthodox factions around him are coalescing. So, I paid the Cloud Rain Society a visit. Moyong Baek nods. You had a round in the Cloud Rain Society then. Leader, lets talk honestly today. Lets do that. Moyong Baek grins and says to me, It looks like your Internal Demons (ħ) are by the door. I mean this in regards to your condition, Leader. I chuckle. I thought so. Thats why I came to see you. Ill likely end up being your patient from time to time. I had killed the vice leader of the Cloud Rain Society, freed the dancers, and killed the men who pounced on me during the whole process. I thought I might become a Crazy Demon going berserk if I continued and fought with Mister Su after his return from his trip. That is why I refrained from doing so and came here to see Doctor Hoyong. I want to be a cool-headed Crazy Demon that tries to fix my weaknesses, not a bloodthirsty Crazy Demon. A better Crazy Demon than my previous life; thats my goal. In addition, it is also the way in Kangho to visit a doctor when one is sick. Moyong Baek then says. What happened in the Cloud Rain Society? Nothing much. I just went around killing people with an ax. How did you I split their heads open. Murder is the same whether it uses a sword, ax, or fists. Did you kill anyone you shouldnt have killed by accident? No. Then where did the uneasiness in your eyes come from? Im not sure. Moyong Baek smiles faintly as he looks at me. Just in time, the nurse brings us tea and places it on the table. Pouring the teapot with his hands, Moyong Baek says. Leader, do you know much about poison? I shake my head. Not as well-versed as you, Doctor. The Poison Demon of my past life is asking me about poison. I cant help but let out a smile. Without becoming the Poison Demon, Moyong Baek expresses his thoughts about poison. Poison is technically medicine. Why is that? Poison kills people. Medicine saves people. Moyong Baek points at the cup of tea. Please, have a drink. I take a sip of the clear tea with Moyong Baek. Moyong Baek continues. Most of the worlds most powerful poisons come from insects, plants, and animals. Kangho warriors would then extract poison from them. Thats right. Or should I say its a condition that triggers this kind of poison? Its like a defense mechanism. Poisonous insects tend to use poison when their lives are threatened. Most of the time, its for survival. But thats not a Kangho warriors goal. They use poison so they wont die. Hence theyre more like medicine. Some die after eating something. Some get better after eating them. So aside from the classification, they are essentially the same. Is that so? I agree with some of what you said, while some other parts sounded vague. Moyong Baek nods. Its alright, thats just my opinion. This is the same with Internal Demons. If you try to use the poison of your mind, consequences follow. Insects often die on their own after spitting out poison. Or, in the process of being eaten, it releases poison and dies with its predators. Its similar to the No-Win Strategy. Yes. So Im hurting myself because I have poison in my mind? Dont you think so? Killing bad people weighs on your mind. And thats only natural for humans. I tilt my head. This is a little different from the usual explanation of my Internal Demons. However, Moyong Baek is being very serious, so I cant refute him. Then what should I do? Moyong Baek then laughs; a rare sight. You just have to do it in moderation. Looking at Moyong Baeks expression, I also laugh. The man who was more bloodthirsty than I during my Crazy Demon days is telling me to control myself, so I cant help but laugh. I nod my head. My doctor tells me to do it in moderation, so I will do just that. Moyong Baek pours another cup and says. Do it moderately. Try to share the burden with your companions. The stronger you get, the more forgiving you get. If you always use the poison in your mind, it will harm you. That, I agree with. Because thats what I did in my previous life. Moyong Baek saved me with poison in my past life, but now hes consoling me. Surprisingly, Moyong Baek then says. Killing the Demon Cult is essential, which is why the Murim Alliance established strict rules to prevent their members from going rogue. Executions are rare, and its usually done after sending them back to the alliance. Rather than a law protecting the offender, its more to protect their members. Thats the first time Ive heard of it. At this point, I ask him a question. I think that this question might touch on the root cause of my Internal Demons. Theres someone I hate the most in the world. Yes. Hes a great master. His men are skilled. Lets say Im strong enough to beat that master. If many people under him start to resent and hate me, is killing them all the right decision? You dont have to. Im a little concerned about that. Only cults will behave that way. Is the Heavenly Demon Cult your enemy, Leader? Instead of answering, I smile. Moyong Baek then says with a nervous look. You have the Three Disasters () as your enemy. I must have taken you too lightly. Ive always been quite the dreamer. The stakes are quite high. I comfort him as I judge that he might be a bit intimidated as he is just a regular doctor. Dont worry. I wont lead you to harms way. Was Moyong Baeks pride hurt by that? Suddenly, he says this to me. Word has it all the masters of the Three Disasters are immune to ten thousand poisons. Well, I dont intend to poison any masters in this world, so its none of my business. Moyong Baek shakes his head. It does matter. How so? I have done enough research, and Ill make you immune to hundreds or thousands of poison. If you build immunity toward poison, itd be far easier to go up against the Demon Cult. What about immunity to ten thousand poisons? Moyong Baek is a realistic man. That would be a little difficult. Moyong Baek and I laugh at the same time. Ive got to go. I dont think the unorthodox factions joining hands with Mister Su is going to let it slide Lets get going. As I am being sent off by Moyong Baek, the doctor asks me a question out of the blue. Leader. Go ahead. Have I ever treated an acquaintance of yours? What purpose does he have for asking this question? I choose my words wisely at the sudden question. I dont know why you are asking that question. Moyong Baek replies with an awkward look. Im just asking because youve shown me great generosity. I nod my head. Hm, thats possible. As we bid farewell in front of Moyong Clinic, I answer his question. There are times when people die as they lived, without any reason. Maybe you saved my life once in our past lives. As I smile, Moyong Baek shakes his head. That wont be possible. Why? Moyong Baek then says with a grin. I wouldve been a Kangho warrior in my previous life. Maybe Id killed so many people that I was given the task of caring and treating so many patients in this life is what I often think about. Chills run down my spine as I look at Moyong Baek. I then reply calmly. Perhaps. Lets stay healthy. Farewell, Leader. Moyong Baek bows his head. I cant respond with Kangho etiquette, so I just lower my head. The anxiety I am feeling is not clearly resolved yet. It may be a burden to think of so many Kangho masters as my enemy. However, after talking to Moyong Baek, I feel relieved. Anyhow, this person is someone I can confide in, and as a clever man, he could roughly tell what most of my worries were. Only then did flowers and trees appear in my eyes again. It feels easier to breathe. Feeling the Internal Demons at my doorsteps receding, I head back to the Black Rabbit Union. As soon as I reach the Black Rabbit Union quarters, an uproar occurs due to the people who arrived before me. While I head to the main hall, I imagine a few scenarios. The people I had summoned were the Twelve Generals, Dokgo Saeng, and Cha Sung-tae. Unfortunately, no one can surpass Cha Sung-tae. I can clearly picture the vivid image of Cha Sung-tae quietly reading the room. Tsk. I swing open the gate to the main hall and observe the atmosphere inside before stopping. . Dokgo Saeng has yet to arrive. However, all of the Twelve Generals and Black Rabbit Union officials, including So Gun-pyeong, are present. The Twelve Generals and Black Rabbit Union officials are seated on the chairs to the side, while Cha Sung-tae sits in the podiums center seat. What? Cha Sung-tae gets up and bows to me in a fist and palm salute. Welcome back, Sect Leader. Only then did the other guys follow suit. Welcome, Clan Leader. Welcome back, Big Brother. When I walk up to the top seat, Cha Sung-tae steps away from the seat and waits for me. After I take a seat at the high chair, I look at Cha Sung-tae and then proceed to read the atmosphere with the Twelve Generals and the other officials. Everyone, have a seat. Yes. Some of you here are seeing each other for the first time. Have you done the round of introductions? Cha Sung-tae, standing next to me, replies. Yes, we have. Im a curious person. Feeling somewhat petty, I ask Cha Sung-tae to solve my curiosity. Why were you sitting in the high seat? Cha Sung-tae replies with a calm look. Im the Manager of the Low-Down Sect, after all. Well, thats true. Hong-shin, who has a blunt personality, intervenes as if she intends to snitch. He claimed to be the second-in-command of the Low-Down Sect. Is that true, Big Brother? I whip my head and exchange glances with Cha Sung-tae. Cha Sung-tae sends me hints with his eyes. Tell her Im right. Please. Seems like Ive raised a sly fox. The culprit is an Ass in Lions Skin (ٻ, a fox pretending to be a tiger) and is standing in front of me. Feeling glad I didnt raise a tiger cub, I shake my head. Nope. Cha Sung-tae is just a manager of the Low-Down Sect. Theres no such thing as a second-in-command. But managers are important, so treat him as one. As you can see, a punch or two will kill him. Only then did the Twelve Generals brighten up. While Cha Sung-tae is backing up to the corner, I say. Cha Sung-tae. Yes. I keep belittling Cha Sung-tae. If youre gonna be sarcastic, at least get stronger. Incompetent bastard, sloppy, the one who lost consecutive rounds to Sima Bi, the Ass in Lions Skin. Cha Sung-tae, who takes a seat at the very end, replies. No, everyone here has met a powerful master, consumed panaceas, or learned good martial arts to grow stronger. I didnt have a powerful master, neither have I seen a panacea, and I swung a knife to survive. So, I think I may at least stand a chance in physical martial arts. So Gun-pyeong, who is listening quietly, stares at Cha Sung-tae. With that being said, should we go for a round? Cha Sung-tae answers as he stares at So Gun-pyeong. Lets do it next time. Its a passing remark, but Hong-shin suddenly bursts into laughter. Geum-hae laughs when Hong-shin laughs, and then the Four Generals smile and eventually burst out as well. Everyone is laughing except for Cha Sung-tae. I have no choice but to say this with a laugh. Make sure to do it next time. Yes, sir. Chapter 63 How should we destroy them to cause rumors to spread? Should we invade them? Or should we go on a siege defense ()? Feel free to speak your mind. Cha Sung-tae, who hears the question last and is slow to grasp the situation, asks the room. Who is our opponent? Elder Hornless Dragon, his ally Mister Su and other unorthodox faction scums. Cha Sung-tae replies casually. That might add up to about 4~500 troops, then. All the members in attendance look over to Cha Sung-tae. Everyones gaze is questioning, how does he know that? Feeling slightly puzzled, I grant Cha Sung-tae the right to speak first. Go on. A siege defense would be interesting. Why is that? Were behind in numbers. Thats it? The one who attacks first is usually the bad guy. But were not the ones who attacked Elder Hornless Dragon first. I nod and settle on the strategy for our fight plan. Then lets go with a siege defense. This time, everyones eyes are all on me. ! Their eyes are questioning why I decided on that plan so easily, but Im a man who doesnt need an excuse to do anything. I think a siege defense would be fun too. Speak up if you have any more interesting suggestions. Hong-shin raises her hand. Big Brother? Speak. If were going for a siege defense, wed better evacuate the servants and anyone that doesnt know martial arts. They could get caught up and die. I nod and raise my voice immediately. Miss Son! Miss Son rushes to me from behind. Yes, Leader. Gather all the servants, the sick, and people who dont know martial arts and prepare to leave for Ilyang. Ill call up the guards. So prepare carefully and gather up the people. Miss Son answers right away. Yes, Ill prepare them right away. I look around at my men and ask. Who wants to escort them? You are to leave immediately since they might infiltrate us as early as tonight. This task is as important as fighting here, so you dont have to feel sorry. Hong-shin speaks up as if she doesnt want to handle the escorting duty. Im gonna have a round today. Baek-yu, Baek-in, and Cheong-jin, who all hold a grudge against Mister Su, remain silent. Being left with no choice, I ask for Cha Sung-taes opinion. Do you want to go, clumsy Sung-tae? You wont be of much help anyway. As soon as I start to regret being too straightforward, I see that Cha Sung-taes face has already reddened. Cha Sung-tae replies with his eyes wide open. Leader, Im Cha Sung-tae of Ilyang. Ill stay as a representative of Ilyang. Please leave me out and decide, Leader. I nod. Looks like everyone wants to stay. Then Ill decide for you. Manager Byuk. Yes. You will be in charge of the front, and Sima Bi and his men will take the back. Sima Bi, send those quick on their feet out first to ensure the road is safe. Sima Bi and Manager Byuk reply at the same time. Yes, sir. Sima Bi stands up with a look of regret. But I believe Sima Bi is the right man for the job since hes smart and frequently travels to Ilyang. As a large number of people are leaving the hall, the place suddenly becomes busy. I watch over them and call for Geum-hae as the evacuees depart. Gold Brother. Yes, Big Brother. Follow them in the rearguard. If anything happens, do as you see fit and report back to me. Geum-hae replies as he stands up. Yes, I understand. Geum-hae is still trying to recover his internal Qi, so he must be concerned with his own condition. I speak to one of my subordinates from the Black Rabbit Union. We have nothing left to do, so lets drink. Yes, Leader. When my subordinates go to get the booze, the sky begins to darken. As three cups of alcohol are served sometime later, the main hall door swings open, and a man dressed in black appears. Two black straight swords hang around his waist. He looks like a man swirling in darkness due to his clothes, weapons, and facial expressions. Dokgo Saeng stares at me in the upper seat and says, Zaha, your hyung is here. The greeting is so ridiculous that Ive become speechless. That crazy son of a bitch Dokgo Saeng looks behind him and tells the officials that came with him. Greet your captain. Then the scums show their faces and greet me in a disarrayed mess. Hello, captain. Hello. Long time no see. Were here. It seems like you were having a drink. Dokgo Saeng waves to the officials. Wait outside. After closing the hall door, Dokgo Saeng approaches as he scans the seated crowd. How are you doing? Youve gathered quite a number of masters, huh. Dokgo Saeng naturally takes the seat where Geum-hae had been sitting. It just happens to be next to Cha Sung-tae. When Dokgo Saeng extends an empty cup to Cha Sung-tae, Cha Sung-tae, with growing annoyance, immediately cusses. What the heck? Pour it yourself. When Dokgo Saeng pours for himself without much response, Cha Sung-tae, who has downed three consecutive cups, begins to nag at Dokgo Saeng. How dare you tell the leader, your hyung is here? Youve really lost it. Ignoring Cha Sung-taes words, Dokgo Saeng takes out a stick of daylilies. I ask Dokgo Saeng. Have you come up with a name? Fiddling with the daylily, Dokgo Saeng replies. We used to be the Black Hurricane Castle, and now were the Low-Down Sect. Were all stupid, so we couldnt come up with a name. Youre a fool to expect wittiness from us. Lets just go with Low-Down Sect. And our rules have already increased to ten. Being the head gives me a headache. It is a brief report, but a report nonetheless. Cha Sung-taes eyes only grow bigger when he hears that Dokgo Saeng is from the Black Hurricane Castle. Cha Sung-tae hurriedly averts his gaze and drinks quietly. Dokgo Saeng takes a deep hit of the daylily and blows smoke toward Cha Sung-taes face. Then Cha Sung-tae fans his hand with an annoyed look. Dokgo Saeng looks around the people gathered here and fixes his gaze on someone. Who are you? Baek-in answers the question calmly. Im White Tiger of the Twelve Generals. Dokgo Saengs mouth curls in the shape of an O. Oh, Dae Na-chals disciples. Youre alive and not dead. Instead of Baek-in, Blue Dragon retorts. You should wash up. I tap the table a few times with my hands. Stop it. I didnt ask you guys here to fight. Dokgo Saeng, how many people did you bring? Dokgo Saeng looks at me. You told me to bring a hundred people, so I only selected the best and brought 30. They are 30 people with the abilities of a hundred, so dont worry. Good job, asshole. Ultimately, Dokgo Saeng isnt asking me who we are fighting. He just smokes his joint of daylily and drinks as if he is here on a casual visit. This tastes like water. Do you guys get drunk from this? This must be a joke. Only then did the officials of the Black Rabbit Union, as well as the Twelve Generals, finally seem to adapt to the personality and mannerisms of Dokgo Saeng. No one answered because they didnt want to take up his challenge. With no one willing to answer his retort, Dokgo Saeng then asks me. Whats your plan? Nothing. Are we killing all of them? I nod my head. Kill them all. Dokgo Saeng nods and says his piece as he gets up. All right. Wake me up when the enemy comes. Ill be taking a nap. Dokgo Saeng goes to the corner of the hall, lies down in a regular posture, and closes his eyes. I ask So Gun-pyeong amid the gloomy silence. Is the moon bright today? So Gun-pyeong nods. Its bright. Just the right time to fight. Is anyone on Elder Hornless Dragons side proficient with poison? Not that I know of. This time, I ask Baek-in. Are you sure Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su are the strongest? Baek-in replies. Most likely. How are they compared to Dae Na-chal? They have their own strengths and weaknesses, but they dont fall behind Master. Then leave them alone. Ill deal with them on my own. Fight enemies that match your strength. This is going to be a long battle, so if you run into someone stronger than you, retreat. I drink another glass and then suddenly look to the front. Open the door. As my guests turn their gazes forward, So Gun-pyeong gives an order in a voice injected with internal Qi. Open the door. The main hall, the inner courtyard, the outer courtyard, and the main gate all open one after another. I point to the display stand and tell my subordinates. Bring me my mask. White Tiger, Blue Dragon, White Rooster, and I wear our Twelve General masks. Its better to wear a mask when you do bad things. Since I killed the vice leader of Cloud Rain Society, they would bring people who have seen my face. I speak as I get up. Lets go. Dokgo Saeng, who is lying down, jumps up. When I walk outside, I see that most of Dokgo Saengs men are scattered on the wall. After taking a few steps into the inner courtyard, I jump into the air and land on top of the inner courtyard door. As So Gun-pyeong mentioned, the moonlight is shining bright. Outside the premise of the Black Rabbit Union, the glints of eyes and weapons are increasing. The Twelve Generals jump to the left, while So Gun-pyeong positions himself on the right. Something cuts through the wind in the dark and flies straight at me. At soon as White Rooster wields his iron fan, an incoming weapon is deflected by his fan wind (L). A low voice rumbles in the dark. Who killed the vice leader? I dont see him here yet. A voice that I presume to be Mister Sus follows. Look, Four Generals Juniors. I will generously take you in if you take care of the person who killed our vice leader. You couldnt do anything when Dae Na-chal was here, so I didnt get why youre going as far as resisting. As your sunbae, I dont have anything against you. You better make the right choice. I murmur softly. What a nice way to separate us. White Tiger, who is standing next to me, replies as our representative. Its been a while, Mister Su. Yes, White Tiger. White Tiger speaks in a gentle tone. How can you lower your head to Elder Hornless Dragon? Master will be ashamed if he hears this in the afterlife. You were a rival he respected. Mister Su scoffs and looks around for someone. Where is our cutie Hong-shin? Is she dead? Hong-shin spits on the wall. Kyaa Tu! Mister Su says to Hong-shin with a low laugh. Ill especially spare you. Then, Dokgo Saeng, who belatedly jumps up the wall, speaks as he pulls out two black swords. Hey, you morons. I killed the vice leader. Our armed forces and, for some reason, the enemies all ignore Dokgo Saeng in unison. There are humans who get caught up too quickly when theyre crazy, and thats precisely who Dokgo Saeng is. In the meantime, the number of troops has increased. Mister Su is getting worked up and has come all the way first, and now his other troops are joining us. At this time, as the crowd split between sides, an elderly man with long white hair hanging out of a gray Jangsam walked out. Anyone can tell that it is Elder Hornless Dragon. The white-haired old mans face that is reflected in the moonlight is pale. Then an unpleasant voice goads. Dont just stand over the wall. Those who dont want to die, come over here. Unorthodox factions are all mixed up anyway, so there are no original roots. Isnt surviving the only virtue? Only the one who killed my old friend will face my wrath, so you little punks should stop struggling. It wont be so hard to decide if you think about why Dae Na-chal offered me his fortune regularly. While listening, I rub my hands and mutter. Dang, there are a lot of people here to kill today. I whisper to the brothers next to me. Hey, brothers. Yes. Dont betray me today. My condition is not good. My madness gets even wilder when I fight under the beautiful moon. I might lose myself, so dont be misled by that geezers words. I cant spare you today. Yes, we understand. I turn my back against the enemies and speak to White Tiger. Tiger Brother, lock your fingers together. Baek-in clasps his fingers in astonishment. Putting my right foot on White Tigers hands, I say. Throw me as high as you can. Let me watch the full moon. Baek-in responds with honorifics, albeit with puzzlement in his voice. Pardon? Use your internal Qi and throw me as high as you can. See you in a bit. I make eye contact with White Tiger. At last, White Tiger makes up his mind quickly and says. Ill see you later, Big Brother. I grin under the mask. Alright. Lets do that. Then Baek-in throws me into the air with both hands using his full body strength. I, too, step on White Tigers hands as hard as possible and shoot into the air. How high am I soaring? My mind feels refreshed to the point where it feels like my spirits are being lifted. Hahahahahaha I burst into laughter. As I reach the peak of my flight after soaring into a curve, I briefly enjoy the shining, beautiful full moon and land on the ground where the unorthodox factions await. Expecting various hidden weapons, palm forces, and sword winds, I wrap my right hand in the Fiery Fragrance and launch the Fire Chicken Great Handprint (aӡ). Not only the enemy and their troops but also the shining full moon opens its eyes wide. A large palm gleaming red surges through the air to stamp (D) on the troops of Elder Hornless Dragon. Chapter 64 Those hit by the Fiery Fowl Great Handprint are utterly crushed. Meanwhile, those skilled in footwork manage to avoid it, but it doesnt matter. Because I am now successfully on the front foot. As soon as I land on the ground inside the mark left by my palm, I manifest the Fire Chicken on my right hand, as if I am about to launch another Fiery Fowl Great Handprint attack. As my hands are painted red from the only place where the moonlight is reflected The scumbag faction all backs away in unison. This is only natural when they see the many bodies sprawled around them after being hit by the Fiery Fowl Great Handprint. The leaders of the enemys side have their men line up like shields and retreat further. Like this, I become the center of attention with just one attack. A man who uses an ultimate attack to get the first word instead of directly killing off those scumbags, thats just who I am. Where is Silver Phantom Yoo Sa-cheong? Hes hiding. Wheres that rat and bat-like Muak Sect Leader? He must be in hiding, too. I heard the crazy Lady Iron Toad who throws hidden weapons is also allied with you? Ah, shes here. Everyone, listen carefully. I killed the vice leader of Cloud Rain Society. I point my finger beyond their troops and at Elder Hornless Dragon, who is glaring at me. And there he is. Because of that senile old geezer who eats whatever Dae Na-chal gives him as he ages, you must die today, remember that. Phew, that was short and sweet. With this, I have managed to provoke all of the enemys figureheads. When a battle breaks out, it is ideal to be the provoking party. They tend to start blaming their allies when casualties increase. Unsheathing the Black Hares Tooth from my waist, I say. What are you looking at? Come at me all at once, you imbeciles. At that moment, I hear a thudding sound behind me. A smattering of people dies as they are caught up by Dokgo Saeng and his twin swords. The Twelve Generals also surge forward, alongside the Black Rabbit Union with So Gun-pyeong at the front, completing the siege from the rear. I smile as I shrug my shoulders in the center of the enemy. The moonlight is spectacular, my subordinates are in good spirits, and Im in a good mood too. The blade shines red as soon as the Fire Chicken is instilled into Black Hares Tooth. As I suddenly advance, the scumbags all back away. Theyre still in formation to protect their leaders, though. What Im always concerned about is the enemys psyche. Because of that, I use my footsteps and words to engage them in a mental battle. Get out of my way, dirtbags. I only kill the leaders and chiefs. When I suddenly chuckle and rush forward with a sword in hand, the scumbags, who are supposed to be human shields, collapse in horror. Im not going easy on these scumbags, of course. I shoot out Sword Wind towards the backs of the fleeing men, chase them down, and then slash my sword down like how Jang Deuk-soo would slaughter pigs. Screams and shouts are mixed in a bloody flash. Meanwhile, Brother White Tigers calm voice resounds from the back. Red Sister, take care of those folks at Big Brothers rear. The other Four Generals should work together to assist Big Brother. Baek-in seems to understand my strategy by seeing the bigger picture. I can also clearly hear the conversation of the Low-Down Sect members under Dokgo Saeng. Chief, what about us? Dokgo Saeng answers without halting his moves. Just kill them all. When Dokgo Saengs words finish, a scream shoots into the sky. So Gun-pyeong is urging his men by cursing at them. For the most part, the curses all roughly translate to various ways of telling them to get a hold of themselves. I advance with just the Black Hares Tooth in my hand to conserve some energy. When your enemies take a step back, the correct thing to do is always to advance just a little bit faster than they retreat. Since I didnt use much energy to take out the dregs, my mouth feels itchy. Today youre really unlucky, arent you? I slash a mans shoulder with Black Hares Tooth. Pwark! After cutting the neck of a man who tried to attack me from the side, I spring into the air and crush someones face with my knees. Thud! Did you think this was your chance after Dae Na-chal died? I stab Black Hares Tooth into the neck of the guy whose face I crushed with my knee. Plorkk! When I pull out Black Hares Tooth, a long line of blood splatters over the heads of those backing away. Why are you running away? Hmm? I speed up and wield my sword. As I use my sword, I continuously blabber while launching side kicks, front kicks, turning kicks, flying kicks, and palm forces. I sometimes lose track of what Im saying, but it doesnt matter. The crucial point is to talk while killing the enemy, but coherence isnt important. Theyre just words and actions that maintain the battle in my favor. Thanks to this, it is not difficult for my men to know where I am. Naturally, a charge with me at the forefront is unfolding. Why did you kill Dae Na-chal, you lunatic? Why did you kill him? I use the Great Absorption Method to grab the speaker by the collar and pull him over before asking him calmly. Why do you think I did it? I smack the stuttering mans forehead with Black Hares Tooth handle. Punch! Now, more people are stepping back whenever I turn my gaze. But I deliberately chase down the ones who are obviously backing away from me. Why do you think he died? Answer me, you bastards. For the first time, someone shouts Ack!, turns back, and runs away. I let out a scream as well as if I were mimicking the enemy. Ack! As I grab their attention, I gather up the Fire Chicken and breathe it into the blade. Haah. So hot. The Fiery Fowl Fragrance swirls around the blade. This is the Fiery Fowl Great Stride (a). The man who says his techniques aloud, thats me. In fact, its just a different name. The technique is not much different from the Fiery Fowl Great Handprint. Itll look very different for the enemies who are seeing solid red threads wrapping around my blade, though. Die. I make my way forward, swinging around the bright red threads like a whip of Fire Chicken energy. Each swing tears up four or five bodies. As I walk forward while giggling, I can feel that a third of the enemies are running away. In fact, more and more people are straying from the battle line. Some lose their necks due to Mister Su and Elder Hornless Dragon attacking them after just a few steps. I look at Mister, who is cutting the throats of his escaping subordinates, and shout. Mister Su! Mister Su stares at me with wide-open eyes. I speak to him as if Ive known Mister Su for a long time. Why didnt you believe me, sir? I killed your vice leader. Werent their heads split open with an ax? Am I wrong? It was an ax, right? Mister Sus face turns bright red. That nutjob I trudge towards Mister Su with a Black Hares Tooth dripping blood in my hands. They were killed using the ax from the incinerator. Im the culprit. The officials of the Cloud Rain Society are blocking the path to Mr. Su as I rush in. Now I can clearly hear the enemys chatter. Mister Su, please stay calm. There are still more of us. That is Elder Hornless Dragons voice. Everyone, gather up. Hes the leader. This voice must be Lady Iron Toad. But in the end, Yoo Sa-cheong didnt speak up. I ask them a question as I deal with the officials of the Cloud Rain Society. Officials, wheres the guy called Yoo Sa-cheong? That guy mustve set the stage. I cut up an officials podao like a dumpling with Black Hares Tooth and carved a straight red line into his face. Kyak! As I plunge Black Hares Tooth into his throat, I yell. Yoo Sa-cheong. Ill put up a wanted poster in the central district. Its no use in running away. Im going to have fun hunting you down. Ill especially split you up with an ax. A sudden surge of palm force gushes in from the left. Booooooooom! I respond accordingly, using my left palm as I am shoved to the side due to wielding a sword. Of all things, the direction I am retreating towards is where a meteor hammer is coming in quick. At that moment, I am forced to swing Black Hares Tooth to hit the meteor hammer, which then wraps itself around my blade. I forgot. Ah, a Meteor Wanderer. Its nice to meet you. At the same time, something flashes in front of me. A hidden weapon that I believe to be an iron toad flies by. As I try to pull my sword away from the meteor hammer, I turn my body in a somersault to avoid the incoming iron toad. At the same time, I exchange palm force attacks with Elder Hornless Dragon, who has finally appeared from the left with his white hair fluttering all around. As he is being cautious, Elder Hornless Dragon doesnt come close even though he is launching both palm wind and palm force at me. I smirk. Old geezer. At that moment, the tight ropes around the meteor hammer break away from Black Hares Tooth. Hong-shin had appeared and cut the ropes with a dagger. As I collide palm forces with Elder Hornless Dragon one more time, I let out a giggle. Subsequently, Baek-in, Cheong-jin, Baek-yu, and Hong-shin, arriving after killing dozens of scumbags, take position behind me and stare. Sometimes, everything is decided in a moment (һ) during war. There are also times when starkness and competition repeat themselves, such as what is happening now. In a state of starkness, I touch my mask and look around. We are lacking in terms of numbers at the start, but the corpses lying on the floor are all the enemies. Cha Sung-tae, an underling official who has followed me without killing anyone so far, points at a guy and shouts. Hey, right there! The crowds eyes gather on Cha Sung-tae. Cha Sung-tae then speaks with great confidence. Youre the Silver Phantom, Yoo Sa-cheong, right? Cha Sung-tae stares at a plainly dressed, normal-looking man who looks bored. Shaking blood off the Black Hares Tooth, I ask Cha Sung-tae. How can you be sure thats him? Cha Sung-tae replies as if he sees through the truth. Hes standing there doing nothing, like me. In this mess. Youre quite the detective (̽). I cant think of an idiom while appreciating Cha Sung-taes greatness, so I just randomly utter out. I guess even dog shit is useful. Good job. Thank you, sir. Even though I am staring at him, I can see no facial changes on the face of the man who Cha Sung-tae is accusing of being Yoo Sa-cheong. If he is a scumbag, usually, hed already look scared. Suddenly, judging that theres no use hiding his identity, Yoo Sa-cheong smiles. He looks average when expressionless, but when he smiles, he seems like a different person. Yoo Sa-cheong then tells me. Youre not the leader of the Black Rabbit Union. Did you find out about my identity faster, or was it me who saw through you first? You cant find me just by my name. Keep fighting since both sides have laid your claims. We have to decide the winner. Yoo Sa-cheong is speaking as if his identity is greater than everyone else. Surprisingly, Yoo Sa-cheong even threatens his allies, the Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su. Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su. Is this how youre gonna fight after taking my money? I think it hasnt been too long since you bragged about conquering the South and compensating me handsomely after raising your forces. For a moment, I choose to refrain from taking off my mask. Would you look at this guy? I observe Yoo Sa-cheongs aura closely. He may look young at first, but upon closer inspection, he seems to be over 40. Through his posture and gaze, there are signs that hes skilled. Meanwhile, I have a sudden thought. If you look closely at the world, a person who lends you money is the worst. Rather than killing them right away after catching them, its best to make them suffer for a long time. He is a man who would torture unconditionally and find out everything he has to know. This is an assumption without any specific or solid proof. Because Im a man who does things without foundation or proof. As if the real ringleader has just been revealed, Yoo Sa-cheong issues an order. Then keep fighting until the winner is decided. You unorthodox faction pests. Chapter 65 As soon as I heard what Yoo Sa-cheong said, I became offended. I cant help but feel so. Until now, I felt like a general leading an army, but Yoo Sa-cheongs words downgraded my status to that of a Horse in Korean chess. I fight if you tell me to stop, and stop if you tell me to continue. That is a consistent mindset of mine. I follow that mindset exactly in reply to what Yoo Sa-cheong said. Fight until a winner is decided how dare you order me? I raise one hand up slightly and say. I propose a truce. ! Big Brother? Leader? Both enemies and allies all look at me together. I lower my voice gradually. Good, weve now confirmed that Yoo Sa-cheong is the one behind this. Should I say were all deceived by Yoo Sa-cheong? Its fine that youre a gambler. But I wont let a gambling house owner slide under my nose. The owner of the gambling house makes the most money, after all. We dont even know how much he makes. My proposal is simple. A temporary truce. Yoo Sa-cheong replies with a smile. Youre not making any sense. Fair point. However, Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su will suffer the most losses if we continue this fight. Elder Hornless Dragon asks me with a pale expression. How come? Mister Su also replies. Ive never suffered losses in my life. I nod while looking at the two. Of course, you wont suffer losses if you divide the southern region. Youve probably counted your odds from your perspective, but I am different. Most importantly, that guy Yoo Sa-cheong isnt the one leading the troops. Thats the key. I guarantee that more than half of you will die in my hands if this fight continues. Of course, my men will also die. But only one person has nothing to lose from the start. And thats Yoo Sa-cheong who started all this. Yoo Sa-cheong intervenes. Whats your point? Yoo Sa-cheong mustve convinced you two that taking control of the South is beneficial. In the process, most of your men will die at my hands. But I wont die. In the end, our subordinates are the ones dying in this fight. Yoo Sa-cheong interrupts. So what are you trying to say? Get to the point. The point is no one will face losses with a truce. The money received from Yoo Sa-cheong is still intact, right? Hong-shin raises her hand. Im sorry, Big Brother, what do you mean by the money received from Yoo Sa-cheong is still intact? This is a fake trade of giving and taking. Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su received a large sum of money from Yoo Sa-cheong to their respective factions. If they want to pay him back, they will have to replace it with the wealth earned from reigning over the South. Its a waste to return the money you received, but its not a waste to pay off your debt by stealing from someone else. Do you understand what I mean? I understand. Yoo Sa-cheong is taking advantage of this. Give a lump sum of money, and tell them to invade the South to pay him back. Kill two birds with stone But the point is, I repeat, Yoo Sa-cheong loses nothing. He didnt bring in troops today, fight, nor did he come with his fellow masters. What is the cost of losing their subordinates? Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su failed to consider the cost of losing their troops. All right, thats it for analyzing the status quo. I ramble on while staring at my surroundings. The person Im targeting is neither Elder Hornless Dragon nor Mister Su. Fellow enemies and allies, all you must do are stay still. I grin from under my mask. First of all, let me have Yoo Sa-cheong. Im a man of my word. If you accept my proposal, Ill take off my mask right now. I might be disadvantaged, but Ill sacrifice at least that much to catch Yoo Sa-cheong. Just so you know, Yoo Sa-cheong will continue to persuade you to fight. Now lets listen to what he has to say. . Yoo Sa-cheong is clearly about to provoke and threaten Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su to go on with the battle but is stopped by my words. In the end, Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su look at Yoo Sa-cheong with grim faces. Then Yoo Sa-cheong frowns and says, Youre going to listen to him? I burst into laughter at once. Hahahahahahaha. I giggle for a long time and point my finger at Yoo Sa-cheong. See? Told you. I immediately stop laughing and order. Let me catch Yoo Sa-cheong. Its not too late to fight after that. As soon as I finish speaking, I take off the Black Rabbit mask and hand it to Red Monkey. Hong-shin then addresses me as she puts on the Black Rabbits mask. Thank you, Big Brother. I reveal my face and ask the crowd. Anyone here seen me before? Would anyone recognize the errand boy of Ilyang? Definitely not. I have already borne the losses. I have to tell you that if I walked around concealing my face, Im confident I can assassinate half of your forces. Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su. You decide. Yoo Sa-cheong looks at Elder Hornless Dragon. Can you handle it, Elder-sunbae? Elder Hornless Dragon responds. Did you really think of me as a jol () in Korean chess, Yoo Sa-cheong? Of course not. Elder Hornless Dragon looks around and says. Ill make a counteroffer. I wont accept a truce immediately. Well have the Southern Region unorthodox faction, the Ihwa unorthodox faction, and all my troops encircle this place. Let that talkative fellow and Yoo Sa-cheong have a duel. Elder Hornless Dragon then looks at me. Whichever one of you dies, I will fall back. Once you bear the sin of killing Yoo Sa-cheong, a real temporary truce will fall in place. What do you think, Mister Su? Mister Su replies briefly with a smile. Youre right, sunbae. If Yoo Sa-cheong wins, they will infiltrate and conquer the South. But theyll pull a scheme and pull back if I was the one who won instead. As expected, veterans of Kangho never have any intention of incurring losses. But theres something that these guys are mistaken about. I was never the Horse[^n1] (R) in chess. Even if Elder Hornless Dragon plots this way, I have my own plan. Lets do it. 1 on 1 duels are always welcomed. White Tiger approaches to stop me. Big Brother, it looks like they want to analyze your skills through the duel. I lock eyes with Baek-in. Really? Theyre pretty smart. As I smile faintly, White Tiger backs off after seeing my expression. Elder Hornless Dragon gives out orders to all the troops. Spread out widely. Form a circle so no one can escape. Dont fight rashly, and make sure you and your opponent arent standing too close. Start the duel. Mister Su adds. Spread it wider. Whoever runs away will be killed. Yoo Sa-cheong turns around briefly and looks at the officials of the Cloud Rain Society and Lady Iron Toad. Elder Hornless Dragon also steps forward as if he will be the one to block any escape route. Yoo Sa-cheong grins. Have you all gone insane? Elder Hornless Dragon answers. Why? You just have to win. Nothing has changed. Will you step up or hide? Thats the only difference. If youre so powerful, you should prove it with action, not words. I dont really care whether they are having an argument as I approach Yoo Sa-cheong openly from the back, moving in like a cat. Yoo Sa-cheong scratches his chin and turns around as he pulls his sword from his waist. As I lower my posture, the tip of my hair is cut off by a sword and flutters in the air. I extend Black Hares Tooth out in a straight line. Clang! After deflecting Black Hares Tooth, Yoo Sa-cheong uses a Quick Sword (섦) and rushes to me. With lips in a tight line, Yoo Sa-cheong fends off my moonlight-reflected sword and stabs forward in a flash, launching an Illusion Sword (Ӱ) which makes his sword look like it is split into three. It is an attack method that utilizes sword energy () and an afterimage (). His swordsmanship is stable, the sword is swift, and his waist remains firm despite moving smoothly. I flick the sword away with Black Hares Tooth and think. He used to be in an orthodox faction. This isnt some sword technique he picked up in the streets. There are traces that he intensely trained in this specific swordsmanship for at least a decade. He acts like a bystander who flaunts his money, but his concealed skills are decent. Even I cant fight back hastily until I observe the technique from start to finish. As this happens, I admire the ancestors and founders of orthodox factions who created this martial arts system. In my thoughts, I can admire his martial arts. But theres no chance that he can recognize my martial arts. Because my martial arts have no foundation. There are many martial arts that I created while mixing the martial arts of third-rate blade techniques, third-rate swordsmanship, scything graves, real battles, sparring gambles, secretly learned martial arts peeked over shoulders, third-rate, and second-rate manuals, Strolling Golden Turtle Technique, and the Crazy Monks martial arts. The martial arts I learned while running away, the stabbing movements realized as my body was slashed here and there, and the process I struggled to escape from Qi Deviation were all parts of me. With no source, the entire process of survival has become my foundation. As I deflect all of Yoo Sa-cheongs attacks, I watch the process of his sword technique flowing like water from the first to the last. Later in the movement, he merges the initial tactics with the latter ones, transforming and restructuring them as he attacks me. I deliberately back away and push towards my allies side. I then stood in place, blocking all of Yoo Sa-cheongs attacks. A man who holds out against aggressive, offensive attacks made by a swordsman from the orthodox factions by using an iron wall defense, thats me. If hes not stupid, hell soon realize As I stay on defense this whole time, I address him with a grin. Faster, faster, swing faster. Too slow, faster, faster. Youve already used that sword technique three times. There are cases where you cant run away from attacking as if you are possessed. Thats precisely Yoo Sa-cheongs predicament now. Instantly, I generate a Fiery Fowl Great Handprint using my left hand. Yoo Sa-cheong, swinging his sword at a tremendous speed, instantly cuts the palm-shaped force into three pieces. At the moment when I shot out the Fiery Fowl Great Handprint There are times when real power is compressed and spread out as an attack. Deceive your opponent by creating only a false illusion like a cloud. Of course, it is difficult to create an illusion with Qi (). But just as Yoo Sa-cheong created phantom swords, I can also create a false image with Qi. Then, as Yoo Sa-cheong cuts down the big afterimage 3 times I dash in like the wind, covering the short distance, throw Black Hares Tooth, and surge obliquely inside his guard when he raises his sword. Clang! I use the Great Absorption Method with my left hand () and the Wooden Fowl Finger Technique with my right hand (). Yoo Sa-cheong is sucked in and forcefully bound by the Great Absorption Method as he has lost his balance. I then use the Wooden Fowl Finger Technique on his shoulders. When his arm holding the sword becomes stiff, I let go of him and jab Yoo Sa-cheongs pressure points with my thumb and index finger. Rigid shoulders, a stiffened neck, his mouth sealed shut, and every connecting vein from the waist down, I inject Wooden Fowl Energy in that order. Tak, tak, tak, tak! I look at Yoo Sa-cheong, who is now standing rigid, before turning to Elder Hornless Dragon and saying. From now on, this guy is my prisoner. He is my puppet, my slave, and also my mens prisoner. Whether I torture or kill him, its up to me, so dont tell me what to do. I use the Great Absorption Method to pick up Black Hares Tooth on the floor and continue. How cocky, fucking assholes. As I am talking, I feel the urge to tease him more, so I let my mouth run. Since youre so prideful, youre gonna get handed over like this as the ringleader. This is Elder Hornless Dragons fault, foolishness, ego, a judgment gone wrong while trying to rebuild his pride as a veteran of Kangho, and an old geezers senile choice. I pretend to spit water out like an executioner on Black Hares Tooth blade and dance around the frozen Yoo Sa-cheong. As I dance around with my sword, Hong-shin asks. Big Brother, are you gonna kill him? Dunno. I wanna try being an executioner. A sword dance under the night moon, an executioner in the moonlight, an errand boy of Ilyang, an emancipator of the Black Hurricane Castle, leader of the Black Rabbit Union thats who I am. I seriously engage in the sword dance in front of Yoo Sa-cheong, who can only keep his eyes open. The clouds part, letting the moonlight shine on me. [^n1]: The Gorse can be seen as the equivalent counterpart of the Knight due to their similar movements Chapter 66 Chapter 66 C Thats The Problem As I hover around the stiffened Yoo Sa-cheong while twirling around in my executioner dance, Hong-shin says to me. Big Brother, those bastards are slipping away, though. What? I halt the dance as if forgetting about it completely and turn around. As I do, some of the fleeing scumbags land on their butts, jump back up and scatter away like a bunch of defeated soldiers. Meanwhile, Elder Hornless Dragon is giving me a direct stare. I ask Elder Hornless Dragon, who is faking his composure. Old geezer, got something to say? Elder Hornless Dragon answers. Im just maintaining a truce as promised. White Tiger steps forward and says. Big Brother, lets kill all of them. Its fine. A truce is a truce. A siege defence is a siege defence. The faces and atmosphere of the retreating men, the faces of the chiefs trying to keep calm. Enjoy it while you can. When Elder Hornless Dragon begins to retreat, Mister Su couldnt help but follow. As the de facto fake leader, he says. You, well meet again soon. I reply with a grin. Only those who come to me first will be treated as a defeated general. Go back and slowly think about it. Will you have a chance to survive once you get back? Think about it. After the enemy retreats, I look back at my subordinates. Tend to the wounded. Its late at night, so lets go inside. Wrap up the siege, and Gun-pyeong, set up the patrols and switch shifts with another official. Understood. I slap the frozen Yoo Sa-cheong on the face and say. Youll work hard too, slave. The night air is cold. Lets head inside. One of the Black Rabbit Union subordinates approaches and carries Yoo Sa-cheong. I call out to Cha Sung-tae. Sung-tae. Yes. I dont really have anything to say, so I just put my arms on Cha Sung-taes shoulder and head toward the Black Rabbit Union. Lets go. I sit on the high seat and down a shot of alcohol. In the meantime, the officials roam freely around the hall. I let the wounded get treated, the sleepy ones sleep, and the hungry ones eat. Watching the busy officials bustling around, Yoo Sa-cheong wordlessly sits beside me in captivity. After a while, the generals and officials return and fill their seats. Everyone is curious as to who Yoo Sa-cheong is. Having to wash the blood off his face and body and appearing last, Dokgo Saeng smacks Yoo Sa-cheong in the head while passing by and sits next to him. Is everyone here? So Gun-pyeong replies to my question. Chief Oh had some injuries, so he went to bed first. Putting down his glass as if his temper is wearing thin, Dokgo Saeng suddenly slaps Yoo Sa-cheong again. With that slap, Yoo Sa-cheong turns. I look at the Twelve Generals. Did any of the generals get hurt? None. Were all right. Cha Sung-tae also reports his condition. Im fine, too. I nod my head. You should be. So Gun-pyeong asks about the grander strategy. What should we do about Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su? Patience. They are suffering greater loss compared to us. They will feel uncomfortable sleeping, eating, and going to the bathroom for the next two days. Fear and anxiety will arrive after provocation, confusion, and defeat. Theyll hold out since theyre hard-headed, but their men will be shaken. And then theyll grow weaker than before. Surprisingly, White Rooster utters. Your dance was lovely, Big Brother. I should have done the fan dance next to you. I grin. Lets do that next time. Yeah, sure. White Tiger glares at So Gun-pyeong and asks. What about him, Big Brother? What do you brothers think? Baek-in brings up Yoo Sa-cheongs sword technique first. The technique he used is not from unorthodox factions. Explain to the others. People like Sung-tae might not be aware. White Tiger briefly explains. I feel like he had trained his posture intensely before learning the sword technique. Thinking back to when he first started to fight you, his flow was consistent. Hes not a swordsman who learned a cheap technique. I agree. Dokgo Saeng scowls at Yoo Sa-cheong. This punk is from the orthodox factions? The fierce palm of the solitary high school student hits the cheek of the Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technology graduate again. When the agency does not open its mouth, Hongshin, who is curious, asks me a question. Big Brother, did you also shut his vocal cords? Maybe. Should I undo it? You cant. And I cant undo it either. Ive done a lot of jabbing, but I didnt practice much because I was too lazy to undo it. I didnt inject much Qi, so itll wear off soon. Truth is, I didnt memorize the pressure points properly. I just know roughly what effects it has after tapping a spot. I learned how to do it for attacking, so I didnt try to learn how to undo it. Hong-shin speaks out without much thought. Sealing the vocal cords can be quite dangerous. He might become a mute if we dont release it soon. I answer Red Monkeys words after a short pause. Its none of my business. Yes, sir. I chat with my subordinates without much thought. We share some leftover food from the kitchen and drink together, laughing and giggling to pass the time. As an hour flies past My men report from outside the main hall. Leader, the Green Mount Sect Leader has surrendered his weapons in front of the gate. What shall we do? What do you mean? If hes here, let him in. As the officials and generals look at each other with puzzled expressions, the Green Mount Sect Leader enters the hall with two disciples. Green Mount Sect Leader bows with a fist salute and says. Hello Leader. Im Yang Jae-kyung. I nod slightly and reply. Welcome, Leader Yang. The Green Mount Sect Leader then speaks with an awkward smile. I dont know where to start Please, feel free to speak. The Green Mount Sect will never see you as an enemy. We made a mistake due to a lack of information. If possible The leader is stuttering so much, so I just nod my head. Lets do that. Thank you for your generosity. When the Sect Leader beckons his disciples, the two disciples put down boxes at my feet and open the cover. Inside the large boxes, gold and silver that occupy half the space each are shining. I click my tongue and say. You dont have to. Between us, tsk. No, how much is all this? Thats amazing. I shouldve brought some from the Black Hurricane Castle. Isnt this too much, Leader? I close the cover with my foot and stand up. Its no good to go overboard on the first meeting. An apology is sufficient. Thats how people live. Dont you think so, Leader? When I tap him on the shoulder, the startled Green Mount Sect Leader jumps in slight surprise and nods. Yes, youre right. Sometimes enemies become allies, and allies become enemies in Kangho. If youre unlucky, you get beaten to death, so dont take it personally. Ah, yes. Ill keep that in mind. We will not answer to Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su ever again. Thats good to hear. This is just a small gift, but we arrived here a little late to prepare this. Its already late at night, so I will take my leave. Take care. You brought all this in the middle of the night. Thank you. The Green Mount Sect Leader hurriedly salutes and turns around with his disciples. I call to him as soon as he steps out of the main hall. Leader Yang. Oh, yes. Lets have a meal together next time. Ahaha, sure. See you then, Leader. When Green Mount Sect Leader leaves, and the main hall door is closed once again, silence falls in the room. . Dokgo Saeng, who has been watching all this time, looks at me. It feels like he has something to say, so I ask. What? Dokgo Saeng replies with a deadpan. Thats fucking hilarious. I have no idea what Dokgo Saeng is thinking about, so he might think its funny or find the Green Mount Sect Leaders action hilarious. But when Dokgo Saeng says that this is funny with a straight face, the generals and officials also burst into laughter. Hahahahaha I end up laughing too. Yeah, that was funny. While everyone is busy laughing, Yoo Sa-cheong has a grim expression on his face. Naturally, everyones eyes fell on Yoo Sa-cheong. Dokgo Saeng watches Yoo Sa-cheong. Why arent you laughing? You cant move your face? When Dokgo Saeng raises his hand as if he is going to slap him again, Yoo Sa-cheongs face trembles. Dokgo Saeng pretends to put his hand down but then slaps him relentlessly. Slap! I dont really care how Dokgo Saeng treats the slave. He has the right to do so since he brought his men here and fought for his life. With my hand propping up my chin, I think. Did the Green Mount Sect Leader come to test the waters? My subordinate continues their announcement as if the Green Mount Sect Leader is taking turns with someone. Leader, Lady Iron Toad is here. I scold my subordinate in a slightly raised voice. The night air is cold. You should let her in without asking me. Hurry, go invite her in. With a stiff expression on her face, Lady Iron Toad enters the hall. She looks more troubled than Leader Yang, but her words seem stuck in her throat. I take the initiative and say. Lady Iron Toad, I almost didnt manage to say my lines due to the fierce hidden weapon you threw. Youre really skilled at throwing. At last, Lady Iron Toad speaks. Yes, Leader. I apologize. I mean Please go on. My disciples and I will part from Elder Hornless Dragons side and head back to the Yuhwa Valley (񻨹). I will spread the word to those around me to be careful not to interfere with the Black Rabbit Union. I hope you can overlook my mistakes today. I nod my head. Well, it can happen in fights. Sure. Is the Yuhwa Valley Leader well? Yes, he is busy with martial arts training. As his wife, you must be busy making money instead. Now that we know each other, I hope Yuhwa Valley will not be enemies with me in the future. Lady Iron Toad nods. All right. Its already late, be careful on your way back. Hesitating, Lady Iron Toad takes something out and puts it on the table. Leader, Ill gift you the Moonlight Dagger (ذ) that Ive cherished since my younger days as a token of my words. Eyyy, you dont have to Tsk, Ill use it well. I have always wanted to carry a dagger with me. This is perfect for self-defence. It looks sharp. Although it is short, this is a fine item that can cut through long swords like they are dumplings. Its perfect for assassination. Kangho people like us have expensive tastes. Ill use it well. Please send my regards to the Valley Leader. Yes, then Ill be off. When Lady Iron Toad leaves, Hong-shin asks curiously. Is anyone still coming? I look at So Gun-pyeong. Go check outside if any of those scumbags are around, send them away with threats or something. I dont want to deal with them. Oh, you can also take all the bribes. So Gun-pyeong stands up. Understood. As soon as So Gun-pyeong goes out, I have another glass and slap Yoo Sa-cheong, who is sitting next to me, on the cheek. Being tied to the chair, Yoo Sa-cheong falls over with the slapping sound. Thud ! One of the officials near the end seat rushes up and props the chair back up. I speak to my men. Its late. Go find an empty room and rest. The servants are not here, so there will be a lot of empty rooms. Ill consider whether I want to kill him or torture him. All right. My subordinates rise from their seats. After a while, only Yoo Sa-cheong, myself, and the Moonlight Dagger remain in the spacious hall. I tap the flashy dagger with my finger and say to myself. The Doctor said I should go easy sometimes, but its not easy after trying. Its awkward. The guys who came to apologize were awkward. I felt awkward, too. Ive been thinking about Moyong Baeks request while drinking since a while ago. Its not easy to turn over a new leaf and live a different life from my past. But my doctor said that for my own good, so Ill try. Dont you think so? . Wow, Ive changed a lot, too. I used to only beat to death, crush, and kill my enemies. Whats going on here? What happened to me? Is this what they call the night changes fast (֮)? Or is it the change of fate (ɣ̺)? Did I get both wrong? . I look into Yoo Sa-cheongs eyes and ask coldly. Whats with your eyes? Do I look uneducated? You think Im stupid? . Yoo Sa-cheongs mouth wriggles. Are the pressure points wearing off? Sweat is dripping on the bridge of his nose as Yoo Sa-cheong squirms continuously. Downing a glass, I sigh with a serious look. Problem is whether I should spare or kill you. I unsheathe the Moonlight Dagger and put it on the table for now. Chapter 67 Chapter 67 C Shut Up And Eat Your Meal I stare at Moonlight Dagger as it sits on the table. When I was young, there was a fun hyung who lived in my hometown. Like, you know, a cheerful, funny hyung whos also nice to you. He was also manly. . This is how a duel took place in our neighbourhood. Put a dagger on the table and talk it out, and if it doesnt work out, they can grab the dagger and stab the other party. Its a duel, but people dont die every time. Usually, just one or two fingers were severed. It looked quite cruel to me when I was a child. People in my hometown never backed down from a fight. I look at Yoo Sa-cheong. One day, that hyung died on the table. It wasnt surprising. My grandfather took care of the body, and I brought a cloth over and wiped the table. But the cloth kept getting stuck on the table. When I looked closer, there were dozens of knife marks on the table. At least that hyung didnt die from fighting poorly, I thought. I cleaned the table more than once a day, and I thought about how I should feel about this every time I did. . I cant wipe the table properly because of the knife marks. . I cant recall his name. He was an orphan, so its not like I can ask around. Anyway, it happened way back, but the guy who killed my hyung died the same way to my hands. I unsheathe Moonlight Dagger. In the end, he came back here and got killed by me. Yoo Sa-cheong, whose entire body is bound, starts to twitch. Hes a grown man, yet tears are running down his face. Yoo Sa-cheong finally opens his mouth. P-Please spare me! Oh, the pressure points finally released? Save me. Ill tell you everything I know. I will cooperate unconditionally. I dont know what youre going to tell me, but Im not interested. I reach out with Moonlight Dagger and cut off his restraints. The thick rope is easily cut off as the knife cuts through them like dumplings. I grab Yoo Sa-cheongs arm and put it on the table. Youre still not able to move. If you dont get your act together, youll go into the state of Qi Deviation. Breathe in deeply. Grabbing his hand tightly, I say. Also, why would I kill you? I use the Great Absorption Method on him. Gnhngh Yoo Sa-cheongs pure Qi enters my body through my palm. I briefly pause the Great Absorption Method, then send out a string of righteous energy to scout into Yoo Sa-cheongs body. Then, I resume using the Great Absorption Method. Moments later, the string of righteous energy returns to my body. Tears, snot, and saliva run down Yoo Sa-cheongs face. Watching Yoo Sa-Cheong, I halt the Great Absorption Method and huff out a breath. Now Im the one in dire need of doing some Qi circulation. I can feel the extreme Yang energy seethe through my Dantian and rise to the top of my head, which causes my face to flush and my sight becomes red. I flip over Yoo Sa-cheongs hands and plunge Moonlight Dagger through one of them. With a stabbing sound, Moonlight Dagger penetrates through his palm and lodges itself into the table below. As Yoo Sa-cheong lets out a long shriek of pain, I say to him. Shut up. If you wake Dokgo Saeng up, hell come here and chop your head into pieces. Wouldnt it be better to endure the pain than die? Kngh I glare sideways at Yoo Sa-cheong before sitting in a lotus position on the chair and begin to use the Qi breathing technique. Bring it on if youre confident. Thats how the people in our neighbourhood fight. I abandon all thoughts of Yoo Sa-cheong and begin to suck out power from the Heavenly Pearl to use for Qi circulation. Although its only been a few moments, Ive burned through a considerable amount of righteous energy and am slowly accumulating internal Qi. Nevertheless, the fact that my Strolling Golden Turtle Technique is currently stopped at the Fire Chicken stage leaves a weird taste in my mouth. While it is a martial art that becomes more difficult to achieve a breakthrough after the middle stages At this moment, if I exert myself, I can break through the Fire Chicken limit. But I refuse to rush it since that goes against the overall principle of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique. When I wake up after calmly finishing a full Qi circulation, Yoo Sa-cheong has already stopped his hands bleeding in his own way. Yoo Sa-cheong says to me with a pale face. I stopped the blood for now. It seems Yoo Sa-cheong has finally come to his senses. Asking me to spare him and saying that he would tell me everything did not work for me. I look at Yoo Sa-cheong and answer briefly. Good job. Yes. As I pull out Moonlight Dagger, Yoo Sa-cheong quickly tears the hem of his shirt and uses his functional hand and mouth to hurriedly wrap up his wound. I pour alcohol into an empty glass and serve it to Yoo Sa-cheong. Yoo Sa-cheong can finally drink a glass of alcohol with his normal hand. He frowns with a profound expression as if hes finally gotten a sip of water after a long walk in the desert. After downing a cup, Yoo Sa-cheong tells me with bloodshot eyes. Thank you. I then begin speaking to him as I take another drink. The reason why Green Mount Sect Leader and Lady Iron Toad came and bowed their heads was because they lived in the same area as us. They know I can exterminate the Green Mount Sect or set the Yuhwa Valley on fire, so they let go of their pride and came to apologize. They didnt apologize to me because they were less proud. They just felt more responsible because they have disciples to protect and a family to feed. Pointing my finger at Yoo Sa-cheong, I continue. But I dont really care about you. Youre a gambling house owner. Yes, thats right. The only way to live. Please go on. I have already killed Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su. I dont see the point of letting you live unless you make yourself useful. Those two attacked me first, but they were bound to get in my way anyway. Thats also why I killed Dae Na-chal and the leader of the Black Hurricane Castle. Just like my hyung, who was killed by a knife, Im an orphan and have nothing to protect. All the men gathered here? Dae Na-chals disciples, the Black Hurricane Castles scums, and a bunch of men whose leader I killed. You dont even deserve to be my subordinate, and your chances of surviving in my hands are low. Say, how will you persuade me when your life depends solely on how you will deal with Elder Hornless Dragon and Mister Su? While thinking hard about how to answer, Yoo Sa-cheong bangs his head on the table as if passing out. Thud! I sigh. Tsk. Why are there more and more people passing out while talking to me? Should I consult Doctor Moyong on this At that moment, Dokgo Saeng walks out from inside the hall and asks. Have you talked to him? He fainted while we were chatting. Dokgo Saeng lays a finger on Yoo Sa-cheongs neck. Hes breathing. Dokgo Saeng stares at me and says. Go get some sleep. Your eyes are red. Its unusually purple. Only then did I rise from my seat. Im off to sleep. When my subordinates come and tell me to eat, I wash my face and return to the main hall. Even though the servants are not around, the table is full of food my subordinates prepared. I scratch my head and then sit down to eat. Each and every one of them also sit in the same seats as yesterday and starts eating. So Gun-pyeong asks a question as he eats his food. Shall we start with Elder Hornless Dragon? Or Mister Su? I reply while chewing on the vegetables. Dunno. Baek-in asks. Where is Yoo Sa-cheong? Dont know. Eat first. Im a man who doesnt know many things. While we are eating, the main hall door opens, and Dokgo Saeng and Yoo Sa-cheong come in together. The eyes of the officials and generals are fixated on the pair. Dokgo Saeng approaches first, pulls out a chair, and tells the stumbling Yoo Sa-cheong. Sit down. Yoo Sa-cheong greets everyone and sits down. Thank you. Everyone shakes their heads and continues to eat. He came all freshened up after being beaten to a pulp. And Dokgo Saeng is now caressing Yoo Sa-cheong. Lets eat. Eat a lot, too. Yes. How many times did he get beat to make him lose so much spirit? Luckily Yoo Sa-cheong did not die. I snap at Dokgo Saeng while I eat. How can a person be so cruel? Dokgo Saeng answers. Dont tell that lame joke to me. Its not funny at all. Dokgo Saeng explains the state of Yoo Sa-cheong to others. Our leader stabbed his hand. I also heard that his internal Qi got sucked dry. He was so scared of our leader that it was hard to talk to him. I only gave him a few slaps in the face. Yoo Sa-cheong, am I wrong? Yoo Sa-cheong replies while eating. You are correct. Dokgo Saeng is uttering strange words to the audience. Leader has his hands full. Ill take care of this guy from now on. So take note. Perhaps Dokgo Saeng has a nasty personality as no one answers him. Suddenly, Dokgo Saeng strokes Yoo Sa-cheongs back. Eat up. Yes, sir. For a moment, I got goosebumps on my back. As Dokgo Saeng keeps talking down to me, Cha Sung-tae intervenes. Youve worked hard, Dokgo Saeng. ! At that moment, the crowds gaze shifts between Cha Sung-tae and Dokgo Saeng. Dokgo Saeng replies with an indifferent look. Manager Cha, youre having a hard time just wasting your food, too. As everyone giggles at Dokgo Saengs words, Cha Sung-taes face flushes red. Everyone is eating without saying much, but Yoo Sa-cheong then says. Leader. What. If you allow it, Ill bring my troops to the vanguard Ill come back quickly with Dokgo Saeng. I glare at Yoo Sa-cheong and reply. Shut up and eat your meal. Yes. As I finish up my meal, I tell So Gun-pyeong. Now that weve filled our stomachs lets drink in the daylight. So Gun-pyeong grins and says. Shall we? Im currently the leader of the poorest people in the world, with no plans, no direction. All I have is a grand strategy in my head and a belief in who would die at my hands. During the drinking session, Baek-yu tells me. Big Brother, I will partake in a fan dance. Sure. Baek-yu dances a fan dance after drinking, Dokgo Saeng begins picking on Yoo Sa-cheong again, and Cha Sung-tae often stares at Dokgo Saeng with a dazed look while drinking. Meanwhile, Hong-shin sings as Baek-yu dances. Baek-in is drinking with his usual elegance. Cheong-jin is also looking at these morons with distaste. It is a real mess. I feel increasingly intoxicated as I look at my subordinates and click my tongue. Jeez, pathetic bastards. What did Dokgo Saeng do to bully Yoo Sa-cheong? As he silently listens to the conversation, Yoo Sa-cheong is eventually drowning in his tears. I am waiting for the enemys power to weaken on its own, so theres nothing much to do now. Eventually, I sit in a lotus position on the chair and meditate in the middle of this chaotic mess. Hong-shins singing voice fades. Dokgo Saengs insults and Yoo Sa-cheongs sobbing disappears. . Amid the sleepiness, drunkenness, and meditation Before I realize it, I am sitting in the old Zaha Inn. . . . Zaha, give me one bowl of noodles. The neighbour hyung enters the guest inn dressed in white from head to toe and sits down. I bring a clean cloth and proceed to clean the table that hyung is sitting at. The table is cleaned well, perhaps because it is clean to begin with. Hyung, where are you going? Youre all dressed up. While hyung eats the noodles without saying anything, I sit across from him since its been a while since I saw him. Finishing the soup to its last drop, hyung asks me a question as he puts down the bowl. You dont remember my name? Im disappointed. What was your name? Hyung reveals his name, but I gloss over it without even remembering. Ah, thats right. Now I remember. Thank you for the meal. As hyung is getting up after paying for his meal, I ask. Where are you going, all dressed up? Are you going on a date? Hyung shakes his head and smiles brightly. Woman, my foot, its time for a fresh start. Are you going to stop fighting? You should get revenge against Cho Yi-gyul. Revenge? Im already dead. Anyway, thanks. Im off. I lock eyes with hyung for some time and grin. A fresh start, good luck with that. Hyung grins in front of Zaha Guest Inn. Yeah. . . . As soon as I open my eyes, I let out a long, trembling breath. It was a strange dream, but it didnt feel strange at all. Im just thinking that even the neighbour hyung is getting a fresh start. The corner of my lips goes up as I look at my subordinates. Chapter 68 Chapter 68 C Who Am I Talking To? Im about to explain the strategy, so clean up and take a seat. The chaotic hall dies down in a flash. After clearing the table and arranging the surroundings, an official brings the strategic board Manager Byuk uses. I wait calmly until the officials are settled. Once everything is in order, So Gun-pyeong says. Please go ahead, Leader. He points to a large piece of paper that is used by Manager Byuk. Lay it out on the table. The white paper is laid on the table, and the officials at the end row hold out a damp brush with ink. I grab the brush and get up, drawing a dot as I watch the blank paper. Black Rabbit Union. I write Su (ˮ) one span above. Mister Su. I drew a simple triangular mountain (ɽ) between the Black Rabbit Union and Mister Su. The pointy top points exactly at Mister Sus name, and the Black Rabbit Union is right below. We are going all out. Hong-shin asks. Do you mean a raid? I nod. Indeed. Only those who can use footwork nonstop until we reach Mister Sus can come with me. So Gun-pyeong. Yes, sir. You get what I mean, right? So Gun-pyeong asks for confirmation. Arrive at the Cloud Rain Society with footwork instantly. Those who cant catch up dont have to come, is that right? Exactly, but thats not all. You need to follow the details. This is purely a footwork match to keep up with me. Ill start with the officials. Ill take the lead, but I wont check if youre keeping up. Of course, the gap will widen depending on your individual footwork skills. It doesnt matter. Jump over the wall in the order of arrival, and well keep moving. Until we arrive at Mister Sus residence, dont stop. So Gun-pyeongs eyes grow wide. We will still run after arriving at Cloud Rain Society? I nod. Same goes to all of you, dont stop until you find Mister Su. Im the definition of straightforward, the apex, and the awl. Slash them, throw your weapons, get rid of the guys behind me, and keep moving. Dont chase after those who are running away. Kill the people blocking the way, and advance, advance, advance Follow me and charge forward until I see Mister Su. I check the faces of my men. You understand what Im talking about, yes? Understood. Everyone except the slow ones can come. When are we leaving? I answer Cha Sung-taes question. Right this second. As soon as I say right this second, everyone jumps from their seats. Even Yoo Sa-cheong, listening and watching the crowd, eventually stands up. I tell Yoo Sa-cheong. No hostages. Yes, sir. Sung-tae, watch over the hostage. What? Walking past, Dokgo Saeng pats Cha Sung-tae on the shoulder. Good luck, Manager. The Four Generals also address Cha Sung-tae comfortably. Good work, Manager Cha. Good luck. Thanks for the help. Jeez, now I have to earn my keep. So Gun-pyeong speaks in a hurry. Leader, I need time to explain to our men We dont have time for that. Just tell them to keep up behind us. Think of it as footwork training for the slowpokes. I just need you guys to deal with Mister Su. Last night, the Green Mount Sect and Lady Iron Toad stopped by, and the last victim involved in this fraud was the Cloud Rain Society. Their vice leader died by an ax that I swung last time. This is why we are trampling on the weakened Cloud Rain Society instead of going for Elder Hornless Dragon. I pause at the front gate and look back at the officials. Im curious who will arrive first. Run like its a ranking match. Lets go. When I say lets go, Dokgo Saeng kicks the gate open and speeds off like the wind. So Gun-pyeong scowls at Dokgo Saeng. That lunatic I say to the officials and generals. Why are you so relaxed? Go on. Im faster anyway. Sorry? Ah Perhaps the quick-witted Hong-shin worries about the ranking and bolts after Dokgo Saeng. Baek-in, Cheong-jin, and Baek-yu also take off at the same time. Only then do the other officials, including So Gun-pyeong, unfold their own movement skills. I walk three or four steps and belatedly unfurl my own footwork. As I pick up speed, I soon catch up with the officials of the Black Rabbit Union, including So Gun-pyeong. I tell So Gun-pyeong as I pass him by. Gun-pyeong, faster. So Gun-pyeong concentrates on his footwork without replying. Cheong-jin and Baek-yu are running ahead. I see Baek-in when I get ahead of those two. After seeing Baek-in behind me, Hong-shin and Dokgo Saeng are the two competing for the lead in front. I sneak up behind the two and whisper. You, catch up to him already. Hong-shin suddenly screams and speeds up even faster, taking the lead. I laugh as I run alongside Dokgo Saeng. Youre pretty good, Dokgo Saeng. Dokgo Saeng lets out an inexplicable scream. Leaving the shrieking Dokgo Saeng behind, I chase after Hong-shin. I tell her as soon as I catch up to Hong-shin. Red Sister, are you in a hurry to go to the bathroom? Youre pretty fast. Hong-shin is too busy to even answer. She is maintaining a reasonably fast pace as if shes been born with talent in this field. Deep internal Qi doesnt always equal speed. Hong-shin has great internal Qi and a talent for running. However, the person who has greater internal Qi and a physical advantage in running is me. Remembering the Nimble Guild masters after a long while, I speed up and outpace Hong-shin. Red Sister, youre the fastest. Maintain the speed. If you keep it up, no one will be able to surpass you. Hong-shin mutters. Yes. As I run in front of Hong-shin, I think. Hong-shin may be eligible to become a member of the Nimble Guild. It may be difficult at her current level, but if she continues to amass Qi and train harder, she will have enough qualities to catch the attention of the Nimble Guild masters. Though the distance with my men has widened, I dont bother to slow down. I am running with the mindset of barging into the place alone. Even if Mister Su had set a lookout near the Black Rabbit Union, Im faster than the spy anyway. He wont be able to stop this raid. As I run, I imagine what Mister Su would be doing. He probably has a lot on his plate. He will be anxious, so hell start with siphoning off his fortune. And urgently reaching out to the masters hes close with. If Mister Su had gone to Elder Hornless Dragon, Id use this opportunity to burn down the Cloud Rain Society. Whether Mister Su is at Cloud Rain Society or not, I run with the determination to destroy the Cloud Rain Society no matter what. As soon as I spot the walls of Cloud Rain Society, I soar high into the air. I cant see my men, but I can see Mister Sus men. Is it because I jumped too high in the air? While I land after crossing over the wall, people who notice me stand dumbfounded while uttering Uh?. When I sprinted after kicking off the ground, only then did I hear cries of Intruder! However, it seems they didnt recognize the intruder as the Moonlight Executioner. As a commotion rises in the background, those wary of me begin to follow me. I pass through the nearby pond by the incinerator, then smash open the door to the main building with a kick. The main building is mainly a performance space, so the place is empty. I jump over the audience seats in one go, step on the stage, and enter the back aisle. Only then do the attacks of the dregs appear from the aisle. Since I am constantly on the run, I fend off the harmless attacks. I move past the guy blocking the front with kicks or jabbing their pressure points. After passing the aisle, climbing the stairs, and slapping the protruding men on the cheek, I advance and pull out Black Hares Tooth in front of the room blocked by guards. I respond to the guards obvious yells. Its me, the Moonlight Executioner As the startled guards scramble to reach for the swords at their waists. I shoot out blade energy () horizontally and kick the big door open. In a flash, the guards necks are slashed by the blade energy, and their heads roll down from their bodies. As I enter the room, I greet the people inside abruptly. Mister Su, its me. Did you sleep well last night? The room is big, with a large bed at the far end. Mister Su, who is just putting on his pants, flounders for his sword on the table in a hurry. There are other people, but my eyes are only fixated on Mister Su. As I narrow the distance in an instant and wield Black Hares Tooth, Mister Su manages to grab his sword to block my blade and finally looks at my face. ! For a moment, we clash our swords without saying a word. I swing Black Hares Tooth wordlessly. Mister Su resists by swinging his sword aggressively without being able to put on his clothes properly. I wield my sword as I stare into Mister Sus eyes, shooting out palm force with my left palm, swinging Black Hares Tooth, and shooting blade energy one after another. I then release both finger wind and the Fiery Fowl Great Handprint, striking Mister Sus sword, then grabbing Mister Sus neck in a flash with the Great Absorption Method. Keugh. I lock eyes with Mister Su. Mister Su? At the same time, I stab Mister Sus abdomen with Black Hares Tooth and back him to the wall. With another stabbing sound, Black Hares Tooth pierces Mister Sus abdomen again as it is stuck in the wall. I grab Mister Su by the jaw and look around his face. This is how you look? I finally pulled out Black Hares Tooth. Pwarkk! Mister Su slumps against the wall. I shake off Mister Sus blood and sheathe Black Hares Tooth. After tidying my disheveled hair, I look around. Only then did I spot young women covering themselves with blankets on the large bed. Both of them are in a daze. I crouch down and look back at Mister Su. Mister Su looks like he has something to say, What? I cant hear you. Fu Fuck? Do you want your last words with a curse? Pathetic. Why didnt you come to surrender? Didnt I tell you that you wont have another chance to live? Believe in what people say. Dont think youre right all the time. What are you doing in broad daylight? Mister Su? . He must have stopped breathing. I tell the women who are still staring at me. Who am I talking to? I talked to a body. The women reply. Help I answer before the ladies can finish their sentences. Oh, yeah, Ill help you. Only then did my subordinates show up at the door. Blood is dripping from the weapons they are holding. The generals look at the dead Mister Su in astonishment. They look puzzled that their masters long-time rival died so easily. Dokgo Saeng, who appears last, asks as he looks inside. Is it over? I order my men. Go downstairs and clean up. Tell them Mister Su is dead. Dont kill those who beg on their knees, but kill all those who continue to attack. Yes, sir. The crowding officials band together and go down the hall. I also go down the stairs to wrap up. As I descend slowly, the shouts and sounds of weapons clashing subside. When I reach the front of the main building, several people are kneeling. Now that the party is over, many of the Black Rabbit Union lackeys have yet to arrive. Some of them are gasping and showing up one by one at the main gate of the Cloud Rain Society. I watch the gasping subordinates entering and say to So Gun-pyeong. We have to increase the intensity of the training. At this rate, do you think they can stand against a powerful faction? So Gun-pyeong answers with a nod. I will train them harder. I take a slow look around the kneeling men and our troops. Everyone is looking at me. I waited after a nights sleep, ate a filling breakfast, and drank during the day, but Mister Su still hadnt surrendered, so I came to kill him myself. Those who still havent come to their senses can come at me. Ill send you to your leaders side. Try cooperating with my men as much as you can. The Cloud Rain Society is ruined. My subordinates expect me to say something else, so I am forced to add another word. But I cant be ruined. Do you think Im gonna screw up? . The reactions arent very good. Chapter 69 Chapter 69 C Todays Failure? I look at the kneeling people and order my men. From now on, were the Cloud Rain Society. What? Lets get dressed first. Change into the attire of the dead. If there isnt enough, you can undress the heavily injured ones. Or you can find fresh ones inside the buildings. Go get changed. I specifically exclude Dokgo Saeng. As for you, you dont have to change. Why? You stand out too much. Clothes wont work either. Clean up the place with your men. When I say this to Dokgo Saeng, the other subordinates finally understand what I mean. I will turn the Cloud Rain Society into a defeated enemy and attack Elder Hornless Dragon immediately. And those on their knees will act as the vanguard. I briefly explained to So Gun-pyeong with a phrase. Its Use Poison To Cure Poison (Զƶ), Gun-pyeong. Understood. I call Hong-shin over while the subordinates are busy changing. Red Sister. Yes, Big Brother. Girls know each other best, right? Right? That lunatic Dokgo Saeng can kill anyone. You stay and look after the hostages. You can kill the suspicious ones, but leave out the weak ones. All right. Send the women who suffered here back to Ilyang. Well release them, so make sure to take care of it. Hong-shin nods. Yes, I will. Then, I approach the hostages again and begin lecturing. You freeloader bastards that are just like Sung-tae . All of you deserve to die just from being part of the Cloud Rain Society, but Im indecisive, so Ill be your light of hope. Raise your hand if you dont want to die. Or you can bite your tongue here and die. I wont stop you. . Anyone? If you dont answer me properly, Ill send you to Mister Su as an example. The hostages answer in unison. No. I point my finger at the hostages and say. Now, you and I will join forces to kill Elder Hornless Dragon. You are the scoundrels who kidnapped women, undressed them, watched the performance, and sold them elsewhere. Am I correct? Yes, thats correct. I draw Black Hares Tooth out in a sudden fit of rage. I might as well kill all of you and have you sit in hell Before I know it, White Tiger approaches and stops me. Calm down, Big Brother. Let me go. Im sending them off to burning hell. We can get rid of them after using them as human shields. We have too many of them. Now that Mister Su is dead, please give them another chance to live. Like you did for us. I look at White Tiger, who hasnt talked so much in a long time. I think White Tiger has also suffered much under Dae Na-chal, so he must understand the hostages feelings well. I sigh and force myself to put the blade back in. The fiery pits of hell might not be the best place. Baek-in says with a calm look. Yes, Big Brother, I will supervise these guys well. Since Baek-in said he would take care of them, I am reminded of Moyong Baeks words. I remember that he said I shouldnt do it all alone but with my subordinates, though I cant remember the exact words. You take care of it. Thank you, Big Brother. Please continue your speech. Where did I stop? You said they were morons. And before that, you said they were like Sung-tae. Ah, I did. Anyway, these idiots.. Baek-in speaks coldly to the hostages. Answer. Yes! I scratch my nose with my finger and explain to the hostages what the plan will be. All you have to do is put up an act. I dont mean joining forces with my men and attacking them. We are going to pretend to be the Cloud Rain Society. The goal is to spread the news that Mister Su is dead and infiltrate the mountain cabin that Elder Hornless Dragon set up like the pervert he is. Understood? From now on, we are the defeated faction. White Tiger steps in. I understand the strategy, Big Brother. Ill give them specific instructions. Great. This is how convenient it is to be the commander in chief. I whip my head around with my hands behind my back and call for So Gun-pyeong. Gun-pyeong. Yes, sir. Let our excellent subordinates who have had difficulty running all the way here get some rest. It mustve been hard to run here. They should rest up. Yes. Our forces will weaken if they come with us to the fight. Were growing weaker even as our numbers grow. What kind of shitty situation is this? I got it. As if something is funny in the midst of this, the officials are walking about with smug faces. Everyone seems to have a hold of my personality after capturing Mister Su in the fastest time possible. I whistle and stroll around while my men prepare for todays second battle. I am a little bored since there is nothing I can interfere with. Sometime later, a man I have started to recognize as one of the Black Hurricane Castle chiefs approaches me and hands me Cloud Rain Societys attire. Please get changed, Leader. Upon close inspection, the chest area is torn apart, and the clothes are smeared in blood. Get me something clean. Do you see me having a chest injury? Im normal as it is. Yeah, okay. Motherfucker. Why are you cursing me? I brought this for you. The chief grumbles and goes to look for other clothes. Come to think of it, that chief is one of the most tactless guys in the Black Hurricane Castle. I murmur as I click my tongue. Weve come this far. Weve come this far I stand around looking at the decorative fish after changing into some decent clothes. Moments after, my subordinates come to inform me. Were ready, Big Brother. Lets go, Leader. I say goodbye to the fish I had reunited with and turn around. Lets go. I head to the main gate of the Cloud Rain Society and say. Give some food for the fishes next time. Theyre starving to death. Theyre just trying to live on. We cant starve them to death. So Gun-pyeong replies plainly. Will do. Did White Tiger choose the right actors? The hostages, who are volunteering to play an important role, slowly stagger alone toward the main gate of the mountain cabin of Elder Hornless Dragon. I watch the play (݄) from a distance away with the other subordinates. The hostages are doing a realistic performance of having been stabbed. Their outfit, posture, and movement are perfect. However, he suddenly collapses in front of the gates of Elder Hornless Dragons cabin. . I stare for a long while at White Tiger and ask. Isnt he overdoing it? White Tiger shakes his head with a grave look. Its a promised action. And he was actually stabbed. Baek-in is so serious that I cant refute it. When I turn my head again, the guy who had collapsed is struggling to get up again. Thats a great performance. This is how strong the human will to survive can be. The hostage actor, performing his best even though no one is watching, takes a difficult step and knocks on the door of the mountain cabin. Knock knock knock. Moments later, an old man comes out and helps the dying man from the Cloud Rain Society. I cant hear what they are saying. Afterward, the other committed volunteer actors also gasped with blood all over their bodies. At least they have strength in their voices. We are fighting an all-out war with the Black Rabbit Union. We are here to ask for aid from the Elder. Come on in. The other hostages ignore the previous words of Elder Hornless Dragons lackeys. Give me some water. . . . As I watch, my mouth curls up in an O shape, and I whisper softly. Good script. White Tigers lips go up slightly next to me. Big Brother, its time for us to go. I give a final warning to the Cloud Rain Society members. If you want to die, you can go in and side with Elder Hornless Dragon. Ill kill you for real this time. Lets go. I am the first to get up and raise one hand. Wait a minute. I listen with furrowed brows. If there had been news that Cloud Rain Society was under attack, a commotion would have naturally occurred. However, even though three injured people have entered, the mountain cabin is still quiet. I leave my ears open towards the cabin and look at the faces of the Four Generals. They are not wearing masks now, of course. I also glance at So Gun-pyeong and the Black Rabbit Union officials faces one by one. . Finally, I looked around the hostages from the Cloud Rain Society. No one seems to have snitched or betrayed the raid, but somehow it feels like the raid has already failed. Things cant always go smoothly in Kangho. Im used to failure. And, it wasnt that strange either. One possibility is that the scout sent from the Cloud Rain Society noticed the mishap and followed us, changed directions, and reported it to Elder Hornless Dragon. Or, a scout from Elder Hornless Dragon noticed the mishap in advance. Anyway, Elder Hornless Dragons cabin is still tranquil, and even the main gate where the hostages entered is still wide open. As if Zhuge Liang is waiting for Sima Yi with the door wide open. I click my tongue. Looks like were busted. Baek-in gives a suggestion. Lets go in and end this. No, I think I underestimated the Kangho veteran too much. Feeling curious about Elder Hornless Dragon, I head to the cabin alone. Leader? Big Brother. I wave my hand. Stay there. What do you mean to stay? Just wait. In front of the main gate, I suddenly feel ashamed of the Cloud Rain Society attire. I dont exactly know why I am feeling ashamed. I remove the outerwear, throw it aside, and put on a jangsam. When I walk inside, the cabin is as quiet as I expected. I walked along the trail for a while because it is a fairly spacious mountain cabin. There is one table in the vast garden where Elder Hornless Dragon sits alone. As I approach, Elder Hornless Dragon asks me. Welcome. Is our truce over? I look around and approach. Have you done the arrangements? Elder Hornless Dragon nods after taking a sip of tea. As you can see, Ive arranged everything. I only have one old servant who opened the door earlier, but I sent him out through the back door. Hes a commoner. Theres no need to involve him and die. What about your subordinates? I sent back those with places to go. Gave some money to those who have nowhere to go. I sent them away yesterday and today. I replied without approaching the table. Youre quick-witted. Elder Hornless Dragon looks at me and smiles. How old are you? Thats none of your business. Hey, you and I are 40 years apart. I stepped into this place when I was your age. I had 40 years of experience in Kangho. Experience doesnt build up like internal Qi. Thats true. Have a seat. I dont sit when Im asked to. As I stand still, Elder Hornless Dragon asks. Dont you have time to relax and have a cup of tea? I am a man who doesnt have the luxury to relax. Im not one to have tea with a person like him, either. I am just smiling because I think how ridiculous this situation is. Elder Hornless Dragon tells me. Youre quite the skeptic. Old geezer, what do you have for me? Im bored. Lets hear it. Elder Hornless Dragon speaks calmly. Other than martial arts, is there anything else for Kangho warriors to prepare for? We have learned martial arts all our lives, so we dont prepare anything new. I know your schemes. Elder Hornless Dragon looks at me. You? You killed Dae Na-chal 1:1. Ive seen guys like you. Your behavior, your way of speaking. As soon as I saw you, I recognized your depth and personality. This fight is not about us anyway. It wont be necessary to spill the blood of my men. So I was waiting alone. You were close to Dae Na-chal Elder Hornless Dragon reaches for his cup as he listens to my story. As soon as I feel something awkward with his hands and intentions, I push my left foot to the ground. Elder Hornless Dragon presses the teacup almost at the same time. With a click and the sounds of machinery, the place where I had been standing disappeared. Not only where I was standing, but everything around the round table sunk. It went down about 18-21 meters. Im somewhat experienced, but Ive never seen a garden that was set as a trap itself. I glide over the ground and escape using the One Jump (һS) tactic and look at the hole. It is deep and dark, so I cant see anything. Its like Elder Hornless Dragons black heart. I speak to Elder Hornless Dragon, who seems to be sitting on a circular pillar. Geezer, this is not the end, is it? The chairs and tables were also part of the trap, the tea must have been poisoned, and the ground of the area must have been set as a fire pit trap. Im a little inexperienced, be sure to remind me next time. Elder Hornless Dragon stands up with his mouth tightly closed and stares at me. . I speak in an indifferent voice. That surprised me, you piece of shit. Chapter 70 Chapter 70 C Hes On Fire How many bodies are buried in this pit? With such a massive trap, Elder Hornless Dragon has no need to align his forces with the Cloud Rain Society or send off his men elsewhere. Elder Hornless Dragon presses his teacup again and turns his wrist. The teacup spins with a clicking sound. Then, with the screeching sound of friction, parts of the garden sink while some pillars soar up. The entire garden is transformed into something similar to a baduk chessboard used to play with black and white go pieces. White areas are places with tiles that you can step on, while the black areas are deep, dark pits. The areas where you can land and where the pitfalls are located are randomized. As soon as I see them, I predict that there will be hidden traps in places that are made to look white. And the old man is the only one who knows which piece to step safely on. Elder Hornless Dragon then says. This looks about right. Lets begin. I step back once again and smile. Now I get why youre not as famous as Dae Na-chal, you sick bastard. Elder Hornless Dragon looks at me. Whats the point of fame? For 40 years, youve buried people in the pits, so no one knows you. You eat, drink tea, and sleep above all the bodies you have killed. Now I understand why your face is so pale. Is Kangho always this scary? Elder Hornless Dragon smiles. Youre talking nonsense. Ive seen a lot of guys like you. Snobs who dig traps and cant live far from them. You dont hunt like a beast. You dont travel the world and compete with the strong. You spend all your life rotting away, burying your men, burying friends, and burying anyone who gets on your nerves. Every time the pit opens and closes, it reeks of bodies rotting. I feel sorry for Dae Na-chal. For a dead man? I glance around the cabin and say. He probably has been researching this mountain cabin to kill you. I guess you never let him catch any of your weaknesses. Elder Hornless Dragon laughs creepily at my words. He is already pale, so it looks like a ghost is smiling. Elder Hornless Dragon says. Indeed, Dae Na-chal also never showed me his flaws. Birds of a feather, it happens. As I keep stepping back, Elder Hornless Dragon flashes his row of sparsely missing teeth. Where are you going? Im at a disadvantage here, so Im running away. Son of a bitch. Asking about something obvious. Elder Hornless Dragon reaches out his hand with a pleased expression. The exit is not that way. When I turn around, only vines are visible where a path is supposed to be. Its a simple hallucination spell, but as Elder Hornless Dragon says, there is no exit. If I had invaded with my troops, more than half of them wouldve died here. What an interesting geezer. Did you learn spell casting? Dont tell me youre copying the old Guiguzi ()? How does a young man like you know of Master Guigu? I might look young in appearance, but Im older than I look. In summary, Im a baby face (ͯ) that descended from the heavens. I dont say it aloud because it sounds so stupid. Guiguzi is a figure from the Warring States Period; in Kangho terms, he is an eccentric master. And for some Kangho warriors, hes the founder of mechanism spells and arrays. In fact, his nickname was also derived from the secluded Ghost Valley (ɽf). There is a fact that only I know about Guiguzi. Guiguzi is precisely the type of person the founder of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique, Ki Sung-ja (ӛ), despises the most. Guiguzi wrote the book of the same name, Guiguzi. There is a saying in that book. Gain the trust of your opponent and keep a close relationship. Seize the weakness of your intimate opponent, and hold onto them so they cant escape. At first glance, it may seem like savoir-faire or simple know-how, but in the twisted psyche of Kangho warriors, it is nothing like that but is instead perfectly in line with what Elder Hornless Dragon is doing right now. Theres no way this old geezer is the direct descendant of Guiguzi. In Kangho, many people are influenced by out-of-date actions, words, books, and ideas. I reveal my secret to Elder Hornless Dragon. Look, you trashy geezer whos still a long way from being Guiguzis descendent. Unfortunately, one of my masters hates the Ghost Valley people who live in seclusion like you. Elder Hornless Dragon replies. Is there a person like that? Hes called Ki Sung-ja. I dont know if youve heard of him. You ignorant geezer. Never heard of him. I have learned the martial arts specially curated to deal with people like you. Use Magic Fire (w) to go against cunning rabbits with three burrows () ruthlessly. Too bad you had to meet a guy like me. How fascinating. A clever rabbit digs up three burrows. Ki Sung-ja says to burn down all three burrows completely. And thus, the martial art he created is the Fire Chicken (a). I grin and prepare the Fiery Fragrance in my left palm. Sensing something ominous, Elder Hornless Dragon steps on white stones here and there, jumping around like a rabbit. After being lured by Elder Hornless Dragon to the table, I cancel the Fiery Fragrance and shift my body while observing the garden. Isnt it the way of Kangho to wait while preparing a deadly attack? I couldnt finish the sentence because I became busy. Elder Hornless Dragon is chasing after me with a snake head cane. Where on earth did that weapon come from? And of all things, it just has to be a snakes head. Snakes are not scary. However, when a Kangho warrior attaches the head of a snake to the cane handle, you shouldnt take them lightly. Or maybe the snake head on the cane has poison, so it was a warning not to mess with them. Therefore, it is right to be on guard at times like this. I step on various places like stepping stones and eventually unsheathe Black Hares Tooth to strike Elder Hornless Dragons staff. Clang! However, the cane and knife did not clash as often as they usually would. Probably because there are pits under us at all times. Stepping on the white stones, I brace myself. Sure enough, a hidden weapon targeting me pops out of nowhere when I step on a normal-looking white stone. Swoosh! The cane plunges at the back of my head as I deflect the hidden weapon with Black Hares Tooth. Eventually, I jump over three or four white stones and try to land on flat ground, but this time, my right foot plummets. A trap that is posing as a white stone. I soar into the air as I shoot palm wind attacks on the floor. When Elder Hornless Dragon whirls out his fluttering jangsam, dozens of steel needles shoot from under it. No wonder people say the older, the wiser I grab my own jangsam in my left hand as if I had ripped it off and whirl away. The hidden weapons soaring towards me tear through the innocent jangsam before falling gloriously into the pit. In your next life, meet a good owner and be reborn as pretty clothes people wear on a date. Suddenly, burning anger swirls in my heart, and the Black Fire Chicken (a) twitches inside me. Youre dead. I cant think of any particularly sharp attacks. Youll be dead a little later. I have memorized the normal white stones I had stepped on. I dont have an excellent memory, but I can remember well enough when my life is on the line. The human psyche is mysterious, so getting beaten up a little can help improve ones memory. I dont know why either. Its pathetic to see myself running away against this old geezer, but I am trying to eliminate the variables in advance with a calm mind. The pillar has already sunk down three times, and the hidden weapons have been triggered twice. I wander around beforehand to take some hits first because itd be problematic if Elder Hornless Dragon, who is trying to figure out which of my moves is the trap, ends up cornering me in this fight. After a while, I allow a short sneaky chase before turning around to face Elder Hornless Dragon head-on. I have already figured out the pitfall locations around us. Now, the next thing to watch out for is poison (). I suddenly feel like a Kangho veteran. Perhaps he trains regularly since he is swinging that heavy-looking iron cane skillfully. To be honest, even if I wasnt fighting in this mountain cabin, none of my subordinates would be able to defeat Elder Hornless Dragon. I intentionally inject Fire Chicken energy to envelop Black Hares Tooth and release the Fire Demon (ħ) here and there in the cabin whenever Elder Hornless Dragon dodges. It is a thought that comes up when no other strategies come to mind. Itll work out somehow. Elder Hornless Dragon can not hide his anxiousness as I begin to burn the corners of the cabin with the Magic Fire Method. Are you trying to drag me to your grave? Seizing the gap when Elder Hornless Dragon is talking, I vigorously swing Black Hares Tooth. If the amount of internal Qi injected into Black Hares Tooth was 50%, it has now increased to 70% by the time Elder Hornless Dragon opens his mouth. Still, 30% remains as a reserve. Nevertheless, Elder Hornless Dragons staff gradually slows down. Elder Hornless Dragon will be forced to use his next trick if I fight solidly while stepping on one white stone. It is probably poison. I am forcing the opponent to use poison and am mentally prepared to accept it. The moment Elder Hornless Dragon thinks it is becoming difficult to fend off Black Hares Tooth, he presses a spot on his cane and swings it forward. A greenish poisonous mist (F) appears before my eyes. At the same time, Elder Hornless Dragon retreats to where the table is I stretch out my left palm, unleash the Great Absorption Method, and pull the scattered poison into a spiral. Swoosh-! Meanwhile, I wield sword wind using Black Hares Tooth and shoot the ball of compressed poison toward the pit as if I am parrying an onions peel. At the same time, as Elder Hornless Dragon hits the table Surprisingly, large harpoon-shaped awls pop out of all the pits and shoot up into the air. Boom! A continuation of his tactics to use mechanical traps to end me if I managed to avoid his poison mist. I watch the harpoons shoot into the air in unison with a startled look on my face and mutter. How vicious. You deserve a compliment. Elder Hornless Dragon must be thinking that his continuous attacks are a satisfying trick as he seems to lose focus for the first time in our fight. . I naturally put Black Hares Tooth back into its sheath, looking like a man who has finished fighting. I then pull it out like a thunderbolt and shoot out blade energy. Swooooooooosh! Elder Hornless Dragon grabs the cane with both hands in surprise, blocking the blade energy. Banggggggggg! I lift Black Hares Tooth and launch another blade energy vertically at the same place. Elder Hornless Dragons old pale face trembles vigorously every time he is hit by my blade energy. Raising Black Hares Tooth up again, I say. Thats it? No more? Think fast. Youre dying soon. Bring it on. Come at me. Thats not true. From what I can tell, this is the safest spot. I send forth another wave of blade energy. I launch my blade energy 13 consecutive times in the same place, and Elder Hornless Dragon, who does not have time to even turn around, manages to block all of them. Elder Hornless Dragon beckons me to come at him, asking me to fight him head-on, provoking and spitting curses, but I ignore all of them and simply keep swinging my sword. Having blocked 17 blade energy attacks in a row, Elder Hornless Dragon finally loses his balance while holding his cane. I then simply shoot another attack of blade energy toward Elder Hornless Dragon, making him scramble to his feet. P-zark! At last, I see a spurt of blood. P-zark! This time, the hand holding onto the cane also falls to the floor. Then his arm flies away, and the other arm is also severed by blade energy. As Elder Hornless Dragon falls to his knees upon losing both arms, I send another blade energy to his knees. P-zark! I watch Elder Hornless Dragons face and, after sheathing Black Hares Tooth, wrap Fiery Fragrance around my index finger. I put some effort into making the Magic Fire take the shape of a real flame. Then I compress the Fire Chicken energy as much as I can. Elder Hornless Dragon is saying something to me with despair on his face, but I cant hear him since I am concentrating fully. I shoot the completed flame from the tip of my finger toward Elder Hornless Dragon as lightly as possible. Then, I look at Elder Hornless Dragons expression, whose face changes comically every second. Thats the face of someone facing their death. As soon as the flickering and dancing flame clashes with the body of the Elder Hornless Dragon, who is attempting to escape, a fire pillar launches itself vertically into the sky, ascending as if it is a Fire Dragon (). Fwhooooooosh! I watch the shower of fire dragon sparks momentarily with my arms crossed. The flame is stunningly beautiful. I murmur softly as I watch Elder Hornless Dragon struggling while on fire. Hes on fire. Chapter 71 Chapter 71 C Its Broken I laugh at Elder Hornless Dragon as he is engulfed in flames. Since no one is around, my laughter is much more at ease. I jeer Elder Hornless Dragons death, laughing to insult and mock his life. I ride on the excitement and draw Black Hares Tooth to spread Fiery Fragrance. Flare up and burn This dancing flame is a gift from the errand boy to the people of Kangho. In the past, after the Zaha Inn was burnt down, I managed to somehow immerse myself in Kangho. That realitys Elder Hornless Dragon was also fairly punished for bringing such an ordinary errand boy into the world of Kangho. All the faint memories of my ordinary daily life are being burned down in this cabin. I wield my sword, set more of the place on fire, and burst into laughter as I wish, even as the voices of my subordinates call out to me from outside. Big Brother! Since when did I have brothers? Leader! I am a sect leader? In the ever-enlarging blaze, I reflect upon myself after hearing the words of Big Brother and Leader. Am I too hyper? I slowly repeat the path that I traveled to get here in a low voice. Ilyangs errand boy, cemetery caretaker, sickle master, the loser of a sparring gamble, third-class Kangho warrior, Qi Deviation, fish of Zhejiang Are the system and equipment breaking down? Crack with a loud crash, holes are formed in the building. A voice, I can hear a group of familiar voices coming closer. Leader! Its Gun-pyeong! 18000 Years, So Gun-pyeong? Then, with a loud bang, the burning ivy on the walls is crushed, and my generals and So Gun-yeong appears with evidence of the fires effects on them. Only then did I ask So Gun-pyeong. I told you to stand by. Why did you come in? So Gun-pyeong yells in reply. We came in because there was a fire! What are you doing? Come over here! Hearing his words, I head down, but there is still a black pit between me and my subordinates. It is just a small pit, but somehow it looks like the Sanzu River (;), a gap that is drawing the line between this life and my past life. So Gun-pyeong also looks at the pit and says to me, Theres nothing in the pit, Leader. Please jump here. Ah, okay. I jump lightly over the pit and land where my men are. My subordinates have dirty faces as if they were just smeared with charcoal soot. White Tiger asks, Did you set the place on fire, Big Brother? Yes. Lets get going. I chuckle;e at Baek-ins words and run ahead first. Lets go. So Gun-pyeong is still angry at me. Why are you laughing? I answer with a smile. I set someones house on fire, am I supposed to cry? So Gun-pyeong bursts into a strange kind of forced laughter, Ohohohoho, and adds. So this is how Qi Deviation happens. Now I know how it feels. Be careful, Gun-pyeong. Nothings scarier than Qi Deviation. We work together and use our weapons occasionally to get past the flames. Sometimes the generals unleash palm force to open a path, allowing us to safely escape from Elder Hornless Dragons residence. As soon as I reach the outside, I look back at the cabin. Something explodes with a boom, and the flames flare higher. So Gun-pyeong then says with a dazed expression. Looks like there is gunpowder inside. That is not simply the effect of a burning fire. I agree as I watch the mountain cabins fiery inferno. I know, right. Baek-in then asks me a question, probably because he wants to meticulously make sure. What about Elder Hornless Dragon, Big Brother? He burned to death before the cabin did. Baek-in breathes a sigh of relief, something Ive rarely seen from him. Good, good. Indeed it is. I look at their dirty faces, and they look at my face before we all burst into laughter together. I ask as I look at the group of troops from the Cloud Rain Society. Who are the first actors who went in first? Those people raise their hands from the back. Were here. So Gun-pyeong explains. They got out from the back door with an old servant. The servant told them a big fight would break out inside and asked them to wait outside. Im glad. Great performers almost died. Yes. I didnt ask about the whereabouts of the old servant. These subordinates wouldve already died if he had mastered martial arts. As I whip my head back, the cabin is sinking as if falling into a pit. It seems they had dug too many pits from the beginning. The fire isnt likely to spread since this is a single mountain, not part of any connecting mountain range. It might not be so bad if everything burns down at once, so we can start over. Lets go. While we return on foot with our troops, the generals and officials are very curious about the fight, so I give them a brief explanation. There was a lot of machinery inside. . So Gun-pyeong replies with astonishment in his voice. Is that all, Leader? Yeah. I look at White Tiger and continue. He wasnt that much stronger compared to Dae Na-chal. Baek-in looks at me and nods with an indifferent expression. I see. I pause to look at the generals. Dae Na-chal, Mister Su, and Elder Hornless Dragon are all dead. Among them, Dae Na-chal was the manliest. Baek-in responds. I see. Thats fine. Cheong-jin and Baek-yu also nod in relief. I then speak to my subordinates. The Cloud Rain Society is no more. Those who want to leave, leave. I wont stop you. The ones who remain will now belong to the Low-Down Sect. The Black Rabbit Union, the Black Hurricane Castle, the Cloud Rain Society are all under the Low-Down Sect. A Cloud Rain Society member asks. What is the Low-Down Sect? I nod and answer. A place full of scoundrels like you. A crappy sect that will spread throughout Kangho while eliminating people like Mister Su. A guy who still doesnt realize my identity then asks. Whos the leader? That would be me. Are you not the Low-Down Sect Leader? Thats also me. I speak to So Gun-pyeong while we are on our way back to the Cloud Rain Society. That punk Dokgo Saeng didnt cause any trouble, did he? So Gun-pyeong shakes his head. General Hong-shin is with him, so itll be fine. I order the officials. Our manpower has suddenly grown in size, but thats pointless. The officials and generals can hold a meeting to make detailed arrangements. I dont have the knack for managing an organization in detail. Yes, sir. Do what you are most skilled at. Im going to keep training to be strong. In the end, being strong is the sect leaders biggest responsibility. Honestly speaking, even a genius in internal affairs wont be able to completely control this chaotic faction. I send So Gun-pyeong and generals from the crossroads to the Cloud Rain Society. Ill head back to the Black Rabbit Union to check on the slave and return once everything is settled. So Gun-pyeong asks, Who will be the temporary manager of the Cloud Rain Society? Its still an Unorthodox Faction establishment that serves guests. Theres a possibility that constant disputes will happen. With Dokgo Saeng there, he will resolve them with a fight. White Tiger responds. The other generals and I will remain there temporarily. I have an idea who will appear as guests as well. I will kill whoever is necessary and send those left alive away. Sounds good. Good job, all of you. Ill be off first. Yes, Leader. I walk up to the top seat while glaring at Yoo Sa-cheong. Have you been good? Yes. Cha Sung-tae didnt bully you? Yes. I sit in the high seat and look at Yoo Sa-cheong on my left and Cha Sung-tae on my right. Cha Sung-tae asks. How was the trip? What trip? You went to take care of Mister Su. Ah, Mister Su was stabbed to death, and Elder Hornless Dragon was burned to death. Now that I have sent friends and foes to Dae Na-chal, he wont be bored in the afterlife. Now that I think about it, he died because of Yoo Sa-cheong. I look at Yoo Sa-cheong. Its largely thanks to you. Yes. Cha Sung-tae thinks of something and asks. Where are you from? I am from the Hoyeon Clan (ӄ). I ask Yoo Sa-cheong. Are you a Hoyeon (), too? Hoyeon is not a common compound surname. Yoo Sa-cheong then reveals his real name. My real name is Hoyeon Cheong. Where are you based? We were originally located in Dongboseok, but now we are located in Hongcheonhyang. Dongboseok area is full of Orthodox Factions. I guess you guys were ousted out of there? Yes. I point to the wanted poster on the table and tell Cha Sung-tae. Bring it to me. Cha Sung-tae brings the wanted portrait with the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights face and lays it down in front of me. I push it to Hoyeon Cheong. This is the guy Im searching for. Can you find him for me? Hoyeon Cheong answers. Ill track him down no matter what. So you dont know him. Hoyeon Cheong replies with a complicated look. Save me, Leader. Ill find him no matter what. Ill take one if you have any poison. Ill be back for the antidote. I nod my head. Weve already killed a lot of people today. My normal day shouldnt start with killing people and end with killing people. Hoyeon Cheong replies with a sigh of relief. Thank you. All right, we should have this kind of relationship. Its not like forcing people to do things would solve everything. The main hall door opens at this time, and Suhas report continues. Leader, we have a guest. Who? Geum Chul-yong, the Steel Dragon Sect Leader, is here. Invite him in. Geum Chul-yong and Kwak Yong-gae appear in the hall. Geum Chul-yong addresses me with a smile. Leader, its hard to see you these days. I reply as I get up. Whats with the sudden visit? People keep coming in, but I cant see our leader, so I came to see him myself. Has it finally arrived? Kwak Yong-gae puts down a black box with a string attached to it on the table and opens the cover. A Crazy Blade () crafted by Geum Chul-yong is inside the box. The handle and the sheath are gray in color. A dragon is engraved at the tip of the handle, indicating that it was made by Geum Chul-yong. However, it is a straight sword that is comparatively shorter in length than normal. I then think. That they didnt get the iron, they wanted. But its been a while since I received a gift. Rather than the quality of the blade, I accept Geum Chul-yongs sincerity for the gift. Thank you. Geum Chul-yong reaches out. Draw it. I take the rather heavy Crazy Blade and unsheathe it. The silver blade slowly reveals itself. I examine the blade and say. Ill use it well. Do you like it? I am anxious since I am unable to appear indifferent. I like it a lot. Whether a blacksmith or a Kangho warrior, its only natural that they would desire to test a new weapon. Geum Chul-yong asks, Is there anything you can slice it with? I look over casually at Hoyeon Cheong. Horrified, he suddenly kneels on the floor. Help me. Geum Chul-yong and Kwak Yong-gae are surprised at the unexpected sight and look at Hoyeon Cheong. Holding onto Crazy Blade, I look at Hoyeon Cheong. Why would I kill you? With a grin, I pull out Black Hares Tooth from my waist with my left hand. Holding Black Hares Tooth in my left and Crazy Blade in my right, I ask Geum Chul-yong. Mister Geum, you have no regrets, do you? Geum Chul-yong nods, knowing that these two swords will become an experiment. I have no regrets. I also checked with Kwak Yong-gae, who is also the most involved in the overall production process. What about you, vice master? Kwak Yong-gae nods. Im confident. I inject Wood Chicken energy evenly into both hands and clash the Crazy Blade and the Black Hares Tooth together in the air. Instilled with internal Qi, the metal sound blends with a dull sound, and the blades fly across the room. Geum Chul-yong, Kwak Yong-gae, and Cha Sung-tae are all startled. Hoyeon Cheong, watching on his knees, also blinks in bewilderment. I look at the remaining half of the severed Crazy Blade. Its broken. Black Hares Tooth won. Geum Chul-yong scratches his head with an awkward look. Ha, gosh. where did you get that fine sword? This is a sword used by the leader of the Black Rabbit Union. Kwak Yong-gae sighs with a pale expression. Boss, were not good enough. Geum Chul-yong nods. I see. Kwak Yong-gae hurriedly picks up the broken blade, snatches Crazy Blade from me and puts it back into the box. Kwak Yong-gae wraps the box around his shoulder and tells Geum Chul-yong. Lets go, boss. Somehow it sounds like they are running away from here quickly. Geum Chul-yong looks at me. Leader, Ill be back. I nod with a serious face. Dont rush it, Mister Geum. Ill be using Black Hares Tooth for the time being. Geum Chul-yong turns around with a wistful look. Lets go. Suddenly, Geum Chul-yong stumbles, and Kwak Yong-gae, next to him, hurriedly helps him. The two men walk out of the hall while relying on each other. . Dry coughing a few times, I sit down on my seat again. Cha Sung-tae, who witnessed the scene, is holding back his laughter. I look at Cha Sung-tae and say. Dont laugh, you punk. Yes, sorry. Anyone can fail. Just like I did. Sung-tae, youve never failed before. You have to try something to fail. As far as I know, very few weapons do not ever crumple entirely. Among them, the weapon I used to have has not even arrived in the Central Plains yet. Until then, I have no choice but to use Black Hares Tooth. Chapter 72 Chapter 72 C Before The Sky Gets Dark After washing up and getting changed, I sit at the main hall table and look at Cha Sung-tae and Hoyeon Cheong again. Sung-tae, go get some booze in the back. Three glasses. Yes. As Cha Sung-tae puts down the alcohol and places the glass in front of us. I look at Hoyeon Cheong. Listen carefully, Hoyeon Cheong. Yes. I dont care if youre Yoo Sa-cheong or Hoyeon Cheong. I also have no interest if youre from the Hoyeon Clan or another clans swordsman plotting a conspiracy. Youre just a prisoner held captive due to shitty luck. From now on, you have to do as I say. Got it? Hoyeon Cheong answers briefly. I understand. I take out the Moonlight Blade and plunge it into the table between the three of us. Stab! Cha Sung-tae and Hoyeon Cheong look at me, curious about what this means. I point at Moonlight Dagger. This is how my neighborhood conducts a duel. From now on, if you guys cant talk it out, use this to stab each other. Cha Sung-tae smiles and tries to say something but immediately closes his mouth once he sees my face. I reveal my intentions. Ill give you 108 days. Hoyeon Cheong, you shall pass all your martial art knowledge except for sword, footwork, and internal Qi techniques to Cha Sung-tae. Hoyeon Cheongs eyes widen, and Cha Sung-tae snaps his head at me. . Of course, Hoyeon Cheong will have a lot to say about this. Its probably some nonsense that the techniques are only exclusive to his clan members. However, he cannot open his mouth easily after seeing the Moonlight Dagger stuck to the table. Instead, Cha Sung-tae is the one who responds with a dumbfounded look. How can I learn his martial arts in 108 days, Leader? Sung-tae. Yes, sir. I glance at Cha Sung-tae. Do you have a death wish? I just said this is a death duel. Ah Ah? No, its nothing. I explain my daily routine to the quiet Hoyeon Cheong. Since were in the Black Rabbit Union, the both of you will wake up by Myo-si (îr, 5AM). Breakfast, training, lunch, training, dinner, and rest. Rest includes free time, but if you leave, escape, or run away, you will die by my hands through a deathmatch. If you have any objections, pick up the Moonlight Dagger right now and stab me. . Since Hoyeon Cheong had lost some of his internal Qi to me, it is up to you to rest up and recover your internal Qi. Once again, you have 108 days. A long yet short timespan. Im not asking you to master them in a short time. However, Cha Sung-tae should be stronger than he was 108 days ago. How do you determine if he got stronger in 108 days? I answer Cha Sung-taes question. If you have any objections, pick up the dagger and stab me. That was a question. Hoyeon Cheong finally asks me this. Teaching him one sword technique will be tough in 108 days. Thats none of my concern. Cha Sung-tae may be a freeloader, but hes not a fool. Whether you teach him generalities or other things once hed adapted to the sword technique, its entirely up to you. Figure it out yourself. Hoyeon Cheong then says unintentionally. Us Hoyeon Clan. I dont care what your clan is like. If you hate it, pick up the dagger and kill yourself. Only then did Hoyeon Cheong shut his mouth and close his eyes. I then say to both of them. There are way better things in life than merely dying. If you dont want to teach him, die. Sung-tae, if you dont want to learn, just die. Stop mooching around. If you dont like this or that, pick that up and come at me. Ill kill you. This time, Cha Sung-tae also tilts his head and closes his eyes. Leading the awkward atmosphere caused by the two, I say to them. No, just say the word. Ill pick the dagger first. Cha Sung-tae raises his hand. I agree. I look at Hoyeon Cheong. Hoyeon Cheongs lips twitch before he finally responds. I will teach you everything. I stare at two and nod. Now were talking. I pluck Moonlight Dagger, slice my finger, and drop blood into the liquor bottle. Then, I extend the dagger to Cha Sung-tae. Cha Sung-tae also drops his blood into the bottle. Subsequently, Hoyeon Cheong also uses the same method to bleed. I take the bottle containing our blood and fill up their respective glasses. This bottle contains the blood of three men risking their lives in a death match. Master Hoyeon Cheong will teach his disciple Cha Sung-tae with sincerity, integrity, soul, and effort following the blood oath. His disciple Cha Sung-tae will learn his masters teachings by devoting his heart and soul for 108 days. I, Lee Zaha, swear I will use Moonlight Dagger to end their lives if they shall take this matter lightly or show any instances of unfaithful attitude. Cha Sung-tae turns pale as I swear my oath. Hoyeon Cheong swallows his saliva. I hold up my drink as I watch the two of them. Do you swear to the oath? I swear. I swear. I give a big nod. Lets drink. The three of us down the shot of blood-infused alcohol. I put down my glass and say with a happy face. Great. The intense training will begin tomorrow, so lets have the final supper together today. Cha Sung-tae replies. Theres no one to cook right now. I see. The servants have already left for Ilyang, and the majority of my subordinates are still in Cloud Rain Society. I agonize with my chin propped in my hand. Mister Su is already dead, and Ive also killed Elder Hornless Dragon, so how will we settle the dinner issue right away? Jerk Cha Sung-tae says. Should I go out and buy some? Why bother? Are you trying to run away? At that moment, the main hall door swings open at Hong-shins sudden arrival. But instead of focusing on her expression, I look at what my Sister is holding in her hands. Holding up the things she is carrying with a calm expression, she says. Have some dumplings, Big Brother. I bought it on the way here. After making a Tsk! voice, I applaud Hong-shin. As I applaud her with a serious expression, Cha Sung-tae also nods and claps. Looking alternately at us, Hong-shin replies. Whats with you guys? I reach out to Hong-shin. Excellent timing. Come and sit down. Yes. When Hong-shin unpacks the cloth on the table, the white appearance of the dumplings is revealed. Hong-shin jabbers on. I didnt know what you like, so I ordered both meat and vegetable dumplings. They sell sweet and sour pork next door, so I bought it as a side dish to pair with drinks. Wiping my tears with one hand, I reply. Great. From now on, Ill appoint White Tiger, Blue Dragon, White Rooster, and Red Monkey as the Four Generals. All of a sudden? Lets eat. I munch on a dumpling and say to Hoyeon Cheong, who is sitting still and doing nothing. You should eat too. Yes, thank you. Hoyeon Cheong answers timidly and reaches for the dumplings. I speak naturally while eating the dumplings. Just know that both of you are fated to die in my hands if I dont see satisfactory results. Cha Sung-tae replies while eating dumplings. Yes, I understand. Hoyeon Cheong also replies. Roger, sir. As I gobble down dumplings like a beggar who lives in a cave, I say to Hong-shin. Can you make noodles? The ingredients should be in the kitchen. Hong-shin responds leisurely like Guan Yu, who would cut the head of the enemy before the alcohol goes cold. Should I make some? Ill make it after I eat this. I nod several times since I am afraid Hong-shin might change her mind. Id appreciate it if you do. All right. Cha Sung-tae slightly lowers his head toward Hong-shin and says. Then I hope you can also make me some Since youre cooking, you should make more, including the managers. Suddenly, Hong-shin, Cha Sung-tae, and I look at Hoyeon Cheong. As a prisoner, Hoyeon Cheong has no right to ask Hong-shin to do it. Despite that, the three of us are anticipating Hoyeon Cheongs response. It is an unspoken pressure that if he doesnt request it out loud, he wont get any. Eventually, Hoyeon Cheong replies in a nonchalant voice. I think I will pass. I click my tongue. Nonsense. Red Sister, please make enough so we can have it together. With a dumpling in her hand, Hong-shin smiles and gets up from her seat. All right. I give her a thumbs up while watching Hong-shin go to the kitchen. As expected, the male-dominant Kang-ho is like hell on earth. I whip my head towards Hoyeon Cheong, and, as if the dumpling is stuck in his throat, he hurriedly downs a shot of alcohol and suddenly weeps like a madman. I shake my head and look at Cha Sung-tae. What a fucking mess. Geez. Are you crying because the dumplings taste so good? Hm. Cha Sung-tae tries to tease Hoyeon Cheong with me, but he only wordlessly puts on a solemn face. Perhaps it feels weird to be teasing his supposed master. Hoyeon Cheong says. Its not like that. Anyway, Ill teach you well. I make fun of Cha Sung-tae and Hoyeon Cheong to my hearts content while waiting for the hot bowl of noodles. I even wonder if a devil is living inside me. Well, if I had been such a nice guy in my previous life, I wouldve gained the nickname Sword Saint () or something. But my nickname was Crazy Demon. Sung-tae. Yes? Your prime days have passed. Poor you. Bahahahahaha. Afterward, the four of us eat the noodles. After filling our stomachs with dumplings and noodles, we gradually feel sleepy. I stand up after finishing the soup broth. Ill go get some sleep. Yes. As I head outside the main hall, Cha Sung-tae asks. Where are you going? Im going to sleep. Out here? Why? Cause I want to. I leave the inner courtyard and lay down with my arm under my head below the plum tree, where the petals are falling. The sun is setting in the sky, and the night has not yet come. Purple mists (ϼ) fill the sky for a moment. A sky that is neither bright nor dark. Time quietly passes as the sky is illuminated with the same meaning as my name. I close my eyes before the sky gets too dark. I said hello in advance to those who wanted to hear it. My heart aches if I meet them in my dream. Otherwise, anyone else is fine. Those Id beaten to death, those I want to bully, Crazy Monk, Left Hand of Illuminating Light, sect leaders, the masters of Three Disasters, those scumbags who won against me in sparring gambles I fall into slumber, thinking its okay for them to appear in my dreams as much as they want. I fell asleep and thought of those I miss as people who must not appear in my dreams. Miscellaneous thoughts that are a blur between dreams or memories pass briefly like the sunset. . . . Ill hand this over to you. Why? I dont need anymore. I look at the khakkhara (U) Crazy Monk is giving to me. Im not a monk. How am I supposed to use this? A crescent-shaped blade is attached to the tip of the khakkhara used by Crazy Monk. He turns the blade and removes the iron. You shouldve just given me the whole thing. Why are you removing it? Youre too ruthless, so Im confiscating the sharp ends. This is a superb weapon. You can say this is a weapon of unbreakable will. Are you sure it wont break? Youre dead if your will is broken, so you dont have to worry. What do you mean? Like what I just said. I grab the metal staff () Crazy Monk gave to me in puzzlement. Its a weapon weighing over 36 kilograms. No one can use it freely other than Kangho warriors. I look at Crazy Monks expression and ask. Where are you going? I have to go back. Youre suddenly leaving? Theres somewhere I need to be, so this is just a round trip. Now that Ive filled it up a lot, its time to empty it out again. What if you dont have a place to go back? Like me. Why dont you have a place to go back? Come find me, and Ill shave your ugly hair off. You hate that too, dont you? Dont run your mouth and get killed. Come whenever you feel stuffy. Im off, idiot. The Crazy Monk disappears with the gush of wind. Hes unpredictable, so Im not surprised at the sudden departure. As the person who used to drag me around disappears, the feeling of emptiness from freedom is also massive. When I look around, only the lump of iron that had been naked as the unbreakable will remain next to me. Carrying that iron stick on my shoulder, I look around for a long time, but there is nowhere to go. My heart is no different from a wasteland, so I head back to Kangho. Since I have no place to go, there are still people I need to beat up back in Kangho. The sky is getting darker and darker. Chapter 73 Chapter 73 C Gambling Revelation Lee Zaha I spend the next 108 days meditating in the Black Rabbit Union. My back becomes stiff, my knees often also stiffen, and I start smelling like a poor beggar due to not bathing often. But it is necessary. In the inner courtyard, Hoyeon Cheong teaches Cha Sung-tae, and in the outer courtyard, the subordinates of the Black Rabbit Union continue to train. I also circulate Qi on the rooftop of the Black Rabbit Union. I train using the Qi Breathing Technique regardless of venue. I train in the baths, on the walls, under the plum blossom tree, inner courtyard, outer courtyard, and bedroom. Occasionally, Dokgo Saeng, the Four Generals, Manager Byuk, Geum-hae, Hong-shin, etc., would come to find me, but I do not respond much as I am acting like a person doing secluded training. My answer is always the same. Figure it out on your own. I dont want to intervene in things they could decide and judge independently. I decided to circulate Qi for 108 days because the Fire Chicken state of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique feels somewhat ambiguous. I feel I can move on to the Fighting Chicken stage soon, so I have no choice but to concentrate. My subordinates also realize that I am facing a critical point in my martial arts training. They then proceed to take care of the work while consulting amongst themselves as much as possible. 108 days is a strange period of time that is both short and long. On some days, I circulate my Qi while looking at the petals falling from under the plum tree all day. I occasionally take a break to drink water and eat some food when I cant stand it. Thanks to that, I lost more weight. Whenever I need a break, I go into the inner courtyard and watch Cha Sung-tae train. The way Cha Sung-tae is exaggerating his pain is very him, so I dont bother to interfere. After thirty or forty days have passed. Dae Na-chal, Mister Su, and Elder Hornless Dragons deaths became widely known to the neighboring Unorthodox forces. Manager Byuk reports that the news has spread to all the Unorthodox Factions in Namhwa and Ihwa regions that the Black Rabbit Union Leader is on the rise. Manager Byuk asks. Wouldnt it be better to correct the rumor from the Black Rabbit Union Leader to Low-Down Sect Leader? For the first time in a while, I reply to Manager Byuk. You dont have to do that. Yes. Im planning on using an Unorthodox Faction as a front for the time being. The main quarters of the Low-Down Sect are still under construction back in Ilyang. Also, it doesnt amount to much just because we have gained domination over Unorthodox Factions in two towns. Forget the overall landscape of the central district. It wont even show up on the map of the Unorthodox Factions. This place is still a frontier. None of the opponents I competed with in my past life have appeared. No masters have come to bother me since my return either. Ive managed to buy a lot of time to train after fulfilling part of my big scheme by getting rid of Dae Na-chal and Mister Su. The subordinates of the Black Rabbit Union, including So Gun-pyeong, are also training fiercely. Cha Sung-tae also practices hard every day as if he is going crazy. Of course, I am the one training the hardest. Thinking of this as my duty as the commander-in-chief, I immerse myself deeper into the Qi breathing technique. Lets burn away every little thing in our daily lives with some concentration Whenever I close my eyes and open them, sometimes it is dawn, sometimes night. The moon and the sun, the wind and rain, the reports of my subordinates, and the occasional hunger pang arent enough to interfere with my training. A man who forgets everything when he focuses on training, thats me. By the time Ive lost track of how many days have passed, the internal Qi I converted from the Heavenly Pearl has completely mastered the Fire Chicken. Currently, I am repeating full circuits of the Fighting Chicken (^a). From that point on, I started gradually listening to my subordinates. The meals I ate once every two days have now increased to three times a day. By reducing the times I practice Qi circulation, I allow myself to start diving into physical training like my Black Rabbit Union subordinates. Mixing in with the crowd of training subordinates, I change my stance according to So Gun-pyeongs instructions and build up my physical strength alongside these scum without complaints. The atmosphere was stiff when I first joined the intense training alongside my men. Later, everyone became used to it to the point where even I became unsure if I was initially a scum of the Black Rabbit Union or simply a leader who had gotten closer with everyone. My body was thin during the first half of the 108 days of training. After entering the Fighting Chicken stage in the second half of my training period, muscles reappear in my limbs. I am fully recovered back to my previous physical state. One day, I am just peacefully breathing under the plum blossom tree. I hear Cha Sung-taes voice. Leader, today marks the 108th day. Opening my eyes, I reply. Already? Yes. In the meantime, Cha Sung-tae had transformed into a hairy man holding a sword. In fact, his gaze and posture have drastically changed, so it wasnt necessary to check further. Still, it is only appropriate to give him a compliment. Do you think youve become stronger? Cha Sung-tae smiles. I am way stronger than I was 108 days ago. For a moment, I want to tell him to train for another 108 days, but I hold myself back. Though Im good at using the whip, giving too much of it isnt the right thing to do. This time, I look at Hoyeon Cheong. Sung-tae, are you sure youve gotten stronger? Hoyeon Cheong answers. Leader, he is now a swordsman. Though it was a short time, hed learned all the basics, principles, and forms of the Fast Ray Sword (ֹ섦). I also taught him an internal Qi method; after dinner, hes mainly amassing Qi with me. Although we didnt have enough time to build internal Qi, he still managed to learn how to extract Qi and use it. I use my hand to smoothen my skin. You did your best. How do you feel about teaching him? Hoyeon Cheong, who hesitates for a while, gives me a somewhat surprising answer. I want to continue teaching him if you allow me to. I look at Hoyeon Cheong with a puzzled expression. Really? Yes. Come to think of it, Hoyeon Cheongs demeanor when he had been taken as a prisoner had also disappeared. What kind of enlightenment did he gain while teaching Cha Sung-tae? He is entirely different from my first impression of him. Sung-tae, what about you? Cha Sung-tae replies. I want to keep learning, too. I then speak to the two. Stand side by side. I look at Hoyeon Cheong and Cha Sung-tae with my arms crossed. Hoyeon Cheong is over 10 years older than Cha Sung-tae. This relationship is no different than that of a master and his student. I look at the two of them and nod. The three of us have kept our oaths, so do as you please from now on. Hoyeon Cheong and Cha Sung-tae reply to me calmly. Thank you. Yes, sir, I ask Cha Sung-tae. Sung-tae, how does it feel to now be in Kangho? Cha Sung-tae replies briefly. Not bad. If you waste time drinking and eating away in the pavilion, you wouldnt die because you are weak in martial arts. But now its harder to survive because of the martial arts youve learned. Thats the Kangho I know. Cha Sung-tae replies while looking at me. Im just getting started. I do not regret it. I didnt know if it was because I was getting stronger day by day. I like it. I expected Cha Sung-tae to give this answer. This is what its like for the majority of Kangho warriors. Most people dont regret their lives unless a sword is stuck in their hearts. This is because they have fallen into the crazy, powerful charm of becoming stronger. Good work, Hoyeon Cheong. Thank you. I dont think much about Hoyeon Cheong anymore. If I dont see Hoyeon Cheong around someday, it means he left to find a way to survive. If he visits the Black Rabbit Union from time to time, like the Four Generals and Dokgo Saeng, then we will have a connection. I decided to just follow the flow. A breezy, sunny day. I wash up and change for the first time in a long time and take the gold and silver ingots given by the Green Mount Sect Leader with me. As I pass the inner courtyard, Cha Sung-tae asks me. Where are you going? Me? Im gonna do some sparring gambles. Ill also go look around lhwa on my way. I can hear Cha Sung-tae and Hoyeon Cheong chat behind me. What is a sparring gamble? What do you think? Betting money on fights. Why is the leader suddenly Im not sure either. A sparring gambling den; I am thinking about visiting one. The reason why my face had gotten scarred in my previous life was due to the sparring gambling den. I was beaten up a lot. Peoples faces change when their faces get hit a lot. A sparring gamble is divided into two categories. Armed fights and bare-handed fights. I learned a lot there. I realized I could learn a lot, even from losing. I learned how to fight back while being hit and how to grasp the strength of the opponent through their appearance, atmosphere, and eyes. There is also a reason why people who reach the bottom of their lives often visit sparring gambling dens. They make some money even if they lose. Im relatively younger compared to when I frequented gambling dens in my past life. The people who stay there for a long time tend to remain the same. To sum it up, the levels in sparring gambling are a mess. Sometimes, mysterious Unorthodox Faction masters come to make quick cash by hiding their identity. Often, these mysterious Unorthodox Faction masters will cause a childish, big fight among themselves. The sparring gambling den located in a town nearby called Siryun is the most famous. What is unique is that the whole market there is geared around the gambling den. They sell alcohol or food to spectators and participants alike, brothels are prevalent, and there are other gambling dens in addition to the sparring gambling dens. Though I havent visited in a while, my memory is completely restored as I look around. I know all the people gathered here, but they dont know me. It was so ridiculous that I must laugh. This hell of a place is still the same. I go into an inn that I used to frequent and begin drinking. As I think about this place that has been weighing my mind for quite some time, the alcohol goes straight in. All the guys in the inn are fighters who participated in the sparring fight, so the atmosphere is really menacing. Unlike in my previous life, my looks have mellowed out, so I look like a nerd. I am chewing on dry snacks and looking around when a big guy approaches and drinks my alcohol without permission. As I laugh, the big guy laughs along. He then says as he sits across from me. Ive never seen you before. Buy your bro here a drink. Ill explain things well. I down the rest of the booze and smash him on the head as soon as I grab the bottle. As his head lowers with a thud. I grab his head and hit it on the table continuously. Thump! Thump! Thump! Thump! Thump! I pull him up by his hair and check his face. A broken nose, and three or four crippled front teeth. I shove his head away and find the errand boy. Since there is a commotion, it isnt hard to lock eyes with the errand boy. Give me some more Kaoliang liquor. The errand boy simply mutters. Yes. I then tell the blood-covered guy who is looking at me. Get lost. He jumps up and goes somewhere, squeezing past the crowd. These types of guys have a habit of coming back after being told to get lost. People around me burst into laughter. The errand boy scurries over, wipes the table, and places the newly brought dry snacks alongside two liquor bottles, saying. That guy is the red-light districts brothel owner (^, owner of a house of prostitutes). Hes going to bring his people here. Would you be alright? How many people does he usually bring? Hell bring around a dozen people. Really? Yes, sir. I, flicking my finger at the errand boy and say. Can I make some money? The errand boy looks at me, blurting a Huh? and observing me. Have you been here before? This is my first time. Ive been here in the past. I see. The errand boy hurries around busily, brings a large basket, and waves a bell on the ceiling. Ring, ring, ring! The customers all turn and look at the errand boy in unison. The errand boy says. Is there anyone who would like to participate in an inn sparring? This gentleman is facing off against the beaten-up Heuk Gyeong, the brothel owner. He would have about 10 men, right? This has no participation fee, so well bet on the winner. The young gentleman on the left, Heuk Gyeong on the right. 500 nyangs will be added to the prize. Here we go! As the errand boy walks around the inn with a basket, money begins to fill the basket with a piece of cardboard, splitting it down the middle. The money is placed on the left and right sides. In the meantime, all the sparring gamblers in the inn are looking at me. Someone brazenly asks me where I am from, so I answer briefly. Pay the money and then ask your questions. I remember the old days, so I curse. You fucking bastards. Chapter 74 Chapter 74 C King Of Sparring Gamble 1 I look at the gamblers while drinking Kaoliang liquor. Heartless assholes. This guy hasnt even placed a bet yet and still has the nerve to ask me where I came from. These factors can predict victory or defeat, so its only natural to ask after making a bet. Ignoring the question, I down the liquor, and the new customers ask the errand boy something and come straight to me. You need to come outside. Ill go after I finish this. Drink and get up quickly. I lift up the bottle and pour the rest down my throat. The liquor splashes here and there as I pour it down. Its been a long time since Ive visited the sparring gamble den and drank, so I feel refreshed. I wipe the alcohol from my mouth with the back of my hand. Lets go. I follow the guy who urged me to come out and smack him in the back with a bottle. Thud C the guy faints. The people who bet on me applaud in unison and cheer. After knocking down one quickly, I walk out of the inn. Many spectators have gathered since the brothel owner of Heuk Gyeong brought quite a number of back-ups. I ask Heuk Gyeong, whose face is still a total mess. Are you coming in bare-handed? As Heuk Gyeong turns his head left and right, the dozens of people he brought put their weapons on the floor. Heuk Gyeong then says. Yes, bare-handed. He whips his body around and tells his lackeys. Make him half-dead. As I walk to the center with a grin, dozens of people rush in without even making a declaration of war. I run forward and kick the first guy in the lead in the chest. With a thud, the guy flies off in a straight line, crashes into the onlookers, and can no longer get up. I resist the attacks without using any internal Qi. I strike someone on the top of his head with a chop of my hand, grab and twist an arm in front of me, and stab an opponents eyeball on the right with my index and middle finger. Without knowing who is who, I just attack everyone within my sight. I break a guys nose with a punch and whirl around to kick a fast-approaching guy in the face. I grab a knife from the guy I kicked and then rush in. Hehehe. This is how it eventually turns out after asking if I would fight barehanded. I dodge the extended knife slightly and twist his arm in the opposite direction. Kaaargh! As he steps back and cradles his flabby broken arm, the other guys rush in and come together in a circular formation. This is not a fight that these scoundrels can win by using tricks. Because Im not who I used to be. After easily avoiding the fists and kicks that are inferior to what the Black Rabbit Union members could do, I break one hand from each of them to end the fight. Nothing is staining my hands, but I shake them off once anyway. Is this the end? The errand boy looks at Heuk Gyeongs group and nods. Yes, thats it. The errand boy, Il-bo, brings out a table and a basket and starts splitting the dividends. The errand boy is risking his life to distribute the money because joking about the dividends would ruin the inn. The gamblers also line up in a very orderly fashion and receive their dividends. Most of them are appropriately distributed along with the 500 nyang that was invested and the funds of those who lost their bet, but everyone is enjoying it because it is enough to cover todays drinks. I earned your allowance. Lets grab another drink. Listening to the gamblers, I look at my share in the basket. Hitting the corners with my hand, I say. Give it to Heuk Gyeong. Yes. I take out two silver coins and hand them to Il-bo. Great work to you too. Il-bos face brightens up. Thank you. Put the rest in. Il-bo takes a wrapping cloth from his waist and pours in the prize money. The cloth instantly becomes heavy. Gambling here is set in a way where the winner takes most of it. Most of them bet at least one silver coin, which is quite a good sum. Il-bo asks me with a smile. You must be here to make some cash. Sometimes there are masters like that. Where are you from? Pay me and ask. One silver coin. Smiling awkwardly, Il-bo replies. I was just asking. Thank you. Il-bo then continues to meddle. If youre that good, you can participate in a battle (^). Who holds the biggest prize money right now? That would be Undefeatable Dong Bang-yeon (|ȼ). But you must carry at least 10,000 nyangs to fight for him. I grin. I see. Dong Bang-yeon is the opponent that I would never dare to dream of even touching in the past. He also has the nickname of the King of Sparring Gambles. A portion of funds given by the Green Mount Sect Leader and the money I just earned from the inns sparring bet doesnt even total close to 10,000 nyangs. Im here to clean up my past, but Im not here to waste time like the other gamblers. My schedule ends once I meet the King of Sparring Gambles after earning 10,000 nyangs. Carrying the bag of money over my shoulder, I head for the next gambling den. By the wall, there is a line of people who are engaged in weapon gambling (ـ). Everyone is sharpening their weapons on a whetstone like a madman. The world is full of crazy people. This is where the victorious gamblers stand by and wait if they hit and break their weapon. At the entrance, there are scoundrels, and the guy with the sharpest weapon stands at the center of the arched wall. I look across the center at the white-haired gambler with a bag full of money. In my previous life, his eyebrows were white, but now they are not entirely white yet. As in the past, he is wearing an ivory () necklace on his chest, which is said to be difficult to obtain. Koo Jong-ak (), the top dog of the weapon gamblers, then says as he looks at me. Are you taking up the challenge? I give Koo Jong-ak, who I havent seen in a long time, a simple answer. Yes. Im a little expensive. How much did you bring? Show me. I put the wrapped cloth on the board. Koo Jong-ak then looks inside the cloth and lifts it with his hand. Still, Koo Jong-ak doesnt have an expression on his face. Do you want me to make an exact one-on-one deal? Sure. I take out my money pouch and put additional gold and silver in the cloth. Then Koo Jong-aks eyes shake slightly. Arent you overdoing it? When I bring in a large sum of money, rare to see here recently, the other weapon gamblers turn their attention to us. I simply reply. If youre scared, step aside. Let me sit in the best spot. Who knew the King of Weapon Gambles would be this scared. Koo Jong-ak raises his head and stares at me. I dont know where youre from. I dont think youre from the Orthodox Factions or family clans. Koo Jong-ak then says as he looks around. Ill give you a gold coin if you know of him. Everyone answers in unison. I dont know. I then speak to Koo Jong-ak. No one knows me here. Why is that? Its my first time here. Koo Jong-ak crosses his arms and stares at me. Do you know how this works? Please explain to me. One attack, one defends. Whoever breaks it first is the winner. If its a tie, we go for another round. We can raise more money in the middle. If you hurt your opponent, the gathered gamblers here will stab you. Agree? I agree. Koo Jong-ak points to the place to store our weapons. Put your weapon down first. I cant do that. Lets compete with each other. Its true that Ive never been here, but are you sure I didnt do any information research? How dare you deceive me? Old man, do I look like a moron just because I talk nicely? Koo Jong-ak smiles. When a gambler laughs, their composure often breaks down. Koo Jong-ak says. Young man, youre bound to suffer internal injuries if you hold a weapon during a fight. I was trying to protect you. Isnt your life more important than money? I unsheath Black Hares Tooth and hold it out to the middle. Old man, lets cut the crap and decide the winner. Ill let you have the first hand. The defending party stops with their weapon out, and the attacking party wields the weapon. If its a tie, it will proceed again the other way around. It looks like a battle of weapons, but in fact, this also involves internal Qi. Koo Jong-ak has long continued to stay as the King of Weapon Gambles. Although his sword is solid and sharp, his real secret to staying in power for a long time is due to his strong internal Qi. In other words, until the day I left the sparring gamble den, the only person who never lost in weapon gambling was this old geezer, Koo Jong-ak. Koo Jong-ak sighs slightly, walks towards the wall, and looks at his collected weapons. Of course, he used to pick a weapon according to his opponent to protect the blade, but this time he did not hesitate to choose a sword on the right side of the wall. Koo Jong-ak says. Ill deal with you with the Mysterious Heavenly Sword (섦). If the sword flies, innocent people can get hurt, so hold on tight. Are you ready? I glare at Koo Jong-ak while I hold Black Hares Tooth in one hand. Ready. Koo Jong-ak clicks his tongue. Talking informally imbecile. I smirk. A single moment is essential to weapon gambling. In many cases, the swords clash the moment one persons breathing shakes. I know all the rules here, so theres no way I will be tricked. While he holds the Mysterious Heavenly Sword, Koo Jong-ak looks at Black Hares Tooth. Ive injected Wooden Chicken energy into Black Hares Tooth. Naturally, the energy does not cause the sword to glow. Koo Jong-ak glances at me once and swings the Mysterious Heavenly Sword to hit the center part of Black Hares Tooth. I twist my wrist when I see Koo Jong-ak cleverly trying to hit the back of the sword. With a blunt sound, Koo Jong-aks Mysterious Heavenly Sword is deflected. Koo Jong-ak then tells me with a mixed expression. Well, now its your turn. This time, Koo Jong-ak holds out the Mysterious Heavenly Sword to the middle and fiddles with the ivory on his necklace like an old habit. Out of kindness, I once again make Koo Jong-ak aware of the rules of this gamble. Old man, if you hurt your opponent, youll be stabbed by everyone here. I know. Im telling you, be careful. What are you As Koo Jong-ak answers in astonishment, I swing Black Hares Tooth. The injected force has been converted from Wood Chicken to Fire Chicken. When Koo Jong-ak bends his wrist, I follow suit. Clang! At that moment, the blade of the Mysterious Heavenly Sword breaks! Koo Jong-ak flicks the ivory he had been fiddling with in his left hand with a finger technique. The ivory breaks off the necklace and flies towards my neck. I send the ivory flying away with a similar technique, the Wooden Fowl Finger Technique and then throw Black Hares Tooth straight into Koo Jong-aks chest. Keugh! With a wet sound, Black Hares Tooth is pulled out again. I didnt plunge the blade deep into him on purpose. I look at Koo Jong-ak, who is holding his injured chest with a gaunt expression. How dare you ambush me, you goddamn geezer. Koo Jong-ak opens his mouth. Help I grab Koo Jong-aks face with my hand and throw him to the center floor. With a thud, Koo Jong-ak rolls to the floor. I pull the gold bar from the gambling money box that Koo Jong-ak was keeping and then say. What are you doing, you sons of bitches? Its a rule to stab the injured opponent. Who was ambushed first? If you have eyes, you would have seen it. I look at the weapons gamblers who are watching while throwing the gold bars into my wrapping cloth one by one. Everyone is monitoring the situation quietly because they are afraid of Koo Jong-ak. I continue to pick out the gold bar with a chuckle. Whatever, you morons Koo Jong-ak, who is still breathing, asks for help from those around him. He would repeatedly call someones name, try to bargain, and offer to share his fortune. I hum as I fill the cloth with gold bars. How nice would it be if we just played fair? At this time, a weapon gambler at the end of the table stands up with his knife and stabs the struggling Koo Jong-ak in the leg. Screams and curses fill the air at the same time. I remind them of the rules of weapon gamblers as I continue moving the money. Arent rules meant to be obeyed? The weapon gamblers stand up with their respective weapons and stab them into the body of a man who has reigned as the king of weapon gambling for a long time. Stab, stab, stab, stab, stab, stab, stab Now Koo Jong-aks screams become silent. I stand up after shoving all of Koo Jong-aks gold bars into the cloth. After clapping my hands a few times, I say farewell to the scumbags. That was fun. You gambling addicts. As I maneuver over Koo Jong-aks body, several people stare at me in a silent rage. I immediately respond to the threats, turn around and let my mouth loose. Do you want to die? In an instant, the rage in their eyes disappears, and everyone returns to their place. I also resume my steps out of this place. Thats right. Thats how you become good gamblers. You fucking imbeciles Anyway, this is how I am preparing the necessary gambling funds to challenge the king of sparring gambles. Chapter 75 Chapter 75 C King Of Sparring Gamble 2 A hollow is made under the spotlight where the fight is taking place. Those who are involved in the fight are below. Those who are betting their money are above. In other words, those involved in the sparring gamble fight in the hollow. I have no idea when the fighting pit became like this. However, the divide has a clear purpose. First, if the men involved in the fight run away, they will likely be attacked by the gamblers. That is, this setup places the fighters at a disadvantage. Even the gamblers inept in martial arts would throw stones or daggers at them. How dare the fighters run away after a bet has been made? Whether its a chicken fight or a dog fight, its the same. The bigger the fight, the larger the crowd of spectators above the fighting hollow. Second, detecting any attempt at fraud becomes easier, which places the audience in a superior position. A battle here is where force is used to fight. Therefore the use of poison is prohibited. Winning in combat due to skill is acceptable, but winning by using poison is considered a foul Thirdly, this setup is also made to place gamblers superior to those who fight below. Even though this might not be true in reality. Lastly, this is also one of the various tricks the organizers use to maintain their power and lead the game however they want. Sparring gamblers sometimes involve authentic fights, but if you look further, it can also involve political disputes between powerful gamblers. Thats all of the knowledge I have here. Therefore, even though the Undefeated Dong Bang-yeon became the King of Sparring Gambles by using his own power, he has only been able to maintain this position because he has a secret organization of well-off gamblers backing him. Its hard to explain in words, but Anyway, you will gradually notice these corruptions as you fight. And if the person realizes the corruption does not belong to the vested interest, the person will die either way. Hence, this place is now a fighting pit once more. This is a place where humans fight anyway. I go to the gamblers position and put down the wrapping cloth filled with over 10,000 nyangs. A fight is already taking place below. Even if I throw 10,000 nyangs in here right away, Dong Bang-yeon wont come out immediately. I have to face the gamblers here first and will need their permission before I can get the time to proceed with my performance. In other words, I need to show them at least a teaser of my skills. Though its up to me to get to the point where I can compete with Dong Bang-yeon with just 10,000 nyangs. However, it is up to the gamblers here whether or not they want to place their bets. The customers who watched me from the earlier gamble in the inn have all gathered at the fighting pit and are filling up the seats. Even the errand boy, Il-bo, is among them. As an errand boy who has worked in this city for a long time, Il-bo duly reports my fight at the inn to the manager conducting the battles. After a while, as the battles between the morons below conclude, someone addresses the crowd with a voice amplified by Qi. I have shocking news. Someone said theyre going to challenge Dong Bang-yeon. It is a casual tone as if they are speaking to a friend. This voices owner is Pyeong Gun-sa (ƽ܊), the host of the battle. Pyeong Gun-sas name literally means ordinary soldier, but his name choice is more to feed his inflated ego. Hes a rather arrogant person. After hearing errand boy Il-bos explanation, Pyeong Gun-sa points directly at me. I heard youre the challenger. Am I right? The spectators and gamblers in the audience alike all turn to look at me. This is a battle where Dong Bang-yeon is included, so everyones eyes glint at seeing a chance to make a lot of money. I give Pyeong Gun-sa a brief answer. Im the challenger. Pyeong Gun-sa points his finger at me and says. Another naive wanderer is here to lose money. Lets give him a round of applause for his stupidity. When no one in the audience claps, Pyeong Gun-sa continues. Who knows. He might be an amazing master, so Dong Bang-yeons unbeatable streak could be broken today. The audience boos that prediction. Pyeong Gun-sa, stop talking nonsense and continue with the show. The real gamblers would only make their bets once they see real skill. Pyeong Gun-sa continues to speak as if he is giving me an explanation. Youll have to show me something if you want to summon Dong Bang-yeon. Theres nothing like a battle to show your skills. If you go all out, there will be no one to challenge you, so think of it as a light warm-up, and why dont we start with a 1,000 nyang bet? Its a 1:1 battle depending on the outcome. If you win, you get 1,000 nyang; if you lose, you lose 1,000 nyang. Its a simple setup for a sparring gamble. I nod my head. Get ready. Pyeong Gun-sa sighs as he scratches the back of his head. Why are the youngsters these days so quiet? Seriously Now, youve all heard him. Who wants to challenge the guy that will take on Dong Bang-yeon? The bet is 1,000 nyang. It doesnt matter if youre armed or unarmed. No one? Oh, yeah. Theres no way theres none. Three figures move simultaneously from the audience and step into the fighting pit. Pyeong Gun-sa speaks to the three men. Who said this will be a 3:1? Figure it out, and two of you get lost. The three people look at each other, and the strongest one of the three remains while the other two return to the audience while smacking their lips. Pyeong Gun-sa introduces the man who remains. You guys all know, but this wanderer may not know, so let me introduce him. This is Bang Gaek (), who frequently participates in 1,000 nyang fights. Does anyone here not know him? I guess its only this wanderer. Of course, that wanderer is me. Im well aware of Bang Gaek. I used to be beaten up by Bang Gaek and had my money taken. Theres no way I wouldnt know. The reason why Pyeong Gun-sa introduces Bang Gaek again in such a way is to encourage their participation. Every word and action here is related to money. Whats a shield in Kangho? Youll understand once you see Bang Gaek fight. As you all know, Bang Gaek lost to Dong Bang-yeon in the past. In other words, hes been training silently to seek vengeance. Now, lets get into the easy betting. Bang Gaek is white (), and the wanderer challenger is black (). Gambling breaks out as the servants begin to roam. Pyeong Gun-sa didnt even call me out for not revealing myself. Nevertheless, the audience is flaunting their money. This time, the servants jot down the records and collect the money simultaneously. Only then did Pyeong Gun-sa call for me. Come down, hillbilly. Leave the money there and come down. Dont worry. Well protect your money. Thats true. I hold out the wrapping bag to an approaching servant. As if hed mastered the martial arts of counting money, the servant takes out the silver ingots and counts out up to 1,000 nyang. I place down the bag and slowly walk down to the fighting pit. Pyeong Gun-sa continues to blabber on. Youre very relaxed. The bet is closing soon, so bet some more on this relaxed guy. Empty your pockets. Even with this blatant talk, these gambling addicts are all opening their own pockets generously. I walk to the center and look at Bang Gaek for the first time in a long time. Hes in his mid-30s. A large iron shield is attached to his back like a turtles shell, and a podao is hanging by his waist. I become momentarily confused if this is a dream or reality while looking at Bang Gaek. All I can do is smile. Bang Gaek looks at my smiling face without opening his mouth since hes a naturally calm man. I was defeated by Bang Gaek in my previous life, but without carrying any specific feelings toward him, I didnt say anything. Pyeong Gun-sa looks at the situation in the audience and says, Both of you, get ready. Were ending the bet. Counting to ten. After the countdown, the whole audience becomes quiet. Pyeong Gun-sa stands between Bang Gaek and me and declares. Lets get started, 1,000 nyang battle. The man who dies in the fight is the unlucky one. The winner has to buy a round of drinks from their 1,000 nyang. Please, I hope neither of you dies now but dies while fighting until you get old. Sparring gamble Pyeong Gun-sa takes out a handheld fan, lifts it vertically in the air, and says. Start. Bang Gaek takes out his shield and holds the podao. There are times when shields are frowned upon as much as the Demon Cult, but not on the battlefield. Shields are an efficient fighting tool. And this man learned how to use shields on the battlefield. It can be said that hes a master that clumsy third-rate Kangho warriors make fun of. However, he earns 1,000 nyang from time to time without challenging Dong Bang-yeon. And he is also a man who has a wide gap with me now. I tell him as I unsheathe Black Hares Tooth. Go easy. Turtle Man. Bang Geok furrows his brows and advances by wielding his podao. I block the podao with Black Hares Tooth, kick straight forward, and hit the shield. With a thud, Bang Gaek is pushed back. Bang Gaek grins at me as if he thinks my kick is weak, even though I am already overwhelming him with just pure strength. I laugh with Bang Gaek. What are you laughing at? Hehe. Bang Gaek rushes back in with a low chuckle. This time I use Black Hares Tooth with a slight injection of Wood Chicken energy. I repeat the same kick again, but with internal Qi. Boom! While holding and blocking with his shield, Bang Gaek is startled and slides off straight across the ground. He loses his balance and ends up rolling on the floor several times. When Bang Gaek jumps back up, I am already in the air again. Once again, I, the representative of the incompetent, attack the shield coolly with a flying kick. Booooooooooom! Bang Gaeks forehead bumps into the iron shield this time, and he again rolls to the ground. As he slowly props himself up, I see that Bang Gaek has cut his forehead, and blood is dripping down his face. Narrowing the distance again, I hit the podao far away with Black Hares Tooth and then raise my foot like an ugly drunk fighting on the street and trample on the shield. Bang! Bang! Bang! Crash! Bang! Stomping with pure strength, stomping as I slowly instill internal Qi, I stop and kick in whatever manner I want. The key aim of this match is to show an improper kicking technique so that I can never be mistaken as a Kangho master in disguise. Bang Gaek holds the shield with both hands and hides like a turtle to block my kicks. I step on the shield with my feet and mumble. Bastard, youve become a real turtle. Boom! As I inject more internal Qi and kick down, Bang Gaeks voice fills the air with urgency. I lost! I place Black Hares Tooth back into its sheath and look at Pyeong Gun-sa. Give me the money. Pyeong Gun-sa stares at me. . 1,000 nyang. Pyeong Gun-sa approaches me, points his finger, and says in a warning tone. What are you doing? Arent you supposed to show off your skills to proceed? I glare at Pyeong Gun-sa and whisper. Pyeong Gun-sa, you asshole, stop with the nonsense. Just announce the results if you dont want to get slapped on both cheeks. Pyeong Gun-sa frowns at me. . The moment I raise my right hand, Pyeong Gun-sa shouts as he defends himself with the handheld fan. Wanderer won! Bang Gaek lost! After the declaration of victory, I held a staring fight with Pyeong Gun-sa before opening my mouth. What? Why? Pyeong Gun-sa snorts and turns away. A small number of gamblers who boldly invested in me screams in unison. Among them is the errand boy Il-bo, who shouts while clasping both hands. I can clearly see the future of a young gambler. Being an errand boy was a promising job. That jerk, jeez. On the other hand, it seems like a promising job only to me, so I am a little bitter. Pyeong Gun-sa glances at me while fanning his fan. Look, Im sure youre itching to compete with Dong Bang-yeon right now, but today we have to attract more gamblers to create more noise for the show. Well let you stay lavishly, so rest up. Wrap up, and youll get to fight tomorrow. Got it? I nod to Pyeong Gun-sa and reply. Lets do that. And young bloke, cant you change your tone? I point my finger at Pyeong Gun-sa. If you want to change my way of speaking, 2,000 nyangs. I gave you a discount, especially because you seemed older than me. Pyeong Gun-sa turns his head, spits once on the floor, and orders the servants. Guide the challenger to the Phoenix guest room. Yes. As Pyeong Gun-sa disappears while flapping his fan, Bang Gaek, who is dusting his attire behind, calls to me. Hey, young man. I turn my head to Bang Gaek. What? Bang Gaek tells me with a calm expression. Be careful of Pyeong Gun-sa. Why are you so feisty? I look around and reply to Bang Gaek. Why? Does he use honey traps or evil plot schemes? Bang Gaek looks at me in surprise. Have you been here before? Have you seen me here? No, I havent. Bang Gaek tilts his head. I take a silver ingot out of the cloth that the servant gives back to me and throw it to Bang Gaek as a winners tip. Bang Gaek looks at me, puzzled as if he has never received a winners tip after losing a battle. I point my finger at Bang Gaek and grin. You must have a sour stomach. Go get a bowl of rice soup. Dont go carrying a shield and create a fuss when you have no skills. Thats what Bang Gaek once told me. At that time, he probably said, Dont go carrying a scythe and create a fuss when you have no skills. I giggle and collect Bang Gaeks 1,000 nyangs, put them in the wrapping cloth, and head to the Phoenix guest room. I wonder if there will be any honey traps waiting for me, the ones Ive only heard about. Chapter 76 Chapter 76 C King Of Sparring Gamble 3 As I survey the Phoenix guest room with my hands on my back, a woman dressed in white approaches me from behind. Sir, I will be serving you today. My name is Baek So-ah (Ѷ). As I whip my head around, a woman I cant complain about is standing there. Her figure is covered in white, the headdress and accessories are all white, and she is quite beautiful. All the accommodations here are tents, and the Phoenix guest room is one of the largest. Bedding, tables, and bathtubs are divided into blocks within the spacious tent. I have frequented small tents, so this is not unfamiliar to me. Baek So-ah says to me. Let me know if you need anything. Clothes, desired weapons, food, and alcohol, we can match them according to your taste. As long as its nothing too difficult. I ask with a calm expression. Is there poison in food? No, there isnt. I then ask another question while looking at Baek So-ahs expression. Why not? Youll make more money if Dong Bang-yeon keeps winning. How is it beneficial to us if an undefeated warrior keeps winning? No, an undefeated warrior attracts more gamblers. The gamblers may bring the warriors theyre nurturing, invite a master from outside, or ask an acquaintance to challenge Dong Bang-yeon. You attract all sorts of people here, and they will bet money. Baek So-ah then replies with a smile. I see. If youre not up for a meal, should I bring you some alcohol? I only drink Kaoliang liquor. Of course we have them. Is it for free? Of course. No poison? Yes. Bring it to me. Yes, Ill be right back. While leaving, Baek So-ah turns around at the entrance to the tent. Oh, sir? How about the ladies? What ladies? We will have girls serving you the alcohol. But they are not necessarily girls who will spend the night here. Most of them only want to serve alcohol, but you never know. There might be a girl who may take a liking to you. Should I pick a pretty young lady and bring her here? I ponder for a moment and answer. Might as well. Yes. Bring someone good at drinking. Baek So-ah answers with a tilted head. I understand. Sitting in front of the drinking table, I look at the woman Baek So-ah brings in to serve me. Do you drink well? Yes. Ah, sir, my name is Heuk So-ryeong (Ц). This woman is dressed in black from head to toe, and even her hair accessories are black in color. This is my first time looking closely at the two women. Your surname is Heuk too? Its a nickname. Heuk So-ryeong pours the Kaoliang liquor and holds out the glass. I dont grab the glass and instead lower my head to smell the drink. I shift into a lotus position in front of the drinking table, close my eyes, and then use the energy I exude as a focal point. I then scan Heuk So-ryeong with my Minds Eye (). When I have memorized Heuk So-ryeongs energy and expanded my range, I can sense an energy that I believe to be Baek So-ah outside. This is an internal Qi technique called the Strolling Safe (b) in the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique. I open my eyes and look at Heuk So-ryeong. Heuk So-ryeong asks me. What are you doing? I found out that both Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong are being used as honey traps due to their own circumstances. These two were rumored to be the most beautiful in my previous life. To be honest, I expected something special about them since they are being used as honey traps, but instead, its quite disappointing. While both Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong are rare beauties, I hadnt been interested in them at all in my previous life. They are women who need to bring down the challengers no matter what, but I already know that they have thorns in them despite their glamorous appearance. Using Strolling Safe, I identified that the two learned the same martial arts. Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong are talented people with outstanding fighting skills who have been trained enough to keep their expressions calm and even taught to drink and dance. I pour Heuk So-ryeong a glass and hand her the glass. When Heuk So-ryeong reaches out her hand to take it, I drop the glass on purpose. Heuk So-ryeong looks distraught as soon as she grabs the falling glass. At the same time, I jab her face and shoulder using the Wooden Fowl Finger Technique. Tap! Heuk So-ryeong stiffens while holding a glass. I praise Heuk So-ryeong for her fast reaction. Youre very good. Heuk So-ryeong looks at me with calm eyes even though she has had her pressure points sealed. . I look at the frozen Heuk So-ryeong before taking off and inspecting her hair ornament. While looking at the round black pearl, I squeeze my nails in the center and pull, splitting the black pearl in half. There is an unknown powder in it. What is this? Its powder. What kind of powder is it? Will I die if I eat it? Or not? What should I do? Im curious. Im dying from curiosity. Bah, whatever. I pour the powder from the black pearl into Heuk So-ryeongs glass and look at her. Miss Heuk, shall we have a drink? . I tilt Heuk So-ryeongs chin up and grab her jaw. After opening Heuk So-ryeongs mouth, I slowly pour the drugged liquor inside. The alcohol flows down with a dripping sound. Heuk So-ryeongs throat bobs as she swallows the drink. I lower her head and observe her with crossed arms. If its a deadly poison, youll die, and if its not, then good for you. Lets see. Heuk So-ryeongs eyes are unbothered. I whisper in Heuk So-ryeongs ear. Wow, I guess its not a deadly poison. How kind. But you put the powder in the pearl because its important, right? When I look at Heuk So-ryeong again, tears are flowing down her eyes. Looking at those tears, I think that it is fortunate that I had jabbed her acupoints. Because crying will create a fuss. I get up without making a sound, then walk to the entrance to the tent and stand in an appropriate position. A moment of silence. The silence continues until the time to call it for a moment has passed. Suddenly, the tents entrance folds open, and Baek So-ah appears. Sir? After I jab Baek So-ahs face and shoulders one after another, I drag her by her nape and sit her next to Heuk So-ryeong. When I take off Baek So-ahs white pearl hair accessory and open it, there is also powder in it. I pour the powder into my glass and feed it equally to Baek So-ah. They are both in tears when I check their conditions while warming up. What kind of powder is that? Why are you crying? I cant stand being curious. This is bad. This is really bad. Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeongs eyes are gradually rolling back. Huh? Their faces are flushed, and strangely, they have a mournful look on their faces. Only then did I realize what the powder was. Ah, its aphrodisiac (ˎ). I thought it was something else. After consuming the drugged alcohol that evokes sexual desire while in a state of being bound, it is no wonder, they are reduced to tears. Aphrodisiacs wont kill you. Its none of my business if you die, so Ill be back after a drink. The two of you, get a grip. I have no intention of touching the rice, water, alcohol, or snacks provided by the hosts. And I already know they are using honey traps from the start, so I have no intention of touching Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong. I exit the tent and head for the guest inn where the errand boy Il-bo works. As expected, drinking alcohol in a guest inn is best while watching drunk customers, fights, and people getting together. Il-bo gives me free drinks to celebrate a special occasion when I enter. I asked Il-bo. Is there no poison? Il-bo says. If I poisoned it, Ill be beaten to death by gamblers. What are you talking about? You should check since anyone couldve done it. Is that so? Il-bo, who is looking at the current happenings, sits across from me with a solemn face and says seriously. By the way, sir. What? Shall I bet all my fortune tomorrow? Who do you think will win? Il-bo strokes his chin and replies with a cautious look. You. Why? Thats the problem. I think you will win, but I dont know why. Just an errand boys hunch, I guess? Ah, I shouldnt risk my entire fortune with this hunch. Its too dangerous. Il-bo. Yes, sir. Will you do it if I ask you to? Il-bo replies with a bright expression as if it is good news. Yes. Really? Of course. I say seriously to Il-bo. Quit gambling. If I win this time, my life will take a 180-degree change, though? How can such money change your life? Youre asking me to be an errand boy for the rest of my life, is that right? I grin at his words. Isnt it that you dont dare to do anything else? You shouldve said it earlier. I need money to do something else. I pour Kaoliang liquor for Il-bo and say. Thats not true. Its just that you havent found the things you like, what you want, what you want to do. What do you really want? See, you dont. Do you know what you want, sir? Dont ask about others. Ask yourself. Il-bo and I glare at each other with an ever-serious expression and drink together. However, when other customers enter the inn, Il-bo stands up with a complicated look. Welcome. The group of incoming customers strides into the inn and immediately whacks Il-bo, knowing he drank. With a smack, Il-bo turns his head around. Is this a combination of a guy who hits and gets hit? The attackers behavior looks pretty natural. The customers laugh and say. Crazy errand boy, youre drinking again. Il-bo smiles bitterly and points inside. Please grab a seat. You drank, right? I had a drink today because something good happened. Apologies. Please come in. Il-bo, who skillfully lets the customers inside, suddenly gazes at me. . I laugh aloud as I watch Il-bos expression. Then, Il-bo, who has to go to get orders, smiles, and swears. Fuck, this sucks. Il-bo is seriously conflicted about whether he should endure the rising anger or explode. One of the customers stops walking and looks back after hearing Il-bos curse. Did you curse? When Il-bo stays still, the customer looks at me this time. Was it you? I nod slightly. The three people who are on their way to their seats turn back and come close as if they are planning to block me. A guy says. Why did you curse? You son of a gun, hm? I get up from my seat, look at the three, reach out and jab their shoulders. I then grab the man in the center by the throat with my left hand. Keugh! I glare at him with a firm grip on his neck. Why are you hitting an errand boy so recklessly? You son of a gun, hm? I get ready to flick his forehead. I blow hot air on my fingers and hit the man on the forehead. With a smack C the man tumbles backward. Holding his forehead with both hands, he rolls around the floor and screams. I then give the men with jabbed acupoints a forehead flick each. Smack! One guy keeps screaming, and the other faint after the forehead flick. Il-bo, who is watching, asks me. Sir, are finger flicks hard to master? Its very hard. Theres nothing easy in the world. I cant even learn finger flicks. Il-bo approaches me as if hed given up. He then sits across from me again and pours himself a drink. Il-bo asks. Have we ever met before in the past? Nope. Right? Theres a weird sense of closeness. If I quit here, where can I find you, sir? I dont think you will be staying if you win tomorrow. I cant tell you. Why? Because youre too weak. Thats because I didnt learn martial arts. Taking a sip of Kaoliang liquor, I proceed to say calmly. I never thought I was weak when I hadnt started to learn martial arts. Really? Why did you think so? I pour the rest of the drink to Il-bo. Thanks for the drink. Are you leaving already? Its about time for me to release the pressure points. When I stand up, Il-bo begs me as he grabs the crotch of my pants. Sir, please help me. Im not saying Im going to be a Kangho warrior, but Im telling you honestly because I think life would be better if I were your servant. Then, should I give you a mission? Yes. Go to the Black Rabbit Union and tell them to gather here at Shin-si (r) tomorrow. In particular, tell them to bring everything they have, such as wrapping clothes, boxes, wagons, and carts to collect the money. Can you do that? Il-bo nods. Understood. I leave the inn and return to the Phoenix guest room. I then check the condition of Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong with my hands behind my back. Somehow they are sweating excessively, and their long hair is sticking to their faces. The stench of make-up mixed with sweat pierces my nose. I stab the Moonlight Dagger into the table and stare at them. Chapter 77 Chapter 77 C Fraud Gamble Between Us I didnt jab them with much force in the first place, so their pressure points will soon be released. If you scream or say anything unrelated to my questions, I will pull this dagger. If your hands are faster than mine after your pressure points are undone, you could pull them out too. Ill accept this as a death challenge. Blink if you cant speak yet. Heuk So-ryeong, who got jabbed first, opens her mouth while Baek So-ah blinks. Only my face can move. Heuk So-ryeongs breathing is rugged, like a drunken person. I ask Heuk So-ryeong. Did Pyeong Gun-sa make you do this? Heuk So-ryeong looks at me with regret now that her throat is free. . I tilt my head and say. Have you not come to your senses? All right. I get it. You still cant decipher who is scarier. Thats plausible. I place my index finger lightly on the handle of Moonlight Dagger and ask conclusively. Did Pyeong Gun-sa make you do this? If there is no answer, the only gift I can give is the dagger. Heuk So-ryeong then replies urgently. Yes. I pull my finger off the dagger and say. Thats a close call. Your name is Heuk So-ryeong, right? You shouldnt be mistaken. If I kill you, Baek So-ah will still be alive. Once you die, shell get scared and tell me more than you do, wont she? Get your act together. Heuk So-ryeong answers immediately. Yes, I understand. I suddenly look at Baek So-ah. Then Baek So-ah hurriedly opens her mouth. My throat is released, too. I flick my finger and say. Good. From now on, lets answer the questions on a count of 3. Answer my question at the same time. The one who hesitates will get stabbed by the dagger and ascend. I wonder who will die first. First question, who is Pyeong Gun-sas boss? 1, 2, 3. The two reply in unison. King of Gamble (ـ). I give them an insincere round of applause. Bingo. Your lifespan is extended. The second question, if the King of Gamble is higher-ranked than Dong Bang-yeon, say up, and say lower if hes lower. Do you get what I mean? I give an additional explanation while moving my fingers around. Up and down, up and down, so close to death. 1, 2, 3. The two reply simultaneously. Up! Oh I smoothen my chin. I know the answers up until now. The problem is the third question. Its something I dont know. I have a feeling that Heuk So-ryeong and Baek So-ah will know. However, I have doubts whether they will give a proper answer. Ill count to 3 slowly for the third question. Answer carefully. Who is the King of Gamble? One, two, three. Mister Ouyang Bok. I reply to their answer nonchalantly, despite being slightly perplexed internally. Mister Ouyang? The Narak Inn Owner? Heuk So-ryeong and Baek So-ah answer at the same time. Yes. I touch my hair for a moment. One thing pops into my mind as I think of Ouyang Bok in my past life. A man who makes no enemies. In addition, he was a generous man who often gave away free alcohol, did not pester people for their tabs, and lost money all around since he enjoyed gambling. Still, Ouyang Bok was a good man who never frowned. Come to think of it, everyone addresses him formally since hes quite elderly. This is surprising. Is this a match between the Zaha Inn and Narak Inn? It suddenly occurs to me that Dong Bang-yeon might be Ouyang Boks disciple. I then say to Heuk So-ryeong and Baek So-ah. Well done. After jabbing their throats again, I lay them down one by one on the bed. I leave the center space empty as if I will be lying there, and this time I inject quite a lot of power into jabbing Heuk So-ryeong and Baek So-ahs shoulders. I pinch Heuk So-ryeongs cheek and tell her. Since you ate aphrodisiacs, youll have a racy dream. Lowering my foot from the top of the bed, I cover the two women. I then head for the Narak Inn after picking up Moonlight Dagger. When I suddenly appear in the Narak Inn, the customers all look at me in unison. A short silence follows before the conversations continue again. Thats a meaningful moment of silence. When I sit down, the errand boy, Jo-pal, approaches me. What can I get you? Jo-pal is an acquaintance, but I cant pretend to know him. I then tell Jo-pal, whom I havent seen in a long time. Give me anything thats white wine (׾). Sorry, we dont have anything. Its not funny. Just bring me anything. Yes, sir. Moments later, I look at the needlefish that came out as a dry snack with the white wine. Come to think of it, the inn uses expensive fish as the basic side dish. It gives me a strange feeling. As I space out after pouring out a glass of white wine, Ouyang Bok, the owner of Narak Inn, walks out with a sleepy gaze and looks at me. Ill pay for that drink, so pour me a glass. Ive never seen you around before. I pour the drink immediately for Ouyang Bok, who is sitting across from me. Ouyang Bok takes out a stick of daylilies uniquely shaped like a finger and lights it up. It is my first time seeing it, and it is even made of jade (). Ouyang Bok takes a deep hit of the daylilies and drinks a sip of the white wine while looking at my glass. Since Im not drinking, he cant help but look. Ouyang Bok then says. Give me another glass. Feeling lazy, I beckon with my chin at the white wine. Pour yourself. I speak to him informally on purpose and then watch the other customers. Initially, they arent looking my way, but I laugh when I see some of their expressions becoming stiff. Jeez, what a complicated world. In my past life, I innocently thought I had managed to survive. Ouyang Bok then says while drinking. Youre not drinking. When I dont give him a reply, Ouyang Bok finally says. I apologize about So-ryeong and So-ah. Pyeong Gun-sa must have got busted. Seems like Ouyang Bok has no choice but to tell the truth because he noticed I already know everything. Still, I never expected him to reveal his identity so quickly. Ouyang Bok suddenly looks at the other customers and waves his hand. Then, all the customers in the inn stand simultaneously and leave. Ouyang Bok gives me a wrinkly smile when all the customers have left. Young man, it doesnt look like you came to ruin my business. It costs 10,000 nyang in challenger fees and 50,000 nyang in dividends from gamblers. This is my token of appreciation, so take it and go back. I have sent off some Unorthodox Faction masters who came without sparring, but I never sent them back by giving them 50,000 nyang. 50,000 nyang? Ouyang Bok smiles and nods. 50,000 nyang. I reply to Ouyang Boks words. Arent most of the people who competed with Dong Bang-yeon dead? Some who win against him either die within the next few days or go missing. Ouyang Boks drowsy gaze begins to look more alert. You Why are you doing this? Did I kill your acquaintance? Did Dong Bang-yeon kill your brother or master? Youre young. You wouldnt lose a lot of money in gambling. Why do you say that? Plus, think of the fact that Im treating you kindly. Ouyang Bok holds up his hand when someone barges into the inn from outside. Stay put. Glancing sideways, I see a tall man, who looks like a fierce warrior from the battlefield, staring at me with hostile eyes. It is the King of Sparring Gambles, Dong Bang-yeon, who is trained in both internal and external martial arts. Dong Bang-yeon brings over a chair, sits next to me, and folds his arms as if he is going to watch over me. Ouyang Bok extends his hand and says. I havent changed my mind. 50,000 nyang. Id like to hear what you think. Dong Bang-yeon opens his mouth. Why are you giving him 50,000 nyang? Ouyang Bok interrupts Dong Bang-yeon. Be quiet. Hes still our customer. I look at Ouyang Bok and Dong Bang-yeon and say. What youre doing is a scam, not a sparring gamble. Ouyang Bok replies. Isnt that what business is all about? The difference is whether its small or large. Most in this business are frauds. Your schemes make the bandits and pirates look innocent. Ouyang Bok asks me. My business didnt cause you any trouble. If it does, I will raise the negotiating fee. I tap the table with my finger and say. The biggest problem with gambling is that its addictive. Its hard to quit. People who find something more interesting than gambling will quit, but not much in this world is more interesting than gambling. Would I give my entire fortune and cut off my hands and feet to stop? When I suddenly bring up the subject of gambling, Ouyang Bok snickers in response. You knew. There is a legitimate side to sparring gamble, but fraudulent gambles are different. You regularly bribe the nearby Unorthodox Faction master to ask them to turn a blind eye. Youre rich, so you have plenty to spend. Even if the breadwinner of someone elses family dies out of bankruptcy, its a given. The neighboring Unorthodox Factions expand their power with your money. This is not daylight robbery, so the Orthodox Faction cant do anything to you. You guys are formidable in many ways. Ouyang Bok then asks me. Dont you want to negotiate? I do. Tell me what you want. What started as a gamble should end with a gamble. Lets play a round of fraud gamble. What kind of fraud gamble? I suggest to the King of Gamble and Dong Bang-yeon. All of you, to the fighting pit. . Be my opponent. If you guys win, I will die. If I win, I will have everything here. I observe Ouyang Boks expression. So? Narak Inn Owner, King of Gamble, Ouyang Bok. Are you dumbfounded because its in your favor? Or are you scared of losing everything overnight? Its hard to choose, right? Whatever it is, this ridiculous proposal is a gamble. Like the King of Gamble he is, Ouyang Bok examines the conditions. What if I say no? If you refuse, youll get a more unfavorable hand. How come? I reply while slightly scratching my cheek. Tomorrow, my men will arrive as a group. Tonight is your best bet. Dong Bang-yeon tells Ouyang Bok. Hes insane, so lets do it. As the King of Gamble, Ouyang Bok does not readily agree as he takes these matters seriously. In a way, this prudence is only natural. Ouyang Bok never fights in a losing game. But thats the part I hate the most. King of Gamble concealing your identity, provide alcohol to challengers, using honey traps, using aphrodisiacs, using whatever means to make the opponent fight Dong Bang-yeon in a weakened state, ambushing the winners, burying the dead, buying alcohol for the gamblers with the money you make, pretending to be a good person, and regularly bribing the powerful Unorthodox Factions. And then you earn the nickname King of Gamble after living such a pathetic life? I call out to Ouyang Bok like I used to in a previous life. What a great gambler you are, Mister Ouyang. I dont understand. Why dont you kill us right now if youre so confident? Thats more beneficial to you. Beneficial to me? I insult them with a serious face. You still havent got a grip. Do you think were on the same level because we both run inns? I live in Kangho, and you guys live in the gambling house. Were on a different level, a different kind. If youve ripped off somebody your whole life, why dont you gamble properly for once? Master Gamble King. Stop trying to use your brain. Dong Bang-yeon is getting riled up, and I stare at him. Ouyang reaches out to stop Dong Bang-yeon and asks me. Youre from an inn? Who are you? That is a slip of the tongue, but I still just exposed my identity. I am the owner of the Zaha Inn. I swallow these words internally. Youre right, Im insane, but Im not the Crazy Demon yet. Ouyang Bok replies. Ill do that. Gather your men and go to the fighting pit. Its in my favor, no matter how hard I think about it. As long as you dont regret it. I nod. Living without regrets is a Kangho warriors virtue. Lets get going, pests. When I stand up, Dong Bang-yeon follows suit. He stands one head taller than me. Dong Bang-yeon looks down at me and says. There are guys out here trying to die, unusually. Wow, the way you talk is a little dignified? Is it because youre the King of Sparring Gambles? Strict, stern, serious. Something like that. Hey, thats cool. As Dong Bang-yeon, who is suppressing his anger, sucks in a deep breath, Ouyang Bok stops him with a subdued tone. Go warm up in the fighting pit. I look at their faces and turn around. Chapter 78 Chapter 78 C Lunatics Are My Enemies Outside Narak Inn, the lackeys disguised as customers are surrounding the store. Faces I know are mixed among the crowd as well. Dong Bang-yeon is staring at me from behind. I stand still, silently signaling them to ambush me as I watch the faces I havent seen in a long time. I carry out this useless checking by noting things like how that guy is also the King of Gambles subordinates, ah, hes a King of Gambles lackey too. Someone then asks Dong Bang-yeon from among the scumbags. Should we kill him? Walking past me, Dong Bang-yeon replies. At the fighting pit. Tell everyone to gather. Everyone? Dong Bang-yeon yells. Every single one of you! Dong Bang-yeon looks back at me and says. What are you doing? Lets go. I stand side by side with Dong Bang-yeon and head to the fighting pit. Some people are going out to summon the others, but quite a few also head for the fighting pit while encircling me. In the meantime, many people drinking outside the inn stand up in the alleyway, and even the ordinary customers are added to fill the street instantly. As the crowd gradually expands, Dong Bang-yeon smiles. Its too late to regret this. As I walk alongside Dong Bang-yeon, I find a familiar street vendor. I smack several heads to make a path and take out a silver ingot from my money pouch. Mister, one rock candy, please. The street vendor holds out a stick of rock candy with a surprised look. The vendor hurriedly opens his change bag as I extend out the silver coin. I tell him while biting the rock candy in my mouth. You can keep the change. Oh, yes. I follow Dong Bang-yeon as I suck on the candy. Dang, when was the last time I had rock candies? Dong-yeon sighs and curses when I let out slurping and sucking sounds with my lips. Moron. I ignore the dying mans words. By the time we arrive at the fighting pit, spectators and gamblers who are unrelated to the King of Gamble have also gathered. Pyeong Gun-sa, who appears from somewhere, strides beside Dong Bang-yeon and says. Whats going on? Were supposed to compete tomorrow. Dong Bang-yeon replies. Shut up. I bite off the rock candy and say to Pyeong Gun-sa. Shut up, ordinary soldier. Dong Bang-yeon shouts at his followers. Narak Society (), kill this guy in the fighting pit. I reply to Dong Bang-yeons words. Why? Are you going to appear at the end, fucking moron? This happens if you give a dog a nickname with king. Is this a new trend? I slap the cheek of the man, who turns around with a grimace in front of me. Get lost, rascal. The man I slapped whirls in a somersault and faints as soon as he touches the ground. Sneakily knock out one guy, success. As soon as I enter the fighting pit, the scumbags spread out, stretching as I head to the center. As I do a warm-up exercise called the Kangho Gymnastics (w), I look at the entrance as fire moths disguised as humans flock inside. Not only the fighting pit but ghosts crazy about gambling have also gathered in the audience. Then, as if a beacon is connected to the fighting, the stage becomes brighter as fire lights up the place. I fight alone, so I can use darkness to my advantage. However, as the beacon circles the fighting pit, the place becomes as bright as day. I can fight better because I can see well. An optimistic guy in any given situation, thats me. The gamblers in the audience ask Pyeong Gun-sa. Pyeong Gun-sa, whats happening? Youve got to explain. Having heard about what happened to his subordinates, Pyeong Gun-sa replies to the gamblers. Just stay put and watch. This fight isnt about money. What fight is that you want me to just watch? This time I clap my hands to get their attention. Everyone, listen up. Those who know and those who dont know wont know, but the most powerful person here is the King of Gambles. Dong Bang-yeon roars. Shut up! The person who talks more when told to shut up is me. The King of Gambles is the owner of Narak Inn. I will fight the entire Narak Society, including the King of Gambles. If I die, you can continue to play with the King of Gambles. If I win, everything belonging to the King of Gambles will be mine. Dong Bang-yeons face turns red when I reveal the King of Gambles identity. I point to Dong Bang-yeon. That punk is one of King of Gambles lackeys. How can a king be someone elses lackey? If he had fought with his skills, he wouldve died long ago You sure live a long life. Pointing my finger at the subordinates of King of Gamble, well over a hundred people, I say. Ill give you a chance to live. Go up to the audience seat if youre scared. Anyone? I lift my finger and scratch the bridge of my nose. Never mind then. In fact, I wont kill them all. If they were a cult, a league, or even a higher-ranking Unorthodox Faction, I wouldve annihilated them. However, an organization built with gambling as the core wouldnt be all that cruel. Those weaker than me but fight until their last breath is either a fanatic, too prideful, or crazy about Unorthodox Factions. Therefore, only lunatics are my enemies. Many moths flutter in like plum blossom petals. I abruptly pull out Black Hares Tooth and slowly unleash Plum Blossom Sword Technique that I had been enlightened with under the plum tree. Since it is not yet a complete sword method with detailed movements, I just move as the sword suggests. Suddenly, I realized that the mindset on the day I crafted Plum Blossom Sword Technique was light and pleasant, so it was not suitable for the occasion. Once again, I have gained enlightenment. I reached the final conclusion that the Plum Blossom Sword Technique shouldnt be used to kill gamblers. No other reason whatsoever. Dong Bang-yeons voice echoes in the arena. Kill him. Suddenly, I turn my head and see the moths gathering like ants. Watching the approaching men, I sheathe Black Hares Tooth and face them unarmed. Fighting unarmed means fighting with my bare hands and fist, and as a metaphor, they have no weapons, but it is different in my case. Unfurling the Fire Chicken with my empty left hand, I also use my right hand lightly to create a bare fist. Though I grew up poor. A man who strives barehanded, thats me. Calming down my mind, I begin to hit the enemy with the Fighting Chicken principles. The Fighting Chickens teachings are simple yet mysterious. If I am to explain, its delivering high-skilled, random blows. I dodge swords, knives, whips, and spears. I jab pressure points when I see shoulders and poke eyes with my finger when I spot eyes. If I lower my head and see someones foot, I stamp on it. Step! Argh! I will push off attacks that are hard to counteract with Palm Wind. I jump up, stepping on shoulders and other peoples heads, and then kick off a mans face with a surprised expression. Still, I am busy. I have to lower my head often and scrunch my shoulder to avoid incoming swords, shooting Palm Wind in front of me with both hands and sending spinning kicks to those coming from the back. They lack experience fighting in groups. Pathetic guys. Furthermore, the masters arent coming forward, so the first ones who come at me are only kicked or punched, yet they roll off to the floor so feebly. But their screams are realistically desperate. Keugh Huk! A man hugs his stomach after being hit in the abdomen and faints on his knees as he passes out. He didnt faint immediately but is showing signs of losing consciousness. When I push his head, he rolls his eyes up and directly displays a fainting act by falling to the side. I sigh. What should I say about this atmosphere? The scumbags are fighting half-heartedly because they value their lives. Its also because I am not wielding a sword and letting them get away with one strike. The enlightenment gained under the plum blossom has become weird. When I dont kill the scumbags brutally, they slowly notice and start fighting chaotically and lying on the floor. These guys are really something, I think to myself. Perhaps thinking the turn of events is laughable, Dong Bang-yeon shouts out loud. All of you, get out. Top masters who had been active in sparring gambles stand in a line next to where Dong Bang-yeon is standing. Only 1/3 of the crowd is sprawled on the floor. Many cant hide their astonishment, knowing it is already their turn. I know most of those guys. I know their fighting patterns, and I am even well-aware of their personality traits. Whats important is that there are guys who deserve to be beaten to death amongst them. When I suddenly rush in after pulling out Black Hares Tooth, a few begin to scramble off. Looking at the runaways, I chase down the devils who committed assault and rape in their previous lives. My intention of beating only one guy is revealed. The frightened men quickly clear the way for me, and my chase commences against the fleeing devil. The devil screams while pushing the crowd. He cries, Why did you stop? but his crimes are so horrible that even his colleagues frown upon them. None of them respond to his cry. I soar into the air, step on someones shoulder, move, and swing Black Hares Tooth on the back of the devil who had fled near the entrance. I fend off the devils serrated blade (X) with Black Hares Tooth. I stamp down on the devils shoulders instantly. Then, I turn around after slashing the devils neck with Black Hares Tooth. Hearing the devils body hit the ground with a thump behind me, I look around the fighting pit. I still have more to kill. Hey, get out of the way. You, I said, get out of the way, rascal. As I look around holding the blood-ridden Black Hares Tooth, the scumbags are clumped up and squirming like fishes avoiding predators. When I suddenly rush in like a madman once again, screams ring out. They are in terror since I am selective in my killings. But theres no reason for me to explain why. I find Il So-ja (һЦ), who often murdered his fellow gamblers for no reason. This time, I point at Il So-ja with my finger. Hey, small eyes. Come here. Il So-ja widens his small eyes and unfolds his footwork near the audience seats. While running, I pick up a willow throwing knife, soar in the air obliquely, and throw it at a fierce speed like a flying ax. At that moment, the willow throwing knife is shining red due to the Fire Chicken as it flies and penetrates through Il So-jas back and ends up stuck on the wall. As a cracking sound fills the air, Il So-ja belatedly collapses on the floor. As Dong Bang-yeon realizes his lackeys are sheep, he draws his double sword in the air. Only then do I swing Black Hares Tooth a dozen times without stopping. Finally, sparks fly whenever the weapons clash. Subsequently, Pyeong Gun-sas handheld fan hanging from my waist shakes about. When I deflect Dong Bang-yeons double sword and step back, palm forces are shot at me from the back. I stomp on the floor and shoot upwards like the Earth is my enemy. The devil and Il So-jas colleagues are joining forces. As I shoot up vertically, Dong Bang-yeon, Pyeong Gun-sa, and two others who had ambushed me are waiting for me at my landing point. I click my tongue at the pathetic sight Do I look like a joke to you? Holding Black Hares Tooth midair with both hands, I curl up and spin crazily like a top caught in a whirlwind. I evoke the Fiery Fragrance with both hands and inject it into Black Hares Tooth. The blades flying like sparks in all directions shower in the sky like raining petals. The guys who made a belated surprise attack are already dead, with scorching holes all over their bodies. While Dong Bang-yeon and Pyeong Gun-sa struggle to ward off the blades surging in like a rain of hidden weapons. This is an attack technique improvised in a wave of madness, but I did it in a frenzy, so it doesnt have a special name. Maintaining the silence to gain momentum after creating a ruckus is good. I touch the ground with my left knee and left hand, and the Black Hares Tooth in my right-hand stretches out horizontally as I raise my head slowly. As I get up, I slowly put Black Hares Tooth into the sheath as if I have something to say. Then, without saying anything, I draw the blade and send it across to slice Pyeong Gun-sa, who is bleeding all over his body. Pzark! Pyeong Gun-sas head soars high into the air. Chapter 79 Chapter 79 C Gamblers Song The weaklings are bound to join the silence when the person in power is silent. I made Dong Bang-yeon, who is still alive, and all the present spectators shut their mouths, and pick up Pyeong Gun-sas handheld fan on the floor. When I open it, blood is smeared on the white fan. Flapping the fan slowly, I scan the crowd. I then address everyone here. You pathetic bastards. What a wonder. The words echo throughout the fighting pit and prick my heart. I was pathetic, too. When I glance at Dong Bang-yeon, his left arm is bleeding after getting hit by my previous attack. After clearing my throat, I recite the songs first words, known to all gamblers here in monotone. I spent 30 years at a gambling house. . Pyeong Gun-sa sang occasionally. The songs that are often sung by gamblers, those who lost their money, debtors, bystanders, and everyone working nearby are flowing out of my mouth. Hold onto the cards when I was young and put down the cards as I grow old. The gamblers in the audience respond by singing the following line. I gambled away my fortune. I also nod and mutter. I gambled away my fortune. Pointing to this and that guy with a fan, the song continues. Was it only my money? The gamblers follow in like a bell chime. No way. How can I throw away my friends money and relatives money without hesitation? No one welcomed me even though I havent been home in a long time. I took out the money hidden in the closet and headed to the gambling house. Everyone in the neighborhood looks at me with contempt. The gamblers sing the final line. Everyone I meet looks at me with contempt. I stood still, holding the handheld fan, and continued singing. If I dont show up again, tell them I died gambling. Today, the cards were especially lingering before my eyes. Making eye contact with the Narak Society scumbags, I repeat the chorus. I will be in luck today. I will be in luck today. Following my lead, the gamblers sing along. I will be in luck today. I will be in luck today. After the song, I speak to the gamblers in my usual voice. But youre not in luck today. . Were closing today, so pack up and leave, dimwits. The shows over. I yell at the audience and the Narak Society scums who are watching me wordlessly. Fuck off, dickheads! I go up to a Narak Society martial artist, whack his head, kick his butt and say. Get out of here, you punk. Didnt you hear? Were closed. Pathetic bastard. As I randomly beat up two or three people and cursed at them, only then did the gambling addicts disperse. Go home if you have a roof, scumbags, and if you dont, go beg for money. The last guy to get out of here will have their wrist broken. I run up to the dawdling bastards and kick them in the ass once more. Hit! When the man who had rolled on the ground also jumps up and hurries away, the remaining Narak Society is also dismissed. As I look around the room while fluttering the handheld fan, only a few people remain. They must be gambling officials who cant leave because they have piled up a fortune here. I look at Ouyang Bok, the King of Gamble, sitting alone in the audience. Do you think youre screwed now? Ouyang Bok stares at me without saying a word. Did you think youd win if all your subordinates came at me? Didnt I say this is a fraud gamble? Any thoughts, Dong Bang-yeon? Isnt it refreshing to meet someone like me after beating up those squirming dudes after drugging them aphrodisiacs? Ouyang Bok, who is seated in the audience, opens his mouth. Look, young man. Before coming here, I sent a letter to the Nanming Society (). Ah, Nanming Society. It will be difficult to pay bribes in the future if we have a troublemaker here. Its a simple letter, but the Nanming Society will look into it. Ive paid a hefty amount, you know. I nod. I suppose so. Did you expect the money would go to you if you made a mess here? Its not that simple. Even if you run around recklessly, you will eventually get caught by the Unorthodox Factions. Thats why Im satisfied with this gambling house. Ouyang Bok puts a stick of daylilies in his mouth in his seat and breathes out smoke. Insolent bastard. I hit the fan on my palm, fold it, and throw it at Dong Bang-yeon. Schwingggg! When Dong Bang-yeon, whose pressure points blockages had worn off, crosses his double sword to block the fan, sparks fly. At the same time, I strike forward with Black Hares Tooth. The weapon containing the Fiery Fragrance slices the upper body of Dong Bang-yeon at an angle. Pwark! Three startled members of Narak Society all flee, each heading north, east, and south. What confidence did they have to stay all this time? Looks like they had faith in the unwavering Ouyang Bok at the audience seat. Putting Black Hares Tooth away and picking up Dong Bang-yeons double sword, I throw it eastward and then southward. Two swords penetrate the escapees body and then stick in the wall. The man who runs north shoots toward the audience seat and says to Ouyang Bok. Leader, lets go! Startled awake, Ouyang Bok grabs and pulls the official to find a safe place. He then suddenly grabs and smashes his head on the chair. Thud! Thud! Thud! After hitting three times, the officials body collapses under the chair. Ouyang Bok raises his voice, kicking his subordinate-turned-corpse. Who said were running away! I leap lightly into the air, and I am standing behind him when Ouyang Bok shouts out his words. As soon as Ouyang Bok, who is still attacking the body, notices that I am behind him, his movements slow down significantly. Ouyang Bok says as he turns around. Was it called the Zaha Inn At the same time he raises the question, Ouyang Bok shoots double palm forces. I dont deflect Ouyang Boks palm forces but extend my hands to challenge him. Ouyang Boks palm forces that must have taken a relatively long time to hone are overpowered by my own. During the challenge, I call out to him using the name I did in the past. Mister Ouyang, I knew you were a generous person. I dont know if the owner has to be generous to run a successful gambling house. Ouyang Bok looks at me in astonishment as his eyes become wide as he continues to release his palm force. Of course, it is only natural for him to be confused since the person hed met for the first time is talking like theyd known each other for years. Who are you? However, I dont intend to resolve the suspicions of someone dying soon. An errand boy. Ouyang Bok interprets that as confessing that I used to work as an errand boy here. After overwhelming Ouyang Boks palm force with the Fire Chicken energy, I switch to the Great Absorption Technique to extract Ouyang Boks Qi from his Dantian. Ouyang Boks desperate screams fill the fighting pit. As soon as I confirm that Ouyang Bok looks like his life force has been sucked out of him, I hurriedly retrieve my hand. Sinking down to his knees, Ouyang Bok looks up at me with an exhausted expression as if he is about to die. Nanming Society Forget about them. Ill take care of the rest. Does our generous Mister Ouyang have any last words? Facing death, Ouyang Bok looks to have completely lost it and asks. Do I get a share of your winnings? No, you asshole. I lift my right foot and step down on Ouyang Boks windpipe. Jab! Winners share my foot. I deliver the results of todays duel while looking at the empty audience seats. Everyone, listen up. The owner of the Zaha Inn has won. I am walking around clapping on the railing of the fighting pit, picking out a torch, crumpling abandoned papers, and setting it on fire. It is a bundle of documents with the gamblers names and betting amounts. Whoosh! While looking around, I throw the torch to a place that quickly catches fire, pulls out more torches, and gift fire to Ouyang Boks corpse. The fire catches on Ouyang Boks clothes, engulfing his entire body. A man who sets fire everywhere he goes, thats me. As I walk around picking up and throwing torches, the place is going up in flames. Most of the audience seats are made of wood, hence the blaze turning this place rapidly into a colossal brazier. Walking through the blazing fire, I sing the gamblers song to myself. I spent thirty years in a gambling house. Hold onto the cards when I was young and put down the cards as I grow old. I gambled away my fortune. Was it only my money? How can I throw away my friends money and relatives money without hesitation? No one welcomed me even though I havent been home in a long time. I took out the money hidden in the closet and headed to the gambling house. No one welcomed me even though I havent been home in a long time. I took out the money hidden in the closet and headed to the gambling house. Everyone I meet looks at me with contempt. If I dont show up again, tell them I died gambling. Today, the cards were especially lingering before my eyes. My luck will be good today. I will be in luck today. Feeling a sense of satisfaction after burning down the gambling house and singing, I let out a long guffaw. Riding on the high, I burned his body and spread the flames as if pissing on his dream. Pulling out Black Hares Tooth, I dance between the scorching flames. The Magic Fire Technique wrapped around Black Hares Tooth shoots forward, making the fire burn stronger. As the fire joins the flame, the area is lit ablaze as if Acalantha has descended. I space out as I look at the flame. How great will it be if this powerful, beautiful, ruthless flame becomes my power? I lay on the warm ground where the flames havent yet reached and look up at the night sky. I want to sweep the stars in the night sky and drop Buddhist statues over the cult fanatics hunting me down. Talks and gossip stop whenever I go, stomp on those who cut mountains with swords, and slap the faces of masters called the Three Disasters. Thats me. Not yet. Ugh, its hot. The moment I sit up, I am surrounded by a sea of fire. . A man who comes back to the past and gets burned to death, thats not me. I draw Black Hares Tooth vertically and shoot Blade Wind in front of me. Swoooooosh! The flames are split to the side but begin to creep up again. I swing my blade around in place and, after injecting the Fighting Chickens energy, use the Cut In Half Technique (һɔ) that is used by every faction. The fire splits into two branches, and the entire audience seat beyond it is completely separated into half, making a path crafted by the slash of a sword. Slashing the fiery hell caused by the burning gamblers, I escape. I leave the burning fighting pit behind and look at the town of hectic gamblers. What a beautiful night. A ruckus is taking place, and someone shouts out loud. Fire! I reply in a monotonous tone to the remark. Its a fire show. Fire! Its a fire show. Okay? Suddenly, I dash off like someone who has forgotten something and scream upon arrival near the Phoenix guest room. Miss So! Miss Heuk! Are you in there? I chuckle and look around. People are shouting Fire. here and there, so it mustve been like hell for the ladies. A weak murmur can be heard in the Phoenix guest room. I pull back the tent curtains and ask while heading to the bedroom. Are you there? No? I guess not. He he h ere A desperate scream comes from the bed as their pressure points havent worn off. I dance my way to the bed. Youre still here when the sun sets, and the moon is shining? Sinking my feet on the bed, I look down at Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong. The two cry for a long time and look at me with bloodshot eyes. ! Outside the tent, someone is rushing past, yelling. Fire! I stare at Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong with a stiff expression and say in a low voice. its a fire show. Soon, Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeongs eyes roll up, and they both faint at the same time. Chapter 80 Chapter 80 C This Is Mine. Im not surprised anymore. I look impassively at Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong, who fainted without my permission. Though I have thrashed several She-Devils (Ůħ^) known for their evil deeds in my Crazy Demon days, I never killed any women weaker than me. Furthermore, fainting in their weakest state possible is testing my conscience. Suddenly, I recall the faces of the She-Devils and compare them to the two unconscious women. Evildoers do not come in genders. However, the common characteristic of She-Devils is the fact that their faces show that they have no luck. Most of the time, the allure was replaced where luck should be. Rather than their allure coming from being man-crazed, it is instead caused by the martial arts they master. She-Devils who master the Yang Energy Conversion Technique, such as Switching Yang To Yin, often maintain their youth by forcibly sucking the essence of teenagers and youngsters. The problem is, they are also adept masters whove fought for a long time during my Crazy Demon days, so they are opponents I cant let my guard down on. I inspect them closely when I suspect the unconscious Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong to be younger versions of the She-Devils I knew from my previous life. I would beat them to death right here and now if they are indeed them. Not you. I grab Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong by the collar, sit down, and give each a slap. Slap! Slap! Todays your lucky day. The two knocked-out people slowly come to their senses. Outside, people are still heading for the fighting pit crying Fire, but there are no risks of a big fire breakout. The fighting pit is an independent building, and the lower center arena is sunken. As soon as they open their eyes, they begin crying again. Stop crying. I go to the corner and tell them this as I give my face a light wash. You better shut your mouth before I throw you into the fire pit. After washing my face, I sit on a chair in front of the bed, staring at the two. Im a kind man, so I explain to them the story of the fire show. The Narak Society is gone. Dong Bang-yeon, Pyeong Gun-sa, Ouyang Bok are dead. And many others too. If you dont want to go up to heaven and set up a cotton cloud rainbow gambling house with the dead guys in heaven, answer my questions well. Got it? Freed from their pressure points, the two respond shortly. Yes. I promised Ouyang Bok like a man. If I win against the whole Narak Society, I will own everything that belongs to the Narak Society. As you can see, I won, and Ouyang Bok ascended as soon as he asked for a winners tip. Im concerned. He should stop gambling in heaven. You guys should pay a silent prayer to Ouyang Bok. . I fiddle around for Moonlight Dagger and say. Do I have to take the knife out for you to pray? Well do it. I watch the two pay silent tribute with closed eyes. Heuk So-ryeong is trembling, and Baek So-ah has a runny nose with her eyes closed. Now open your eyes. I ask the two who opened their eyes. Im sure hes off to a good place, right? Heuk So-ryeong and Baek So-ah answer me simultaneously. Yes. I reply to them in a deadpan. No, that wont happen. . You can only go to a good place if you extort from one or two people. How can he be off in a good place? Am I right? Thats right. Since he died in a fire, he must have gone straight to the inferno. Tomorrow, my men will bring carts and carriages. Tell my men where Ouyang Bok hid his fortune and have your cooperation to smoothly retrieve Narak Societys funds. Can you do that? Yes, we can. Great. Rest up. If you seize the chance to run away just because your pressure points are worn off Rainbow gambling house, got it? Baek So-ah then asks. Isnt there a fire outside? Fire? I see. Ill keep the fire under control. Cant you just release us? Shut up. Controlling the fire comes first. Standing up, I pull back the curtains of the Phoenix guest room and leave. Naturally, the flames are only flaming up in the fighting pit. Walking down and spectating the chaotic street, I enter the empty Narak Inn. I cant see errand boy Jo-pal, and the white wine I didnt touch is still there. Of course, all the Narak Society fighters are all missing. Just as I send the errand boy Il-bo to the Black Rabbit Union, errand boy Jo-pal mustve gone to the Nanming Society with Ouyang Boks letter. I roll up my sleeves and murmur. Shall we look at the King of Gambles residence? I head inside, passing through a narrow hallway, to the kitchen, the errand boys room, and the warehouse, before arriving at the end of the hallway. A thick iron door that did not match the guest inn was blatantly standing there. I didnt take the keys from the corpses in the fighting pit, so instead, I unsheathe the Moonlight Dagger and heat it up using the Fire Chicken. As it glows red, I press Moonlight Dagger into the keyhole, step back and kick down the iron door. Bang! It is a large room similar in size to the guest inn. Looking around in this place, I note that his place as the King of Gamble is nothing more than a prison. The owner did not leave the house because he was protecting the money tucked away in the back. The King of Gamble lived a useless life. The inside is full of all kinds of expensive-looking furniture and collections. How can an inn owner collect these luxury items? I have no particular interest in antiques or items of aesthetic value, so I stop looking. As I go to the desk that Ouyang Bok used, I find a half-written letter. Narak Society has been attacked by some crazy lunatic. I couldnt predict his martial arts skills, tricks dont work on him either, and he knows much about Narak Society. All this time, I have been devoted to the Nanming Society orders without requesting aid That is all written on the letter, and an ink line is also drawn in the center. Suddenly, as I look at the right wall of the desk, I spot six portraits. The portraits are unfamiliar faces from the first to the fifth, but I can immediately recognize the last portrait. The Nanming Society Leader, Nam Ga-rak (ϼэR). The Narak Society seems to have sponsored six previous Nanming Society Leaders. I stare at Nam Ga-raks portrait for a moment. Of course, I know his name and face well, but I have never engaged with him in person, so I have to rely on information and memory. He was doing well and suddenly died in the hands of a master. Who was it again? It wasnt the Crazy Monk Ah, it was to the Nameless (o) Assassin. The culprit who killed Nam Ga-rak was quite lowkey, so it remained an unsolved mystery for a long time. Still, having lost their leader, the Nanming Society identified the culprit to be an assassin faction called the Spright Clan (һȔɽ) and declared an all-out war. The Nanming Society was ruined shortly after. However, there are more rumors about the Nanming Society circulating in Kangho. It is partly due to the Spright Clan, who gained victory after incurring a great loss. The Nanming Society also fought a ridiculously intense war against the fairly powerful Spright Clan. Since they are lunatics who fight until their faction is annihilated, I must reconsider how I should deal with the Nanming Society. The case of the Spright Clan killing the Nanming Society Leader is useless right now because the incident only takes place in a few years. I remove the portrait of Nan Ga-rak from the wall. I take down all the other portraits, smash them on the ground, and look at the wall. Near the center, covered by the six portraits, there is a metal door that seems like a secret safe. It is a strange door that has no keyholes or locks. I look at the walls and ceilings, follow an imaginary line, and glance at the desk again. This is a systemic device connected to the desk that is designed to be opened at the same time. I open the desk drawer one by one, close them back, and try to lift the inkstone on the desk but get no reaction. When I gently press the inkstone, I feel a pretty significant resistance. I press the inkstone with appropriate strength and add palm force. Immediately, a rattling sound rings out from somewhere. When I go to the wall and push the metal door, another mechanical sound follows as the iron door opens outward with a click. ! Swoosh I step aside as soon as I hear the sound of the wind. A metal needle from the inside of the metal door fires and shoots across to the opposite wall. Thud! What on Earth did he hide to prepare this shit? When I peek inside from a distance away, to my surprise, I can see a clean-cut, thin metal piece. I cant touch it recklessly, so I bring a lamp from the desk and light up the inside. Hmm I thought that it was gold, but its black in color. The surface looks rough and hard. I took out the Moonlight Dagger to gouge out the unidentifiable piece of metal and bring it to the desk. Making sure that the surface is not poisoned, I use the tip of Moonlight Dagger to draw on the metal surface. Although I have drawn it as finely as if I am engraving letters, the tip of Moonlight Dagger can not penetrate its surface. Its darksteel (F). Though Ouyang Bok had already paid a hefty amount of money to the Nanming Society, he didnt seem to have any intention of presenting darksteel to them. I am curious about where he got this, but the owner is already deceased. I carry the darksteel out of the safe door onto the desk. I can spot a small booklet and a black ring inside, but I want to look at the darksteel first. Something comes to mind, so when I try to carve it into a shape, it becomes a black, long sword (L). It is incredible. I am not surprised that it was a long sword made out of darksteel, but I am more curious about how it was molded. What kind of master in this world can make a sword out of darksteel? Forget my Crazy Demon days, even the top masters who were stronger than I couldnt even break darksteel into pieces. Perhaps Ouyang Bok wanted to mold this into a new weapon. However, the reason why it was only kept here will forever be a mystery. Im not a blacksmith, but this looked at least a few centuries old. There is a perception that weapons made of darksteel are indestructible, but I throw away that misconception after seeing this. Nothing in this world is indestructible. Perhaps the owner of the long sword was a great master. However, when that solid, long sword broke, the sword owner died. This indicates the faith and belief you held are broken. Only then did I somehow understand what Crazy Monk had said to me. If you break your faith, youre a dead man, so you dont have to worry. What do you mean? Just like what I said. Instead, it sounded as if weapons would hinder the process of gaining further martial art knowledge. I finally realized that Crazy Monks words should be interpreted differently depending on my experience and skills. Perhaps I couldnt understand half of Crazy Monks words in my past life. I take out the booklet and ring from the metal door, place them on the desk, and start reading the booklet. Generational Swordsman (һ) Grandmaster Ouyang (WO). Grandmaster Heavy Sword (O؄) I smile as soon as I see the following sentence. Grandmaster Ouyang has lost to me seven times, who had no prestige. He was a prideful man, but the stronger party won nonetheless. I knew I would win before the fight, so I was nonchalant. However, Grandmaster Ouyang could not accept this. He didnt even ask for the cause of defeat. I understand the Kangho warriors mindset, but how do I explain that he couldnt move on to the next stage because of that mindset? When I pointed out his flaws, I got the answer that it was too late to learn again. I beg to differ. How can one be late and early when it comes to learning? I know things dont always go their way. When I honestly told him not many have competed against me in Kangho, he was even more shocked. I didnt mean to put him into Qi Deviation, but Grandmaster Ouyang only trained with his own sword for a long time, and mind training and swordsmanship are subpar methods. This is often the case for Kangho warriors. I briefly summarize the martial arts technique of Grandmaster Ouyang that I faced at his dying request, who couldnt overcome his wounded heart. The people who obtained this sword method should only use this with good intentions. I guarantee you will end up miserable if you use this for the wrong reasons. Ki Sung-ja (ӛ). I already noticed that it is a booklet written by Ki Sung-ja while reading, as it contains the same tone as the author of the Strolling Golden Turtle Techniques manual. The reason why Ouyang Bok hid it is simple. Ki Sung-jas martial arts teachings are too profound. Knowing it was out of his abilities, Ouyang Bok wont understand what it meant even if he read it. Furthermore, it is clear that the prophecy that he would be miserable if used for the wrong reasons weighed on his mind. However, no one understands Ki Sung-ja more than I do in this present Kangho. Therefore, the Grandmaster Ouyang Technique is a sword method only I can clearly understand in the world. Suddenly, I think. I cant believe he challenged Ki Sung-ja seven times, the person who invented the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique Grandmaster Ouyang, just how strong were you at that time? Chapter 81 Ki Sung-ja has listed eight tactics of Grandmaster Ouyangs techniques. I can copy the first four tactics to some extent, so I deliberately skip them. Long Sword Style (Lʽ) is to emit energy. Short Sword Style (̄ʽ) is to condense energy. Myriad Sword Style (fʽ) is shooting Sword Energy like a torrent of petals. Draw Sword Style (΄ʽ) is a principle of unfolding the previous three styles while pulling out a sword. However, the second half of the martial arts technique becomes more difficult. Thunderous Sword Style (ׄʽ). Converting Sword Energy into a thunderstorm. How am I supposed to do this? Wooden Sword Style (ľʽ). Utilize 5 techniques with a wooden sword, but wouldnt it be expected for the wooden sword to break? Energy Sword Style (Ωʽ). Unfurl every technique without the wooden sword, then why do I have to learn sword techniques in the first place? Grandmaster Style (Oʽ). It says here that the sword, mental and internal Qi, explodes instantly, but its such an absurd tactic that I have nothing to say about that. I read the whole thing three times over and gave up on the second half of the eight tactics wholly and utterly, without any lingering feelings. A man who gives up right away if he cant do it, thats me. Ki Sung-jas explanation was too brief. If you try to force yourself to learn, youll only end up experiencing Qi Deviation four times. This senior is always brief in his explanation. It could be due to his high martial art skills, or maybe he thought it was pointless to explain in detail. I realized something while learning martial arts in my previous life. Some are easy to learn as soon as you see them. On the other hand, you cant master a martial art or specific tactics if it doesnt match your way of thinking, personality, and understanding. The point here is that I am not naturally a perfect human being. As written in the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique, you get stronger gradually daily, and if you try to get into something that doesnt work out, it will not produce good results. There are many ways to get stronger, so theres no need to dwell on the second half of the tactics. My mindset on martial arts is a little more flexible and lenient than in my Crazy Demon days. Lets not force ourselves to do what we cant do. Putting the darksteel into an expensive-looking box, I wear the unspecified ring on my middle finger and leave. Is it because Ive read the book over and over again? It is already dawn. After I pack the two unopened Kaoliang liquor from the kitchen, I sit at a table outside and watch the sunrise. Though there are purple hues when the sun is setting, the color of the sky is also fascinating at sunrise. Its like when Yin and Yang energy shine in a tense, knitted face-off of palms. Anyway, whether its sunset or dawn, these mysterious lights are always similar to my name, Zaha (ϼ). Getting rid of my thoughts and feelings, I read Ki Sung-jas review that is written at the back of the manual. Does Grandmaster Ouyangs sword technique look great? Even a man like this was defeated by me seven times. Drinking a glass of Kaoliang liquor, I read it as if I were talking with Ki Sung-ja. Youre cool. Does that make me the Greatest In The World (µһ)? No. As far as I know, there are other masters on the same level as me. Everyone in this world grows old and dies. How can I boast about being the greatest? If I dont compete with the masters and survive longer than them by taking care of my health, will I become the best in the world? Then I would die of old age soon. In short, the word the best in the world means nothing. If I travel the world and meet a master stronger than me and discuss martial arts, that will be my blessing and joy. Why is winning and losing a better pleasure than improving martial arts skills? Martial arts cultivation is a slow and lengthy process. Those in a hurry face the fate of harming themselves like Grandmaster Ouyang. Will you walk down the Demon Path that gains power in a short time, or become a true hero who becomes stronger day by day? Think about it. No matter how strong a Kangho warrior becomes, he cannot beat a strong-willed hero. I know many people dont agree with me, but this is just my opinion. Hm? Just a mere hero? Whats with this sudden hero talk? The word hero has disappeared these days as if it has gone missing, and the deceased Master Ki Sung-ja is bringing it back in this review. I might have dismissed it if it was someone else, but I cant. This is none other than the words of Ki Sung-ja. While drinking alone, I reflect on Ki Sung-jas talk on the hero. Why? Why is a hero more powerful? The books contents are too short to answer my questions immediately. As I look toward the Phoenix guest room, Baek So-ah and Heuk So-ryeong, whose pressure points had worn off, stuck out their heads and made eye contact. I ask. Running away? The two run toward me and reply as if they are reporting their findings. I came out to check if the fire was already out. I came out to find out where you are. I point across the table. Have a seat. Yes. I ask them a question as soon as they sit down. What do you think of a hero? Heuk So-ryeong replies. Nothing. I thought they were not around anymore? Baek So-ah also says. I learned young that a hero is a cool person. I scratch the back of my head and beckon them with my chin. Drink up. Yes. Drinking alcohol while looking at the morning sun is the best. You have to drink in a pathetic situation to get the real taste of alcohol, you know. I have a few drinks with the two who have the bright So and smiling So in their names and announce the nicknames I made for them on the spot. From now on, you shall be Black & White Beam (ڰЦ) The name means smiling brightly, so its your job to always smile brightly. Heuk So-ryeong and Baek So-ah look at each other and answer simultaneously. Understood. I will meditate for a bit until my subordinates arrive I take the Moonlight Dagger, put it on the table, and tell them grimly. Stab me if you can see an opening. . After appointing Black & White Beam as my watchmen, I proceed to meditate. If they swallow aphrodisiacs, they would have a racy dream, but in my dream, I am being beaten by the Crazy Monk again. Sometimes, it happens. There are times when I hear my own snoring in my sleep. A man who listens to his own snoring even in the middle of a dream, thats me. Opening my eyes abruptly due to the uncomfortable posture, I drag an empty chair and put my legs up. As I look drowsily at the two, Black & White Beam tells me. Please sleep comfortably. We cant see any opening. I answer with my eyes closed. and thats me. Once again, I snore. Determined to beat Crazy Monk this time, I fell into slumber. Sir, I think you need to wake up. As soon as I hear Heuk So-ryeongs voice, I nod with closed eyes. Was the meditation long? Yes. Yes? The timing was perfect. Wiping the saliva off my mouth, I survey my surroundings. The atmosphere has been very brutal since the morning. A distance away on the left, the Four Generals are standing in line with the Black Rabbit Union subordinates. On the right, a group of Kangho warriors with similar attires is staring at the Black Rabbit Union. Judging from the atmosphere and outfit, they are the Nanming Society. Errand boy Jo-pal points at me from within the crowd. Thats not the leader. That guy is the leader. Him? The man who leads the men of Nanming Society peers at me. I yawn and then tell Black & White Beam. You two go to the left. Those are my men. Black & White Beam gets up quickly and then moves towards the Four Generals. In a half-awake state, I gulp down Kaoliang liquor on an empty stomach. Ive been drooling, my hair is getting greasy, and I down alcohol as soon as I open my eyes. I look so pathetic that no one in the world would compete against me. A Nanming Society Leader, who has come to check on the Narak Society, asks me. Are you the leader? I answer while pointing to the opposite side. As you can see, take a seat. Amid the stand-off between two parties, a Nanming Society official walks out and sits across from me. Naturally, an eye-contact fight breaks out. Ive trained in the staring games that incompetent men learn before maturing. The man blinks first, then says. Im Nam Yeon-poong (L) of the Nanming Society. Perhaps hes a relative of the society leader. He has the same surname. I look at my lackeys and reveal a fitting identity. I am the leader of the Black Rabbit Union. Nam Yeon-poong replies with furrowed brows. Are you Dae Na-chals disciple? More like the one who killed Dae Na-chal. I see. What about Ouyang Bok? Hes dead. Did you know Ouyang Bok is one of the people paying the Nanming Society? He said that before he died. Nam Yeon-poong looks at me and shifts to Nanming Societys troops. Our numbers are much smaller than the Nanming Society. After hearing Jo-pals report, he must have rushed here to check the current situation. Nam Yeon-poong then says. Youre young. Are you aware of our leaders personality? Whats your leader like? Touching his forehead to suppress his anger, Nam Yeon-poong replies. Black Rabbit Union Leader, go to the Nanming Society and apologize to our leader. Thats the only way to keep things from getting out of hand. Go back to your room and ask your subordinates what kind of organization the Nanming Society is and who our leader is. Come back when youre done researching. Come apologize, okay? If you dont want to, then this is war. Apologize? Nam Yeon-poong says while pointing his finger at the town. Do you think our leader will be angry at the Narak Society for that small money offering? Money doesnt matter. Come over and explain why you killed Ouyang Bok out of nowhere. Our leaders sword does not discriminate. Whether Demon Cult, Orthodox Faction, or the same Unorthodox Faction. Dont shed blood for blood, Im telling you. I could already guess that the Nanming Society must be pretty influential when he says money is unimportant. I tell Nam Yeon-poong. Tell your leader. Ouyang Bok was killed for committing fraud in a gamble. Whether he pays you or not, fraud in gambling is a different matter. All he does is give part of the extorted money. If you take it despite being aware, then youre an abettor in accordance with the laws of Murim Alliance, and if the Nanming Society aided him, then youre a fraud gamble accomplice. So its not right to ask me to apologize. Once you say this, add my words. What is it? I point my finger at Nam Yeon-poong. Ill be in the Black Rabbit Union, so ask the Nanming Society Leader to send an invitation in his name. Then Ill go and discuss what happened with your leader. I guess that stupid word seems to be your idea I pointed to the Moonlight Dagger still stuck on the table and tell Nam Yeon-poong. Yeon-poong, you wanna die here? . Leaning forward, I tell Nam Yeon-poong. The Nanming Society is strong? Thats none of my business. Just so you know, Dae Na-chal was more arrogant than you before he died. Go back and convey my words to your leader. Save that nonsense for your underlings, okay? Nam Yeon-poong stares at me and scans my men. Hes considering it, but he probably thinks I wouldnt die recklessly here. Nam Yeon-poong stands up, lets out a sigh, and says. See you again. I hold grudges, so I keep teasing Nam Yeon-poong, who is pretending to be strong until the end. Yeon-poong. Nam Yeon-poong turns around. I spared you once. Now leave When I grin at him, Nam Yeon-poong reddens and whips his head back. The Nanming Society, which came here with good momentum, disappears in a heavy silence. Of course, the errand boy Jo-pal, who I know, follows them. Only then did I call out to So Gun-pyeong. Collect all the funds of the King of Gamble with those women, and lets leave. So Gun-pyeong nods. Okay. I beckon the errand boy Il-bo who is standing around awkwardly. After handing an empty glass to Il-bo, I pour Kaoliang liquor for him. Good job. Il-bo replies with a grin. Thank you, sir. The generals and subordinates are watching, so I add. Lets wrap this up in 2 hours and leave. We can drink when we arrive at the Black Rabbit Union. And by the way. Weve made quite a lot of money today, so lets go all out. I mean to cheer up my subordinates. Come to think of it, I didnt do anything except wake up, drink, and tease the Nanming Society today. The role of the leader is so difficult and pathetic. Now that I think about it, if I was still the Crazy Demon from the past, I wouldve killed Nam Yeon-poong and everyone, even Jo-pal. Did I stop because of the responsibility I now hold to my subordinates? Or am I changing little by little? Im not sure. Chapter 82 Sorry for coming so often; even though Im not sick, Ive caused you inconvenience. Strangely, I feel like I havent seen Moyong Baek in a long time whenever I visit him. I dont know why. Moyong Baek observes my expression and says. You are welcome anytime. Did I keep you waiting? I have been waiting for an hour, but I answer vaguely. Ive only waited for less than 10 minutes. Like a fixed routine, Moyong Baek checks my pulse and continues. By the way, it seems like youre getting stronger every time I see you, Leader. This is a rare compliment, so I smile. Im trying to live like that. Moyong Baek then says as he withdraws his hand. Theres no problem with your body. As I was before, Im more curious about your mental condition. Moyong Baek stares at my expression and gaze. I ramble on about the fire show among the recent events. When I see the flames surrounding me in the fight, I blank out for a moment. If I had slipped, I wouldve died in the fire. Moyong Baek replies with a thin smile. Why is that? Im not a fortune teller. Im sure you have a rough idea why. I am trying to find the cause, but I just ramble on. I had a guest inn named after me, and it was burned down. A feeling of helplessness? I didnt notice at the time, but the moment my home disappeared, I think I lost hope of living a smooth life. Why is that? Even before it was burned down, I know how my temper is. Moyong Baek replies calmly. Does that kind of personality prevent you from learning martial arts? Not really. Immersed in deep thoughts, Moyong Baek then asks me a question. How do you feel when you meet an opponent stronger than you? I dont know if youve met someone like that yet. I know precisely what Moyong Baek is feeling to ask this question. I lose my mind when I meet someone stronger. Why? I look at Moyong Baek with a solemn expression. I thought I could win if I went berserk. If Im not as good as my opponent, I have to endure with my madness to win. You mentioned having to endure. Can you elaborate on that? In a fight, everyone ends up suffering. To win, you have to endure the pain; from some point on, youll feel like youve gone too far. Youre passing out, but you dont. I have to faint, but I dont. Somewhere around there, madness pops out from the dark. Are you not afraid? Defeat or death. Im not afraid of losing. Ive lost a lot since I was young. And it has made me stronger. What about death? It occurred to me when I was trapped in the Heavenly Net. I also thought about it when I was beaten mercilessly by the Crazy Monk. Through numerous defeats and failures, I was not afraid of dying. Perhaps the moment Zaha Inn was set on fire, I had already braced myself to die. I dont think about it when I fight. Moyong Baek responds with a stiff expression. If it wasnt fear, then you must have recognized the need to go mad while spacing out looking at the flames. Recognize? Doesnt it mean you must be crazy to win and beat the strong people in this world? Thats right. If you regret the mindset as you watch flames engulfing the inn, you might space out. Is living as a madman the right choice while bracing for death? Or should you have another resolution? Perhaps your lifes meaning comes to mind whenever you look at flames? And what if thats my goal? Are goals easy to achieve? How strong are you planning to keep growing stronger? Until I become the best in the world. Suddenly, Moyong Baek taps the table. And how long will it take for the dream to come true? I dont know. Thats right. Youre well aware. If thats 10 years from now, it wouldve been ideal to do nothing and focus on amassing Qi for the next 9 years. Is that how you will live on? I have no intention of doing that. Why? Wouldnt that be too boring? I have to drink, sing, dance, and fight other people. Im busy. Then you have no choice but to continue living to the fullest every day. And someday, someone will become the best, assuming youre alive. Everyone has a cunning side. Correction, your dream is not to become the best in the world. Then, what is it? Drinking, singing, and dancing your way to becoming the best in the world sounds more like your dream, Leader. I laugh out loud because I find Moyong Baeks words funny. Oh, is that so? I calmly reflect in my mind and reply. Feels like something is resolved halfway. Moyong Baek then says. Its my personal opinion. Why dont you induce that madness only when you meet a strong opponent? It would be helpful to practice calming your mind daily. Distancing your mindset from when you fight. Moyong Baek knows a lot about my mental condition, even though we only met not too long ago. Perhaps Moyong Baek had gone utterly insane in his Poison Demon days. If god were to draw Moyong Baeks mind, the letter madness is probably curled up in the corner. I ask Moyong Baek. Have you ever felt like youre losing your mind? Of course there is. Moyong Baek replies with a complicated look. I often get upset when I see patients Ive saved who have difficulty changing their attitude when they are fully recovered. Whenever that happens, I feel sick and have to lie down for a few days. I nod. I understand. Moyong Baek understands me, and I understand the Poison Demon Moyong Baek. Surely this guy went berserk for this reason. Sharing our deepest weaknesses, we laugh together. Doctor Moyong, I have a question. You might think its a light question, but Im asking you seriously. Yes, Ill consider the question sincerely before asking. What are your thoughts about heroes? We have never talked about heroes, even in our days as the Crazy Demon and Poison Demon. Therefore, what Moyong Baek is about to say is a first. Moyong Baek ponders thoroughly and replies. Arent heroes a fool? Fools? If a person who cant take care of themselves is a fool, then in a larger context, a hero is a fool. Im listening. People who risk their lives for a good cause are heroes, but nothing is more precious than ones life. They throw away the most precious thing to set a faithful purpose. You can say they are the biggest fool among fools. What if theyre strong? It is a stupid question, but Moyong Baek answers me cleverly. In terms of humans in general and not martial arts, are there any other people stronger than them? Heroes are rare in the past and now. The person who beats up the criminal may be a saint, but a hero is not only strong in martial arts but a strong person in general. This is the opinion of the Poison Demon of another lifetime. What an impressive response. A senior of mine said a hero is stronger than any other master, but I dont get it. I dont mean individual fighting skills, but a persons influence, then a hero is definitely stronger than a Kangho master. Do you doubt this is some kind of martial arts training method? Thats all I have in my head. Moyong Baek throws out an unexpected remark. Why dont you give it a shot? Give what a shot? Being a hero. Even if its not necessarily life-threatening, anyone with power can do chivalrous deeds. Furthermore, youre the strongest person I know, so why not? I reply with a self-mocking smile. A hero, me? Did heroes of the past become heroes after considering their situation, status, origin, and fortune? They only become one after not caring about such things. Can you be a hero too, Doctor? Ive already set my course as a medical practitioner. Come to think of it, many of the famous clan founders in Kangho are regarded as heroes in their youth. Dont you think? Looking at their early years and biography, they were called heroes in their young days, retiring to the mountains as they grew old, and later became clan founders by raising a successor. Ive heard of many past cases. Now that Ive said this, the thinking that heroes are strong feels different. Feeling somehow relieved, I nod. Observing my expression, Moyong Baek then asks curiously. Have you decided already? Ive decided. Im curious, so please tell me. I speak with crossed arms. Im not going to be a hero. It doesnt fit my character. Moyong Baek smiles helplessly as if he didnt see this coming. I then explain my thinking to Moyong Baek. However, if I can find a person with goodwill and a kind heart, I will support them. I can teach them martial arts and provide full financial support. Im seizing money while defeating Unorthodox Factions one by one, so its entirely possible. If I support them physically and mentally and nurture them into a chivalrous hero, maybe my curiosity will be solved. And you wont become one yourself? I grin. Im a lot worse than you think, Doctor. So I think Im more fit to be a villain. I have many bad guys to kill. I will kill those Big Devil (ħ^) monsters in advance so my future hero disciple will not be beaten to death later. Then itll be a little easier for my stupid disciple to do chivalrous stuff. Moyong Baek bursts into laughter. Hahahaha I laugh along with Moyong Baek. Moyong Baek takes a deep breath, nods his head, and says. Something in me feels a little relieved. Then I will also support our leader and his future disciple. In that case, Ill give some help to the foolish hero who will make an appearance in this cruel world. Will you do that? Id be happy to. I look into Moyong Baeks eyes and nod. Lets do that. Ill be on the search for the right candidate. To raise a hero to be strong, Ill train to be stronger in martial arts, and the Doctor can prepare with your medical skills. Lets raise the worlds most powerful idiot. Moyong Baek says with a smile. Leader, not an idiot but a hero. Now that I think about it, it would be difficult for a smart, overthinking guy to be a hero. Thats how a fool and a hero are connected. Moyong Baek asks cautiously. By the way, what happened to the fire show you mentioned? Is it still burning dangerously in your heart? Its burning, but its not dangerous. Because itll drive my enemies crazy. I stand up to head back to the Black Rabbit Union. Doctor, are you short on staff? The nurses abilities vary, but there are times where they dont come in handy. Two women named Black & White Beam are staying in the Black Rabbit Union. All they know is how to bewitch men. My men are being seduced even if they dont do anything. Id like to arrange an interview if youre willing to teach them to become a nurse. Theyre adept in martial arts, so theyll be able to protect you as well. Moyong Baek answers honestly. If theyre good, Ill keep them. And if I cant handle them, Ill kick them back to the Black Rabbit Union. Well meet again once you return to pick them up. Sure. Have a safe trip back, Leader. After saying goodbye, I leave Moyong Infirmary and head to the Black Rabbit Union. As I make the walk back, the conversations I shared with my past lifes Poison Demon are fading and being replaced with these chats I share with the new Moyong Baek. What is this feeling? As old memories disappear, new memories are built. I interpret the hero theory written in Ki Sung-jas manual with my own thinking. I can raise a hero into an influential, chivalrous hero. A man who makes his disciple the strongest hero in Kangho is the leader of the Low-Down Sect, Lee Zaha. . . . Thats me. Chapter 83 Please wait a moment. I came alone since I received an invitation from the Nanming Society. The point isnt that I came alone but in person. Many of my subordinates wanted to tag along, but I am the most knowledgeable about the Nanming Society. If I come along with my forces, things will only end with the Nanming Societys downfall. This organization is a very tight-knitted one. Im not particularly interested in annihilating another unorthodox faction, and I wouldve lost more than a dozen men. To prevent that, I end up coming alone to meet the Nanming Society Leader. The main gate opens, and the Nanming Society officials appear one by one and settle at the long table where I am sitting. Nam Yeon-poong is one of them. Perhaps because of the strict discipline of the organization, Nam Yeon-poong and the other officials do not speak up in the main hall. As I watch the officials faces, I am dozing off. . The reason why I doze off often recently is that I am staying up all night circulating Qi. It feels like Im extracting Qi with my hands from the depths of the Heavenly Pearl. Ive reached the state of Fighting Chicken in a short period of time, so I feel tired easily. But its not a problem to doze off. My bodys reflexes react faster than my consciousness to surprise attacks anyway. Perhaps because it is a stern organization, no one screams or clicks their tongues as I doze off. Therefore I get a moment of shut-eye. By the time I feel the saliva leaking out of my mouth, I hear someones voice. Is everyone here? Yes. As I open my eyes, I see Nam Ga-rak, leader of the Nanming Society, walking into the room. Oh, its him. Nam Ga-rak asks his lackeys as he sits at the top seat. Bring me the Black Rabbit Union Leader. Nam Ga-rak orders his subordinates without spotting me among his cadres. Then, the official sitting to Nam Ga-raks left tells him quietly. Hes here, Leader. What? I wipe the saliva off my chin using my thumb and make eye contact with Nam Ga-rak. I open my eyes wide on purpose to the point that I can feel double eyelids forming. Nam Ga-rak asks me as he furrows his brows. Black Rabbit Union Leader? I yawn and then answer. Its me. There is a moment of silence in the hall. Nam Ga-rak looks at the officials expressions and asks me again. Are you here alone? Im here alone. I nod and then say to a waiting servant. Fetch me some water. Whats wrong with the hospitality here? The servant bows and replies. Understood. As soon as the servant answers me, he realizes hes made a mistake as he sees the officials expression. When the servant stands frozen in place, Nam Yeon-poong interferes. Its okay. Bring him water. Yes, my lord. Only then did Nam Ga-rak, who has calmed his surprise, tell his executives. All of you, stand. The officials jump up simultaneously, move away from the table, and stand in place as if surrounding the main hall. Nam Ga-rak introduces himself while looking at me. I am Nam Ga-rak of the Nanming Society. I also introduce myself out of courtesy. Im the Black Rabbit Union Leader, Lee Zaha. Ilyangs e I think Im not fully awake yet. The servant puts down the glass and tilts the kettle to fill it up directly. I look at the servant and then say. Theres no poison, right? The servant bows his head and steps back. No, there isnt. After gobbling down the glass of water, I loudly sigh. I feel a little more alert now. Hah As I pat myself on the cheek with both hands, Nam Ga-rak asks. Did you doze off here? I nod and reply. Thats what happened. How did you end up coming on your own? I heard you have quite some men. Its the human courtesy to come when youre invited. My men find it troublesome, so I came alone. Nam Ga-rak gives me a flustered smile. Ha. I finally take a closer look at Nam Ga-rak. He looks relatively young, between his late 20s or early 30s. He has a handsome face with sharp eyes. Hes the type of man that emits an intimidating aura that women would fear. If Dokgo Saeng is the all-around scary type, his expression shows hes a man of great responsibility. Men who have been in a leadership positions since they were young often have this aura. Nam Ga-rak keeps looking at me and says, Why did you kill Ouyang Bok? I went to do a sparring gamble but discovered it was a fraud. He sent women who hid aphrodisiacs in their hairpin and was caught by me. A union leader went to do a sparring gamble? I nod. I went because I heard people saying this guy called Dong Bang-yeon can fight quite well. His nickname was King of Sparring Gambles, but he doesnt live up to the name. Nam Ga-rak then says. I heard Ouyang Bok revealed that he sent money to the Nanming Society before he died. Yes, he did. And yet you killed him. I look at Nam Ga-rak with an indifferent expression. Would you have spared him? . Nam Ga-rak cant answer. I guess he called me here to give me an earful and get money offerings, but his expression changed at every moment of the conversation. I only speak informally as politely as possible since Nam Ga-rak has done nothing against me. Even I am amazed that I havent said a swear word yet. Nam Ga-rak asks the officials. Did he really come here alone? The question sounds as if he is asking if this man is indeed the leader of the Black Rabbit Union. The officials reply. Yes, thats him. It seems like both the officials and Nam Ga-rak are confused. No faction leader has ever behaved this way after causing conflict. Perhaps because he is speechless, Nam Ga-rak eventually raises the money issue. I heard you raided Ouyang Boks fortune. What are you going to do about the money the Narak Society used to offer us? As soon as I hear about money, I become offended. Are you a beggar? So what? You want me to pay in his stead? Are you declaring war or what? Nam Ga-raks face turns red. In the end, one of the observing officials cant stand it and says to Nam Ga-rak. Leader Nam Ga-rak points with his finger and interrupts. Shut up, I ask Nam Ga-rak. Leader Nam, I guess your men didnt give a proper report? What report? I called the entire Narak Society to the fighting pit and faced them alone. It was a sparring gamble Ouyang Bok agreed on. The winner takes everything. A game is a game. A gamble is a gamble. I got Ouyang Boks fortune because I won. Ouyang Bok earned his wealth by gambling anyway. Even if Ouyang Bok comes back to life, you cant blame the money issue on me. I also hint at the time when I killed Dae Na-chal. I also single-handedly killed the former leader of the Black Rabbit Union and his master, Dae Na-chal. Thats how I became the Black Rabbit Union Leader. How can you ask me what to do about the money offerings? What a twisted question. I have nothing left to say if he still doesnt understand after all this explanation. All thats left is to stab the Moonlight Dagger on the table Nam Ga-rak replies shortly. Youre right. Then why did you come here? Im here because you invited me. The officials let out a dry cough here and there. I look around at the officials and nod. Nam Ga-rak was killed by the Spright Clan, and as all of them fought for their lives at that time, they all seemed brave. Thus Im going to overlook some of their cheeky behaviors. Those who can risk their lives should be respected. Im sure Nam Ga-rak called me here to kill or make me his lackey. Im just here to see Nam Ga-rak and his men in person. I heard from my subordinates that the Nanming Society rejected to merge with a powerful faction, the Bajian Society (҆), and did not respond to the invitation of Nam Cheon-ryeon () and continue to run the faction independently. Im curious about who you are, so I came. By the way, if you continue to reject the demands of the Bajian Society or Nam Cheon-ryeon, youll have to shed blood once. Do you have a plan? Actually, my subordinates didnt tell me this. I am just making a guess. In any case, the Spright Clan is an assassin faction, and someone couldve put a bounty on the Nanming Society Leaders head. Of course, the Spright Clan will be swayed by such a request, and the Nanming Society will be destroyed entirely. I doubt powerful Unorthodox Factions and warriors like Bajian Society and Nam Cheon-ryeon would plot to take out both. In particular, most clans may end up ruining their livelihood due to the high commission fees. Nam Ga-rak then says. There is no such thing as a plan. I dont want to bow to the Bajian Society or Nam Cheon-ryeon. If we have to see blood, we will see to it. I nod. Youre facing them head-on. It is an expression I like to use, but there is no reaction. In any case, a manly guy should respect a persons decision. I suggest to Nam Ga-rak. Look, Leader Nam, just as all Orthodox Factions know about transparency, not everyone in the Unorthodox Factions is trash like Ouyang Bok. I deal with my opponent by distinguishing between good and bad. I can help you if the Bajian Society or Nam Cheon-ryeon bothers you. . When Nam Ga-rak, who seems puzzled for a moment, bursts out in laughter, the officials smirk along with him. Nam Ga-rak, who has been laughing for some time, then says. Then are you asking for money offerings? You dont have to do that. I dont receive bribes from the subordinates of the Black Rabbit Union, the Black Hurricane Castle, Mister Su, Four Generals, or Ilyang. Ouyang Boks funds have already been distributed to my subordinates. Those who wanted to farm were funded, and those who wanted to do business could leave. I also supported people who wanted to learn carpentry or blacksmith. Only those who dont know what to do are under me. In fact, I didnt kill many of Ouyang Boks men. I think I only killed five or six people. The rest must look for ways to make a living since the gambling house is demolished. I convey to him the notion that Im different from the regular Unorthodox Faction leader, but Nam Ga-rak has never met a person like me, so he looks like he doesnt understand. How could you do such a thing with other peoples money? Ouyang Boks money is useless anyway. Its better if at least one person finds their passion. I do not take pity on morons sob stories. I just provide support to those who want to try something. All I ask from them is one thing. When I ask for help one day, they have to reunite under the name of the Low-Down Sect. For some reason, I even tell him of the Low-Down Sect. Nam Ga-rak says. Were you originally the leader of the Low-Down Sect? Something like that. I get up from my seat. If you want to go to war with me, do it. If you want to join Low-Down Sect, youre welcome to. I will respect you no matter what you choose, enemy or ally. But dont ask me for money, threaten me, or bully my men. And dont ever let me hear that the Nanming Society is bothering merchants, vendors, or ordinary people. Then its war. This is what the Low-Down Sect is. I came to explain it to you because there was never an organization like this. I notify Nam Ga-rak, who is listening to me with wide eyes. Think about it and give me an answer. I glance at the officials and walk to the main hall entrance. Then Nam Ga-rak calls out to me. Hey, Low-Down Sect Leader. What? Dont you have to show me your skills for me to decide? Turning around and looking at Nam Ga-rak, I smile. Leader Nam, dont make fun of your subordinates because you have some. Do you want me to show you? . I point my finger at the officials and then tell Nam Ga-rak. I can line your guys up in the main hall according to their skills. Just watch, and youll know. After reaching the stage of Fighting Chicken, I have become more sensitive to sensing other peoples energy levels. Energy level refers to the overall energy that circulates in the body. When a Kangho warrior mentions energy levels, they often look at the completion of the atmosphere, inclination, physique, and energy. Just as physiognomy predicts ones character or fate, Kangho warriors can roughly predict someones ability from their energy levels. Nam Ga-rak asks me. Who looks the strongest except for you here? I simply answer his obvious question. You. Nam Ga-rak rises to his feet. Then lets talk after the face-off. 1:1. Well, is it finally time for the 1:1 that I like? Nam Ga-rak then says in a calm tone. If you lose, all the forces in the Low-Down Sect will come under the Nanming Society. I thought you were just a lunatic because you were dozing off, but I changed my mind as we talked. Youre a man of your word. Do you accept the obligation on conditions? If you lose? Nam Ga-rak looks around his subordinates and replies with his forehead in an eight () shape. Will that ever happen? How ridiculous. Hahahaha. Only then do his subordinates laugh. I also smile and say to the entire Nanming Society. How absurd. Im speechless. What nonsense. Thats ridiculous. What a joke. . This is so absurd and bewildering that Im getting goosebumps. Nam Ga-rak, whose laughter fades, mutters with a stern expression. Thats enough. I also imitate Nam Ga-raks expression and furrow my brows in an eight () shape. How ridiculous. A man who has to win in an argument, a man who failed from his previous to present life in becoming a chivalrous hero, a man who deliberately nodded off and led the atmosphere of the talks, and a man who stormed in alone and eventually drag the opponent into a 1:1 duel, its ridiculous, but thats me. Chapter 84 In my errand boy days, I always assumed Kangho warriors only fought openly and squarely in a 1:1 duel. Swarming into a grappling match was only done by losers who didnt master martial arts, or so I thought. However, now that I have stepped into Kangho, the Unorthodox Factions, Orthodox Factions, and Demon Cults use all kinds of tricks, ploys, conspiracies, and tricks to win. There are surprisingly very few manly Kangho warriors. Meanwhile, the masters who act all proud and go around without alliances or factions die in vain from being attacked by pirates or bandits. And that has always weighed on my mind. 1:1 is the best kind of fight. Its a clean-cut, accurate, basic, and original fight. While leaving the main hall as a group and moving to a larger space, Nam Yeon-poong declares that only the officials are allowed to spectate. The people walking around the vast area disappear instantly. Positioning himself in the larger space, Nam Ga-rak asks me with his arms crossed. What would you like, Leader? I then say as if I am ordering snacks in a guest inn. Anything. Take your pick. I also fold my arms like Nam Ga-rak and answer. You choose. I have mastered all sorts of forms. Lets go with what youre most confident in. It seems like Nam Ga-rak is indecisive, so I help him with his choice. Looking at your face, I kind of want to beat you up a little. You never got beaten up since you became the head of the Nanming Society, have you? Ill go for bare hands rather than weapons. I think hitting that annoying face is going to make your men happy. What do you think? Nam Ga-rak scoffs in amusement. Crazy bastard, youve completely lost it. You can use weapons if youre scared. Use your bare hands if youre confident. While Nam Ga-rak is still contemplating, I throw the Black Hares Tooth on the floor. Nam Ga-rak then loosens his arms and approaches me silently. We are about the same height. Nam Ga-rak asks as he narrows the distance. Are you ready to get your ass beaten? When I smirk, Nam Ga-rak responds by swinging his fists. Whoosh! When I try to hold on to my wrist with the Qin Na Technique, Nam Ga-rak withdraws his hand and sweeps the floor with his left foot. I avoid the low kick with a backward step. Nam Ga-rak stretches his palm out to my face. I support my legs with internal Qi to gauge Nam Ga-raks palm force and strike back with my fist. With a sound, Nam Ga-raks shoulders fly backward, and this time he has both palms outstretched. When I realize the palms are a fake-out, I quickly increase the distance between our standing positions by three zhangs (, about 9m) to further observe Nam Ga-raks skills. Only then did Nam Ga-raks expression turn serious. Everyone might become upset if I take the lead and charge at Nam Ga-rak, but now its different. I will fight properly not because I acknowledge Nam Ga-rak as a talent but because I want to have the entire Nanming Society. Suddenly, I think. If I dont do my best, Nam Ga-rak might catch on and feel displeased. Changing my mind about dealing with him moderately, I then stare at him. At that moment, I channel the Fighting Chicken energy throughout my body and then cover my hands with Fire Chicken energy. The watching officials then realize something is wrong and utter a word. Oh? Hm. I warn Nam Ga-rak as I feel my whole body heating up due to the energy of the Fighting Chicken. Be careful, Leader Nam. Stomping the ground with my feet, I narrow the distance in a few seconds and stick out my palms. With widening eyes, Nam Ga-rak responds with his own palms. The Fiery Fowl Great Handprint envelops both of my hands. Boooooooooooom! Nam Ga-raks body is blown off like a straight-lying corpse. Meanwhile, I jump midair, raise my right hand while injecting the Fiery Fowl Fragrance and prepare to slash at him without a sword. As soon as I slash down with my hands, a red blade flies toward Nam Ga-raks head, which jumps up. Nam Ga-raks face turns into a grimace, and he crosses his hands to unleash palm force for defense. At that moment, Nam Ga-raks body bounces off three zhangs (, about 9m) away with a loud bang. Nam Ga-rak, whose body rolls on the ground, jumps up as he tears off the badly shredded jangsam with one hand. Nam Ga-raks expression has already turned feral. But in my eyes, he just looks like a grumpy inn cat. What a nice expression. I am going to deal with him after gaining the upper hand. Without wasting a breath, I narrow the distance, unfolding the Fire Chicken energy and slashing with my hands. I then throw a Wood Chicken punch, a kick, the Fiery Fowl Great Handprint, then further mix Finger Techniques and Palm Techniques and continue to attack Nam Ga-rak one-sidedly. Nam Ga-rak steps back every time he blocks an attack, as his entire face trembles. He leaps here and there like a startled cat while maintaining his fighting spirit. In the meantime, I unfurl the Great Absorption Technique with my left palm and shoot a Fighting Chicken Palm to drag in Nam Ga-raks entire body. Nam Ga-rak is dragged in with his chin raised and then holds out his palms to face the Fighting Chicken Palm. Booooooooooooom! As soon as Nam Ga-rak blocks the Fighting Chicken Palm, he vomits a handful of blood and rolls three or four times as he hits the ground. If I had maintained my power at the Fire Chicken level, then his subordinates wouldve enjoyed the match where the two of us fight evenly, but the Fighting Chicken is different. Its normal to vomit blood or roll on the floor upon receiving my attacks. The state of Fighting Chicken is higher than Nam Ga-raks ability from the start. As a means to ask him to get a grip, I rise into the air and trample my foot on Nam Ga-raks face. Step! Nam Ga-rak barely manages to roll on the ground to avoid it and jumps up using his right hand by punching the ground to generate recoil. In the meantime, I retreat back in midair after considering Nam Ga-raks reaction time and perform a kick with both feet. Thud! Its dangerous to give him time to react, so I am attacking with this weird move. Blocking the kick with crossed arms, Nam Ga-rak frowns and steps back. I move as fast as I can to conceal my moves, swinging my right arm like a whip and cutting the neck of Nam Ga-rak with my hands. Perhaps thinking this is his chance, Nam Ga-rak blocks my arm with his left hand and counters with a punch with his right hand. I forcefully force myself to change my trajectory and grab Nam Ga-raks collar. I then pull his extended wrist and throw him into the air. Bangggggggggg! As I hurl Nam Ga-rak into the air, he spins like a scarecrow. In the meantime, I kick the ground and dash to where Nam Ga-rak is falling down. Nam Ga-rak hollers in the air. Pull out your swords! After declaring war, Nam Ga-rak first draws his sword in the air and swings it recklessly to buy time. Landing safely on the ground, Nam Ga-rak is shaking all over. Nam Ga-rak then says as he holds out his trembling sword toward me. Leader, bring your sword over. Nam Ga-raks breath is extremely ragged. His eyes are bloodshot, and his face is all flushed. No other emotion is dominating Nam Ga-rak as much as his pride. I said bring your sword over! I grin as I watch Nam Ga-rak lash out. I speak leisurely, thinking Id give this guy time to rest. Lets do that. I stretch out my left hand and pull the far-off Black Hares Tooth with the Great Absorption Technique. Black Hares Tooth moves slightly while shaking before suddenly surging in with lightning speed into my hands. Tak! I pull out Black Hares Tooth and inject it with Fire Chicken energy without announcing the start. The sword reveals itself with a red glow. I swing the sword over my head and set it vertically as I unveil the Fiery Fowl Fragrance. Whoosh! The swords blade begins to flutter with red heat waves. As I switch to Fighting Chicken by pouring external Qi and attack power into my right hand, the blade calms down as the red heat waves straighten. Instead, Black Hares Tooths blade turns purple as if it is smeared with blood. After moving the upright sword to the right, I make eye contact with Nam Ga-rak. Are you ready to die, Leader? . The spectating officials then say to Nam Ga-rak. Leader? Somehow it sounds like a hint to stop him. Nam Ga-rak is staring holes at my purple-colored sword. Nam Ga-rak knows that if he continues, he will face more of a disaster than when we were fighting with bare hands. To Nam Ga-rak, the situation requires coolness rather than pride. Nam Ga-raks lips twitch as he says calmly. I dont think we need to check sword techniques. I lost. Nam Ga-rak, who regains his composure in a few moments, sighs heavily and sheaths his sword. I watch Nam Ga-rak and gradually remove the power I had injected into Black Hares Tooth. The blade seething in purple, slowly turns white as if its anger is subsiding. I retrieve Black Hares Tooth and then say to Nam Ga-rak. Staying composed is also a skill. That was a good fight. I understand the pride of men. Nam Ga-rak needs time. At times like this, he doesnt even need consolation from his subordinates. Just let him be. Although he is a prideful man, he is also a man with a great sense of responsibility, so he would return to the usual Nam Ga-rak. I look around the Nanming Society without lingering feelings and say to Nam Ga-rak and his men. See you again. I didnt demand anything. I didnt mock the Nanming Society. I just turned around. I walk three or four steps before Nam Ga-rak asks me in a low voice. Leader, at least stay for a cup of tea. Lets do it next time. I halt in my steps and look at the sky. It rained the day before, but the weather is very sunny today. The clouds Maybe feeling a little bothered, Nam Ga-rak asks from behind me. What are you planning to do next? I reply while looking at the floating clouds. Itll work out somehow. The Low-Down Sect is the Low-Down Sect, and The Nanming Society is the Nanming Society. Lets compete again if we have a chance. If the Nanming Society officials wish to have a match, tell me next time. You are always welcome if you are as confident as your leader. I finally turn around and look at the Nanming Society. The whole Nanming Society is looking back at me. While choosing what to say, I tell them. If the Bajian Society or South Horizon Sect bothers you, contact the Low-Down Sect. Nam Ga-rak replies. And if I do that? I tighten my grip on Black Hares Tooth with my left hand and say. Then it means war. I could have said something else, but I didnt. The choice is up to Nam Ga-rak. Will he stay in the Nanming Society and die like his past life or join the Low-Down Sect and change his fate? I dont want to forcefully change the future of people and factions. But if Nam Ga-rak changes his mind, so will his fate. Im sure even the heavens will forgive his changed fate. After saying goodbye to the Nanming Society, I have various thoughts while returning to the Black Rabbit Union. This is what Im certain about. If you want to change your fate, you must change your mindset. Not only does this apply to Nam Ga-rak, but to me as well. It wont be easy to change our minds seeing as were both men. How is changing fate an easy feat? Its difficult in the first place. Nam Ga-rak may be recovering after hurting his pride, but so am I. Im somewhat confused because Im acting like an ordinary Kangho warrior all the time without being as crazy as a madman. But I think I handled it well. Moyong Baeks voice lingered in my ears throughout the fight. Why dont you induce that madness only when you meet a strong opponent?? Whenever I thought of grabbing Nam Ga-rak by the collar and crushing his face with my fist, Moyong Baeks words would resonate. From explosive to subdued madness, I need to train and calm my mind. Just as big and small fish bite and tear each other under the river, the water surface remains tranquil. Peaceful like the river. Thats what I need right now. Walking down the street, I hum like an errand boy sweeping the floor. Peace to me is like the river, peace to me is like the river, madness to me is like the sea, fun to me is madness. . . . Its overflowing. Chapter 85 After returning from Nanming Society, nothing much is going on, so I am carefully examining the lives I have ruined. Actually, Im a professional life ruiner. The darksteel is currently being delivered to Dragon Head Smithy. As I am reminded of the Plum Blossom Sword Technique, I sent them a request for a sword made from darksteel. Whether Ill receive a proper sword or the darksteel will fail depends on Geum Chul-yong. I then sent Black & White Beam away to the Moyong Infirmary. If they end up as decent nurses, they will continue to remain in the Moyong Infirmary, and if this plan fails again, they will return to the Black Rabbit Union. Im redeeming ruined lives, and yet Im also a professional life ruiner. I take a walk outside since I have nothing to do. Cha Sung-tae, who has been living a ruined life for over 20 years, is wielding a sword diligently. And that Cha Sung-taes master is Hoyeon Cheong. He is a clan swordsman I have no business with, but hes staying in the Black Rabbit Union as a guest after having his life ruined by me. The ruined master and ruined student support each other. They both nod once as they look at me. Great work. Go on. Yes. Cha Sung-tae and Hoyeon Cheong bow their heads slightly to me and resume training. To be honest, Cha Sung-tae is unlikely to become a famous swordsman in Kangho. But the future is unpredictable, so Im going to cheer for him. So Gun-pyeong is mercilessly training the subordinates, who are more doomed than Cha Sung-tae, as usual. I watch So Gun-pyeong with my arms crossed. Still, our 18,000 Years So Gun-pyeong is an earnest man that is rare to find in the Unorthodox Factions. I think I should leave the Black Rabbit Union to him in the future. Im the leader of the Low-Down Sect, anyway. Passing down one responsibility or another to my subordinates will be sufficient. After meeting all the ruined lives in one go, I move to my training spot. Theres no way the plum blossom will be ruined as the petals are falling. I sit in a lotus position below the tree. I close my eyes while listening to my subordinates occasional painful moans, and a river-like peace finds its way to me. The peace of the river and the madness of the sea lap together in a mixture. Nothing is particularly upsetting today, but I imprint patience () in my mind like a Buddhist mantra. I have to hold back. Leader, this is Manager Byuk. I have something urgent to report. As I open my eyes, I look at Manager Byuk, who has lived nearly 50 years in the damned Unorthodox Faction, with a calm expression. Whats the matter, Advisor General? I almost called him Damned Manager Byuk, but when I tried to quickly correct it to my flow of consciousness, I went too far in the other direction. Advisor General? You flatter me, sir. Hehe. Hm. Ive finally found a man with a very similar appearance, Leader. I am suddenly wide awake. Where? The location is a little risky. Do you know Baek Eung-ji (ֹ), who often hosts social events for the nobles of the Orthodox Murim Clans? I do. He was seen at the core of the place, at Garosugil (·) Street. However, the guy who went to investigate was caught following him around and roughed up a little. He just returned from treatment at a nearby clinic, so the report was delayed. He said his face was smashed, and his right arm was broken. How did you manage to find him? Thats incredible. Following your description, I told them to ask around famous bars in the Orthodox Faction areas, where unlucky handsome men frequent, and it was fruitful. Your instructions were spot on. Yes, indeed. However, he is just a man similar to the portrait, so we need to double-check. If youre busy, I will send a runner again. I shake my head. That wont be necessary. If he gets caught again, he wont end up with just a broken arm. How dare he hit my men? Ill have to take revenge. Whats the broken arm guys name? Everyone calls him Gong-cheol. Gong-cheol, got it. Born in an Orthodox Faction clan, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light is skilled. He started training in martial arts when he was a toddler. An elite who can quickly deal with most of the Unorthodox Faction masters, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light of the Demon Cult is not a position just anyone can attain. Regardless of his personality, he is a genius that is hard to come by when it comes to martial arts. I give an order to Manager Byuk. Lets get ready. Anything you ask. Consult Gong-cheol and prepare white jangsam and warrior attire to match their trends as much as possible. Yes. Send someone to the Moyong Infirmary and ask for poison and antidote from Doctor Moyong Baek. Manager Byuk asks. Poison? If you ask for a poison like diarrhea medicine, Doctor Moyong will know what you want. We dont know whats going to happen. We should be well prepared. I understand. We will see to it right away. Since my showdown with the Left Hand of Illuminating Light is imminent, I close my eyes again and enter into Qi Circulation. Im going to amass internal Qi as much as possible before the face-off. Hes either going to die or become my lackey. Im never going to let him step foot into the Demon Cults. If everything fails, I intend to trample his thing with my feet and turn him into a eunuch. At least the ladies of Orthodox Factions wont be affected. Perhaps Im also changing the fates of these Orthodox Faction ladies. Upon finishing a complete circuit, I murmur while in a trance. Im going to make you into a eunuch. Cha Sung-tae, who is training, replies with his eyes wide open. Sorry? Shut up. Yes. I start practicing kicks aiming for the balls. I also throw a fist at an imagined lower part. As I train to deliver low kicks and low punches while circling around the plum tree, Cha Sung-tae, who is taking a break, asks me. Leader, what are you doing? Shut up. Yes. I duck low into the air while using footwork and land on my feet after hitting imaginary balls three or four times in a row. Cha Sung-tae and Hoyeon Cheong applaud my Heavenly Castration Technique (). Youre cool. Nice moves. A man who trains to make a normal man into a eunuch, thats me. Baek Eung-jis name means a white hawk resides. I dont get why hes there, binge-drinking. Oftentimes, we have no idea whats going on with other people. Anyway, the Orthodox Faction successors have gathered to drink, meet their partners, and fight, and Im here to burn the place down. Though there are many losers in Unorthodox Factions, its not that different in the Orthodox Factions either. Ambitious guys will read books or train in martial arts. Sometimes there are people who play well, drink well, are popular among women, and are strong in martial arts. Those people are just born like that. The world is unfair. With so many guest inns and diners in the district, I go around places with many customers. I look around while pretending to look for my friend, go in as if I am invited to a gathering, and leave, pretending like Ive come to the wrong place. I guess it cant be helped if I look somewhat pathetic. Feeling hungry after looking around a few more guest inns and diners, I have no choice but to enter the Cheonpung Inn frequented by Kangho warriors and grab a seat by the window on the second floor. Im sure Im richer than the rich nobles who hang out here. I call the errand boy over, ordering the inns signature meat and seafood dishes, and also order Kaoliang liquor, cold noodles, a sea cucumber named Golden Sea Mouse (), chili stuffed tofu, and dumplings. Its a bit too much to eat alone. However, a bumpkin cant be discouraged when he visits the Orthodox Faction districts. As soon as the food is served, I move my chopsticks and gobble down food like a soldier on the battlefield. As the sky becomes darker, the lamps from each store light up the street. The lights can make women restless and cast a wicked glow that makes peoples hearts like the Left Hand of Illuminating Light race. More people are crowding the inn compared to when it was daytime. The Cheonpung Inn is suddenly filled, and several people look at me sitting alone at the round table before going elsewhere. They must have wanted to say something since Im taking up the space alone as the seats are becoming scarce. But this is the Orthodox Factions territory. Only those who know their boundaries are gathered here. No one will lash out or request to join tables. People who value etiquette on the surface, thats the Orthodox Factions. Thanks to this, I eat like a bumpkin, a loner, and a swordsman pretending to be tough while observing an inn bustling with men and women. Fortunately, the errand boy comes over to refill my cup often and asks if I will need anything else, so I gesture for him to come as he looks like hes a friendly fellow. The errand boy comes up and says. Yes, sir? I take out a silver ingot and give it to the errand boy. The errand boy skillfully pulls out the hand cloth he hangs around his pants, brings it to the table, and swiftly takes the silver. It is a quick hand movement, as if he is using a fast sword technique. The errand boy murmurs as he wipes down the top of the table with a hand cloth. Please go on. I spread out a wanted poster of the Left Hand of Illuminating Light, revealing his face. Do you know who this is? The errand boy looks at the poster and thinks about it for a while, then says as he pours me some water. This is the scoundrel of the Mong family (ɼ). The Wind Cloud Mong Clan (Lɼ)? Yes. Whats his name? I dont know his exact name, but everyone calls him Mong-rang (). It sounds more like a childhood name than an alias. It means that he is the wolf cub of the Mong Clan. As I put the poster back in, I ask the errand boy for the last time. Is he a jerk? The errand boy looks straight at me and answers firmly. Yes, sir, you have to be careful. Hes unmatched. I finish my meal shortly after. If the Left Hand is indeed from Wind Cloud Mong Clan, then theres no need to be hasty. In short, the Wind Cloud Mong Clan was a family of generals (܊). Upon quitting the generals path, Wind Cloud Mong Clan has established itself as a clan in Kangho. The entire current Wind Cloud Mong Clan is probably a line of indirect descendants. Their family is known to have been destroyed long ago. The possibility of them being the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights family is high. I recall the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights chilling palm force as I sip on some Kaoliang liquor. How strong is he right now? I became strong in a very short time thanks to the Heavenly Pearl and traveling back in time, but the nobles of the Orthodox Faction clans have devoted themselves to martial arts for over 15 years since they started to walk. The children of the family who produced generals or high-ranking officials have great pride. If he had been treated as an illegitimate child, he wouldve been more infuriated than anyone else. After emptying the liquor, I get up and descend to the first floor. Feeling a little tipsy while looking at Baek Eung-jis downtown area, I buy some candied fruit and take a bite. I ask the street vendor for directions to the Mong Clan residence and stand around to watch the street performers briefly. While mindlessly watching the performance, I casually scan through the crowd of onlookers, and someone catches my attention. Their visuals are so outstanding that they dont blend in with the crowd. While watching the performance, the man and woman share a few words and laugh. I only watch for a moment, and the man holding the fan makes direct eye contact with me. . The annoyingly handsome man folds his handheld fan and points it right at me. His gaze and gesture are saying, If you keep staring, youll get in trouble. Only when he folds the fan am I able to take a clear look at his face. I smile, nodding my head as if I understand his message. A young Left Hand of Illuminating Light is watching the performance with a beautiful woman. I am smiling on my face, but a stormy madness is swirling inside me. Hes leisurely out here on a date. Im getting worked up despite knowing that he dates many women. The fact that he leeches off women is enraging, and the fact that hes dating beautiful women is also maddening. Im mad hes still not called the Pervert yet, and Im pissed for the fourth time when he pointed his arrogant hand at me. Feeling drunk, this is the fifth time Im getting pissed off. I stare at the Left Hand of Illuminating Light again and mutter to myself. For the Orthodox Factions From today onward, I am temporarily the chivalrous hero Lee Zaha. For the Murim Alliance Leader, innocent alliance members, naive ladies, justice, and the ugly guys. I silently point my fingers arrogantly at the Left Hand of Illuminating Light, who is standing on the other side. I will get rid of your manhood. The man who has returned to the past to execute the Left Hand of Illuminating Light, thats me. Chapter 86 Having witnessed my pointing finger, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light gives me a smug smile. I mustve forgotten. After the Left Hand of Illuminating Light whispers something to the beautiful woman next to him, the two glance at me and laugh. Now that hes mocking me with his date, I am getting pissed for the sixth time. Suddenly, someone runs from where the Left Hand of Illuminating Light stands and asks me. Sir. A young servant calls out to me. What? The servant comes close to me and whispers in my ear. Young Master over there asked you to join him for a drink. Theres another woman among his peers. A 2:2 gathering. Looking at the servant, I answer. Why should I? The servant continues with a grin. He said you are the most handsome among the spectators. Bullshit. As I turn my head, the woman next to the Left Hand of Illuminating Light disappears. As I look around like a bumpkin and withdraw from the crowd of spectators, the Left Hand of Illuminating Light approaches with two women on his sides. Left Hand of Illuminating Light then says with a snicker. Do you want to join us? The women suddenly intervene. Lets drink together. Seol-ah, what do you think? The newly appeared woman named Seol-ah smiles as she looks me up and down. Id love to join too. Looking at the three, I think. Crazy nutjobs. The Left Hand of Illuminating Light says to me as he narrows his eyes. Theres nothing to be afraid of. They are nice people. It is a passing remark, but I can sense the extraordinary perversion. Without much thought, I immediately recognize he is trying to mooch off me based on his own skill, mannerisms, and cleverness. A 2:2 drinking party, my ass. I nod my head to see how the Left Hand is going to play this out. Lets go. Without exchanging introductions, I join the Pervert Demon and his leeching companions. I didnt expect this either. But the point isnt drinking, but Ive finally met the Left Hand. The drinking party is arranged in a private space separated by a room divider. Perhaps hes a regular at this diner, but the Left Hand enters and sits down naturally. The women order an awful lot of alcohol and dishes. The side dishes quickly fill the table in no time. The woman called Seol-ah sits next to me and says. Please have a drink. The Left Hand asks me. Is this your first time here? Why? No one here dared to stare in my eyes for that long. Maybe girls do. You look almost the same age as me. Lets talk casually. The woman next to Left Hand introduces everyone at the table. Brother Mong-rang, I am So-wol (С), and the one next to you is Seol-ah (ѩ). What about you, my lord? They are all aliases. I am Gwang-chul. Gong-chuls older brother. Seol-ah asks with a puzzled expression. Who is Gong-chul? The Left Hand then says while raising his glass. Come on, drink up. That was a long introduction. Who cares about names and backgrounds? Only drinking reveals the true character of men and women. Mong-rang, So-wol, Seol-ah, and I, who have suddenly become Gwang-chul, drink together. I try to swallow as late as possible as I observe their faces and eyes. However, I am not the only one eyeing everyone. The three of them are doing the same. Looking at their drinking movement, breathing, aura, and upright posture, all four of us have learned martial arts. The Left Hand then asks Seol-ah. Seol-ah, do you like Gwang-chul? Seol-ah nods and smiles. Yes. Then how far can you go today? Why are you in such a hurry, Brother? Hahaha. I listen to the conversation with my eyes covered for a moment. Is that a secret code (Z) just now? As the useless conversation continued, I down three glasses of wine. As I am about to drink my fourth cup, the Left Hand stands up and says. Im going to go take a piss. I should go all out today. Have a safe trip. As Left Hand leaves, So-wol then says shamelessly to Seol-ah. Lets go, too. Okay, sure. I simper and grab Seol-ahs wrist as she is about to get up. Seol-ah, have another drink before you go. Seol-ah replies with a perplexed look. What? I then speak as I motion to So-wol with my head. Go ahead. So-wol replies sternly. Ah, alright. As soon as So-wol disappears, I stare at Seol-ah. Seol-ah then says with a baffled look. Why are you looking at me so scarily? I grab my glass and inject it with Fire Chicken energy. The alcohol instantly boils like my heart. Youve never seen liquor like this, have you? One glass, drink it in one go. Seol-ah then replies with a surprised gaze. Ah, I dont want to. Before Seol-ah can jump up from her seat, I extend my hand and jab her pressure points one after another. Jab! I take out the small pill case Moyong Baek provided and open the lid. I then mix the powder into the liquor. What is this, you ask? Moyong Baek, who says that its hard to make poison on such short notice, displayed his ability by giving me a colorless, odorless laxative. I have my fair share of experience in Kangho, but this is my first time using a colorless, odorless laxative. The color or smell does not change upon mixing with alcohol. Hence this is the best laxative in all of Kangho. I pour the hard liquor mixed with Moyong Baeks laxatives into Seol-ahs mouth. Lets see whats gonna happen if you dont want to get an antidote. Then itll be your death. Got it? Her make-up is smeared on my hands when I look at my hand. After wiping it on Seol-ahs pretty clothes, I also pour the colorless, odorless laxatives into the Left Hand and So-wols glasses. Only then did the somewhat stern-faced Left Hand and So-wol return in a hurry. The Left Hand sits down as he looks at me. Whats with the mood? I speak to the Left Hand coldly Hey, you prostitute fucker. What? Are you trying to dump your booze tab on a bumpkin and run away? Are you a noob? Pay for the drinks. The Left Hand smirks and says. What are you talking about? Maybe its because youre a hillbilly. Youre extremely twisted. Who would have thought that Id hear this kind of nonsense. After downing a normal drink with an unpleasant expression, I secretly reveal my wish to face the Left Hand immediately. As I stare at the Left Hand and So-wol with a murderous look, Left Hand and So-wol drinks from their laxative-laced glasses. In the meantime, the Left Hand lowers his eyes and repeatedly checks the color and aroma of the alcohol before drinking. It is only after he empties his glass does he notice Seol-ahs weird state. Whats wrong with you? I explain to them. I thought she was running away, so I jab her acupoints. Slowly reveal his real character, he said. Thats ridiculous. Let her go. Sipping on the booze, I reply. Im a bumpkin. I didnt learn how to release it. You do it. The Left Hand jumps up and exaggeratedly caresses Seol-ahs torso with his hands. At that moment, Seol-ah lets out an Argh! and faints on the spot. The Left Hand looks at me in puzzlement. You must want to die really badly. So-wol, you take care of Seol-ah and pay. This guy thinks so little of me. Yes, brother. The Left Hand gestures with his chin and says. Follow me. Its no use running away. Standing side by side with the Left Hand for the first time in a long while, we walk out of the diner. Next to me, the Left Hand says calmly. Looks like youre here to challenge me, but Im getting tired of people like you. Who sent you? Feeling the Left Hands voice suddenly becoming arrogant, I reply. Gong-chul sent me. Whos Gong-chul? The guy whose arm you broke. Ah, that idiot. The Left Hand sneers. After taking me to a secluded area, the Left Hand suddenly pats his chest. As I peer at him, the Left Hands face is becoming pale. The Left Hand suddenly jumps forward and stabs his finger at various spots around his abdomen. The Left Hand glares at me as he whips his head around. You poisoned me? As I am about to answer him, the Left Hand abruptly narrows the distance and initiates the first blow. Thud! After delivering our first blows, we look at each other. The Left Hands face is becoming pale white. It is already surprising that he could deflect my attack as if nothing had happened, but he seems to be getting uncomfortable by the minute. I speak to the Left Hand with a calm expression on my face. Whats that, moron? Say it The Left Hand is about to answer me, but he turns around in a hurry and runs fiercely to somewhere. He is running at a tremendous speed indeed. A strange sound comes out of the Left Hands mouth. Uh But I am not one to let the Left Hand go. I follow after the Left Hand like a gust of wind. Before I know it, Im already sticking close to his back as he twists his body in the air. The Left Hand faces me and holds out his palms. As soon as I see the Left Hands palms turn white, I respond with the Fiery Fowl Great Handprint. Booooooooooooom! As he faces off against Fiery Fowl Great Handprint in the air, Left Hand widens the distance by using the rebound of the colliding palm force. As soon as he lands, he disappears around an alley. Entering a winding alley like an ant cave, I move slowly while listening to the surroundings. I called out to Left Hand like friends playing by the alley. Mong-rang, do you think Ill give you time to take a shit? No chance. The Left Hand will probably attack again at the alley corner with this silence. At that moment, I hear the cheap trick of ventriloquism as he hides his location. What poison is this? I dont know. What about the antidote? I have it. What do you want? I reply as I carefully examine the moonlit alley. I cant tell you that. I am about to turn around in an alley, but I lower my head when I hear the sound of the wind. The Left Hands handheld fan flies past and smashes through the wall. Pak! When Left Hands surprise attack fails, he flees once again. He already swallowed Moyong Baeks laxative. How is he holding up so well? I then spot the Left Hand, who is running, poking his abdomen again with his fingers. Tatatak! That looks very painful. The Left Hand, who turns around while holding onto his belly, stares at me with a pale face. If you give me the antidote, Ill save your life. I wont give it to you even if you say please, nutcase. Im saying this one more time, if you give me the antidote now, Ill save you. I snort and then reply. Go take a dump. The Left Hand moves his tongue around his mouth and roughly takes off the white jangsam he is wearing. I ask. What are you doing? Trying his white jangsam around his waist, the Left Hand replies in a fury. Today is your funeral day. As he ties his white jangsam around his waist and pats it here and there, the Left Hand is wrapping it around his pants like a womans skirt. I look at the Left Hands action and ask him with a blank expression. Is that a diaper? The Left Hand responds in a cold voice. I might be pooping, but youll die today. Antidote? I dont need it. I admire the Left Hands ferocious spirit. Does one have to be like that to survive in demon cults? Since hes such a spiteful man, he must have won the position of the left-handed man after beating numerous old demons. Nodding like a madman, the Left Hand approaches me. Are you ready to die, bumpkin? Its no use begging now. Throwing away his handheld fan without hesitation, the Left Hand makes a farting sound while walking a few steps. The Left Hand immediately frowns. Perhaps he is embarrassed or is about to give up even after declaring that he would shit on the spot. He then sighs. Haah. I take a step back as well. Wait He is the first rival that fills me with the madness that came to mind as soon as I had regressed. When another farting sound fills the air, I keep backing away without realizing it. Dont come near me, poopyman. The Left Hand replies with a smile as if he has given up on his life. How can a man be afraid of a disgrace of a time? Come here. Ill roll you around until you cant differentiate between mine and yours. You scumbag. The Left Hands bottoms are now smeared with brown. He just had to wear all white, a color that couldnt hide anything. The pungent stench fills the air around me. The Left Hand then surges at me like lightning. Pwarkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk! Whenever the violent sound of palm forces colliding bursts out, it is mixed with the sound of farts. ! ! At least this guy isnt in an Orthodox Faction. If an Orthodox Factions warrior shits his pants while fighting, they wouldve announced retirement and jumped into a river. The Left Hand calmly attacks and defends while smelling like poop. This calmness, this level-headedness, this survival instinct, this fart As expected, he is my rival, the no. 1 most-wanted member of the Low-Down Sect, martial art genius, poopyman, and top-class master, officially with Demon (ħ) in his nickname before becoming the Left Hand. I might be experienced. But Ive never competed with a master shitting his pants in real time. For a moment, I realize that he managed to completely deflect all of the Castration Technique attacks that I launched at him with my palm force. Thats absurd. I cant step on that poop-covered bottom with my new white shoes. That is illegal to do to my new shoes. In the meantime, the overpowering foul smell is making me dizzy. I gather myself together as I behold the strongest poopypants I have seen in my life. Chapter 87 As I initially thought that the Left Hand was using an ordinary palm technique, I abruptly fused a chilling Ice Technique at this sudden turn of events. Looking at his expression, I deal with the situation calmly. Come to think of it, I have never heard of the Left Hand losing to anyone. Far from being defeated, he infuriated the Alliance Leader for teasing the warriors dispatched from the Murim Alliance, which led to them using the Heavenly Net formation. We, the two men who have escaped the Murim Alliances Heavenly Net, are now dueling. We are using palm techniques, various finger techniques, finger flicks, punches, and Qin Na Technique combinations in attack and defense. His techniques are so unique that I wonder if there was any martial art I didnt know as we are frantically exchanging over 30 strikes. Meanwhile, I mock the Left Hand. Youre pretty good for a poopyman. Shut up. Use the Ice Technique. This guy is trying to save the Ice Technique as much as possible. He has no choice. In exchange for being an effective move, the Qi consumption is enormous. Plus, Im not being pushed around by the Left Hand, so he has no choice but to grow anxious. If I want to use the extreme Yin energy in the Heavenly Pearl, I need to snatch up the Left Hands Ice Technique. My curiosity grows bigger as the fight continues. Why is this guy so strong at such a young age? The Wind Cloud Mong Clan is a swordsman clan () known for using spears and swords, but why isnt he using a weapon? No matter how I look at his form, it doesnt seem like the martial arts he uses, such as Palm Techniques, Finger Technique, and Finger Flicks, are taught in the Wind Cloud Mong Clan. I sneakily ask him while exchanging more palm force attacks. Who is your master? Who is YOUR master? Suddenly, I catch a whiff of a foul smell. I then jolt and step back 3 jangs () instantly. I am almost humiliated by a blatant attack of poo. I am even more terrified since I have dressed in white. The Left Hands poop is more terrifying than any secret weapon coated in poison. As I step back in astonishment, the Left Hand laughs heartily as if hes found my weakness. Scared? Of course, you are. Im not avoiding you because Im scared. I avoided you because youre filthy. Moron, prostitutes brother, shithead. The Left Hand looks down at his soaked jangsam and nods. I cant be the only one humiliated. Dont run. Thats the way to the main street. Glancing at the main street, I cross my arms and speak seriously. Youre way better than Id expected. Its been a while since Ive met someone this skilled. Youre not just a normal shithead. Ill give you the antidote. Ive already shit myself. I dont need it. Challenge me again after youre done cleaning yourself. The Left Hand then says in a chilling voice. How can I eat what you give me? I pinch my nose with my fingers for a moment and then say in a nasal voice. Dont come near me. Im getting a headache. When the Left Hand rushes in like a madman, I quickly turn around and flee to the main street. As I run with a giggle on purpose, I can hear the Left Hand swear softly. Perhaps as a nobleman from a family of generals, manners are still embodied in him. No matter how crazy he is, hell never enter the street in that state. How dare he try to play clever with me? No hesitation is needed in a man-to-man fight, but the Left Hand is obsessed with women. This means hes not the Baek Eung-ji who can walk around with poop in his pants. If he can follow me this far, then Ive got the wrong person. When I get to the crowded, busy street, the Left Hand, following behind, halts his footwork just as I expected. Hey, stop running away. I turn around and waggle my finger with my back to the main street. Come. You come. Come here, shithead. Fight can be settled between men. Why should we trouble other people? There is a saying that you get angry at others for your own mistakes, and thats who you are. Ill go to you if you tell me who your master is. Shut up. The Left Hand didnt reveal his affiliation twice now in a row, which I suddenly think is strange. He must have learned Ice Technique outside. Does that mean he has a separate master? The Left Hand is not yet Murims public enemy. This is a period when he still hasnt succumbed to his perversion, so honor and popularity are very important to him. As I mix within the crowd of people, I stare at the Left Hand. Honestly, I couldnt showcase my skills properly during the earlier fight. Who knew poop could be this scary. His lower body was literally invincible during the battle. In other words, it was no different than fighting a rival with an unbeatable lower body. Of course, there was no way I could showcase my proper skills. I learned only after competing using palm forces that his martial arts are already quite polished. Actually, it isnt that surprising. A master that could escape from the Murim Alliances Heaven Net is unheard of. As far as I know, during my Crazy Demon days, the shithead was in his Pervert days. Only the members of the Three Disasters managed to shake off Murim Alliances Heavenly Net. Simply put, the most overwhelmingly strong among the masters Ive fought in person upon regressing is this shithead. And he is trying to resist using the Ice Technique unless the situation calls for it. He is a man of many restrictions. The Left Hand tries to cross the busy street several times but backtracks. What does it mean when a strong man like Baek Eung-ji cant come out after shitting his pants? This is the hidden power of the Orthodox Factions, the power of manners, and the desire for honor. With my arms crossed, I laugh mockingly at the Left Hand. Huhuhu. At this moment, a woman calls out to Left Hand from the direction of Garosugil Street. Brother Mong-rang? What are you doing there? As I observe the woman and then look back at where Left Hand stood, he has completely vanished. I make eye contact with the woman who recognized the Left Hand and nod. Yes, that was Lord Mong-rang. Right? But he looked pale. Didnt you see? See what? I say calmly. He shit his pants. I think he drank too much. No way. Did you not see the damp white jangsam wrapped around his pants? The unfairly attractive woman suddenly gets angry at me. No way! Why are you lying! Why are you angry Does she have a crush on the Left Hand? This woman eyes me as if I am the one who shit my pants and then whips her body around. Theres no way our oppa would take a shit. Is that what she meant? Tsk tsk tsk. While clicking my tongue, I can hear the Left Hands voice. Come out now while Im still being nice. Theres one thing Im afraid of all my life: a guy who fights while shitting his pants. . I shift forward slightly and answer. What goes around comes around, idiot. Ill cut you some slack for breaking my brothers arm, so go home and change up. Lord Mong-rang of the Wind Cloud Mong Clan, Mong Clans shithead, Mong Clans poo diaper, Mong Clans Lord who doesnt know when to butt in. Shut up! I put my hands together to make fun of him. Poor kid. Namo Ami Finger Flick Technique! As I hear a rustling sound in the dark, I flick my finger reflexively and unleash the Fiery Fowl Finger Flick Technique. Pak! I then yell out on purpose. Mong-rang! The General Familys wolf cub! Change out of your shit pants before challenging me again! When he hears my curses, the Left Hand drifts away using a lightness skill. With crossed arms, I keep my eyes on the scuttling shadow. Come back when youve freshened up. Filthy bastard. A guy like you doesnt deserve to be in the Orthodox Faction. I dont have a reason to chase him down. I managed to ask around and found out that the Wind Cloud Mong Clan is close to Baek Eung-ji. Since I can only use the Castration Technique after vetoing his lower body advantage, I walk around Baek Eung-jis local downtown in leisure. Clean streets, clean clothes, and pale white skin. It seems theres a reason why theyre the Orthodox Faction. I take a step back against Baek Eung-ji, and its a draw for now since he ran away. Suddenly, many people are now standing in front of the Baekhyang Diner I went to earlier. People are chatting at the entrance with distaste, but I hear rumors that some pretty women had shit themselves in the diner as I walk by. Seeing as how the Left Hand quickly jabbed the pressure points in his abdominal area, the laxative made by Moyong Baek mustve been intense. So the women mustve shat themselves before reaching the bathroom. Again, Im leaving the dealing of consuming laxatives and poison to their family doctor. I spot a noodle restaurant that looks delicious while strolling, so I sit outside and make an order. While eating noodles, I watch the youth passing by on the street. How are there so many attractive women who dress so beautifully here? I had also dressed up according to Gong-chuls advice, but now that I am here and seeing others, I am definitely a hillbilly compared to them. Maybe because this is Orthodox Faction territory, no one is trying to pick a fight. I have mixed feelings seeing those who did not learn martial arts walking around happily. By the way, after competing with the shithead, the noodle doesnt taste as good. Jeez, I lost my appetite. After paying, I ask the errand boy if a stream is nearby. The errand boy replies. If you go straight up that way, you will see Dragons Son Stream. The errand boy points to the north where the Left Hand had vanished. It would be difficult for the clans illegitimate son to go home with shitty pants, and hes probably washing his pants now after wandering around the stream carefully. This is my instinctive sense. The errand boy then asks me. But why are you looking for a stream so late at night? I pat the errand boy on the shoulder and reply. Im on a heros mission. Im tracking an evil demon. Actually, Im chasing after a shithead. The errand boy turns serious as if hes always admired heroes and salutes me with his fist and palm. Thank you for your hard work, Hero. Maybe because were in Orthodox Faction territory, even the errand boys here are courteous. I nod my head and head for the stream like a mighty hero. In fact, everything I have done since my return has been focused on the peace of Kangho, the happy lives of the ladies, the human rights protection of the working class, and the punishment of the wicked. My work is no less heroic, even if the world doesnt recognize me. If not, then never mind. I am traveling through Dragons Son Stream along the moonlight and stop when I hear water splashing on an old bridge. In the quiet Dragons Son Stream, the Left Hand is washing up while naked. A man who turns a stream into shit water, thats the Left Hand. I thought I should go down immediately and make him into a eunuch, but stop in my steps. The Left Hand spots me, but he doesnt look surprised at all. Is it a trap? The moonlight shines on the Left Hands torso as the dark clouds clear. Scars that I cant distinguish between whip marks or knife marks decorate his body; between them, his body is full of ink tattoos. I cant tell whether he had been tortured or mastered demonic powers. I look at the Left Hand with crossed arms. Wash clean. Potty pants. The Left Hand comes out of the stream with a face of resignation, wrings water off his top, and wraps it around his lower body. He then looks at me while half-naked. Come down, you punk. Im done washing. Ha I let out a sigh. The moment he launches an exaggerated kick, I briefly think that the noodles I ate earlier would definitely come back up. Hes no ordinary pervert. How can he cover his lower body so perfectly with a top? He is a mind games expert who understands women well but can apparently also read mens minds perfectly. Moreover, the neckline of his top covers his crotch. I rebuke the Left Hand in a low voice. Just go home, you bastard. Lets fight tomorrow. Lets say I lost today. Under the moonlight, the pervert smiles eerily. Hehehe. Im an orphan, so I cant fathom the twisted mind of an illegitimate child. I honestly dont care. However, Ive known him since my past life, so I am curious about the scars on his upper body. I ask without much expectation. What is that tattoo? Is it a martial art? The Left Hand responds. Youre curious about everything. I remember your face now. You cant run away now. You will get caught by me even if you run away to the Murim Alliance or the demon cults. I make a note of our battle earlier. You know I couldnt fight properly because of your poop. The Left Hand points at me and then says strange things. I will ask my master to make you his disciple. Dying would have been the better option. So, who the heck is your master? Suddenly I come to my senses. Oh? I know information related to Left Hand, I know about the Demon Cults, and I have heard about martial arts that are related to tattoos. At that moment, I theorized that the Left Hand joining the demon cult in my previous life was clearly a scheme. I speculate that the Left Hands master is the man who managed to turn the entire Demon Cult into an enemy while fighting for the leadership position. The Left Hand says as he heads north of the Dragon Sons Stream. Well see each other very soon. I close my mouth as the Left Hand tries to reveal the identity of his master. Chapter 88 The one who was the Left Hand of Illuminating Light in a different life, Mong-rang, enters a house in a secluded area and says. Master, Im here. The house is too big for a man to live in it alone, but the yard, wooden bench, and the area around the tiny well are clean and neat. Mong-rang looks terrible, but he has come prepared to be scolded. Moments later, when a middle-aged man appears, Mong-rang kneels down. The middle-aged man looks at Mong-rang and says. Why do you look so shabby at this hour? Youre not even dressed properly. I cant go home looking like this, so I have come here late at night. Please lend me a change of clothes. The middle-aged man then speaks as he steps out into the yard. Get changed and come out. Yes, sir. The middle-aged man sits on the bench and waits for his disciple while trimming the wooden sword he is carving to pass the time. After a while, having changed into black clothing, Mong-rang sits on the bench and sighs. The middle-aged man then asks. Whats the matter? It looks like you got into a fight and reek of shit. Mong-rang sighs with a complicated expression and says. Master, didnt you say I will not have a rival among my peers? The middle-aged man smiles and replies. How is that my opinion? Thats what you usually think. Thats true. But a rival appeared in front of you then? Kangho is big, so thats not surprising. Which family clan is he from? Hes a country bumpkin. The middle-aged man puts down his wooden sword and replies. Hes not from any of the family clans? Yes. How good is he? Recalling the duel, Mong-rang replies. I couldnt figure him out. The middle-aged man then answers as he looks at the blade of the wooden sword. Does he know who you are? I have no idea. Would you like to meet him? If I see him again, Ill have to go all out. Oh, dont. Itll be a nuisance if you use your skills as Baek Eung-ji. Thats what Im telling you. Hes a guy I cant handle without the Ice Technique. Is he a disciple of one of the Three Disasters? That will make sense if hes a country bumpkin. That may be possible. The middle-aged man then says after some contemplation. Lure him to a quiet place and fight. Dont reveal the Ice Technique in a crowded place. If you cant handle it, lure him. Ill take a look at him myself. I understand. Also. Yes, Master. Why is a rival appearing strange to you? If youre arrogant, catching up with the masters who are still ahead will be harder. Always be on your guard. Go home and rest. Master, can I move out of the Mong Clan soon? Think of it as training your patience. Continue to take a good look at the people of the Mong Clan. Reading different kinds of personalities is as important as martial arts. Alright. How are you feeling? Dont worry, Im recovering slowly. Unless the leader appears, the other cult masters cant do anything to me. Mong-rang stands up from the bench and performs a full bow. I will take my leave. The middle-aged man stares at his disciple and asks him a question. The guy you mentioned earlier, are you going to kill him? Or is he useful? Mong-rang replies. I dont know. If we ever fight again, Ill discipline him properly. Also, what does this stench come from? I swallowed some of his laxatives. Mong-rangs expression becomes grim as he sees his masters mouth twitch for the first time in a long time. The middle-aged man erases his smirk and says to Mong-rang. Now that you have fallen for a country bumpkins trick, your opponent is not only the demon cult but also the masters of Kangho. Countless skilled masters also get beaten. Dont let your guard down. Yes. The man that Mong-rang addresses as master only laughs after his student disappears. Moron. Getting drugged with laxatives. Tsk tsk tsk. The middle-aged man resumes trimming his wooden sword again with a stern face. As I lock myself in Baek Eung-jis quarters, I recall the duel. The Left Hand must have left the fight with a bad taste in his mouth since they were fighting on par due to his diarrhea. Nothing in the world works as expected, after all. They had both fought while hiding some of their powers. However, if the Left Hands master, who I dont know the identity of, is a real person, I can understand why he did so. Anyways, I am assuming that the Left Hands master is the Dokgo Sword Demon („ħ), who once fought the Demon Cult leader and then left. I know about the man because he is someone who tried to kill the leader before I did. What kind of man is he? He is a figure of the Demon Path (ħ) who was recommended to join the Murim Alliance by the Alliance Leader. His background definitely belongs to the Demon Cult, but as he had committed no evil deeds, no one had opposed the Alliance Leaders offer for him to join the alliance. Hes a man who lives by his stubbornness, so the possibility of him joining the alliance is zero. Thanks to the Alliance Leaders efforts, he sometimes interacts with the Orthodox Factions. The words left behind by the Dokgo Sword Demon are also very famous. When he was asked for the reason behind his fight with the Demon Cult leader, the Dokgo Sword Demon had said. They had fought to see who was the better demonic follower. This was an unthinkable contradiction for the master of the Pervert Demon since he was a decent man. Considering the current timeline, there is currently little news about the Dokgo Sword Demon. Since the Pervert Demon will eventually appear, I need to see what events led to it happening. Considering the personality of the grandmaster of the Demon Cult, he doesnt have his own faction. Even though he didnt belong to any faction, he could be considered a one-man faction. Hes simply too gentle of a man to be considered part of the Demon Cult. Yet it is hard to call him a fully good and gentle person since there are rumors that he had brutally killed the cult followers who had tried to block his escape. The demon cult doesnt hand out the nickname of Sword Demon easily, after all. Anyway, it means hes a big shot. I think about the scenario from many angles, but I cant think of one single outstanding idea. I then decide to go to sleep with one goal in mind. Whether its the Left Hand or the Sword Demon If I cant recruit them to the Low-Down Sect, Ill just kill them. Period. But I could also end up dying at the Sword Demons hands. But a man who gives up his aim just because hes afraid of death, thats not me. In my dream, I am being hunted down by the Murim Alliance. I dream of successfully drugging a banquet full of the alliances masters and their leader with a laxative. I run around laughing before being captured and imprisoned by the leader. Why do my dreams always have a terrible ending? As I am trapped in prison, the leader comes by to give me prison food. After eating it, I get a stomach ache and continue dreaming of diarrhea. When I open my eyes, the sun has already risen. Im getting karma from a dream? After splashing my face with water, I head to the noodle restaurant I visited yesterday. While I wait for my order of noodles, the Left Hand appears wearing a fresh set of clothes. I naturally pinch my nose. Youre making me lose my appetite, shithead. The Left Hand sits across from me, crosses his arms, and says. Youre here to have a meal. It could be your last meal, so eat up. As soon as the errand boy places my noodles on the table, he turns and asks the Left Hand. Lord Mong, what would you like to order? Left Hand replies. Ill pass. Yes, sir. Noticing the deadly stares between us, the errand boy quickly withdraws with his eyes wide open. I stab the Moonlight Dagger into the table and eat my noodles. The Left Hand then asks me. I find it strange, so let me ask you one thing. As I slurp up the noodles, I glance at the Left Hand. I wouldve died if it was poison instead of laxative. What are you after? I gave him the same answer as yesterday. I cant tell you that. Left Hand then asks me what is in his mind. By any chance, did I snatch your girl? If I did, I would understand your behavior. Thats stupid. Guess Im right. Otherwise, you wont hold a grudge against me. You sent that guy with a broken arm to check my track record. Right? I give him a vague answer since I am feeling lazy. Lets say youre right. The Left Hand, surprisingly, does not try to launch a surprise attack until I finish my noodles. I then ask the Left Hand my own question. I mastered the Ice Technique but havent been able to use it properly. Take me to a quiet place. Ill make you see the real difference in our skills that I couldnt show yesterday. Lets go. Without saying anything further, we leave Baek Eun-ji and enter a cozy and quiet village. The Left Hand points to a house with high walls. Dont get me wrong, and listen. Thats my masters house. I dont know if you get it, but hes not someone who will intervene in the fight between juniors. If youre scared, Ill guide you somewhere else. I look at the Left Hand. It cant be helped even if it is a ruse. I cant stand not knowing things I am curious about. Lead the way. If the Sword Demon is here and intervenes in the fight, Ill have no choice but to flee. However, if it is really the Sword Demon there, I think that he wont interfere, as the Left Hand states. As I walk into the house alongside the Left Hand A middle-aged man Ive never seen before is sitting on a bench and is trimming a wooden sword with a dagger. The Left Hand then asks. Master, can we have a duel here? The middle-aged man glances at me and says to the Left Hand. Do whatever you want. I dont know what the Sword Demon looks like. It is difficult to guess the age of the middle-aged man sitting on the bench, but he has some gray hair and an intelligent-looking face. He is a man with a complex face whose nature seems simple and strict. He doesnt pay much attention to me as it seems that making the wooden sword is more important to him. In a way, he is a man who does not get ruffled. As I let out a short sigh without giving him a greeting, the middle-aged man tells me. I wont blame you even if you kill him, so fight as much as you want. As soon as I hear this, I am convinced that the Left Hands master is the Dokgo Sword Demon. The Dokgo Sword Demon underestimates me too much, so I provoke him slightly. This chick cant be my opponent. Why dont we have a round, Senior? The Sword Demon puts down his wooden sword with a puzzled expression. With me? The Left Hand then says coldly. Are you out of your mind? I answer the Left Hands words with my hands behind my back. Shut up, shithead. The Sword Demon then stares at me. I try to conceal my energy levels since it seems that he is trying to gauge them. The Sword Demon then speaks with a frown. Which faction do you belong to? There are only a few factions in this world that I dont know of. I cant tell you that. In a calm tone, Sword Demon then says intimidatingly. I can win if I fight with all my might, but it is impossible now. Im recovering from an injury, so I cant compete recklessly. Come and sit down if you dont want to compete with Mong-rang right now. The Left Hand asks him in a bewildered voice. Master? The Sword Demon tells the Left Hand. This guy is fearless. Youll duel with him often in the future, so theres no need to rush. Go get us some tea. In the meantime, I should try to guess the faction of our uninvited guest. The Left Hand is about to protest but then gives in. Understood. As I sit down on the bench, the Sword Demon smiles as he strokes his prickly beard. How astonishing. Astonishing indeed. Which master in this world can guess my affiliation? However, judging from the Sword Demons atmosphere, gaze, mindset, and voice, I realize hes a rare madman. Even more surprising is that this madmans nature contains pieces of Taoist philosophy. The Sword Demon scratches his forehead in front of me and asks. Youre not going to reveal your faction, are you? Yes. Of course you wont. What did this man see in me? I am also starting to feel strange because I am meeting the man who survived a fight against the Demon Cult leader. The Sword Demon seems to be an impressive man since he doesnt treat people based on their backgrounds but by how polished they are. The Sword Demon catches me off guard and says in a gentle voice. That boy probably added some laxatives or poison to your tea. Why do you think so? The Sword Demon points inside and says. Its past the time it would usually take to make tea. It makes sense, but the first cup will be fine when the tea comes out. The Sword Demon asks me, despite knowing the answer. Why? Because he overheard us and is changing my cup right now. The Sword Demon nods. Thats right. After a while, the Left Hand, who had been suddenly tasked to make tea, places the tea cups on the table and says. There is no diarrhea medicine in this, so please drink comfortably. Master. The Left Hand points his finger at me. You drink comfortably, too. I reply with a nod. Youre here. Youve gone through a lot since yesterday. The three of us drink a cup of tea. It is a normal tea that one drinks on a day when nothing happens. I look at the two of them and then around the peaceful house. I then look at the faces of everyone sitting on the bench once more We are the Sword Demon (ħ), Pervert Demon (ɫħ), and Crazy Demon (ħ). Chapter 89 The Sword Demon puts down his teacup and says. You dont have to force yourself to say anything you dont want to reveal. But why dont we ask each other questions we want to know and answer them in exchange for information? Well go slow. We should get to know each other first. Are you asking me to do a Q&A relay? Indeed. Very well. Ask me if you have any questions. Now that hes allowing me to ask questions, I have so much to ask. I have to sort out my questions according to priority. As I ponder this deeply, the Left Hand intervenes. Master, may I join you? Sure. Thank you. Like the generals of the kingdoms Wei, Shu, and Wu, we choose our words carefully. I ask the Sword Demon the first question. Why are you teaching a shithead like him? Sword Demon answers me calmly. Im thinking of making him the next Heavenly Demon (ħ). Does that answer your question? I feel like I just got beaten down by the Sword Demon for a moment. This is an unexpected answer. When the Sword Demon and I turn to look at the Left Hand, he shakes his head. Ill pass. The man, later known as the Left Hand of Illuminating Light, is a gentle sheep in front of his master. The Sword Demon then nods and throws a question at me. I dont think youre from either the Orthodox or Unorthodox Factions. I wouldve also known you if you were in the Demon Cult. That leaves three masters, Seo Jang or the Three Disasters. Or, though hard for me to believe, you learned all of this yourself. I swallow back a curse. The hairs on my arm are all standing up. It is incredible how he could narrow the scope of possibilities without witnessing my martial arts skills. The Sword Demon demands an answer. Is my prediction right? Yes. I give him as simple of an answer as I can. That way, the longer the question and answer session, the more information I can get. I look at the Sword Demons wooden sword and the Left Hand before asking my question. What are you teaching him? Shithead mastered the Ice Technique, and youre mastering the sword. The Sword Demon points at the Left Hand. He learned Ice Technique before meeting me. Look at him. Hes inexperienced with a lot to learn. Just because Im a good swordsman doesnt guarantee hell also be one. He swallowed laxatives even before he could fight. Do you have any idea how much I have to teach? Its better to train in what were good at. Sword Demons words are irrefutable. Youre one nasty little punk. I have no choice but to nod in agreement. This time, the Sword Demon asks his question. What is the martial art you are most confident in? Your hands dont have calluses. Even though I have the Black Hares Tooth on my waist, the Sword Demon doesnt see me as a threat. I notice that there is no use in lying. Sword Demon can quickly determine whether its a lie or truth. I answer him in my own way. I learned various martial arts, so I dont fight with one style. Im confident in all of them. It depends on the situation. The Sword Demon nods with an indifferent expression. That means nothing about you stands out. I let out a short sigh. It feels like the Sword Demon just slashed his sword and struck my arm. The Sword Demon then gestures. Ask away. I ask him a comprehensive question to discover why the Sword Demon is staying around in an area under the Orthodox Faction. What is a member of the Demon Cult doing here? Sword Demon answers after understanding the intent behind the question. Im waiting for the right timing to fight the Cult Leader. Hes not a man I can fight anytime I want, so Ill have to wait longer. I also need to recover from my injury. This isnt surprising at all. I scratch my head and nod. Sword Demon, who just made a clean counterattack, launches another attack. This is our first encounter. It seems like you knew my disciple from before. What do you want from him? Since you didnt poison him, it means you want something. I stare at the Sword Demon for a moment. Is this guy using the Phantom Sword? I suddenly feel as if invisible swords are entirely surrounding me. If I lie, the invisible swords will stab into my body. I thought this was a question relay, but it ended up with me risking my life. Even the Left Hand realizes that this is not an ordinary question relay. Im a man who doesnt worry much, so I only tell the truth. Ill think about the story that doesnt make sense later. All I want is the Ice Technique. The Sword Demons expression instantly changes, and the invisible swords surrounding me disappear all at once. The Sword Demon and Left Hand look at me with suspicion. I just think to hell with all this facade and ask the Sword Demon. Why did you take this guy as your disciple? Hes a ladys man. Being a womanizer is his nature, and nature is inherited from parents. He probably gets it from his father. While there are children wary of their parents nature, there are those who dont. His potential and talent for learning martial arts were rare and exceptional. The shocking fact about the Left Hand is that he is a man without any twist to his story. Even the Sword Demon admits that this guy was born to be the Pervert Demon. When the Left Hand does deny anything, Sword Demon then says with an awkward expression. I wont stop him from playing with women. But I told him not to hurt and insult women. Still, he will end up in trouble if he keeps changing lovers. If more innocent women follow him only by looking at his handsome face, this guy will realize his fate. The Sword Demon answers my question with his predicament. The Left Hand, who is listening carefully, asks the Sword Demon. Master, what is that destiny you mentioned? That destiny is Yes. I dont know either. Its just that when you find a woman you really like, shes more likely to look down on you due to your reputation. Right now, youll be happy to sleep with several women, but affection is no simple and easy matter. But its like knocking on a dead mans door. Even if I say this, just live as you please. Thats fate. The Sword Demons attack drives the Left Hand to a corner. The Left Hand looks extremely hurt, so I snort at him mockingly. Get the hell out, shithead. Its time for me to compete with the Sword Demon again. Sword Demon asks me. Its my turn to ask questions. Why do you want to learn the Ice Technique? I scratch my forehead for a moment. Right now, whenever Sword Demon attacks, I can see his tactics. This is a punch-like question. There is no way to avoid it, so I block it head-on. To kill the cult leader. Even though I succeed in my defense, the feeling of being cornered is still there. After some thought, I ask my question in the form of a direct stab. What is your intention in fighting the cult leader? This time, the Sword Demon folds his arms. Youre asking such an obvious question. But if you dont know me, its understandable youll be curious. Thats right. A man who sets foot in Kangho and fights more than 10 times isnt a skilled man. Ignoring the rules, I follow up with a question. Why not? Doesnt it mean you have 10 guys to beat up? You will compete for ego if you meet a Kangho warrior as you train. Youll have to continue training if youre lucky enough to survive. You wont have enough time to continuously look for the next Kangho warrior and compete with 10 masters. A sect leader may be among the strong, and next, the alliance leader caught my attention. For a moment, I am astonished by the Sword Demons condescending answer and keep my silence. Sword Demon then adds. That is my definition of Demon (ħ). This man is a demon who walks the path of a truth-seeker with his sword. This time, it is the Sword Demons turn. You cant kill the cult leader by just mastering the Ice Technique. Do you have a plan? The answer to this question is simple, so I tell him what I have in mind. The important thing is to have a Killing Intent () toward him, so the result doesnt matter. The Sword Demon stares at me with a frown as if he is mulling over my words. Ask your question. Suddenly, I recall one of Grandmaster Ouyangs eight tactics, the sixth tactic, the Wooden Sword Style (ľʽ). Sword Demon has a wooden sword. Id given up since the fifth tactic, the Thunderous Sword Style. Now that the Sword Demon is holding a wooden sword, I cant help but be curious. Grandmaster Ouyang and the Dokgo Sword Demon may not come from the same faction, but I still ask him the question because they might share something in common. Does that wooden sword represent your current cultivation level? Thats a strange question. The wooden sword has been a topic for me these days. As for my level perhaps youre right. I cant fully control the wooden sword yet. Does that answer your question? It is understandable if they have not read Ki Sung-jas explanation. However, I can predict the Sword Demons level since Ive read the synopsis of the Grandmaster Sword Technique. The Sword Demon asks me a realistic question. How will you acquire it if my disciple has no intention of teaching you? I answer without much thought. If not, Ill gain enlightenment on my own. Sword Demon scoffs, nods, and says. The relay is over. I know who your master is. I think, Oh, this is how you want to play? This is such an odd question relay. Who do you think it is? The Sword Demon replies. You are influenced by a few people but dont have an actual master. Basically, you are the one-man show type who builds your own faction or becomes a grandmaster. An independent man who lives by his own disposition, personality, and mindset. Youre not learning the Ice Technique because you need it, but more for the knowledge to explore the next step. In any case, extreme Yin energy is a big part of martial arts. Thats the traits of a grandmaster. You have no affiliation, but it is reasonable to see it as self-taught. You may be using what youve learned since youre young. The day will come when youll use your own martial arts if you work hard. I become speechless for the first time since my regression to the past. This is a serious situation if a talkative person like me is speechless. The Sword Demon asks for confirmation. Am I wrong? No, youre right. This rare trait itself is very invaluable. The Sword Demon nods without showing anything and looks at the Left Hand. If my disciple has offended you in any way, please forgive him. Since you kept him alive, it must not be a grave mistake. Im the one to be blamed for not teaching him enough. If you forgive him, you can come to find me whenever you have any questions or get stuck with training. . The Sword Demon continues. Moreover, the Ice Technique is like the soul of my disciples clan. My disciple could change his mind and teach you, but killing him wont enable you to learn the Ice Technique. However, regardless of chance or coincidence, we both want to kill the cult leader. Now that weve cleared the air, why dont we move on? I stare at the Left Hand with genuine surprise. There is no change in his expression. His reaction shows that hes not surprised at Sword Demons words. You, killing the cult leader? While staring at the Left Hand, I recall his behavior, speech, and expression back at the cliff. And I then come to this conclusion. Jerk, he was hunting me down so I would swallow the Heavenly Pearl. The Pervert Demon is the Pervert Demon. Theres no unexpected side to him. The unexpected twist is that this man hadnt come to retrieve the Heavenly Pearl and present it to the Cult Leader. He isnt such a great person to give rare panaceas like the Heavenly Pearl to others from the start. Even if I killed 100 of the strongest elites of the Heavenly Demon Cult It means the Left Hand was just looking on as he was chasing me. He hadnt been interested in taking my life. All the Left Hand wanted was to get his hands on the Heavenly Pearl. Furthermore, if a faction named the Okhwa Palace was destroyed by the Heavenly Demon Cult, it would be more natural for their descendants to seek revenge. The Left Hand then says with reluctance. Master. The Sword Demon answers immediately. You. Yes. Dont be too bothered that you got spiked with laxatives. You should be relieved you werent poisoned. If the outcome of the match was cruel, youre already dead. Foolish, I warned you to be careful. The Left Hand replies with a bewildered look. I will deeply reflect on my mistake. The Sword Demon points his finger and launches a finishing attack. You didnt survive because of luck. You are alive because this man needs something from you. Your clans Ice Technique saved you. I wonder how long youll get drunk and sleep with women. The Left Hand hangs his head low and gives an unexpected response. I will do my best in training. What about women? Ill also work hard As Sword Demons wooden sword surges with a thud, the Left Hand drops and rolls onto the floor. I look at the Left Hand with my arms crossed. To be honest, I am in awe. Wow, shithead, youre incredible. As I stare at the Sword Demon, I comfort him with pure intention. Thank you. I suspected that the Sword Demon might have died of an anger disorder in his previous life. Looking around the scenery of the yard again, we are. The Sword Demon walks on the path of a seeker of truth with his sword. The Pervert Demon is the Pervert Demon. And Im the Crazy Demon. All three of us have nicknames true to our nature. Chapter 90 This is the summary. The Sword Demon has yet to contend with the Cult Leader in this lifetime. It seems like he will be joining the alliance once he has his fight with the Alliance Leader. Though I have no idea when that will happen. Assuming the Sword Demon would fight other masters once he trained some more after competing with the Alliance Leader, it would match up with the time when the Sword Demon went missing in my past life. After the Sword Demon, who fights with a wooden sword, disappeared, his disciple, the Left Hand, went insane and became the Pervert Demone. He would then join the Demon Cult to kill their leader. All of this makes perfect sense. Actually, the question relay is already over. However, I immediately asked the Sword Demon a question since he said I could ask him anything anyway. I found an unusual manual that outlines a sword style called the Thunderous Sword Style. What do you think of it? Sword Demon gives me a slight smile. He must find it funny and amusing since I am asking him questions about martial arts without modesty. The Sword Demon replies. What was written under the Thunderous Sword Style? There should be a synopsis. The Sword Energy transforms into a thunderstorm. thats all? I nod. See, I wasnt the only one who found it strange. Even the Sword Demon is a little flustered at the brief explanation. Who the hell is able to master the Grandmaster Sword Technique, then? The Sword Demon then asks me more about the processes that come before and after. If the Thunderous Sword Style is its name, what comes before and after? I stay quiet and catch my breath for a moment. I briefly ponder if I should tell him but quickly decide since I am the one asking for advice anyway. Of course, I should tell him. Its divided into different levels. In chronological order are the Long Sword Style, Short Sword Style, Myriad Sword Style, Draw Sword Style, and Thunderous Sword Style. What about the rest? There is also the Wooden Sword Style, Energy Sword Style, and the Grandmaster Sword Style. The Sword Demon nods after some contemplation. Its systematic. The terms are named after the state, and its unique that the sword techniques dont come with complex sword styles. The Grandmaster Sword Style must be the founders most powerful weapon. But Ive never heard of a faction that solely focuses on the core. He must have been a great master from at least 100 years ago. I guess so. The Left Hand, whose forehead is swollen after being hit by a wooden sword, sits calmly on the bench again. The Sword Demon is lost in thought, so I close my eyes for a moment with my arms crossed. The three of us think about the problem shown to us by Ki Sung-ja. The Sword Demon then says. Ill tell you my opinion. I open my eyes. The Sword Demon continues. Take it with a grain of salt since this is just my opinion. Theres no need to mull over the term Thunderous Sword Style. This senior may have amassed extreme Yang energy. It would be a fitting name if the sword energy is dragged to the extreme and fired as an explosive attack. Qi () is often similar to nature, so following its form, it will become the Thunder Sword (ׄ). You dont have to use a sword that looks like a thunderbolt. Do you understand? I understand. Then explain what the Wooden Sword Style is. I answer right away. From Long Sword Style to Thunderous Sword Style, it is the level that shows itself in the form of a wooden sword. The Sword Demon makes a look of admiration. Ah its as if youre talking about my condition. If so, does the Energy Sword Style manifest as energy instead of a wooden sword? I nod at the sharp-witted man. Sword Demon murmurs while frowning. So Wooden Sword is not the final form. Is this the sword technique of the Greatest Man in the World? That, I dont know. This sword technique is from Grandmaster Ouyang, and Ive never heard of him. The Sword Demon nods. He must be an Orthodox Faction master. Ill ask the Alliance Leader later and let you know if I get the correct information. As I hear Sword Demons words, I nod my agreement. The Alliance Leader probably knows. The alliance always keeps detailed records. Now I know that Im not stuck at the Thunderous Sword Style stage. This is just a matter of internal Qi. Im accumulating Qi from drawing the power of the Heavenly Pearl, so Ill be able to use the Thunderous Sword Style as time passes. The sword wont appear as a thunderbolt as Ive never studied nor used swords to fight using sword energy. The Sword Demon has explained that it doesnt matter. Then, I suddenly remembered the plum tree. Maybe the sword energy will flutter like plum blossoms. Plum blossoms and thunderbolts cannot be compared to each other. The point is that the form will use someones personality as a base characteristic. In terms of my own interpretation, the Grandmaster Sword Techniques Thunderous Sword Style is something like my Plum Blossom Sword Style (÷ʽ). Combined with the Strolling Golden Turtle Techniques Fire Chicken, it becomes the Plum Blossom Fragrance (÷). However, the swords power must be as strong as a thunderbolt to make it a meaningful style. The conversation is mainly between the Sword Demon and me as the Left Hand is lost in thought. Since he doesnt use a sword, he must be reinterpreting the core of our conversation in the context of the Ice Technique. The Sword Demon then brings up a new topic at a somewhat strange timing. Hoobae, my real name has been meaningless for a long time, so I dont use it. I wonder slightly what he means by that sentence. Did he want me to reveal my name? I decide to reveal my most important identity to the Sword Demon. I am Lee Zaha of the Low-Down Sect. Did you create the Low-Down Sect? When I nod to this, the Sword Demon says to his disciple. In the future, dont touch those who belong to the Low-Down Sect or insult them with your light words and actions. Or else its war with their leader. This applies especially to their women. The Left Hand answers after reading the room. Understood. The Sword Demon props his chin and then bids me away with an honest expression. I wont sleep all night because of what you said today. Ill contemplate it happily, so I hope my disciple and the Sect Leader could spare me some time alone. The Sword Demon looks at me. Leader, can we see each other again? I nod and reply. I think we have much to discuss in the future. The Sword Demon, whose expression has been calm this whole time, raises the corners of his lips slightly. See you again. As he is not a formal kind of person, the way he speaks is casual. The Sword Demon then stands up and says goodbye to the Left Hand with his hands on his back. You learned something today, so stay home quietly today. Enlightenment will come to the door and run away because you reek of alcohol. Apparently, their relationship is of a master who teaches a larger picture and lets his student figure out the rest himself. This method of education is only possible because the Left Hand is already a master. All three of us are brusque men, so we separate without a word of farewell. But as soon as I step out of the home with the Left Hand, we stare at each other as if it is a matter of course. The Left Hand speaks to me in a low voice. Bumpkin, youre lucky you could receive Masters teaching. I answer the Left Hand. You want to see whos the real lucky one, shithead? Then, the Sword Demons raspy voice sounds from the house. I need to talk to you. Come back in, shithead. The Left Hand hurries back into the house without making the atmosphere worse. Did you call for me, master? Having lost my opponent to fight, I click my tongue several times and have no choice but to turn around. On my way back to my accommodation, I forget about the shithead and recall the conversation I had with the Sword Demon earlier. I couldnt acquire Ice Technique immediately, but I feel like I have gained a sword. I didnt use swords very often in my previous life. According to the Sword Demons standards, hes probably right that I dont stand out in Kangho. If a persons criticism leaves a bad taste in your mouth, it is right to accept it. In fact, the martial arts Im most confident in are the unidentified staff technique that the Crazy Monk gave me and the martial arts that contain unbreakable faith. This would be a merit since the staff is very sturdy. It already feels unpleasant that the Sword Demons level is slightly higher than mine. However, since my return, I indeed became unusually strong quickly in terms of my overall rate of martial arts development. Therefore, there is no need to rush or compare with others. One of Ki Sung-jas advice says to not intentionally ask about other heroes. The Sword Demons path is different. Perhaps it is because he is a man who walks on a path that is different from those of chivalrous heroes. I think this is because he was part of the Demon Cult. A man who is not interested in becoming a hero and only pursues martial arts. Perhaps because he was a veteran member of the Demon Cult. The range of a path cant be easily mapped out from origin to destination. If a man like the Sword Demon calls himself a Demon, he is one. But, as for me I admired the tale of him competing with the cult leader to determine who was the true Demon. It was not until I met the Sword Demon in person could I fully understand. A man should be like that This thought swirls through my heart. The Sword Demon sighs from the bench. Disciple. Yes, master. It is my mistake to let both of you out at the same time. I called you back since I thought you two would have another fight. The Left Hand nods with mixed feelings. Actually, it does look like we will fight. Mong-rang. Yes, master. I am a private and selfish person. Its not easy for me to devote my time to you. It will be hard for you to understand. You who are sociable in nature. No, I understand. Have you lost interest in training recently? Honestly, it feels like Im about to reach my limit. This is a common phenomenon to anyone who studies martial arts. I suppose so. How to overcome it? How do you see the problem and solve it? In fact, Kangho warriors call this comprehension (). Many people think comprehension is that one is fast at learning martial arts, but thats not true. Geniuses in assassination, analysis, fast-learning, and understanding are not comprehension but intelligence. Its like a gift from a parent. Like you. . Stop drinking, stay away from women, this is this, and that is that. What comes to mind when you see the Low-Down Sect Leader who is your age and is growing stronger without a master even though I am teaching you? You have been called a genius since you were young, but are you better than Lee Zaha in comprehension? Im not quite sure about that. You heard what I said. That guy is going around trying to invent a new martial art. I dont know what type of faction the Low-Down is, but his purpose is martial arts. Hell go kill the cult leader when hes prepared. But he knows its not easy. Do you remember what he said? Yes. What was it? He said the important thing is to have a will to kill him. You train while having women in your arms, yet he trains with murderous intent. A year passes, and two years pass. When the both of you argue and engage in a war of nerves with him by the door once again. Will you be able to face the Low-Down Sect Leader confidently like you did now? The Left Hand only listens with a sullen expression. . Look at the long run, disciple. This is not a joke. Im asking you to think about your future. If the man who fed you laxatives become much stronger than you, how will you live with that shame? Could a genius like you bear the humiliation? Its a blessing that he suddenly appeared. Kangho was always like this. A rival will make you stronger. Yes. A person who can become stronger easily due to high comprehension. Thats you. Yes. Whats the use of comprehension if Lee Zaha insults you? I almost sighed several times when I saw the young man being cautious throughout the conversation by trying to suppress his energy levels. Who told him to be this cautious? Go back and think about it. How can you beat Lee Zaha in a year? How will Lee Zaha be defeated in two or three years? What should you do to overcome that unknown murderous will? Mindset and determination is comprehension. The Left Hand lowers his body and bows to the Sword Demon. Ill think deeply. Master. Just so you know, I will meditate for a few days to find a clue for enlightenment. Yes. Looking closely, he is suppressing his madness, so dont fight hastily. You call him bumpkin, and he calls you shithead. He is a bad-tempered man who only called me senior when I called him leader. Dont mess with a mad dog. Think of him as an ally and a rival since he wants to kill the cult leader. How many people in the world can you and I have a deep conversation with? Dont treat him carelessly. Yes. As expected, the answer is not to mess with a mad dog. Thats right. If my disciple calls Lee Zaha a crazy dog, hell probably call you a horny dog. You can go now. The student who was scolded by his master bows deeply to the master with tears on his face. Master, your incompetent disciple is off now. The Sword Demon nods with a serious look. I am glad you realize this. The disciple stands up, stumbles once, and walks to the gate with the gait of a defeated soldier. The masters sigh echoing from behind becomes a sword that stabs the disciple again. Chapter 91 I sit in a seat where I can watch the streets, order myself some Kaoliang liquor, and become lost in thought. I wait for the Left Hand as I organize my thoughts on the Thunderous Sword Style, Plum Blossom Sword Style, and Plum Blossom Fragrance. The fact that Sword Demon mentioned and called the shithead back in is to stop us from fighting. Even if we dont fight, its about time to end my visit to Baekeungji. Im sure the Left Hand is also curious about me. This is due to the gaps in my words during the question relay with Sword Demon. Of course, the Sword Demon is unaware, but the Left Hand would be curious. When I emptied my fifth cup of Kaoliang liquor The Left Hand, heading to the Mong Clan, walks up to me. The Left Hand walks up and gives me a look. He clearly is trying to hold back on what he wanted to say about three times before sitting across from me wordlessly and pouring himself a drink. I speak to him in a casual voice. Why do you drink it so fearlessly? What if there are laxatives in that glass, too? Are you out of your mind? As soon as he hears me, the Left Hand chokes and coughs as he puts down the glass. Well, hes still a novice. The Left Hand glares at me when he realizes I am just trying to scare him. I wait for the Left Hand to speak as I sip on the Kaoliang liquor. The Left Hand throws an obvious question at me. How did you find out that I use the Ice Technique? I dont get it. Even though master didnt find it strange that wed fought, judging from your behavior, you already know I use the Ice Technique. I nod. Im looking for the Ice Technique. Thats all? I have a lot of men. A subordinate of mine whos a successor told me about Okhwa Palace in detail. They told me about the Orthodox Faction areas, especially the family clans. I am on the search since I figured an heir would be taking over the Okhwa Palace soon. Ah, no wonder the guy whose arm I broke was following me. But still, I never used the Ice Technique in public. I didnt have to use it on him either. At this point, I grin. Youre funny. What? You broke my subordinates arm in Baekeungji of all places. I found out it was a playboy with great martial arts skills. If my subordinate is hurt, I should come forward. I got confirmation you learned the Ice Technique during the fight. The Left Hand ponders if there are any loopholes in my words. How did that guy follow me around? I glance at the Left Hand and say. My subordinate guessed the illegitimate son of a family clan wouldve mastered it. As soon as I mention an illegitimate son, the Left Hands face turns red. I look at the Left Hands agitated face. The Left Hand then speaks with a forced smile. Shut up with that illegitimate son talk. Do you know that everyone in Baekeungji who says that to me got beaten up? Whatever. Youre a bastard, and thats that. I dont get why you got mad at others. Looking like hes about to flip the table, Left Hand replies. Insulting Why is that insulting? This isnt something you can choose, moron. Youre so frustrating to talk to. As the Left Hand is about to drink the liquor, he sees the empty bottle. He then calls the errand boy over to order more alcohol. Anyway, this is how we smoothly slide over the topic of the Ice Technique. Next, I need to check this guys probability of switching to the Demon Cult. I know now that he joined them to kill the cult leader, but the situation is different now. Im also in preparation to kill the cult leader, after all. It might be due to the Sword Demons teachings, but this guy is one of the strongest in the Demon Cult. It will be easier to deal with him if he remains in the Orthodox Faction. The Left Hand says. Look, hill Hill, what? Hillbilly bastard, why is the cult leader your enemy? I dont think a noob would have anything to do with him. Is Okhwa Palace part of your external martial arts? If so, I wouldve learned the Ice Technique long ago. Then why is the cult leader your enemy? This is what makes coming back from the past difficult. Sometimes you have to come up with an excuse. But thats still part of me. I cant tell you that. The Left Hand shuts his mouth as soon as I take a defensive front to his questions. At this point, I also have to ask Left Hand what I am curious about. How did this guy become the Pervert Demon? If I figure it out, I think I can prevent the birth of the Pervert Demon just like how Id gotten rid of Dae Na-chal early enough to stop Moyong Baek from turning into the Poison Demon. Although I did fail to acquire Ice Technique. The mission as important as acquiring the Ice Technique is still in progress. Suddenly, as a silky, soft-haired woman passes by on the street, the Left Hand turns his head with his mouth attached to the glass. This is why fate is hard to change. I ask him a straightforward question without much expectation. How did you end up like a horny dog? Is there a reason? The Left Hand looks at me. Ah, there is. What is it? I cant tell you, bumpkin. I snicker. I think the Left Hand is living a ruined life like my subordinates. If hes born into a good family but oppressed by the thought of being a bastard, hell live a damned life. I laugh and hold out my palm slowly. The startled Left Hand hits back with his right hand while he is still trying to drink. Puck! I immediately shoot out Wood Chicken energy and convert it to the Fire Chicken. The Left Hands expression suddenly changes, and his right hand is dyed white as he tries to stop Fire Chickens energy. At that moment, he uses the Okhwa Palaces Ice Technique. I observe the Left Hands expression as I use the Fire Chicken palm force. The Left Hands face is becoming more solemn by the minute. At this level, however, he would easily win against heirs of other Orthodox Faction forces without needing to use the Ice Technique. However, I think that the Fire Chicken stage of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique has excellent synergy with the Ice Technique. Moreover, the amount of Qi extracted from the Heavenly Pearly is comparatively lower than what the Left Hand uses. As I intensify the palm force, the Left Hand hastily grabs the table with his left hand. The table is instantly frozen, so I grab the table with my left hand. The white, freezing Qi dissipates once more as our opposing attack reacts. To check on how the Left Hand is feeling, I say. Senior Sword Demon didnt want us to fight, but we should at least distinguish the ranks. Dont you think? You piece of shit. I think crushing his ego will make him focus on training without even having time to meet women. If the Left Hand becomes triggered by me and becomes stronger than in his past life, I can also get inspired and become stronger. The Left Hand, whose pride is as great as mine, opens his mouth. Of course, we need to sort out who is superior. You bumpkin. As an impromptu palm force battle occurs at a table near a bustling street, spectators inevitably gather. Furthermore, a crowd instantly forms as one of the parties involved is the infamous Mong-rang of Baekungji. As I continue on while using the Fire Chicken, the number of onlookers begin to increase. Absurdly, I hear some women cheering for Mong-rang. I laugh at this absurdity while continuing to blast out my palm force. Shithead, youre pretty popular. And youll soon be famous for being a disgrace. As soon as I confirm that the Left Hand is somewhat relaxed, I switch to the Fighting Chicken. As if wed established an unspoken rule, neither of us uses our left hand. The Left Hand quickly turns pale as soon as I switch to Fighting Chicken. Hes rather pale from the start, but his face becomes as white as paper when color is drained from his face. At the same time, the Left Hand asks me. Shall we call it a tie? I instantly let out a laugh and almost divert my attack, but I quickly regain my peace of mind. Then the Left Hand requests once again. Lets call it a tie. I reply in an indifferent voice. I wont accept your demands. I think it is too much to kill the Sword Demons disciple, who still hasnt turned into the Pervert Demon, so I just shoot out the power of Fighting Chicken as an explosion with my palm. After a loud bang explodes from my palm, the Left Hands body drops and rolls onto the floor. The spectators die down as if they have stopped breathing. This is because its their first time witnessing Mong-rangs defeat. From his position on the floor, the Left Hand looks at the onlookers instead of me. Among the onlookers are women the Left Hand wants to pursue in the future. I drink while watching the Left Hand stew in his wrath. Serves him right. Suddenly, the Left Hand stands up as he shakes the dust off his clothes and bursts into laughter. Wahahahahahaha. The Left Hand approaches me with hands behind his back and speaks awkwardly like a theatrical actor. I lost today. That means its one victory and one loss? The Left Hand sits back in the chair smiling and drinks calmly as if nothing had happened. . The Left Hand waves to the onlookers. The show is over, so go back. You little shithead, one victory, one loss? The Left Hand whispers as if he is saying something important. I dont know if its one victory and one loss Dont be so harsh since we will continue to compete. You dont know this since youre a hillbilly, but internal Qi is not everything. Lets say I lost in internal martial arts. You better watch out. The Left Hand then looks around and takes a drink. The Left Hand, who is bothered by the eyes around him, looks absolutely pathetic. He seems to have an unconscious desire to be seen and recognized. As I sit there doing nothing, the Left Hand blurts out. There was a servant named Byeong-gu. He worked for me. He was five years older than me, but he was adopted by the Mong Clan at a very young age with no home and no family. He was a loyal servant who called me sir and fed me, changed my shoes, and brought me towels and clothes when I took a bath. In fact, Byeong-gu was the friend Id played with. One day, the loyal Byeong-gu hangs himself in a small room. It was suicide. I looked into why my only servant died and discovered that this stupid man had a crush on a woman named Dan-yeong. The Left Hand downs another shot of alcohol. He looks half-drunk. When I found a woman named Dan-yeong and tortured her, do you know what did she say to me? When she refused Byeong-gus confession, she said, Why are you confessing to me when youre not even Brother Mong-rang? Goodness, I cant believe this moron was my servant. He committed suicide after hearing that? Anyway, I lost Byeong-gu. So. So? I became curious about women. I wonder who these people that made Byeong-gu take his own life. And then? Surprisingly, most of them have similar thoughts to Dan-yeong. A better-looking man, a little richer. He should come from a better background they dont view Byeong-gu as a human being. No, more like they dont see him as a man. I stare at the Left Hand, who has been oddly twisted since a very young age. The Left Hand continues. The more I date them, the more similar they all are. Sometimes women with higher standards hated me because I was a bastard. To some, Im no different than Byeong-gu. So, is that why your lovers keep changing? No. The prospective Pervert Demon looks at me and utters words of absurdity. This is just justice for Byeong-gu. Because Im trash, too. I nod. You a stupid shithead. I know the exact words that push his buttons, so I say them right away without much hesitation. You are no different from your father. The Left Hands face crumples instantaneously. What? Your father dated your mother to gain the Ice Technique. He didnt love her. The Ice Technique is the soul of the clan, and thoroughly persevered, your mother would have only passed it down to you. And you were treated as the Mong Clans illegitimate son. But I cant believe youre doing this because of that pitiful servant are you any different than your father? You idiot. As soon as I see Left Hands incoming punch, my hand moves first and slaps him on the cheek. When the Left Hands face turns after my slap, I drag him by the hair with my left hand. Jeez, you immature punk. I guess the Sword Demon took you in because he pities you. If you attack me again, Ill make you a eunuch. Intoxicated, the Left Hand contemplates whether to have another fight with me or not. I shove Left Hands head and take another drink. A deep sigh grumbles from within me. I speak to Left Hand in a serious voice. I havent gone out with anyone yet, so dont say something ridiculous like that to me. The Left Hand frowns and asks. Really? I sweep my hair back and answer the one-day-maybe Pervert Demon. Our attitude toward life is different, you jerk. The drunken Left Hand lowers his head and bursts into laughter. Hahahahahaha. I murmur over my drink. Where is true love? Pervert Demon grabs his belly and guffaws louder. Hahahahaha. I feel like an idiot, so I laugh a little with the Left Hand and make a promise to myself. Things will be different in this life. . . . For sure. Chapter 92 Im watching a man who lost a duel using internal Qi, was slapped across the cheek, and shit his pants after getting spiked with laxatives, and hes smiling happily. Yet, why am I the one feeling unpleasant? Stop smiling. The Left Hand replies while smiling. I thought you were some big shot when my master praised you, but youre just a bumpkin dunce. All right, Ill stop smiling. Shithead, anyone can coax and deceive a person with a few words. Dating so many women isnt something you should be proud of. The Left Hand replies in a deadpan manner. Anyone can do it, but I dont think you can. The girl slaps you mid-conversation. After exchanging a few words, shell drag you by the hair and yell at you to get out. Am I right? . Right? Hahahahaha. This crazy bastard laughs as he hits the table. I smile a little, too. In retrospect, that is indeed how I lived in the past. No. A man with a bad memory, thats me. The Left Hand asks when I call the errand boy over and get up after paying for the drinks. Youre leaving already? Where are you going? To find true love? Where can you find it? Hey, why dont you just settle in Baekeungji? This place is full of beautiful women. There are many beautiful women here and the place where those famous Namgoong guys hang out. The errand boy, who is listening while calculating the tab, intervenes. True love, I hope you find it. The Left Hand bursts into laughter again. Bahahahaha. I speak to the Left Hand with a poker face. Ill come if I have something to ask the senior for my training. The Left Hand nods. Dont be obnoxious just because you won once in an internal Qi fight, but good luck in training. Oh, if the master wants to see you, where should he go? Ill be in the Black Rabbit Union, so find me there. Wait, you said youre the leader of the Low Down. I have destroyed, killed, and dominated all the Unorthodox Factions around me. I am the Black Rabbit Union Leader. Ah, really? He looks like he has something else to say, but I resume my steps since my business here is over. Behind me, the Left Hand bids me goodbye. Bye, bumpkin. Come back when you find true love. I nod. The path of a lonely man. My life is incomprehensible to the Pervert Demon. Suddenly, the Central Districts Most Beautiful, the Orthodox Factions Most Beautiful, and all kinds of the Most Beautiful of many regions pop into my mind. Female masters who were more known for their beauty and skills also came to mind, It doesnt mean much. It just comes to my mind suddenly. Come to think of it, I think I ridiculed or cursed at least half of them. But its okay. I wont mock them this time. At least not yet. My steps become a little lighter. On my way back, I purposely chose a mountain path, a hilly path, a secluded road, and a path that bandits often lurk in. I walk by defenselessly but dont encounter any of them. How unlucky. Even though I am on my way back from Baekeungji, I am young, and being dressed in white makes me look like a bachelor. I arrived safely at the Black Rabbit Union soon after. Nothing much happens in the Black Rabbit Union, either. After clearing up all the nearby Unorthodox Factions, the peaceful days continue. Fortunately, the atmosphere inside the Black Rabbit Union is not bad because So Gun-pyeong is controlling the situation and Cha Sung-tae is training like a madman. I Mostly just practice my Qi Circulation under the plum blossom tree. I need to accumulate more Fighting Chicken power to use the Thunderous Sword or Plum Blossom Sword Styles. Of course, I could force it out if I tried very hard. However, it is only meaningful to show off a skill while having strength remaining to spare. Furthermore, the darksteel I sent to Dragon Head Smithy has not returned in a finished state. So I amass more Qi while waiting for the sword. I watch the fluttering plum blossoms while I accumulate Qi. It is an expected visitor who breaks this repetitive cycle. Manager Byuk reports. Leader, a man who identifies himself as the leader of the Nanming Society, has arrived. I have brought him to the outer courtyard. He brought quite a number of subordinates, but he came inside alone. I open my eyes and answer. Bring him to the main hall. He came earlier than I expected. I dont think hes here because of a conflict with the Spright Clan. Perhaps hes here to discuss things with me before someone threatens to send assassins. Of course, Nam Ga-rak, leader of the Nanming Society, will never know who hired the assassins. He would only realize it at the moment of his death. There is a high possibility that the issue Nam Ga-rak will bring forward is to discuss who hired the Spright Clan. Is it the Bajian Society or the South Horizon Sect? I arrive in the main hall first, while Nam Ga-rak enters shortly after, guided by Manager Byuk. How did I talk to him? Nam Ga-rak speaks first while I struggle to remember. Leader, Im here. Good to see you. It is annoying to act respectfully if it isnt at least someone like the Sword Demon. Nam Ga-rak expresses his thoughts as he passes through the outer and inner courtyards. Your men are training hard. Theyre sloppy, so they should at least do that to survive. I see Nam Ga-raks calm expression and ask him. Did something happen? I received word that the South Horizon Sect and the Bajian Society might go to war. Unsurprisingly, we fought often due to our territories overlapping. But? We have incurred quite a few casualties this time. At first, there were 30-40 people in Okyang, but as the fight dragged on, they both sent reinforcements, and things got out of hand. Both the South Horizon Sect Leader and the Bajian Society Leader appeared and dueled. Who won? It was a dreadful battle between them. If one of the leaders died, it wouldve concluded as a victory, but it wasnt. The territory they fought at was neutral territory, so they went back. It is somewhat obvious what happened next. I heard the leader of South Horizon Sect almost went crazy. He contacted all the nearby Unorthodox Factions, even those not in his sphere of influence. He suddenly ordered them to barge into the Bajian Society. They were threatened with extermination if they refused. Nam Ga-rak points at himself. He reached out to me, too. I nod once. I see. Nam Ga-rak continues. However, the Bajian Society reached out to me the day after. Similar demands. In other words, all nearby Unorthodox Factions are forced to choose sides like me. What do you think about this, Leader Nam? Of course, I intend to reject both. I ask Nam Ga-rak with my chin propped on my hand. I dont know the specifics about the South Horizon Sect and Bajian Society. I created the Low-Down Sect to protect the lives of the working class. I can see that they are both Unorthodox Factions. Still, wouldnt you know better who is worse? Nam Ga-rak then explains. The Bajian Society is an organization developed by forcibly merging merchant groups. Theyre filthy rich. The merchants had no choice but to sign up due to their dictatorship. How did the Bajian Society dictate them? For example, if a certain commodity price in a region is two silver, these guys will send the merchants to break the supply balance with one common silver and negotiate. They make a lot of money. Hence they are pressured with money. If it doesnt work, the Bajian Society sends their men, and if that doesnt work either, they hire assassins. Following Nam Ga-raks words, I think there is a high possibility that the Spright Clans supporters are the Bajian Society. What about the South Horizon Sect? South Horizon Sect is an Unorthodox Faction sect, as the word suggests. All the Unorthodox Factions in the Namcheon area were forcibly combined by the South Horizon Sect Leaders apostle. He joined during his late teens and created the South Horizon Sect. Hes a well-known man in Namcheon and also a man Bajian Society cant buy out. I think the South Horizon Sect is better judging by their nature. Nam Ga-rak replies with a troubled face. Thats true, but this apostle is the king of Namcheon. If you introduce yourself as the leader of the Low Down Sect, hell make you kneel. Thats why I dont intend to go under either of them. I reply with my arms crossed. I am the king wherever I go. There cant be two kings. Haha, youre a man whos no different from the apostle. I have yet to decide when the main gate opens, and So Gun-pyeong gives me a report. Leader, the Bajian Society is outside. The Bajian Society? Now that I think about it, Im also the Black Rabbit Union Leader. However, it is interesting that the Bajian Society is now here. They are definitely determined to destroy each other. The Bajian Society is so rich that they are buying troops and hiring contract killers. I look at Nam Ga-raks expression and then say to So Gun-pyeong. Tell him to come in. Nam Ga-rak snorts. Coming all the way here, how ridiculous. As I am reminded of the Left Hand, I then say. Ive been in a bad mood lately. He is here at a bad time. The main gate swings open, and a messenger-like man from the Bajian Society walks in and looks at Nam Ga-rak. Who is the Black Rabbit Union Leader? The man, probably in his mid-twenties, walks over as he speaks and sits across from Nam Ga-rak. I look at him and reply. I am. The young man nods and gestures with his chin. Tell your subordinate to get out. I look at Nam Ga-rak and reply to the Bajian Society messenger. Hes not one of my men. Tell me why youre here. Really? Let me introduce myself first. Im from the Bajian Society. Oi. . I cut off the messenger and continued. I dont care who you are. Tell me what you want. The Bajian Society warrior stares at me while twisting his hair with his fingers. Black Rabbit Union Leader, youre audacious. Im from the Bajian Society. Oh, yeah? I forgot. When I look at Nam Ga-rak with a smirk, Nam Ga-rak laughs in response. The Bajian Society messenger then reveals his purpose of visit with a stern face. Three silvers per warrior from the Black Rabbit Union. Daily. If the leader comes in person, thatll be 10 gold. Even if you dont do anything, Ill calculate it according to the day you joined the battle. If Dae Na-chal comes in person, I will give you a special rate of 50 golds every day. When all the people gather, we plan to destroy the South Horizon Sect in one go. If you refuse, youll have to deal with the wrath of the Bajian Society Leader. What will you choose? Nam Ga-rak bursts out laughing and tells me. I was told my subordinates will be paid 5 silver per person. As expected, my subordinates rate is still higher than the Black Rabbit Union. I laugh at Nam Ga-raks words. Ah, I didnt expect to be ignored like this. How embarrassing. He doesnt even know Dae Na-chal is dead, so thats possible. The messenger from the Baijian Society then speaks with displeasure. Ah, you must be the head of this Unorthodox Faction. These are not my words. Im just delivering words to various Unorthodox Factions according to my orders. And you say that Dae Na-chal is dead? Nam Ga-rak ignores the messenger and asks me. What should we do? What do you think, Leader Nam? Nam Ga-rak expresses his opinion. To be honest, I just want the Bajian Society Leader and South Horizon Sect Leader to compete individually to settle their own scores. I dont get why theyre risking their men. Nor do I understand why theyre threatening the nearby factions. To be honest, theyre both morons. I dont want to go under either of them. I nod. I see. Your words make sense. You should do so if youre a man. The messenger of the Baijian Society then rises from his seat. Thats your answer? Fine. Ill see you when Im done. I yell out. Chief So! The main hall door bursts open, and So Gun-pyeong replies. Yes, did you call me? As Son Gun-pyeong answers my call and blocks the door out of the main hall, the Baijian Societys messenger is forced to stop in his steps. I point to the messenger with my chin. Hes the messenger of Bajian Society, who will soon fight us. Lets have a go in the inner courtyard. Tell the subordinates to gather and watch. Ill have to see the skills of a lowlife from the Baijian Society. The Bajian Society messenger then glares at me. Are you out of your mind? I speak to Nam Ga-rak while ignoring the messengers question. Leader Nam, tell your subordinates to come in. The Nanming Society should bear witness. I dont like the South Horizon Sect or the Bajian Society. Lets gauge the opponents skills and fight. Nam Ga-rak grins and responds. All right, lets do it. I then stand up and say. Get ready for the duel, you rude messenger. I slap the messenger, who is trying to hurry out of the hall. He seems to have wanted to say something but ends up rolling on the floor with a loud bang. I then tell the messenger, who is holding his cheek in his hand. Are you deaf? Arent you getting up? Ive been in a bad mood lately, but an inferior faction Ive never even heard of is getting on my nerves. The messenger, who stands up with an angry look, tries to bluff once again. Can you handle it? I suppress my anger because Im not the type to kill a messenger. However, I can hit him. I slap him on the cheek again, making him roll on the floor three to four times. Just prepare for the duel, messenger. Otherwise, youll die from being slapped.. I head out of the main hall first alongside Nam Ga-rak. Chapter 93 So Gun-pyeong stares at the messenger of the Bajian Society and then speaks as if asking for permission. Leader? What? Hes not worthy. Too sloppy? Yes. All right, you can go. While eyeing my subordinates from the Black Rabbit Union and the men from the Nanming Society on the platform, I make eye contact with Cha Sung-tae. Cha Sung-tae, fight him. Your opponent is a damn messenger from the Bajian Society. Cha Sung-tae mutters in reply. Understood. Cha Sung-tae walks out to the center and cracks his neck. The messenger of the Bajian Society glares at me. Is this how youre going to treat a mere messenger? Was I rude? Please understand, Im just here to deliver a message. I stare at the messenger and speak blandly. Then I shall fight with you in honor of the Bajian Society. The messenger turns around and draws his sword against Cha Sung-tae. Lets do this. When Cha Sung-tae pulls out his sword, the messenger speaks as if he is trying to give him information. Lets compete without getting hurt. Cha Sung-tae replies. Shut up, you idiot! Theres no such thing. I nod. Indeed. Contrary to his confident scream, Cha Sung-tae is clearly nervous. It is inevitable since its his first match against a warrior from another faction. Nam Ga-rak asks from beside me. Whats his rank in the faction? Rock bottom. Ah, really? Veins pop up on Cha Sung-taes forehead upon hearing my words, and soon the two face off in earnest. Nam Ga-rak watches the fight for a few moments and tilts his head. Hes good, though? From my perspective, Cha Sung-tae has improved a lot. Theres no real reason behind it. In Ilyang, Cha Sung-tae was the second-best fighter after the Cho brothers with their sloppy skills. Now, he has actual experience and an Orthodox Factions steady Sword Technique. Furthermore, he is also amassing internal Qi. Above all, I think Hoyeon Cheong has done well in teaching him. After exchanging 20 or more attacks while wielding their swords fiercely, they both extend their left hands toward each others opening as if they have planned it beforehand. With a pop, Cha Sung-tae, exchanging internal Qi for the first time, staggers and takes a step back. The messenger of the Bajian Society stumbles for some reason and falls flat on his butt. Advancing quickly at that moment, Cha Sung-tae holds his sword on the messengers neck. The messenger looks nervously at the sword attached to his neck. Cha Sung-tae then asks me. Shall I continue? Leave it. Cha Sung-tae grins after retrieving his sword with a proud expression. The Bajian Society isnt such a big deal, huh. I correct Cha Sung-taes misconception. No, that guy is not a big deal. Dont be mistaken. I didnt arrange this duel to create this delusion. Everyone saw it, right? This is the skill of a messenger. The Bajian Society tried to make the Black Rabbit Union out to be a mercenary force, but as you can see, we refused. Messenger of the Bajian Society, get out. If you act arrogant again next time, it wont end with just two slaps. The messenger then says. Thank you for saving me. Ill see you again. As soon as the messenger finishes, he touches his ear in a hurry. Blood is dripping down his ears. The messenger scurries out of the courtyard while hitting his left ear several times as if he can no longer hear. Cha Sung-tae tilts his head and asks. Blood Was my palm force that strong? I ignore Cha Sung-taes blabbering and say. Officials, lets have a talk. As I take a seat at the top, the group of officials from the Nanming Society and the Black Rabbit Union settles in their respective seats. Cha Sung-tae, seated as a manager, asks again from the end row. Hes bleeding, though? Is it because of my palm force? Nam Ga-rak answers him as he can no longer stand the questions. He got slapped by the Leader before the fight. His eardrums must have exploded. Cha Sung-tae mutters in disappointment. Ah, I see. The atmosphere has settled slightly. I briefly summarize the messengers words to the officials. The Bajian Society is at war with the South Horizon Sect. If we join, we will be given 3 silver per person daily. The Bajian Society thinks your lives are only worth 3 silver. The faces of the Black Rabbit Union members turn murderous. Preposterous! Those morons Even the quiet So Gun-pyeong is swearing. This is how its done now that theyre earned some money with blackmail, trashy bastards. This time, I decided to correct what So Gun-pyeong just said. Take back the last word. Were trashy too. Yes, Leader. I scan the officials and their faces. But were different. We are trash the size of leaves fallen from a plum blossom tree, and those fellows are trash like the smell of shit after consuming laxatives. . The atmosphere becomes awkward after my absurd metaphor. Was it too much? Cha Seong-tae tries to sweet-talk me. No, it was a fitting metaphor. Shut up. That was too much. Yes. I introduce Nam Ga-rak to my officials. This is Sect Leader Nam Ga-rak of the Nanming Society. He received the same threats from the Bajian Society and the South Horizon Sect, but he rejected them. Regardless of my skills, I acknowledge a brave man, which applies to Leader Nam. No matter who were fighting this time, note that the Nanming Society and the Black Rabbit Union are joining hands. The officials of the Black Rabbit Union answer in unison. Understood. This time, Nam Ga-rak addresses the officials of the Black Rabbit Union. The truth is, I was defeated by your leader the other day. If hed humiliated me then, I wouldnt be here. Even if we combine our forces, we are no match for the South Horizon Sect or the Bajian Society, but I promise that the Nanming Society, including me, will not fight with our heads down. The officials of the Black Rabbit Union bow slightly to Nam Ga-rak. Well be in your care. This time I slightly corrected what Nam Ga-rak said. I have more men. If we come together and I stand at the forefront, we can turn either of them into ashes. Ive been holding back because that means casualties will appear. Lets discuss our strategies for now. To achieve the greatest victory with minimal damage. Hoyeon Cheong, who is listening, then says. Leader, I can gather some troops, too. I make eye contact with Hoyeon Cheong for the first time in a long time and address him using his other nickname. Master Hoyeon, you have done well teaching Cha Sung-tae. Hoyeon Cheongs eyes grow wide. Thank you. Thanks to you, he wasnt humiliated. But you dont have to gather troops. You have a knack for teaching, so feel free to come and go freely in the Black Rabbit Union and guide my men. It is no different than freeing Hoyeon Cheong. He also understands what my words mean and replies with a flushed face. Thank you, Leader. I look around at my officials. If you have any good ideas, lets hear them. Lets start with Black Rabbit Unions brain and great general, Manager Byuk. Manager Byuk immediately says. Overall, this is a period where both sides are gathering troops. But they dont know what the other side is up to. In fact, if we were to join one side, our forces are just as large as their certainty of gaining victory. Thats right. So wouldnt it be better to let both sides know this now? Specifically, how? We will join under the names of the Low-Down Sect, Black Hurricane Castle, Black Rabbit Union, Twelve Heavenly Generals, General Geum-haes merchants, and even the Nanming Society if Leader Nam agrees. If we all participate, one of us is bound to win. They wont get to act as arrogant as they did today. Strategist So Gun-pyeong also expresses his opinion. Manager Byuk is right, but why dont we conceal our powers and aim for the fish in troubled waters? We continue to watch as the two sides face off. When the dreadful war is ending, we then sweep in. They were the ones who provoked first anyway. So Gun-pyeongs plan is a little more realistic and ruthless. Manager Byuk, who likes to paint, is somewhat amicable, and So Gun-pyeong, who survived by wielding a sword, has smelled the heartlessness of the battlefield. I ask Nam Ga-rak. What about Leader Nam? Nam Ga-rak, who recalls So Gun-pyeongs face and name, replies. I like Chief Sos idea. If there arent any opinions, the Leader can decide. I nod and reveal my reasons first. Our main enemy is the Bajian Society. Lets not focus on the South Horizon Sect for now. So Gun-pyeong asks. Is there a reason? From what Ive heard, South Horizon Sect sounds like an innately Unorthodox Faction built from one sword. If the leaders were asked to decide, they were likely to agree. On the other hand, the rich Bajian Society will hire killers for assassination. A more cowardly type. As I look at Nam Ga-rak, he nods in agreement. I reply to Nam Ga-raks words in my mind. Youre still a baby, bastard. Hearing what the messenger said, I am convinced the one who hired his killers in my past life was the Bajian Society. Anyway. Yes. Ignore the South Horizon Sect for now and write a letter to the Bajian Society. Manager Byuk replies. Okay, sir. Tell me the crucial points, and Ill organize it. The Black Rabbit Union, Mister Sus scums, Twelve Heavenly Generals, Gold Mountain Guild, Ilyang, and the Black Hurricane Castle all belong to the Low Down Sect. And the unprotected merchants, business owners, food sellers, and farmers belong to the Low Down Sect. If the Bajian Society is ever caught coercing, kidnapping, threatening, murdering, and assaulting them, it is war with the Low Down Sect. Write this down and send it to them. Nam Ga-rak intervenes. Leader, you left out the Nanming Society. I nod my head as my eyes meet Nam Ga-raks. Add the Nanming Society. Manager Byuk replies. I got it. Ill organize it and send the letter out. Not just the Bajian Society, Send it to the nearby Orthodox Factions, Unorthodox Faction, martial art academies, bandits, pirates, merchants, banks, assassin organizations, brothels, guest inns, restaurants, caves, and temples. Make hundreds of copies, stick them in your room, send them out to various factions, and give them out to families, single families, and the streets. If they mess with the working class, Ill come forward, whether its slapping them, kicking their butt, or killing them. Do you all understand? Yes, Union Leader. Yes, Sect Leader. I was in a bad mood for a few days, and now I am declaring war in the name of the Low Down Sect Leader. Tell all those who hold grudges, who wish to fight with me, and think Im a joke, to find Lee Zaha of the Low Down Sect. Perhaps he thinks that it is too far off, Manager Byuk replies with a smile. Wouldnt you be too busy, Leader? Ill sort it out first. I reply while looking at Manager Byuk. It seems no one is aware that Dae Na-chal is dead. Add in that I killed him. This news should be widespread. Why do we Should I put it in? Then, add that I killed Mister Su, Elder Hornless Dragon, smashed the Black Hurricane Castle Leaders head because I dislike him, and the man who committed fraud gambling named Bang Dong-yeon was also burned and killed by me. As the contents of the announcement grow bigger and bigger, Manager Byuk keeps his silence. Manager Byuk, write it all down. Okay? Yes, I understand. And Sung-tae. Yes, Leader. Go to Ilyang now and bring Deuk-soo over with a carriage. On your way back, stop by the market with Deuk-soo and buy plenty of ingredients of pork ribs, various meat, vegetables, and lots of alcohol. Make sure to pay it all in cash. Go with 10 of the Black Rabbit Union men. We will treat our Nanming Society brothers to delicious food with the help of the chef of the Low Down Sect. Manager Byuk, ensure you pass on a generous amount of money to Cha Sung-tae. Yes, I will. I look at Nam Ga-rak. You came all the way here. We should at least have a meal together. Nam Ga-rak grins. Of course. As I think about calling Deuk-soo over and serving the Nanming Society delicious food, my anger calms down a little. Now, is there anything else I forgot? Anything else to discuss? Did I leave out anyone on my hit list? No? At this time, outside the main hall becomes noisy, and someone kicks open the main hall door and appears. Three men I am seeing for the first time push off the Black Rabbit Union subordinates and let out a demand while looking at me in my upper seat. The South Horizon Sect is here. Where is your leader? Everyone in the main hall turns their heads together and glances nervously at me. . Bewildered, I look at these scum from the South Horizon Sect. A cold silence fills the hall for a moment. Feeling like something is going on, the messengers avert their gazes and observe the tense atmosphere. So Gun-pyeong stands up, swears, and insults the South Horizon Sects messengers. Kneel, you assholes. Where do you think you are! At the same time, the Black Rabbit Union officials grab the South Horizon Sects messengers, knock them down, and assault them recklessly, swinging their fists and feet. There was no time for me to intervene. Hm. While the three messengers sprawled on the floor are stomped on by the officials feet, even Manager Byuk stands up and yells. He then joins in the stomping, even with his bad joints. You scoundrels, scoundrels, bastards, assholes Beaten up to a pulp, the messengers fall to their knees. Manager Byuk looks at me. Leader, as expected, we should publicize the letter as you said. That way, the opponent will also be polite. I nod. Hm, all right, lets do that. I hadnt been able to eat pork ribs in a long time, and already I almost rushed into the South Horizon Sect, but my anger quickly subsided due to my subordinates proper response. I spot the messengers sporting looks of being treated unfairly and order my men. Keep stepping on them. Yes! My men answer my demands loudly. Chapter 94 The feast that uses a whole pig is being held in the Black Rabbit Union under the orders of the Low Down Sects leader. After the orders are given for the doors of the Black Rabbit Union to be opened, tables and mats are spread in the main hall, inner garden, and outer garden alongside some liquor tables. Deuk-soos wife, alongside the unions servants, carries the food around. Whoever they are going to attack, whether it be the Baijian Society or the South Horizon Sect, they dont seem to care. For now, it is time to eat and drink. First, I have one cup with General Byuk, then one with his wife, and then one more with Hoyeon Cheong, who is having a lot of trouble while teaching. I also break into the kitchen to feed Deuk-soo, who is cooking an entire pig, while grabbing the people, running away, and forcing them to take a sip of alcohol. After a while, 12 men who had been sent here by someone also arrive to drink together with their martial brothers. I quickly exceed my own alcohol limit. As I walk around with a red face, I meet the eyes of a stranger in the corner of the hall. Uh? Three men, covered in blood, seem surprised to see me. ! I ask the three of them calmly. Who are you? Did you get hit? The hall becomes silent for a moment. Those bloody faces turn towards me. We are from the South Horizon Sect. Uh, is that so? I guess I forgot because I am drunk. Gu-pyeong, one drink! Oh! So Gun-pyeong quickly runs away. As I move inside, it is yet another place filled with alcohol. Manager Byuk is in the middle of explaining what had happened to our 12 martial brothers. I also sneak a peek and move next to them to listen in. The South Horizon Sect members look pissed off as the managers stories continue to spread. I nod alongside the words coming out of Manager Byuks mouth. Right. The words of the manager are right. One of the men smiles and looks at me. Big Brother. You seem to be having too much today. You should drink too. Yes. I hand over the alcohol to Manager Byuk and pull the sword from his waist. Brother, let me borrow your sword. Yes. With the sword in my hand, I walk over to the plum tree and circle around it. I then stop and show my subordinates a roughly improved sword movement. Please take good care of our sect. I am the leader of the Low Down Sect. As I politely give them a bow, my subordinates are slowly swaying from the drinks theyve consumed. We greet the leader. Since they are all also drunk, they answer my greeting. Sect leader, please take good care of us. As I reach out to shake on the deal, one of the drunks gives me his hand for support, and this place suddenly feels so large for once. Looking around in my drunkenness, I say. Our brothers of the Low Down Sect, I am Lee Zaha. I introduce myself while still holding the sword. I was born in the Ilyang province, and since I was a little boy, I have been cleaning the table for the guests in Zaha Inn. But one day, the inn was burned down. Our Low Down Sect started when the inn caught on fire. Did the flame within my heart move? Now, somewhere in my heart is a flame, and the flame continues to dwell there. I am normally a bad-tempered man who prefers to be low-key, a person who goes through this and that. Because I am such a person and weak, I stand in front of the Low Down Sect like this. I continue to speak while holding my sword. All those who do not touch the weak without reason are my brothers. It doesnt matter if you are the Orthodox Faction or the Unorthodox Faction, Demonic Sect or the Beggars Union, a merchant or a fisherman. All of you are my brothers. The ordinary people who havent been trained in martial arts are weak, the weak, the pretty-hearted, the faces, the little children, the monks, the drunkards, the servers, the courtesans, the shamans, and the nuns. Other than that, if there are those who bother the fathers, mothers, uncles, sisters, or brothers struggling to make their living through various jobs, it doesnt matter where they are from. I will deal with them. I smile as I look down at the Low Down Sect in our shared drunkenness. The alcohol is taking over my mind. My skills are lacking compared to those who are the strongest in the world. Yesterday, I cultivated and did so the day before and in the past. I train my body with my brothers in the Black Rabbit Union, and recently I met a senior in Gangho and got good advice about swords. I am a man who grows stronger each day, the Low Down Sect leader, and I will show my brothers the sword technique I have been practicing lately. I hit the plum tree, making its blossoms fall. I swing my sword while moving around the plum blossoms in a drunken state. It is a messy dance, but it doesnt matter. My sword continues to move. A few of the plum blossoms are cut with my sword movement and then cut again into four pieces. The fragmented plum blossoms are scattered all over the place as I mix my slashes and stabs. It is a sword dance with no meaning. However, after staring at the fluttering petals for a moment, I infused the Fiery Fowl Scent into my sword. Wheik! I watch the red yang qi condense onto the sword and instantly add a little bit of sword Qi into it. The sword Qi of the infernal flame is split into several pieces, like the plum blossoms, and scatters into the air. It is a sword technique that I interpreted in my own mind, the Plum Blossom Sword Style. I smile as I look at this. The Plum Blossom Sword scatters into the night wind as it burns all of the plum blossoms floating in the air. They then turn to dust and disappear. I think it is fortunate that I infuse slightly less qi into it. The subordinates who witness my skills applaud together. After my brief introduction and sword dance, I pull my sword back and look around at everyone. All of my brothers and subordinates also get up from our drinking party and look at me. I throw my sword to one of them and go over to Cha Sung-tae. I then show him my empty glass, which he promptly pours more alcohol into. I saw what you did, leader. I grab his shoulder while I drink. Our member of the Low Down Sect. Yes. No dying. If one wants to survive, they have to train hard. Cha Sung-tae nods his head with a serious expression. I then proceed to have a staring contest with him as we drink. This time too, I am drunk. Manager Byuk then approaches me. Leader, are you fine? You seem to have drunk a lot. I wave my hand, urging him to go back as I go and sit under the plum tree. I then close my eyes for a moment. I channel the alcohol qi in my body to one side and the tip of my finger. This special technique is used to dissolve poison in the body. After a few moments, the drunkenness from alcohol slowly changes as drops of liquid fall from the tip of my finger. Its a technique to detoxify my body. I quickly relieve myself of my drunkenness and look at my subordinates in a sober state. They all look at me blankly as I drive my drunkenness away. I then tell them. I am not drunk anymore, so you can drink in peace. I will stand guard for tonight. While the rest of my subordinates hesitate, sister Hong answers me. I understand, Big Brother. I move into the main hall with my back to them and then glance over the still-kneeling messengers from the South Horizon Sect. Why did you come? Did you have something to tell me? One of them replies. We have come to the Black Rabbit Union to demand participation under the orders of the South Horizon Sect leader. Is there a reason or cause for me to participate in that war? The three of them are unable to respond until one of them says. We didnt have the chance to ask our leader about that. I look at the three of them and say. I see. But do I look like a weaker man than your leader to just act on his words? We do not know since we are not skilled enough to know it. Then is your leader in the top ten masters of the Unorthodox sects? No. Then the three of you go and relay this back to that arrogant man. Yes. If such rude behavior is displayed one more time, I will directly have to come over. And your leader will end up having a hard time again. Get up. The three stand up as they support each other. There is no place on their bodies that are safe from wounds. I push the three and clasp their shoulders. Now, go from the Black Rabbit Union. I will not be guiding you out. The people are all busy today with drinking. It is fine. Shut up. I lead the three of them to the halls front door as if they are all drunkards. The three messengers, who are terrified of me, immediately bid me a proper goodbye. Leader, we will take our leave. Thank you for giving us your time. We will pass it on to our leader. One of the three messengers, who overheard the conversation in the party hall, then asks me. Ah, leader. I am sorry, I apologize. Do I have to call you as leader of the Black Rabbit Union or the Low Down Sect? I am the Low Down Sect leader. I understand. I look at the three of them and motion them to come closer. Come here. Let me make it clear to you. If you go ahead and report what happened here, there is a high chance you will end up stabbed. The messengers nod as they respond. We listen to you. When you came to the Black Rabbit Union, their leader was already dead. It is true. I killed him. An unidentified warrior appeared and defeated and killed the man in an overwhelming manner alongside all the other men who knew this organization well. I beat the Black Rabbit Union warriors with sticks, killed them with axes, stressed them out, and then burned them. That is me. The Low Down Sect leader, Lee Zaha, you didnt know that, right? Yes. The Low Down Sect is also rumored to have a high number of troops because their leader only kills captains and leaders, but not subordinates. Do you hear that? Yes. I did. We heard it all. Sure you did. If you are thoughtful, how should you treat me after hearing this? One of them answers me. This should have been a matter of a courtesy visit. I nod. Right. But then you have been rude to me since you appeared here. That is why you got trampled by my men. We apologize. If you want to live, mix in what I just said and report it to your leader. You couldnt even eat the pork and got trampled by my men. Yes, then we will head back. The three of them take a few steps before turning around and saying. We have ears on what is happening outside. We will pass it on. I wave my hand. I say a lot when I am drunk. You dont need to take everything seriously. Yes But I am being sincere. You know what I mean, right? Two of them look at me with shock on their faces, while the last one just smiles. I understand. Then, leader, we will return now. Go back safely. I send them off and close the door as I turn around. Quite a few people are already making their way through the pork dish. I ask the men who are eating. How does it taste? And an expected answer comes from them. Leader! It is so delicious. I look at him. It isnt something you can eat anywhere else. Suck it to the bone. Hahaha! That is what I am doing. I look around again and say. Who didnt get to eat the pork? Raise your hand. Hands rise all over the hall, and I look around at them. Ah, so you havent had it yet. Put your hands down. My men lower their hands with a smile. As the drinking begins to slow, I begin to feel hungry and jump away to the hall. Moving past the infirmary in an instant, I open the nearby kitchen door. Where is my pork bone? The people inside reply. It was placed at your seat. As I go to the top of the table, I find the pork bone dish served to me in a small bowl. I rub my hands, sit down, and proceed to grab the pork belly first. Lets eat. All the subordinates and everyone around me respond with a bright smile. Lets have a good meal! I take a big bite of the thick meat around the bone and then summarize the sensation. . . . Today, I have successfully consumed the pork belly bone roast. Chapter 95 Two people are facing each other in a pavilion at a sparsely populated location. The man wearing black sitting on the right side places gold coins on the table. He slowly builds a tower by placing coins on top of one another. As his tower reaches the height of ten coins, he says. This time, the leader of the Bajian Society will be quite angry. The ordinary-looking man who is facing him responds. Lets hear it first. That mans name is Lee Zaha. He is said to be the leader of the Low Down Sect. Have you heard of him? Continue. That place was fixed up. It looks like he took over from the Black Rabbit Union and took the spot for himself. I also heard he has a lot of subordinates. Do you know of Dae Na-chal? I know. They are saying that this man, Lee Zaha, was the one who killed him. This Unorthodox master and his subordinates died. Anyway, remember that this young mans skills are great enough to kill such a warrior. What should I do to prove the kill? Bring me his head. No, I just want to confirm that the former leader was really killed. The man in black then looks at the man across from him. Does this Lee Zaha have a title? No. Then we should send someone to check his skills and give us details, right? That will cost more. The man in black nods and points to the ten gold coins on the table. how much more? I will do it for one hundred gold coins. Isnt that too expensive? He isnt even that well known in Kangho. It isnt expensive. If we fail, a hundred coins will be returned to the Baijian Society. The man in black responds with some surprise. It will be returned? Anyway, that would only happen if we fail. Instead, you can use us again. After considering the skills of any of our comrades who died on this mission, a more skilled one will be dispatched. You are free to leave the task to us or someone else. What will be the cost when the task needs to be repeated? Double the amount. The man in black opens his mouth again. Woah, that is expensive. 200 gold coins? It isnt expensive. If the second attempt fails, the 200 gold will be returned to you again. Ah, is that the way? But with 200 gold coins, wouldnt it be possible to kill even the best? It isnt like that. There will be many guarding this person day and night. As a man who would be wary of being attacked, the cost associated with the task will be higher. Of course, we also have to be careful of possible deadly retaliation against the Baijian Society in case of failure. The man in black nods. Fine, lets do it. A hundred gold for Lee Zaha. It has to be paid upfront. The man in black snaps his finger, signaling to his subordinate, who is waiting outside the pavilion, to come in with a box that is then placed on the table. As the man who serves as the negotiator for the contracted organization checks the gold coins, the man in black speaks to his subordinate. Describe clearly what he is like. Yes. The man in black instructs for something to be placed on the table. It is a painting roughly describing the appearance, clothing, and everything else about Lee Zaha. The man in black points his finger. This is him, the guy who pissed off our busy leader. Doesnt his face already look disgusting at first sight? I will keep it in mind and take the painting. What about the atmosphere around this man? You will have to see it in person. The man in black picks up the painting and stares at it. He then twirls his finger near his temple. I see some possible things, but this man looks crazy. The person who drew this put so much emphasis on his hair and eyes. Dont his eyes look like crazy eyes? then, we will get started and let you know the results. The man nods. Take care. Ah, by the way, I also contacted the leaders of our side since I dont know everything happening around us clearly. Your organization name, I am not sure what it is I am giving you money like this, but I need something in return. I need to report it back to our leaders. You dont expect me to keep this a secret, too, right? The River-Crossing Reed. Such a dignified name for an assassination and information-gathering group. I wish you well. We also have a very strong fortress here. A lot of money is being put As the man in black continues to speak, the man he commissioned stands up. Then we will contact you later. The man lightly bows his head and walks out of the pavilion with a box of gold. The man in black then mutters. Be careful. Once the man has moved quite a bit away, he turns to his subordinates and asks. What do you think? Do you think it can be done? Yes. Why so? They must not want to return the money, so they will do it. Ah, I see. The man smiles and nods. Then it is good. But they might be losing on purpose to double the amount too. But it will cost a lot more to bring up another skilled person in their group. The man in black gets up from his seat. True. Lets go. First, Lee Zaha will be dead anyway, so we dont have to worry about it. Yes. Two days after that meeting, a man pulling a cart passes by the front gates of the Black Rabbit Union. The morning after, a young man selling rice cakes passes by. In the afternoon, a group of people who claim to have lost their way also linger around. Rain falls on the same night. The next day, a man wearing plain clothes looks through the wide open gates of the Black Rabbit Union as he passes by. Since the fortress is usually filled with the loud shouts of men training, passersby inevitably glance over as they pass. In the evening, the main gates are closed. On the afternoon of the third day. The assassin, who has been watching all of this from a room in a building quite far away, puts down the jerky that he has been chewing and looks at the gate. A man presumed to be the Black Rabbit Union leader, Lee Zaha, is stretching in front of the door. Someone else then pokes out their head from inside and asks. Where are you going? Walk. Shall we go together? I dont want to. As he listens to their conversation, the assassin writes down Lee Zahas characteristics. -Good at refusing. -Has a knife at his waist. -Young. -Face which looks like it lacks sleep. -Bloodshot eyes. -Handsome. -Expected to have a bad personality. After confirming the direction that his target disappeared to, the assassin places the paper on the table and exits the building. After a few moments, he slowly begins to walk in the direction that Lee Zaha had walked to. He passes the market road and waves away the smoke from the dumpling shop with his hand. This Lee Zaha is in front of him with a large dumpling in his mouth. The assassin walks down the path calmly. He can hear Lee Zahas words from his position behind the man. Uh, oh, so delicious. The young owner of the dumpling restaurant looks at him and asks. Leader, shall I pack more for you? Lee Zaha gulps down his dumpling and replies. Why? I am going to have it alone. Ah. I see. As the assassin continues walking down the road, he hears Lee Zahas absurd ramblings. I always eat alone, I eat dumplings by myself, I sing by myself. I actually can see that. Yes. The assassin walks past four to five other street vendors before entering a fairly quiet inn and sitting outside. He then suddenly thinks. is he insane? The inns errand boy comes to him and asks. What can I get you? The assassin asks the boy. Do you have any jerky? Yes. Beer? We have Dukuang and Wuling alcohol. Wuling alcohol then. Please wait. In the olden days, assassins would have needed to wait inside bathroom septic tanks or dig a hole in the ground to hide in. Things arent like that anymore. The most important thing now is to naturally blend into the surroundings. When the time is right, an assassin would eat, drink and dance while monitoring their target and assassinating them at the most appropriate time. The errand boy brings the beef jerky and the Wuling alcohol before speaking to a passing man. Leader, where are you going? A walk. A walk? Inspection, spying, wandering, prowling, sightseeing, and searching. Wow, you are doing several things at once. As expected of our leader. That is me. The assassin knows that the voice belongs to Lee Zaha, but he doesnt turn around to look. The server asks Lee Zaha another question. Leader, arent you having alcohol? How about having a cup before going? I stopped drinking. Dont lie. The assassin looks at the errand boy with surprise. That is an unexpected tone of voice, considering who the boy is talking to. Is he insane too? As the assassin pours himself another glass of alcohol with a calm expression, the conversation between the two continues. Uh, it has to be what happened a few days ago. I had a huge drinking party with my subordinates, and I almost died. Why? Everyone was drunk and passed out, fainted, and puked. It was a mess. Leader too? Everyone except for me. I had been on the watch all night. Wow, is it okay for the morality of Kangho to be messed around like this? Does it make sense for the leader to stand guard over his own sect? Those were my words exactly. But didnt you declare war? Ive heard about it too. What did it mean to bring in such a large amount of alcohol then? Which is why I dont want it now. Ah have a good walk then! Good work! Yes. If you see anything strange, report it. If I do that, will I be able to enter the Black Rabbit Union? Do it right first. Yes. After hearing no more words, the assassin drinks another glass of alcohol and turns his head to look at Lee Zahas moving back. The errand boy approaches him with a strange look and asks. Are you seeing our leader for the first time? Ah, he is the leader of the Black Rabbit Union? I heard he wears a mask? That is the dead former leader. I see. The assassin then says to the errand boy. Dont look at me like that, and go back to work. Yes. Ah, customer, I have one question for you. What is it? If the South Horizon Sect and Bajian Society fight, who will come out as the winner? I have been hearing a lot of stuff. Lately, I am curious. What are people saying? Well, there are opinions that both have similar power. Dont they have rich sword techniques and lots of battle experience? In terms of power, isnt it known that the South Horizon Sect leader is stronger? So people are saying that the South Horizon Sect will win. The errand boy naturally pulls out a chair and sits across the smiling assassin. Everyone is so interested in the matters of others. Isnt it obvious what one talks about when drinking? One more glass? Um. Unable to resist the temptation, the assassin nods as the errand boy pouts another glass. Thank you. What do you think? Who will win? Wait. I will take a sip and then say. The errand boy also takes a sip and wipes his mouth on his sleeve before saying anything else. Firstly I can think of the end despite whoever wins or loses. Why? We heard the rumors that the leader of the Bajian Society, who had just passed away, wouldnt leave anything attended. Why do you think so? The quality of their sword technique is known to be bad. They have a lot of money, so they buy people. Fucking trash. . Assassinations are happening everywhere. On the other hand, it seems like the leader of the South Horizon Sect is a veteran of Kangho and holds to the principle of one on one fights. So that is why our leader said that the Baijian Society would fall. Do you know? The Unorthodox Factions around here were taken over by our leader. Have you heard about that? I didnt know. Uh, do I have to tell you this too? This is the story. Still, the Black Rabbit Union is a small group. The Baijian Society is a place where several factions are united together. I wonder if the two can even be considered equal opponents? Ah, is the Baijian Society that big? I didnt know. The assassin, who wants to give more of an answer, becomes silent and looks ahead as Lee Zaha seems to be returning from his walk. The errand boy notices the assassins gaze and turns his face. Leader, is the walk already done? Yeah. I see. Give me some booze. The dumplings are stuck in my throat. I underestimated the dumplings. I shouldnt do that again. I understand. As the errand boy heads inside, the assassin cant help but stare at Lee Zaha, who is standing still in front of him. Luckily, the errand boy comes out again as the assassin couldnt find a good way to speak in this situation. Leader, will you have it here? Ah, I was talking with this person about South Horizon Sect. Would you join us? Is that so? Ah, yes. It is good for everyone to know. The server says this as he places the bottle on the table without asking the assassin. Now, now sit down. Is the customer fine with this? The assassin can only sigh, which prompts Lee Zaha to say. Cheer up. Yes. You go in. Ah? I-I understand. After seeing Lee Zahas expression, the errand boy quickly heads back inside. The assassin raises his gaze and looks at Lee Zaha, who is sitting across from him. The assassin, who is becoming worried, tries to speak. Join me. I heard from the errand boy that you are the leader of the Black Rabbit Union? The assassin watches warily as Lee Zaha smiles. Why are you smiling? Where are you from? I am from Seokpyeong. I came here to meet some acquaintances No, no, no. Who sent you? The assassin looks at Lee Zaha and becomes silent. The target, who he is drinking with, pulls the knife from his waist and stabs it through the table. Chapter 96 The assassin glances at the dagger that is stabbed through the table. Just how Before he can even think of anything to say, Lee Zaha speaks first. Is it the Bajian Society or the Spright Clan? Dont say that its neither. I know itll be dog shit. I knew from the moment you looked into the building. The assassin now sees Lee Zaha in a different light. The way he had stretched out his body near the gate, eating a dumpling with his mouth open, the look he gave him when talking with the errand boy, and the look he gave him as the errand boy went inside. He thought this was just Lee Zahas everyday life, but it wasnt. Everything that he seemed to have done coincidentally is so natural that it appears to have blurred into an everyday life routine. Didnt he only realize what Lee Zaha was doing after seeing the dagger on the table? In other words, even by the standards of their organization, this target is much more skillful than he is. The assassin then asks him a question. Is the Low Down Sect an assassins organization? Then came the reply. You shouldnt look at the world with such a narrow view. I am getting annoyed as I look at this guy I might kill soon. I dont mind killing him, but knowing that this wont be the end of it is annoying. I have to eliminate either the Baijian Society or completely root out the Spright Clan, so people like this dont come after me. The assassin then asks. Narrow view? When a young man speaks so vulgarly to the leader of the house, it is normal to walk away. It is normal to look pathetic when a grown man appears with a dumpling in his mouth. When someone sings a strange song, most people would think to at least look back. A person who does not respond to any of these three things is clearly not ordinary. Its evidence of training, good quality too. The assassins face then changes. You didnt recognize me to be an assassin. In the first place, I just thought and saw different things from you. Do you understand what I mean? I smile at his words. Killing you isnt too much of a thing for me, but what happens next is. It is because I need to kill, kill and kill again till the end until the leader shows up. But I wont back down. It is the responsibility of a leader to bear the burden of this task. I look at the man as I drink from my glass. If the conversation continues like this, I am sure Ill end up killing him. If a conversation doesnt work either, Ill kill him too. But a thousand thoughts run through my mind as I look at this assassin who came here to kill me. In the olden days, the word assassin, or hitman, was considered similar to that of a slayer. It was recognized as a skill. Is that so? But the world changed a lot because you people began to kill for the sake of money. The warriors and you bastards began to deviate far from each other as if standing on opposite ends of the world. Once upon a time, you were allies. However, it is now a world where assassins kill and are killed. What do you think? No thoughts? The Low Down Sect isnt just a simple sect. What I do, as the leader of this place, is something that used to be done when warriors and assassins stood on the same ground. To some extent, I am also living like you. I pretend to slash open my head with my thumb. I am also good at killing. We are of the same foundations. We What I am trying to say is, what do I do if I kill the leader of an assassin group? That would be the best move since I dont want people like you coming here. Still have no thoughts now? I take another sip. The assassin clearly cant drink as he is nervous. It seems like my words dont make sense to him. I sigh as I judge whether or not this guy or I am faster. Of course, I am faster. Ugh, you ordinary grunts are orphans. If you werent an orphan, would you go around killing people and making more orphans? Once you get a family, your emotions change. They interfere with training, after all. Thats why your groups operate using orphans. It is, so people like you dont have the emotions to understand my words. How unfortunate. I point my finger at myself. It is the right move for me to kill you. But you didnt die because of me, but because of your ancestors who created your group. You should understand that and die. That is the life of an assassin. The life of an assassin is to die while obeying orders? Yes. There is no need to live like that. Im already covered in blood. Who else can I blame? Such a crappy life. What I want to know is the main base of your organization. If you cannot speak, then draw your sword. Because of you, my walking time is getting longer. The assassins eye glances at the dagger on the table again. As those eyes move back to me, I pull out a black cat from under the table. I do what I do. Swish! As the dagger cuts the table, it is clearly infused with qi. As the black cat bares its teeth, the situation feels like it has changed. A solid red line is engraved on the assassins body that couldnt even react fast enough to draw a weapon. The body then becomes engulfed in flames as it burns without a sound. Puak! The assassin stands up in shock, but the legs that no longer have strength fall back as the upper body that had been cut falls down. The sound of a body split in two fills the air with a thud. I brush the blood away from the blade of the dagger and put down the black cat. There is more shock than pain on the assassins face. In times like this, it is a mercy to kill without pain. Rather than being angry at the dead, ill feelings towards the assassin organization well up in me. As anger surges through me like a river, the errand boy runs to me with a shocked expression. Leader? Uh? He was an assassin? Yes. I see the errand boy approach the corpse and say. Dont touch it. He may have poison in his clothes or mouth. Even a corpse shouldnt be touched so carelessly. Yes! I will send men to clean it up right away, so leave it like this for a bit. I then handed him some coins. Drinks and tables. Why are you giving me this much? An advance. Something like this will continue to happen often. For the time being, Ill be coming by on my walks often.. It is more comfortable to wander around in broad daylight instead of waiting to be ambushed to death in my sleep. Ah, yes. Thank you. But how did you know? I just thought he was a bit strange because he didnt seem to be from around here. I tell him with a shocked expression. Errand boy, you didnt realize it despite looking at him? I didnt know. I point to the assassin. That face itself says that he is an assassin. Where? Is it written? He even has a narrow forehead. You need to know that before you try to enter the Black Rabbit Union. An ugly person, a sloppy person, a person who doesnt even know the basics of being a server. Are you suddenly going to turn on me? That is what I do. The errand boy picks up the dagger that fell down and holds it to me. Leader, your dagger. I see it. You put the dagger on the table and finished him with a knife! Since you had placed the dagger there, it was some kind of psychological warfare, right? It was just out of habit. Uh? As I head back to the Black Rabbit Union, the errand boy asks. Leader, when will the men come? Will he be able to recognize this guys face too? Sure. If someone comes who doesnt seem to know, then tell me. Hell be someone who neglected his training, so I will scold him. I understand. The errand boy looks around the sharp-eyed men of the Black Rabbit Union and speaks. Excuse me. What? Just looking at this person, does he give off an assassin vibe? He looks normal to me. The person who receives the question looks at the errand boy as if he is a pathetic being. You didnt realize it after seeing it? You didnt? uh? Cant you tell with one look? Ack, so pathetic. No, when did you even see me to know I didnt recognize it? Im pathetic? The man suddenly speaks with a serious expression. Youre not part of the Low Down Sect? Me? Arent you being paid? Yes. Then you are in the Low Down Sect. I-I understand. The man points to himself with his thumb. It is me. What? I am Low Down Sects general, the main man, the man who laid the foundation for the sect from the early days with our leader. I am called Cha Sung-tae. The errand boy nods without looking too shocked. Oh my, nice to meet you. So can the general tell a warrior or assassin from just a look at their face? Cha Sung-tae nods in response. That is me. The server boy then thinks. This scammer is trying to imitate our leader when did he become an important person? Cha Sung-tae then says. Why are you looking at me like that? You got something to say? Ah, no. Sorry. Because youre saying the same thing the leader said, its hard for me to listen to it seriously. This bastard Cha Sung-tae, who is about to retort, stops as other sect members burst into laughter. Cha Sung-tae doesnt like this but decides to speak to the other men as he looks at the corpse on the plank. My brothers, let us go to a secluded place and set it on fire. Yes. Cha Sung-tae then looks at the errand boy and asks. What is your name? It is Jang Sam. Its likely similar people would come here to check out what happened. Let them know what you saw at once. You mean report? No, just inform them. Do not do anything dangerous. You can recognize those with a similar atmosphere to this dead guy, right? How do we recognize them? The mans eyes, did you see them? Yes. Their eyes feel like they are sunken in and have no emotions. Oh that is true. That means he is an assassin. Jang Sam nods and then looks at Cha Sung-tae with respectful eyes. You really are a general, then. Do come by and have a drink with me. Cha Sung-tae then heads off somewhere with his men. Where will they do it? Jang Sam looks at Cha Sung-taes figure and crosses his arms. That bastard might be smart or foolish and amazing. However, he is still mimicking our leader, that ignorant stinky bastard. Jang Sam sits outside the inn for the second day while he looks at the people crossing by him on the street. You are an assassin, right? Not you. You live with dazzling eyes Jang Sam then involuntarily makes eye contact with a man, and his stomach suddenly churns. Many thoughts run through his mind instantly as he becomes unable to think. Any further moves, and he will die. He is a real assassin. While wiping the table, he bows his head as the man who made eye contact with him approaches. Let me ask you something. Yes, sure. Jang Sam looks at the man and clasps his hand together politely. The man, who has a long thin sword around his waist, asks as he looks at the table and the ground. The one who died here yesterday. Yes. Died with a single hit? Yes. As soon as he makes eye contact again, he bows his head. He learns today what it means to be normal-looking but scary. He recognizes it once more with that thought and realizes he could die. Where did he sit? Jang Sam holds out his head. Not there. Yes. Sit over there. The man, whose appearance screams assassin, sits down at the newly arranged table and speaks to Jang Sam. Bring me some of the drinks the dead man had yesterday. Yes. At this time, someone approaches and whispers into the ears of the man who has just ordered alcohol. Captain, you cannot do this. Go away. As Jang Sam places snacks and alcohol on the table, the assassin looks at him and says. Errand boy. Yes. Dont run. Stay calm. If you dont want to die, take that seat over there. Jang Sam has to simply sit where the assassin is pointing. The assassin then stares at the path that Lee Zaha always takes on his walks. Jang Sam suddenly realizes that many people he has never seen before are on the street. A man pulling a cart. A young man selling rice cakes. Some kind of generic thug. All of these unfamiliar faces have something in common. Their eyes. In addition, many strange ones are also walking around. He becomes filled with suspicion and certainty. He is no longer sure he can get out alive. As Jang Sam looks around, the assassin gives him an early smile. Yah, errand boy. Yes. Do you want death right away? I am sorry. An errand boy should act like an errand boy. Dont try to act up. Yes. Jang Sam realizes that what happened yesterday was just a prelude. Even the dead man didnt realize he would become a victim of this place. It is both scary and curious. As he raises his head, he realizes what Kangho really is. This is insane. In the meantime, the assassin who has come here openly says. Leader, this side. Ah, did you wait for long? We just arrived. Jang Sam lifts his head again. His leader, who often walks alone while eating dumplings, sits across the table without fear. Jang Sam. Get me the usual. I understand. After a few moments, he returns with the drink and places it on the table. I think a lot of jerks are around today. Its such a mess. They dont seem to have any info on you. This must have been their plan from the start. I have more subordinates. When is an assassination mission ever stopped? Even my death would bother me. Jang Sam, you head inside. Jang San then stands tall at those words. Ah, yes. As he goes inside, he feels an ominous feeling. As he turns around, he sees that the assassin has grabbed a pair of chopsticks and thrown them. However, the chopsticks flying through the air suddenly change directions and fall to the ground. Puak! Jang Sam looks at this in a daze and falls on his butt. The assassin had tried to kill using chopsticks and is now reaching towards the leader. How the hell is this happening? In an instant, the leader responds with something. Kwaaang! Jang Sam raises his chest and looks at the leader and the assassin. The assassin is pushed into three or four tables and pulls out his sword. But the leader is just leisurely drinking his alcohol. Jang Sam sees all of this and finds it impressive. This is Kangho. Chapter 97 As I drink the alcohol, I contemplate whether or not I should finish off the other bottle or strike first. The assassin draws his sword right in front of me and is bleeding from his mouth. I then increase the tension by adding my internal qi to the wooden stick. The assassins outstretched sword is trembling. This guy isnt someone so skillful that he could assassinate anyone. Perhaps because my current reputation is less widespread, it feels like the assassins they sent are low-level ones. Compared to the others Ive faced, they are pretty lacking. The assassin then grabs his sword using his left hand. Quick sword? The only expression on his face is just tension. ! Sweat drips down his face as he infuses qi into the sword he is holding. If this continues, both of our weapons will just flare with qi. I notice that the onlookers are beginning to look worried. Everyone, dont move. I pressure the other assassins to not move by releasing my internal qi and turning to look at the opponent in front. If the internal qi of both people is similar, then retreat is an option open to both parties. Before he loses his arm, he adds a threat. You, move forward if you want to be turned into ashes. The sword in his hand is already red. The hand holding it seems to have difficulty handling the fire qi. I turn my head to the left and make eye contact with one of the assassins. What kind of weapon does an assassin in disguise even have? I think this one probably throws the load he is carrying on his shoulder. Then, the load will likely explode and launch its metal parts at me. As if I willed it, he does precisely that. Did this tense confrontation that is happening in front of him force him to rush? Just as easily as combining flame and wood, I stop the attack and immediately pull the metallic particles to me using the Great Absorption Technique. Swish! Surprised, this assassin reaches out to the man in front of me. No! Papapak! However, the reality is that the assassination needles are already lodged into my first opponent. Many needles are lodged in his body, face, neck, shoulders, and stomach. The qi that the assassin gathered in his sword is dispersed instantly, and his body is immediately engulfed by the flame qi. The body that didnt understand what had happened fell to the ground in flames. Thud I look at the man who is in the attire of a cargo carrier. Why did you kill your own colleague? As I continue to drink, I ask out into the crowd. So, Gun-pyeong, how far away did you stop? To which So Gun-pyeong answers me back from the crowd. We have a perimeter around here at approximately 15 meters away. We will continue to spread out as much as possible to kill any who try to run away. Can you pick them out from the crowd? We can find them first. Wait Yes. Ah! I need to kill this cargo carrier first! Hong Shin, who is in the crowd of passersby, immediately uses the assassination needle. Swish! As the man notices this and tries to avoid it, one of my Unorthodox Faction members attacks them from behind. Swish! Kuak! Chongjin and Baekyu also immediately go towards the head and the shoulder. After I see the cargo carrier go down, I call for Jang Sam, who is still inside the inn. Jang Sam. Yes, leader. As soon as he comes out, he moves closer to me. As I look around at the crowd of onlookers, I ask him. Can you find them? The ones that do not fit. You practiced, right? Yes. Nice. Show me the ones that look suspicious to you. Jang Sam immediately points his hand. That rice cake seller. The rice cake seller is acting awkward. The rice cake seller, who got pointed out, immediately begins to run. I lift my head a little and watch his run. Faster, run faster! I think he has to get very lucky to get out of here. Just as I think that someone pierces his throat with a knife, and he falls to the ground. Puak! I click my tongue Oh my, you didnt get that far. Nam Garak, who killed the rice cake seller with a single attack, kicks the corpse and throws it in front of the guest house. Puak! The bodies begin to pile up. I wave to those who are watching. It seems like the assassins are looking down on me. Obviously, I said I have more subordinates than your organization. Jang Sam, another one. Jang Sam tries to point out someone else with his finger but withdraws his hand. Its because this particular assassins reaction looks quick. Jang Sam then says. Man by the cart. Actually, his position is right next to where the rice cake seller had been. Nam Yeon-pyung and my other brothers are already enclosing the area to ensure no one escapes. Puak! Puak! Puak! This time, Nam Yeon-pyung is the one who kicks the corpse and throws it in front of the inn. Puak! The corpse rolls and comes to a halt as I look at Nam Yeon-pyung for a long moment with a smile. That guy just scratches his cheek a little in response. Jang Sam. You did well. Any more? Every time Jang Sam turns his head to look around, everyone in the crowd seems scared. Jang Sam then candidly says. Other than that, I dont know. I ask Nam Garak, who is still in the crowd. Elder Nam, what do you think? Maybe there are more? Then lets thin the crowd out. Sure. We need to be patient if we want to catch the bugs. True. Those who know Jang Sam here, have come to work, or live around here, come up one by one. Is there anyone from this neighborhood that Jang Sam wouldnt know? Oddly enough, everyone turns to look at me. The people slowly begin to come closer one at a time and speak to Jang Sam to show that they are who they say they are. They sigh in relief when Jang Sam agrees. The number of innocent people left is dwindling. Jang Sam waves to the people coming up to confirm their identity. Hurry in quick. Yes. One glass mister. You, too, come in. Hurry up. Next, next. Come on in. What are this great order and controlled atmosphere? I laugh while seeing Jang Sam seize the moment to act slightly arrogantly. I know that having an errand boy on my side is a considerable advantage. Its because they know all their customers and have to deal with various things while looking out at the streets all day. As more people receive Jang Sams guarantee, the exposed bugs can only blink. I am not the only one looking for the assassins. My subordinates, too, are still waiting for the crowd of people to thin out. When only five people are left, a frightened man kneels on the floor and says. Its not me! I dont even know martial arts! I then speak to the man. All of you come over to my side. Do not worry; I will not kill you. Surprisingly, except for the one on his knees, the other four utilize footwork skills and run in four different directions. I pull out some chopsticks and throw them at the back of the head of the first escapee. Swish! Puak! I get up from my chair and look to my left and right. There is no need to give additional orders audibly. One runs to the second floor of a building before Nam Yeon-pyung catches him from behind. The others go after the other runners as Nam Garak approaches the kneeling person. He holds out his hand and says. Give me your hand. Nam Garak checks the man for any traces of internal qi. Leader, this guy really has no qi? I look at the kneeling man and say. Send him here. Nam Garak kicks the man on the butt. Go. Jang Sam takes a chair and sets it across from me. I then say to the approaching man. Sit here. The mans expression clearly shows he is terrified. I then say to him, Put everything on you on the table. Uh? At the same time, one of my martial brothers comes dragging one of the runners to the front of the inn and kicks him. I ask with a bit of worry. Did you touch the body? The guy raises his hand and says. Big Brother, I am wearing protective covers. Good job. Nam Yeon-pyung then drops the other corpse from the roof. The chase is finally done as the corpses are dragged to the inn. All that is left is the man in front of me. you are dead. You are the only one left. If you say nothing, death is next. I havent even learned martial arts. Is it alright to kill people in this manner? If you work with an assassins group and act as you please, death would inevitably come. Why are you so upset? Did you think I would spare you? After a bit, the other members arrive and sit in the inn. Cha Sung-tae, who appears late, gives me gloves for my hands. So Gun-pyeong asks me as he sits down/ Should we kill? I nod in response. I dont think hes part of their group. Then? Hes probably a subcontractor for a contractor? I dont know for sure. Baek-in looks at me and asks. The Bajian Society? I dont know. I look at Jang Sam, who is still watching. Jang Sam. Yes. Face that side for a bit. Once Jang Sam turns his head, I kill the man in front of me with a single twist. As the sound of the mans neck bones being broken is clearly heard, Jang Sam inevitably flinches. Jang Sam takes a deep breath before turning his head. Phew I then look at my subordinates and say. Lets hold a meeting here. Yes. Jang Sam, bring us anything, but in moderation. You did well. Yes, leader. The members are waiting on my words, so I put my thoughts together for a few moments before telling them the plan. If we stay here, the people who work here will continue to get exhausted. Looking at what happened yesterday and today, the goal wasnt just me alone. It isnt a bad thing for me to be targeted. The base for this assassins organization wouldnt be easy to find. They should be a decent organization. Brother Baek-in. Yes, Big Brother. Isnt the Bajian Society connected to the merchant union? There are several merchant unions connected to it, yes. In that case, summon Brother Geumhae and ask him to investigate the merchants related to the Baijian Society. I think that should make it easier for us to find this assassins organization. Do the merchants know of this? No, but they might know of it. Merchants are known to fear death a lot. Even if that isnt the case, if the Baijian Society begins to crumble, then any merchant union attached to them would look for a clean way out. We cannot kill them, so tell Geumhae to intervene and take advantage of the situation. At that point, Brother Baekin would need to use his head right. He will gain the most since financial gain is forbidden. War with merchants is forbidden for us, so you know how to act. I will distribute the money from profits made there to those who had been harmed this time, so tell them to calculate and work properly. The biggest beneficiary will be the Geumsan Merchants, after all. Baek-in nods. I understand. I can also be wrong. I leave this matter to my younger brothers. Yes. I then look at Nam Garak. Elder Nam, lets take down the Bajian Society. Do we have a way? He is questioning what kind of strategy to use for this fight. Since we are fighting our own wars, it doesnt matter if the South Horizon Sect participated or not. Lets head in with a small number but then retreat right after burning down the main base. Nam Garak is shocked at this suggestion. Why? Why? Why do we burn it down? I will make it uncomfortable for them to sleep and cause some property damage. And that is the end? No. The South Horizon Sect will be stimulated by this attack. We can think further when it happens. We have to make them both fight and fall back. I set up a broad plan as a way to incite the two forces to fight. We move with our best men in small numbers to burn the place down before running, maybe even killing a few of them. Let them know that the two of them can fight. We should also let the South Horizon Sect know what the Baijian Society did. While moving, we can also steal clothes and wear masks for extended periods. Do you get what I mean? We are going to make both sides fight. Nam Garaks expression becomes unusually bright, probably because he thinks he would not need to sacrifice his subordinates. Ah I like it. I look at Nam Garak and smile. Elder Nam. Yes. Let us have a fun time. There is no need to be all serious about these bastards. Nam Garak couldnt give me an answer right away. There are times when Kangho is serious and times when it isnt. The point is It just has to be harassment for the other parties. Until I faint from pain or go crazy. I know better than anyone the fun in this. Deep in my heart, the group called the Baijian Society has disappeared. My mind is instead filled with other thoughts. We will find out later who is worse. Chapter 98 A man in black. Is a person wearing black clothes. The meaning is simple and straightforward. However, the men in black in Kangho are also known to be mysterious. Theyre not fools or morons but strong in martial arts? However, if their mask is taken off, their strength drops. The point of their outfit is to keep their identity mysterious. Probably no one else in Kangho has studied the nature of the men in black as much as I. I am an expert in it. First, their basic form is to cross their arms. The places they use to move are on walls, roofs, and above main gates. The timing of their appearance is also important. Usually, walking and crossing their arms after hiding in the dark is normal, but it is also good for them to make a quiet kill. Huuhuhu. I smile like this is something comfortable for me. The important thing is to not be too cruel. The amount of cruelty is somewhere between hahaha and Hahahaha, and the second one isnt too recommended as it comes out as a perverted laugh. The men in black I know of are heavy like darkness and mysterious too. However, their limitations become so clear if you look deeper into the concept. Actually, from my past experience going against the best of Kangho, most men in black are outright morons. Because a strong warrior chooses to reveal themselves. In other words, using your mouth when fighting and showing off your power honestly gives people a clear idea of what kind of person you are. Men in black, however, can be either good or bad. However, when I, who have superior skills than actual men in black, pretend to be one of them, the reason is this. To gather attention. It sounds unlikely, but Kangho has a name for such people. Attention Seekers. This is a word that actually exists. The type of person who enjoys attention and does things to gather it deliberately. If this term is added to my name. Attention Seeker, Lee Zaha. That is me! After some consideration, I settle for a place not far from the Baijian Society, and while waiting for the moon to rise, I transform into a man in black. As I take out the black robes prepared by the Black Rabbit Union servants, I can feel the spirit of their work. Since when does a man in black appear this way? Looking at the black robe, I become confident that I can do much worse things compared to the bad things I usually do. As I stand here with my arms crossed under the shining moonlight, I easily become confused about whether I am a crazy man or someone mysterious that can shake the foundations of power. I take off the clothes I have on and put on the black clothing. The top, shoes, and even the waistband are appropriately tightened. Finally, I put on the long black robe that emphasizes that I will not be an easy opponent and raise the collar to my neck. I wonder if there has ever been such a perfect man in black? If I can walk in a bright place, people can see me and enjoy the sight. I can even raid a town or a village in this attire with just a little light and get better, effective results. Am I really going to go to a village? Thats just talk. I place my precious dagger and other things into the pockets of this robe that perfectly fits me and tie a sheathed blade around my waist. The goal is the base of the Bajian Society. From now on, I have to wear these black clothes and walk brightly. With my eyes cold and chest out proudly. I sit cross-legged and meditate as I wait for Nam Garak to come. To become immersed in meditation is to clear the mind from clutter. I calmly explore my memories as I think about life and why beautiful women hate me. Everything runs through my mind. The pork meat, the alcohol, those bastards, those bugs, and the trash I need to catch. Confusion. Is there anyone who becomes confused while meditating? Well, I do. After concentrating for a moment, I manage to calm my mind and chase the distractions. I then fall asleep for a moment. Sleep . . . Knock. Come in. I am slightly surprised when I see another man in black walk through the door. Ah, Nam Garak. Leader, you must be tired. As if. I check his attire and hold back a yawn. Perfect. The preparations you made are amazing. Nam Garak smiles with his arms crossed as he enjoys my compliment on his attire. Huhuhu, the Black Rabbit Union is pretty good too. Since we are part of the Black Rabbit Union, we are always prepared. Lets cover our faces and head out. We then move. Nam Garak has prepared a classic black hood that covers his head. I put on a triangular black mask that covers everything from my eyes to my chin and is secured by tying it to the back of my head. This way, it wouldnt interfere with my vision and will keep people from remembering the shape of my face. On the other hand, Nam Garaks hood lets not talk about it. Nam Garak looks like a black egg right now. I turn to look at him. Surprising ! Nam Garak then asks me. Is there one more? If you have it, please lend it to me, After thinking about it for a moment, I take another mask out of the bag. Such a meticulous person. Nam Garak removes his hood, throws it to the side, and puts on the mask I give him. You are lucky, Lets go. How? From the window or over the roof? I shake my head. Well take the stairs. Wont more people be looking at us? I snort and say. Enjoy it, endure. This is the life of a person who is below me. Um. Anyway, if we look around with our eyes wide open in a place owned by the Baijian Society, everyone will think that we are men in black from there. They have those types of men anyway, right? True. We take the stairs, pay for a room, and then ask the owner to throw away clothes left in the room. The owner looks a bit frightened and assures us that there will be no traces of us left in that room. As we walk outside, I say to Nam Garak. See that? There is a benefit to wearing these kinds of things out in the open. People think were strong. And it is the strength of a strong man to shake until their hair roots when they see a man dressed in black. Dont joke around with that serious tone. I get confused. As soon as we take a step outside, I look up at the moon in the night sky. Yah, the moonlight is Nam Garak explains while admiring it. So bright. Good for us. I know. Such a perfect day. The air is dry too. If it was raining, then our plan would have failed. Thankfully the night is helping us. We must be lucky. Alongside Nam Garak, I deliberately enter the busy side of town and walk slowly. People who see us inevitably give way and make us a path. Such a majestic sight. I also deliberately crack my knuckles. The defense will be tight anyway. Yes. Look here, its nice for a man in black to make a fire, but its better to not make the fire by yourself. What nonsense are you saying? It means we should naturally make a fire. Take a good look around and carefully in the alleys. It is better to take advantage of a bustling area when escaping. After all, Nam Garak is also one of the best, so I wont have to look after him. Not many here will be able to compete with Nam Garak when it comes to speed. After a while, we move into the darkness to a spot where the Baijian Society base is visible. How dare they send assassins to me. This is how the people of the Baijian Society act? Right. Let me crush them. It is a luxurious mansion that looks like a merchants house. The main building has three floors and a visible black roof. Above the large main gate is a plate that indicates that this is the Kang Family Manor. Their head is of the Kang family? Yes. Seeing the Kang Family Clan name, it is clear that the Baijian Society belongs to the Unorthodox side. It has an atmosphere of someone who made a lot of money by committing evil tasks by themselves or using their underlings. I then look at the house structure. Lets move freely. Instead, I will make a plan to destroy the main building. Your blood seems to be heating up. We couldnt bring many of our subordinates here because not many of them can break through here in the first place. The virtue of a man in black is to not only offend other people but to also avoid getting caught. I will go first. I start moving with my arms crossed, but they start feeling numb, so I release them. As soon as I feel myself becoming calm, I run, roast into the air, and smash into the nameplate first. Kwang! I can hear Nam Garaks shocked voice. No I smash the plate on top of the main gate using qi and then smash the gate, too, for good measure. Kwang! Kwang! Nam Garak raises his voice and speaks to me in a hurry. If this is the plan, why are we wearing black? Clothes help with craziness. I am me. Ha I look through the smashed gate and think that a man in black would never act like me. If you are a man, you enter through the front gate! In an instant, the men of the Baijian Society begin to appear, and even their dogs start barking. I become angry at the dogs barking and scream back for a moment. Stop the fucking dogs from barking in the middle of the night! You dogs! Nam Garak makes a strange little laugh and runs away. I then soar to the roof and make my own way. In the meantime, I look at the moon again. Wow the moonlight. I feel like the moon might make me lose concentration, so I pull out my black blade and soar into the air. I raise my sword at the moon but put it back in its sheath since there is nothing to cut. The roof I use as my path continues to go higher. After I constantly step and jump, I reach the tallest roof in the mansion. There, I look down at the whole palace with my arms crossed. It is no joke, and my heart is bursting in my chest. Huhuhu, huhu, huhahahahah! With my hands open, I declare war on them. Come on. As I expected, they are surprised by this attack and are rushing toward me by stepping on the walls and roofs. How could they even tell the difference between friend and foe when they are dressed the same way as me. I only pay attention to Nam Garak. Suddenly, I look down at the roof as I become upset at being unable to sleep for the past few days. My anger grows as I think about many things, especially the leader of this place who could eat and sleep comfortably. I wrap the Fiery Fragrance around my hands and move towards the men rushing towards me. Wheik! I launch the fiercely burning flame from my hand to the building. Originally, you would use this flame with both hands, but I am now a man in black. I place the flame in one hand and then spread it like a black flame dragon onto the roof. Kwang! Chapter 99 I stand on the edge and peer into the smashed roof. Since the man is wealthy, I can see a spacious space below. Not a house. This is a palace. He definitely has a lot of money, which is why he sent assassins to me and also spent money everywhere to recruit people to fight the South Horizon Sect. I respect merchants who make legitimate money from their businesses, even if they arent strong warriors. However, the Baijian Society and forces like them are different. They definitely obtained their money by sucking people dry and taking countless lives. I couldnt think of any other possibility when I saw this large house. A sword suddenly comes up from beneath my feet. Kwak! I move to the roofs edge to avoid the sword qi, and someone completely smashes the roof with the sword. As soon as the roof begins to collapse, I unfold my footwork into the air, making them unable to approach me. I stand there on the edge to look at their level. At the same time, a red-robed swordsman soars high into the air, lands on the roofs edge, and looks at me. Are you some kind of guard? He looks like a man in his early 30s. Even while standing still, his eyebrows look tilted up, which means hes the kind of person who enjoys intimidating others. However, he seems a bit young to lead men in the Baijian Society. The enemy asks. Who sent you? Its funny since I asked that same question to the assassin. However, people rarely answer such questions correctly. At the same time, a fire flares up near the center of the manor. Nam Garak runs rampant while setting fire to everything with the gunpowder he had prepared. The flame is difficult to put out and continues to burn. I stare at the enemy with a sneer. Usually, when your house catches fire, you will panic, but the enemys expression doesnt change. It is as if he has a lot of money, and burning down one house doesnt matter. Below us, the warriors of the manor reveal this mans identity. Head, are you alright? Surprisingly, this man here is the head of the house. He then responds to his subordinate. Make sure to get this one alive. I will torture him to know who sent him. Yes. His warriors begin to climb up to the broken roof as I mumble with an altered voice. Get me alive? With those skills? I look at the five or six swordsmen and then fly under the broken roof. After seeing the rest of the people coming up, I jumped up to the roof again. No matter where I go, my control over my footwork is excellent. All these idiots are jumping where I jump at the same time, and I just swing my sword toward the one who comes after me first. Their body is torn apart with the sound of my slash, and I immediately jump back into the manor. Now up on the roof This time there is a moment of silence. It must be because that person just died way too easily. Actually, if someone wanted to bring the fight to the South Horizon Sect, it is better to just set the place on fire and then run away. However, it is slightly disappointing since the leader of the Baijian Society didnt pop up. Judging from the structure of the place, it seems like the leader is in the deepest part of the complex. I think of leaving, but I want to see how his face looks, so I use my sword on the ground instead. Puak! The entire floor shakes, showing an entrance that goes further down. While holding my sword, I jump away from the other people on the roof and use the assassin needles. Tang! Even their younger members must have taken a lot of pills and elixirs, considering the money here. So the assassin needles I use are quite heavy. I move away with my eyes fixed on the ceiling before kicking the door with my legs and walking with my sword dragging along the wall. Since my sword can cause damage, the Baijian Societys residence becomes messed up as I pass. In the first place, my sword is hard to stop, and with fire qi infused, no one can touch it. On the other hand, the house is coming down as fast as paper. There is no reason to hesitate. I will smash the walls, cut them, and stab them whenever I want to. As I enter the hallway, I run into someone who suddenly appears and pulls out his sword to defend himself. As soon as he tries to adjust, I stab him in the stomach. Puak! I grab the dead man by the head and throw him down the stairs. As the corpse collides with the people coming up Pualk! I launch my qi at the bottom of the stairs, tearing apart the corpse with it. The people hit by it receive additional damage from the flying limbs. In an instant, both sides of the stairs and the bottom are stained with blood, which makes the scene gruesome. Walking down the stairs, I briefly encounter an enemy following me. He orders a subordinate forward while he stays in the back. The enemy, who looks relatively calm, gives an order in a calm voice. Stop him there. The enemy speaks as if he hears footsteps on the stairs while I continue to move. Did Situ Kang send you? I decided to stay silent, but honestly, I couldnt believe how they thought that Situ Kang would send people. At this time, I hear a heavy voice from further below. Move. A person appears from a place where many enemies are gathered. Head Cheon is dead? The enemy who is blocking me then answers. Alive. But his limbs must be cut off. I see. The one who had come from below has a spear reaching about shoulder height, with an additional blade that almost touches the ceiling. As soon as I see that, I raise my hands. I surrender. I cannot defeat a spear. With that declaration, I put down my sword and kicked it away. Puak! The sword, which flies with the infusion of fierce qi, stabs itself into the chest of the spear-wielding man. At the same time, I jump off the wall on either side of the stairs by using both hands for recoil. I then cling to the body of the collapsing man, pull out my sword from his chest, and then grab his spear with my left hand. At the same time, I swing my spear to make the enemy retreat. Those who try to approach are cut down by my sword, which is covered in sword qi. As soon as I land on the ground, my sword is back in its sheath, and the spear is now in my right hand. A scream warns of the spreading fire outside while another explosion fills the air. Amazing. Nam Garak He is a guy who can mess around with fire better than I can. Nam Garak must make it a habit to set buildings on fire and then run away. Well, he has to do it. I still remember the first day I held a long spear in my hand. I had been almost to death many times for not doing it right. I slash an approaching enemy with the spear before retreating and exiting the hallway. In a place where his men are being cut left and right, the enemy still looks calm. You dont seem like an assassin. Who are you? I look at the floor, and memories fill my mind. I see the shadow of someone walking, and then I hear a low-pitched voice. Head Cheon, did Situ Kang come? The enemy asks. No, just a few rats. Huh I throw the spear toward the origin of the voice with speed. Swish! As the enemy reflexively turns and avoids the spear, which rushes at him in a straight line, the spear is also halted in mid-air. It is hard to see, but there is a sudden silence. The warrior is holding the spear with his bare hands. I admire him. Pretty good. To catch a long spear that I had thrown with the power of the Wood Chicken so easily. Actually, if he is a leader in the Baijian Society, then doing something of this level is expected. However, I deliberately look shocked and then turn without regret. It is as if I am doing an art performance by expressing my emotions with my body. At the same time, those who are pursuing me fiercely follow me and soar into the air. After spinning the body once in the air, I draw my sword. Swish! Three to four men lose their lower bodies with a cry of pain as they jump toward me. I climb up a wall without difficulty and retreat without trying anything. Because fights always happen when one jumps into the air, the sound of the wind made by their movement gives them away. They can only pursue me if they are skilled, but these men are just following orders. I gradually increase my speed while running. After a while, Nam Garak appears out of the darkness as I catch up with him. The two of us confirm the missions success with our eyes, exit the light, and race through the darkness. The distance between us and those who are chasing after us gradually increases. Soon, the warriors of the Baijian Society are nowhere to be seen. I feel like it is too early for them to have given up chasing after us, so we decide to continue moving in the dark. Isnt that thing there, everything? Nam Garak sits on the root of a cut tree and answers my question with his mask still on. I have the Black Killing Troops, the Iron Strong Clan, the service group, and more. If all sides decided to gather and attack, then the battle between those two sides would be enormous. I looked at their weapons, and it felt like their army must have grown a bit. Did you burn a lot? I set fire to more than a dozen of places. They will have a hard time tonight. Should we join the team at the South Horizon Sect right away? Or shall we continue observing the Baijian Society from here? Before we came here, I had divided the troops and temporarily sent Nam Yeon-pung to the South Horizon Sect. I listen to the surroundings for a second and whisper. Put the mask on. Nam Garak hurriedly covers his face with the mask without knowing why. After escaping into the low mountains, we are resting in a wide open space. After a few moments, we hear a faint artificial sound from a distance away. I ask Nam Garak a question. It is strange. Is the Baijian Society stronger than we know? Nam Garak nods and replies. Probably it looks like it. It is weird to wait together, so lets split up. If I am late, head back to the place we stayed in. I put my finger to my lips to stop him from answering, and Nam Garak disappears into the darkness again. I looked toward where I had come from with a puzzled expression. The tree branches sway, and a middle-aged man I am seeing for the first time comes down from the air. He has a long beard. As he approaches me, he asks. Did you think you could run away? What is with that leisurely act? Is it because hes really skilled? Or because he has confidence that he is the strongest? Or is it because I look like a stupid man in black? As I am listening to the surroundings closely, it seems he caught up with us quickly as the surroundings are quiet. Despite a one-on-one duel, it feels strange that I am still more excited about the bright moon above. What kind of situation is this? A large fish I didnt expect to cross paths with has come to me on its own. Since it seems that hes not the type who will die quickly, I feel more satisfied. I get up with my arms crossed and speak in a serious tone to this warrior man. Come on already, you strong-looking baldy.. Chapter 100 I am really curious about this swordsman who comes to me without fear. Why are you alone? Betrayed someone, or did you suddenly change your decision? Could that happen? Baldy, you should be wary of me. This man, the leader of the Baijian Society, tilted his head. He is probably wondering why this man in black in front of him isnt speaking like one. With his expression of confusion, the man says. In Kangho, betrayal has no meaning. After all, the strong are the ones who own everything. I pull out my sword right away. Right. I heard those precious words. Drawing his own sword, the Baijian Society leader says. How much did you receive from the client? Why? The man continues to speak while looking down at me. Tell me. Thirty-nine thousand eight hundred, you bastard. Why? You people are so driven by money. I do not put emotion into business. I have more money than those that hired you. I will give you twice the amount that you requested. Kill the one who ordered you to kill me. I have no feelings for people like you. I suddenly think about why this man is moving so leisurely while waiting all this time. I want to speak too, but I decide to just swing my sword at him. It is better to tease his mouth with a fight. As soon as he deflects my sword with his spear, the Baijian Society Leader takes a stance, and I immediately mirror him. Suddenly, the sound of drums being hit is heard through the clearing, and he retreats with his spear up to six steps. The expression on his face is one of shock as I ask. Baldie, shocked? Maybe its because he got hit with the fire qi, but his bald head is clearly red. Its like meeting a red squid on two legs on this dark night. Fuck, I was surprised. His appearance is more uncomfortable for me to look at as the impression he gives gradually changes. He is changing into a man whose sweat is coming out, making his face shine in the moonlight. An evil person is evil. Their faces are different every time. The face gradually changes according to the thoughts one has. This guy is now deep in contemplation and slowly degenerates into an angry red squid. Sliced squid usually tastes good, but looking at this guy, it doesnt seem like he would. I follow through and swing my sword infused with wood qi to prevent his escape. Dont think about running away. Red squid, red octopus, red egg, red baldy. Somehow, my hands and feet are becoming slightly off today. It must be because I use a straight blade usually, but Im using a sword. The flow of my blade isnt going as smoothly as I want. On the other hand, his actions reveal that he is thinking of escaping as soon as we face each other. The man, whose face is becoming tense, swings his sword instantly. However, even though there is enough strength there to wound me, the level of his technique doesnt match his experience. If he has a lot of practical experience, he should fight better than he is now. However, I see his movements beckoning his subordinates to come and act for him. That means that this man doesnt do much directly on his own, a type of leader Ive seen plenty of times. If this type of person meets someone with better skills than them, they will fall into despair with thoughts of defeat. This man also makes the mistake of considering me to be below him. Since there is a chance that his minions are coming here, I continue to attack him quickly. I constantly attack him and deliberately aim for his wrist, arm, and sword while also using the Great Absorption Technique. It is effective in breaking the balance of his body and forces him to be defensive. I dont like what I am doing, but as I combine every movement I can to target him, my mood slowly improves. Whenever the Baijian Societys leaders face changes from moment to moment, I speak to him in a low voice. Late. It is no use begging. Do not expect the Baijian Society to help. They will be surprised to see your corpse and then go off to face the South Horizon Sect. The Baijian Society will end up being scattered, and the corpses of your servants will start to pile up. Your place will be torn apart. You are seafood, and I am a fisherman. Fisherman Benefits. I remember when I saw a fisherman catch two fish at one time, but I cant remember which two fish they were, so I just wrapped them up and shipped them off. Actually, Im not sure if they were frogs or fighting tortoises. Anyway, the important thing is that I am a fisherman. As soon as he notices that his hands and feet are beginning to tire, I cut lightly into his forearms with my sword. As soon as I see his blood gushing out, I use the Great Absorption Technique on the wounded area. The wound the size of a finger opens up as more blood gushes out. It is a technique where the qi is manipulated to make the wounds bleed excessively. Excessive Bleeding. As the blood drawn from the wound increases, my sword begins to ignite with flames. The drops of blood evaporate due to the heat. Swish. With a sound, the leader who was hit becomes startled and backs away. There are holes all over his clothing as the heated blood splashes back into him. Complete subjugation. Although I am now holding a sword that I am not used to It isnt too much of a problem if I am for the vital points of this shocked man. To do this, I unleash a sword technique that focuses mainly on stabbing. Clang! Clang! Even in his condition, the man still manages to accurately deflect away my stabs. He is a man capable of being in a position at the top of the Baijian Society, after all. However, I feel my stomach churn as I clash with this man who looks like a red squid. The squid is good at blocking. I suddenly have a thought. If I dont kill this guy here, this giant squid will significantly impact things in the future. I have a foreboding feeling that he will become a powerful being that will strike me down. Of course, this man didnt have anyone calling him a crazy man in his past life. I think he was probably killed pretty quickly by either the South Horizon Sect leader or someone else. At a close distance, I begin to use more fire qi on my sword to obscure the field of vision. The aim is to make him overstretch and lose his balance near his foot. His body, which is about to move back, loses balance and staggers as his feet kick the ground and soar into the air. Moving at the same time, I grab him by his right ankle and throw him to the ground. Kwaang! After that, I twisted and crushed his ankle, making the man desperately try to suppress a scream. I hit him four more times before I realize that I cant grab him by the hair since he is bald, and I decide to go for the throat instead. Kuak As soon as I realize that this person is the reason for my lack of sleep, I begin to strangle him. He fights hard to resist as his veins stand up all over his body, making him cough in pain. Why spend money on assassins? You bastard. I almost died. ! Go get some sleep. As I loosen my grip, he asks. Who are you? I take a look at him before whispering in his ear. The Low Down Sect leader. He goes stiff as if he suddenly became a corpse. Theres not much he could do with those smooth hands, either. I crush his resisting hands and begin to tap into his dantian. I drop my sword to the side and cover his screaming mouth. As soon as I detect that his internal energy is dirty, I stop trying to absorb his qi and resume striking him before noticing that hes stopped breathing. Well, this man isnt too different from other people that Ive beaten to death in my previous life, thoroughly unimpressive. As his cooling body falls to the ground, I stare into the darkness for a second. His troops, who have been waiting a while at a distance, begin moving now. Wow, these I didnt come here with my usual intent of fighting like a crazy person, so I tried to suppress my anger. I even speak to the dead man. Did you kill him knowing this? You didnt know? It wasnt until I killed the leader that I remembered the calm figure of Head Cheon. When I threw the spear, Head Cheon simply avoided it. Since the opponent didnt know my skills, they must have mistaken my presence after grabbing the spear. This is normal because of the situation we are in It isnt surprising that we are fighting each other; it is all too common to use the head to try and gain power. No matter how fast the leader can move, the fact that his subordinates didnt arrive until after his death means something is happening within the Baijian Society. Head Cheon, who looks like the man in charge, must have been the one who arranged this situation. It is possible that he is preparing his own plan. But what does it mean for him to hold onto the power in his sight? The Baijian Society is bound to fall once the South Horizon Sect enters the fray or might end up destroyed by my hands. There is nothing vainer than winning power through betrayal and conspiracy. I untie the sheath from the dead mans waist and then ready my arms in an open position. Im not sure if the situation is becoming better or not. The important thing is that Ive killed the leader, but it doesnt matter in the long term. Conflict in Kangho only ends when one is dead. I am here to drop it off. I placed the Baijian Societys leaders longsword on the table. Gong Doo-chan of the service order looks at it and asks. This where do I send it? This gift needs to be delivered to the South Horizon Sect in a hurry. Please give me the cost for that as soon as possible. Gong Doo-chan responds with a bewildered expression. Ah, excuse me, but whose sword is this? I brush my hair and respond with a disappointed expression. The baldys sword. I want to know who this baldy is. I look around the room and yawn. Im still suffering from a lack of sleep. I just came here to drop this off as a token. As I struggle to hold back my sleepiness, I speak to the man again. I said it right. It is the sword of the bald man. I need to know if it is stolen or not. It is because this is not a common long sword. Its not stolen loot. Its the sword of the Baijian Societys leader. I had confirmed the chilling stillness of his body and confirmed Nam Garaks expectations. These guys are like gum that sticks to the Baijian Society. When it gets known that they are being overtly attached to the Unorthodox Sects, the number of their possible targets will decrease. This is why they are pretending to be unrelated on the surface. I look at Gong Doo-chan and ask. Your face looks rather upset. What is this? He asks me with a dull expression. Is the man dead? Dead. Gong Doo-chan then says. It seems like you know we are siding with the Baijian Society, so what do you want? Sir, first of all, this is a normal request. Just deliver the sword to the person who I rejected already. Unless Situ Kang is an asshole, we would need to immediately gather troops to fight them. I am too lazy to deliver this to him personally, so I need you to do it quickly. I tap the table with my hand. A service is a service. And give me a room. I need to sleep. You dont know how much trouble I had sleeping due to those assassins that dead man sent me. No one from the Baijian Society would say they didnt order it. That was how many they sent. But you know, there is one who betrayed the leader, but if he wants to completely put the blame on me, he will continue to put the blame on me and pursue me. I slur my words slightly as I am sleepy. Gong Doo-chan is so shocked that his eyes are wide as he stares at me. What? Dont be surprised just because I want to sleep. I killed the guy because he didnt let me sleep, alright? Not my fault. Gong Doo-chan is unable to answer and looks around at his men. Guide the guest to his room. I stood up right away. The delivery? Once people are appointed, it will be sent right away. I nod and follow the person leading me to my room. The fate of your service business depends on this order, so be careful. I lie down on the bed in this fairly large room and address the young person who brought me here. Look here. Yes. If you ever wake me up from my sleep, you die. Get that. Yes. I understand. The guy cautiously nods and leaves. But is the Baijian Society leader really dead? Yes. Did you kill him? Yes. May I ask for your identity or affiliation? I close my eyes. I am a man who was chased every time, the man who fell off the cliff and the man who gained strength from there, the man of darkness, the commander of a mysterious force, a man in black with a certain identity, a strong man who isnt bald Gradually my eyes became heavy. That is me. Chapter 101 The smell of food makes me open my eyes. I rub my eyes, thinking that it is nice that I am not smelling poison. I look at the sunlight coming through the window and head to where the smell is coming from. As I arrive at the table, I see people from yesterday already sitting and eating. The sight of me makes them go stiff. I sit down in an empty chair. Give me food. . As the person next to me hands me chopsticks, a servant begins to place side dishes in front of me. While I am eating, the head of the service agency speaks. The service group left last night. I nod as I begin rummaging through the bland green vegetables and eating some unknown fried food. As I continue to eat silently, he asks again. Will the Baijian Society and the South Horizon Sect fight? Yes. We are worried even if the South Horizon Sect wins. Why? We have heard the rumors of Situ Kang. And if he asks us to raise our dues, what power do we hold to disobey him? Rumors say that he kills those he doesnt like. I snort. Look here, head of services. Yes. Is the Baijian Society any different? They are the same. And I am eating here, so should we talk about the money in the morning? The rice is nice, and so are the side dishes, but you speak about the payment, the change in power, and whatnot when you havent lived poorly. What are you trying to do? Gong Doo-chan, the head of services, goes silent. I then take a drink of water and say. Since you are stuck with the Unorthodox side, shut your mouth if you have been able to eat well and live well all this time. You dont have thoughts about losing money. I have my men attached to the Baijian Society for the sake of the future, and if it gets reported to me that you have been treating people like slaves, then it will not end with a meal like this. Today isnt the time for you to worry about Situ Kang. You need to worry about me coming back. If the Baijian Society wins. I will deal with their remnants. If the South Horizon Sect wins, I will either kill or defeat Situ Kang. There is nothing more to do. However, I am different from those two. I do not care about money. But if you cross the line, then I dont mind walking into the other world to get paid properly. I look at each one of them. You have to do your tasks properly. Dont do anything strange. I have been craving food since morning, so I ended the conversation. But who is your cook? The food tastes so good. As the flow of the conversation takes a turn, the atmosphere becomes colder. A man I dont know, who seems like hes in his 30s, asks me. But where did you come from? You seem like youre from the Murim Alliance. Why? Do I seem weak if Im not from there? Then you are from the alliance? No. I am not from such a pathetic place. I came from the side of Namhwa. From Namhwa means you came from the south. I hear a warrior named Dae Na-chal is famous there. I nod my head and drink the soup. He is famous. His disciples are also famous. That same man tilts his head. So youre from his faction? From his faction? No. That man died at my hands. I also killed his 12 subordinates. Im eating right now, and this topic is quite weird. Are you curious about how I killed him? No. Tch. Once I clean up the rice bowl, I put the chopsticks down. I had a nice meal. How much did it all cost? As I take out a pouch from my sleeves, the head of services says. How can we take your money? You have saved our lives by telling us of the situation immediately. Life is life. You need to get paid money, though. How much? The man then says. Then I want two common coins. I glare at the guy. Why is it so expensive? Do I look like some country boy? Then I will take just one. I take out two coins and set them down next to the rice bowl. You did a lot, from letting me use a guest room to not poisoning the meals. Thank you. As I get up from the table, I look at the man. Head of services. Yes. You should tell all of the Baijian Society merchants clinging to it that the society will collapse soon. Tell them to return to their old ways. Their cash cow will vanish, so tell them to work like proper merchants for once. I understand. If they want to play around to be heroes, then I will have to kill them. Yes. If they make strange trades that end up hurting the common people, then I will send my subordinates to take care of them. Yes. I will. But who should I say is telling them this? The person who killed their leader, the one who stayed back and then came to reap the benefits. I understand. And, listen carefully. Yes Tell them as well that I will find anyone from the assassin group that tried to kill me. Before that, I will forgive the one who gives me information about the assassins to any of my subordinates. There are no other options. I will relay those words. Before that, I have one request. The ones who contacted those assassins Actually, we only No, just imagine it with your head. Where is it? We can sit here until you remember something if you dont speak. At this point, I should also do my role properly. I look up at the clear sky from the rooms entrance. It is a clear and sunny day, so my black clothes are ill-fitting. I look at the sky and continue. Give me clothes that the chief wears. These are too dark. Yes. Prepare those which fit my body perfectly. For a moment, I thought about paying only two coins for a room, food, and clothing. Still, the coins are of high value. I then take my dagger from my waist and ask him. You cannot remember anything? After a long moment of thinking, he finally comes up with some information. It wasnt a merchant. I heard a rumor that a member of the Unorthodox side had hired assassins to kill any and all competing sects. It is a place that frequently makes requests Where are they? They are the group that has taken over the commercial side of Jong Pyeong lake. Okay. I exit the place after I change my clothes. Nam Garak decides to look into the movement of the South Horizon Sect and the Baijian Society. Now that the plan has been set, all we have to do is watch the fight unfold. We are not in a hurry to leave before seeing this. I changed my role from a man in black to an affluent young man. I still have a weapon strapped to a belt around my shoulder. The outfit is perfect, and I look handsome. Okay, maybe not. Well, I am doing at least two roles in two days. As an aspiring blade user, I dont dare to practice anything in this lovely weather from my previous life as a sword user to this present life. Like a proper young man, I continue to move along at a slow pace. The client is the Low Down Sect, with Lee Zaha as an attendant. The weapon is a dagger, and the destination is Jong Pyong Lake. As I move south like a delivery man, I decide to take a nap at the lakes shore and then play around with some stones. I descend along the southeast side of the lake and notice the number of street vendors and shops increasing. There are many stores with names Ive never seen. The most unusual one is a place called the Service Men Restaurant. I am curious as it looks like a place where people dressed like me would eat, but I choose not to enter. As I look inside, I realize that the place is quiet, with only a few people inside. I then feel someone touch my leather belt from behind. I pull the man responsible and slap him across the face. The loud sound from the slap makes the thief, and everyone around, stare at me. I dont like his arrogant look, so I slap him again. This thief must have seen my clothing and assumed I was an easy mark. I slap him three, four, and five times in a row to make him change his gaze. Since no apology is coming, I make sure that at least four teeth are knocked out with my next slap. His eyes are still full of rage despite not knowing if he might die or not. We have a short staring contest before I give him a smile. Nice. See you later, boy. After some messing around, I go into the restaurant, sit at the entrance, and order some food while facing the door. Men with fierce eyes are looking at me, probably colleagues of the thief I slapped. Once my stomach is filled with some tasteless noodles, I drink a cup of bitter tea and look at the entrance as I call a server over. Are there Unorthodox people here? Yes. What do they do? There is an alliance here. I think theyre called the Yunhae Brotherhood. They collect taxes and protection money from the shops near the lake. Their name is the Yunhae Brotherhood? Yes. It sounds like a fruit shop. The server becomes silent and hurriedly disappears into the kitchen. The colleagues of the one I slapped are gathering at the entrance. Soon, a man that looks like their representative comes in. Brother, when you are done eating, come out. I beckon him to get closer as I have something to say and then slap him. The slap is so hard that he falls over on his ass. Dont forget honorifics. The location that I am in now is between the South Horizon Sect and the Baijian Society. That means this is the most commercial area possible in the region, and the local Unorthodox Faction people are acting as if they dont know this. There is a chance that they might participate in the war. Although this is a detour, I am wasting time because I could have been waiting for the South Horizon Sect to move. Moreover, if an Unorthodox Sect hires assassins, meeting them is the duty of any warrior in Kangho. As I hand the server the payment for the meal, he looks worried. Sir, be careful. I dont need to be. As I walk outside, I see the two I slapped waiting for me alongside some other men. Too many of them are there for them to be thieves. I would be unsure if someone asked me if they looked like bandits. They probably do bad things, so they might be pickpockets or something more serious. Naturally, the people surrounding me speak in a calm tone. Little brother. Lets move somewhere else instead of here. I nod. Lets do that. Them calling me little brother feels a bit weird. I then ask them a question as we walk down the street. If you are from the Yunhae Brotherhood, please inform your leader. You are quite the cheeky one. The guy next to me frowns and looks at me, resulting in him getting a slap. Guide me, you bastards. Stop staring now. In an instant, a knife suddenly comes at me from the left. I grab it with my bare hands and break it easily. A moment of silence passes as I break the knifes blade in two. One of them shouts as his hand is still stretched out. No! I hold the broken part of the knife and immediately shove it into his throat. Puak! As the man with his throat pierced falls without much fuss, I step to the side. Thud! Another one then says. We are not of that brotherhood. Then? We are a sub-group that helps them. Ah, is that so? What is the difference, then? Guide me. To be honest, these people are probably aspiring wannabes who want to join that brotherhood. They snatch things in broad daylight and act like they are given free rein around this place. Yet they decide to bring their whole group over for a slap? Well, those who saw what I just did are now silent. My little brothers, if you point a sword at such service-oriented people, you will die. Did you think I would spare you? I continue after checking the surroundings. I will kill all those who try to run. Guide me to the Yunhae Brotherhood right now. I take the dagger from my belt and hold it to my waist. Chapter 102 I am a person who doesnt like a lot of things. Among them, the thing I hate the most is reward money taken and used by those of the Unorthodox Sects. Probably because that is what I did for a bit in my past life. Cleaning up a table, picking up side dishes that fell, mopping the floor, cleaning the dishes, preparing ingredients, cooking, and then collecting your money. Youll have money if you repeat the same thing for 10 days. I do the work, and other people earn money. Once you get used to this, you can get used to anything. But things like these are also what cause my anger to rise. Then you get asked to work for 15 days to get paid the next time. The moment you feel that you are living in vain, your anger increases further. The source of anger is the delay in payment. There is a way to solve this, however. In my previous life, many people withheld payment with no intention of giving it had died at my hands. There was simply no other way to solve it. Just by killing, you can become notorious. After some time, I decided to search for the brotherhoods headquarters by asking around among the beggars. Large and small houses connect for a long distance along the lake shore. My guide then points towards the center. The place with five red lanterns in the center is where the leader lives. I understand. Many people are outside the house, so they are all looking at me. Someone from the Yunhae Brotherhood then says. Why did you bring a service agent? I turn to the ones who are with me and say. Go and take away the body if you want. If you stay here, you will die. The beggars think for a second before turning around without a word. As I walk down the stone path, I tell the people in front of me. Guide me to your leader. I can hear laughter from around me which is followed by simple replies. Get lost. Who are you? The one who said get lost? The person who spoke is sitting on a chair while eating something. This guy must have gone crazy. As I approach the man who spits out his food, I can hear knives being pulled by the people around us. I look at the oil around his mouth and ask. Tasty? You look like you are from a service organization. Are you out of your mind? Insane or something? I grab the guy by his neck and lift him up with one hand. Kuak. This time the door swings open from the inside, and a skinny man looks around from within. What is it? I am a service agent and would like to meet with the leader. Huh? A simple agent and not even the agency head? After I loosen the grip on the mans throat, I slap him with the back of my hand. I then speak to the skinny man. I am from the assassin squad, so please guide me. The skinny mans expression changes as soon as I say those words. Why come here if the mission is done? I have a task to do. Wait. I will pass the message on. I look to my left and right and note that the faces around look slightly calmer. After a while, the door opens again, and the skinny man says. Come in. I am guided through the main hall and a back door leading to a place that overlooks the lake. There is a place that looks like a sitting area at the end of a bridge. On it, there are people fishing. As I walk across the bridge and pass by five people, I enter the pier and approach the one who looks like the leader. He then turns his head. I am Byeok Sa-un. Sit down. There is a small chair next to the window. I elect to not sit, despite him telling me to. But this man, who looks like a catfish, continues to eye me up and down. His lips are strangely thick, and he has a thin mustache, making him look like a catfish monster. You are the leader? You look like a catfish. The man sighs and then looks at me. You must have come here to die. What? Youre not from the assassin organization. The sword on your waist isnt one used by those who kill people secretly. Where are you from? Contrary to his appearance, he has good observation skills, so I feel a bit at ease. I am the leader of the Low Down sect. Have you heard of it? The Low Down Sect? This is my first time hearing this name. I am looking for the Reed Crossing the River assassin organization. If you are looking for them, you must have been a target. Why would you say that? Thats simple. Its because you couldnt have gotten that information from their men. They are hard to discover because not a single man would speak, even under torture. It is an organization held by its people alone. It is a structure where you would feel despair by talking to one of their leaders. In the end, you will need to kill them all one after another to get to the top. Can you do that? You seem to have limited time. Even if you do try to find a way, I bet you wouldnt be able to see it to the end. Their requests are expensive, and dealing with them is difficult. Who explains in such a kind manner? He must be seeing the Low Down Sect as just another Unorthodox sect. Suddenly, I can feel the energy from the men on the bridge. The man then asks me. Then is your work done? I shake my head. Not yet. Say it. The business here seems pretty good. It is good. Do you get paid? We charge protection fees. Who are you protecting the people from? It isnt about protecting the people from anyone specific. Even if it isnt me, there are many Unorthodox sects around. I was born and raised here, which left me in charge of this business. Some people do normal things to live, and others dont. If I invest in people to protect the commercial area, I also spend money on it. I dont think its strange to get rewarded for it, dont you? Oh I havent heard such a speech in a long time. It is much easier to deal with martial artists, but I will not be pushed around by words. You did a great job. The people who died by my hands must have also thought the same. The only difference is our methods. I was almost pickpocketed as soon as I arrived. When I caught them, I was told I was supposed to pay them. Ah, I see. They were ready to rob someone on official duty like me, an outsider who traveled here. You need to pay; meanwhile, the food tastes like trash, and the tea is like water. You talk as if everything is normal when its not. Acting like a sage with that face Byeok Sa-un answers me with a smile. I dont know how proud I am that you killed so many great people. As I turn around, the fishing people stand up and look at me while blocking the entrance. They will probably be afraid if they know I had killed the Baijian Societys leader, but I dont mention that. I am giving them a chance to live. I didnt come here to ask nicely. Let the catfish come to his senses and disband the brotherhood. Byeok Sa-un then stands up and shouts. Yah, you bastard! It seems like his anger has taken over his senses. Im not surprised since I know he will act like this. The man looks at me with his fearsome face. What are you, you bastard? Byeok Sa-un grabs a dagger from his sleeve and draws it toward my neck. I then grab his wrist and shock him by turning him around. This pathetic bastard. As I hold him, I smash his wrist using my internal qi. The sound of broken is clearly heard by everyone. The moment he is about to scream, I kick him away and pull out my dagger. After my kick sends him into the air, I immediately slash him. His body is cut into two pieces, falls into the lake, and turns the water red. I hear footsteps and turn to see his minions approaching with swords, but then they stop. I then say to them. Are you crazy and still want to do this? Come on. I stand still and wait for them to move or to realize the difference between us. I know that despite this place being an Unorthodox sect, there is a variance in each regions power. Well, I am strong anyway. As they continue to hesitate, I sit in a chair and grab a fishing rod. In this situation where everyone can only stare at me, I say to them. Kids find a way to live. Behind me, those minions are feeling troubled. However, unless they are stupid, they wont be able to act in haste since they have seen the difference in our skills. I continue speaking, not caring what these people are thinkinByeok Sa-un must be fish food by now, but let us pretend that he is alive. I have a job, so contact the assassins and bring them here. Then, an answer. Who am I talking to? I get up and look at them. Kids Actually, I am not old enough to call them kids. Yet, for the moment, I am using such respectful words. It is to the extent that I begin to wonder if I should be this respectful. Come and try to take revenge for this guys death anytime. I will welcome any of you with that kind of thought in your head. One of the men then asks me. But who are you? The one who killed your leader. I let them have a bit of extra information to be a bit generous. But I also killed the Baijian Societys leader. The truth is, you would be insane if you wanted to take revenge. I then see them start to tremble. Well, at least they look strong. Among those who are looking at me, there is one who looks lean and tall. We will find out and let you know. What is your name? Woo Cheol-jin. Are you the first head? Yes. You will be taking over once I leave. Do the task well if you do not want to lose it. Woo Cheol-jin nods his head. Yes. Without worrying about the details, I turn around and grab the fishing rod. I somehow killed the leader here, but I have no regrets. I think Ive grown up a lot, considering this ended with just one death instead of a massacre. Well, people do change. As I look along the lakes surface, I see the moon glinting faintly in the dark sky. It seems like the sun is leaving work early too. As I look at the lake, the moon, and the sunset, I feel a bit lonely after a long while. Originally, I was not a person who was sensitive to such things. I cant help it, though, when everyone wants to leave. That doesnt mean Im all alone. It is because I am a person who is used to many things. The truth is, it is difficult for me to meet women. I had thought of wanting to be with a beauty in my previous life, but The fear of having a family is still rooted in my present self. First of all, I have eyes that can see the peak of things. Any woman, for me, needs to have both pretty eyes and strong martial arts. Few are both strong and beautiful. And those few dont have any reason to like me. I checked it in the past. The fishing rod moves, making me pull on it Perhaps I was holding it too tightly, but I caught a catfish. I am shocked and slap it back into the lake. Shit. I cannot kill two catfishes in a day. The man who is gradually becoming kinder thats me. Suddenly, I think of the words of the ancestors who speak of ruthlessly slaughtering strong men. Amitabha. Asura. I am Mahavairocana. The Descendant of the King of Infinite Faith. Die. . . . I smile while looking at the water. Die. Chapter 103 Chapter 103 C That Is My Plan. I catch the rod but not the fish. I sometimes wonder why men throw their fishing rods into the water when they fail to catch a fish. They probably hate the process, like me. I even lose my appetite. I dont like catfish. In any case, I watch the seemingly endless lake as I throw the fishing rod into it. I am interested in the man called Kang Tae-gong because of his words. What is done cannot be undone. These words mean that spilled water cannot be put back in the bowl. When did he say these words? He said these words after his family left him when he became poor and returned when he became a wealthy prince. I reflect deeper on his thinking. I think that Kang Tae-gong is a man that is like me. There is no mention of that man learning martial arts, but I am sure he has mastered some. He is a descendant of the Shen Nong family. The Flame Emperor. It doesnt mean hes a real emperor, but the people of Kangho called him that. This fact is powerful for me as someone who also learns about fire qi. Kang Tae-gong is renowned for defeating many enemies using a small number of troops during the battles of the War of Night. My personal conclusion is that he won because he is strong. Or maybe not. As I look at the calm lake, I calm my mind using these thoughts. I then cleanse myself from my anger and wait for the news to arrive. On my third day of fishing, Woo Cheol-jin delivers the news that the troops of the South Horizon Sect are on standby at Bokyang. Bokyang is a transportation hub about half an hour away from the lake. It is a place I can reach quickly with a little bit of footwork. As I hear the reports details, I note that it seems that the other sects that were requested by the South Horizon Sect to join this war are also waiting to move together. If this happens, it will be easier for me to join them. Its probably fine to pretend to be from the Yunhae Brotherhood and blend in. I did not bother them for three days. As I look at the situation, I decide to leave it as it is. This is because many are surprisingly running for their livelihoods. Instead, I would wander through the shops around the lake. Through this, I heard talk about the death of the Yunhae Brotherhoods leader and rumors about how workers wouldnt get compensation in the future. That was something that I did. Anyways, after three days of trying to catch a fish, I changed clothes to ones brought by members of the brotherhood and finished my life here. From a man in black to a service agency officer and now to a third-rate warrior from an Unorthodox sect. The messengers of the South Horizon Sect likely wont know my face. Even if they do recognize me, it wont matter. I can simply participate as the leader of the Low Down Sect if I want. Before leaving the lake, I sit next to the fishing Woo Cheol-jin. Leader Woo Cheol-jin. The mans eyes widen as he hears me. Uh? If I leave now, you will become the leader. How long do you plan to live like an underdog? Ah, yes. Do not do anything wrong. Yes. Dont run away after being paid. Tell the brotherhood members to find honest work and make a living. Since the protection fees are being released, at least replace the restaurants serving tasteless foods. Woo Cheol-jin responds with an unsure voice. I understand. If you have any subordinates who have nothing to do or are worrying about filling their stomach with food, send them to the Black Rabbit Union. It wont take long. They wont have to worry about living or eating there. However, there is a risk that they might die while fighting someone strong or during training there, so keep that in mind. Woo Cheol-jin stares at me. You are a leader of a group in the Unorthodox Faction? I thought you werent affiliated. The former leader of Black Rabbit Union died at my hands. Most of his men survived. There is a lot under me. If all of you tried to attack well, you would have ended up as fish food. Ah Now, do you get it? Yes, I clearly understand. Woo Cheol-jin asks me with some curiosity. But will you leave the South Horizon Sect? I reply simply. What is more interesting than watching a fight from within? They are pretty strong ones, so it will be a fierce fight. Which side do you think will win? I dont know. Do you think they wont win even after I killed the leader of the Baijian Society? Yes. The South Horizon Sect will win. I look at Woo Cheol-jin for a moment and wonder if we will meet again Maybe this is the last time? As I think so, I tell him. I will send someone later to see how people live here. Yes. At that time, if the food and tea taste better and the store owners are smiling, I will bring you into the Low Down Sect. However, if nothing changes, my subordinates will come here wielding their swords. Some might turn you into fish food. Even fish need to eat meat sometimes. Yes. Woo Cheol-jin, who doesnt look too bright, nods his head and says. I will remember the name of the Low Down Sect. So you are really the leader of that place? Yes. I am also fighting that assassin group. My enemies are everywhere. A man who continues to fight by making enemies who didnt exist before, that is the Low Down Sect. I will continue to look for them. I then say goodbye to the lake that has calmed me for the past three days. So this is what a lake is. Yes. The lake is beautiful despite not a single thing being touched by human hands. It was so tranquil that even my craziness disappeared as I looked at it. Thanks to this lake, I was able to rest well. Woo Cheol-jin nods as he, too, looks at the lake. A beautiful lake. I laugh out loud at his words. I think that since he is a man who can see the beauty of the lake, I can leave him as the leader. I point to the lake. Look there. Yah, it is amazing to see that the scenery changes each time. During the day, the sunlight shines, and at night the moonlight falls. Such a great place. I mumble like an old man. The same goes for the people who live near the lake. They eat well and live well without bad people mingling around them. Leave the working people alone. They are busy trying to make a living. Woo Cheol-jin is the first to speak again. Since you spared me, I will do that as much as possible and make sure our brotherhood will not disappear. It is then that I see that Woo Cheol-jin is a good person. I did a good job selecting you as the leader. Lets meet again. I will leave now. Please look after yourself. Kangho is usually filled with killing and fighting. It is also where we repeat a cycle of meetings and partings like this. I leave the lake behind me. After saying goodbye to the lake, I head to Bokyang and line up like a young man about to be enlisted. It looks like I also have to fill in some personal information. The ones who arrive before me go to the barracks to write down their personal details and come out with money. Its not much, but it is a good amount for those who are suffering. Rumors spreading by word of mouth say that the South Horizon Sect would also give out greater rewards if they won this war. Why did it feel like something so obvious? There are people from other Unorthodox sides. Quite a few of them also look strong. Because I am wearing clothes from the Yunhae Brotherhood, I dont lag too far behind them. Once it is my turn to enter the barracks, the man writing down the details asks me. Brother, where are you from? You must be a thief. I respond after mimicking his accent. I am Woo Cheol-jin from the Yunhae brotherhood. Yunhae Brotherhood, Ive heard that name a few times you came alone? Yes. For money? I have a personal grudge against the Baijian Society. Those people have so many enemies Are you good? I am undefeated on the shores of my lake. In Yunhae and Jong Pyong Lake, I am undefeated. The man sighs. It seems like people from there are quite talkative. We will pay you three small silver coins. The man who is in charge of payments looks up in shock. Three? The examiner clicks his tongue. Didnt he say he was undefeated? Pay him three. Yes. I take the three silvers from the younger man and ask. How many are usually given? The young man replies. Just one is a lot. I nod. The eyes of the examiner arent normal. I am busy. Next, please. If I come all the way here and give this little shit a beating, then it wouldnt be strange if they excluded me from the war. Arrogant bastard Throwing out words is different, though, which is what the young man did after I left. Uh? What did you say? The examiner intervenes. You. Shut it. What kind of habit do you have of talking to a person who came to apply? After my trip to the lake, I have become more patient. After getting kicked out of the barracks, I looked at the line of people. Out of nowhere, a man who overheard the conversation about the three silvers looks at me. Just as we start having a staring contest, a warrior from the South Horizon Sect approaches me. I will pass on the words of the leader. We depart in an hour. Those who didnt get paid will be paid later. The goal is the base of the Baijian Society. Do not do anything strange and simply attack. Escape, betrayal, and quarrels among allies will not be tolerated by the leader or us. We hope you wont go running away either. I continue to listen as I walk around with my hands on my back. Where is Situ Kang? Anyways, the South Horizon Sects territory is no less than a large prefecture. It is definitely much bigger than my village. I walk around and stop as I hear a voice from the largest barrack. We move. Yes. A man in armor walks out of the barracks. His hair is stiff, and his large mouth is raised to the sides to complete his smiling face. His smile doesnt indicate that he is having fun but rather shows extreme confidence in himself. As I look around, I realize that this man has to be Situ Kang. As I hold my hands together in the crowd, Situ Kang stops and looks at me as he walks down the path. Why is he staring at me while I am hiding? Little brother, you have a good face. I nod. You too. As I say that, his servants become wide-eyed. ! But the man simply bursts into laughter. Good. Good. Hes a recruited ally. How would he know who I am? Leader, still Lets go. In the end, the men followed him. The last member comes up to me with shock still in his eyes. I bring my finger to my lip. Shh. Situ Kang walks to the center of the camp, where everyone is gathering, looking around as he raises his long sword. Brothers! This is the sword of the Baijian Societys leader. I dont know if this was stolen, killed, or bought, but I cannot stand a man who simply gives away his weapon. The time has come to fight! Tricks or not, the Baijian Society has to be brought down tonight. Did you come for money? Good. It would be better if you came with a grudge against the Baijian Society. Once the battle is over and we subjugate them, those who fought for us will become my brothers. Lets go. I laugh at his words. Brothers. Men who risked their lives for manliness are strong, and this man is no exception. My plan, which came to my mind while fishing, is still on track. First, I need to act alongside this man and let them have the Baijian Society. After we take the Baijian Society, then its Situ Kangs turn. Perfect, perfect I plan to absorb the South Horizon Sect into the Low Down Sect. Situ Kang will bow to me as he joins. Situ Kang fits so well with my thoughts of him, to the point where I am unsure what to do to him. Chapter 104 Chapter 104 C What Kind Of Pain Would It Be? As I follow the South Horizon Sects troops, I think that the advance is slow. Theyre not saving strength or using a strategy to move. This was just simply moving. Moreover, this is a situation where the Baijian Society can fully recognize its intentions and plans. Of course, since I am not a captain, I cant interfere. I occasionally hear Situ Kangs laughter from the front, but I feel a bit strange. Is he already thinking that hes won? Its not any of my business, but he looks like a moron. The forces that have been chosen and the route that we are taking are the fastest options to reach the Baijian Society. Our speed also picks up gradually as we enter the Musan Hills, a place I have often visited in my past life. I look with some puzzlement at the hills around us. If we go any further in, well reach Musan Gorge. Is he insane? Musan Gorge is foggy at dawn and night. Fortunately, it is a fog-free day right now, but the terrain is a path with high stone mountains on both sides. It is a perfect place to be ambushed. I know this place so well because warriors who are experts at footwork use this place as their playground. It is a place where those types of people often visit to improve. This place even has a cliff setting. I then say to the man leading the troops. Look here, if we keep going this way, well arrive at Musan Gorge. If we get attacked there, half the people will die. The man frowns and says. Is that so? I will report this to the front. He sprints to the front, and I also speed up and leave the line. After a bit, the man returns with a bewildered face. What did they say? They are telling us to shut up and break through quickly. They arent sending a scout? Ah, they The man notices this late and runs back to the front again. I step back a little to the left of the path and look around. They are doing quite a few stupid things. What are they up to? From the moment that I inform them of the gorge ahead, the faces of those moving with the troop slowly become strained with tension. First, all these people are trained in martial arts and are naturally adverse to dealing with ambushes. Instead, theyre probably more concerned about the loot they can get at the Baijian Society. As we move, everyone stays silent, but after hearing that a gorge is ahead of us, everyone begins to shake. I begin to use my qi. As I stand away from the troops, I look at the forward forces, a mix of many people. The leader who went there earlier to ask the scout is also there. Why are you asking about a scout? Have you lost your mind? Reports have already come in that there is nothing wrong there. Do not step out of line. Ah, I apologize. Well, this isnt a trained army, after all, just a group of people who mastered martial arts. Still, it is absurd that they are reacting so sensitively to a request for a scout. First of all, it is absurd that a scout has already returned. Shouldnt they have sent someone skilled? A skilled scout would look over the rocky sides of the mountain instead of just looking down the path. I am slowly losing my temper. People like Situ Kang wont succumb to a quick death since they can fight. But what about the low-level idiots who came here as support? Because I am a person who does what he says, I talk directly to Situ Kang. Sect leader, are we moving into the gorge? Situ Kang looks at me with an unpleasant look. You think therell be an ambush? The leader of the Baijian Society is dead. What can they do? They will be too busy bickering internally since too many people want to be the next leader. Yes, leader. I decided to try one last time. We can move back. At those words, Situ Kang seems to lose his patience and yells. Shut up! What do you know?! I smile at this reaction. Fucking absurd moron. This is why generals who lack resourcefulness always end up losing to people like Zhuge Liang when you review the old classics. In fact, the Baijian Society and the South Horizon Sect arent much different from my point of view. However, I dont want them to enjoy this. I dont want a slaughter at an ambush. Thats not what a real fight should be. Is this a chance? I am a man who has something to say. I speak to Situ Kang. If there is a surprise attack, about a hundred people will die, and that would fall on you, leader. Hu This insane bastard Situ Kang stops as the faces of everyone around us become pale. Young man, you are crossing the line. Situ Kang looks at me with a hardened face as the troops following behind us stop. Situ Kang is running out of patience and has gestured to them to stop. Who is this kid? One of the examiners came up to us. He came as a volunteer from the Yunhae Brotherhood, located at Jeong Pyong Lake. Ive never heard of them. Look here, little brother isnt it strange that you came to help but instead look like you want to die by my hands? I look at the troops who have stopped just shy of entering the gorge and say. Speaking words and advancing troops without another thought is a wrong move. Look at the terrain. If there is an ambush from the rocky mountains, they will attack from both the front and the back, and the battle will already be lost. A choice? Detour? This isnt the time for you to care about my tone. You should take every situation into account. Is it because I am being too bold? Situ Kang turns his head without answering me and looks at the gorge with a serious expression. His eyes then turn toward the mountains. A small rock begins to roll down the mountain and falls to the ground after bouncing several times. At the same time, someone walks to the side of the gorge. Horizon Sects illegitimate son, what did you come here for? Situ Kang looks at the spear with displeasure. I look at the gorge and see an enemy who stands alone. I smile as I see him. Head Cheon seems to have become the new leader of the Baijian Society for now. Wow this is interesting. Head Cheon approaches our troops and continues his provocation. Eh, you bastard who doesnt even know your parents. Was the leader scary? To only come in after sending assassins to This isnt a nice method. Leader, why are you pretending to be some kind of manly person? You fucking bastard. I knew that Situ Kang was such a person. I look at Head Cheon, who is smiling. Fucking crazy bastard, bringing in our parents youre dead. I watch as Situ Kang stays silent. No, he is going to hold back, right? This is a moment to hold back. But then the man pulls out his sword and runs to the enemy alone. Situ Kang runs in a way that churns up the dirt on the ground and shouts. Cheon Sae-ryong, you bastard. You are no man if you run today. It seems like Situ Kang already knows the mans identity. So I ask the officials around me. Did the two of them fight before? One of them replies. The other day, there was a neutral zone agreement and a spar. Ah, is that so? If its to that extent, this probably isnt an accidental fight but one that Cheon Sae-ryong already planned. Many in Kangho like to cheat, after all. Like Cheon Sae-ryong and this filthy Situ Kang. I can clearly hear the sound of weapons clashing. Both people are holding up pretty well. I then ask the man again. Soon, once that Cheon guy retreats, his people will appear and launch arrows and stones at us. What are you going to do? Do you want to go to the leader and tell him or watch this fight until the end?? The man then asks back. How can our leader be defeated by that man? Look at the fight. This reply makes me lose my temper. You moron, are you more skilled than Situ Kang? You must not be able to see the difference with your eyes. The skills of the opponent are nowhere lacking. He is just pretending to be lacking. At this point, I cant understand if I am an outsider or their nanny. As Situ Kang is using qi and cutting up the stones around him, more rocks begin falling from the mountain. They are also slowly becoming bigger. Anyone who sees this can see that the situation is dangerous. And as the rest of the South Horizon Sect members continue to impatiently watch the fight I hear the sound of something being pushed. Cheon then jumps into the air, throws red powder, and begins using his footwork to move. Situ Kang also uses his footwork to avoid the red powder thrown. Situ Kang shouts, Cheon Sae-ryong! Cheon Sae-ryongs laughter can be heard echoing through the gorge. As I expect, the Baijian Societys forces simultaneously appear on both sides of the gorges. Just like they planned, they begin to launch arrows and daggers toward Situ Kang, who is standing alone. Honestly, I admire Cheo Sae-ryongs head. Typically, people would ambush the troops once they entered the gorge. Yet this man chooses to stop the many at the entrance and use the initiative to lure Situ Kang deeper inside with a fight. He must be aiming to kill the enemy leader first before going for an all-out war. I feel strange. Its like Im dealing with Zhuge Liang and cant help but feel a sense of admiration. It is a shame, but one should compliment another when they do something right. Of course, that doesnt mean that this guy is as competent as Zhuge Liang. Situ Kangs response also shows that hes figured out the trap. Situ Kang moves his body towards the arrows coming from all directions. Look at those jerks pathetic. The fate of Situ Kang now rests in the hands of his subordinates. Will they go out and rescue him? Or will they be traitors like Cheon Sae-ryong? If his people dont run in to save him and hold their position, the troops will live, and only Situ Kang will die. The rain of arrows is something that even Situ Kang cant run away from. The daggers and arrows from each side come one after the other. Situ Kang is urgently blocking the rain of arrows, daggers, and stones. His clothes are beginning to get torn up as he tries to avoid them, and his upper body is starting to bleed. As I watch his officials mumble between each other, I say. Are you all part of an Unorthodox sect? As I say that, those guys pull out their swords and jump forward without answering. There are no words to say when it comes to saving their leader. Even those who are still confused are beginning to rush into the gorge. It feels like one jumped in and made the others follow. As the people of the South Horizon Sect rush in, the attack from the other side becomes more intense. It seems like Situ Kang still has the trust of his men. Suddenly, a rumble can be heard from where the troops of the South Horizon Sect are standing. I look back with my arms crossed. Most of the volunteers who came for money are starting to run away after noticing that they wont be pursued. I feel so dumbfounded that I begin to laugh. So unique. In the end, the condition becomes completely unfavorable thanks to the stupidity and ignorance of Situ Kang that pushes them into the gorge. Some of those who are advancing up the stone mountains also fall down. Some of the officials jump in to save Situ Kang. The ones leading the troops to take off with their spears, heading toward the mountain. And I I just fold my arms and watch both sides. This is the plan that I made. Chaos. However, the Baijian Society had managed to stop their own leadership crisis while the South Horizon Sect had to step in to save their leader. As soon as I see the difference between these two factions, I move to the gorge, where the people are stuck fighting like morons. With my back to the fight, I walk towards Cheon. I am a man who walks through the rain of arrows while pondering about the pain that only I can inflict on other people. As I hear the screams of those falling down the cliff, I mumble. Welcome to the Troublesome Gorge. Chapter 105 Chapter 105 C I Thought You Called Me A Kid? The psychology of a battle always goes up and down. The ambushers are excited when they get to throw daggers at Situ Kang, but once the South Horizon Sect moves in and launches a counterattack, their minds begin to change. The members of the South Horizon Sect that entered the gorge are ready to die and are fighting too fiercely. However, the South Horizon Sect entered this fight at a disadvantage. A South Horizon Sect warrior who falls down the cliff will scream and then go silent with a popping sound. While looking around at the stones that make up this gorge, I realize why so many South Horizon Sect troops are falling off the cliff. I also examine Situ Kangs current state. On either side of the gorge, the warriors of the Baijian Society are also busy shooting arrows. Then there is another order to attack. I then head to the stone mountain on the right, where many people are falling. A man wielding a heavy-looking giant spiked club is single-handedly causing the advance forces of the South Horizon Sect to drop the cliff. I begin to move and soar toward the right-hand cliff. It has been a long time since I climbed cliffs like these, so I want to prevent myself from making mistakes. I break any place I land with my toes before jumping back into the air. I repeat this three times and climb to the top in an instant. I pull out my sword and charge at the man using the spiked club to kill the South Horizon Sect troops. Stand away. The South Horizon Sect warriors in my path immediately move to the sides and clear the way. The man using the club isnt someone they can handle in the first place since his heavy weapon can send them off balance with one hit. The screams of those who fall down the cliff continue for a long time. The current head of the Baijian Society probably meticulously planned this out. The man with the club spots me and swings his weapon at my side. I immediately jump into the air, using the speed I am running at to avoid being hit, and pierce through his neck with my sword. Puak! It is just a simple blow, but my attack speed differs from the South Horizon Sect. As I pull my weapon out, the rest of the warriors rush in from behind me and simultaneously drive many swords into the mans body. Puak! I cut down three to four more men before heading back down again. At the halfway point, I push my body with the back of my feet and bounce off as I land on the ground while looking around. Men from both sides are clashing with their weapons on the cliff. If one side is subdued, the daggers will fall from the air. I soar high and step on the center of the cliff before running up again. This time I arrive at the center where the troops still aiming for Situ Kang are located. My expression changes as I find myself landing between twenty people. There, while wielding my weapon, I channel the Wood Chicken energy through my attacks. No one here is capable of blocking this, so I simply swing my sword and slaughter them all. Blood is rushing out of these new corpses. As soon as an executive from the South Horizon Sect discovers the unexpected variable, he gives his subordinates an order. Push After leaving the rest to the other soldiers, I stand on the cliff to watch Situ Kang. That ignorant bastard has only advanced around 50 steps in the interim. On the other side, that Cheon guy is standing at the entrance to the gorge with heads from the Baijian Societys subordinate groups. As I walk along the cliffs edge, I approach where Cheon is standing. On the other side, the men of the South Horizon Sect and the Baijian Society are fighting, but no one approaches me. I move to where Situ Kang is fighting. I jump and move my body in the opposite direction of the fight to descend lightly from mid-air. The tension of the battle is being controlled well below. As I think that, I approach Situ Kang. Situ Kang, you bastard. What are you doing in the face of death? Even after all that planning, you still take this kind of damage. I asked you to go back, but you didnt. Situ Kang is breathing heavily. The South Horizon Sect is struggling already as there are many members of the Baijian Society to deal with. Quite a few of their men have also fallen. I look at Situ Kang and say. If you are ignorant and mentally deficient, dont act like a leader. Fucking moron. His face becomes distorted at this. Right. It is my fault. It is because I am ignorant. Leader! The officials close to him reply to his words. It is all my fault. But even if I die with you guys today, I will not regret it, so let me be torn to shreds and killed! Situ Kang looks at me with bloodshot eyes and rushes forward with his men behind him. This guy is planning to break through with force. Well, it is the only answer in this kind of situation. However, it is impressive that Situ Kangs attitude has changed from before. My thoughts on this are like this. Most leaders are ignorant like this man. Perhaps Situ Kang is at the top due to his natural strength and ignorance. In a different life, hed likely be a famous general. Pathetic bastard. The ignorant man rushes to the opponent and collides with their main force. This is now a melee with a mix of warriors in red robes and swords in their hands. No one is being pushed back by the attack. Situ Kang doesnt ask for help from me and simply continues to wield his sword at both large and small troops around him. Did the death of the subordinates awaken something within him? He is swinging his sword as if he is in a trance. Perhaps he is determined to be the bravest in this fight. Nice. You should at least be good in a fight if you are stupid. This is the kind of fight I wanted. I cheer for both sides and make clear my desire for them to fight it out. Die! While I watch the fight comfortably, I occasionally eliminate those who bump me. As I walk towards the two leaders fighting in the front, I push away the South Horizon Sect soldiers with my hand while kicking someone from the Baijian Society in the crotch. Move. Bastards! Kuak! The man from the Baijian Society falls down while holding his crotch and ends up with his head cut off by the man from the South Horizon Sect. Puak! I have always been a biased man. As I move forward, Situ Kang wields his sword like a madman. The South Horizon Sect men are all fighting to their best. I look at this and decide to add words of support. Everyone is working hard. If you dont eat well, your body will suffer. Stay strong. In the distance, Situ Kang swings his sword and shouts at me. You please shut your mouth! Puak! Along with those swords, he cuts an enemy into two. I smile as I pass by him. If you have common sense, shut your mouth! Another one of his men yells at me. Are you an ally or enemy? If I was the enemy, would you be alive like this? Calm down. After I answer him, I immediately jump up and land elsewhere. As I finally feel free, it feels like my temper is about to explode. Cheon of the Baijian Society and other people who look like his bodyguards look at me. I jump up and use Fire Chicken energy on them. You fucking morons. A large palm-shaped flame falls down on Cheon and his men. Kwaaang! Dozens of people are forced to draw their swords to block it and are pushed back. However, their appearance is different now. Some manage to hold their ground while others are already coughing up blood. As soon as I land, I pull my blade again. Head Cheon, it is I. Cheon Sae-ryong frowns. Who? I am a man who mercilessly beats and kills those who insult other peoples parents. What insane I approach him with a smile. The plan and provocation were good. It was good that you praised his talent for trying to control the place and that he didnt neglect to collect information. But you shouldnt let your mouth cross the line. It will only bring pain. Cheon Sae-ryong then looks at my blade. You? Cheon Sae-ryong and all of his men run to attack me as I pull my black blade out. Flames begin to ignite from the handle to the tip of my sword. I think of the flying plum blossoms and pour them out in front of me. The plum blossoms are made into small flames in front of my enemy. I release it all to Cheon Sae-ryong and his men. Kwaaang! They are bounced backward and collide with anything in their path, making most of them unable to get up immediately. Cheon Sae-ryong manages to block it but now looks shocked. I look at him and say. What, moron? Spill it. As I say that, Cheon Sae-ryong decides to run away, making me immediately pursue him. Head Cheon, do not run. Come here. This guy has some seriously amazing footwork. Anyone who feels death is approaching is bound to show the best version of themselves. I follow closely behind him. Head Cheon faster, faster faster! I guess I wasnt in your plans. Run faster. Hahaha! As soon as my long sword reaches close enough, Cheon Sae-ryong jumps from the ground and tries to swing his sword as a surprise attack. Kang! I use my sword to block his attack as it comes close to my neck. The flames still coat my blade as it collides with his, causing Cheon Sae-ryong to groan. I stop and step back on the ground with my left foot. As Cheon Sae-ryong turns his back to me I pick up a stone from the ground and throw it at Cheon Sae-ryongs left hand. Cheon Sae-ryong bends his body to the left as the stone moves. He is really dedicated to running. I am not the one to miss, though. As I run, I sheathe my blade again. If I lose him, everything I planned would end in a mess. In five long breaths, I catch up with him again. Cheon Sae-ryong begins to sweat and jumps in the air. Swish! I hold out my hand to accept any possible attack he would make as I watch his expression. I then grab his hand and pull him to force him to stand on his right. Puak! The dagger, which is pushed from the front, is caught from behind and once again pierces his body. Kuaaak! Puak! Puak! Puak! Pauk! I get around the attack with his blood on my face and then look around. Suddenly, a drop of blood gets into my eye. I then wipe my eye with the back of my hand and pick up my opponents long sword and sheath with my bloody hands. I then head back to the entrance of the Musan Gorge. Once I reach there, I begin to watch the battle again. There are only the dead on the floor and the living who are sitting in exhaustion. I stare at Situ Kang, who is covered in blood from head to toe. In the middle of this, I remember his words. What did this jerk say he called me a kid. I dont remember his exact words, but they didnt sit well with me. So I then say to Situ Kang. What, moron, say it. Situ Kang, still processing the death of his subordinates, stays silent. The battle has come to an end. All of the South Horizon Sect survivors are looking at me while holding their breath. The Baijian Society was defeated. The South Horizon Sect also fought a foolish battle that resulted in nothing short of defeat. I then snort and say. But I didnt lose. It is my victory. The atmosphere here doesnt seem that good, though. . . . . Chapter 106 Chapter 106 C A Strategic Man I look at the Baijian Society members lying around me. Go and look at those who are still breathing. There must be a few living. Do not let this go. Actually, this is a command that Situ Kang should be giving. His soldiers still get up with some surprise. I sit across from Situ Kang, who is looking at me with a complicated expression. Its like hes struggling to say something. Even if we try to fight, I am clearly stronger. His pride will not let him apologize, and arguing will be difficult since I have helped him. If I didnt help them today, the South Horizon Sect would have also suffered. My conclusion is this. The South Horizon Sect will be dealt with by Situ Kang, but it is up to me to absorb the loot and remnants of the Baijian Society. This idiot doesnt deserve to grow in power. Situ Kang and I clearly know who is above and who is below. It is quite easy. Crave, kill, or give Looking at Situ Kang, who might faint from exhaustion, I say. Situ Kang, I wont kill you. Lets make our positions clear and then break apart. Situ Kang is shocked, but I dont care. He then says. My skills arent good enough. What can I do? So what if your skills are lacking? What have you done to weaker people in the meantime? From what Ive heard, you are the kind of person who will make backstreet bastards kneel in front of you. Isnt that true? There was no such thing. All twisted stories. However, I was certainly never nice to Unorthodox people weaker than me. Ive never felt the need to. Leader, do you know who I am? I do not know. When your subordinates went and asked various sects to participate in the war, they came to me too and acted rudely. And look at the results today. When you charged earlier, no hired soldier of yours came into the gorge. All of them began to run. You understand? What kind of idiot would want to enter that place and die? And you ignored my words and went anyway. The corpses of your men who died are all over the gorge, and it is all because of you. Situ Kang doesnt move his face, so I reflexively slap him on the head. Look around you, moron. Those who died because of you look at them and thank them, fucking moron. Say you are sorry. All his men turn towards me when I slap him on his head. The act of hitting their leader on the head doesnt sit right with them, but none of them make a move. It is my fault. I cannot see all this, so leave me alone. For a moment, I suppress my anger. At that moment, I think it might be better to just kill this man here. Then his men begin to surround me. As I glance around, one of his men says something unexpected. Leader, we should have pulled our leader back. We apologize for it. Please forgive us. Situ Kang is puzzled. Chief Jang, what do you mean? The man called Jang then explains. The messenger under me recognized him as the Low Down Sect leader. He participated in this war as our ally, and I received a report that we shouldnt treat him harshly as he has a radical personality, but I could not convey this to everyone. This, too, is Situ Kangs mistake. Since his subordinates are not given the right to speak out openly, even things that should be reported never get to him. Situ Kang gets up and bows. Low Down Sect leader, I apologize. Thanks to your help, I am well aware that I and my subordinates here managed to survive and not get annihilated. From today on, the South Horizon Sect will make sure to run to pay back the grace shown to us by attending whenever you call. I am lacking, but I live by what I say. As Situ Kang, who has received a smack in the head, apologizes, the people around us do the same. Thank you, leader. We will be there when you call. I rub my forehead. Ah, what are these bastards doing changing the situation like this? I sigh as I cant go back to slapping a man who just apologized. I dont want to bow back to these assholes, so I ask Chief Jang. Is that messenger still alive? The messenger, who is bleeding from the thigh, is a little distance away and raises his hand. Leader, I am alive! I remember this guys face. Ah, it was you. He was the one who listened to my words during the drinking party. I look at him and nod. It is good if you are alive. Yes. The heavy atmosphere dissipates as I say good words to the man. Situ Kang then says. Leader, can we visit the Low Down sect after tidying up here? I look him in the eyes and then say. Dont, because it is unlucky. You take good care of the South Horizon Sect, and I will have my subordinates handle the Baijian society. I honestly dont like this. According to my nature, Situ Kang dont talk. Realize that I endure your actions because you have brave warriors around. There is no other reason. Situ Kang looks down. You need to know that the life of an idiot is still there because your men rushed into the gorge to save you. They jumped in despite losing limbs and lives. For you. Situ Kang nods. I will keep Suddenly I turn my head towards where Head Cheon had appeared earlier. Everyones gaze follows mine. The surroundings have become too quiet. Two people are standing at the gorges entrance, and I am struck with the absurdity. The man on the left is holding a fan in his hand. The man on the right is wearing rags like a beggar. Even though I am a bit shocked, I am happy. They are the warriors who usually come to play in the gorge. The problem is that they might feel offended as the place they enjoy is filled with corpses. I speak to Situ Kang in a calm tone. You need to walk away as soon as possible. Quietly, quickly and in an orderly manner. Do not look at them. I say this to him, and the man nods. He immediately begins to clear the scene alongside his subordinates. I feel like he understands what I am saying, but the two men at the canyons entrance have disappeared. Since they are human beings who live their own way, it is difficult to predict their actions. With so many corpses here, they could have just gone to play elsewhere or Now that the South Horizon Sect is taken care of, I begin to meditate. The madness inside is different. Among them, the anger that those two men could have is pure. This is because they are the ones who focus on seeking pleasure but are not idiots who only play. The speed they have also signifies strength. However, I am a bit shocked since this is the first time Ive seen the combination of a beggar and a scholar. Friends? The beggar has to be a member of the Beggars Union, and he also looks old. In my previous life, he was called the Slow Man. It means that he has a dull body, which is why such a title is given because there are people faster than him. Actually, he is the fastest person in the Beggars Union. Being the fastest there means being the fastest beggar in the world. The other man is the more questionable one. It is because I sense a lingering demonic power from him. Perhaps he is a person who doesnt have the power to control many? Or maybe he is someone more important than that? Because they use demonic martial arts. I am not sure which one to hate more, but There is a man who escaped from the faction that he was once in to commit to the Murim Alliance, so he could be someone different. Someone joined the Demonic Sect in the past, but now I see one who jumps out of it. A man who has moved to a different faction, and now I have met that man here. What is most surprising is that he continues to come to this place despite having a place he belongs. Im not sure what he is called now. But in my past life, I knew him as the Demonic Gentleman. I am shocked that these two strong people had come here to compete. I am in deep thought because they are men with such an impressive background and had seen such a mess happen. How do I deal with them? If I recruit all the warriors into the Low Down Sect, I will become the leader of a sect with a stronghold. But that is unlikely because of my selfish and eccentric attitude. The two men didnt seem interested in a fight either. They are more interested in their own fights. It is then that I hear Situ Kang. Leader, we are leaving. I nod to him. You, if you find out anything about the assassin group I told you about, inform the Black Rabbit Union. He nods his head. I also plan to pursue it, so I will contact you if I find them. Hurry up. As I watch him leave, I cross my legs. The subordinates have their own jobs, and the leader has his own. It doesnt matter, even if we fail. Trying is more important to me. In my previous life, I had actually joined the Swift Society, which met in this canyon. This time, however, I want one of them to join the Low Down Sect. And maybe run with them. Running isnt everything in life. I will maybe respect their madness and obsession. What the world needs now are martial arts. If I can bring these people who have detached themselves from the world to my side What might kill hundreds of my men in a future battle might end with just three or four deaths if I have them. This is why getting them is important. I decide to close my eyes and wait. After a while, I hear their whispers. [He hasnt gone yet?] [This is difficult. Do we chase him out?] [Lets wait longer.] The Demonic Gentleman and the Slow Man are looking at me. Because I look young, they must think I am some swordsman who fought in this war. As soon as I confirm that the two are still here. I get up from my seat and take a deep breath. I move in a relaxed manner in the middle of the gorge. Phew um phew I exaggerate my breathing on purpose and sprint to the cliff. I jump loudly on a pile of stones to move up. Papapak! Few people know the truth about the Swift Society. They are essentially filled with people mad with footwork. I jump from the cliff and run quickly across the center. Anyone who sees me will be sure of my craziness. For them, however Uh? He is pretty good. I climb, jump, move upwards, and run through the place like a madman. I feel a bit weird. I didnt even eat anything. What am I doing After a while, I could see the two of them slowly come out, their eyes shining like a cat who found something interesting. I should also keep an eye on You, little one you are running? I nod my head and say. What bastard are you? The old man looks bewildered at hearing my words as the other chimes in. No, what kind of person openly calls a beggar a bastard? The Demonic Gentleman says this. I dont know, you beggar. The man folds his hands and shakes his head. Your form isnt good. It is lame. If you run like that, your knees will give out. I stare at him. I know that too, you idiot. But I respond differently. Where does your intellect come from? You look like someone who hides in a tortoise shell. My words shock him. ! The beggar giggles. Uhahahaha. I look at the two of them with my arms crossed. I am now betting the luck of the Low Down Sect and have said some serious words. A strategic person who speaks nonsense. That is me! Chapter 107 Chapter 107 C Seeing The Two Hearing my words, both men appear in front of me at the same time. The wind makes theirs and my hair flutter. These people are trying to scare me off by showing off how good they are, but I know better than anyone about how fast they are. I glare at the two as I ruffle my messy hair. Showing off? The Demonic Gentleman chuckles. You are an interesting one. Werent you taught to respect your elders.? I nod. Never learned that. The man becomes silent. As his partner is embarrassed, the beggar now speaks. You didnt learn it? Do you know that people like you should read and learn a lot? No. You didnt learn anything. Not learning isnt a sin either. The Demonic Gentleman then snorts. Fine. This can happen too. But it sounds like you climbed quite a few cliffs. Let us do this. Let us compete to see who can climb the cliff faster. I will then respect you. The beggar chimes in as well. Nice. That sounds like a good way. You two should compete. These people are eager to show off their skills like children. It must be because they saw me do this climb just moments ago. I look at them with my arms crossed. Lets compete. To be honest, I am not someone to shy away from competition either. Moreover, these people are older than me and have trained for longer. This is especially true for those who only aim to be swift. If I compete directly against such people, there is a clear chance of me losing. Regardless, I just need to go a little further to recruit at least one of them into my sect. The Demonic Gentleman then asks. Why? Scared? I did think you might be. I speak back as if I have fully grasped their skills. Looking at you two you must have trained yourself to death. Then you should be pretty fast. This beggar here is a free-spirited man who must have increased his speed using internal and external skills. It is probably rare for him to have enemies. The other person, however I point to the Demonic Gentleman. Here. Your clothes are clean from head to toe. It is amazing. How should I say this? You arent the type to run wild. Like a gentleman walking with a stiff posture and leisure, you must be tapping into the internal qi and someone who is fast. As I speak, both of their expressions change. ! The two look at each other in shock as I finish my words. They cant help but be surprised as everything I say to them is correct. The old man has a shocked look on his face. Arent you quite observant? Quite good at it, strangely. You can tell all that by just looking? The well-dressed man is silent. The old man then asks. Then what are you? I wonder Actually, I do want to compete with you two, but The impatient old man then says. Then lets compete. It is simple. Why complicate things which are simple? I reach out my hand and wave it to the side. As if. Why? I continue to shake my hand and say. Ive only practiced martial arts in earnest for less than 3 years. What? ! This time the two of them are shocked, maybe even surprised at this. To be honest, I dont think they would believe me if I reduced the time any further, so I limited it to three years. The old man mumbles. No way. You are a great warrior, though? I shake my head. No, that isnt what is important. I learned martial arts to face someone, not to compete with your type of people. Since it has only been three years since I began to train, there is no way I can beat both of you. It wont happen. By looking at the two of you, your footwork is superior to mine. Ive already noticed it, so what should we do? But As I continue to use words to blur my intentions, the old man begins to look frustrated. But what? Tell me quickly. Why do you keep talking and blurring your words? So frustrating. I am becoming bored. I glance at the old man. Why is this man so slow at understanding? This old man has one of the fastest legs in Kangho. Thats probably why he doesnt have the patience to wait for others. But The old man looks at me and nods. Right. But say the following words. I go straight to the point. About footwork. It is a fascinating study. Dont say silly stuff. What now? The Demonic Gentleman then says. Do you know what you are saying? Shut it. Let me tell you something. If you stay still, it is difficult to talk. Tch. The old man becomes silent as I continue. at an important time to practice martial arts, what should I say about the training I occasionally do to let my stomach settle down? This might not sound the best The old man shakes his head. N-No. Do not drag this out. I nod my head. I feel frustrated, running makes me feel refreshed, and the madness around me seems to die. And I have subordinates, and I need to kill my enemies, so it would be right for me to focus more on martial arts. The Demonic Gentleman nods his head. That isnt wrong. That said, it is shocking that you are this skilled with footwork after learning martial arts only for three years on your own. The old man, too, nods his head. My words exactly. If it is three years, then we As the Demonic Gentleman glares at him, the old man goes silent. How can they reveal the existence of their society to a person theyve met just once? I pretend to care. This is because building my internal qi to go after footwork is important. So what I am saying is the truth in a way. But I am saying these words because I know their reaction. The Demonic Gentleman then asks. Your sect? I give him an answer. I am a man who learns martial arts alone. There is an affiliation, but that would be ambiguous since I am a captain. Really? Captain of which faction? I shake my head. Brothers, I cannot tell that. The old man frowns. No, why do you have so many secrets? I have a lot of enemies. The gentleman shows some interest and asks. And your enemies? I began to play with their curiosity. I cannot let you know. Why? At this point, I choose to act like some great man with tremendous power and information. Looking at you two The old man says impatiently. What now? What do you see now? You are a warrior of the Beggars Union, and anyone can see that. How did you know? Ah, I get it. Right, I am from there. And I then look at the other person. The man looks at me in anticipation. Right. Which side do I belong to, according to you? I look at the man and sigh. I dont know. I really dont know. Actually, I do know. Unfortunate. From the clothes, the eyes, the form, and breathing, you look like a warrior of a prestigious Orthodox Sect But Somehow, the aura which you exude seems different. This means that you arent from the Orthodox side. And if you are a disciple of a leader it doesnt seem like that. And if it isnt one of those three The old man asks. Why are sect families excluded? There are warriors as skilled as him in there too. I ask him back. Have you ever seen the young master of such a sects family walk around in such robes? I have not. If you havent, then I will tell you. People of those sect families wear similar clothes and have similar haircuts. They even put powder on their faces to deceive women. We dont see that on the Unorthodox side either. I dont know. Rarely, I dont know about this. As I continue to talk, the Demonic Gentleman smiles. I then look at them as they both look happy. The old man says. Fine. Ugh The Demonic Gentleman snorts and smiles. Anyway, young friend, you are good, I would like to see more of you, but I cannot force you. The old man nods as well. Unfortunate. The man continues. Are you planning to continue training in the future? I shake my head. I am sorry, but I am being treated right now. Treated? The old man looks worried. No, but why? You look fine, so treatment for what? This young man is sick? I take a deep breath. The old mans words are so fast, seeking understanding as he looks at me with shocked eyes. I grab my chest with my hand. I am suffering from insanity due to madness. And The old man asks. And?! What?! I tap at my dantian. I learned unharmonious martial arts, so my mind fluctuates. The extreme polar qis are imbalanced, and, in particular, the yang qi is affecting my whole body and causes outbreaks. The Demonic Gentleman looks at me with shock. No wait did you say you have the yin and yang qi in extremes? I look at them and continue my serious act. Can that not happen? No, it is a rare thing. I learned from a physician who I know that my body is a Yin Yang Body. The men look even more shocked. Yin Yang body? The old man says. Oh, shocking. That is a body that has to be destined by heaven is this why you achieved this level of mastery in just three years? What do you think? Is it possible? The demonic gentleman shuts his eyes, leaving me to wonder. This man has extensive knowledge of martial arts. He must have read many martial art books and must understand how rare having such a body is. The man then asks. Then maybe I respond to his silent question right away. It is difficult. How can I hand my body to someone I am meeting for the first time? It is quite difficult. The man pulls back his hand. Right. I let out a sigh and look out over the gorge. Man. Again What a beautiful place this is. After being filled with madness and further training here, I wanted to run. It is just a gorge, right? I wanted to call this the peace-giving gorge. I want to visit various famous mountains which have rough terrains. If only I could raise the level even more and take a huge leap martial arts are known to not end, and if there is an infinite realm that cannot be counted as the end for footwork, I want to touch that. What do you two think? The old man nods in admiration. You are right. There is no end to footwork. My name is the Dull Man, as there are still a few people faster than me. I nod my head as he gives out his title. Dull Man hyung, nice to meet you. My tone changes as the old man smiles. Ahm, this is nice. Because of his affiliation to his sect, the other man cannot give out his name. Naturally, if he gives out his title at this point, then anyone would know what group he belongs to. And the Demonic Gentleman asks. How can that be resolved according to the physician? I cross my arms and begin to act further. He said it is quite difficult. Say it. I deliberately reveal the name of Moyong Baek as he has credibility. Moyong Baek said that this madness within me is caused by the dissonance between the two qi. He said that this can only be solved through a reaction that starts by balancing my body, dantian, and qi in succession. So I first learned martial arts before improving my internal qi with Yang energy. There were a few changes. However, after using that method, I have no choice but to deal with my body constantly. I would need to cut bones and cough up blood. He said this is the way to correct the disharmony within me. I look at the sky with distant eyes. And the man says. Right. You are in quite a strange state. The man who is curious about my Yin and Yang state looks like he might die from curiosity. The old man just looks like he wants to compete. This psychological warfare is going well. A truly nice battle. But more importantly, its time to finish it. As I have turned myself into a mystery, I decide to leave. Then, lets meet again. I have a lot of work to do. The Demonic Gentleman frowns. Little brother, wouldnt it make sense to tell us your name? It isnt like we have any bad intentions toward you. The old man speaks in a nervous tone. That is right. I am a man of the Beggars Union. I cannot stand it when I am treated like this. And the name of Beggars Union isnt so light, right? I nod my head and say. Of course, I will think about it. I turn my back to them to do my best with all my might. I stretch out like a man using both my external and internal qi. This is to impress those two. Instead of moving away at tremendous speed, I choose this timing to reveal my identity. Low Down Sect leader. That is My words cant be ignored despite my fast speed. Anyway, they have enough intelligence that they wouldnt miss this. They will be able to find me. Chapter 108 Chapter 108 C Genius, Genius, Genius On a particular day, the Demonic Gentleman looks down at the Low Down Sect with awe in his eyes and waves his folding fan. [Moyong] You did well. The Demonic Gentleman suddenly comes to visit the Moyong Family at a place that he recognizes Moyong Baek to be. The man sits down, and Moyong Baek asks in a low tone. For what reason have you come here? After that question was asked, the two engaged in a staring contest. Moyong Baek realizes at once that this opponent is from Kangho, which means that he is a warrior, but he chooses to say nothing. Putting his fan on the table, the Demonic Gentleman responds. To be honest, I came here because I had business with you, doctor. I will listen and decide. The man takes out a book and places it on the table. After we talk, I think this should be passed on to you. What book is this? I beg your pardon. I will tell you after we are done with our talk. Moyong Baek responds with a shaky voice. I am not caught up in something bad, right? The man nods. You arent. Then speak. I will listen. Moyong Baek realizes that the man in front of him isnt ordinary. The Demonic Gentleman holds out his hand. First, check my pulse. I have come to a physicians place after all. Moyong Baek places his middle and index fingers on the mans wrist. The Demonic Gentleman asks. How is it? Moyong Baek releases his hand and then says. No big deal. No, it is perfect. Just get up for a moment. This surprises the Demonic Gentleman. You mean to stand up? Yes. Just stand. As Moyong Baek had asked him to stand up, the man complied. I am sorry but please spin around once slowly. Since the man has a pleasant disposition, he follows the requests with little question. Moyong Baek then nods and points for him to sit down. Moyong Baek then says. You are healthy. However, the neck, shoulder, waist, and pelvis lines are no good since you seem to hold a certain posture for a long time. And I think you use your legs too much, so it is natural for the upper and lower body to be unbalanced. The Demonic Gentleman touches his neck and asks. Why is my neck a problem? You must be someone who reads books. Hmm. Come closer. I need to see your eyes. As he moves forward slightly, Moyong Baek checks his eyes before stretching out his hand to press his shoulder. How is this? The Demonic Gentleman responds by saying. Hurts. Moyong Baek explains the mans state while tracing various shapes with his hands. First of all, your posture while reading is too right. The muscles in the place I touched, and the neck bones are like this you might contract headaches because your neck is curved. Your eyes look exhausted. Are you practicing light footwork? To which the Demonic Gentleman asks. How did you know? Moyong Baek smiles. I was just guessing. You have been training for a long time with your back. It might not be a huge deal, but if you continue to do this while in this state for another three to four years, the pain your body will go through is too much. And it wouldnt be just a small trouble. You are practicing martial arts, so you need to pay attention to little things. Things can be corrected within a year. Just one year?? Since you practice martial arts, I shortened the time. How do you judge that I practice martial arts? Didnt I check your pulse? Did the physician check my internal qi then as well? It wasnt just your internal qi, but I also looked at your internal flow. After his suspicion is cleared, the Demonic Gentleman looks at Moyong Baek. So it wasnt just a name. As he thinks this, he looks at the man in a new light. The Demonic Gentleman then speaks in a calm tone. Doctor, do teach me. I want to fix my body. Actually, since you have been practicing martial arts for a long time, you might already know how. It is a matter of cognition. All you have to do is sit straight and run right. The words might be simple to say, but the execution of it is painful, and it is often difficult to solve with willpower alone. The Demonic Gentleman nods. Such a nice answer. He stretches his back and moves his back, causing a cracking sound. Moyong Baek smiles. Now, lets hear your real purpose. He nods and then speaks after arranging his thoughts. Do you know the Low Down Sect leader? Yes. I met him the other day, and he said you were like his brother. Is that right? Moyong Baek responds with a calm expression. It isnt exactly like brother Ah, it was a lie? Its actually quite ambiguous. I will drop everything and run over to treat him if he ever gets seriously injured. If the Moyong family ever faced difficulties, he would come anytime. The titles of doctor and sect leader are of mutual significance, but the expression of brother is also not an exaggeration. I see. Then is the Low Down Sect suffering? This time Moyong Baek does not answer. Instead, he responds with a question. Is my customer the enemy of the Low Down sect? The man chuckles. I dont know why you would think so. What would you do if I am an enemy? Moyong Baek strokes his chin. I will be in trouble. Well, it isnt that. Enemy again, I came here to ask for a favor. I have a rather difficult problem and wanted to discuss it with you. Thank god. What exactly is the condition of the Low Down Sect leader? Moyong Baek looks at the book and says He is manic, bipolar. Bipolar? Is it serious? I dont know for sure, despite being a physician. Why is that? Because all Im aware of is his manic condition. It is complicated. There is a psychological side, and it is connected to martial arts. It isnt like there are any side effects. It is also connected with his hearts aspirations. A vague sense of loss, melancholy, and behavior is also tied to a mask. Masks? I am not talking about an actual mask, but a psychological feeling which changes people in certain situations. In certain situations It happens during fights. I am quite interested in him. Not only because he is my patient but also as someone with a rare character. So I often ask him about his activities and the people he fights. Its not because he is a patient, but also someone with a kind of righteousness. And where does he fight? Well, here and there. According to his subordinates and other people, hes just picking fights. So Crazy? Yes. Its not the case with all members of the Low Down Sect? Only the sect leader is like that. Ha! So what kind of force is the Low Down Sect? What do you think about it? Did you search about it? I had to sell my feets sanity for a few days. I thought that it was just a simple Unorthodox sect. Its not like I dont know what that means. You havent had a long talk with the sect leader, then. Yes. Moyong Baek explains. The Low Down Sect isnt Unorthodox. But it matches all the This is difficult for me to explain. Ask him when you get the chance. In any case, I know that the sect leader doesnt take money. He is someone who targets Unorthodox groups and then receives rewards from merchants and workers, no matter how much they give. He will then kill the other sects leaders and absorb their troops. He doesnt simply absorb them either but would leave them alive or send them away. In a way, he is asking them to find something else to do. The rules arent strict to be honest, theyre like shit. However, despite knowing that situation, he continued to act like that. Do you understand now? In the future, many other groups would fall to him. Ah is that so? Yes. As I understand it, this process would inevitably leave only those at the bottom with nowhere else to go to gather by his side. That is probably why the Low Down Sect is so unnatural. The mans thoughts become filled as Moyong Bake tells him many things. Right, he is a person who has strange thoughts. The Demonic Gentleman then asks. Then, doctor, are you part of the Low Down Sect? I am not someone who can do that. As you can see, I belong to the Moyong family. Ah, so you are not? Moyong Baek chuckles. The sect leader might think of me as one of his own. Even though I am not someone who can belong to it. The Demonic Gentleman looks at the goosebumps on his arm. Ah, is it such a place? Then it will become a much greater force than now. It will probably keep getting bigger. Moyong Baek points to the book. Anything more to say? The Demonic Gentleman looks at the book that he has forgotten. Ah, I need to explain I will be sure of one thing. Hearing my story can put you in danger. Can we gain something without being in danger? To which the Demonic Gentleman then says. Perhaps this can cure the sect leaders disease. Only then did Moyong Baek realizes that this opponent wasnt normal. It is because he is only responding after knowing his reactions. This man, he isnt an easy opponent. Moyong Baek sighs and answers. I will listen. The man nods. Good. Dont worry too much. The Demonic Gentleman says this while he strokes the book in his hand. This is a demonic art. A fairly old and tricky one at that. Moyong Baek takes a deep sigh. I already feel the danger. Why did a man who looks like a scholar from an eminence family of the Orthodox Faction have a book of demonic arts with him? This is not something that Moyong Baek could have foreseen. Moyong Baek then says. You might have to explain in detail. And then the man explains. After I met with the Low Down sect leader, I also came to look for this book on a hunch, as if possessed by something. I heard that he has a Yin Yang body, right? Yes. It is said that dissonance between the yin and yang leads to an imbalance, which is the cause of his extreme manic nature. He can train in this skill, the Ice Arts. Hm Do you know why the Ice Arts have disappeared from the world? I dont know. There are simply not enough materials that could support it. Pills and liquids containing yang energy are rare, but they exist. However, those who need to learn Yin martial arts are lacking. It is also difficult to develop them. It is rare for people to have such a body, after all. Very few succeeded, so the number of people continues to decrease. Wouldnt the Demonic Sect use it often? In the Demonic Sect, pills and elixirs are rare and hard to find. How much stronger would we get if we were lucky enough to eat just one root of the snow ginseng? So we try to supplement the Yin Qi in other ways, but it is done by people who are fine with this. Do you know what I mean? I do not understand. Is it not a martial art that can be strengthened through cultivation? It is possible. It is just slow. So slow that no one would like to do it only to get exhausted. Are you saying it takes a humans innate qi and absorbs it? It is something similar to that. We often find that it is the cause of such things and start supplementing it with pills. In the end, not many choose the means or methods to learn this type of martial arts. Moyong Baek listens to the story with a gentle expression and then points with his finger. Is that the same too? The man smiles. You need to listen till the end. If it is written down, why would I choose to come here to you at all then? Erasing the inhuman methods of using people to make pills and deleting the parts which dont fit the habit of others. Can you summarize it in a way that draws out the essence of yin and then deliver it to the sect leader? The doctor can use it as an ice qi generation method and then deliver it to the sect leader. Moyong Baek tilts his head. Some parts make sense, and some dont. You will see it. How can I be the one asked to do it? Well, anyway, it will be helpful to the sect leader. I know that his condition is strange. Moyong Baek holds out his hands. But why would you want to help the sect leader? I dont know if there is any motive. The Demonic Gentleman smiles. This is such a delayed question. I really applaud your patience. If I tell the truth, maybe you might understand. I will listen. The Demonic Gentleman opens his mouth while organizing his thoughts. What should I call this feeling? I I want to see if the sect leader is a better genius than me. Moyong Baek suddenly comes to his senses and finally looks at the man. A truly unusual, arrogant maniac is looking at him. This arrogant person continues to speak with a gentle expression. Doctor Moyong, you might understand my heart. The man smiles confidently. Because we are not the ones shackled by common sense, right? Moyong Baek then looks at the book again, his mind filled with complex thoughts. Chapter 109 Chapter 109 C Didnt Get That From Seeing It? Are you busy? I have some work to do. I have come to visit the Moyong Family after finishing up with the Baijian Society. This is because, according to Manager Byeok, Moyong Baek had visited the Black Rabbit Union several times with a tired face. I sigh as I sit down and look at Moyong Baeks face. Doctor, why does your face look like that? Moyon Baek forces a smile and says. I seem to be studying a bit too hard. I look at his expression. I, too, lived with studying and working, and I know that this face is not from studying. It looks like you used too much of your mind, like something happened. I look at his library. Books in high places arent usually touched, but his books have visible handprints on their dusty covers. Probably because a couple of books were taken out. What is this guy suddenly studying? Anyway, Moyong Baek isnt looking well. The condition of my physician doesnt seem good. Who will you even treat like this? I think you should lie down and rest. Moyong Baek continues to smile. I am just a little tired. Doctor. Yes. Hurry up and tell me everything. Moyong Baek nods and changes the topic. I see youve been busy recently. I dropped by the Black Rabbit Union several times but didnt find you there. I give him a brief explanation of what Ive been doing. Some people kept sending assassins after me, so I went to find them. While I didnt find the assassins, the faction that hired them has been wiped out. Right now, my men are carrying out the rest of my orders. Seems like a pretty large force. Theyre the Baijian Society. Ive heard of them. I stop talking as I notice Moyong Baeks pale skin. Its clear that today is the day I have to find out what happened to him. Moyong Baek doesnt seem to want to speak about it. Doctor Moyong. Yes. Lets talk about everything. Why did you have to use so much of your life force? I need to know. Of course, I have to speak. Moyong Baek picks up a book and places it on the table. I received a manual for the Ice Arts. I nod my head and cross my arms. Right. And? Moyong Baek continues, slightly shocked. Arent you surprised? Ice Arts is Ice Arts. Do I have any reason to be surprised? Keep talking. You received it and? Of course, I thought it would be good to hand this over to you, sect leader. Once I began reading, though, it felt strangely similar to a book that once spoke about internal qi and medicine. Right. I checked to see if there was anything that could harm the sect leader. But was there anything that could harm me? Moyong Baek points his finger at the book. If you want to raise the level of your Ice Qi, there is a technique for it. It is something similar to harvesting yin to nourish the yang. To harvest means to dig into, and when you dig into something, it is bound to die. In other words, this method implies the necessity to kill people to become stronger. It is not described in detail, but the creator of this martial art completed it by filling it naturally. In other words, this is not a martial arts manual but closer to a diary. I have edited out all of the unnecessary processes Doctor, doctor Moyong Yes? Drink a glass of water. Slowly Moyong Baek looks at me as I pour him some water. I wanted to make it right, but it wasnt easy. Because the content of the diary is quite intertwined. So? I feel a bit bad for all hes done, but I continue to listen. In the end, I visited you several times, but you werent there, so I was studying alone. I nod. So that happened. It seems like the other method was also cruel? Yes. This is a book written by someone from Kangho who isnt just cruel but also incapable of feeling sympathy or remorse. The book is not detailed, but I cant even imagine how many they killed. I felt depressed while reading this. I now understand the situation. So this is a demonic art. Yes. Did the guy who brought this come while waving a fan? How do you know this? He asked me to keep it a secret. If you really thought I wouldnt know, then you underestimated me. Seems like that guy had left, though. It wouldnt have been difficult for him to get the book since he is a member of the Demonic Sect. However, if he secretly stole it, then it wouldnt be strange if he was kicked out. But since that man is the Demonic Gentleman, he probably has enough power to silence anyone who might complain. That means something similar probably happened in my previous life too. However, Moyong Baeks condition is more important to me right now. I sit while clenching my chin and ask him again. How old are you to simply tap into the life force? Doctor, you are one unpredictable person. Yes. It was because I was angry. I am a physician who has to save people, and as I read the diary of a person who kills another without hesitation more and more, I You? I was so angry that I couldnt sleep. I also wondered what is the use of the medicine that I am studying if it cannot be useful. And And now Moyong Baek is revealing his true intentions. Actually, I have been thinking this whole time to find that person and kill him if he was alive. I nod. I have no choice now but to respond to him. Right. It has to be poison. There is only a paper-thin difference between good and bad intentions. This man can also change at any time. This is because that paper boundary is thinner than a persons thoughts. I made up my mind to scold him a little. Of course, I also need to do it strategically since I dearly value our relationship. As I devise my strategy Moyong Baek, who isnt in a good state, asks me. Leader, this guy must already be dead, right? Dead. When did he die? Can I see it once? I hold the book left by Demonic Gentleman and then mumble as I read through it. Why are you talking so much? Phew, the weather is nice. Ice Arts is a branch of Yin cultivation, and it is divided into Coldness and Ice. The purpose of Cold Qi is to spread cold energy around you. If anyone uses this, nine out of ten are sure to suffer. However, since the Ice Qi will exude coldness outside the body, it can be used to freely target whoever you want across a wide area. Moon Shadow Martial Arts Doctor, this Ice Art. Yes It is made by a woman. Moyong Baek responds with surprise. Uh? There was no mention of that, though? No, it was definitely made by a woman. The Moon Shadow Martial Arts. The moons shadow is ruthless, but the woman also seems to have suffered a series of misfortunes, specifically from ugly men who depended on alcohol. If this is an Ice Art, she probably reached enlightenment for it while drinking under the moonlight. I understand it. However, the shadow of the moon is heartless, you know? This is not a sentiment made by a man. Just looking at it, doesnt it seem like something a woman would do? Couldnt you tell with just one look? Moyong Baek answers me simply. Right. Looking at it further, it seems like this is a martial art used to take revenge. Moyong Baek is shocked once more. Uh? No, there was no mention of revenge? No, listen to me carefully. Who would take revenge on someone using Ice Arts? Was this person the best in the world? No. I definitely think this was made with a target for revenge in mind. They must also possess tremendous power and strong martial arts. Maybe almost the best in the world? It would have been impossible to defeat them using normal martial arts. They must have been a man with a good reputation and difficult to reach. Perhaps a great swordsman or some kind of leader. This woman must also have been very beautiful. What is this, all of a sudden? Moyong Baek visibly gives up and continues to listen to me. She was definitely quite the beautiful woman. She must have been trained in martial arts too. The man approached her and made love to her. The woman was happy, thinking they would be together for the rest of their lives. When the man left her for another how was she supposed to forget those memories? To erase those happy moments? The man must have looked down on this woman. Thats why all of this is written in such dull and clear writing, made under the heartless light of the moon. Moyong Baek looks at the handwriting further. The handwriting is really clean This is the handwriting of Wei Ryong-ha, one of the Demonic Sects Great Warriors. Are you just guessing? Do you know her? I do. Wasnt she a young disciple of the Demonic Sect who challenged the men of Kunlun? Come to think of it, she was described as being like a typhoon. I know that someone named Wei Ryong-ha had destroyed the Kunlun Sect. Only after their annihilation did she become associated with the Demonic Cult. Where in the world were the people who would call her that? Someone else could have accepted her martial arts or become her successor. Moyong Baek is now confused as to how the record of her skills has come to be here. Come to think of it, the man who brought this here also had bad posture and looked like he was overly well-read. His eyes were tired too. Doctor Moyong. Yes? I look at him. I am not the Demonic Cults Great Warrior. There is no need for such a method. There is no need to hurt people by performing the evil deeds written in this book. There are many ways to become stronger. If the doctor is this restless I grab the book and shake it. Id rather burn this. Moyong Baek is startled and holds out his hand. Ah, dont do that. I understand. Dont burn it! I will not read it anymore. Really? Yes. I speak in a blunt tone as I put the book down. There are many evils in this world that we do not understand. This is why I am busy running around killing all the bad people. I will be the one to throw them into the fire. Those who drink alcohol, those who view people as things, and those who do not regard people as people. I will take them all to hell. Yes. Doctor just needs to calm down and look after his patients. Killing is what I do, okay? I look into his eyes as he responds. I understand. But, leader, do you understand the intention of the man who brought this book? I do. What is it? They want to compete with me using our footwork. He is a crazy one. Did you compete with him? No, I avoided his challenge since I know he is faster than me right now. This means that I can learn properly and compete equally later. What happens if he wins then? He seemed strong. I smile. Well Yes. I will be happy. You will celebrate defeat? Yes, Ill be happy to gain motivation to train. Victory is something you always keep striving for. Someday, he would come back and rechallenge me with a smile. Who would win, then? I am a man who wont be defeated by a bookworm, a running addict, a calm man. Moyong Baek nods his head. So cool. I grab the book and shake it again. If we cannot learn Ice Arts normally, then lets just burn this without regrets. Ice or not this is just one of many martial arts. Yes. Actually, I dont even need to develop using all of the paths. I dont even need pills. It is enough to use the qi stored in my body, but I cannot tell Moyong Baek this. I then point to him and order him in a commanding voice. Enough for today. Now go and sleep. I will. Go now. I am going to meditate here today so tell the maids to close the doors too. For today I will stand guard. Unlike my previous life, Moyong Baek is afraid of the Demonic Gentleman because he doesnt have an in-depth understanding of martial arts. He is also angry at himself for this fear. The reason for being angry is simple. As a physician, he only has a short time to learn martial arts. However, this is because he is more confident than most when it comes to martial arts. The psychology of a person is mysterious, and the flow of it is different from common sense. I will now cultivate here while Moyong Baek sleeps. I sit cross-legged on the bed used for patients. Because I am a patient, I feel comfortable here. Many female helpers are moving around, so I close my eyes and open my mouth. Noisy. I need to cultivate, so, please be quiet. Why dont I hear an answer? We understand, leader. A man who cultivates while standing guard . . . I can hear Moyong Baek mumble in his sleep. you must be tired. You should go and rest too. Sit down and snore. Shh. Chapter 110 Chapter 110 C Ice Arts Are Nothing Anyway, I slept well. . . . What are you looking at so intently? I am holding the Shadow Moon Martial Arts manual in my left hand and my chopsticks in my right hand. I respond to Cha Sung-taes question. What? What are you looking at so intently? I dont know if you will put rice in your mouth or nose. I give him a brief response. Nothing much. If it is nothing muc I put the book down and focus on my food. Lets eat. Most of my subordinates had left to deal with the issue of the Baijian Society. Only a few warriors are left in the Black Rabbit Union, including Cha Sung-tae, Ho Yeon-chun, and Manager Byeok. Cha Sung-tae then asks. Can I see that? No. Does he think this book is a magic book or something? I plan to burn the book once I gain an understanding of its contents. Since even the Black Rabbit Union had a hard time dealing with it, this book is bound to create trouble. However, I am not the kind of person who will be shaken up by the diary of a woman with a broken heart. I have too many problems, to begin with. In the past, there were many people like this. The leader of the cult that I want to kill is probably not much different from Wei Ryong-ha. She is a real person who resides in the White Moon Fort, which is located in Mount Kunlun. As I mentioned earlier, the Kunlun Sect was annihilated, and another force took its place. It is honestly disgusting since the Demonic Cult has dipped its fingers there. Well, they often do despicable things, which is why many of their opponents become trash. Anyways, since it happened in the western side of Kangho, far from the Central Plains, the truth can be easily hidden. The incident happened too far back in the past, so how would they cover it up? Perhaps if there was a survivor who lived through it It would mean that any such survivor would have walked on the path of the Demonic Sect from birth. Therefore, I believe that the longer an Orthodox Faction group exists, the more hypocritical its path becomes. The Kunlun Sects leader, who once fought for the title of the best in the world, moved to the central plains and became head of the Murim Alliance. Then he gave up his position in the Murim Alliance and reached back out to Kunlun at some point in time. The title of the First Sword of the World belongs to Kunlun. The Blue Sea is a place filled with power, so many Orthodox and Unorthodox sects and people are intertwined in it. Among them, Kunlun still holds a powerful position. Even if the rest of the factions unite, it is difficult to defeat the Kunlun Sect. Even with that woman who had gone through so many difficulties, the strength of Kunlun will still make anyone tremble. I still need to compete with such kinds of people later. People of the Kunlun Sect will also appear one after another to aim for the title of the best in the world. There will be more of them nowadays since people are having difficulty getting titles. . . . I reread the book while eating my food and then continue reading it under the plum tree. After a while, I am immersed in thought and read it for a third time before burning it. With this, the Shadow Moon Martial Arts vanishes from existence. If Wei Ryong-ha is still alive and her victims survived, I plan to one day go and kill her. However, she is already dead. Im not sure what this relationship is, but I have now learned her martial arts. I greet her as I think of her spirit. Even though this martial art was created for revenge, I will honor you for letting me learn this martial art by beating those hypocrites in the future. Perhaps it was beautiful Senior Wei Ryong-ha, are you listening? Since I dont have the talent to speak to ghosts, I immediately stop doing it. Anyway, after learning this art, I plan to kill anyone who can be an enemy. I look at the fluttering plum blossoms for a moment. This is the time to perfectly understand what martial arts is. Itll be difficult to do if assassins come by again, so I have no choice but to make my move. General Cha. Yes, leader. Follow me. Yes. I speak to Cha Sung-tae while sitting cross-legged in the largest room in the union. I am trying to learn a new martial art, but I dont know how long it will take. This is important to me. Cha Sung-tae looks at me with a serious expression. Um. You are the guard. Do I stand outside? No, stay here. If something happens, you take care of it. Alright. After closing my eyes, I begin to cultivate using the Shadow Moons method. The introductory steps have to be done correctly. Of course, this is because I may come across something nice along the way. Since this is a technique made by a woman, it may cause changes in my mindset. I will only give up this martial art without regret if I decide to run to death. The introductory steps are simple. This martial art is different starting from the way it draws in power. This isnt a path I decided on, but it is what this martial arts need. First, the route is established to allow the qi to move back and forth. This is a breakout method. The type of qi coming out of the body is rare. I quickly finished my understanding of this step. The next thing I need to do is similar in concept to drilling a hole in a rice paddy field. This part is a bit difficult. You have to strike the heavenly point to create a place for it. Then, I need to induce qi into this pre-established point and circulate it before ending the cycle. Once this process connects smoothly, the qi is accumulated in the dantian and can be used whenever I want. This is known to be a difficult process, but something Ive done a variation of in my past life. I proceed with the exploration, establishment, and point opening without much effort. As soon as I am done, I let go of my greed to push any further and open my eyes. Cha Sung-tae looks shocked. Are you done? I nod. Yes. You learned the new martial arts? Probably. Show me. Should I? I take a dagger out of my pocket. This new martial art is divided into three phases. The new moon, half moon, and full moon. These are the words to distinguish the coldness of the qi. Naturally, after just completing the learning process, I am now in the state of a new moon. Im in a situation where I dont really know how things will turn out, but I infuse the qi into my dagger. A faint cold aura can be seen on the blade as the blades tip becomes covered in frost. Cha Sung-tae looks shocked. Is that Ice Arts? Yes. Then the book earlier? I burned it. Then the leader will not teach it to me? Sung-tae. Yes. This martial art is very difficult. No, but you closed your eyes and then opened them after saying it was done. I tell him with a severe expression. Its not a lie. That moment I closed my eyes felt like an eternity. Cha Sung-tae, who feels a sense of foreboding, becomes silent. I wont learn. Alright. In terms of style, it is the best one. Practice it with effort. Do you want to learn a swordsmanship style with no use and just swing it around? Wow What? You just stood up with a serious attitude, and now you are acting like this? Sung-tae, this is the Ice Arts that I obtained after Moyong Baek spent days and nights researching it. This is to protect the Low Down Sect, the warriors, and Kanghos well-being and peace. Did you think I learned this for my own greed or vanity? Cha Sung-tae nods his head. Yes. I sigh. Lets not talk. Its just a joke. Congratulations, okay? How strong have you become now? This is just the start. I mean that, literally. Ive never used this kind of qi, so how the hell am I supposed to know how to use it? For now, I just need to repeat the same thing for one week and raise the level to half-moon. I have to balance it to some extent to see any change. In any case, I can now use fire on one hand and ice on another. After letting Cha Sung-tae leave the room, I fell into my thoughts for a while. If If only I could harmonize it with others. If all of it can be unleashed in a single martial art. What kind of nonsense is this? The reason for this absurd idea is simple. This is because my body is harmonious with both yin and yang. Since I already know a technique to deal with yang qi, it will be nice if I can manage to master this skill to deal with yin qi. Dividing two types of qi into both of my hands might be a bit odd. Therefore, I decided to perfect the Ice Arts so I can make my body easily use two different qi. Once this is done, I can name it the Sun and Moon Divine Arts. But. Instead of using the two opposing forces separately What if I use both of them at the same time? Like the intersection of the sun and moon? Since imagination has no bounds, it might be nice. That short time when the sun sets and the moon begins to rise The purple light created by the coexistence of Yin and Yang will cover the world. A martial artist that will reach a different level will be born. Naturally, I will name it the Zaha Divine Arts. It is a new technique that blooms in me. Therefore, what I said to Moyong Baek is not a lie. Ice Arts are nothing. Especially when compared to the Zaha Divine Arts I go outside and sit cross-legged on the tallest roof in the Black Rabbit Union and watch the world as it changes colors. I am not good-natured. I live with suffering and madness. Even though I am a man who changes his thoughts dozens of times a day. Even though I do this and that, most things in my world are still decided by my thoughts. No matter how big the Low Down Sect grows One day, when I die, there has to be a leader that is stronger than me to lead it. If only low-level people are left, it will just become an average sect one day. However, the influence will rise when they can wield the force of gods that is strong enough to cover the world. I need to live for a long time I need to raise a disciple capable enough to spread the influence of the Low Down Sect. If that disciple increases the clans power again, my influence will not disappear easily. I will sweep away the evil guys and lead them into the pit of fire. If my disciple can manage to rise to the brightest position in Kangho and make people admire him What I do will intersect and create a harmony between light and dark. Heaven has given me another chance. Therefore, I need to live with big ambitions. Because my aspirations are that great It will be an extremely absurd story, an errand boy becoming the number one in the world. As I gaze up at the sky and drown in my thoughts The world is dyed purple as if it wants to meet me. I welcome it right into my heart. Today is the day I acknowledge the madness which dwells within me. The madness I harbor will not return to sanity. Yet today is the day that my heart feels at true peace. I am Zaha. Where light and darkness coexist My existence is only under the heaven. Chapter 111 Chapter 111 C Spar In The Elegant Jade Pavilion It has been 50 days since I left the Black Rabbit Union. Except for the Shadow Moon Martial Arts training, I have cut off all of my interest in worldly affairs. Since I am immersed in my training without being involved in any of the Low Down Sects work, Cha Sung-tae has no choice but to become the temporary leader and deal with any tasks. He then brings up the rules, which clearly state that I need to be involved in the worlds affairs. Unexpectedly, it is all because of news sent by the Sword Demon. The content inside is brief. [Elegant Jade Pavillion, Miyao Mountains The New Year is approaching. Business is happening in private. The number of observers on both sides is limited to two, and one seat is vacant, so you should come. Originally I thought of putting in my disciples, but then I thought of you. It will be a meaningful day if you come with me. Come and meet me. Waiting for our reunion at the Elegant Jade Pavilion. To the Baekeungji Swordsman of the Low Down Sect] I continue to read the letter over and over again. There is no doubt about the tone, the writing, and the words. Cha Sung-tae then asks me. Whats in it? I answer his question quickly. I am invited to Mount Miyao. It will be good to leave today. Will it take long? Should I come? I wish you could, but I have to be alone this time. Will something good happen from going there? I nod. I know that itll be a mess. Do not go there unless something serious happens. Even if people come looking for me, just tell them I left. Yes, you will leave right away? No. I need to take a bath first. Cha Sung-tae looks shocked. Oh? What? Is it a woman? Why are you taking a bath? I blink my eyes at him. He then bows immediately. I apologize. I put my hand over my chest and begin to recite. Peace of mind. Yes. My inner peace is like a river. Nice, nice. Quiet, I like it. The Sect Leader is changing more and more as the days pass. The dignity of a leader is slowly seeping into your body. That is wonderful, leader. I nod while I look at him while holding back my laughter and walk out of the hall. As I did, I hit him on the back of the head. Act in moderation. Cha Sung-tae rubs his head as he says. Come back safe, sect leader. I managed to arrive at the Elegant Jade Pavillion on the first day of the New Year while wearing clean attire. As soon as I arrive, I immediately recognize the person standing outside this hut-like place. Amazing. Only the most famous uniforms in Kangho can be seen here. A white robe with a character embroidered on the shoulders covered the wearer from top to bottom. As I approach the gates, the soldiers posted there halt me briefly. You are invited? I nod as I reply. Low Down Sect. The guards must have been informed in advance about the Low Down Sect leader. They looked surprised, however. Is it because I am young? I smile as I enter the pavilion. More merits for me. If the Murim Alliance is to investigate the Low Down Sect, they will only get information about how the various Unorthodox Faction sects got beaten up. This is the outcome I wanted. This is also the first time Ive come to this pavilion. It is so spacious that it looks more like a mansion. Soon, a man approaches me with his hand held out. Sect leader, I will guide you. I let him guide me and thankfully met up with the Sword Demon. Because of the Sword Demons actions, I might end up meeting with the Murim Alliance soon. It surely will be a mystery. Moyong Baek, who was practicing medicine now, was a master of poisons in my past life. In other words, since I am a martial artist that lacks the full knowledge, I dont dare to predict how this life will go. As I am guided to him, the Sword Demon looks at me. And he then says. You are here. Yes. Sit down. As I sit down, the man on the left asks the same thing. You are here? I ignore the question and directly ask the Sword Demon. The opponent? To which he responds. Alliance leader. I look around the empty place and then say. Why isnt he coming? If the guests are called, then shouldnt he be here too? The Sword Demon then gives a rare smile. The person on my left looks shocked at this. And he then says. Crazy. Is the alliance leader your friend? How dare a cub try to question a tiger? It is the Alliance leader. Be careful with your words and actions. I look to my left with some shock. You are a martial artist too, you bastard. Ah, fuck, so frustrating. It seems like he thought he still had some value here. The Sword Demon ignores the disciples words and asks me. How have you been? Nothing much happened. Training? I have been immersed in it lately. I didnt do anything to interrupt it, right? I shake my head. If its a spar, its only proper to break down any number of doors to come here. However, senior Go on. I heard you were injured, so why did you have to compete with the Alliance leader so quickly? The Sword Demon smiles. If the busiest man in the world wants to give me some time, I need to respond. Hmm. I am skilled enough to not get hurt, and I just need to endure through. If you two become stimulated after watching the spar, then there is meaning regardless of victory or defeat. I turn towards the person to my left as I have nothing to say. Suddenly, I feel immersed in my thoughts as my body clenches. I feel like I owe this to the Sword Demon. And the three people arrive. I am shocked as soon as I look at the alliance leader. Wow, I was shocked for a second there. He really is the leader. Since Ive returned to the past, it is only natural for this man to be younger too. As I only remember the face Ive seen before, I am surprised to see that this man is still in his youth. He has more black hair than gray, and his face looks younger despite holding the same blunt expressions. Im Sobaek, the Murim Alliance leader. Swordsman. Chivalrous spirit. And the man I hated the most. I know this is my first time seeing his face up close in this life, considering Ive only once seen him from a distance. Im Sobaek takes his place at the head, and his followers stand on his right and left. Im Sobaek opens his mouth. I see Sword Demon. Are these two your observers? As you can see. Are you the second son of the Mong family? The one on the left gets up and says. Mong Yeon of the Mong family greets the Alliance leader. Its my first time hearing this guys name too. Im Sobaek nods his head to the left guy. There was a rumor that you are the strongest among his disciples. To which the guy answers. Among the disciples, yes. Right. Then when will you come to the Murim Alliance? I will give you a position. Normally you need to swear allegiance, but for you, I can just make a spot. Ah Lefty panics, as the Sword Demon says. Leader Im, he is still in training, so lets talk about it later. Im Sobaek then looks at left Mong again. What we usually do is train. Even after you join us, you will have enough time to train. Lefty then bows his head. I will remember that. And then he turns to me. Nice to meet you, Low Down Sect leader Lee Zaha. I reply to him without much thought. Same here. The atmosphere immediately turns sour. I watch the peoples faces around me. The Sword Demon and his disciple are both looking at me. The young men on the right and left side of the alliance leader are also staring at my face. Im Sobaek doesnt seem very surprised and then asks the man next to him. What does the Low Down Sect do, though? It is just a sect that operates regardless of region. Are you sure? There is very little information on it. There were rumors that he dealt with the Unorthodox side. I see. Im Sobaek then asks the Sword Demon. Why is this friend observing? To which he responds. Because he has great skills. If so, should I find out? He is still young, so I dont know about that. Im Sobaek nods his head. Right. Anyway, what are we going to fight with? Are we using swords? There were rumors that you were hurt by the cult leader, so dont overdo it. We can compete often when the time comes. The Sword Demon then responds. Wooden sword. Im Sobaek nods again. Wooden swords. Go and get it. One of the young men set off to bring some wooden swords for the duel. Im Sobaek then says to the Sword Demon. You, if you lose, come to the Murim Alliance. The Sword Demon responds. What can I even do there? What could you do? Teach the kids. I refuse. If you refuse, I cannot guarantee what happens next. Lets think about it. If you win, is there anything you want me to do? Give me a pill. Im Sobaek nods and then tells the other young man. Fine. If I lose, I will give the best one I have to the Sword Demon. Yes, leader. Im Sobaek then says to the Sword Demon. Lets go. Everyone gets up from their seats. I sigh slightly as I step out. No matter how anyone looks at this, the Sword Demon would not win. It was my first time seeing Im Sobaek this closeup, but he wasnt someone who looked weak in any aspect. But its not just me who has realized this. Even the Sword Demon and his disciples have realized this as their expressions are dark. As we leave the pavilion, Im Sobaek asks me. Why are you sighing, Low Down Sect leader? It is my heart which sighs. It can be your heart, but I am asking since I am curious. I respond to his words. I sigh because I think that this side will lose. Im Sobaek nods. If you think that the person you are cheering for is going to lose, then sighing is inevitable. However, there is no need to attach deep meaning to victory or defeat as this duel is being done with wooden swords. The young man who has returned with the wooden swords then hands them over to Im Sobaek. Leader. Im Sobaek grabs one as the young man hands the other to the Sword Demon. Im Sobaek holds the wooden sword and then says. Everyone move. Only he and the Sword Demon remain in the center as the rest of us observers move back. Im Sobaek asks. Sword Demon, are you ready? After which, he proceeds to widen the distance between them and increase the power of his sword. Im Sobaek then tells him. Take it slow. I will wait. The Sword Demon stares at Im Sobaek with his mouth shut. Im Sobaek, on the other hand, is looking around the place as if his thoughts are elsewhere. He then looks at the disciple and me. A man with no concerns. I cross my arms as I look at both of them. The Sword Demon is motionless as if the world has stopped while Im Sobaek is lost in thought. He isnt paying attention to the spar. It feels like he just accepted this challenge without much thought. This doesnt sit well with me. When the Sword Demon doesnt move, Im Sobaek asks him. If there is something to ask, ask it right away. The Sword Demon asks. Alliance leader, when did you go past the level of a wooden sword? Im Sobaek tilts his head. Level of the wooden sword? Im Sobaek asks the young men on his side. When did I become the leader? Four years ago. In that case, I passed the state of a wooden sword five years ago. It has been a while, so dont rush. Just because you learned it quickly doesnt mean that you are good at it. Sometimes they just push through it. Take it slowly. The Sword Demon asks again, his confidence disappearing. Why learn it slowly? Im Sobaek replies in understanding. It is because the road is vast and long. It isnt bad to get there slowly. Sometimes we might even meet a wall. The Sword Demon smiles faintly and then raises his sword. I am ready. Im Sobaek nods. Then lets start. His blunt expression then changes. His eyes widen slightly as a smile graces his lips. His form is nothing special, but his entire body is moving as if it is breathing. On the other hand, the Sword Demon doesnt move. I feel there is a reason for them to drag this spar on. Just as I think that the Sword Demon makes the first move. I can see his form as he holds the wooden sword and moves toward Im Sobaek. The swords movement is simple. Im Sobaek swings the wooden sword down in a form similar to standing. I notice that his swords movement is a bit strange. As the swords collide, one of them shatters. At the same time, the Sword Demon holds his place. As Im Sobaek responds this way, the Sword Demon groans and takes three steps back. This is a strangely simple spar. The Sword Demon throws away his shattered wooden sword to the ground without regrets as Im Sobake nods. Alliance leader. Uh? I lost. Im Sobaek responds by throwing his wooden sword away. You worked hard too. There was no need for a tense battle, but I had to show it. Go cultivate right away. Your internal understanding will deepen. Im Sobaek looks around and snaps his finger. Come over. Not just the young men but the guards in the area also respond. Yes, leader. And Im Sobaek then tells the Sword Demon. Lets meet again. The Sword Demon holds out his hand. Lets meet again. Im Sobaek turns around and heads for the entrance as the front gate opens. Even though the spar was short, this retreat was even faster. The Murim Alliance leader disappears right away. An impressive retreat with no words spoken. Chapter 112 Chapter 112 C Six Warring Great Swords Secret I stare at the main gate where the Alliance leader disappeared into. Damned bastard, he is strong. Its not strange. He isnt strong because he became the alliance leader, but he became the alliance leader because he is strong. Is that why? Well, I am now in a bad mood. The Sword Demon didnt just get defeated. He was utterly crushed. Even his disciple is looking disheartened at the result. Moron Even so, the Sword Demon glances at me and his disciple and smiles before sitting cross-legged as he meditates. I look at the disciple and then sit near the Sword Demon to protect him while he is training. My stomach was boiling with anger, but I wasnt the one defeated, so I didnt have the right to get angry. As I look at the Sword Demon, I swallow back my sight. I will ask once he finishes his cultivation why he needed to do this fight. Perhaps this spar is meant to show something to us. If that is the case, then his purpose has been achieved. His disciple is also holding back his anger and his face is red. A long silence falls over us. And then I suddenly think back to the Alliance Leaders words. [Since this is a spar with a wooden sword, there is no need to attach deep meaning to victory or defeat.] Would the meaning have changed if they had used real swords? Of course, it would. The fight wouldnt have been short. With their skills, even the pavilion would have ended up being torn down during their intense fight. So I cant help but be confused. Why did the Sword Demon have to be this quiet? We couldnt even see the Alliance Leader at his best nor the Sword Demons martial arts. As soon as the two ended their fight cleanly, one immediately disappeared. Which meant the Alliance Leader must have known the meaning behind this spar. [There is no need for a tense battle.] This probably meant this spar wasnt meant to show off anything. Once his cultivation is complete, the Sword Demon opens his eyes, and his disciple says. Master, I am sorry. I try to keep my anger in check so that the disciple and his master can have their conversation. The Sword Demon answers. Mong Rang, did you see it? Your master was defeated. Yes. How do you feel? The disciple says. Did you deliberately fight to make us upset? The Sword Demon shakes his head. It wasnt that. The sword of the Alliance leader is impressive. However, I do not know why master declared defeat after such a simple fight. No matter how strong the opponent The Sword Demon then looks at me without answering his disciple. Did it help you, sect leader? And I say in reply. Senior, I have a question for you. Ask away. When the Alliance Leader wielded his sword, the trajectory was simple, but it felt like his sword was enhanced as it fell. Obviously, he had swung a single sword, but it felt more like one, two, three, or maybe even five swords fell instead. The situation is how should I say it The Sword Demon then laughs. How many afterimages did you see? Six. The Sword Demon then asks his disciple. You? His disciple replies. I saw four to five. It is difficult to note them accurately since they are afterimages. The Sword Demon then explains the Alliance Leaders martial arts. Both of you had a good look at it. It is called the Six Warring Great Sword. Um. It is a self-reliant form. Only the name is widely known, but none knows its theory. Even that mans disciples dont know it yet. They might not even be able to learn it. The disciple then asks. Master, I dont understand what Six Warring means. You are from the Orthodox side, but you dont know? Yes. Actually, I am not that interested in his martial arts. Alliance leader Im was actually the commander of Six Warring Squad. In other words, it is a sword technique he created during his days as a commander. So the name is quite simple. It means a sword which leads people to war. The disciple tilts his head. He wasnt a leader of a clan? Im Sobaek is a person who got promoted from a normal member to co-captain, captain, commander, main escort, and later became leader. Ever since he was a member of the sect, he often fought with others, and despite the results, he would continue to fight without breaking down. In his days as an escort, he often fought with many warriors of Orthodox sects and never lost. He was then turned into a leader due to his skills. Because of his unique character, he went to those who once defeated him in the past. Without allowing his emotions to sway him, he fought against them again and defeated them. Um. There are not many warriors who can stand against that man. It is best to acknowledge the opponents skills and compete briefly, like today, to check the heart of our blades. On the contrary, the leader is the one who gave me time. He didnt feel the need to show his skills because he was a good man. What can be greater than this? The disciple replies. Well. I dont know The Sword Demon then says with a serious expression. He showed me a technique that was supposed to be a secret. It is a secret that someone chose to reveal today. Perhaps it is a rebuke to stimulate me to focus on my training. Perhaps confidence is greater on his side. Even if this technique was exposed, he is sure to be able to deal with any opponent. I greatly admire his thoughts, but his personality is slightly twisted. Then it is even worse. Fucking cheeky bastard. No. There is actually an emotional story in it, The Sword Demon recalls the past. That technique he showed us When he was young, Im Sobaek led a squadron, and it was annihilated by the current Demonic Cult, leaving him the sole survivor. The fact that he added the words of the Six Warring Sword to his technique was to stop him from forgetting. It is a promise that he will never lose to the leader of the Demonic Cult. At those words, I become silent. Nevertheless, the fact that he and I can spar now means that the mans heart is not shallow. If it was someone else, they would feel the desire to kill and tear me apart the moment they knew of my origin. As you can see, he didnt show such emotions. Instead, he encouraged me to join them. If it is to a man like that, then losing is alright. He wouldnt have liked it if I fell to despair just because of this. The disciple then asks. Is it possible that master wasnt part of the people that attacked his group, right? Leader Im is a person with feelings. If that was the case, then one of the two of us would have died today. I felt relief after listening to the Sword Demons words. So he had such a story. The bastard I hate, who simply nods his head a few times, has such a story. In any case, this spar helped the Sword Demon realize many things. Although the three of us have different personalities, we are all men who are serious about martial arts. This time I ask a question. Why did you have to make us come for this? The Sword Demon smiles at my question. Look. Now, I will be the only man who sparred with the alliance leader and our sect leader. I also wanted to show the two of you this spar, but in the end, this was my limit. I am looking at a long road. It is impossible to be strong with training alone. Leader Im understood what I meant when I asked for a spar using wooden swords. The disciple asks. What? It means not attaching a deep meaning to victory or defeat. Yes, that man did say that. Even though he was defeated, the Sword Demon continues to speak with an unwavering attitude. In the first place, I will have more chances to risk death in a spar, and that man knows it. However, I still wanted this fight. I then lost. That is the end of this spar. The disciple wears a grim expression as the Sword Demon touches him. If you too become strong enough and want to face this kind of situation, stop harassing your disciples in the future. If you dont, I assure you that you will not be able to touch that man. The disciple bows his head as the Sword Demon looks at him. But I do not know how to deal with the Six Warring Great Sword. You cannot ask him to tell me. What do you think? As I hear his story, it seems that the Sword Demon came here because he wanted to learn something. That is why he feels no shame, and that impresses me. As I ponder his question, I take a dagger from my pocket and hold it in my hand. If we roughly follow the principle of it, maybe I instill Fire Chicken energy into its blade. It begins to turn red, but the moment I introduce Wood Chicken into it, it returns to its original color. I dont know the details, but it seems like this simple repetition is done six times in that brief moment. The path is the same, but the technique was made to increase the swords destructive force. If he had used a real sword, then the opponents weapon would have been broken. I guess I understand how this technique was made. The Sword Demon tilts his sword in some shock. You know? I nod. If he started as an ordinary member, then it meant that he didnt come from a great family. The cheap iron sword he used then must have been something that broke several times. Wasnt this martial art made to break down weak-looking swords? It is a sword technique made by someone with a weak sword. Perhaps if he used a rusty, wooden, or even a divine sword, there would not be a big difference in its strength. It is a bizarre technique born from battle, survival, and poverty. That is my conclusion. What do you think, senior? As I look at the Sword Demon, I find him looking back at me with eyes wide open. He is surprised. The Sword Demon crosses his arms and falls into thought as I suddenly look at his disciple. This jerk? How dare he look wide-eyed in front of me? He is also staring at me but quickly avoids my gaze and falls into his own thoughts. As I look at the two of them, it feels like they are pondering what I just said. And then I suddenly have a thought. The Sword Demon and his disciple must have come from good families. Rich jerks. The two of them, who have never been poor, must have been unable to consider what the Alliance Leader had gone through. Because I spent most of my life being poor, I could look at the situation from the right perspective. I take a step back as they are too deep in their thoughts. Senior, it is just my guess. You dont have to take it seriously. The Sword Demon shakes his head. Its not just a guess no, the circumstances were correct. Even a wooden sword wouldnt break easily because of that technique. The leaders sword would normally have broken much sooner than mine. It is bizarre how much stronger his martial arts are because of his past hardships. I then say to the Sword Demon. Senior, dont say that. I will feel bad. The Sword Demon laughs at my words. I know. To be honest, I dont feel too good about this. Poverty isnt something that one should be competing over. In terms of poverty, I would win over the alliance leader. I mean that I lived a much harsher life, and that thought makes me feel worse. There are times when conversations end for no reason. Such is the case now. All three of us look at each other for a moment before snorting out a laugh. The situation is a bit funny, yet bitter. Each of us is smiling because of how complicated our minds are. I then speak to the Sword Demon. Senior. Let us have a drink today. People should have a glass when they face bitter defeat. The Sword Demon laughs as if I had made a joke, and his disciple responds instead. What is this way you are talking to my master? You rude jerk. I then look at him. Mong Rang. What? How old are you? ! The man who is asked about his age becomes shocked. From what I know, this guy should be a year younger than me. If we reveal our ages in front of the Sword Demon, he would be forced to call me hyung. The shocked bastard quickly changes the topic. Master, would you like a drink? To which he replies. Disciple Yes. I heard you dont drink with your own hyungs. Will you give such glory to your master? It would be a great honor. Such a momentous day today will be. At those words, the disciples face turns red. No, master I burst out into laughter as I look at this. The Sword Demon is definitely strong. It is my opinion that for a man to be strong, he needs to be strong from the beginning. Even today, the Sword Demon is taking down his disciple with only words. Chapter 113 Chapter 113 C Who Is Disturbing My Time This is the first drinking party in fifty days. I didnt have time or thought to drink before today because I was busy training my martial arts. I come down from the pavilion, walk on the street, and soon see a quiet guest house. I head inside and see a lot of shabby shops on this street. Most mountain climbers like to drink alcohol, so they typically sit together and drink. However, the people in the guesthouse look at us, realize that we are different, and cough as they leave one after another. I didnt mean to kick them out, but it just happened. The atmosphere around the Sword Demon must be daunting for them. Even though he looks like a decent man, his atmosphere must be hard to deal with. The disciple sees this and then says to me as he drinks. Everyone seems to avoid this place because Lee Zaha gives the wrong impression. I ignore his words and drink my own cup. Then, whenever a question appears in my mind, I turn and ask the Sword Demon. Senior, are you staying away because of the cult? The Sword Demon answers. Not necessarily. There are those who will try to kill me wherever I am and continue to send people. I also cannot be in a place with people. Why? The Sword Demon smiles. Because I am prepared to cause a lot of damage. Come to think of it, he is a man who killed his would-be killers and made his escape. This time, his disciple asks a question. Master, as you have competed against the Alliance Leader and our cult leader, can you judge who is better? This is a strong question and sends the Sword Demon into thought. Alliance Leader and cult leader To be honest, I am curious about the answer as well. This is because the two of them have never fought until now. Since each of them have many subordinates, I wonder if they would have to deal with each other. Judging from my point of view, I think the skills of the Demonic Cult leader are higher. If we proceed with a spar, our cult leader will win. The disciple then asks with a surprised expression. If it isnt a spar, then? The Sword Demon replies with a grin. The Alliance Leader risked his life and did many things in his life. Even the cult leader would not be able to shake off attacks made by that man. It would be difficult for the two of them to be able to live a normal life after that. Whoever won would at least lose an arm or a leg. My guess is that the two of them would be able to grasp this situation and continue to spend time and practice. Thanks to this, the Kangho can stay quiet as the balance between the two of them is just right. Clearly, this is a time for both sides to gather up strength. This is also the time given to me. I then ask about something I am curious about. Has senior mastered the demonic arts as well? The Sword Demon nods his head. Those who have learned martial arts in our cult since childhood starts with that. The basic principles of cultivation also change. I am learning the Shadow Moon Martial Arts, so what differences exist? Different in what way? There are many cases of choosing a short way in the process of qi construction. After about thirteen years of training, mastering it will come naturally, and there is no other way to avoid the aftermath of getting it done so fast. The disciple then asks. Isnt thirteen years too short? The Sword Demon nods his head. That is why the cult often has troubles. Normal cult members would die fighting in a mission or conflict before any physical problems appear. The average lifespan is short. This is an internal issue of the cult that I am not aware of. He then continues. The thoughts of those in power are, frankly, heartless. They do not care about the lives of the low-level members of the cult, to begin with. They are expendable and can be replaced with another. Some are smart enough to overcome the situation, survive fatal crises, and naturally rise to the top as they age. They are then recognized by the cult. Their loyalty is deepened thanks to money, women, and luxurious surroundings. They then become a somewhat useful and welcomed expendable piece. I smile as I pour a glass. Surprisingly, the Sword Demon and I have similar thoughts about the Demonic Cult. The people there dont see people as people. The Sword Demon is aware of this. He then asks as he checks my expression. Why are you laughing? I laughed because it felt like our thoughts were similar. Then, is the Alliance different? The Sword Demon nods his head. It is an organization that tends to follow the thoughts of the person at the top, after all. Any mob can transform into a sect. Any number of sects could also end up being run by blinded men. This is a problem of leadership and not the sect. I might not have left if the current cult leader was someone like Im Sobaek. I nod and then ask him. Were you having a hard time dealing with the cult leader? My true defeat will be death. Even the cult leader cannot kill me. I listen to him and doubt if my guess is accurate. But his words allow me to learn some truth in what he says. Is he really a man of the sword? This time the Sword Demon asks me. But you, leader, seem to have a different atmosphere. Have you learned any new martial arts? Senior, how did you know? I dont feel like anything has changed, though. The Sword Demon smiles. It is subtle. Please explain. The Sword Demon raises his glass. Let us suppose that this wine glass is made by a craftsman who makes the most beautiful alcohol glasses in the world. I nod. On the other hand, lets assume that a disciples glass is just an imitation of this. Ordinary drinkers could not tell the difference between the original and the copy because the shape was the same. However, the eyes of craftsmen who make glasses would be able to feel a difference. Why? The disciple responds. Isnt it because the difference in precision is visible? The Sword Demon puts down his glass. It is the same with warriors. The three of us are not complete warriors. If a counterfeit is headed for the real thing we would still be able to discern tiny differences. It is right if I can feel something different from our last meeting. On the other hand, my disciple is The disciples face reddens. Master. The Sword Demon nods his head. It is good to be consistent. Yes. But the day will come when you, too, will be enlightened. It isnt clear if he is joking or being serious, so I ask. Why so? The Sword Demon answers. Because he is the disciple I teach. The Sword Demon continues as his disciple becomes slightly emotional. Even if the cult leader dies, the cult will not disappear. It is because a lot of old members are still clinging to it. So, you need to set up the right teacher for it all. Even if you kill the current cult leader, the cult will continue to move forward. Whether the disciple becomes the leader now or someone else takes the mantle, there is one thing to do. The current leader has to die. The disciple could not sit straight, no matter how often he heard this. Master, I do not want to be a sect leader. Why? The disciple answers. I just think they are all crazy. It is the fact that the logic of the world is contained in books. Although I am a madman who reveals a lot to women, such books are hard to accept. The Sword Demon laughs as his disciple asks. Why are you laughing? The Sword Demon answers. They are the Demonic Cult. They are not a group of people you could convince. They rule and subjugate by force. Fanatics cannot be reasoned with but can only be killed and destroyed. It might be early now, but the day will come when you become complete. The Sword Demon looks at me. Make sure that you keep it in mind. A part of the world is already crazy from long ago. For a conversation in a shabby guest house, it is quite deep. We arent even sure if anyone is listening in or not. Anyway, this drinking party is good for me. I learned a little about how the Sword Demon thinks and lives. I chat with the Sword Demon about various things, such as the thoughts of scumbags and how things are changing. At the end of our drinking, I ask. Senior, I have a request for you. Go on. I dont know who your next sparring partner is, but please call me even then. I think the training time will be wrong, but I will do so. I look at the face of the Sword Demon. Because his expression is that of a person ready to die, I feel like he cant imagine living for long. He must have been attacked by many warriors who attempted to kill him. However, since Ive crossed paths with this man, I would hate to see him die in vain. I will need to check out the shadow of death that clings to the Sword Demon. I then have a thought out of nowhere. It cannot be Gwang Sung, right? The timing of when Gwang Sung appeared in my past life is quite vague, so I cannot be sure. There is a period when Gwang Sung appears and makes a name by doing evil deeds, causing various accidents, and more. In any case, it isnt easy to kill the Sword Demon. It is possible that the cult leader dealt with him directly. I get up after finishing our drinks. They return to their residence while I prepare to leave for the Black Rabbit Union. I then say goodbye to the pair after sharing a couple of words. I pull out my blade as I walk the road back alone. I cant help but think of the Alliance Leaders technique. As a drunk man walking down the road is swinging the sword, the vendors I pass end up panicking and moving back when they see me. I knew it. Its impossible for me to understand it. When he used it, it looked like an extremely difficult technique. It isnt a simple sword technique that others can copy by just looking at it. But as I keep swinging my sword down this quiet road, it is fun to see the blade change colors. Another woman walking down the street runs away screaming when she sees me. Ah Is this world telling me that I cannot practice as I please? Wasnt this too much? I think Ive done enough to scare people away, so I sheathe the sword back and practice with my bare hands. As I walk back while moving, people occasionally still scream. They look scared, and even I am becoming scared after seeing their faces. This is why I always feel like crazy people are more comfortable. All of a sudden, my left hand is wrapped in fire, and my right is encased in ice. I then perform my moves using both. After a few repetitions It feels so frightening that I have to restrain myself. A man who does not cross the line, that is me. I walk down the mountain road, the busy street, and then the quiet roads. Then, while heading back, I look at the lake. Peace is like a lake to me. I carefully search for a flat thin stone to bounce on the water and watch as the wild geese begin to flock to me. The flock of geese coming to me suddenly moves away from the shore. As they move away, some humans who arent afraid of me have gathered behind me. I cross my arms without turning back. Who dares to disturb my time of peace? They seem to have enough killing intent to scare the geese away. So why didnt they attack and surround me? I turn around in curiosity. Chapter 114 Chapter 114 C I Am Sober I confront the farmer, the fisherman, the trader, the woodcutter, a swordsman, a half-naked guy, an ugly one, a sickle-holding one, and a bad-looking bachelor. I then ask. Is it the dream for you assassins to live a normal life? This attire to surround a man is too plain. Still, They might have come to fight, so I want to clear something up before we start. Who wants to drown in the water? None? Someone is about to bring something out but puts it back after hearing my words. I make eye contact with a Taoist-looking guy and nod. It is me. I am the one. They then surround me. Under these circumstances, they must have found where I was after I left the Black Rabbit Union. Some probably followed me up the mountain and must have been shocked when they saw the Murim Alliance people there. Oddly enough, they didnt come to fight when I was with the Sword Demon and only came when I was alone. Anyways, it feels like they are waiting for someone. I also try to make conversation since were all waiting together. I dont even know how to react. Useless bastards who cant take a joke. People who dont have a heart or compassion are all like this. That is why they are assassins. Suddenly I point my finger to one close to me and say. But you. A popping sound filled the air as the wind flew. The man, who suddenly has a hole in his forehead, begins to fall back. Thud These people dont know my skills. Even if they tried to find out, I had spent the 50 days of travel doing the same thing repeatedly, which further increased my innate skills. It isnt just an increase but also a more harmonious combination of yin and yang. The quality of qi and my usage of it are now very different. I look at the corpse with a hole in its head and then say. Why did you have to move? Come here quickly. As soon as I finish speaking, the formation begins to spread from the back as the encirclement fans out to the left and right as an old man with a cane walks in. The old man, who looks like a human covered in wrinkles, seems over 80 years old. I look at him. Old man, you must have had a hard time coming here. To which he responds with a hoarse voice. Low Down Sect leader, if you want to survive, prepare a fortune. Take the medicine today and leave. There will be no other negotiations. You old bastard, you dont even know how negotiations are done. You cannot be talked to. If you fight me here, wouldnt your sect be the one thats disbanded? I dont know what confidence you have to do this. The old man then says. Yeop Bu (The Hunter). Yes. Kill him. A man called Yeop Bu pulls out an assassins dagger and throws it at me. I nod as I avoid his attack, and he steps forward while unsheathing the sword at his waist and points it at me. The initial distance between the man and me is around nine meters. The sword narrows the distance between us in one step and comes close to my eye. I hold out my sword and kick him away. Swish! My blade cuts him diagonally from his left armpit to the right shoulder. Puak! My movement speed is so quick that he dies without even being able to scream. I swing my blood-stained sword to the ground and then sheathe it back in. Next. Like the king on a chessboard, the old man begins to push his assassins to fight me. Is it his intention to make me consume my energy by throwing away his men? However, I cant think of this as a suitable method. Still, I am impressed by the strict working conditions under this old man. The old man thinks for a moment and opens his mouth. Cho Bu (The Woodcutter). Yes. Deal with him carefully. The man named Cho Bu has a large frame and looks like he has trained his body. He looks like he can cut down large trees with only a few swings of the large ax he is dragging along the ground. As soon as I see his form and hardening muscles, I realize that he aims to finish this in one blow. He would give away a part of his body to destroy mine. Cho Bu narrows the distance and rushes forward with his large ax. It looks like a random swing that can cut down anything. However, I still have enough momentum to defend my body using qi. The problem is, while Im dealing with this one, I also want to give the other assassins a surprise. Not a bad plan. The counterattack will be a short and quick one. I take Cho Bus left hand with an accurate parry and then engrave the center of his body using the Ice Arts technique. Tuk! I avoid the ax flying at a remarkably slow speed at me due to the ice and then hit Cho Bus upper body with the Shadow Moon Martial Arts. Tak! A strange groan escapes his mouth. Kuak Cho Bus body looks utterly stiff. I look around, pull out my dagger, and stab him in the neck. Puak! This time the sound of a pig being gutted fills the air. I then tell the old man. Old man, it looks like you are trying to check my skills by using your subordinates as bait. This type of warfare is useless. Just stop this and let it go. The old man then says. Lee Zaha uses Ice Arts. His weapons are swords and daggers. There is no use of assassin needles. I will keep that in mind. Something can be cut for sure. Before you all die, make sure to kill that man too. The people watching me then answer. Yes. Are they judging this fight to their disadvantage? Assassins usually are trained in stealth and hidden attacks. The attack order continues as I fail to understand the old mans intention in sending them against me one after another. Nak Pang-gek and Neng Geyom. Yes. Together. The scholar draws his blade as the sickle-wielding one also walks forward. I notice the two and say to the old man again. Old man, just let this go. To which he smiles. Shut up. I then take a good look at the encirclement. I think that the old man perhaps isnt even the leader as the two attacks me. I pull out my sword, wrap it with Fire Chicken energy, and slash at Neng Geyom. Wheik! The moving flames strike his body and both their weapons, ignoring their movements, and the sound of something burning fills the air. As soon as I see their fear, I take the chance to push them back. Kwaang! The two move straight back as I hold my sword and fill it with Wood Chicken energy. The blade of my sword then moves straight toward the assassins in the encirclement. Swish! The movement of the sword is different. This time an unusually normal-looking farmer is holding a sword in one hand. In the meantime, the old man swings his cane to deflect the attack. As my sword is pushed back, I use that moment to look at the shabbily-dressed farmer who has better internal qi than the old man. As I look at the farmer, I then say. You are in charge of them. You have been watching me like a mouse right from the start. As I giggle and smile, all of the assassins become silent. This is the right type of psychological warfare. Perhaps the old man will send the farmer out now? Or is it time for everyone to just come and attack me together? I then ask the farmer. You got caught. What to do now? The old man, who needs to give orders, also falls silent from shock. The farmer opens his mouth with a faint smile. This I jump into the air with a push on the ground. As his mouth opens, an assassins needle is launched at me, narrowing the distance faster than Ive seen so far. If this is the case, then who is the real assassin? Me! The farmer steps back as he loses his chance to counter. As I begin to use my sword technique, I observe the farmers eyes and movements as he evades my sword before aiming for his head with a simple strike. Clearly, the first sword-enhancing technique has an advantage. The farmer then wraps both of his hands in qi and grabs the blade of my sword by clapping around it. Tak! At the same time, he says. Shoot. I use the ice technique around my left hand and grab onto the farmers wrist. I then immediately pull his body in and look behind the farmer. The Low Down Sect leader hides his skills. It is now time to check the strength of the Shadow Moon Martial Arts. After leaving my sword in the farmers hand, I charge forward using footwork and run with two spears covered with my ice technique. The fisherman, the merchant, the Taoist, the half-naked guy, the ugly one, and the sickle-holding one are all made into my targets, and I slowly rush the shocked old man. However, at the edge of the lake, instead of hitting him down like the others, I simply grabbed his arm and pulled the old man close to beat his body down several times. Now all the men who might interfere have been hit with the ice technique. Was this new technique that Ive learned not so inferior to other techniques, or was this just the result of my utilization? I take my sword back from the farmer and induce ice qi into his body. Tak! Tak! I then approach the others who have gone stiff from shock and infuse ice qi to seal their bodies. Their stiff faces gradually become pale. Their lips also turn purple. As I wander around and continue to turn them into frozen statues, I make sure to observe their expressions, breathing, and face. Suddenly, everything around me becomes quiet as I tell them. You are the newly brought test subjects. It will be a little painful, but you will live, so dont think about complaining. As I go to the shore of the lake, I pick up a flat stone and throw it into the shallow water. The flat stone curves on the lakes surface and bounces around. As it bounces, I note that it has bounced thirty times in the past. Now, however, it moves until I can no longer see it and continues to move. Yah this is why martial arts has to be learned. I put ice qi into the flat stone this time and threw it. What results is a spectacular sight. Whatever the cold stone touched grew a thin layer of ice before gradually vanishing. I suddenly remembered the assassins that I froze, so I touched the lakes surface and splashed it at them. The lake water flies into the air and then falls down with a thud. The assassins who are hit by the hardened lake water begin to shake. Although they cannot move their bodies, they cannot help but tremble. Since I didnt seal off their blood points, I could also hear groans and muffled sounds of pain. So I ask them. Is it cold? It suddenly occurs to me that the old man and the farmer are most affected. If they wanted to fight, they should have come and faced me themselves instead of using their men like chess pieces. With my dagger, I kill the old man and the farmer. As I look around at the assassins with my blood-stained dagger, I see that their eyes are shocked despite their frozen state. And then I tell them. You will not be killed so easily. Today, someone is going to tell me about your base. It is annoying, and yet I stay silent. Come camp overnight on the lake with me tonight. I will make a bonfire, and if bored, I will wait. If you run, though, I will chase after you. And it is fine, as you are slower than me. I look at their faces and, in order to handle the work neatly, I make sure to inject ice qi once more into them. Tak! Tak! Tak! Tak! As I look at the merchants face, I see a tear falling from his eyes. So then I look at him and ask. Did you cry? Why is such a big one crying? Phew, you poor assassins have to stay silent, but no one wants to save you. Amazing. Lets see if you win or I win. After the cold, I plan to attack them with hunger. I will explain the camp schedule today. You will be hit with the ice again at night, and the water will baptize you. Water torture will also happen from time to time. I plan to make a bonfire to eat the goose I catch and find out who is behind you. I am busy running through my torture plan. Now I have to catch a goose and bring the stuff I need to make a bonfire. It is my first time camping in a while, so I cant hide my excitement. I then suddenly realize my condition. Uh? . . . It is only after I wake up that I remember that I was drunk. I shake my head and go off to look for the goose. Wow, finally sober. Chapter 115 Chapter 115 C How Far Did You Go To Find Hell? Geese are referred to as those who go against the moon. That is probably the strangest thing about them. I dont even know the meaning behind this name of theirs. Do they stay away from the moon? Regardless of why their names were given this meaning, I dont know about it in detail. It is very rare for a word to survive while its true meaning is lost. And going against the moon is like that. Someone in this world might remember the meaning, but Im not that person. As I light the bonfire, I begin to groom the goose. I imagine many scenarios on how its name came to receive its meaning, but I cant come to a proper conclusion. It can also be a term that refers to medicine. The effects of goose meat can vary. First of all, since the meat is non-toxic, eating it can help detoxify poison from insects or anything that might contaminate the body to some extent. Since the meat is also generally cool, it is also good to use for alleviating the bodys heat. For my current condition, eating goose meat is good if I want to suppress my madness to some extent. In that sense, I think the naming of the goose was something done by people from Kangho. Or maybe not. I skewer the trimmed goose and roast it slowly over the fire. In the middle of this, the assassins who have their bodies frozen are groaning. I then ask them. Is it cold? Does anyone know why geese are called those who go against the moon? . Doesnt seem like anyone does. Ill save you if you have an idea about it. Have any of you studied the words of Confucius? Why is it that when three people walk down a road, one is called a teacher? Does that mean you have something to learn? You need to speak if you have a teacher who can teach you. You cant just rely on the teacher. I start to eat the well-roasted goose. It is bland because there is no salt, but it still works fine. All the shivering assassins are looking at me as I eat the warm goose meat in front of the bonfire. I then make eye contact with them and say. Delicious. It tastes good. The meat slowly melts away. If you think about it, you are the same as the goose. After being trained hard in the art of killing, you stay alive, but do any of you remember why you even kill? Your ancestors were never like this. They risked their lives because they had a good reason to kill. On the other hand, none of you have that. To kill someone because someone else ordered it just as the meaning of the gooses name has disappeared, no one in this world will remember you. I slice the meat as I eat. I can live like this. However, I have different ideas and goals. No killing for money. They extorted money from the weak, robbed dead bodies, demanded ransom payments, and treated people like slaves with their twisted logic before killing them. I am not someone who makes a living like that. I put the last piece of meat in my mouth. My mouth then makes a popping sound as I take the leg bone out. I had it all. As I check the assassins conditions, I once again infuse them with ice qi. Taktaktak! Kuak! One of them groans, startling me. You shocked me. This bastard. What kind of bullshit is this? Close your mouth! As I look around, I see that everyone has runny noses and teary eyes. I then tell the other assassins. Is this screaming guy a merchant? His fighting spirit is already gone. Your superiors should have taught you right. The seniors need to get beat then. Except for the one who screamed, I infuse their bodies with ice qi again Tik. Tik. Tik! Nice! Such things shouldnt come from an assassin group. Anyway, Im thinking of going to a nearby guest house to buy some drinks. Promise that none of you will try to run away while Im gone? I look at their faces with my hands up. No? I sigh. I mean, even if you have a mouth, you wont answer. Fine. You die. I stride to the shore of the lake and splash its water onto them. Die! Splash! Splash! Raiding waves, furious waves, and unstoppable splashes. I smile as I see their faces falling into deeper despair as they begin to run out of breath. Fucking morons. Anyone who answered would have been put near the bonfire. Wait here while I get some drinks. I move to the guest house using my footwork. As I head to the bar, my mind is occupied with what I want to drink. After taking an hour to drink a cup of tea, I buy three jars of alcohol alongside plenty of dry snacks to take back to the lake. I then interrupt a conversation between some whispering idiots. I bought a lot. Generously too. What did you all say about me? The assassins suddenly fall silent. Wow, for real, who am I talking to today? My throat is burning because I keep talking to myself. For a sore throat, alcohol is best in such cases. There are alcohol and side dishes for snacks. Hahaha. Ehh. I put more firewood into the dwindling bonfire and sit on a cushion made from dry grass and reeds. I drink a few drinks and chew on some snacks. Kyaak the farmer died, the woodcutter died, the hunter died, the scholar died, the sick one died, and the old man is also dead. Ah, the narrow-minded one is dead too. The fisherman, the idiot, and the disgusting-looking one. Five people managed to stay alive? The sickle guy is also alive, so six. The man who uses the sickle is looking at me with wide eyes. I then speak in a worried tone. You people arent allowed to sleep. Be patient even if you are getting sleepy. When you wake up after falling asleep, youll be in hell. How did hell find you? Well, someone will tell you that you were sent there by Lee Zaha. The great king is suffering a lot because of me. I let out a long sigh after drinking more alcohol. No, guys. I crave joy through words. What am I doing today? So pathetic. Sorry I get up with a bottle in my hand and walk to an assassin. Yah I grab the ugly-looking one with my left hand and look into his eyes. Look straight into my eyes before I kill you. After making eye contact with him, I continued speaking. Its not that I hate you because youre an assassin. Its not because youre ugly, either. Do understand that I hate you because you live without thoughts of the consequences. Think and live Why were you born? Why do you assholes have to act like this? Is that life really meaningful? Have you ever thought about that? Be suspicious. I look at him. Assassin, please understand me. I am like you. I mean, what Im doing isnt the same as you trying to make a living. However, you have to kill those who want to kill you. Its not about listening to other people. The Low Down Sect leader is asking you to drink. Drink. I open the ugly ones mouth and let him have a drink by putting the bottle inside. Gulp The man gulps down the alcohol and passes out. How does it taste? Nice? Amazing, the others will envy you now. It should be an honor to share this drink with me. I go back to my seat and continue to drink. Hey, all of you? I used to be an errand boy. I smile as I nod my head. Ah, so you didnt know that? You wouldnt have known, no matter how much you looked into my past. I didnt name my sect the Low Down Sect for nothing. These are words that refer to those people who are at the bottom of the world. There is no difference between you and me. Did a man wake up alone, or did he live a life that ended in a vain death after carrying out other peoples orders? Thats the difference in mindset. Now, one last question. I gently lift a finger from the bottle. A sip, anyone? These people are probably expecting that I would kill them by using intimidation. Uh. No. I will persuade them. Im not saying I will set your base on fire. I am also not asking you to tell me who your boss is. I will not ask again. Who wants a drink? The fishermans lips part as he lets out a loud voice. One sip. Nice. I get up and go towards him. I then make him drink after raising his chin slightly. You must have had a hard time opening your mouth. Such quiet guys. How have you been trained? I dont know. I return to my sitting spot and then look at them again. I am now familiar with their faces. Oh, the moon has risen a little. In a little while, it will shine on the lake. The Flower in the Mirror and Moon in the Water. Have you thought of this, why is the moon so uselessly beautiful? Look at that moonlight. Maybe it is because people who work at night know it wont fall. Or it is floating to tell people to be careful with their hands. Maybe lonely people sometimes wake up to look at it. Am I wrong? Anyways, I can conclude that I am not the kind of person who goes around killing people. The four of you havent had a drink, so youd better be dead.. As I approach the swordsman, I hold the bottle in my left hand and my dagger in my right. As the swordsman opens his mouth, red blood drips from his lips. One sip. I place the dagger on his neck and ask. Why did you decide to speak so suddenly? How long have I talked to myself? How many times did I have to ask? The knives are coming now. The swordsman screams. Alcohol! Help me! I look into his eyes and ask. Want to drink? Yes! I get it. Swordsmen should be friendly. Instead of alcohol, the dagger enters his throat. Drink and give it a go. The dead dont speak, though. I force the three left to make a choice. Drink or die. Dont answer, and youll die. Two decide to drink, but the sickle guy just looks at me. You, Neng Gyeom? Dont want a sip? I grab him by the neck and throw him into the lake. Alongside his scream comes a splashing sound as he sinks to the bottom and is unable to move. I then tell the living ones. Five people left. Now, lets take a look at each other. I plan to keep only one person with whom I can communicate well. For the rest, you can go swimming at night. Go after fish or whatever. And if I cant stand you, then Ill kill you. As I return to threatening the remaining five, I sit back and cross my legs. Everyone, lets see who wins. I close my eyes and whisper. Will I die first, or your leader? Try to mediate that. I will tell you in advance that I am not weaker than your leader. I still need some cultivation, though, as a man doesnt miss a day in the journey to become stronger. I may have been weaker than your leader yesterday, but tomorrow I will be stronger. Do you know the reason? I take a deep breath and then deliver my conclusion. I wont tell you. My cultivation starts under the moonlight. Around me, the moons shadow begins to cover the night and fall on the water. The heartless moonlight shines on the flowing water and me. Chapter 116 Chapter 116 C Needlessly Beautiful During my cultivation, I overhear the conversation between the assassins. Hyung. You die this way and that way, too. It is the same. Fisherman, do you have a way out? The man replies. No. If not, tell me what I need to know. We dont know anything at all. What do you know about me? Chubu will know the most. Chubu, speak up now. Ironically, they are using the temporary names that I had given them. The fisherman is a fisherman, and the ugly one is Chubu. Chubu then says. If Geom Yuk and Yain agree, I will tell you. Geom Yuk is likely the swordsman, while Yain has to be the half-naked man. The two of them respond. If Chubu tells you, we will follow him. I will follow too. Finally, the ugly one speaks. Look, leader, you hear us? I will tell you what I know. But dont be offended when I do tell you what I know. I will be waiting for you once your cultivation is done. I open my eyes after finishing my cultivation. Ready to talk? Chubu looks at me and replies. This is a body that is about to die, so I will pay you back for what I drank. I get up from my cross-legged state and grab Chubu by the neck before placing him near the bonfire. I also pick up the rest of the people and put them around the bonfire as I give them alcohol to drink. Tell me. Chubu looks at the flame and then says. First of all, you keep calling our assassination group a particular name. I wonder where did you get it from? Why do you think that is our name? For all you know, that could be someones title since its too awkward to have a group named like that. We are talking about crossing a river using a single floating reed leaf. But as you know, we dont have such skills. I nod my head. Keep talking. The title of the person who manages us is the Reed Crossing the River. We learned about assassination targets from this person. We are usually scattered and only gather when there is a need. After we hear the assassination targets description, people like the old man you killed are the ones who plan and share the information. The three old men are most aware of the system, but theyre dead now. Farmer? Elder Sek, the farmer, was the one sent to kill you. He is the most talented one among us. What I want to say is that there is no such thing as the main base the man called River Crossing the Reed is our center and main base too. I get up and pour alcohol into Chubu, who chokes a lot. The alcohol makes an audible sound as it disappears into his mouth. I then put down the empty bottle, open a new one, and pour alcohol down the others throats. As I sit back down, I say to the four. Everyone did so much to survive. Suddenly, Yain sighs and closes his hands as the others, too, sigh with tears in their eyes. I dont ask why and they dont explain either. Chubu then tells me. It is not easy to find that person. They always send people to call us, so how will you, sect leader, find them? I reply to them calmly. Where in the world do things ever turn out how you want them to? If I wasnt looking for them, would you continue to look for me? Chubu nods his head. I understand. We suffered a lot of damage. How would I even find someone who hides so well? They only order out the kill missions. On nights when assassins dont come and visit, I get to sleep a little longer. Its been so long since Ive slept comfortably. If the window sways with the wind even once, or a rat passes by my ceiling, I keep wondering if an assassin might have come. I imagined that the rat might have run away from spotting an assassin. I would toss and turn, thinking about how to stop myself from drawing the sword under my bed. Then, it is already dawn when I look out the window again. The moon must have seen me toss and turn so many times. If I fall, the Low Down Sect falls, and if that falls, more bastards will rise. The Unorthodox Faction, like bugs, would come and slaughter many people. The women would be abducted and asked to adjust to their new homes. I grin and then take another drink. Ah that cant be me. I cannot stand it. I point my finger at them. warm. Life is accompanied by small joys like a bonfire, but it is usually cold, hungry, and painful, like today. Nine out of ten people live with the pain. Most people have a hard time living a normal life, and there are still those who put them through hell. As I kill people like you one after another with my own hands, the craziness within is growing each day. But it is fine. No man in the world can withstand this craziness better than me. In the end, I always win. That is me. I look at the assassins and smile. Finally, I enjoy drinking with such people, so the taste feels better. I lightly touch their upper bodies. Due to the heat, their weakened legs are beginning to collapse. I throw more wood into the bonfire. I am no longer the only one watching the flickering flames of the bonfire, as there are no other places to look. As we go through life, there always comes a time when we sit silently watching a fire. And now is such a time. Some look back on their past while looking into the flames. That is what the assassins are doing now. In the silence, the fisherman says. What a warm bonfire. And Yain says as well. I am sorry. I am speechless at this. The swordsman says. Does this make sense? Is there something youre thinking about? Yain nods his head. Food. I can only ever think of food. I guess I only like it when I eat something. I look at him So you like food. As I look at my dry snacks, I grab a large piece of beef jerky and put it into his mouth. Yain then starts chewing it. Eat well. Yain replies. I will. The swordsman then asks me. Excuse me, but do you have a master? Youre young and not too famous. You also made a mistake associating the name given to you. I have no master. My lack of reputation is probably because most of those who attack me end up dead. We, the Low Down Sect, dont take any money, so we have no influence. Therefore, the rumors dont spread, so we have no fame. The fisherman then asks. How do you run a sect if you dont receive a reward? If I rob people like you, I get a lot of money. You dont know, but the leaders always have money. Im also curious. Where does your group spend the money you get from commissions? It wouldnt have been used on you people since youre the ones sent out to die. Money always ends up with those at the top. As you get older, you should know that this is how the world works. Dont just go thinking about eating and drinking. You get that, Yain? And Yain replies. Yes. What, yes? This jerk. You can only tell whether or not rice is hard or cooked. What else do you know? Where did you leave your shirt to even act like this? Life is as cold as ice and even colder for morons. You pathetic bastard. Yain sighs. Phew. The swordsman then suddenly joins the conversation. There was a raid in the past at a place called the Buhyang Mountain. Almost all of the assassins gathered there then. Everyone was pretty nervous since there was a pretty strong person. The Reed Crossing the River had gathered us there to take the lead. At the same time, a man came to help us. Reed Crossing the River called that man one thing. I ask him. What was it? Mu Hun sahyung. I then speak with a bitter tone. Mu Hun, the one they call Stepping Without Trace? Probably. So both Reed Crossing the River and Stepping Without Trace are people who depend on using light footwork. At first glance, I am suspicious of the Swift Society, but there are no such people there. If there is a sahyung then there has to be a master. It seems like there are quite elite people around your group. At the very least, I can probably find the base I want to find if I capture and torture one of them. It is likely that Nam Myunghee, in his past life, had killed the assassins but was later attacked by those two and was defeated. The Reed Crossing the River must have been discreet and completed the task immediately. I begin to trace back my past memories. Have I ever been through a process? In the world of assassins, just like life within Kangho, there is a hierarchy set in many places. Whether within sects or clans, events will cause a rise and fall. Within this world, the only one I know about in detail is Sal Wang, or the Killing King. No? The fastest way to find out where that base is located is to meet with Sal Wang. But if I leave alone, then I am likely to get cornered. I know that Sal Wang died with his limbs torn off by fighting Hwang Seung in front of my very eyes in my past life. What should not be misunderstood is that Sal Wang died as the opponent was stronger. It is unnecessary to deal with him in my current state. As I continue, my train of thought is coming to an end. I suddenly look at the face of one of the people in front of me before I move to the others. In my mind, I am still thinking about Sal Wang. There is a beautiful valley called the Flower Valley. Has anyone heard of it? The assassins shake their heads. No. Old one. I then look into their eyes and say. I heard that its name was changed after a few people took refuge there. It is said that it was originally a beautiful place where you could see peony petals falling over the valley. However, it is often said that bodies were washed away into the valley. Instead of petals, death was the one who came. The peony is known to be the king of flowers. The assassins from the Valley of Death are called the King of Assassins. If that is the case, this Reed Crossing the River must be from there. I look at them again. I was deeply involved in something dangerous. You shouldnt look for it if you dont know about it. If you do, you might touch something that you shouldnt. No matter how much you think about it, there is only one power that could brainwash someone so perfectly to be able to instill thoughts, actions, and many more things. I think its definitely the assassins of the Valley of Death, probably one of their best. What do you think? I get up and move to the fisherman. One by one. The fisherman first. I grab him by the shoulder and look into his eyes as he says. Has to be from Valley of Dead. I didnt hear it. Isnt it true that you have wide knowledge, leader? So I ask. Was the alcohol delicious? I inject more ice qi into his shoulder, making him nod. It was delicious. I am glad. As I watch him turn cold and stiff, I turn to look at the swordsman. What do you think? He looks at me with a calm expression. Excellent insight, Low Down Sect leader. Right? Is my guess right? I slam my sword into his head. The man falls down with a popping sound. Ugly one, what do you think? Chubu looks up and says. Just kill me. The Valley of Death is a difficult place even for me. Didnt you hear me say this? Chubu smiles. Low Down Sect leader. What? People dont change easily. Dont you know they can be changed with a favor? What kind of favor? It should at least be a win. Ah, this. I chuckle and laugh. The world doesnt know me. I get it. I pull Chubu up by the neck and break it before leaving his body to droop down. Yain, I was going to feed you pork meat. How can you do this to me? Yain looks confused. I dont know what that place is. I only know of the Reed Crossing the River, so why did you kill them all? Yain. Tell me. I look at him with serious eyes. You are the greatest and most excellent living person. Tears are welling up in his eyes as he looks at me. What the hell are Leave your words. Yain exclaims lightly before speaking in a different tone. I will give no advice, so heres my will. Lee Zaha, the jerky was delicious. In the meantime, Yain, who is released to some extent, reaches out his hand to me. I look at the assassins hand approaching my body. My sword is encased in ice again as I slam it into his head. Puak! Suddenly, I turn my head to the back. As I turn, I see the moonlight pouring down. I mumble as I glance at it. Yah, the moonlight is uselessly beautiful again tonight. Chapter 117 Chapter 117 C You Are The Only One Who Can Help I decide to not return straight to the Low Down Sect from the lake. The ones who died here were better than the ones I killed at the Black Rabbit Union. If I am to guess roughly, theyre probably captain-level assassins? Therefore, the next visit will likely come from the Reed Crossing the River. There is no reason to welcome them into the Low Down Sect, as I think that person comes from the Valley of the Dead. I will be fine, but I dont want any innocent people to die. Going to another place is convenient, but it will be difficult to hide, considering my personality. So I decided to head back to the Baekeungji. A place that showed the greatness of the Orthodox clan, its nobleness, and a place where one out of three people walk out as a swordsman. A place that is full of beautiful Orthodox people. Somehow, if they and the assassins end up fighting, I can smile. Of course, I will be supporting the Orthodox side. I arrive at the dorms of the Baekeungji at dawn and make up for my lack of sleep. I then get up in broad daylight like a man with many things to do and walk around the streets. This area is clearly a lot cleaner than an area under an Unorthodox sect. It is a city with people who know how to clean up. After walking around and looking at the trees lining the street, I sit down at the guest house where I met the disciple the other day, ate noodles, and drank alcohol to pass the time. When I was near the Black Rabbit Union, I was always nervous because of the assassins, but I could sit in peace here. A situation where I wonder if my body is tilting towards the Orthodox side. I then find the jerk who is wandering around in the late afternoon and loudly say. Ugh! Isnt that young master Mong? The second son of the Mong family, Mong Rang. The disciple becomes startled and looks at me from the street. What? What is with you? I reply with an even louder voice as he comes running to me. Yah you, ass. The disciple who arrives close to me then continues to stare at me. Do you want to die? This is insane. Shut your mouth! The disciple naturally sits across from me and begins to glare at me while covering my mouth. Why are you here? As you can see, I am here to eat. You didnt go back to the Low Down Sect and instead decided to eat here. I drink a glass of alcohol and look at him. My wish. Actually, even among my subordinates, no one is stronger than this guy. That is the reason I am here. That said, it is convenient to greet this guy even if he doesnt like me. I was originally going to go, but But. The assassins found me. So? After killing them all, I remembered the noodle house. And this one was good, so I came here. A passerby grins at my words. We are doing pretty well. I nod and point. I know. The disciple is also thirsty. Arent you out? The errand boy bows his head. I will leave, young master. And the disciple looks at me again. I meant that there is no reason for you to rest here. Low Down Sect leader, why do you keep bothering me? Dont act innocent, either. Mong Rang, do you still not realize? What? If you tell me to not act innocent, then I will end up doing that. You jerk, you must be out of your mind. Do you want a fight? Can you show me who is the strongest among the young in Baekeungji and let me fight them? I decided to let go of the Low Down Sect leader title for a while. And, is Baekeungji your property or something? Your front yard? Backyard? Nonsense speaking bastard. He sighs. Baekeungji is not my land. I get it. Alright, so you can fight well with the skillful ones and take care of it whether you leave. I will leave As I glance around, the disciple changes his words. I wish you good luck. As he gets up, my voice becomes serious. You bastard, sit down. His face becomes covered in an angry expression. This jerk is seriously pushing his luck! I smile and look at him. Mong Rang. What? Do not act silly. What do you think I will do if I fail to hold my temper? We will establish a Low Down Sect branch here. There are many ways to go around drinking here every day until the branch stabilizes. If I see an assassin harassing a lady or a sister, we will even tell that to the senior Sword Demon or maybe the Alliance leader. So do not provoke me. The man who can set up a branch will be here with the intention of bullying you. Got it? The disciple becomes silent. I speak in a casual tone. There are more than 500 subordinates who can be used. All of those will come to watch over you. Today, I went to a place with Mong Rang and ordered jerky with alcohol. I am confident to let things like this go out to the world. That is the Low Down Sect. Will you have fun living with them? You wouldnt, right? He then asks with a bitter expression. What do you want? I nod my head and offer him a drink. Now you make sense. Have a drink. I fill the empty glass and then say. The people chasing me are probably hunters from the Valley of the Dead. Okay? Then how about gathering the 500 men of yours to attack them? Even if those 500 are shit, I am sure they can get something done, and the assassins would be annihilated in their hands. Why can you not do anything that simple? I smile as I say. Is your head filled with shit? Did you just flirt with a woman? Why are you acting like this? Shut up. Well, that valley is a place where assassins are often produced. I am pretty skillful since I am a sect leader, but my people would end up dead. Right, and what does that have to do with me? I point to him. There is no man stronger than you among my subordinates. He chuckled at this. Yah, isnt it obvious? There is no one equal to me in Baekeungji except master. I clench my hand as I check his expression. Seeing the smile that suddenly appears on his face after some trivial praise I sigh. What do you think assassins are? What do I think? Assholes. Catch them and kill them. Good. I have decided. What? You work with me. The two of us will smash the valley. It will be a pretty tough fight. Why do you get to decide that? He looks like the whole idea is absurd. Why do I have to come there with you to kill people who are said to be assassins trained to be best? It is true that I am strong, but why should I? Could you explain, so I understand? I nod. In such a case, you must make an offer that cannot be refused. Give me a pill. Pill my ass. You wicked jerk. Do you know the thing that ice technique users need to consume? I take a sip of water as I say. Tell me where the Moon Pill Flower is. In an instant, the disciple becomes so shocked that he falls back. He suddenly stands as stiff as a ghost with surprise. Moon Pill Flower? How do you know about that? I know because I am the leader of the Low Down Sect. Most people wont know what that is, but I would since I practice the ice technique. The Moon Pill Flower is a rare pill that many previously tried to obtain. Even though I know its location, I have yet to go for it. The reason is that if I take it without a solid foundation, the effect will decrease. I was like that in my previous life. Although the qi from the pill is good, it will be difficult to fully utilize it. And here is the explanation. If the Millenium Ginseng, the king of all elixirs, is at the pinnacle, this pill can be said to be in the top ten. For those learning the ice technique, it is akin to feeding them ice. There are very few within Baekeungji, but no matter what I am, I cannot get one. This is because I, too, ate just one and was in great pain in my previous life. When a single flower falls, the moon flowers around will also start to wither. In addition, the pill is cumbersome to consume without touching. I have learned the Shadow Moon Martial Arts and how to use ice qi, so it might be good to use the Moon Pill Flower. I then ask him. Where is the pill? Must be in a nice place. It isnt a lie, right? I look at him and ask. One day, I was out for some drinks. As I leaned on a woman at some point, the realization hit. It is hard to find a pill that can give us ice qi. If one can use such a qi, then having the pill will help smoothly increase the total qi that the body can work on, allowing us to take the next step in the process. It is up to you to decide whether you want to spend all your time being scolded by the Sword Demon or if you would like to focus on your own training as he wants. He responds with a serious expression. I cannot believe that such a pill even exists. Lets first think about it. If we head to the Valley of the Dead, then consuming that pill and cultivating the energy should be mine. This cant be negotiated. I need to be the one who takes that pill. I look at him calmly and nod my head. You can do that. Instead. Instead, what? Tell senior Sword Demon about this incident and the destination. After you take the pill, tell him about the invasion, and that you are coming with me. You are still a child, so your words will not have much weight to them. He looks puzzled. If you knew the right location of the pill, why didnt you eat it? I said I was looking for Ice techniques. Do you know what that means? Ah right. He quickly understood my meaning, and his expression changed. What? Then you learned an ice technique? I grin. Did you think you are the only one who can do it? I infuse ice qi into the glass I am holding. Soon, vapors rise from within as the drink freezes in an instant. He gulps as he holds out his hand. Give it here. I toss the frozen drink at him as he looks at me stiffly. What is this? This is real. I look at him. Mong Rang, think for once. This is your chance to have your life changed. What person of Kangho would speak about this pill? Fortunately, this Moon Pill Flower has to be taken at a limit. When the person accepts the qi, the petals will falter and fall. Prepare a sword and come pick them up with me. At the same time, you can take it and increase your ice technique to a higher level. After that, we can head to the Valley of the Dead. If you are afraid of the people there, we can ask senior Sword Demon to come along too. If the three of us work together, we can destroy a sect alone, right? I turn my head to see the Sword Demon approaching me with his hands behind his back. He then asks me. Sect leader, is it true? I dont know how far you know, but it is. The Sword Demon approaches me with a dull expression and looks at his disciple. My disciple. Yes, master. Lets go, Ah, where do we go? To which he replies. What do you mean where? To take the Moon Pill Flower. Now? The Sword Demon looks at me. Sect leader, we will take our leave. As I do calculations to settle the bill with the errand boy, the disciple asks the Sword Demon. Why are we suddenly leaving? Do we need that, for real? I dont need it. Then why should you come? I will head there with the sect leader. The Sword Demon looks at his disciple and me as he responds. Guide me. I know for sure. The times are dangerous. I look at him and nod. Lets go. Chapter 118 Chapter 118 C After Paying The Price Of Time I look at the Sword Demon, who brings a long sword he didnt use against the Alliance leader, and ask. Senior, what kind of sword is that? The Sword Demon replies. It is the sword of my ancestors. I do not use it often but must bring it with me at such times. Does it have a name? The Bright Sword. The Sword Demon and the name of his sword do not match together. What could the story behind that be? Even though I know he will refuse, I make an unreasonable request. Senior, can I take a look at the sword? The disciple is shocked as he looks at the Sword Demon after hearing my request. The Sword Demon simply smiles as he says. A look? He simply hands me the sword, allowing me to look at it. Nothing unusual about it so far. It gives off a modest feeling. There is no intricately designed sheath, and there is nothing unusual about the handle either. Overall, it feels a little strange that it has a mixture of indigo and black colors. The most impressive thing about it is the weight. Why is it this heavy? Because it is weighted. I grab the Bright Sword with my left hand and move it around. It looks dull on the outside, yet the sword is smooth and dazzling. It has to be a famous sword. I suddenly get a strange feeling as I slowly pull it out. I feel goosebumps rise all over my body. Hmm I look at the Sword Demon. senior, am I imagining things? I look up at the sky and around us. I hear the screaming of people and their sobbing. It doesnt feel close but is similar to echoes from another room. If I continue listening to it, I feel like my heart might succumb. I put the sword back inside its sheath, and silence returned. The Sword Demon says. That was none of your imagination. You held up pretty well. Usually, many people pass out as soon as they pull it. If you touch it for a long time, your dreams start to go wild, so give it back here. I return the sword to him and say. I had a good look. No, do I even get to say that? Well, it is an amazing sword. Hearing my words, the Sword Demon calmly receives the sword with a confused expression. Amazing? I look at him and say. It is a rare thing to see. What do you mean? It is a Demon Sword of high rarity. Whether it is a Demon Sword or Righteous Sword, you fought the Alliance leader using a wooden sword. That means my senior is a strong man. It is quite impressive. My thinking is correct. If the Sword Demon had fought with this, it wouldnt be strange if their fight had lasted three days and three nights. The Sword Demon nods and says gently. Thank you for letting me know. He then looks at his disciple and says. The Low Down Sect leader understands my heart. The disciple bows his head and says. I understand too, master. The Sword Demon smiles. Lets go. The Bright Sword must have a story behind it, but I dont ask him about it. Every person has a story that is difficult to talk about. Since he didnt use that weapon against the Alliance leader, then it means that the Bright Sword holds a deep story behind it. It is only fitting to hear that story after paying the price in time. The Sword Demon holds his sword, and together with his disciple, the three of us head towards the Great Red Mountain. The Moon Pill Flower is in the Great Red Mountain? It is beyond it, to be precise. The Sword Demon looks surprised. Are you speaking about the red peak? You know of the red peak? The disciple, who doesnt know about it, asks his teacher. Master, what kind of place is it? It is a place where warriors would often meet and fight. It is a unique battleground. That is a place where it is said that the rough terrain had become flat due to powerful people. Actually, it is a place that cannot be understood with just your naked eyes. The ground is red with dust, and the peaks are of unknown origin. The disciple looks at his master. Did the Three Disasters fight here? To which Sword Demon replies. I dont know. There are always rumors about them, which makes it hard to determine the truth. However, if those tales are true, the warriors must have often fought there to change the landscape to such an extent. The disciple then speaks with a dry smile. If so, then the Moon Pill Flower might not have bloomed there naturally and was instead cultivated by one of the Three? Wouldnt it be better to rethink this visit then? The Sword Demon shakes his head. It cannot be. I feel the urge to speak for once but decide to stay silent. If that place is being managed by one of the Three Disasters, I should have died already. The three of us cross the Great Red Mountain and look at the vast, dark-red plain beneath it. Peaks of various shapes are all around it. It truly is a place of strange shapes. With these thoughts in my head, I jump down. Lets go. After a while, the three of us move like the wind through the dust. I head straight to the highest peak I see. While running, I see the disciple who shouts. No, how did you?! This peak only looks moderately tall when viewed from atop the other peaks. However, it looks massive when we look up at it while running through the plains. It doesnt look like it will allow humans to easily climb up. And if it is the highest peak, it means it is steep and tall. The Sword Demon, running on my right, asks. This is the highest peak. Does it have a name? It is called the Red Wild Lonely Peak. At first, I didnt understand why a peak was called lonely. But, as I continue to climb it, I begin to understand the meaning behind it. It is because the peak is a place where unfathomable loneliness can be felt. The Sword Demon sighs. Ah, if that is its name, then it must have been visited by people of ancient times. I then tell him. Senior, it will be more convenient once we get to the top. Do your best and move at full speed. I dont know if your disciple can do it, though. The disciple snorts. Shut up. I take the lead to show them how comfortably they can move. I then leap high into the air by slamming my foot to the ground and soar high above. I feel my thighs swell as I reach the top by kicking and balancing my body repeatedly. When I look down, I see the Sword Demon using footwork and moving near me without much of a gap between us. The two of us stare at the disciple who has yet to arrive. It looks like he might have stumbled in the middle, coming up with loud sounds as his hands and feet try to get a grip using ice. Bababak! I click my tongue. We came here for the flower. Does he have to show off like that? He somehow reaches the top with trembling hands. The Sword Demon looks quite displeased at the state of his disciple. You must have enough qi to do this. What are you doing? It was like seeing the stone dragon move. Well, youre busy drinking all day long, but make time to learn footwork in the future. You came all the way here to just make me ashamed. The disciple looks shocked. Master, this is my first time climbing this peak. I snort at his excuse. Shut up. I turn to look at the peaks center before the disciple can speak anymore. The Sword Demon then sighs. Ah, it is there. On the small side of the peak are flowers in bloom. The three of us walk to it. As we promised, we are taking cautious steps. This is because the flower has a tendency to wither on its own. Actually, some of them have already scattered all over. In between those fallen petals are some healthy flowers that are moving in the wind. The disciple then says. It really is here. I then tell him. Cut it with your sword. Take the flower with your blade as it falls. Do you know what I mean? If you touch it with your hands, its effect will decrease. The disciple then asks the Sword Demon. Master, wont you have any? It will be foolish to be greedy for what doesnt suit me. The two of you should hurry and get your body ready to cultivate this. Stop talking now. The disciple and I exchange glances. I usually get a bit drunk in these situations, so I take a deep breath. I hope this disciple doesnt make a mistake. But mistakes that do happen are also fate. I nod and sit down to match the moment as I pull out my sword to cut a flower. I then immediately gulp it down without touching it. I look at the disciple, who is chewing on it with a smile. The Sword Demon then speaks with a calm tone. Start. The three of us sit cross-legged in a triangle as the Sword Demon looks at us with his arms crossed. With my eyes open, I feel it will be alright to absorb the Moon Pill Flowers qi. I begin to feel the coldness wrap around my body. I dont really need to cultivate it, but then I look towards the Sword Demon sitting cross-legged in front of me. That sword was called the Bright Sword. I know that sword is very dangerous due to the ominous ghostly voices I heard when I drew it. The Sword Demon doesnt have any other demonic items on his body, and he is trustworthy. As I cannot be anxious about the dangers of a weapon, I often make eye contact with the Sword Demon while cultivating. Even if I dont cultivate, the Sword Demon doesnt look shocked. He looks at his disciple and me. Then his disciple closes his eyes. In the end, we are waiting together for his disciple to finish. I cant predict when it will end, so I decide to close my eyes and fold my arms. This situation is where the disciple doesnt have a week to get this done. I open my eyes at the same time as the Sword Demon. ! The Sword Demon holds out his hand as if to tell me not to get too excited. Even the disciple is frowning with his eyes closed as he feels the flow of qi change. The Sword Demon then says. Mong Rang, calm down and do what you need to. The Sword Demon stands up quietly, turns his back to us, and looks to the front. Muffled sounds emanate from the bottom of the peak as a woman in red jumps lightly to the top. I stand right next to the Sword Demon as she suddenly appears. A woman who looks to be in her thirties, but it is difficult to estimate her age. She has a large mouth and a small dimple on her cheek. I know right away that she isnt one of the Three Disasters, but I cant figure out who she is. The woman then says to the Sword Demon. Did the Moon Pill Flowers wither? To which he responds. I apologize if this senior had raised them. There was no signpost saying anything. I am a bit puzzled. To be honest, I am curious about the womans identity. However, I am even more curious about why she wasnt here when I took the flowers in my past life. The woman then says. This is so confusing that I cannot even speak. Disciple, is it alright to say those things when you are stealing? I came here because I heard a strange noise. The Sword Demon then says. The footwork of my disciple is rather slow. That was why senior heard it. Since I am no longer part of the Demonic Cult, there is no need to call me a disciple. You left the Cult? Please understand that I left because of an argument with the Cult leader. The woman looks surprised. You argued with the Cult leader? That is surprising. Can you tell me why? The Sword Demon replies in an emotionless voice. The leader desired to create the Heavenly Pearl, but I was opposed. We ended up fighting. As soon as the Heavenly Pearl is mentioned, I become shocked. To exaggerate slightly, I can even feel the Heavenly Pearl inside me buzzing. The woman smiles with her big mouth. Heavenly Pearl? Big Brother must have gone insane. Thats so like him. I glance at the woman. How many surprises am I going to get today? First, its the mention of the Heavenly Pearl, and then this woman calls the Cult leader Big Brother. She looks at the Sword Demon and says. The fact that you left a fight with Big Brother alive is unheard of. Or perhaps he was especially caring of you and couldnt kill you. To which the Sword Demon says. Does he have an emotional side? Senior, you should be careful with your words. Even your relationship with him as your Big Brother is useless in front of him. The woman nods. Can Heavenly Pearl be made so easily? Then who is next in command after you left? I dont know. I am not interested. The woman looks at the Sword Demon with a calm expression and says. But the Moon Pill Flowers have withered. Lets hear how you will make up for it. The Sword Demon replies. Are you really the one who cares for these flowers, senior? The woman smiles again and throws a parchment from her sleeve toward him. I smile as I see it flying through the air. It is the map that I had in my past life. Chapter 119 Chapter 119 C What A Chaos. After checking the parchment, the Sword Demon speaks in a gentle tone. A map? The woman smiles. The Moon Pill Flower is a flower that blooms and dies at will. I notice that there are times when it refuses to bloom for ten years. Shouldnt people be there to soothe the boredom during that gap? I need to replenish the servants for the main base. However, if youve managed to come here, you arent that useless. Whats the difference between you and the Cult leader, then? Are you saying that people living in Kangho must be treated humanely? If the Moon Pill Flower bloomed here and I was a weak woman, everyone would come and attack me. A man that holds the name of the Sword Demon is spewing shit. Are you suffering from something? So much bullshit. The woman looks at the cultivating disciple and then at me. Now then, you know that the flowers are under my care. How will you repay me? Lets hear it. The Sword Demon looks at me. It seems like hes at a loss for words. I then tell her. What do you even want? The Moon Pill Flower is a flower that blooms on its own. If you were going to take it, you needed to have taken it long before. Your argument is bizarre. Moreover, seeing that you are holding a map, you seem to think of this as bait to catch strong men. So now you want to rip us off? As soon as I say those words, she looks surprised. How brazen. Sword Demon, who is this person? To which he replies. Ask him yourself. He is right in front of you. I havent fully figured out who he is either. She looks shocked as she turns to look at me. Who are you? I have always been rude, so I frequently get into trouble. If I somehow mention that I am the leader of the Low Down Sect, itll probably just give her a good reason to get mad and attack my base. I am a person who not long ago was working in a guest inn The woman ignores my words and then asks the Sword Demon. Who is the one cultivating? To which he replies. My disciple. The one to inherit the Bright Sword? No. Thank you then. Between your disciple and this absurd bastard, I will take one of the two as payment. They will work as servants and then eventually be released. They are both quite skilled for their age, so I will be able to put them to good use. This should be a solution? The Sword Demon then says. That will be difficult. Reason being? My disciple still has a lot to learn, so I need him with me. Not to mention that if you take him, youll end up in an all-out war with the Mong family. How surprising. How is it that the Mong family would end up as my opponent? So is this man a young master from the orthodox side? The Sword Demon shakes his head. No, but hell not be a servant for you. Reason? It is because he is already an independent man. Anyways, it is true that I took flowers that belonged to you. I will search around Kangho for things of equal value and send them to you. I am a man who keeps his word, so please settle for this. I look at the two of them with my arms crossed. Even though they are both from the Demonic Cult, their way of speaking is gentle. The woman laughs. It has been a long time since I heard someone say this to me, and its making my mood drop. You fought with the great sahyung and managed to achieve something, so it seems you forgot who I am. I think it will make me feel better if I take a look at your disciples skills. The Sword Demon smiles. I could say the same thing. Have you forgotten who I am? The woman nods her head. I know who you are. Why did the handsome Sword Demon run away after a fight with the leader? You, who was more arrogant than anyone else, experienced defeat, right? The Sword Demon nods. Such is the strength of the leader. Just like a young master who ran from home, I had no choice but to do the same. We met with similar opponents and are just recalling old memories. The woman responds right away. Lets go. The woman walks to the end of the peak and moves. The Sword Demon looks at me and says. Leader, please. I nod. Come back safe. I cross my arms as I watch him move. Anyway, it isnt surprising that fighting is the best thing to do when you are angry. I am curious about the fight, but the Sword Demons request means I simply fold my hands and remain sitting. And sigh as I guard this idiot. What a person gets to do in life is truly a mystery. After a while, I hear a roar from below that doesnt concern me much. The Sword Demon is someone even the Demonic Cult leader couldnt kill. It is my conclusion, then, that the woman is unlikely to be able to kill him either. With this in my head, I begin to think about the flower Lets think about why the woman didnt appear in my past life. What reason can there be? She must have been killed by someone. In that case, there must also be a high chance that the Demonic Cult leader died as well. That is how precious the Heavenly Pearl is. It seems that it is an object the cult was reluctant to create. The leader must have also infused it with demonic qi after touching it. Kill and replace, and repeat. No matter how strong this woman, who calls herself a Palace Leader, was, if the cult leader wanted to find her, she wouldnt be able to hide or avoid her fate. Inevitably she would have ended up dead from either a broken neck or having all of the qi in her dantian drained out. Another roar sounds from below. I look at the disciple, whose face is dripping with sweat. This is why people stay far away from Kangho. Anxiety or even a twist in the emotions during cultivation can result in death or cause serious qi deviation. I then tell the idiot. You master will not lose the fight. Stay calm and finish it unless you want to be scolded later. Hearing that, he gulps down his anxiousness and begins to calm down. The sound of a roar continues to echo from below. I fold my hands again and turn my head. Who? Has my opponent arrived? After a few moments, a woman dressed similarly to a man arrives at the peak. Her clothes have more white on them than on average. I came to the conclusion that she is still young. She isnt normal either. A woman with a frown on her face approaches the flower, takes a deep breath, turns to me, and asks. Did you two take them? As I sigh, she asks. Are you deaf? I begin to dig into my ear with a finger. Phew. I never touched a woman who didnt learn martial arts. Then what does this mean? A woman who has mastered martial arts means she has trained a lot. It feels like where this woman came from also has many women. And since she is a woman, I ask her politely. You seem to be a disciple of that woman who came here first. If you dont want the bright red dirt with that mouth, keep your eyes open and be careful with your words. If you dont know about the world, youll get taught through the most horrible forehead flick. The woman continues to look at me, and she walks closer. She then looks at me with cold eyes and asks. What is a forehead flick? It is more absurd that you dont even know that. I cannot tell you. Why? Because it isnt something one learns by asking. The woman smiles. I see her expression and think that it is probably fake. It is an expression that says she will attack, and, unsurprisingly, her hand moves toward me. When she tries to grab my wrist, I naturally avoid it by simply turning my wrist and switching her hand to the other side. Her movements are smooth, so I accept that she is a good disciple for her master. Kwaang! She quickly takes six or seven steps back. Oddly enough, I am pushed back slightly, which causes me to fall down on my butt. It looks like my feet were pushed as I didnt have balance. It doesnt feel nice as I get up, patting my butt. Are you ready for the flick? She asks me. How old are you? Again, this kind of question. She means to ask for my age, but the meaning behind it is to compare our age and say that the elder has a better understanding. I look at her face and respond. I am at an age where I know everything. She looks at me wide-eyed as if she is being mocked. What do you even know? I know about the flick. A village wench who doesnt even know that doesnt get to ask. She immediately changes her stance, pushes off the ground, and moves with her sword to attack me. I accept her attack and think. At this point, that bastard will end up dying from Qi Deviation. Hell go insane since two masters are fighting beside him. I make my first move to ensure this woman stays right with me. The woman is also constantly changing the technique she uses to flow between defense and direct attacks with her hand. I counter her palm technique with my fist. It looks strong, but I know how to overcome and counter it. She instantly changes her attack to a kick that is aimed at my left cheek. I block it with my left hand and counter with an attack to her chest. She is startled and immediately moves to defend her chest as I switch to using the Waning Moon technique. Tak. It is a technique I made when I knew that the opponents I might encounter were likely stronger than me. But since this woman is skilled, it doesnt work correctly. I kick her on the ankle and, as her body begins to wobble, catch her by the collar and infuse her with ice qi. She attempts to counter it, but the expression on her face contorts once the ice begins to seep in. Moreover, the first place I touched her was on her neck. I then hold her as I say. A flick. I flick my fingers directly on her forehead, and she collapses with the sound of something cracking. After glaring at her, I speak to the cultivating idiot. Are you going to do it all day? What did you even learn? Do you plan to do anything? Do it in moderation, asshole. Am I being careless? The woman I thought had fainted suddenly pushes up from the ground with one hand and withdraws seven feet as she gets back up. She continues to stroke her forehead as she glares at me. Looking at the red spot on her forehead, I say. What will you do? Figure out what that is. For a moment, I have a feeling that my voice sounds a bit evil. Its not me whos weird, but its that woman. She then asks. that is a forehead flick? It is hard to get used to how she speaks The disciple next to me begins to cross his hands and lowers them right to his dantian before exhaling a long breath. Uh After finishing his cultivation, he opens his eyes. Without even a word of thanks to the great me, he gets up, looks at the woman, and says. You thug, dont hit a woman recklessly. I fold my arms and turn my head to look at him. you do say the right things. Shut up! He yells at me and then says to the woman. I apologize to you. He then gets up, wipes his bottom, and bows to her. I am Mong Rang of the Mong family. May I know who you are, Miss? I look between him and the woman with a puzzled expression. You stay out of it. What? The woman stretches her neck to both sides and makes a squeaking sound. In the middle of this, I am surprised that this idiot is trying to look good to a woman from the opposing side. Those from the Unorthodox side who run after chaos are weird, but these people are beyond that. Whenever I see such things, I feel like I should move to the Orthodox side. It is because I feel like a normal person compared to these idiots from the Demonic Cult. In the middle of this, she pulls a band tied around her waist like a girdle and flicks it, turning it into a whip. The woman then asks. Are you ready to be beaten? Meanwhile, a long beam of qi flies out from the Bright Sword from below. The laugh of a woman who is like a virgin ghost begins to echo over the whole of the Great Red Mountain. I sigh. Wonderful. Wonderful. Chapter 120 Chapter 120 C If You Want To Hate Me, Do It Properly This idiot is trying to talk nicely and kindly to stop the woman. Miss, hes no ordinary lunatic, so stop. She glares at me and then tells the Pervert Demon. I told you to stay out of this. I turn to look at his expression. I can see that this idiot is scanning her body. I am amazed at his dedication to his character. This guy is for real. Hes an actual pervert. The woman then says. You didnt fight properly. Neither did I. Lets give it our all now. I cross my arms and respond to her. You seem to have never been given a proper beating. Well, I will give that new experience to you today. When I gave the forehead flick earlier, it was just a normal flick. Normally, her head would already be broken. The woman begins to infuse qi into her whip. Those kinds of threats dont work on me. I wonder if her hand is moving in a line or a curve as the whip moves instantly toward my head. Pung! I am too lazy to make large movements, so I just grab the whip with my left hand. Tak! The woman frowns as she holds the whip with both hands and tries to pull it back. I continue to hold onto it and infuse some Fire Chicken energy into it. Her body begins to get dragged forward, and suddenly, she decides to come toward me. ! This hot-tempered woman is jumping at me. As soon as I see her eyes, I know she wants a fight. I counter her attack with fire. Wheik! With my left hand holding her whip, I form ice using my right hand and begin to infuse her whip with more fire energy. I then glance over at the disciple who is watching events unfold. It is an old habit, even though I know the moron wont be surprised. I then turn to look at the face of the woman in front of me. Her face gradually turns red, as if she is on the verge of desperation. The disciple couldnt stand it. You idiot, dont kill her! Miss, stop it! This will be my last warning. My master and your party member are also fighting over this matter. I watch the womans eyes turn red. Um? It looks like shes learned some demonic martial arts. This is surprising since its usually older practitioners whose eyes show such color when they use these techniques. Gold represents Shaolin, blue for Wudang, and red makes up other extreme qi. However, blue is typically the representative color. On the other hand, the color of those who learn martial arts tends to vary. It can be dark or ominous, like blood, or cloudy and gray. Her red is that of blood. Her eyes and the whip she is holding onto are gradually turning red. Her hand also has a red hue around it. I snort as I look at the woman. Is she on the side of the Blood Demon? At that moment, the disciple looks startled, as if he has figured something out. Sect leader, be careful. She seems to be part of the Blood Demons group. Even a single wound will end up in a war. Lee Zaha! You cannot kill her! I squint my eyes. Shut up. I know what I need to do. I try to balance the Heavenly Pearl with the Shadow Moon technique. The level of my ice technique and ice qi that I can use is low compared to fire. However, it is enough to mess with this girl. The strange feeling coming from her red color is suppressed as if a fire is burning it down. I also continue to infuse ice qi into the whip. At that moment, blood began to drip down the womans nose as she couldnt hold it any longer. I smirk at the sight. The blood that is dripping from one nostril then starts dripping from both. I cant help but giggle as I say. Nosebleed. Look at that nose. Sticky and dirty. Should I give you time to blow your nose and fight? Or did you dig too deep into the nose before climbing up here? She looks at me with anger on her face. Man, this woman has a greater temper than most men. Even considering that she belongs to the Demonic Cult, I feel she doesnt understand its principles. My hit on her forehead also probably makes her feel a strange resentment towards me. Look here, I am no subordinate to bow to you. I press forward to her as I combine the internal and outer qi of fire and ice. The womans knees begin to tremble like they will crush down to the ground. I then ask while forcing her to kneel. You surrender? To which she replies As if. Good. I nod my head to acknowledge her courage. I release my crossed arms, grab her by the collar, infuse her with ice qi, and then throw her off the side of the peak. Swish C the woman goes flying into the air. As soon as her scream starts, it continues as she falls at high speed. The disciple squeals. You crazy moron! I then tell the woman fighting with the Sword Demon at the top of my voice. Look here, lady. A woman of yours, a disciple or something, is falling down the cliff. Hearing this, the disciple throws himself off the cliff. Miss! I go to the edge of the cliff and look down. Wow what new kind of madness is this? If he has the same skill as the woman who attacked me, then he wont die. If he uses qi, the impact can be reduced, and the body can land without damage. Moreover, the woman fighting Sword Demon must have heard my voice. Unsurprisingly, a red form is moving at an incredible speed and running for the falling woman as the disciple is also reaching her. Is this pure psychological warfare or a prelude to the next attack? I place one hand above my eyes to get a clear look at what is happening below. As I thought The red woman snatches the falling woman mid-jump. The idiot has to tumble through the air and lands loudly as he falls. From a little distance away, the Sword Demon approaches them with slow steps. Suddenly, the atmosphere turns cold as the idiot, the woman, and the woman in red all look up at me. .! I stand at the peak and say. You should act in moderation when it comes to killing or to be killed. The idiot curses at me. I should be the one saying it! You bastard! The red woman then asks. Are you alright? Yes She looks at the Sword Demon and says. Sword Demon. I stopped the attack and rescued my disciple. I owe you. We will forget about the flower. The Sword Demon simply replies. Sure. And she then looks up. Who is that guy? He is the sect leader of the Low Down Sect. Can I kill him? To which the Sword Demon says. You dont have to. The reason being? He is the enemy of our cult leader. The enemy of an enemy is a friend, so act in moderation. I know hes not the type to attack first due to his personality. She then turns and asks her disciple. Did you jump in there first? To which she replies. Yes. Why is your forehead like that? A forehead flick. Did you jump into the fight because of that? Yes. The red woman sighs as she understands the situation. Immature. So immature. As if asking for forgiveness, she turns to the Sword Demon. She has never been into Kangho, so she doesnt understand how the world is. Please understand. The Sword Demon nods. It was nothing. The red woman then looks up and says. I wont kill you, so come down. I will just make sure to give back the flick on the forehead you put on my heir. The Sword Demon smiles and says. Senior. What? Look closely. A man who doesnt know to act in moderation is looking down. Anyway, lets end it here today. There is no need to push it like that. Since he is your junior who will help to deal with the cult leader, just let it be. My disciple must be tired of fighting. The disciple looks shocked. Master? The Sword Demon responds with a dull expression. Am I wrong? No. I am tired from all of that and the fight as well. It is difficult to understand why he said it, but both women are greatly embarrassed. The Sword Demon then says. Sect leader, come down and greet them. I put one foot in the air and fall straight down. I glide down the cliff, and as I come close to the ground, I hit the wall with my feet and land in a clean roll. Ten out of ten! I walk over with my hands behind my back and tell the women. I am Lee Zaha, the Low Down Sect leader. The woman replies. A common name and rotten nature. She looks at me and then turns to the disciple. You are? The idiot bows and says. Lady, I am Mong Rang of the Mong family. She nods lightly. There are still discussions left to do. Count on me to help you anytime you need. The disciple smiles. Dont worry. I just did what I had to do. She nods again. Then lets go ahead. I cross my arms and smile at their conversation. The disciple then asks. Why are you smiling? I respond with a bored look. Its because this bastard needs to take a dump before speaking normally. The disciple then says. Stop talking about dumps and shit! The Sword Demon gently intervenes. This is the Blood Night Palace Leader, Senior Eo Soryong. When I was young, she killed the then cult leader. The Blood Night Palace Leader answers. Dont talk about useless stuff. I was close to him. The Sword Demon then looks at the woman who is wiping her nose. It is my first time seeing her. The female disciple bows her head. Mister, my name is Gyo Young. The Sword Demon looks surprised as he says. Ah, really. You have grown so big that I didnt recognize you. There is silence for a moment. When such words come out, it inevitably becomes awkward. The Blood Night Palace Leader then asks him. What do you plan to do with the cult leader in the future? The Sword Demon answers. I expect the Alliance leader and the cult leader will fight one day. If its only between individuals, I intend to stay neutral. But if they move together with their forces, I intend to give my strength to the side that is at a disadvantage. You? The woman replies. I am in a situation where I cannot live under the same sky as him. But I still cannot help the Alliance leader. That is narrow thinking. Why? If the Alliance falls, anyone hiding in the mountains, whether you or bandits, will be killed by that man. It will be too late then. This made the woman silent. Can we go to the palace and see? Or shall we go our separate ways here? The Palace Leader replies. It is forbidden for outsiders to enter and exit because of the cult leader. We have to dine somewhere nearby and then go our own ways. Okay. As a reminder, even those who belong to this blood-sucking group eat food. As we move together, I speak what comes to my mind. Palace Leader, please help us eliminate assassins from the Four Flow Valley. She doesnt answer me but instead asks the Sword Demon. Is he crazy? The Sword Demon sighs as he replies. I dont know to be honest. The disciple who is next to me then chimes in. You are right. Look at how he threw your disciple from the peak. He is fully insane. So she then asks. Then what are you doing together? As if I know. I honestly convey my feelings. I think I am the most normal, so I dont understand this bullshit you are talking about. All the men and women together sigh at the same time. Shut up. Shut it Zip it. I close my eyes and then look at the Sword Demon, who is gently avoiding my gaze. The Palace Leader then asks in a displeased tone. What do I have to gain by helping you? Gain? I pause for a moment, look at her, and say. The reasons are different but dont we have a grudge against the same person? And you want to make a profit off me now? That is nonsense. The reality is, everyone here, including myself, is weaker than the Demonic Cult leader. To take revenge using martial arts alone will be too much and likely not result in our victory. So what do we fight with? We keep fighting to maintain our way of life. The cult leader treats the weak like worms, so I created a sect where the weak could proudly stand. With each step, we take down more of the Unorthodox sects. I will win by doing what that man didnt do. You must be doing something on your end to deal with him. To get revenge, you need to make the right plan. To hate someone, you need to hate them properly. Do you understand, Blood Night Palace Leader? I look at her. It is absurd to dream of revenge against him with such an attitude. Will you take revenge or not? I push her with my bullshit. The logic behind the words is way off, but If it helps to bring her to my side. Either way, it will be to my benefit. A man who scolds those who put their profit first while still taking care of his own profit. That is me. Chapter 121 Chapter 121 C Changing Fate Is Hard The place the Blood Night Palace Leader guided us to is a high-class manor called the Moonglade House. However, I cant tell if this place is a restaurant, a guest inn, or a brothel. This is because I rarely go to luxurious places. As I look around as we enter, I see that it is a place with everything. Food and alcohol are sold here, and nicely decorated private rooms are also prepared. This is a grandiose guest inn used by so-called distinguished guests. As we watch the guides treat the Palace Leader with the utmost respect, we eventually find ourselves led to a well-separated place. We didnt order anything, but light snacks are already being served. I ask the first question since I remember that everyone else finds it hard to converse with the Palace Leader. Blood Night Palace Leader, have you committed a massacre here before? The Blood Night Palace Leader replies with a puzzled look. What the hell are you talking about? Everyone is treating you with utmost devotion. The Blood Night Palace Leader shakes her slightly and replies. This place was made with the funds of the palace. Since we cant easily receive money offerings, we let merchants operate here, and some profits go back to the palace. As a matter of fact, Im the owner. Aha. I look at Blood Night Palace Leader again in amazement Shes an amazing woman. The Sword Demon, the Left Hand, the Blood Night Palace Leader, Gyo Young, and I sit around a round table and begin to eat. The servants sometimes appear to help refill water, but I note that all of them are in surprisingly good shape. A pervert is always a pervert. Whenever a servant comes by, the Left Hand would drink his water while staring at their chest. When he does it again, the Sword Demon sighs deeply. Disciple. Yes, Master. You fall in love too easily. How can you ogle at the ladies bodies so shamelessly? I feel ashamed of myself for nagging you at this place. The Left Hand replies in an unusually serious tone. Master, would this be an illness? An illness where I cant control myself. The Sword Demon looks at the Blood Night Palace Leader and says. Sunbae, this is how he is. You liked to evaluate people and often looked at physiognomy. What do you think? Lets hear from our Blood Goddess (Ѫ). The Blood Goddess must have been the Blood Night Palace Leaders nickname from her younger days. A Goddess usually refers to a woman with a beautiful appearance. However, the leaders beauty isnt that outstanding in my eyes. Perhaps all the stress has affected her face. Her looks are rather distressed. The Blood Night Palace Leader is strong enough to fight equally with the Sword Demon. It will only be natural to be constantly wary since their enemy is the cult leader. The Blood Night Palace Leader stares at the Left Hands face and says. Perversion is visible on his face. How come you have not noticed it yet? The Sword Demon replies in a complicated tone. As you may know, hes not from the Demonic Cult. I accepted him as my disciple without knowing his conditions. As she examines the Left Hands face, she continues. There are often men born with a morbid obsession with women. Of course, some women are also like that. Its not a problem in itself, but when they are born is important. If your disciple was born during a war and became a general or a king, then its no big deal. Your flaws can be overlooked if you lead an army and have excellent fighting skills. In this era, though What was your name again? The Left Hand replies. Its Mong Yeon. If you keep this up, your name will be the Pervert Demon as a condemnation and insult that follows you. However, you wont be able to cure this illness despite being ridiculed. This disease of the body and mind only disappears upon death. After her explanation, the Blood Night Palace Leader looks at Gyo Young. Hes the number one guy you should never date. Do you understand? Gyo-young replies. Yes, understood. Today, he falls in love while looking at you. He will make love with a servant tomorrow and snoop around the brothels that evening. Hell probably hit on women the next morning on his way back home. I grin as I continue to eat. Thats right. The Left Hand then asked the Blood Night Palace Leader with a serious look on his face. Sunbae, is there a way to fix it? No. How come? Because you dont intend to fix it. Repeated actions lead to fate. Live on knowing you will become the Pervert Demon in the future. You might die a miserable death. Perhaps training consistently can be one way out. Gyo-young then asks curiously. Then, what kind of person should I date? This time the Blood Night Palace Leader looks at me. After her narrow eyes scan me from head to toe, she continues. You should never meet a guy like him too. If Mong Yeon is number one, the Low Down Sect Leader is second. Take 50 steps away instead of 100. I reply bitterly. How so? The Blood Night Palace Leader explains to Gyo Young. Look close at the Low Down Sect Leaders eyes and expression. This is a guy who never intends to settle down. Thats often the case for men who are braced for death. Gyo Young, look at your forehead. Gyo-young touches her swollen forehead. The Blood Night Palace Leaders words continue. Hell give you a forehead flick every time you get on his nerves. A real man would never hit a woman. The Left Hand gives me a look of distaste. Thats right. I eat while looking around the table. Whatever. Gyo Young then asks the Blood Night Palace Leader. But why didnt anyone in the palace use the words finger flick? Its a word you use when you joke with friends. How could those in the palace use that word with you? Gyo Young then asks. What if I use it? Youre going to give a finger flick to the servants? Yes. Speechless, the Blood Night Palace Leader looks at the Sword Demon. The Sword Demon then says to Gyo Young. Gyo-young, how old are you? Im 18 years old. Youre past the age of hitting your servants or giving them a finger flick. You cant do that. Gyo Young replies. Yes, sir. If someone of your caliber does a finger flick, the servants could die. The flow of this conversation is all over the place. I scoff as I continue to eat and snort while scooping up the soup. Anyway, the food here is delicious. Their cooking skills are exceptional. The Sword Demon looks at my expression and asks. It sounds like you have something to say, Leader. I nod and look at the Blood Night Palace Leader. Looking at your face, you dont have much time left to live. The Left Hand spits out the water he was drinking. Pfft Ah, Im sorry. ! The Blood Night Palace Leader puts down her chopsticks and looks at me. How absurd. I have never heard such insults. As soon as the Blood Night Palace Leader shows signs of anger, the Sword Demon says. Hes not one to run his mouth. Lets hear him out. Lets hear it. I chew on a big chunk of sweet and sour chicken until its swallowed and then say. You fought with Senior Sword Demon. I have to admit youre skilled. The Blood Night Palace Leader is about to say something, but she glances at the Sword Demon and shuts her mouth. I then hydrate my mouth and speak with a grave expression. I think we should have a meal at Blood Night Palace today. I know you forbid outsiders and guests, but do you think the cult leader wont be able to find you if you hide? One word from the cult leader, and his men will use whatever it takes to find you. It doesnt matter if it takes 1, 2, or 3 years. Once he kills you, his men will go against the Blood Night Palace. The day the cult leader appears, the Blood Night Palace will vanish. You will die, this girl who was flicked by me will die, your servants and the superiors will die. Money will be transferred to the cult, and only ashes will remain of your palace. The Blood Night Palace Leader replies. Were not that weak. Does that mean youre stronger than the cult? No way. What are you trying to imply? Whats the meaning of Blood Night Palace? A night sky covered in red or something like that? Anyone can tell its part of the demonic cult. Isnt that so, senior? The Sword Demon replies. Blood Night is a nickname belonging to the Palace Leaders grandfather. Anyway, its funny that you used your grandfathers nickname as the faction name. Get rid of the name. A country changes its name when a dynasty ends, so whats the big deal? It is foolish to dream of revenge alone anyway. Its unrealistic. How can you seek revenge when the cult is more powerful? Your faction is weak, and your personal martial arts are worse than theirs. You have to change if you want to survive. You should know what you said to the shithead applies to yourself. Repeated actions lead to fate. You dont intend to change the closed-door nature of the sect, do you? Then your death is approaching. . Everyone holds their breath at my slander and remains still. I continue as I sip on my water. Based on my observation, The Sword Demon has individualistic tendencies. If such a sunbae said he would visit the Blood Night Palace, you shouldve treated him as a distinguished guest. Its not that hard to treat him to a meal. Once word gets out, itll come out along the lines of the Sword Demon had visited Blood Night Palace Thats rather disadvantageous news for you. People love to gossip. However, it turns out that the second son of the Wind Cloud Mong Clan family was also present, and the leader of the Low Down Sect, which is unheard of, is also spotted. Wouldnt your enemies increase? I try to pick up sweet and sour chicken with my chopsticks, but the atmosphere is too grim, so I put down my chopsticks. Look, Blood Night Palace Leader. Its not easy to live on. You have to try anything to not die. I would ally myself with the Sword Demon if I were you. I tap the table with my hand and say. Anyway, nows not the time to joke around. Do you get what I mean? Thats why you shouldve actively helped me when I was getting rid of the assassins of the Four Flow Valley. The Sword Demon replies with astonishment. Why are you suddenly bringing that up? The Blood Night Palace Leader looks at me and says. I understand what youre saying. How vexing. Ive never met anyone as cocky as you. I see Gyo Young staring at me and ask her a provoking question. What are you looking at? . The Blood Night Palace Leader asks Gyo Young. What do you think? I agree to changing the name. What do you suggest? Lets hear from the elders. Or we can change it to Holy Fire Sect based on fathers creation, the Sky Destructing Holy Fire Technique (}). Wouldnt it be more natural to follow the name of a martial art rather than his nickname? No one except the elders has learned great-grandfathers martial arts anyway. The Blood Night Palace leader nods. Ill consider it. At this time, a luscious-bodied servant enters to clear the plates. Everyone turns to look at the Left Hand. The Left Hand turns his head towards the servant reflexively, but he slaps himself on the cheek and whips his head in the opposite direction to stare at nothing. The sound of the slap surprises the servant. . I speak to everyone at the table in a calm tone. Changing fate is so hard. The Left Hand replies with a distressed look. I agree, its not easy. As soon as he says this, the Left Hand closes his eyes tightly. I click my tongue and shake my head. Cut the bullshit, jeez. Forcing his eyes shut, the Left Hands eyes are trembling. As she becomes lost in thought, the Blood Night Palace Leader looks around at everyone seated here and says. Then Ill serve you tea in the palace. Everybody get up. Gyo Young, who has been watching all of the Left Hands shenanigans all this time, then says to him. You really seem like a lunatic. The Left Hand opens his eyes and answers. Dont say such mean things to your brother. Gyo Young becomes horrified as the Left Hand smiles and winks at her. I make eye contact with the Sword Demon, and we sigh simultaneously. In the meantime, the Blood Night Palace Leader is hugging Gyo-young as if they are avoiding the plague. Dont look at him. Lets go. Yes, maam. In fact, changing fate is very difficult. Its the same for everyone. Not just the Pervert Demon. I am the same. The attractive women I knew in my previous life had no connection with me. I think about it carefully after scolding the Blood Night Palace Leader, humiliating the Left Hand, and insulting the lady who swings a whip. I feel like itll be like that in this life too. At this point, I have discovered the secret to returning to the past. I can somehow predict the future of others. Yet I still dont know my future. However, some facts do not change. Im a man who somehow changes fates. Otherwise, the errand boy of Ilyang would never become the Crazy Demon. From errand boy to Crazy Demon. What will I become from Crazy Demon? Now that I have returned, it is my mission to find out. Chapter 122 Chapter 122 C White-haired Real Man Welcome. The Blood Night Palace Leader formally greets the elderly man who appears as we are drinking the tea. As our group turns our heads, we see that an elderly man is walking with difficulty, with helpers assisting him at the halls entrance. The white-haired elder halts and stares at the Sword Demon with wide eyes. Oh the Left Hand has really visited. The Sword Demon rises from his seat with a startled look and approaches the old man. Its been a long time, Elder Governor (ʹ). The old man pats the back of his helpers hand. Thank you, Yong-myeong. Ill take it from here. Yes, sir. I watch the old man and the Sword Demon with wide eyes. The Sword Demon is naturally helping the Elder and guiding him to a table where tea is ready. Upon close inspection, the old man seems to be well over 100 years old. The Blood Night Palace Leader pours some tea and turns the round table. Have some, Elder. The old man replies with a bright smile. Thank you, Palace Leader. I came after hearing were having guests after so long. Its so nice to see your face before I die. The old man pats the Sword Demon on the back as if he is his grandson. The Sword Demon smiles and replies. Elder, I left the cult after arguing with the cult leader. Im not the Left Hand anymore. Ah, really? I didnt know that. The elderly man looks at the people sitting around the table and adds. Im worried that fewer people are speaking directly next to the cult leader. Who are these young companions? Gyo-young introduces to answer the old mans question. This is the Wind Cloud Family Clans Lord Mong Rang, and this is Lee Zaha, the leader of the Low Down Sect. They are with the Sword Demon. The old man looks at the Pervert Demon and me before introducing himself. Lord Mong, Leader. My name is Heo Gyeom (St). Since he is an elder, the Pervert Demon and I respond politely. My name is Mong Rang, Elder. Please speak comfortably. Elder, Im Lee Zaha. He is an elder figure that the Palace Leader addresses formally and even causes the Sword Demon to rise from his seat. This indicates that he is one of the top heads of the faction. Elder Heo Gyeom asks the Blood Night Palace Leader. What were you talking about? I hope Im not intruding. Actually, I wanted to chat when I heard the Left Hand was coming. The Blood Night Palace Leader points at me. The Low-Down Sect Leader here is trying to attack an assassin faction called the Four Flow Valley, and he requested help from me. Do you know about the Four Flow Valley? Elder Heo Gyeom suddenly takes out a worn notebook from his wide sleeves. Four Flow Valley, hold on. I remember them. But its not clear. Ill tell you after looking through my notebook. Everyone looks at the worn notebook in Elder Heo Gyeoms hand. When he opens the worn-out cover, it is filled with small letters. Flipping through several pages, Elder Heo Gyeom then reads a part. The part about assassins is written here. The Four Flow Valley is always foggy. The apostle, the 7th () Instructor, and his disciples went into hiding. They operated as assassins, but it was difficult to nip the buds since people who mastered spells were also included. Many senior members of the cult died, and most sent to deal with them were killed. Later, the dispatched First (һ) Instructor beheaded all the defectors and burned down their hideout. However, the body of the 7th Instructor was not found. Looks like theyre back, huh? I look at Elder Heo Gyeom and reply. I dont know the details. They kept sending assassins to me, so this is what I found out while investigating. Elder Huh Gyeom smiles at me. Youre young. I cant believe youre already caught up with assassins. It seems youve been on the go around here. Getting a strange feeling towards Elder Heo, I reply. It just happens naturally as I get into fights here and there. Judging from his limping, he is clearly an old man who has lost his fighting ability. Nevertheless, he doesnt seem weak and still looks like someone worthy of my respect. It isnt just an aura that comes along with age. It feels like an aura similar to a conqueror of the land whose strength bordered on the narcissistic. It is not clear why such a person has become this fragile. Anyhow, the Blood Night Palace Leader treats him with respect, and Sword Demon rises from his seat to assist him, so Elder Heo appears to be an important figure in the cult. Gyo Young asks. What are the Seven Instructors, Elder? Elder Heo Gyeom replies. Oh, thats what I called them. What I have written here is mainly related to the Demonic Cult. The 7th Instructor is simply the 7th instructor who trains the assassins in the cult. You can think of them as the 7th chief. There were many talents when the clan was at its prime. As their power weakened due to the battle for succession, assassin sects were set up by the instructors. The instructors who raised the assassins mastered the worst part of the cult. It would be better for you to eliminate the assassins with the Low Down Sect Leader. The Blood Night Palace Leader nods. Yes, Elder. This conversation makes it unclear just who is the actual Palace Leader. I stare at Elder Heo Gyeom. I have no choice but to assume that he is a legendary figure in the Demonic Cult. Of course, I know nothing about retired members of the cult, but his aura and circumstance indicate that it is so. For a person to survive the Demonic Cult and live over a hundred years. How many fights, betrayals, death, and birth have this man witnessed with his eyes? In terms of age, he is a man who is like a celestial (), so I just sip my tea in awe. Elder Heo Gyeom actively participates in the conversation as if he values his remaining time. He then suddenly tells the Pervert Demon. Lord Mong. Yes. Can you give me your hand? Id like to see your internal Qi. Pervert Demon looks slightly taken aback, glances over to see the Sword Demons expression, and extends his hand. Elder Heo Gyeom grabs Pervert Demons wrist like an experienced practitioner and smiles. Ah, do you happen to be a survivor of Okhwa Palace Pervert Demon nods slightly. Ah, yes, I am. On my mothers side. Elder Heo Gyeom strokes the Pervert Demons hand. Youve grown up really well. I know you havent cut ties with Okhwa Palace, but its my first time seeing you in person. Im glad that excellent martial arts didnt go in vain. Lord Mong. Yes. You must have had a hard time training. Oh, no. I met my teacher, and Im getting guidance well. The Sword Demon nods. Elder, hes my disciple. Elder Heo Gyeom smiles and looks at the Sword Demon. You have an apprentice. Im surprised. If you see him to the end of the Okhwa Palaces Ice Technique, its a great martial art, so dont pass on the Illuminating Sword to him. The Sword Demon nods. Thats what I planned to do. Suddenly I sit upright. This old man hes no ordinary man. If a veteran retires and lives for another half a century, their aura will become like this Elder in front of me. Unfortunately, Elder Heo Gyeom looks at me this time. I look at Elder Heo Gyeom and think. Oh Lets not do that. Elder Heo Gyeom then says politely. This might make you uncomfortable, but my curiosity gets the best of me May I take a look at your internal Qi like I did to Lord Mong? I reply with complicated emotions despite knowing he has good intentions. Yes, of course. Please give me your guidance. Elder Heo Gyeom puts his finger lightly on my wrist and soon takes his hand off. Elder Heo Gyeom, whose expression has suddenly changed, is staring at me. . Gyo Young gets up and brings him some water. Elder, please have some water. As the atmosphere becomes cold, the Blood Night Palace Leader, Sword Demon, and Pervert Demon glance between Elder Heo Gyeom and me, who is saying nothing. Elder Heo Gyeom drinks the water and finally relaxes his expression. Sect Leader, you have such a great achievement at a young age. Are you also the Left Hands disciple? The Sword Demon answers instead. No, sir. Please pardon the question. Do you trust him? The Sword Demon answers calmly. Hes usually a little radical and harsh with his words and actions, but he has high aspirations regardless of his age. Elder Heo, the Low-Down Sect Leader, is not a bad guy. Dont be wary of him. If you have something to say, say it without hesitation. Ill listen to you. Can I briefly know your activities? Im aware hes killing many of the Unorthodox Factions in his hometown and infiltrating them. Has he had any disputes with the alliance or the cult? No. Only then Elder Heo Gyeom looks at me again. Leader, are you perhaps the disciple of the Three Disasters? I shake my head. No, no way. Elder Heo Gyeom then says. Sometimes Im confused that I know so much. Its the same when I face something I dont understand. This year my age should be 100 plus 11 years. Youre very young. I cant help but be shocked because you have mastered both extreme Yin and extreme Yang internal Qi. In fact, this is what the cult leader is cultivating now. I thought he sent his hidden disciple here, so I was flustered for a moment. If you have learned it on your own, you have my humble respect. I nod. I see. I understand. The cult leader tried to consume the Heavenly Pearl in my past life, so it is only natural that he is learning both Yin and Yang martial arts in balance. It is also only natural that the Elder, who has been with the cult for a long time, is surprised when he examines me. Elder Heo Gyeom then asks me. Ive never heard of a faction called the Low Down Sect. Are you the founder? Yes. What is the purpose of the faction? I made it so people would leave the working class alone. Elder Heo Gyeom smiles with a look of disbelief. Thats the most honest answer Ive heard about a factions purpose. Gyo Young asks. Elder, whats so honest about it? Elder Heo Gyeom said. The working class is often oppressed. Hence, the purpose of the faction meant hell fight forever. Ive heard of the rise and fall of many factions, but Ive never heard of such a reason. I nod. Youre not wrong. Elder Heo Gyeom asks me. Does the combination of yin and yang work well? As soon as the topic of martial arts comes up, I answer him carefully. Its not as harmonious as Im self-learning. And its still in the beginning stage. I see. Suddenly, Elder Heo Gyeom glances at the Blood Night Palace Leader. Palace Leader. Yes. About attacking the Four Flow Valley. I want you to actively help the Low Down Sect Leader. Im sorry if I am saying this out of line. The Blood Night Palace Leader replies. Not at all. Ill do that. Will you do that for me? Yes. This time, Elder Heo Gyeom looks at me with burdensome eyes. Sect Leader. Yes. Im very old. I might die anytime. I hope you can help Blood Night Palace if I ever die. What? As soon as I answer him, I glance at the expressions of the people around me. As the words are clearly not planned, the Sword Demon, Gyo-young, and Blood Night Palace Leader look flustered. The Blood Night Palace Leader says. What do you mean, Elder? We dont even live in the same town. Yes, I know. Elder Heo Gyeom looks around and says, If I die, the cult leader will come to this palace. Im asking you to help me then. It may sound strange, but it is what it is. Why would the cult leader be afraid of me? I saved him in the old days, so hes turning a blind eye. He wasnt even a leader at that time. He wasnt a man who takes care of others nor is sympathetic, but he distinguishes between love and hate when it comes to life-related matters. And thats why Ive been staying in this palace. Suddenly, Elder Heo Gyeom stares at me with a deep gaze. This palace came from the cult. Since our independence, we have never killed a person who has not mastered martial arts. You help the weak, so please help us with a generous heart. Just because we come from the Demonic Cult, it doesnt mean were all devils. Ive never felt so scared of a man who has lost his internal Qi. It is such a strange request that I try to roughly gloss over it. If theres anything I can do to help. Heo Gyeom cuts me off. Leader. Yes. Someone must reach out so one can escape the demon path. I am also puzzled as this 111-year-old Elder fusses over me. Sir, I have a question Ask away. I look at Hyeo Gyeom and ask him. How did you end up losing your martial arts? Heo Gyeom replies. There was a time when I was arrogant and thought I was strong. This is what happened after intruding on a well-known mans whereabouts. Who is that? He later became a member of the Three Disasters. I am stunned and check both the Sword Demon and Blood Night Palace Leaders faces. The two are expressionless, indicating that they already know. Only then do I realize why the Palace Leader and the Sword Demon are so respectful/ Anyway, this old man deserves respect. Not many people can survive coming up against the Three Disasters. A rare white-haired elder is looking at me with his wrinkled face. Perhaps as I am too impressed, I end up running my mouth carelessly. Wow Elder, youre a real man. . The atmosphere becomes cold. Humans make the same mistake over and over again, and this saying refers to me. Chapter 123 Chapter 123 C We Are Manly Men Elder Heo Gyeom replies to my rudeness. certainly in my youth, I was a manly man. Its been over half a century. I nod. I dont know what you expect from me, but I cant help if the Blood Night Palace remains a demonic cult. Elder Heo Gyeom nods. As I said, the Blood Night Palace will turn into a force that does not bother, kill, or extort the weak. We will need your help to transform. Im going to nag until my last breath. Fortunately, the Palace Leader listens to me well, so my efforts wont go in vain. I naturally talk a lot of rubbish, but I feel heavy when making a promise. Yet somehow, I cant avoid the old mans blaring gaze. Lets do that, Elder. Do I have your word, Leader? I look into the Elders eyes and promise. I take the pledge of this brilliantly aged real man and a real young man. The Low Down sect shall help the Blood Night Palace when the Blood Night Palace leaves the demonic path. With just a few words, I am now on the side of the Blood Night Palace. Is this the right choice? When I see the Elders widening smile, I feel like Ive been checkmated. Elder Heo Gyeom is not just an ordinary old man. I dont care who the Blood Night Palace fights. As long as you dont persecute those who dont cultivate martial arts, the Low Down Sect Leader will help you. Elder Heo Gyeom replies. Ill remember that. Anyway, Elder Heo is the one whos in charge of this situation. Suddenly, Elder Heo Gyeom flicks his finger, and a young man, who is waiting nearby, approaches. Yong-myeong. Yes. Everyone looks at Elder Heo. Do you know what Im going to order? The young man named Yong-myeong then says. I have a rough idea. Please go ahead. The third bookcase, 6th row, the 13th book. Bring it to me. Yes. Elder Heo Gyeom looks at me as Yong-myeong, who obeys the order, hurries out of the hall. Leader. Yes, sir. Not many martial arts in the world use both extreme Yin and Yang. Only a few have researched it. Although I lost my inner cultivation, I did not neglect to research and studying martial arts. I have a book that summarizes the combination of the polar opposite Qi. I look at the Elder with my arms crossed. Hm. Remember, its only for reference. Martial arts are not a study that distinguishes between black and white. Everyone has a different physical condition, environment, and type of Qi. Do you understand me? Yes. Let me briefly explain the combination. What happens when the water in your right hand and water in your left hand are put together? It will overflow. How about holding snowballs in both hands and putting them together? The snowball will get bigger. What about a stone in one hand and a snowball in the other. It becomes more powerful. It is a book that explains the expression and harmony of Qi using such simple analogies. How to trigger and handle the energy. How to actually combine them to create power. It is divided between how it is handled within or outside the body. My experience, my fights, and the beatings that my withered body went through and endured are all recorded in the book. In fact, I never thought I would deliver this directly to someone, so it only has a temporary title. Its called the Observations of Yin and Yang. Instantly, Heo Gyeom is giving out all of his martial art theories like a rain shower, yet I can still understand everything without missing a word. This is because it is a theory that exactly matches my worries. Elder Heo explains further. The same goes for the principle of Taegeuk, which is mentioned in Taoist philosophy. The most efficient moment when yin and yang meet is as a Taegeuk. The moment the two forces collide, they explode. To counter this, I studied reverse Taegeuk for a long time in the cult, but in the end, when you try to reach the top, I realized that you think about the same thing. Whether its reaching the peak or straying off the demonic path, its just a road sign on the road to completion. Elder Heos words are not directed only to me but also to the Sword Demon, Pervert Demon, Blood Night Palace Leader, and Gyo Young, all here who trained in martial arts. Soon after, Yong-myeong returns and presents the book to Elder Heo. Elder Heo tales it and gives it to me without expressing any conditions or feelings. Please take a look and refer to it. Since I have agreed to help Blood Night Palace, I take the book. Ill take a good look. Yong-myeong, its time for us to go. When Elder Heo looks at Yong-myeong, Yong-myeong helps Elder Heo up. Elder Heo then looks around the audience and says. You guys can continue. And it would be great to take Yong-myeong with you when you attack the Four Flow Valley. I will at least ask him not to cause you any trouble. Everyone looks at the young man named Yong-myeong. Judging from the flow of the conversation, he must be Elder Heos young disciple to who he has been teaching his collective martial arts. The Blood Night Palace Leader rises from her seat and says to Elder Heo. Elder, please have a safe trip back. Elder Heo meets her eyes and says, You have to sleep early to live long. Ill be off first. His words no longer sound normal, so everyone also stands up from their seats. Have a good rest, Elder. See you again, Elder Governor. Goodbye, sir. I briefly stop the Elder and Yong-myeong. Wait a minute. I place the book from the Elder on the table and say. Elder, I will help you to your chamber. Yong-myeong, who is supporting the Elder, looks at Elder Heo and me in astonishment. Elder Heo Gyeom nods, and Yong-myeong steps aside. I approach Elder Heo and say. Two real men will be on their way, so dont come disturbing us. I hold on to Heo Gyeoms side and help him with his frail body. His body is so light that I feel like I can lift him with my finger. Heo Gyeom pats the back of my hand, which is assisting him. Lets go, Leader. I walk very slowly with the old man. It will be a short but long journey, so I slowly wet my lips. Elder. Go ahead. You are still half a century older than my late grandfather. My grandfather spent his life working in a guest inn, and you must have had a really great journey since he survived the demonic path. You mustve seen a lot of crazy people. Elder Heo grins. Dont even start. So many disputes happen within the cult, so I met a lot of demons. Only then do we finally arrive at the main hall and look outside. The clean path to the inner courtyard feels really far away. If I carry the elderly man on my back, we can walk past in seconds, but we are manly men, so we keep walking. If my grandfather in heaven sees me now, he will be very surprised. Why is that? How surprised will he be to see a guy who couldnt even make noodles and mop properly suddenly going around beating up Kangho warriors? He was probably concerned if Id taken over the inn and worked every day. He must be worried to see me wandering around Kangho. Do you regret coming to Kangho? I shake my head. I like it now. So do I. There is something called the afterlife, so if there is Kangho, I will live there without hesitation. I nod in agreement. I would too. While walking along the street with the Elder, unknown petals are flying in front of us, so we stop walking for a while. It is only when the fluttering petals pass that we resume walking again. It took more than half a century for me to understand the world and realize the foolishness of people, including myself. I have seen many people get more twisted as they were pressed, criticized, and scolded. Thats why you shouldnt do that. At times, I was in despair over the fact that there was no end to killing and being killed. Im a foolish man, too, so if I had met you earlier, I would have been scolded a lot. Since when have you been so crooked? I grin and recall my old memories. Well, I guess Ive heard drunk peoples nonsense too often ever since I could understand words, but its been too long for me, even for my age. Ive been crooked since I was very young. I thought Id beat up those stupid drunkards first when I grew up.. How about you? I spent my whole life training and fighting. I couldnt afford to look back. It was not until one day when I lost all the martial arts that supported me, that I looked at the world differently. There was a time when I thought martial arts were everything, but it wasnt until I lost it did I realize that it isnt everything. I realized it too late because Im slow. Fortunately, perhaps of good karma, no one in the cult tried to kill me. I assume so. No matter how evil they are, manly men should be respected. One day, when I firmly made the decision to kill the cult leader, it was after I had already lost my martial arts. I was so old that I had forgotten I had lost my martial arts. I smile and reply. How nice would it be if you fought the leader in your prime days. It wasnt easy to deny where you were and think otherwise. Indeed. I follow the gaze of the Elder and spot his residence. It isnt a fancy house but a cozy wooden house with a front yard for training. I take a slow look around the modest place of this old former demonic master. The Elder says. Lets sit at the bench. I guide the old man to the bench, and we sit down together. As I sit and look to the front, the main building where the Palace Leader stays and the scenery of the inn are also easily visible. Leader, your cultivation is fast, but dont let your guard down. I will. I taught this to my disciple, Yong-myeong. Please use it as a reference. Im listening. When you meet someone with a bigger dream than you, serve them as your master. If you meet someone with a smaller bowl, leave without regrets. However, if you find an outstanding human being that you cant tolerate, be their friend and stick to it with all your loyalty. It is difficult for any master to prevent backstabbing after sharing a deep conversation with a friend. Do you know what logic this is? I make eye contact with Elder Heo Gyeom and nod. It will be the logic of a persistent killer. Elder Huh Gyeom says. Thats right. Yong-myeong is the last assassin Im nurturing. Bet and devote your life to your target; only think of the mission at the most appropriate timing. Its a method to use when you have to assassinate a target thats hard to kill. Hes a disciple I taught with the cult leader in mind. My fight with the leader is not over yet. I touch Elder Heo Gyeoms hand. He has lost his cultivation, but the calluses thickly attached to each knuckle remain the same. Were you the First instructor who eliminated the Four Flow Valley? I often think about how I couldnt catch the 7th Instructor then, but I didnt know he would resurface. Be careful. This means that the 7th Instructor raised another assassin in the time since, just as I raised Yong-myeong. I nod and look at the distant sky. There are enemies everywhere. I have trouble sleeping because of the assassin. How can I overcome this? Recently, I have been dozing off while eating. The Elder becomes lost in thought and then replies. There is no method. Assassins also have a tough time reducing sleep. Its bearable to endure for three or four days, but its hard for even top assassins to endure for more than a dozen days. You have no choice but to stay patient, knowing that youre in a more comfortable position than the assassins. Make good use of your men, too. The best thing is to keep your assassins, but you will never gain peace if youre paranoid. I sigh at the old mans response. Its not easy to survive. Its also a joy of life to live so fiercely. Thats right. Thats the life of a real man. Elder Heo looks up at me when I stand up from the bench. Come and see this old man one more time before he dies, Leader. I hold Elder Heos wrinkly hand. Our old real man sunbae, please live for a long time. Ill come to see you again. Elder Heo nods and smiles. Ill be waiting. We are both real men, so we part ways after a few nods. Chapter 124 Chapter 124 C Who Is Closer To Death? While heading to the Four Flow Valley using the carriage provided by Blood Night Palace Leader, I repeatedly read the book presented to me by the old manly man. Based on my experience Reading a book several times can help the reader capture a glimpse of the authors emotions. After reading it about 10 times, I gain an understanding of what Elder Heo is trying to convey. After I read it about 20 times I notice the handwriting at the beginning and the latter half is different, and the writing style of the sentences also becomes more stable toward the second half. After I read it about 30 times. I catch a hint of Elder Heos mental state as he writes each page. Some days he was calm, and some days he was anxious. There were especially many errors during days when he felt exhausted. As I reach my 40th read through. I can differentiate Elder Heos thoughts from mine. I agree with this part, and I disagree with that part. I read it in the wagon, reread it as I got off the wagon for a meal, and read it again and again as we took a breather under a tree during the trip. As I read the book over and over again, none of my companions disturbs me. I have picked up four people who would come and attack the Four Flow Valley. I didnt ask the Blood Night Palace for help to allow them to fill the Four Flow Valley with spies. I also want a master who can survive after getting rid of the Four Flow Valleys assassins. Therefore, the current groups consist of me, the Sword Demon, Pervert Demon, and Yong-myeong, Elder Heos disciple. The four of us are on our way to exterminate the Four Flow Valley alongside one horseman. I had rejected the Blood Night Palace Leader and Gyo Youngs offer to join us. First of all, this is not the time for the Palace Leader to come forward. Gyo-young is also not experienced enough to deal with the assassins. On the other hand, the Sword Demon and Pervert Demon dont have to prove themselves. Yong-myeong is Elder Heos disciple. He knows about the assassins better than anyone else. Though I only got one extra companion from the Blood Night Palace, this is sufficient force. Four masters are more than sufficient to take down a faction. Whenever we felt stuffy, my companions would get out of the carriage and chase me around using footwork. However, I have to read the book, so I treat the carriage as a prison and lock myself up as we head for the Four Flow Valley. Thanks to that, I sleep more than before. I didnt realize it was so comfortable to nap in a rattling carriage. If I ever lack sleep again, I think Ill let a subordinate of mine drive a carriage while I nap inside. From the third day on, I lose track of time of day. I read the book when the wagon takes off. When the wagon stops, I eat, wash up, and sleep. When I reach my 70th readthrough, I finally come out of the rattling carriage. Only then did the Sword Demon ask me. Leader, are you done reading? Ive read it enough. You sure read it fervently. I had a lot to think about, so I read it repeatedly while meditating, and thats what happened. I hand the book to Yong-myeong. Thank you. Please pass it back to the Elder later. I will. Yong-myeong, who has remained silent throughout the trip, replies briefly. When I look around, I see that the wagon is passing through a muddy road. I stretch and tell the horseman. Thank you for your hard work, sir. I think you can drop us here. The middle-aged horseman replies. As my wish, my lord. I take out the silver ingot I usually carry and hand it to the coachman. Perplexed, the coachman says. You dont have to, Leader. Go back and buy yourself a drink. The way back can be dangerous, so make sure you head to crowded places, okay? Yes, my lord. As the carriage heads back the way we came, I look at the mountain covered in fog. In fact, without Elder Heos help, it would have taken us a long time to find the Four Flow Valley. However, the coachman ordered by Elder Heo guides us directly to Grey Ash Mountain. Looking at it from down here, the mountain gives off a gloomy atmosphere due to the fog. We naturally look to Yong-myeong, who has often helped us with directions. Yong-myeong says. Regardless of life and death, its not easy to go into the Four Flow Valley due to the fog. I nod at his words and then take a deep breath, mix it with Qi, and shout towards the big mountain. Hey, you assassin pricks! The whole group looks at me with a startled expressions. . Because it is a shout mixed with internal Qi, it echoes endlessly. The Pervert Demon asks me. What the hell are you doing? I dont know what kind of place Four Flow Valley is, so I need to say my greetings. Theyre going to kill me anyway. Wont they come out? But, still Surprise attacks dont work for these guys anyway. I speak to my companions. We came to kill them all anyway. There are four of us. Its perfect for them to underestimate us. The Sword Demon nods with a calm expression. Thats right. Lets go. Pervert Demon then says in a troubled tone. Are you sure we can catch them all? Sword Demon replies lightheartedly. If we cant find them, well set this ominous mountain on fire. The whole mountain is ominous. This time I nod in agreement at the Sword Demons remark. Thats right. I speak to Pervert Demon as I advance to the misty mountain. Shithead, sing a song. Youre crazy. If you mind, then whatever. Then, Yong-myeong, who has kept his mouth closed throughout the trip, speaks unexpectedly. I cant sing, but I have a message for you. The three of us stop walking and look at Yong-myeong. What is it? Wow, thats the longest sentence youve said. Lets hear it. Yong-myeong clears his throat and says. I am Yong-myeong, a disciple of Heo Gyeom, the first instructor of the former Dark Shadow Squad(Ӱ). The disciple of Heo Gyeom, former Left Hand Commander who eliminated the Right Hand Man. The disciple of Heo Gyeom, the former assassin who killed all the defectors. Yong-myeong, a disciple of Heo Gyeom, who used to be an assassin trainer. Yong-myeong, the disciple of Heo Gyeom who can hold his breath underwater for an hour. Yong-myeong, the disciple of a man who stood in the reed field for 13 days. I ask him, who is the top head of the assassins? Once upon a time, my master was at the top. My master said There is a world of difference between an assassin and a rat. Today, Heo Gyeoms disciple arrived at Four Flow Valley. Lets find out who are the true descendants of the Dark Shadow Squad. I shall avenge the dead who antagonized the traitor. Oh bravo. As soon as Yong-myeong finishes speaking, I give him a big round of applause. Clap, clap, clap. What a great speech. It was a great self-introduction, a great improvised poem. Thank you. I look at Yong-myeong and ask on a whim. How old are you? Yong-myeong replies to me. Im 20 years old. Similar to shithead. The Pervert Demon then speaks to Yong-myeong as if to get an advantage. Yong-myeong, Im older, so call me Brother from now on. Yong-myeong then says. I dont want to. Yes. I say to Pervert Demon with a kind voice. Mong Rang. What? Loser. . You should introduce yourself, too. Like Yong-myeong. After thinking whether or not he should do it, the Pervert Demon clears his throat and mutters. Im Mong Rang of Baekeungji. Im Mong Rang of the Wind Cloud Mong Clan. . The Pervert Demon gulps. Its not easy when he tries it. Hes a man who reached the pinnacle of the Ice Technique. Bahahahahaha! . As we walk, we watch the speechless Pervert Demon. Perhaps his pride is hurt, but he continues introducing himself through gritted teeth. Im a man who can make any woman mine as long as Im determined. Im a man who can love a woman today and love another woman tomorrow! As soon as I spot the Sword Demons expression, I roll my tongue in my mouth and hold back my laughter. Hes mad. The Sword Demon sighs and snaps. Disciple, are you finished? The disciple replies in a whiny voice. Yeah. I cant think of anything, so I apologize. Yong-myeong was good at it. Before we realize it, we have entered a thick fog. The person walking next to me is also covered in fog. However, everyone present has advanced cultivation, so the fog is cleared with just a few hand movements. We then proceed to continue with the climb. While walking quietly, the Sword Demon tells me. Leader, you should introduce yourself. I want to hear it. I nod. Alright. I pause for a moment and, with my hand on my waist, look forward. I warn my companions. Be careful of your earbuds. Haa eup! I take a deep breath and shout as loud as a lions roar. The leader of the Low Down Sect. Thats me! Hahaha! After the shout, I add a loud laugh. The fog surrounding us wavers instantly, and the fog before us scatters along with the echoes of Thats me as our vision opens up. Meanwhile, the Pervert Demon and Yong-myeong are covering their ears with their hands. My voice roars through the foggy mountain. Thats me thats me thats me thats me. We climb through the path cleared by my echoes and reach a fairly spacious spot halfway up the mountain. Before I know it, white fog is again approaching and blurring the space in front of us. I look at the Sword Demon before the party gets swallowed by the fog. Im also curious about your self-introduction. . As soon as I finish speaking, the Sword Demon pulls out his Light Ray Sword. When the Light Ray Sword is unsheathed, a ghosts wail gradually fills the foggy mountain following the sound of a sword being pulled. A horrifying Sword Echo. It is a ghostly wail mixed with screams, cracking skulls, sobs, cries, silent screams, and angry shouts. This man is the Sword Demon who has escaped the gates of the Demonic Cult. A low voice pierces through the wail of ghosts swirling around the foggy mountain. I am a Sword Demon. The clamorous cries are crushed by the silence in an instant and disappear without a trace. But it isnt just the wailing that disappeared. The fog that surrounds us also disappears, along with the ghostly howls. Nevertheless, the buzzing continues to echo in my ears. Only then do I hear a calm voice that I have never heard before coming from somewhere. Left Hand, why did you enter your own grave The Sword Demon replies as he walks to the center of the empty clearing. Are you saying this is my deathbed? A peal of laughter follows as an answer. Yes. Lets see whos closer to death, assassins. As I see the Sword Demon face north while sitting in a lotus position, I settle towards the east and do the same. Subsequently, Pervert Demon settles in the west and Yong-myeong in the south. Four people are in charge of the east, west, north, and south. The fog, cleared by the ghosts wails, returns and covers my surroundings. The eldest among the party, the Sword Demon, gives us a warning. Be careful of each others attacks. Yes, Master. I understand. Then a monotonous bell rings. Deng Deng Deng! Hidden weapons fly in from all directions with each ring as it repeats a few times. The Sword Demon brushes them off with the Light Ray Sword. The Pervert Demon deflects the weapons in front of him using palm force. Yong-myeong barely makes a sound, but the hidden weapons directed at Yong-myeong fall to the ground after losing their momentum. I keep my eyes on the sky. The others are attacked by hidden weapons, but a large rock falls through the fog above me. These bastards always target me. I pull out the Black Hares Tooth and swing it twice. The incoming rock is cut in a sib(ʮ) shape, and I extend my left palm. The bell still rings. At that moment, I can see a steel needle appearing in rhythm with the ringing bells. I swing my hand, which is filled with Waxing Moon Ice Technique, and blast away the steel needle. I am the only one facing a tough challenge. The corners of my mouth naturally go up. Can the assassins see me? The voice that spoke to Sword Demon replies to me. Welcome, Low Down Sect Leader. Youre the only one who needs to die. You brought this upon yourself. Yeah, nice to meet you. A man who brings trouble upon himself, thats me. I instill Fighting Chicken energy into Black Hares Tooth with the mindset that anyone I attack will die. When nothing comes into my sight, I unfurl the Cut In Half Technique. Singggggggggggggggg! The air is filled with the sound of splitting trees and the continuous sound of branches breaking. As the sound of various items and shields being cut fill the clearing, I hear the faint sound of flesh being cut. This is definitely the sound of a body part being cut off. I speak with my eyes wide open. Hey, I think I slashed someone. Did I cut off your arm? . Silence. Quiet or not, I ask again in a serious tone. Who am I talking to? Chapter 125 Chapter 125 C Sin Of Hindering With My Good Nights Sleep . Instead of an answer, the fog thickens instead. I look around the fog in silence. By all accounts, this fog will be the most dangerous whenever we launch an attack. I might accidentally cut Sword Demon or Yong-myeong, and Sword Demon could stab his disciple or Yong-myeong on accident. There must be a reason why the Sword Demon is sitting in a lotus position toward the north. Nice. Suppressing my anger, I sit down and wait for the next attack, patiently out of character. The bell sound is so clear and pure. I cant believe there was a master who hit the bell so well. Its none of my business what effort was made to make the bell ring so beautifully. . The Sword Demon, Pervert Demon, and Yong-myeong are tight-lipped while waiting for the attack, but I am different. I am becoming more and more bored. Did they mix hypnosis with the sound of the bell? Im sleepy. . Dont even make rustling noises from now on, assassins. Ill run over there. I warned you. Daeng Daeng Daeng Daeng Daeng Suddenly, as I look around, I can no longer hear the Sword Demon, Pervert Demon, or Yong-myeongs voice, nor can I identify their location. It is now just a sea of white fog all around me. The scenery is so wonderful that it makes me exclaim. Shithead, can you hear me? You cant hear me, huh. What kind of martial arts is this? Is it a combination of a Sound Technique and Magic? It seems a specific pitch range is controlled, and now only the sound of bells can be heard. I have no idea how this is being done. As I continue to think, the sound of the wind hidden by the bells can be heard from my front and back. With a single gesture of my head, I twist my body to avoid the rest and slowly turn around in place. . I completely lose my sense of direction. I dont even know where the north and south are anymore. It seems that the assassins of Four Flow Valley did not spend their time fooling around. Looking for a place to retreat, I stare up at the sky. As soon as I feel the ominous energy, I stretch my left palm to the sky and use the Waxing Moon Ice Technique. With a chikkkk sound, something half-frozen falls to the ground and shatters. Someone must have sprayed Skull Poison, as even when it freezes and shatters, it melts and seeps into the ground. Skull Poison, thats cool. In the meantime, steel needles fly past me again. I avoid it with minimal movement and only deflect with Black Hares Tooth in unavoidable circumstances. I use my weapon fiercely and then halt. This time there is a possibility I might have cut off someones limbs. Oh is this what it is? I sheath Black Hares Tooth and rub my hands. I wet my lips by swirling my tongue around. Rub, rub, rub, rub I rub here and there, rub the back of my hand, and rub my palms. It doesnt mean much. I am feeling the texture by injecting Ice Technique in my left hand and the Fire Chicken in my right. I constantly move around with the ringing bell by hitting the incoming weapons with my palm force. Meanwhile, someone rushes past me. I cant identify whether it is Pervert Demon passing by, Yong-myeong, or the assassins of the Four Flow Valley. Perhaps like me, their troops are refraining from launching attacks on a wide range. This is why a large number of troops is often a challenge against skilled assassins. Whenever I have time, I rub my palms to check the texture by combining extreme Yin and extreme Yang. I practice combining the two energies following Elder Heo Gyeoms theory. While checking how the Ice Technique and Fire Chicken might react when they collide, I experiment by combining them just once. Clap! Because it isnt the feeling I wanted, I inject both energies evenly into both hands and hit my palms strongly together. Pak! Much better. The fog scatters around my fiercely slapping palms. Like stone-throwing, clapping has its own levels. Anyway, it means that you have to hit it accurately. The palm must close together to create a small distance, and then the palm has to collide consecutively with accurately injected Wood Chicken palm force. Clap-clap-clap-clap-clap! I carefully check how much fog is pushed away by the waves of applause. It will now be a matter of distance and speed. I squat down to listen to the bell for a moment and then stop breathing. I hide my presence in the fog like the assassins. . As I listen, there is a slight clutter between the sound of the ringing bell. That is probably the real sound of troops fighting. As soon as I hear the bell ringing again Daeng I crush the ground with a stomp. Booooooooooooooooom! As the circular shockwave spreads around me, my view clears instantly. Three assassins dressed in white are visible in front. Perhaps theyve done something to their eyes, but their irises are white. I know it is a simple setup to camouflage within the fog, but somehow this is funny. I jump out and execute the Draw Sword Style. And slice off one arm in one stroke. Pzarkk! While retrieving my sword, I slash the neck of the assassin clad in white and pull a fleeing assassins back with the Great Absorption Technique before smashing his head with the Black Hares Tooth sword handle. They all pass on without as much as letting out a gasp. I stick Black Hares Tooth up to a bodys shoulder. When I pull it out, Black Hares Tooth is smeared with bright red blood. I block a few more incoming hidden weapons with the body. Weapons strike the body without letting out a sound. I immediately cut off a limb and held it in my left hand. Blood is dripping from the severed arm in the middle of this grave silence. As I look at the floor, I cant hear the sound of blood dripping. I think my ears are broken. I giggle and look around. I plan to splatter blood from the severed arm. Booooooooooooom! As soon as I stomp on the ground again, the flowing fog dispersers, and as soon as I see the white eyes, I charge in by tearing the bodies of the assassins with Black Hares Tooth. In the meantime, the incoming hidden weapons flying from the side strike the arm, and I stick Black Hares Tooth into a white-eye assassin that appears in front of me. Plorkk! Avoiding the sword aiming for my neck on the right, I sever one of the assassins arms. As I spread the Fiery Fragrance through Black Hares Tooth, the Plum Blossom Fragrance flutters in all directions. Fwhoosh! Red petals have spread to the pale white world. As soon as I hear a chikkk sound, I throw the dismembered arm. This time, the flying arm is cut into two pieces, and I make eye contact with the Sword Demon for a moment in the fog scattered by the Sword Wind. . As soon as I lock eyes with the Sword Demon, it begins to fog up again. It lasts for only a second, but Sword Demon and I confirm each others position. I stomp and soar high into the air this time. While piercing through the white fog, I twirl my body downwards and shoot Blade Wind through the air. Banggggggggggg! As soon as my Blade Wind blows the fog off the ground for an instant. I can hear the Sword Demons low laughter. Hahaha Subsequently, the sword energy shot from the Light Ray Sword continues to extend in a semicircular shape, and lines of blood splatter from all over the place. The Sword Demon slaughters about a dozen assassins as soon as he spots them. In the meantime, I see the shitheads rapid movement. The white-clothed assassins on the path that are making various movements are stopped altogether. It seemed that the shithead dealt with them by jabbing their pressure points while saving up his energy. Despite this, I dont see Elder Heo Gyeoms disciple. I hear the Pervert Demons voice from somewhere. The bell is not ringing anymore. Master, can you hear me? The Sword Demon replies. I can hear you. The guy who was ringing the bell seems to be dead. We havent checked, be careful. Yes, Master. I finally land on the ground and look at the iron ring I am wearing on my left hand. Its the ring I got from the Gamble Kings place. It was originally black, but it now emits a faint light like a luminous pearl. I open my mouth as soon as I see the mysterious phenomenon. Careful, the fog is fused with poison. I only speak briefly, then stop breathing and sheathe Black Hares Tooth. Moving forward again, I clap my hands. Boom! Somehow the fog is dispersing faster than before. As soon as I notice this, I tell the people around me. They are retreating by using the poison. After hearing a few Palm Wind bursts around me, the fog quickly dissipates. The fog is poisoned, so I wave my hands to fan off the fog. Only then did the Sword Demon and the Pervert Demon reveal themselves nearby. The Sword Demon shakes off the blood from the sword. The Pervert Demon looks around with a frown and says. Where is Yong-myeong? Yong-myeongs voice is heard from somewhere. Im here. When I turn my head toward his voice, Yong-myeong is wearing the assassins white clothes and standing up. . I ask. When did you get changed? I changed earlier. I tried to approach the quarters, but I failed. Only then did we check the floor. Bodies with amputated or twisted limbs lay all over the floor. The number seems well over fifty. I dont know how they fought, but the Sword Demon seems to have killed more than me. When I look at the Sword Demon, he retrieves his sword and says to me, Wait a moment Once your hearing returns, check the surroundings, and look out for poison. Dont touch the bodies. They might explode. Come to think of it, my ears are numb even if I can hear them talking. Yong-myeong, looking at the ground, points in one direction after checking some bloodstains. They retreated this way. But theres a high possibility that theyre luring us. They might be on standby. They are at a disadvantage because it is their main base. I look at the setting sun and say. These guys must be changing into black clothes. The night is coming soon. The Sword Demon asks me. Leader, what should we do now? I look around Grey Ash Mountain and say. It is foolish to keep fighting when they are disadvantaged by the location. Lets burn them all up for now. Yong-myeong replies in a rather surprised tone. Were burning this place down? I nod. These guys have the Grey Ash Mountains under their control. This is a place no ordinary people can survive. Lets burn it all down. All of it I dont intend to match the assassins pace. The Pervert Demon looks at the Sword Demon. Since Leader and I have mastered Ice Technique, I dont mind if we set this place on fire. It means that we can arrange a retreat together. The Sword Demon nods. Then, lets burn it all. Then, the voice that first spoke to the Sword Demon and I spoke out once again. Dont go overboard I yell back. Shut up, you idiot! I couldnt sleep well at night because of you guys. Im killing you all for hindering my good nights sleep. Ill apologize to the mountain spirit later, so you rats better stray into your corners and squeak like you used to. Idiots who dont even know how to fight. Im sure youre applying poison somewhere. I thought you were great because youre part of the Dark Shadow Squad The Pervert Demon replies with a smile. Hey, hillbilly. You have a great temper. Yong-myeong takes out a fire starter without saying much and lights the branches. I smile and speak to the Four Flow Valley with an absurd look while the two start fires. All you can do is go into the dump and hold your breath. Thats what it is for assassins. Dont you think, Yong-myeong? Yong-myeong sighs. Patience is the virtue of assassins. Yeah? It applies to the Four Flow Valley, right? Yes. Wow, when they decide ranks, they go by who can hold their breath longest in the rat hole? Is that it? Do they become the king of assassins the longer they smell poop? But if you talk about poop, you cant beat Baekeungjis Lord Mong. Speaking of this guy, hes had a history of shitting his pants. I am straying off-topic. The Pervert Demon intervenes with a frown. Seriously, but if you want to provoke the enemy, then provoke the enemy. Why are you bringing me into this? Pick a struggle. There are times when you go off-topic, dumbass. Every time he talks, hes always full of shit. Thats me. Yong-myeong, who is setting fire around the place, then asks curiously. Did Lord Mong smear poop on his body? The Pervert Demon replies. Shut up. Im curious. Perhaps as he is bored, he sets the Grey Ash Mountain on fire by throwing fire branches here and there. I look at the spreading fire and then say. Dang, I want to pee all of a sudden. This is how hard it is to get rid of the assassins. But its okay. You have to put up this much to beat those who hold out in the dumps. I watch the burning flames and speak to the assassins of the Four Flow Valley in a serious tone. You will regret messing with the Low Down Sect Leader. Its not until deaths door that you, ah youre happy to wait in the dumps. I bet you will. It is an attack on the assassins, and even the Sword Demon shakes his head at the ridiculous remark. Leader. Yes? I wouldnt be able to stand it if I were them. Youre doing great. Im hearing more nonsense today than in all the years I have stayed in Kangho. Ive never had a fight like this. I nod approvingly at the Sword Demons civil words. I liked your honesty. Today, there will be a feast of poop and pee. Lets see who wins. Chapter 126 Chapter 126 C Yes, Youre Right, I Know, How Nice If someone asks if the mountain or the people are more important, Ill tell them to shut up. Because both are important. There are times when neither mountains nor people matter. And thats how it is now. I did not come back to the past to make the mountains green. Anyhow, we are not burning the mountain but burning down the hiding place of those who kill people for money. I laugh as I watch the flames blaze brighter. I dont space out anymore, even when looking at the fire. As you get stronger daily, all your shortcomings will disappear. Yong-myeong then chimes in as he looks around the grass that is beginning to turn red. We should all apologize to the mountain spirit. I nod. Ill represent us and build a shrine next time. Yong-myeong replies with a surprised look. Leader, are you rich? I can just rob someone. I see. Of course, the shrine will be entrusted to the head of the Architectural Sect, Yeon Ja-seong. When making a shrine, I plan to ask them to check if any outposts are built on Grey Ash Mountain. There is a high chance the assassins had planted posts all over the place while setting up various devices and traps. Practicing Qi Circulation on a mountain like this only causes the body to become heavy without bearing fruitful results. Come to think of it, I have one more reason to kill the assassins. The crime of damaging forests, the crime of regularly damaging forests, the crime of installing posts in the mountain, the crime of incriminating me of being the person who burns the mountain, the crime of pissing me off, etc. I have so many reasons to kill them. Meanwhile, my heart aches as I watch the mountain burn. Did I become a public enemy for no reason? This is not my first time burning down a mountain. Looking around, the Sword Demon says. The mountain is changing, unlike what I saw with my eyes. At that moment, a large tree collapses in our direction, so we use our footwork to move at once. Boom! The way the tree falls is somewhat unnatural. It seems a device, burning in the flames somewhere, activated accidentally. This isnt the last of it, either. There are times when a mesh soars to the sky from the front without us going near that space. Some sort of arrow or needles also flies past with a swish. Shields with spikes made of ropes tied on trees also swing fiercely. Only then does the Pervert Demon say in admiration. Master, there are so many traps everywhere. Its impressive. Yong-myeong. Yong-myeong answers politely to the Sword Demons summon. Yes, sir. It doesnt have to be exact. Can you predict where the traps are by looking at the terrain? I can do that to some extent. Good. Then Yong-myeong can continue setting the place on fire at the front, Mong-rang and Leader can take the sides to stop the fire from spreading. We are closing in with flames, burning only the roads prepared by the assassins. Instead, the trap will lead us to the right path. I understand. The Sword Demon adds a word to his disciple. You dont have to put too much effort into stopping the flames. Save your energy for the fights. Understood. Strangely, the Sword Demon is taking hold of the critical situation, probably due to his experience. Yong-myeongs advance is not fast since he is setting the fire while looking at the terrain. However, we do not do it hastily since we have to endure the annoyance to gain something in exchange. Surprisingly, a trap emerges every 10 jangs (about 30 meters). The most impressive one is a large hole that can fit 50-60 people. As I walk past and look at it, I see that weapons are piled in the pit, and snakes are wandering in search of food at the bottom. Seeing as the snakes do not eat each other, they must be snakes raised by the assassins. They sure do everything. I swing Black Hares Tooth to draw a line of cold air or shoot out attacks fused with Ice Technique to put out the fire. It is not perfect, but strangely enough, the fire does not spread wildly because the original path keeps stretching. After a while, Yong-myeong says. Theres a dead-end vine wall ahead. We look up at the wall in front of us. The vines are messy and tangled, scattering widely everywhere. In particular, the upper part is no different than a distant cliff. Observing the mountain, the Sword Demon nods. Good find. There will be quite a lot of space inside. Seeing vines in a large vacant place, something feels out of place. While Yong-myeong slashes the vines with a dagger in search of the door, the Sword Demon is lost in thought with his arms crossed. I then speak in a voice mixed with internal Qi. Assassins, your guests have arrived. Open the door. These doors dont work on us. The Pervert Demon smiles at me. Youre seriously out of your mind. Then, the sound of stone doors opening from the right side of the vine wall we are looking at can be heard. Grrrrrrrr..! Everyone looks at the stone gate, which is opening by itself, with surprised eyes. What? Why is it opening? Everyone looks at me, so I say. I dont know. . Grey Ash Mountain is destroyed. Of course, it would open. Or it means theyre asking us to not break this place. Lets go in. At this time, a new voice comes from beyond the stone gate. Welcome. Suddenly, the Sword Demon tilts his head and says. Lets go in. The Pervert Demon, who is looking at the expression of his master, asks. Whats the matter, Master? That voice sounds familiar. Well know once we get in. I murmur as I walk through the damp passage. Is this how it feels to walk into a rabbit hole? Yong-myeong replies. There are such feelings? Have you ever invaded a rabbit hole? No. If you havent been there, dont talk. Its similar to right now. Yes. The Pervert Demon murmurs, expressing a bad feeling. Is something going to fly past? After a moment of ominous silence, we arrive at the entrance safely and enter an empty cave. My companion and I raise our heads to look at the vast cave. It is a large cave, as if we are teleported to a different world. It doesnt seem difficult for all the assassins to gather here and train. But what catches the eye are all the holes all over the cave walls. There, the assassins are looking down at us with different expressions. What are they hiding from to create a cave like this? It is a hideout that shows the will to survive the doom of Kangho. There is only one cave at the top. So it seems that all of the upper floors were occupied. It is absurd that a place like this exists in the mountains, and it is ridiculous that the ranking is thoroughly divided in this place. An elderly one-armed man who appears from the cave on the top floor then says. Left Hand, how did you find us? The Sword Demon stares at the old man for a long time and replies. Who are you? The Sword Demon, scanning the place, recognizes a few more people on the upper floors. Come to think of it, there are a few defectors among you. The mutters of a few middle-aged people flow from everywhere. I heard you became a defector yourself. Youre still as arrogant as ever. I ask the Sword Demon. Sunbae, do you know them? The Sword Demon answers. Some of them are survivors who left the cult once the successor was decided. But I dont know the old man at the top. I look at the old and say. Old geezer, are you the 7th Instructor? You dont look over 100 years old. The guy whose blood hasnt dried on his head, reveal yourself. The old man sighs. Sword Demon, if you also became a defector, you are not our enemy. Why are you fighting us? The Sword Demon replies. You should have asked with courtesy. The old man then says. Lets do this. If you kill the Low Down Sect Leader, we wont fight you. Youre a member of a great clan. Also, youre a capable man enough to go independent. I will provide funds to create your own faction. So? From what Ive heard, you have no connections with each other. These guys must be out of their minds. Theyre commissioning a murder contract to Sword Demon. The Sword Demon replies. I refuse. Now talk to the leader. The old man looks at me. . I look up at the old man and touch my neck. Come down, you punk. My neck hurts. Cut the crap. You make us uncomfortable in many ways. Is this how youre gonna behave now that I and Sword Demon sunbae are here? Come to think of it, these guys are more afraid of the Sword Demon than me coming to their hidden base. As a former Crazy Demon, this is very displeasing. As I walk to the center alone, the old man looks at the Pervert Demon and Yong-myeong. Lord Mong, Elder Heos disciple. Are you interested? The Pervert Demon replies. Do you have a beautiful woman beside the money? Is there none? If there is, show me their faces. Yong-myeong doesnt reply at all. . I look around and say. Everyone, stay put. If you dont want to die. I feel a sense of irony in my words. Because Im going to kill them all. It is about time to use the study of Yin and Yang that was given by Elder Heo. I warn my companions. Everyone, be careful. The Pervert Demon replies with a perplexed look. What the hell are you I instantly stretch my hands from side to side, compress the Waxing Moon Ice Technique in my left hand, compress the Fiery Fowl Fragrance in my right, and quickly combine the opposite energies. ! The texture is like the feeling of a snowball that Elder Heo mentioned. In an instant, a group of white rays and red rays wraps itself around both my hands. Are the opponents flustered? Or did they not detect any danger in my actions? I tell the assassin what is on my mind. Stop provoking me. This place will blow up as soon as I collide my hands. The Pervert Demon sighs. What are you doing? The Sword Demon tilts his head and warns. Everyone, be careful. This is an unusual torrent of energy. I compress the energy of the extreme Yin and extreme Yang in both hands again and again. My heart is beating faster as I do this. The old man asks me. Low-Down Sect leader, what the hell are you doing? I tell the old man. Well, doing something. Anyway, if everyone comes and kneels down before me, Ill spare you. The old man replies in a cold voice. I refuse. If you say so. Suddenly, the Sword Demon beckons the Pervert Demon and Yong-myeong to step behind him. Meanwhile, Sword Demon hurriedly pulls out the Light Ray Sword and grabs the handle with both hands. Hmm In the midst of everyones confusion, only the Sword Demons actions hint that things are about to go south. The Sword Demon tells me. Do whatever you want, Leader. I will. I have come up with a name for the technique at the moment. Light Sky of the Sun and Moon (¹). I contemplate between the words light and madness, but I decide on light to stop going mad. Someone reaches out. What? As I laugh, I combine the ominous snowballs of Double Lunisolar Energy (p) and levitate it in the air. Am I doing this right? I dont know, either. Then, white and red fuse violently with a buzzing sound, and. while rotating like an unstable brain machine, it classes into the upper layer of the cave. ! For a moment, the spectators ears, including mine, become deaf altogether. The deafening explosion sound expands and reaches our eardrums. Boooooooooooooooooooom! As the light bursts, the yellow-brown cave crumbles and collapses. Bouncing off the spreading shockwave in the air, I leap. While twisting my body, I also pierce through the brown-colored walls. The wall surfaces keep cracking so that I dont know what is going on, and then I float around and stretch out in all directions. There seems to be an aftermath. I bounce off about a dozen walls and stand up, covered in dust. Phew, at least Im alive. Looking forward, the Sword Demon is hiding behind a black shield made with sword energy, and behind him, the Pervert Demon and Yong-myeong are lying flat on the ground. However, the surrounding scenery is more impressive than the rest of our group being safe still. The cave has been perfectly, coolly, and relentlessly blown up. I definitely entered a cave, but now Im looking up at the night sky. The Sword Demon speaks to me with a perplexed look. You still need to train on your torrent of energy. Yes. The Pervert Demon says. You are seriously nuts. Youre right. Yong-myeong tells me. We were in danger, too. I know. I briefly forget about the scumbags of the Four Flow Valley and look at the stars in the night sky. How nice. Practice my torrent of energy, watch the night sky, kill the assassins . . . This is great. Chapter 127 Chapter 127 C I Cant Believe I Arranged This Kind Of Meeting You go crazy if you stare at the night sky for too long. I pull out Black Hares Tooth and enter the battlefield that has been swept away by the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon. As Sword Demon said, the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon technique is not perfect. From the standards of a master, the technique takes too long to prepare and shoot, which gives quick-witted punks time to prepare. They can either use a defensive technique or attack preemptively using palm force. They can also quickly hide behind the ocher-colored walls to minimize the damage. And some pests also survived. If you go and beat up an Unorthodox group to death, you can do it roughly, but there can be no mercy against assassins. As I entered the chaotic fray with my sword drawn, my companions spread out to finish off the pests. As we do, things begin to fall from the sky. Thud! Various things, such as weapons, body parts, cloth remnants, and knuckles caught in the explosion, pours down like rain. Yong-myeong exclaims briefly. Wow its falling now. I move in search of any assassins that may still be breathing. You shouldve gotten on your knees when you had the chance. You dont get to use your knees anymore. Its too late. Then, all of us look up at the night sky. The one-armed man with his now-torn clothes is falling from the sky. Looks like the combination of my palm force and the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon made him fly up to a tremendous height, and he is only reaching the ground now. I am amazed as well. Woah youve got some moves, geezer. The only unfortunate thing is that his long, fluttering hair is now gone, as if it had caught on fire. When the one-armed old man lands on the floor, the Sword Demon says. Were you the one who supported the second lord? The old man nods. You finally recognized me. What was your relationship with the 7th Instructor? He was my master. So you gathered the defectors and created an assassin sect. As I approach with Black Hares Tooth in my hand, the one-armed elder says. Sect Leader. What? If you guys join hands, killing me wont be difficult. Now that things turned out this way, I want to have one last fight with the Sword Demon, who became Left Hand at a young age. He was a young master whom old men like us admired. I hadnt had the chance to compete with him since his status went up. Though were both defectors, I would like to fight with him as a former Left Hand and the Second Lords guard. Will you grant me the favor? I look at the Sword Demon. You dont have to do that. However, I can already guess the Sword Demons answer. He is not the type to pass up this kind of 1:1 fight. The Sword Demon nods. Escort Deng, lets do it. The old man then grins, flashing his rows of missing and rumple teeth. Thank you. Were you part of the search party when the Second Lord was hunted down by his family members? I was. Who did you kill back then? The Black Wolves Squad who interfered midway. And? I remember killing them all. Didnt you know someone in Black Wolves Squad? The Sword Demon nods. Looking at the Sword Demons expression, the one-armed old man bursts into laughter. Good. Even the great Sword Demon knows what regret is. Not really. You dont regret it? Regret that you are weak. The instructors taught me to think like this even when I die. Ill let you have the first move, Escort Deng. I cross my arms. It is a rule to watch a fight after watching a fire. He survived and lived against the Light Sky of the Sun and Moons explosive force, meaning hes a worthy opponent. However, he should have been spent countering that incomplete torrent of energy. This fight isnt about the outcome. Anyway, the Sword Demon is currently holding the Light Ray Sword, so Im looking forward to a slightly different fight than when he went against the Alliance Leader. Meanwhile, perhaps uninterested in his masters duel, Pervert Demon is going around killing off the assassins. I observe the one-armed old man and the Sword Demon. The one-armed old, standing on the edge of the rubble, surges into the air and narrows the distance by using unusual footwork that makes him look like he is sliding on the floor. He is moving as fast as lightning. Oh? Drawing his sword midair, the old mans sword touches the Sword Demons chest. Clang! An ear-piercing metallic sound. The Sword Demon, who seems to welcome this deliberate strike, stabs the old man in the abdomen with the Light Ray Sword and lifts him at the same time. Pzarkk! Black sword energy explodes from the Light Ray Sword and shreds the old mans body. Although it is a demonic martial art, I have never seen sword energy so brutal. Usually, sword energy imitates the form of a sword; however, this sword energy looks like a ghosts limbs and a face with a wide open mouth. As soon as the ghost engulfs the old man, blood splatters everywhere. However, the blood is swallowed by hands stretching out from the sword. My mouth is opened in an O shape. Wow The old mans body at the end of the Light Ray Sword breaks apart in the air as the black ghosts recede back into the sword. Then the Sword Demon sighs deeply. Haah It is a strange sound. A sigh that sounds like it is filled with regret and guilt. I look at the Sword Demons complicated expression with my arms crossed. this is a very serious demonic art. This is why even the Cult Leader misses the Sword Demon. The Sword Demon, who uses the Light Ray Sword skillfully, is a very precarious man. If I had walked down that path, I would have been devoured by the Light Ray Sword someday, I think. I ask Sword Demon a pressing question. Sunbae, is it okay to continue using such martial arts? It looks dangerous. The Sword Demon looks at me. His pitch-black eyes are slowly turning back to their original state. The Sword Demon then replies as he transforms back into a human. I try not to use it as much as possible, but this happens whenever I become competitive. I should train on my wooden sword. What an impressive remark. Hes undoubtedly a strong man, but at the same time, I see the figure of a very weak man in him. How can a person be strong and frail at the same time? Thats the case for the Sword Demon. I ask. Are there any major side effects? Not really. What are the specific side effects? The Sword Demon answers as he looks at the Pervert Demon. The side effect is the never-ending greed of the Light Ray Sword. I tried to teach this to my disciple, but I stopped. I remember the tattoo on the Left Hands body. Was that the reason why you have a tattoo? The Sword Demon shakes his head. Its a similar martial art. Its a protection mark. Suddenly, the Sword Demon sits in a lotus position as if he requires a rest. He doesnt perform Qi Circulation and has no injuries, but he looks extremely exhausted in my eyes. The Pervert Demon, who finishes dealing with the injured assassins, says to the Sword Demon. Master, are you alright? The Sword Demon nods. Im fine. I also sit near Sword Demon and quickly look around at the deserted hideout of the assassins. Yong-myeong tells the three of us who are sitting down. Please continue to rest. Ill move around and take care of the rest. I nod and look at the Sword Demon. The Sword Demon looks at his disciple and me alternatively and speaks like a man looking back on his past. The fact that my weapon is powerful instead of my skills made me live with a sense of contempt. I tried to avoid using it, but it is not easy to look away from this power. Ironically, the Crazy Demon, Pervert Demon, and Sword Demon are taking a rest after killing the assassins. Unlike the Qi Deviation I experienced before, a different type of Internal Demon (ħ) seems to be bothering Sword Demon. Ambition and emptiness. He uses a demon sword because he hates losing. He then feels a sense of self-contempt for using the demon sword after that. He hates to lose more than to die. A death that he has no idea when it might hit him is circling around the Sword Demon. Suddenly, I think. Maybe in my past life, the Sword Demon died alone somewhere in the world. Instead of being killed by someone else. I am caught up in the idea that he might have disappeared from the world with the Light Ray Sword in a lonely and desolate place. The problem is the Sword Demons life seems so complex that I cant get a clear answer. Would you die fighting with an ordinary long sword or live like a demon while thriving with a demonic sword? I wonder if there is a clear answer in life. Sword Demon sunbae. The Sword Demon looked at me with the emptiest eyes. Those are the eyes of someone who doesnt have a guilty conscience, even if they cut down hundreds or thousands of people with a sword. He has a calm and cold nature in the first place, so he doesnt lose his composure. The Sword Demon says. Yes? I could see your Internal Demon. Thats what it is. Will you die fighting with a wooden sword, or will you continue to suffer Qi Deviation? I think its a matter of choice. Its more complicated, but in retrospect, it is. I can introduce someone who can help. Would you like to meet him? Do you mean they can cure my condition? That wont be possible. But you still want me to meet them? Yes. Why? I reply with my arms crossed. Are you going to sit here and become a demon? Or will you actively look for ways to remain human while seeking help? Thats the question. Of course, no one can fix it overnight. But I think the person suffering from Qi Deviation having the willingness itself is a key that can change the situation. What do you say? I wont force you. The Sword Demon replies. I dont want to listen to old geezers who seem to know everything in the world. I nod. Right, but who I want to introduce to you is a young man. The Sword Demon looks at me in shock. A young man? I also hate an old geezers stale advice. If you dont like the foolish words of a young man, youre bound to die in a ditch while circulating Qi in the wild. You dont have to feel pressured. I dont expect much either, so As the Sword Demon looks at me in dismay, the Pervert Demon advises his master. Master, just try it once. If hes arrogant, Ill teach them a lesson. I look at the Pervert Demon. Cut the crap. Who are you going to scold? Crazy bastard. Suddenly, as if pulling himself together, the Sword Demon stands up and says. Then lets check on the pests again and kill them all before leaving. We should be thorough. The injured ones wouldnt have gone far. I nod and say to the Sword Demon. Break off a branch and use it as support. The Sword Demon answers me obediently. I will. Doctor, Doctor, Doctor Moyong! Im back. I storm into the Moyong Clinic and proudly call out for Moyong Baek. It isnt necessary to bring Yong-myeong, so we dropped him off at the Blood Night Palace. The loot from the Four Flow Valley needs to be collected and distributed equally, so Yong-myeong has a lot of work to do. I hear a crash somewhere, and Moyong-Baek runs out with a surprised look. Leader, youre here. Are you busy? No, not at all. Moyong-Baek looks at the people on my left and right and asks nervously. Who are they? I glance at the Sword Demon and reply. I brought a patient. Sword Demon sighs. Moyong-Baek asks me with a puzzled face. Oh, why are you so happy to bring a patient? Right? Come to think of it, youre right. Moyong Baek introduces himself. Anyway, welcome. Im Moyong Baek of Moyong Clinic. But . Moyong Baek asks in a serious tone while looking at the Pervert Demon and Sword Demon. Who is the patient? I am surprised for a moment and answer. Oh, thats a sharp question. That would be him. A severely ill patient. I point to the Sword Demon. Myong Baek then gestures in the direction of his office and says. Come on in. I lock eyes with Sword Demon, who looks like he is being dragged to the slaughterhouse and give him a thumbs up. Listen well to the doctor, sunbae. . Dont hit him just because youre angry because hes like my brother. That wont happen. After the Sword Demon and Moyong Baek enter the office, two unfamiliar-looking women approach and greet me. Leader, its been a long time since I saw you. How have you been? I look at the nurses who greeted me and ask. Who are you? The nurses reply with flustered faces. Were Black & White Beam. Heuk So-ryeong and Baek So-ah. Only then do I realize that the nurses faces have changed a lot. Of course, they look much better than before. Oh, you two. You looked much better, so I couldnt recognize you. Its better. Why dont you recognize us? Shut up. Yes, sir. Go in and tell the other nurses not to show their faces today. Everyone should wear masks to work. What? I frown. Why are you talking back? Hurry up and go in. The top pervert of Kangho is here. I shoo the nurses away. Sitting on the chair, the Pervert Demon glares at me coldly. Look, Leader. What? Do you think Id mess with the girls here? Cut it out. Mong Rang, you cant join the patient because you dont want to change. Stay still before I call the nurses here and tell them all your dirty past. The Pervert Demon replies with a puzzled look. My dirty past? What do you mean? . He blushes as soon as I close my mouth, perhaps understanding what I meant. I snort as I stare at the Pervert Demon with narrowed eyes. Only then does he realize I am referring to his pants-shitting incident. Stupid fool. Chapter 128 Chapter 128 C This Is Not Internal Demon I look at Moyong Baeks office in silence. To think that my past lifes Poison Demon and this lifes Sword Demon are talking inside. I feel strange just thinking about it. Frankly speaking, the Sword Demons condition is complex and challenging. Just how difficult it must be. That even a man like the Sword Demon cannot resolve it himself. It will be difficult for Moyong Baek, too. But I place meaning on the fact that I arranged this meeting. I dont know why. Theres always a lot I dont know. But one things for sure. Moyong Baek cannot solve this problem alone, but neither can the Sword Demon nor I help with it. But three heads are better than one. As soon as Moyong Baek lays his eyes on the Sword Demon sitting across him, he unconsciously gulps. Where does the Low Down Sect Leader keep finding these monsters to bring him? He wonders. The mans mental strength seems resilient, not to mention his martial arts skills. Moyong Baek feels rather speechless at this. The Sword Demon sees the nervous young doctor and says. Theres nothing to be nervous about. Yes. How should I address you? Me? I dont know. Thats vague. Moyong Baek asks with a polite smile. Since youre an elder, should I call you sir? The Sword Demon shakes his head and answers. No one calls me that. I thought you were a mere practitioner, but you train in martial arts, so call me sunbae like the Low Down Sect Leader. Moyong Baek replies. Would that be okay for you? As the Sword Demon nods, Moyong Baek replies bluntly. Then Ill call you sir. . Should I call you a patient? As the Sword Demon stares at him with his eyes wide open, Moyong Baek lowers his head slightly. Just kidding. The Sword Demon then says in a nonchalant voice. I can see why youre the Leaders sworn brother. Youre both alike. Ill take that as a compliment. Thats up to the listeners interpretation. The Sword Demon sighs, looks around the office, and says. You read a lot of books. Yes, there are martial arts books. There are medical books, ancient scriptures, and old novels that are hard to get. Do you like books? I do. What genre do you normally read? That would be martial arts books. Anything else? I sometimes read Lao Tzu books, and I also read them by substituting their contents for martial arts. Have you seen it? I have. What do you think? There are a lot of words I couldnt understand, so I skipped over many parts. Was it helpful? No. I forgot all of it after thinking it was unnecessary. Moyong Baek wets his dry lips. Youre relentless. Indeed. Why did the Leader call you a patient? I dont see any problems. The Sword Demon nods, pulls out the Light Ray Sword, and places it on the table. Can you pull it out? Moyong Baek replies with anxious eyes. Im not going to die, am I? The Sword Demon smiles. Would I treat the leaders acquaintances carelessly? Alright, then Ill try. Moyong Baek reaches out with two hands and pulls out the Light Ray Sword. He then hurriedly sheathes it again as soon as the wailing of the ghosts reaches his ears. Moyong Baek then says. The sword is screaming. Seems like the sword is in pain. The Sword Demon replies with a rare smile. You see everything as a patient. It comes with the job. It is rare, but there are swords that make their own echoes. Its not a normal sword. This must be a Demon Sword. Did you make it? No. Its a sword vested on me forcibly since I was young. By your family clan? The Sword Demon nods. After letting out a few dry coughs, Moyong Baek takes out a white handkerchief from the drawer and wipes his forehead. Is there a way to break the bond? There is, but I didnt learn how. If you know how to do it, will you remove it? I cant do that now. Why? Because it will kill me. Moyong Baek nods. Does killing you mean you die as soon as the bond is broken? Or does losing the Demon Sword lead to a weakening of power that makes defeating you easier? Probably the latter. Moyong Baek nods. Then we shouldnt release the bond recklessly. Thats right. Nevertheless, the reason the Leader brought you here is an ongoing problem thats not just merely owning a Demon Sword. Please explain. Thats the hard part to explain. The Sword Demon strokes the Light Ray Sword. When I reach a certain level, the speed at which I get stronger gets slower, and this guy is getting stronger as if there is no limit every time it eats up my enemies like a living creature. Because of this sword, I survived the meetings between the demons, but Now the fact that Im relying on this is insulting. Maybe disillusionment, you know what I mean? I wonder if Im weaker than this Demon Sword. But I cant throw it away easily. Dying is much better than being defeated As the Sword Demon stops talking, silence fills the air. Moyong Baek asks. I see, so thats the story. What is the name of the sword? Its called Light Ray. What an unfitting name. Let me touch the sword again. When the Sword Demon gives his permission, Moyong Baek pulls out the Light Ray Sword again. This time, the wailing of the ghosts is calmer. Moyong Baek swallows and says. Its not the same as what I heard earlier. What makes the Light Ray Sword uneasy is recklessness. You only use it when youre desperate, and you often wonder if you would get eaten due to this unpredictable aspect. Moyong Baek puts down the Light Ray Sword and crosses his arms. Should I say youre a normal person? Or should I say an ordinary Kangho warrior? When these types of people acquire the Light Ray Sword, they will continue to get stronger by killing people. Growing more powerful as they kill. You wont regret it too much. You have deep vengeance; if you dont, youll fight until you reach the top. Of course, you will die if you meet a master the demon sword cannot defeat. Thats how Kangho is. In a world where common sense and proper reason are despised, power is truth. The Sword Demon looks at Moyong Baek. But? Arent you from a demonic family clan? Thats right. There must have been a time when you received your familys teachings. You had your own thinking and reached a different perspective than your familys. For example, you dont think indiscriminate slaughter can make you stronger or you dont feel the need to absorb the weak. These feelings. It is not taught by your family. On top of that, if you trained hard, you could feel humiliated. This cant be concluded as having Internal Demons. Its not Internal Demons? Yes. Then what is it? This terrible feeling of contempt, emptiness, nameless, complex emotions That is called responsibility. . Moyong Baek looks at the Sword Demon with clasped hands. You were born human and influenced by the demon path, but the responsibility is to protect that last piece of humanity. This is a huge burden. Because the environment you are situated in is very brutal. How do you know that? You said it yourself. You crawled out of the demons pit. The higher the level of the demons, the greater the mental pressure you had to face. You just wanted to stay alive, but there were many obstacles around you. If you were a weak or somewhat frivolous person, you wouldnt feel this responsibility. You just wielded a demon sword and faced your own destiny. Would you be willing to pass this sword on to someone else? The Sword Demon shakes his head. It wont be easy. Who would live with this sword and exercise such difficult self-control? This isnt easy at all. Instead, use it and pass it on to the Low Down Sect Leader whenever you have a hard time. The Sword Demon replies with a surprised look. To the Leader? You want me to let him use it? Moyong Baek shakes his head indifferently. No, with his temper, he wouldve destroyed this ominous sword immediately. Sword Demon replied with a shocked look. Then why? It sounds like he is asking, Why pass on this precious thing to that kind of person? to Moyong Baek. Moyong Baek replies in a calm voice. Hell break it because youre more important than the sword. Hm. Perhaps hell break it because he cant control himself, then hell run to the blacksmith, throw it in the furnace, and watch it until it turns into molten iron. And then he would curse his shitty luck. I see. I guess so. Moyong Baek nods and caresses the Light Ray Sword. Thats right. Its a rare sword, but at the end of the day, its just a weapon. How would I know when it will combust? The person who knows best about this sword is you. And the person who can restrain the sword is probably you. This pain does not stem from the heart, but responsibility. I have a question. Yes. Why do you think I feel such responsibility while holding this sword? I mean, there was a time when I used to swing it recklessly. Im speaking nonsense. Do you get what I mean? Yes. The Leader wouldnt have brought you here with that expression if you were such a violent person. You have self-control and are civil, so he introduced me to you. Im not a great master like you and the leader. And as we talked, I understood. Its just that the sword is hideous, and youre not a demon (ħ). The Sword Demon looks at Moyong Baek with his mouth agape. My nickname is the Sword Demon. I know. Did the Leader tell you? No, I have heard of the nickname. Sunbae, this ominous swords name is Light Ray, so the man called Sword Demon may not be a demon. I might be crossing the line, but this is the only way to deal with this sword. If you do, this sword will forever remain as Light Ray, and the owner will remain human. Moyong Baek holds the Light Ray Sword with both hands and holds it to the Sword Demon. Will it be a Demon Sword or Righteous Sword? Its up to the sword owner. The Sword Demon grips the Light Ray Sword while making eye contact with Moyong Baek. It was up to the swordsman. Yes. I will keep this in mind. Dont go in too deep. Why? Wouldnt that hurt you too? Please take care of the leader outside, who spaces out often. Visit whenever you have time. Sometimes you will laugh if you sometimes talk back to the nonsense of a delirious human being. That happens sometimes. Uncontrollable laughter is good because its a smile. Only then can the Sword Demon finally relax. It was a good thing. It was nice to see you today, Doctor Moyong. Moyong Baek tries to make a joke but holds back and holds out his hand. Lets go out together. Wasnt you going to say something? Ill tell you the joke next time. The two leave the office with awkward and uncomfortable expressions. As soon as I notice Moyong Baek and Sword Demon in my sleep, I also find out that I am snoring. . The Pervert Demon jumps up and says. Master, are you out? I naturally get up with my folded double-eyelid eyes and put my hands behind me. Youre out? Good. Lets go eat. My voice cracks as if I am thirsty. The Sword Demon looks at me and replies. Leader, did you have a good nap? I reply with a nod. Being able to sleep anywhere is a skill. I see. I look at the Sword Demon and Moyong Baeks expressions. They are both acting as usual, so I dont know how things turned out. Anyway, I put my hand on my arms. See you again, Doctor Moyong. Moyong Baek approaches and grabs my arm. Leader, I wont accept it today. Why? I didnt prescribe him any medicine. Treat me to a meal next time. Shall we? Yes. I nod and point my finger at the Pervert Demon. Be extra careful with this guy. If he comes alone, dont take him in as a patient. Do you understand me? Moyong Baek nods. Ill keep that in mind. I make eye contact with the Pervert Demon and beat him to it. Shut up. . The atmosphere is really strangely awkward, so I look around and say. Whats with the weird atmosphere? Am I the only one feeling awkward? Am I the only one whos weird? I give up because no one answers. Lets go. Chapter 129 Chapter 129 C Does He Have Any Illness? I ponder for a moment where I can take the Sword Demon and Pervert Demon. There are spots such as Black Rabbit Union or Deuksoo hyungs store. Wherever it may be, I intend to host them properly. Thanks to them, exterminating the Four Flow Valley was a breeze. Of course, I destroyed the hideout using my incomplete secret weapon, but the leader of the Four Flow Valley was killed by the Sword Demon. To be honest, they had no good reason to help me. And yet, I received help, so I should treat them to pork ribs Following my stream of thoughts, I head to the Chunyang Restaurant. Theres this shabby restaurant and food I eat often. Is that okay? The Sword Demon nods. Sounds good. Lets go. I dont ask the Sword Demon anything while we head to the restaurant. Im not going to ask him, either. The conversation between Moyong Baek and the Sword Demon is only theirs to know. But I forget for a moment that a piece of dogshit is beside me. How was it, Master? The young practitioner looked very calm. The Sword Demon replies. Hes young. Yes. He is calm and has a deep-rooted mindset, so if he masters martial arts properly, he will become a capable man. If you bump into him next time, treat him with respect. I understand. The Sword Demon, who is walking on the street, then says in a calm tone. It was a brief chat, but I learned much from the young doctor. The Sword Demon doesnt bother to thank me. Perhaps that sentence itself is an expression of gratitude. I just nod a few times while we walk down the street. It wasnt a bad first impression. In my opinion, a Great Doctor is a person who has a good grasp of the patients feelings. How can they heal patients bodies when they cant even understand the patients minds? Anyhow, Moyong Baek was a Great Doctor before fate made him into the Poison Demon. The meeting between Sword Demon and Moyong Baek didnt go as badly as my baseless assumptions thought they might. Of course, I think it is appropriate to not introduce the Pervert Demon. Neither I nor the Sword Demon can deal with this lunatic. Moyong Baek wouldnt have a better time with it, either. We cant easily solve some things even if the three of us work together. Thats the case for the Pervert Demon. By my standards, hes a total nutjob. When we enter the restaurant, Jang Deuk-soo, who is slurping noodles alone, halts his chopsticks. Oh? I grinned while looking at Deuk-soo hyung. Im back. Jang Deuk-soo smiles and replies as the Sword Demon and Pervert Demon enter behind me. Oh, youre still alive. I havent seen you around these days. Jang Deuk-soo, whose laughter disappears as soon as he makes eye contact with the Sword Demon, greets my companions. W-Welcome. I take a seat at the table and say. Deuk-soo hyung, can you make pork ribs today? Jang Deuk-soo immediately glances at the Sword Demon and Pervert Demon before replying. Todays one of the days that I have to. Even if I cant, itll be out in a bit. Wait. Nice. Jang Deuk-soo smiles at the Sword Demon and says. Please hold on a moment. When the Sword Demon nods, Jang Deuk-soo retreats to the kitchen with wide eyes. In fact, even guys like Pervert Demon and I will often think that the Sword Demons aura is intimidating. In the eyes of Deuk-soo, who has not learned martial arts, it is natural to be nervous because a dangerous man is coming into his store. The Pervert Demon whispers. Master. What is it? Ive never come to such a shabby store. The Sword Demon replies as he looks at his disciple. Shut up. Yes, sir. The Pervert Demon glances at me unconsciously and quickly averts his eyes. Regardless of the eye contact, I add. Dumbass. Looking at the empty table, I stand up, bring a kettle and a glass of water by myself, and set it down on the table. I have no choice but to do it because Deuk-soo hyung is busy. The Sword Demon and Pervert Demon watch me silently. Maybe the silence is awkward, so the Pervert Demon picks a fight with me. This job suits you. I nod. I used to be an errand boy. . After I sit back down, I cross my arms and glare at the Pervert Demon. Thats me. The Sword Demon asks me. Is that the truth? Yes, did you see the construction site outside on your way here? I saw. Its a guest inn named after me, the Zaha Inn. Im thinking of turning that place into my quarters. Though theres no point for me to stay there for long. The Sword Demon replies with a puzzled look. You have already entered Kangho. Why do you want to open a guest inn? I answer without much thought. Im making it because its where my house used to be. Im in Kangho, but I should have a home I can return to. If I die away from home, then it cant be helped. I point to the kitchen. Hes going to be the main cook of Zaha Inn. He is also a member of the Low Down Sect. The Sword Demon replies. How many people are there in the sect? I dont know. No one will know. Not now, not ever. Ill keep staying clueless. The Pervert Demon replies. What a mess. Thats what it is. But whats important is not that I dont know, but that it will continue expanding. What are you talking about? I meant that there are many in the Low Down Sect because they are mostly workers like Deuk-soo, whos in the kitchen. Then its not a faction at all? I glare at the Pervert Demon and say. Who are you to define a faction? You shithead. What do you know? The Pervert Demon looks at his master. Master, do factions like this exist? This guy always looks for his master whenever hes out of words these days. The Sword Demon nods. Even the Beggars Sect consisting of beggars is a powerful force. Why is the Low Down Sect not a faction? When the leader says its a faction, its a faction. I see. After a while, Pervert Demon asks curiously. But why does their sect leader continue to be a beggar despite being powerful enough? I wonder about this often. The Sword Demon answers simply. Thats because beggars continue to appear. Hmm. There are people who lost all their wealth, orphans, and those who cannot work for various reasons. Just as traitors are gathering under one house. The Beggars Sect exists because there are beggars. Im not trying to differentiate ranks, but anyway, just understand that theres a similar sect called the Low Down Sect. It looks like the leader wants to protect the working class. I nod. Thats right. The Sword Demon tells me. But you will have more enemies than the Beggars Sect. And youll be involved with the Orthodox Faction more often. Thats what Id hope for. The Sword Demon grins when he hears my answer. Later, the three of us look at the kitchen. Jang Deuk-soo brings out a large pot and scoops the pork ribs into bowls. Before I can even get a bite, a distinctive scent wafts through my nose. Jang Deuk-soo, who is distributing the pork ribs in a bowl, asks me. Alcohol? I reply with a nod. That would be nice. By the way, did the scent change a little? The ingredients are simple since its only for us to eat. Food presentation is important when presented at the Zaha Inn, so I added seasoning. Seeing food with your eyes and scent is important before eating. Itll taste similar. A pork rib is placed in front of me, too. I see the Pervert Demon and Sword Demon pick up their chopsticks and leave them be. Lets dig in. I grab the bone of the ribs with my hand and rip the meat off. Deuk-soo also sits at a table a distance away and eats pork ribs with his hands. After tearing and nibbling at all the meat, I put the bone down. Meanwhile, the Pervert Demon is using chopsticks and making a fool of himself. Does he have to keep his hands clean so he can touch women? He looks like a madman who is always prepared to seduce a woman. The Sword Demon has put down his chopsticks and is eating the pig ribs with his hands as he meets my eyes. . How was it? The Sword Demon answers in a firm tone as he pulls the bone out of his mouth. Very delicious. He says it is great, but his expression says the opposite. It is funny because a man with no interest in eating is forcefully saying that. Indeed, he is a human who greatly lacks emotion in things other than martial arts. I drink alone and wash down the flesh with alcohol. For a moment, sleepiness crashes into me like angry waves. Ah The Sword Demon looks at my expression and says. Leader, are you okay? Im all right. Only then am I sure about my condition. Whenever something is added to the Heavenly Pearl, fatigue rushes in rapidly. I am always sleepy when I take the panacea and suck someones energy with the Great Absorption Technique combined with the Heavenly Pearl. The condition must have gotten worse because I was swarmed by the assassins. The Sword Demon notices my condition. Do you have a sleep disorder? I think so. Because of martial arts? I nod. Perhaps so. When was the last time you slept? I dont remember. Feeling my eyelids becoming heavy, I eat the whole pork rib. Come to think of it, I think that if I start the Qi Circulation of Shadow Moon Martial Arts, it will not be that hard to break through the Waxing Moon Ice Technique. To be honest, the speed at which I become strong is unrealistically fast. In a way, it is natural that the body needs rest. The Sword Demon asks me while eating the ribs. What are your plans from now on? Pouring Dukuang liquor for the Sword Demon, I say. There is no such thing. Life is always colorful except for the goal of being strong. Getting drunk and eating meals, and once my sleepiness goes away, I plan to probe into the Orthodox Factions again. There must be many strong people there and many people that annoy me The Pervert Demon holds out his glass, so I pour one for myself. Pour it yourself. The Sword Demon says as he drinks his Dukuang liquor. Doctor Moyong said this to me. Lets hear it. One day, when things get too difficult, he tells me to hand over the Light Ray Sword to you. I dont need the sword. I know. Only then do I understand what he means. I look at the Sword Demon and nod. If youre having a hard time, please hand it over anytime. What are you going to do if I pass it to you? Watching you fight, I can tell its not an ordinary Demon Sword. A ghost might attack me if I tried to break the sword. Ill find a very desolate place where people dont come and bury it deep under. Suddenly, a scene from my past life that I dont even know about comes to mind. It is a scene where the Sword Demon wanders into the wilderness and buries the Light Ray Sword himself. The imagination is always wild and free. The Sword Demon replies. Please do. Im not a man who comforts people easily, so I tease the Sword Demon Sunbae, dont look so down. This is not like you. If your skills differ so much with or without a sword, you arent that strong, to begin with. The Pervert Demon intervenes with narrowed brows. How dare you say that? Ignoring the Pervert Demons words, I continue. Youre just a man who can fight the Alliance Leader. The Sword Demons face changes. Isnt that being strong? Shut up. . I stare at the Sword Demon and Pervert Demon before saying. If a man enters Kangho, it is natural to aim to become the best in the world. I dont think Ill respect you much if you become the greatest in the world with the Light Ray Sword. Id be ashamed of the Sword Demon nickname. The Sword Demon replies. Do you mean it? I mean it. The Sword Demon nods. I think so, too. Im well aware of it. Thats why Ive been suffering all this while. Only then does Pervert Demon shut up. I put my thoughts in my mouth after a long time. Its extremely difficult to be the greatest in the world anyway. If it is difficult, regardless of having the Light Ray Sword, I hope youll choose a more meaningful path. We are men who live with difficulties anyway. Curious, the Sword Demon asks. Ill consider it. But why didnt you introduce my disciple to Doctor Moyong? When we talked, he was so wise he didnt seem like his age. I drink and stare at the Pervert Demon. This guy is The Pervert Demon replies with a frown. Is what? Lets give up. Things never go the way you want. If you cant change him, then nobody can help him. Jang Deuk-soo, who is eating pork ribs beside us, asks curiously. Does he have any illness? Shithead is surprised and stares at Jang Deuk-soo. ! Jang Deuk-soo looks at me with wide-open eyes, wondering if he said anything wrong. ! I point my finger at the shithead to solve Jang Deuk-soos curiosity. Hes a Pervert Demon. Jang Deuk-soo understands right away. Ah I retrieve my finger with a deep sigh. I cant believe I returned to the past and have given the Left Hand of Illuminating Lights nickname myself You can never predict what will happen in the future. Chapter 130 Chapter 130 C If One Day, We Make It Out Alive In Kangho The former Pervert Demon became Pervert Demon in this life because of me. A Mountain is a mountain, water is water, and a Pervert Demon is a Pervert Demon. The past is different from the present. In the past, the shithead was notoriously known as the Pervert Demon of Kangho. In this present life, he will be reduced only to becoming the Pervert Demon of the town. Repress, restrain, tease, and bully. Watering down the level to where hes only a problematic guy who sleeps around with women in this and that town. Luck should follow if you do good deeds Its a shame that no one knows about my actions. I look at Pervert Demon, who is poking at the pork ribs with his chopsticks. Hes still a dumbass anyway I am sure the period he gained notoriety as the Pervert Demon was after the Sword Demon disappeared. I wont let that happen this time. I will prevent all possibilities of the Sword Demon dying in the wilderness, dying of being surrounded by enemies, or suddenly falling into Qi Deviation. Anyhow, Im not going to let him die a lonely death. This earnest, serious man is the master of the Pervert Demon. In short, we will stay alive To keep an eye on the Pervert Demon. The Pervert Demon becomes a Pervert Demon again, but it wont be easy to commit the same crimes. My chest and lower stomach swell as I finish eating the pork ribs while thinking about this. The Sword Demon asks me. Leader, what are you thinking about so seriously? I reply while downing the liquor. I wonder if Im doing things for my own personal gain or if I do it for a greater cause. And? Im just a person who lives however I want. The Sword Demon nods and says. How blunt. If were done eating, show me around the Zaha Inn. Of course The Pervert Demon, who cant eat properly because he is using chopsticks, clicks his tongue and looks at the pork ribs. The Sword Demon says lightly. Use your hands. Yes. For a moment, I watched the Sword Demon and Pervert Demon. Strangely, they seem like a teacher and disciple, yet they also seem like a stepfather and stepson. Recalling the meaning of master, this is not so strange. I wonder if the two know that they share this bond. The Sword Demon doesnt seem like he would build a family. The Pervert Demon is a bastard mistreated by his clan. In conclusion, the Pervert Demon does not respect the Sword Demon just for his advanced martial art skills. Sometime later, I left Deuk-soo hyung with a lot of money and left the restaurant. This is a great location. Is that so? The sun is setting, all the workers working on the construction have left, and Yeon Ja-seong is nowhere to be seen. The Zaha Inn is gradually changing every time I stop by. The foundation is progressing slowly but steadily, like my martial arts, so this doesnt feel so bad. The Pervert Demon asks me. Are you rich? The quality of the construction seems quite high. This is not a construction site that can be spotted from the corners of the village. I stole it. What? Money. From who? The Unorthodox Faction. I see. The Sword Demon, who is watching his disciples expression, says. If you have something to say, say it. The Pervert Demon responds. If you steal money from the Unorthodox Factions to build a guest inn, youll need to hire many workers. And what about that? It just seems rather meaningful. Looking at the guest inn, the Sword Demon answers. Meaningful you can give compliments too. How can I dream of women all day long? Master. The Sword Demon nods back. Thats you. . I look at the two alternatively and tilt my head. It feels weird to see a man such as the Sword Demon becoming influenced by my habits. Anyway, I also agree with the Sword Demon, so I look at the Pervert Demon. Thats you. A piece of crap. Shut up. The Sword Demon says. When the guest inn is completed, reserve a room for me. No problem. But why later? The Sword Demon answers while looking at the darkening sky. If one day, we make it out alive in Kangho. Okay. The Pervert Demon steps in. Of course, you will make it out alive, master. No matter how strong the cult is, we still have the Alliance. The Orthodox Factions hate the Demonic Cult just as much as the Unorthodox Factions. The Sword Demon replies. There are exceptions. However, there will also be many Unorthodox Factions siding with the cult. Thats how its always been. Cowards and the non-cowards are all together in the bunch. I answer the Sword Demon. Ill kill the cowards in advance. Dont neglect your training while chasing those who need to be killed daily. The same goes for my disciple and me. Amassing Qi requires silence, so the environment is important as well. I think its better to solve your sleep problems than to find a new enemy. I will be sure to do that. Since it isnt my idea to take them on tour around Ilyang, I should make use of the time and say. Would you like to go somewhere with me? Where to? To the smithy. I asked them to make a weapon for me, but it had been a while since I heard from them. Since were here, lets stop by there. This time, I lead the two to Dragon Head Smithy. I have no idea what Geum Chul-yong is up to. As usual, I storm into the Dragon Head Smithy. As I appear with the door swinging open, someone shouts as he runs inside. Leader is here! why are you running away? The Pervert Demon says as he looks around the smithy. This place is quite spacious. Inside, Geum Chul-yong and Kwak Yong-gae, who are topless, run out. Are you here, Leader? I am taken aback by Geum Chul-yongs state. His chubby face is shining, and sweat is on his whole body. Furthermore, as if scorched by fire, he is red all over. On the other hand, the skinny Kwak Yong-gae has toned muscles on his upper body. The large-built person lost weight, and the skinny man now has muscles. Mister Geum, how have you been? Geum Chul-yong nods. Well, Im always the same old me. Geum Chul-yong bows and greets the Sword Demon and Pervert Demon. Im Geum Chul-yong of Dragon Head Smithy. Welcome. Kwak Yong-gae also says. Im the vice master, Kwak Yong-gae. The Sword Demon nods and greets them shortly. Nice to meet you. When the Sword Demon does not introduce himself, Geum Chul-yong looks at me with an awkward smile. Are you here to see the Crazy Blade? More or less. Come in. On our way inside, the Sword Demon stops when he sees several swords on the table. It is a sword in progress without a handle. Geum Chul-yong says with a flustered look. Ah, these were samples. Theres no need to look over these. The Sword Demon ignores Geum Chul-yongs words, grabs a long sword without a handle, and looks at the blade. . The Sword Demon asks Geum Chul-yong. Did you make this recently? Yes. Not bad. Geum Chul-yong replies. Thank you. I do not introduce Sword Demon grandly on purpose. Its the fact that hes not a swordsman Geum Chul-yong can easily meet in his life. It is the craftsman who makes swords, but it is the swordsman who uses them. He knows the pros and cons better than anyone else. Kwak Yong-gae guides us. This way, please. On the way, I ask Geum Chul-yong. Is it complete? No, I would have gone to see you if I did. Suddenly, I look at the shiny sweat on Geum Chul-yongs body. While making weapons, Geum Chul-yongs body changes as if he is practicing physical martial arts. It used to be a scrubby dad bod, but now the muscles on his back flex every time he walks, just like how a smithy owner should be. Then am I here to see my weapon? Or did I come to see the changed Geum Chul-yong? This doesnt feel bad at all. A blade was placed on the desk where Kwak Yong-gae led us to. As expected, it has no handles, a measuring tape, and tools are placed next to it. Perhaps it is forged using darksteel, but the blade is quite dark in color. The Sword Demon asks me. Can I take a look? When I nod, the Sword Demon again holds Crazy Blade with his left hand and looks at the blade. The Sword Demon asks Geum Chul-yong. Is it fused with darksteel? Yes. I mixed it since Leader gave it to me. The Sword Demon injects force into his finger and flicks the blade. The blade trembles with a piercing echo. Geum Chul-yong and Kwak Yong-gae widen their eyes. ! In the meantime, as Sword Demon suppresses the vibration with his left hand, the blade falls silent. The Sword Demon says. Sect Leader, the blade seems too blunt. Was it the Leaders request? Geum Chul-yong replies. Yes, giving up on sharpness as long as it is sturdy. This was the Leaders request. The Sword Demon nods. As long as its sturdy. The Sword Demon checks with me this time. Is that right? Yes. Then its not a sword. It doesnt matter if its not a sword. Its a weapon with an unbreakable faith. The Sword Demon smiles. Unbreakable faith. Look, Sect Leader. Yes. Since youre going for a sword form but making it like a bat. Is there any leftover darksteel? Theres still some left. This is also well made. However, if you want to make sure that the sword never breaks, sharpening the sword blade is extremely difficult. If you make and break it repeatedly, your physical strength will run out at some point, and soon you wont be able to hold out mentally. Qi Deviation doesnt only occur to Kangho warriors. Blacksmiths often suffer from it just the same. Hm, did you call me a craftsman? The Sword Demon, who doesnt understand the question, tilts his head and asks. Youre a craftsman who creates weapons, which is why the Leader entrusts it to you. Isnt that so? Yes. The Sword Demon continues, nodding his head. Try melting all the remaining darksteel and making it into a bat. Instead, remove the impurities in darksteel during the process. Focus only on the fact that it wont break, and by adding your touch, Im sure a much better weapon will be made compared to this one. The Sword Demon looks at me. Will it be okay to give this order? Its perfectly fine. Geum Chul-yong nods back. I will try again. Perhaps because it is also an impressive piece of advice for Geum Chul-yong, he asks for the Sword Demons identity, who does not introduce himself. May I ask for your name? The Sword Demon ponders for a while and replies. Its been a long time since I used a name Leader Geum. You can call me the Sword Demon. I observe the Sword Demons expression for a few moments. It feels strange. After selling his weapon, which has a flashy handle like a fraud, Geum Chul-yong is now becoming a craftsman. In my perspective, the Sword Demon is speaking more and more humane words. Geum Chul-yong and Kwak Yong-gae, who learn the swordsmans identity, keep their mouths shut. The Sword Demon asks. Have you heard of me? Yes. The blacksmith is one who has stepped into Kangho anyway. Of course, theyve heard of it. The Sword Demon asks. You said its an unbreakable faith, but who said it? Geum Chul-yong looks at me. Leader said it first. The Sword Demon looks at Geum Chul-yong and says, as he looks at the interior of the smithy. Well said. I also want to come here and make a custom sword. Not right now, but I will come again. Yes, please do. The Sword Demon says to me. You guys catch up and come out. Lets go. The Sword Demon exits the smithy with the Pervert Demon. I grin as soon as I make eye contact with Geum Chul-yong. Geum Chul-yong and Kwak Yong-gae are also dripping in cold sweat. Geum Chul-yong whispers. Isnt he from the cult? I nod and whispers. Hes a master who can hear your whispers outside. Oh, gosh Geum Chul-yong whispers in a smaller voice. But how can you get acquainted with a cult member? He left the cult. Oh, gosh Mister Geum, have you been eating? I glued it on my mouth. I take out a money pouch and throw the whole thing at Geum Chul-yong. Geum Chul-yong then replies. How can you give the whole thing? I wave to Geum Chul-yong and Kwak Yong-gae and say. I have a lot of money. More than you can imagine. I dont even know how much money I have. Whats important is that money changes me and changes my surroundings. Money not spent on places like these is useless to me. From now on, I wont be counting my pennies. Im going to flaunt it around like today and throw it however I want to. Chapter 131 Chapter 131 C Lick The Cult Leaders Foot As the sky got dark, I realized that the only place to house the guests for the night was the brothel. I dont have a home to entertain guests yet. Due to the circumstance, I take Sword Demon and Pervert Demon to Plum Blossom Pavilion. I never thought that I would enter a brothel with Pervert Demon. But with his master and me present, nothing will happen. Because I havent seen Plum Blossom Pavilion in such a long time, I was not used to the view. I had disappeared and Cha Sung-tae is currently not here. How is Plum Blossom Pavilion holding up? First, the gatekeeper didnt recognize me. No one recognized me even when I entered Plum Blossom Pavilion. I deliberately mention Cha Sung-tae to a woman walking by. Where is Cha Sung-tae? The woman replies, Manager went to Black Rabbit Union. Then who is taking care of this place? Its under the supervision of Sima Bi. Oh, Sima Bi. By the way, who are you? Looking at the young lady I reply, The person above Sima Bi and Cha Sung-tae. The young woman with freckles on her face suddenly shouts as if informing the entire brothel. Leader is here! Suddenly, the main door to Plum Blossom Pavilion swings open with a bang, and many people show up here and there- looking at me standing from the ground floor. Finally, I was able to spot some familiar faces here and there. Welcome, Leader! Oh, yes. Chae Hyang, show us the way. Chae Hyang, whom I havent seen in a long time, replies, Ill take you to the Plum Blossom Suite. I climb the stairs along with the two and enter Plum Blossom Suite. On the way, Sword Demon says, I will be practicing Qi Circulation, so get me a separate room. Master, I will be having a drink with the Leader. Alright. Even after entering the brothel, Sword Demon did not nag at his disciple at all. I let Sword Demon stay in the room on the top floor that Ive used previously, and sit across Pervert Demon in the Plum Blossom Suite. Come to think of it All the women Pervert Demon slept with in the past were famous predecessors of the unorthodox faction. The fact that all the women he slept with had double surnames1 caused a ruckus. I thought that he would play around like a dog in heat once he stepped foot in the brothel But, as if he was never the Pervert Demon, he only drinks calmly across from me. He didnt even spare a glance at Chae Hyang, who makes an appearance occasionally. I was even more puzzled because he appears to be uninterested even towards the brothel entertainers. Pervert Demon asks, Where should I sleep? Ill give you a room. Pervert Demon nods and resumes drinking. A while later, someone knocks on Plum Blossom Pavilion and says, Leader, this is Sima Bi. Come in. The last time I saw him was when I was facing against Elder Hornless Dragon. With his hair up in a ponytail, as soon as he sees me Sima Bi greets me in a bow. Its been a while, Leader. General Sima, nothing happened while I was away? Yes. Who manages the brothels finances? The manager left the keys with me before leaving. We store it in three places. Would you like to have the keys? Forget it. Come on in. Yes. I pour him a drink as Sima Bi takes a seat. Did you learn much about how to run the brothel? Yes, we have been running the place as a restaurant rather than a brothel. I often discuss matters with Manager Cha when problems arise. I introduce Pervert Demon, who had been drinking without saying a word. This is Mong-rang, the second son of Wind Cloud Mong Clan in Baekeungji. This is Sima Bi of Low-Down Sect. Pervert Demon dryly says to Sima Bi, Nice to meet you. Sima Bi replies with honorifics, I am Sima Bi of Low-Down Sect. I give Sima Bi a mission. Advisor Sima. Yes. When Lord Mong of Baekeungji returns, accompany him. I need you to do something for me. Please go on. We are going to reinvest the profits earned from all three brothels. Follow him back to Baekeungji and find out which guest inns, restaurants, and brothel businesses can expand with the Low-Down Sects investment. Take a look at Baekeungjis commercial district and see if there are any buildings or shops you can buy. Yes. If you dont have enough money, Manager Byuk of Black Rabbit Union will provide you support. Do you know why Im opting for a business of Low-Down Sect in Baekeungji? Is it a branch that will serve the purpose of collecting information? Thats right, Sima Bi, but it wont be just Baekeungji. Please elaborate. A lot of surplus funds are accumulated in the Black Rabbit Union. You will take charge and establish a branch in Baekeungji, and, using this as an experience, make a branch near Blood Night Palace, one near Bajian Society, Fair Lake, Nanming Society, and South Horizon Sect. Oh, and also Black Hurricane Castle. Thats all. And although it will be a branch, it should still be a place where one can work and earn income. The personnel to be selected and deployed there will be individuals who currently have nothing to do from either Ilyang or the Black Rabbit Union. I know the other regions, but I dont know the Blood Night Palace. Ill let you know later. Take your time. Yes, sir. Examining Sima Bis face carefully, I say, I never called for you or specifically asked you to work, but you still managed everything on your own. Sima Bi smiled lightly. Theres much to work on here. Sima Bi is the type of man who goes around to find work. If so, I have no choice but to give him more work and raise his position in the Low-Down Sect. Come to think of it, this is why Sima Bi is a military advisor. Advisor Sima, Im sorry for making you work so much though it has been a while since we met. I pour Sima Bi a drink. Sima Bi replies as he receives his glass, Do you know what rumors are floating around in Ilyang? I dont know. Word has it you invaded Nanming Society alone. Before that, there were rumors you ambushed Mister Su and killed him. Word has it you also destroyed the Bajian Society. Whenever I heard the news, I had no choice but to think you were risking your life fighting somewhere. Hm. Sima Bi makes eye contact with me after drinking. If you need me to do anything, just say the word. Hearing what I had done in the past, it felt strange. Sure. . For the funds, you can continue to discuss them with Manager Byuk and Manager Cha. Discuss with Yeon Ja-seong of the Architectural Sect if a new building needs to be built. Yes. We have a guest, so that will be all for today. Good work. Yes, please enjoy your stay. As Sima Bi walks away, Pervert Demon says with his head tilted, Youre a busy man, hillbilly. I thought you ran a regular martial art training center. But. But what? Are you able to talk about real business like this when Im even not a part of the sect? I thought it was something serious. Low-Down Sect isnt some great faction. Its just a place that gives people work, doesnt get threatened to pay money offerings, and also a place to get beaten to death by Kangho warriors. Are you applying the things you heard in Moonglade House? As reference. Pervert Demon snorts and stays silent for a moment. I look at Pervert Demons expression and drink. Pervert Demon says, Are you setting up a branch nearby because Elder Heo asked you to assist the Blood Night Palace? Thats the only way. I can only help if I know whats happening. I get it, but why are you making one in Baekeungji? Because your master is there. And unorthodox factions as well. So why are you keeping an eye on my master? Whether its your master or the Blood Night Palace, youre bound to be attacked by the demonic cult one day. He is not one who would get defeated easily. Low-Down will be in orthodox and unorthodox factions and also in places without any Kangho fighters, so stop pestering me. I do what I want. Wow, how impressive. As soon as I hear Pervert Demons sarcastic remark, I reply, Pervert Demon, do you wanna get beaten up? Youre itching to do it now that youve drunk some alcohol, is it? Try that harmless threat on your men. Its amazing, by the way. How are you so sure of the things you want to do? What are you talking about? Like what I said, you made a sect to protect the working class and went around fighting orthodox factions here and there Whats the motivation behind it? Im not interested, but I ask anyway because its absurd. How should is it that I should answer when asked an obvious question? I thought maybe the answer was not with me but with him. Im me. Youre you why are you living like this? Me? Are you living like this because you have nothing to do? Are you referring to women? Anything. Pervert Demon says as he pours his glass, In this world, theres nothing more beautiful than a woman. I drink since it felt like Pervert Demon isnt finished. And theres nothing more ugly than a woman. Two years ago, I attended an early marriage proposal with a lady from an unorthodox faction, but it got called off when it was revealed that I was a son of a concubine mid-conversation. No, also As he gathers his thumb and forefinger together, Pervert Demon says, I wasnt even this interested in the marriage. I mean, I got dumped without doing anything. So? So? I hid my identity and went to see what kind of girl she was. She was a very promiscuous girl. And I got dumped by that bitch because Im a bastard? I will spit in front of her house. Tui, fuck, tui, tui, tui! You spat on the side dish, jerk. Dont eat it then, you rotten punk. Pervert Demon says as he picks up the side dish he spat on. When I came back home and saw the pathetic sight, I suddenly became a failure. Our Family Head thinks of me as a pawn to expand the faction. Those jackasses I argued with the family head and his predecessor that day. I beat them both anyway. I spewed on the side dish in front of me while drinking. Pfft As soon as I spouted liquor on the side dish, Pervert Demon frowned. Ugh Dont eat it, you trash. No, but isnt your father the Family Head? Thats right. And the vice head is your brother? Yeah. But you beat them both? Pervert Demon stares at me with wide eyes. Why, is that weird? Are you seriously saying that right now, you nutjob? Pervert Demon suddenly grins and says, Thats not weird. How come? If this is weird, then they shouldnt have beaten me since I was young. I got hit because I was weak. The tables have turned now that Im stronger. Of course, they didnt know I was stronger until they were hit. Its common for Kangho people to fight when voices are raised. Anyway, the family cant treat me carelessly anymore. I think he even thought about kicking me out of the family, but no way. They raised me when they needed me, and now they want to kick me out? This damned family. With a loud bang, Pervert Demon puts down his glass. Thats our clan. Wind Cloud Mong Clan, a wonderful family. Having never seen anyone beat up their father and brother, I pretend to scratch the back of my head and then smack Pervert Demons head on a whim. With a thud, Sword Demon grabs his head. Are you insane? What was that for? Just take it, you punk. There is no reason. Fight me if you feel wronged. According to your logic, cant the strong keep beating the weak? If youre going to live with that logic, join the cult. Go, beat the weaker ones happily, grow fast and lick the cult leaders foot. Youre weaker than the cult leader anyway. Am I right? What the hell? Why would I join the cult? If you beat your father and stepbrother, youll be welcomed with open arms. Why wont you go in? I already told you I got hit a lot when I was young. I suddenly touch his nose and give another quick smack at the distracted Pervert Demon. Is it the same back then and now? Whats different? I pour out a drink and stare at Pervert Demon. If youve grown up in great health, be independent. Instead of muttering bullshit. I told you before, right? Youre no better than your father. If youre over twenty years old, gain independence and build a decent family. Dont rant about old silly stories when you get drunk. Its a waste of alcohol. You punk. . I put down my glass because Pervert Demon was glaring at me murderously. Why, wanna go for a round? Lets go, you bastard. Good. I spring to my feet at the table with Pervert Demon. Pervert Demon runs his mouth in a strained voice. Take me to a wide place. While walking down the narrow stairs shoulder to shoulder with Pervert Demon, Sword Demons voice echoed gently throughout the Plum Blossom Pavilion. Our Low-Down Sect Leader and disciple. . The two of us stop walking and answer in turn. Yes, Master. Please say it. Sword Demons calm voice continues above. I wont stop you. But only use physical martial arts. Do not use Qi. I thought he would stop the fight, so it was an unexpected demand. I make eye contact with Pervert Demon and then we reply to him one after another. All right. Understood. As I go down the stairs, Sword Demon lets out an exasperated sigh. Editor/Translators Note Hi everyone! Just for some cultural context, Zaha makes this comment about double surnames to emphasize the class difference. Double surnames, also known as compound surnames, are surnames that use more than one character. Take for example Lee(one character) versus Sima(two characters). These compound surnames derive from Zhou dynasty Chinese noble and official titles which hints about how the Pervert Demon was getting with girls who were coming from higher ranking families- making it all the more taboo (lol). If you wanna learn more refer to this article. ?? Chapter 132 Chapter 132 C Its Been A Long Time Since I Ate Dirt Eventually, Sword Demon sits up from his lotus position and stares outside by the window. His disciple and the Low-Down Sect Leader can be seen facing each other in a place barely lit by the brothels red lamps. Theyre too young. The reflection of red hues and moonlight cast long shadows. He already knew that his disciple had assaulted his father and brother, but he didnt interfere as it was a family matter. However, Low-Down Sect Leader and his disciple got into a fight during their conversation. His disciple is excellent in martial arts. The leader of Low Down is also an outstanding master, so he cant help but look at the fight with a peaked curiosity. In addition, if he didnt watch them from afar, these two would end up fighting using their internal Qi. The Low-Down Sect Leader can single-handedly blow up the main quarters of Four Flow Valley with an incomplete torrent of energy. Furthermore, because his disciples Ice Technique does not discriminate, there was a high possibility that this quiet town called Ilyang would turn into a mess. And as these two come into a face-off. A dull sound of clashing begins to sound under the moonlight. Instantly, windows open here and there, and people stick out their heads. Passersby join as spectators, and the shadows begin crowding around them. Even without using internal Qi, the two fight brutally well. Sometimes his disciple flies off as he gets hit by a kick and rushes in as he stomps on the ground. Other times, the two land punches and are pushed back at the same time. Looking at it from afar, he thought that the sound was very diverse whenever their body parts collided. Thud! Smack! Crack! Slap! With rugged breaths, the two continue to fight with their feet stamping on the ground. The fight progressed with indecipherable curses. Hey, shit! Piece of- Son of a- Perhaps because of the urgency of the situation, most of the swearing ends halfway. At the next scene, Sword Demon sighs in bewilderment. Huh The Low-Down Sect Leader was grabbing and pulling his disciples hair. Aaah Let me go! Meanwhile, they deflect each others hands, trip over their legs, fall, and stand-up multiple times. It was a strange fight that ended up progressing into a street fight though they have great combat skills. What the hell Even after many years in Kangho, Sword Demon has never seen Kangho warriors pull each others hair. His disciple grabs the leaders leg while cursing. The Low-Down Sect Leader grips his disciples waist with both hands and tosses him to the ground. Bang! Then, when the leader goes to stamp his face with his feet, the disciple rolls on the ground and hurriedly avoids it. Sword Demon watched with his mouth open. Oh, that Lazy Donkey Roll. Lazy Donkey Roll means a donkey rolling on the floor lazily. In fact, the disciple barely avoids it as dust sticks all over his body. Lazy Donkey Roll is a technique respectable Kangho people are most ashamed of. The one rolling on the ground is his disciple, but Sword Demon was the one flashing in red. Of course, it is natural to use it whenever your life is in danger. Even so, he never expected them to fight so blatantly sloppy. As the Low-Down Sect Leader said the other day Even if he called it a party of shit and urine, it was a fitting dogfight. Instantly, the shadows become faster. As soon as he makes a flying kick and lands on the ground, he throws the soil in his hand at the leaders eyes. Wait! It seems like he grabbed the dirt when he rolled on the ground. As soon as he witnesses his disciples wickedness, Sword Demon exclaims out of fluster. The Low-Down Sect Leader violently whirls his hands in the air (without exuding Palm Wind), and as soon as he crosses his arms, his disciple lands a flying kick causing the Leader to fly backwards. I cant believe he got hit again. Sword Demon knows he shouldnt be laughing, and quietly raises his hand to cover his mouth. . The agitated Low-Down Sect Leader yells, Fucking bastard, how dare you throw dirt at me? Disciple teases Low-Down Sect Leader, How does the dirt taste? You used to eat it a lot when you were young, right? Its been a while. How does your hometown taste? His disciple switches to making insults. It was clear he said this deliberately after hearing that the Low-Down Sect Leader used to be an errand boy while he was born in a wealthy family. It was so childish. When the two collide once again Strangely enough, remarks come from the onlookers. Zaha, dont go easy on him and take him down. Why are you fighting like that? As he rushes towards the disciple, the Low-Down Sect Leader says, Shut up! The onlookers help. Mr. Pyeong, shut up. If youre drunk, go home. Im going to watch them fight. You guys shut up. Sword Demon watches the fight with folded arms. This place is the Low-Down Sect Leaders hometown. At that moment, Low-Down Sect Leader runs in place several times and leaps by blatantly extending out both hands. It wasnt a Qin Na Technique. Neither was it a palm technique nor a fist technique but it was a strange posture. Hm The disciple rushes in while spewing curses. What kind of fucking posture is that? Bring it on. In between the flying punches and feet, the disciple gets slapped with a loud smack. Low-Down Sect Leader slaps the disciples cheek again while taking the incoming punch from the disciple. Slap! The sound was on point. Sword Demon could feel his anger just by looking at the shadow. He lost at the psychological war because of the slap In the meantime, as he analyzes the fight harshly, Sword Demon thought it was strange. Looking at the development so far, he couldnt help but think that the Low-Down Sect Leader getting dirt thrown at was also part of the mind game. It was a battle between genius idiots, he thought. Getting worked up, the disciple charges in and the two fiercely compete with Qin Na Technique using punches and feet. Low-Down Sect Leader grabs the disciples collar at some point, lowers his body, kneels him down, and throws the disciple on the ground. Thump! The blow was quite strong this time. A keugh sound flew out of the disciples mouth. Sword Demon brows narrowed. It wasnt a sloppy technique after all. It was an effective technique to make him lose his balance with minimal force and throw him on the floor. The leader grabs the lying disciples kicking legs with his hand, grabs his students foot again, and hurls it down here and there. Thud! Thud! Just by looking at the shadow, one could tell that the Low-Down Sect Leader was ruthless. With one hand, the ruthless man raised his disciple again and kicked the disciples waist and abdomen this time. Thud! The spectators were startled and exclaimed in unison. Gosh.. Isnt his bone broken? In the meantime, another slap sounds one after another. Slap! Slap! Slap! Slap! Instantaneously, the fight quickly became favorable to the Low-Down Sect Leader. Whenever his disciple moved, his sleeves and legs were always gripped by the leader. After some time, the leader pulls the disciple up by the collar with his left hand and asks the disciple, Surrender? No. At that moment, the leader lifts the disciple with both hands and thrashes him to the ground in full force. Bang! . As if the blow was quite big, the disciple wriggles like an earthworm on the floor. Sword Demon was amazed. Strangely, the two really competed without using internal Qi. Since hed been watching from the start, he knew that their physical skills were on a similar level. However, the disciple could not respond to the leader whose technique changed strategies midway. It looked like a physical technique that expanded and developed from Qin Na Technique. He learned some strange martial arts that is neither a fist technique or Qin Na Technique. In a calm tone, the leader speaks to the onlookers. Were done here, so go on now. Go, now! The crowd faltered and slowly dismissed. Sword Demon stared at the Low-Down Sect Leader, who chased away the crowd, and his disciple laying on the ground. Curious as to what the two might talk about, he has no choice but to keep watching. Once the crowd is gone, the leader spits on the ground. Perhaps dirt really got into his mouth because he wipes the area around his mouth while spitting. The disciple lying down still has the energy to spout nonsense. Youd be dead if it was poison. The leader replies, If you were one to use poison, you wouldve been long dead. Bullshit. Be grateful that I didnt use my internal Qi. Shut the fuck up. The disciple sits up and dusts off the dust on his arm. Low-Down Sect Leader also dusts off his clothes and walks toward Plum Blossom Pavilion without saying a word. . Sword Demon, who expected Low-Down Sect Leader to say something, watched with crossed arms. Hm Low-Down Sect Leader disappeared from his view and entered Plum Blossom Pavilion. He was fighting and cursing sloppily in a disorderly and childish manner and now that the fight is over, he doesnt say much. In the vast empty space, the disciple sits with one knee up and sighs. . After a while, the disciple also gets up dusting off his butt, and goes into the building. Sword Demon stares endlessly at the vacant lot with folded arms. Strangely, the dogfight lingered in his mind. The only thing clear was that what took place in the open space was a battle between demons. It was just a fight between men. That was a weird fight. As soon as I return to Plum Blossom Suite, I rinse my mouth with alcohol and spit in an empty bowl. Jackass, its been a while since Ive eaten dirt. I wash my dry mouth with liquor. Perhaps because I warmed up, it felt like the alcohol was seeping into my body. Gah. Pervert Demon fought unexpectedly well. I had no choice but to use the lethal moves that I learned during my fight with Punch King. It certainly worked. Punch King is called Punch King for a reason. If Id used internal Qi, Pervert Demon would have had his back broken. The door bursts open and Pervert Demon enters and sits across. Mae-hyang sticks her head out by the door and asks, Leader, would you like to have more alcohol? I nod. Oh, yes, no side dishes. Yes. Moments later, I pour the liquor Mae-hyang brings over into Pervert Demons glass. Pervert Demon then grabs the bottle and pours alcohol into my glass. As soon as we down the drink, we look at the door again. Sword Demon opens the door and says, My disciple, that was one good Lazy Donkey Roll. Pervert Demon responds as he straightens his posture, Yes, Master. You rolled well like a donkey. Yes. Sword Demon then speaks to me as he sits at the top seat. Leader, I also saw you pull my disciples hair. It was impressive. I reply with a nod. Im glad it helped expand your knowledge. . When Sword Demon sits down, Pervert Demon extends the bottle. Have a drink, Master. Sure, lets have a drink today. As he pours alcohol into his masters glass, Pervert Demon says, I lost because I didnt use my internal Qi, please dont mind it much. I know. Sword Demon holds his glass and looks at me. But what does expanding knowledge have to do with pulling hair? I reply seriously as I pour the liquor. Why do the masters of the Buddhist Sect shave their heads? It is so that they wont be subjected to this kind of embarrassment. This jerk always cares about his looks but by getting defeated by me today, this will be helpful in the future. This is all an experience. Sword Demon nods. I see. Leader always had his plans. Sword Demon looks at his disciple this time. You threw the dirt like an assassination weapon. It was like seeing a third-rate orthodox faction. An ugly attack that cant be spotted in cults. Pervert Demon replies, Thats right, sir. If it was a large dose of poison, would he be drinking in front of me like now? The game is actually over then. It was not a match, but a close fight of one win and one loss. Sword Demon nods and holds out his glass. Its at a time like this where its appropriate to say that you only know how to run your mouth. Lets drink. The three of us drink Dukuang liquor and put down our glasses. . I suddenly look at Sword Demons face. His expression was strange. Thats the type of expression you have when youre about to laugh. Sunbae, whats wrong with your face? If you want to laugh, laugh. Youll get Qi Deviation from your facial muscles. Sword Demon replies, Where did I meet such a fool its fascinating. Huh? Suddenly, Pervert Demon, who was going to say something, tilts his head and touches his nose. His nose is bleeding slightly. Maybe because I slapped him. Suddenly, Pervert Demon tears his sleeves to cover his nose and lowers his head. Pervert Demon, who blocked one side of his nostrils, suddenly looks at the master. . I also follow his gaze and look at Sword Demon. This man, who was like a cold demon, had nostrils that were flaring. Pervert Demon says to the master with a complicated look. Just laugh, Master. Then Sword Demon laughs loudly. As soon as I hear Sword Demons laugh, I applaud with a blunt expression. Congratulations, sir. Sword Demon looks at me with a puzzled look. For what? Isnt it your first time laughing in your life? The first one is hard, but the second one will be easier. You dont even know how to laugh. Tsk. When Sword Demon panicked, it was Pervert Demon who cant hold back his laughter this time. I look at the two with a stern look on purpose. Since Sword Demon could pull out his magic sword, I tell the two in the most serious tone possible, Lets have a drink. The key is to not laugh at times like this. Chapter 133 Chapter 133 C Thats Why It Is Engulfed In Silence The day after heavy drinking, I stared at the backs of Sima Bi, Sword Demon, and Pervert Demon as they were leaving for Baekeungji. It is unknown how this short journey will impact Sword Demon and Pervert Demon. I dont know if Sword Demon and Pervert Demon know this, but I did my best to assist them. I took them for pork ribs, hosted them in Plum Blossom Pavilion, and shared Dukuang liquor. I invited them to my hometown, showed them the smithy that is forging my weapon, and toured them to Zaha Inn under construction. If I had treated them as enemies, I wouldnt have done any of these. I treated them in hope that their lives would change. I hope Sword Demon doesnt die a lonely death while wandering around in the wild someday. I hope Pervert Demon doesnt become the public enemy and flee to the demonic cult. This is my wish. But everyone live lives in their own way. Now it is necessary to go our separate ways to train in martial arts and solve our obstacles in life. In the meantime, if Sword Demon suddenly gets attacked by the demonic cult, and Pervert Demon causes trouble and has a similar incident to his past life, then its their fate. Suddenly, Sword Demon, Pervert Demon and Sima Bi who was about to disappear from the slope, halts and looks back at me, who was watching from the window of Plum Blossom Pavilion. I lock eyes with Sword Demon with my arms crossed. . Meanwhile, Pervert Demon throws away the piece of cloth he had up his nostrils. Sima Bi bows his head to me. I raise my hand awkwardly. See you. Sword Demon nods, turns around, and soon vanishes from the slope with his disciple and Sima Bi. Now Pervert Demon will resume cultivating Ice Technique. Sword Demon will train the Wooden Sword. The same goes for me. Come to think of it, the lone Sword Demon also left me some advice. He pointed out that I shouldnt neglect training while chasing my enemies. And hes right. Pervert Demon also unexpectedly showed his restraints. Although we threw dirt at each other, pulled each others hair, and exchanged punches and slaps, whats important is that we didnt use any internal Qi in the midst of the skirmish. Though hes obsessed with women, insane, and overcoming his inner demons. A promise is a promise. After hankering and threatening Hyeok Ryeon-hong, who was put in charge of Ilyang by Sima Bi, with insults, I patrol around Ilyang for the first time in a while. After confirming with my own eyes that people started their daily lives without any problems, I quietly left Ilyang. Where and what the Low-Down Sect Leader is doing Theres no need for the sect members to know in detail. I kick open the main gate of Black Rabbit Union as if making a surprise attack. All the men of the Black Rabbit were smashing their heads to the ground with hands clasped behind their back. . So Gun-pyeong approaches me, surprised. Leader, youre back. I nod and look at my men. A man springs to his feet and does a fist and palm salute. Welcome back, Leader! Then all the faltering guys jump up and do a fist and palm salute as well. Welcome back, Leader! Yeah, hi. I ask So Gun-pyeong, What happened? Why is everyone hitting their heads like that? So Gun-pyeong replies, Yes, sir. These days more and more people are getting used to it, so Im specially training their foreheads. I reply in a solemn tone, Good job. Forehead training is a must for Kangho people. Indeed, it is. Its also effective to counter forehead flicks. Thats right. I speak to my men. Smash your foreheads until you can have an iron forehead. Yes, sir! As the subordinates resume hitting their heads, I say as I walk past So Gun-pyeong, Good work to you. So Gun-pyeong grins and replies, Thank you. When I pass through the outer courtyard and enter the inner courtyard, a duel was in progress. The Twelve Heavenly Generals and Hoyeon Cheong are sitting and watching the duel. In the center, Cha Sung-tae was being beaten up excitedly by someone. Cha Sung-tae was wearing a white band on his head, and he was frowning because he was hit by a fan while swinging a sword. Apparently, Baek-yu is having fun beating up Cha Sung-tae. After a while, Cha Sung-tae gets hit on the forehead by a fan and falls on his butt. Baek-yu discovers me first and says, Big Brother, youre back. I greet the generals and Hoyeon Cheong and stare at Cha Sung-tae. Sung-tae, Im glad youre still alive. While rubbing his forehead Cha Sung-tae says, Leader, youre back. Blood drips from Cha Sung-taes forehead, and the white belt is gradually stained in red. I check Baek Yus state. To my surprise, White Rooster was sweating on his forehead. I say to Baek Yu, Brother Rooster, youre sweating a little too much while beating Cha Sung-tae. White Rooster smiles awkwardly and wipes the sweat off his forehead. No? Im sweating because it was hot. The weather is hot. Yes. I reach out to Cha Sung-tae, who is tired and cant get up. Cha Sung-tae holds my hand and stands up. As I looked around at the people in the inner courtyard I say, Have all of you been well? Yes. Why does it feel like I havent seen you in a while? Cha Sung-tae replies, Because thats how long it had been. I reply while looking at blood flowing from Cha Sung-taes forehead. Youve become wise in the meantime. Thank you. Go and clean your forehead. Yes. Did your head crack? Its well and functioning. Great. Keep going. Only then did I enter the main hall and stop in my tracks. I was overwhelmed by the long table in the main hall. A disastrous scene as if paper was distributed with an array1 technique. Manager Byuk, who jolted from his seat, frowns and put his hand on his back. Oh, my back . Y-Youre back. Manager Byuk, youre out of breath. Get up slowly. Yes. Looking at the messy papers sprawled on the table, I move to the top seat. Wow, is this an array made of documents? Even if Zhuge Liang comes, hell be trapped. Haha Im flattered. Its not a compliment. Sorry. In fact, if this was all Manager Byuks paintings, I would have gotten Qi Deviation, but fortunately, it was all documents. When I glanced at the documents, most of them were ledgers. Why did you lay all these ledgers out? Manager Byuk replies, Oh, Im practicing a western way of recording ledgers. Dont you have many sects under you? It would hard to organize them all at once Whats this all about? So, I wrote Black Rabbit Union, Plum Blossom Pavilion, Cherry Blossom Pavilion, Black Hurricane Castle, Bajian Society in the top row, and write the order on the left line and the total amount in the center. I dont know if youll understand my explanation. Oh, so that means you studied and filled out the ledger that can be reviewed at one glance? Manager Byuk answers with a delighted look, Thats right. Everyone didnt understand what I was doing, but you can tell right away. I nod. I guessed it right. Manager Byuk explains, I will complete about three of these ledgers and deliver them to the vice managers of each branch. Who are the vice managers? That would be your decision to make. I see. Ive been to a sect called Blood Night Palace this time. I see. The elder is 103 years old. Hes indeed an old senior. I tap on the table. Dont work on your own, Manager Byuk. Get a disciple. You need to hand out easy tasks so you can work for a long time. What are you doing? Just looking at the table makes me feel like I fell into a trap. Clean up everything. Understood. I shout to the inside. Mrs. Son! After some clashes, Mrs. Son runs out. Leader, you just got back? Our Son So-so, Mrs. Son. Yes. As of today, I will appoint you as Manager Byuks disciple. What? Shut up. Learn all the work related to ledgers. Ill appoint you as the vice manager in 100 days, so learn properly. I understand. And clean up this mess. I speak to the two who is cleaning the table. The two of you will be training the manager of each branch. Yes. Suddenly, as I look out the wide-open main hall, Cha Sung-tae was flying around. He wasnt running around with footwork, but it looked like he was being chased. Oh, how hardworking. Good for you. Manager Byuk reports the important points to me as he organizes the documents. The wealth Bajian Society accumulated was huge. General Hong-shin and Geum-hae had a hard time moving everything. In addition, because of General Geum-haes suggestion, were safely keeping the funds in Million Bank(fXf). Million Bank? Yes. Why does it have to be Million Bank Youve heard of it? Isnt that a bank protected by the Alliance? Wouldnt the process become complicated when they ask about the source of the funds? Yes, thats why its the safest bank. And when General Geum-hae entrusted the funds, he revealed that it was you and wrote your name. Surprisingly, Million Bank requested information from the Alliance, but it was approved within three days. If it was rejected, it would have been a hassle to transport all the money. The Alliance agreed right away? Yes. Is Leader Im the meticulous type? Manager Byuk looked at me with a startled look. Do you know the Alliance Leader? I met him briefly this time. Did you go to the Alliance? Lets save that for later, itll drag longer if we talk about this. Alright, sir. Anyway, the Alliance now knows the name Low-Down Sect. It suddenly feels like were one step away from being Murims enemy. Why is it that I feel glad, but feel disappointed as well? We can always cause trouble, so it cant be helped even if I feel bummed. After finishing clearing away the documents, Manager Byuk sits down and says, This time I heard the Alliance is recruiting large amount of alliance members. They are holding duel competitions, special recruitments, and many factions are warning their public enemies to surrender. They are recruiting alliance members and outer alliance members according to the results of the duel competition. Do you plan on joining Leader? I nod. Nope. Yes. Manager Byuk grins as he looks at me. Why are you smiling? Leader, then why dont you send the subordinates? What? If it was the Twelve Generals, at least one or two of them would qualify in the alliance. It sounds like youre saying to put a spy in the alliance? Do we have to? Manager Byuk gives a sinister smile. You never know. Rather than using a bad word such as spy, just think of it as sending them abroad is all. Were not orthodox factions committing crimes. Isnt Black Rabbit Union an orthodox faction? Manager Byuk gives a firm answer. We are the Low Down. As a person who made the Low Down himself, this was refreshing to hear. I forgot. Ill think about it, you can go now. Letting Manager Byuk and Mrs. Son leave, I shake my head and lift my feet on the table. Haah Drowsiness is pouring down on me like a waterfall. When I close my eyes, I am so tired and sleepy that I dont know if Im sleeping or falling into the state of Qi Deviation. When I yawn, tears come out of my eyes. This is how tired I am I am so tired that I cant get up and walk to the bed. I close my eyes for a moment and focus on the sound around Black Rabbit Union. . In the outer courtyard, So Gun-pyeong is still yelling at the subordinates. In the inner courtyard, the sound of a round of competition and the generals laughter teasing Cha Sung-tae overlap. From the inside, I can hear the servants whispers, and Manager Byuk and Mrs. Sons chat. All this white noise I manage to calm the forthcoming symptoms of Qi Deviation. A mixture of shallow sleep and imagination creates an image of a walking Sima Bi on the street with a ledger in my mind. The expression of Sword Demon who remains silent. Pervert Demon touches his hair while walking. Elder Heo, who is taking a walk under Yong-myeongs assistance at Blood Night Palace, also comes to mind. Suddenly, I think. Like these people, Im also doing my best to live The sleep weighing down my whole body is proof. Still, I cant let my guard down, so I stab Moonlight Dagger on the table before going to sleep. A murmur directed to no one naturally flows. Im going to sleep now. . . . Moments later. Black Rabbit Union was engulfed in silence. Because the Low-Down Sect Leader, who returned, was sleeping. Editors notes In the context of martial arts, spell formations are also called Arrays. Theyre essentially magic circles which cast a continuous area-of-effect spell on the location the formation encompasses. Read more. ?? Chapter 134 Chapter 134 C The Toll Fee Is Ten Percent? I cant train my torrent of energy in Black Rabbit Union, so I focus on Qi Deviation instead. Id seized most of the neighboring orthodox factions, so I expect nothing to happen for the time being. But because the future is unpredictable, I only anticipate it. Anyway, as Sword Demon advised I started training for self-care, seclusion, and solitude. As I expected, Shadow Moon Martial Arts upgraded from Waning Moon state to Crescent Moon () state. It wasnt wholly due to the Heavenly Pearl but because of the Moon Pill Flower as well. But Im unable to devote myself entirely to the Ice Technique in Crescent Moons level. I can feel my bodys balance getting distorted. Something feels cold inside. At first, this was the state Id predicted the cult leader to be in at the cliff. He was going to consume Heavenly Pill after balancing the extreme Yin energy A similar condition to my current state. Hence, I trained Strolling Golden Turtle Technique today, and Shadow Moon Martial Arts the next day. But theres always a limit. My arms and legs keep getting thinner even though Im just cultivating Qi. The joints in my back and knees stiffened, and my mental and physical strength are being drained rapidly. If I had prioritized only one cultivation, I wouldnt have been this exhausted. However, training both yin and yang at the same time is weighing twice the burden on the body. In summary, exertion. In the end, I trained Shadow Moon Martial Arts, Strolling Golden Turtle Technique, and physical martial arts one day at a time. This is called the 3 Day Training Method, so I just named it 3 Day Training Method Technique. Only then did the training gain momentum. When I train Strolling Golden Turtle Technique, my body is warm all day long. When I train for Shadow Moon Martial Arts, my body is cold as if I was stuck in perpetual snow. I conclude that my mental and physical decline and exhaustion over the two days can only be recovered with physical training. Training is what makes you strong. I trained my body intensely because I felt like I was going to die if I were to fall into Qi Deviation. Therefore, I joined my subordinates in outdoor training, and constantly shared nonsense and small talk on the way. In the meantime, I constantly thought about Pervert Demon, Sword Demon, Cult Leader, Alliance Leader, Crazy Monk, Punch King, the villains that rose to name as Murims Public Enemy, and the master of Nimble Guild. Other than them, there are still many other masters who I couldnt overpower in my past life. Physical martial arts is about enduring the pain of the body, I constantly recalled the reputable Kangho master and overcame the pain. I will be able to fight Pervert Demon without using internal Qi next time, so I trained in physical martial arts with even more vigor. After all, training Becomes more efficient when thinking about beating someone up. I join my men in physical training and once I reached the point where I started getting toned muscles, I hung on the plum tree and started doing pull-ups with one arm. Pull-ups are just about raising and lowering your body with one arm Once Ive done enough repetitions to the point that the muscles in my arm go numb, I then switch to the other. When I repeat this in front of my subordinates, they start coming up to do chin-ups with their arms on the tree as well. One day, I suddenly look around to see all the men are hanging from either the trees or the walls. Youve got to be kidding me Jeez, monkeys. One of the guys bursts out in laughter and falls from the tree. Theres a saying that goes Even Monkeys Fall from Trees 1. When I laughed with him, my arms lost strength and I landed on the ground. When someone does something, people around them follow along. This is human instinct. Staring at the guy who laughed, I say, Those who laugh during training from now on will skip dinner. Yes, sir. I wipe the laugh off my face and resume the monkey chin-ups more fiercely. As I increase the intensity of my training, the minions were also able to catch up to my intensity to some extent. Im not the only one whos growing stronger, the group is as well. After repeating the 3-day routine for 30 days. The days begin to get more and more chilly. My internal Qi still remains in Fighting Fowl in Strolling Golden Turtle Technique and Crescent Moon in Shadow Moon Martial Arts. My physical condition was quickly catching up with my Crazy Demon days. Toned muscles, slimmed down, and now I can also make a powerful attack with external martial arts. My subordinates trained hard, but nonetheless, I was the most vigorous. I have achieved the best record of pull-ups, finger chin-ups, and finger push-ups. No news is good news Just when I felt glad that I havent heard anything from Blood Night Palace, Baekeungji, South Horizon Sect and Nanming Society- I hear the main gate crash open The men rush outside. I also take my hands off the plum tree and go out to the outer courtyard. Someone was limping while being tied up and behind him, people I have never seen before were walking into Black Rabbit Union laughing. As soon as the tied-up man sees me, he says with a bright smile, Big Brother Who is it? His face is severely swollen, so Im unable to recognize him. Its me Brother Gold, Big Brother. What happened to you, Pig? When a man approaches from behind and puts his hand on Geum-haes shoulder, he kneels on the floor. While patting and caressing Geum-haes head, the skinny man with a podao2 hanging from his waist asks, Who is the Low-Down Sect Leader? The men invaded with such confidence and poise; I reply like a scared idiot. its me. I look around at the four people with an absurd expression. Just four? The man, who appeared to be the head of the pack, says as he flaps his fan, Youre young. The man speaks as he looks around Black Rabbit Union. We are the envoys of Namak Green Forest Sect. Envoys of demonic factions normally mean the top masters but in normal factions, envoys are usually just people who boast. I mean I am speechless. Alliance Leader Im, you son of a When I think it over with a confused mind, this is probably the time period before Leader Im conquers Namak Green Forest Sect. I feel like the time is passing strangely since my return. The sudden arrival of the bandit faction, which eventually becomes overthrown by the Alliance. Being invaded by these damned bastards, I was half surprised and half excited. There are times when emotions are mixed half like yin and yang, and this is the case right now. In fact, Namak Green Forest Sect is actually a very powerful faction encompassing one-third of the Hunan province and bandit forces. However, theyre not scary because of the number of masters they have, but rather the unorthodox forces avoid them because of the large number of members they have. This generally applies to bandit and pirate factions. They were the ones being avoided by sects because they were large in numbers. Ah, this is absurd. I approach Geum-hae first, take out the Moonlight Dagger, and release him. The thick rope was cut like a dumpling. I hold Geum-haes face with my left hand and ask, Brother. Yes. Retrieving the Moonlight Dagger I ask, Did you lose some weight? They didnt give you food? Geum-hae replies with a smile. Yes, they didnt give me any. Why did they capture you? Is it because youre chubby? I was transporting Bajian Society funds. Yeah. I didnt know, but I guess I had passed by the mountain path cleaned and managed by Namak Green Forest Sect and it was a certain area where I had to pay tolls. There was nothing when I passed by, but they came to me later Ah This means that while transferring funds, he jaywalked through Namak Green Forest Sect territory. This is a tactic of letting him cross first and demanding him for money later. Namak Green Forest Sect did this over and over which angered Alliance Leader Im, and he ended up exterminating all of them until not even a fly was left. This trick was so cruel that even the unorthodox factions talked a lot about it. I dont know the details because Ive only heard about it. First, I look at the envoys. How much is it? The man replies, Leader, were only asking for a 10 percent share, but this merchant young master wouldnt cooperate. When I asked him, he said these are not funds for the merchant, but for Low-Down Sect, so I had no choice but to come. If hed told us earlier it was Low-Downs money, we wouldnt have come so late. Why does he have to be stubborn he had it coming. Money is so problematic. It was also a problem that Bajian Society was wealthy. Kangho people dont have common sense. In other words, all I can think is that theyre trying to pick on us because of their twisted minds. Geum-hae says with a smile, Big Brother, the toll is one-tenth. So, you should pay them the one-tenth of Bajian Society funds. Hahaha. Perhaps from being beaten up too much, Geum-hae lost half his wits. I nod. One-tenth, thats a lot A lot? The man looks at me and says, Isnt it the money extorted from Bajian Society? But thats too much? Look, this is what happens if you get too greedy. We will report this incident to our leader anyway. If you pay one-tenth this time, Low-Down Sect can use the toll built by us Green Forest Sect however you want. And you still think its expensive? I ignore the mans words and help Geum-hae up on his feet. Get up. Yes. I pat Geum-hae on the shoulder and pass him to Brother White Tiger. Geum-hae walks while limping on one side. White Tiger, Blue Dragon, and White Rooster approach and take care of Geum-hae. Now, four people from Namak Green Forest Sect are looking at me. The subordinates of Black Rabbit Union also watch me with their mouths closed. I sigh while looking at the four bandit faction people. You couldve said it nicely. Why did you hit my brother? So Gun-pyeong approaches with an anxious look and grabs my arm. Please dont get angry, Leader. Lets try to talk it. Whats wrong? Im not angry yet. Ah, yes. As I stand still, and Baek-in approaches this time. Big Brother, lets try to talk it out, Brother Gold Boar came back alive, so rather than killing them right away Shut up for now. Yes. When I stare at the four envoys of Namak Green Forest Sect. Cha Sung-tae approaches carefully. Leader, shouldnt we negotiate first? Negotiate? Yes. Ive never done it before, how do you do it? Oh, I havent either. The expressions of the four men gradually changed while So Gun-pyeong, Baek In, and Cha Sung-tae are trying to stop me with nervous looks. We tilt our heads and look at each others faces. Realizing this must not be progressing as they expect, . I manage to contain my anger and ask the bandits, How many people are in your sect? One of the guys answers, Over a thousand. Thats more than Low-Down Sect? Youre stating the obv Speechless, I shift my body and jab the four with Crescent Moon Finger Technique. Jab! A guy swaying his fan stiffens. Jab! A guy pulling out his sword freezes. Jab! A guy swinging his fist at me pauses. Jab! A guy who was trying to escape stiffens. Their movements stop strangely because of the combination of my finger jab and Crescent Moon Finger Technique. When I pull out Moonlight Dagger from my arms, suddenly So Gun-pyeong, Baek In, and Cha Sung-tae rushes at me. Wahaha, Leader. Wait a minute. Ah, lets talk to them first before killing them. Big Brother, you froze them, whats the rush? Hahaha. Baek In suddenly snatches the Moonlight Dagger in my hand and So Gun-pyeong half-hugs to hold me back. Cha Sung-tae swings my hand and laughs. Hahaha Pushing the three away I say, Jeez, let go. This. So Gun-pyeong hollers at the subordinates. Step on them! Yes! Instantly, the men of Black Rabbit Union flock in and slap, knock down, and begin to step on the frozen guys. I look at the scene and tell the three people who are blocking me. Okay, I get it. Let go. Lets watch. Yes. I extend my hand to Baek In. Give me my dagger. Here it is. I pack my flash dagger and, with my arms crossed, I watch my minions and the bandits and say, Make a mess of their faces. A mess like they did to Brother Gold Boar. The men of the Black Tomb answer in unison. Understood. So Gun-pyeong, Baek-in, and Cha Sung-tae stand next to me and watch the subordinates beat the Green Forest Sect with folded arms. The men were treading excitedly. These guys have been training so harshly, they must be very pent up. They were trampling down so firmly. I finally sweep my chest up and now with my hands. Phew I feel calmer now. Editors Notes This proverb is used in settings where someone acts arrogant or overconfident. Monkeys are considered very adept at climbing trees and so by saying that even monkeys fall from trees- there is implication that even confident masters arent exempt from making mistakes. In a sense, this is said to humble someone (ahem Zaha) LOL. You can read more about Korean proverbs here. ?? For those who want a visual, this is what a podao looks like. ?? Chapter 135 Chapter 135 C There Goes My Plan To Being Murims Public Enemy I look at the kneeling bastards. Their faces are beaten to a pulp like Brother Geum-hae. I squat down and remain silent to fuel the tension. Sure enough, a guy speaks to me in a cautious tone. Do you think you can handle our leader? Is that a threat? Youre not in no place to threaten me. I blow my fingers and flick them on the brow of the guy who threatened me. Flick the guy passes out with a thud. Perhaps sensing they shouldnt open their mouths, the three remain silent. Thanks for paving the road. But its not right to demand a one-tenth share as the toll fee. I will make you pay for kidnapping, beating, and starving my brother. You bandits seem to be mistaken just because youre big in numbers, I can fight the entire Namak Green Forest Sect alone. Are you looking down on us because were the Low Down? Did I come up with the wrong faction name? I shouldve taken out the Low and replace with High. Hasnt it occurred to you that we might be capable if weve exterminated Bajian Society? Why didnt you go take them down if you wanted Bajian Societys funds so bad? Why did they send these morons and make a fuss about the money? Thoughts? Fellow Green Forest Sect gentlemen. . I blow on my fingers again. Ha A guy says, Im sorry. Sorry? Yes. All right. I flick a finger on the forehead of the guy who apologized. The guy lets out a short shriek and faints right away. I look at the next guy. Youre the one who patted my brothers head earlier, right? A relaxed attitude, it was nice to see. I thought you were a reclusive master. But the reclusive master of Kangho is me. I didnt rise to my name, so we looked like morons to you, is that it? Yes. Youre honest. I blow a hot breath on my fingers and give a forehead flick. This time, the kneeling guy falls backward with a bang and faints. Did he faint or die? So Gun-pyeong quickly feels the guys pulse and replies. Hes still breathing. Lucky bastard. He must have trained his forehead. His forehead is split open. Move on. I look at the last guy. . How long did it take you to get here from Namak? It took four days. Really? Then itll take you 4 days get back, another 3-4 days for the Green Forest Sect bastard to wonder why you guys are not back, send over other envoys arriving in another 4 days, that means Ill buy around 12 days of time? . I will show you how we train during these twelve days. We are not people you can extort toll fees or come at us just because were outnumbered. Got it? Yes. I dont think you understand. I fully understand now. Did you bandits flatter your leader a lot? I cant feel the sincerity. You get toll fees from the weak, and hide and watch when famous masters pass by, dont you? Messing with the Low-Down Sect means youre messing with hawkers, bundle peddlers, and workers. I will deal with Namak Green Forest Sect properly so they can never collect tolls from the weak. Bring it on. . I blow a long breathe on my fingers. Haaah While breathing, the Green Forest Sect envoy suddenly foams by mouth and faints in a kneeling position. Watching him I say, it doesnt work, you punk. Fainting like that. All right, Ill give you a forehead flick until your head crack open. The collapsed man jolts awake and replies. Im sorry. These guys have a habit of being sneaky and apologizing later. Wouldnt it be better to stop doing it altogether? Who taught you this? Did the mountain god teach you this or did your leader teach you this? I give him the strongest flick. Smack! I get up and tell my men. Tie them to the plum tree. We will continue training until the Green Forest Sects next visit. Brother Geum-hae, watch over them. Geum-hae answers, Yes. Dont give them food and water. Only give them few sips to those who look like theyre about to pass out. Give them food once every three days. Then starve them. Eat every meal in front of these guys. Look at these guys faces while youre training in martial arts. They are our enemy. Theyre my enemy. Theyre the ones who beat up Brother Geum-hae. They are your enemy. They are bandits who take absurd toll fees from people passing through mountains that belong to no one. Dont show them any mercy from now on. Yes. Drag them and strip them before tying them up. My men drag the fainted ones away, and the officials look at me. I look around at the officials and say, I have no plans. Training is my strategy. Hardcore training as usual. Kangho is all about skills. Lets train. All right. Shall we call for the masters of other branches? No need. If we increase in numbers, we will become as complacent as a bandit. Well just deal with them as it is, so dont call them over. Yes. I say to Baek-in, So Gun-pyeong and Cha Sung-tae specifically. If they suddenly manage to escape while Im training, catch them. They might end up running back to Namaksan Mountain alone. We understand. I trained Strolling Golden Turtle Technique one day, trained in Shadow Moon Martial Arts the next day, and on the third day, I return to the inner courtyard to look at the bandits tied under the plum tree. Goodness, its been a long time, my bandit friends. How have you been? . Who am I talking to? I havent been well. Havent eaten in three days, the bandits were looking at me with skin and bones. I grab the plum tree and look at the bandits while doing pull-ups. Suddenly, the subordinates approach with smiles and proceed to join here and there, hanging and doing pull-ups around the plum tree. I warn the subordinates. Dont smile. Smiling makes you lose strength. Yes. Geum-hae askes me as he brings the table from the back. Im sorry, Big Brother, but can I have a meal here? Oh, sure. Eat comfortably. Thank you. Geum-hae puts down the table in front of the captives, arranges the food brought by the servants on the table, and sits down in a chair. Geum-hae says apologetically, Big Brother, I will join the training after recovering. Before that, Ill eat a lot. Okay. If theres anything you want to eat, ask the maids to make it. If the maids cant make it, buy it from outside. Eat up. Food is what matters. Thank you, brother. Suddenly, I catch a whiff of the food on the table, so I say while doing pull-ups. Damn, it smells delicious. Would you like to join me, Big Brother? No, Ill eat it later. Yes. I keep changing my arms while doing pull=ups along with my subordinates, as I look around, some of my subordinates start doing pull-ups with just one arm like me. Geum-hae starts eating with a chewing sound. Chew, slurp, swallow, sip, crunch Geum-hae always eats a lot and eats deliciously. He probably gained weight because he knew how to eat deliciously. He was eating the food served by the servants very well. Geum-hae grabs the juicy chicken with chopsticks and hands it out to the bandits. Who wants to eat it? First come, first served. Me. Me. . Me too Geum-hae asks me. Can I give it to them, Big Brother? I answer back while doing pull-ups. No way. Roger that Yeah. Seeing the faces of the bandits, I never knew hunger could be this scary. They extort others to live a full life, and now they are shamelessly saying they want to eat. Im speechless. Are these guys eating today? The subordinates reply, Yes. Cancel it and only give them water. What a waste of rice. I understand. Geum-hae says as he is chewing chicken, Big Brother, Ill mobilize some of the troops from the merchant in our face-off with Green Forest Sect. Please give me your permission. Theyll end up wounded, you dont have to. Yes. Lets keep this for ourselves. You must be very angry. Geum-hae answers while looking at the bandits. Yes, if you would allow me, I will slaughter them here and grill them up. Brother, thats not possible. If you eat human flesh, what rumors will circulate about the Low-Down Sect? I made a mistake. If youre upset, you can beat them to death at any time. Ill allow that. Thank you. Theyre to be disposed of anyway. Trash, theres a limit at the bottom, too. We have no choice but to kill those no one want to collect and use. I come down from the plum tree and cool down, staring at the captives. I hear someone talking at the front door. As I stretch while waiting, the men enter the inner courtyard and report. Leader, a messenger from the alliance has arrived. They want to see you. Let them in. Yes. All the men present in the courtyard halts their workout and lay off the plum trees and walls. . Geum-hae wipes his mouth with a handkerchief and stands. Even the captives turn their heads to the door of the courtyard. A young warrior from Murim Alliance greets in a salute, looking around and says, I came to see the Low-Down Sect Leader. My men point at me. There he is. Murim Alliance greets in courtesy once again. Leader, Im Shim Se-gun, a messenger from Flying Swallow Pagoda under the Murim Alliance. I am here because I was asked to deliver this letter. Thank you. Shim Se-gun takes a letter from his arms and hands it out to me. I check the condition of the letter with my eyes and grab it. Shim Se-gun says, Can I explain it here? Go ahead. When Gui Do of Tree Spirit Fortress (who rallied pirates from Changsha, Liuyang, Shandong) joined hands with Namak Green Forest Sect that caused a scandal by infiltrating Jang family merchant, ignored Leader Ims warnings and calls. Leader is sending a letter to friendly forces to inform them of the tyranny of these two forces and requesting for you to participate in the subjugation. If you look at the letter, the tyranny of the two forces is briefly written. The letter is written by him. He emphasized that this is not a coercive request to his allies and friends. I answer simply. Where is the gathering place? The Alliance branch in Mount Heng. Tree Spirit Fortress is in the north and Namak Green Forest Sect in the south creating threats, so Leader Im has departed for Mount Heng. We plan to look at the branch first and decide on the advance. I will see you at Mount Heng, Messenger Shim. Farewell. Shim Se-gun bowed in a fist and palm salute. Thank you, Leader. Ill see you at Mount Heng. I nod and look at Geum-hae. Brother Gold. Yes. Geum-hae pours tea from the kettle he was going to drink and hands it out to Shim Se-gun. Thank you for the hard work, Messenger Shim. Shim Se-gun replies, Ah, thank you. After gulping the tea, Shim Se-gun swayed his hands to me and other subordinates and says, See you again. See you. Shim Se-gun turns around and walks, only then did he find the captives tied up under the plum tree in wretched states, and he asks me in a startled voice. Ah, Leader. These are. Dont mind them. They are Green Forest Sect messengers. Oh, is that so? Why are they here? They ended up like that after trying to extort money from me. Shim Se-gun pauses for a moment and looks closely at the captives. I see, they are bandits. Ill see you again. The bandits speak to the alliance member passing by. Help us. Take me to Murim blind! Shim Se-gun replies as he strides toward the gate. Shut up. We are suffering because of you. I read Leader Ims letter after Shim Se-gun disappears. There was no significant difference from what Shim Se-gun said. I think as I fold the letter. There goes my plan to being Murims Public Enemy I look at the captives with my arms crossed and tilt my head. At this rate, Im going to end up as a chivalrous hero. Jeez, thats a little Chapter 136 Chapter 136 C Weve Infiltrated The Orthodox Faction After only the officials gathered, the doors to the main hall were closed. Call Manager Byuk. Yes. Moments later, while we are waiting for Manager Byuks arrival, Cha Sung-tae asks, Its strange that the Murim Alliance is suddenly asking for our support. Indeed, it is strange. But there is a difference between my suspicions and Cha Sung-taes. Whats weird? As he looks around the officials, Cha Sung-tae says, Even if they dont ask us for help, wouldnt it be easy for them to get rid of Tree Spirit Fortress and Namak Green Forest Sect on their own? Are they trying to pull allies to incur less damage? But thats too modest. Not really. While Cha Sung-tae is asking questions, Manager Byuk sits down. Manager Byuk. Yes, Leader. Please explain to Cha Sung-tae. Why is the Alliance asking for aid from a countryside faction like us? Yes. Manager Byuk says as he looks at the officials, An aid request is inevitable. Why is it inevitable? If you think of them as allies, you can contact and ask them for help no matter what happens. If we help them, we can proudly ask the Alliance for help from now on. What the Alliance wants is the unity of factions. Its a combination of these things. Rather, sect leaders who hadnt received a request for aid might feel unpleasant. As a result, the Alliance will ask as many forces as they can for help seeing as not many factions are joining the Alliance otherwise. Its only when an incident like this occurs that will get them all to interact together. Anyway, the reasons are overflowing. I see, there are a lot of reasons. Manager Byuk asks me, By the way, did Tree Spirit Fortress and Namak Green Forest Sect join hands? As I nod, Manager Byuk continues. If Tree Spirit Fortress and Namak Green Forest Sect rise to power, it seems like they might be able to take down the royal troops, so it is natural for the Alliance Leader to ask for help from as many forces as he can. But the question is, how much are you planning to help the Alliance? I look at Manager Byuk with my arms folded. What kind of life would this old man live without me? Manager Byuk. Yes, my lord. With your resourcefulness, wisdom, insight, and analysis, it feels like Im looking at Jiang Ziya. Manager Byuk eyes me suspiciously. Thats a compliment, right? Did it work? No. Manager Byuk, youve grown in the meantime. Only then did Manager Byuk say with a smile. Thank you. . Thinking that compliments work too well on Manager Byuk, I say to the officials, Good timing, I wasnt planning on letting the Namak Green Forest Sect off. Yes, it is. This is not something the Low-Down Sect can help the Alliance with. Low-Down Sect will not be helping the Alliance. What? Shut up. Yes. Listen carefully. Ill make this simple. We, Low-Down Sect are not helping the Alliance, but the Alliance is now helping me with my personal revenge. Cha Sung-tae blinks. Isnt that the same thing? No, the Low Down will stay here and continue training. I will take personal revenge on Green Forest Sect, who asked for ransom after starving, beating, and making Brother Geum-hae limp. Do you all understand? Cha Sung-tae nods. Understood. In short, you mean youre going to go in alone. I nod solemnly. No, Im going with the Alliance. Im not alone. I have the Alliance by my side. A reliable force. Wow Saying that makes you look grand and cool. So Gun-pyeong, Sung-tae, Brother White Tiger. Yes. Train hard every day Train the same no matter if Im here or not. Next time this happens, at least one of you three can represent the Low Down. Skill is key. Youre doing your best, but still lacking in many areas. I see. And Manager Byuk. Yes. Scratching my cheek I say, Take enough travel expenses, and make sure my outfit doesnt appear like a bumpkins. Low-Down Sect shouldnt look like Beggars Sect at an orthodox faction gathering of masters. I will. Ill leave as soon as Im ready, so as usual, everyone My subordinates rise from their seats and salute. Have a safe trip, Leader. That gave me goosebumps. Other officials also cut me off and say, Have a safe trip, Leader. Increasing Low-Down Sects reputation Ah, is this too much? Anyway, have a safe trip. Please dont go and fight with other sect leaders, Leader. The officials are nagging more and more. Yeah, yeah. So noisy. Cha Sung-tae adds, Leader, you cant kill your allies. Enough. Yes. When I look around, all my subordinates are looking at me like Im a kid going out to the water. Uhm I nod a few times and reassure my men. Its me. Dont worry. Nothings gonna happen to me for beating up the Green Forest Sect and the pirates. Yes. The officials mutter among themselves as they proceed out of the hall. How worrying. Im afraid hell beat up our allies. Shush, I can hear you. I nod as I listen to my subordinates conversation. Nice. This atmosphere A warm atmosphere where you can freely express your opinions. Manager Byuk nods besides him. Thats right. Two hours later, I was sent off by my subordinates and left for the meeting location of the Alliance Mount Heng branch. You have to run intensely while training footwork anyway. As I run with footwork after a long time, I feel a little excited. This is the first time I have trained my footwork since training my Yin and Yang energy. After running non-stop for four hours, I stop on a quiet road for a while. I wonder if its because my footwork was faster than usual. Why did I run so fast? Is it simply because the accumulated Qi by drawing the power of Heavenly Pearl has deepened? I couldnt clearly find out why my footwork suddenly turned so rapid. However, even if I was running more than before, my body was feeling pleasant. Is it because I mastered Shadow Moon Martial Arts? Usually, if I run fiercely for more than four hours, my whole body will heat up as if it were in flames, but now the heat subsides easily even though I didnt use Shadow Moon Martial Arts. Has my body advanced? I take a short break and advance for Mount Heng again. When I returned, I would have never guessed that I would end up helping the Alliance. Come to think of it, when the alliance members become seniors These guys will become the ones who spread the Heaven Net and hunt me down. Goosebumps form on my forearm while I am running. . Thinking about it now, the alliance members I beat to death would be there. Even during my time as Crazy Demon, I had beaten the masters of family clans and the hypocrites of orthodox factions to death, but I have not directly killed an alliance member. However, this couldnt be helped as I escaped the horrendous Heaven Net. If I get caught, Ill die, or Ill be stuck in a prison for decades. It wasnt until rumors spread that I killed the alliance members and ran away That the demonic cult became interested in me. Its thanks to this that I was chased by the cult. Anyway I feel very strange running to the Mount Heng branch. It feels like there is a nameless thorn stuck somewhere in my mind. I also feel a little unpleasant. If I had the ability to escape the Heaven Net of alliance in my past life, I wouldnt be feeling this emotion. Suddenly, ability determines everything. As I was being engulfed in an unknown emotion, I pick up the pace. I am running furiously to help those who ambushed me in my past life. The man who leads me to the main hall announces, The Low-Down Sect Leader is here. The present sect leaders in the main hall turn their heads and look at me. I let out a dry cough and cover my mouth. Several masters of orthodox factions who were beaten by me in my past life were amongst the crowd. This is pricking my conscience. Why is the flow of life so extreme? Even though only the leaders are gathered, there are still so many people that it is chaotic. Normally, I get distracted even when I am alone, but I am flustered to see all the people I had bad blood with in my past life to look at me in unison. Leader Im, who is sitting in the top seat, looks at me. Leader, youve arrived? You came much earlier than expected. Its not an atmosphere for hosting, so please have a seat. I take a deep breath with my arms crossed, sitting in the only empty seat left at the end of the table. Looking around Leader of Mount Heng Sect, Vice Head of Namgoong Family, Vice Head of Seomun Family, and Leader of Diancang Sect first catch my attention. There are many people I know and dont know. While looking around to see who responded to Ims call, I finally find the guy in the opposite corner. ! Pervert Demon is looking at me with his eyes wide open. I flinch for a moment and look at Pervert Demon. Shithead? Leader Im, who was talking, looks at me. Leader, what did you say? Oh, its nothing. As soon as he heard the word shithead, his face turned red. When I think about why this guy is here, he seems to have come to represent the Wind Cloud Mong Clan. Of course, Wind Cloud Mong Clan is also an ally of the alliance. I scratch my forehead for a moment. Pervert Demon mouths the words, Do you want to die? I shake my head and mouth a greeting, You idiot. Two public enemies of Murim in the past is among the supporting forces of the alliance. But not all the allies have arrived yet. The warrior who guided me earlier opens the main hall again and announces, Family Head of Sima Family is here. Then, everyone looks at Leader Ims expression. His expression does not change much. When Sima Hak, the head of the Sima family, appears in the main hall, people stood up. Welcome, Leader. Pervert Demon also stands up and salutes Sima Hak. While remaining seated, Leader Im says to Sima Hak, Family Head, youve arrived. Sima Hak says to Leader Im, Why do you look so disgruntled at the person who came to help you, Leader? Leader Im replies briefly, This is my natural expression. Please have a seat. I stare at Sima Hak. Ive never seen him before. But I know who he is and how he dies. He is a man of great ambition and has caused a lot of trouble in orthodox factions. In short, Sima Hak was a person who sought the alliance leader position. He doesnt hesitate to do illegal things He was caught by Leader Im and dies in a one-to-one duel. In his past life, he challenged Leader Im and was beaten to death. When I looked around, the relationship of my past connections is really complicated here. Wow, the alliance is a hell of a mess. When I think about how I am the only one who knows this, I get goosebumps again. Sima Hak, who is suddenly looking for a place to sit, comes to me and says, Get up, hoobae. I dont have a place to sit. ! I look up at Sima Hak with a startled look. Suddenly, the worried expressions and words of my subordinates flashes through my mind. [Leader, you cant kill your allies.] Im not a fool. Sima Hak tilts his head and says, Hoobae? I stop thinking and then answer, If you dont have a seat, please listen while standing. Leader Im sighs and says to a member. Go inside and get a chair. Yes, my lord. Sima Hak looks at me with half embarrassment and half laughs. Ive never seen you before. Who are you? Before I can answer, Leader Im yells, Sima Hak! Sima Hak looks at Leader Im with an absurd expression. Leader Im says with narrowed brows, If you came to support, then act like an ally. Dont set the mood. Sit there when the chair comes. Stop interrupting the meeting. Are you here to set the mood or to help? In private, Sima Hak is the senior, but Im So-baek is currently speaking as the alliance leader. As Sima Hak remains silent, the member who brings a chair, says carefully, Please sit here, my lord. The member puts Sima Haks chair next to me. Sima Hak, who calms down his expression in an instant, smiles and says, The leader is right. My mistake. Keep the meeting going. I look around the hall with my arms crossed. Suddenly Im a new member of the orthodox. It was interesting that the sick atmosphere I was familiar with was unfolding right in front of my eyes. First of all, I thought that the Alliance Leader was not a difficult position. It would be convenient since it is the most reputable position in Kangho. But if there are more people like Sima Hak then your gray hair will definitely keep growing. Suddenly, I turn my head, and Sima Hak is staring at me. Fuck, that scared me.. When I look straight ahead, this time, Pervert Demon is looking at me. . Ah, this is so messy Chapter 137 Chapter 137 C Shut Up! Commander Gongsun, explain. At Leader Ims words, a woman stands to her feet. The main hall becomes quiet for a moment. As if the woman was the individual they had come to see in the first place, the young men were unable to take their eyes off her. The young gentlemen being Pervert Demon and the vice head of the family clans. Even Pervert Demon, who was staring at me, turned his head on his own and there was no sign of returning. If I were to choose a man as famous as Leader Im in the alliance, it would be Gongsun Shim. Gongsun Shim, who is not present, often acts as an acting leader. And the female commander, who just stood up, is the only disciple and foster daughter of Gongsun Shim- Gongsun Wol. She later gains the nickname Iron Blood Commander. If we go down to Namak to fight Namak Green Forest Sect, Tree Spirit Fortress will attack the Mount Heng branch. And vice versa, if we go north to attack Tree Spirit Fortress first, Namak Green Forest Sect will invade the Mount Heng branch. They have no thoughts to be consistently at the forefront. They want to fight in Namak where they have the advantage. The pirates want to fight on the water and in the raid places were not in control, and then they want to disperse or retreat our troops. This is the obvious tactic Green Forest will use, who always fights a long-term war. All the guys with eyes stare at Gongsun Wol. . The same goes for me. Right now would be Gongsun Wol in her novice days. Before I returned, the few times I saw her there was a knife mark on that young face. The demonic cult had tried several times to kidnap or assassinate her. As a result, shed often draw a sword and competed directly. It felt strange when a woman who was called Iron Blood Commander, had appeared in front of me with an unharmed face in her prime. Everyone has their prime. Gongsun Wol continues, So its natural to disperse the troops. The problem is that if we want to clean up the pirates and bandits, we have to win in Namak, in the waters, and the Mount Heng branch here. Youre not here to hear news about losing those scums and being defeated here and there. I propose to conquer both pirates and bandits on all fronts at the same time. The heads of each group are the major leaders of the alliance. Support forces should not exceed the operations or powers of the major leader. If you cooperate with us, the rest of the detailed operations will be led by the major leaders. Hey, Low-Down Sect Leader, are you sleeping? . As soon as I open my closed eyes, I stare at the young Commander Gongsun. How could that be? Gongsun Wol asks me, Could you repeat what I just said? You said lets win in three places. Dont go against what the major leaders say. In summary, I was getting sleepy because she was going on and on. Gongsun Wol stares at me and goes on. Ill divide the troops into three. North Group and South Group will be in charge of subjugation, and Mount Heng Group will be in charge of defense and support here. Vice Head of Zhuge Family asks, How are you going to divide the troops? Leader Im replies, Those who are comfortable fighting in the mountains will be dispatched to the South Group, those who are familiar with the water will be divided into the North Group, and the rest will be at Mount Heng. I will be at South Group, so whoever wants to follow, stand up. . When the bad-tempered Leader Im says that he will be at South Group, all the heads of the supporting troops remain tight-lipped. I find it interesting to observe people, so I check Sima Haks expression. Sima Hak had a visibly pleasant smile when no one tried to follow him. With a stiff expression, Leader Im stands up and says to Gongsun Wol. Ill leave first. Divide the support forces well to protect the Mount Heng branch and attack Tree Spirit Fortress. Gongsun Wol bows with a perplexed expression. Yes, my lord. Leader Im stands in the main hall and looks back at the masters of orthodox faction. This will be your temporary headquarters. Gongsun Wol will be in charge of detailed operations and commands, dont underestimate her just because shes young. Treat her as a Murim Alliance Commander. All right, Leader. Gongsun Wol says, There is no shortage of troops since Leader will be in South Group. Is there anyone else who wants to join us? If there isnt, I will. I raise my hand. I will join South Group. People stare daggers at me. . I also decide on the future of Pervert Demon. Lord Mong of Wind Cloud Mong Clan also wants to join South Group. Pervert Demon opens his mouth as he looks at me. No I yell at Pervert Demon in a place full of orthodox faction masters. Shut up! The crowd turns grave silent. . Interrupting Pervert Demon, I look at Gongsun Wol. Commander Gongsun. Yes, yes? Didnt you hear that? Me and Lord Mong will be at the south. I see. Gongsun Wol says, Then, the Low-Down Sect Leader and Lord Mong will join the South Group, so you can leave now. The South will be led by the leader himself. In the meantime, I say to Pervert Demon who is looking at Gongsun Wols face one more time, This punk needs to stop. Pervert Demon quickly unleashes his footwork and hurriedly blocks my mouth, and drags me outside. Pervert Demon murmurs, Be quiet, son of a gun. I beg you. . Pervert Demon whispers, Dont talk about shit. Please. I push back Pervert Demons hand. Do well. I know. I grab Pervert Demons shoulder and push him out of the main hall first. Then I look around the masters of the orthodox faction. I wish everyone good luck. With this number of troops, Tree Spirit Fortress will be a dogs nest. As if he didnt like my arrogant way of speaking, Sima Hak replies, The way you talk I stare at Sima Hak. Shut up. You punk! While Sima Hak jumps up and tries to pick a fight, I purposely slam the main hall door shut. Banggg! I turn around and put my hands behind me. What the hell is he talking about. dumbass. From the inside, Gongsun Wol screams, Family Head Sima! Gongsun Wol might have a pretty face, but she has a nasty temper. While Gongsun Wol and Sima Hak are arguing inside, I slowly walk to the place where Leader Im was, looking around Mount Heng. I mumble as I touch my hair. Dang, I really held myself back many times today. Patience seems to be developing slowly like my martial arts. The orthodox forces are hilarious. There is still a commotion in the main hall where Leader Im left. Orthodox factions always have arguments first. That is both an advantage and a disadvantage. Leader Im, who is looking at the darkening sky, turns around and smiles while looking at me and Pervert Demon. Oh, are you two the only ones in South Group? Pervert Demon replies politely, Yes, Leader. Leader Im looks at the main hall with an absurd look for a moment. Well, Im already thankful that you came. Green Forest Sect will have the largest number of troops, will you two be okay? I reply to Leader Im, who looked especially lonely today. Dont worry, Im here. Lets go. Leader Im replies, Ah, did the Low Down bring a lot of troops? My stomach burnt a little, so I reply in an honest tone on purpose. I came alone. I had a fiery eye contact fight with Leader Im for a moment. . The eye contact fight lasted quite long, but I never blinked first. In the end, turning his head first, Im So-baek says, Go ahead Ah, how many did Lord Mong bring? Pervert Demon answers calmly. I also came alone. Im So-baek coughs and says to the waiting troops. Good. Im joined by masters who can beat 100. Lets go. Looking around, those who escorted the Leader were in various costumes. The escorts with same outfits seem to also have troops, and there was also a white-haired veteran. I dont know what combination this is. One man was wearing a very old martial arts attire, and the letter seven () was written on his back. The color of the coat appeared faded due to long exposure, but it was a nice outfit overall. Not only his clothes but his demeanor and facial expressions looked like a master who had been through all the hardships. At last, Im So-baek says to the man. Major Chil. Yes. There are two volunteers on our side. Oh, is that so? A man named Major Chil smiles when he sees me and Pervert Demon. Thank you for your help. Dont mention it. Nice to meet you, Major Chil. Pervert Demon tells Leader Im. By the way, are we really attacking Namak Sect with this number of people? As Pervert Demon says, there were less than a hundred people around. Im So-baek explains the composition of the troops. We didnt deploy a lot on purpose. Seven Swords Squad, the escorts, a few elders, and you guys. Its not a lot, but you dont have to worry because theyve been with me for a long time. I sent more troops elsewhere because I am here. I heard that the band of bandits exceed over a thousand. Were one beat 100, so there wont be a problem. Youre the strongest out of Baekeungjis young masters, dont tell me youre scared? Pervert Demons lip corners raised. No way. Even if you and I go alone, we will be able to kill all the Namak Sect. Im So-baek bursts into laughter. Hahaha. I look at Pervert Demon, the person who softly coaxed Leader Im. you punk, you were Murims Public Enemy in your past life. So was I, of course. Anyway, we went south from Mount Heng to Namak to fight 1,000 bandits.. In the meantime, perhaps because he was worried, Leader Im kept looking back while walking down the path. We stop for a moment and turn around; lights were lighting up by the Mount Heng branch in the dark night sky. Somehow, Leader Im seems lonely. Major Chil says, Nothing bad will happen. My lord, the Mount Heng Sect Leader is there. Im So-baek replies, Who will go up against Gui Do? If he beat White Crane Sect Leader, he must be quite good. Isnt the boastful Leader Sima also there? If Leader Sima remains in the Mount Heng branch. Have faith in the group leader, Leader. Gui Do wont be able to deal with him. I overhear the conversation between Leader Im and his members at the end with Pervert Demon. We share strategies, chats, and comment on the people who came to support. I just found out that Leader Im is the type of person who worries a lot. This time, Leader Im was worried about Commander Gongsun. Everyone was just looking at Gongsun Wols face. Thats right. Theres nothing we can do, right? The alliance members do the same. I picked her because she was smart, not by her face. Im aware, Leader Im. Please understand that we cant help it because theyre men. What can young people do when other sect leaders look at her explicitly? I smile and look at Pervert Demon. It sounded like they were talking about Pervert Demon. No matter how much I think about it, I think that rather than being sent by his family, Pervert Demon volunteered. I didnt come to beat the bandits, but it felt like I came to see the rumored beauty. Im So-baek, who had been talking to his members for a long time, calls out to me and Pervert Demon. Low-Down Sect Leader, Lord Mong. Come forward. We walk past the men and walk alongside Im So-baek in the lead. Pervert Demon asks, Leader, why are we advancing so leisurely? Wouldnt it be better to ride a horse or use footwork? Im So-baek replies, You dont have to go fast because the enemy is already preparing. I see. By the way, you two were together last time, and you two are together again this time. You seem to be close friends. Pervert Demon replies, No were not. Pervert Demon says and eyes me carefully. This is how scary shit is. Im So-baek looks at me as soon as Pervert Demon says were not on good terms. Are you not on good terms? I nod and reply in a solemn tone. Hes an idiot, I have a lot to teach him. I see. While walking quietly for a while, Im So-baek says to Pervert Demon. Is master doing well? Yes. Take care of him. Yes. It wont be easy to break the delusion to use a demonic sword to become stronger. Its something that people like us cant imagine. Pervert Demon looks at Leader Im with a subsided breath. Im So-baek continues, It must be like hell every day. Youll have to help him get out of that hell. You are his disciple, but are you aware that your role is very big? Pervert Demon replies calmly, keeping an eye on the front. Ill keep that in mind. Im So-baek says to his men, me, and Pervert Demon. I only told the people here to some extent about the results of the fight at that time. He put down the demonic sword and stood up to me with a wooden sword Im So-baek smiles while looking at Pervert Demon. Your master is a strong man. Pervert Demon nods. Yes, he is. Because it was a conversation I cant intervene in Whenever my mouth was about to open, I tell myself, Lets just shut up for now. . . . Thats me, the man who asks himself to shut up. Chapter 138 Chapter 138 C Hungry Because I Am Pissed I walked for a long time on the dark path. Walk, run, walk, run all night. I couldnt open my mouth because no one complained. Were moving south at a fairly high speed since were also using footwork. Im So-baek, who confirms the terrain from the front, says, Please explain about the One Sword Formation, Major Chil. Yes. What type of sword formation are they referring to? Without any explanation, Major Chil continues, As Leader Ims adjutant1, Heo San will watch and report on all the actions and surroundings of the lord. A man named Heo San replies, All clear. From now on, Elder Gwan will watch over Low-Down Sect Leader, and Elder Cheon will watch Lord Mong. The two elders respond, Done. Good. Major Chil follows, The target is the headquarters of Namak Green Forest Sect. The sword formation will be maintained until we get to the main quarters. The speed, direction, advance, and retreat of steps are determined by Leader Im. Im So-baek replies briefly, All right. The rest of the team maintains the current formation as it is now and will not chase enemies who are more than 30 steps away. In special situations, act first and report later. Once it is over, rejoin the formation. Then, everyone answers, Understood. Major Chil coughs and re-emphasizes, In summary, the sword tip is Leader Im, and the sword blade are the troops in the center that supports Leader Im. The elders, Low-Down Sect Leader, and Lord Mong will watch the overall situation and provide support as the sword handle. Are all of you in position? Yes, all done. I make brief eye contact with Pervert Demon. Major Chil asks again because neither of us answered. Leader, Lord Mong. Are we all clear? Yes, checked. Yes. Major Chil nods. Alright. Doesnt matter if its 10 or 1000 people in front, our goal is the same. Stab, cut, and pierce with a sword to advance to the main quarters of Namak Green Forest Sect. It was a unique sword formation. The defense and marching steps differ entirely from faction formations in terms of purpose and operation. It would be better to see this as a breakthrough type of sword formation refined through real wars. Looking at the sky, the dark clouds scattered, and now the moonlight is shining down In the meantime, Leader Im increases and decreases his pace as if he was trying to coordinate the examination, and, at some point, he unleashes footwork and halts. Participating in a sword formation is a fascinating experience. This is because I have never joined any formation before. Anyway, everyone seems used to it except for me and Pervert Demon. As we resume walking again until midnight, Leader Im suggests we camp out. The men set up a bonfire in the center of the open space, and those who look like the youngest men clean the floor. It was an absurdly empty camp. A while later, we lay around the bonfires lit in places. Im So-baek says briefly, You have four hours. If you want to sleep, sleep. Yes. I scratch my head once and fall asleep with ease as soon as I close my eyes. Lets go. When I wake up, its dawn. I can see the alliance members putting out the bonfire here and there. Im So-baek, who is walking around while stretching, tells me, Leader, you were sleeping soundly. Its a skill to sleep that well. Right. I nod with drowsy eyes and kick the Pervert Demon who seems to have lost all consciousness. Wake up, the bandits are here. Eek! Pervert Demon springs to his feet with a strange cry. The alliance members, who were getting ready to leave, are startled and look at the Pervert Demon in unison. ! Pervert Demon turns his head here and there. Where? Where are they? The bandits. I reply, Did you have a dream? . Im So-baek says with a smile, Lets go. When Im So-baek takes the lead, the alliance members quickly follow and maintain the formation like a stretched-out sword. Witnessing this scene at dawn, Im So-baek and the Alliance look formidable. While Im yawning, Im So-baek tells his men, We will soon enter near Namak, and we will skip breakfast because there is a possibility that Green Forest may have poisoned ordinary residences, guest inns, and wells. Yes. When we arrive at the bottom of the mountain, we will invade according to my signal, and eat breakfast in the main camp of Namak Sect. Major Chil says. Leader, breakfast is too much. Lets have breakfast and lunch. Yes. Major Chil says, Jong-chan, distribute the beef jerky. Yes, my lord. When he is told to give out beef jerky, a young man approaches me and Pervert Demon and hands us a piece of beef jerky wrapped in paper. Thank you. I walk while chewing beef jerky. When I look around, everyone was chewing beef jerky taken out from their waist or arms. I chew beef jerky and spit it out with a stream of consciousness. This is sweet, somewhat sweet, bittersweet, sweet, yet salty. Sweet and savory. . Saekma, who was looking at his beef jerky next to him, asks me, Should I change it? Its the same thing, so just put it in your mouth. The nearby Elder Cheon approaches Pervert Demon and gives out his beef jerky with a naive expression. Lord Mong, would you like to have this? Taste it. Oh, yes, sir. Thank you for the food. As Pervert Demon chews the beef jerky, I tease him in front of Elder Cheon. Its the same thing. Beef jerky is all the same. Ah! Hahahaha. Suddenly, Elder Gwan and Elder Cheon burst into laughter. It wasnt a big deal, but the two elders were dying of laughter. Pervert Demon trudged with a sullen and complex expression. Major Chil says, Elder, youll wake all the bandits watching nearby. Im sorry. I forgot. This is the perfect place for a watch station. Sure enough, it is a mountain road with cliffs towering on the left and right, so it was a perfect place to raid. However, before that, the sound of horns sounded a little away, as if Namak Green Forest was already watching the alliance approaching. Booooooooo As if extremely familiar with the place, Leader Im explains while moving, Ambushes might take place on the left and right. They might also block us from the front and rear, so be prepared for attack soon. Yes. The morning sun was rising so bright that I wonder if we are really invading the Namak Green Forest. The scenery of the tranquil mountain looks more unrealistic. After a while, as Leader Im walking in the lead stops in his tracks. Green Forest Sect appears in front of the wide mountain path. Green Forest Sect blocks a place that looks to be its entrance The Green Forest Sect, dressed like cavemen with spears, emerge on both sides of the mountain path with a scrubby appearance. I hear a Qi-infused voice from the Green Forest Sects side. Leader Im, what brings you all the way down here? Are you going to surrender to our leader with those humble troops? Im So-baek replies, Is Leader Ya Yul inside? Of course, hes still asleep. If you have any business with him, Ill help you convey the message to him. Its not too late, so tell him to surrender now. The bandits laugh. Youre asking us to surrender when you only brought 100 men? Then, Im So-baek raises a finger on the front line. charge. Even before he could finish the word, Im So-baeks body starts ahead first. The hundred members then sprint after Im So-baek. Dashhhhhhhhh! As soon as the front detect the confusing atmosphere, stones, arrows, and assassination weapons rain on the left and right cliffs. But it is far too delayed in comparison to Leader Ims speed. It didnt even reach the fiercely charging alliance members. Like a lightning strike Before I knew it, suddenly in the air, Im So-baek pulls out his sword, and slashes down his weapon and sends sword energy to a group of 100 bandits. Xinggggggggggg! Following the body, when the sword energy hits the ground, the Green Forest Sect flies in all directions with an explosive sound. An astonishing scene even though Im watching with my own eyes. Subsequently, the escort defending Leader Im rushes as a group, and the Seven Sword Squad led by Major Chil charges with swords drawn. Seven Sword Squad, who is advancing while slicing the Green Forest without killing the enemy, rushes after Leader Im. It is literally a combination of charge, rush, advance, and onslaught to clear the path. Actually, I have nothing to do at the rear. It is my first time playing such a comfortable role as a supporter. Elder Cheon and Elder Kwan, who are on standby from left and right, wave their hands several times and flying weapons deflect into the air. This time, a huge stone that seems as if the moon is about to descend to Earth is shaking on the right, and about a dozen Green Forest people are struggling to push the huge stone. Pervert Demons body shakes briefly, and he shoots up the cliff vertically launching his palm force. When the Green Forest Sect freezes without making a sound, Pervert Demon hits the stone with finger technique and lands on the cliff again. Then, the Green Forest Sect that had been stuck to a huge stone, freezes altogether. But the most impressive of them all was not Pervert Demon, but Elder Cheon. He jumps on the cliff at the same speed as Pervert Demon, catches up with him, and returns together as if blocking Pervert Demons rear. When Pervert Demon and Elder Cheon return and join the formation again, the speed of the charge increases again. As Leader Im said, they were the elite of the alliance. Instantly, Leader Im runs through the mountain path and runs up the hill where the enemies are blocking him. Instead of blocking us, there are more enemies that we pass by leaving them to follow us from behind. Only then did I have something to do, so I often shoot palm force or wield a sword. However, I dont have that many opportunities since the alliance elders are running wild like young people. Im So-baeks calm voice penetrating the front is heard. Stand by. Major Chil repeats, Stand by. As I climb the hill, I see a wide space as if there was a plain in the middle of the mountain, and a mountain range comes into sight. There is a long line of wooden barricades made along the mountain range. There were indeed many bandits. They look like bandits from another world. Their outfit and the color of their attires are extraordinary. Is it because they were made of animal skin? It was as if we traveled back to ancient times. So, it would be impossible to talk it out I have a hunch that the only thing that is going to happen is a massacre. Only then did I think of the Capture and Release Seven Times (߿v) tactic. In order to not kill them all, I feel like the only method would be to capture and release them about 7 times. Based on Im So-baeks personality In his past life, he mustve killing everyone in the alliance no matter if they were injured or killed during the attack in Namak Sect. Thinking it was unnecessary, he might have staged a cruel massacre. I step aside mindlessly and look around. It is too easy to get into the main camp. Leader Im and the alliance are great, but is the Green Forest Sect really this foolish? I wonder. The number of troops surrounding us is increasing. Looking around the faces of the Green Forest bandits, I move alone with my hands behind me and stop. A bandit with gray hair is staring at me. . I sigh while looking at him. Leader Im. Im So-baek, who is facing off from the front, replies, Whats the matter? The demonic cult is among the bandits. Not just the Green Forest Sect. Theyre all the same, so you dont have to worry about it. The alliance members, including myself, look around the siege. Only then did the front door of the wooden barricade split from side to side to have a tall man and a skinny man walk out. As if the Namak Sect Leader is here, he has an argument with Im So-baek. Regardless of if they are arguing or not I wrap Fiery Fragrance around my right hand with a calm expression. Fwhoosh as soon as the sound was heard, Pervert Demon looks at me. What are you doing? I make eye contact with Pervert Demon and raise my left hand with blank eyes. This time, Shadow Moon Martial Arts Waning Moon palm force is wrapped around my left hand. Pervert Demon approaches with a panicked expression Seriously, dont Too late. Pervert Demon yells at the alliance members. D-Duck! In an instant, those around me moved away like waves spreading in a circle. Combining Waning Moon and Fiery Fowl. I think, am I hungry because Im mad, or am I mad because Im hungry? Regardless, I am pissed. Lets kill first. I might die if Im hit by this, so I forcibly combine the red Fiery Fowl and the white Waning Moon with clenched teeth, in the shape of Taegeuk2. Bzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzt! Editors Note An adjutant is a military officer who acts as an administrative assistant to a senior officer. ?? The Taegeuk is a symbol most prominently displayed on the center of South Koreas national flag. The Taegeuk is a Confucian icon symbolizing cosmic balance and represents the constant interaction between the yin and yang (eum/yang in Korean). Rather than taking a black and white color scheme, the Taegeuk symbol is blue and red with a horizontal separator as opposed to vertical. Read more here. ?? Chapter 139 Chapter 139 C Who Am I? All these bastards are going to be killed by Leader Im anyway. With the thought that overpowering them single-handedly with the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon would make them surrender earlier in comparison to their past lives- it was mixed with anger derived from hunger. Ha For the sake of the Low-Down Sect, I almost utter the word aloud. It was an ignorant statement, but I manage to restrain myself. for the Alliance. This is better. The alliance quickly steps back from behind me upon hearing Pervert Demons cry. I shoot palm force fused with Crescent Moon and Fiery Fowl, and quickly haul Light Sky of the Sun and Moon using Great Absorption Technique to where the troops are most clustered. As if I was throwing a heavy sphere. Flying in an arc, Light Sky of the Sun and Moon slows down and comes to a fall. Problem is, the orthodox faction masters among Namak Green Forest Sect have no idea who I am. Do I look like a fool playing ball? The oblivious orthodox faction masters jump into the air toward the small Light Sky of the Sun and Moon in the air and pull out their weapons. The sword strikes twice in lightning. The moment Light Sky of the Sun and Moon is cut in a cross shape Leader Im lets out an indecipherable scream. Leader Ims roar was overthrown by Light Sky of the Sun and Moon. ! All of the alliance members behind me pull out and hold their swords vertically and inject them with energy. The levitating orthodox faction swordsman melts due to the aftermath of Light Sky of the Sun and Moon and dissipates without a trace. Then, as the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon falls on the Green Forest Sect troops on standby. Pervert Demon hollers, Hey, you son of a! I deliberately nullify Light Sky of the Sun and Moons impact with two palms interchangeably to protect the alliance. Booooooooooooooooooom! Wow, shit I attacked but I also have to defend against said attack. Theres no greater bullshit than this. As soon as the shock is deflected, I hear the continuous cracking sound of trees breaking one after another. Distracted for a moment, I look at the sky. . Clouds were passing by peacefully. Todays weather is sunny. Nice. Suddenly, I was anxious about the dead silence around me, so I jolt up and it was actually quiet. Ah, ah. I pinch my nose with my fingers and then blow air through my ears, only then was I able to hear. I could peacefully hear Leader Ims cries and the sound of weapons clashing. He escaped into the woods while holding his throbbing waist. Maybe he couldnt catch me when I flew in the air. I see a scared bandit running in front of me. Gasp! I wave at the bandit. Youre unlucky. For encountering me. As the bandit screams and turns the other direction as soon as he sees me, I pull out Black Hares Tooth and slice the bandits arm. Pzarkk! When I come out, the alliance members were charging as soon as Leader Im laid his order in a bloodbath. At a glance, I could see the bandits running away and the members chasing them. Fighting spirit is crucial on the battlefield. When I arrive at the vast space and look at it, Im So-baek and the leader of Namak Green Forest Sect were having a face-off, and the result was somewhat obvious. In terms of skills, it would not have been strange if Im So-baek alone slaughtered all 1,000 of them. The barricade where Light Sky of the Sun and Moon landed was devastated. I look at the sight of the war with my hand on my hips. After taking a deep breath, I shout with injected Qi while applying strength to my lower core. Kneel, you fuckers! Before I beat you all to death! Instantaneously, three or four people from all places got on their knees. Seeing this, the members killed those who chose to wield their swords. Subsequently, the members of the alliance repeated after me like a group hunt. Kneel down, you punks! The riled-up alliance members were killing the bandits on their knees by hitting their heads with the sword handle. The experienced alliance elders spread out and began the massacre, stopping the retreating bandits. In the meantime, more and more people surrendered as the calm alliance members made the bandits get on their knees. At that moment, the bandits shouted at the same time. Leader! The heads of the fighting men turn to Im So-baek at once. Im So-baek threw Green Forest Sect Leaders head on the ground. The bodies of Namak Sect officials are already lined up around Im So-baek. Im So-baek looks around with bloodshot eyes and says, Green Forest Sect, throw away your weapons and kneel. This is my last warning. . I walk past and hit the bandit on the head. Now, the bandits seem to remember my face but start to run away, stepping on the members feet. Stay still. Stay still! I go to the place where Light Sky of the Sun and Moon burst and look around. What a mess. All the nearby barricades were blown off. A circular pit with a radius of 20 chapters was sacred, and no traces of the bodies around were found. Instead, the farther away from the pit, the more human limbs and bodies scattered. Many bandits are sitting with blank faces. I look around the scene of the massacre with arms crossed. Is this a necessary sacrifice or a meaningless death? In terms of past life No matter how damaged the alliance is, either way, the bandits cannot kill Leader Im. Leader Im chased them and beat them to death. More than a hundred people died immediately in Light Sky of the Sun and Moon before the battle began, and the rest were killed by the alliance member or are currently on their knees. Strangely enough, I look around and find the people who had dealt with Pervert Demon in a frozen state and still breathing. Anyway, this time, I killed the most bandits to save some of them. I cant help but snicker. Hihihi. Im So-baek, who suddenly approaches, asks me, Leader. Im So-baek, who comes close, says in a low voice, Im flustered that so many of them are alive. Hearing Im So-baeks remark, I turn around and examine the situation. Most of the defeated bandits either fled or knelt, but as Leader Im said, the number of alliance troops was relatively smaller. I look at Im So-baek. Now that weve come so far, lets continue to act like a devil. What do you have in mind? Lets lead the unharmed Green Forest Sect troops to the north and infiltrate Tree Spirit Fortress. Use the bandits to beat the pirates, but we still have no choice but to collect those who survived. Im So-baek understood what I meant and nodded. But I cant take them all. Youre right. Leave the injured and those who cant be used as manpower here. Ill stay behind and take control. Lead the rest and the Green Forest Sect to the north. This will be tough. If you want to leave the alliances forces here, at least 20 or 30 people would be needed to control this place, so Id rather just be alone. Im So-baek falls into deep contemplation and replies with his arms crossed. Will you do that? Of course. I make eye contact with Im So-baek. Before that, lets take some food from the bandits. I ate beef jerky all night. Only then did Im So-baeks stiff expression break into a smile. Yes, Im hungry. too When Im So-baek left with the alliance members, only then did Pervert Demon approach. Pervert Demon says, Oi, you almost said for Low-Down Sect but changed it to For the Alliance, right? So what, you punk? He is uselessly sharp. Pervert Demon sighs and says, Can you at least give a warning before using that explosive torrent of energy? Why do you have to use it so urgently every time? What if I got stabbed by a sword while preparing for it? Thats true. Pervert Demon shut his mouth. In the meantime, the alliance was putting captive bandits in the main building of Green Forest Sect. You should follow Leader Im and help him out. What about you? I need to stay and take control of this place. There are too many troops. Thats true. Ice Technique has the upper hand in the water. Help Leader Im well. Dont you feel sorry for him? Why would I feel sorry for him? Look at the gray hair growing because of guys like you. You punk. Shut your crap. Im off. Pervert Demon glanced at me and walked toward Im So-baek. Many of those with injured legs and those who were hit or slashed by the alliance members remained in the main building of the Green Forest Sect. Of course, most of them were injured when the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon exploded. It was already late in the evening when Leader Im, who ate a lot of food from the bandits, led the bandits as a human shield and went down the mountain. I sat in the Green Forest Sect Leaders top seat and looked at the bandits. The alliance members have started to leave. When I start to fall back as I am the only one left in the sect, the bandits become flustered. I touch the tiger skin wrapped around the leaders seat. You bandits sure have the same taste. Why do you like tiger skin so much? I sit slanted at the seat and say to the bandits, Guys, Im the only one left. Now I am your leader. . Those who have nothing to do come forward and kneel down. Those who have work to do, see to it. Or else Ill beat you up. Moments later, all the injured orthodox faction masters of Namak Green Forest Sect gathered and looked at me, kneeling down. I grin and say, If you have imprisoned, starved, and hit the young master of Gold Mountain Guild, come out. I am Low-Down Sect Leader, that pigs Big Brother. Which of you jerks suggested asking me for toll money? . Am I talking to the wall? I get up and look at the bandits. You must be comfortable on your knees. I expect quick-witted people, those pretending to be injured, and those who are saving strength to be here. Smash your head. Lets see who wins. I look at their faces and as soon as I grab a mans head, I throw him by the barricade. The guy whose head flew makes a bang and droops. Turning around, the bandits were smashing their heads. . Who is the one who asked the Low Down for toll money? I will tear him to pieces. Fess up. It was General Hong Ahn-gui. He was killed by Leader Im earlier. You think this is over because hes dead? Whos next in charge? Its Chief Jinryang. He was killed by Leader Im earlier. So? Next. Its not a special order from anyone. Thats how we used to run the Green Forest, so please have mercy. Thats how you extort others, and you want mercy? . I dont like the way you talk. Everyone, stand up. When the guys hitting their heads get up, I whirl Fiery Fowl in my right hand. Fluttering The bandits eyes widen at once. I stare at the bandits with my right hand on the line. You think Im a pushover. Im trying to find the responsible person, but they all died. All right, lets see what happens. I unleash Crescent Moon palm force in the left hand, the same energy used for Light Sky of the Sun and Moon. The moment I combine the two together Three or four bandits point to a man. Chief Deungyang! Is the person responsible. The squealing continues, I know hes not injured. The bandits quickly move away from Chief Deungyang. Chief Deungyang, who is kneeling, glares at me with fierce eyes and says, You maniac. The alliance withdrew and left only one person. I just have to kill you before I run with the money. And youre still gonna stay here like an idiot? I look at Chief Deungyang with my hands behind me after reclaiming Crescent Moon and Fiery Fowl that had been wrapped around my hands. You rat, that one person is me. . I ask the bandits, staring at Chief Deungyang. Who am I? The bandits reply, The leader of Low Down. Thats me. I have an eye-contact battle with Chief Deungyang and fight over authority. Those who will follow Chief Deungyang to attack me can come at me. If you dont want to die all at once, kill Chief Deungyang. The choice is yours. I stare at Chief Deungyang and the bandits with crossed arms. Lets see who dies first. . On a count to three. 1, 2, 3. As soon as the word 3 fell, the bandits behind Chief Deungyang rushed in, grabbed, and began to punch him. Then, those who were usually unkind gathered from all directions and began to kick, step, and thrash Chief Deungyang. This is common in Kangho. I order the bandits with my arms crossed. Kill him. Chapter 140 Chapter 140 C I Tried Hard To Remember. I watched the bandits beat Chief Deung to death from start to finish. Chief Deung is naturally stronger than his subordinates, but he cant stop dozens of punches and kicks. In particular, stronger men caught Chief Deung first, so he was beaten and killed before he could even properly defend himself. I sit back in the leaders chair and scan the bandits carefully. . When I close my mouth, all I can hear are the grasshoppers and birds chirping. A scenic mountain surrounds us. Only then did I look around the main quarters of Namak Sect, surveyed the scenery, and then looked carefully at the bandits again. You have to stare at them to remember their faces, and you have to look carefully to look at their appearance. I look through the bandits without saying a word for a moment and say, What confidence did you have when you were confronting the alliance? A thousand against one hundred, itll work out somehow. Youll win if you fight. Was that what you were thinking? Theres nothing to be afraid of. If you want to talk, feel free to answer. Since Chief Deung is dead, I want to have a chat. After a long silence, one of the men replied. We believed in Yayul, our leader. How can you trust Leader Yayul? The alliance leader came in person. Dont you know Im So-baek? This time another guy replies, The Ghost Valley Leader was also with us in the earlier fight. And? Leader Im broke his sword and he died instantly. It was unexpected. Did Ghost Valley Leader say he could win if he joined forces with your leader? Was it the skinny one? The one that appeared with your leader. Yes. The bandits were really ignorant. How can a man named as the leader of Ghost Valley Sect be the opponent to the leader of the Murim Alliance? It seems knowledge is limited in the mountains. Perhaps the person they feared most was not Im So-baek, but their leader, Yayul. Then, when I made a sphere out of the torrent of energy earlier, the guy who jumped wasnt from Green Forest? Yes, he was from Ghost Valley. Okay, I briefly understand the situation. Anyway, you guys must have had a grudge against the alliance. Thats what we heard. Many orthodox masters have a grudge against the alliance. Maybe because their masters or brothers died in their hands. I nod and tell the bandits. But why are you all so ignorant? Is it because youre stuck in the mountains? You are so ignorant. . Its due to ignorance. Its not about being literate or illiterate. Youre ignorant about life itself. Why is that? If your Leader Yayul was so strong, wouldnt he participate in the orthodox or unorthodox, instead of the Green Forest? A man answers with complicated feelings. Were bandits because were ignorant. Okay. It was a pretty ignorant comment, so I wont kill you. Stand up. Who was it? One man stands up timidly, and he looks ignorant at first sight. Sit down. Ill cut you some slack because you look ignorant. Yes. I sigh, stare at the bandits, and continue. In fact, ignorance and banditry have nothing to do with each other. This is an insult to ignorance. You are lower than ignorance. Not all ignorant men are bandits like you. Your job is to blackmail merchants who cross the hill with knives to extort money, kidnap women, and use numbers as intimidation. This description doesnt fit ignorance since you use a strategy and think it through. Its better to say that youre morons who do stupid things very strategically. I dont know if you understand me. Hey, you. What did I say? The man I pointed out replies, You said were morons who do stupid things very strategically. Thats you. . Then whats ignorance? Ignorance means you have not seen anything, have not heard anything, and have not learned anything properly about a certain topic. Its neither a sin nor a shame. Youre just ignorant. Its ignorant that you didnt know how strong the alliance leader was. Thats a little different from being bandits. . However, no matter how ignorant they are, if they have the right mind, they dont beat up merchants to rob them or beat them to death and bury them somewhere. This is quite different from ignorance. In short, you have no shame. What is shame? Not knowing what it is to feel ashamed. A man with a pretty ugly face replies, Why should we feel ashamed? We just beat up the weak. Isnt it like the alliance killing us? I look at the guy who answered. Do you think Im trying to argue with you? Youre talking back at me now? If I refute with logic, you are the one to refute with a similar case. Its because youre shameless. If you are ignorant and have no shame, you generally do not know how to admit your mistakes. I guess I look like a scholar who went to a private academy and read poems. You funny guy. I was wrong about you. I stand from the top seat. I guess youre eager to die. When the guy who ran his mouth suddenly tries to run away, the big guy next to him grabs his arm. Let go! A man who looks like a bandit underboss grabs the back of a man who was trying to run away and lightly throws him to where I was. I pull out Black Hares Tooth at the struggling man in the air, see blood splatter, and put the dagger back in. Pzarkk the body split in half falls on the floor. The bandits faces turn pale again. I sit down again on the top chair, clicking my tongue. I was mistaken, you punks. By the way, I heard you guys attacked Jang Family Merchants? The alliance has nothing to do with the merchant group. Leader Im was angry and called the orthodox forces to the Hyeongsan branch, and walked all night, chewed on hard beef jerky, and reduced his sleep. Why would they come all the way here to kill you fools when they can enjoy honor and wealth even if they were to just breathe? He didnt come to kill you; it was a march to protect the merchants. Dont try to discuss logic with me, bandits. No sword fight, no logic debates. Do you understand? Yes, we understand. You bully the weak to extort money from them. The strong leader of the alliance is trying to kill you to protect the people weaker than you. Dont get me wrong. Its a very insulting remark. And look at me. . Im different from Leader Im. But Im also different from you guys. Careful with your words is the way to live. Also, does anyone know why Im rambling so much? The big guy who dragged the fleeing guy earlier replies, Could it be you are trying to distinguish between men you should spare or kill? I look at the guy who looked like a bandit underboss with wide eyes. Hey, youre smart. Come here. The man with wide shoulders stands up, approaches and kneels down again. I carefully look at his big face. How old are you? Im 19. Wow. But why do you look way older? Ive been like that since I was born. You must have been a warrior by birth. Yes. Sometimes theres a guy like this. They inherit exceptionally strong bodies from their parents. He looks over 30 at first glance, so it was astonishing when he said he was 19. Whats your name? My name is Jang San. Jang San, what do you think of shame? The big man on his knees answers politely. No one here talks about shame. So, I have no idea. Then Ill let you know. Yes. You are a warrior with superb strength at the age of 19. It is inevitable that you are stuck here for one or two years because of fate. But lets say youve been watching what Green Forest has been doing for a decade. Lets say youre 29 by then. If you are living as a 29-year-old bandit who mindlessly harasses the weak, hits merchants, and steals goods- it is not fate, but because you are a shameless fool. Yes. Or if you trained fiercely in martial arts for 10 years, beat the Green Forest Sect Leader with your hands, took control of this place, and sought ways to live other than banditry- what do you call this? I dont know. Then he deserves to be called a man. A man who sets his own direction in life and seeks a way to live alone and become independent, that is a true man. I talk to Jang San with my brows narrowed. A man like you with great strength, that alone does not make you a man. Is that so? Why? Are you here to be a bandit for 10 years? I wave my hand for Jang San to go back to his place. When I go back to my seat and look at Jang Sans face, it was blushed red. It means he knows how it feels to be ashamed. I got one of them I lean on the top seat, look at the bandits, and speak frankly. You want to kill me, but the feelings are mutual. Know how I feel. I want to beat you to death one by one. That would be easier for me. Jang San answers, I saw earlier that you killed us Green Forest Sect the most. I dont think what you just said lines up. All right, well noted. I killed the most. Your brothers, superiors, subordinates, good bandits, bad bandits I exterminated them into thin air. But I didnt beat 100 people to death. Lets assume that 100 alliance troops went against a thousand of you. You guys cant win anyway. And lets assume that one or two members of the alliance member died in the fight earlier. . I tell the truth of what actually happened in my past life. You 1,000 idiots would all be killed by Leader Im even before sunset today. Thats how powerful Im So-baek is. Hes a man of great responsibility for his members. How many survived after I brutally killed a hundred of you? Jang San replies with a somewhat surprised look. Most of us surrendered. I nod as I look at Jang San. Thats what I intended. Believe it or not I look around the mountain scenery and say bitterly, Namak is not yours. Your lives arent mine. I told Leader Im I will take over for a while, but actually, I dont have the skills or personality to accept any of you. The alliance left, so I dont want to kill anymore. Those of you who want to leave, get up and go down the mountain. Ill spare you, so try to live a different life than now. My patience is wearing thin. Get up before I change my mind. I look at the bandits kneeling by the podium. No one stood, perhaps because they still feared me. You dont believe that I will spare you? Answers came from all places. Yes. I understand, but Im disgusted to see your faces. . Im not talking about external appearance. Your thoughts reflect on your expressions. Its disgusting to read those thoughts every time. Leave, I dont want to see it. Im a guy who goes back and forth on his words, but I keep my promises. If you dont leave now, you wont have a chance. After a while, one or two people stand up, look at me, and bow. I say, waving my hand. Dont become bandits. If Leader Im gets angry, he will attack other bandit factions. With this, bandits rise here and there, gathering in twos and threes, looking around, and quietly disappearing from the Green Forest Sect building. Somehow, there are more left. I tell the rest of them, Sit comfortably. Only then did the bandits who were kneeling, sit on the floor. I bring the bandits close together and speak. Look at me one by one and tell me your name. Ill definitely forget it later, but I try to memorize the bandits names. The bandit on the left looks at me and recites his name. Looking at the bandits, I memorize their names with utmost attention as if I were learning martial arts. When they finished saying their names. Looking at the bandits, I say, Jeon Son, Yuwen Soo, Hoo Woong, Deung Ik, Yeom Yi-rak, Jang San, Yeom Won-gi, Do Dae-sam, Gu Jun, and Gu Pyeong. Are you two brothers? Gu Jun and Gu Pyeong answer at the same time. Yes. Alright. Jong Sa-chan, Guan Woo-chun, Po Chung-ah, Yang Ho, Jang Son-rak, Nam Joo-kyung, Lee Chan, Cho Ga-sung, Wi Gwang. I recite all the names I had memorized. Every time I make a mistake on the way, the bandits correct me. After calling out the names of the bandits, I exhale loudly. I was out of breath even though it was nothing. A guy named Jo Ga-sung asks, How did you memorize all that? Dont be surprised. I forget quickly. I look around at the bandits whose names I called out and say, Anyway youre lucky I didnt kill you. Then I introduce myself to the bandits. Im Low-Down Sect Leader, Lee Zaha. Chapter 141 Chapter 141 C Why Bandits? From experience, its better not to talk after talking a lot. I imprinted the names Low-Down Sect and Lee Zaha in their minds and remained silent. Suddenly, I am reminded of Im So-baek and the Murim Alliance heading to Tree Spirit Fortress. He is a man who lived through a lot. A man who lives hard for others, not for himself. This kind of man is what the world calls a chivalrous hero. Leader Im, who I saw from afar in my past life, was stubborn, blunt, often quarreling with the heads of the unorthodox forces, and a merciless man to the cult. But upon closer inspection Alliance Leader is a sharp man who charges in first, takes the lead in the battle frontline, and examines whether his men are injured. He is also a man who chews on tasteless beef jerky, lies next to a bonfire, and walks around all night with his members. In short, he is a man who doesnt have much to laugh about. Perhaps thats why I could imagine Im So-baeks expression very well, who was currently advancing to Tree Spirit Fortress. A stiffened mouth, and a stoic expression that occasionally looks back at the march. Like in his past life, Tree Spirit Fortress would only be exterminated if many of his men are injured while fighting them. Thats why I hope shithead will greatly help Leader Im with his Ice Technique. If that happens, Leader Im will be grateful Shithead will not become Pervert Demon but will remain as a shithead. My conclusion is that being a shithead is better than being Pervert Demon. The bandits are staring at me so hard that I have no choice but to open my mouth. Ask away if you have any questions, you morons. What kind of organization is the Low Down? I nod and reply, Its an organization that beats and kills people like you. Why us? The merchants with their old mothers waiting for them at home are caught by you while crossing the hill, get robbed, beaten, and sometimes die. You jackasses. Even your question is stupid. Who was that? Stand up. Another ignorant-looking guy stands up. Out of everyone, I happen to remember his name. Sit down, Woo Chun. You ignorant bastard. Yes. I tell Jang San. San. Yes. Bring me some booze. Not the alcohol you guys normally drink, but the alcohol that your Leader Yayul, who left for the other world, enjoyed privately. I understand. Gu Jun, Gu Pyung. Yes, sir. Bring me some side dishes and the storage key. Storage key? There must be a place where Yayul collected his favorite mountain treasures. That key. Gu Jun and Gu Pyung answer as they stand up, Alright, we understand. As the three people leave, Jo Ga-sung asks me, Are you more powerful than Leader Yayul? I look at Jo Ga-sung. Are these bastards childish because they are bandits? Or did they become a bandit because they were childish? Since I was originally as childish as them, I answer without much difficulty. Didnt he die soon after attacking Leader Im? Besides, Ghost Valley Sect Leader joined him too, right? Yes. The outcome wouldve been the same if he competed with me. What if Leader Im and you go against each other? Thats like asking, who wins if a tiger and a bear fight? All right, I cant lose. I sigh and look at Jo Ga-sung and the other bandits. Everyone looks genuinely curious. Their mental age is young despite being people who rob others for a living. How old do you think Leader Im is? He looked over 40. What about me? Early twenties. Qi is accumulated through effort and time. I have to wait longer to compete with Leader Im. Of course, Im at a disadvantage now. Even if Leader Im and I have similar fighting abilities, Leader Im has built over 20 years of Qi compared to me. Who would have the obvious advantage? Leader Im. Thats right. Our Leader Yayul is well over forty, though? Thats because hes a moron. How can an old dog beat a bear? I see. And just because they are both leaders, that doesnt make them the same. Only then did I realize that the bandits were all as mature as Jang San. Soon after, the liquor arrived, so I share the liquor with the bandits. After gulping down our drinks, Jang San asks me, Does that mean the Murim Alliance Leader is the scariest guy in Kangho? Hm I look at Jang Sans face. Hes asking out of curiosity. Although he is 19 years old, if hed only spent his time in Namak, it means he doesnt know much about Kangho. I look at the bandits. Other than Leader Im, there are plenty of scary people. It is troublesome, but I explain after washing alcohol down my throat. You wont encounter them since the world is big, but there is an Alliance Leader in the orthodox faction. You dont need to know, but there are people who call themselves the Three Disasters. Theres also this guy called The Greatest in a province. There is also the Evilest in The World that fights crazy freaks. There are also many powerful people who have no faction. However, if I had to pick the scariest man in Kangho, that would be the leader of Heavenly Demon Cult. Ive heard of the name. Of course you have. Leader Yayul said we shouldnt mention his name carelessly. I nod. But it will be hard for you to see him in person. Do you know why? Why? Because even grown men fear him Have you met him before? I saw his portrait. His height is about two heads taller than Jang San, and his shoulders are wider than Jang San. Maybe its because hes too tall, he hunches. His hair is black and glossy. Its probably because hes a pervert. His voice sounds as uncomfortable as the sound of clashing swords. Should I say talking to him is suffocating? Hes a menace. Not human. You said you saw his wanted poster; how do you know what he sounds like? Shut up, Woo Chun. Sorry. About his face. His eyes bulge forward, and his cheekbones rise high like hills. His chin is square-shaped, and his mouth is big like a catfish. He doesnt feel any emotion when killing people. He normally speaks with a smile and kills with a smile. There are times when you feel intimidated just by looking at peoples faces, thats the case for him. Hes so ugly that hell emerge once in a thousand years. Jang San replies, Does being ugly have anything to do with being scary? Let me correct myself. He looks so bizarre that he might emerge once in a thousand years. Suddenly, cold wind blows, and the bandits gulp their saliva. I take a slow look at the bandits expression. If any of them were a cult member, I would be furious. Nah. Gu Jun came to me and gave me a pile of keys, and Gu Pyeong gave out the fruits he had brought in a large basket as well as dry snacks. As soon as I get drunk, the marching alliance members flash before my eyes. It is uncomfortable to leave these guys alone, and uncomfortable to drink here while the alliance is fighting for their lives. Still, the bandits are childish and honest, so I convey my honest feelings in words. This tastes nasty. Why? I dont know. Is it because Im drinking with ignorant people? At this point, I ask the bandits a question that reaches the peak of childishness. But you know. Yes. If bandits and pirates fight, who do you think will win? . I glance at the bandits while chewing on dry snacks. Who will win if Namak Sect and Tree Spirit Fortress go against each other? I heard Gui Do is pretty good. Your leader is gone, and youre a bunch of fools, so youre no match, right? Well, thats probably the end since you bully people who dont master martial arts. Whats the point? . But the bandits who followed Leader Im are lucky. How so? Think about it. Thanks to me, no alliance members died. In such a situation, bandits joined the alliance to exterminate the Tree Spirit Fortress and made a contribution. Lets say they killed three or four pirates out of bravery. By showing off their bravery, what would happen? Since ancient times, there has been a concept of a defeated general on the battlefield. Whats a defeated general? Its a general who surrenders, you punk. Not a happy general. In any case, if a surrendered general makes a contribution, he will be treated with honor. Even if they were a bandit who killed a few pirates? Of course, they will take a separate entrance exam to the alliance, but there is that much possibility of becoming an alliance member. This is how incredible fate is. How does it feel to become part of the alliance when you were a bandit? I look far away with my chin propped. Lets imagine for a second. I was a bandit and became a Murim Alliance member Ah, did I go too far? This wont do. Jang San asks me while everyone held still with bated breath. What is the Murim entrance exam? You have to take a test to get into Murim Alliance. They will see both physical strength and personality. In the case of ordinary members, they wont test your martial arts skills. Theyll train you anyway. As far as I know, they drag applicants for more than a dozen days, push them to the limit through all sorts of harsh training, and then select successful applicants. This is what I heard; Ive never taken the entrance exam. I thought martial art skills would be mandatory. There must be some who pass with that. For those who enter the special recruitment, its the same. Looking at Jang San quietly, I say, Hey, San. Yes. Since you are 19, if you are lucky enough to enter the alliance, you will be able to work inside for about 30 or 40 years. The alliance pays well. The treatment is good. If you say youre a member, you wont be ignored. Most of the people who belong to the orthodox are brothers, so there is mutual respect. Though they are from different affiliates, they share the same views. Of course, there are some rude people like Sima Hak from Sima Family Clan but there is no need to tell the bandits. I look at Jang San while drinking alcohol from the gourd. Jang San of the alliance. How does it sound? Jang San replies with a smile. Sounds good. Do you like it? Yes. I reply with a straight face. Whats good about that, you bandit jerk? When Jang Sans face turns red, other bandits laugh at the same time. Hahahahaha I laugh along with the bandits and continue. Lets say Jang San enters the alliance. Yes. After enduring years of tiresome training, youve finally entered an elite organization. Lets say you got into a swordsmen faction or battalion. You go around beating up the orthodox. Track down Murims public enemy and exterminate them. You are always set up to settle the dispute between the two factions. You get promoted, get married, and lived a very happy life. I look at the smiling bandits and speak in a different tone. One day, you get attacked by bandits and die. . Jang Sans skills are enough to fend them off, but one arrow strikes his side, and he is stabbed by a knife while fighting. In the newlywed house near the alliance, his newly married bride waits all night. These ignorant bandits look at me with their stiffened faces. . I continue with a nonchalant expression. Leader Im, whose hair has turned white, will receive a report in his office. A man from Seven Sword Squad died during his mission. Then Leader Im will ask. Who is Jang San? He will probably ask even though he knows the answer. His subordinate will answer. He used to be a bandit, but at the recommendation of the Low-Down Sect Leader, he took the entrance exam. I say, nodding my head with a blunt expression like Im So-baek. Oh, that guy. I remember him. He will ask the one who reported it with a blunt face. Who killed him? He was attacked by a bandit. Leader Im will say okay, then send his men off and sit alone for a while. Because he needs time to get his act together. Leader Im receives death reports of his members. He needs time to hang in there so he doesnt go crazy. I dont know if you noticed, but Leader Im did not look at you with bloodshot eyes after killing Leader Yayul but looked at his subordinates. . Were any of the members attacked by the bandits? C kind of look. Staring at the bandits, I continue. Im So-baek is a man on the verge of madness. It is pure luck that you did not die by either my or Leader Ims hands. Heaven has blessed you and given you a chance to live, so stop this goddamn banditry. Do you understand? Yes. I purposely make eye contact with Jang San. Jang San. Yes, sir. You lived as a bandit yesterday and today, but you dont have to do that forever. Look at the world a little more before you bully the weak. There are many ways to live, and ignorance is not a sin. You can learn. I look around at the bandits. Im usually a man who talks back and forth, but Im a man who keeps promises. Trust me and live a different life than yesterday. I take a sip and recite in a calm tone. Youre born as strong and worthy men, why bandits? Chapter 142 Chapter 142 C That Explanation Was Long Since You Dont Get Me. The day after drinking with the bandits- I ride a horse, and the bandits ride in carriages. The carriage contains relics, gold, and silver collected in Green Forest Sect. If I take all of this to Low-Down Sect, it would be embezzlement. I have a lot of funds already, theres no point in taking more. Instead, if we organize this in the Mount Heng branch with General Gongsun Wol, it will be divided fairly among us. The carriage, which was left unattended below Namak Sect, was packed with items and property owned by Leader Yayul. It looked like we were moving with the task of transporting goods. As if were becoming escorting bandits. After assigning a few surviving bandits as guards, we headed from Namak to the Mount Heng branch. Has Leader Im and his men arrived at Tree Spirit Fortress? Nobody knows. Anyway, Leader Im is going to lead the members around like his tail. Im also leading a line of people that have hit rock bottom. Who is living a harder life? The important thing is to take it seriously in any situation, so there was no need to compare. There are quite a few injured bandits, so I dont travel in haste. While moving at a moderate pace, we ate, and as soon as the food brought from the mountains ran out, I sent decent-looking bandits to the village or street markets to buy food. It was then that I witnessed a scene I had never seen before. A bandit who had to go buy food looked nervous. It was as if he was facing a crisis of a lifetime. Is giving them money to buy food something to be terrified about? This is neither a funny nor a sad business, Im just sending them to do an errand at markets normal people frequent. Why are you shaking, you bastard? Are a few punches gonna make you feel better? Wiping the sweat off of their foreheads, the bandits answered as they gulped. No, we will be back soon. I look at the guys going off to run errands and ask, Whats wrong with them? Jang San replies, I dont know. Maybe its because theyve never bought food. Its not a big deal. Its not like you have to fight to buy food. Just give me money. Yes. A while later, as if theyd done something incredible, the bandits returned safely with food. I purposely sit around a quiet place and eat with the bandits. The bandits were eating very well, and while eating deliciously, they did not leave a single grain of rice. This is sudden, but I have forgotten most of the bandits names except for a few guys. The bandits names I remember are among those I dont remember, so I dont specify names on purpose. You should change your clothes on the way. We have plenty of silver in the wagon anyway. If you see a big market that sells clothes, well buy clothes there. Yes. I dont know why you go around flaunting the fact you guys are bandits. Ignorant Woo Chun replies, Whats wrong with our clothes? I think they fit us pretty well. I sighed. Sure. That guy Woo Chuns top and bottom are different. It may be because they stole clothes from different people. If he were to walk around dressed like this, people in the downtown area would automatically avoid him. Watching these bunch of weirdos buying clothes in excitement, I feel a sense of shame. From Namak to Mount Heng. After transforming the bandits into decent human beings, we arrived near Mount Heng at noon on the third day. Before entering the Mount Heng branch, I had already expected the bandits to receive looks of contempt. However, it cant be helped. If you do bad things for a living, you should know to handle the looks of contempt- is what I thought. I arrived at the Mount Heng branch with the bandits. Of course, I didnt bring these guys here to introduce them to the alliance. Even before entering the Mount Heng branch, deflecting most of the members and allies of the Mount Heng branch (who had mistaken us as attacking bandits), we came to a face-off. Looking at General Gongsun Wol, I say, General Gongsun, its me. Low-Down Sect Leader. Everyone is so eager to welcome us. Gongsun Wol replies with a perplexed look. Whats with the bandits behind you? Is it that obvious? Yes. I turn my head and look at the guys who transformed from bandits to bodyguards. How can I explain this in simple words? First of all, I try to bring up Leader Ims name. Have you heard from Leader Im? No. We took care of Namak Sect 2 days ago. There were too many prisoners, so some bandits headed to the Tree Spirit Fortress with Leader Im right away. Quite a number were left behind, so I was watching over them. After destroying the main quarters of Namak Sect, we brought back their stolen goods. In other words, I brought all the loot from Namak Sect. This was a long explanation since were running out of time, but you can understand me perfectly, right? Only then did Gongsun Wols anxious gaze subside and she nodded. Good work to you, Leader. Dont mention it. Where do you want me to move the stolen goods? At this time, the man who stepped out later than General Gongsun interrupts with an annoying voice. Just leave it there for now. Why dont we lock them up and move them on our own? I narrow my brows and look at Sima Hak who interrupted the conversation. When I glare, Sima Hak glares at me. If your gaze is not friendly, the gaze you receive will be the same. Im managing these guys, so theres no need to lock them up. Sima Hak, I warn you, dont tell me what to do. You seem to be quite talented with a great temper, so why didnt you go to Tree Spirit Fortress? Im surprised you proposed to stay. Sima Hak looks at me with a smile. Theres no need to argue on what was discussed and decided. Sima Family Clans people were staring at me in disdain. I wet my lips for a moment. What the hell did I do wrong? Instead of taking the loot back to the Low Down, all I did was ask the bandits who survived to carry their luggage to distribute them to Leader Im and his members who worked hard. I look at the bandits for a moment. There were quite a lot of injured people, and they were scared as they saw the alliance and the family clan masters in front of their eyes. Furthermore, they trusted me and followed me, but the situation took a turn, and everyone was wearing sour expressions. I tell Jang San, Put down all the things youre carrying for now. Stand back to the carriage. Jang San replies, Yes, Leader. As soon as I finished, Sima Hak ordered his family members. Go and make the bandits kneel. Tie them up. The warriors of Sima Clan answer altogether. Yes. I lost my temper before the warriors could take another step. Stop. . I stare at the Sima Clan warriors. They surrendered when I was with Leader Im. And he put me in charge. Tying them up is unnecessary. A middle-aged warrior of Sima Clan replies, How can an unknown master of Low-Down Sect be this disrespectful? The Alliance and orthodox sects are joining forces to wipe out bandits and pirates, it is only right for the alliance to decide how to deal with them after arresting them first. I nod. Thats right. Thats right? The alliance should be the one to decide. You belong to the Sima Clan. Keep your mouth shut. General Gongsun. General Gongsun responds, Please go on, Leader. I guess you have misunderstood. It was strategically necessary for me to stay in Namak and control the situation. As you can see, Im alone. The reason why I brought the stolen goods from Namak is to return the assets to Leader Im and the hard-working alliance members. Otherwise, I would have ordered the bandits and taken it back to Low-Down Sect. Youre the one with the authority here, why are you fueling the dispute between Low-Down Sect and Sima Clan? Can do your job properly? General Gongsuns pale face instantly reddens. Ah, please clarify your attitude a little more. How. Did you bring them here as prisoners? Or did you gather them like what you said? Whatever it may be, I respect your decision. However, if they are prisoners, its right to lock them up. Feeling flustered, I nod. Oh, I see. Then Ill take them back to Low-Down Sect for now. As soon as I finish speaking, Sima Hak bursts into laughter, and the warriors of Sima Clan laugh loudly. Hahahahaha I stand in the center with the bandits amidst the mockery. Sima Hak looks at me and says, Look, Low-Down Sect Leader. Have you seen anyone accept bandits? Do you lack that much talent that you would have to accept them into your sect? What would the unorthodox faction seniors and juniors think of you if word gets out? You might be young, I tried to treat you as a respectable leader, but now Tsk. Is there a reason why bandits cannot be accepted into factions? Sima Hak replies with a delighted expression. Do you really think that makes sense, Leader? I answer with a stern look. Thats me. . Nothing Ive done since Ive stepped foot into Kangho makes sense anyway. Most of the Low-Down is housing the unorthodox, they are about the same in my perspective. Orthodox are the good guys. And if the unorthodox all deserve to die, then I dont agree with the world. That is not what I think. If I can reach an understanding with Leader Im So-baek through a few words, I wont ever reach common ground with a guy like Sima Hak no matter how much we argue. However, Ive already known that the world is like this since my past life. If I was back in my Crazy Demon days, I would have opted to attack rather than try to reason. But my patience has increased and has become more open-minded. I vowed to hold back as much as possible, argue a little more, and confront whatever it is. I say as I looked around the orthodox warriors, I understand that the bandits as prisoners make you uncomfortable. You will know once Leader Im returns, but I killed the most bandits in Namak. I think I killed more than 100, was it? When I look back at Jang San, Jang San replies with a complicated expression. Yes, thats right. This means I have the greatest responsibility because I have committed more murders than any other alliance member. I brought them to surrender, and I also said that I will spare the people who surrender. To keep my promise, I admitted them into the Low Down. Admitting them doesnt mean Im treating them as a prisoner or a slave, Im letting those who want to learn a skill, choose work, and give them a chance to take a path- not live as bandits. I will beat up the inept ones to death with my own hands shall they be judged as inadequate. These guys were bandits up until yesterday. From now on, they belong to the Low-Down, so theres no need to treat them as hostages. Fellow Kangho seniors and juniors. Do you understand me? As expected, Sima Hak steps up. What if I say no? They should be thankful to be our prisoners. They shouldve been slashed in the neck, now you want to introduce them as members of your faction? Do you think this is right, General Gongsun? I cant believe the orthodox allied with such an organization How ridiculous. For a moment, I slap my cheek. Slap! I mutter the curse halfway and swallow it again in my throat. . Still, I close my eyes for a while and open them due to the seething anger. At that moment, I imagine grabbing Sima Hak and tearing him to death, but when I imagine Im So-baeks terrified expression upon hearing the news, I have no choice but to endure it again. My chest heaved as I manage to suppress my temper. I let out a big sigh and stare at Sima Hak. Look here, Leader Sima. Say it. I heard a duel is a good tradition of the orthodox. Why dont we decide through a duel since we dont see eye to eye? General Gongsun will be our witness. Whether we lock them up as prisoners or I take them in, it is a fact that Leader Im and I marched to Namak and won a great victory. So, lets settle this with a good fight. What do you say? I glare at Sima Hak, shooting daggers with my eyes. What are you gonna do, you son of a. With a flustered expression, Sima Hak laughs as he shrugs his shoulders. Are you a remarkable master? I am a family member of the Sima Clan. So? If you are challenging me in a duel, doesnt it mean youre letting me take charge? As Sima Hak laughs, the warriors of Sima Clan join in. I remain silent for a moment. To be honest, I dont know who will win. For hes a man who dares to talk back against Leader Im So-baek. I dont know the exact skills and abilities of Sima Hak. Regardless, my mindset always stays the same. It doesnt matter if I win or lose. More importantly, I have to beat up the people I dont like. If I win, Ill slap them on the cheek. If I lose, Ill still win somehow. Whether its grabbing his hair or biting Sima Haks finger while using Qin Na Technique, I will fight in my own way. Apart from winning and losing- Im a man that beats people up. In fact, Im unaware of the extent of Sima Haks skills, but I dont think I will lose. I purposely look down at Sima Hak and laugh arrogantly. Lets fight. Leader Sima. The middle-aged man who lectured me just now intervenes again. Why are the mannerisms of a young junior so. I shout loudly, spreading my voice throughout Mount Heng with my inner Qi. Shut up! . Staring at the middle-aged warrior, I say, This is between the Family Head and the Sect Leader. Everyone else, stay out of it. Chapter 143 Chapter 143 C I Go First, Here We Go. The moment I yell at the Sima Clan warrior General Gongsun Wol quickly steps in. Please look at me, Leader Sima and Leader Lee. At that moment, everyone looks at Gongsun Wol. Disregarding Gongsun Wols status as a general of the Alliance, she is an attractive and beautiful woman. Even all the bandits look at Gongsun Wol at once. Is this why Im So-baek appointed her as a general? With everyones utmost attention, Gongsun Wol says, A duel is not a death match. If the Low-Down Sect Leader and Sima Clan are both going into this with the intent of bearing grudges against each other after the duel, then theres no need to do this. Do you promise to accept the results after the duel? Sima Hak nods. Thats obvious. I nod too. Of course. Gongsun Wol looks at me. You should bear in mind for the Low Down and Sima Clan to remain in good allies with the orthodox faction after the duel. I answer with a begrudging remark. What kind of power does Low-Down Sect have? Were a faction that welcomes bandits. We cant compare ourselves to the Sima Clan. After I finish, I hand over the horse reins to Jangsan who is waiting. . General Gongsun nods. I will be a witness and report the match and conversation that took place today to the leader. Manager? A man replies among the Mount Heng warriors. General Gongsun. Will you form a circle for the duel? Lets do it. The man tells the Mount Heng warriors as if it was no big deal, Everyone spread out. Yes. The members of Mount Heng scatter and stand in a wide circle. Mount Heng Manager says, All the spectators, please stay behind the warriors who made a circular formation. This is a warning. Intervention during a duel is as severe as an assassination attempt and will be extradited to the alliance. I hope you will not be foolish enough to throw hidden weapons. Their skills are unpredictable, so spread out wider. Yes. In an instant, a truly spacious space is set up. As he walks to the center, Sima Hak asks, Leader, what would you prefer? I also answer as I walk to the center. Im a sect leader that recruits bandits, how could I possibly choose? Do as you please. Sima Hak replies with a smile, Leader, arent you being too petty? How interesting. I say with a smile, too. Being petty is interesting? Pick a side. Is it Sima Clans tradition to throw insults in a roundabout way? I make eye contact with Sima Hak and fake laugh. Hahahaha. Sima Hak says, This might not be a death match, but you still can get seriously hurt, so be careful. Take it easy. How shameful would it be to clench your teeth against a junior that recruits bandits? Other Clan Leaders will laugh at you. When I persistently mention bandits, Sima Haks laughter gradually disappears. Lets do it this way. We will compete with fists first, and if we end up going nowhere well use weapons. Now that weve come this far, should we also use martial arts skills? I wonder what martial arts the Low Down masters. Sure. Standing three jangs1 away from Sima Hak, I tie my hair. Im thirsty. I need a glass of water. Come to think of it, I didnt even get a glass of water. Damn it As I stand still, Sima Hak makes an unexpected suggestion. You can go first. Really? Ive never done this before. Is this right? There are times when I yield to three tactics, but I dont know your skills, so Ill just yield the first offense. Okay, thank you for your consideration. Dont mention it. I yawn and hurriedly block with my left hand, then widen the distance a little. The yawn was a long one. When on earth can I get some good shut-eye? I check Sima Hak over and over again. Then Leader Sima, I will go first. As soon as Sima Hak nods Swirling Fiery Fowl in my right hand, I glance at Sima Hak. . Without exposing its aggressive nature, I inject a moderate amount of Qi into Fiery Fowl. Naturally, the power is somewhat lower than the power that I used to blow off Namak Sects wooden barricade. Sima Hak looks at me with a slightly puzzled expression. What? It may be because I have not yet launched an attack even though I have red extreme Yang energy wrapped around my hand. Literally, I have neither unleashed nor made a preemptive attack. I scratch my head with my left hand and casually look at the bandits. Just in time, the eyes of the bandits were comically big as if they were going to pop. ! Jang San looks at me as if he is about to say something but holds back. His mouth is half open, and he blanks out. Sima Hak asks me, Leader, what are you doing? Oh, Im sorry. Im not feeling well today. Flame on my hand. I smile dryly and gently wrap my left hand with Crescent Moon Ice Technique which is significantly weaker than Waxing Moon Ice Technique. I move my hands around in the shape of Taegeuk like a clown juggling balls left and right. Ready? Now, here I come. Ta-da-da, Ta-da-da, Ta-da-da, boom-cha-cha A reddish energy and frosty energy circled in the air. Only then did Sima Hak say with a stiff expression. No! No my ass, you son of a bitch. I shoot a palm wind of Light Sky of the Sun and Moon swirling with extreme Yin and extreme Yang energy. Light Sky of the Sun and Moon spins violently in the air, creating a terrible sound. Bzzzzzzzzzzzt! Shit! is written all over Sima Haks expression. He quickly stomps his left foot on the ground, shouting as soon as he crosses two hands. The Light Sky of the Sun and Moon collides mid-air with the palm force Sima Hak pours out with all his might. I feel this every time I unleash the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon Light Sky of the Sun and Moon tends to drown out all the surrounding sounds in an instant. I dont know why. I created it, so I have no one to ask. ! Booooooooooooooooooooooom! If the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon were made from the combination of Fiery Fragrance and Crescent Moon Ice Technique, Sima Hak wouldnt be able to withstand it. However, the combination of beginner-level Fiery Fowl and Waxing Moon Ice Technique would be somewhat in Sima Haks league. Maybe not. With an explosion, Sima Hak flies off. A half-moon shape scarred the place where the palm force and the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon clashed. Dust rose like a snowstorm, covering the whole area. As soon as Sima Hak shot into the air, I run at full speed. Sima Hak drew an arc and bounced off. Perhaps he was able to come to his senses by the time he arrived on the ground because he barely landed on the floor as he twisted his body. The whole area is already full of dust due to the impact and aftermath of the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon. As the dust scatters, I appear in front of Sima Hak and purposely stomp my foot in place. Banggggg! Broken fragments and flying dust arise once again. Sima Haks hair was disheveled, his clothes were in tatters. Does Sima Hak have power left? He extends two palms again toward me with a spaced-out expression. I purposely swing both fists, violently hit him six, seven times, and punch Sima Haks abdomen. Punch! He fiercely fights back with palm force and fists five or six times aligning with his power and speed. During this, I land my fist on his chest. Punch! I intentionally didnt use force. I control my strength just so I can hit him more. Sima Hak waves his hands in a struggle while vomiting blood. Wielding Waxing Moon Ice Technique and countering Sima Haks palm forces Punch! I switch to Finger Technique and hit right at Sima Haks Dantian. Stopping, I stare at Sima Hak. Sima Hak was walking backward, and even his pace of stepping backward was slowing down. When the dust that was flaring in all directions slowly subsides, I catch up to Sima Hak and whisper, Leader Sima, want me to spare you? This is a spar, I should save you, right? Sima Hak looks at me with a frantic look. I speak calmly. I think you have some grudges. Should I break your lower abdomen? Sima Hak barely opens his mouth, but his chin keeps quivering due Waxing Moon Ice Technique. Leader What? The winner I look around. Feeble folk were all swept away from the aftermath of the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon. In the meantime, I blow my breath on my fingers. Youre saying the duel isnt over yet, is it? All right, this is a victory flick. I inject my fingers with the brute force resulting from hard training and Wooden Fowl, smashing Sima Haks trembling forehead. Flick! Sima Haks body spins three or four times in the air and rolls to the ground. I stretch out my hands into the air and unfold Great Absorption Technique. I shake off my hands slightly whenever the swirling dust comes near my body. Dust whooshed around me and Sima Hak. By the time the dust was gone, I wipe the grin off my face. When my vision cleared I turn with a stoic expression and scan the orthodox warriors. Woah, this is how an orthodox duel works. If they all let me have the first offense, I can kick most seniors in the ass. How hilarious. Why would you let others have the upper hand? What I look at Sima Hak with my arms folded with a calm expression. Sima Clan warriors come running to the fallen Sima Hak, crying Leader anxiously. I reduced my power, but its actually great that Sima Hak was able to stop my attack. Of course, I also intentionally widened the distance so that he wouldnt get killed. It is right to prevent such an obvious attack if the opponent is a leader of a Murim Clan. Gongsun Wol and other alliance members also approach hurriedly with footwork. Gongsun Wol says with a bewildered look. Leader, dont tell me. I stare at General Gongsun. Leader Sima is alive and well. A duel is a duel. All eyes were on Sima Hak. Sima Hak, who plodded back down when his men tried to help him up, began circulating Qi with his eyes closed. Even during the circulation, his entire body was shaking due to Crescent Moon Ice Technique. Gongsun Wol sighs and tells me. Leader, did you have to. Save it, General. My opponent is a clan leader. Besides, weve never had a fight. Its only natural and right to fight with our all. This is how the game turned out, but no one here can fight poorly against Leader Sima. Am I wrong? Gongsun Wol swallows and answers. Thats right. Looking at the Sima Clan, I say, I admit that I got riled up during the spar. I managed to save Leader Sima by holding to my wits. Consider him lucky. I purposely look at the bandits while saying lucky. Youre lucky, you assholes. The bandits were all looking at me with colorful expressions. In particular, the ignorant Woo Chun held both hands as soon as he made eye contact with me. You won! Was his expression. The bandits didnt say anything, but I say something to them. It was just luck. Luck my ass. This is my skill. Im a man who holds grudges, so I purposely beckoned the bandits. Everyone, come here. The bandits come running and stop. I speak to the bandits of Namak Sect in a solemn tone. Be courteous to the martial warriors of the orthodox faction. Though I did say you belong to Low-Down Sect, I cant force you to stay. Since many orthodox seniors and juniors gave permission, you can live a new life, so be truly polite. The bandits voice their thank yous. The bandits words continue to trigger Sima Hak, who was focused on Qi Circulation. I interrupt the bandits. Shut up. Yes, sir. I sigh and look up at the sky with my hands on my back. Jeez, its not easy to turn over a new leaf and start anew. It was not for the bandits, but rather for myself. Anyway, I slap myself very lightly and order Jang San. Jang San. Yes, Leader Take a small box of silver ingots from the loot and hand it over to Sima Clan. It will serve as a treatment fee. Understood. Im such a generous man. Come to think of it, it was the bandits money after all. At this time, several Sima Clan people shout at the same time. Clan Leader! Suddenly, I am startled. An angry-looking Sima Hak was staring at me with his eyes open, but he didnt open his mouth. In other words, he was trembling. Wow, this means he has severe internal injuries. I speak to Sima Hak with my brows narrowed. Leader Sima. Calm down. Of course, you will get Qi Deviation. It was a good match. At that moment, Sima Hak spat dark red blood with the sound. I know because Ive experienced Qi Deviation several times. But at this point, he would have to stick to doing Qi Circulation for at least 10 years to recover from this injury. I whisper to Jang San next to me. What does this make me? Im sorry, because of us. This is all because of you bandits. Do well from now on. Got it? Yes. They are bandits that were never in my life Ugh. I sweep the dust off my clothes like a man and turn around. The flying dust will enter Sima Haks nostrils (who is currently busy circulating Qi). Im such a bad guy. Oh jeez, seriously. Im shaking my head. Editors Notes Jang is a traditional Korean unit of measurement. One jang is equivalent to approximately 9 feet. (Information courtesy of our TL!) ?? Chapter 144 Chapter 144 C Alliance Leader Im So-baek Returning from the sweep of the Tree Spirit Fortress in victory, Im So-baek sat in his office room, put his feet on the desk, and gently closed his eyes. He closed his eyes but couldnt fall asleep. The march took a long time, and there were frequent fights. He could neither eat properly nor sleep comfortably, and he was on constant high alert throughout the war between the bandits and the pirates. Of course, he couldnt fall asleep even after closing his eyes. So, he concluded that his body is exhausted, but the adrenaline still hadnt died down. Whenever he pressed the upper part of his chest with his hand, he could feel a delayed dull sting. It was the same when he pressed his temples If this is how he feels physically, his men wouldve been in worse shape, he thought. I should rest for a while. Me and the men If he were to rest, it would only result in him receiving late reports from his men. However, as soon as Im So-baek decided, he heard footsteps outside and lowered his feet from the table. Moments later, a guard reports. My lord, General Gongsun Wol has returned. Im So-baek answers with his eyes open. Let her in. Yes. Gongsun Wol, who returned from the Mount Heng branch, comes in and salutes. Congratulations on your great victory, Leader. Have a seat. Im So-baek, turning his head to relieve his stiff shoulders, looks at Gongsun Wol. Gongsun Wol says, I came to see you because I have something to report on. Im sorry you must be tired. Thats okay. Im So-baek pours the tea on the desk himself and holds out the teacup to Gongsun Wol. As she takes the teacup with both hands, Gongsun Wol says, Thank you. Seeing how tired the leader looks, Gongsun Wol gets straight to the point. Low-Down Sect Leader Lee Zaha and Family Head Sima Hak held an official duel. Glancing down at the black tea on his teacup, Im So-baek calmly replies, Why are they suddenly fighting? Did they argue during the meeting? Gongsun Wol takes a sip of tea and carefully puts down the teacup because it tastes surprisingly bitter. Low-Down Sect Leader arrived at the Mount Heng branch with all the loot possessed by Namak Sect, and the people who carried them were bandits. Then? An argument broke out when Family Head Sama tried to lock up the bandits. Low-Down Sect Leader suddenly said not to lock them up because they belong to the Low Down. As he refilled tea water back into his teacup, Im So-baek replies, Do you want more? Ill pass. So, thats the reason why they fought? Yes. Im So-baek shoots down the tea water and replies, Its no problem for a leader to recruit members. But does it have to be specifically those a part of the Green Forest Sect of Namak? This must be how Sima Hak picked the fight. Yes. What did the Low-Down Sect Leader say? He said he killed the most bandits so he has the most say about this. He was the one who encouraged them to surrender and promised to spare them. When Sima Hak continued to outright ridicule him, Low-Down Sect Leader proposed a duel. General Gongsun, why did the Sect Leader suddenly propose a duel? Gongsun Wol thought for a moment and replied. It seems he was sure that Family Head would accept the challenge. They have been on bad terms since the meeting. I guess so. What was the result? Thats been a bit of a problem. I was in a bit of trouble because Sima Hak protested and argued about this and that after the duel ended. Did Low-Down Sect Leader fight meanly? Shall I tell you the truth? Dont make up stories. With a focused look, Gongsun Wol says, Yes, Sima Hak even let him have the first offense. That can happen since hes a senior. Moreover, hes way older. Yes, but when Low-Down Sect Leader thanked him, he. Gongsun Wol raised her right hand like she was grabbing a ball. A bright red energy wrapped around his palm. Im So-baek looks at Gongsun Wol with a startled expression. What? Why are you so surprised? No, keep talking. Gongsun Wol nods and explains, Then white energy flared in his left hand. This is where the problem comes. He had energy in both hands, but he didnt make an attack. Since he said he would make the first attack, Sima Hak had no choice but to wait. I suppose. But then, Low-Down Sect Leader moved his hand like this and like hes making fun of him on purpose. Are you sure? Gong sun Wol twirled her hands in the air. Yeah, moving as if hes in a ballgame, muttering, ta-da-da, ta-da-da, boom-cha-cha. Alliance Leader Im So-baek blinked. Boom-cha-cha? Yes. Then suddenly, he combined the energies like Taegeuk and threw the ball. In conclusion, ta-da-da and boom-cha-cha were very high levels of psychological warfare. The vibe was, its a casual attack, why dont you try blocking it? Im So-baek couldnt intervene since Gongsun Wol was so serious. . All of a sudden, a thundering sound rumbled in the air, and I could see dust rising from all directions and I could see Family Head Sima Hak in the air for a second. As the dust disappeared, Sima Hak was unconscious. When he came to his senses, he vomited blood during Qi circulation. It seems to me he vomited blood due to Low-Down Sect Leaders constant mockery. Im So-baek sighs. Hes a little eccentric. He has both stubborn and sloppy sides to him. Low-Down Sect Leader killed more than 100 bandits in Namak with that torrent of energy. Im amazed Sima Hak didnt die. Ah Did he reduce the power? Im not sure about that. Im So-baek nods. At first the bandits were confident, but when 100 people were exterminated, they were dispirited. It was also the starting point for the great victory in the conquest match. But what did Sima Hak complain to you about? He let him have the first attack, but it wasnt fair to attack like that. Really? Im So-baek nods and says to Gongsun Wol, Thats ridiculous. What did the Sima Clan even contribute to this alliance? They had an argument with the Low-Down Sect Leader, fought him once, and retreated. All they did was eat away in Mount Heng. Tell Sima Clan this right after your report. Please go ahead. Im So-baek says, If you acquired a wretched defeat against your junior, its best to exterminate your clan. How dare you pester the general about this. Gongsun Wol was lost in thought for a while and answers honestly. Leader, the Sima Clan is in grief right now. Our relationship with the clan will be severed if I deliver your message as it is. Why dont we let it slide? Of course, I will convey that the leader is displeased. Is Sima Hak severely hurt? Yes. his family members carried him and left after he vomited blood. According to the Mount Heng branch manager, hes lucky to be alive. The branch manager of Mount Heng determined Sima Clan will have to select a new head in one to two years. Im So-baek nods. How unfortunate. Well, if thats the case, lower the harshness and deliver it. Theyre already grieving, then I shouldnt add salt to the wound. Yes, Leader. Just in case, send a smart fellow nearby Sima Clan to watch for about 20 days. They might go into conflict with Low-Down Sect. I understand. Is there anything else? Three wagons. Low-Down Sect Leader delivered the treasures and wealth of the Green Forest Sect brought by bandits carrying a bindle each. He said hed like to deliver it to the leader and the members who worked hard It was so sudden that I only received half of it and returned the rest to the Sect Leader. It should have gone through you first, but I was the only person in charge. Half you dealt with it well. We didnt wipe out the pirates and bandits to extort their assets. Yes. Instead, convert the assets to silver ingots and distribute them accordingly to the members who worked hard in the conquest. Especially to those who contributed so that the orthodox forces were able to return safely. Deliver it well to Lord Mong Yeon of Wind Cloud Mong Clan. He was sent alone from Mong Clan but contributed largely in Tree Spirit Fortress. He was hiding his skills. Everyone is grateful because there were quite a few alliance members that were saved by Lord Mong. I will arrange it accordingly. Distribute all of them so no unnecessary assets are piled up in the alliance. Ill follow your orders. Low-Down Sect has more mouths to feed, so it wont be a problem if he takes half of the assets to take care of all of them. In terms of contribution, he has the greatest merit in Namak. Dont bother to reveal the added finances to anyone so that the other forces dont cause problems for them. Yes. It hasnt been long since he decided to rest, but Im So-baek gives an additional order. See if there are any other forces supporting the pirates and bandits in General Society(܊). Especially the quarters of Ghost Valley. Investigate the unorthodox forces that joined Tree Spirit Fortress. Quite a number of scums joined in this time. The leaders in the conquest will be looking into the specifics. Yes, understood. Problem is, Im suspecting it was the Great Sage Sect who instigated this orthodox faction. We wont engage in an all-out war for the time being but keep an eye on the situation. The orthodox forces involvement with the Tree Spirit Fortress was abrupt. Anything else? No, thats it. Gongsun Wol smacks her lips and looks at the teacup. By the way, sir, why is the tea so bitter? Im So-baek replies with an expression that he had forgotten. Ah, this is the medicine I take. Sorry? I have some depressive anger, so Im drinking the prescription. If your master retires soon, you will face this soon too, so drink this in advance. Gongsun Wol replies with a thin smile. I dont have this illness though? Im So-baek replies, clicking his tongue. General Gongsun, do Kangho affairs seem that easy to you? There are more people like Sima Hak in Kangho. This is why your masters hair is turning gray. Take a look. General Gongsun rises from her seat and salutes. Then Ill take my leave. Sit down. Yes. Im So-baek points to the teacup with his finger. Drink it up and go. After her nostrils flare, Gongsun Wol grabs the teacup and pours the medicine into her mouth. Dry coughing, Gongsun Wol salutes. Have a good rest. Im So-baek waves his hand once and becomes alone again He takes a deep breath and breathes out again. Im So-baek puts his feet on the desk again, leans back on the chair, and tries not to immerse himself in unnecessary thoughts. Sometimes, there are days like this. There were days when he couldnt sleep all night due to his racing thoughts, and today seems like one of those days. At times like this, you have to control your mind closely. Clear your mind. Erase your thoughts. As he comes to mind from his sudden simplified head, Im So-baek mutters, Ta-da-da, ta-da-da, boom-cha-cha, boom-cha-cha Im So-baek closes his mouth with a stoic expression. Afraid the guard outside overheard him muttering strange words, he stares at the door and coughs. Ahem The escort outside asks, Leader, did you call for me? No, its fine. All right. Im So-baek thinks briefly and asks the subordinates outside. Who are the senior officials who did not participate in the conquest this time and stayed in the alliance comfortably? Except for administrative and executive officials, General Society Leader, Secret Pavilion Leader, leaders from Two Sword Squad, and the Cheonggyo Head. Also, Leader of the Elder Association. Im So-baek is lost in thought and replies, Tell them to have a drink with me tonight. All right, shall I collect everyone together? Im So-baek shakes his head. It sounds weird to say collect. Tell them to gather. And dont tell the elders from the Elder Association. Come to think of it, itll get tiring if theyre drunk. Ill leave them out and just deliver the news. After a while, Alliance Leader Im So-baek falls asleep. . . . Im So-baek, who had been asleep for an hour, quietly opens his eyes. His eyes are bloodshot. Im So-baeks eyes are red because he is a man who never forgets the past. Im So-baek, who met the subordinates of the marching forces in his dream, where he used to be the team leader, pours dark-colored tea into the teacup with an expressionless face. Im So-baek, the leader of Murim Alliance, stares at the dark-colored tea for a long time. Chapter 145 Chapter 145 C The Connection Of Murims Public Enemies After the bandits enter Black Rabbit Union, the forces are divided with the original hooligans being in the First Squadron and the bandits being in the Second Squadron. Naturally, So Gun-pyeong will be in charge of leading the Second Squadron to the First Squadron. So Gun-pyeong has somehow become the monkey trainer of Kangho. . . . I laid a mat under the plum tree and took a nap when, suddenly, I woke up to a groan. I speak in a languid tone. Who moaned? Which bastard disturbed my beauty sleep? I apologize, sir. You cant even do a hundred push-ups, but you want to learn martial arts? I was too lazy to get up, so I turn to the side and look ahead. As I was looking at him in a lying position, my eyes meet the bandits who are smashing their heads to the ground. Head on the ground, hands on the waist. The bandits are now in excellent head-smashing positions. I hear So Gun-pyeongs voice nearby. Stand up. When the bandits scramble to their feet, the bandits faces disappear from my sight. I close my eyes again and So Gun-pyeong voice resonates. You dont want to work at the inn. Not the blacksmith. Not the Architectural Sect. You just hate work, dont you? Thats fine. But I wont accept you making a fool out of Black Rabbit Union. I look funny to you since the leader took you in, right? You scumbags who ambush and rob people in the mountains? No, its not! Is it because youre thieving bastards? Is this all youre able to yell? Smash your head. I beckon So Gun-pyeongs words. Hes right, youre doing great. Smash your heads. Once again, thumping sounds echo, and the bandits stomp their heads on the ground. So Gun-pyeong says, Leader is sleeping next to you. See if you dare to wake the Leader up with your groans. Youll be hitting your head all night. I answer in my sleep. Yes, let me get some sleep. No one asked why I had to sleep here of all places. In fact, strangely, I easily fell asleep as I watched my men get tormented in training. Sometimes I woke up to someone screaming, but those were the times when it was fun to watch, so I would open my eyes and watch them train. As I look at them with drowsy eyes, I watch the faces of Jang San, ignorant Gwa Woo-chun, Jo Ga-sung, Goo Jun, and Gu-pyeong brothers, who are hitting their heads on the floor. The reason why they are smashing their heads is because they said that they would remain in Kangho. I ask the bandits the question that I ask them every time. Hey, you guys who dont want to hit your head, fuck off to Ilyang. Go dig some dirt. Dont stir up a fuss here. Jang San replies in a sullen tone. No, sir. So Gun-pyeong isnt in charge because hes free. You punks take up someone elses time and dont even know how to be grateful. So Gun-pyeong. Yes, Leader. Train them harder. Kick the wacky ones to Ilyang. I understand. If any member of the Low-Down causes trouble in Ilyang, the sacred place of the Low-Down Sect, I will be sentenced to immediate death. Take note. More than 30 people remained in Black Rabbit Union. The rest of the bandits were sent to Dragon Head Smithy and Architectural Sect on the first day of returning to Black Rabbit Union. Those who said they would stay in Kangho even if they died are now smashing their heads. In short, So Gun-pyeong is controlling the military spirit. When I revealed they would join the Black Rabbit Union on the first day, the spirit seemed to be lacking. First of all, So Gun-pyeong is not an easy opponent. Hold up a leg. Whoever puts down his leg will be beaten like yesterday. Ill give you another chance. Those who want to work can get up and leave the courtyard. Know your place and live a normal life. What kind of wise life do you think you rotten bandits can live? You should know your place. No? I lie down with one hand on the back of my head and say to So Gun-pyeong. Chief So. Yes, Leader. I fought with the Alliance this time, and I experienced a lot of new things. We first invaded to Namak Sect in a One Sword Formation. Yes. And the commander was Alliance Leader. So Gun-pyeongs eyes widen. Wow, really? The rest of us formed a sword formation in the form of a breakthrough and followed Leader Im. I was at the rear. Whats interesting, however, was that the guards, swordsmen, and elders, found their positions naturally without any explanation, and advanced fiercely. Perhaps Leader Im ordered them to advance until Namak Sect Leaders neck no matter what. It was very impressive that they could charge as one, from elders to the youngest swordsman. How long does that kind of training take? So Gun-pyeong replies, It is an incredible sword formation. And Leader Im is a great commander. Theres truly no man like him. Seeing the alliance members fighting in Namak, it made me think that Nanming Society under us would be no match at all. Personally, I think Nanming Society is the strongest among our affiliates. So Gun-pyeong replies, What about Black Rabbit Union? I contemplate for a moment and answer honestly. Nanming Society is the strongest. The rest is meaningless. Similar to Black Hurricane Castle. Suddenly, I lie down to watch the First Squadron monkeys of Black Rabbit Union. Still, the monkeys must be hanging somewhere, doing monkey chin-ups. Now that all drowsiness is gone, I sit against the plum tree and look at the bandits ramming their heads. Our bandit friends, are you sure youre comfortable training and dying in Kangho? Its way better to stay in the Low Down as working people. To survive in Kangho, you must at least train like Black Rabbit Union warriors. Every day. The bandits answer at the same time. Yes, Leader. So Gun-pyeong says to the bandits, Thieving bastards, stand up. With clambering noises, the bandits stand up and watch So Gun-pyeong. So Gun-pyeong says, 32 people. I shall accept you as Black Rabbit Union Second Squadron monkeys. All the First Squadron monkeys are your seniors. Jang San. Jang San replies, Yes, Chief So. If youre confident, pick someone from the first squad and fight. No, sir. Yesterday, Jang San challenged a seemingly easy subordinate of the Black Rabbit Union but was brutally beaten and fainted. Jang San may win in terms of natural strength, but he cant beat the monkeys that lead a tough life in Black Rabbit Union. I say to the bandits, Now that youve mentally prepared yourself and entered Black Rabbit Union, if I ever hear about you guys confronting the First Squadron monkeys or rebelling against Chief So, who will supervise the training, I will kindly send you to accompany the deceased Namak Sect Leader. Understood? Yes, Leader. I call out to Cha Sung-tae who is walking out of the main hall. Manager Cha, tell Manager Byuk to manage these 32 people in Black Rabbit Union. Yes. Also, send those outside the courtyard to the Architectural Sect. Report back if anyone shows even the slightest dislike towards Yeon Ja-seong. These are the people for who I had to put up a fight with Leader Sima for. Its an insult to me. Inform them I will beat them up if they dont do their job properly. Of course. We will hire well-adjusted and hard-working people and make them the inn manager or pavilion manager in the future. Before that, shouldnt I also figure out who is hardworking and who is sly? Thats right. So, I will send them as helpers for now. Remember to explain this to Yeon Ja-seong. Yes. By the way, I slept too much since returning. I dont feel sleepy anymore. If I stay up all night again to do Qi Circulation, my body clock will naturally get messed up again. In the midst of the last yawn of the day, So Gun-pyeong and the men direct their eyes toward the wall opposite me all at once. A young man with wet, oily hair suddenly appears on the wall and is looking around Black Rabbit Union. So Gun-pyeong yells, Who are you? All the subordinates who were doing monkey chin-ups jump off and stare at the wall. At this time, propped up on the wall, the intruder smiles wickedly and looks at me. Are you the Low-Down Sect Leader? As soon as I see his expression, outfit, and atmosphere, I frown and say to my subordinates. Hes a guest, dont mind him. So Gun-pyeong replies, What? Go in and have dinner. Dont mind us. As soon as I finish my sentence, the guy on the wall giggles. I think to myself. Crazy bastard, did he smell the money? I was confused due to his young appearance, but the guy on the wall is probably the youngest of the Gold Silver Seven Insects (y߳). The Gold-Silver Seven Insects isnt that great of a nickname. It just means seven bugs. If Chil Chung is here means Il Chung (һ) is nearby. In summary, they are money-hungry pests. Problem is, these Gold Silver Seven Insects, named by the servants, are orthodox masters and later become included in the Wanted List alongside me. The method of determining the ranking depends on the bounty price offered by the Alliance. Naturally, the higher the reward, the higher the ranking. The owner of those bugs was a serious attention seeker, so the higher my public ranking, the more they regarded me as competition and caused more ruckus. Whether its then or now, Im also an attention seeker. In short, I can conclude that the sudden appearance of the orthodoxs Seven Insects is as follows: Pests are showing up now that Im good at earning money. Perhaps the rumor that the Low-Down Sect Leader makes quite the dime spread in the orthodox sphere. While So Gun-pyeong was taking the bandits and subordinates in, I ask Chil Chung sitting on the wall. Whats your business? When Chil Chung grinned, I could see sparsely missing teeth. I heard that Leader is famous these days. Crazy fucker. If I kill Chil Chung, of course, Yook Chung () would come out. If you kill Yook Chung, the next bug appears. I know their faces because all seven of them have died in my hands. I got lost in thought as I looked at Chil Chung. Is there a difference between controllable and uncontrollable fate? Killing more than a hundred bandits was a fate that had not existed in my previous life. I knew that the karma Im So-baek shouldve bore was brought upon me and the consequent aftermath or incident would soon follow, but I didnt expect those that I killed in my previous lives to appear so soon. Chil Chung says, Master Yukhap said he wants to have a talk with you. If you could make time today or tomorrow evening, Master Yukhap will visit in person, Low-Down Sect Leader. Tell him to come tomorrow evening. Thank you. Chil Chung disappeared from the wall. Similarly, the sound of rats running from the roof sounded outside and was moving away from Black Rabbit Union with other bugs. So Gun-pyeong sticks out his head from the main hall and asks, Is Master Yukhap coming? Are they the money worms? I think so. Shall we gather and kill tomorrow? I look at So Gun-pyeong. Can you kill Master Yukhap? Actually, I have only heard his name, I dont know how strong he is. Well treat him over for dinner tomorrow, so just leave him be. I understand. Sometimes, theres a guy like that in Kangho. A man known for his vulgarity, childishness, and obnoxiousness. Master Yukhap is an orthodox master famous for his vulgarity. The problem is no one has been able to gauge Master Yukhaps skills. It was the same in my previous life. Later on, Master Yukhap changed his nickname to Ghost of Yukhap. When Ghost of Yukhap was once again involved in multiple cases of Kangho, his name then changed to Yukhap Ghost Demon (Ϲħ). When the alliance announced that he was on the wanted list and would go on a manhunt, the word Yukhap was removed, and they simply marked him as Ghost Demon. Hence Ghost Demon, Crazy Demon, Poison Demon, and Pervert Demon were the people in question on the list. The four were classified as the individualistic Four Demons. Tying with the Five Evils named by the alliance, they became the Five Evils Four Demons (吺ħ). This leaves the missing tenth (ʮ) person who completes the numbers. And the guy whos been in that position for a long time. He was a man named the Evilest in the World (µһ). In addition to being at the top most wanted list, he also became the symbolic leader of the Ten Most Evil (ʮ) where the Five Evils Four Demons conceded the number one position. First Disaster (һ), who paid no heed to the Alliance and the orthodox faction. In other words, he was a member of the Three Disasters. The man was up on the Wanted List of the Alliance, but he did not actively try to do anything. No news about this person is a blessing both to Kangho and to me. Ive only heard rumors, but Ive never seen them. If I had seen him, I would have died before getting trapped in the Demon Cults Heaven Net. When Ghost Demon said he wanted to come to see me after a long time The bad guys in my previous life came to mind. With my arms folded under the plum tree, I slowly began to replay the unresolved fight with Ghost Demon. I killed all the bugs and then fought Ghost Demon, but we couldnt kill each other. So even if hes still in his Master Yukhap days. First of all, I should be prepared. What do the bandits who sweat while ramming their heads on the ground know? Surviving in Kangho is not easy in the past or present life. Chapter 146 Chapter 146 C Past Life Ghost Demon And I Ghost Demon and I had previously tried to kill each other due to our differences in opinions. Also, it wasnt just me. Past life Poison Demon also tried to kill Ghost Demon but failed. However, its not necessary to prepare poison for the dinner tonight. Anyhow, to entertain Ghost Demon in his Master Yukhap days along with his subordinates, I prepared a feast in the Black Rabbit Union main hall. The food was directly prepared by the officials of Black Rabbit Union. This is because I have sent Mrs. Son and the maid to Ilyang beforehand so no women will be harassed by the Gold Silver Seven Insects. As soon as the sun goes down, I sit alone in the main hall and wait for the past life Ghost Demon, Master Yukhap, with the union doors wide open. Whether to kill him or not Truth is, I dont really have an opinion. I dozed off after stabbing Moonlight Dagger on the table. After a while, I hear the buzzing conversation of the Gold Silver Seven Insects. The pests come in chatting as if Black Rabbit Union was their kitchen and sit at the table. Are you the leader of the Low-Down Sect? Yes. Were here, Low-Down Sect Leader. Master hasnt arrived yet. Hes dozing off. Chatting amongst themselves, the seven pests sit down. Only then did I open my eyes and look at the young faces of those I killed with my own hands in my previous life. From Il Chung to Chil Chung Memories came back one by one as I looked at them. Their words and expressions as they died flashed through my mind. I cant wait to see the guys I beat to death with my own hands sitting around me. It feels as if I invited ghosts over to dinner. I ask the pests without addressing any names, Where is Master Yukhap? Hell be here any minute. By the way, youre quite young, Low-Down Sect Leader. I nod without reacting much to the pests words and look at the Moonlight Dagger still stuck on the table. . For a moment, I have the fleeting thought of finishing these seven insects off before Master Yukhap. Master Yukhap and I dont get along. Master Yukhap thinks of other people as bugs. It was the same in my Crazy Demon days. Ghost Demon even treated Poison Demon like crap. Ghost Demon looked sloppy but had redundant self-esteem. As I stare at Moonlight Dagger, one of the pests gaze is directed at the dagger. Whats that? A knife is stuck here. Are you looking for a fight? The pests laugh altogether. Yeah right. I guess you dont know what our master is like. I look around at the bugs and close my eyes. Insect bastards, wake me up when Master Yukhap arrives. . The pests complain noisily while my eyes are closed. Shouldnt you at least serve us a glass of water? Whats with this terrible hospitality? With my eyes closed, I speak towards the inner side of the main hall. Get them water. Yes, Sect Leader. As I closed my eyes, I could feel Il Chung staring at me. He was the most hostile of the bunch. However, these guys cant do anything without Master Yukhaps order, so theres no need to feel threatened. The ones who will play the role of servants for todays feast are Cha Sung-tae, Hoyeon Cheong, So Gun-pyeong, and the other Black Rabbit Union officials. When the men bring the water jugs, the pests protest once again. Jeez, why cant I see a single maidservant here? This place is only filled with stinky men, pathetic. Leader, are there no women around here? Did you move them somewhere else? See, I told you we should have come yesterday. With my eyes closed, I ignore the bugs words and hear So Gun-pyeongs voice. Would you like a glass of water, Leader? Then I open my eyes and nod. While So Gun-pyeong pours water, he looks at the waiting insects. Now everyones expressions went dark. I look at the pests and say, When Master Yukhap arrives, you guys should shut up. Youre noisy. After a while, I hear clothes fluttering outside. As soon as Master Yukhap, who seems to have flown over the wall, appears from the main hall, I guffaw. Hello, Low-Down Sect Leader Its nice to meet you. Im Yukhap. I nod and reply. Nice to meet you, Master Yukgap. Welcome. Not Yukgap1, but Yukhap. Master Yukhap sits down at the far end of the table. Facing me. I stare at Master Yukhap, who is much younger than he was in his Ghost Demon days. Anyhow, its kind of nice to meet him again. In Ghost Demons younger days, he looked like he was in his early 30s. He was a rival during my time as Crazy Demon, so I wonder what his skills are like now. If I become certain his skills are inferior to mine during the meal, I will kill him along with the Gold Silver Seven Insects here. However, it was very difficult to gauge Master Yukhaps skills in the past and even now. Hes the type to thoroughly hide his Qi. I ask Master Yukhap, Would you like to have a meal? Ive prepared a lot for this evening. Master Yukhap replies, You prepared for us? Are you sure its not poisoned, Leader? Theres no poison. Its not my style anyway. You cant be killing strangers with poison. Master Yukhap replies with a smile. Then lets eat. Please serve my subordinates as well. Of course. After a while, the officials bring out the dishes and put them on the table. The dishes were cooked up by the officials, so the taste cannot be guaranteed. As the pests take out silver needles to check for poison, Master Yukhap says, Just eat. Yes, Master. The insects quietly put away their silver needles and begin to gobble down their food loudly. As it was in the past, the role of these gluttons is always to make others irritated, provoked, and uncomfortable. If I somehow respond to the pests behavior, Master Yukhap will examine my personality. Master Yukhap asks, Why arent you eating? I answer while looking at the gluttons. I lost my appetite since it doesnt look appetizing. Eat up. Master Yukhap takes out a smoking pipe in front of the dinner table and starts smoking daylilies. The insects eat as they wave the smoke away with their hands. What an unfortunate sight that makes the slaves look especially pitiful. I ask Master Yukhap the purpose of his visit. Why dont we get to business? Master Yukgap. My name is Yukhap. Not Yukgap. Nonetheless, what is it that you want to talk about at this first meeting? As he is puffing out smoke, Master Yukhap says, I heard you have a lot of money. Moderately. Just enough to live by. Who knew being humble about having just enough to live by could sound this annoying. I heard from Mus subordinates that you took Bajian Societys fortune, and you killed Dae Na-chal too. You also killed Mister Su. I heard you have exterminated all the nearby orthodox factions. Is that right? Thats right. You became a rich lord at a young age. Congratulations. Dont mention it. South Horizon Sect is not active these days. Did they fall into your hands? I dont know about that. Master Yukhap says with a grin, I have an amazing business plan, so hear me out. I raise my hand to interrupt Master Yukhap. Wait a minute. Master Go ahead. Are you interested in money? Of course. Then why didnt you kill the people I killed and just rob them? Why are you envying someone elses property.. Master Yukhap replies with a snicker. What are you going on about? Youre in no position to say that to me. I was close to Mister Su. Bajian Society also doesnt deserve to be exterminated. I dont know what this guy is talking about. Hes always been like that, so I just dismiss it. Furthermore, I dont look forward to the business plan he mentions every time since its always childish and nonsensical. Master Yukhap says, You must have quite a lot of troops. Mobilizing Low-Down Sect troops, me, and my subordinates, we can rob Million Bank. If we succeed, we will retire from Kangho. I think we can rob Million Bank overnight with your troops and my wisdom combined. What do you think? I nod. I have a lot of money in Million Bank, so it wont be necessary. If anything happens to Million Bank, Ill have to help them in order to protect my funds. Lets hear the next plan. Oh, really? Until now, Master Yukhap didnt take even a sip of water. He is looking at the gluttons who are eating passionately. If the food really was poisoned, its about time for the insects to die. Is that why? While Master Yukhap and I are talking, the gluttons are sweating as they eat. They might have kept going until Master Yukhap tells them to stop. Just in time, while looking at the gluttons demolishing the food, Master Yukhap says, Stop eating. Yes. The seven bugs put down their chopsticks at the same time wordlessly and wait. Master Yukhap asks Il Chung, No poison? Yes. How does it taste? It doesnt taste good. Only then did Master Yukhap grin at me. The taste of the food is a mess. I think so. How so? If you want to eat delicious food, go to a restaurant. Dont come to me. Were men who only need to fill our stomachs. Master Yukhap asks me with a smile, What a strange gentleman. Do you have any thoughts to join me? Ill let my subordinates go under you. Youre young but you have quite the aura. Its no exaggeration to say you have an aura of a dragon or a tiger. Youre born different from these subordinates you fed. Born? Thats right. Born? I used to be an errand boy. You mean you became a faction leader as you worked as an errand boy? What the hell happened to you? I know you dont have a master. I answer the truth as it is. I fell off the cliff. I got a rare opportunity from the cliff. Ah Kangho people are originally doomed when they meet a cliff miracle. Actually, I was the same. I look at the pests. If you want to stop living like idiots, try jumping off a scenic cliff somewhere. If youre lucky, you can be like me. The pests snort. Ah, really? Wow, our Low-Down Sect Leader. You are a great person. Surviving off the cliff. Hehe, well try to jump down if we have a chance. Dont do that. Why dont you tell us the cliff you jumped from? I think that would be faster. I giggle as I listen to the sarcasm of Gold Silver Seven Insects. Thats what these guys are supposed to do. Of course, this is also why they were beaten to death by me in the previous life. While picking my nose in front of the guests, I say, Master Yukgap, do you have other business proposals? Strangely enough, I have no idea how good you are. If I cant figure it out, it means you are skilled, right? Instead of Million Bank, why dont we exterminate a faction bigger than Bajian Society. With glinting eyes, Master Yukhap responds. For example? For example, the Orthodox Association. I realize it was a slip of the tongue as soon as I utter it. Master Yukhap replies with a puzzled look. Is there an organization called the Orthodox Association in Kangho? The pests answer back. No, there isnt. Master Yukhap asks, Are you referring to Jecheon Clan? I nod roughly. The name changed along the way, but I was confused. Sometimes, my knowledge about Kangho gets mixed up with what I knew during my Crazy Demon days. Right now, its Jecheon Clan. During the Crazy Demon era, they already had changed their name to the Orthodox Association. Master Yukhap smiles and says, Even the Alliance wont dare to mess with them, how could we mess with them? Theres a limit to spewing nonsense. Although we had a bad relationship in our previous life, I convey my honest thoughts to Master Yukhap now that weve met after a long time. Master Yukgap Im not saying to attack them right away. We need to have big ambitions. Build power, make money, deal with the Jecheon Clan, and keep the Demon Cult in check. Though it is important for a man of Kangho to train in martial arts, isnt it important to build the faction as a whole? Whats the point of bringing pests around and scorning the weak? Master Yukhap retorts, Scorning the weak? As far as I know, I hear that you dont go near anyone powerful. You always avoid the alliances territories. You never approach areas where the rumored powerful warriors lurk. As if you only snoop around the alleyways on dark nights and hit people roaming the roads from behind. Am I wrong? The pests look at Master Yukhap with surprised faces. The face of the former Ghost Demon is unusually distorted even to me. Translators Note Yukgap rhymes with his name Yukhap. But Yukgap means silly/stupid. ?? Chapter 147 Chapter 147 C I Understand Why Youre So Ugly. Master Yukhap says, Low-Down Sect Leader, arent you looking down on me? No, of course not. Ive seen guys like you in Kangho. Especially in orthodox factions. Looks like Master Yukhap is angry. Is that so? Died while fooling around believing in their faction. Having faith in their martial arts skills and died due to arrogance. Died from ignoring me due to my looks. The same goes for you. I guess you look down on me because Im dragging the pests around. Master Yukhap smirks at me. The moment Master Yukhap lays his orders, the seven bugs will attack me no matter their livelihood. On the other hand, I sit alone in the main hall and calmly wait for Master Yukhap to give his order. Master Yukhap, who is staring at me for a while, tilts his head and says, How unusual. Youre too young to be this calm. Il Chung says to Master Yukhap, Should we kill him, sir? Wait it out. Yes. Look at his expression. Hes a weirdo. I wait without much response and tell Cha Sung-tae, Sung-tae, bring me some Dukuang liquor. Right away, sir. When Cha Sung-tae walks in, puts the two Dukuang liquor on the table, and disappears, Master Yukhap asks, Is there poison this time? I pour a drink without answering. I wanted to pour a glass of alcohol for the pests that had died in my hands, but I cant since Master Yukhap is a skeptic. After downing three glasses, I look at Master Yukhaps ugly face. It was the same in my previous life, but I now could read his emotions which were uglier than his own face. Having an ugly face doesnt mean you have a twisted mind. But this guy has both. Master Yukhap is such a vicious person that he later gained the fitting nickname of Ghost Demon (ħ). Perhaps thats why he appears more hideous. Feeling the alcohol kick in, I say to Master Yukhap, Master Yukgap. Its Yukhap. Now that Im seeing you, youre ugly. . Your face is so ugly. In terms of visuals, youre uglier than all the pests here. So, did you purposely pick ugly guys as your subordinates? Just so you ugly bastards can come in packs. No? Master Yukhap looks really angry. . He is so angry that he cant utter a single word to me even though he is slowly blinking his eyes. On the other hand, the Gold Silver Seven Insects are standing by with their heads lowered. They must be aware that Master Yukhap hates people insulting his appearance the most. Master Yukhap says with a smile, Youre a dead man. I laugh and reply, Why? Because I teased you for being ugly? Am I that ugly? I watch Master Yukhap with my chin propped. Lets see. Lets take a closer look. Look twice, look three times. . Youre absolutely hideous. Youre ugly no matter how much I look at you, Master Yukgap. Perhaps because I was speaking too bluntly. Master Yukhap, who was about to lose his cool, suddenly puffs and laughs. How absurd. I laugh at Master Yukhaps expression. It must be absurd. Im taken aback, too. Its rare to see a smiling man this ugly. How horrible. Are you finished, Leader? I respond accordingly because I think Master Yukhap is about to lash out. No. I need to tell you this. I know why youre ugly. Master Yukhaps eyes widened. What the hell are you talking about? Listen up, I dont back out from fights. Even if one of us dies in a fight, I have to tell you this. Hear me out, I know exactly why youre so ugly. I even have the solution. It wont be too late to fight me after listening to the story. I say with a grim look on my face. On the other hand, Master Yukhap is looking at me as if I were delirious with his ugly face. I tremble my hands as if trying to calm a livid dog and say, Would you hear me out? Youll regret it if you dont. I dont know many people. With ragged breaths, Master Yukhap stares at the insects including Il Chung. The bugs had their heads lowered as if they were people who were about to die. Master Yukhap says, Tell me. Yukgap calm down and listen carefully. Suddenly, Master Yukhap shouts as he slams the table continuously. I said my name is Yukhap! Not Yukgap, its Yukhap. Yukhap! Yukhap! Yukhap! Yukhap! You prick! Is it that hard? I will tear you to pieces! Putting my hands down, I appease the former Ghost Demon. Okay, okay. I got it. Stop fussing and listen carefully. Master Yukhap, allow me to explain. Listen first and then get angry. Tell me. Drinking the liquor, I ask the pests. Anyone want a drink? No? Good. Ill have to drink it alone. Let me explain. I preach the Ugly Man Theory seriously. This is a pretty profound problem. The thing with men there is the idea of born handsome and acquired handsome. Likewise, there is the idea of born ugly and acquired ugly. Born handsome is the attractive appearance you were given since birth. You understand up to here, dont you? Master Yukhap stares at me. Go on. I point my finger at Master Yukhap. You are born ugly. It means youve been ugly since birth. Master Yukhap looks at me with his mouth half open. . But the problem is, you became an acquired ugly man. What could be the reason? I mean, even an ugly man can be acquired handsome. Its my unwavering opinion. Especially, Kangho warriors like us. You just dont know how. What a load of rubbish. What do you think that means? This means that a born handsome can become ugly. The key is the harmony of mind and expression. You sound like a moron. I nod. It may sound like that if you dont understand. When a guy laughs, the expression and mind should be in tune, just like inner and outer martial arts. You were thinking about hurting someone, but when your face smiles, your facial muscles tend to twist to the ugly side. . I too have once had a murderous smile. But now I often laugh because Im happy. Besides, you have an ugly face, but your heart and expression dont align. Youre just making your ugly face worse. A mans face usually changes every ten years. Even if you were born ugly, knowing this means your face changes just as Kangho warriors Qi changes. Is it difficult? Actually, its such a difficult and mysterious problem that it feels like Im explaining martial arts. I look at Master Yukhap as I down a glass of liquor. Master Yukhap says, Elaborate. Dont tell me theres more? If you cant convince me, youre dead today. Well, save those stupid threats to your subordinates. Very well. That was a bad analogy. Let me explain. There was a mans smile that I thought was really cool. Who could it be? Who? Is it Sword Demon? You mean Sword Demon of the Demon Cult? I nod. This man has only ever laughed out loud in front of me once. The smile at the time was really worth seeing. Why is that? Because it was rare for a guy who never laughs. This man never easily laughs, but when he does, he laughs heartily. This gives you a rough idea of what kind of man he is, doesnt it? I suppose. This is the first case. The second time is when Alliance Leader Im So-baek laughed. Oh, he also doesnt laugh much like Sword Demon. If you put them together, I bet they would only talk expressionless for a hundred days. Leader Im also had a stern expression all the time, so it was really difficult to check his smile. But he certainly knows how to laugh. Its a smile that creeps out after confirming the safety of his men and ending the operation safely. So, what about it? I glare at Master Yukhap. Even a man who only laughs once a year is nice to see. No matter how ugly you are by nature, you can become a nurtured handsome man. Even more so since Kangho warriors can utilize their Qi and aura. The smiles of Alliance Leader and Sword Demon, who escaped the Demon Cult, are rare. Its because they dont really have much to laugh about. Thats how hard it is to make them laugh sincerely. On the other hand I point my finger at the pests. Look at these pests giggling all the time since arriving. None of these guys laughed for a moment because something was funny. No one laughed because life is enjoyable and fun. Is the fake laughter that you made while shoving stale-tasting food into your throat, worrying if it was poisonous, sincere? Its all fake, survival, moronic smiles because theyre scared. Thats why their faces are messed up. I explain from the beginning. This is what happens when the mind and the smile dont match. These forced smiling pests will get uglier and eventually turn into monsters in ten years. I told you, didnt I? A mans appearance changes every ten years. It is the same as your inner Qi levels. Your natural face is no big deal to Kangho warriors. Will you slowly grow stronger and become a handsome man? Or will you live ugly day by day and become an ugly man? Thats the secret to appearances. I explained it so seriously that I had to wipe sweat off my forehead. As I drink Dukuang liquor, I say, Now you know why youre ugly? Master Yukgap. Master Yukhap glances at me calmly. Leader, let me ask you one thing. Yes, go ahead. I introduced myself as Master Yukhap, but why do you always call me Master Yukgap? I shake my head and answer in a grave tone. Thats me. What does that mean? I grinned as the corners of my mouth curled. It was very fun to tease the former Ghost Demon. Its up to me. Whether youre Yukhap or Yukgap, the fact that youre ugly doesnt change, so dont be so petty. Why does it matter if it is Yukhap or Yukgap? Your face and mind are ugly anyway. How Do you understand me? I wonder if you feel like living again after receiving tips and information on how to become a handsome man. Wow, I cant believe Im giving you this information without charging a fee. Will there ever be another swordsman like me? While Master Yukhap takes a deep breath, I continue. No matter how ugly you are, a man who smiles sincerely is beautiful. A smile like that cannot be hidden by ugliness. No matter if you dont die today or tomorrow, remember. We can all be handsome men. My lecture, which started with the Ugly Men Theory, ended with the Handsome Theory. I felt a prick because it felt like Id swindled them. . I ask Master Yukhap reluctantly. So? Are you going to fight me? Youre going to end your life today? Thats too bad. I call my men before Master Yukhap could respond. Sung-tae, Chief So, and Master Hoyeon. Officials. The waiting men walk out to the main hall and say, Yes, Leader. Did you call for us? I stare at Master Yukhap and order my men. If I get beaten by one of these guys. Yes, sir. Please ask my acquaintances in Kangho to avenge me. Cha Sung-tae nods and replies. Please lay your order. Contact Alliance Leader Im So-baek, Sword Demon Sunbae who managed to escape Demon Cult, the Cult Leaders Sister Blood night Palace Leader, and the Wind Cloud Mong Clans second son shithead to seek my revenge. Yes. Also, you shouldnt leave out Nanming Society, South Horizon Sect, and Black Hurricane Castle. Of course. Come to think of it, my acquaintances are situated throughout orthodox, unorthodox, and demon factions. Guess I didnt live life in vain. Thats right. Please let my hometown friends in Ilyang know. Sung-tae, you should take revenge in about 10 years. You still suck. All right. I speak in a solemn tone. Let them know the Low-Down Sect Leader was falsely murdered. Say Master Yukhap is Master Yukgap, tell them I was attacked because I was just merely stating facts, that he was ugly. Theres no wrongful story like mine. Alliance Leader will feel especially very sorry for me. We had shared a deep comradeship as we exterminated Namak Sect together, so make sure to put Master Yukhap and his men on the Most Wanted List. Not Yukgap, its Yukhap. Dont forget. Cha Sung-tae nods. I will definitely deliver the message. Is it Yukgap? Its Yukhap. Yes, I understand. I grab Moonlight Dagger stuck on the table and stare at Master Yukhap. Good. Im relieved. Now lets fight . Mas.Ter?Yuk?Gap. I smile broadly after calling out to the former Ghost Demon. In this case, it was a very appropriate expression since it was fun to tease him. Ah, itd be too troubling if I become too handsome at this rate . . I did some self-reflection. Chapter 148 Chapter 148 C Doctor, Doctor, Doctor Zaha! Is it because I threatened him by mentioning prominent characters? Even though I asked him to fight, the former Ghost Demon stayed still. Did he fall into Qi Deviation after finally realizing why he was ugly? Or did he notice my skills to some extent? This is someone elses mind, so I have no idea. Master Yukhap stares at me without saying anything, stares at his subordinates looking like he was gonna kill them, and then looks up and down at my awaiting men. Then suddenly, Master Yukhap tells me in a blunt tone, I lost today. ? You hide your skills really thoroughly. My men and I will leave. Will you let me go quietly? I shake my head as soon as I think, This punk is spewing nonsense again. How vague. Whats vague? That just means youll come back to bother us again. Do I look like I have a lot of free time? Master Yukhap looks around and says in a calm tone. If you let me go, I will try again in 10 years. If I violate the promise, I will meet the Three Disasters and face the misfortune of being beaten to death. No. You were so laid back as if you could kill me anytime, but now youre going to step down without losing anything? What, is ten years your dogs name? I didnt know Kanghos Master Yukgap is so soft. Master Yukhap smiles bitterly. Should I cut off my pinky? That wont be necessary. I point to the Gold Silver Seven Insects. If a fight breaks out, all seven of them will die first. Even if you are lucky enough to escape, Master Yukhap, leave your subordinates behind. Then Ill let you go. Master Yukhap looks at me. Meaning youre going to kill all my subordinates? Who knows? Truth is, I dont give a damn about his men. Im just curious about how Master Yukhap feels about his men. In my previous life, I killed them all before fighting Ghost Demon, so I couldnt figure out what he thought of his men. I ask, whirling Moonlight Dagger in my hand, So, whats the verdict? After a while, Master Yukhap replies. If you intend to kill them, I cant leave them here. The Gold Silver Seven Insects looks at Master Yukhap with surprised eyes. ! For a moment, I grinned. Oh, how surprising. Thats unexpected. I get lost in thought for a moment as I look at Master Yukhap. Is he useful if I keep him alive? Would he be a useful ally when fighting the Demon Cult or the orthodox? Does he torment the weak? How did he become a public enemy? In short, this guy is like General Wei Yan1, so I have no choice but to be deeply concerned. Its a waste to kill off a talent like him. But too problematic to keep him alive. We met as public enemies of the Alliance, so we dont really know much about each others pasts. I realize that worrying about this is the problem. If I have the ability to overpower Master Yukhap, what problem could there be? After much thought, I made up my mind. Thats right. Lets think about it after I defeat him. Nodding my head, I say, Master Yukgap, Im sure you have noticed that I am not under you. Master Yukhap replies, Ive been trying to figure out your skills all this time, but I couldnt. I couldnt sense your Qi either. It was hard to gauge your inner Qi. Regardless of the past or present, Ghost Demons cautious personality still remains. Master Yukhap says calmly, But I noticed one thing. What is it? You mastered both yin and yang martial arts. Oh, interesting. How did you know that? I look at the Gold Silver Seven Insects. Did you pests notice? This time, the bugs respond with honorifics. We didnt know. We did not notice, Leader. As I retrieve Moonlight Dagger, I say, I see. Its vague to kill you off, and its uncomfortable to let you go. Its not easy to live in Kangho. I say with my hand on my chest, The peace of mind Taking a deep breath and sighing, I grasp the table with Crescent Moon Ice Technique injected into my left hand. At that moment, the cold energy spread with a cracking sound and the Gold Silver Seven Insects sitting at the table are all pushed out at once. Whirling Fiery Fowl Great Handprint in my right hand, I wield it like a thunderbolt to Master Yukhap. Master Yukhap immediately responds to my palm force and an explosion roars. Boooooooooom! The impact of the palm force in the center After being hit by the surging Crescent Moon Ice Technique, the Gold Silver Seven Insects flew off. Bzzzzzzzzzzzt! The pests are hurled from side to side and faint immediately as soon as they hit the wall. I go outside as I talk to my men. Knock them out if they wake up. Understood. While I head outside to the main hall So Gun-pyeong asks me, Shall we join you? No, Ill be on my own. Yes. I go out to the inner courtyard and look at Master Yukhap. Master Was that really necessary? I answer as I am pulling out Black Hares Tooth. Ill spare you. Lets fight first. Dont run away. Master Yukhap answers, pulling out his long sword. It wont be easy. Ah, thats more like you. Unfortunately for Master Yukhap, I know his martial art skills because Ive competed against Ghost Demon in my previous life. On the other hand, he knows nothing about my skills. Well, its not a big deal. The stronger opponent always wins the fight. I extend my left hand to So Gun-pyeong who comes out to spectate the fight. Throw it, the Night Blade. I catch the flying Night Blade with my left hand and hold Black Hares Tooth on my right, confronting Master Yukhap in a circle form. Master Yukhap asks me, Using double swords? Shut up. . Since this guy knows that I am going to use Yin and Yang martial arts, I openly inject Crescent Moon Ice Technique and Fire Fowl Energy into the knife and swing around. The blade turns white then red, back and forth Wielding double swords, I go against Master Yukhap. As we fought, I knew. I havent recovered all my martial arts skills from my Crazy Demon days yet. This also applies to Master Yukhap, so hes lacking compared to his Ghost Demon days. Which of us recovered more of our skills from our prime times? Of course, its me. Furthermore, my martial arts routine is different. Ive been training Strolling Golden Turtle Technique calmly to avoid falling into Qi Deviation; hence my skills are still lower than when I was Crazy Demon, but the addition of Shadow Moon Martial Arts made my offense and defense combination more advanced. While I deflect Master Yukhaps sword, I counter with the double swords whenever there is an opening. The sounds of iron clashing and the opposite sound of Qi overlapping caused quite the commotion. Anyway, this is the situation The former Ghost Demon endured well. The depth of his inner Qi accumulated over the years is not shallow, and the Six Combination Technique (Ϲ) he uses is originally an intricate defense-type of martial art. I dont know the name of the martial arts in detail. However, the term Yukhap refers to the East, West, North, South, Sky, and Land. He uses a unique sword technique that makes you wonder when he will go on offense as he defends so firmly. In contrast to his nickname Ghost Demon, he uses an authentic inner Qi of a family clan. Unlike his solid defense and original martial art, he mainly preferred to have the Gold Silver Seven Insects make a sly attack to gain victory. A combination of authenticity and wickedness. Thats why I neutralized the Gold Silver Seven Insects before fighting Master Yukhap. If Id let them be, hidden weapons, poison, steel needles, whips, daggers, poisonous insects, would have intersected throughout the fight. I mumble my thoughts since I was bored while cornering Master Yukhap. Master Yukhap, Master Yukgap, Master Yukgap Yukgap, fuck, moron. Dodging the sword aiming for my head, an explosive sound resonates when striking my double sword. The startled Master Yukhap steps back. I laughed at Master Yukhap, who had stepped back excessively. what a fuss. Is it silliness or a fuss, just pick one. Cant you just shut your mouth? Shit. If I shut up, thats not me. This is a fight to find my ego. As I resume my attack, as if I was a Tibet monk chanting the Buddhist scriptures, I chant. If I shut up, thats not me. I am me. You are you. Those who mumble are blessed. He who keeps his mouth shut will be engulfed by anger, Amitabha, jackass, degenerate. As I keep muttering while wielding my double swords, my hands and feet fumble clumsily. Jeez, this is making me dizzy. A man who gets dizzy by his own rambling, thats me. But its okay. What if I get dizzy? That means this guy is on the verge of going crazy from getting dizzy. The sixteenth verse of the third chapter of Crazy Demon Schemes2. Make yourself dizzy first to make the enemy dizzy. There is no man in Kangho who can withstand madness better than me. I ramble while I corner Master Yukhap until he rebrands himself as Master Yukgap. The moment I confirm that Master Yukhaps complexion changed unrelated to his inner Qi, I speak calmly. Oi, Master Yukhap The former Ghost Demon looks at me with a puzzled expression while wielding a sword. I shoot the freezing Waning Moon Energy on Night Blade ahead, and attack by piercing through with Fiery Fowl in Black Hares Tooth. While rotating my body, I wield the double swords and recite it again. Master Yukhap You look pale. Your energy and blood is a mess. This is an early sign of Qi Deviation. If you dont surrender now, something bad will happen. This is a critical situation so Im calling you Master Yukhap. Master Yukgap At that moment, the former Ghost Demon steps back, vomiting dark red blood from his mouth. Blergh What? It seems his Qi and blood is indeed a mess. I corner Master Yukhap. Master Yukhap, that used to deflect my sword with vigor, became feather light like a bamboo stick. In fact, I am almost about to fall into Qi Deviation from running my mouth. It must have been hard for Ghost Demon to hold out, too. I stab the stumbling Master Yukhap in the shoulder, slash his forearm, stab his thigh, cut his side, and kick him. As blood splatters, Master Yukhap spins around in the air. I chase after him, kicking Master Yukhaps sword away, let go of Night Blade, and jab Master Yukhaps whole body with Waning Moon Finger Technique. Hit, hit, hit, hit, hit, hit! With his whole body frozen, Master Yukhap looks up at me with a blank expression. . I look down at Master Yukhap and whisper, Master Yukgap, Ill call a doctor and treat you, so please wait. You cant die. I reach out and flick Master Yukhap out of consciousness. Flick! Complete darkness. Feeling his body restrained, the former Ghost Demon Master Yukhap opens his eyes. The blaring sunlight makes him squint his eyes. He remembers what happened just before he fainted in bated breath. Low-Down Sect Leader. Master Yukhap moves his eyes around to inspect his surroundings. His subordinates were hung upside down all over the plum tree. Were captured. Then, people approach as he hears someones voice. Master Yukhap is awake. How is he? Hes not in a critical state anymore. Good. Master Yukhap tries to move, but his whole body is tied and bound to the bed. Furthermore, every time he moves, his knife wounds feel like they are on fire. Lets just breathe out and wait A man wearing a white hood appears in Master Yukhaps sight. Next to him is the one Low-Down Sect Leader called Sung-tae. A conversation ensues between the two. The man, who covered most of his face with a white hood, says as if to record it. His fever has gone down a lot. Next to him, the man named Sung-tae writes down on a paper that appears to be a questionnaire in his hand with a thin brush Yes, the fever has gone down a lot. Sword wounds all over his body, four places, here, there, here, here. Here, he was slashed by a sword. He also got hit by Ice Technique. Severe internal injuries. You mean hes shaking, so it means he incurred severe internal wounds. Condition: critical. Me? Not you. I see. Youre done writing, right? Then go to Doctor, Doctor, Doctor Moyong and go get a prescription. I understand. Tell him not to come, if hes busy. This guy is not my subordinate. If he dies, then it cant be helped. All right. Ill be back. Dont go now. Eat up before you go. Ah, Im hungry. Master Yukhap breathes heavily and stares at the man with a white hood. The man lowers the white hood that is covering his mouth and asks Master Yukhap. Sir, what? Drink more lukewarm water, and you need to quit smoking to recover quickly. Take note. Master Yuk-Hap watches the Low-Down Sect Leader unveil his hood. As soon as he sees Low-Down Sect Leaders face, he feels dizzy. . Low-Down Sect Leader suddenly grips his wounded shoulder tightly and says, Ill save you, so hang in there. Yukgap Urghh. Master Yukhap didnt say his shoulder hurt. There was no energy left in his body. Meanwhile, Low-Down Sect Leader lowers his head and whispers, You cant die without my permission. All right? Ill do everything in my power to heal you. Low-Down Sects quack doc, thats me. Master Yukhap faints once again while listening to Low-Down Sect Leaders whisper. Editors Note Wei Yan was a Chinese military general and politician of the state of Shu Han during the Three Kingdoms period of China. He was known to treat his soldiers well and was known for his bravery with valor that surpassed others. He was also boastful of his talents resulting in his peers avoiding him 3. ?? Idk how to explain this, but its kinda like 52878219469th times of Crazy Demon does stupid things kinda meaning, very unserious. C TL ?? Chapter 149 Chapter 149 C To Be Honest. Moyong Baek received a request to give a prescription, but he arrived at Black Rabbit Union with Cha Sung-tae to see the patient in person. Moyong Baek thought he requested the prescription because he didnt have any knowledge in medicine. Cha Sung-tae, who returned with Moyong Baek, asks while looking around the inner courtyard, Where is the Leader? A man doing chin-ups replies, He took his bandits for a short walk in the mountains. Moyong Baek tilts his head. Did he hold bandits captive in the Low-Down? Cha Sung-tae explains, Yes, they were caught in the midst of banditry. Oh, I see. Moyong Baek, who immediately gets the picture, says while looking at the patient tied to wooden bedding below the plum tree, The patients are outdoors. Let me take a look. Yes, sir. As he approaches the bedridden Master Yukhap, Moyong Baek says, Master Yukhap, I am a local practitioner. Can you speak? He had gotten a brief run down from Cha Sung-tae. Moyong Baek had previously heard rumors about Master Yukhap. Youll eventually hear about what happens in Kangho once you start treating Kangho warriors. On the other hand, Yukhap, who was tied up lying under the hot sun, could only let out a sigh because he could sense how this would somehow tie into the schemes of the Low-Down Sect Leader. What is he up to this time? Moyong Baek grabs the lying Master Yukhaps hand and feels his pulse. After a while, he looks into Master Yukhaps eyes and asks, Master Yukhap, how did a respectable man from the southern orthodox faction end up facing such humiliation? Master Yukhap replies, You know me? I heard you were the last disciple of Six Shift Sect (T). You ended your revenge by exterminating most of the orthodox factions in the South. Low-Down Sect is nowhere an orthodox, why did you invade this place? Master Yukhap goes silent. . Smiling softly, Moyong Baek says, Master Yukhap, I can treat your injuries. Leader stabbed you nowhere near any of your vital points. If you have the will to recover, you will be able to get up soon. However, the problem is not your treatment. Then what is it? Moyong Baek says, Im a local practitioner who often helps the Leader. And the Leader is also helping me. However, if you recover and decide to take revenge on the Low Down, I will be troubled. Thats the bigger problem. Master Yukhap snorts. Then what do you want from me? Regardless, Leader Lee will capture and tear your limbs out if you mess with Low-Down Sect anyway. You should know that it is not medicine or treatment that saves you. As soon as Moyong Baek sees daggers shooting from Master Yukhaps eyes, he responds, Rest up today. Ill write up a prescription and then start the treatment. Suddenly, Master Yukhap, who feels ominous, replies, What medicine? Nonchalantly, Moyong Baek utters scary words. If you dont take the antidote regularly, your inner Qi will gradually disperse. If you dont take it on time, your muscles will get soft. I will pass this antidote to Leader Lee. If Master Yukhap does any harm to the Low Down in the future, you will naturally be forced to leave Kangho. If the survivors of the Nansong orthodox region hear about this, theyll come for you. Do you understand? As soon as the immobilized Master Yukhap realized that this was the reason that he checked his pulse, he went hysterical. How is that medicine? Thats poison! Just kill me already! I cant do that. There must be a reason why the Sect Leader kept you alive. Ill take responsibility and save you. Kill me! Moyong Baek gently pressed Master Yukhaps wounds with his hand. Look, Master Yukhap. Gngh! Are you sick? If you consume something that keeps you alive, its medicine. How can it be poison? I will be the judge of whether or not Master Yukhap will be a threat to the Low Down. If the Leader allows, I will neutralize the poison. Rest up. The patients health is my priority. Moyong Baek lifts his hands and looks around. The warriors of Black Rabbit Union doing chin-ups say their greetings.. Doctor Moyong, thats a brilliant idea. This will suffice. Moyong Baek slightly nods to the warriors. Ill see you next time. When Moyong Baek says he is leaving, Cha Sung-tae replies, Ah, doc. Youre leaving already? Moyong Baek replies, Manager Cha, the patients internal Qi is fine, so it wont be a problem to eat the medicine I made. And please take note. Yes. Master Yukhap is a man who has wiped out all the orthodox factions in the Nansong region over the course of a few years. He gained a reputation for his vengeance and perseverance. But I will prepare the medicine so no future problem will ensue. Please tell the Leader this. Cha Sung-tae, who only understood half of what Moyong said, simply nods his head first. Yes, I understand. While looking at the restrained Master Yukhap, Cha Sung-tae says, Hey, Master Yukgap. Youre scary. Did you get to all the Nansong orthodox? I thought you were an idiot because you were beaten up by Leader, turns out youre not. Cha Sung-tae raises his hand when the lying Master Yukhap glares. You wanna die? Be nice. Or else. Before you die accidentally. This time, the Gold Silver Seven Insects hanging upside down speak in a hoarse voice. Water, please. Cha Sung-tae replies, Water? You had it yesterday. Do you think the Low-Down Sect is a charity house that gives out water? Cha Sung-tae approaches the Gold Silver Seven Insects and roasts them hard, then glances at Master Yukhap. Somehow, the lying down Master Yukhap is more intimidating than these guys, so he only lashes out on the lackeys. After kicking the hanging man with his foot, he says to Moyong Baek, Lets go. Yes. After physical training in the mountains with the bandits, I enter the inner courtyard. I receive an enthusiastic welcome by the monkeys doing chin-ups. Welcome back, Leader! I look at the lying Master Yukhap and the pests hanging upside down. Anyone dead? . I guess not. I walk to the bed and look down at Master Yukhap. Master Yukhap stares at me then closes his eyes. Cha Sung-tae, who comes out of the main hall, reports. Doctor Moyong just left Leader. Why is he working so hard? He came by to take a look at Master Yukgap. Doc said if he doesnt swallow the antidote he prescribed, he will bring a panacea1 that disperses his inner Qi. And then he will proceed with treatment. Ive been given the antidote to pass to you. Why is he working so hard on the antidote? I think hes worried Master Yukhap will take revenge on Low-Down Sect after the treatment. According to Doc, he wiped out the orthodox in Nansong. Ah, really? I stare at Master Yukhap, who has his eyes closed, with my hands behind my back. After Moyong Baeks visit, his face had gotten even more pale. Hey, Yukgap What do you want? Hes shaking, Sung-tae. Yes, sir. Let the bandits rest for a while and then get to training them afterwards. Chop chop. Train them until theyre about to die. As you wish. Where are you going? I should catch up with Doctor Moyong. He came all the way here, so I should at least say hi. I casually gaze at the hanging Gold Silver Seven Insects and stop in front of one of the guys. This punk Youre still laughing. Who are you? Looking at the order they were hanging, it was Sam Chung. No, Im not. You have a trashy personality or what? Youre laughing? To his surprise, Sam Chung replies, My tooth is protruded, so my mouth just keeps opening. Im not laughing, Im sorry. Ah Surprised, I scratch my head. Turns out he just has an ugly mouth. I cough dryly and say to Cha Sung-tae, Untie these guys from the tree now. Cha Sung-tae replies with a surprised look on his face. What? Put them down. Also, give them some water. Ah, of course. With a deadpan face I say, Yuck, they are so ugly. Anyway, Ill be back. Yes, have a safe trip. I quickly catch up with Moyong Baek, who is on his way back to his infirmary, using footwork. Doc. Moyong Baek turns around with a startled look. Leader? Youre here. I slow down to a walk and gesture my hands ahead. Lets go. Well, youre busy. I heard you went for a walk with bandits. It just happened. Did you see the patient? You dont have to try that hard. How is he? Moyong Baek, who had been agonizing for a while, replies, He was stubborn. And feisty. Youll have a hard time making use of him. I see. Is there a reason why you spared him? Hmm. While walking with Moyong Baek, I think about the reason for a while. Poison Demon, Ghost Demon, Crazy Demon, Pervert Demon. In terms of the evilness as Murims Public Enemy, were about the same. All four of us were nutcases. However, I did not save him because we share a past. I tell Moyong Baek my honest feelings. Im just trying something different. I can kill him any time anyway. If I cant spare him and kill him afterwards, that just means thats where my limit is at. Hm. I went to Namak and killed a lot of bandits with my own hands. The Alliance was on a conquest, and I got the Low-Down Sect involved, so I ended up joining. How many people have you killed? Over a hundred. Oh my single-handedly? Keeping my eyes ahead, I walk down the street with Moyong Baek. The man walking next to me is not Poison Demon, but a Great Doctor, so I reveal my innermost feelings. Ever since I came back, I think about it often. I have no regrets about fighting and killing the strong but killing over a hundred weaklings no matter how evil they are the bandits appear in my dreams sometimes. How do you react when a bandit appears in your dream? Ive been killing them all at once. Wishing that they wont show up again. But I guess I cant get rid of them completely since its a dream. I think so. Moyong Baek nods beside me. Thats why you didnt kill Master Yukhap and kept him alive for now. For now, I spared Master Yukhap and the subordinates he brought. Actually, I dont think much about Master Yukhap. If I had killed the Gold Silver Seven Insects that I had killed in my previous life again with my own hands, it may overlap with the 100 bandits incident, and it feels like somethings going to happen to me mentally. This is how I feel honestly. Moyong Baek says, Leader, you have done a good job for choosing to save them. Its easy to kill, but hard to spare. This is the same for me as a doctor. Saving people is the hardest thing. I pause and look at Moyong Baek. Were both thinking about saving people. Moyong Baek nods. Yes. Do you remember this finger from the other day? Moyong Baek raises his finger upside down and imitates walking. When I nod, Moyong Baek says, If you kill the people you meet on the way, you say thats the Demons Way. I remember. Moyong Baek nods and looks into my eyes. You have madness and anger issues and so if you walk into the Demon Cult, you will obtain the nickname Crazy Demon. it doesnt sound that bad. Moyong Baek says with a smile, Leader, if you become much stronger than now, you will have more options. Once you grow even more powerful, you wont have to do what you did in Namak. Im sorry, its a consequential story, but Im sure youre right. Since it was to protect the alliance troops. Moyong Baek gestures forward. Lets keep walking. I walk down the path with Moyong Baek again. Suddenly, Moyong Baek sighs and says, There are many masters in this world. The standard of being strong has become very high. I thought things would be comfortable with your level of skill, but I was wrong. I nod. It doesnt seem like he was expecting a response. Moyong Baek asks in curiosity, Leader, what do you think of the Alliance Leaders skills? Hes a strong man. Is he stronger than you? Of course for now. Im So-baek was way stronger than me even during my Crazy Demon days. Suddenly, I watch Moyong Baeks expression and say,. Doc, do you have any concerns these days? As if it were no big deal, Moyong Baek says, These days, I spend more time reading martial art manuals than medical books. I tend to study poison more than medicine. It wasnt a big deal, but I suddenly burst into laughter and snort. Why are you laughing? Well, its fine to do research on poison if you like it. Whats wrong with that? Its not like theres a law that practitioners should be weak in martial arts. Whats wrong with being stronger? Sometimes when I have a big problem, I get help from Doctor Moyong I was worried about how to deal with Master Yukhap today, you said youll make a Qi-Dispersing Poison, so I felt relieved. Poison is medicine, so please study it well. Yes. Looking back, we both have a lot of worries. I console Moyong Baek presumptuously. Youre doing great, Doc. Past life Murim Public Enemies comforting each other. Leader is doing well, too. If you get stronger than now, your madness will gradually get better. I nod and direct my hand near Moyong Infirmary. Then, I will see you again. Moyong Baek says with a nod. I will be back with the Qi-Dispersing Poison soon. It would be better to use him like this than killing Master Yukhap. I nod. Thats right. See you again. Moyong Baek turns around with a bright expression and heads back to Moyong Infirmary. For a moment, I stare at Moyong Baeks back. He somehow seems like the former Poison Demon. Well, its not that strange since the Great Doctor and the Poison Demon are the same person. Editors Notes Panacea is synonymous with being a cure-all. A remedy for all ills or difficulties. Note that its not literally a panacea, its a qi dispersing poison to keep the Ghost Demon in check2. ?? Chapter 150 Chapter 150 C At The Moment Of Farewell In my previous life, what would I be doing right now? I dont know exactly. Ive never written in a diary or kept any record with the dates written. I just remember a few big events throughout the years since I like to just go with the flow. Looking back at my memory, the inn would have already been burned down. It should be around the period when I left Ilyang and worked as a grave keeper, mowing the grass all day long. A time when I only mow grass. What on earth has happened to me? The period is the same, but Now I have so many subordinates that its difficult to take care of them individually. I had no choice but to adjust my training, thinking of them as either my direct subordinate or focusing on the subordinates that catch my eye. Among them, the most recent and most important plan that I will focus my attention on will be to work on nagging, threatening, and converting their personalities until Master Yukhap is completely recovered. As planned, they ate up the Qi-Dispersing Poison. While the treatment is occurring, and the former Ghost Demon is about to engage in a second and third round of psychological warfare, a letter arrives. I feel strange even before I open the letter. In fact, its because there arent many people who would send me letters. I thought it might be the Alliance Leader or Sword Demon. However, as soon as I read the letter, I had no choice but to be shocked. It was a simple letter written like this: 111 years are passing by like a day. Hoping that there will be a reunion. Watching a friend in Kangho leaving. It was a short letter with no sender or recipients name written on it, so I read the contents repeatedly. After rereading the letter, I began to understand the meaning behind the three-line sentence. 111 years is the age of Heo Gyeom, who is also an old manly sunbae. Reunion means he thinks of me as a friend and wishes to see me again. I interpreted the line the years are passing like a day as Heo Gyeoms health being in jeopardy. I read it over and over again to look out for hidden meanings, but I cant find anything else. I fold the letter and put it in my arms. Hmm After thinking for a long time with my arms crossed, I called inside. Mrs. Son, you there? Yes, Leader. As soon as Mrs. Son comes out of the room, I say, Prepare a 10,000 nyang slip. Bring it along with a black jangsam1 in a bindle. I will be right back. Put some beef jerky in it too, its fine if its bland. I also need a bamboo barrel. Yes. I speak quietly to Cha Sung-tae, who just entered the main hall. Quietly get So Gun-pyeong, Manager Byuk, and Master Hoyeon for me. Yes. I wait for the officials with my chin propped. As soon as the officials arrive and close the hall door, I say, Have a seat. Yes. I tried not to keep this place unoccupied, but I cant help it. Chief So will be in charge of the antidote that needs to be fed to Master Yukhap. If they act out of control while Im away under all of your watch, kill Master Yukhap. We understand. What about the Gold Silver Seven Insects? Cant you guys handle them as you see fit? Dont let them die unless they act out. Yes. And there is a small possibility, but the leader of Sima Clan has been seriously injured by my hand, so they might hire third parties to infiltrate this place without my presence. If someone asks about my whereabouts, say I went to Nanming Society. And if they gather troops and invade Nanming Society, it can be resolved there to some extent. If anything happens, take care of the situation accordingly. Tell the Four Generals to train in Black Rabbit Union for the time being. Understood, sir. So Gun-pyeong asks, Where are you heading to, Leader? Blood Night Palace. When are you leaving? I answered Mrs. Son, who hurried out from the interior, handing over the bindle. Im leaving now. Watching my expression, Cha Sung-tae says, Leader, if youre off to fight, you should take some men. Its too far. And Im not off for a fight. Its an urgent matter I need to attend to, the troops will collapse before they arrive. I stand up and take a look at the officials. See you when I get back. As I stride out, the officials follow me to the main gate in a group. Suddenly, I look back at the officials because I think Ive forgotten something. Then I say whatever comes to mind. While Im away. Yes. Chief So will be in charge of Black Rabbit Union. Low-Down Sect under Sung-tae. Master Hoyeon is the trainer, and other important internal matters will be in Manager Byuks hands. Discuss external Kangho affairs with Brother White Tiger. All right. I nod in farewell and then speed off in my footwork. Will I be able to meet Heo Gyeom? I dont know. If 111 years passed by like a day Perhaps by now, a dark night is passing in the life of a man named Heo Gyeom. What does death mean for a manly elderly assassin who lived for more than a hundred years? Anyway, there was a long way to go to the Blood Night Palace. A million things crossed my mind. It will be a problem even after this old manly sunbae passes away. While I was in Kangho in my previous life, I never heard of or even remember knowing anything about a faction called Blood Night Palace. This is why I am rushing to Blood Night Palace. Because I have no idea whats going on. Theres also an unfounded anxiety. At the same time, I also want to say my final goodbyes to Heo Gyeom. This is because were real men trying our best to keep our promises. While I am running, I gradually halt my thoughts and focus only on footwork. I have enough Qi to run nonstop, but I cant continue because the soles of my feet were hot, the senses of my knees became strange, and I was out of breath. After a full day of running, I sit down in a quiet place, drink the water in the bamboo barrel, and chew on beef jerky. At that moment, I instinctively look around and turn the spirit of the Shadow Moon Martial Arts internally. I instantly feel cool from head to toe. The condition itself was astonishingly fascinating. While experiencing something new, I cant help but think that there is a long way to go. The completion of martial arts is a long way to go. I get up again, take a deep breath, and resume my journey. This time, I operate my inner Qi with the idea of combining extreme Yin and extreme Yang as a Division Technique. It isnt easy, but its an area to be challenged someday. Using Yin and Yang simultaneously in the body is the first stage. Shooting both Yin and Yang from the body at the same time is the second stage. Combining Yin and Yang and using them freely inside and outside the body is the third stage I decide on my own, this is the starting line of Violet Mist Technique. I run with the thought of building a new foundation for martial arts through footwork. A monkey who holds back poop, skips meals, and thinks about martial arts while running. I run and run like a crazy monkey observing the Sun and Moon in multiple shifts. A promise is a promise. When I arrived at Blood Night Palace, I knew it wasnt too late. This is because instead of crying, I could hear laughter. Ah, he kept his promise. When I arrive at the large hall with the guide by the Blood Night Palace warriors, six or seven people are sitting around, and Heo Gyeom is also sitting in a faded black robe in the center. As soon as Heo Gyeom spots me, he smiles as if he is happy to see me. Leader, you really came. Yong-myeong, what did I say? He will definitely come. Yong-myeong answers with a faint smile. Yes. Though there are several people on the sides, I greet Heo Gyeom first. Sunbae, Im here. Kanghos manners be damned. I go to Heo Gyeom and lightly grab his crumpled hand. Heo Gyeom says with a smile, Thank you for coming, Leader. His tone is different from the other day, but I dont mind. We are not men who care about this kind of thing. I look at Heo Gyeoms complexion and eyes and feel the grip of his hands. He has no strength at all. I say with a smile, Sunbae, your outfit is not too bad. It looks like the assassin outfit you wore in your prime times. Heo Gyeom nods. You recognized it right away. Its that outfit. I used to wear it when I was First Instructor.. Behind Heo Gyeom, Yong-myeong says, Leader, please sit in my seat. Only then did I look around at the other guests. Blood Night Palace Leader is present, and Lady Gyo Young, who I gave a forehead flick to, is also there along with some other Kangho warriors I dont know. Once I sat in Yong-myeongs seat, I found out that sunbae Sword Demon didnt come. This isnt a place to be chatty, so I just look at Heo Gyeom. It isnt until I sit down that Blood Night Palace Leader says, Leader, thank you for coming all the way here. Dont mention it. I came comfortably like visiting a friends house next door. . Blood Night Palace Leader squints her eyes and smiles. As the atmosphere was growing awkward, I ask tactlessly as usual, What were you talking about so pleasantly? Heo Gyeom says with a smile. This old man has lived for a long time, so this faded black uniform remained. I was handing out a few items. Yong-myeong. Yes. Bring out the item I said the other day that would suit the leader. I look at Heo Gyeom and Yong-myeong. Hes giving me a present as soon as I arrive? Actually, it is more of a keepsake of Heo Gyeom than a present. While I am waiting for Yong-myeong, I make eye contact with Lady Gyo Young, smile and pretend to flick my finger. Then Lady Gyo Young stares at me with her calm eyes. As soon as I see Gyo Young muttering under her breath, I ask, Im annoying? Gyo Young is surprised and looks at Blood Night Palace Leader. No, I didnt say anything. I know. Leader is teasing you, so dont get involved. Yes. When I look around, there is also a middle-aged man who I saw at a high-end manor called the Moonshine Pavilion the other day. You must be the owner of Moonshine Pavilion. The middle-aged man smiles and bows his head slightly. Its been a while. Either he had a relationship with Heo Gyeom or only high-ranking officials of Blood Night Palace were present. Yong-myeong, who came out straight from the inside, hands Heo Gyeom a shabby wooden sword. Heo Gyeom strokes the wooden sword and tells me, This is my gift for you. This is a wooden sword I cherished when I was young, I hope you could use it. I get up and receive the wooden sword from Heo Gyeom. Why would you hand out such a precious item. Heo Gyeom hands me a wooden sword and smiles broadly in a good mood. I go back to my seat holding the wooden sword and say to Heo Gyeom, Senior, I will make this a faction heirloom passed down to the leader of the Low Down from generation to generation. Heo Gyeom says with a light smile, This is an assassination weapon, Leader, it does not suit it to be an heirloom. Heo Gyeom draws his finger sideways. I immediately realized what he was saying and pulled out the plain wooden sword. It looks like an ordinary wooden sword on the outside, but it was an actual sword on the inside. Although it was light enough to feel weightless, the sword blade looks very sharp. I ask Heo Gyeom, Sunbae, does this sword have a name? There is a name the assassin named, but I wont tell you, so please give it a new name. That would be good. I nod and look at the wooden sword. I will. While looking at the people around him with a comfortable face, Heo Gyeom says, There are perks for living so long. Im glad I have a lot to hand out. I listen to Heo Gyeoms calm voice without saying much and turn my head to the main hall door. I could hear somewhat urgent footsteps, and the Blood Night Palace warriors appeared in the main hall. The young warrior reports with a pale face, Id like to inform you that the Cult Leader is on his way to see Elder Heo. I look at the people of Blood Night Palace to find out what this is about. Seeing everyone turn pale, it seems that they must be uninvited guests. The only calm person, Heo Gyeom, replies in a calm tone. How far did he come? Hes already nearby. He has his people on standby, and he will come alone so that Blood Night Palace doesnt have to be wary so that Elder Heo will not feel uncomfortable, is what he said. Heo Gyeom nods. Its just a visit, so theres no need to overreact. In the meantime, I try to figure out the situation despite feeling like a party-pooper. Theres nothing I can do in particular. I ask, thinking I heard it wrong. Did sunbae change religions in your later years? Since the Cult Leader is coming. . I accept the situation because nobody answers. The leader of the Demon Cult is nearby. It feels very refreshing and thrilling. Editors Note A Jangsam is a full length, flaxen hemp dress that is known to be a buddhist monks garment. The image I linked is an actual Jangsam excavated from the tomb of the Jongjung Na family dating back to the early Joseon Dynasty from the early 16th C 17th century. ?? Chapter 151 Chapter 151 C Lee Zaha, You Got Something To Say? The warmhearted atmosphere quickly subsides at the news of the Cult Leaders arrival. When nobody utters a word, Heo Gyeom says, This is a request from this old geezer. Blood Night Palace Leader answers. Go ahead. I know everyone has mixed feelings about the Cult Leader. So do I. However, if the Cult Leader says hes here to visit, it will be nothing more than that, so I hope nothing else happens here. Blood Night Palace Leader says to Gyo Young. You should go. YoungEr1, go stay inside. Gyo Young gets up without a word and disappears inside. Perhaps the leaders tone was more serious than usual. Then Blood Night Palace Leader looks at me. Leader, nothing good will happen if you run into him, so you should go in and rest. The members of Blood Night Palace and Elder Heo will take it from here. Blood Night Palace Leader is talking smack. You dont get that many opportunities to see the Cult Leader up close. I cant do that. I wont allow it. At this point, I know better than anyone else that all the masters here cant take him down even if they come at him at once. So, I have to stay and watch over this situation. As Heo Gyeom said, he is only here for a visit. Blood Night Palace says sternly, Then stay out of it. Please Im a quiet person. Blood Night Palace lets out a short sigh. Perhaps she thinks that Blood Night Palace will be wiped out if she breathes the wrong way, but in fact, you couldnt put it past the Cult Leader. Then, the main hall door opens normally, sounding like a thunderbolt. Everyone, including me, stares at the main hall. . The Cult Leader, who appears from the main hall, has an unexceptionally large frame and blocks all the light coming from the outside. Thanks to this, the interior of the main hall has become dark. When the Cult Leader begins to walk in, the darkness in the main hall also disappears. His stride was neither slow nor fast, but strangely, it felt like he walked in after stopping time. There is no way to express his behavior and expression. Even though hes walking normally, it seems like he is trampling on something as he walks. Words like arrogance and pride could not even come close to describe a human being like him. Fucking moron, what a unique aura. This is my first time seeing the Cult Leader. When I was invited to the Demon Cult, he was training in seclusion so there was no way I could have met him. Heo Gyeom greets first. Welcome, Cult Leader. Forgive me for not being able to get up because of my poor health. When Heo Gyeom says he couldnt get up, strangely, everyone else gets up from their seats. When I insist on not getting up, Yong-myeong comes and takes the chair next to me and approaches the Leader. Yong-myeong is deliberately blocking my view with his body, so I have to peek from the side and look at the approaching Cult Leader. As if something was very funny, the Cult Leader was smiling ever since he entered the hall. What the hell is he laughing about? Is he gonna get lucky if he smiles a lot? I dont know. When Yong-myeong puts down the chair where one could sit and see Heo Gyeom in the eye and steps away Cult Leader sits in his chair and says to the visitors, Take a seat. As soon as Blood Night Palace Leader meets his eyes, she says, Hello, Brother Cult Leader nods and answers Blood Night Palace Leader. Our youngest has aged a lot too. Yes, indeed. The rest of the people, except Blood Night Palace Leader, bow at the same time. Nice to meet you, Cult Leader. The leader, who is nodding, stares at me. . I also move my head to look at the Cult Leader. Then I realize that Im a nutcase. Why on earth did I smile as soon as I saw the Cult Leader? I have no idea why Im reacting this way. However, Cult Leader diverts his eyes off of me smiling, and looks at Heo Gyeom. Elder Heo, 111 years. You have lived a long time. Heo Gyeom nods. Ive lived a long time. I scratch my ear with my finger. Perhaps the Cult Leaders voice is mixed with inner Qi, it feels like blood is coming out of my ears. Maybe if he let out a lions roar in that voice, most of the people here would suffer internal injuries. His appearance alone is already tiring, so I try to calm my breathing and watch Cult Leader and Elder Heo. Cult Leader asks Elder Heo, How do you feel to be at deaths door? Is this a question you should be asking a sick person? But I knew it wasnt a joke after seeing the Cult Leaders expression. Heo Gyeom replies, I want to live longer. I still want to do so much. On the other hand, its a relief to think that Im finally ending this painful life. However, I feel more regret than relief. Cult Leader nods, What makes you have such regrets? Heo Gyeom looks at the Cult Leader and speaks informally. Its a pity that I couldnt kill you with my own hands. Cult Leader shakes his head and lets out a laughter that sounds like metal clashing. Thats so like you. I learned all about assassins from you, theres no way I would fall for it. You are not a sloppy teacher. As he is talking, Cult Leader looks up and down at Yong-myeong and continues. Youre the last disciple. Yong-myeong answers with a slight bow. Yes, Leader. No matter if you die or live, there is a high possibility that you will not be able to reach your masters toes, so work harder than you are now. Yong-myeong answers dryly. I will keep that in mind. Cult Leader looks at Blood Night Palace Leader and says, Elder Heo raised me in hell anyway, so send him to the cult when the time comes. Ill train him. Blood Night Palace Leader answers politely. All right. When I looked at Yong-myeong, his face had already turned pale. Heo Gyeom asks in curiosity, What makes you come all the way here? Cult Leader says as if it were natural, I have to come to see you. I didnt die after joining the cult. If I was about to die, you would come to the cult and see me, right? Heo Gyeom nods, Come to think of it, youre right. Cult Leader really did come to see Elder Heo. I watch the expression of the old manly senior and observe the Cult Leaders expression at times. I could tell that there was a long history between the two that couldnt be summarized in a few words. Cult Leader smiles and looks at Blood Night Palace Leader. Without Elder Heo, I wouldve never become the Cult Leader. Blood Night Palace Leader nods, I agree. My husband also helped you out a lot, Brother. The other day, I heard Blood Night Palace Leaders husband was killed by the Cult Leader. In response, the Cult Leader replies, He was an excellent man. If I hadnt been greedy, I would have been the Left Hand or Right Hand. By the way, didnt Sword Demon come to visit you? Dont tell me he went into hiding like YoungEr when he heard I was coming. Blood Night Palace Leader replies, We contacted him, but he hasnt arrived yet. Cult Leader asks with a grin, Is he still living shabbily, wielding a wooden sword? I dont know much about that. Cult Leader looks around and says, Many people left while I was immersed in training. Looking back, I enjoyed myself the most when I fought with my successor. Nobody thought about leaving at the time. I had countless nights of falling asleep once every three days, and at times I was only able to get some shut eyes in five days. I was able to sleep because of Elder Heo. The assassin of assassins. Even when I closed my eyes, Elder Heo dealt with my enemies, but somehow I miss those times. Elder Heo smiles and nods a few times. He must be reminiscing about the past. Cult Leader calls for Elder Heo, Elder Heo. Go on. Many people have betrayed me, but I have never betrayed anyone first. The same goes for you. Most of them left me after betraying their past promise. Heo Gyeom responds, Am I the same? The leader nods. You too. The common traits of the masters who taught me was to tell me not to put limits on growing stronger. But when I reached a certain point, they repeated the same thing over and over again. Do you have to go that far? Thats what you used to say to me. Heo Gyeom admits it without hesitation, I did. Why did you do that? Why did you go against your words? Heo Gyeom replies with a tired look, It is because Im human, Leader. Then why didnt you teach the assassins manners first in the cult? Did you do that? I couldnt. What did you say to the people who wanted to survive? I told them they have to be a demon to survive. The Cult Leader nods. I grew up believing that. Thats what Ive been taught since I started walking, and one day, you said I couldnt. I didnt think it was insulting, but I was taken aback. If we hadnt lived like demons, you and I would have already died to fight for the position. No? I look at Heo Gyeom in surprise for a moment. Transparent tears were flowing from the eyes of the old manly senior. I cant tell if it was regret or repent. Cult Leader smiles at the tears. Is it because youre old? You cry easily. You are Heo Gyeom wipes away tears with his fingers and says, If I were to go back in time, Id be living like a demon again. To survive, I didnt have a choice. However, if I saw the leader gradually straying the human path over the years again Id still advise you not to do it. Cult Leader, people change. Cult Leader nods. Thats true. Because of your interference, I still couldnt become the Greatest in the World. I cant go any further considering the limitations. How pathetic. Heo Gyeom asks, Does the fact that having enemies infuriate you so much, despite being so powerful? Havent you already killed enough, considering how many people have died? Thanks to the process weve gone through to survive, how can I stop when more and more people are trying to kill me? Your teachings dont add up. A sigh naturally flows out of my mouth. I think I know why the leader came here. Im not trying to tell anyone this, but this is the state of the leader in my opinion. He is a man with little humanity left. He isnt here to say his last goodbyes to Elder Heo, but to say goodbye to humanity overall. The Cult Leader asks, Elder Heo, do you have a wish? Heo Gyeom looks at the Cult Leader and laughs with a nasally voice. You wont grant it for me anyway. Cult Leader nods. I know what it is. Cult Leader gets up from his seat and stares at Heo Gyeom. Heo Gyeom nods and says, Goodbye, Cult Leader. Lets meet in the afterlife when you die. Then I will resolve my regrets and apologize for teaching you wrong. Cult Leader shakes his head. You and I are on different paths now, so we wont be able to meet in the afterlife. Only then did Cult Leader look at Blood Night Palace Leader and the people around and say, Do your best. I will see you again. I make eye contact with the Cult Leader for a moment. At that moment, Cult Leader smiles and asks me. Lee Zaha, you got something to say? He watches the world through an intelligence organization in the first place, so it wasnt that surprising that he recognized me out of the blue. I answer placidly, Ill be working on it, so Ill see you again at the right time. All right, I look forward to it. Elder Heo will also have high expectations for you. When Cult Leader looks around the people again, everyone has to keep their mouths shut. Suddenly, Cult Leader looks around the main hall and says in a mocking tone, I dont know why all the people who left the cult like the palace. The same goes for making it so elaborate that it looks good when you break it down. Leaving for the main hall alone, Cult Leader put his hands behind him and looks up at the sky outside. He blocks out all the light from entering the main hall, turns his head and says goodbye. Farewell, Master. I cant see the Cult Leaders face well due to the backlight, but as soon as he finishes speaking, it seems like he is smiling. Heo Gyeom also says goodbye to the Cult Leader. Go back safely. Cult Leader answers casually as he goes down the stairs, Yes, its nice to see you. You die of old age. It cant be helped. I stop my awe of the Cult Leader and check on Heo Gyeom first. Heo Gyeom was breathing with his eyes closed. When I looked at the others, everyone was still in a daze. Not just Blood Night Palace Leader but everyone else was having trouble catching their breaths. The owner of Moonshine Inn, the weakest of the bunch, was shaking his hands and feet like a person suffering from a cold. Get a grip, the Cult Leader is gone. I slapped the owner of Moonshine Inn next to me on the cheek. Get a hold of yourself. Yes. Everyone shakes their heads a few times at the loud smack. Worried about the old manly sunbae, I ask, Sunbae, are you alright? Heo Gyeom opens his eyes quietly and says with a bitter look. I think my lifespan is reduced by a few days. Ah, shit. Should I laugh at this or not? I nod while pinching my thigh. I try to come up with an appropriate answer, but I cant. It was the first time that someone joked about their lifespan in front of me, so I just joined the others in taking deep breaths. Haa. Translators Note A bit of context, Er is child in Mandarin and is more prevalent in ancient Chinese culture, it is equivalent to the English -y or -ie ending, and used as a term of endearment.- TL ?? Chapter 152 Chapter 152 C Ah, This Is So Thrilling I closed my eyes for a moment and reviewed the words of the Cult Leader. If you want to beat me to death later, it is because you couldnt digest the words said. Conversation hides the character and weakness of a person. And to copy It seems that the subordinates often prevented the Cult Leader from teaching the Heavenly Pearl. And considering the personality of Elder Heo, he would have said it directly too. In addition, the fact that the Cult Leader often practiced in closed training means that either he hadnt yet completed the martial arts or that he was learning more about it. However, no matter how much I looked back at our conversation, I cant see anything that could be regarded as weak in my character. Rather, I noticed right away that something was up and avoided it.. It seemed like because Yong-myeong is the last disciple of elder Heo is how he knew something about me. The reason he even realized that I was receiving the attention of elder Heo was probably because of the wooden sword in his hand. It means he is a meticulous man who has good insight but doesnt let others know of it. It is likely his humanity has turned thin considering how he spoke as if he had no feelings for his people in front of the Blood Night Palace Lord1. Then this bastard An excellent person with insight, quick witted, and obsessed with completing the martial arts. Then, the only weakness he has would be the fact that his focus of martial arts is too much. Because this guy often goes into closed training, the allies who were in high positions, such as Elder Heo and Sword Demon, must have chosen to walk out. The reason that I was even able to steal the Heavenly Pearl is because the Cult Leader was training. Other than that, I could see no weakness. After I opened my eyes, I had no choice but to ask. I am sorry that I came to visit you only to ask questions, but I really need to. Blood Night Palace Lord says, Ask me. Do you know why the Cult Leader often rushes for closed room training? She nods. Of course, I do. During the time when there was a struggle for the succession, he used the martial arts of his family. It wasnt until he became the Cult Leader that he trained in the other martial arts that were used by the former cult leaders. Moreover, it must be because the martial art of the cult is the toughest. One has to learn about Yin and Yang qi at the same time to achieve great results. It is difficult since there hasnt been one who excelled in that for several years. If one cannot achieve that, they will not be given the title of Heavenly Demon. Just Cult Leader. Hmm. Actually, if Sahyung had skills it wouldnt have been strange for people to call him Heavenly Demon right now. However, even Sahyung knows that people wouldnt just obey others. Become one of the strongest, be the best in the world, or master martial arts of the cult. Only when one of the three is accomplished will Sahyung find peace. I nod. And none of the three could be done. A worthless. Of course, no one laughed at my words. . I checked the condition of Heo Gyeom. Originally he was a man with great composure, so it seemed like he took less psychological damage than others. Im curious so I also ask, Please tell me about the third disciple. There is a lot of misinformation out there, but no one seems to know. Blood Night Palace Lord answers, It is true that very few know the details of it. Elder, can I tell what I know? Heo Gyeom answers. Please say. The woman says, The Cult Leader had taken down the families which participated in the succession fight. It wasnt just a massacre of the family. It is so much more because the subordinates and helpers to those people within the cult were found and tortured to death. It was normally customary to spare them. But it wasnt a law that they had to be spared. Because the fight happening was so fierce that one side was sure to die, and it was too horrid of a sight to see, neither Elder Heo nor anyone else came ahead to oppose it. Sahyung must have thought that he had to change everything from the beginning, so he began to kill those opposing him in the succession race. Families with even the slightest doubt were being harassed. That is what happened. I say what I know about it. A disaster caused by the path of demons we took. She nods. It is a disaster we brought on by pursuing the path. As you can see, Sahyung has no humanity left now. If one deliberately enters the training of his because he didnt kill Elder Heo then one should consider being ready to lose their life. There was a time when I heard about how thin the humanity of the man called Cult Leader was. The Cult Leader I had heard of never had humanity. I turn to Heo Gyeom. Then the Three Disaster you dealt with is not the Cult Leader Heo Gyeom nods. I have never had a direct fight with the Cult Leader. The man I dealt with is Heavenly Evil. And to be precise it wasnt even dealing; it was more like I was attacked and struggled to live. I feel irritated so I ask, What kind of guy is he? Heo Gyeom laughs. I am curious too. So, I asked the person concerned but, as you can see, the result is as such. My martial arts vanished. After that, he must have moved somewhere and competed with the Cult Leader. The Cult Leader returned with a serious injury, however, when I met with the Three Disaster, the man said he couldnt still be called the best. It wasnt until the end that I realized what this was. An era without the best. Heo Gyeom nods. If the Cult Leader had made up his mind to stray from the path of humans, the other two would have already deviated before him. And about half of them are living long lives so calling them Evil Gods wouldnt be that odd. In the past, my dream was to be the best in the world. I planned to hold it off for a while. First, this is a situation where I have to set a goal before beating down the warriors ahead. If that was the case. It is said that the reason why it didnt happen perfectly in the previous life was because there were different Three Disasters. At that point what if the Cult leader took the Heavenly Pearl? I laughed at the thought. Ah, I already saved Kangho once before? I say this to the Black Demon. That there would be an answer to becoming the Demon God in my poop. And I was right. if I hadnt eaten the pill, the Cult Leader would have been the Demon God. Thinking about it, I suddenly think that the relationship between the Black Demon and my poop is rather deep. I looked at Heo Gyeom for a moment because he was looking this way. Senior, today you spent too much of your energy because of the Cult Leader. I am going to discuss trivial things with the palace lord, please understand and rest. And do understand that there are disjointed things happening. I look at Yong-myeong and then he approaches his master and says, Master, take a break. Heo Gyeom nods. Yes. And Heo Gyeom begins to move out and I look at the wooden sword he hands me. After Heo Gyeom disappears, I say to her, Palace Lord, let the two of us talk. She turns to me puzzled. Do we have to? I pointed my finger at her people who were here. It is because I feel a bit uncomfortable. There must be someone in the palace who is in contact with the Cult Leader. Of course, I am not saying these ones are those. Anyway, I want to talk so please understand. And she nods. I will talk to the sect leader. You people should get some rest. At that, the people bowed to their Lord and leave as she says, Now what? It will be impossible to find the snitch now because it cannot be just one or two. No matter where you run, it looks like the whereabouts are constantly being reported. The Blood Night Palace Lord sighs. There is no way. When the time comes, we have to fight till death. When do you think that will be? You must know the leader a lot better than me. The Blood Night Palace Lord nods. Not right now. He must have come because he was worried about sending Elder Heo away without seeing him off. If there is a collision with Im So-baek on the way out then it would be an all-out war with the troops, so returning back would be the priority. There are several reasons why the Cult Leader will not attack us right now. Go on. Too many people have died in the past. Individual forces are strong, but if a war of such a thing occurs without a decision, the blow for the cult would be too much. He himself needs training but he will also need time to strengthen the troops too. It will take another 3 years. I nod. Then let us assume the worst. Troops trained. Within three years, Cult Leader could come here alone and annihilate the entire palace. Blood Night Palace Lord smiles. No matter how strong he gets, he wouldnt come here alone. Why? It is because Sword Demon is constantly there to keep him in check and I met you today. I heard you have an alliance with Im So-baek? You know? If I know then the Cult Leader should also know. Originally, you would think he can clean down this palace on his own but there are variables. Sahyung is quite prudent in nature, so everything will be fully considered. If he comes and turns up unlucky, he will have to deal with me, Sword Demon, and you at the same time. What does that mean? I smile listening to her words. Ah, that means I am in danger too. Either bite the palace or get rid of you. Either leave us both behind and focus on training or move after removing Sword Demon. Sahyung is a smart person. I ask her. how did you interpret this when you are struggling? Thinking of something, the Blood Night Palace Lod furrows her words. The thing elder Heo almost objected to was to make the sacred thing called Heavenly Pearl. The Cult Leader was against it, so the ones supporting them too. Maybe he didnt mean to hold on until it is made perfectly? Certainly, this woman knew a lot of things because she is the samae2 to the Cult Leader. What is the Heavenly Pearl used for? It is in my body, but I was being polite to her. And she said, It is a pill made from force. It may have been written as a methodology for cultivating the martial arts Cult Leader wants. If the Cult Leader concentrates on training and subordinates prepare him the pills then the time for him to step up would be less. It is a guess but when making the Heavenly Pearl, many will die. I tell her, Palace Lord, please look into that thing again. When will it all be completed? Or is it already completed and waiting to be used? There are already those clinging to you yet working for the Cult Leader, so you will have to move. Either with spies or send people to enlist into the cult. How can we fight without martial arts? Blood Night Palace Lord sighs. The right person. Dont we have one? Who? I say in a calm tone. Yong-myeong. How can we send the last disciple of Elder Heos to his death? I speak clicking my tongue. Lord, can you always be sure of when it is? Right now, this place is closer to the end than inside of the cult. Right. I will think about it. Anyway, be careful now. I dont think the Cult Leader is stupid. I shake my head. Do not worry about me. Why? I deliberately start pretending to be proud of myself to assure her. I was actually on my way to be a master In psychological warfare, mind reading, and a master in psychology. She looks confused and asks, What good is that? It means that I have it all ready. The more the cult knows about me, the harder it will be to report to the Cult Leader. Why? It is because I am a regular server. A vulgar and degrading man. Hmmm I point to the sky. If the Cult Leader is as honorable as me, I point my hand down and say, I am a man crawling up from the bottom. There is a man whose rank is so low that the Cult Leader wouldnt directly deal with me. So, he will send his subordinates. Furthermore, the name of the sect I lead is the Low-Down Sect. It is not the bottom level that a Cult Leader would touch. you have your plans. I was worried for nothing. There are more reasons. With the eyes of the Cult Leader, he would have noticed about both yin and yang qi being mastered too. And I say, Materials like me are rare things to get in Kangho. But I am not that ripe yet. She laughs but then groans in pain. And I speak to her in a serious tone. Smile comfortably. It was only then that she burst into laughter looking up. Well, a man who risked his life and learned how to joke with an old senior, that is me. Actually, if I die, the situation in Kangho is done. The fate of Kangho was resting in my mind. Ah, just how thrilling is this. Editors Note Samae is a term for higher female disciple. ?? Chapter 153 Chapter 153 C I Thought Of Something Impossible. Blood Night Palace Lord laughed loudly at my sincerity. Palace Lord, you are laughing so loudly at the cost of your life. Sorry. However, she is a woman who fights back. You pinched your thighs too. I nod. Lets count it as a draw. But I will draw up a map and give the letter, so hurry up and bring the physician from the Moyong family. It has been a long time since elder Heo met a physician. It isnt my business, just bring him. Elder Heo might be alright. However, it is up to the physician to make the right judgment and treatments. Whether one manages to live for one year or ten more. We try everything until the bodies move. And Palace Lord, there is something I have been thinking about since before. Yes. If the worst happens, put down the pride and surrender. To the enemy? I glare at her. Did you think being a leader is easy? Survive at any cost. Until the last, last moment. I can bear more of the humiliation than surrender, but I know to do both. But he is not one to accept it. Surrendering well is also an ability of a leader. Think. She looks at me and asks, Are you going to surrender in the final moment when the Cult Leader wins? I put up two fingers, then fold them one by one. If there are many subordinates around then I will surrender, but if I am alone then I will fight to the death. The Blood Night Palace Lord nods. Thinking that puts me at peace. We have a lot to think about because we are the leaders of our groups. What about powers other than leaders? She says, First, there is Sword Demon who has been helping out. If I die, there will be a new one picked. And there are candidates as young cult leaders. All are of young age or a bit over young. It means the same age as you. They are the heirs to the family that held me hostage. Children whose father lacks humanity maybe history will repeat itself. How does the Cult Leader treat his kids? Might wonder who is stronger. He teaches martial arts which he says should be learned, and they learn the martial arts from the maternal side and learn the arts of Demon Cult. Their personalities are different, and their martial arts are also different. I felt it for a long time, but for those in the path of demons, they view the fights of their kids as fun. If it was a normal person, all the children would be treated nicely. She bursts into laughter. Do not expect anything like that. He is the kind who likes a killer more than kids who arent skilled. After the messy meeting to make plans, I ask for writing tools to be brought along with a booklet and hand it down to the Palace Lord. Take this. You dont have to tell him. Its just that once you get there, you need to meet them at all costs. She looks at me and says, Sect Leader. Yes Thank you for caring about me in various ways. The first time I saw you, I wanted to pound you to death, but I never thought that my impression about you would change. I am a good person who is good at highlighting things about myself but someone else praising me is not something I am used to. So, I show the wooden sword and ask her, How do you use this sword? It is too light. Wait. She snaps her fingers and then a warrior appears from the side. They take the letter and map that I gave, and she says, Bring the physician here. A carriage of the fastest horses will be taken from the palace and leave right now. Let them know it is the leader of the Low-Down sect who is calling and be polite. He is an acquaintance of the Sect Leader. I understand. The Palace Lord looks at her men and then tells me, Let us do all that we can. Yes. And that is when she extends her hand to me. Give the sword. She extends her hand and I give the wooden sword which she holds and speaks as she walks to the center of the hall. This is the sword of murder. The basics of the Murder Sword is to slash at once. So, make it as light as possible. As you know, since you are learning martial arts, you should know how difficult the sword technique training is. It is endless. And I will show you. While holding the wooden sword in her left hand, she gazes at a place on the wall which was on the other side of the hall. In an instant, her form moves in a straight line, she draws the sword in the middle, and brings the tip of the sword to the spot she was staring at. This is the first step. She slowly returns to her original position and gazes at the wall again. This time, she moves as if there are obstacles in her way to the wall. Movements so light and soft. However, like a person carrying a wooden sword with weight, she has balance in her form when she moves. The body of hers which had been moving around the battlefield constantly, pulled the sword and held it out the moment she got to the wall. To my eyes this seemed like a single reaction. And she asks me, This is the second step. How do you compare it to the first? The same. Right. In the end it is the same. Then I dont have to explain more. The rest is how you use it. This is the Murder Sword. A fairly difficult martial art. She nods. Martial arts combine all sorts of body movements to unleash an extremely simple sword at fast speed. In other words, start simple, practice complicated and then go back to being simple when it comes to killing. This is also the martial arts of elder Heo. I applaud. It is a really cool martial art. The process, however, will be painful. It is because it is a martial art which has no power at all until training to a certain point. Literally, it is a martial art that utilizes just one hit to kill the opponent. Of course, if trained to do it right then this sword will be strong. I received the sword back from her. The world is wide. She nods. And there are many obstacles. The others might have happiness at the sight of their name being spoken while there are those who want to hide. There are those who delude others. But one who wants to kill will have to drive the sword into the neck even into the one who hides in darkness. She speaks. The most horrid killer attack I have witnessed was that of a murderer who killed the opponent with their own sword. I shake my head. I cannot do that much. I cannot live in such a place at all. But I will try to understand. Anyway, since I did attract the attention of the Cult Leader, his people might come. Suddenly, I was thinking according to what I remembered but things changed drastically. Now doesnt this mean an assassin can come when I am asleep? This is fucked up. She asks, What is with that expression? Because I am angry. This sudden? I have been controlling myself, so give me food. Come to think of it, I wasnt even offered a glass of water. I will have that prepared. She was about to go inside. Lord, wait a minute. I dont want to eat alone, so let us eat together. Uh For a while, I stare at her as she leaves and then look at an afterimage smiling. Because of you I cannot sleep well. Let us see who wins. I cannot think of a way to defeat the Cult Leader, but this is not a problem that can be solved by martial arts alone. Summoning Moyong Baek, helping the palace Lord, saving elder Heo, introducing Sword Demon to Moyong Baek All these actions were done to kill the Cult Leader. Cult Leader is getting stronger by training in martial arts. And I am fighting with life slowly. Suddenly the words of a sage resounded. Rationalism is stronger than any expert. Was it like this? The words I read somewhere in the past were coming into my mind now. That is why I read the book several times. Actually, Cult Leader wasnt an opponent who can be instantly defeated. In terms of martial arts, not just the current me, but also the Palace Lord, Sword Demon, and Im So-baek are weak. Then, we have to beat the others instead of Cult Leader. Since the man is living a life which isnt right, if I want to defeat him, I have no choice but to respond by being a warrior. Shocking. A situation which takes the breath away. It is because I am far from acting warrior-like. A warrior? Any passing one would laugh. Even I would laugh but I keep thinking about how to keep the Palace Lord from being taken down by the Cult Leader. Is there any way? I thought to find out. I barely come up with an answer to the frustrating question as I sit with people of the Blood Night Palace around. While eating rice little by little. I am shocked, and I just thought of something. Hear this. I put something in my mouth and then put rice and side dishes. Palace lord sighs. Sect Leader, eat slowly and then speak. Fine It is a simple task, but it seems like she isnt used to multitasking. And its not for me to decide. She rules the place here. I glance at the subordinates of hers around and say, Now lets make the palace open. It is time to blend into Kangho. We are a divided faction within the Demon Cult, who would want us? Since I cannot yell at her here, I calmly try to respond. It is better than death. Leave the doors open. Unleash out your things. Also, stop any work being done. There are too many intruders so just leave it open for people to move. Actually, invite people too. Like? First, invite our Low-Down Sect. Invite, Sword Demon senior, and notify the Murim Alliance. She accepts what I say without any words. And for what reason? I replied assuming this woman would be alive for another 3 years. Declaring war on the Unorthodox. Declaration that you will be taking a different path from the cult. An honest request for help from Kangho. A notice to abandon the name of the Blood Palace. In the end, we are being threatened by the Demon Cult Leader, and we are sharing information about how this palace can be annihilated in a year or two. Everyone looks at me with their chopsticks put down as if the rice got stuck in their throats. . As I drink a glass of alcohol and watch, I continue. reach out if you want to survive. You will have to ask for help. Send a well-spoken man to the alliance to grab their legs and that of Im So-baek. If kicked out, send them again and do it again. Even for those proud families of martial arts, send them what they want, letters or things. Try to open up and interact with the Beggars Union. Like last time, if Alliance Leader Im asks for help in clearing out bandits, step in. I grinned. I will follow along, but this is fun. Look a lot. Anyway, this is a place from the Demon Cult, but youre reaching out asking to be saved. Do everything you can. You should try everything. Everyone was silent. But I am a man who has many things to say. What is the meaning of living like a frog in a well only to be beaten to death by the Cult Leader? I heard that Cult Leader is desperate, but he isnt stupid. If we will have to fight then we need to show that we are struggling to get help. Looking at the people around, I say, I made a promise to Elder Heo. Even if the land gets turned, the Low-Down Sect will help the Blood Night Palace. So, this is a matter with my life at stake. I am not going to die in vain. I drink mumbling that. There are still a lot of people I need to take down before death. I look at the Palace Lord. Senior. It is time to put down the pride. Being stubborn and dying is something strong people can do. Do you want to burn to death and take down your subordinates with you, or take revenge? Think and then decide. I look at the young lord1. Young Palace Lord. Yes. I heard the Cult Leader say the reason for building the palace. Said it would look good when it would get burned down. If the palace remains then the position will be handed over to you. If this place gets burned down, all your subordinates will die, and you will end up as nothing. A woman and a child who will be burned to death before turning 20. She looks surprised and I look at her. That is what happened in the previous life. The Lord taps the table with her hand. Do not scare her. That is the reality. She crosses her arms and says, the palace doors will be opened up. Changing the name too. and a messenger will be sent. I sigh and drink. The food which felt clogged was coming down. Kuak.! Calming my mood, I say, Sorry. Editors Note To clarify, the Young Palace Lord is Lady Gyo Young (forehead flick girl heh). ?? Chapter 154 Chapter 154 C The Heart Of Gold I tell the people of Blood Night Palace what Im thinking. Elder Heo. This old manly guy is a rare senior. . I hope things change so that you feel like you can walk out of this place without worrying about the people in here. Only then did I look at my protruding belly. Had too much. When I came here, I only ate beef jerky. I ate really well. The Palace Lord nods. I am glad you enjoyed it. I need a room. I thought it wouldnt be right if I called in a benefactor only to leave first. We sleep, practice, drink, and talk until teacher comes. Cheap as ever. If I see any suspicious guy when walking around I will treat them as an idiot and punish them. Only then did the two who were eating, laugh. It was only now that they got used to me. Palace Lord nods her head. They are important ones, so true. I show my fingers to the young lord who is staring at me. I train at finger flicking too. I laughed so hard, but since no one laughed apart from me, I stopped. let us leave. Moyong Baek who ran at the call of Low-Down Sects leader speaks in a cautious tone in front of Heo Gyeoms residence. .. can I come in? After a while, Yong-myeong comes with a puzzled face. Who are you? Moyong Baek introduces himself. A physician called by the Sect Leader of the Low-Down. Sect Leader called you? Yes. And where is he? He only informed me to come here and he went. Yong-myeong looks at Moyong Baek in confusion. Master doesnt like physicians very much. Heo Gyeoms voice could be heard. Bring them Yes. Bringing them in. Moyong Baek is guided by Yong-myeong and looks around before he enters a room which was unusually large with a bamboo smell. It was a boring room with no paintings, just things smelling like bamboo. Moyong Baek bows his head to the old man in a white robe. Moyong Baek of Moyong family. Heo Gyeom replies, turning away from the window. If the Sect Leader sent you, you must be a skilled one. Moyong Baek thinks for a moment and then smiles. You are right. I did treat a lot of people. Heo Gyeom smiles as he holds out his hand. You must have gone through a lot to come here. Moyong Baek looks around and takes a deep breath. I cant tell so I have to ask but is this bamboo scent coming in from the outside? Yes. Why do you seem surprised? Bamboo is said to bloom flowers once every few decades. It is an unfamiliar scent. Heo Gyeom nods. Come to think of it, the physician is young. Come sit. The two sit across from each other at the long wooden table and look. Moyong Baek asks, Senior, may I know your age? I will be 111 years old. I thought you were around 70 but I was wrong about 40 years. Trying to joke? As you said, do you think I should have lowered the age? Heo Gyeom laughs out loud and holds his arm out. You want to check? Yes. Moyong Baek stretches out his hand to check his pulse and touches Heo Gyeoms palm. You are a swordsman? Swordsman? Yes. Did you come here without hearing anything about me? Blinking his eyes Moyong Baek replies, Sect Leader sent a letter Sent? And told me to come quickly so I hurried. He helps you? No. he is my patient. Huhuhu. If not a swordsman then blade? Or do you use a spear? This isnt a normal palm. Heo Gyeom replies, No. I It wasnt easy to say what Heo Gyeom was. There was pride but when he thought about how he almost died, the pride turned to regret. These regrets have increasingly made it tough for him to maintain his calm. Heo Gyeom speaks to the young guy feeling guilt. I have retired. Moyong Baeks eyes widened. Ah, I see. Moyong Baek touches the palm and next grabs his wrist and inspects him. have you lost internal qi? As soon as Heo Gyeom nods, Moyong Baek hurriedly removes his hand. Moyong Baek needed to process what he just heard. He is 111 years old, and he lost his internal qi. How the hell did this man survive until now? The strangest thing is that he had no other special health problems. Moyong Baek stared at Heo Gyeom. Did he try to take his own life? Heo Gyeom asks as the young physician is trying to figure his health out. How is the condition? Moyong Baek responds. Hmm, you have taken wonderful care of your health senior. It is difficult for one to maintain health as such. It seems like you have also been taking a lot of care for your mental health. If only Low-Down Sect Leader can calm himself down like senior does, his madness would be buried in no time. Heo Gyeom laughs. It wont happen. The way we live is different. Or the mindset of ours is different. I am only calm because I have been trained to keep my composure. There was no special method for it. Is that so? Well, if Low-Down Sect Leader comes to learn under you, he wouldnt be able to stand it for even ten days and run away. It is a martial art that you have to train from the heart, but that mans temperament wouldnt let it happen. Heo Gyeom laughs. Just the thought of it makes me laugh. Moyong Baek also laughs without saying anything. Heo Gyeom, who is looking at Moyong Baeks expression, asks, Is there any other reason for the young physician to constantly mention the Low-Down Sect Leader? That is just the truth. Let me hear about it. While inspecting the wooden table in the center, he touches the slightly tilted spot with his hand. The table is split. It has been a long time. Senior, that man has a broken heart just like this table. Madness of his comes and goes. Whats unusual about him is that he doesnt have much of a heart of gold. He doesnt think about hiding it, covering it, or trying to fill the gap in character. However, I am aware of where his wound is. I know how big his wound is. And Im also aware when it pains him the most. I am looking at his wounds objectively to some extent. Such is the attitude of the Low-Down Sect Leader who is dealing with wounds on his heart. Hmmm. The guy is living with a hard heart. Heo Gyeom asks, Then what about me? Moyong Baek says, Thanks to how you maintain your calmness and composure, there is no such thing. Even if there were, you would have filled the wounds without a trace. Because it was a high level of maintenance, no traces would have remained. Heo Gyeom nods. Moyong Baek says with a thin smile. But senior, by nature, everyone has wounds on their heart. Conversely, a person whose heart is never wounded is far from being a human heart. Perhaps senior. Moyong Baek points to the wooden table. Recently, it seems that there is a crack in your heart. You must have had a lot of worries. In the past you handled them amazingly, but now the wound might have widened up. Heo Gyeom stares blankly at the crack on the wooden table. your heart must have feared the Cult Leader. Cult Leader like Demon Cult leader? Right Because the martial art is strong? No. If you put it in how us physicians say, that person would never have a crack in his heart. Right. As far as I know, was that person always like this? There was a certain softness, but it seems that even that has been removed. Moyong Baek nods. Then there is no way that senior, who was able to lie so much, should be afraid of death. You must be concerned for those who will have to stay back. Must be because I am getting too old. Not exactly in that way. Why so? Moyong Baek looks at Heo Gyeom. senior, you didnt just retire from being an assassin because you didnt want to hold the weapons or lost your skills. You have let go of the thought to kill and that is why you retired from that field. The heart of a high-level assassin has no crack but that of a retired one does have cracks. It is because you have finally returned away from the killing part of life and are able to show compassion. It took a long time. Heo Gyeom looks at the table. Moyong Baek says, You have a crack in your heart and so does the Low-Down Sect Leader. And now, my senior, you too have recognized it. In the past you would have covered it with the mindset of killing again, but now this is just. Please say it. It is a burnout Heo Gyeom says with confusion, Burnout? Yes, to some extent you have similar symptoms with Low-Down Sect Leader. It comes and goes for him. However, for senior, you seem to have deep mental control of your mind compared to him, so you cope better. I will have to inform the Sect Leader about the situation of senior. Heo Gyeom hurriedly raises his hand. Ah, do not tell him. Uh? Heo Gyeom says with a complicated expression. I can handle this much. Low-Down Sect leader is handling it, and if I cannot do it. Senior, that man is an odd one so he will not be enduring this in the right way at all. At that time, he was having pain like a stomach burn. But it is bad for you. Ah, because he has a temper around you? Yes, senior. He is pretty ill-tempered, so I need to be careful around the man and act accordingly. Still, seeing that he called me in a hurry means he is quite worried about you. Until I got here I couldnt figure out if I was seeing a patient or someone he kidnapped. How did you even become friends with such an ill-tempered man? Heo Gyeom smiles. I dont know. He is a real man, I like it. It looks like he had killed a hundred bandits not too long back. Someone asked me to make medicine, so I went to visit him, and it was for a beat patient who was laying in the scorching sun. Whether you want to be treated or not, that man is quite vicious. Ah, werent the physician and Sect Leader close? Moyong Baek nods. Before being close as acquaintances, he was my patient. We are friends but his temper is still bad, so I make sure to cover my words politely. I can get beaten too. Heo Gyeom, who tried to be patient, eventually smiles. Right. Moyong Baek lightly holds the mans hand like before and says, Senior, this is also a disease, and it is one which comes up suddenly and then disappears like it never happened. You are doing good and well. That man is also enduring it, so we shouldnt lose this easily to it. Heo Gyeom nods. I will win it. Actually, there is no need for medicine or concoction. So, I will leave. When Heo Gyeom tries to get up, Moyong Baek supports him. You can see me off from here. You worked hard listening to the words of mine. Heo Gyeom nods. Thank you Yes, then. Moyong Baek makes eye contact with Heo Gyeom and bows his head and walks out. Yong-myeong, who was waiting outside, gets up. You are leaving? Moyong Baek answers back. It can be a little difficult, especially during the hot summers. If he is having a hard time in summer, he might feel a bit sicklier due to this. As a result, disciple should learn how to soak plums and then offer them to your master often. Since you are learning martial arts, which needs a lot of time, eating together would be nice too. Yong-myeong lowers his head. Thank you, sir. Yes, then. Moyong Baek leaves the place to go back the way he came from and looks at the top of a large tree. Sect Leader? After a while came a rustling sound and Low-Down Sect Leader landed on the ground. Done? Yes. Why did you climb the tree? He looks around and says, I tried to imitate assassins. This is weirdly fun. you always have fun. I tend to try at all times. Well, it looks like the spies of the Demon Cult are planted around. I see. Low-Down Sect Leader holds out his hand as if he wants to walk. Lets take a walk. How was senior? Moyong Baek lowers his voice and says, Burnout. Uh? Well, that is good. His life force seems weakened, and he doesnt seem to be eating well. Um, then how? Plums stimulate appetite so it shouldnt be a problem. Low-Down Sect Leader nods. As expected of our Moyong! You must have had a lot of trouble coming here in a hurry. There will be more instances like this, so you should hurry up and find a disciple. Moyong Baek stops walking. Uh? Why are you so surprised? You will call me more? To which he answers calmly. Isnt it important to save lives? If I had learned medicine, why would I call you? I could just do the treatments myself. But I couldnt so you came from the horse drawn carriage. And I ran from the Black Rabbit Union all the way here on my two legs while chewing on beef jerky. Lets go. Moyong Baek, speechless, mumbles. Yes. Low-Down Sect Leader mumbled as he walked with hands behind his back. Shall I try the plums too? Moyong baek says, Have alcohol. Right. Lets go get a drink. Moyong Baek is taken away without saying anything else. Chapter 155 Chapter 155 C The Reason We Went To The Sea In Zhejiang. Before I leave the Blood Night Palace Lord, I enter the residence of Elder Heo alone and meet with him quietly. When I appear, Heo Gyeom, who is sitting at the tea table, says, You are leaving? You wont stay a couple days and go? I sit face to face with him and say, Thanks to you I had a good rest. Because I am snooping around here too, the people in the palace must be tired of my actions. Senior, how was the physician you met yesterday? In fact, I introduced them because they wouldnt have likely crossed paths otherwise, but I wasnt sure if Heo Gyeom liked it. Heo Gyeom replies in a comfortable tone. Surprisingly, I feel more at ease. As the nervousness disappeared, breathing turned easier. Sooner or later, I will have to start drinking plums. What about Sect Leader? I will try to organize my thoughts when I return. The Cult Leader wont appear around here for three years. Before that, we will join forces with Alliance leader Im or create a variable to attack the Cult so that senior wont have to work too much. Heo Gyeom nods. How can I not pay attention? But you will hold up well. Thanks to my senior, I was able to see the Cult Leader with my own eyes this time and realize the difference. The Cult Leader is currently in the higher stage of training his martial arts. However, it wont be easy for the Cult Leader to build up the right supreme innate qi. Originally the level of it is too high to even imagine. Senior, you realize what this means? Heo Gyeom looks blankly and then says, The Cult Leader will wait till the end to kill you. Until all grown. As senior can see, the Sect Leader treats me like a bug. It seems like I should use it. I am a bug now. Because of that short meeting with the Cult Leader, all sorts of psychological warfare went around. I grin at Heo Gyeom. Even if I mess up to some extent, the Cult Leader will have no choice but to leave me alone. Because it will be an unsightly thing. Rather, my concern is that senior will miss the fun which happens that is my concern. At that Heo Gyeom nods and smiles. I am fighting with my body well, let me raise you. After helping Heo Gyeom up, I nudged him lightly like I would to a grandfather. Senior, stay healthy and safe. Heo Gyeom pats me on my back. Please let me know about the things that happen from time to time so that theres something to smile about. Even if the news is all shit. After grabbing Heo Gyeoms bony arms, I speak my thoughts. I will do that, senior. We live in Kangho, so every moment must be our last. Let us live and reunite. If I am in danger, I will put my pride on the line and run. Heo Gyeom nods. Lets survive and meet by any means. I stop at the corner of the path after saying goodbye to elder Heo and the people of the palace. When I stop somewhere in the middle, Moyong Baek asks, Sect Leader? This was a road I took before. If I head north from here, I will find the alliance. I can take Moyong Baek to the Murim Alliance and introduce him to Im So-baek. And if we went to the west it would be the Black Rabbit Union. I look to the east. . Going back the way we came; it would mean the Blood Night Palace. The reason I stand at the corner of the street and am lost in thought was because no direction mattered. Why am I feeling this way? Maybe it is because I made up my mind. In order to kill the head of Demon Cult who is living a bad life, I made the pledge to live a righteous one in my heart. So now I dont care whether I go north or south. Whether I go to the alliance or to Black Rabbit union, as long as I dont forget the meaning, every path will be the same. I even thought about how it wouldnt matter if I moved to the end of the east and looked at the coast of Zhejiang. The important thing wasnt the waterbed in Zhejiang, but the attitude I had until I arrived there. What if I go there and see a large fish and what if I dont? Just as fast as the thought enters my mind, I am being dragged around to the coastal waters. Just like how the craziness would make me beat the people around me. I thought of craziness. Why did I get dragged around by that concept? The answer to this has been with me right from the start. Maybe it was because I am an idiot. Only then did I look at Moyong Baek. Lets go. Yes. I thought while walking with him. Why do I wake up so late each time? Seriously. In retrospect, I had no choice but to train in light foot work as if I was experiencing hell because of following the right path. The reason why I am still confident in my footwork is because I know I can use my footwork to move as far as possible in a situation where I would otherwise die. If that is the case, it would be the same for those strong people. In the end, footwork was important to me. I just didnt realize it in my previous life. Until Why go all the way to the coast of Zhejiang? If I decide to take him and he falls down, it would be a hassle to beat him to get him up. All a big burden on me. It will be a lot faster with just my martial arts and to see it alone too1. Moyong Baek sighs. What are you thinking so deeply about? How do I speak about my past life? In the end, I just say, The sea of Zhejiang. Yes. There is a fish the size of a bamboo pole. Moyong Baek looks puzzled. Is that so? I thought of it just now. You were thinking at the crossroads earlier. Where do we go now? Where do you want to go? Do I get a choice? I speak with a smile. Nowhere. You can go anywhere. Actually, I was going to take you to Leader Im So-baek. Moyong Baek responds with an absurd expression. Is that true? I nod with a serious expression. Im So-baek, that side is seriously ill. Even more than senior Heo. He has a burnout of the highest degree. You are great, but that is a complicated thing which wouldnt help him. Elder Heo said. Yes. You must have been embarrassed this time because he was an old man who managed his body well. It seems that he is healthy and well taken care of by himself with no illnesses. Compared to the crazy one, his symptoms were normal. And your help in recovering would be right. Is that a compliment? It is a compliment. But Im So-baek is different. What a Murim Alliance Leader is. Right. I point to my shoulder. The weight of the burden on his shoulder must be the heaviest. Even you cannot take down the weight and pain he has. And it is a problem you cannot stop alone. So, I think there is no need to meet right now. Moyong Baek nods. I do understand it. What the burden is on his shoulders. If he has risen to a position of leader, he probably wont have a normal burnout. Because of this it wont be a simple problem that can be solved easily. Think about it. Im So-baeks burnout as a leader is as good as an elders. However, he is a man who is in the Murim alliance, and it is one which long suffered from the Demon Cult. His subordinates will be concerned too. That is a tricky situation. Originally, Im So-baek was said to have been the commander of the Six Warring Squad, but at that time the entire squad got wiped out except for him. At the hands of Demon Cult. You can cure the man too if you work harder. Me? I stare at him. It would be meaningful and rewarding to work as a physician with skills. Who will treat the Murim Alliance if he is confined to a place at the top all alone? Me? So suddenly? Murim Alliance? What is this? Arent there other physicians? I clicked my tongue. Haha would I have told you about Alliance Leader if there was someone better? Make sense. Sect Leader. What? I might be getting burnout. I burst into laughter holding my stomach. I am sorry. You say that, but you seem to like it so much? See here, Moyong physician. Yes. Have you not heard the saying if there is a blessing, share it, and if there is a weight, carry it together? Yes. If you didnt hear it, say it. Actually, this time I came with around 10,000 coins. If elder Heo collapsed, I would have given the money to the Blood Night Palace and advised them to destroy the palace and move. Fortunately, Elder Heo was holding on and I didnt know that the spies were walking inside. Which is why I stepped back. Like an official embezzling public money. Eat the most delicious food with it. Drink the best and come. Eating and drinking is the way to deal with the Demon Cult. And the money you dont use can be returned back. Your words are so confusing and colorful at the same time. You, too. Dont just lock yourself in that house of yours and eat nice, unseasoned food prepared by those women. Think of unhealthy food as an experience and eat them now. Spicy, sweet and salty ones too. Moyong Baek sighs at my words. Sweet, salty and spicy. Lets go. I walk for a while in search of a nice place and say what comes to mind. Did I tell you that I met Cult Leader at the Blood Night palace a few days before you came? Uh? Moyong Baek groans and then yells in shock making people run in shock. The Cult Leader came to visit Elder Heo in treatment and went back quickly. Ah, so that is why the seniors form collapsed like that. I thought they were talking about their old relationship because the story of the Cult was brought up. How did you feel when you saw it? I laughed at it. He is no longer human. And stronger than I thought. In a short time, I imagined joining forces with the Blood Night Palace Lord to take him down. While I was talking, I could smell something savory and look at the place in the street. Where is this smell coming from? Lets talk while eating. Sure. I look around the street and follow the smell and order noodles, dumplings and also alcohol. As soon as I ordered, Moyong Baek seemed surprised. When do we head home? We will go when we eat well. It feels like since we are here the plan to go faster has been delayed. I tilt my head. What could happen? What kind of world is the world we are living in these days? Though ruthless strongmen and insane evil swordsmen often do that, ah, it isnt so hard. After hearing my words, Moyong Baek falls silent and looks around at the people in the inn. I followed his gaze and looked to see that the customers were all looking at us. Cant you see? This is a peaceful place. The expression of Sect Leader is the one not peaceful. Is that so? I was waiting for the food to come with my wooden sword on the table and one at the waist. After a while, the server sets the food down. I ask Moyong Baek rubbing the chopsticks, There is no poison? None. After absorbing all the noodles into the mouth with three bites of chopsticks. I gulp down the broth and then touch the dumplings and alcohol. Suddenly, while looking at Moyong Baek, I pulled out the blade from my waist2 and handed it to him. Use this for the time being. Moyong Baek must have realized that refusal wouldnt work. I look at him. I am like Poison Demon now. Keep it for self-defense, it is a good sword, and it is one I took after throwing it at the head of the Black Rabbit leader, it is quite sharp. Suddenly, a clear sound rose from my throat and the people of the inn walked away in fright. Moyong Baek asks, Will Sect Leader be alright with the wooden sword? I look at the sword on the table. This isnt a wooden sword. Then? This is the real sword which will stab the throat of the Demon Cult Leader. As soon as I finish my words, I hear a cracking sound and guests running all around. Silence falls around. Suddenly when I look up I see the server with his nose twitching, looking at us tear faced. And then I apologize to him. I guess you are sorry. He politely put his hands in front of me and says, No. enjoy your meal. Moyong Baek looks at me and I say, Lets eat. Yes. He mumbles and chews. It is nice that the inn is quiet. Moyong Baek looks around as if he gives up on answering and says, I know, the place is so quiet. Editors Note To give some clarity on this section, I think Zaha is thinking under the perspective of the Crazy Monk that dragged him around in the past life. It wouldve been faster for the Monk to go by himself if he wanted to go see the fishes, but Zaha thinks about how the Monk chose to bring him even if he had to stop and turn around to beat Zaha when he couldnt keep up. His entire internal monologue was him reminiscing of how he was forced to learn footwork because the Monk dragged him everywhere. ?? Chapter 156 Chapter 156 C Moyong Moyong Moyong, Physician Baek Together with Moyong Baek, I finished off the dumplings and the drinks in the deserted guest house. After gulping down a drink, with a slightly relieved expression, Moyong Baek says to me, Sect Leader, I had a nice meal. Nodding my head I ask, How is it now that youve had something like this after a long time? Moyong Baek smiles and says, Nothing bad. The food in the guest inn wasnt so bad, but I felt like I forced Moyong Baek to have something bad. Actually, despite being a physician, Moyong Baek is actually gentle. And I dont like people who are na?ve without countermeasures. Moyong Baek in his previous life was, in fact, gentler than average so he must have more hidden character than others. I think about it. One side of his heart is white, and the other is black. Like me, he wasnt a guy who had it tough from a young age. Several people died when they touched Moyong Baek. So, I decided that instead of letting that happen far in the future, smearing some dirt right now would be alright. Of course, in my own way. Feed alcohol, some unhealthy food, watch me beat people. In the end wouldnt Moyong Baek come to his senses if I beat a couple and he too beats a couple? It isnt like I have a clear plan or something. I just feel like seeing what it would be like if a great physician and a poisonous demon met halfway. It would be like living in such a world. I was so lost till now, but one has to take medicine when they should and poison when they need to. Now that he is a good-natured physician who comes running at the call of someone sick, I need to make him see what saltwater tastes like. And as expected. As alcohol enters his body, the tone of his talking changes and it seems like he is down, so I smile. Right, let us stop drinking and get up. Yes, now is the right time. Even when I am paying up for the food I am thinking about how to handle him. How much? The server who is wiping the table, approaches with a towel stuck to his waist. 23 If I had a common silver coin, it would be a generous amount and there would be money left over. I was rummaging through my bindle to find the coin and looked inside. It was full of pouches and leftover beef jerky. Moyong Baek, who looks into it, admires it. Wow, Sect Leader, do you have a lot of money? I told you. I have a lot. It is a lot but it is mine. Uh? There is no coin. I have no change to give. Just slips. And giving a money slip here will be embarrassing. Moyong Baek takes something from his bag. I will pay. I knew how the server would look at me if I gave a money slip. If I hand over a slip now, it will be difficult for this place. Moyong Baek takes out a common silver coin from his bag and hands it to the server. And, as soon as he takes it, he squats down and rummages through a box which holds change. At that time, someone comes in from the entrance and says in my direction, Get out. I stare at the guy who mumbled that. A man in his early 20s with a blade around his waist taps the server on the knee who is counting the change. What are you doing? I am here. As soon as the server checks him he says, Ah, one minute Calculate quickly. The guy bends down, grabs the box of change, and then puts his right hand in to pull out a handful of coins. I am going to die of frustration. Fifty coppers? The server who looks at him says, You cannot take them. The man holding the coins pretends he cant hear and asks, What? I didnt hear. Instead of the shocked server, I say, Dont your ears work? Why? Didnt hear? Your ears look fine. Fucking dog. The man turns his head and glares at me. who are you? I swing my left hand at the mans nose and with a thump he is pushed back and loses his balance making him land down on his butt. What, what? Youre the one who needs to be hit. Looking at him I say, You have a nosebleed. Uh? The man touches his nose then checks by wiping his nose. The server who watched this holds out his hand. Wait! He tried to stop us. Haha go out. Go out, yes. The area outside is wide and nice. The man with the blade jumps up holding it and asks, Are you insane? I look at Moyong Baek while pointing to him. This man has amazing insight. Moyong Baek nods. I was thinking the same. I briefly look at Moyong Baek and then look back at the man. Did you point the blade at me? Do you have the confidence to do that? I point to the wooden sword tucked between the bindle I had on. Cant you see the wooden sword? The man yells, So what! I dont care about his yelling and ask Moyong Baek, What would it mean for someone to carry a wooden sword in Kangho? Moyong Baek gives the answer. Must be an expert. I nod and look at the man. That is me. Damn it! Ill admit to my surprise the third-rate warrior swings his blade at me and it flies for my neck. However, I move ahead and poke my fingers into his shoulders as if I would pierce him with them. Tak! The blade flying straight ahead loses power and falls down. At the same time, the man changes his stance and gradually slows down. It was like he was moving in water, unable to escape even a single step backwards as he stumbled. Judging from his appearance he looks like someone who wouldnt be able to stand ice arts even for a moment. As he stumbles, I start to pick up the coins that fell and put them into the box. The server and Moyong Baek come to help too. After putting them into the box, I say, this is tax? Yes? From which place? It is to the Great Raven Clan. Originally they werent taking such things from us, but suddenly these days they began to change. We too are quite shocked. So, there wasnt such a tax payment before? Yes I look at Moyong Baek. Moyong. Uh? I point to the fallen guy and tell him. Find out what is happening from him. Reincarnate Poison Demon, torture him. Was what I meant to say. And Moyong Baek replies, Me? I ignore his question and speak to the server. I will make sure you dont have to pay in the future. Would that amount suffice for ruining your business today? Ah, yes thank you. I looked at Moyong Baek who was standing still. What are you doing? Moyong Baek shakes his head for a moment to sober up and then approaches the fallen man. I watch him. Moyong Baek speaks to the man who is trembling. You. H-help me. Who said you would be killed? No killing here. Why is the Great Raven Clan suddenly taking money? We too need money. For what? That for the escort services of Hwayang. Moyong Baek frowns and asks, An unorthodox sect paying tribute to an escort service? Not a tribute, but Moyong Baek lightly touches the area I hit with ice arts three times and the words of the man calm down. we accidentally touched the escort services and now have to pay compensation, the amount is huge, so I am collecting money. Please. I was curious how Moyong Baek managed to do it, so I ask, How did you do it? I stopped the ice qi from spreading for a time. After a while it will continue. I nod. Wonderful. Really amazing. Moyong Baek replies like a physician. Thank you. And he asks the man, And so, your clan touched an escort service? We have no other choice but to pay the compensation because the leader drank 100-year-old water. Moyong Baek looks shocked and then smiles. now I get it. How much does it cost? Moyong Baek responds, Wouldnt it be around 30 gold coins? That expensive? It is a rare thing. Is it worth it though? Yes. I look at him and say, Are you beggars? You make mistakes and then make up for it by robbing money from other places. And these are typical actions of yours. Take me. I wonder if your clan really doesnt have even 30 gold. I look at the server who is watching. We will leave now. Ah, yes, and you are? I am Low-Down Sect Leader. The server opens his eyes in shock and asks, Low-Down Sect Leader? Why are you so shocked? The server suddenly speaks, unable to respond. We we this is a guest house. You dont know? I dont. Ah, a man called Sima Bi of the Low-Down Sect asked in detail if there was a shop close by he could take. I am surprised at the mention of Sima Bi. Uh? Sima Bi came? Yes. And what happened? We have a house attached to the back, but it is difficult to walk there. I told him about a few other shops close by. And I understood what Low-Down Sect is after, after hearing his explanation. I nod at the server who is smiling. Sima Bi is quietly working alone. Hearing the news from a place like this is good. I speak to Moyong Baek and the man. We move to the Great Raven Clan now. This is the first area where Low-Down Sect established its branch. On the way home, I will clear down all the unorthodox sects and make my move. Suddenly, my motivation just doubled. If I hit around will I get stronger? What do you think? Moyong Baek, who seemed to have a stronger instinct to return home than anyone else, looks at me and says, Sure Dont like it? No. I like it. Good. If I am with you, your motivation will increase, right? Moyong Baek just turns his head like he lost his temper and touches his head. Puk I nod with a satisfied expression. I like it. I tell the server, Do not worry. If my beating doesnt work, I will solve the issue by killing the clan. Nothing bad will happen in the future. The server scratches his head. Yes. When I turned I saw Moyong Baek holding the man and shaking him. Yah, get up. What is it? He passed out. Wake him. Moyong Baek sighs as he grabs acupuncture needles from his pocket. The needles were thick enough to assassinate someone. Moyong Baek glares at the guy and mercilessly stabs the guy at the top of his head. The man lets out a rough gasp and regains his consciousness. Cough! As if Moyong Baek wanted to head home fast, he grabs the guy by the collar. Yah, quickly guide me to the Great Raven Clan. He raises the guy to his feet. Where is it? He points to the direction with his hand. At first, it didnt seem like he would walk by himself, but I deliberately pass the two and say, Lets go. Ehh, But Moyong is so good at using medicine, at acupuncture, all around a trustworthy person. Our Moyong Moyong Moyong, physician Baek. Moyong Baek lowers his head and urges the guy who is walking slowly. Will you not move faster? My body is Want another hit? N-No. Get up. You can do it. I am feeling better today. When I checked back I could see Moyong Baek bullying the man by raising him up by his ear. As I thought. Seeing Moyong Baek grow up makes me so happy. Chapter 157 Chapter 157 C Poison Demon Of Previous Life Is Pulling Out The Needle. Mr. Yes Looking at Moyong Baek, I say, Now that we are going to the Great Raven Clan to punish their leader. What do we do? Hmm. Moyong Baek grabs his chin and thinks. He asks, Dont you normally go and destroy everything? That is when there is no way out. I glare at him, and he continues, I see, you wont. I nod. I cannot do that all the time. I can, since it is possible, but will you be alright? Moyong Baek looks at our hostage who is trembling. Then lets use the hostage I shake my head. Looking at him will only make the clan enraged. Same thing. Yes. If you treat and take care of patients, you will get used to it and become a better doctor, but you will not know how things work in the world. I see. For now, put him against the wall. To look like a beggar or an unconscious drunk. He isnt even that important, so we dont need him all the way. Moyong Baek takes the guy and puts him near a wall. Sit down. I tell him, Take care of the blood points. Yes. Moyong Baek, without wasting time, immediately touches the mans blood points. Only then did I say to Moyong Baek, looking at the front gate of the Great Raven Clan, Lets go. I go to the front gate and knock on the other side with my hand. Bang! Bang! Bang! I look at Moyong Baek with a calm expression. I am a member of the escort services, and this side is Moyong Baek, an escort. Is the leader here? The man looks at us with a wide mouth. Ah I push the gate open and enter the place asking again, Is the leader here? The man says, Wait, the money is being prepared so. I am not going to talk to you. Tell the leader to come. I stride towards the main hall not talking to the guy, so he follows and says, Representatives of the Hwayang Escort services have arrived! The stupid underling spoke about it. Moyong Baek hurriedly turns his head around to check the situation around us. Warriors are coming in from here and there, but they cant say anything when they see us. Because this is a place which did wrong. We arrive at the front of the main hall in an instant and open it with both hands like officials who have come to collect taxes. Great Raven Clan Leader! Are you here? There was no one in the empty hall. I rush right in and sit first in the place meant for guests without asking. Escort Moyong, sit. Yes A few of the people poke their heads in and then vanish. At the same time a guy who seems like a person who manages the place, is talking to someone while coming in. Shut up! I deliberately yell for everyone to hear, and this makes my shout resound. The guy coming in stops and looks at me. I frown and tell him, Call your leader. Ah, I understand. I return to the main hall and sit next to Moyong Baek and explain. We came in using the name of the escort service, and the middle guy is scared by my voice And we go straight for the leader. Isnt this quicker than bringing the hostage? Moyong Baek nods. Yes. I havent forgotten about it. I nod. These people must know a lot about the escort service. It could be this and that, but they might know about the clothes they use and try something like that but remember that we arent doing anything wrong. You mean to be bold. Bold and confident. Up to this point, Moyong Baek didnt waver, so we waited there for the leader to come. Great Raven Clan leader, Hwang Gayo. 32 years old. In order to completely convert the power of the first pill he took, he was concentrating on cultivating. Especially today he felt like he could pass an important hurdle if he managed to do this. Of course, he knew there would be problems if he took the pill. However, once he had the thought it wasnt easy to not take the pill and so he decided that taking that would help him deal with the escort services. After all, Kangho is about using martial arts. Of course, he was saving money in preparation for buying the pill. Hwang Gayos handling of Kangho and its situation was always meticulous. Right now, the Great Raven Clan was in a tough situation, so their Leader Hwang was struggling for it. And right now, he noticed that there was a commotion outside. Who came? Is it those from the escort services? Whoever it is, hold on. I need to end this. He had the confidence to solve anything if he could finish the cultivation right now. So, Leader Hwang focused on cultivation not caring about the noise from outside. A single drop of sweat began to trickle down his face. The voice of his most trusted subordinates was heard from the outside. Leader. I am sorry. I think the people of the escort services are here, you might have to come. Leader Hwang couldnt speak. Shall we kick them out? Rather, I will buy time. At this, the man opened his eyes bursting into laughter. Hahahaha! This is so refreshing! After finishing the cultivation, Leader Hwang lowered his hands and exhaled. The state of his cultivation was clear since he gave up on sleep for days and did this. Leader Hwang says, You can open the door. As soon as the subordinate opens the door, he checks the expression of Leader Hwang and hurriedly kneels down and says, Leader, I will enter! While stroking his beard with a pleased expression, Leader Hwang asks, Who came? Your young escorts from the services. And their aura is scary. Leader Hwang smiles. Jun Pyung, there is no need for us to be afraid of them anymore. I will finish the work myself and put down those cocky bastards. The man called Jun Pyung brightens up and says, I will be loyal to your actions, leader! And Leader Hwang nods. In the end, I have been given such a chance. Lets go. Leader Hwang, who gets up from his place, snatches the long sword and heads to the main hall. I am talking with Moyong Baek in the main hall only to look at a bastard who comes in laughing. Hahaha. I blink my eyes and then confirm that this guy was the leader of this place. A man who seemed to be full of confidence sits down and looks at us. I am Hwang Gayo. And I was told you people came from the escort services. I nod. Leader Hwang But the guy raises his hand to cut me off, and says, I dont even have a wish to know what you want to say. Go back and bring me your leader. It is distasteful for me to handle things with their henchmen. No. Shut up I look at Moyong Baek and he looks at me before turning to the leader. Look. Leader Hwang, listen to the story. You realize how rude you are? Fortunately, Leader Hwang was making Moyong Baek angry. I spoke politely but this guys response was rubbing Moyong Baek the wrong way. Leader Hwang, in order to pay the price for the hundred-year-old pill, you have to pay great funds. There was a situation where your people were making money by robbing a guest house. Is this the right way? Even the honor we have built will be lost if you do such things using us as an excuse. The guy smiles. Ah, you came to ask about that? Yes. Leader Hwang points next to him as if it was no big deal. Jun Pyung Yes, leader. What is this? I apologize. There is no need to do that to raise money. I will take care of it so stop snatching money from them. I understand. Leader Hwang looks at me. Okay now? I smile and nod and he turns to Moyong Baek. Now stop with the unkind words and bring your leader to me. He spoke as if he had nothing to do with the situation. When he gets up, Moyong Baek seems pissed. Leader Hwang, sit down. When I see his expression I realized Moyong Baek was angry Anyway, even the most patient people go insane once they step into Kangho. It is because the more people they meet, the more disgusting they realize people are and enduring it turns tough. Moyong Baek says to Leader Hwang, Leader Hwang, wasnt our escort service making a big concession by asking you to pay at your pace? How dare you act out like this? Did you think now that you got the pill down you can act however you want? Leader Hwang laughs and says, Young escort, do I look like an easy person? I can see the eyes of Moyong Baek changing so I touch his hand. Nice. The jokes end here. I take out my dagger and put it in the table as I tell Leader Hwang, sit down. He looks at the dagger and then at me. Young Sit down you bastard if you dont want to die. Only then did he realize that something was odd and sat down. You people arent from the escort service. He turns to his man called Jun Pyung and he strides out of the main hall, maybe trying to get the others. Putting his hand into his sleeve, Moyong Baek speaks calmly to Jun Pyung. Stop. Moyong Baek takes out a long needle and lightly inserts it into the table. He was glaring at Jun Pyung and says, You stand right there. Jun Pyung stands still because he knew Moyong baek threw out the needle. Leader Hwang laughs. This is inane. See now He raised his right hand, and his palm was turning red as if he mastered the supreme martial arts. And he asks us, You want me to try this? The Great Palm of the Great Raven Clan? I flick my thumb with my finger making a snapping sound and then inject fire qi. There was this crackling sound as if the air caught fire and the red glowing flame rose from my fingers and turned into the shape of flame and vanished. I reply while rubbing my ear with my left hand, What? I couldnt hear you? Was there a dog barking from somewhere? Moyong, did you hear anything? To which Moyong Baek said, A stupid dog barked. I look up and down at the leader. I am asking. Did you bark? Leader Hwang hurriedly withdraws his hand and looks at the flame I made. This guy is barely at the level of making anything with flame and in terms of swordsmanship I can do martial arts with the level of considering the sword to be free moving. Unless he is an idiot, he should have understood the difference. Leader Hwang says, Well, from where? When his attitude changed this fast, Moyong Baeks expression changed. I glare at him and say, Low-Down Sect Leader. Moyong Baek glares and says, Moyong Baek of the Low-Down Sect I say to him who went silent, The price you paid for them. The additional amount needed to pay the escort service as an apology. The payoffs from the inns and merchants that your people went to steal and the damage your people caused in there for them, the physical and mental damage. The amount of touching something which belonged to another. Bring everything right in front of me. Leader Hwang couldnt even ask. do not do anything odd. Bring it when I say to and it is all good. And if you dont like this, come at me. I will handle you. And after beating you down, I can easily get someone to replace you. At my words, Moyong Baek looks at Leader Hwang. You, what do you plan to do now? I look at Moyong Baek And we both smile at the same time. Chapter 158 Chapter 158 C Life Has Pitfalls. After I ask Leader Hwang to bring the money, I wait for his reaction with the feeling of what will he say to piss me off more? Leader Hwang speaks very cautiously. it isnt easy to suddenly raise money. If you give me time, I can prepare. I point my fingers at him and turn to Moyong Baek. See that? Yes Look at his expression. Most of them will act like this. It doesnt deviate an inch from our thoughts. I warn Leader Hwang. You shut your mouth for now. . I turn to Moyong Baek. There was a reason we came to the Great Raven Clan to steal money and seek this guy, but I had Moyong Baek to focus on. Leader Hwang next to him is someone who can be dealt with anywhere, so I tell Moyong Baek, I have something to convey to you. Moyong Baek nods. Please tell. What could it mean for this guy to come out like this? Moyong Baek replied like he didnt have to think. They send us back, they will either gather the people that they can mobilize or investigate the Low-Down Sect and come up with ways to avoid paying us. Right. Lord Hwang wanted to open his mouth and speak but I shushed him. I told you to shut up. Do not move that mouth. You are staring at the dagger right? That dagger has the greatest chance of becoming one with your body. I look at Moyong Baek and say, Life has its own pitfalls, Moyong. In my case, the traps came too soon. All that was left was an inn for them, but they went ahead and were ready to burn it down. And for whom? I point my finger at the leader. These bastards Its because they dont do anything right. They burned up everything. Moyong Baek nods as if he is listening. Where is the logic in this, Moyong? There is none. None. So, I was beating down these bastards without logic. Often taken over by craziness which you tried to cure me. Right. I continue to talk to convey my sincerity to him. I think like this I felt rewarded and proud for saving people. I keep a pure heart when working and you are a physician who does the same. But everyone falls into the traps of life. What is the biggest that you, a physician, can fall into? Moyong Baek ponders and says, Well. I think, because you often treat people in Kangho, one day Kangho will betray you. Moyong Baek replies with a thin smile. Could that happen? I saved lives. I smile too. There will be bastards like Leader Hwang all around. One day he will visit because he is injured. Pretend he was someone you didnt know, then you would treat him, right? Yes. The guy barely survives after the amazing treatment you do, but he has a stained heart. Or steals something from your place and runs away. Or lets assume that something like running away after eating a pill which was supposed to treat another patient who is severely ill Look at Leader Hwang. As soon as he hears my words, Moyong Baek glares at the man. This is the guy who came out looking proudly after eating that pill which the escort service was working on. If this guy got stronger than us, what wouldve happened to you and me? Moyong Baek glares at Leader Hwang and says, I would have died right away. Can you be sure that while working as a physician, you wont face what happened to the escort services? Take a good look. You healed a patient with a pure heart but what if it comes back as a betrayal? Can you handle it? Imagine if you went to argue and got beaten because you didnt have martial arts? Are you going to be able to live fine at the unfairness in life? I say to Jun Pyung standing there, Get down on your knees. It is a dangerous situation right now, Jun Pyung. Ah, yes. Jun Pyung kneels down with a shocked expression and Moyong Baek tells me, If that happened, I wouldnt have been able to live right, Sect Leader. Actually, this guy was the same in the previous life. I nod. Believe me. I am not asking you to help me or even the Low-Down Sect. Just practice martial arts for your own sake. So that when you fall into a pitfall of life, you can jump out on your own and be alive. Even if life goes on, you wont feel happiness at all. Even if you beat those bastards to death when you see them, it must be, your heart might be feeling empty, but taking them down might fill the heart. Because you cannot go back to being innocent at any point in your life. Moyong Baek nods. I continue speaking in a calm tone. I knew that you wanted to return to your home as soon as possible after you healed Elder Heo, but why do you think I brought you to this place? It is alright. It wouldnt be wrong of you to go crazy from how I act and leave us. For yourself, it is my wish that you practice the martial arts as hard as you can and save people too. I am not saying this for the sake of Low-Down Sect. You need some training for your sake and the sake of your family. This is my wish for Moyong Baek. I turn to Leader Hwang. Leader Hwang quietly descends from the chair and kneels down. I speak to him, holding my calmness. You are a bit smart. I was about to throw the dagger and you did the right thing to stop me. He replies, Sect Leader, please spare me. Every time he shows such actions, the expression of Moyong Baek only gets worse. I tap on the dagger and say to him, Look at this worthless guy. What these bastards have in common is that they are strong against the weak. Right. The commonality of those who are always strong to the weak is that they always serve the strong. Yes, Sect Leader. This means most of the men I killed were like this, get it? Moyong Baek nods. I understand. The ones who attacked me with red faces were lucky if they survived. As soon as I said it, Leader Hwang went pale faced. Sect Leader. Do not interfere when I am talking. Yes. Today is the day where I talk a lot, but it was all for an important moment. The reason you and I became stronger is because of those guys. Because even those stronger than us are all trash. Of course, there are far more warriors stronger than you and me and anyone we know. That means that you will probably get as sick as me. The guy who is kneeling, slams his head to the ground. And he says, Sect Leader, Mister Moyong. Please spare me. I have committed so much rudeness. I asked Moyong Baek about him. Can we trust him? Moyong Baek says, They cannot be. I watch Moyong Baeks expression and he gulps as he asks, Should I kill him? I look at him with a determined expression and say, Moyong Yes. I told you, if possible I will do it. But for this time, let us do this way. I have a plan. What kind Looking at him, I smile. I am going to make a proper poison this time. . A poison that can only be cured by the Moyong family. Originally, we should kill him, but since you are amazingly skilled, he is saved. Poison to save people. If you dont give the antidote, then they betrayed me and looked for you. Moyong Baeks expression brightened. Ah. I know your strengths and weaknesses. Just like the poison I had in the past. You can study venom and decide on the life and death of others. Then your poison will become the medicine. You cannot gain fame by just saving people. Titles like Poison Demon which kill people wouldnt fit, so how about a new title for the person called Moyong Baek who decides on the life and death of people? Like the Physician of Life and Death. Physician of Life and Death of the Low-Down Sect? I nod. It would be an honor if you did that. However, poisons and their antidotes will not be enough. Train in martial arts. Moyong Baek nods. Sect Leader, I will never treat martial arts this lightly again. I hold my hand out to him as if asking him to take care of Leader Hwang. Moyong Baek says, Leader Hwang, get up. Yes. The funds which Sect Leader spoke of. Prepare them all without missing a single coin. Yes, I will do it right. Moyong Baek looks at him and says, While preparing the funds, I plan to gather the materials needed for a poison and the cure. Of course, either of them is meaningless now. After all, your word of paying back will keep you alive. Do you get it? Yes. And I say to Leader Hwang now. Yah, Leader Hwang, is the way to go pretty long? You were going back and forth at the entrance to the underworld. He replies as he folds his hands. Thank you for sparing me, Sect Leader. Since this suddenly happened, it feels like I am watching a drama. Right, Moyong Baek? Exactly. Leader Hwang quickly responds, N-No. After thinking about it, yes. I ask, What are you thinking? That I heard that the Low-Down Sect Leader accompanied The Murim Alliance in the attack against the Namak Sect. I expected that the person who was there as Sect Leader would be older, so I didnt expect you to be him. Listening to this the Sect Leader of Low-Down Sect seems to be you. I nod. That is me. Yes As soon as I say, that is me, Moyong Baek snorts, making me ask, Why are you laughing? No. It seems like something you often say. At the atmosphere which suddenly turned warm, Leader Hwang smiles. As soon as Leader Hwangs face was noticed I ask in a serious expression, Did you smile? N-No. Did you smile? I apologize. Is a guy who just escaped death acting like this? You are a funny one. It is ridiculous. I pull out the dagger from the table and wave it in front of him. If you keep interfering with me, I will end this. Yes You crazy bastard. And you seem to think that I will give you plenty of time to prepare that money, but no. Bring all the funds your clan has right now and pile them up. Now. Leader Hwang repeats, Right now. You give the order and come back. And Jun Pyung. Jun Pyung who was kneeling responds right away. Yes, Sect Leader. Put some drinks and snacks on the table. I will have a drink and wait. I will prepare it. I put my hands and feet on the table and push the chair back. While the chair was shaking as if it would trip over, I glared. But what does the Great Raven Clan do for living? You seemed to have made a lot of money. This shouldnt be normal right? What do you think, physician? Moyong Baek replies as he examines the atmosphere. You must have made money doing bad things right? Would these guys be farming or selling dumplings? I push Moyong Baek to stimulate his anger and he says with a bland expression, There are a lot of such people in Kangho. All enemies of the Low-Down Sect. I closed my eyes and rocked in the chair. Chapter 159 Chapter 159 C To Do Until You Cough Blood. Moyong Baek spoke to me while I drank the alcohol Jun Pyung brought. Sect Leader, I will check if there is an infirmary nearby and get the needed materials. You dont have to. Have a drink. Pouring a drink for Moyong Baek, I say, Lord Hwang is the hostage we have taken. You cannot just leave the guy and go. You can feed the poison to him right here. I understand. I look at the warriors of the clan who are busily bringing money. I didnt think much of it at the start, but big and small boxes were piling up and even Moyong Baek sighed at what he was seeing. They seem to have a lot. I sighed. There is a lot to share with the merchants. If we have to take all this, then it has to be moved to the Black Rabbit Union. You people arent the Great Raven, but the Great Thieves Clan. I say to the leader who is passing by, Great Thieves clan leader. Yes. Come here. He is hesitant as he comes over and puts his hands together in front of me and I ask, What have you been stealing? What is all of this? Isnt this the first time you hit someone for money? Leader Hwang speaks in a cautious tone. N-No. The scale of the business is quite huge, from alcohol to tea and brewing a couple more things. When I flick my hand at his lower head, I choose to slap him and say, You have so much money and yet you still went around to collect money? After he falls down from the slap, he gets up and says, I apologize. I sent the guy away because watching all this made me dizzy. I do not understand the greed of a rich person. How do I accept this? Sect Leader, I dont know because I was never rich. This isnt a world the poor can live in. Yes. Moyong, let us not bother trying to understand. We need to be rich to understand this. Right. We can just live without knowing this. I nod at Moyong Baeks words and share a drink. This was a dangerous moment which could make us rich. But after the drinking heat moved into my body, I yelled at Leader Hwang. Leader Hwang! Yes! First of all, take out enough money to deliver to the stores you took them from. If I go out to inspect them and they say you didnt, it will not stop with one slap. Ah, I understand. I am so angry now that my thoughts feel very enraged. At least, Moyong Baek is pouring me a drink without saying anything, so I am able to calm my anger. What is this feeling? It is a situation where I am controlling the anger. Physician, we need to be clear on this money issue. Even if we have to stay up all night, we leave after confirming that the money divided in five quarters is spread around. I understand. Moyong Baek speaks to me in a calm voice. Sect Leader, there must be many people in the world who accumulated wealth by harassing people. Calm the anger. I nod. Right. I can only feel happy when such people look like beggars. Lets make them beggars. I get it. The day after we managed to get the issue of the Great Raven Clan sorted, I took Leader Hwang as a hostage and put him on a carriage. I didnt kidnap him alone. The funds they had saved and gathered over time were generously distributed around to infirmaries, inns, and merchants. We also paid up the escort services. Still there was a lot left so we loaded them into the carriage. The return got delayed, and the amount of compensation for the damage to the Low-Down Sect was generous. That is how I am on my way in a carriage with a kidnapped man, my physician and money. Inside the rattling carriage, I would often glare at Leader Hwang who sat across from me. Leader Hwang. He responds quickly to my call. Sect Leader. How old are you? Ah, I Come to think of it, I dont know your age. Whether you are 30 or 40, the fact that you wasted your age is what counts right? Moyong Baek nods beside me. Right. I ask Leader Hwang, You are married? He looks at me with a worried expression. I narrow my eyes. You wont answer? I might have to tie your waist to the outside of the carriage and tell them to drive faster. Ah, I didnt get married. Why? Leader Hwang had a bitter smile. what marriage when living in Kangho? I look wide eyed. Damn. Wah 1 Moyong Baek seems to think I reacted oddly. Why are you so surprised? I point to Leader Hwang. Originally, its supposed to be a cool statement, but it sounds so unpleasant when this guy says it. I find it so pretentious that this rotten guy says such things. Holding back his laughter, Moyong Baek asks, Ah, come to think of it, you didnt get married either. I take a moment to think it through. Right. Actually, it is because I had similar thoughts to Leader Hwang. What kind of marriage when the world is full of enemies? Unfortunately, I cannot say what that idiot just said, so I say, My skills are still lacking, so I dont know when I will die. I cannot be going around with a woman right now. He looks at me and says, The same reason as Leader Hwang. Hmm. I touched my head because this hurt me so much! I am hungry, lets get off and eat now. With that, the coach man reduces the speed and says, I will stop at the nearby inn! I look at Leader Hwang and kick him in the shin, making him groan. The carriage is parked on a large crossroads, and we take a seating spot with outdoor tables. After the coachman is here, the four of us order food. And I look around to see many men drinking in broad daylight. It seems that there is a unique thing to this place, most weapons were placed onto or against the table. All sorts of weapons out. It looked like a scene where food was being escorted by weapons. Strangely, it seems like there are more warriors than normal people so I ask Leader Hwang, Did you say, Jin Mok? What is with this town? Are they at war? Leader Hwang says, Some of it is because this place has a lot of foot traffic, and it is a place where the Demon Cult people attack frequently. There are also bandits who suddenly attack from all directions and run. So, in this place most of the servers have swords too. Looking around, it seems right. Isnt it better to gather people and attack the bandits? These bandits set up several bases somewhere in the wilderness to attract troops to fight, so attacking them to wipe them out is difficult. I heard that the boss who leads these bandits isnt an easy one to catch. Who is the boss? At this, the hair guy next to our table says, Tattooed Red Ghost. Tattooed Red Ghost A title with tattoo? Therefore, it seems like he is a man who has marks around the body and face. The Murim Alliance is busy now. It would have been difficult to come down here and deploy troops on a large scale. Leader Hwang took over. The people this man leads are called tattooed demons. Still, I liked this place where everyone had their swords and weapons on. Looks like they are the ones who dont treat others right. Even the server had alert eyes and I ask Leader Hwang, Do the bandits kidnap women and children? Yes. I think that is good enough of a reason to report this to the alliance and ask them to clear this up. The server who had brought the food and sets it down on the table replies, we do not want that. What happens here should be resolved by people staying here. The reason for that? The server looks at me and says, Some of those bandits were actually people from Jin Muk County. They are the jerks who betrayed their town for the man there. I nod and say to Moyong Baek, The atmosphere is similar to the men of Ilyang. Where I was born. I decided. What? Lets stay here for a day. Yes. If you dont want to, you leave. If we are lucky we can catch and kill that Red Ghost. Leader Hwang. Leader Hwang notices and cautiously asks. Yes? Your skills must be good since you fully absorbed the pill, so wouldnt the Red Ghost be a simple issue? When I looked at your palm it was hot. If its you, he will be down in ten sounds. If you catch him, slap him till he dies. Let us see your skills. Leader Hwang nods. I understand. But when I praise Leader Hwangs skills, everyone turns around and looks at him. I had questions about why these people didnt ask for help from the Murim Alliance or another organization to help wipe out the bandits. If the traitors of this place were now bandits, then the spies of bandits must still be here giving them information. I continued to eat and praise Leader Hwang. If you have the skills that Leader Hwang does, you can beat down hundreds of the bandits yourself, right? That is Am I wrong? 100 is a bit too much. Then the Red Ghost? One on one. Leader Hwang grinned. Isnt he just the leader of demons? I am confident. I nod with a serious expression. Ah, so reliable. But the guy doesnt smile when I say that he is reliable. While eating, he pats his chest with his hand and drinks water right away. Anyone can see this guy is nervous. Clearing down the food in my bowl, I ask, Leader Hwang, why are you so nervous? N-No. Why would I be? Fucking trash. You wouldnt have felt this kind of tension when robbing down stores right? If Red Ghost came and asked you for money, you would give it up without a fight. I was right. Such people serve the strong. And he stared at me. After hearing the words of Sect Leader, I seem to be such a person. With the intention to have this guy cough blood, I say, A third-rate idiot. Yes. He is a leader to the subordinates who stole the money from the people who made it through hard work. Yes. Ugly bastard who stretches to where you cannot reach. Yes. An idiot who pretends to eat because he is afraid of a bandit leader. Yes. That is me. I laugh at his compliance. It has been a long time since I liked a jerk like you. Suddenly this idiot holds the empty bowl up with both hands and says to Moyong Baek, Mister, please one drink. Moyong Baek nods and pours it for him. Take it. Thank you. And he gulps it down, but his hand is shaking. I glared at him. Leader Hwang. Yes. All the money was taken away by me. Since you are on the way to the Black Rabbit Union to get poisoned, you are nothing but an idiot who works for me with scattered subordinates, right? What are your thoughts on it? There should be some people left since I treated the subordinates right. Ah, really? Amazing. He says he did right. I point to Leader Hwang and say to Moyong Baek. Yah, our Leader Hwang is in control. He says men will stay back as if they are subordinates waiting for someone like him. Then I admit it, the unorthodox sects are actually corpses with loyalty. Moyong Baek nods his head. Yes. I left Leader Hwang and chatted with Moyong Baek over drinks. We talked about Murim Alliance, the wooden sword, stories about this and that. I treated Leader Hwang like someone who couldnt be seen, perfectly. Just as I asked Moyong Baek what martial arts he would focus on learning, Leader Hwang drank alone. Sect Leader, I have something to tell you. What? Well, this bastard. Drunk now? If you are drunk it means risking your life. He lowers his head and points to the coachman. Can I send this friend to call those of the Great Raven Clan? If you allow, I will do it. Why call them? He looks at me and says, to cut down the Red Ghost. I crossed my arms for a while and glared at him. I turned to see even Moyong Baek crossing his arms and glaring at him. Editors Notes Wah is how you would say wow in Korean. ?? Chapter 160 Chapter 160 C The Right Way To Cross The Wilderness Is. Leader Hwang, do you have many warriors under you? Warriors, then a little. I look at him. Is there one as strong as you or a subordinate to a similar level? He looks concerned as he says, a little weaker. I see. Then, as you think, if we bring your men here, how many people will be killed or injured? For a simple thought, lets assume that there are around 100 demons. And lets say you and your men go off to fight them in that far wilderness. He counts and says, 20 to 30 will be injured. As I thought. I wonder if more than a dozen will die. Will you at least catch the target? He nods. Yes. I look at him and ask, Then, what wrong did they do? Are they people who should be killed in that far off wilderness? Uh? Leader Hwang, listen to me carefully. If the demons attack your hometown where the Great Raven clan is, it is right for you to step up and fight against them. Die or get hurt, you are lucky there. Still, you get the name for fighting your home. It would be a fight on behalf of the weak. Yes What is the point of calling your men here and letting them die here like dogs? How many times have you been beaten by me? You are going to call your men to protect your pride? This is neither for revenge nor to protect anyone. Is there anything more horrible to call your men to die for you to show your pride? This guy had a disgusting life so he cannot talk back to me just because he decides to act for us. Leader Hwang says, I was wrong. For the first time I poured alcohol for him. And I say pouring to the coachman, You dont have to go, so enjoy your meal. The coachman drinks. Yes, Sect Leader. After sharing drinks, I say, Leader Hwang, I respect your desire to prove. Yes. But dont try to turn your men into corpses for it. Why not go on your own? He is puzzled by my words. If you mean that, you want me to go Why are you pretending to not understand? That is the demon. I dont know if they are 100 or 200 out there but if you take down their Leader Red Ghost, then you will be treated right. Indeed, you are a clan leader. You can hear such things. Do you not want to show us that? To which he answers, It sounds like you are telling me to go alone and die in there. Cannot do it? Yes, I am not an expert here. I nod. Then dont act like you are a changed person. It is all a deception. He laughs and says, Deception? Yes. Anyway, Leader Hwang looks around with a strange expression and says, Sect Leader, you and I will go tomorrow. To the wilderness. After saying that, he went silent smiling. Looking excited. I say with a smile, With me? You have confidence? To which he says, Not confident, I will show you how to die without running away while fighting next to you. He looks around and says, Brothers in Kangho who happened to hear all the talk. Keep my words in mind. How is it? As he said, everyone was listening to us talk. I scratch my cheek with my finger and respond to his request. Nice. Lets go. The two of us should go and see if the bandits will be cleared or if we die. He glares at me and asks, If I do not run, will you accept me if I die fighting or survive fighting? I answer while pouring myself a drink. I will see you fight first. I understand. Lets drink and rest up. We could fight all day tomorrow. So, we rest now. Moyong Baek looked like he was going to say something, so I looked at him. Lets talk later. And he went silent after a slight nod. I get up to find out an accommodation with the group, but someone asks among the tables, Where does the Sect Leader belong to? Moyong Baek checks his face and then answers. Low-Down Sect. As I am walking, I hear several people talking. There are people who said they had heard of it and people who were certain of it and those who couldnt believe two people would go against bandits. They werent worth responding to, so I left. Moyong Baek comes over to my room and says what he wanted to say earlier. Sect Leader, are you really going alone? What about me? Three of us cannot go. Wouldnt three be better than two? I look at him and say, Then I will become the same person as Leader Hwang. I will go with him and the two of us will solve it, so do not step out this time. Moyong Baek says, Actually, I am not worried about you, but Leader Hwang will die 9 out of 10 times. As you said, he can die or not die. If he has poor skills he is bound to die no matter how many times he says. There must be a hundred enemies there. Yes. Wouldnt it be better to fight to death than live being protected? It is an ugly sight of a leader, and it is his own decision, so the two of us will go to solve the issue. Um, is that so? I will see you tomorrow. Have a nice rest. Moyong Baek withdrew without pushing his opinion and so I lay down on the bed closing my eyes. I think about this for a while before rushing into cultivation. There isnt much of a difference between the Demon Cult and bandits. Is the force large or small? That is how the difference starts. And I cultivated. After I had a simple breakfast, I left with leader Hwang and moved to the wilderness. The guy didnt look good since eating breakfast, but when we arrived in the wilderness, he began to walk fine like he was relaxed enough. I walked with him, not saying much. It was a windy day and the sun wasnt too hot so it was a suitable day to fight. Moyong Baek offered help but I refused. I check the sword on the waist of Leader Hwang and say, What sword technique did you learn? The Ruthless Sword Technique. What? Ruthless sword technique. I stopped and looked at him. Isnt it a sword technique which doesnt suit him at all? I really wanted to ask that but then went silent. Since he might die today, it wouldnt be right for me to come here and tease him. How many hand forms? It is Seven forms. Who did you learn from? The former clan leader. Isnt that the Poison Clans martial arts? Yes. Because it is a martial art which is not performed in front of others, I never spoke about it. But today might be the time for me to take the higher step and perform it in front of you. You should take a look. Yes. Leader Hwang spread distance between us and drew the sword up. After that, he began to practice the Ruthless Sword technique which holds 17 forms. I looked at the stance and the movement and estimated how much he trained. It was a sword technique I wasnt familiar with so I couldnt understand much. And when he did all forms, I ask, One more time. Yes This time, Leader Hwang slowly spread it out. As soon as he did it, holding the wooden sword following what he did, I ask, Why is this movement like this? Is it a way to cut something? I know all that this is, is the former leaders technique made by fighting warriors frequently. So, the movements are breaking down the chained attack and stabbing. It was only then I understood what this is. Right. but it doesnt make sense to use sword technique when fighting too many. Use it in, one on one fight, these people will emphasize a three-form sword technique. It will be effective when a large number of people are warring. An enemy with excellent skills will be dealt with by the others. Yes. If you survive, blow away all the techniques made to deal with a specific weapon in the seventeen movement. Reduce it to thirteen. There should be more basic movement to deal with a situation. If you read the technique right while coping with the movement, you might be able to use it for assassination too. I will refer to it. Lets go. I walked again with him and after a long walk we could neither see the path anymore nor signs of people living. It was all wilderness and trees. Leader Hwang next to me asked worried, Sect Leader, I am sorry but What? Will the wooden sword be fine? You asked so fast. Should we change swords? No. If you arent going to, why ask? He looks puzzled and says, I am not that skilled, so I will use a real sword. I was wondering why you brought a wooden sword, so I asked. I am no idiot to bring a wooden sword here. Suddenly, he looked wide-eyed. A dozen bandits were moving quite a distance from us. Sect Leader. I am watching. As soon as someone said bandits, I looked and pulled Leader Hwang by the shoulder. Lets run. Uh? Run this way, you bastard. I change direction and increase my walking speed. Leader Hwang says in an urgent tone, No, why did we suddenly run As we began to run at a steady pace, I say, We have to run so the enemies come after us. It is too far, and they are on horses, at least the ones on horses will come after us fast. right. The right way to work in a forest is to play weak. In this way, we can know how to use it. Leader Hwang. Yes. Those guys will be happy to find the weak. They steal, kill and roast corpses in hunger. Right.. Looking at the small number of people, it is a scouting one which travels frequently. As we ran the sound of horse hooves grew louder and we began to slow down and stopped as we watched them get close. The bandits split into two, one passed from ahead and the other blocked the exit to slowly turn to a circle. I looked at their clothes and the expression of Leader Hwang and I smiled. Looking at them, I say, Brothers, how are you? I was crossing the path; do I have to pay a toll? When I ask in a friendly tone, the bandits look at each other and burst into chuckles and the man, with woman ornament on, says, You are a smart friend. Put down the money and throw the sword this way. Cant we just pay the toll and move? There is no need to give up the sword. Examining his appearance, his arms and legs were dark revealing that he had applied womens face powder to his face which looked white. The man grinned and drew his sword. Speak less. Throw the sword before I kill you. I smiled as I looked at him. Do we have to do this? To which he said aiming his sword, Dont make me laugh. I will tear. As soon as I pull the wooden sword which Elder Heo gifted me, I infuse sword qi into it and cut off the head of the man. With a thudding sound the head falls, and blood flows. The eyes of all the bandits turn to the headless corpse and I laugh. Leader Hwang Yes. Lets kill. I rush to them. Chapter 161 Chapter 161 C Please Curse Me. The wooden sword, which wasnt even named yet, was so light making my movements seem lighter too. I am light and so is the wooden sword. Thanks to that, I jump around like a frog swinging a wooden sword. The wooden sword is so thin that others avoid colliding with it. It moves, cutting down the body of the opponent. The leg, then it jumps up to the head. After avoiding the moving swords, I accurately cut down the ankle of one bandit. The enemies that were called the demons couldnt move as lightly as I was, so slashing them was easy. At least the more experienced guys finally jumped off their horses and swung their swords, but I moved while spilling blood. Before they could do anything, their blood was gushing out. In a state of moving and stabbing the enemies with the light wooden sword I make sure to not kill them in one hit. Only then did the bandits try to raise a flare from their chest. I immediately go to cut it down along with the wrist holding it. Puak! Kwaaak! The guy held his wrist and screamed in pain. As he continued to scream, Leader Hwang immediately swung his sword to take off his head. I wasnt interested in this fight of his, so I watch the guys running away and say in a mixed voice, Can you run away at your current pace? After asking this question which I knew wouldnt get an answer, I rushed to the bandit ahead of me. I smash his head with the blade of the sword, and throw the sword at the bandit fleeing north as soon as I land on the ground. Flames break out on the blade. Wheik! To slaughter people down in such a short time, I seem preoccupied. After confirming that the wooden sword penetrated the back of the demon running, I turned around and threw an ice qi ball into my sheath and threw it at the back of another demon fleeing. In the air, the frozen white sheath flies and pierces the back of the demon. Puak! When I turn my head. Leader Hwang is competing with three bandits at the same time. After looking at them for a while, I recognized that Leader Hwang was coping with stab, slash, cut, and vertical slashes. It was a fight that revealed that he was clearly taught, and this showed the guy was no idiot. I began to use light footwork and then moved by lowering my form like a wolf. I grabbed onto the foot of the demon running with both hands as he was attempting to cut Leader Hwang. He started to scream in fear. Euk, eukkk! While I infused ice qi, I grabbed his feet and lifted him up to smash his head to the ground. Puak! As the lower half of his body becomes frozen hard, I throw him at another demon. In the meantime, Leader Hwang manages to rush and slash the head of another fleeing demon. Looking around, I pick up a large stone and aim it at the back of a fleeing bandit. The stone grazes the side of Leader Hwang and hits the bandit. Puak! Leader Hwang, who pursued him, cuts his head right away. Silence falls upon the messy wilderness. Regaining my calm, I say, All dead? To which Leader Hwang says, Yes. Looking around, all the bandits belonging to this fight died. As I brush away the blood on the sword, Leader Hwang looks at me. Before he can say anything, the startled horses begin to run away. I watch as they run in groups. It was difficult to know right away if the horses were running back to the bandit base or just running. Leader Hwang, come. Leader Hwang comes running and I tell him what to do. If you go through their things and find something like beef jerky, Yes. First, cut off a bit of it with a sword, place it where there are lots of ants, and check it by eating it later. And water too. Yes. If there is anything else to take, take it and lightly cover the bodies with soil. Anyway, if the dust blows they should be covered soon. Yes. I retrieve my sheath and Leader Hwang starts covering the corpses now. There was no reason to be either happy or sad because all we took down was a simple scouting group. Suddenly, I decide to go and pick up the signal flare that fell down earlier and I examine it. it was a cylinder that could be launched by pulling a string with a red feather attached to the end. Bandits couldnt have made something like this, so it looked like they had an escort service behind or robbed someone with them. I passed it to Leader Hwang. Get this. Yes It looks like the leader got killed by the bandits. Leader Hwang stares blankly. Probably. It seems that even if an escort service had failed in this place, there is no one to call for help here, so it was all taken away when they defeated the escort service. Leader Hwang replies as he puts the flare inside, I will handle it. The two of us sit down near a corpse and take a break. Leader Hwang holds out a leather pouch. Have some water. After receiving the leather bag, I poured it on the ground to check the water and then quenched my thirst with it. Leader Hwang says, Couldnt find any jerky. I nod and look around. There could be people coming for them. If these people dont go back then another unit will come. How to handle that? It isnt difficult, but I cannot figure out the number of enemies so I think we will have to preserve our stamina. All of them are on horsebacks, so there is often enough gap to attack them. But if everyone gets off their horses and fights us by surrounding us then things will get difficult. Yes. I observe his expression and ask, How. do you think youll die today? You want me to die? I smile as I say, If I wanted you dead, I could have killed you with my own hands. But surviving and taking down more bandits like this, walking towards death is better. Leader Hwang nods and asks, Sect Leader, you are young, but why do you have so much experience? Leader Hwang, although I am younger than you, I have tried and did many things to survive. You probably dont know because you were making by comfortably. The guy tilts his head back bursting into laughter and drinks water. I will check his condition later. You still have energy left to fight? Very much. There is more to do. I nod. Looks like there is enough for the task. He was speaking with confidence so I couldnt believe what he said. Leader Hwang asks me, What about Sect Leader? I havent even used my internal qi yet. After all, confidence is something which should be on my side. I nod and he nods as he says, I saw the sword shining red and the sheath turning white. In the wilderness you often see odd things. Suddenly Leader Hwang puts his head a little down towards the ground. coming. They should come. Along the horizon, three or four bandits could be seen. They were pointing their swords in our direction and, in the meantime, the number of bandits increased. Suddenly, Leader Hwang sighs as he watches the number of bandits growing. Sect Leader. I suddenly feel like my confidence is drained. Can you please curse me? How do you want it? Moderately? Or strong? The number of bandits quickly increased to forty or fifty. It looks like they are calling out to the spreading bandits while shouting amongst themselves. Whenever bandits began to join in one after another, the direction the sword pointed to was at us. Leader Hwang counts the bandits around and says, Do it strong. I stand holding my wooden sword and look at the bandits who are filling the horizon on the left and right. you seem to have no fucking brain left in you. If you die to their hands then you are a fucking trashed cripple. Leader Hwang. Yes. Leader Hwang gets up and draws his sword. The bandits raise their swords high, not speaking much. Then they move on their horses shouting. In an instant, dust rises and the band of bandits rush in faster all at once. I am a mind cripple then? Highest kind. Well is there no strategy? None. Even if the Zegal family comes, they wont get any. Suddenly, Leader Hwang sighs with dejected emotions. Holding the wooden sword, I recited a prayer of Buddhism. Poor horses. Do not be born as an animal in the next world. I pass Leader Hwang and walk ahead, hoping that the animals get a nice second life. Is the reason why the bandits are screaming like this because they are also ready for death? I cant tell. I just pull my sword out as I get close to the bandits in front of me. I pull the sword out infused with external qi and sword qi and swing it. Swish! A crescent shaped slash passes through as it stretches out hitting the legs of the running horses. In an instant the legs of the horses are cut making the bandits riding them fall. The following bandits rushing after them trample ahead and fall down, forcing the second and third rows to become all tangled. Only then did I use light footwork. Suddenly, the mindset of myself from the previous life swells into my heart, and I open my mouth comfortably, just like when I got called the Crazy Demon. surrender will not be accepted. It is no use getting on your knees. I will chase those running away and beat them to death. Anyone who dares to attack me will be killed right away. Ah, the craziness was soaring. I am confused on whether or not I had regressed to the past life, or if I was still in this life just in a state of confusion. A state in which killing intent slowly gets added. Why were these bastards even born? Is it that there is no end even if I beat and cut them to death each time? It has been a long time since I felt the feeling of entering the gates of hell. One day, I will have no wish when I see a hundred, a thousand or ten thousand enemies running at once. In the end, in order for me to not go crazy, I would have to reach a far higher ground. I clenched my right hand around the wooden sword and, looking at the rushing enemies, I leaped into the sky. There is no way I can reach the sky, but I soar as much as I can. When I feel that the direction of the jump and the force has reached its apex point, I crouch down and make the Crazy Wind surround me. Now I was like a sphere. The shape of my madness. I spin like a ball swinging a sword which had a blade piercing through. The long screams of the dead as I feel like a ball comforted me. Nice. Those who should die, must die. Bye now, bandits. Die, bandits. Be blessed, horses. I spin as hard as I can and burst into laughter. Since all this happened, just die. I swing the sword without even considering my physical condition. If I want to kill them directly with a sword, I can. If I wanted to stab with sword qi, I could do that too. Chase and kill those who run. The one who confronted me would come up occasionally, but their entire body would be torn off. I judged that I had consumed too much of my qi energy, so whenever I would come to senses I would swing the sword and slice up the bodies of the bandits. Cut, stab, slash. Crack, tear, pierce. Suddenly, there are many bandits who are running with distorted expressions on their faces, and I have to use ice qi in all directions with my sword. There are so many of them running away in various directions that even I feel dizzy now. In an instant, I mount a horse and begin to chase after the fleeing bandits. do not run. I warned them right there but still, too many of them ran so my words held no weight to them. As if intimidating the bandits I saw in my previous life, I use the horse to run ahead. I then clamp the torso of the horse with my feet for support and then slant a little to the right to cut off the running bandits necks, and, in an instant, I shout at the bandits. Yah! You fucking bastards! I told you to not run! I move on the horse, stick the fleeing bandits, and trample on a few with the hooves of the horse. I hear a familiar voice from somewhere and when I look, I see the familiar face running to me. Sect Leader! Sect Leader! I reply with frowning eyes. What? What are you doing without fighting? The subordinate ignores my words and looks around and only then did I check the surroundings. The numerous corpses all over the place, bandits corpses. The subordinate is angry at me. You have to fight when there is someone who can fight! I nod, taking a deep breath. Come to think of it, he wasnt a subordinate I had in the previous life. You must be Leader Hwang. He yells back at me. What nonsense is that! I am Leader Hwang! Why are you shouting? Do not get excited. sigh. Stroking the back of the horse I was riding, I say, Wah, you are such a good horse. Good and strong too. Looking at me like that, Leader Hwang sighs. This is fucking insane. Really. Chapter 162 Chapter 162 C Not As Crazy As Darkness. I kicked Leader Hwang right from the horse. You bastard asked to be cursed and now you are doing it yourself. He gets up holding his face. Ah, I did that because I was a bit too excited. I look at the corpses scattered around, and he points in one direction. They ran from there so the base has to be in that direction. It didnt seem like everyone was running to the base either. Right. I dont know why though. I check the condition of Leader Hwang and say, I dont need to chase them right now, so lets take a break. Yes. After saying that, I get off the horse and smack it on the butt to send it into the forest. Leader Hwang seems puzzled. Sect Leader, why are you sending it? You said he was strong. If you dont have confidence to protect, then let go. I pull out the leather bag off the corpse of a bandit and sprinkle it on the ground. This time the water is sweet because I feel thirsty. If I was crazy for a while, it means I lost control, so I sit cross legged to control myself. The triggering condition for craziness is memory. I have competed with bandits in the past life and as the memory of that time was clear I set off my condition. The memory I recalled was one of me in the past life when I got the name of Crazy Demon, and it wasnt a bad one. Because if I go insane I will be in trouble, I am able to calm my mind by meditating. But I never thought I would be taken over by craziness at such an unexpected time. Perhaps the time I dealt with the bandits in the past was before I got used to it. I am a troubled man all the time. There are so many things I tried to forget and there are times as such when things suddenly come back to me. The problem is that the Crazy Demon in the previous life often went insane and had this dark atmosphere around, so I tried to be insane but brightly. What is the difference you ask? I dont know. Just instincts tell me that. Say it brightly Not like dark crazy but light crazy. Looking at the fight just now, it seems like even Leader Hwang wasnt able to recognize what I did. This always happens so it is not surprising. I suddenly look at the wilderness around which feels a bit comforting to me who was insane in the dark. Insane bastard pitiful one. Since the me then and the me now are different, it may sound strange, but I comfort myself in the previous life. Come on, lets keep going. Not get caught in craziness. I am different now. I struggle between the Crazy Demon of this life and the past life. After a while, I am able to take a deep breath and look at Leader Hwang and the corpses of bandits I killed, all without emotion. Peace like a river and coldness like snow. Thinking that the man who sent me back to the past through all the obstacles was a Martial God, I pray to him. Martial God hyung, please look after me. Put me to the test but deliver me from craziness. If I get hit on the left cheek, make it possible to show the other side. Let me avoid the Three Disasters until I become strong. In return for this, I will offer the Five Evils by beating them to death. May only fear come to my enemies asura. When I think about how being alert after praying was a skill not many had, my heart calmed down. After a while, I open my eyes and look at Leader Hwang and sigh. the fiery nature passed. He nods. Congratulations. This isnt something to congratulate. I was surprised to see the Sect Leader suddenly fight like you met with a beast. I nod. Are bandits friends then? They are enemies. That isnt what I meant. Shut up Yes. This is often the case when fighting multiple enemies, but I have no problem with it. I understand. After a while, Leader Hwang asks like he is curious, Ah, then was it like this when you fought with the Murim Alliance? No. I think you fought calmly back then. Not that either. How did you fight? I killed them in one hit. Suddenly, Leader Hwang looks like he regretted it. What? Nothing. Leader Hwang, I am more concerned about killing a horse than a bandit. Am I weird? What do you mean? It could sound strange. Just say one thing. Leader Hwang bursts into laughter. Hehehe. I get up and brush my ass. Lets go, we are in a dangerous situation where we can become bandits too. We need to kill them and leave quickly. I understand. I start tracking while looking at the floor. There are times when blood is visible here and there, times where accessories are missing, weapons abandoned. I say to Leader Hwang who is wandering, If you find something like a spear, bring that to me. I dont see anything. You use a spear? I handle every weapon there is. Leader Hwang looks at me with a serious expression. Sect Leader. What? You are fine? I smile a bit shyly and he walks around as he says, I feel a little at ease now. Then no. If you cannot find the leader of theirs, then you must be scared. If you see the subordinates running away and take them down, it means you are skilled. More skilled than the dead ones. After a while, I cant see the wilderness anymore. I found some fleeing bandits, but it was because they were killed by other bandits. The clothes and the atmosphere are the same. It seems that the leader was killing down those who didnt obey his orders or something. Even the bandits who were subordinates seemed to fight back but most of them died or escaped with their throats being cut. Oddly enough, these guys are being brutally killed by the people they had fun with. There is also laughter around. Throwing in assassin weapons, hitting the bandits who lost, and chasing after them. And jumping onto the horse of another person to kill the raider. To sum it up, a group of bandits were fighting. Leader Hwang says, The guy there smiling while looking around seems to be the Red Ghost. As soon as Leader Hwang says it, the man we presumed to be the Red Ghost looks at us and says something. And the leaders who were killing the fleeing bandits gathered around making loud laughter. I smile looking at them and they smile at us. Smiling? As soon as six to seven bandits begin to run to us, Leader Hwang asks, Sect Leader, how many should I take care of? Do not die. Yes. The bandits spread the distance to the left and right and then came running in a wide formation. As the distance narrowed, I could see the expressions of the bandits. Everyone still had smiles on their faces. This time, the bandits who spread around increased their speed to surround us. I sighed. Fucking assholes. I held the wooden sword in my left hand and as soon as I saw the guy who was throwing an assassin weapon at Leader Hwang, I drew my sword and cut his arm. A scream erupts as the weapon hits someone else. I smile and the Red Ghost stops laughing. And so did the bandits who went around us. The man with his arm severed continued to scream. Tattooed Red Ghost says, Shut up. Three to four assassin weapons hit the guy who had his arm severed and knock him down. Red Ghost speaks to me. Are you the damage mitigator? Did the escort service send you? I pick my nose and check on him. Stronger than Leader Hwang. When I look around, I see people who seemed close to middle-age and those with a slight difference. They are the ones who didnt fully look like bandits. In an instant, the leaders jump off their horses and attack us. A chain flies with a sword attached to it. I slash the chain with my sheath and the sword which was moving for me. So many diverse weapons. And two run at Leader Hwang. And it was a situation where 4 bandits, including Red Ghost, rushed at me. This time I couldnt kill one person with one movement anymore. With my eyes open wide to not lose any sight, I dealt with the chained attacks of the bandits. Sparks flew in the air and then we were close enough. Some kicked the ground with their feet to throw dirt at my face, while others were swinging the chains aiming for my legs. In the meantime, Red Ghost pulled out twin swords and came to bump into me. While I am moving my body, I check Leader Hwang and he is swinging his sword against two people and I smile. Die instead of living like an asshole It was better to die right now. I had no intention of helping him, so I concentrated on my fight. Swords clashing at close range. The one who blocks my sword with a huge sword flies back and bounces off the ground. But everyone here is skilled. It seems like they learned martial arts and then turned into bandits. In that gap, I rush to the Red Ghost to fight For a while, it was a one-on-one fight. Looking closer, Red Ghost too seemed like a middle-class man unlike others. There is something made on his forehead, and tattoos around. Judging this, he has a mark of something on his head, like someone who escaped from family. In particular, the way he wields the twin swords wasnt one that depended on experience but a sword technique. In any case, he is capable of slaughtering five to six bandits alone. I am in danger of breaking my thin sword, so I fight by constantly infusing qi into the wooden sword. However, the one who is surprised by the wooden sword is me. The twin swords, which the Red Ghost is using against the wooden swords almost at the same time, break while my sword seems fine Red Ghost was shocked, and so was I. Treasured sword. Red Ghost steps back holding the broken sword. The other bandits, who switched their stance to defense, charge ahead. In an instant, I stepped forward by using Shock Feet. Dust rises with this movement. The wooden sword wrapped with ice qi was scattering like plum blossoms. The dust mixed with black wind spread out in all directions, and the energy of ice qi filled in the gap made with the Shock Feet. My vision was blurry Pupupupu the sounds and then screams came together. I swing a chair to blow away the dust then look at Red Ghost, who ran. When I turn my head, Leader Hwang is fighting fiercely against two bandits from a distance. Would it be fine to go ahead and kill Red Ghost? Or should I save Leader Hwang first? Which one would shine brighter? Lets live a busier life and work harder. I giggle and join Leader Hwang. As soon as I get close, I raise the wooden sword and I see that the guys I were fighting against were scared. Leader Hwang, I came. He gasps for air and says, Sect Leader, please just help me! I slash the hand of the bandit in a straight line and then pull onto the leg of the other bandit. In the meantime, Leader Hwang uses his sword to cut a X shape at the neck of the enemies. Leader Hwang made my heart flutter. Haaa. I touch the back of Leader Hwang who is bending back into exhaustion. Lets go Wait a minute. Lets go. You brat. There is just one guy left, the Red Ghost. Kicking him on the ass, I say, Now, run. Yes. We run through the wilderness for a while and can see Red Ghost running away. Behind me Leader Hwang is panting. Towards the wilderness Leader Hwang, me, and Red Ghost are running around. Leader Hwang, come fast. Now, Leader Hwang could only let out a gasping sound. I look up at the sky and see the sun is setting. After a while, Red Ghost, who had been staggering, bends over and gasps like he cant run anymore. But I was fine. Rather than killing Red Ghost right away, I deliberately ran slow to train Leader Hwang. I approach Red Ghost who looks like hes about to collapse and call Leader Hwang. Come fast! Suddenly Red Ghost kneels down and raises both hands. Save me. I reply while looking down at him. why should I? I will become your subordinate. I answer back in a calm tone. A man who kills his subordinates will not be taken in by me. Just die. Haa. I shout at Leader Hwang, COME FAST! At that moment, Leader Hwang, holding his energy, threw his sword with all his might. As soon as the sword, which flew with a crushing sound, pierces the neck of Red Ghost, Leader Hwang falls forward. He gasps for air by laying down. I applaud as we stand alone in the wilderness watching the dead man. Laughter comes out of nowhere. Nice. Chapter 163 Chapter 163 C Spark As Beautiful As A Flower. I look at Leader Hwang who cant get up. Leader Hwang, you have weak stamina. Leader Hwang answers after he turns toward the sky. if I hadnt eaten that pill I would have died from running itself. I sit on the floor too. You did good. Yes. Leader Hwang lies down and looks at the sky and I look at the trees. As I am looking at the desolate place, I think of Sword Demon. From what I know, Sword Demons heart is no different from this. I wonder if he went to visit Elder Heo now. I will never know. Actually, the condition of Sword Demon wasnt normal, so it wasnt natural for a patient to visit another patient. If he was holding on to the sword and was on the verge of enlightenment, there was a chance that the bastard might not have even informed him. Actually, Sword Demon doesnt have burnout. He must be a man who became a swordsman because he was serious towards the sword. Leader Hwang lying down asks, What kind of place is Low-Down Sect? Lost in my thoughts at the scenery, I briefly answer Leader Hwangs words. A sect which does such things. I see. You mean the kind of things which make people run out of breath in forests and kill? What you kill, and I kill are different. I am not one who goes after fame. Lets assume that the one who defeated the leader of bandits was you. Thank you. Because I did actually kill the leader. The world will not know though. I look up and ask him, You still have those flares? Yes. Take it out. Leader Hwang put his hand into his sleeve and took out a flare. Want it? No, hold onto it for a while. I laid down on the ground and looked at the sky. As the sun went down, the light began to turn faint. As soon as the light in the sky, which was too bright, began to go down, stars should appear. After a while, I tell Leader Hwang right before the shining stars come to visit us, Now. What? The sky is suitable for watching fireworks. Ah, I dont know what will happen. I am shooting it. Leader Hwang raises the flare into the sky and grabs the string to pull. In an instant, the gunpowder explodes, and something bursts into the air. It didnt rise too high but there was this popping sound, and the flames exploded again making it shine in the sky like a blooming flower. While looking at the sky like a flower, I say, Looks like the signal was right. Right. Because this is a clunky flare it isnt fully done. The signal flares of places like Murim Alliance and more have better perfection. Anyway, revenge for the warrior who had the signal flare was replaced by me and you. As I watched the flare vanish in air, I say, It would have been better if the flare was fired. Why? You never know. Someone like me could have been lying there and rescued him. . Anyway, the unknown warriors who died to them, may they get peace and rest in happiness now. Leader Hwang says to those whom he never met, Rest in peace. I look at the darkening sky and check Leader Hwang. Actually, it was the right time to get up and walk before it got any darker, but looking at the sky I went silent. The sky was filled with stars right away. I mumble looking at the stars, Why are there so many stars? Only then did Leader Hwang say, Right. Leader Hwang got up and looked at me. It looked like he wanted to say something. Shut up. Yes. . But you know what I want to say It is not my business, so shut up. Yes. From now on, these bandits wont do anything, if they do they wont live. And promises are useless. Leader Hwang wipes his face with hands. Sect Leader, I will go to the Hwayang escort service and apologize later. Do what you want to. Suddenly I get up and turn my head to the sound of the horse hooves which were coming in, and it wasnt one or two. Leader Hwang looks so lost. Ah there are more. And there came this incomprehensible cry from the wilderness. After a while, the lights shone and flickered, and hooves could be heard. Leader Hwang gets up with his sword and I smile looking at him. Do you have any energy left? I cannot just die. The odds of those approaching being the bandits were very low. It is because I took down the leader of theirs and those who ran, or possibly ran, couldnt have come back to attack. Leader Hwang. Yes. Looking at the lights, I say, I shot a signal flare so it looks like they came to rescue us. Uh? It cannot be. After a while, a man with a torch comes forward. , you are here! Hahaha. Of course, it was a person I didnt know. But seeing me and Leader Hwang the guy burst into laughter, and he raised his torch. Over here! Leader Hwang turns to me. Sect Leader? As expected, I tell him, These are the people who were in the inn. I told you. There will be help. Leader Hwang covers his face as if the emotions got the best of him. Meanwhile the first man who came asks me, Sect Leader. Seriously, we found you. There were so many bandit corpses here and there so we thought you were close by, but it took us so long to find you. I nod and smile. How did you find me? We came here after the flare. We werent sure and wanted to know. When the mans words finished, people with torches rushed in. Of course, even Moyong Baek was there. I brush off my butt and get up as Moyong baek smiles, Sect Leader, you worked so hard. We were late to come. It seems like he knew I annihilated most of the bandits. The men who came for us are curious and ask, Is the Red Ghost dead too? I dont want to answer so I turn to Leader Hwang, and he says, Yes, he died at last in this place. Actually Before he could say anything more, the men with torches all screamed in joy. People thanked me and Leader Hwang equally. Thank you Leader Hwang and thank you Sect Leader While they said those words, a man from the crowd with a horse said, Sect Leader, please get on this. You can ride with your colleague. I got on the horse. Another man yielded the horse to Leader Hwang in the same way and got onto the horse. A man took the lead and shouted by raising his torch. Lets head back! Follow me! People shared their joy and shouted. Should we have a drink today? I dont think drinking will do it today. With all the jokes men usually do, we all moved. Those holding torches naturally ran ahead. The people with torches surrounded me, Leader Hwang, and Moyong Baek. We were being escorted in flames. It was my first-time walking like this in a flickering flame. Even though I didnt smile, the others were laughing and enjoying themselves. I looked around and rode my horse, and saw that Moyong Baek was smiling, and Leader Hwang was also bursting into laughter. There are drinking parties which wouldnt be avoided. Now it is the same. Because everyone started coming to drink and share things. Even after returning to the inn, there was no rest because everyone was drinking. Reluctantly, I took a table with Moyong Baek and Leader Hwang. But I didnt want to talk, so whenever people came to me and asked me about the death of Red Ghost, I pointed to Leader Hwang. In the end, he had to repeat himself several times and after a while leader Hwang lost his cool, so he gathered all the people and explained what happened. Every time he looked at me, I put my finger to my mouth. Dont talk about me. So, he had to take the lead for all. And like a performer, Leader Hwang explained what happened and the people were busy listening. I slipped my head into drinking and at that time an old man, with the help of someone, approached Leader Hwang. Leader Hwang looks puzzled at the old man. Even before the old man gets close he begins to cry out and then continues to cry holding Leader Hwang. The old man is probably not the only one who lost his family to the bandits. Everyone is watching Quite a few people hold onto Leader Hwang and thank him or bow to him. At first, Leader Hwang greets him with a puzzled expression but seeing their expressions he lowers his head and hugs the elderly. Moyong Baek, who watched it, says, Leader Hwang seems to have lost it. Right. Sect Leader? Moyong Baek looks at me and says, Red Ghost, is he strong? I nod. It would have been too much for these people to deal with. It seems like the Red Ghost thought of this place as a warehouse. He acted like he owned the land of the forest there and wasnt bothered and would come hit people when he wanted things. Moyong Baek lowers his head and asks, Did that guy really kill him? I, too, speak lowly. Right. Although they all died. After thinking about it, Moyong Baek joked to me. I should go and give him something. Seeing how he is struggling against the old man; Leader Hwang seems to be going weak. Of course, some of the warriors here seemed to know that Leader Hwang couldnt have killed Red Ghost alone. But whenever people came to visit with alcohol, Moyong Baek would smile and hold his hand out to Leader Hwang. It was an expression which said the merit all goes to that man there, and people accepted it. Moyong Baek looked at Leader Hwang. Leader Hwang, look at the people around that man. I nod my head. Better a swordsman than a bandit. Moyong. Yes. Lets make sure to make more swordsmen in the future. Even if I do the killing, the fame is given to the subordinates, and we will place a lot of swordsmen around. Moyong Baek smiles like someone is joking. Sure. The two of us raise our glasses and watch the people. I say, For swordsmen. Moyong Baek says, For Low-Down Sect. And the two of us drank while Leader Hwang was suffering with the people. He approaches us back with a flushed face. He sits down and looks at me. Sect Leader. What. Dealing with people is so difficult. Talk and talk and talk. It seems like I can die from that. Does it make sense for them to call me Guardian Hwang? I cleared my throat and clearly tell him, Guardian Warrior Hwang, have a drink. When I speak seriously, the surroundings turn silent, and everyone stares at where Leader Hwang is. Leader Hwang grasps the atmosphere and raises the glass looking shocked. Ah, yes. Thank you. After pouring the drink, I console him for the hard work he did, but with a serious expression. It is really fortunate that I had you to take down Red Ghost. I saw this with my own eyes in the forest. I jump and take my drink. Hyungs! Let us all have drinks! Moyong Baek stands up with a smile and raises his glass looking around as people begin to lift their glasses up. Moyong Baek who caught my gaze shouts, For Guardian Warrior Hwang! People shout with cheerful voices. Guardian Hwang! Leader Hwangs expression was worth watching. It was a good thing, but he seemed to be conflicted with it. I met my eyes with the Poison Demon of the previous life He mingled with the crowd and laughed. Chapter 164 Chapter 164 C The Two People Are My Flare. The drinking lasted all night and I managed to escape the county the moment the sun rose. There were a lot of drunk people, but Moyong Baek and I were fine because he hadnt had a drink for a while. When something like this happens Do they have to really drink so much? Is what I think. You shouldnt think like that. Leader Hwang looks at me. Think about what? We are in the county now and I am Guardian Hwang here. Because I did something undeniable. I will admit it. Yes. I am also the leader of the Great Raven Clan. Seeing his nod, I come to the conclusion, But you are the prisoner of the Low-Down Sect. Hmm. The guardian of this place is the prisoner of the Low-Down Sect. Only then did he realize the reality of the situation. That is me. And do not forget. Yes. I was about to ask Moyong Baek to have breakfast somewhere close by but I stopped and turned. Leader Hwang and Moyong Baek too turned after me. . A man is approaching with a smile from the road we just came from and says, I barely caught up. Where are you going? I look at the swordsman who came. I couldnt tell if this person was an ally or not. All I could see was that he was well dressed. And I felt wary right away despite not showing it. As soon as I saw him, I felt feelings close to hatred towards him. Looking closer, he was tall with good looks and spoke while holding his hands. Great Raven Clan Leader, Low-Down Sect Leader. I couldnt greet you because I was mixed amongst so many people. But I am called Yeop Ya-hyung. Moyong Baek and Leader Hwang turn to me so I ask, What is this about? Yeop Ya-hyung pulls something out of his sleeve and shows us. Do you know who this is? I look at the painting shown. It is tattooed Red Ghost. Yeop Ya-hyung reads what was there. The man with 20 gold coins hanging on his head is indeed him. If we cut the head of his and take it to the county, you will be paid the gold. You drank a lot last night, did you get paid though? I speak in a dry voice. We didnt kill for money, so there is no need for it. Anything else? Obviously, the people of the county were trying to punish the bandits on their own and it was questionable why this man was asking for this. I check the sword of Yeop Ya-hyung. It wasnt a sword which one can attain that easily. Yeop Ya-hyung says, I have a question, so I tried to ask while accompanying you when you were about to leave. Please excuse me. I nod my head. Ask away. How did Leader Hwang get hailed as the man who killed Red Ghost when he didnt have the skills to deal with I answer right away. Because I was tired of dealing with them, I asked Leader Hwang to kill him. Got your answer? Ah, I see. Yeop Ya-hyung laughs at the answer and says, My curiosity has been resolved. Then, have a nice trip back. I touch my nose and turn around to face the guy. Warrior Yeop, which place do you belong to? He smiles as he says, I apologize. My master wouldnt be happy with me revealing it. While he turns around to leave, taking a couple steps back, I stare at his back and ask, Where is the place then? When I ask the same question in a different manner, he stops and I ask again, Where is it? Yeop Ya-hyung turns back and he is still smiling. Sect Leader, people forgive me for not answering you. I nod and say, You came after me at this time to find out who killed the bandit head. To go back without saying anything about you I am asking one last time, which clan? Only then did his face harden. I look at him and think of letting him go. Warrior Yeop. Yes. Red Ghost learned martial arts properly. It wasnt martial arts a bandit would train in. Then he too must have a master right? How would I know that? I smile as I say, I killed Red Ghost, that should be enough answer. I deliberately decide to speak out as if telling him to not bother. And his face changed as he left. As he walks away, Moyong Baek asks, Sect Leader, shouldnt we catch him? I shake my head. I dont know who his master is, but when they come, things will be a mess. From the start, I thought there would be only bandits there, but it seems like there are a lot more different kinds of people around. Lets walk now. I walk around the path with the two and Leader Hwang asks, What is with the bounty picture? It was to lure us into the wilderness and spray poison. Or something which cannot be cured. If this county was like this till now Yeop Ya-hyungs master is a wicked man who has good control. I couldnt tell right away if they were on orthodox side or unorthodox side. This is due to the fact that once a person reaches a certain skill level, they go past the cultivation side they chose, and the martial arts learned afterwards can be so diverse. As I was walking I ask Leader Hwang, Leader Hwang, can you list the experts around here? Both from the orthodox and unorthodox? I nod. Since he is the head of the Great Raven Clan he should know something about this. And he begins to speak of those he knew without much difficulty. The people of both sides. There were people I knew and those I didnt either. And after he begins to mention those who I presumed to be stronger. Around here is the White Face Scholar who is famous, and there is the Demon Fairy who is famous. And not exactly here but around there is the Wandering Cold Man which isnt even a clan yet just a reputation a single person got Wait. Yes. I stop and turn to him. Yuxiang Valley Master, Demon Fairy and White Face Scholar are friends? Yes. You know that? What more do you know about them? Nothing more I see. I looked at the two of them as I yawned. All three of us stayed up all night so even they were feeling sleepy now. Furthermore, since Leader Hwang had gone past the limits of his stamina yesterday, it wouldnt be strange for the guy to pass out. I watch the path Yeop Ya-hyung left in. I dont tell the two, but somehow I have the feeling that the guy would come back with his colleagues. I cant help it, so I decide to speak. I think there will be a group to chase us. Just a hunch. Uh? Lets head to the Black Rabbit Union first. Leader Hwang cannot fight now with his condition and Moyong lacks skills of combat so there is a higher chance of us being wounded. I hand a slip to Moyong Baek Get a horse or carriage on the way and run to Black Rabbit Union. Moyong Baek asks, Wouldnt it be better to wait together and be in a group of three if someone is going to come to attack? I thought of sending them first because they were my priority, so I decided to scare them. The situation isnt like that. If there is a warrior, a master to that man, he would be skilled like me. While I fight with them, the two of you can be outnumbered or even worse, hurt, so return. That is my order. Moyong Baek and Leader Hwang look at each other. Since they wont move, I command them. Moyong, if you, a subordinate of Black Rabbit Union, goes and brings me an envoy or support it would help. I can manage to drag the fight till then. You two are my signal flares. You get what I mean? Go now. Realizing what they had to do, the two nod. We will move quickly. Leader Hwang says it like he felt bad, Please be safe. I wave my hand to shoo them away and walk slowly. Yeop Ya-hyung would think I killed Red Ghost so the target would be me. Be it any side of the clan he is, if someone touches their men, they will come for revenge. There is no reason for me to run to them, so I sit down in an inn and sit to take a break. The server asks me, What do you want? Noodles? No. What do you want? Dumplings? Nope. What do you want? I looked inside the inn and wasnt shocked since there are always unfriendly shops everywhere. It is true that I prefer being treated right but since I am a server I knew. But this guy, I didnt like him and nor do I like how he acted. I didnt even think about drinking since I already sipped alcohol. The food was bad, and I took out my dagger and placed it on the table. After putting both legs on the empty chair, I closed my eyes, and the server came back with an annoying voice. No, what do you want? Guest. Gues He mumbles but seeing the dagger out he goes back. Rest comfortably. I closed my eyes and dream with reality mingled around. Moyong Baek and Leader Hwang carrying the burden of human flares on their shoulders ran for Black Rabbit Union by shouting for motivation. On the other side were men with huge swords cursing me. All of a sudden, those who seemed to be the Five Evils passed by one by one. The Five Evils dancing and training martial arts while wearing weapons around with black strings tied to them. In the dream, I looked at the rope to see people acting as puppets. Of course, it must be the Heavenly Evil which belonged to the Three Disasters. Since I have never seen them, the face of Heavenly Evil couldnt be revealed in a dream, but the person was playing around with the Five Evils like puppets. I opened my eyes because it felt closer to a nightmare. I closed my eyes but before I knew it the sun was in the middle of the sky, and I began to feel thirsty and hungry. When I look at the server he runs to me. you called? I take out a money slip and hand it to him. I am sorry. Yes. Bring me alcohol and dry snacks. Bring food too. And the inn too, I will rent it for a day. Things like furniture might break so just buy them and if you want to live, go somewhere else. Ah, yes. I will take good care of myself and the owner, but do you have to fight in the inn? It is nice we can make money but.. I look at the server then. His thin limbs are like a squids and look dirty. Fighting in the inn makes me happy. I have nothing to say. Alright. There is no name, what is the name? Spring Dream Guest House. I had a wild dream, so it is because of Spring Dream huh. After a while the server went in and brought out the things I ordered. Dumplings and noodles were missing. After rummaging around this time there was vegetable soup, rice, and fish all placed on the table and I ask, What is all this? Ah, it has been a while since the owner saw that much money so he is doing this to thank you. I roll my sleeves up and smell the food. After that, I pour the alcohol into the empty cup and pick up chopsticks. I touch the food and dip it into the alcohol cup. If the food I touched with the chopsticks is poisoned, then bubbles will appear in alcohol. There was no problem. And I eat only after seeing that everyone is done. Chapter 165 Chapter 165 C Spring Dream Guest House While eating. Even the owner of the guest house, the chef and the server greet me and leave. I am sorry but this cannot be helped. Still, as if this wasnt shocking, the owner said he would be going on a trip for a few days with the money I gave taking the server and chef. Maybe that is why the name of the guest house is Spring Dream. It expresses how delicate life is. The attitude of the man was quite suitable to it. Well, I forced the people who were working to take leave, took the inn, and ate the decent meal prepared to my hearts content. After finishing the food and slowly sipping the drink, it was difficult to tell if this was a guest house for Spring Dreams or for Lee Zaha. The pursuers didnt come. No guests came. With nothing to do, I move the dishes to the kitchen and begin to even wash them. Even though I am not good at cooking, I was good at washing, so I cleaned it up and went out with a towel and wiped the tables. There are times when I feel proud of myself after cleaning things, and this was one of those moments. Suddenly, I look at the towel I was using to wipe the table and think. Is this an occupational disease? I suddenly wanted to do it. I put the towel down and set my mood to fight. A day in the guest house with nothing to do. At the leisure of alcohol and dried snacks. It wasnt bad. If Moyong Baek and Leader Hwang had enough time to return without incident, a little dishwashing and cleaning was fine. While chewing on the dry snacks, I kept my eyes on the table, the floor, the pillars, the brooms, and the kitchen along with the utensils. I remembered everything I could and soon forgot. I sit down at the special spot of viewing that I found and put my legs on an empty chair and close my eyes for a moment. I was thinking about closing the inn and leaving for Black Rabbit Union if nothing happens before sundown. I am so drowsy that I wasnt sure if I was fully asleep or half asleep. When the sound of steady walking is heard, I wake up. And then I hear four times, I look ahead. A man wearing a bamboo hat slighted his head a little and looked at me as he sat down. Can I give my order? I look at his barely visible eyes, the jawline, his straight form and the sword on the table. All we have is alcohol. It is fine. Then I will prepare it. The man takes out a coin from his sleeve and throws it at the pillar next to me. The coin gets stuck in the pillar. Puak! I look at the nailed coin and say, Throw it lightly. Fucking bastard. . Why do bothersome stuff when not needed? Fucking retard. Tch. I go into the kitchen and bring out drinks, the cheap ones, and put that on the table. Should I throw the drink too? I am about to throw the drink but then click my tongue and put it on the table. On the way back, I can feel the guy staring at me. Disgusting. I feel thirsty after watching the pathetic guy and drink a glass of it. While drinking, the bamboo hat guy takes out a silver needle and dips it into the glass. I snort. Look at that. You dont have to drink if you dont want to, stupid. The guy gulps it down and looks at me. It was brutal, as if there were knives in his eyes. I couldnt tell if he wanted to genuinely cut me down or just stare me down. I try to block those unlucky eyes of his by drawing my hands to my eyes. The man asks me, Any dry snacks? I put my finger into my nose and ask, How does this sound? The guy who is drinking another glass spits it out. Spit! I glare at him while chewing on the dry snacks that I prepared for myself. I shake the beef jerky at the man and then eat it. Suddenly, he and I turn. A well-dressed woman in pale pink and red clothes, like a palace lady, approaches with a white fly whisk1 in her hand. I cant figure out the identity of the one who came down to sit. But I knew who the woman was. Demon Fairy. She sits down without even looking at the bamboo hat guy and looks at me. I chew on the jerky as I speak. What are you looking at, you insane woman. Dont stare and order. She used a fly whisk to shake off her anger and since she is a woman who seemed to disguise herself, she couldnt help but look insane to me. Demon Fairy lets out a short sigh and mumbles as if she pretended to chase the flies with her fly whisk. What bugs are While I chew on the dry snacks, I look at her and the man and burp. In the meantime, the two dont even look at each other and continue to keep their attention on me. I point my finger towards myself and ask, Am I that good looking? Seems like you are falling in love with me? Demon fairy acts like she would puke. She frowns and waves her hand in front of her, when a beggar begins to drag his foot in. Looking at the beggar I think. All those in the Beggars Union are beggars, but not all beggars are of the Beggars Union. A beggar who didnt belong to the union sits at a distance from the two and looks at me. I say to the beggar, You bastard, how dare you sit down when you have no money! The beggar laughs at me with his yellow teeth. Server bastard if you have confidence try kicking me out. I point to the beggar and say, Stay seated. He giggles. I sigh. There are a lot of guests today. While drinking a glass of alcohol Yeop Ya-hyung comes in smiling. Haha ah, hello. No one even looks at his face. Warrior Yeop, we meet again. He smiles and says, Uh? Right. Why did you come? Here to die? He looks me straight in the eye and says, As if I would? I came here because I didnt want to die. Pointing to the seat in front of me, I say, Come and have a drink. Yeop Ya-hyung holds his hand out. I will have to refuse. Still, when someone I knew came, I feel glad that I could ask him, Any more guests to come? With a nervous expression he takes out a cigar and bites into it. Well, how would I know about that? We should wait. As he begins to breathe into it after he lights it on fire, the woman who is behind waves for the smoke to go. But the guy with bamboo hat is still glaring at me and I say, Sir, you shocked me! Your eyes keep staring at me. You jerk. You fucking scared me. Can you not see for you to use those eyes by opening them that wide?! I click my tongue looking at the guests. The insane guy in the bamboo hat, the mad bitch with that whisk, the beggar who limps, and this guy who laughs the guests I got are so diverse. I point to the sky and say, If I am guilty! There must be no other crime than to help. I never thought that the life of a swordsman would be this hard. Fucking shit. This is all because you misread the book. Yeop Ya-hyung smiles and asks me, Which book was it? Still, Warrior Yeop is the only one I can talk to here. Yeop Ya-hyung smiles and nods. I will listen to you then. I liked this guy called the Gambling King, and there was this book I got from his home. I continue to talk by chewing on the dry snack. It was written, the strongest in the world is a swordsman. Ah, is that so? Well, it was written in every phrase that a swordsman is strong. There were the words of expert warriors. Yeop Ya-hyung speaks while eating. Such nonsense was written? I know. So, you believed the scammers words? You are more na?ve than you look. I answer in a serious tone. No. you bastard. How can I trust that? Since I cursed at him, the guy looks upset and puts in the mandarin he took out into his mouth. I continue talking. But it was my first time hearing that shit. But the important thing is no one considered it as nonsense. What is important is always rare. So, it has to be verified. What do you people know? Whether the words in the book are true or not it is something you have to try to realize right? Yeop Ya-hyung replies looking surprised. Ah, so you acted like that. You went to hit the bandits. You are a wonderful person. But I think you misread the book though. It is the first time I have ever heard anyone mention such a book. I nod and smile. I might have misread the book, but you seem to have misread the person. Yeop Ya-hyung smiles as he says, Such nonsense. When I jump up, making the chair creak All four of them are startled and get up, but the man in the bamboo hat stops himself from pulling his sword. As I sit quietly, I say, You fucking assholes. You scared the shit out of me. Hahaha. I burst into laughter hitting myself on the thigh and three of them sat back. I really admired the bamboo hat guy. You have amazing cool headedness. I yawn but then think an assassin needle might be thrown in, so I cover my mouth. This was a rule of manners too. After pouring alcohol into the half empty glass, I put ice qi into the glass, and it freezes the liquid in no time. Yeop Ya-hyung looks at me. What are you doing? After pouring a fresh drink over it, I shake the glass to cool the fresh liquid. I raise my glass and tell them, This is cold alcohol. Gulping it down, I wipe my mouth. Kyaa. It tastes like this. I put the frozen glass down after seriously thinking about throwing it. It was because a man in his mid-thirties was walking to the guest house pretending to be busy, with a dull expression in his eyes. He stops right ahead of the guest house for a moment and looks at Yeop Ya-hyung while he points and Yeop Ya-hyung says, Yes, right. The busy looking man nods and walks right over to sit across. He rubs his hands together and asks me without another thought, Young one, why are you interfering with other peoples business? You caused huge casualties and property damage to our business. How do you plan to compensate for it? I dont think you can handle it alone. You are? Yeop Ya-hyung answers, The Sect Leader for Low-Down Sect which is making its name now. There is the Black Rabbit Union under his command, and he killed many warriors under the unorthodox sect. What are his specialties then? The subordinates trained by him tend to move on their own. Hearing that he asks me, You a hero or something? Why are you doing this? I try to be respectful because this bastard gives off such a mood. But who are you? I want the name. You come acting up the moment you fucking stepped in. I suddenly try to bring in a fight. I am not the Low-Down Sect Leader. How dare this fucking guy think I am the head of a sect? The Sect Leader avoided it, and I took his place I look at Yeop Ya-hyung innocently. did my acting work? The man ahead glares at me and asks Yeop Ya-hyung, What happened? He says hes not. He replies in a calm tone. It is the Low-Down Sect Leader, I am right. This mad man is playing pranks on us. I brush my hair with my left hand. I heard it right. You people arent normal. The man frowns and glares at him and I say, I am also acquainted with the Alliance leader, so act in your limit. I glare at the man who is ahead of me and, the one who seems to be their leader, tilts his head, and says, We dont have a good relationship with the Murim Alliance Leader. Do you know each other? I cross my arms. Because I know the head of the Demon Cult. Dont try wagging your tail now. I didnt kid. And the guy ahead of me and his lackeys all went stiff. It worked. After setting the mood, I speak in a prideful tone. That is me. Editors Note A fly whisk is a tool that is commonly used to swat flies. In the context of Buddhism, it represents the symbolic sweeping of ignorance and mental afflictions. ?? Chapter 166 Chapter 166 C I Soared In The Air The middle-aged guy opens his mouth with a firm expression. Know each other? Yeop Ya-hyung laughs like he wants to intervene. Could that even happen? He must be saying anything because he is surrounded. The man nods. See here, Low-Down Sect Leader. Do you have many lives or something? There are names you can mention and those you shouldnt. I dont care. The man regains his composure and says, Anyway, you dont have to touch the sect. You are no cult leader. I couldnt say I was the cult leader because that is what I hate the most. The man laughs and says, Low-Down Sect Leader, about what happened this time. It will not end with you dying. For now, the Low-Down Sect will be annihilated without leaving a single living ant in it. I cut off his words with a serious tone. First of all, the Low-Down Sect doesnt accept ants in it. For your knowledge. I look at the man and say, Now you continue. We will also take down the Black Rabbit Union, Nanming Society, and more. That sounds scary, you brutal people. Fortunately, you must be an organization which has nothing to do with the Murim Alliance. It isnt over. In addition, I will investigate from where you started, and I will start with taking down those who even passed paths with you. What will happen? People who know you will He pretends to slit his throat. Will be decapitated. Why go after innocent people? Shut up. Do not take my words lightly. You cannot handle your life anymore. Do you get it? I will take all your lowest subordinates in your union. Of course, they will be pushed through the initiation training. Take the medicine we give them. You get what I mean? I nod. Who exactly is the captain? Maybe I touched wrong. Since my life depends on you, anyway, just say it. The middle-aged man whispers with a frown. A worthless man like you doesnt have to know that. Scratching the nape of my neck, I reply, I can find out. I will find out when I kill you. And I am no trash. The trash are the Demon Cult members. As Yeop Ya-hyung smiles, the beggar and the woman too laugh. Hahaha. In the meantime, the eyes of theirs were all glaring at me. Even the middle-aged guy smiles. You speak so easily. Suddenly the atmosphere warms up and I laugh along. I had no idea what or who was behind these people, but anyway, the more skillful they are, the less likely I dont know of them. Since the time where I was strong in the previous life hadnt yet come, things like this can happen unknowingly. And this is my prediction. It is highly possible that these people dont belong to a sect or a family, but a fairly strong warrior of an Unorthodox Sect or a member of the Five Evils is their head. If it is a warrior at the highest level then they can treat me like this since I dont have an amazing reputation yet. Even if it is the Five Evils, it is because they are evil people who didnt get pushed back even in my previous life. I continued to smile and kept my eye on the middle-aged man so he wouldnt move ahead. There are definitely a lot of opponents, so I continued to look. My eyes turn to the man who is still silent. The middle-aged man sitting holds out glove armor. I respond by using Wooden Fowl Palm Force on both hands. Kwaaang! When the frowning middle-aged man stops with just three paces. The bamboo hat one draws his sword Yeop Ya-hyung too draws his sword and the Demon Angel swings her sleeves while the beggar gets up with a smile and looks at me. I dodge two of the swift sword attacks which come in and tilt my head to let the Sword qi pass. In an instant, the beggars shoes, which flew while spinning in the air, are halted by my hands. I respond with Wooden Fowl Palm Force, then with my back I step onto the furniture in the guest house, which breaks down. The beggar who got close had spun in the air and retreated. The movements were light. In the meantime, the Sword Wind which flew in with the intention of securing a wound on me, began to break the inside of the guest house. Ah, because it is someone elses guest house, look at them ruining it. I get pushed all the way to the kitchen and pull out my dagger with my right hand and use my left hand to grab a random kitchen knife. I put the wooden sword aside like a trump card for a while. First of all, I put flame qi into the dagger and kitchen knife. As soon as I saw everything in front of me splitting into a straight line with a low sound, I soar into the air and break down the roof of the guest house. The bamboo hat guy glares at me. The feet of a dagger too moved diligently to block my escape, and the Demon Fairy with Yeop Ya-hyung moved to the east and west to block my paths. Trying to locate the middle-aged man, I say, . But are you all here? Yeop Ya-hyung asks curiously, What do you mean by that? I was waiting for you to kill all of you. It is a question of whether there are more people who want to die coming here. To which the guy smiles. This much is enough, I think even after killing the Sect Leader we will have enough strength left. I answered walking on the roof that seemed like it would collapse. No. That is plain delusion. Those who surrender now will be taken to the Low-Down Sect now. Think well if you want to live. Warrior Yeop. Do you have any thoughts now? None. I nod. Unfortunate. Then you will have to work too hard. Suddenly, a horse neighs close by, and the middle-aged man mounted on the brown horse pulls an arrow from his back. I mumble in shock. Isnt bow an unfair weapon in Kangho? Insane people. It wasnt unfair to be precise. The arrow flies in with a ching sound and when I dodge it without difficulty, the guy pulls another arrow and says, Trust me and go at him. I will continue to aim. No one responds to the middle-aged mans words, so I answer. I understand. This time, I just moved my head to avoid the arrow but the force of it was so strong that I could feel the pressure on my cheek. In an instant, four of them moved from the four directions. Oh my I move back into the hole in the roof and slash the arrow which appears and infuse flame qi into the dagger. Papapak- With a sound, the roof cracks open In return, the sword wind, sword qi, the palm, and assassin needles pour in. Bubububk I rolled onto the ground and threw myself out of the inn. Now the sound of the bowstring being drawn was odd. Blocking the arrows flying between the west side, I drew the dagger vertically to release the sword qi. The middle-aged man moves hurriedly to avoid the sword Qi. The reaction is so fast that this horse doesnt seem like a normal horse. In an instant, four people from above the roof come down. I suddenly look at the kitchen knife I am holding. When there is no time to care about the situation, the middle-aged man points the bow at me. I cant think of anything and ask, so, any thoughts about surrendering? Fine. Yeop Ya-hyung smiles. Sect Leader, your skills are nothing. At this point, we stepped too far in to back out. The middle-aged man aiming the bow says to Yeop Ya-hyung, Can you not shut up? Yeop Ya-hyung is surprised. Sorry. Shut up and attack. He isnt even fighting properly. Demon Fairy rushes in without another word, the man in the bamboo hat swings his sword, and the beggar just giggles at me. Yeop Ya-hyung, also looks at me while moving his head to and fro, as if he saw a chance. I slash the fly whisk with the dagger. The white fly whisk is made of the white tail of a horse. Naturally, it started to smell burnt as my dagger was surrounded with fire qi. It is perfectly compatible with my martial arts. You use that weapon like a fool. I laugh throwing it away, but I can feel something from behind. An arrow comes and Yeop Ya-hyung leaps into the air and swings his sword. I slash Yeop Ya-hyungs sword with my dagger and at the same time flick my wrist at the neck of Yeop Ya-hyung. The guy is surprised to see me extend my left hand out which holds the kitchen knife and twists his body to the back The kitchen knife sticks to his shoulder. Puak! In an instant, after counteracting the palm of the beggars, I deliberately widened the distance and did a somersault. I lost the kitchen knife but it was my gain since I stabbed Yeop Ya-hyung. Yeop Ya-hyung frowns and grabs his shoulder. I nod looking at him. It is meant to hurt. Shut up. Even in the midst of this, the Demon Fairy, the bamboo hat man, and the beggar rush for me. An arrow flies that makes a sound as it moves. I smile, stepping back slowly. will you follow if I run? The beggar answers. If you are confident, try running. I pushed myself off the ground with my left foot, and then spun in the air. I heard a sound from behind which was an arrow to the back of my head. Swish! I lower my body down without slowing too much and then stretch ahead to increase the speed. In an instant, my madness was flaring up as I moved. How did I get into a good position in my last life if I cannot even handle these people? Of course, after running for a while I ran around the place. I arrive again right at the guest house and stare blankly at the broken guest house. ruined. At this point, it seems like it should be because a solid theory is that every guest house I get into is ruined. I guess it is fate now that I have no one to blame now. Look at the guest house I came into And my pursuers come after me. And as I watch the guest house, which was ruined, these guys seem pretty shocked too. I look at them not bothered and put my dagger near my chest. Yeop Ya-hyung, who had injured his shoulder, arrives last and lets out a rough breath. I try to comfort the guy. You worked pretty hard. I think you will die in the next attack. Poor bastard. I go back into the guest house and sit down on a chair which seemed alright and look at the insane woman, the glaring guy, the beggar and the injured. Oh, the guy with the bow too. The beggar stiffens for the first time and the middle-aged man says, You arent a normal mad man? I thought you were running away. The middle-aged man gets off his horse and takes a deep breath as he speaks to me. You continue to hide those skills of yours, do not look down on us. Things will turn bloody. If the knife you had was poisoned then Yeop Ya-hyung would have been dead by now. I get it. I speak in a serious tone, to the now alive. Surrender. A swordsman doesnt kill without thought. The middle-aged man answers, Now, dont bother responding to what he says. I answer with a nod. But I am not a swordsman. Actually, the one who kills recklessly, is now. I look at the Demon Fairy Even if I am a mad man, I dont kill women. Get on your knees fast, I will give a couple slaps and then forgive you. Fools. One fifth of the power you have is lost. As this archer said, I havent even done my best yet. Why so? Self-Reliance. The mindset of a swordsman. Arent you all just scarecrows being used too? Perhaps being threatened or coerced by an annoying superior. Raise your hand or blink your eyes to me None? The middle-aged man says to Yeop Ya-hyung. Go bring more. Yeop Ya-hyung responds with a light nod and leaves. I understand. When the middle-aged man sits down at the table outside, which is a short distance away, the others too fall into chairs. In the meantime, I think of Shadow Moon Martial Arts. Of course, that is one thing I know. However, I hadnt tried to use it till now. Of course, there is the cold Qi which spreads around. A situation where my mind is clear should be there because if I fail, I die. I find a point to use, digging into the estimation of how the people are spaced. For a moment, I look at the enemies with the Shadow Moon Martial Arts being used around my body. It was my first time feeling such coldness wrap over me as I used the technique. When the air begins to turn cold, the chair and table ice over The facial expressions of the people left sitting begin to change. I sit in the guest house, not speaking and then cool my body and swing the wind at the enemies. Ha. A cold white fog escapes from my mouth like that of a ghost. Among the forms there are for the Shadow Moon Martial Arts, this was one with a terrible form. After hugging the betrayed lover who was freezing, and watching them under the moonlight I suddenly think of such a thing, and my anger rises. Come to think of it, I was never personally betrayed by anyone. It was especially because there was no place for loved ones in my life. And as the anger rose, the voice of the beggar could be heard. This bastard, look at those eyes! I soar into the air. Chapter 167 Chapter 167 C It Is A Long Dream. Qi Wave is literally a Wave of Qi. It wasnt an easy thing to do. I applied the principle and theory of using the Golden Strolling Turtle Technique, and used the ice Qi of the Shadow Moon Martial Arts I was ready for. I let this coldness in the air wrap around my body in an instant and got down to the ground I see the sword of the bamboo hat man on the left side. And the quick-witted middle-aged man is stiff with his arms crossed. The beggar, who seemed a lot cleverer than he looked, is almost standing up. According to their own thoughts they got up from the chairs to deal with me. They were already up for their respective roles of attack and defense, but all of them were frozen in ice QI. Did I just jump into the air and spread around ice Qi? These people arent at the skill level where I had to do this. Anyway, no matter how high or low their skill is, I have a martial art to use, and these are my opponents. I pull the dagger out while watching them all in their frozen state. Everyone, stop moving. You bastards, did you think I am that stupid? I glare at the bamboo hat man, check the woman, and then whisper to the middle-aged man. was my ice Qi that perfect? I know that everyone is saying that it is hard work to actually do that. But I am warning you, I will stab you with the dagger. The one who moves first, will be daggered. Even if you can move, do not. Kicking the table the beggar is at, I say, Beggar, you understand me? It isnt good to release such techniques too quickly. If you move, it is obvious that we both attack fast, so let us have a quick fight. The one who moves will be stabbed. I move the dagger back and forth with my hand and watch him. I am guessing the archer will move first then? Isnt he supposed to have the best internal Qi? I look at the middle-aged man and pierce the Waning Moon Ice Technique three more times. Puck puck puck! And with the sound of that, the face of the guy I hit turns pale like a sheet. While looking around, I do the same and shoot the Waning Moon Ice Techniques at the other three too. I told you that you came for the wrong person, but you still ignored me. I return to where I was seated before, drive the Moonlight Dagger into the table, and set chopsticks down. After pulling chopsticks into two, I then say, Those who wriggle will get chopsticks and those who run away get daggers. And those who fail to regain their senses are beaten to death. I look at the smashed-out Guest House and enjoy the quiet atmosphere. Clearly, using ice Qi has its own advantages. It feels quiet and so calm. The fire is something to be used when I am in the Crazy Demon state. I normally hear the screams of my enemies who die in horrific ways by my hands. But look at this one, this ice Qi. It was quiet and calm and peaceful. It is like I am cold, not feeling anything, like a man of coldness. With a calm mind, I toss the chopsticks at the shoulder of the middle-aged man. Puak! From the depth of the mans mouth came a low groan. I look at him and ask, You, archer, you look like you are a bit helpless right now. What thoughts do you have? . Judging by the lack of an answer, it seems like his mouth is still frozen. To take a job which needs me to be killed, to annihilate the Black Rabbit Union, the Low-Down Sect, and the people who I am in contact with. This man, you are my enemies from what you just said. I think your words were heartless, violent, and cruel enough to be punishable by death. I get up from the chair, hold a stance with the wooden sword, and then sit down. The eyes of the frozen people move to the middle-aged guy. Later, his upper body, which was finely split obliquely, falls to the floor. Thud. I look at the other three with a calm expression. Now dont you think that you did a wrong thing? Yeop Ya-hyung was giggling and excited to be working together with all of you. I will come down to the next verdict. You bastard you are one sneaky guy. I watch the beggar. Always attacking last. Attacking just the right amount and then retreating. I saw it all. Even at the end, you had quick eyes and noticed that I was using up Ice Qi. It is just the look and the outfit, and the act of being a beggar. You will be put to death too. As soon as I pull the Moonlight Dagger I imbue fire Qi on it, and I throw it at the beggar. The dagger moves like that of an arrow and sticks between the forehead of the beggar. Puak! Suddenly, I hear an odd sound and I look up to see the Demon Fairy producing foam from her mouth. I frown at this. You, get yourself together. Try to use cultivation or something to the body. I am not the kind to kill a woman. As soon as I say it, she begins to puke out red blood. I just click my teeth. Huh. It seems like she is past the moment to be able to do anything.. It isnt my responsibility to do anything for her, so I rest my chin on my hand and look at the last man. In my opinion, the internal Qi of this bamboo hat man is similar to the archer. However, it is a man with the trace of being on the wrong side of life. He is someone who followed orders till the end, which for me means, a boring man. Since I am a man with principles who is wishy washy at times, I get up and approach the guy in the bamboo hat. The guy is glaring at me. After taking off his hat, I checked his face. I grab him by the chin and check his face before looking into his eyes. Look at this, you arent the kind to be under others. That is weird. After infusing fire Qi into my finger, I tap onto the upper body of the guy for the ice Qi to melt down faster. After pulling out the Moonlight Dagger stuck between the forehead of the beggar, I return to my place shaking the blood off of it. The woman has scared eyes as she continues to leak out blood from her mouth. I sigh and point to the almost destroyed guest house. this is called the Spring Dream Guest House. Do not forget that there are many warriors around in Kangho. If you had listened to me in the first place, or hadnt done the bad things you did, this death wouldnt have come to you. Normally, if you had come in normally, I would have thought about considering what happened and moved away, but then, Yeop Ya-hyung is one with proof instinct. I looked at the guy whose bamboo hat was taken off and put it in my hand. He begins to move his body a little, more like twitching. Soon, he speaks with blood-stained lips. Please return the hat. Why? Give it back. That is what, why? It is something I cherish. Are you a fool? I treated the lives of the others like fucking bugs to be crushed and you want the hat back? Fucking fool. I burn the hat right away and throw the remains into the air. The remnants of it reach towards the guy and he grabs the ashes, as much as he can, and looks horrible. So, I asked him. Was it that precious? At this time, he gives me an unexpected answer. avoid the rain, the snow and the eyes of people. I treasured it. I look at my arm as I listen to him, and goosebumps begin to form. And that was when I realized who the leader of these people was. Fifth Evil was the leader. I couldnt tell if he was a man who had insane thoughts from the start or if he changed after meeting the Fifth Evil. Feeling bitter, I made a promise to them. I will make sure to kill the Fifth Evil with my own hands. The bamboo hat guy smiles at me for the first time. It will be tough, Sect Leader. I know. Eventually, you too will be captured and taken in as slaves like us. I shake my head. No. How can you be so sure? Now, even if I am weaker than Demon Cult leader, or your own leaders, you dont have to worry too much about me cause I will win with time. The guy laughs and says, I do not believe you. I told you. In the end, swordsmen are the strongest. It wasnt a joke? You dont have to believe me. Look at the heavens. If the world was full of bastards like the Demon Cult, the world would have been hell. But it isnt like that. Because there are more swordsmen who are on the right side, than bad guys in the world. In the end, we will win. Even if it means to die while fighting, even if the Alliance leader dies being surrounded by evil and the troops of justice all collapse. Even if the Murim Alliance and the Low-Down Sect dies in the end, there will be a swordsman who will arise from somewhere in this world to change the world on the wrong path back to normal. That is how the world works. That is the power of people. The guy looks at me. Then what about people like us? I understand your words to some extent. There are times in life when things do not go the way we want. Everyone lives a foolish life or makes mistakes and one day, when they choose to change, they turn into people under the Evil ones. A righteous swordsman turns to a villain. One can turn out to be a hypocrite. Be a traitor. The man asks me, Then you are a righteous swordsman? I answered him honestly. No. But I am someone who can tell the difference between a righteous person and a bad one. The one who can identify and kill the wicked ones and take care of the righteous ones, that is who I am. The guy is suffering from internal energy, it is evident from the blood around his mouth. If there are so many righteous people in the world? Then why dont I see them? You are looking at the world with such hostile eyes, as if you want to take down everything you can see, so you dont see it. The guy chuckles showing his bloodied teeth. I must have been unlucky. I wasnt interested in what the dead people had to say, so I put my legs onto the table and looked at the sky. I let the dying ones know my intentions. . If I take care of 10,000 people and even one or two of them come out right, then I succeeded. The people I took care of will then go to take care of another dozen or hundred. If there is another righteous swordsman, it is luck. No matter how many enemies are here, I cannot do it alone. Even if the Low-Down Sect gets taken down one day, my will is going to be retained. Ruining or going down is all shit. And I turn my head. Yeop Ya-hyung is coming with dozens of people to the guest house. I look at him with arms crossed, curious as to how he will react. You here? Yeop Ya-hyung stops and checks the dead and the dying ones and the men he brought do the same too. Everyone is speechless. I ask Yeop Ya-hyung, Warrior Yeop, it seems like the time to die? You didnt even run, but were stupid enough to come back. The guy, who was in a bamboo hat till a while back, looks at Yeop Ya-hyung. You fool, everyone is dead because of you. In an instant, the woman who was coughing for a while, had collapsed down and Yeop Ya-hyung looks as he says, Leader Seok? I answer for the corpse. She was left as such because you were busy with other things. The guy in the bamboo hat speaks in a slow manner. Not everyone can run, what are you doing more? Run. These words were the signal. Yeop Ya-hyung begins to run first and then more than a dozen people follow him and flee. It seems that the one leader down was enough for them to know they would lose. As I think about chasing and killing these bastards, it feels a bit embarrassing for me to chase them. Killing is good but my mental health especially so since I was being asked to keep my emotions in check. Yeop Ya-hyung who is running shouts, Byuk Geom bro, I will take revenge for you! Was it because I learned ice Qi? My mind feels a lot calmer than usual. Looking back on my previous life, the harmony of Yin and Yang had never been there because my Yang had always overwhelmed other things. The bamboo hat guy, Byuk Geom, looks at me and then stands up holding his sword. It seems like he wanted to buy time. I pull out the chopsticks and aim them at Byuk Geom. You want to die? Seeing him trying now, I ask, Say it now. The power, the force and strength. And the leader. If I give up things like that, then my death wouldnt be graceful. I wave the chopsticks. If you dont do something like that, then you will be next. Byuk Geom speaks in a desperate manner. If I dont, I will die from what my body has become. Id rather just die from a sword. Is that so? I look at him and say, I have an amazing great physician on my side. Think again. Chapter 168 Chapter 168 C If You Understand My Words Right. Great Physician? Can he really remove the poison? Byuk Geoms question is answered. I dont know. How can I know? Am I a physician? Byuk Geoms eyes widened. As I speak, his expression changes from despair to hope and then back to despair. The physician knows for sure whether or not he can treat you. But I bet you cannot cure a person if the person doesnt want to be cured. That is the Moyong Baek I know of. The guy looks at me. But I am curious. Why me? The leader must know a lot more information than me. Or was I just lucky enough to be last? As if that can be it. It wouldnt be fun if everything in the world went after this concept of luck. I get up and go through the wreck the guest house had turned into and pull out something stuck in the pillar. It was the money I received after I served this guy the drink. I throw it back at him. Of course, him throwing the money at me and me accepting it would be two different things. But it doesnt matter. It is because the only person to be saved is the one who at least could think and act. The beggar was a sly fox kind of guy and the woman had been committing numerous murders. And their leader is someone I had no intention of keeping alive from the start. When the guy looks at his coin, I say, That coin has different meanings from normal coins. It is more valuable so take special care of it. As If what I said was strange, the guy fiddles with it and puts it back into his sleeve. I look at the guy with arms crossed. Now lets talk business. Let us do some cleaning up now. Clean up what? From the start. Please tell me. I look at the guesthouse, which was broken, and say to him, Give compensation for the damage done to the guest house, and then move on. If lucky, you can be treated by the Low-Down Sects physician and the poison will be treated. Cooperate until I take down your head. He says, What should I cooperate with? Everything. What I need to know. Good things I need to know. The plans, the ones who will speak, the ideas being presented anything, actually, everything. To which he says, It isnt a meaningless survival. If you can release the poison and help me escape this slavery, it isnt a difficult thing. I will cooperate. Nice. If I kill your head, you get to live as much as you please. The contract ends now. There is no room to refuse when someone is giving freedom. And in my thoughts, this guy is a normal human. On the contrary, he is the kind to be stubborn and work because of orders. He nods. Good. Now what? I pull out a sheet from my sleeve and put it on the table. Since it had been rolled up, it had to be straightened up. It is the starting fee. Hmm. Until the organization you belong to has been destroyed by me. Eat, sleep and drink and if there is something to report, only use carriages or horses to come and tell me. Byuk Geom holds onto the money slip looking a bit shocked. I look at him and then say, Your eyes are so bloody and raging so buy a different bamboo hat. He nods. I get it. Officially, the enemies and you died here today. You are dead. Be a dead man. Since Yeop Ya-hyung was saved and sent out, that guy will speak of your death. Did you hear what he said when running? Though I doubt he would actually come to avenge. Byuk Geom says, I dont expect it either since he is all talk and no actions. It would be better if you change clothes to something new. It was only then that he realized what he had to do, and his expression changed. Once the poison within gets cured, it will be Byuk Geoms mission to monitor the actual troops with a new identity. I leave the table and kick the beggar, the woman, and the leader into the guest house. Since they were poisoned people with extensive ice Qi within, if they are left untouched, the wild animals will do their task. After a while the broken guest house was burned along with the corpses. As I was looking at the Guest House which was flaming, my anger rose. It is fortunate that I saved the lives of the owner and the server boy, but the damage I caused by staying here was too much. At least since I know their faces, it would be better to compensate them somehow. Later, I think about how if I make a guest house after the Low-Down sect grows, the owner of this place can move there. While the place is burning down, I take out Moonlight dagger and carve words on the table outside. I will compensate later. He makes the sign onto the table and after the clean-up is done, I say to Byuk Geom, Lets go. Anyway, the guy is injured so movement wouldnt be quick. As I head for Moyong Baek, I want to hear about this place he worked for. then is the official thing that you know about the White Face Young Lord? Yes. And when White Face Young Lord orders us to do work, many warriors get mobilized. And Leader Seok spoke in honorifics to the person. The other leaders? I dont know because word doesnt spread much. I have never seen the entire place or the troops within. Actually, the valley lord isnt that different from Leader Seok, but he was in a position of being higher and couldnt be treated carelessly. If Moyong Baek can save this guy, it means that he can handle this valley lord too. If so, there is a possibility because the physician is Moyong Baek. Detoxing the poison and destroying the organization. In a way, it was a situation in which the biggest role is being handed to Moyong Baek, and not me. And I ask the guy, So who is it? Till this point, he hadnt said a word about their head. The guy stops walking and looks around. He barely speaks, trying to overcome the fear. Three Great Lords. I am a bit shocked. What is it? Who are the Three Great Lords? I only knew of the Five Great Evils and came to almost ask of them. Either it is because this wasnt the title I knew of them as, or it is possible that maybe the information I had was wrong. He continued his explanation. I thought you knew that I was talking about the Three Great Lords. It is the three men of the Cult Leader. I couldnt think of a single thing and looked at him. That is why everyone was surprised when you mentioned the Cult Leader. After all, it meant that we got to know the superiors superior or close to a person who gave us a hard time. But I had my own circumstances. To be human means to survive. In order to not make the same mistakes as the past, the Cult Leader left the position of the successor vacant in advance and was sitting by letting them fight it out. Money has to be raised on command and warriors have to be gathered. And if they didnt rise to the position, even they would be taken down and killed Then your place is centered around the three Lords and their families? Yes. They are all putting in full effort and if they dont become the Vice Leader of the Cult, they can be killed by other candidates or might be asked to leave the Cult. No one knows what the Cult Leader is thinking so we were all prepared. That is the reason I dont know what methods and means they would choose. And this White Face Young Lord is? There is a high chance of him being one of the Three Great Lords. Since he is often called as the leader and tasks are always given, we dont get much look into it. The Lords side will probably prepare for the succession war. I think of the appearance of the Blood Night Palace and the appearance of Cult Leader. The information side of the Cult must already be monitoring a lot of things. It seems like the family to these heirs too were scattered. Anyway, if these guys want to survive, they will have to prove their work. Cult Leader is someone who pampers and then throws out when of no use. Organizing my thoughts, I headed for the Black Rabbit Union. Returning to the Black Rabbit Union, I tell Moyong Baek, Sir. Yes. I point to Byuk Geom. It looks like this bastard took poison. I was able to reunite with Moyong Baek who was bringing in support for me. Moyong Baek looks at the patient and says, He looks fine on the outside. What do you mean? It means that it is difficult to cure. I smile and look at Moyong Baek. It is a poison with a lot of things tangled up. If you cannot solve this then the Low-Down Sect will be in trouble. Could you speak more elaborately? As I walked down, I explained to him, The three kids of the Cult Leader. It seems that all of the strong warriors are being forced into coming under those three by putting poison into them. If the poison can be cured then we get to take down a lot of power the three lords have. Even if you make a cure, it would be like a restraint against them. After all, these people will be carrying out the orders of the Cult, so this is a chance to weaken them. A lot of this depends on the cure. Moyong Baek nods. I do my best to rile Moyong Baek up. Is the poison of the Demon Cult superior? Or the cure of Moyong Baek higher? Let us check. Moyong Baek snorts. Sect Leader, it isnt an easy task. Patting him on the back, I say, I agree. It isnt easy. Since I am always out putting my life on the line, try to calm down and do your share of research. Do not worry about the cost of ingredients, travel, or creation. Cause I will fully support you. Didnt I steal money by beating down the bad people? We have a lot of money, do not worry. Moyong Baek says to me with an uncalm face, Sure, that puts me at ease. It should. Such peace is placed into my heart. You have the right mindset. I stop for a moment and then say to my men, Let us all applaud for Moyong Baek, who is going to struggle from now on. As soon as I start to clap, the young men who train in Black Rabbit Union begin to clap. I put my hands on my hip. Everyone, listen. Yes. Our lives depend on physician Moyong. Moyong Baeks nose flares in succession and I have an order. So Gun-pyung. Yes, Sect Leader. Select two of your subordinates who train very consistently and put them into the escort role of Moyong. It is a promotion for them. The guy bows. I will take the order. I nod and call Cha Sung-tae, General Cha. Yes, Sect Leader. From now on, any funds that Moyong Baek requires dont need to be approved. Give them fast. I understand. Moyong Baek was shown. Our lives depend on him. As soon as I say it, the people again applaud Moyong Baek. Thank you very much. When did the Low-Down Sect come here? This is a whole ceremony. Should there be a separate ceremony? My subordinates are talking, and I let the fuss settle in. Shut it. Yes. I look around and ask, Where is the Great Raven Clan leader? Hwang? The one who defeated the bandits? Moyong Baek says, He passed out. Right after arriving in the Union, he fell. Fainting must be nice. Yes. I sigh as I walk with my hands behind my back. I am bored so I try to move slowly, A pig fell into Kangho. Cha Sung-tae says, I know right. I summarize my thoughts and tell my men. Everyone, listen here. Yes. From now on, those who enter the Low-Down Sect will be screened by Seo Gun-pyung after physical training. If one passes, they get taught the sword techniques. The most outstanding of the people will later be Master Yukhaps. Only then did I confirm if he was dead. Is he alive? Cha Sung-tae answers. Yes, for a few days there were continuous curses and shitty expressions and as soon as he recovered well, he was often out competing. Who is winning? His internal Qi shouldnt be alright. Even though, Master Yukhap still wins most of the time. Right. I explain the future of the Low-Down Sect to the subordinates. soon, if you establish several branches, we will get results. Throw in some money too. Use the information we get. Do various things. But the most important thing is that those who belong to the Low-Down Sect should one day get together. After I stop walking, I look at my men. Seo Gun-pyung will teach, Sung-tae will instigate, Master Hoyeon will teach, Master Moyong will take care, and Master Yukhap, I dont know what, but he will put his best efforts into developing people right for a long-term goal. I grinned. Among them, the most outstanding ones will be taken in as my disciples. After all, I wont be taking in just any ordinary genius to learn and understand my martial arts. Everyone gets it? As my subordinates look at me, all of them bow. I understand, Sect Leader. Lets go. Chapter 169 Sect Leader, I am here. Come inside. After two days of inspecting Byuk Gyeom, Moyong Baeks face was a lot more strained than I expected. I ask because I feel sorry for him, Did you not sleep? Moyong Baek, who had come and sat next me, sighed. I couldnt sleep at all because I am too focused on this difficult task. First, I am going to discuss it with you and then head to sleep. This talk isnt a status about the patient, but one to get an opinion? I realize there is discussion to come, so I stay silent and wait for him to speak. Moyong Baek asks for understanding. I am informing you beforehand that my words might be a bit messed up due to the lack of sleep. It is fine. I am always messed up. Right. Only then did Moyong Baek examine his thoughts and ask, Did the Sect Leader not sleep? I had a bit of cultivation going around. I have to keep it on schedule when there is nothing happening, so I cannot help but not waste time on sleeping. Moyong Baek looks at me with a pitiful expression. Both seem affected. I know. Still, you should get a good nights sleep. There is no medicine for lack of sleep. Sir, let me say that to you. Right. We both sigh at the same time. Moyong Baek suddenly says, suddenly I feel a bit lightheaded. I felt nauseous. Most of the time I cannot sleep. Moyong Baek takes a deep breath and asks, Fine. How far did I explain? I answer in a calm manner. Well, if I remember right, you didnt say a thing. I see. Now, let me explain then. I nod my head and cross my arms as he says, I told Byuk Geom not to speak about anything. I began the treatment without any information. With just the one assumption that he had been poisoned. This makes sense. I checked the condition of his, through various experiments, but I couldnt find out if he was poisoned or not. So, you mean his body is fine? Yes, despite all the methods I know that I used, I decided to declare defeat on the first day. If this is a poison, then there are definitely people better than me. Right. We laid out the facts on the second day. I heard in detail about the poisons and antidotes around. Then I heard about the different conditions for taking them, his feelings, and the changes in the body. The poison is taken at first, and then the antidote at intervals. The antidote has to be taken at least three pills at a time. So, if they dont get a new one within the needed time frame then they will die horribly. Sect Leader, is there anything strange about this? I listen to the reason he asked this question. Then Yes. Did you say they would die horribly then? Yes. Okay. Continue talking. The state of the person on whom I tried this on, because he couldnt eat the antidote, died due to his body. Is that so? Moyong Baek nods his head. Let me just end this. Byuk Geom doesnt fit, or more like his story didnt fit. The first poison he ate wasnt probably poison? I ask in a calm tone, Then he took an antidote? It is a bit more complicated than that. To explain, it wasnt exactly that either, but an addictive drug. So, if we listen to the conditions and judge it, the first poison is probably a medicine which causes hallucination. Then the antidote, taken in 30-day intervals gradually causes the symptoms of poison and, if not taken in time, it causes fear, illusions and distress to the mind and body. A drug which makes you completely dependent on the organization. Are they more horrible than we expected them to be? Right. It seems that instead of three, they are giving out six to five pills in advance to those who are loyal to the organization. And they take it with loyalty. I look at Moyong Baek. Then what we need to confirm is the exact cause of death of the guy who exploded and died before. Right. Will it be difficult? Yes. Only then did I realize it. So, your concern is that there is a risk that all of this would be just a guess. If that happens, then our man dies. Right. It means that if we dont keep giving him the antidote, there is a high chance that Byuk Geom himself will develop withdrawal symptoms, betray us, or run back to the place and cling to it. I rub my hands. Wow, that gave me creeps. Well, it is poison. The problem is that Byuk Geom himself wants poison now. Yes. I crossed my arms and looked at Moyong Baek. He must have been through a lot. If Byuk Geom is driven that way due to the impact the drug has on his mind, he will start to hate us fast. Right. Moyong Baek says with a serious expression, It feels like I just stepped into a new land of poison. Because it made the body need poison. What kind of terrible poison is this? If he refuses to eat it, it will be called poison, but since he wants to eat it, it is medicine. If we give it a temporary name for communication, it will be a drug. An appropriate expression. Sect Leader. I think about something and ask him. Is there any other reason which led you to this? Moyong Baek replies with a slightly surprised expression. Yes. So, it is a question of efficiency. It seems that there are quite a few strong people taking it. But if there are poisons there which cannot be cured, it means that those who are making these needs have amazing wealth. Right. But this place is raising that much money? It just doesnt make sense. If you save up and spend it all on making a poison it wouldnt pay them back much. Thats right. On the other hand, the drug they are faking up as an antidote seems to be paying them good. After all, it could mean they are making this in a cheap way. Or they have already mass produced, so they have enough. And the problem is to cure it. I nod. Right. I came to the same conclusion he did. I let out a short sigh and looked at him. Without this man, what kind of fight would I have been in? Moyong Baek says, I was able to grasp the situation, but I have nothing to say to the man. Which is why I am here. How much time do you have left to make the antidote? Around another ten days left. Actually, it seems like he received a promise that if he attacked and took you down, he would receive the antidote in advance. What do we do? Moyong. Yes. This time I havent been of much help. Um. Honestly, instead of help, being up front seems better. Dear Byuk Geom, our examinations are as follows. What you ate isnt an antidote but a drug that continues to cause addiction. If you quit, it will be painful. It is even possible that our thoughts are wrong, but we will tell you everything. Moyong Baek nods. Of course, when Byuk Geom is sane, he will understand what we are saying, but it is difficult to predict what will happen if he doesnt take it. As you said, his body might explode like the other person. So, when the withdrawal symptoms start to kick in, he will be drowning in panic. They are such horrible people. There is no way to confirm whether or not they would survive. However, with this level of skill, the ones doing this are villains enough to become a member of Five Evils. As a child of a Cult Leader, what would he be afraid of? Rather, there would have been a more human side to this one who is fighting for succession if their father was human. If the children were taught by abandoning their humanity, there was a good chance that they would be born more wicked than their father. Just seeing what they are doing now, it is because of such things that the duty of a man of Kangho and honor of martial artists cannot be found here. These bastards are true members of the Cult. Even their mothers side. Yes. Where is Byuk Geom? Moyong Baek pointed to the main hall and says, There is no point in treating him, so I brought him along with escorts. Ask him to come in. And you go get some sleep. No matter what decision is being taken, I will share the news. I understand. Moyong Baek stood up and sighed. Sect Leader. Huh? I am very angry. This must be natural when you find out what is happening, no need to worry about it. Somehow, I will make sure to break through, but you should take care of your body first. Yes. How have you been handling it, Sect Leader? All these feelings. Me? I had you help me. Moyong Baek nods. Right. I look at Moyong Baek who is walking and call for him. Moyong Yes. Do not fall too deep into the feelings. Then you will end up like me. Only then did he smile and say, I understand. Byuk Geom came in nervously as he scratched his neck. I pointed him to the place where Moyong Baek sat. Sit down. Yes. I look at his face for a long time before I ask, What did the physician say? To which he had a nervous expression. He continued to sigh. I havent heard a thing from him. The tone of his words was a lot more polite than before. I see. Let me explain it then. The bastard who claims to be one of the three young lords presented you a way to hell. To which he looks at me. You mean the poison cannot be cured? I shake my head. I will tell you what Moyong Baek felt and what I feel too. The first thing is that the medicine you took is what causes temporary hallucinations. It means you dont need an antidote for it. To which his face turned pale. The medicine you received after that, is the addictive one. It is a drug which is very painful on the body when you stop taking it. There is no need for an antidote. It is just a situation where you are being made to take this medicine believing it is an antidote. Do you understand? Yes. I look at him and ask, So what do you want to do? What? They gave you a way to hell. The question is, what do you want to do now? One in a million chance can it not be a poison? Very low. Because this is about money. They must have heavily produced the antidote and fed people. And now it seems like they use this as a way to make money. Yes. Then your value is less than money. They dont treat you like people, but as tools to make money. To them, you people werent worth the treatment. They must have secretly aimed to kill you, who is getting drunk with the second drug. Or they could deal with you whenever they wanted. As an example, they might show you how you would die, if you took real poison. Byuk Gyeom looked angry and then he had this strange smile. I really want to kill all of them. Oh? Me too. He looks at me. Sect Leader, help me. I nod and then say, I have a few ideas but it would be best for you to decide the strategy for it. Think of the most efficient way out. I will help you. To which he says, White Face Scholar will come to give the antidote or the second drug. Whether you catch him and torture him or secretly track down his place, we will need to find his base. They are out there, mass producing this. Kill them all, burn them to the ground. I nod and say, Even if we deal with that, the pain which comes to you is a different issue. To be honest, I cannot even imagine the extent of pain it will be. According to Moyong Baek, it will be painful to eat anything if it gets past a day. I heard the cycle will get shorter each time. To which he crosses his arms and says, I will endure it. The guy who said he would hold on, soon begins to have tears in his eyes. Even though his expression didnt change, the tears began to flow down. It seemed like he remembered the pain of not taking the drug. And he looks at me. Sect Leader. I will endure it all. It is quite unfortunate if I suffer like this without getting anything back. Do not be too scared. I asked Moyong if it was poison, it would be subdued. The pain will be eased. How many days left for the symptoms to come? I can still hold on for more than 10 days. As I touch my hair, I end up pulling a strand out. First, we watch White Face. I check my palm to see a lot of hair in my hand. Yah, I might go bald at this rate. As I checked in my previous life I normally didnt have a life where I was popular with people and if I went bald now, it would be hell over here. The man with hair falling out dealing with Demon Cult, that would be me. Byuk Geom. Yes. I am not the only one enraged. While he was there to help you, even Moyong felt angry. He couldnt even sleep for days. Is that so? I was asleep so often that I didnt realize it. No matter what happens, from now on, you will live with the people of Low-Down Sect, and that is an order. I understand. I crossed my arms and mumbled. the crime of giving such drugs to people is quite disturbing to Moyong and my hair is falling out because of those thoughts. I will surely show them hell. The days wind was flying through my hair. Peace close to a river had flowed through me. Chapter 170 After sending out Byuk Geom, I think. As if I was climbing up some hard mountain with no air and rest, I am angry. So, what could the problem be? The martial arts I have are getting stronger quickly, I have many subordinates, and a lot of money too. The problem is that the emotion, anger, is still there. Then, when I go back to being Crazy Demon, before I know it, it feels like all my hair will fall out. It is going to be a frustrating and disappointing thing. I think to myself as I vent out the anger and then smile realizing that my condition was never normal. T-this is bad. I have a bad temper. If someone else saw me right now, I would be sitting here with an angry face only to suddenly start giggling. I am no different from a crazy guy. I think it is the right situation to take my anger out on someone else rather than go insane like this alone. I give myself a slap on the cheek and then shout, Master Yuk Gap, ask him to come in. Do not waste time and come in fast. Yes, Sect Leader. Cha Sung-tae and Seo Gun-Pyung had been with me for quite some time, so I couldnt go to them without reason. The Ghost Demon from previous life, master Yuk Hap appears with his hands behind his back and asks me, You called? I nod my head and point to the seat next to me. Sit down. Yuk Gap. Since I have been eating the food of the Black Rabbit Union for a while, I have been thinking about something. He sits down and looks at me. You fucking trash, what were you thinking? Answer me. To which he sighs and says, It was without thought. No. You must be recovering from the poison little by little. And after recovering and running, you must have been enduring day by day with the thought of completely recovering your martial arts to come get revenge on me, right? The man glares at me from the side, then speaks in a low tone. Right. You know me well. You look so well into my heart. I smiled and he looked at me. With your current skills can you avenge? To which he smiles as if his anger was hitting its peak. I thought I could live very well with the thought of revenge for another three to four years. Wouldnt that be enough time to catch up? Really? I shout out, Cha Sung-tae! I brush my hair with all my thoughts running through my mind and endure the anger. Cha Sung-tae, who arrives, asks, You called? Bring in all the antidotes for poison. I understand. It wasnt until the last fuse in my head got blown that I realized to some extent the reason why I was feeling as such. It is because what I did to this man is the same as what the Demon Cult did to others. Is that why? I was angry with the Demon Cult, with Yuk Gap, and even myself. Cha Sung-tae runs with them and Seo Gun-pyeong stands next to me. Here. I grab one of them and set it down on the table. Yuk Gap. Speak. Take all of it and gulp it down. You are a useless bastard who used more of his head. But do you have use in Kangho now? No. Did you ever have any great aspirations and ambitions like a man? Not that either. You are just fucking trash who has a bit of stronger martial arts. Now you go outside and fight till death with the wicked trash of the Demon Cult, because when someone like you stays in the Black Rabbit Union, it makes me feel more uncomfortable. The guy narrows his eyes at me. Why are you doing this all of a sudden? Why? Do you need me to kill you? No. I have pride. I cannot beat down a weakling after handing him poison. Ah, you too eat well and go now. Right. Perhaps because I shouted several times, the people outside were looking into the place. I glare at Yuk Gap. I have always been such a person. Come and go. I am sick of things these days, especially people who are from Kangho. Of course, I live in Kangho so that includes me too. Get out of my sight though, before I smash your head down. The guy looks at me and takes the antidote, which he placed near his chest. I say, Come back when your internal Qi is all restored. Then, I will tear you apart and kill you. I have pride too, so I wont be touching you rat like this. I will wait. He quietly gets up and looks at me. I will not die till then. Ah. Of course, and when you finish with me, bring all the bugs. I will tear each one to death and lay one corpse over another. The guy nods. Sure. And I feel a bit relieved then. I am normally a kind person. Since the poison was given in a wrong way, I put my life to save the life, and each time I thought of this man, I would only feel uncomfortable. The first time we fought, it should have been to the death, but it turned out like this because I felt sorry for the power that Ghost Demon had in the past. Ghost Demon isnt someone I could ever have with me. He had to be bigger, and I had to be stronger. However, my temper wouldnt allow me to kill a guy who hadnt recovered his lost strength. Because I was losing my temper, my subordinates made way for the guy to leave. After Cha Sung-tae closed the door to the hall, he approaches me and says, Sect Leader, why are you so angry today? I know, right? Cha Sung-tae sits without saying anything and then says, What is it? It is the first time I am seeing you this angry. I look at him and say, this time, the Demon Cult is involved in poisoning the people of Kangho and using them. It is the same thing I did with Yuk Gap. I will kill him like that, and it makes me feel bad. Cha Sung-tae looks at the ceiling with his arms crossed. Well, something like that happened. And the opponents are strong? The power of the Demon Cult. Cult Leader has strong kids with power from their mothers side. Ah if it is his sons, killing them would be a problem too. And killing him would be a problem too. A knocking sound was heard in the main hall, and Seo Gun-pyeong showed his face. Sect Leader, can I come in? Come in. The door opens and he comes in saying, Teacher Ho Yeon went to see him off. It looks like the two of them have gotten to know each other a bit. I knew what he was speaking about and didnt bother reacting. I get it. The two of them looked at them, and Seo Gun-pyeong asks, Sect Leader, why are you so angry today? Do I seem like that? Yes. I am honest with them. I am angry because you are all idiots. I am angry because I am the same too. No matter where I try to take you guys, you all fight, I cannot even feel a thing. It is true that all of you are weaker compared to Yuk Hap. If his martial arts are strong, he gets to act like it. It looks like the people under his care will be taken out and searched for by all. I am angry at myself for this and that and this that is my condition right now. Seo Gun-pyeong replies with an angry expression. I dont practice every day to be protected by the Sect Leader like some child. Even this guy is angry at me. I nod. The three kids of the Cult huh. As soon as the word Demonic Cult came in, everyone went silent. Seo Gun-pyeong sighs and says, Sect Leader. What? Tell us where we need to fight. We are training to fight. It cannot be that all their forces are strong right? It cannot be. The middle level will be middle. Isnt it the strong ones who collide with each other and die if one of them is weak? In the meantime, it wouldnt be strange if one of the captain level warriors of theirs ends up being dead. It would be quite touching, but the Demonic Cult isnt such a place. I nod at their words and feel a presence around. I ask, What? Why didnt you two go? As soon as I finished, the door opens with Yuk Hap and Ho Yeon Cheong out, with Ho Yeon Cheong saying, I dont know. Teacher Yuk Hap came to me and then came back. Teacher Yuk Hap took out the antidote I gave him and tossed it into his mouth. Sect Leader, who do I fight? Why? He sighs as he says, I keep getting angry and have no place to unwind. . Do not worry. I will challenge you later. This time, I want to join the Low-Down Sect and fight. If you feel bad about me joining, it cannot be helped. I heard from teacher Ho Yeon that there might be a fight with the Demon Cult. I was about to ask him how I would trust him, but I held my words. Well, if I can trust him, it would be like using the Ghost Demons power. If the Ghost Demon of this time decides to betray me, it will only make things very slightly difficult. The problem is, I am already in a situation where I am losing my hair. And I dont want to ask the Murim Alliance for help. I dont want to call the Sword Demon or Pervert Demon either. Because this is something I should be shouldering with my sect and the others have their own problems in real life. Its just disgusting to be indebted to someone whenever things get hard. Actually, I was angry along with my subordinates here and I was going to run out right now because controlling is hard. It was my intention to go alone, drink alcohol, wait, and then torture that White Face. If the Ghost Demon of the past life joins me now, did the difficulty go up or down? Yuk Hap? Speak. Get some rest today. The two of us will attack tomorrow. I honestly disclosed my current condition to them. Because I am on the verge of going insane now. I will sleep until tomorrow so do not wake me up. Oh, of course, if there are any guys breaking in, I will take care of it I got up and waved to my subordinates. Wait. Seo Gun-pyeong intervenes, You are going with just two people? See, do not be angry and practice when you get angry. I can tell by looking at you, how your skills are. Do not mess around if you dont have skills. Okay? I am not taking you there and shoving you to death. I trust that you will hone your skills and fight beside me someday, but not now, not today, not tomorrow. Sect Leader. Then why is It seemed like Seo Gun-pyeon was angry with me today, so I calmly say, Look. Yes. Teacher Yuk Hap is ten times stronger than you. If I go somewhere and die, you people will have to lead the Low-Down Sect. However, if something happens to me for real, then realize that all the enemies would have died. I point my finger at Yuk Hap. Of course, even if that bastard betrays me, I will end up taking him to hell with me. As I headed to the room, I took my robe off and threw it aside. Time has been wasted, so I thought I should sleep. When I opened the door, I had already unpacked all the clothes. After putting the dagger beside the bed, I closed my eyes and, in an instant, I forgot everything. The thoughts were shaken, and worries erased. After draining all the strength from my body, I passed out into a defenseless state. Sleep rushed over me like waves and took over my consciousness and then I drifted into oblivion. . . , As soon as I opened my eyes, I grabbed my dagger and looked out the window. Seeing that the sun was shining, it seemed that I had been asleep for a long time and when I looked around the room I noticed my clothes were scattered. I came to my senses and picked them up to dress myself. How much did I sleep? Suddenly, I felt thirsty, so I opened the door and tried to move, but something caught on the door not making it move. Feeling the presence of people outside, I push through it I look at the attendants of the Black Rabbit Union blinking. What are you doing? Ah. Sect Leader, you awake? Looking to the left and right, I see my subordinates sleeping against the walls. What is with those guys? Just standing guard. There are a dozen standing guard. It is like this because Mister Seo told us to do it. If we lack skills and then use numbers, he said. I nod and kick the guy who was sleeping. Get out of the way. You bastards, get up, I woke up and now you are sleeping. Wake up everyone Only then did the leaning back sleepy ones stand up to greet me. You are awake? Ah, right. I think you slept better though, wipe that drool off. Yes. I break through the hallway and look at the guards. But how long did I sleep? You slept for two and half days. I shake my hands. Rest. It looked like I slept too much. I dont remember a thing because I didnt dream and only the memory of being angry at my subordinates is what my brain holds. I passed through the main hall and looked at Yuk Hap who was sitting cross legged under the plum tree. Yuk Hap. After he opened his eyes, he asks, Sect Leader, you ready? I nod and walk down. Lets go. The past lifes Ghost Demon got up without a word and followed me. As I was heading to the inner garden, I suddenly remember something, so, I ask him, And what of the poison? Two days after taking the antidote is enough time for it to work. To which he says, Actually, Physician Moyong seems to be quite busy, so he didnt notice it. But it sort of solved it. And the next day he immediately gave another antidote, so that helped too. Suddenly, various thoughts crossed my mind and I looked at Ho Yeon who bowed to me. Sect Leader, have a nice trip. Come to think of it, I am not the kind of person who can integrate Ghost Demon into my men at all. Rather, I thought that Ho Yeon would have better luck changing the mind of Ghost Demon. This wasnt my task at all. So, I tell Ho Yeon, I will come back safe. Yes. Ho Yeon is the person previously known as Hoyeon Cheong. Just a minor change in spelling. As a refresher hes the man Zaha tasked with training Sung-tae. Chapter 171 I came out of the physician building with Master Yukhap and Byuk Geom. Byuk Geom, lets go. Byuk Geom who is looking to the side, answers, Yes. As soon as I got up, I put my clothes on and ran, and only then did the subordinates flock from around. I wasnt in the mood to speak to them, so I just waved my hand when I heard a laugh come from the Black Rabbit Unions gate. Hahah Where could this laughter be coming from? The Black Rabbit Union was quiet, everyone looked towards the source. If I could, I would have told the person to fuck off, but I couldnt at the big grin the man had on his face. It was Geum Chul-yong and Kwak Yong-gae. We are here. I welcome the faces of the two who come in. Mister Geum and sub leader, welcome. Geum Chul-yong smiles and looks into the union. The number of people has increased and the number of unfamiliar faces too. The reason Geum Chul-yong is here is unknown. After I manage to calm down, I say, I think there was some progress. To which he nods. I guess so. When Geum Chul-yong reaches out his hand, the sub leader holds out the long sword he was holding in his left hand to Geum Chul-yong. Geum Chul-yong pulls out the sword confidently. Come on, now Sect Leader. Should we spar? I suddenly realized that I didnt have Black Hares Tooth. So, grabbing the wooden sword at the waist, I say, Unfortunately, I gave the Black Hares tooth to Moyong. Today, I have no choice but to use this. I drew the wooden sword and held it out in the middle. Strike it. Geum Chul-yong asks me puzzled, Sect Leader, isnt the sword too thin? You think so? But you cannot belittle things based on their appearance. If you break this, I will admit that you have a right reason for this belief. Honestly I dont know what will happen. This wooden sword was the weapon of Elder Heo, who held a front position in the Demonic Cult. After Geum Chul-yong takes a stance, he checks again. It isnt my responsibility if it breaks. Of course. I turn my wrist to raise the sword a bit and Geum Chul-yong nods. Here I come. Next, he swings his right arm and strikes the long sword into my wooden one. There is a huge sound. Sring! In the suffocating silence, Geum Chul-yong stares blankly at the sword. The sword I was using was in good condition but his was broken. He asks, Sect Leader, did you use internal QI? His face goes dark as I look at him and I shake my head. He then drops to his knees and mumbles while touching the broken blade, No, dark steel was mixed into Yong-gae hurriedly helps him up. Brother get up. What kind of man gets on his knees? And I comfort him. Mister Geum. He looks at me with a horrid expression. Putting the wooden sword into the sheath I say, The sword I have is a sword which once was used to kill the first in the world. It means you dont have to feel bad. For real? That wooden sword? I nod and look at Cha Sung-tae. Sung-tae. Yes, Sect Leader. I called for him to get close and then raised Geum Chul-yong whose legs went weak with Yong-gae. Mister Geum, sub leader too, listen to me. Yes, Sect Leader. Do speak. I look at Cha Sung-tae. Sung-tae, investigate all the people who need weapons in the Low-Down Sect including the Black Rabbit Union. I understand. I hold the shoulder of Geum Chul-yong and say, Mister Geum. Yes. Now make all the weapons for the Low-Down Sect to use in your Dragon Head Smithy. The price of the weapon will give you the best sword making name. I carefully examine his broken sword. You need to get paid like this. Will you accept the request? Geum Chul-yong was so flustered that he didnt answer. That I look at the sub leader. Sub leader, do you understand what I mean? To which he nods. We will make it. We have improved a lot. It will not be compared to what we were using. I nodded and looked at my men. Mister Geum, the ones here are all people of Low-Down Sect. Please make them a little stronger with the weapons from your place. So that the weapons can save our lives which are at stake once in battle. To which he looks at my subordinates. What, obviously I will make it. I look at him. With this determination, make each of my subordinates one piece of those unbreakable swords. He nods feeling pressure and I nod to Cha Sung-tae. I will be busy with work, so please serve tea to him. I understand. I say goodbye to him first. I need to move for someone. Have a cup of tea and leave. Talk to my subordinates about anything. Only then did I speak to Master Yukhap and Byuk Geom who were watching from the other side. Lets go. Farewells came in from behind, but I didnt bother responding. I found a store which sells things like hats and picked a bamboo hat. To which Master Yukhap looks shocked. What are you doing? Master Yukhap, it is essential for Byuk Geom to move. So, this. Pick one. He sighs. What nonsense. But in the end, I bought three of them and paid before leaving. I put on one and looked at Byuk Geom and Yukhap who while holding the sword in the left hand See? There is no absolute adherence to a wooden sword in a bamboo hat. I let out a sigh. It is because Byuk Geom and Master Yukhap are bastards who dont even know to joke. So, they looked like I said something lame. Byuk Geom slightly raises his hat and asks, Do we kill all those in Yukhang valley? Why are you so into killing people, you insane bastard! Stop killing everyone. Let us talk first. If they cannot respond to words then we can think about it, talk and then we decide if we kill or not. Byuk Geom. I understand. Why are you angry? Master Yukhap asks the same. Werent we planning to kill them all? See, Yukhap. The three princes of the Cult, the mothers of theirs have amazing power on their side. They have the best warriors, and they use them as slaves. Yukhap asks, Ah, like me? Uh, right. like you. Fucking idiot. Anyway, the leader of the valley is also being forced to work under them like Byuk Geom. I will be there and catch the White Face Prince first and then get the antidote. He must have someone from his mothers side who is helping. Now do you know what we do? Master Yukhap asks Byuk Geom, Where is the valley? Follow me. Byuk Geom says walking quickly, Looking at it now, the bamboo hat too was a strategy. I answer briefly at the idiot words of Byuk Geom. Sure. I looked at the stupid guy and the ugly guy and moved ahead. It was a fun journey. I wanted to defeat the two of them before traveling to the right place, but I couldnt since these two were on my side. Byuk Geom walking fast says, Can we run? Do whatever you want, I am faster anyway. Byuk Geom asks Master Yukhap, You are fine too? To which he nods. I am faster so do what you want to. Byuk Geom snorts and begins to use light footwork. Yukhap too does the same. I sigh and run after them. Pathetic bastards. I am full of energy because I made up for two days of sleep. Before that, this obsessed feeling with cultivation had worked and the body felt nice now. First, I was planning to focus on the cultivation and raise it to a level of using it when fighting. That way the harmony of yin and yang would be correct to some extent. After arriving at Mt. Pyongjong, where the Right Valley was, we climbed up the mountain. My body temperature, which accumulated heat due to using light footwork, was quickly brought down by the wind coming down the valley. What kind of person is the leader of the valley? Byuk Geom says, Martial arts are good and there is strong pride and he gets into trouble because of it. Why? It wasnt that the White Face prince was coercive. He gambled and lost with a price, so he took the medicine as ordered. Still, he is one who resists whenever he is ordered to do something. How should I put it there are some insane sides. I am sure that the Sect Leader can communicate with him. And if you cannot, no one can. Of course, you speak first. And I will check his personality and then speak. I understand but what if the prince is there? Is he strong? Enemies cannot stand him. I look at Yukhap. Hear that? Your opponent. Yukhap nods his head. It will be funny to play the role of Demonic Cults enemy drinking their own poison. Not funny. Arriving at the valley, the rough surroundings were gardens and flower paths being managed by people. Byuk Geom walked on the narrow road as he said, Do not get lost around here. There are poisonous weeds. It seems there are various thorns pricking us too. After passing through the narrow flower road, the warriors of the valley began to appear and recognized Byuk Geom. You came? To which he responded. Where is the valley leader? He is inside but there are guests. Guests? One man moved ahead and looked at Yukhap and asks, Are these your new subordinates? Byuk Geom nods. Right. Byuk Geom walks like a person with a task through the garden. At the table three people were talking and looked at us. One who seemed to be the valley lord looks at Byuk Geom. Byuk Geom, what is it? When he hesitated, the man raised his finger. Stop. Stop those following you. It was only then did I raise my head and slightly check the valley lord. A man and a woman were with him. Of them, the middle-aged woman changed her facial expression fast, and got up from the chair. The quick-witted valley leader checked her expression and turned to look at us. Who are you? I do not think you are under Byuk Geom! I push Byuk Geom to the side and slowly approach the round table. The man sitting on the side of the leader is strange but the woman feels familiar. As I get closer, the woman grabs me with a scared expression. Sect Leader, how have you been? I smile. Ah, I was thinking who The woman forces a smile. How are you? I nod. Lady Iron Toad. Yes. Only then, I knew of the man. Then you are the valley leader. As I see it, Oil Flower Valley and Right Valley seem to be close. So, Lady Iron Toad and the other valley leader were here. Who? I take out a dagger and look at Oil Flower Valley Lord. You recognize this? His eyes widened. The dagger! I come in casually and slump over in a chair and put the moonlight dagger into the table. Nice to meet you all. I am so delighted that I have this wide smile. And I tell the two who came with me, The two of you wait. Yes. Sure. I hold my hand out to Lady Iron Toad, who is still standing. Lady, sit down and be comfortable. Why stand? The land is wide yet narrow. For me to see you here. Ah. yes. I didnt know. She turns to me and sits down, pressing down her knees. Oil Flower Lord looked like he was holding himself. The Right Valley Leader asks Lady Iron Toad, Who? To which she says, He is the Low-Down Sect Leader. As if he had heard something before about us, he turns to me. I dont even bother thinking and say, That is me. Pleasure to meet you. Half real and half not but I dont care. The important thing wasnt the tone but the feeling. I look at the dagger and say, You people dont seem happy to see me. To which they said, Nice to meet you, Leader. Oil Flower Leader speaks to me in a calm tone. Nice to meet you. I have heard several things about you. Even the Right Valley leader tells me, Low-Down Sect Leader, nice to meet you. A man who is welcomed wherever he goes, that is me. Oil Flower Valley was previously known as Yuhwa Valley (). Also, as another refresher, Lady Iron Toad is the individual who gifted Zaha the moonlight dagger. Oil Flower Valley Leader is Lady Iron Toads husband. You can refer to chapter 66 for more details. Chapter 172 Right Valley Leader was in his mid-thirties. Lady Iron Toad and Oil Flower Valley Leader were also somewhere around the same age. Maybe thats why they looked like friends of the same age. It wasnt a leader-subordinate relationship; I felt that prudence was seen in the face of the Oil Flower Valley Leader and the stubbornness with pride stood out the most for the Right Valley Leader. And so, the Right Valley Leader looked at me. For what did the Sect Leader visit us? This was an odd question, so I thought for a while. It seems that the man doesnt yet know that I beat down his people to death at the guest house. Which means it was taking quite a while for Yeop Ya-hyung to report. Looking at the dagger I say, I have something to tell you. I have something to ask. Lady Iron Toad. Yes, Sect Leader. I point to my dagger. I use it well. Every time I spike, it sticks in right. It is a good dagger, thanks to which I cut a lot. To which she replies with a dry smile. I am glad you are doing well. I look at the Right Valley Leader and ask, Valley Leader, I wonder when the man called White Face will come. To which he frowns and says, That isnt something I know. Because I dont know, I have nothing to report to you. Why are you looking for the person? Lets get to the point. From your point it should be like this. Who would touch the poisoned things at this place? Did they mention it makes ghastly sounds? She waves her hands at me. N-Not me. I didnt even drink anything but the oil flower alcohol. What did you just say? The faces of the Leaders werent good. Maybe it was because I kept speaking in a roundabout way. But as expected, the Right Valley Leader takes a while. Sect Leader, what are you asking? I am having a hard time eating. He gets spoken back to with a mix of respect and a short speech. I know that it is difficult for my words to hold any weight right now, because there is no way now, and I will speak the truth. The antidote the Valley Leader is taking is not an antidote. Rather it is one which contains ingredients which cause addiction in the body so if you dont take it constantly, you will suffer from all sorts of things. I dont know if you get it. The guy looks startled. Lady Iron Toad asks, Sect Leader, is it true? Lady, why would I suddenly come to this place and say such things? Unless one is insane. To which she asks, I apologize but how did you find out? So, I point my finger at Byuk Geom. Since we have him on my side, and a physician too, we tried to decipher it but then failed. Believe it or not, the antidote will make you more bitter the more you eat. I mean the withdrawal symptoms are terrible. It isnt just a medicine to treat, but one which makes you cooperate with the man in order to continue taking it. Do you understand my words? She says, Actually, Oil Flower Valley Lord knows a lot about poison, so I was visiting and looking at it. And you conclude it as? We werent quite sure of it. I nod. It is a good thing. The story slowly seems to be unraveling. Right Valley Leader opens his mouth. Sect Leader, why did you come all the way here to tell me? Many things were said but I answered as briefly as I could. I have many enemies. They are here and there. Some orthodox sects are my enemies. Some unorthodox too are my enemies. The fight with them is quite superficial but now I want to go ahead and fight the three princes caught my eye. I found out that White Face Prince was the subordinate son to the Demonic Cult. To which he asks, I am confused. I know that but for it to happen like this? How did the Low-Down Sect Leader come like this? I shake my head. I am a bit busy. As a Low-Down Sect member, I need to fight and it is great, but why do I feel dissatisfied? The guy laughs as if my tone is absurd. Huhu. He looks to Byuk Geom and says, Byuk Geom, come here and help me. To which he says, There is no place for me here. Talk to the Sect Leader. Regarding the poison and its cure, Sect Leader is right. At this time, one of his subordinates, who approaches after moving past Byuk Geom, says to the Right Valley Leader. Valley Lord, White Faced Prince has arrived. To which he answers. Guide him. The eyes of the people moved. I had my back exposed but as soon as I realized that the target was coming I felt my body heat up. Even in the middle of it, I looked at the expression of those ahead. The Right Valley Leader sighed. Before I could say anything our new guest spoke. Valley Lord, it has been so long. We had guests. Not just White-Faced Prince, there were other warriors who came. I estimated the level of martial arts and the number of warriors coming. There werent that many, but this was enough to clear the valley. White Faced Prince appears next to me and takes the empty spot and looks at the people seated around. He had a mask on, so when I see him I end up snorting. Fucking moron. And Right Valley Leader says, Prince, you came. To which the guy nods. As expected, Valley Leader with wide feet. I mean, there are so many friends you have, do introduce me. To which he introduced those to his side. Oil Flower Valley Lord, Lady Iron Toad, and Low-Down Sect Leader. White Face Prince snorts and nods. Nice to meet you, Yeop Ya-hyung. The voice of Yeop Ya-hyung can be heard from behind. Yes, prince. The guy who runs at full speed looking at the prince. I was called. The guy moves his fingers. Is the Low-Down Sect Leader you mentioned the one here? When I jerk my head back Yeop Ya-hyung flinches. Ah, yes, right. The guy who was surprised is greeted by me with a warm expression. Warrior Yeop, you came? Ah, yes. I am bored so I try to speak. Are you ready for what I said? Yeop Ya-hyung answers with eyes wide. What nonsense is this? Shut up and leave, this isnt your place. No. As soon as White Face Price turns his head, Yeop Ya-hyung bows his head. I must have lost my reasoning, I will move. Prince. To which White Face Prince waves his hand. Go. Yes. Yeop Ya-hyung steps back down like he was doing it in front of a king, then turns around as I mumble. No fun. Prince looks at the Valley Leader. Valley Leader, how did this happen? Did you actually set a trap for me? Why is the Low-Down Sect Leader here? To which he answers, Low-Down Sect Leader has just arrived. It is a first for me too. If the two of you have something to resolve then do it. I have nothing to do with this. As soon as he arrived, he spoke about the antidote being poison, but this part should be answered by the prince. He threw the question and White Face Prince looked at me. Somehow, I managed to arrive right in time. There was a prince right ahead of me, so I wasnt going to miss the chance. The guy took three pills from his sleeve and threw them on the table and all three fell precisely in front of the Oil Flower Valley Leader, Lady Iron Toad, and me. And he speaks in a different way. If you three eat that, I will save you. And Valley Leader, do you not want to take the cure? Acting out so uncooperatively. If you can tolerate it then do it. Valley leader looks at me and the prince. Prince, according to the Low-Down Sect Leader, this cure causes withdrawal symptoms. So, if we keep taking that cure, which is addictive, it will make us slaves for the rest of our lives? Promises are no different huh. Did I end up looking like someone who was afraid of death and would run like a dog? I applaud his words. *Clap!clap!clap!* And this time, he continues, And Low-Down Sect Leader, what do you hope to get by speaking about this? If you want to catch the prince, he is right in front of you. It is the two of you who need to solve your problems first. I will hold onto what I have to say, only to the winner. I will not intervene in your problems. I burst into laughter as this looks like a place where smart people all gathered. Finding my situation funny I smile and ask Lady Iron Toad, What do you think of this, lady? To which she looks at the others. Of course, I will follow the orders of Sect Leader. As promised last time, I will not do anything to become your enemy. A promise is a promise. And Oil Flower Valley Lord says, I have no intention of taking this blindly. I nod and applaud them. Good. That is a good thought. The prince sighs and then takes his mask off as he says, then all four of you will die at my hands? I rub both my hands at the goosebumps which came. Awk, that is what baseless confidence is. I say to Lady Iron Toad as I forgot, Ah, lady. Yes, Low-Down Sect Leader. Get up for a while with the Flower Valley Leader. Now. She jumps up and raises the man and I nod. Nice. Take three steps back and wait. Lady Iron Toad and Valley Leader step back. I nod again and wave my hand. Now go back like that. Yes. It is a quick dagger, a reward for trust. Go all the way to the back. With a few random words I drive the two of them to the back. The prince is a dangerous one but the two might die by being caught in my attack. White Face Mask smiles when I push them out. That is right, what a strange young man. Only then did I look at his actual face and man, he was a good looking one in his early 30s. Taking off his mask means that he wont let go of those who saw his face, but the act of wearing and removing the mask is the same. I wanted to look back and check the warriors this guy brought but this guy himself had an amazing presence so I couldnt look back. When the Right Valley Leader gets up, White Face Prince snorts and speaks to Right Valley Leader, Do not speak bullshit about this place and neutrality in front of me. Low-Down Sect Leader, I will end you with my own hands. You arent the only problem I have. Because the lives of the people in this valley depend on my decision. Low-Down Sect Leader. Why? He smiles and looks at me. You tried threatening me. I wonder who you take after. Yah, you are a friend who knows how to mess around. I nod and then threaten him. If this guy wins, you, Valley Leader, will be his slave. If I win, you get out of this slavery. I am the Low-Down Sect Leader, the vanguard in the Kangho Slave Liberation Union, the middle army, the area army, the officer, and the commander of all. The prince shakes his head. Like you said, I am a crazy man. I make eye contact with him and then extend one hand. *Puak!* A state where my right hand and the princes left hand were facing each other. In an instant the two of us moved our heads and looked at Valley Leader. . Confirming that we are going to fight truly, he grabs his long sword and I grab my sword. Right Valley Leader opened his mouth with a smile. who would be killed? Multiple swords are drawn simultaneously from behind. Behind him, I hear the laughter of Master Yukhap. Sect Leader, you arent going to run now right? I might be pretty upset. Valley Leader, who was a little far, took out his assassin needles and Right Valley Leader drew out his sword. From the back, I heard the voice of Yeop Ya-hyung. Sect Leader, it looks like you are moving to heaven today. How did you think to come into the den of the tiger yourself? I nod my head. Who will betray? Who will not betray? A persons mind is known, and the life ahead seems shallow. Even in the midst of this, I remembered my seniors. The words of Elder Heo, who wants to live in Kangho even if he is reborn with the same heart. For the first time in a long time, I feel the dantian moving. The first time since I ran into all kinds of obstacles. At that time, the midpoint of dantian was cut straight with a sword so it felt like two lumps were created, but now it is different. The dantian, which is divided into Yin and Yang, seems to be going insane with me, it was like my heart was doing tumbles. How else should I express this? For example . . . Taiji? Dantian is loosely translated as elixir field, sea of qi, or simply energy center. Dantian are the qi focus flow centers, important focal points for meditative and exercise techniques. Also known as Tai Chi Chuan. Taiji is derived from Chinese philosophy and is an ancient Chinese discipline of meditative movements practiced as a system of exercises that often involves slow, controlled movements and the interplay of Yin and Yang. Chapter 173 Does the dantian of a person have its own temper? Well, I dont know about others but mine sure feels like it does. And it is often so difficult to try to understand what is happening within. The Yang Qi in the dantian beating the Yin Qi and the Yin Qi trying to strangle the Yang Qi when being beaten. But never giving in. That is because I am the owner of both Yang and Yin Qi, and I am not a man who gives in to anything at all. I wasnt nervous about people betraying me, but more because of the sudden change, and I began sweating all over my body. I cursed myself. A man who falls into a crisis thinking that it will happen. In the meantime, White Face Prince, of course, is enduring it well. The reason is simple. It is because I had saved up Qi to prepare for a surprise attack. I convey my thoughts while glaring at the Right Valley Lord with my most scary eyes. It is fine as long as it isnt me. Hit the one next to me. As soon as the hands of the Right Valley Lord move, my entire body rages with energy. In that moment, my eyes notice the Valley Lord, who passes right ahead of me, going for the White Face Prince. Nice. However, White Face Prince actually stops the sword by holding it in between the thumb and index finger of his right hand. I cant help but praise this guys skills. I like your skills too. On the other hand, the eyes of the Right Valley Lord, holding the sword, widen. Sometimes, those who dont know how to handle it, ask if it is alright to turn their sword in this situation. But there are times when it helps and times it doesnt. Unless the opponent is a complete ass, he would be readily pushing internal Qi into the sword. In any case, this was an unfavorable situation and, as expected, the White Face Prince asks for the help of his subordinates. Kill him. At the same time, he begins to infuse Qi into the sword with the intention to explode it and that widens the distance. Puak! The table explodes and the sword Qi aims at me and rushes in. I kick the sole of my foot into the ground and soar into the air. As I tumbled, I checked the condition of my body. And what I confirmed is that I was now face to face with the White Face Prince. Soon, both of us drew swords from our waist and we clashed in the air. Kwaang! With the base of the swords having been infused with our Sword Qi, instead of hearing the clashing sound of metal, what came was a wave of force that exploded out at the same time causing both of us to spin and regain our balance at the same moment. At times like this, being flustered allows for the beauty of hiding and revealing skills. But I still have to hide my true skills. And I have no other alternative but to check the state of my wooden sword every time we clash. This sword is thinner than the normal long sword, so I am worried that it might break. Silence continues for a while as we look at each other and I ask Mr. Yukhap who is a little far, Yukgap? Master Yukhap, who had drawn his sword and confronted the subordinates of White Face Prince, replies with an expression which says this is absurd. It is Yukhap. Fine. I myself have no idea as to why I spoke to him. The reason why the subordinates of White Face Prince werent moving hastily was because they were surrounded by the subordinates of the Right Valley Lord. White Face Young Lord looks around as if his interest is piqued. Valley Leader, it is a pity that you chose to turn your back on me this swiftly. To which Valley Leader answers with his sword in hand. Since when was I on your side for us to speak about betrayal? I only lost once in a game, but I never agreed to be a slave. I speak back in a polite manner. Gambling is scary in such ways, everyone. At my words, Right Valley leader yells, Shut up! You fucking Low-Down Sect Leader. Suddenly, I feel so uncomfortable in my stomach that I frown as I look around. It wasnt like I needed to take a dump but more like I was feeling something ominous. No This feeling made me infuse more qi into the wooden sword. Fortunately, a red flame on it makes me feel a bit better. My internal Qi is doing fine. I try so hard to get rid of this feeling, which is bothering me, by focusing on the other thoughts. Its the way most people try to forget about diarrhea, but as anyone would know, it doesnt help much. In the sense of my heart wanting to rush things, I take out the moonlight dagger, hold it in my hand, and infuse it with Shadow Moon Martial Arts like I did in the inn. Fortunately, the ice was normal and the dagger was now looking frosted white. In an instant, this strange and horrible pain tore throughout my entire body. The feeling of something digging right into my dantian and forcing it to expand began to spread throughout. Normally Im not the kind of person to scream due to pain. However, the dantian, which should have been normal, began to move and the pain of having it move and tear through my organs was excruciating to control. Ah, please not here. I watch the people around while trying to control the pain. I take a step back alone thinking how it would be difficult to stop anyone if they were to move in to attack me right now. Byuk Geom seems surprised as he asks, Sect Leader, are you alright? Even Master Yukhap seems surprised. Sect Leader, what is happening? You cannot be doing this. We will all die here, alright? When White Face Young Lord moves for me, four men approach to handle Byuk Geom and Master Yukhap. The middle-aged man speaks to Yukhap in a gentle tone. Everyone be still. I see that you are Master Yukhap. Why are you with the Low-Down Sect leader? To which he answers, You dont need to know. Everyone looked at me, but I couldnt help it. I cant get my voice out. So, I rested myself on my knee feeling the clash of Yin and Yang within. Be damned. Was this really happening out of nowhere? Or was the body just in shock and unable to handle it? The Yin and Yang qi within my dantian are fighting like insane beasts trying to eat one another. Even when the two were in harmony, it was an unfortunate thing, but now? Is this why I wasnt so popular with women? At that time, White Face Young Lord, who is watching me, bursts into laughter. Hahahaha! You are going through a cultivation mistake! I am going to kill you by watching you to my hearts content. Hahaha fucking insane bastard who cannot handle this will attack me? You are going to cough up blood soon. I will bet on it. This is the situation. In that instant, blood mixed with sweat began to pour out of my body. A few of the people around moved back in fear as they saw my face sweating blood. This time, I just cursed. Ah, fuck. Yeop Ya-hyung seems excited as he says, Wow, this is happening for real. I put my left hand out to try to buy time. Warrior Yeop, wait. Wait my ass! Yeop Ya-hyung is elated as shrugs his shoulders. He moves his head around like a monkey and begins to approach me. Sect Leader, are you alright? I am not, so stop there. You must be shocked right? Hahaha. What is this, bleeding out slowly? Wow, just what stupid martial arts did you have to learn for you to bleed all over your body! Where did you even learn this martial art? You bastard! Even in this desperate moment I have to respond to him. Self-taught. This makes Yeop Ya-hyung stomp his feet and laugh. You did good you fucking insane bastard. Hahahaha. This is happening because it is self-taught! What you? A genius? I learned things the hard way. I didnt know that working hard to see some effort would do this. As I say it, the guy changes his tone and yells more loudly. Yah, you Sect Leader fuckin dog! I knew that you were a scary guy the other day but man I had no reason to be scared. You fucking foolish bastard, Low-Down Sect Leader, you are just a fucking guy who is nothing. Just stand there. Young lord, I will be aiming for his right arm first. White Face Young Lord smiles and tells him, You bastard, do not be careless. To which Yeop Ya-hyung says, Ah, right. I shouldnt. Now, here I come. Still, Yeop Ya-hyung is looking alert since he is slowly coming close. In that instant, I began to feel a drowsiness fall over my body, so I began to collect the Infernal Flame Scent and wrap it around the wooden sword. I also retrieved the Shadow Moon Martial Arts which was around the dagger. Suddenly I sighed. Phew And Yeop Ya-hyung flicks his left hand. I, Yeop Ya-hyung, will be the man who will cut down the head of Low-Down Sect. Get up. It is I who will be showing you the bitterness of life. I put my sword back and then move the dagger into my right hand. Warrior Yeop. What? I cant stop the tears in my eyes and Yeop Ya-hyung looks shocked. Woah, tears of blood now? I wipe my eyes to see it. I found that my fingers were truly stained with blood, sweat, and tears too. But I am not a man who gives in so easily. Although feeling weak, I hold out my dagger to kill the guy even when I am trembling, even when blood is flowing down the sweat pores in my dagger holding hand. In an instant, I could feel the craziness rise to the point of me losing sanity, so I hold onto the Yin and Yang in my dantian at the same time and clench the dagger. There is a strange sound which touches my ears and, before I know it, the dagger gets dyed in purple with sword qi. . A color I am seeing for the first time, and this was a rare color to have. It looks like a color which came from mixing red, white, blood, sweat and tears. Come to think of it, this isnt my first time seeing it. This resembles the purple sunset that I was mesmerized by the other day. Purple Sword Qi? I was truly shocked looking at the color, and only when I sensed the approaching presence of Yeop Ya-hyung did I swing my dagger. I hear the sound of chuk- and then see the purple sword Qi and the body of Yeop Ya-hyung at the same time being cut in half. I feel truly sad for the guy, so I call for him. Warrior Yeop? The guys eyes were on me but he had already lost the life in his eyes. The blood from the diagonal cut on his body began to spread out and his body split and fell down. Thud! With my own mouth open in shock, I look at Yeop Ya-hyung who left for heaven. I was trying to hold you. But you died. Such a sad thing. The pain had gone down a little and the condition of the body seemed to be recovering fast. And, as I wished, I could release a very small amount of Qi from the sweat holes in my body which was draining blood and sweat. The drops of blood which felt too ominous covering my body began to spread and scatter around with purple mist. The only one who knows my name here is Yukhap. And he is looking at me dumbfounded as he says, Zaha? I wasnt sure if he was calling my name, or the purple mist (cause purple means Zaha) so I answered normally. Master Yukhap, what is it? To which he smiles as if this is fun. It wasnt a cultivation mistake? Uh. No. After putting the dagger into the place near my chest, I say to White Face Young Lord, who looks surprised, You wouldve had the chance to attack if you moved, but it is too late now. I am all recovered. I earned the time I needed, and you will realize that all of this was a part of my plan, a psychological warfare. Only then did the guys face change from shock to dumbfounded one and he raised his finger to order the subordinates. Him. And as his men rushed for me, the guy soars into the air for the other side and begins to run. That bastard. I take three steps towards where the idiot was running and order Master Yukhap, Yukgap. Can you handle this? I have to. There is Right Valley Leader too. I block and walk towards the swordsmen and then slash them down with the dagger which I took out. The Purple Sword Qi moves out like a feather and slashes down the necks of the three at once. Puak! I am the only guy who is surprised at the sight of killing them in one hit. This is giving me creeps. I jump into the air, twist my body, and continue to jump on things to get close. I watch the running guy who stops on a tree branch and moves while stepping on the other trees. Well, I was never one to care about weak people. Anyway, I always have a tendency to beat down one man. I wasnt sure why, but now I had this burning desire to catch the ones who ran. I increase my speed as I provoke the guy. White Face, do you think you can run? . The thing I am most confident about is footwork. You fucking bastard. You abandoned your subordinates to create this situation? Abandoned your men! I push for the guy who gave up his own men to run. I have no idea what to do if the dantian decides to betray me. If it turns to Taiji or if the Yin and Yang Qi decide to agree on something. In any case, the situation turned me stronger. That is enough. Chapter 174 I ran with a calm mind. It wasnt an easy task to catch up, but the more I ran the more it felt like I was getting faster. It felt like my organs, which were tangled up, were beginning to move back to their rightful place. And this is how I managed to chase after the guy. I could even laugh while running. The pain of my enemy is my pleasure. If me being in pain can make them suffer more, I can laugh while running through it. Moreover, if the enemy belongs to the Demonic side, then I can run through the central plains from start to end, skipping meals and even sleep. After a while, the guy turns back and holds his hand out. Wait, wait. Tired? I ask him as he is catching his breath. Fine. Get good rest. White Face Young Lord, who is preparing for a surprise attack because he is gasping for air, straightens his back and glares at me. But I remain calm as I say, What? Get rest. Come on. The distance between us two is around 15m, so I grab onto the wooden sword and prepare to rush to him. I am coming. After catching his breath, White Face Young Lord begins to run again. I too spread-out light footwork without getting to draw my sword out. And as I run down fiercely, the situation feels a lot clearer and calmer. As I get faster than before, I can even speak comfortably while running shoulder to shoulder with him. Will you not run fast? Go fast! Now! Well, my purpose isnt to kill him on the spot. If he is a warrior with good enough skills, there is a high chance that one wrong move to kill him will leave me with the wrong information. So, I will be beating the guy down. Suppressing that mind of his is even more important. Again, he stops and inhales. . I wait with my arms crossed. Fine. Rest and then move. Only then did that idiot understand my motive and ask, So, the reason you are doing this to me, is to find out my base? I dont have to think to answer this. Well, you can think of it like that. You must be insane if you think I will show it to you. Ah, I am fine either way. Guide me now. But do not do stupid things like taking me to the Demonic Cult instead of your base. I know where it is. He nods. Follow me. If I guide you there, I will not be safe either. I have no idea what your source of confidence is as the leader of a sect I never even heard of. But I will take you. And so, I follow White Face Young Lord with a calm expression. I want to find out how to get rid of the withdrawal symptoms the others were going through. And I have to find out where he is getting his forces from, but the problem here is my anger. I have been really patient till now, but the human heart cannot be trusted. I speak as I naturally walk with him. White Face, I can hear the sound of your head being used. It is hard to shake me off, and embarrassing to take me to the base, and it seems like you have no chance to win against me. What more can you be worried about? Sect Leader, just what do you want? What do I want? You are the ones who sent assassins to kill me. I must have looked funny for you people to order only one guys troops to come deal with us. Actually, we have a lot of idiots in the Low-Down Sect, so you can look down on those idiots, but you cannot underestimate their Sect Leader. And that is what I will make clear today. That is why you are making this mess? If I kill you here, no one will realize how scary I can be, so I wont. That isnt even the right thing to do. The White Face guy stops and looks at me as he sighs. I begin to look him in the eyes and he does the same. What is it? Change your mind? The guy continues to glare and then moves to the side. When the guy moved, it was like his body separated into two people looking exactly the same. And then the two moved to four. I watch him with my arms crossed. Right, must be a part of the Illusion Demons side of the family. That didnt mean that this guy was the Illusion Demon. Maybe the one who offered his daughter to the sect leader was one from the Illusion Demons side. If that guy had been wearing the original white mask, this Illusion Shadow Demon Arts would have felt a bit more effective. At some point the number of bodies increased. White Face Young Lord seemed to use this only after being through enough. I continue to watch him with a calm mind. It wouldnt be easy to find the real one now. you made me use it. As expected, even his voice is resonating around the illusions. So, I tell him, White Face, do not do anything stupid and lets just move now. At that moment, all the illusions drew their swords and rushed for me but I just stood there and received the swords of the illusions. It is unlikely for the one using this technique to attack first and reveal the main body. Four swords reached my body from the north, south, east, and west but they were illusions like I thought. I look around as I say, Pity right? You didnt think I would be still right? Bastard. Actually, the thing with illusions is that the swords cutting through the air neither make sound, nor do the flapping clothes. This was the weakness of this technique. In order to use this perfectly, one has to also learn the assassins martial arts. At the very least, they have to combine both to make me run like a mad dog in a neighborhood. But this guy wasnt that strong. I move like I am taking a calm walk and then catch the swords thrown at me. Still, the field the guy chose to fight in was nice. There is no wind, it is flat ground, and there is a creek somewhere around which continuously creates the sound of flowing water. I walk around as I continue to slap the illusions and they begin to vanish. Of course, if one was inexperienced they would swing their swords at the illusions and then be shocked when the real opponent strikes after spotting an opening. Cacaccacacaca! The moment I hear the sound of stones clashing in the sky I immediately pull my wooden sword out. He seemed to notice that I was trying to listen to the sounds. There was the sound of tiny iron stones hitting one another. I move my wooden sword toward the vision ahead. Did you put marbles in the sword sheath? Fucking child. You did good. I mouth the words Ho, ah, hap, eh while trying to move and swing the wooden sword lightly as if cutting down plum blossoms by doing a sword dance. When I dance while holding the sword, I swear it has its own charm. I think of rushing as I practice. Not bad. It was good to train. I swing the wooden sword while spitting out words which made no sense. Muffled sounds could be heard. Well, the weather seems to be getting hot again. I use the Three Style Sword Attack and try to thrust the sword in with a bizarre movement which no sect would have. Rains down and then stops and then it rains all day. I move my feet recklessly around as I thrust the sword moving my hips to the side. Be damned man, I am tired of it all. It is my time. Hungry despite eating? You must have a beggar in your stomach, a bastard who can only spit on the ground, bastard spits around. Fucking. I continue to mumble nonsense and then a thought comes to mind. For a moment it feels like I went back to my days as a server, and it gives me the creeps. Illusion Shadow Demonic Arts is scary. For a moment I thought I was a server. . Suddenly the illusions vanish with the real one alone and he is staring at me. Low-Down Sect Leader. What? I clearly feel the difference. I will guide you now. I nod. Right. You are doing the right thing. Guide me and do not try to mess around. My mind is in a calm state now, so do not try to make me angry. Before sending you to where Yeop Ya-hyung is, learn to act in line. Remember that your life remains if I am sane, alright? He nods his head and turns to walk. I manage to close the distance and stand right next to him. This startles the guy, and he has to take a deep breath. Fuck. I put my wooden sword inside and speak normally. So White Face, lets talk while walking. Is the grandfather of yours the Illusion Demon? Among the families who gave their daughters to the Cult Leader. I think, the. While I am talking I stretch my hand out and grab the left arm of White Face and infuse the Full Moon Ice Arts. .! The guy is shocked at his left arm which froze in an instant. He does all he can to release the coldness around. After making sure he doesnt infuse Qi to release it, I get ready to punch him in the face with my left hand. Puack! At that moment, he tried to defend himself with his left hand, but it was already frozen. The moment when this idiots Qi slowly starts dispersing, I switch my right hand into absorbing his Qi and then thrust my fist into his face, chest and stab him in the stomach. Puak! Puak! Puak! Kuak! I glare into his red eyes as I continue to absorb his internal Qi. do you think I am funny to deal with? At the confirmation that his dantian was being drained out of internal Qi, he screams. KWAAAAAAAK! I cover his mouth with my left hand. Be quiet, it will all end soon. I grab him by the collar, lift him high up, and then slam his body down to the ground making him cough up blood. I make sure to tilt my head to not be touched by his blood and continue my task. Be quiet now. I shut his mouth. I have to concentrate because if I lose concentration then White Face Young Lord will die. What had changed in this duration were those eyes of his. It was as if a vast lake turned into a small stream of waterfall. And I make eye contact with him as I say, White Face. Do not die, kid. If you think you are going to die, ask for help. That way we can get you to live. When I let go of his mouth, he speaks in a frail manner. Save me. After tilting my head, I continue to absorb the same. Wait a minute. People dont die that easily. Not yet. I take my hands back as soon as I see his skin crack like a desert ground. White Face passes out with blood leaking down his lips. I put my hand on his neck to check his pulse. Woah, almost got you killed. I have to slap the guy in the face to get him back and say, If you do not open your eyes now, I will send you to Yeop Ya-hyung. The moment I say it, the guy opens his eyes and I bend down to get down to his eye level. Why are you looking at me like this? You either must be out of your mind, or have enough energy to get hit again, right? I get ready to flick him on his forehead until he speaks. Sect Leader, spare me. Tapping his face ever so lightly on the forehead, I ask, Spare you? Please. I lost, right? I lower my head down to whisper. Hmm, firstly there is something I am curious about. Please answer carefully. If you mess with the answer, I will be beating you to death. So, think carefully. . Clearing my throat, I ask him. how does it feel to be weak? His eyes shuddered at my nonsensical question to him. How are you feeling? Wouldnt it be that you were never weak? Isnt this your first time experiencing this? I am curious now, so please answer quickly. We have almost run out of Qi now. I mean, you are sick. Which means you cannot even take down the sickest person in Low-Down Sect. Have you ever imagined yourself to be weak? Young lord? The guy is so pale that falling limp any moment wouldnt be shocking. I grab him by the collar and say in a cold tone, Yah, you fucking trash. Who told you to lose your sanity! Answer me. I am more curious about this than your base. In an instant, he passes out with his eyes closed. No? This bastard. He didnt even answer. I sit close to his head and continue to stare at him. Until he recovers from fainting.. I think to wait and stare because if he comes back to his senses, I can ask him right then. Whenever I become bored, I shake him. Look here, how does it feel to be weak? Yet, no answer. Chapter 175 All of a sudden I come to the realization that I forgot about the drowsiness that often consumes me after combining someones internal Qi with mine. With White Face Young Lord in an unconscious state, I decide to close my eyes while sitting cross-legged. It is a bit ridiculous that I would be put in a situation of feeling sleepy after fighting. But I cant do anything as this was a reason why I wouldnt also absorb the Qi of others. I tilt my head to the left and come to a state of mind where Im at the borderline of non-sleeping and having no dreams. The contents of my dream are that I slept very comfortably though. A dream of me sleeping soundly elsewhere. It seems like this is why it was difficult to know whether Zhuang Zhou really dreamed of the butterfly or if the butterfly dreamed of him. I am afraid of falling into further sleep, so I tilt my head back and look at the sky with wide eyes. After looking at the sky, which looked the same, my eyes begin to hurt with the dust in them, so I begin to chant Buddhist verses while looking up. Lee Zaha, who wouldnt sleep on time, turns into a crazy man. Lee Zaha, who forgets to sleep, turns into a crazy man. It isnt a crazy man if he can sleep comfortably. I yawn and touch my heart. Killing isnt a good night. I calm my mind which is very important to do in order to hold the information that will help to kill the big ones in the Demonic Sect. But at some point, I can sense that the breathing of White Face Young Lord had changed so I tell him, Caught you, so open your eyes. As soon as I say those words, he opens his eyes and sighs. For a moment, the guy who had been deprived of his Qi and the one deprived of his sleep glared at each other. White Face Young Lord speaks in a calm tone. Low-Down Sect Leader. What? Am I a weakling just because my internal Qi is gone and I lost in a fight once? I really have no idea what being weak is like, so stop asking. I dont know. I just do not know. Can you not ask another question? After thinking about it, I think it is worth it. Are you saying you dont understand the feeling of weakness? I dont know. I have been taught that defeat is death. Then do I need to know what being weak is? Did this bastard take some drugs? Or did you realize the way to Tao fainting? Why are you this calm? I look into his eyes to examine him as I open his eyes and check his chin and tongue. I find no trace of addictive drugs, so I tell him. Fine. Weakling, I will not kill you now. You dont know how it feels to be a weak one, so I have no choice but to let you know. What is so special about being a weakling? If you are cold and hungry then you are weak. If you die after being beaten, you are horribly weak. I grab the guy by his collar and lift him up as I hit him on the head. Lets take a walk. This made him curse at me. Do you think that the Low-Down Sect will have a future? We are not having a good time now either you idiot. Do I look fine? . Well, since your martial arts Qi is down, I can spare you if you answer my questions. To which he responds in a weak tone. What are you curious about? For now, how to solve the withdrawal symptoms. So, he answers while walking. Where would that be? You just have to not eat it. The first 30 days will be like hell, the next 20 days will force one to feel the pain of having been bitten by insects, in the next ten days an itchy pain will take over the body with three days of fever, and then you will be back to normal. Of course, those who took huge quantities will suffer horribly. It is a poison which has no cure. Walking by his side, I ask, Why did you make this? We have to survive too. You survive by putting the others in pain. White Face Young Lord speaks in a calm tone. Sect Leader. I have lived my entire life in fear of my father. Our head of house is someone afraid of the Cult Leader. Those who get dragged to the battlefield with no other option have to fight like this. I am just a soldier brought into the battlefield the moment I was born. I have to die and this service to them would be over, so what is this? Even if you decide to use your head like this, the Cult Leader will have no chance of winning, so what is this now? He nods and says, It is predicted that one day the Cult Leader will take a path beyond humans. They said to be prepared to protect the family. When I asked what he was preparing, he said that it cannot be helped because he was touching this forbidden arts. This isnt just a win or lose fight. It turned into one for survival. I did expect the forbidden martial arts to be used, so I ask, What is this forbidden martial arts? I dont have the full details. I heard that Kangho did not like it because of a certain thing. I heard that if it doesnt work, there is a chance for the families with weak loyalty or dislike will be accused of being bad for the Cult. And that could be our family. The Cult Leader was someone who could just stay where he is without doing anything because he has no inspiration. I was about to go up the mountain but changed my mind and went to an inn on a quiet road and took a seat. With a pale expression, White Face Young Lord sits across from me and leans his head back against the wall. I waved my hand to the server who was coming to take my order and then looked at White Face Young Lord. He says, looking out of the inn, Can you take down the Cult Leader? I cannot win over him right now, but I am preventing him from becoming stronger than he is now. How? Getting rid of people like you. That will take a long time. There will not be just one person like me. At that time, I will be skipping meals, practicing, and sleeping less. That would still take a long time. So, at what age? If I cannot do it, I will hope that my disciples will do it in the future. You are young, you already have disciples? Not yet. What is the reason you want to go this far to kill him? Is it revenge? No. Then why? Stretching myself I tell him, Looking at things, this is something only I get to do. I have seen him before. And he treated me like a bug. It riled me up. The bastard there knows that I am a bug, I am a bug, right? Lets see how far this takes me. Is what I thought. This made the guy say, Hero of the first generation. Do you know that the Cult Leader killed his half-brothers? I dont know the full details. Real brothers, his cousins around eight to nine of them. In the first place, those who were in the line for succession tried to kill each other so it would have been less unfair, but then when it was reaching the end, he went and searched for even those not interested in the succession and killed them. Who would try to get the position from such a Cult Leader? The one who survives. Right. Not a child. But a survivor. What would you do if you were born in our trio? The brothers trying to kill one another all the time and the man being called no face. It would be foolish to drop everything and escape. I mean, if you are going to be dragged away and killed, even if you try to compete with powers, martial arts, or skills, the first and second brothers are stronger. And the martial arts. Their families have a higher place in the Cult. The Cult Leader is watching this happen so what do I do? This made me think. And the guy continues with his head leaning back against the wall. I do not know how the weak feel. But I always wondered, how can a person not become a demon when they are put in such a place? It always made me wonder. So let me give you the smart answer. . You arent dumb right? Still, I would like to have someone like you as my superior. I think I can figure something out then. What happened to me was the same. To deceive me from the start and to end with a surprise attack. The guy leans back and begins to slowly fall so I hit him on the head. Do not play dead. How dare you act like that in front of me? This made him raise his head. Cant you just fall for the trick? People are being turned into retards, what more do you want? Tell the location of where my family is so you can kill them? I cannot do that, ask something else. I am an idiot, but I left a little of internal Qi. It means that with cultivation you can recover. And try waiting. I will find the answer. Is there an answer? I call the server and order drinks and food. Arms crossed, I searched for the answer to the question he asked. I even wondered why I was looking for such an answer. Maybe to continue dealing with Demonic Cult. It was because the thought crossed my mind that I should have known the answer. The basis was none. What would I have done if I was one of the three? If I had to kill brothers to survive, I would be the same as them. It means that these guys and I were all humans with nothing special. Strangely, I have no answer. This made him smile. Uh? You dont have an answer? It is a bit different from what you think. How so? I dont think I could have killed my brother. This made him chuckle. You sound insane. You will die then. Look here, having siblings has been a dream of mine since I was a kid. I cannot kill what I dream of. Even if you can be beaten. If there was a way, the smart Cult Leader wouldnt have killed his own too. The orthodox side would be happy too. No hell would even start. I am asking this because I dont get it, what is orthodox now? The ones who make a living by building their wealth through the usage of martial arts? You insane bastard. I raise my hand, but I dont hit because it looks like he will die. The server too brings out the food and alcohol. After drinking, I get up and my head clears up a bit. I realize it. White Face Young Lord looks dumbfounded as he is pouring alcohol. What? What I would do if I was one of the three. To which he waited for the answer. Imagining myself to be in the Cult, I say, First of all, Id train the light body technique and then run. To this, the guy looks at me like I am pathetic. Just run away? There will be people pursuing you. They cannot. Why? I speak with a serious expression. Cause I will run till the end of the world. And what do you get? What do I get? Just running away so my brothers cannot kill me. Run till the end. Think of it as a trip. Go to the coastal waters, cross the great sea on a ship. Go through western regions and go up to the North Sea too. I bring up the visit to the waters and all that I could think of. It just seems to come to mind without any thought. White Face Young Lord looks at me. Next? I spread both hands open and say, That is it. . The condition to come back is just one. When you have an overwhelming power to beat down those who caused this problem. It doesnt matter if it takes 10 to 20 years. And those who are left behind? What good will worrying do? Just practice. And when we come back? Give everything up. This makes him chuckle. What an idiotic answer. I look at the guy with a serious face. whether you care for the position of the family. Use the cure for the poison. If you arent sure of either of them then look. If I give the cure? I will send you out for a trip. To the other world? No, till the end of the world. Well, your dantian and Qi are a mess now, and they will be restored after years of cultivation. So come back then and check this place out. I am going to say let it be until after everyone is either dying in the hands of the Cult Leader or the Cult Leader dying in my hands. He laughs and I look at him. And strategically speaking, if you want your family to have a better chance at survival, you need to give me a lot of information. For example, write about the first and second young lords and the families of their mothers. If I take them down, the chance of your family surviving will increase. This shocked him. I point my finger at him and say, You use me. I am the Cult Leaders greatest enemy. Cult Leader has many enemies so I cannot agree that you are the greatest enemy among them. I reply while drinking alcohol. It is me. The one who made the Low-Down Sect. Drunk? You are Heavenly Demon Cult, and I am Low-Down Sect. A fight between one which wants to be a Demon God and the guy who fell to the bottom. There is a leader in high place and mine is in the lowest place. Those who want to be the Gods should be beaten to death by the one who was a server. The server flinches and runs into the kitchen and the White Face Young lord asks, You were a server? I reply slapping him on the cheek, Why? Dont like it? I hold my hand to his cheek and explain. it is like this. How amazing would it be if the Cult Leader gets slapped on the cheek? Just imagine euh. I rub my hands. Giving me goosebumps. In ancient Chinese text written by Daoist philosopher Zhuangzi during the late Warring States period (476C221 BCE), a story tells that Zhuang Zhou once dreamed he was a butterfly, flitting and fluttering around, happy, and doing as he pleased. As a butterfly, he did not know he was Zhuang Zhou. All of a sudden, he awoke and found he was Zhuang Zhou, solid and unmistakably human. But then he did not know whether he was Zhuang Zhou dreaming he was a butterfly or a butterfly dreaming he was Zhuang Zhou. In the end, Zhuangzi wrote, there was necessarily a difference between Zhuang Zhou and the butterfly; this difference was the transformation of things . The transformation is a change in consciousness between reality and illusion. The constant flux between dreams and awakening leads the self to change from being unaware of the distinction of things to being aware of the definite distinction between and among things. Cited from Chapter 176 Sect Leader, the great and second young lords are constantly being called Cult Leaders in their own right, and their maternal sides hold a strong presence within the Cult. It is meaningless. I put my drink down and look at White Face Young Lord. Are you trying to test my patience? To which he displays a dejected smile as he says, It is true. You dont even have the intention to save me. After you calm down with your drink and listen to what I say, I will be dead. It seems that my persuasive technique is lacking. Listen here, carefully. You already lost your internal Qi. Even if a little of your power remains, you are now an idiot worse than the Low-Down Sect. Like this, I can send you out alive and still get you back too. Will your family be fine? All your Qi is gone, and you got beaten down by someone. How do you think your family will treat you after they know that you got dragged around by the Low-Down Sect Leader? Think and then answer. He kept silent as he thought through it. I point my finger at him. This is why I am sending you on a trip. If you are confident, then you can head back in this state. In exchange, the place where the cure is being made needs to be revealed. It is even better if it is a different place from where your family is. I will burn the place where the cure is made and then you can run back to your family. Why are you so desperate to get rid of the poison? Honestly, the answer was too simple. A poison strong enough to make Moyong Baek struggle for an answer. It is better to take down such a thing in advance. I came to the conclusion that this would end up becoming a problem for both the strong and the weak. If people get addicted to this, they will run to find it. There is a chance that farmers would also want it and then they would end up exchanging rice for it. The expected power of the Illusion Demon would grow. A guy like Byuk Geom isnt someone to be under others. That kind of guy is currently a slave which is a problem. The Cult Leader could abuse this later, so I cannot just let this be. My patience ends here, so it is your turn to speak. I will count to three. Making up my mind to kill the idiot, I begin to fold my fingers. One, two, three. And he says, It is in Mount Hua. Where in there? Mount Hua isnt just one of two. You insane bastard, it is an entire range of mountains so how do you expect me to find it? West side. You want me to search all of the west peaks!? It is everywhere from the west side till the Lotus peak. I havent been there either. Because the person who manages the place just sends things when the time comes, we just receive it. Why do something like that on the west side? The leaders of the old Cult suddenly started killing during a meeting that was taking place there. There were several Soul Mountains which the Demonic side didnt like, and this area is one of them. It remains on record, so I dont like speaking about it. And this is something no ordinary person knows. To sum it up, Cult Leader too is a superstitious idiot which led to Soul Mountain. Who died? I only know that they held the title and were referred to as Guan Yunja. Where are the rest of the Soul Mountains that he doesnt like? Mount Hang, Mount Song, Mount Hyung, Great Mountain, and Southern Edge. And the reason? He answers, touching his chin. Very similar to Mount Hua. It is said that the place is good for training and the effects of cultivation are better than in other places. The old leaders who were insane about martial arts climbed one by one and died, and there was this leader of the cult who supposedly converted to Buddhism after that. There are rumors of him being forced to change. There are rumors he was locked in a cave and died. Rumors that people were being cut down here and there, so people were reluctant to head into the mountains, especially the Demonic Cult. I sighed. Then those who are making this in Mount Hua arent from Kangho. They are making it not knowing what it is, all for money? Yes. Fucking beggars all over the world. According to this, Mount Hua and the Southern Edge are close to each other, but the rest of the Soul Mountains are far. And looking at the past records of the Demonic Cult in here, it would be so old that even if they visit the place, there would be no traces of them left behind. I gulp alcohol and entrust work to him. I cannot afford to go so far to a place like Mount Hua. I will give you three choices. White Face Young Lord looks at me. . Dont like it? If you dont then you can die, so lets give you four choices to take. Let me know and I will decide. I fold a finger. How about a choice which lets you head back? And meet with Yeop Ya-hyung? Pass. So sad. But dont worry. There are three more options left. While pouring drink to him, the guy trembles and I say to him, return to your family and report this in detail. Quite a lot of subordinates died, right? Also report the loss of manpower. And say that the guy known as Byuk Geom betrayed you and clung to the Low-Down Sect. You should also report about your Qi being taken. Why? Because that is the truth. Reports need to be accurate, prompt, and without exaggeration, as they are.. Well, youre trembling, so you will even get harassed by those who you used to work with. Do you want to do that? The guy glares at me and says, pass. Sorry. It would have been perfect for you to get hit and then get dumped. The guy takes the drinks with trembling hands. I ask, How many left now? Two more. Good. The next option is good. Right. Going on a trip. Go out and travel. Toward the wilderness, to the valley, dawning sun, carrying sacks of green hills, and holding the festival of the Golden Sun. Speak concisely. I continue to tease the guy with an expressionless face. How is it? Move and move. No? Well, if you travel for nothing and get caught by a guy like Byuk Geom, you might be beaten to death. Your martial arts are quite low, so you will meet bandits and then meet the wilderness it will be such a fruitful trip. . But, since the Low-Down Sect has disbanded the Namak Green Forest Alliance, let me inform you that you can have a safe travel. I didnt tell you to travel by ignoring all this. As you know, I also defeated the Demonic troops once. And the final choice? I nod my head as I tell him. Actually, money is good. It is also convenient when traveling. I am busy right now, so I cannot be running to Mount Hua right now. Go and clean up the drugs you have been using and then set fire to the place or take all the money that they managed to earn during the past ten years. The guy looks at me with an absurd expression for a while and asks, And after that? I continue in a calm tone. It is not of my concern. Hmm. For once in your life, try to live how you want. What is normal and what isnt. Go where you want to and do what you want to do and spend the money you want to spend. Try everything without just wishing for it. If you want to kill me after trying everything then come take revenge. If you are still worried about the sect you belonged to, you can return to it. If you change your mind and want to live differently, come buy me a drink then. I will listen to what you were doing all this time. At that time, tell me your name instead of saying that you are White Face Young Lord. The guy avoids my gaze and stares blankly outside the inn. In my eyes, this guy is a kid who has never stepped into the outside world. As he continues to stare out the window looking at the sunlight, I say to him, I heard you were brought to the battlefield as soon as you were born. . I will give you a vacation, so go. He asks in a tone different from the start, You are really going to spare me? I thought I wouldnt have to talk anymore so I nodded. To which his expression changes and he gets up as he says, Then I will go on vacation right now. White Face Young Lord, who is walking to the entrance of the Inn, calls for me. Sect Leader. What is it? As I look up at him, he puts his hands together. I will head to Mount Hua. I sigh as I finally realize that this guy understood what I was saying. After a couple nods I say, Go leisurely. He lowers his head. I watch as he steps slowly towards Mount Huas direction. If he is unlucky on the way, he will die in the hands of someone by being beaten to death, or, if lucky, he will head home safely. However, there is a fact he isnt aware of yet. Merchants who roam the world by foot, having heavy luggage on them, are all weaker than that guy who lost his internal QI. He probably hasnt met normal people who didnt master martial arts. These people go long ways to risk their lives every day in order to feed their family. He can go on the trip and come back too. And only when he realizes that he was able to escape from the dark path will he be truly free. After he leaves, I look around the inn with an exhausted mind. I had dealt with just one man, but I felt both physically and mentally exhausted. Suddenly, I look at the server who is standing quietly at the kitchen entrance. The server asks me, Sect Leader, would you like some more drinks? When I nod, he brings a huge jug, pours it for me and sits across from me. This guy pours the alcohol into the glass that the White Face Young Lord was drinking in and holds out his empty glass. Please give me one glass. I suddenly come to my senses as I notice the server. Ask and I give it. Here. Yes. The server takes the drink and says, Seems like that frustrating man finally understood the words of Sect Leader. Ah, I thought I was just going to explode and die while listening to you. Really? Yes. Still, it seems that there was something which touched me in the end. Good thing. Lets drink. I drink with the server. To an extent, I am feeling a sense of relief. The server wipes his lips with his sleeve and looks at me with a serious expression. Sect Leader. What? Ive heard so many conversations at drinking parties over the course of my life, but it was the first conversation which was grandiose and solemn and interesting but puzzling at the same time. And. The server pats his chest. I understand with my heart. It seems like Sect Leader was trying to somehow return the feelings of being human to him. And that impressed me. I nod and then ask the server, Drunk? Not at all. One more drink, please. Have this. As I pour myself a drink too, I ask the server, Do you know who I am? I dont know. Sect Leader. Sect Leader. Low-Down Sect. Low-Down Sect. Arent you Low-Down Sect Leader? That is me. Drunk? Not yet. I giggle with the server too while sharing the drinks. Giving and receiving, this server guy robs me of my alcohol. But why are there so few guests? The server sighs. I know right. I turn to the side and put my legs up onto the empty chair. Arent there no guests here because of you? I dont think I will come back because you have been drinking all this time. You speak the truth. It could be because of this. When I cross my arms and yawn, server says, There are no guests so you can sleep well. Right. But how do I get into the Low-Down Sect? Can I join? Who would you want to join? Uh? No, you sent the frustrating man on a trip, so you seem like a nice person. I am not a nice person. Then youre a bad guy? You can think of me as someone on that side. I take out my dagger and wave it to him. I am sleeping. After sticking the dagger into the table, I close my eyes and the server says, Sleep comfortably. I will be alert for the sake of Sect Leader. I nod. Sure. The server says as he walks out of the inn, Fine then. Todays business ends here. Even with my eyes closed, I randomly think of a strategy that is closer to my random thoughts. I thought that I had to take Mount Hua and Southern Edge to deal with the Cult Leader. Of course, this isnt something I can do right away. Because there is an order to things. When I find a disciple I can teach, then it will be nice to train together. If that ugly demon from the past life, Ghost Demon, Yukgap is alive I thought it would be good to send this guy to the Southern Edge. Well, this guy is a skilled person who becomes one of the top ten in the Murim. Some day when I head up to the Southern Edge Mountain and beat up the ghost of my previous life Originally, a brat with a temper, he would be subjected to more evil training. What if he receives spirit qi from the Soul Mountain and trains again and again? Anything can happen. . . . If it doesnt work, I just have to beat them until it works. Chapter 177 I doze off for a while, but I wake up when my dantian starts to feel itchy. Should this be called narcolepsy? Or should we understand it as the aftermath of becoming stronger faster than others? The phenomenon of falling asleep often after someones internal Qi gets pushed into the Heavenly Cell feels like some sort of warning. Because, if it wasnt for this, I probably would have sucked in the internal qi of my opponents every time I fought. Kanghos Fourth Disaster. That means it could be me. If one possesses martial arts strong enough to escape the illusions of another. I was aware of the fact that I could be someone above human. I look at the quiet inn with my eyes open and for a moment mistake this place for Zaha Inn. Because the internal structure is different, I realize that this is reality. Phew, I thought I went back again. It is annoying, so I dont want to go back to the past again. After drinking the water on the table, I look outside the place and see the server lying face down on the table sleeping. Perfectly alert. Look at this. As soon as I come to my senses, I am filled with the things that I thought to do, so I let out a slight sigh. Is this some form of addiction? It is a situation where a person has no choice but to be diligent even though they know that it isnt good to live such a busy life. It is because I am in the middle of both sides like the Cult Leader said. Anyway, there is a slight chance that I can become more insane than I was in my previous life after struggling like this. I erase my thoughts and focus on the Wooden Chicken stage of the Strolling Golden Turtle Technique. After a while, I put down my hands and took out my pouch to leave on the table, take my dagger, and leave the inn. See you again. Behind me, the server is startled as he shouts. Sect Leader. Payment! On the table. Ah, thank you. But how do I get into the Low-Down Sect? I dont accept guys like you. Why! I speed up and answer, It is my decision. Actually, there is no need to enter the Low-Down Sect until the inn. I slowly pick up the speed with the mindset of training footwork and then sprint to the right. Thanks to White Face Young Lord, I dont have to head to Mount Hua. However, since he didnt inform me of where his hometown was, there was a need to return to the Right Valley once again. That said, within a few days, there is a chance that the warrior of magic will appear from that direction. To summarize, the situation in the Valley is a mess right now with everything scattered. In particular, many of White Face Young Lords subordinates are scattered throughout the grounds, which are said to have poisonous thorns. It seems like Right Valley Leader was using his head. When I arrived at the place that used to have a flowery path, it was nothing but a muddy field now. Master Yukhap looked at me with a normal face. Sect Leader, you are here? White Face Young Lord. I dealt with it. And here? Master Yukhap replies while wiping his sword with a cloth. Of course, I killed them all. Without letting anyone run. As expected of Yukgap. It looks like Master Yukhap is a bit irritated because he replies with a short answer. Yukhap. When I looked around, on one side, Right Valley Leader was treating his shoulder with medicine paste, and on the other side, the other injured ones were receiving treatment here and there. I look at the expressions of the people and the messed up Right Valley Leader and then call Lady Iron Toad, who was standing there dazed. Lady. Yes, Sect Leader. After checking her condition, I ask, Did the lady just watch? To which she smiles and says, Ah, actually I. Actually what. Stood still like someone who didnt know martial arts, then saved my energy for the dangerous looking men by assassinating them. And again, I assassinated two who were trying to attack Master Yukhap from behind. Maybe it is because I am not used to being able to fight in front of many. Master Yukhap nods. I got some help. I applaud silently as I listen to her. Come to think of it, even when we fought in the past, the assassins skills were fierce. Ah, yes. You were very sloppy then and even now too, but you still saved Master Yukgap. Master Yukhap, who is listening to this, mumbles, It is Yukhap. Lady Iron Toad smiles as if she is embarrassed and tells me, That White Face Young Lord looked strong, but as expected of Sect Leader. Right. Certainly, he was much stronger than the old opponent we both fought against in the past. Ah, right. I make eye contact with her and smile at the same time. But you know. Yes, Sect Leader. What Lady told me the other day you said you would tell your friends not to get in the way. Didnt you pass it onto the Right Valley Leader? Ah, you remembered. I passed it on to all my close friends. However, at the time, it was the Black Rabbit Union, so we changed the delivery date to the Right Valley. At that time, the Sect Leader was known as the leader of the Black Rabbit Union. It is said to be the Low-Down Sect now. So, such a thing happened. I approach the Right Valley Leader with my hands behind my back. Is Valley Leader alright? Right Valley Leader answers with a softer attitude than before. I am fine. I set a chair down in front of the man, sit and look around. I wave to Byuk Geom. I sit the three people in front of me and say, Does Flower Valley Leader know a little about medicine? To which he answers. Yes, Sect Leader. I tell him what I think of the medicine. Listen, if the withdrawal symptoms occur due to not taking the cure, the first 30 days will be full of severe pain. Yes. The next 20 days cause the pain of being bitten by insect-like things. Following this, for the next 10 days or so, there will be itchy pain. Then high fever for three days to come if you hold on this far, one will head into the recovery period. What do you think? Actually, if I was speaking to Moyong Baek about the withdrawal symptoms, he would be much better at dealing with this. But for now, Flower Valley Leader was the only one who I could talk to. He seems to be deep in thought. Full body pain, bugs, itching, high fever, in that order You see what I mean? If you dont deal with each one, our friends will have a hard time handling it because it will be messing with their heads. Right Valley Leader and Byuk Geom look at each other and sigh at the same time. And Flower Valley Leader says, If the pain is really terrible, there is no other choice but to endure it with four different types of drugs, as Sect Leader said. Hmm? When the pain in the body starts, there is a drug which will mentally calm the person. Valley Lord himself has no choice but to consume his Qi and stamina altogether, or to sweat, until the extreme situation comes to excrete it all out of the body as swiftly as possible. Right? I will judge the situation and deal with it. Next. Cope with the pain of being bitten by the insects with standard prescriptions. Since itching is the aftermath, we respond by applying herbs. A high fever is the symbol of recovery, so they have no choice but to endure it, thinking it is extreme body aches. I point to Byuk Geom. So, can you take care of Byuk Geom as well? Flower Valley Leader nods. Yes, sure. First of all, after discussing how to resolve the side effects with the right treatment, I look at Right Valley Leader. It was about a different problem this time. What will Valley Leader do now? About what? I couldnt find out about their base from White Face Young Lord. All of White Face Young Lords subordinates died on the spot, so his superior will come soon. Hmm. Since the superior of White Face Young Lord is said to be the third young lord of the Demonic Sect, he could come directly or the third ones maternal grandfather could appear. I point my finger at Right Valley Leader. It means that we can all die if we stay here and do nothing. Right Valley Leader is silent. I am honest and share the situation. If the third young lord comes, it will be worth sticking to my side. If he is a genius, then we might be stopped. But martial arts arent everything. But if that bastards maternal side comes into the picture, then I cannot be sure of anything. Fighting, running, doing this and that, you have to be so damned to even deal with them. It has to be pretty scary. There is a high chance that he will be a veteran who participated in the Demonic Sects succession war. Suddenly, the entire place falls silent. What will you do? Right Valley Leader asks me with a bitter expression, If the Sect Leader gives instructions, I will follow them. According to my judgment, which is rational, this entire place was something I inherited from my father, so I cannot just leave this place Listening to this situation, it seems so arbitrary. This wasnt a situation where I should be feeling this frustrated, but I have a bad feeling about this, so I try. For now, give me the pill which the Right Valley Lord has. Give that to Yukhap. A pill so suddenly. What? You want to fight then? Then you dont have to give it. Look, Yukhap. After being called by his name properly, Master Yukhap immediately replies, What? Lets go. Okay. I get up at the same time as Master Yukhap, I wave my hand at Lady Iron Toad and the others. Then, I wish you luck. . Lady Iron Toad hurriedly approaches the Right Valley Leader and whispers in a frustrated tone. Valley Leader can you stop can you handle it? No, it isnt that, but I was a bit embarrassed. Right Valley Leader calls me. Sect Leader, you had a lot to do today, so things didnt go as planned. As I turn, Right Valley Leader stands up and says to me, Sect Leader, there are pills in my possession. I will give it. I reply in a dry tone. Is it going to be the poison which requires a cure but cannot be found? Would I do that now? What? It is called Rain Flower Scent, and it is a pill that we cultivate with great care. Care? Usually, when you take it for the first time, you can add up to 78 to 128 years of internal Qi based on your mental stability. It is a pill which becomes less effective the longer we use it, so you need to take it over a period of time. Even so, it is the highest level among the pills. He didnt seem to relay it due to the Heavenly Prison, but it would be a good help to Master Yukhap. I look at Yukhap. Have you heard of Rain Flower Scent? I have. Can you tell them apart? Fake or real? Mr. Yukhap nods as if it isnt difficult and I whisper, Is it good? Master Yukhap, who is looking at me with his back to the people, raises and lowers his thumb. But I wasnt someone who liked the Right Valley Leader, so I continued going with my harsh tone of speaking. Right. It would be a waste. No. I speak of the things I wanted to tell this guy ever since I stepped foot in here. Look here, Valley Leader. You are older than me, but it is only because we judged this situation like this. Looking at your expression, it seems like the pill would be a waste, money is a waste, and even this place is a waste. There isnt any other possible idea either. Martial arts weaker than the White Face Young Lord, but not of orthodox side either. It isnt the unorthodox which believes in their own pride and risks their lives. It seems like this is somewhere between here and there but then suddenly chooses to live according to what they want. Well, I intend to beat all the people entangled with the Demonic Cult, but seeing what you do and say gives me this sense of odd skepticism. Before they answer, I tell Lady Iron Toad, Lady, do help us and then you can leave. Getting caught up too much into this will lead to death. When things get bigger than this, I wont be able to handle it all. Lady Iron Toads wide eyes glared at Right Valley Leader feeling a bit offended maybe. Right Valley Lord, are you going to do this right? Are you going to serve Sect Leader like an alley? To which the guy who is pale in color, suddenly walks to me and then stops. Sect Leader. Do speak, Valley Leader. Ive never spoken a lie to anyone. You most likely wont like the attitude of mine or the way I speak. You have already helped Master Yukhap and us once, so even if you go back like this, I will give you the Rain Flower Scent. If I survive, I will be cooperating with the Low-Down Sect in the future. Well, the slightly right answer came out. Still, Im in a bad mood, so I glance at Master Yukhap. He nudges his elbow to my side as if he wants to take the Rain Flower Scent. Let us have a look. If we didnt know about its existence, just leaving here would have been fine, but now that we know, we cannot leave it with a powerful enemy possibly coming for us. We are going to kill the Demonic leaders anyway, right? I look at master Yukhap a bit shocked. This guy, this was the most hes talked since I met him. To the Kangho warriors, the pill is so scary. Contrary to my inner thoughts, I speak in a calm tone. Master Yukhap, you are so righteous. It was nothing. Perhaps maybe. Master Yukhap cut off my words abruptly. Even if not for the pill. Just helping out feels comfortable. Well, since we have injuries of the past, eating this might help. I grab him by the shoulder. Master, even if you and I work together, there is a possibility that we will be pushed back. It means that we can die helping each other out. Will you be alright though? For a while, the Ghost Demon from the previous life wears a troubled expression. It was worth seeing the expression of this guy, who tormented people, now fill with worry and desperation for a pill. Master Yukhap tells me, Can I be honest? Be honest. I want to eat the pill. If I eat it, I will be indebted to this place. If there is a grudge, it has to be paid back, and if I receive favors, that should be paid back too. Those who live in Kangho will become stronger when they decide to overcome the difficulties they are going through. You can help me. If he thought I would be quick to help, then he was mistaken. I look at the Right Valley Leader and speak slowly on purpose. Valley Leader. Yes, Sect Leader. I rub my fingers and ask, Do you have money? . I armed my mind with the mindset that I would never help for free because it would make me feel bad. Chapter 178 When I asked if he had money, Right Valley Leader said, Sect Leader, I inherited so much money that I wouldnt possibly be able to use it all in this life. No matter how much is needed, I can be a patron to the Sect Leader and the Low-Down Sect. This was an unexpected answer. However, it didnt surprise me too much because I already expected that he would have had a good load of money. Actually, asking if one has money out of the blue is an odd thing. Everyone is looking at me, hoping that I will reveal my true intentions behind asking for such a request. I look around the mountain hut (which seems to be where this guy stayed), the surrounding gardens, the flower path, and the small pond. But, who created the overall atmosphere of this flower-like garden here? My grandfather and I were the ones who made it. I had nothing to do because I lived in the valley. It really does give a flower-like vibe. It wasnt like they were cursing at me, but it felt like they wanted me to spit it out. Everyone is looking at me, so I decide to get to the point with a serious tone. Anyway, if I face an enemy here, whether I win or lose, this beautiful flower field will be turned into a chaotic wasteland. You get what I mean? To which the Valley Leader nods. I understand. I am glad that you have a lot of money. For now, lead the people and evacuate with Flower Valley Leader. But their place will not be safe either. Flower Valley Leader and Lady Iron Toad. Why so? To which she answers. Since we touched the Demon Cult, we will not be safe. I am glad you understand. I show them where to head. Well, White Face Young Lord and the people are probably at least an outside force of the Demon Cult. In other words, we already touched them. It is probably equivalent to us pulling off a couple petals, but it is still a right excuse for them to get angry. Right Valley Leader isnt safe, and the same goes for the other Valley Leader. You people will take all that you saved up and get ready to move away from this place and to Mount Huas Lotus Peak with others. This made the Right Valley Leader look at me wide-eyed. Uh? Mount Hua? I place my hands behind my back and continue to talk while looking at him. For now, take the Rain Flower Scent. I look at Master Yukhap. As soon as Yukhap eats it, let him have a good time to cultivate. I will continue to talk during that time. Time cannot be wasted now. When he nods, his men begin to move to get the thing and he asks me, Any reason to move to Mount Hua? Would I tell you to do things without reason? The Demon Cult is a religious group. They are the ones who make and believe their own teachings even though it might seem strange to us. If they believe in odd things, then they would also be in the habit of avoiding odd things. It seems like the old elders of the Cult had often been killed by the strong, and it often happened in Mount Hua and the Southern Edge Mountain. It is a sacred mountain for us, but it is one which the Demon Cult forbids its people to go. As time goes, maybe that will change, but right now they arent ready to change. I speak to all who are gathered here. Go to that place if you want to live. Lady Iron Toad recommends something because we are acquaintances. Sect Leader, in that case, let us head to Mount Hua together with Master Yukhap and the Low-Down Sect too. You have enemies to face now too, right? I call for the three of them with a hand gesturing. Come close. All three of them move closer and I speak in a low tone. Because you are moving your place of residence I will let the three of you work together to build several residences so many people can come live there. The three of them look at each other. I also ask for a house to be built for me to stay. Later, build me a place to stay. Right Valley Lord, gulps. Isnt that too big of a task, Sect Leader? I know that leaving isnt easy. But dying because you couldnt leave your home wouldnt be right, right? This place is actually the place White Faced Young Lord talked about. He said they grew the medicine out there to avoid being caught by Demon Cult. I stole his internal Qi and sent him there. If he doesnt get it right, you have to kill him and find the place where the antidote is being made and burn it all well. Um, I understand. He promised me that he would be going on a journey once he cleans up the place. Its only right to kill him if he doesnt stick to his part of the plan. Conversely, if the three of you dont get things right, I will have to come and check. Lady knows my temper right? Yes, Sect Leader. Flower Valley Leader, who was listening to all of this, asks a question. But, while we are settling down and building several houses, when will you settle down? I smile. I dont know that. If I cannot come back after fighting, you people will have to take care of the Low-Down Sect. How many more years that I will focus on this fight will have to be seen. Yes. I pressure Right Valley Leaders tasks. Valley Leader. Yes. Money should be spent at such times. If you die, that much money will turn useless. Spread the money while preparing various things so that people can live around the Lotus Peak. If that amount of money runs out, I will give you the money I have accumulated during my time just throw in all the money. I understand. I will send those who have no place to go, like the children without parents in Kangho, so keep that in mind. Do you understand why I am telling you to head to Mount Hua? The three says, I understand. I look at their faces and say, The four of us. Master Yukhap interrupts me. Why four? It is five. I correct my words. The five of us. In fact, we arent close to each other. We havent gotten close during this time, and we dont even hold a leader position here, but Yukhap and I will be risking our lives first to buy you time. You should survive till the end and settle down in Mount Hua. Since we are all strong people, we repay the grace by showing grace accordingly along with resentment at an equal level. Right. Then there is nothing more to discuss. Let us get organized from here and leave for the Flower Valley. At least, Right Valley Leader will have to leave after his initial symptoms get resolved. It seems like a lot of time, but, in reality, it still isnt that much time. Right Valley Leader speaks to me with an urgent expression. Sect Leader, shall we dig a trap with poison weed? If we can remember the location, it will help in the fight. We are running on a tight schedule, leave it. I understand. In the meantime, his subordinates bring a small box. Sect Leader, we have brought the Rain Flower Scent. I point to Master Yukhap. Give it to master. We brought two? I scratch my head and say, Give it. After receiving one, I put it in my pocket and gesture for the Valley Leaders and Lady. Move swiftly. There are a lot of people. I tell Yukhap who is holding the box. Yukhap, take it and cultivate right away. I have no intention of having mine right now. Master Yukhap nods. I understand. People were busy moving around, and from time to time there were people who would come back to greet me and try to talk with Master Yukhap. Whenever that happened, I made everyone stay silent and sent them away. This is because he had to cultivate. Even in the last moment of farewell, I only waved my hand and mouthed the word, Bye. Everyone bowed their heads to me and walked out of the valley. It was like refugees were marching out with huge things loaded onto their backs. I looked at the valley cross-legged and sat near Yukhap. While the Ghost Demon from the previous life closed his eyes to cultivate I fell into my thoughts, listening to the sound of the birds and water around. I was half asleep when I got woken up to the sound of Yukhaps breathing. After finishing the cultivation with easy gestures, he opens his eyes with a smile. Just looking at his expression, I can say that he had a good performance. In a way, this pill was no different from the one that White Faced Young Lord was using to control men. Drugs. Master Yukhap turns to me with a smile he cant hide. You should take it too and hurry the cultivation. We can take turns. I burst into laughter. I had no intention of cultivating in front of the previous lifes Ghost Demon. And with my body already containing a pill the size of a great bird within, I didnt have to rush. Later. To which his expression hardens. Sect Leader, do you still not believe me? Master. Speak. I suddenly thought of this. Do you have disciples? I bet those wormy idiots arent your disciples. None. Why? Suddenly he goes silent. It isnt until I see the look on his face that I remember the fact the one that was learning his martial arts had died. In a way, it was because of that disciple that he who was called Master Yukhap had turned out to become a Demon with the passing of time. This man is a man who had never been able to change the direction that his life was supposed to take. But scars are common to everyone, so I say what I want to. I will try to take a disciple later. What about me? I will teach a disciple who has the qualities of the greatest swordsman in this world. Since one has to lead the next era, it would be better to teach martial arts safely in Mount Hua. You teach a disciple at Southern Edge Mountain. Why me? I smile as I say, Lets watch them fight each other. . Since ancient times, it is most fun to watch kids fight. You know, but you have to fight against a guy you hate, and I am one who improves with time. It is foolish to train against a competitor who is like a wall. You understand what I mean, right? Right. Since you never know. What? You might be better at teaching disciples than me. Do you have to say it? Of course, I am better. I match his pace. Come to think of it. Actually, I might be better. You would be with that ruined personality of yours. You are as good as I am. I giggle and make fun of him. And I already won. What nonsense? You dont even have a disciple yet. I take out the pill box from my pocket and wave it at him. I didnt take it. I will keep it until the day I get a disciple. So that I can immediately take down your disciple. Yukhap speaks with a mocking look. It will rot with time. Keep it. As soon as it turns into poison with time, you will lose a disciple. And you are too impulsive too. As soon as I hear his words, I open the box, put the pill into my mouth, and chew it while looking at the man. Master, thanks for the advice, better to have it right now. Master Yukhap seems confused and I mumble as I continue to chew it. This takes so much like medicine. The bitter taste of life. Master Yukhap jumps and says, I will keep watch so quickly cultivate. I dont know, for all we know, we could be the ones who fight well only when we pay attention to the terrain around us. With hands behind his back, Master Yukhap begins to walk around the valley. He seems to think I dont like him around me. I stare at him for long and then sigh as I suddenly have this thought. I mean, people really do change in life. But that change is. It wasnt easy for me and for the Ghost Demon in the previous life. I go to the table, put my dagger on it, and stretch my legs on the empty chair. White Face Young Lord gets his first vacation in life and heads to Mount Hua, but for me, this is a short vacation. With both hands behind my head, I look at the sky above and take a deep breath. While I inhale the scent of flowers, I ask Master Yukhap. Yukhap. What is it? Are there flowers on Mount Hua? Uh? Is that a question? Of course, there are many. As I thought. Thought what? You dont fit well with Mount Hua. Go to Southern Edge. The flowers will be shocked at your god ugly face. It would be right for me to go. I could hear him sigh loudly. Looking at Master Yukhap, I say, I will head to Mount Hua. Because I am more handsome than you. And he shouts from somewhere. You damned thing stop talking already. Do some cultivation! Did you call me a damned thing? That is me. I mumble looking at the flowers around. Lee Zaha over flowers. This seems a bit too much, so I chuckle. Tsk tsk. From a distance, the guy clicks his tongue. Suddenly, when I turn my head, the Ghost Demon of the previous life is looking at the flowers with tight lips. The flowers will be shocked you bastard. This time, my thoughts didnt escape my mouth. Chapter 179 I wasnt in the right headspace to cultivate, and I didnt really want to train, so I watched the clouds move. Its necessary to stay here for about three days to ensure that the procession from here safely enters the Flower Valley first. If anything could be considered boring before, then these three days will be even more boring. It will be a good break to rest in a mountain with such a good view. Im not doing anything because I need to rest more than I need to train. What I am to do here is. Look at the clouds and flowers. It is to look at Ghost Demon looking at the flowers from time to time. The man who doesnt get along with flowers. The man walking around with the unfamiliar flowers in his path. Suddenly, I feel a bit impressed by the guy from the previous life and I call him. Yukhap. What? Why are you walking around like some street cat? I am just walking. The man looking at the flowers couldnt openly say he was looking at the flowers. I picture the Ghost Demon from the past looking at flowers and speak back what comes to mind. To be stuck in the corner of a valley and staring at flowers? When I say that out of the blue, he turns to look at me blindly. . I continue talking, pointing to him and the flower. The flowers moving in the wind asked. He asks me back, What are you asking? I am asking where you are from. Ghost Demon answers in a calm tone. I am from Yukhap Sect. I answer, I am from Ilyang Count. The flowers might ask again. . They ask if there are similar flowers out there. As soon as they said that, the flowers seemed to turn to the sword. To which he says, Why? They ask if the swordsman might hurt the flower with their sword. It was said that they never had such a thing happen, and the flowers were relieved. But I gave them the news that they will be coming in a few days. What? If the Demon Ghost comes to the Right Valley, I have no choice but to draw my sword. Yukhap asks me like he is playing along. And what did the flowers say? It cant be helped. They say they are happy to be able to talk even for a little while. Now, he turns to me. That is the true nature of flowers. When I nodded, he had an odd smile as he looked at the flowers. See here, it is Yukhap and not Yukgap. I burst into laughter at that. Hahaha. Yukhap smiles and says, Sect Leader, dont waste qi by talking and use it with your sword. I get up and go to him. He portrays a look of realization. Grabbing my wooden sword, I calmly say, Ilyang countys server, Lee Zaha. Yukhap draws his sword. The last survivor of the Six Harmony Sect. Before I could fully master their martial arts, the sect vanished. This has to be a coincidence. What? Our guest house was destroyed by fire. Yukhap laughs. Ah, I see. But it is being built ten times bigger than the one that was taken down using the money of the Unorthodox Sect. To which he laughs and thrusts his sword. Such an evil man. I deflect his sword with the wooden sword and stay silent. The two of us looked at each other like wild animals that came to look at the flowers. And Master Yukhap says, The Sword of Six Harmonies is a simple sword technique. Blocking the four directions and countering attacks that separates the sky and land. After being thrown into Kangho, I learned various martial arts and hid them all into the Sword of Six Harmonies. After learning the complexity of all that, I tried to understand what it meant. All of a sudden, he was teaching me the Sword of Six Harmonies. Without much thought, I competed with him. At first, it felt awkward to fight without infusing internal Qi, but since the attacks of the Ghost Demon were very simple, I was able to adapt to it without much difficulty. In the middle of the fight, Master Yukhap suggests, Respond with Six Harmonies. As he says it, I counter by stabbing in all four directions and stab, cut, or strike only at the openings. In a way, this could be called the most simple and basic sword technique because it didnt need much movement. Still, I had struggled against the Ghost Demon of previous life who stubbornly only used this technique. At one point during our spar, he steps back and draws his sword vertically creating a wind slash. In an instant, my eyes close because of the wind. It is a move that couldnt be avoided unless internal Qi is used. It was shown with the intention of teaching me how to use the Sword of Six Harmonies, so I immediately create sword wind using a similar technique. The two streams of the sword wind mingled like a whirlwind and then spread into the sky with a loud roar. Master Yukhap sends out sword wind and lowers his sword. Do you understand why I continued to defend using the iron wall technique and lead with this simple sword technique? I realize and answer. The first is to let them make a mistake. Second? Sealing the matter with a variable. Third. To change the flow with a single sword. Fourth then? Without excessive usage of internal Qi without unnecessary movements. Nice, fifth? It takes me a while to answer. in the end, the six-step defense is a concept which can hide the important parts of martial arts. Looks like you understood it. Then what next? Is there more? He sits on the ground and tells me, Think about it slowly. Why would one insist on a simple sword technique? I sit across from him and cross my arms. In the end the last attack which takes the breath of the opponent has to be of cut, stab, slash, no matter how many times it has to be done. In the end, in order to refine such a technique, into a proper sword technique which can kill one for sure. The martial arts which endlessly raises the level of performing a simple attack through complex training. Master Yukhap looks at me for a moment and nods. That is the Sword of Six Harmonies. There are dazzling techniques out there that deceive with movement through performance. But the sword technique I learn is that of a defense which neutralizes all the flashy techniques followed by a single counterattack. It requires stamina, endurance, and qi. It is a technique that will not tire the man out even if he is being attacked for three days and nights. This martial art is so simple and clear that it will be hard to achieve anything at a fast speed. Those who come in expecting something flashy would probably crawl out on their own hands and knees. I guess so. What motivated you to hide the complicated martial arts you learned? When I look at revenge, in the end, most of it is carried out by being stabbed or cut to death. I thought I found my answer. The secret to the sword technique isnt to imitate others. After all, it is a complete martial art on an endless road, so one shouldnt hurry. Endless road. Because of Master Yukhaps martial arts being like this, he must have been strong even in the past life as a Ghost Demon. No matter what personality he has now or in the past, he has the ability to become a great warrior. I nod and advise him. Your first disciple must be the most patient kid in the world. It will be difficult to achieve greatness with normal determination. I dont know if such a disciple exists. You need to find them. But why are you suddenly telling me the secret to your technique? Master Yukhap says it like it doesnt matter. What is the use of keeping all of this to myself when I die? With the flow of the conversation, it was my turn to teach him a sword technique I learned. But in actuality, it would be a tough task because my martial arts are the complete opposite of what the Ghost Demon had learned. For that reason, I also try to explain in words. Somehow, I am pursuing a sword technique opposite to yours. To which he shakes his head. Not the opposite. Then? It is difficult to say. When I was staying in the Black Rabbit Union, Seo Gun-pyung often shook the plum tree and then cut the falling plum blossoms with his sword. Is that what you are trying to learn? I nod. Right. I was shocked after watching him, so I asked him what he was doing. And he said he was following you. He said that Sect Leader was ten times better. So, what did you say? I told him to stop because it is a training method with no hope for his skills. Right. Why are you hitting plum blossoms without a reason? It seemed like he was blindly following you. This guy is smart, trying to get things out of me even when I wasnt teaching him a thing. And I say with ease. Because the beginning of the sword technique is nothing but a process. Is that so? If one stubbornly wields a technique without any changes, the opponent will see through and kill them. There are many techniques and forms in the world, but that is all for just training. And when directly fighting, one doesnt use such techniques. Is there a warrior who can cope with all situations with the one technique they learned? None. Learning the basics step by step, and learning the mysterious technique is done with the intention to deal with the opponent faster than you think. And to do so, one needs to train their body and sword technique. What does that mean? Terrifying training of pruning the plum blossoms will be one form. But when will that be completed? It will take a longer time to become a fully completed sword technique that would place in the top 3. As such, this was the difference between mine and Master Yukhaps sword technique. Even though we understand each other to some extent. This will become the starting point for the Southern Edge Sword and the Mount Hua Sword to flow in different directions. I think it is over and say to Master Yukhap, In my opinion, for the greatest swordsman to be born. Go on. I need to have the stubborn tricks of Yukhap and the freewheeling spirit of Mount Hua. If the disciples we raise do not interact with each other, great swordsmen are bound to come. Do you get what I mean? Yukhap nods. Because we both go after martial arts that are far apart. Both sides will have to fight and win. That is what you mean. The sky turns dark as we continue to talk all day. Only then did we head to the right corner of the residence. Unexpectedly, Master Yukhap says, Fine. Sword is understood to some extent. Tomorrow we can talk about the spear, fist, and palm. After that? On the third day, let us discuss the way to express the Qi outside the body. Lets do that. If we think about it, the Ghost Demon and I were discussing martial arts despite not knowing when the Demonic Cult would come. This is because those who are men dont run. While waiting for the enemy, they exchanged and argued about each others martial arts. Is this why? As I continued to stay here, I forgot about the fact that 5 or 6 days had already passed. One day, while we were discussing about internal qi in a place of flowers, I spotted a gray-haired man standing nearby with his hands behind his back. I wasnt sure if he was an enemy or ally, so I just greeted him first. Elder, welcome. The gray-haired man approaches and asks, Are you the Right Valley Leader? No. The man approaches us and sits down at the table. Did the two of you kill the servants of the third young lord who came here? I look at Yukhap and reply. Right. The man nods. Then you did well. For a while, the three of us stared at the scenery around and the colors of the flowers all seemed to be turning white. It seemed like he was the maternal grandfather to the third young lord. Chapter 180 The old man says, I do not harbor any feelings towards you two. However, I was disturbed enough that my progress was interfered with. The two of you are young and seem to have excellent skills, so why dont you work under me for three or four years or maybe five and put your precious lives on the line? I promise to release you when the huge task is done. Not only will you earn a lot of money, but I can guarantee you a position that will have no one telling you what to do. The gray-haired old man, who didnt even introduce himself, began to speak of business with me and Yukhap. Was this some type of Demon Clan recruitment or something? It wasnt like he was swearing, and this wasnt meant to be threatening or a warning, so I answered back in a polite manner. Old man, as you can see here, this ugly Master Yukhap isnt someone meant to be under others. Look at the situation and tell me. Old man doesnt even know how to assess things, where did you even spend all these years? The old man glares at me and so does Master Yukhap. . I apologize in a calm tone as it seems like I made two enemies at the same time. Kidding, lets move on. The old man speaks to Yukhap in a friendly tone. Master Yukhap, I often hear this name. Wouldnt it be better to come under this old man than to die here right now? You seem to be under someone else, but, in fact, if you come under me then you will have far more people below you than you have now. I nod at his words and turn to Yukhap. Right. It doesnt seem like a bad proposal, but lets hear the answer from the person involved. Master Yukhap answers while looking at the old man through the corner of his eye. I am not the one to go under the evil ones. I frown. What are you saying? Does that mean you will go under Alliance Leader? Yukhap says, Sect Leader, are you going to speak all that shit in the midst of this? I often have the habit of spitting shit before a fight. Just for your reference. The gray-haired man, who is smiling slightly, asks me, Are you of the same thoughts as Master Yukhap? You are young. You must be the same age as our elder young lord. Its a pity to kill you. I nod like I agree with him. If it is a pity, you can back out. Old man bastard, you seem to have lived spilling blood all your life, so do not pretend like you are coveting talented people. It doesnt fit you. And I am on my own. To what extent is that answer? Even if I get caught by you and tortured, I have no intention of going under you. It doesnt matter if you are the Cult Leader. At that moment, I remembered being dragged around by a monk and felt my stomach churn. But at that time, I had poor martial arts skills, so it couldnt be helped. The old man smiles as he says, You are such reckless young friends. Anything more to say? I have a question for this gray-haired man. Is the old man who doesnt know how to speak with the flow one of the benefactors to the third young lord? Yes. If you get injured or die, what will happen to the third young lord? The old man tilts his head and asks me, Who are you, and why do you speak as if you know about this situation? I smile and he looks at me. I am the enemy of the old mans leader. What? Are you delusional? Master Yukhap. To which he answers with a short answer. What. Why are you hanging out with such an insane man? To which Yukhap snorts as he says, Sometimes it is normal. The old man tells me. Listen carefully. There are no more than five to six names of enemies which Cult Leader mentions at times. It means that no matter what you do, there is no way Cult Leader would mention someone like you. I nod. After some time, it will be six or seven. An old man threatens us. Now, you will not have a graceful death. You will lick my shoe and beg me to spare you. I came here to make a polite offer, but it is a pity things turned out like this. I try my best to shake his psyche. Old man, if you go back with even one arm cut, the third young lords position will be in trouble. Even if you dont die today in our hands, things will be tough in the future, so fight properly. The old man holds out his pair of spears to Yukhap and me. With the intention of protecting myself, I wrap myself in flames and strike back. Kwaaaang! My ears went deaf at that moment and, before I knew it, I was in the air. The ground where I released my qi was dug in and, at a distance, Yukhap was landing on the ground. As soon as I land on the ground, I ask the old man. Oldie. Your name? The moment he tries to speak, I shout out loud. Shut up! Come to think of it, I am not curious about your name. Lets continue fighting. The old man sighs as he rubs his temple several times. As soon as I see it, I say, Insane bastard. Did the provocation work? The old man rushes at me and not Yukhap. The force is so fierce that at that moment I run away. . While walking around during the past couple of days, I looked at most of the valley around. As I fled down the valley, I found that the troops led by the old man had built a siege ready. As a result, I made a wide turn and returned to the place. In the meantime, the old man and Yukhap arrived one after another. Phew. The old man asks me, Something? Why do you run away? I have already deployed my men outside. I am going to take back what I said earlier. If you dont defeat me in your good condition now, you too will die trying to escape from the siege. I blink and then frown. Ah, oldie bastard. Every time you talk I feel so bored that I can fall asleep. Ah, it is nap time for me, but it seems like I might die of this boredom. Ah Yukhap, you fight for a while. The old man and his way of speaking is so slow that it makes me feel so stuffy. When Yukhap draws his sword, the old man charges at me again. No. I am taken aback and run away again. The old mans light footwork technique is good, but I always run in a pattern-less manner. I run through swamps and hide behind huge trees and then leap into the air, and push off a tree before turning. In the meantime, the sounds of trees falling could be heard. Running away, I say, Mount God will be quite angry. This time, I wasnt able to escape for long and get blocked in by the troops, so I warn them. Get out. At the same time, dozens of swords move for me. As soon as I pull my wooden sword at those who werent moving out, I begin to release my Sword Qi. Swish! Dozens of people swing their swords to counter me. I quickly approach the guy who is staggering and step on his shoulder and swing the wooden sword. But the oldie says, Get out of the way. I feel my eyes widen and my senses expanding. All my instincts and senses feel so heightened. While piercing the troops with the purpose of moving past them and not killing them, I escape their encirclement by bouncing back and forth through the narrow trees. I turn again, put some distance with the old man, and head to the right corner. When I arrived at the place where we talked again, I found Yukhap on his knees meditating. So, I say hi. Yukhap, this isnt the time to meditate. Yukhap responds back with his eyes closed. I will join you when you stop fighting. It is hard to run and catch up. Honest confession. It was good. Then the old man appears to the right of me and looks at me with an absurd expression. I repeat exactly what I told him in the beginning. old man, come on now. Compared to your internal qi, your footwork is a bit lacking. Since you spent a lot of days working at home having the servants doing everything, your knees dont seem to be in great shape. You will run out of breath sooner or later. Oldie bastard, you are controlling your breath. . Suddenly, I turned to Yukhap. Even during the midst of this, his eyes are smiling. Smiling? I speak in a serious tone to the oldie. Oldie, this man is smiling? Instead of attacking me, why dont you check out Master Yukhaps technique? To which he says, I dont know what this junior is trying to say. I dont mind if you two attack me at the same time. I try to mimic his voice in a slow manner. Both attack at haaaa. The old man charges at me and I dodge. Ah, fuck! Why are you following me again? The level of the old mans internal Qi is high, so I ran again. This time, I try to appease the old man while running. I apologize. Let us go back to the right method and formally fight. In the midst of this, the old man asks me, Will you not run? Lets fight. I will join with Master Yukhap. Join me. Nice. I turn and move again. Suddenly the field of flowers from the side, which looked friendly, came into view and I called Master Yukhap. Yukhap When my tone of speaking changed, he opened his eyes. I will let you attack first. Let us fight in an alternating format. I will replace you when you are in danger. Yukhap gets up. As he heads to position, Yukhap asks the old man, Senior, can I fight you with such a method? When he asks politely, the old man nods. You first? I get it. Drinking a glass of alcohol, I look out at the two people and mumble. Phew you are following him so disgustingly. Oldie bastard. As soon as I curse, the old man glares at me. I reach out to calm him. I am sorry. The old man rushes to Master Yukhap. The two face each other like bear cubs and then begin to have a fierce fight. In my opinion, Yukhap isnt one to be polite. And the fact that such a person was being polite to the enemy means that he was being funny. To be honest, I dont know how long the guy will last. For now, from all the running, I have to pee immediately. So, I pull my hands down to pee. I cant see any water, so I go for the most famous traditional method. Shhhh shhhhhh. There is a roar from behind, and from time-to-time small pebbles fly in grazing my ear. So, of course, I still cant see the stream of water. But I did it in the end. Phew. Chakkk. Looking at the water, I hear the sound of Ghost Demon struggling. Every time the swords collided, the internal Qi of the two warriors could be heard throughout. It was definitely an opponent strong enough, so it was a situation where the Ghost Demon was being pushed back. After I finish my errand, I tighten my belt and take in a deep breath and exhale. Ohmyitisdone. In my right hand, which was still in my pants, was the scent of chlorine and a white flower scent. Urine is, in other words, a covert strategy to prepare for ambush. Compared to when I fought with the Alliance, my level of ice arts is higher now. It wasnt amazing, but the coldness of my technique was quite cold. Like a craftsman who makes treasured swords, I concentrate on flame and ice qi in both hands. Still, the old man and Yukhap were fighting. The two of them had no idea what I was doing. In an instant, I pour out my Qi and suppress the two again, like processing Taiji arts. The polar opposite energies engage in a close battle. Pkikikiki! Yukhap spots me and then shouts. Have you lost it!? The gaze of the old man lingers on me without even realizing it and then he hurriedly avoids Master Yukhaps sword and steps back. I risk my life and continue to do it. old man. You may be able to avoid it, but I will let all your men who are building a siege cross over the Santu River. Only then did his expression turn pale while fighting Yukhap. I stare at him and speak in a cold manner. I am Low-Down Sect Leader, Lee Zaha. You have touched the wrong person. Chapter 181 Light Sky of the Sun and Moon. I unleashed it for a while. This wasnt a normal martial arts. Even the expression of being never compatible wouldnt be sufficient enough to explain the situation. Originally, fire Qi can only exist when ice Qi has been entirely exhausted and vice versa. However, my internal qi has made this a continuous cycle for now. In other words, Im in a state where I am forcibly making them hold a situation that wouldnt normally be possible. A method deviating from the logic of the world. It almost feels like I am going in the direction of demons, but this isnt the case when looking at the theory of this martial arts. Perhaps this should be called Legendary Reversal. I looked at Yukhap and the old man who were fighting and threw the Light Sky of Sun and Moon onto the troops trying to besiege us. Be it legendary or not, I dont care. In the first place, since the demons are known to have evil thoughts and are far from normal people, it is the same whether they are either killed or trampled on. Just kill them and that is the end. Pjjkkk! Light Sky of the Sun and Moon makes a loud sound and shines in the air. Rays of light bursting in all directions in the gaps shown between the conflict of flame and ice trying to annihilate one another. A beautiful yet dangerous sight to see. In an instant, the old man pushes Yukhap aside and jumps into the air. At this time, I find an opening in his movement, but I choose to not attack him with the wooden sword. Because it would create a situation where he would have to run from me. And that bastard looked down on me. Was he plain blind? Or too confident in his martial arts? I run at my best pace and grab Yukhap by his shoulder and run in the opposite direction of where I threw the light. Yukhap, who is being dragged, points to the old man. That mad I just snatch him up and begin to run. I turn my head and I can see that the old man is rotating his twin spears fiercely as he soars into the sky. It seems like he is trying to push out the Light Sky of Sun and Moon to a far place. In my opinion, it feels like a stupid and ignorant response. Before I know it, Im standing blankly with Yukhap. All the sounds around vanished. When the spears of the man touch my skill, like a whirlwind, my Light Sky of Sun and Moon begins to suck things in. First, the old mans outstretched arms begin to get sucked into it, and then his body disappears as if it scatters into dust. When my technique vanishes. All I could see was light. Yukhap holds out his sword ahead. Ah, damn it. At the same time, I let out a sigh. T-this is a bit. Soon after, Yukhap and I fly back screaming due to the backlash of the attack. ACKKKKK! The screams of Yukhap begin to sound farther away as I hear him throw curses my way. LEE ZAHAAAAAAAAA! BASTARDDDDDDDD! I try to hold onto my body while listening to his curses. I dont know why, but I suddenly burst into laughter. Its as if my pent-up heart has opened up. ACKKKKKK! A club of laughter and scream. In the air, it feels like time is speeding up and slowing down. Or have I lost my mind? Was this a dream where I was floating? I am confused by many things, but I wasnt so scared of what I did. A situation where peoples limbs could be seen ahead, and weapons were floating around like techniques were being unfolded. At that moment, a corpse appears in front of me, and I slap it. Pak! At the same time, I hear a pop in my ears and all sorts of noises pierce my previously deaf ears. A situation where I hit my back into a cliff-like place and fall down to the ground while rotating the new form. Since everything around is a mess anyway, I intentionally rotate my body. Even after hitting the ground, I spin around six to seven times which makes me stagger and I dont like it. Three out of ten four! It looks like a typhoon hit. The view I was seeing was nice since I could see all around the area. Im confused for a second, and question whether or not this is a dream since everything was so quiet. Anyways, I came to a realization. There are still many warriors stronger than me in Kangho, but the moment I used Light Sky of Sun and Moon, it felt like I became the Fourth Disaster. I used it without much thought. Each time I used it, it always made me feel so cringe. One day I might die due to the techniques I unleash, so I make up my mind to reduce being involved in anger inducing situations. Of course, there is a high chance of me just making a promise only to forget it too. I look at the valley which passed the tornado. Yukhap? Im not sure who is alive and dead, but I look for Yukhap. The troops of the old man couldnt have all died. They were besieging in the north, south, east, and west and since the Light Sky of Sun and Moon was in the southwest side, the people on the other side should be alive. However, the oldie had looked down on my skills, and so he rushed in and tried to destroy it. The fact that the old man looked down on my skill actually means that he looked down on me. I ran away several times, entrusted Yukhap to deal with him, pissed behind his back, so there were enough reasons for him to look down on me. But he wouldnt have known it till now that it was all a part of my plan. Eventually, I found Yukhap sprawled on the ground. And a long sword is in his hand. Despite fainting, the guy didnt let go. True swordsman. At this level, he deserves to be called one. I dont think hes dead, so I kick him. Get up. In an instant, his eyes shoot open like a frightened disciple caught taking a nap. ! Yukhap rises to his feet and look around to the left and right to look for enemies. Is it done? I dont know. Only then did I look at the mess and search for survivors. There are none that I could see in the vicinity. Only corpses. And I can also see torn hands and legs scattered around along with clothes and jewelry. I notice that the condition of the corpses gradually improved the further away from the attack they were. The first problem is that the technique takes too long to unleash in a one-on-one battle. The second is that as the amount of qi unleashed increases, its effects cannot be controlled. And so, I have this thought. In order to use Light Sky of Sun and Moon, I have to learn to protect myself. Conquer my Qi or learn defensive techniques. Or I think I should create a defensive version utilizing the same combination I used for Sun and Moon. After pondering the idea, my thoughts about defensive measures halt and I begin to think about cutting the people who were currently struggling to live. No survivors. For a moment, in a devastated and messed up place, I sit cross legged on the first rock I can find. The realm of indestructibleness is hard to get to, as I experienced in the previous life . I have to conquer a lot more to move to it, so I cant even guess how many years it would take for me to get there. The same with Shadow Moon Martial Arts. Because I learned them all late, it will take time for me to maximize their full potential. The conclusion, again, is the same. While I am lost in thought, I use the qi of both the Sun and Moon at the same time. And then I hear Yukhap. Sect Leader, please stop now. What more are you doing? I listen to his words and reduce the amount of qi in both hands. I gather Taiji in the palm of my hand and remember the feeling. Yukhap asks, What was that? I am thinking about a defensive technique. Yukhap tilts his head and asks, Is it like the usage of Qi in a technique like Sword Shield? Sword Shield? Show me. Do not say things so simply as if its like flipping gambling cards. It isnt such an easy martial arts. Yukhap creates some distance and raises his sword with the index and middle fingers of his left hand swiping the blade from top to bottom. A strange situation unfolds. As if his sword and qi meet. In an instant, Yukhap turns his wrist, turning the sword as well, which creates a shield along its path. Yukhap tells me, Basics of Sword Shield. This is basic? Then what is the next step? This time he turns his sword without unfolding any specific movement. It seems that his deep sword qi created a shield. It is the same, but the demonstration looked more refined and at a higher level. It is easy because it is Yukhap who is unleashing it. And I applaud this. Excellent. At this time, I see a wounded guy in the distance trying to run I unfold my sword with a kick. The blade of the sword cuts through the guy who is running. Puak! When I fall into a lull, there are times when I wonder about how a persons psyche has to be taken care of. But, if I save these people, they will eventually gather one after another and come back to pursue me. And becoming adamant on getting revenge would only give strength to the Cult Leader. In that sense, things would be heading in the opposite direction of what I want. I cannot help but kill and I nod at Yukhap. Lets talk while dealing with the ones who were left out. I remember the Six Harmonies which Yukhap is pursuing and ask, Are these tricks hidden even within the simple sword technique? That means you can unleash a sword shield while performing a simple slash. To which he nods. It is. Bringing a sword down isnt just bringing a sword down. There are variations in it. Sword skills, sword wind, sword shield, heavy cut, block off, and things which focus on speed and cutting are advanced ones. But it all starts with the simplest slash. Usually, one cannot learn this with just persistence. It isnt until I hear his words do I feel that the sword technique of the Murim Alliance Leader was truly amazing. I cant speak to Yukhap, but I know the sword technique of his had heavy strikes. It isnt a simple heavy sword movement. Every time I think of a question, I ask him. Enhanced sword? Even though each sect adds their own meaning to it, in the end, it is all about how you handle it. To simply explain, the enhanced sword is like medicine. You have to think about whether or not to use it because it consumes a lot of internal qi. And it feels like you use one at the expense of ten techniques. If it were you, would you use ten sword techniques or one enhanced sword during a battle? It would be circumstantial. It would be foolish to use an enhanced sword when fighting with many. But if the opponent I meet is better than me, I can put an end to his psyche with just one enhanced sword, a warfare technique. Unlike the helpless regular techniques. The man whose martial arts were similar to mine in the past was Ghost Demon, so talking to him wasnt so difficult. This was just an extension of it. Just when I began to wonder why Ghost Demon was explaining sword techniques this kindly, he asks, How did you unfold that dangerous technique? I look at Yukhap as he asks me in a cautious tone. Want me to tell you? Yukhap speaks like he doesnt expect much. It would be nice if you could tell me something. So, I answer in a serious tone. First, it is essential to build up positive and negative qi within the body. A must. Actually, this most essential step proves to be impossible even for strong ones. Yukhap glares at me without responding. . What? Why? Why look at me like that? Yukhap sighs and walks along. Lets go. Why are you sighing? I am informing you. I said lets go. We are already going. What you need to do is learn extreme yin and yang qi. Traditionally we should be learning it in a slow process. Do not hurry. You said that too, when learning the Sword of Six Harmonies too. Slowly. Yukhap runs ahead. . Judging from that, those lucky survivors are probably going to get beaten to death by him. Well, he is the Ghost Demon with the Crazy Demon. And for those kids there, staying alive will be difficult. I can guarantee now that the result would have been the same even if I didnt use the Light Sky of Sun and Moon. Of course, its a matter of body. Referring to the final stage in the Strolling Turtle Technique. Specifically, the Golden Turtle stage. Chapter 182 Just when I thought I had dealt with all the remaining survivors, Yukhap brushes the blood off his sword and says, even after doing this, the guys who run away still have a long lifeline so it cannot be helped. What do we do? Chase them down? Or should we just join the Flower Valley? I shake my head. What can we do? This is enough. Since the man in charge is dead, even if the young lord tries to figure the situation out, there is a slim chance that the Flower Valley will be suspected. Why? I mention the old mans body which vanished. The old man was pretty strong. In the first place, he wasnt one the Valley Leaders could kill. It would have been possible to kill him only after a fairly skilled warrior was present. It would be difficult to determine the exact cause of the situation. Also, there are many corpses that got blown away. They would think that the valley leaders too died with them. I get that, but if there were survivors they will come find you. Let us not forget that we dont have to finish the job perfectly. There is no perfect end. If a smart and meticulous man can solve the world Zegal Ryang would have never lost at all. Let us leave them. Anyway, I am already at war. It will be more convenient for the enemies to come to me right now than search for me later. After thinking about something, Yukhap says, I have a place I need to go. What will you do? Where? Things I need to handle near Six Harmonies Sect. Six Harmonies? To be precise, its about the ancestral tablets in the shrine. It is the old place of the sect. I look at Yukhaps expression and say, I am bored, so let us go together. While doing that. If we are unlucky and one of us runs into enemies, we will be in trouble. It is because there is no way that a person called the Great Young Lord of the Demon Cult would be alone. His family is unlikely to leave him unguarded, and the warriors he would be accompanied by wouldnt be weak. And at that, we leave the corpses behind as we head for Yeonbo Mount. Yukhap climbs the mountain side, opens a door camouflaged by vines, and enters. It wasnt a super discrete place so as soon as the door opens, I can see several things. Yukhap walks around as he examines the place. After a while, he points to an area that Im unable to discern on whether or not it is a training hall or just an empty area. I mainly trained there. The lonely training hall filled with weeds. There are stones which hadnt been swept away in a long time. I guess there werent many sahyung/sajaes. It is my first time seeing a ruined sect. Yukhap nods. There were times where there were huge numbers. And also, a time when the number of disciples suddenly increased after a great sahyung slaughtered many people who were rumored to be evil. Most of them didnt last long and disappeared. I guess they left because training was difficult. In the first place, only disciples who had no place to go, like me, were left behind. Actually, not everyone can be a person of Kangho. Those who enter a sect because they want to look cool or be stronger, often leave because of the wall that blocks their growth. This is because they do not have a special story to dedicate their training to. Most of those who long for something superficial give up fast. Yukhap stands in the training hall for a while without speaking a word. It seemed like he was thinking back to the sahyungs and sajaes that he trained his sword with. And he says, master wasnt doing well physically, so a great sahyung would guide us a lot. I was more afraid of the great sahyung than master. I wondered if there could be a man stricter and more cold-hearted than this sahyung, but if great sahyung wasnt that strict, I would have died several times already. I also think of Yukhaps youth with his many sect sisters and brothers who wielded the sword with him. Perhaps because this was on the mountain side, where cool winds blow from time to time, I look to the side, and I can see the sajaes of Yukap smiling as well as the great sahyung with a blunt expression. Yukhap, who is appreciating the ground, nods and says, let us head in. It has been a while since I guided a guest. And so Yukhap takes me around. Master Yukhap takes five swords and a tablet out of a storage box and lays it in front of his knees. It seems that the things he needed to pack were his sahyung-sajaes swords. Suddenly he gets up and wipes the cobwebs off the tablet with his bare hands and goes back to kneeling. I look at the tablet. At the top was the name of a person who I assumed to be the master of Yukhap. Beneath that were five more tablets, but when I looked at the names, they all had different surnames which meant they were born in different places but held the bond of siblings. Since Yukhap said nothing, I was silent too. After looking at the tablet for a long time, he turns to me. I nod, and then approach the tablet as I pull out an incense. Ive never been taught any special manners, so I just burn the incense like Yukhap and put it in a bowl filled with soil. The incense which we placed began to give out smoke. And I bow at the tablet. Junior Low-Down Sect Leader, Lee Zaha here. Starting from now, I will be looking after the final disciple of this sect, so please look after us from heaven. After I speak, I move. And Yukhap speaks in a calm tone. Thank you. They havent had any guests for a long time, so they must be happy. It was nothing are those five your sahyungs? Looking at the tablets, he smiles. Right. This familiar sword gives me the right to take revenge. Perhaps they knew that the sword was good, but those unorthodox guys kept going after them. Like loot. Thanks to that, I was able to find and get my revenge, and bring their swords back. How many years did it take for you to kill them all? I dont really remember. But it took a long time seek and kill, seek and torture and kill. I didnt count. Yukhap looks at the five swords. And I ask, You will take them along instead of keeping them safe? Yukap nods. If the Six Harmonies sect could be rebuilt, it would be right to keep them in here. But I intend to take them now. Yukhap said so and he bows. Great sahyung. I will be taking the swords of sahyung-sajaes now. I will find five disciples who resemble the nature of the great sahyung and give each of them a sword. I will tell you in advance, the disciples would be of Six Harmonies. The name has been ruined already. The stigma of it being a bit evil has stuck to this for long because I went after taking revenge. I achieved my revenge but how do I clean back the name of the sect I tarnished? I dont have the answer, so I have been looking for it. I apologize to master and great sahyung. Listening to this, it seemed like Yukhap was the second disciple to the sect. He turns to me and smiles. I plan to pass the swords onto my disciples later. That would be better. I should call them the Five Swords of Southern Edge. He doesnt even have disciples, so I smile at his words. And Yukhap speaks to the tablet. Great sahyung, I am not qualified to be the Sect Leader of a newly made sect. Rumors will spread that the new leader is one who had blood on his hands. I will be giving that title to the disciples of mine, and I will remain as the last disciple of Six Harmonies until the end. I hear Yukhaps voice tremble. Great sahyung I still dont know why I had to be the last disciple left. I will repay the grace which was shown to me by taking in an orphan without any conditions by taking them as a disciple and teaching martial arts. The emotions you put in; I understand them all. And I will come back better. He bows to the tablet. Just how many times does he plan to bow? He bows to the master, the great sahyung, the sajaes too. And suddenly it looks like he is holding back his tears, so I say, you brat, cry out if you want, it will be difficult to find another place for you to cry. Yukhap shed tears with a small smile as if my words were absurd. Right. Yukhap wipes his tears with his hand and ties the swords in cloth and then gets up, placing them on his shoulder. Yukhap leaves a farewell message. Master, great sahyung. I am going. Bless me. I walk out with Yukhap, who is red-eyed, and look around the former sect. Do not think about staying here in your later years and move those tablets over to the Southern Edge. They should also have fun watching the disciples trained by you. To which Yukhap smiles as he says. That doesnt sound so bad. As we are slowly going down the mountain road, where the Ghost Demons sect was put to rest, I say, It would be better to name the sword technique after the Six Harmonies. Despite knowing the reason, he asks back. Why? I dont know about others, but the disciples should know where their roots come from. But it is a common word. It isnt so common when it comes to a sword technique. The atmosphere around Yukhap looks so dark, that I begin to speak nonsense. Do you know what my favorite Sword techniques name is? I dont know. The three-point sword technique. Why? The person who created that must have excelled in his swordsmanship. Did he dare to call his technique as that when all he knew to do was stab, slash and cut? What nonsense is this now? I mean the technique is a name placed for those who are taught the technique. If you teach it to those who arent so talented then they wouldnt learn. There is a limit with teaching. With that in mind, he came up with the technique name. Even idiots would like it if such famous sword techniques were passed down. After pondering on my words, Yukhap laughs. And he refuses. But it doesnt have to be so. What? If we think about this, then you need to do three things to move to a higher level. As a result, the person who invented the Three Point Sword Technique must be a great warrior. Hmm. That is closer to the description of the sword technique. Anyway, we will never know the person who created that technique. It is a mystery that cannot be solved in Kangho. Are there more like that? Do you know since when the Demon Cult existed? Well. It must have been said. It is said that there were times when there were several Demon Cults around. And when they merged into one, the name of the Heavenly Demon was born. It wasnt mentioned in the past, but it must have been during the Yin Dynasty. Well, most of the cults banned away by those dynasties were turned into Demonic Cults. Specifically, when a dynasty changed, more people died. The traitors and their culprits would soon follow the Cult Leader and then suddenly Yukhap looks at me. What? A smart individual must have said to erase the old past and worship him anew. This is the perversion of the sect. For example, the one called as Heavenly Demon must erase his past actions and be only remembered as the Heavenly Demon. These demonic cult bastards always erased history and killed people so much that even they forgot where their roots are from. I ask Master Yukhap, So even if you settle down in Southern Edge, do not forget your roots. Your roots are the Six Harmonies, where your master and great sahyung took care of you. it is different from what the Demonic Cult did. It is different from such affairs. After sitting on a rock for a while, Yukhap tells me, I need to take a break for a while. It wasnt like he was resting because of being tired. But he needed to meditate so he picked a rock. And I too picked one and closed my eyes to clear my thoughts. I was struggling with drowsiness for a while when I heard Yukhaps voice. Sect Leader. What? Even if we lose to someone, our disciples will be able to win later, right? I scold the guy for his horrible mindset. Yukhap, that isnt the correct nature. You cannot step in with such a faltering mind. Then with what mind do I go ahead? I open my eyes and convey my feelings to him. The mindset to drag all the people down to hell. You cannot lose till then. He opens his eyes and looks straight into mine. I finally felt like we were forming a bond. Low Down Sect Leader, Master Yukhap a name like that can roll next to filth. The mindset of fighting dirty, petty, and disgustingly. To beat people down to death. That is what we need. He smirks at that. Hearing that, makes me like it more. I nod and take a deep breath. Finally, is everything done? Now the Crazy Demon, Poison Demon, Pervert Demon, Ghost Demon can join forces. Reincarnated Evil Ones Group. Since only I knew of this, it is safe to say that a mysterious power that will not exist again in the history of Kangho is born. One person doesnt listen, but every organization as such has one such person. Anyway, I became the head of a slightly idiotic but cool mysterious group. . . . Mysterious organization, wicked gatherings, pig meat, everyone having the same temperament issues, but I am the leader. Successful and goosebumps provoking. All that is me. Sahyung is a term for seniors under a master while Sajae is a term for juniors under that same master. Chapter 183 Heavenly Wind Guest House. After I order a lot of food and look around the street, Master Yukhap asks, Why did you order so much? The food here is delicious. First, let us cleanse our stomach with noodle soup, have tofu topped with red peppers, eat dumplings, and have a glass of alcohol while eating pork sirloins as a side dish. Yukhap replies, Dont we have to get to work right away? Yukhap, have you ever lived your life trying to experience things? No. Then take the chance to experience this. I watch the street while chewing on dry snacks. People sometimes need to live like this. Yukhap sighs. You must have been a pathetic thing in your last life. This look suits you so well. Of course. I am such a man. I was about to return to the Low-Down Sect when I turned around and arrived here. While we were moving, we discussed martial arts and I heard martial arts theories about the Sword Shield. And I wasnt the only one who was learning. During the battle, I taught Yukhap how to break the Sword Shield too. Therefore, it didnt matter where we were headed next because what was most important was the fact that we were improving our martial arts along our journey regardless of the destination. I keep looking towards the street while eating noodles and it seems like Yukhap picks up on this because he asks, Who are you looking for? Someone to kill? I drink a sip of my soup before answering. Not for someone to kill. Then who? I point to the people walking down the street. How is the atmosphere here? Yukhap speaks a bit taken aback. There are a lot of strong people. Most of them seem to belong to clans or sects or are from an orthodox group. Well, this is a place for such people. Should we say this is the one for the strong? Among them, there is a strong one. There could be, so what? Probably, stronger than you. To which he snorts and says, Look here, Sect Leader. What? It is very absurd that I lost to you. If that person is at a master level, wouldnt they be your age? Similar. Then he asks me with a serious expression, But they are stronger than me? It cannot be. I take a bite of tofu and say, Why? Is there any law against a young one being able to beat you? The great young lord of the Demon Cult might be a bit older or the same age as me. Not all of them can be weaker than you. They are a special case. What special case? If you fight against the Demonic Cult and lose, there is nothing but death. Is that so? I take a sip of my drink. When someone fights with orthodox people, the feeling of loss remains. And when you fight against the unorthodox, the winner has a habit of making the loser their subordinate. But with the Demonic Cult that doesnt happen. One either dies or becomes a slave. What about you? There are times when I leave the survivors alive, times I make them my subordinates, and times when I kill them. Yukhap looks at me while taking a sip. You eat it all. Very nicely. I laugh out of nowhere and chuckle for a long time. When I dont stop laughing, even Yukhap ends up laughing a few times. Stop laughing. You insane bastard. They are all looking at you. As soon as I feel drunk, I wrap Ice Shield around my right hand. White cold air fills my palm and forms a thin disc. Do not do that. Not even a little. Do we have to do that while were drinking? It is a habit now. But why do you keep making the sheet so thin? Speed. Speed? About practicing it quickly. Right. It seems to be useful for assassination or to hold a sword. It isnt martial arts but more of a study. After finishing all the food, I decide to head towards the residence of Sword Demon until I hear a familiar voice. What are you doing here? When I turn my head, I see a man whom I hadnt seen for a long time. It is Pervert Demon, with a frowning face. I was wondering who that crazy guy was. The one who kept laughing loudly. And that crazy guy ended up being you. He is looking down. As soon as I see him, I point to an empty seat next to us. Sit down. As soon as he sits down, I introduce them. This is master Yukhap, and this is the second son of Wind Cloud Mong Clan, Mong Rang. I watch the two of them and introduce them. And then Yukhap says, Nice to meet you. After looking at Yukhap, he replies in a tough tone. Nice to meet you. I cross my eyes and think about how I could get these two to fight. After thinking about the world, I hear someone speak. I havent seen you in a while, let us get a drink. The maid goes and grabs a glass and I ask her, who is looking timid, you dont have that? What? Nothing. I am being too careless, so I pour myself a drink with no expressions. After pouring alcohol into Yukhaps glass, I say, Lets drink. And the three of us drink together, and we examine one another. Everyone here has a bad temper and is wary of the other. This drinking party is tough and good at the same time. Pervert Demon asks me, What have you been doing for you to come here? I answer while eating pork sirloin. The other day, I heard from senior Heo that he has been having a tough time. I went to see him, but I couldnt find him, so I looked around to see if I could find him. Is he fine? I dont know. Why dont you know? He is mostly trying to recover so I cannot disturb him. I nod as I hear him speak. Right. When I stop talking, Pervert Demon and Yukhap look at each other and then turn their heads away. Just looking at them, it was clear they didnt like each other. It made me smile a Yukhap and Pervert Demon speak at the same time. Why are you laughing? Why laugh? I reply with a tsk sound. Even laughing at these crazy people is wrong. Can I not laugh? To which Pervert Demon says Tell me why and then continue laughing. I slam the table lightly and say, Good. The reason I came today is to meet your master, but I also had the intention of making you two meet. Why do you think so? It is because you two are the best among the warriors I have dealt with. Like a dragon and a tiger. And to be honest, if I were to bet money on one of you two, I wouldnt even know who to bet on. Yukhap and Pervert Demon look at me, more like glare at me. And Pervert Demon says, Is this bastard coming here to make people fight? To which Yukhap laughs. Now I know why you stopped here. Shouldnt I have been informed beforehand? I look at the two of them with a serious expression then slip back into my plan. Kidding. Kidding. Just a joke. Mong Rang. If you tell master today or tomorrow and he says its fine, then Yukhap and I will visit you. I came all the way here, so I need to meet him. To which Yukhap asks, Who is this master? You will know once you meet him. And coming here with master Yukhap makes me feel at ease. Pervert Demon asks me, What is at ease? Your master, me, master Yukhap and even you. Cant the four of us handle things even if a good amount of the demons come? Pervert Demon nods. That is true. He thinks deeply and then asks while tilting his head, What? Did the Demonic Cult move? Somehow I ended up being involved with the third young lord and killed some of their forces. Third young lord Know him? Even if others dont, I know of him. Illusion Ghosts grandson. Since Sword Demon was a swordsman who had been in Demonic Cult, not many people knew more than him about the warriors there. I look at Yukhap. We killed the Illusion Ghost Emperor? Seems like it. Pervert Demon looks surprised. You killed him? I tilt my head. He was the old man who appeared after we touched the forces of the third young lord, so it has to be him. Come to think of it, he died without even saying his name. Foolish idiot. Pervert Demon frowns. You didnt come here with people pursuing you I hope. As if. We annihilated them all. And then the three of us drink in silence for a moment. Even in the midst of drinking, the Pervert Demon turns his head on his own and watches a woman who is walking by. At that time, Yukhap asks, Why are you staring so shamelessly? To which Pervert Demon smiles and says, I looked at the stray cat passing by since it was pretty, why? You dont like it? Yukhap smiles. Do you think there was a stray cat hanging from the ass of that woman? Why does it matter to you even if it clung to her shoulder or ass? Wow, I feel goosebumps rise at the child-like conversation I am hearing. Is this really how the Pervert and Ghost meet? I sigh and knock on the table. Stop it. I was thinking of arranging a dance after introducing you two, but this is turning so childish now. If you are going to fight like this, we dont have to use weapons to fight. If we get a chance later, lets fight together. Pervert Demon looks at me. You just stay silent. Yukhap retorts, Keep that mouth shut. When I go silent, Pervert Demon then targets Yukhap. Who told you to look angry with those ugly eyes? It is so uncomfortable to see. Seeing Yukhap rise from his seat, I wave my hand. Sit down. Sit down, tsk. When Master Yukhap gets up, Pervert too gets up. And I glare at him too. Ehe, you people. Pervert Demon tells Yukhap, Lets go. And Yukhap nods. Guide me. The two of them begin to walk away, leaving me alone at the table. I place a bit more money on the table than ordered and take the dry snacks and go after the two. In the wide, open field, I watch the two of them with arms crossed. Sparring. No serious injuries allowed. Only till one wants to. No extreme cornering. Pervert Demon glares at me. . Yukhap asks me. Sect Leader, who do you think will win if we compete with palm technique? I speak honestly. Mong Rang will win. Hearing those words, Yukhap puts down the five long swords and draws out his own. Looks like an opponent that cannot be defeated by a rough fight. Pervert Demon says sarcastically, Looks like he has been with the Low-Down Sect Leader after being beaten When Yukhap rushes at him without warning, the form of Pervert Demon glides back. I watch the two of them fight. And the result is something I guessed. Yukhap cannot win over Pervert Demon now. I know because I fought against both of them. Pervert Demons internal qi is deeper, and his defense is better too. The martial art of Yukhaps is slow and is still in development as the Ghost Demon in the past explained. I thought that if Ghost Demon lost to Pervert Demon, a fire would flare up in his heart. I sit there on the ground in a comfortable position and watch them fight, as if Im studying them. I compare the ice arts used by Pervert Demon with the techniques I know and watch Yukhap with his sword technique in response to the Plum Blossom Sword technique I was training. And the fight between the two begins Everything had something to do with me. I memorized the movements and defenses of Pervert Demon, and added them into the Shadow Moon Martial Arts one by one. I also carefully watched the Ghost Demons amazing defense. Strangely, both were warriors who were defeated by me. Looking at it from the perspective of a referee, there was so much to learn from these two. As the fight continues, Yukhap, who notices that the Pervert Demon had a deeper internal Qi, begins to counter the ice arts by using Iron Wall Defense. On the other hand, Pervert Demons expression turns more serious each time his martial arts gets blocked despite increasing the strength of his technique. I watch the steaming fight while chewing on the dry snacks and drinking the bottle I brought out. I suddenly feel uncomfortable in my position, so I place a large stone under my left arm and watch them in a half lying position. Hyaaa its a pity. Yukhap dodged it so well. . Slowly. Fooling again? No. . Momentarily, I hear a roar and the two of them step back and confront each other and Yukhap says, Sect Leader, if you talk one more time, I will not let you go. Pervert Demon too warns me. Speak inside. It bothers us. To the troubled words of the two, I respond back. I get it. After drinking, I just quietly watch the fight. It is turning into a more serious fight than I had anticipated. Chapter 184 People often say that there is nothing more fun to watch than a fight, but, in fact, there is a crucial term missing from that statement. Specifically, it is fun to watch the strong fight. It is more eye-catching when a tiger and a bear fight than it is to watch wild dogs. Its because it is impossible to predict who will win. A tiger may have spectacular fighting form, but if unlucky- a single blow from a bears paw could crush its skull. That is this fight now. Pervert Demon is one who fights well even if he has to use all his strength. I know this well because Ive fought against him in the past. On the other hand, Yukhap is someone who is known to be patient. In the first place, he was able to read the flow of the fight and I could too with how I was taught the Six Harmony sword technique and the Iron Wall Defense. But the parties are slightly different. As the fight prolonged, they began to get impatient. Yukhap was shocked to see how strong this young man was, and Pervert Demon looked surprised at how the ugly looking guy blocked his arts. Even while I was thinking about it, the spar was turning rougher. The noises coming from their clashes were hurting my ears and the gazes of both men were growing increasingly fierce. If this lasts any longer, Pervert Demons body might get cut, and Yukhap might freeze while sustaining some serious internal injuries. Well, they both are fighting well. The goal of having the Ghost Demon and Pervert Demon fight has achieved its purpose. In any case, I had met many through the Murim and its advances, and looking at them fight like this made my heart feel full. But with the fight getting so intense it was clear one side would sustain serious injuries, so I decided to open my mouth. This isnt a life-or-death spar. Set your thoughts at ease. Are you mad men, mortal enemies or something? I say it while smiling on purpose to try to diffuse the killing intent that the two of them were releasing. Are you guys rivals or something? Did the poop guy lose his lover to the ugly one? Look at you both. Pervert Demon shouts, Shut up! Yukhap stops and swears. Damn it. The two of them stop for a while, then catch up with each other and face each other repeatedly. As if they both hadnt expected the fight to be this long, their killing intent was rising with the intent to kill the other party. I deliberately call them out every time I realize that they want to kill the other. Wow, is that a trick? I wasnt fooled though. It is alright. Was it right away? In an instant, a huge palm stretches out in the air. *Boong!* As I am watching, a chilly feeling comes over me. Of course, it is from the tension generated by Pervert Demon moving his ice qi around. As a result, everything looks bizarrely cooled. At the same time, yellowish qi rises from the sword of Yukhap, and his white palm splits into the shape of a cross. Pak! In the midst of the chaos, when Pervert Demon appears and moves to attack, Yukhap steps back calmly and responds with a combination of defensive and counter attacks. I applaud. I liked both of them. Hya.. Yukhap adopts an even more flexible response than Ive seen before. It seems like he refined his own technique whenever he immersed himself in meditation. On the other hand, Pervert Demon was using techniques hes never shown me before. In an instant, the Pervert Demon clenches his teeth. Judging by his appearance, he was ready to jump in, forgetting I was watching. Lets see what this poop is going to do I leap straight into the air from my seated spot and lunge into the center of where the two are fighting. Back off. While jumping in the air, I imbue Shadow Moon Martial Arts in my left hand and block Yukhaps sword. Kwaang! Pervert Demon takes 3 to 4 steps back in an instant. Yukhaps sword was turning cold. And Pervert Demon says, What are you doing so suddenly? Pushing Yukhaps sword away, I say, A short break. Yukhap frowns. Who wants to rest now? I look at both of them and place my hands on my waist. I didnt arrange a fight between the two of you only for one of your arms to be cut or for one to suffer internal injuries from ice. You guys are foolish. You have to do it in moderation. The moment Pervert Demon opens his mouth again, I let out a loud noise. Shut up! Shit face! If you cannot win after fighting for this long then it means that the strength of one side isnt that overwhelming. Both of you are prepared to go till the end, so I cut this down on purpose. It is important to build skills which overwhelm the opponents. What is the use of just throwing a gamble into a fight like this and winning? I do not even want to call you as members of the same group. At that moment, Sword Demons voice can be heard. Sect Leader, its been so long. When I turn my head, Sword Demon, who I hadnt seen in a long time, is approaching with a wooden sword in hand. He has amazing hearing so he must have heard the roar from far. Unexpectedly, he is surrounded by a black aura. If it wasnt for his smile, the moment out eyes met, I would have thought he was drenched in darkness. But that smile of his was enough to break down the dark feeling. Sword Demon is also a man with a temper, so it seemed as if he was living a life of a sane person after reaching enlightenment. As soon as I see him, I smile widely for the first time. Senior, you came. Sword Demon looks at Yukhap and says, Who is the one fighting against the disciple? At a glance, he doesnt seem like one of us. Yukhap answers after staring for a long time at Sword Demon. A lowly swordsman from Mount Yeonbo known as Master Yukhap. You must be? Sword Demon introduces himself. I am a swordsman training here. Seeing the encounter of the two swordsmen leaves an impression on me. Sword Demon erases his smile and looks at Pervert Demon. Disciple. Yes, master. How is the skill of the swordsman from Mount Yeonbo? Pervert Demon looks at Yukhap and says, Not bad. His defense is solid. Let us try it out sometime again. It is nice to hear the sound of ice arts being smashed down from far. Yes. I agree with Sword Demon. Senior, now that you are here, lets get a cup of tea. You have come from a long way, so we should. I go next to Sword Demon and show him the wooden sword that I received from Elder Heo. Do you recognize it? Sword Demon takes a glance at it. Can it be used? I am getting used to it, it is so light. I did hear about this when I visited the physician. I heard that we missed each other by a few days and that you were given the sword as a gift. Even if I didnt want to, he was a bit worried for you. Hmmm. Why is a sick man worried about me? Sword Demon smiles and says, They say that you are the first person since me to speak so recklessly to Cult Leader. I heard that he even acknowledged you. Right. How did he do that? There are many in this world who show excessive loyalty. Reporting this and that. It must have been that one who spoke of your appearance. There might be a spy around. Seems like it. Ah, not too long ago, I killed a person, an old one called Illusion Ghost Emperor with Master Yukhap here. Illusion Ghost Emperor? Sword Demon tilts his head and says, It wouldnt have been an easy task. Both of you worked together? The guy looked down on us too much. He was too relaxed till his death. Ah, you must have looked young so he must have been caught off guard. Depending on the situation, he is a man with an arrogant side to him, so his death isnt so strange. Yukhap, who is behind us, sighs. The Cult Leader you mentioned is the one I often hear about? I nod. Right. Then the swordsman that talked to Sect Leader is a person from the Demonic Cult? I shake my head. There is nothing to be so nervous about, he fought and left the sect. As if curious, Pervert Demon too asks Sword Demon. Master, but is there a famous swordsman on Mount Yeonbo? Sword Demon answers, Why are you asking me that? You can ask the person who you fought with. So, he turns and asks Master Yukhap. Are you from a famous Sword sect? When Pervert Demon asks it openly, both Sword Demon and Yukhap sigh. And they stay silent so I have to answer. He is the last of the Six Harmonies. Pervert Demon asks, Six Harmonies? I think I heard of it somewhere. I look at him as I walk. What do you even do? You know nothing because you only know how to look at the ass of women. Sword Demon tells me, That is odd. What is? I think it is more effective when you say something than when I scold him. Senior, I know why. Go on. It is because I am an expert at dealing with such idiots. This is what I specialize in, the best in Kangho. I look and see Sword Demon smiling, behind him, Yukhap sighs. After walking down the street without saying anything, Sword Demon asks me an unexpected question. Is Moyong doing well? He is. It would have been nice if he came along. A general talk, but I like it. Now, after drinking the cup of tea, if Sword Demon and Yukhap fight.? It would be a fight worth watching. This is because both of them are men who have chosen swords out of the numerous martial arts and weapons. And they have one thing in common, their stubbornness. Moreover, Sword Demon is currently training with a wooden sword and Yukhap has amazing defense. If those two fight then There should be more to gain than fighting with Pervert Demon. The man who walks around Kangho, the man who fights and watches. All of his actions are based on the peace within Kangho, and the skills of his allies improve along with the broadening of his own knowledge. The desire to find the end, the new additions in martial arts and the wishes of those in the past life will all start to manifest. Who can understand my heart? It seems that the shit face cant even make tea, so Sword Demon has to do it himself. But this isnt the tea I was used to drinking. Sword Demon pours this undiluted, concentrated liquid into four cups and then pours in normal water. Senior, this is? Sword Demon hands out the teacup and says, Plum extract. Plum? Ah, that one? Elder Heo recommended it. It also has this effect to stimulate our appetite. And he said it is good for the body and temper. I ask Sword Demon, You have a temper? He tilts his head as he answers, Doesnt everyone here have one? . I speak generally. Have it. The four of us begin to drink. More like gulp it. It isnt delicious but its not bland either, it was too vague of a taste to describe. And it is said to be good for temper, so I think of it as medicine. All four of them were generally blunt and boring men, so silence takes over quickly. At least I talk, but there is this heavy atmosphere with Sword Demon in here, so it wasnt the usual atmosphere. Sword Demon fills our teacups again with the plum extract and water. And we all had no choice but to drink it. It was a heartwarming ceremony in which Sword Demon from the Demonic Sect handed us cups and we were drinking it in silence Originally, the plum is known to have effects after ingestion, but now it feels like I am losing weight from drinking it. Suddenly, Sword Demon turns to me and speaks in a calm tone. Sect Leader, you always have a tough time. There is nothing particularly difficult about it. Sword Demon points to Yukhap with his hand. I will welcome this swordsman with excellent skills who fought my disciple. Judging from what you spoke of, I will stick to him too. Sect Leader considers us three to be allies and have arranged a meeting for us to exchange martial arts, so I can only say that you are having a tough time. Sword Demon tells Pervert Demon, Am I wrong? To which he shakes his head. Right. At first, I underestimated his skills but after competing, I have changed my thoughts. He is no ordinary swordsman we often fight. Master, I also understand the intentions of the Sect Leader. I am glad you understand. This time, Sword Demon turns to Master Yukhap. What do you think? Yukhap nods. I think I understand his intentions now that I am competing with the warriors who are hard to meet. Suddenly, Sword Demon, Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon all turn to me. Hmm. They are trying to say something to me, so I cross my arms and say, it is good if you understand. I wonder if anyone could understand my intention. Anyway, the three of them did. Maybe because I am an expert? . . . I ponder the thought again. These three are also experts on people like me, so they seem to understand. Anyway, that is that. I wonder if anyone knows my intentions To be precise, everyone did. Chapter 185 What is an appropriate way to describe the atmosphere when individuals with similar temperament issues gather and drink plum extract? The atmosphere gets taken over by strong awkwardness and loneliness, and, in the end, we all dont have much in common other than fighting and martial arts. But I am in a different mood. Because every time I look at them, I think of these peoples previous lives. Pervert Demon was a member of the Demonic Sect as one of their top warriors. Sword Demon is likely experiencing a feeling of unease, as if he is carefully balancing along the boundary that separates his humanity and his demonic nature, both in the past and present. Yukhap, previously known as Ghost Demon, was a man hated by any. Of course, me too. In my previous life, I was a Crazy Demon hated by these three. Of course, the fact that the orthodox, unorthodox, and the Demonic Sect all hated me made my situation a little different. Anyway, it is almost a miracle that these people gathered and now are in one place. Because we were all on the infamous side of Kangho We can go to an ordinary inn and have fun. I have yet to see any members of the Murim Alliance act uneasy in our presence. And, of course, I try to make it happen. I suggest drinking to Sword Demon who never seems to suggest drinking himself. Senior, it has been a while, so let us drink. Stop with the plum extract. Drinking that will make me angry now. Sword Demon replies in a calm tone, There is no alcohol here. No alcohol means no snacks too. I nod my head. Do not take things so seriously. This is a problem that can easily be solved by simply buying alcohol and snacks. I take out my entire pouch from the back and throw it. Pervert Demon grabs the heavy pouch with a puzzled expression. I speak first before hes able to get a word in. My youngest, hurry up and bring me drinks. Bring a lot of snacks too. Your master will let you buy whatever snacks you like. Dont worry, I am fine with anything, Yukhap is a country boy too, so he will take whatever you give. Even though I didnt say much, I received stinging glares from all three. The three look like theyre about to attack me at the same time so I clear my throat. Pervert Demon asks while frowning, Why am I the youngest? Pervert Demon looks at Yukhap with an angry expression, but Yukhap was quite mature compared to his age in the first place. Pervert Demon glares at me again. You buy it. Why do I have to run errands? I take my eyes off the idiot and turn to Sword Demon. And Sword Demon turns to Pervert Demon and says in a calm voice, Disciple. Yes, master. Sword Demon speaks calmly in a light-hearted tone. Buy it. Pervert Demon replies with a defeated expression. I will be back. The guy walks with his head bowed and then turns to ask Sword Demon. Master, do you have any snacks you want to eat? Sword Demon replies in a blunt tone, Buy anything. Yes. After Pervert Demon disappears, Sword Demon speaks. Master Yukhap. Yes. Recently, I have been training with a wooden sword. Will you fight me with a wooden sword? Yukhap is puzzled. It isnt that difficult. What does it mean for you to be training with a Wooden Sword? Sword Demon nods. it is simple. There are things which I lacked, so I grabbed the wooden sword with the mindset of starting over. Such an odd method. Lets do it. Sword Demon tells me, Sect Leader, lend your sword. I handed over the sword Elder Heo gave me to Yukhap. If you leave the sword in place, it remains a wooden sword; but if you draw it out, it becomes a real one. I say to the two holding the wooden swords, Senior, shouldnt your disciple have a chance to watch? That is something for Master Yukhap to decide. However, there is no reason for him to observe when he is one who doesnt understand the sword. Master Yukhap, can the Sect Leader observe? Yukhap nods. It doesnt matter. I follow the two and stand in front of the door. A situation where Yukhap and Sword Demon were facing each other in an open space. Interestingly enough, Im not so curious about who will win, but more curious about how they will fight. This is the first time Im watching a fight with the curiosity of the method rather than the outcome. Master Yukhap takes the sword in front of Sword Demon who doesnt care about manners, so he lightly nods. Just as I started to wonder how he would fight, Sword Demons demeanor changes. As he takes his stance with his wooden sword, Sword Demons entire body gets covered in air resembling a whirlwind. What? The eyes of Mr. Yukhap, who is holding the wooden sword with a normal lower right form, begins to widen. Sword Demon asks, Are you ready? I am. As soon as those words come out of Yukhaps mouth, comes this pop sound as their swords clash. Since Sword Demon moves fast, I was only able to catch his movements from the corner of the eye. Yukhap takes a step back while cutting the Sword Demons sword. If one is a swordsman who is not used to defending themself like a wall, they will be defeated without being able to endure even a single attack from Sword Demon. The one-sided offense of Sword Demon. This time, I admired it. Wow, he is scolding Yukhap. Somehow, it seems like Sword Demon caught onto Yukhaps pattern of attacks and so he attacks when a gap opens up within his movements. The reason this is impressive is because Sword Demon realized that Yukhap was on the defensive and pressed him on purpose so that he would remain on the defense. This was so that he wouldnt have a single chance to counter and fight back. When I think about it, it isnt so strange. This is because Yukhap couldnt win against Pervert Demon, and Sword Demon is the master of such a man. A situation where there is a difference in skill. Sword Demon seems to have far more experience in real combat and overall, his presence when wielding the sword is quite horrifying. Master Yukhap is sticking to his defensive tactic as usual, but he is being overwhelmed by the pressure of Sword Demon constantly pushing. Because of this, Yukhap isnt getting any chances to react. After a while, Sword Demons sword pierces the shoulder of Yukhap, and he slams Yukhap down and sends his back flying. Yukhap grabs his shoulder and looks at Sword Demon who was standing still. . A long sigh escapes from Yukhaps mouth and he speaks like he is possessed. I have learned a lot. Sword Demon nods and answers in a light tone. Lets head in. Sword Demon goes in first, and I pick up the wooden sword and check on Yukhaps condition. Yukgap, are you alright? You seem to be surprised. The Ghost Demon from the previous life, who is a little dazed, says to me with an expression that he has come to his senses. Ah, now I think I know what it is. I didnt recognize them right away near the guest house because were in an orthodox place. Yukhap holds the wooden sword and looks at it with a questioning expression. Just why is the Sword of the Demonic Sect here? I receive the wooden sword and say, Then why are you here? What is it? Do not simply question those that would require long answers. And its not a question I can answer. When I enter and look at the table, Sword Demon is wiping his wooden sword with a cloth. I look at him. When Sword Demon lost to Im So-baek, he was calm, and even now after defeating Yukhap there was no difference in his demeanor. He kept a casual expression. Yukhap and I sat back where we were sitting while drinking the plum extract and looked at Sword Demon who was polishing his sword. He then says, It is a little difficult because I couldnt break the wooden sword, just like the time with Leader Im. I understood right away. Ah, right. It was a wooden sword given as a gift by Elder Heo, so it means he was being considerate to not break it and that is why the fight took him longer. Sword Demon is normally silent, so I ask Yukhap. Yukgap, how was it? Yukhap, who manages to organize his thoughts, speaks in a calm tone. Well, it feels like I have dealt with a swordsman who knows how to counter my defensive tactic. It was something I stuck to without much thought, but now I think I should reassess my approach. How was it for Sect Leader who is watching? I agree with his words. I am of the same thought. It seems like the key point of this experience was understanding how to cope against senior here rather than learning about sword technique or internal energy. How was it for you, senior? Sword Demon answers, Yukgap. Look here. It is Yukhap. Master Yukhap and Sect Leader are right. There are often warriors who can defend themselves well. Sword Demon looks at Yukhap and speaks, I attacked with psychological warfare by using my internal qi to wrap my body with a wind current. As soon as you saw this and couldnt understand what I was doing, you mentally prepared yourself to step down. After that, you stuck to defense. You werent able to outmaneuver me. That was the end of his explanation. A short evaluation which might feel sparse at first but if one pondered the thought, there was no need to get into a deeper explanation. The reason for defeat is simple. You dont have to over complicate things. Sword Demon was stronger in many ways, so Yukhap lost. Without emotion, he says, It is a common thing, but I learned my lesson. Sword Demon nods. I am impressed. You, too, will become stronger with more agility, strength, and experience. This time Sword Demon looks at me. What do you think of the variety of swordsmen around who fight with one sword, Sect Leader? It is an odd question, so I burst into laughter. So I think swordsmen should be very interested in other things other than just swords. Sword Demon smiles lightly and says, Right, I am telling myself the same. I dont deny it. Right. Only then did the Sword Demon put down the wooden sword he had been wiping with a cloth. I will have to check if it is right. The figure of Sword Demon, who put the sword down for a moment, looks as if a heavy burden had been lifted off his shoulders. Only then did Pervert Demon kick the door and walk in with both hands full of alcohol and snacks. I am here. The three of us look at him with sad faces but dont get up to help him. Pervert Demon puts the drinks down and the snacks onto the table. Sect Leader, you have a lot of money? I bought a lot of expensive alcohol and side dishes, just like you said. You did good. It is money stolen from bandits and the unorthodox sect, so feel free to eat it. A table for drinking was set up on a flat table. After roughly putting down the alcohol and snacks, the maid there goes inside to get bowls and chopsticks. As Pervert Demon continued to sigh, Sword Demon spat out words. Shut up. Yes, master. Only then did the bastard not let out a sigh. Watching this quietly, Mr. Yukhap finally uses a title to address Sword Demon. He asks, Senior Sword Demon, how did you take the second son of the orthodox family as a disciple? Sword Demon answers, I am saying it. You tend to ask questions that are hard to answer in a short time frame. Sect Leader would normally nudge the surface but he never pries. I, along with Sword Demon, naturally look at Yukhap. Yukhap. . Sword Demon asks us, I am curious too. How did you come to this place with the Low-Down Sect Leader when you didnt learn the sword technique of an unorthodox sect? It was only then that Yukhap spoke like he realized what kind of questions couldnt be answered that easily. Right. Should I say there is a lot to tell? Each of them had essential things to know about one another. And fortunately.. There is alcohol in front of us. If I drink, I talk more than usual and then we come to know about the stories of everyone around the table. That is why I drink. One can get close to another by listening to the stories of other people. It is the place where Ghost Demon, Sword Demon, Pervert Demon are gathered. I believed that drinking parties of awkward people isnt meaningless. Sword Demons way of thinking is too heavy, whereas Pervert Demon is a light drinker. Ghost Demon is a bit dumb but also quick witted. All four of us need to get some drinks in to dull our alert senses. It is because if I always live the way I live, I will lose my mind. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 186 We were drinking. Sword Demon stopped after drinking five cups and Master Yukhap drank seven cups and got drunk. A situation where Master Yukhap laid down at the edge of the bed and went to sleep, and Sword Demon retired early saying the alcohol was too much. People who drink and share things. Didnt happen. Instead, me and Pervert Demon have an intense showdown to see who can drink the most alcohol. I keep my mouth shut because I have nothing to say to him other than curse words. Since silence filled Sword Demons place, only the snoring of Yukhap could be heard. Soon there was no more alcohol to drink, and Pervert Demon climbed up the wall and stared at the darkening surroundings like a guard. What are you doing? Pervert Demon responds in a quiet voice. He usually doesnt drink till five cups, but I think he drank a little too much today. Since his master was drunk, it meant he was standing guard. Didnt he drink that much last time too? At the time, he was just sipping. Is seniors alcohol tolerance that weak? Pervert Demon stares at me. He has to get better at drinking alcohol too. Im curious if either one of us will consume this and become intoxicated, although those who dont drink tend to always react that way. Isnt it possible to drive out the drunkenness with internal qi? Even Yukgap fell asleep. Pervert Demon replies, If it is a drink with guests, there is no need to use internal qi. Somehow after emptying alcohol bottles this guy and I were the ones speaking without curses. He stares back at the darkness and asks me, I heard you met with the leader of Blood Night Palace, what was it like? Ah, we did meet. Did you go dumb just by looking at them? Rumors said so. As if. It was impressive. According to master, it is said that most people of the Cult cannot even make eye contact with them. They said it wasnt for manners but because they felt like it was more comfortable to speak to them when not making eye contact. You had to know it. Why? Because I dont know a thing about what you are talking about. To which he says, Why do you not know? They are the ones who think to beat everyone and be the best in the world. I am not speaking of ideals. Even in everyday situations and conversations, speaking and being able to understand what is happening with everyone will be tough. And that is more terrifying. Pervert Demon adds, If I think about it, it is right. It is as if I was born because of the Demonic Cult. Is that so? That is how it is. If the Demonic Cult hadnt destroyed the Jade Flower Palace then the people of the Palace wouldnt have scattered. If that didnt happen, there would be no reason for me to be born. In the first place, it was a force created by the Lord of the palace to care for women who were left alone. I was born because the Demonic Cult destroyed such a place. Well, I have no complaints about being born into a good family, but out of blue my mother spoke about me having an older brother and that I should go. I understand that. but this whole thing isnt what I chose. So. Pervert Demon turns his head and looks at me, but in the moonlight, which isnt bright, I cant see his face. It just means that all of this happened because Cult Leader was strong. Why did the life of someone else start out like that? The more I tried to figure it out, the more I came to the conclusion that there was no reason to do that. They say Jade Flower Palace was destroyed because they were going independent from the Demonic Cult. Speaking that, he turns to the darkness with a stern tone. What are you all doing? Crawl out now. I jump up and stand where Pervert Demon is, looking outside. I try to think about why people would come attack us right now. However, I cant think of a reason they would come, especially if they are warriors. I begin to wonder if the black darkness is shining, and then three or four people walk out. All covered from head to toe so that I couldnt tell where they were from. And I hear a mans voice. Is senior Sword Demon inside? Pervert Demon answers, I asked where you were from. The voice takes a step towards us and looks at the two of us. Tell them that great young lord has arrived. Before Pervert Demon can speak, Sword Demon speaks from inside. Come in. In the dark, his subordinates say to a man, Come in. A young man appears with a calm expression and walks into Sword Demons place without a word while his subordinates remain outside. I sit down with my back against a wall with Pervert Demon and look at the young man. He referred to himself as the great young lord, so he should be the third son of the Demonic Cult. I look around Sword Demons residence with my hands behind my back and I also look at Master Yukhap who has gotten up. Many have said that a single glance was enough to see the resemblance between him and the Cult Leader. Since the Cult Leader is quite odd looking, I couldnt help but recognize him at first glance. Sword Demon, dressed in comfortable clothes, appears from inside and speaks. Come in. The great young lord nods and asks, Elder, how are you? Sword Demon looks at him. You arent here to die, what are you here for? Elder, elder Illusion Ghost Emperor has passed away. So? Well, since he stepped back, no one would seek revenge for him, so I came directly. According to the reports, Low-Down Sect Leader killed him. When I asked people, they said he was someone who had a close alliance with you. He is a friend. The third young lord nods. A close friend, so I cannot just come into the residence of elder and grab the Sect Leader to pull him out by his hair. I came to see you in person and ask for your understanding. Sword Demon answers, Third young lord, what was the wish of the man who died? To make me the subCCult Leader and keep the family alive. Then if such a man has fallen, it is only right to realize that you are out of luck and take care of yourself. Will your father be happy with you acting like this? What is a guy like you, who is fighting for succession, doing here? To which the guy answers, Even if you dont like it, do you not understand that grandfather has suffered for it? If you cannot understand that, then you arent human. If you go reckless in the outside world, your father will find fault with you, and you are bound to clash with him. Can you handle all that? In the end, your brothers will end up in a more active position. If you lose yourself to one elder like him, you will be isolated in the cult so handling this as such isnt right. What would elder do in my position? I am not an elder. That role should be filled by now. Third young lord laughs. It isnt an easy position to fill. Anyone who wants to become the new elder and take the position of Left Hand must first push the sub sect leader and be recognized from both within and outside of the cult. This should be good news for senior. That is good news. But, if I were you, I would use the death of a grandfather as an excuse to stay with my mother and wait for the storm to pass, but you wont follow my words. To which he nods. You see right. Although I respect my senior as a warrior, there is no need to nod to everything you say. I heard that this is the main street for the orthodox sect and their people to gather in groups and drink alcohol. I would have thought that a warrior as you would also smell of it. But I dont know why you are wasting time here. Why not come back and put your head on Cult Leaders feet? Sword Demon lets out a low laugh. The words of his continue, Left Hand sir, you often said that the Cult Leader is quite pitiful. There are many people who will be happy to hear that you are touching a wooden sword. Pervert Demon who had been listening, intervenes. You arrogant piece of shit what is the level for a son of a leader? Be careful of that snout. The third young lord looks at him. Ah, it is you. The vulgar bloodline of the Jade Flower Palace. As Pervert Demon stands up, Sword Demon says, We are talking here. Mong Rang. Pervert Demon huffs before saying, Yes. Third young lord smiles and looks at Sword Demon. Senior, there arent many warriors in Kangho that can deal with you directly. It means that there arent many who want to kill you too. That will be the reason why you can rest in such a place. Dont you know? Senior who became stronger without caring about the means and methods. No matter what time it is, even the senior will want to end things without touching Cult Leader. Give me Low-Down Sect Leader. Sword Demon sighs. Third one, you trust yourself too much. It isnt an easy thing. I know better than anyone that all you successors have changed since your adolescence. But it was the common wish of the Cult Leader and me to die on the battlefield in a perfect state. Wouldnt it be better to live a long life and mess around a little longer? After killing the Low-Down Sect Leader, I can do just that. Well, I knew from the moment I came that senior would refuse my request. It doesnt mean I dont have a way. The third young lord looks at Sword Demon. Sir, it is good to see your face after a long time. I hope you spend your time in peace while drinking alcohol with the people here. You have also suffered a lot, so you can think of this as a reward of vacation given before death. I will meet you again. Third young lord turns and strides out. And looking at him leaving I say, That asshole didnt look at me till the end. Fucking ridiculous. I ponder on it and look at Sword Demon. But, senior, we will see you again. I need to go. You had a lot to drink, so you dont need to come to see me out. Sword Demon calls me, Sect Leader, do not rush. Isnt this a situation where I have to rush? Master Yukhap, not sober yet, interjects. What kind of situation is this? Sword Demon explains the sudden appearance of the new guests. He didnt come looking for me, but to provoke Low-Down Sect Leader. If he leaves like this, he will harass the Low-Down Sect and harass his people. Let Sect Leader find. Only then did Yukhap understand. Ah. The problem is that we dont know who is with him. Do not rush. Same as how I understood the situation. At first glance, it looked like the third young lord was talking to Sword Demon alone, but he specifically said it isnt like I dont have other ways.. His threat was clear. Furthermore, from my point of view, Sword Demon is a man who stuck to the Cult Leader in the past, so he wouldnt bother to go after an immature idiot. It seemed like the guy visited this place after a lot of thought. Mulling over my thoughts, Sword Demon speaks to me. A straight up provocation, but it is unpleasant to see Sect Leader being dragged around like this. I speak back in a calm tone. It cannot be helped. Sometimes you need to fall for the enemys tricks. Yukgap, you arent sober so stay here. Sword Demon listens until the end and holds my hand. Sect Leader do not let your guard down. He will target you when you least expect it. I know. Again he is the son of Cult Leader, and he has worth. You dont have to kill is what I am saying. Even if you have to catch and hand him over, he will die at the hands of the successor fighters. The result will be very different from you directly killing, so understand it. I will hold on. I nod my head. I know that I drank too much. Oh my, this anger I didnt have the heart to ask Yukhap to help, or Sword Demon or Pervert Demon, so I head straight for the darkness where the guy disappeared. It is dark everywhere, so the alcohol was being pushed out. When I stand there and begin to breathe, I hear Pervert Demon. Master. Even though he didnt say anything I heard an answer come. Go and come safe. Be safe. Yes, I understand. As soon as my breathing calms, I drive the alcohol out with my internal qi. In this state, I have a risk of being harmed. This time Yukhap speaks. Senior Sword Demon, let us meet again. Sword Demon speaks. Do not stay away and join us later when you are sober. After I use internal qi, I concentrate the poison of alcohol in my body to the tip of my finger. This wasnt a perfect method, but it did relieve my drunk feeling to an extent. While I am staring into the darkness, Pervert Demon approaches me and tries to speak but looking at him I say, What now you drunk shitty man. He frowns as he says, This body is of a filthy bloodline, so I do not worry much about that. A country boy who cannot even drink. You should have brought more alcohol. I yawn and walk into the darkness with him. The road is dark because it isnt a business area. I couldnt tell if we were being pursued or we were pursuing. I didnt know right away whether he was really going to attack the Low-Down Sect, or if he was waiting for me to come out and deal with him. It was just dark all around. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 187 Instead of heading into the busy streets, I chose to take the unofficially used roads and walk in the darkness. The farther away we went, the quieter the sounds were. I was already walking into the trap so there was no need to rush in. Since he came because the Illusion Ghost Emperor was killed, he couldnt be accompanied by a stronger warrior than him. Or is it possible for him to be stronger than them? Didnt senior Sword Demon say things about how crazy they are? Pervert Demon, who is next to me, answers without thinking. How strong was he though? The old man? I think for a while and say, Well, Yukhap and I fought, and we were stronger. But he fought better than expected. Had experience. Pervert Demon stops walking and asks in a serious tone, Is the Illusion Ghost Emperor stronger than me? He is strong. He had better internal qi. I mean, he is over 60 years old. But how did you kill him? Together? No. Then? I sigh. Just move on. The strong guy doesnt always win. What nonsense. I cant make sense about the fact that I killed people while peeing behind their backs. When I think about it now, I wonder if I was even in my right mind. Cause I was drinking a lot. The reason I wasnt running right now includes the fact that I want to continue to drive out my drunkenness, and, of course, Pervert Demon is doing the same. Pervert Demon says, You said that the sons of the Cult Leader would be rivals if the generations changed and competed for position to be the best in the world. Well, my peers said that there wouldnt be that many skilled warriors even in the orthodox sects. And that is all. Master also expected that much. What? Only one will survive in the end. I think the same. For a tiger cub to be a king. Eating the other brother, biting the limbs, destroying the dantian there will be just one left right? What significance is that? It means that it is advantageous to deal with them now. I say, You are all so happy to see them fighting. You dont know because you dont have siblings, but half siblings arent good people like some might think. Especially the ones with money. Brothers arent as warm as you think. Like me. I nod. Since I was a kid, I have been a guy with nothing, so I cant relate. But I know very well why those Demonic Cult bastards are like that. Why? Those who can kill their own siblings have no bounds. That is right. If those who dont believe in self believe in only their Gods like the Demonic Cult, it is already a troubled sect. That is why they have a cult with the name Demon in it, instead of a normal one. All because of this. Actually, there are more evil deeds this cult did. However, I cannot tell him what hasnt happened yet. I ask Pervert Demon when the moon begins to appear. Shitty face, since we are fighting together, let me ask you a question. Ask away. How many people can you hit with your most powerful ice arts? If you had to rank it in terms of how many you could take down. After thinking for a while, he answers. Around 50 to 60 you? I reply exaggeratedly without much thought. 70 for me. Then I am 80. Come to think of it, it is 90. Enough now. While walking in the dark, I see a lantern ahead. After a while, a man appears with a lantern and says, Sect Leader? This way. I stop and stare at the lantern. The man says to me as he holds the lantern, I will guide you to where the great young lord is. Nice. Lets go. While holding the shoulder of the man holding the lantern, I say, If an assassination comes because of the lantern you are holding, you will die too. How does that feel? Could that happen when I was sent to guide? Do you know the minds of your superiors that well? The expression of the guy stiffens at my retort. I walk down the street with this guy next to me and become friends with this lit lantern. Where are you guiding me? Is there a base close by? There is a secluded place, and he is waiting there for you. Ah, your one? No. Lets see who it is. I have a thought. If the three young lords are trying to kill me with loads of troops, it will be actually easy to deal with them. It would mean many useless people, so it is easier to run too. However, if it is in a guesthouse with one or two warriors, it will be difficult. Obviously the one waiting there would be a strong one. That said, I am not the type to come all the way here and run away, if I come all the way here and then run, the young lord would harass my Low-Down Sect. After a while, we go into this messy place with a sign labeled Heavenly Ruler Guest House. The place has a thick smell of blood, as if they were slaughtering themselves. Young lord was there on the second floor of the inn, looking down at us. Welcome in. When I look around Im able to spot three warriors, and no more who catch my eye. The great young lord looks at the two of us and says, Master, a guest has arrived. I hear subtle footsteps in the kitchen and see a man in his 30s coming out while wiping his hands with an apron cloth. It was the owner of this guest house, dressed in ordinary clothes, and hair shiny as if he oiled it. Hmm. As soon as I see the owner, I recognize the guy as the butcher, Baekga. Also known as the Great Chef. A true warrior who has risen through the ranks of the strong which is what I was hoping for. That is because, out of the young lord and Baekga, the Chef would be the strongest. In any case, this guest house and this man being here meant that the food was made with human flesh, and the reason why they were here is to catch healthy humans and use them as human meat. Another title for this rare evil man was Great Chef, so there were many different times when he was running a bar and inn. It was a funny situation. The butcher asks us, Guests, what would you like to eat? I answer while sitting at the table. Give me alcohol. Thats all. When I sit at the table and look at Baekga, he laughs and says, The snacks here are delicious. I have nothing to say so I sigh and ask the young lord. Bring me a drink. Why did you lure me here? While Baekga goes into the kitchen, the young lord says, I asked a man who is quite infamous in this place to kill, and he said he would have to see for himself to make a decision. I see. I look at the Pervert Demon. As soon as he saw the chef, he seemed to get nervous, which is unusual. And only his eyes were darting around. In any case, it is right for the guy to be nervous. The Murim working is quite young. This is because warriors belonging to the Five Evils are prosperous enough to receive requests from the sons of the Demonic Cult. So Baekga is a person who later becomes a part of the Five Evils. Of course, it wasnt yet known whether the Five Evils were properly listed on the achievements of the Murim or not. Very few people even knew that this man was a member of Five Evils. Of course, I knew all the Five Evils so I could recognize them immediately. Pervert Demon too seemed to notice the atmosphere around this person. Pervert Demon mumbles. We should have come with master. Arent you too proud? Didnt you already know? Now what do we do? Shall we retreat? I say looking at Pervert Demon, Well, I have always been confident in my light footwork. You know what to do. This bastard. Baekga, the butcher who came out of the kitchen with a drink, approaches and puts it on the table. I am sorry, but this is the only drink we have. And two guests do not leave the guest house without my permission. Baekga, walks with his back to us and then sits a little further away looking at the young lord. So, it is these two? You asked me to kill one, so why did you bring two? To which young lord laughs and says, It doesnt matter if you kill just one more. Sounds good? Tell me the conditions. He ignores us and begins to negotiate with the guy again. If you take on this task then I will give you a thousand coins. I will station an outside group. You will be free to act and not take orders or do anything for the Cult. Like today, if you take care of the person I am talking about from time to time, I will continue to pay you a lot of money. Of course, I have no intention of solving it with martial arts alone. If you want martial arts, I will bring you books, I will even use my own connections to bring you food ingredients which are rare to find. I hear you are a chef. Shouldnt you be at a level to entrust yourself with a job to a master who is hard to get? Baekga looks at us and smiles. right. Who is the Low-Down Sect Leader? I point straight to Pervert Demon and say, This way. To which he sighs. phew. I am- I cut off his words. Shut up. Low-Down Sect Leader. You bad man. Suddenly, the guy gives up making excuses at my act and giggles. I poured myself the alcohol which was brought. Then, while holding out a drink to Pervert Demon, I say, Sect Leader, one glass? You have it alone. In the end, I drank alone and hastily spit it out on the ground. Spit! This fucked what is this taste? I glare at Baekga who is looking at me with an absurd expression, so I ask again. Master, why does this taste like this? Why bother selling alcohol? Did you mix stagnant water into this? Or poop? Even if you mix water it wont work. You must have sold shit instead of alcohol. No wonder you look like a moron. Ugh! Fucking! Spit!. Baekga glares at me with scary eyes. . I say, twirling my fingers near my temple, Since you drink this, the wires in your head are a mess and so you strive for human flesh to eat. This brat. There are so many delicious things in the world, but you want to eat the sick human meat? Pervert Demon next to me hits the table. Stop. I will die even if he doesnt accept the request. I reply with a polite tone. Yes, Sect Leader. Pervert Demon sighs and looks at the Butcher. Great Chef. Surprisingly, he too seemed to know the identity of this man. So, Butcher laughs and says, A younger kid knows me? Pervert Demon replies, I recognized you because master had mentioned you from time to time. The clothes and atmosphere are the same as I heard. Your master is? Sword Demon. Ah. The Butcher shakes his shoulders and laughs, and then looks at the three warriors. Young lord, are you asking me to get chased by Sword Demon? Isnt this something worth more than just a thousand coins? I will be raising the cost. This made the young lord narrow his eyes. Are you afraid of Sword Demon? The butcher replies, You are the son of the Cult Leader who had never bled in life, and he is a man infamous before you were even born. You want to make this happen with just a thousand coins? Young lords subordinates intervene. What disrespect is this towards the young lord? Butcher asks young lord, Can I kill him? To which the young lord shakes his head. Hold back. In an instant, the guy swings his left hand and the subordinate who interrupted flies back to the wall and passes out right away. Young lord looks down at the Butcher and says, Senior Baekga, isnt the offer to your benefit? You are accustomed to killing people, and if you get caught, then you will be chased by Im So-baek. To be honest, I am in a situation where I need more warriors. Be it that I succeed or fail in the future, it wont be a loss to you just because you often receive financial support from us. I answer instead of the Butcher, Oh my, you people cannot work. Your father will love that. Didnt you ask a man who eats human flesh to kill? If your father hears this, you will die. How did Demonic Cult fall this far? I came to see the skills of the Cult Leaders son, but I get a butcher being put on me instead? Young lord points his hand at me and asks the Butcher. See that? He is one to do this. But, that man there is the disciple of Sword Demon, and he is the Low-Down Sect leader. Baekga looks at me and laughs. Right. You are Low-Down Sect Leader. I point my finger at him. Illusion Ghost Emperor died at my hand while relaxing like you. But before that, I have something to offer. Butcher answers with a look of anticipation. Something being? I say pointing to the young lord, If you kill the son of the Cult Leader in my place, you will get a thousand coins. 100 more too. As soon as I say it. The young lord, Pervert Demon, and the Butcher all sigh at the same time. It wasnt likely that the situation would change with 100 coins, but I felt excited like I was in a gambling den. This is why people get addicted to gambling. I look at the young lord with expectant eyes. Will you take it? Speak. With a determined face Baekga said, First of all, I will cut off the arms of the Low-Down Sect Leader. He is a funny guy so there is no need to kill him right away. I mean, he seems to have a lot of money. How does that sound? Young lord speaks with a satisfied look. Good. I also nod and say, Confirmed. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 188 I briefly asked for forgiveness from the Demonic Cult and the Butcher. wait. Even if it is my time to go, shouldnt I at least say my will? After confirming, I speak in a serious tone. Mong Rang. Pervert Demon responds in a serious tone. What? If I fall, you take care of the Demonic Cult. Even if you see, Sword Demon will fall for it. Even those guys cannot kill you carelessly because of Sword Demon. What is this? Do not forget that martial arts are there to help the weak and unfair. One has to open their heart even more to be stronger. Pervert Demon sighs. Do the damned thing. Right. The only one to trust. I get up and speak to the Butcher. Baekga instead, let us go to the kitchen and get weapons. Judging by it, it seems like there is a blade disguised as a knife.. Let us see who gets their arms cut off first. Your words and actions are cool! Fine! The butcher smiles and heads for the kitchen. I take a deep breath and then the moment he enters the kitchen. I spread light footwork and hurriedly left the inn. Tang! Tang! Came the sounds with several voices. Uh? Is he running? Then I hear the sound of the door being smashed, and the Butcher begins to follow me like a ghost. I wasnt one to be afraid of ghosts, but his light footwork is so fast that it made my own legs tingle. So, he was fast compared to the skills of the Illusion Ghost Emperor. I know that the young lord is afraid of Sword Demon, so I leave Pervert Demon and flee. It has been a long time since I have been placed in the middle of such a situation. I really did run at full speed because I was curious about the level of his attacks while running. A state where the senses of the body become sensitive, knowing that the moment of life and death has arrived. I hear the sound of wind being cut behind me and I tilt my head. The tree branch that was above my field of vision is cut and falls to the ground without a sound. I increase my speed as the branch stretches out before it hits the ground. The eyes of the Butcher come from behind. Could the young Sect Leader be running? It was a voice which sounded like he was impressed, so I answered kindly. You sick bastard, you smell so stop chasing. I float a little in the air and then turn around while holding a stance. While trees on both sides of the path touched by his sword get cut down, the Butcher soars into the air swinging his blade. In an instant, three Blade Winds rush forward. Three gusts of winds resembling a whirl wind rather than a straight line come flying out making it seem difficult to dodge. I push myself off the ground and step back watching his attacks hit the land. Three bolts of his attack strike the ground causing dozens of stones to fly outward with a loud sound. Babababak! With one foot on the ground, the Butcher leaps up and catches up with me. I swing my wooden sword without even taking a breath. The Butcher seems to be one who is quick to adapt because I dodge the attack but something close by gets caught. The sound made by the knife was faint due to how thin his knife was. It was a situation where the sound could be heard accurately. Even during all of this, I make eye contact with the Bucher. So, we both stared. Without fear. And this makes him spit out words between swinging his swords. Well, you fight this well, why run away. I also answer by taking breaths between swinging my wooden sword. The smell of blood coming from you is so disgusting that my nose feels sensitive. At that moment, the wooden sword and the Butchers blade collide which causes sparks to fly. It feels like my hands are about to tear. Up until this point, I was fighting him without using any of my techniques and so after stepping on the ground again, I ran. Until this time, I competed without a technique and after stepping on the ground again, I ran. The Butcher laughs coldly. Huhuhuh. The Butcher, who steps to the side to avoid me, catches back up in five steps and thrusts his blade towards my back. Swish! As soon as I turn around, I raise my wooden sword and use the thin side of the wooden sword to deflect his attack. Tung! The wooden sword infused with qi bends like a bow. In an instant, I parry away the stab coming for my body and push it towards the ground and jump. The gap between us widens, but the speed of the Butcher is so fast that it is impossible to do anything. After observing the Butchers eyes and face, I swung the sword again. The Butcher evades my attack and goes for my lower body. I dodge the attack with a quick movement and at the same time, he aims for my arm. Oddly enough, it seemed faster because it wasnt a defensive move. Each of his actions carry a purpose with no wasted movement. Moreover, among the warriors I met after returning, this guy is the fastest at moving his body and sword. The Butcher must be impressed by my skills because he continues to talk. Low-Down Sect Leader, come down here and I will spare you. I covet your skills. I deflect the blade of his and answer. I confirm. At those words, he stops attacking and tilts his head. Oh, you are contemplating? When he says that, I begin to run away again, and he follows me while laughing. Such an interesting one. This time though, his voice fills with killing intent. It will not end with just your arms. A man with the intent to kill while smiling. And even when running, I answer with sincerity. I confirm. Confirm what? Ignoring his question, I ran while thinking. His swordsmanship and internal qi are well developed and so there is no possibility of him running out of stamina any time soon. As I run, I reflect on whether there were any openings in the Butchers movement. Oddly enough, there was nothing. Since the Butcher didnt want to go on the defense, he was moving only with the intent to injure me. This was the reason I am running. Moreover, as if he thinks that I am hiding something, hes not showing all of his cards and focusing just on his swordsmanship alone. My sword technique is actually in a poor state with no baseline The blade of Butcher was also so basic that I didnt know just where he learned it from. However, the reason why he was so strong was because the unorthodox warriors are generally fast with their swordsmanship. Because he is quick-witted. And his blade is fast. Fighting, running away, thinking about how to deal with it, and then needing more time to think. Meanwhile, he follows me closely, never straying farther than 20 paces from me. The Butchers voice can be heard. Even if you run for two full days and nights, you wont be able to escape me. Lets see who burns out quicker. I answer briefly. Confirmed. The only thing I could think of is attacking him when he strikes me. When he cuts my arm off, I could aim for his neck. But that isnt the right thing to do. While running, I remember the sword of Yukhap which he was teaching me. A move following the defense of an iron wall. The moment has come for me to unfold the tricks of Ghost Demon. There was no problem when it came to shielding it, but the sword shield would be useless if the Butcher decided to use his internal qi. Even if I block it with a shield, the shield and my arm will be cut off at the same time. However, the shield can temporarily obstruct my vision, so I have to put together a couple more ideas. The Sword Shield, Ice Shield, and many more, White Flower Sword Qi, Flash Blade, Dagger form, Qi Sword form. Considering everything from the attack to the state of the opponent and his speed. I think about how to respond when I run out of time to think. I continue running for a moment until the Butcher opens his mouth and I hear his voice. just till when. As I turn around while floating in the air, I use sword shield with the wooden sword. The sword shield created by the qi spreads out ahead. And when ice qi gets infused, I step back. Even if the two shots hit, it would blow out. Pak! As expected, the tension of the situation is high. While flying I use the Waning Moon Ice technique by flicking my fingers. And the moment I see sword qi dissipate and flames scatter in the wind. I take out a dagger from my bosom and throw it at the Butcher. Swish! I use a technique where ice qi gets infused with more qi and scatters and I also throw the wooden sword without regret. All of them were thrown in order to see how the Butcher would respond. Tang- sounds came with a clashing sound. The cold air scatters as if a longsword dissipated it as the Butcher swings his blade twice. While he swings his blade, the wooden sword barely manages to graze his neck. Furious, the guy steps back and raises his blade. It was a situation in which there seemed to be no escape. Originally, I was going to win even with just my bare hands, but I give up. The situation was favoring the Butcher. Enhanced sword qi wraps around his blade and shatters around his body like a whip falling from the sky which makes me unfold the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon. . In the midst of that, I got worried and so I decided to use the technique Yukhap taught me. . Ah, so fucked. Light Sky of the Sun and Moon was created by crumpling energy that cant be combined with a Taiji sword to create the power of reverse heaven. But if it explodes in such a place then there is a high chance he would die and so would I with our limbs blowing off our bodies. I must be sick. In an instant, an enhanced sword rises from behind. Of course, light shines in my hand. As soon as I block it, I press the sword force with the technique I created with both hands. In my ears, I hear a swish sound. The enhanced sword bounces back. This makes one arm of the guy fly off and as the guy lands backwards from the force- with just one hand left, he lunges at me. I transfer the qi of Light Sky of the Sun and Moon from both hands to one hand and then unfold it to attack it in succession with flame arts. Despite an arm being blown off, the Butchers qi is ferocious. Puak! Puak! The movement of Butcher slows down a lot, and his body gets hit each time. He comes close to my face with his intact hand. As a result, I grabbed his wrist with my left hand. In his hand were chopsticks though, which I look at and say, chopstick, I can confirm. I infuse ice qi into my left hand and then into the right shoulder of Butcher. It was only then that his bleeding stopped. The eyes of the Butcher were red. Even though I grabbed his arm, he had a murderous look in his eyes. And with wide eyes he asks, what are you? You were always weaker when fighting. I hit his torso with ice arts and then turn my left hand and slowly drive the sharp chopsticks into his shoulder. Puak It is strange that he isnt even screaming. I scan the guys body. He was covered in burn marks. This wasnt usual torture, so I ask while holding him, Who tortured you like this? The Butcher says, Master Baek Wei. I nod. I confirm. The Butcher asks with an odd look, Do you know master? I know Five Evils. A person who is known as the Evil Emperor. Butcher asks, What is the Five Evils and Evil Emperor? It is the first time Im hearing of it. I reply feeling goosebumps rising. There is such a thing. There was a certain time when the Five Evils werent so greatly known by the Murim Alliance. And I have this thought. Just as young lord asked Butcher to kill. I thought the Demonic Cult would also have requested this or asked those skilled at killing to take up some tasks. Young lord couldnt be the only client. I politely ask him. Senior Baek, can we find out the hiding place of Baek Wei? Can you kill? I nod. I can try. Practice more. Not enough. I cannot tell you either. He looks at me and smiles, I can see blood around his teeth. I slash the forehead of the butcher and kill him in an instant. Puak! I have no choice but to kill him as he hadnt let out a single scream during the entire fight. Butcher, are you dead? . There is no answer, so I take a deep breath. Confirmed. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 189 Your friends behavior is so odd. Pervert Demon retorts, He isnt my friend. To which the guy nods. It is going to be hard to get away from Butcher. So? Since you are the disciple of Sword Demon, you must be skilled. Even if you survive here without dying, you too cannot handle that guy there. Be it you, or your master, or the crazy bastard there, everyone will die. Why dont you just concede to the Cult now huh? There is a difference between begging to be saved and being invited in advance by me to enter the Cult. If you are invited by me, your skills will not determine how you will get checked and treated. Pervert Demon looks up at the man. Isnt this the battle for succession going smoothly? Why dont you figure out your position and step back early? According to master, the only thing that makes you better than others is how brutal you are. They say your martial arts isnt good, you arent smart either. Even your subordinates are weak. Bowing your head to my master in advance and serving as his attendant is something which suits you. Young lord. The guy tells his subordinates, Kill him. We can decorate using his body like what the Butcher does. Pervert Demon remembers the conversation he had with Low-Down Sect Leader. How many people can you hit with ice arts? Pervert Demons answer is the same as he said before. 50- 60. Young lord narrows his eyes. What? What did you say? I am talking to myself. The guest house wasnt wide. The young lord only had 10 subordinates. On this floor, in front and on the left, his men gathered around. Pervert Demon mumbles lightly covering his nose and mouth with the back of his hand. Moonlight Twinkle. In an instant, cold white air escapes from his body and spreads outwards in every direction. Jkkkkkk! Three warriors block the Moonlight Twinkle and get pushed back towards the back of the place. And all of the servants of the young lord who had defended with their swords immediately froze. Pervert Demon sighs because he is dissatisfied with the coldness of this attack, which he had used in combat for the first time. A stream of white vapor escaped from his mouth. After ripping out a bottle frozen to a table, he begins to smash the heads of the frozen ones, one after the other. Puak! There was only a single sound that could be heard, devoid of anyones screams. After beating down the subordinates with a frozen bottle, as he goes up to the second floor, he says, Son of Cult Leader, where are you? Let us fight. Pervert Demon arrives at the upper floor and approaches the highly skilled subordinates of the young lord. It wasnt easy to determine whether his attack was too weak or if his subordinates were that skilled. Anyway, these people were struggling to keep their blood points open. Even there, Pervert Demon beats and kills those who are unable to move again with his frozen bottle. He suddenly sees that the wall ahead was broken. Pervert Demon sticks his head out to scan the area. It was silent. young lord are you running away? There is no way the Cult Leaders son would be afraid of the Sword Demons disciple. Pervert Demon jumps down the place and watches the darkness. The voice of the young lord is what breaks the silence. Butcher! This side! Pervert Demon looks around. Hmm. Silence. A sound of shock escapes from the mouth of the young lord. What! As if he changed direction, a loud noise followed by the sound of two people fighting in the dark could be heard. However, it sounded like one person was pursuing the other. Shortly after, the sounds of weapons clashing could be heard. Pervert Demon overhears the fight like a cat. This bastard isnt someone who will be beaten that easily. On purpose he approaches without a sound and then watches the two face each other in the moonlight. . Of course, the young lord has a sword in hand. Low-Down Sect Leader appears out of nowhere and has a blade in his hand. Pervert Demon watches them fight with concentrated eyes. Demonic Cult Leaders son and Low-Down Sect Leader. It wasnt known who had better internal qi but it was obvious who had better skills handling a sword. Actually, the scene of the two young men fighting so fiercely was actually so absurd. It was because one of them was the son of the Cult Leader. And the other guy was the same age as Pervert Demon so he knew that this guy couldnt be compared to the son of Cult Leader. Now he knew that Low-Down Sect Leader was strong. At a glance, Low-Down Sect Leader seems faster too. Since he is using a short butchering blade, their clashing weapons were causing sparks to fly. Both of them have excellent movement, so they move away from each other in an instant and immediately close in on one another. Pervert Demon smiles while watching. Ehh, it is fun to watch the fights. To get the result do they have to fight more? At this moment, he hears an unhappy laugh which sounds like metal screeching from Sect Leaders mouth. Uhahahahaha. Pervert Demon looks at his arm. At that moment, he couldnt help but think that Low Down Sect Leaders voice sounded similar to Baekga, and he could feel goosebumps rise as a result. And he continues to look at the man with a strange expression. He is trying mimicry in the middle of a fight? How was he even unfolding this technique of blade so smoothly? It was so unique that he had never seen a similar technique in any other Sect. It was because it was a strategy which completely sacrificed defense to shower on an onslaught of attacks. Somehow, it was also a technique that suited the blade. When an unknown suspicion begins to rise, Low-Down Sect Leader speaks. Young lord, you are quite good. . But the opponent who is fighting with all his might didnt have energy to respond. Instead, Low-Down Sect Leader continues. Low-Down Sect Leader is fighting quite well too. . I ripped the skin off his face and put it on a mask. I stole his clothes and sword too. You were completely fooled. Although his voice was similar to that of Baekga, Pervert Demon sneers. That is a lie which wont work anywhere. However, Pervert Demon thoughts become halted. It was because the expression of the young lord was extremely serious and Low-Down Sect Leader was shouting. Around a thousand ones thousand? One thousand! Every time he screamed; his blade would fall swiftly. Clang! Clang! Clang! A simple attack and yet his speed was so great that the young lord had no choice but to defend. Low Down Sect Leader continued to attack and said, Because of guys like you I turned into a murderer. A Butcher. Every time you pay money, people end up dead. You idiots are no different from my master, you are all the same. People who kill for money! There is no difference between the Demonic Cult and my master. I will kill you. For revenge. Young lord was forced to be on the defense. As he sticks back his sword into defensive technique he urgently says, Seriously, senior. Young lord moves his body and soon after the blade flies and hits his knee while he moves back. With a loud Puak- sound, his blood flowed. Pervert Demon who was watching this, covers his mouth with his hand. Creepy as hell it actually happened. Low Down Sect Leader, who narrows the distance in an instant, kicks the face of the young lord, who was trying to regain his balance, and throws him back. Puak! Low-Down Sect Leader shakes his shoulders and smiles. Then he approaches the young lord who was down on the ground. Young lord, it is me. Senior? It is me. I am saying it is me. It is me. Low Down Sect Leader giggles and stomps on the guys face with his foot. Kwaaaang! The guy manages to roll to the side, hit the ground with his right hand and jumps to his feet. Low Down Sect Leader, who had approached the guy again, hits him in the crotch. Young lord looks like he is about to faint. Low-Down Sect Leader ends the fight in the most bizarre manner as he says, Did you poop? Pervert demon sighs. Creepy Of course, he did. As soon as he confirms the Low-Down Sect Leaders words, which he couldnt understand, the tension falls. Even Pervert Demon was doubting that the Butcher actually survived. The similar voice and unfamiliar look of the bizarre blade being used made him feel anxious. Pervert Demon makes eye contact with Low-Down Sect Leader and flinches. a surprise. You crazy bastard. Do not stare. I have never seen a mad one like you. What happened to your opponent? He looks down at the young lord and says, What do you think happened? He was butchered. It took time to bury him. Low-Down Sect Leader says to young lord, Third young lord. I sent the Butcher to the hell of hunger. Why do you think so? He, who usually kills poor people and eats their flesh, is probably waiting to be locked up in hell and not some other place. What do you think? I am serious now. He must have gone to the hungry ghosts hell, right? One, two, three. When the guy doesnt respond, Low-Down Sect Leader reaches out to hit him. And three or four teeth actually fall out. Pervert Demon watches and sighs. Now now, Sect Leader. Did you forget what master said? What we kill and what we dont have to kill, the results being different depending on our actions. Lets take him to master. It isnt too late now. It would be odd if something terrible happened here. Low-Down Sect Leader nods and says to the young lord. I will kill this one later, I will kill you on the spot. Those who eat human flesh will fall into hell. What do you think? Answer. The third young lord was on the ground drooling saliva. I agree. I think so too. Is that so? . And you asked that guy to kill me? Have I ever seen such a jackass? Pervert Demon crosses his arms and sighs. It was impossible to stop this guy who is half-mad, so he decides to leave it alone. Low-Down Sect Leader asks clutching the hair of third young lord, Did your father teach this to you? As he continues to hit the face of the guy, the sound of puak- puak- puak can be heard. You want to kill someone by giving money? Is that your way in the Cult? My patience is running thin. Answer me now. The poor guy who is beaten down, speaks after a long time. That isnt the Demonic Cult. They will be ashamed of my actions. Low-Down Sect Leader glares at him. Right? It isnt the Demonic Cults way. It isnt right for you people who do that. It seems like the Cult Leader was busy because he didnt seem to have educated his idiotic kids. The guy asks, being curious. What is the Demonic way? Low-Down Sect Leader slaps him and says, I dont know that either you bastard. Am I a member? Why ask me? You should ask the person who is in there. Ask your Cult Leader. I am busy now, so lets stop this now. Pervert Demon makes eye contact with Low-Down Sect Leader and then nods as he says, Enough of the nonsense and lets go. Confirmed. Pervert Demon nods and taps Low-Down Sect Leader on the shoulder. But how did you win over Baekga? He looked strong. It is too much to say. What would you even know when you always stare at the ass of a woman? Pervert Demon nods. Confirmed. Pervert Demon feels odd. It felt like another secret word that only he and this man could understand. Their secret language consisted of these phrases. Pervert Demon, shitty face, kill you, and confirmed. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 190 I speak to the young lord near Sword Demons place. Hya, the Cult Leader is so great. To not kill this guy and bring him all the way here. Because of my usual temper, I hit him on the back of his head as he is staggering ahead. I tell him, Keep it in mind that you are only still alive because there is a risk of many innocent ones dying if you are searched for. Pervert Demon also sneers. Enough. If you do it here, everyone here will be tortured. Even if he has to die, it has to be somewhere else. Right young lord? The guy glares at us, but this time Pervert Demon slaps him shut. And he says, Who do you think you are looking at me with those eyes? Are you out of your mind? Fucking loser. Do not be too confident that you will make it out alive. If master changes his mind, today will be the last day of your life. Pervert Demon tells me to bring him to the yard and so, and I take and hit him to make him kneel. Young lord breathes heavily and looks at Sword Demon coming out of his place. After sitting cross-legged on the bed, Master Yukhap opens his eyes and tells the young lord. You are back soon. Nice to meet you. I look at Yukhap. Drunk? Which he replies with a blunt expression. That is because I am feeling so glad. Master, together with Sect Leader, we managed to arrest this guy who acted so arrogantly. However, Baekga was waiting for us where we got lured. If it wasnt for that, he would have been beaten down by us two. Sword Demon responds in a calm tone, No matter how cornered one is, how can a son of a man who has rivals all over Kangho even dare to think about making another person do their killings? I look at the young lord with crossed arms. Right. Somehow, the atmosphere is very heavy and serious. It wouldnt be so strange to think he might die any second from a single hit from Sword Demon. Young lord, who is kneeling, asks Sword Demon, Elder, what is the demonic way? I heard that both Cult Leader and the elder too chose any means and methods when it came to fighting. Why is it fine for you and not for me? Sword Demon calmly responds, Even the orthodox sects have hypocrites in hiding who do such things. Even a third-rate warrior from an unorthodox sect who lives the most stained life would. So how can this be called the demonic way? I nod at the words of Sword Demon. You are right. Sword Demon says, If there is a butcher, Sect Leader and my disciple must have struggled a lot but let us start by hearing why you got captured. The young lord sighs. I dont know. I definitely thought that with his skills the guy would be better than Low-Down Sect Leader, but the two began to chase and the one who came back alive was Low-Down Sect Leader. I insert myself into the conversation. And that is me. For a moment, Pervert Demon looks at me and suppresses a laugh. Sword Demon continues to speak in a low tone. Even though it was a short time, there was a time when the young lords learned swordsmanship from me. I am quite embarrassed. If news spread that you were conspiring with a man known as the Butcher, even if it isnt your father, the other young lords would tear you apart limb from limb. Since you even lost your grandfather, it is as if you have already lost the battle to run for the position of Cult Leader. Is there any reason for you to live? The guy looks miserable as he looks down. Elder, please give me a chance. Sword Demon says, You shouldnt have come and asked for all this, you should have sought the answer for yourself. Rather, I am more curious as to how the condescending guy who came first turned into such a disciplined one. Kid, what do you think is the demonic way? I wasnt listening with much thought, and my eyes widened. Uh? So, this was the Sword Demons last question. Depending on his answer, this guy will die here. However, if Sword Demon likes his answer, there is a high chance this guy will come out alive. The Sword Demon that I know is such a man. It seems like young lord isnt an idiot either, his pale face turns paler as he tries to choose his answer. The guy was delaying his response, but no one said a thing. Its because this is a time of life and death, one which decides if we have an ally or an enemy. I sit down on the bed with Pervert Demon and watch the young lord think about his answer. However, Im suffering from a mouth which itches to speak more, so I end up speaking. Right what is your interpretation of the demonic way? Make a request to kill, but it fails. Is your definition of the demonic way to insist on staying alive even at the cost of your own subordinates? What do you think? Pervert Demon, who looks at me, continues. Right. If we send him out alive right now, this time he will take more gold and silver and head to another contract assassin and ask them to kill us, right? No, wouldnt it be better to ask him to kill your father and siblings instead? Then you can be the next Cult Leader. This guys demonic way is possible if he has a lot of money. What do you think Master Yukhap? Crazy Demon, Pervert Demon, and Ghost Demon. The three of us naturally continue the conversation and Yukhap chuckles lowly. Does he even have that much money? How much money would it take to kill the Cult Leader or another young lord? I dont know if hes done anything else with his life. If you want to kill your father or siblings you must collect the money first. Things that cannot be accomplished with martial arts alone, how can you do it why not learn the right way and try it that way? Young lord. Shouldnt you be saving up more money now? I nod my head with a serious face and mumble. hold your reins. I was a server once, so Ive tried it, and money is hard to save. Ghost Demon and Pervert Demon stare off in different directions. Sword Demon is listening with a serious face, so it was clear that these two didnt want to laugh. And the young lord has a pale look. Elder, please kill me. Sword Demon chuckles. I asked you a question and now you want me to kill you? I am not asking for a perfect answer. I am asking because people have different thoughts. Disciple. Pervert Demon answers his call. Yes, master. What is the demonic way? I am not one who knows it. I was never interested in it. I almost answer with woman? from the side, but I barely hold back because of the atmosphere. I think that this guy is not a Pervert Demon, but a man who walks the path of being a pervert. I dont know if there is such a thing or not, but this guy is like that. Sword Demon asks Master Yukhap. Yukhap what do you think? To which he answers. Isnt most of the demonic way the way the young lord is? Leaving them alive will never do us any good. They are ones who cannot tell the difference between grace and mercy. Sword Demon smiles. I get it. And Sect Leader? I look at the young lord. That is a difficult question. But one thing is for sure, there is no chance that this guy can be a proper Demonic Cult member. A member of the demonic way, an idiot, a piece of trash, a murderer- they are ones with no character who have no chance of being anything. And even if they do end up as Cult Leader, they still will be trash. That guy? Not a true Demonic Cult member. What does senior think? Sword Demon answers. It is true that in comparison to the demonic way, the orthodox focuses on the weak. I nod. Exactly. If one is a true preacher of the demonic way, they will keep an eye on the strong ones throughout their life. Even if their entire life is focused on the sole purpose of defeating those stronger, there wouldnt be enough time. Sword Demon glares at the young lord. Your father will live his life remembering that he couldnt be defeated till the end. Every time I think of your father, I feel so uncomfortable. However, Murim Alliance Leader, Im So-baek must be awake every night being wary of people like me. But as long as I am locked up in such a place, he wouldnt have to come to kill me. It is because he focuses his eyes on the weak, his colleagues, and his subordinates. The difference between the demonic way and the orthodox way is this. Young lord listens in silence and Sword Demon continues. One day, your fathers thoughts and resolutions will change. It seems that he was determined to be Heavenly Demon even if it meant to give up the weak, rather than using that to grow himself. This is where your father and I fell at odds. Sword Demon was obviously talking to the young lord about his story of the past, and we were all listening. Sword Demon says, No matter what it is that you pursue, if you reach a position in the top, one day, those who havent found an opponent in the orthodox way, will pursue the demonic way. And they will enter a deserted barren land where the journey to the top is very lonely. That is what it means to be the best in the world. Their fight will not affect the weak in any manner or even bother them. No matter which path one pursues, that is what I think. And then young lord says, Then I am not a follower of the demonic way. I just didnt choose the means and methods that I want to live. This feels like an honest answer, and Sword Demon says, If your grandfather had fallen, you should run to your mothers house to find an answer. Your grandfather isnt one who doesnt know martial arts. He was trying to kill Low-Down Sect Leader, and for personal revenge, you should learn his martial arts and go against Low-Down Sect Leader. If there is a big change after todays conversation, I will find you. Young lord answers. I understand. I dont want you to die here for many reasons. So go. Young lord struggles to get up and looks at Sword Demon, and us three. In the end he says, Elder. Sword Demon answers. Shut up and leave. I say to the young lord as he limps out, Third young lord. You are only still standing because of a miracle. But I dont want you to die here. Also, do come down to the Low-Down Sect from now on if you want to see my face. If you are a human before being the son of the Cult Leader, you should know the shame of living a life like this. He turns to me and nods. I do. As soon as he disappeared, Sword Demon says, Sect Leader, I apologize for sending someone away who holds a grudge against you. I nod and accept his apology. Senior. Go on. You have apologized to quite a few people in my life. He sighs with a troubled expression. Not that many. You look really apologetic though. Then let me request one thing. What is it? I look at Sword Demon, but also at Ghost Demon and Pervert Demon. I heard that Butcher Baekga had a master. . Baek Wei, have you heard about him? All three of them tilt their heads at the same time and I say, Actually, teacher Baek Wei is more troublesome than this idiot young lord. Baekgas body was covered in gruesome torture marks. After seeing that, I understood the cause behind his martial arts and disgusting personality. He didnt tell me much so finding him wouldnt be easy. Sword Demon says, But there seems to be a way to meet. I nod. Of course, there is. He asks curiously, How? To which I respond with a serious face. The guest house, the one owned by Butcher Baekga. Whether we have to spend money to spread the word or not, let the death of the guy be known all around. To reach the ears of the guy. I point to Pervert Demon and say, As this guy must know, Baekgas skills were not inferior to us. Then his master should be someone stronger than us. I speak to them all. Let us focus on training until that guy comes and visits me. Pervert Demon looks puzzled. Not catch him together but focus on training? I tell him, You idiot, what is the demonic way? He sighs. You are doing it again, master, Low-Down Sect Leader often imitates people. He is like a mad man having his episode. Sword Demon tells Pervert Demon. Your words are whats making me feel worse now. I apologize. And Sword Demon asks, How strong do you think this Baek Wei is? I cannot tell as I never met the guy. I dont know. But, if he had a disciple like him, it wouldnt be strange for him to be stronger than his disciples. Otherwise, there is no way he wouldve had a disciple who was that exceptional. Ghost Demon asks me, Why do you think so? I answer. A disciple is, after all, one who learns. He cannot be the first or the last. So, to be able to destroy the character of said disciple, they have to be a terrible person themselves. That was the Evil Emperor I knew. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 191 I respect Sword Demons opinion and I thought that I could agree with the thought of the third young lord leaving here alive But is the human brain so simple? No, and it doesnt feel good to me. But well, my mood always fluctuates, so the unpleasant feeling gradually turns, and I watched Ghost Demon, Pervert Demon, and Sword Demon move. Including me, us four. Most of my previous life was about fighting, killing, being chased, or going insane, but right now, being insane with these people doesnt feel so bad. No matter how insane these people are, they are warriors who I can fight alongside. Thanks to that, I forget about the anger of sending the young lord alive. If I think about it, the chances of him coming back to face me to die arent so high. Rather, he would have a higher chance of being killed by the assassins sent by his siblings. Whether he dies or not. Now, the fact that I am slightly changing from the past life and walking towards the light is whats important. I intend to lead these reborn idiots the Zaha Way. Orthodox way, unorthodox way, and demonic way. I dont know. Actually, I dont care either. All Im certain of is the fact that I know about what path I want to take. Kill those who should die, give a chance to those who havent, and leave the end to the heavens. As I continue to look at the idiots around, Sword Demon asks me, Sect Leader, are you fine? You arent feeling your temper flare right? I am fine, you people? Pervert Demon looks at me with a dumb expression. And Ghost Demon nods as if there is no problem. It is fine. Sword Demon asks again, . The burn out looks serious. Shall we have some plum extract? I shake my head. Let us have that in moderation from now on. For the time being, I will stay at the lodgings of the guest house. Sword Demon nods. Do as you see fit. I say to Pervert Demon, Send me some people who can be contracted to work tomorrow at Baekgas guest house. I need to dispose of the corpses and clean the inn. Pervert Demon nods. I will send them. The walls too need to be repaired. After I get up, I tell them. Then go rest. I think I will learn something, so I need to train tonight. Sword Demon has a thin smile. You work hard. Yukhap gets up and he says to me, Sect Leader, give me some money, I need to find a place to stay. This beggar bast Dont forget that everything you had was stolen from my subordinates. Confirmed. I have no choice but to take out a money slip and hand it to Yukhap. With Baekga dead, I inherited his blade technique. One member who succeeded his martial arts, that is me. And the explanation for his Slaughtering Blade technique is simple. It is a method of attack in which one who cannot feel pain gives up their defense to attack. I had tried various martial arts, but none were as bloody as the blade of the Butcher. It is a really ignorant and arrogant method, but it is definitely difficult to deal with. The feeling of moving back and forth between life and death. Slaughtering Blade Technique is enough to take down people with comparable skills to oneself. And even if there is a lack of skill, it is still a technique that gives one the higher hand. Of course, there is a risk of getting wounded when there might be an opening in my movements, and so I try to use it in a way where I would incorporate it sporadically at the most ideal moments. I am usually a man with no shame, so I move without a proper stance. After concentrating on the technique, I realize it is perfect for a mad man. I hold out the blade and unleash light footwork. I move ahead with short swinging motions, and soon when I confirm the movement of the enemy, I swing by lowering my head. And Spreading while advancing the technique to slaughter. Spreading while evading the technique. I sprint through the night unfolding techniques. Every time I imagine the sword technique and the assassin skills of the enemies, I twist my body, stab, or swing the blade. I move like Baekga did to kill the opponent as quickly as possible. I jump lowly into the air while running and stabbing. Cutting while moving and switching to attack even at the moment of them cutting me down. My head now was filled with every movement that the Butcher did to kill me. His killing intent, his recklessness, how brutal he was, all being recreated by me. And I repeat it one after another, and finally I realize three things. Giving up ones body and giving the other person no time to breathe is the third rule of this technique. The Slaughter Blade technique is brutal. If one expresses this a little differently, it would be a sophisticated method of becoming tougher. Obviously, the goal of the psychological warfare of the technique was to force the opponent and the body to be hurt at the same time, and to force the retreat of the enemy. Seriously, I would have fought while running and cut him by retreating. Now that I am at this point, most warriors must have struggled against the man. I used the moonlight as my companion and continued to swing the blade. Even as the imaginary sword stabs me in the stomach, I drop my left arm and cut off their knee and slash the opponents neck with the blade. This time while I jump in the air, I stretch out my left hand and drive the opponents sword into my palm and then cut the opponent down in half. Ah this is so bloody. This method really feels like one that those who loved seeing blood would enjoy. I go around alone thinking of attacking these invisible monsters. It was the movements of one who was possessed by the soul. However, my temper itself wasnt shaken enough, so I have nothing to fear. While I am heading to the guest house I make the entire technique mine. Indeed, it is a skill which is full of madness, so it isnt difficult to get used to. However, I dont like the word Slaughter, and since I inherited the blade technique of Butcher, I decided to name it something else. This will be the Crazy Demon Blade technique. As soon as I think of the name, I dance in front of the guest house. I was thinking of doing a sword dance until I forgot the third form. Although I am dancing like a crazy person, the imaginary Butcher is back alive, and he tries to attack me. I continue with the sword dance while using my own Crazy Demon Blade technique. In an instant, his entire body turned to pieces, but First of all, I am a Crazy Demon. So, in the sword dance, I tear the guy to death again, beat him to death, smash his head, cut him in half. All in a state of trance. After throwing the blade at the signpost in excitement *Puak!* As soon as I pull out the wooden sword, I perform the Plum Blossom Sword Dance. It is a sword dance improvised with the Crazy Demon Blade technique. In an instant, the plum tree in the Black Rabbit Union comes to my thoughts and the faces of the subordinates passing too. As soon as I thought that it was fine to get hurt The power of Crazy Demon Sword Dance feels weak. As soon as I lose my excitement, I pull the sword back, and leap into the air after pulling out the blade from the post. Plum Blossom Sword Dance is indeed a difficult thing, so I think it wouldnt be right to move on after mastering this technique. I go into the guest house where the corpse was laid out and I have to catch my breath. There were messy corpses all over the place, it seems like that bastard used ice arts. At this moment, the sound of something rattling catches my ear. When I go up to the next floor, I see a man with his body leaning against the wall looking at me. A state where his entire body is shivering. I was thinking about why this guy was even alive. Come to think of it, this guy was the one who spoke too much at first and then passed out when the fight began to turn serious. I approach him with the blade and say, so lucky to be alive. All of your mates are dead. But a little luck and see. You are. Hahaha As I raise the blade while laughing at him, the guy who leans back passes out and white foam comes out of his mouth, so I pull back the blade. Passed out? Confirmed. When he gets up later, I will check him and then decide if I should hire him as a clerk or not. In any case, the owner of the inn is in a better position than the manager. For a manager, in addition to cleaning, cooking, serving, dealing with money, intimidation, sweeping the yard, and bringing in guests, there are 172 more chores to do. On the other hand, in the case of the owner of an inn, counting money, taking naps, wandering around, looking around, and seeing a fortune teller is all there is to do. Gradually, I feel that I need a break, but I cant stay up with the corpses, so I have no choice but to throw the blade at the head of the fainted one. *Swish puak!* As soon as the blade gets lodged above his head He opens his eyes, and I look at him as I say, Get up before I beat you to death. My body is frozen I walk towards him, and he jumps up. I ask holding him by the chin, Do you know who I am? Low-Down Sect Leader. Clean or you die. I will clean. Quick. I hire the guy who is the escort to the young lord as a cleaner and pull out the blade. As Pervert Demon said, there was a huge hole in the wall, so I sat there looking into the night. go to the kitchen and bring alcohol. The guy who was about to start cleaning goes into the kitchen, brings drinks and sets it down. I enjoy the night view while drinking the tasteless alcohol. It seems like it was time to see the morning sun. The sound of the guy removing the dead bodies of his mates can be heard. The guy who had been cleaning for a while speaks to me in a cautious tone. Sect Leader, by any chance did the lord die? He isnt dead yet, if he died here things would have been difficult for us. I see. I ask while watching the dark night, Why did you ask? If he dies then all us escorts must die too. I confirm. I then ask, Do you know where this Baek Wei master lives? My first time hearing that name. How did the third young lord approach the Butcher? He was originally a murderer who traded with the Illusion Ghost Emperor. We knew the location. Who did the Illusion Ghost Emperor ask the Butcher to kill? It was a standby force that joined when assassinating the great young lord. They really are brothers who hate one another. Those fucking. I close my eyes. As soon as I do that, I can see the expression of the Butcher. And there was the kneeling young lord, glaring at me. Maybe it is because I had met so many insane minds, I can laugh now. I warn the cleaning guy while lingering between the dreams and reality. do not make me chase you with my knife. I understand. Suddenly, I can come up with many names of those who were treated the same way as me in the previous life. Poison Demon, Ghost Demon, Pervert Demon, Butcher, Poison Shadow Emperor, First Sword of Dongho, Evil Emperor, Heavenly Evil As soon as I think about how I became stronger in such a short time, I feel drowsy. However, the servant comes, and I go back to remembering the past lifes incidents. After I open my eyes, I stare into darkness, and I just focus on it as there is nothing to do. And wait for the light. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 192 I stayed up all night in the guesthouse to finally see the light shining. My heart falters back and forth in the black night for a long time and fortunately, the light doesnt change. It was my fault that I fell into such dim spells. The reason why I couldnt sleep like usual was because of my heart. My martial arts is getting stronger but if I decided to consider the ranks of the people in Kangho, how far towards the top would I be? Suddenly, I have such a thought. If the rankings changed, my rank would fall and rise constantly. Today too, I tried to compose a love song for the shining sun. I dont know. The reason my eyes search for the morning sun. The difference between why a poor person tries to cash out of a rag, and a rich one cashes out of a person. The difference between those who should be killed and those who dont get killed. I dont know all that. How to live without being crazy. The sin of bleeding and the promise to not die. The mind which knows to be stronger and how to kill. But the heart of a woman is more difficult to understand. The feeling of tearing the wicked to death and giving them chances despite knowing it is wrong. The anticipation held in it. Will they fall into hell or be born as beasts? Generally, one cannot know. Why can I not fall asleep? Well, I havent found an answer yet. Alcohol is a bit I suddenly lift the bottle and realize that I was drinking all night. It was only then that I walked to the ledge on the second floor and looked at the guy cleaning up the corpses and cleaning the ground. Have you cleaned everything up? I am cleaning it. The corpses? I moved them outside and covered them with mats. As soon as I make eye contact with the guy, I ask, What are you looking at? To which the guy hesitates to ask. Does the song have a title? No. It is a song with no title? I havent come up with a name yet. You. Yes? Do you not want to die? Please spare me. You are the one who came with the young lord to kill me. Sparing lives isnt an easy thing to do. If you dont want to do what you are told you should have killed yourself right then. I have saved strangers a few times, but I never once held back from killing those who betrayed me. The guy looked at me for a while as he says, If you spare me, I will do as you ask. You realize that your life is at stake, right? Yes. Pointing my finger at the disgusting part of the inn, I say, This is the guest house of Butcher. Yes, I know that. Even when I go near the kitchen I smell blood. It looks like the Butcher had taken in some innocent people and cut them. Not just the knives but even the ground is a mess of blood of body and heads. I dont know how many people he had to have killed for such a stench to come. You clean the entire guest house. If you do that, I will let you live. Wipe the blood, remove any clotted blood, remove the hair. Clean the guest house so that no smell of blood comes. Be it 10 or a 100 days, tables, chairs, chopsticks, the kitchen things throw anything which cannot be reused. Then I will give you the money to get new ones. . Turn it into a place where people can come over at times and eat food or drink. Clean and repair it can you do all that? I will. I nod. Question. The guy cautiously asks me, it isnt that I wont do it. Im just really curious so I want to ask, why are you so into changing this shabby inn I brush my hair up and roughly answer, I cannot sleep here because of this vengeful spirit which refuses to let go of me. I am planning to train here, until the master of the Butcher comes over when something special happens. There is a lot of time. Do I have to have a reason for wanting to make the place Im staying in clean? If you run, I will be the new Butcher, get it? Yes. Workers will probably come during the day or the afternoon. So, you handle the corpse disposal. Make them work, pay them, and also supervise them. I will be busy training in martial arts so you will play the role of the owner. The guy takes a deep breath and then says, Yes, I understand. Death by my hand or clean. Either one. Clean the kitchen first and it should be clean enough to invite warriors from Kangho to come and eat. And do not come to this floor for the time being. There is a good chance that I will throw a knife. In this way, I turn into a nasty owner. The previous owner was beaten to death, the entire property gets taken in by me and the only survivor of the incident is being threatened to work and forced into being a hired hand. And there is no monthly salary either. If there was a wicked business owner in this world. That would be me. I think I have to get some sleep, so I go outside the inn. If I smell blood while sleeping here, there is a risk of me using the Crazy Demon Blade technique the moment I open my eyes. I look at the sign of the guest house, then jump onto the roof of the inn and lay down on the flat surface. If I sleep here, I will wake up when the sun rises in the middle of the sky. I say to the escort before heading to bed, If you die by my hands it will be because you didnt clean right. After about 2 hours of sound sleep, I hear the voice of Pervert Demon. As soon as I open my eyes, I frown. I slept using my arm as a pillow, and my eyes stung as they were hit by sunlight and the moon. Fuck I stand up and look under the inn, like an idiot with nothing to do. Pervert Demon looks at me like I am pathetic. He asks as he brings the workers, Why are you sleeping there? I answer staying where I am, Shut up. Ah, I feel so thirty. After jumping off the roof, I look at the workers. They all seem to be people who are trained in martial arts and not just regular laborers, so I have no choice but to ask. Where did you get them from? Pervert Demon answers, From home. It meant these people belonged to him, and he tells his workers, Help them. There is a broken place near the floor. Move the bodies too. Yes, young master. Unexpectedly, this shitty face is the second son to an esteemed family. As I pull a bag out I say, If they are members of the family, then they should be given Pervert Demon says, Enough, I beat them to death, so I need to be responsible for getting rid of the bodies. Come to think of it, except for the Butcher, everyone here died by the hands of Pervert Demon. Lets head in first. As soon as Pervert Demon enters the guest house and finds the escort to the young lord, he frowns. He is alive? What is that guy? The guy who passed out. I hired him as a server. Ah In the middle of the conversation, Master Yukhap comes in from the entrance and says, I was looking for you for a while now. How did you find me? To which Yukhap says, The dead bodies outside. Yukhap says holding his nose, This isnt a place for running a business. What place smells so bloody. Pervert Demon claps his hands and focuses on the people he brought. pay attention now. Yes, young master. The guy holding the cloth over there is the escort to the young lord, so if he escapes or acts odd, kill him. I understand. Pervert Demon fans his face with his hand and tells me, let us head out and eat something. I cannot bear this place. So, I suggest something because I want to. Should we get some noodles? Pervert Demon shakes his head. I feel like throwing up at the thought of eating noodles. I cannot. Why do you think so? I think its the sight of it. Lets go. I get up with Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon. As we head to the square of the town and look for a nice place to eat, I find that people are gathering and looking at something. Going there I realize there is a soldier wearing a robe with the word Alliance stitched on the back with several more things attached. I stand there with the two of them and when people begin leaving, I move closer to the Murim Alliances building. What is this feeling? The list of achievements announced by the Murim Alliance along with their appearances. The timing of the announcement is different from the past and so is the list. Warriors I didnt know of were on the Murim achievement list. Looking over the list of the Murim Alliances enemies, there seemed to be 10 in total, and Pervert Demon says, The bounties look high. And he continues, It is Murim, so there should be a high bounty. Their skills must be great. Yukhap points to one person and says, Wow, that person has risen this high. Who? Looking at it, there was a name which read, First Sword of Dongho. Of course, this person is someone who achieved a lot in the past life. He is a member of the Five Evils which was the group that ranked as the highest in the last life. Actually, he is supposed to be ordinary, but because his sword is the best in the entire region of Dongho, strong people consider this man as the best in swordsmanship. I dont have to look to know. A state in which travelers and warriors have been replaced by pictures of the clothing they wore over their appearance. On the other hand, the list of the 10 Murim public figures to watch out for, there was no Evil Emperor, Butcher, and no special title holders like Crazy Demon, Pervert Demon, Ghost Demon, or Poison Demon. In the previous life when such a list got announced Some were captured or even killed. It seems like the announcement was made just now. Well, it feels strange to be looking at this list again from the days before I began to work earnestly in Kangho, along with these two. The voices of the Murim Alliance members could be heard. even if you accurately report the location and their doings- it will bring you a nice reward. So, I hope the brothers in Kangho will keep it in mind. Please keep an eye out. It is the Alliance Leaders command. It is right to copy this list and their appearance to pass it around. While the members of the Murim Alliance were shouting loudly and walking, a man approaches me and says, Sect Leader, it has been so long. As soon as I see the man, he bows to me. Who The man smiles as he says, I am Dan Hyuk-san, a member of the Seven Swords troops. Ah, young lord Mong is here too. Dan Hyuk-san bows to Pervert Demon too. Nice to meet you, warrior. The guy smiles as he looks at me, who is still puzzled. Sect Leader, did you forget the Seven Sword troops? There was an alliance between the Alliance Leader, Sect Leader, and young lord Mong. I was there. Only then did I turn wide eyed. Ah, right. You have suffered so much. Dan Hyuk-san suddenly snaps his fingers and speaks with a voice imbued with internal qi. Attention! And the members of Murim Alliance, who were scattered here and there, had gathered together. And as soon as they see me, they start smiling. Oh! Sect Leader? The warriors of Murim Alliance surround me and bow. Even Pervert Demon, who fought with us, was being recognized. Actually, there was never a time when I had such a friendly conversation with the Murim Alliance, so all this was dumbfounding for me. I suddenly feel my stomach burn. Come to think of my past life when I was trapped in the desire of the Murim Alliance. It occurs to me that there were some crippled or dead ones in my hands. I didnt realize it then, but I was too young, and they were too. Well, let me be silent unlike my usual self Pervert Demon grabs me by the shoulder. What? Feeling guilty? After meeting so many alliance members you are talking less. At his words, the members of the alliance burst into laughter. Hahaha Sect Leader, why would you? I look around at each of them with a shy smile. even now, I havent beaten orthodox warriors to death. Pervert Demon covers my mouth and laughs out loud as he says, Hahaha. All this while, Sect Leader went around and beat down unorthodox sect people. You all know, he is one to beat another to death. You all must have heard about the Butcher. Ah, we did. Right. He died at the hands of Sect Leader. But he wasnt on the list. I nod without saying anything and turn to Yukhap. This guy too, had nothing to say. After barely coming to my senses, I tell the alliance members, you all must have been busy since you are on duty, so drinking should be difficult. If you dont mind, I will bring some rice or tea. After I say it, there is silence. I dont understand why the atmosphere turned like this. The members turned to Dan Hyuk-san, and he says, Sect Leader, then can I get a meal? He seems to be their leader or senior. And when he says he would like to eat, the other members faces brighten. Actually, since all I possess is money, it wont be difficult for me to buy them food and drinks. Im just puzzled because Ive never done such a thing before. And I tell the Murim Alliance members. We were on our way too, let us go together. I am curious about the current happenings for Alliance Leader and the alliance. If there is a problem due to not being present for duty, you can use my name once. Dan Hyuk-san smiles. Ah, it is fine. If we use your name, the Alliance Leader will forgive us. I suddenly have to lead the two idiots and the alliance members to find a nice place to eat. How do I express this? The voices of Murim Alliance members smiling and laughing feel like drums are being pounded against my chest. Just where is this life going? One could never know. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 193 Since I was a boy born in the countryside, I decided to take them to a guest house which had a similar name. After making a simple statement, a bit of time passed, and I ended up watching the Murim members, Pervert Demon, and Ghost Demon talk and eat. Just what is this situation? The Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon who fought fiercely against the Murim Alliance in the previous life. Sharing food and eating together. Is this the harmony of the sun and moon which Taiji speaks of? At that time, why did we fight like dying lions? And why are we sitting and eating now? People then and now are the same. Well, the rice is delicious. Everyone was able to get over the awkward vibe and filled their stomachs without much conversation. It wasnt until we were done eating did we talk. Dan Hyuk-san says to Pervert Demon, Doesnt the young lord want to join the alliance? Pervert Demon answers, No. For some reason he asks Yukhap, Master Yukhap Ghost Demon shakes his head. No. Yes. Dan Hyuk-san looks at me. Actually, we are currently recruiting members by doing this and going around the areas we dont usually walk around. I heard the Alliance Leader only accepts people of a certain nature. To which he points at the two and says, Of course, the second son of the Mong family and Master Yukhap are members of Sect Leaders party, so their identities are confirmed. But silence passes after both of them coldly refuse the invitation. And after a while, an alliance member known as Yoon Ji-hak says, Sect Leader, the story that the Sect Leader is strong is spreading all through the Murim Alliance. Actually, your age is very similar to the members of the sword troops. Of course, our young lord of Mong family is young too. And when we have nothing special to do, we train hard. But I dont think we are stronger than Sect Leader. He rambles on, but Im able to understand. In the end, it seems that I was young and better than them. A question which any person with an honest nature would ask. Looking at Yoon Ji-hak, I nod. I still have a long way to go, but it is true that I am strong for my age. Yoon Ji-hak asks, Did you eat a pill? Not just the members of the alliance, but even Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon turn to me. Come to think of it, they too seemed to be curious about this. And I answer honestly. If I have to say it I fell off a cliff. It was high. Pervert Demon naturally inserts himself into the conversation. Then you hurt your head. Head no, I was given a chance. My head wasnt hurt. The members of the alliance exchange glances with each other and ask, Is that true? I answer with a serious expression. Why would I lie to you? Seriously, I am giving an honest answer. You asked me seriously and I answered the same. If this spreads, odds will be against me. Especially with people adding their own opinions into what I said. Master Yukhap asks like it was absurd, so, the pill was at the bottom of the cliff? I turn to this guy and nod. There was. But that isnt the end. One day, I went up high with young lord Mong here. We ate the Moon Pill Flower there. I felt lucky. At the mention of Moon Pill Flower, everyone seems surprised. Is that true? I look at Pervert Demon, with whom I ate it, and he nods. That part is real. Dan Hyuk-san says it like he is shocked. There must be a reason why you two are strong. Wherever we go, there is a chance waiting. I dont know if you know it, but we call you the New South Six Dragons, including the four rising warriors of the south, Sect Leader of Low-Down, and young lord Mong. Pervert Demon and I spurt the tea we were drinking at what we heard. Puah. Usually, it is called Six Dragons in short. I wipe my mouth as I look at him. Six Dragons? This Crazy Demon? Dan Hyuk-san nods. Yes. Pervert Demon asks, Is this similar to the New North Five Tigers? Dan Hyuk-san chuckles. You seem to know. Right. Kangho doesnt like it if there is no comparison and competition. The tigers in the north and dragons in the south. These groups emerged for the strong. In a way, they are the warriors who have similar skills comparable to the top 10 strong people we have today in Murim. Here, the divider for the north and south wasnt the Yangtze River but the Murim Alliance. That is because the Murim Alliance is at the center of it. Coincidentally, there are many orthodox troops in the south, and many Murim sects in the north. What came from this was a title for the members who often changed depending on the results of peoples actions. In any case, there is no doubt that the title will attract the attention of the strong people, and it is a title which women envy, and it is a list to catch the unorthodox. The title of the North Honams Dragon is a perfect name. And so, my situation changed from being Murims Crazy Demon to a warrior belonging to a dragon. Therefore, if one belongs to this Honam Dragons, they will become popular and receive things like wealth, challenges, honor, and also live a tiring life. One of the most absurd things about this is I am popular now? Hopefully, that cannot be. Why do I feel like I am going to be more popular with those who know me, than with women? I mumble, unable to understand. Who the hell put me in the Six Dragons? Dan Hyuk-san coughs. The Alliance Leader He must have lost it. Uh. Why is he doing this suddenly though? Dan Hyuk-san opens his eyes wide. Sect Leader, the other warriors are special cases that we werent too sure about putting in. That wasnt me? Yes. I am sorry, but because the Alliance Leader mentioned it, it will not be easy for you to be removed from the list. How can this be, does that mean I am forced to be the popular guy? Somehow, I ended up being one of the Six Dragons. Womens attention goes to Pervert Demon, and I get people crazy for martial arts, so I have a feeling that the likelihood of people coming over and talking to me will increase. This has to be a fucking Dan Hyuk-san says, Originally, the group was known as the Southern Four Dragon. However, because he questioned whether or not he would be able to defeat Sect Leader and the Mong familys young lord he decided to turn the Four Dragons to the Six Dragons. Because of Alliance Leaders words, the reputation of you two is being spread around tremendously in Kangho. And I suddenly have this thought. It is said that Im So-baek is having a tough time lately. He wasnt the kind who would pass on a tough task to others, but it feels like this was enough to lighten the burden. I suddenly made eye contact with Pervert Demon and mumble. a shitting dragon. Amazing. When I tease him, he pushes back. A country dragon who fell off a cliff and injured his head. Shocking. The guy takes a hit at me. It is an honor. An honor. It is nothing. I think it is a blessing for Kangho for this guy to move his hands. I was worried that they would move only to mess around with the lower body, but I am not a man who cares about that. I am a man who can feed him knowledge at any time. I was going to bully the guy, but I stopped caring. In the long run it feels like it wont matter if I lose a little. After eating and talking with the members of the Murim Alliance Before I knew it, I was reborn as a promising and upcoming warrior from my first lifes Murim achievements. Of course, it wasnt what I expected, but, as usual, in this world you cannot get what you want. And since we fought with the Murim Alliance Leader before, it can be said that this level of fame was rather late to come. Strangely, contrary to the expectant eyes of some members of the alliance Neither I nor Pervert Demon had shown signs of joy. Curiously, Ghost Demon from the past life was listening to this without a sign of envy. After all, the three of us are men with no interest in such things. In the meantime, it was always difficult to find similarities between us three, but I was able to find a couple trivial things. If we think about Its probably because our goal is to be much better than we are now. How can those who harassed many people be happy with a title which those who are even moderately strong can get? I ask Pervert Demon, how is it? The feeling of being a part of the Six Dragons? He answers back without a thought. It is an honor. Like one Phoenix and Two Immortal beings, the reputation aside. I recall the One Phoenix, Two Immortals as one rumored to be beautiful, so I remember it. Up until the end, the members of the alliance ask me in a serious tone, Sect Leader. Yes. What do we do to get stronger? I look up and down at the guy and ask, Is there any reason to ask me? Yes, I actually ask this often. I also asked the seniors in Kangho that Ive met, and I asked the colleagues and friends I know. Because each time the answer is different and the idea is different, it has turned into a habit to ask this question. That is why I was curious about the thoughts of Sect Leader. I nod and point my chopsticks ahead. The position of the chopsticks box and the number of chopsticks. . Then, with my hand, I point to everything around- even toward the people around who are eating rice. The distance to the entrance, the thickness of the folding screen there, the number of steps and speed when someone runs from the front door to there. Number of steps to get here. I point to the ceiling. The height of the ceiling, the distinction between the house from the upper floor and the lower one, the consistency of the conversation or the noise outside. The material of the floor, how thick it is, your nature, the facial expressions, the habits, the health, wounds. The skills of young lord Mong and Master Yukhap who are with me. When we all join forces, what level would our strength be? I point my finger at my temple. as I ate, I roughly estimated all of it. It wouldnt happen, but there might be a warrior or someone who tries to attack the members of the alliance. For example, can I pierce the ceiling with chopsticks or throw them at the table beyond that fold screen? Also, it is the state of being aware of how the noise around you is changing. While I speak for a long time, the members of the alliance all look at me with their mouths wide open. And I say in a serious tone, Eating food, while drinking tea, when talking with you all too, I was constantly thinking. The way to become strong. You might ask yourself why I answered like this but, this is just how I think. I look at the people of the Murim Alliance. To be strong means to be alive. And to be strong means to create chances to live. That way there is a chance to live even if you dont come across the pills around you. But surviving you have no choice but to train little by little every day to become stronger. I look at the member who asked the question. You got your answer? Yes, Sect Leader. The other members respond to me too. We heard you. I will keep that in mind. I nod and stand up as everyone seems to have emptied their tea. You must be busy, let us move. . . . After calculating the cost, I say bye to the alliance members, standing side by side, with the Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon. We bid farewell with warm words and talk again. The three of us, who belonged to the enemies of the Murim Alliance, were speaking happily with them. As soon as the alliance members disappear, I sigh. Huhuh. Why is it so hard to meet and talk with strangers? I can never understand. Pervert Demon, who is next to me, sighs and asks, Country guy, did you really notice everything inside and out? What? Thickness of the folding screen? Wall thickness? Material of the ceiling? Was that for real? Fuck. At least answer right. Ghost Demon turns to me. I was aware of half of them. I click my tongue and put my hands behind my back. What are you that curious about? Pervert Demon says, I am asking if that was real. How can you know all that? You were eating with such focus. After confirming that the members of alliance had vanished I say, I just checked the box of chopsticks and ate. Is there anything more to do? I pointed my finger at what was close and told them whatever I could. Pervert Demon bursts into laughter like a crazy guy. And Ghost Demon frowns as he asks me, Why did you lie? I turn to him and say, I didnt tell them anything bad. I just meant for them to be careful. It is the teachings of the Six Dragons; shouldnt everyone register this into their hearts? Only then did Ghost Demon, who understood, smile. Well, yes. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 194 I look at the list of unfamiliar Murim people and find that I am included in the Six Dragons- a group being collectively known as the rising warriors of the orthodox side. I am Low-Down Sect Leader, Lee Zaha, one of the Six Dragons. However, obsessing over special titles makes life tough and worthless, so I head for the shabby guesthouse that should have finished being cleaned. Contrary to how he looks, Ghost Demon says with clear words, Why should I stay in such a filthy place? We have a lot of money. A secluded guest house is the most comfortable place. We can have the escort do all the cleaning. I want to stay in the residences in the cities and challenge Sword Demon senior more. His swordsmanship was impressive. If I stay here, to go there is so Ghost Demon looks at Pervert Demon. Contact me and I will come to you. Ghost Demon competed in swordsmanship and lost, and that seemed to leave a stain on his heart for now. This is the nature of this guy. It is because he was preparing for his revenge in a very systematic manner for a long time. Actually, it is right for a person of Kangho to want to be strong. Pervert Demon responds, You are welcome to spar, but if you try to fight without training then it will be more unpleasant. The right time to train is important and I will arrange it. But it isnt now. I get it. It was because of Ghost Demons determination that he could focus on training to beat Sword Demon. After a while, we arrived at the Heavenly Ruler Guest House, and I spoke to the two who were walking. This definitely looks cleaner than before, a nice guest house and its not smelly now. What? With my finger, I point to the signpost. Look. Traces of the Butcher are still here. I did kill him, but to be honest, the Butcher is stronger than you two. Pervert Demon nods his head. Then how strong will the master of that man be? If you beat his disciple to death and use the guest house of his, he is bound to feel uncomfortable and anxious. Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon look blankly at me. I convey my words. If I can get stronger by embracing the discomfort, I can endure it. Six Dragons or shit. I dont know. For a while, I want to forget about the Low-Down Sect, the subordinates, and the Demonic Cult. Butcher is strong. So, you both should be careful. Actually, this is similar to the psychological state that the Ghost Demon is in after being defeated by Sword Demon. For the time being, all I can think of is to get stronger. After confirming that the eyes of the two changed, I wrap it up briefly. I confirm. The two demons also respond to my words. I confirm. I confirm too. I look at the two people as they dispersed after a while, then go into the guesthouse. The warriors of the Mong family were waiting to speak to me. Sect Leader, you are here? You have done so much. Your young master has gone, so go. Looking around, I noticed the door at the entrance was repaired, and the bodies were moved to the cart. A few people were making repairs to the wall of the floor and were putting new boards up. And when I took out a pouch from my pocket all of them waved their hands Sect Leader, the young master told us to not accept any money, we will leave. I am not that guys subordinate. I take out coins which can be used to drink alcohol and pass it to each one of them. Have a drink and head home. The warriors had awkward faces and say, Thank you, I will use it well. One by one, the warriors leave, and one person says, Sect Leader? Yes. It is the first time we came to see that our young master has a friend who isnt a woman but a man. It will not be easy because of his temper and his self-centered nature, but he has suffered too much. I nod my head. I am not his friend, so dont feel grateful to me. Yes. Then, please do well in the future. Shaking my hand, I say, Ah, do not worry. I will often beat him onto the right path whenever he strays. As you all know, this guy is the type of guy who needs to be hit. The warrior who spoke to me was in his mid-twenties and says in a calm tone, You are right. He is on the verge of being kicked out of the house, so please do beat him often. We will deliver this news to the head too. Then I smile and answer. I can handle that. Yes. When I look into the kitchen, I see the escort of the young lord washing the floor. And I realize something odd. He didnt run? It wouldnt have been strange for him to leave with only the warriors of the Mong family in the guest house. you ate? The escort replies, I had some dumplings. Where did you get the dumplings? The warriors of the Mong family were giving them out. And there were some food ingredients in here, so I made them. Why didnt you run? The escort says while mopping, I made a promise, so I will think about it after cleaning. Is that all? Yes. I smile and look at the guy. I dont know what this one was thinking. I had the feeling that big and small changes were happening all at once in my life, and yet I was accepting them all. A dark evening. While I sit cross legged on the floor, I think about how this is a place that receives guests. I should have put a sign up saying that this place was closed for the time being. I sit in the place where the tables were put together, and quietly wait for the guests to speak. The guest who is sitting there says, Arent you open for business? The escort sticks his head out of the kitchen. No. Where is the Butchering one? My eyes blink open at that. Butchering? Since it is a word referring to the guy who kills, it meant he could be a sahyung or a person who knew the Butcher. I uncross my legs and look over the railing of the second floor. A man in his 40s with a black fishing rod asks me, Who are you? I answer by looking into the mans eyes. The one who killed the Butcher. The man smiles and says, You? It is impossible. Where is my sajae? Who does this guy think I am? Even after I speak the truth, the guy doesnt seem to believe me. At this time, a woman dressed in red comes from the entrance and says, Josu Sahyung, I am late. The old man looks at her. Since what she held in her hand was a Horse Tack, I could guess who the woman was. I saw this woman for the first time. Samae coachman, come here. The woman looks slightly surprised. Who are you? And in this way, Jo Do-pyun, becomes the disciple of Master Baek Wei. The simple meaning of butchering, whipping, and cutting. In an occupational sense, a fisherman, animal butcherer, and horse trainer. It was like watching the Low-Down Sect I made. The guy with fishing rod says to her, That guy killed the disciple. If the guy in the kitchen doesnt want to die, come here. At that time, a tall man at the entrance of the place lowers his head and appears as if pulling himself out. Jo Sahyung, I am here. I ask this new giant. What are you? Are you some late coming actor? You are late knowing you will be eating? The giant answers as he takes a hatchet out of his waistband and places it on the table. What is that mad man? Sahyung? The fisherman shakes his head. I dont know. Trying to figure him out. It was the first time I had seen a hatchet that looked like this. Judging by the fact that he had animal skin on like a bandit, he must be a woodcutter. I look at the Woodcutter. Then you must be the woodcutter. Judging by their level of martial arts, it seems like the hierarchy ranking from strongest to weakest is the Fisherman, Butcher, Woodcutter, and Coachman. At this time, the escort comes from the kitchen and speaks, Senior Butcher and young lord were chasing the Low-Down Sect Leader. Wait. Should I get you a drink? The woodcutter, who came in last, waves his hand. It is obvious the alcohol wouldnt be good, so it is fine. Yes. Only then did the guy smile and say, Ah, you must be the reinforcements called in by the young lord. Come down here. I am in a position to do anything, so I have things to say. I also smile and say, You are in a position, my ass. The three of them look up. If the order of power is close to skill, then the Fisherman is stronger than the Butcher. It meant that the Woodcutter and the Coachman are on the same level as the Butcher or a step below. In any case, if the three of them work together, I dont have a winning chance. Of course, dying and killing are different things. During the middle of a moment of silence, I hear a conversation between two people in front of the guesthouse. The moment that I decided to deal with these people, two more people appeared making me sigh. Are there more? The conversation outside was like this, Let us have one drink. I dont want to man; the guesthouse is so dirty. It is obvious that the food will not taste good. Dont be particularly anxious about it, just one drink and we can go out to have fun. But why in this place? Alcohol is expensive in the city. Among them, the food places are more expensive. Save money by drinking here. It is frustrating to go around with someone who is like you. Why are you the one being frustrated? Two people move to the entrance and sit down in an empty seat. I nod and look at the new guests. Fortunately, it was shit face and Yukhap. To decipher their conversation, they saw the three idiots come and chased after them. Of course, they are ones who have a lot of awareness so they must have noticed them right away. Pervert Demon looks at me. Take the order. This shitty server. A guest came in so why are you staring at me like that? Ghost Demon taps Pervert Demon. Why are you speaking so carelessly to the server? Look at him. This place is no cheap one. Ghost Demon looks at me. True. The Fisherman, Woodcutter and Coachman all glare at the two. It seems like they were shocked at what they were seeing. At that time, the escort says, The young lord is away, so the two of you must wait. The inside of the guest house is under renovation, so the only thing we can offer you is the alcohol so wait. What is this atmosphere? It feels like chaos was rising in the shabby guest house, and the Pervert Demon tells the Coachman who was glaring, Why are you staring like that? Never seen a handsome man? The red-haired woman snorts and touches her horse tack. And their leader, the Fisherman, answers, Ah, did you guys come to help the young lord? The second son of the Mong family and Master Yukhap? I know that the Mong family belongs to the orthodox but to have Master Yukhap here. When did you stick with Demonic Cult? The two demons keep their mouths shut. The Fisherman looks up at me, I was worried because you looked young, but you are the Low-Down Sect Leader. Did you really kill the Butcher? It is impossible with your skills. Or did the young lords troops betray him? I sigh. Actually Go on. The time it took to kill him was equivalent to how long it takes me to drink a cup of tea. Everyone will be shocked, but I had to avenge my sahyung. To which the Fisherman says, There arent many warriors who can kill him in that timeframe. You, even more so. I will torture you to find out what happened. This time, the Fisherman looks at the two demons. The two of you, dont get hurt by stepping in without permission. I put my hands together and ask him and the other two, I get it now, so lets head outside. I am tired of watching this guesthouse collapse. I am Low-Down Sect Leader. It is true that I killed the Butcher. I have no intention of running away, so lets head out and fight. Cause I wont run away. The three of them stand up. Come out now. I watch the two demons while the others go out and I have nothing much to say. I confirm. Pervert Demon gets up and smiles with scary eyes. I will fight the red coachman. Master Yukhap wasnt sure of the situation and asks, Why? To which Pervert Demon says, I naturally become stronger when I fight against women. It is my instinct so dont ask anymore. After staring at him for a while, Yukhap says, I confirm. As a result, the fight between this guy and the Red Coachman, Ghost Demon and the Woodcutter and Crazy Demon vs Fisherman is confirmed. Perhaps the one who will referee this will be the escort cleaning the kitchen. Horse Tack is a general term for equipment or accessories equipped on horses and other equines in the course of their use as domesticated animals. This equipment includes such items as saddles, stirrups, bridles, halters, reins, bits, and harnesses. In this case, horse tack is being used synonymously with horse whip. Samae is the term for a female disciple while Sajae is a generalized umbrella term for a younger disciple regardless of gender. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 195 Heavenly Ruler Guesthouse. Six people confront each other at the location of the battle. And no matter how much it looks like a fight between men, the strength from each person seems serious, and the Fisherman asks me, Low-Down Sect Leader, would you like to fight us as a group or one-on-one? It is as you please. The escort appears at the entrance and speaks, What do you mean as a group or individually? Are you saying that you want Low-Down Sect Leader to go against three? I wont allow it. It will be one-on-one. The Fisherman looks at the escort with an absurd expression. Allow? Even I turn towards the escort. Allow? Did this bastard come from the kitchen with half a brain because of the rotting blood? Did your soul split into two because you were hit? Have you lost it? You want to be dead? The escort speaks puzzled. I am sorry. And the Fisherman says, Young master of the Mong family and Master Yukhap. Are you guys going to intervene after I warned you nicely? Pervert Demon frowns and says, Shut it. Please dont speak. I just hate hearing everything coming out of your mouth. I will kill you. Everyone looks at the guy who is getting riled up. The Fisherman says, You came to help Low-Down Sect Leader. Fine. Then it will be an individual one-on-one. Samae. Red Coachman replies, Yes, sahyung. You go first. The Fisherman and Woodcutter step back letting her take the center stage. The Fisherman looks around at everyone while the Coachman spins her horse tack. First, he checks the atmosphere and looks around. He couldnt tell if the Pervert Demon had red eyes because he couldnt sleep or because he was afraid of his anger. Did this man really kill the Butcher? If true, it means he is stronger than me. Since the skills of Sect Leader were unknown, he shifted his gaze to the ugly guy. Master Yukhap. Aside from the fact that the man looked sober, he looked ugly and scary. Moreover, he was the most reticent of the three and seemed most skillful. Except for now. The Coachman glares at the young man, the second son of the Mong family. Usually, the type of man she hates the most A guy who is like him The one who stares at the body and assesses it. A flirt. All of these were true but right now she had displeasure looking at all three of them. The woman points her finger at Pervert Demon You, come out. Momentarily, Pervert Demon smiles and even winks at her. He walks closer and says, Noona? . The woman frowns. Why am I your noona? Ah, you want shorter words? I do too. Being in your mid 20s means one doesnt know anything yet. What are you talking about? In the midst of feeling that the atmosphere is odd, the woman looks at Low-Down Sect Leader, who is watching while touching his arm. He is swearing like there are goosebumps on his arms. Hmm. When the second son of the Mong family approached, the woman felt a chill run down her spine, so she turned around slowly. Looking at this one up close, he isnt so odd. In the meantime, the guy called Mong Rang, rolls his eyes, and says, The tack is good. Is that your taste? Is it spanking? Where do you want to hit? In an instant she takes 6 to 7 steps back and increases the distance. Pabababak! She feels another chill run down her spine. . Mong Rang closes the distance as he says, I like the combination. Frozen and then whipped? Nice. I will respect your preference. Before the woman can say anything, Low-Down Sect Leader shouts in an angry voice. Shitty face, do it in moderation! Or I will beat you to death. She says, Do as the Sect Leader is telling you and keep that mouth shut. Did you just order me? Me? Mong Rang suddenly loosens the front of his shirt and reveals his bare chest. And his skin is full of torture wounds. Mong Rang says, I definitely told you to not say this or that. Say one more word and my pants come down, and I will take off the next one within too. Do not provoke me, cause if you do At that time, Low-Down Sect Leader screams. Shut up! Miss Coachman do not provoke him. He is a Pervert Demon. What? Is that something to be scared of? Or intimidating? Well, the woman did swing her stick which was longer against Pervert Demon. Whip! Pervert Demons movements were very light. As soon as the fight started, everything felt cold and everyones attention went to his footwork and ice arts. Low-Down Sect Leader continued to talk. He is the most famous and has the best sword in the Orthodox Sect. If you get caught, your bones will not be able to be found anymore. Watch out for his ice skills. He is a master of it. As far as I know, I heard that he learned to immobilize his opponents, but the rest will be left to you. What he does after immobilizing you. A persons true nature is a mystery to all. Yukhap, what are you imagining? Your face is turning red, you cannot? To which Yukhap groans. Shut up now! The woman finds that Pervert Demon is smiling and looks at him. In an instant, that idiot says, Ah, this atmosphere is At that time, the Fisherman too involves himself into the conversation. Samae, are you really letting such a childish talk shake you? I will tell master that you need some self-reflection. Keep calm now. Yes, sahyung. In an instant, the Coachmans face turns pale, and her whip quickly regains stability. Strangely, both allies and enemies were being harassed, so more skill couldnt be shown. In the meantime, Low-Down Sect Leader speaks in a sarcastic tone. Good luck. It must be the price of torture. Master is quite scary. Such a pitiful guy. It is sad, you know. Did you say it is teacher Baek Wei? The mind of the Butcher is also greatly damaged, but you people are no different. The life of a frightened rat. Look now, you all. Is he your master? That master Baek Wei is coming now. The woman moves her head slightly not realizing and steps back with a blow to the shoulder. Puak! Huk! The fisherman groans. Samae! How could master even come here! Low-Down Sect Leader, if you talk one more time, then it will turn into a group fight. Low-Down Sect Leader responds. Confirmed. Even Master Yukhap, who had been quiet, opened his mouth in a soft tone. I confirm. Pervert Demon, who is running amok here and there, giggles, and performs palm technique. But half of his movement seems like a playful dance. Samae, are you feeling wet? Is it slowly changing? Is it the first time you are getting hit by ice arts? Cold? Want to take it off? Every time she tried to speak, her words felt cut off, and coldness seeped in making her mind dizzy. . And only then did the woman feel an odd chill run from her shoulder. A situation where her left arm turned heavy. In the end, she tries to drive out the chill spreading in her arm by using her internal qi. Pervert Demon says, Didnt your master torture with ice arts? What a disappointment. Traditionally, torture is basically heat, cold, hunger and isolation. What comes next? Maybe adding bugs to it. Do you like snakes? Bugs? Maybe centipedes? How about a frog? I heard it tastes good in the mouth. The Fisherman watching this says, We lost the first one. When the Fisherman says so, the Woodcutter brandishes his weapon. Swish! At that moment, Pervert Demons hand wraps around with the ice and he holds his hand out to grab the blade of the hatchet. At the same time, the woodcutter too counters the attack of Pervert Demon with a clenched fist. Kwaaaang! While Pervert Demon quickly pushes himself back from a lying position, Low-Down Sect Leader appears then and grabs him. At the same time, Woodcutter catches the Coachman and throws her back. At that moment, a thumping sound can be heard as the coat of the Woodcutter begins to tear down. It seems that he had mastered external and internal arts, and this showed his thick veins. The Fisherman waves his hand and releases the fishing line, wraps it around the waist of the Coachman and pulls her tightly, making her land beside him. And he scolds her. Samae, what atrocity is this? You didnt even show your skills properly. Sorry, sahyung. Meditate in the back. Yes. The Woodcutter fist hits Pervert Demon who says, what is this? I was in the middle of enjoying it. To which Fisherman says, Do not feel too bad. If all three of us are defeated, we will put our lives here the first one we admit as our defeat. Who will defeat the next? When Yukhap steps ahead, Low-Down Sect Leader grabs him. Wait, wait. Everyone wait now. I responded by using my head because the Fisherman intervened in the spar. I look at Yukhap and say, Yukhap, I will deal with the Woodcutter. Yukhap is unable to hold back his expressions, he is looking at me with his back shown to the enemies. But why? I respond looking at the two. Since you are the strongest of the three, you should deal with that old man. It is right for me to go against the mid-level guy. It should be a grand fight. Ah, is that so? But of course, I am the strongest of the three. But they cannot know it. In any case, this guy was the scariest one and the older person and Yukhap should do fine. Actually, the skills of the Woodcutter arent much different from the Butcher. Yukhap would have a hard time then it would be meaningless to try something when the opponent is clearly stronger. No matter how highly I evaluate the skills of the demons from the past life, defeating this man now, the odds werent favorable. After making Yukhap step back, I go to the center and look at the opponent. I notice that he is calmer than the Coachman and had a strong pride because of his stoic body and expressions. In order to shake this guys mind, I say to the escort there, Yah, escort brat. Yes. Bring the knife of the Butcher. Yes. I want to show off the weapon, so I tell the guy, I want the weapon brought to me so dont show off your muscles and just wait. The Woodcutter looks at me and says, Bring it. In the meantime, I look at the faces of the Fisherman and the Coach. Be it in a group or individually, the goal is to look at the fight and bring results. Bang- I hear the sound as the escort brings and holds out the weapon to me. Here. Taking the blade, I say, There are several knives of his, but you brought the knife with the purpose of killing pigs. As expected. Woodcutter frowns. Is that the knife of the Butcher? I wave the weapon at him. Well. Ask him after death. I grin and the Woodcutter charges at me with his hatchet. I use footwork to avoid the attack, but the guy is so adamant that he begins to follow me. Fortunately, the guys footwork isnt swift. I warm up in front of the guesthouse making a big circle around the guesthouse and behind the Woodcutter. I look up at the sky and realize the moon is a little pretty today. And moonlight. Yahh. I was in a good mood for a moment, and I laughed out loud at that. Noona is a way a young man can address an older female. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 196 The cold air feels pleasant under the moonlight. As soon as I sense that the muscular man with the axe is coming for me, my smile vanishes. Should I torture him to find out where master Baek Wei is? Or should it be a clean kill? My logic is all wrong. In a fight, there wont be any time to contemplate such worries. Of course, if the opponent is skilled, the answer is to kill them with all my might. I always have a habit of imagining things like this. Wouldnt master Baek Wei capture the warriors of other sects to torture and experiment on them, and then accept them as disciples and teach them? Being a disciple is kind of a gift though. In reality, it would be more correct to see them as a living experiment. The reason I am making such a guess? It is because the characteristics of the martial arts used by the fisherman, the woodcutter, and the coachmen have nothing in common. The age, the footwork, weaponry, and even the air around them feel different. At that moment, I was thrilled to see the face of the person who I had no previous connection with, no reason and no clear recognition. Master Baek Wei? Suddenly, I have a thought. Did I already meet this guy? Of course, it is just a thought, which isnt very likely now. Actually, even in my previous life, the guy was always ranked higher in the Murims watch out list compared to me, Pervert Demon, and Ghost Demon. Never got hurt by anyone. Even when I was being chased by all sorts of obstacles, that guy must have been active everywhere. First of all, the skills of his disciples are all too high. The reason why the coachman got vainly defeated was because Pervert Demon was strong and a bit too perverted that she didnt get to show her skills. Of course, my words played a part. On the other hand, the other two and the Butcher were strong. At that moment, I could sense an axe flying towards the back of my head. And so, as soon as I turn, I block the weapon. Kang! At the same time, I use Crazy Demon Blade technique, but The woodcutter swings his hatchet with a movement closely identical to the image of the Butcher I went against, and it gets perfectly blocked. I ask the guy as I block his attack. Since when did you get caught by Master Baek Wei? . He doesnt answer. I see a few openings in the guys movements, but I dont fight back. That is because the openings I can spot easily are never really true openings. It was the same with Butcher, and with this guy too. They have amazing external skills, so I recklessly move ahead. And in the aftermath, I get a bit anxious that I might get caught in his attack and get torn to pieces. Sometimes, it feels like my brilliant imagination is holding me back. But I am cautious this time and now I am able to figure out his quirks. If the Butcher was the type to abandon his defenses to go purely on the offense, then the woodcutter is the type to wait for the moment an opponent counters to rip the opponent apart. It is a fight which depends on one lethal hit, so I have to be extra careful. Suddenly, I hear the voice of Pervert Demon who is watching. Be careful now. It seems like he has better self-defense techniques. A one hit fight. As he speaks, the fisherman adds on, Disciple, the Low-Down Sect Leader figured out your characteristics. Keep calm now. Yes. A situation in which Pervert Demon, the fisherman and I all were able to read the situation. As anticipated by everyone, the woodcutter swishes and swashes his hatchet in an attempt to grab me and each time I feel a tingle run down my spine. Will I die if I get caught? This guy is big enough to crush down an adult man with one hand. It is revealed that he is hoping to catch me. I smile looking at them and brandish the butcher knife in my hand and the woodcutter follows. Do not laugh. I confirm. I deliberately move away from the field of vision of the fisherman. It is because at some point it feels like that guy will throw in his fishing rod. After getting enough distance I prepared for a one-shot fight. Somehow, if I manage to apply the Waning Moon Ice technique to the bare hands of the woodcutter, I feel like my whole hand will be crushed if caught, so I decide to refrain from using that method. Unlike when I fought with Butcher, I erase each and every technique Im able to use. Palm technique, Ice technique, Sword Wind, Sword Qi, White Flame and more I forget everything. The powerful attacks are what takes time. And unfolding them right away would only make them less effective. I exclude all of my usual tricks, and come to the conclusion that the only one that stands a chance is the Iron Wall Defense technique. And just like when I fought against Ghost Demon, After a long fight, I feel good on one side. Nice. I am an ideal opponent for the woodcutter. Specifically, I am accustomed to the sword technique of the Butcher and so was he. Since the Butcher is his sahyung, he was able to block all of my Crazy Demon Blade technique. And without hesitation I throw the Butcher knife towards his face. Swish! As soon as I pull out the wooden sword from my waist, the Waning Moon Ice Technique is infused. The woodcutter interjects the Butcher knife that flew for his face and takes down the cold arts I infused in it and grabs the sword with his left hand. After I unfold Sword Shield, I infuse it with ice arts in front of me like a large shield. I hold the sword at him, ready for him if he comes breaking the shield. In an instant, the woodcutter appears as expected and shatters the Sword Shield. He grabs the blade of the wooden sword with his bare hand and then strikes his hatchet down on me. I aim for an opening and catch his wrist with my left hand. Tak! He then suddenly begins to inhale like he is getting ready to perform a technique and he spreads his arms left and right, releasing a wave of qi. The ground around him hollows out and even the pile of stones around begin to get swept away. Puak! I infuse ice qi into the wooden sword and my left hand, but the woodcutter dispels them with just a single self-defense move. He seems to be using the Evil Way Martial Arts which works for a short time. Because I have been pretending to be weak, I retreat in a staggering form even at the slightest hit. However, he doesnt lose sight of the sword even while moving midair. For a moment, I thought he would give up the defense and charge. It reminds me of the various discussions I had with Ghost Demon. I remember something and push it into the thin wooden sword that senior gave me. Elder Heos and the Ghost Demons serious expressions overlap as I remember our conversations about the sword. Time is going to be tight. It felt like a moment was turning into eternity. The wild beast, which is running at me, looks like a beast of the mountain with a storm around his body. Born as an incredibly strong beast since birth, he has the appearance of a beast that caught the hunter. While keeping an eye on the beast, like a person waiting for death, I look at the blade being infused with the Shadow Moon Martial Arts. It is very nice to see this here. I even laugh. I cant kill the woodcutter with this, so my head and my dantian begin to work. And in an instant, a dangerous combination of Yin and Yang wraps itself around my wooden sword. Fortunately, the sword turns red, and I swing it at the woodcutter. The smiling expression of the woodcutter holding the blade of the wooden sword with his big hand is impressive. In an instant, his hand gets caught along the path of my sword and his expression changes. He holds out his right hand which was covering my face. But when the big palm covered my face, Purple Cloud Enhanced Sword erupted from my wooden sword. I hear a Puak sound and then step back. . I cant see it clearly because his palm was still blocking my vision, but I was already covered in his blood. And the corpse of his, which was cut diagonally, falls to the ground and there is no blood. Just the slash of a sword mark. As if he had been cut by a thick sword, the part of his body that came in contact with the sword had completely disappeared. Looking back after the blood stopped, I see the fisherman, the coachman, the two demons, and the escort. I wipe the blood from my eyes with the palm of my hand and say as I walk, Did I win? As I smile happily, I can feel the blood running down my face. I look at the guest house and say, I defeated him and am here. This is the first time I have seen a strong woodcutter. Right? No one responds to me. Even if Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon ignore my words, the others shouldnt. Escort, am I wrong? Right. I look at Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon. The reason I came out second to fight and killed the woodcutter is because I had to. And now when the Three Demons take down the fisherman, my plan will be perfect. I smile looking at Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon. This can be fed to a passing dog. In an instant, I turn my head and look at the fisherman. He snatches the coachman who is there seated and begins to run using footwork. In my shock, I take a couple steps, but the fisherman is already enveloped in darkness. Master Yukhap tells me, Must have expected something like this. Such an evil one. To sacrifice the na?ve woodcutter and run away like this confirming he is powerless. He wouldnt have been confident in the three-on-one. I nod and tell him, Is this a win or a loss? To which he gives a simple answer. From the start, we were planning to catch master Baek Wei from this. Suddenly, Pervert Demon sighs and gazes into the darkness before speaking. I head home this way and will bring clothes and weapons. I will come back after telling master. I ask Pervert Demon who heads for darkness. What? He answers, Come to think of it, I think the inn is more comfortable. Damned I say to Pervert Demon buried in darkness. Vegetable dumplings on the way. I get it. In front of the guest house, I take my shirt off and wipe away the blood on my face and hands. Yukhap tells me, Sect Leader, if I fought, I would have struggled. You did well. It was nothing. Let us go in. After taking a deep breath, I look at the sign of the guest house. An inn with the smell of blood. The escort answers. Right. I take out a pouch from my jacket and then take out coins and hand them to the escort. Go and get some drinks. The escort asks me the same thing that Cha Sung-tae did. Snacks? Buy the snacks you like. A lot. I understand. I enter the inn with Yukhap and sit down at a table and take a short break. Master Yukhap, who sat across from me, let out a long sigh. I dont know how this Baek Wei is, but he has such kinds of disciples. I keep quiet about things Im unsure of. After thinking about something for a while, Yukhap says, I will clean the quarters we were given and bring in the swords of sahyungs and come back. Are we drinking? Why do you keep coming here? Just rest in the inn. Master Yukhap stands up and answers with a calm expression. I cannot do that. Rest you know. Once again, Yukhap passes out in the guest house, and I am up alone. The Butcher died, and so did the Woodcutter. The servants of the young lord died, the poor people caught by the Butcher died, and I was alone feeling thrilled. A warm atmosphere for the souls who gave the smell of blood to this place to linger around. I try to see with my eyes, but I see nothing. I imagine the shape of a person in the empty seat of the table in the inn. Clothes, face, expression, the tone of voice, form of martial arts, thoughts of the previous life. In an instant, the man in my intuition and imagination is sitting there. Teacher Baek Wei. The man who drove Moyong Baek, the Poison Demon, to the brink of burn out in just a couple of conversations. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 197 There are many reasons as to why I suspect master Baek Wei as the Demonic Gentleman . The first is because I have the Shadow Moon Martial arts as a gift. What is the intention of giving me an ice art as a gift when we met just once? The intentions were clear. The Demonic Gentleman probably investigated me before bringing the martial arts to Moyong Baek. And what did he find when he investigated? Most of them must have gotten the information after they mercilessly beat the leaders of the unorthodox sects to death. Be it any number of men. In particular I remember the leaders being brutally beaten to death. So, I am definitely on his list. Like the Butcher or Woodcutter. Second, is the Shadow Moon Martial Arts normal? No. The Shadow Moon Martial Arts is a book which describes the method of using Yin energy and the uniqueness it holds to fight. In other words, it is a martial arts and an ice arts which kills people with the unique Yin energy. And Moyong Baek who had this, was in a state of burnout to the point where he seemed dead. Just thinking about it, it seemed to be just before a major event. I still remember what Moyong Baek told me. If the creator of this martial arts is alive, I want to find him and kill him. It was because the martial arts training method, which showed no mercy, was written there. So, this made Moyong Baeks heart turn dark, and then he passed it to me. However, there is one fact that Demonic Gentleman will never know about me. First of all, I have the Heavenly Pearl. In other words, it means that there is no need to build up anything specific for my Yin energy to grow. I wonder if he passed the martial arts onto me hoping I would turn into something of an evil being. Like the Butcher. Maybe I would have if I didnt have the Heavenly Pearl. If I was a guy who went crazy about killing, revenge or martial arts, I could have continued to kill after I got the martial arts. Of course, due to my inclination, the blade would have headed for the unorthodox sects If I had killed people every other day, took their qi, and used it for my martial arts, I would have become a Crazy Demon extremely quickly. It seems like that was his hidden intention. So, all these thoughts from the start and how the Demonic Gentleman handed me the martial arts is clear. For the simple reason to compete with myself? He isnt such a simple guy. As I solidified that Baek Wei is the same Demonic Gentleman, several questions came to my mind. How did he move from the Demonic Cult to the Orthodox? And how did the identity of the Evil Emperor, which the Murim Alliance is looking for, go unnoticed? Also, what was his intention of entering the Orthodox? Im losing it. At this moment, the escort appears with alcohol and snacks that he bought. I was lost in thought up until now that I didnt properly wipe the blood off. I glare at the guy. you are back? Yes, Sect Leader. I will put the drinks and snacks over here. Fine. Lost in thought, I continue to glare at him. How did he change from there? In an instant, I feel goosebumps rise and a low chuckle escapes my mouth. As I do that, the escort looks at me with surprised eyes. Why are you laughing so suddenly? Because I felt that living Is fun. I see. What about you? I dont know since I dont have much to laugh about. I confirm. Because I knew what happened in my previous life, I know that the Butcher wouldve become a high-profile individual that the Murim Alliance would have had their eyes on. But I didnt know that the Butcher had such sahyungs. And assuming they are all alive, it wouldnt have been easy to catch him even if the Murim Alliance came ahead. If Butcher, Woodcutter, and the Fisherman joined forces then one of the top ten warriors in the alliance should lead the forces. But what would happen if a personally brought warrior of enemies says they will commit to correcting themselves to the Murim Alliance? What I mean is It can be said that one will be given the right to be enlisted in ranks if he had the merit of taking down several dangerous people. The people of the world will see the achievement of Murim as a new hero who takes down others. The very few who dont know the situation would consider him as an evil person who cut off the own disciples head to enter the Murim Alliance. Of course, when things get to that point, those who know the truth will end up dead. And right now, I am the only one who suspects master Baek Wei to have done that. Therefore, it is impossible to speak. I have a feeling that I just witnessed something huge and bad in the form of something different from Demonic Cult. And curiously, my prediction is right. Master Baek Wei, who isnt lacking anything, will reach that position. Evil Emperor. My mind and thoughts may be complicated, but fortunately there is alcohol in front of my eyes, and the escort laid them all down prettily. Sect Leader, please eat. I ask the escort. Poison? None. Why? I am not that brave or reckless. I nod and tell him, Confirm it with your mouth. I understand. The escort pulls out chopsticks and begins to examine the food and drinks which makes me think. If there are too many evil people around, we end up suspecting everyone around us. Like me. It isnt easy to stay on the sidelines peacefully without doubts. In a way, the reason why I had such thoughts could be because of the indirect influence of Master Baek Wei. This jerk surely is making my life fun. I chuckle again to myself and get up to wash off. I couldnt handle the smell of blood anymore, and now every corner of my body felt so sticky. I am going to wash. Yes. I wash up the blood with a well behind the guest house. One can wash their body only when there is blood. Only by washing the body can the dirt on it be removed. In this way, there are many traces of blood on my body. Blood from killing the enemies, and when the blood is being washed, it feels like peace is coming to me. I wash every corner of my body praying I wont go insane by being chased by the Demonic Cult or tortured. To be a prisoner with such a smell on me. If I could, I would like to be a clean, confident prisoner. I wash myself lightly and then a thought crosses my mind. When things get out of hand If a man called Crazy Demon visits the Murim Alliance and reveals the identity of the so-called Master Baek Wei as being the Evil Emperor, who will believe him? No one. However, if a man called the righteous swordsman does the same thing, the weight of their words will be so different. Then why are the righteous swordsmen called strong? Because they stick to the truth. If the truth of his is stronger than a man called Crazy Demon. It means truth and righteousness is stronger than martial arts. In that way, when I come to the conclusion that living a righteous life is needed to reveal a certain truth to the world which people do not want to believe, I feel goosebumps begin to rise. I was crazy in the past life. This time, I wondered if I went crazy and would turn into a righteous swordsman. I make up my mind not to do that, and while being vigilant, I wash the blood. I am not a swordsman. After all, swordsmen are people who are said to have accomplished things that most people would find difficult, find annoying, or just straight up ignore. It is something you do for the sake of others and not for oneself. And if I think about it, there is no one crazier than them. For the first time in my life, I came to respect those people. And not respect because they are strong but respect the fact that they are simply righteous and upright. Changing into the clothes I brought, I joined Yukhap to drink. For a second, Yukhap takes out a silver needle and checks if the food and drinks are poisoned. The three of us dont seem to believe the poor escort. Theres a difference between choosing not to kill someone and to trust them. People can believe only when they observe over time. Anyway, each of us reviewed our fights and silently drank while eating the snacks. The reason why these two joined me at the guest house was because they thought I couldnt deal with the master of the dead one coming back. They can tell by watching the Woodcutter and Butcher. So, because Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon didnt want me to die from being attacked by someone, they came here. And I have nothing to say since I know them. After a while, I tell the escort who came from taking out the body of Woodcutter, You too, stop cleaning and have this. Yes. I will wash up and come back. After a while we sit around the table and drink in silence. A long silence as if Pervert Demon is curious about something. I wonder if I could have caught and chased after the Fisherman. Yukhap tilts his head. It would have been difficult. The Sect Leader could have caught up with his light footwork, but it would have been difficult to win in such a short time. And it is the sahyung of the Woodcutter. What more can you think? I nod. Right. Even if your footwork was fine, they had a head start. They seem to have a master, what do you think? I only gave the needed information. The Butcher confessed to being tortured by his master before death. Since the disciples are all insane, so must be their master. Actually, Master Baek Wei isnt the kind to rush in and take revenge just because a couple of his disciples died. My guess is he was busy reading things or in a secluded place doing tea ceremony or wandering for more disciples. Or like I knew in the past life, having a confrontation with his light footwork So, I wasnt too interested in him, rather my interest lied in the Demon Cult. You. Yes. What is your name? At my question, Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon glare at the escort. Does the escort realize that his life is in danger because of these two and not me? He politely says, I dont have a family name, and I am called Sam and Bok, it means Sam Bok. The Third subordinate. Why is the third one here without serving his young lord? Didnt he pass out after the Butcher talked, and then fainted? But. Must have thought he was dead. But he woke up, which mustve been absurd to him too. When I nod, Pervert Demon speaks sarcastically. Such a great subordinate. Ghost Demon nods. He is one who hasnt been hit. I pour Sam Bok a drink and ask for the story of the Demonic Cult. So, I want to listen to your opinion, to see who the subCCult Leader will be. Sam Bok replies, taking a sip. Yes. First, it is known that there are 3 sons to the Cult Leader. But. I dont know how many. The Cult Leader has a very private life. And I heard he has more, but three people are the only ones mentioned to us. The lord and his family are fighting over not just the subCCult Leader position, but the vacant Left Hand too. Third young lord. Sam Bok smiles. Tried to kill the great young lord and second young lord. How? Sam Bok responds. I havent heard anything about that. Why is he so anxious about not being able to catch up to his brothers? Sam Bok replies. wouldnt it be natural? He already had many step siblings die at the hands of the great young lord. It wasnt the battle for succession but revenge between brothers. Of course, there is no evidence of the great young lord killing them. But everyone believed that. It will continue until there is just one person left because the Cult Leader will not involve himself in it. I sigh at his words and then pick up the bottle and pour alcohol for the three of them. Amidst that peaceful sound, alcohol was poured. Have this drink. I pour the alcohol down my throat and wipe my mouth. Suddenly, I think how fortunate it is that these people are on my side. That is because I wasnt sure I could handle it if they werent aware of the evils. At this time, I hear a squeaking sound, and a man with alcohol on the side makes an appearance at the entrance of the guest house and looks around. Fortunately, it is Sword Demon, it seems like he came to check up since Pervert Demon told him what happened. I look at Sword Demon with a bit of a surprised expression. Senior, you came. Master, you are here. Sword Demon approaches us with a calm look and tells me, Sect Leader, I came to see this new guest house you opened. I have no choice but to get up and greet our guest. Refer to chapter 107. He first appeared with a beggar and was said to be a part of Swift Society. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 198 Everyone stands up and greets Sword Demon with a drink. He puts down the drink he brought and looks at Sam Bok. Who are you? Sam Bok takes a step back and kneels down on one knee. Sam Bok, the escort to the young lord. Sword Demon doesnt speak back and sits where Sam Bok sat, and then speaks to Pervert Demon. Drink with me. Yes, master. After opening the cap of the sealed alcohol bottle, Sword Demon pours into the glasses as he asks me, Why keep the escort alive? I look at Sam Bok. To do some cleaning. Sword Demon answers. The young lords all have different characters and skills, but they arent the ones who choose the escorts. The escorts do not betray. Even if they wanted to betray, it is made so that it is impossible to do so. I nod. Betray in what sense? The Illusion Ghost Emperor and the young lord are like the lamp in the dark winds. If this guy doesnt realize that and is loyal, dying together with the young lord is enough. If the target of loyalty vanishes, they wont know what they will be loyal to. Will he be a grave handler then? Sword Demon nods. Right. Which is why, clean up first. Sword Demon looks at Sam Bok and asks, It seems like Low-Down Sect Leader has figured out the thoughts and tendencies of the sect and has you on cleaning duty. You must have survived the education of the guards, so it will be difficult to know the truth no matter how much you are tortured. However, I am uncomfortable with the ones who are persecuted for that reason alone. Sam Bok kneels down. thank you for saving me. The Left Guardian. I look at Sam Bok who raises his head. He has a pale look. Sam Bok bows to me. Sect Leader. I will leave. I nod and pull a coin from my pocket. Sam Bok. Yes, Sect Leader. I treated him as human all this while. You must have had a hard time running errands and cleaning. As my senior said, since I am not killing you, and since young Lord Mong and Yukhap watched you, if you live according to the morals of the past, you die with your young lord. If you take this new life and abandon those age-old morals, you will be given a chance to see the world. The choice is yours. I wish you luck in whatever choice you make to live. Have this. Sam Bok, the third subordinate. A common coin isnt a lot of money. I hand him the coins and he holds his hands out not wanting the coins to fall. I look into Sam Boks eyes one last time and say goodbye. Do not forget the words of senior Sword Demon. Yes. Sam Bok walks to the entrance of the guest house, turns to us and bows deeply. After kicking out the escort, Sword Demon finally raises his glass. Thanks to Sect Leader, more people die and there are often situations where those who should die, come back to life. Lets drink. We drank the alcohol Sword Demon brought, but it was much worse than the one we drank before. Sword Demon says, Sect Leader is crueler than anyone else, and more merciful too. Do you think living like this is the right answer? I answer being a bit drunk. Where even is the answer? I regret things more than 12 times in a day. Three or four times it is embarrassing, two or three times it is laughter. But at least once a day I think about where the people I spared are living and doing. The people I saved are scattered all around Namhwam, Namcheon, Nammyung. If I kill people I dont like every now and then, surely one day I will be called the Fourth Disaster. And that cannot be. Sword Demon who rarely smiles, smiles. Yes, the aspirations of Sect Leader are huge. Fourth Disaster huh. Pervert Demon responds. Exactly. Pervert Demon fills the glasses again and we drink again. Not all of them are men who pretend to be weak, so I sigh. I say to the three of them. It doesnt matter if you are drunk or not. Lets just talk drunk. The four of us have been through such a boring life. Someone lived a boring life like a monk who is meditating. I point to Sword Demon. A man who lived most of his life thinking about revenge. And then to Ghost Demon. The shit face who is crazy for women but cannot meet the one who he is deeply in love with. I point to Pervert Demon now and then to myself. I have been insane half my life. Maybe that is why I do not have a nice personality. But out of all the strong people, why is it that the only one who is crazy for revenge, man who lives like a monk, and the one crazy for women have to communicate with me? Yukhap tilts his head and smiles. Hehe Pervert Demon shrugs his shoulders and smiles and so does Sword Demon. I look at them. This time, I have to say something really drunk to get this over. Who should we start with? Yukgap? Yukhap nods. It is Yukhap. I was actually trying to kill you. Right. I dreamed of revenge when I was caught in Black Rabbit Union, when I was beaten by you, when I laid down, when I ate the poison Doctor Moyong gave me. Then, after fighting somewhere, you came back, and got angry as you told me to get out. I nodded. I did. Actually, you could have killed me, but you forgave me the way you did. I accepted it right away and was about to leave until master Ho Yeon caught me. What did he say? Master Yukhap looks a bit puzzled. Just that I should be healthy. For a moment, it felt like the lump in my heart disappeared then. It wasnt the anger I had towards you, it just seemed to be a lump of frustration that piled up for a long time. Maybe the little monster made for revenge vanished then. And then, as you know, I came up with the idea of moving together. Is this enough to satisfy your demands of drunken conversation? I nod. Nice. Pervert Demon says, Master, I have never seen such a country man in my life. The only thing he is good at is fighting. Sword Demon answers, What is it that you want to say? Pervert Demon smiles as he says, He is a simple useless guy, like me.. Sword Demon agrees. Right. I have never seen one like Sect Leader. I look at the master and disciple. Drunk? Sword Demon nods and says, We are in fact, quite narrow minded. Our stomachs do not wish to help others. We fight, we need to win. We train to win. And far from being bound by anything. For some people, it is the mindset that one should pursue teaching by cultivating, but your nature itself seems titled on that side. Every time you visit me, the boredom in my life which had accumulated disappears. What about you? The three of them look at me and I tell them. I feel a lot better now. For? The fact that the man crazy for sword, man crazy about revenge, man crazy for women are actually strong people who arent easy to meet. We are men who are crazy or on the verge of it. And one look at us is enough to know it. The same for Im So-Baek. Women. Subordinates, religion, revenge, martial arts we have different interests we pursue; we arent men who harass those who dont learn martial arts. And I will stick to that line. I am saying this drunk, but I hope the three of you get it. And this time I poured the three of them a drink. I reveal my true feelings after drinking the alcohol that was stronger than ever before passing out. My dream is to not go insane. While surviving in Kangho, I realized that the craziest thing is to not get crazy. I killed the Butcher and Woodcutter with my hands and their master is one called Baek Wei. Have you heard of them, senior Sword Demon? My first time. I pass on my assumption to them. If it is as I think- that man has gifted me the ice arts in the past. They all appear shocked. so, without realizing, I ended up as a person he is experimenting on. After handing over that ice arts, he seemed to be waiting for some news to come about me. Of course, people like me are not alone. Kangho is going insane, and I havent gone insane yet. I think it would be right to go crazy just about now? Sword Demon nods. If you go crazy then you fall into their control. Pervert Demon shakes his head. Right. He is already crazy now. So, stop being crazy. And Ghost Demon asks, The one who delivered the ice arts you sure about it? I nod. Yes. It was the same when I met with the leader of Blood Night Palace. She said she was mad at me. Come to think of it, everyone seems to be waiting for me to go insane. And this is all just drunken talk I gulp another drink down. My enemies and rivals it looks like they are waiting for me to go crazy, so I need to be a normal person. Protect those who havent mastered the martial arts yet, beat the unorthodox sects to death and harass the others, and if one asks for help from Murim Alliance Leader, I will head to them too. Pervert Demon, who is listening to me, smiles. An ally? Then a good ally for sure. I spill out drunk words. I am no righteous swordsman. And the three of you know very well that even if I wake up from death, I cannot become a righteous one. And Pervert Demon says, What nonsense is this master? Sword Demon raises his hand and closes his disciples mouth. I look at the three of them and laugh. without a doubt, the craziest ones in this crazy world are the righteous swordsmen. I am different from the three of you who wish for individual success, and I have a different mindset, a different attitude to life. I am drunk. I hope the three of you dont become my enemies in the future. Do not lick the feet of Cult Leader just because you are afraid of him. I will beat you to death. I lose my temper and knock on the table making the snack bowls and glasses all bounce up and down. Do not let me kill the three of you with my own hands. Get it? Pervert Demon laughs out loud and says, How can you harm master when you are less skilled than him? Master, Zaha seems really drunk. Sword Demon nods. He is drunk. Ghost Demon grabs my shoulder. Sect Leader, stop drinking. You are already drunk. While I am drunk, I pour the alcohol and fill the glasses of Sword Demon, Pervert Demon, and Ghost Demon. Have a drink. You evil people. Hehehe. I feel really good today, let us drink more. As Sword Demon brings another cup of strong alcohol, it feels like my mouth is on fire. I put my hand on the table while drunk. everyone put your hands up. Hurry. When the Pervert Demon looks at me with a troubled look, Sword Demon reaches his hand out and puts it on mine first. I am first. When Sword Demon holds his hand out, Ghost Demon and Pervert Demon have no choice but to put theirs. Shaking the hands of the three people on mine, I say, The elder Hyungs name is Sword Demon. A man who excels in sword. The second ones name is Master Yukhap, but the face doesnt go well with the ugly face, so I will give him the name of Ghost Demon. The second ones name is that. And the third is Low-Down Sect Leader, Lee Zaha, that is me. Following the names of the two older ones, mine will be Crazy Demon. And the fourth is Mong Rang. Since he is madly revealing his desire for women, if he is not Pervert Demon, who will be called that? You are the fourth. We were born around the same. Pervert Demon groans. Shut up you bastard! Do it in moderation! For real! I laughed as I stopped talking and began to laugh too much while holding my stomach. After laughing, I tell the three of them. The brotherhood resolutions wont work. And it cannot be helped. It is because there are no peach trees, so let us move on. Sword Demon tells me, Third one, wrap it up now. . We all stared at Sword Demon. This bastard who has always been serious and never lets himself divert a little from his character said this. I let out a sigh and then say, The three of you are now my people. The wicked who beat the wicked and evil ones to death. The Evil Peoples organization. For the wellbeing and peace of Kangho. It is a good thing. Pervert Demon removes his hand. Crazy idiot, do it in moderation. Ghost Demon mumbles. The one who cannot even handle a drink. Sword Demon points to the messy table. Put this away. Go now. The atmosphere is awkward because it wasnt my business to be drunk, and I am feeling drowsy, so I pull the chair and put my feet on it and close my eyes. It is the moment to take out the dagger and put it. Everything is too bothersome because I am drunk. . . . Dagger, given up, today. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 199 It wasnt until I woke up that I remembered how drunk I was. Usually, if one has deep internal qi, they do not get drunk so easily. Yesterday, I drank to get drunk. I look around and see that it is morning in the guest house. I wont wake up back at the inn again. When I woke up in the guest house after drinking last time, I mistook it for the Zaha Inn. Glad I didnt this time. Because I cant exactly control how my life progresses, I hate feeling various emotions over and over again and Im tired of having blood on my hands. In particular, I want to stop killing. Its because every time I kill, I feel like I am being pushed by my body. And seeing that my dagger isnt on the table, it feels strange. If the killers were targeting me, there wouldve been no better chance to kill me than when I was asleep just now. But the night has passed. I look around the guest house with a clearer mind than usual. On the top of the table, Pervert Demon is sleeping with his mouth open, like an old man. dont wake me up. I should sleep more. Does this bastard think of me as his servant? I answer to check if he is asleep or not. Yes, young lord. Have a good rest. Pervert Demon responds, Come on, third one. He isnt sleep talking. co-confir.. Sword Demon seems to have left this place but since Ghost Demon wasnt around, I go out. Shouldnt I check the state of the drunken guests? The leftover snacks were a mess on the table, or they should have been, but the table was clean. I fell into a deep sleep without realizing that I had cleaned the table. Did I take a pill while sleeping? I walk out of the guest house Even if everything was fine, Ghost Demon was swinging his sword with an uglier look than usual because of the excessive drinking. I sit on the chair outside the guest house and watch him train. Ghost Demon asks me while swinging the sword, You are up. You slept like a corpse. Well, why is this guys head like this? Why does he have to use a corpse to describe good sleep? Come to think of it, I felt the same when I saw Pervert Demon. I ask, looking at Ghost Demon who looked extra ugly, Yukgap, you stayed up all night? He answers while swinging the sword, The third and the fourth suddenly spread themselves so I had to stay up. Then you were swinging the sword all night? It has been a while since I swung it at night. And senior Sword Demon? He told me the story of the Five Great Swords of the Cult and then went to sleep. The Five Great Swords of Demonic Cult? Only then did the guy lower the sword and exhale. After drinking the water on the table, he sat down close by and said, It is said that the Heavenly Demon Sword of the Cult Leader, the Great Luck Sword of Right Elder, Bright Light Sword of Left Elder, and the Warlords Victory Sword. They are famous swords. The four of them. If we add another sword, First Slaughtering Sword, used by the old elders, it is one of the five greatest swords. Hmm. Ghost Demon looks at me and says, I heard that the First Slaughtering Sword is a wooden sword. I heard that these five swords had something in common, you know what it is? I couldnt possibly know it. I dont know. Before that, about the First Slaughtering Sword. It is said that the sword is inherited from the first slaughterer, an honorable one. The sword is passed to those who it considers as a worthy successor. Why is my spine feeling so cold now? Ghost Demon smiles and says, Right. They say that the Cult is trying to retrieve the five swords. They arent just some objects, but more of a symbolic weapon to the Cult. An honor for them. I scratch my head. To think that this old man handed over such a wooden sword to It could be. In any case, the swords are highly handled by the best of the Cult, so they need to get it back. Because of its symbolic meaning, it can be said that this weapon should be retrieved too. Is there a reason for telling me this? Ghost Demon nods his head. He told me to be prepared to come bare handed in the case I lack energy or am fighting with a weaker sword that stands no chance. It is said that even if weapons collide, poor weapons will not hold on for long. Sword Demon senior said that despite training with a wooden sword, he has no intention of giving up his Bright Light Sword to the Cult. Training to build skills is important, but to reach the peak of swordsmanship he told me to get something better than the sword I am using now. He said what I knew. Dont most of those swords already have owners? I know a couple are being held by the Orthodox sects. Ghost Demon nods. We need to make it. Where? At the iron union I hit my forehead with my hand. Come to think of it, the other day I met the guy at Black Rabbit Union. It seemed that he was trying to make a famous sword, but I tried to stop him. I didnt know. This is because the skills of Mister Geum seemed to have improved. And I speak to Ghost Demon. I will request him later. If my wooden sword is one of the five famous swords of the Cult, it would have been natural for the sword of Mister Geums to break. Ghost Demon nods and asks me with a tired look. Will you take the shift now? I need to sleep. I nod. Come to think of it, Ghost Demon training in front of the guest house was no different from him standing guard. I accept the ordinary day that this was going to be and spend it guarding the guest house. Or so I thought. A man who fights all the time is likely to go insane one day, and a man who works all the time will end up as an idiot. Also, the man who plays all the time is bound to be miserable sooner or later. Which is why it is important to fight, work, or do anything in moderation. Right now. I breathed slowly. Merchants were approaching while speaking outside. They heard about the inn, and said a small meal is what they would like, and then they would leave. Since I didnt have anything, I just pulled the wooden sword out and watched the blade shine in the sunlight. The merchants who came to eat a meal passed by quietly. After putting the sword back in, I think about what the men I had saved for the first time were doing now. My legs trembled at the thought. As Im passing my time normally by leaning on the table, I forget if Im a server, the Crazy Demon, one of the Six Dragons, or the Low-Down Sect Leader. Today, as I was a long time back, I had turned into a pitiful man in the world, and I welcomed the normal sunlight, wind, and air around. My dantian divided into Yin and Yang and was moving roughly since the morning, but I warned my dantian. Do not push your luck too much. Today is my day off. While thinking of each of my subordinates faces I think of Moyong Baek. I wasnt sure if that guy would concentrate on martial arts training. The conclusion of the thought was always the same. If I survive, the day will come when I will get stronger, I take a deep breath and feel the air cool down. Sam Bok, the escort to the young lord, moved somewhere overnight, leaving the guest house, and arrived at a safe place. But the safe place was a corpse filled room. Corpses were also in the yard, in the halls, and straddled to the walls. There were so many corpses of his allies, but many were dressed in odd clothes. As soon as he saw that outsiders were mixed in, he realized that some other warriors had raided the place. Thinking of escaping after checking for survivors, Sam Bok goes around and pushes the door of the main hall. After pushing away the corpse leaning against the door, the smell of blood stings his nose, just like what happened at the guest house. On top of the hill of corpses, he sees the third young lord sitting there. Young lord. It is Sam Bok. Sam Bok approaches him with a pale face and kneels down. Sam Bok. You were alive? Yes. I passed out in the guest house. Sam Bok couldnt speak further at the fear of having the situation misunderstood. But even then, the young lord was doubtful. How did you live? I was able to live because they showed mercy. He nods. Hmm, and any more survivors? I didnt see any. I dont know when the safe house was discovered. There will be an attack soon. Any injuries? Young lord shakes his head. I got hit in an odd manner, so it hurts a little. Sam Bok. Yes. I dont seem to have the skills to be the sub-cult leader. I failed. Sam Bok wasnt sure what to say, so he listened. And the young lord said, I am in a position where I cannot ask for the mercy of my brothers and the Cult Leader wont meet me. It is dangerous. Yes. When the young lord says to, he shows a black palm print on his chest. Do you know what this is? Sam Bok says, Poison, maybe? It was there, but I drove it out. It seems like the other young lords captured warriors from around. Seems like they didnt hire anyone either. How can the Poison Eye Emperor Young lord points to the entrance with his chin. And Sam Bok turns as he sees a body with a huge hole in the chest. Making him ask, Young lord. Even a member of the physician. Young lord shakes his head. Enough. I know my body well enough. It is faster to drive out the poison in here. Sam Bok. Yes. You may have learned that when a young lord dies, so does the escort, but you dont have to. If you are here, additional pursuers will come, so get out first. Leave when I cultivate or avoid the entire situation if you can. I think it would be better to hide in the orthodox village, which is full of them. Where can I go? Let us head there together. Sam Bok, not dying will mean revenge. Let us just move our separate ways. He waves his hand and closes his eyes. Sam Bok says, Young lord, I will stay and train till the end. Young lord says with his eyes closed. Do what? I am not dead yet. I just got hit once. After I recover, I will go meet my mother and then seek revenge for what happened. Even if the fight of succession failed, I have no intention of not taking revenge. The grudge my mothers family has, it has nothing to do with you, so do not intervene. I am tired of talking. If you are worried, come meet me at my mothers house. Sam Bok bows his head. I understand. Young lord. Are we not returning to the Cult? The Cult Leader despises the weak. I will not go there for a while. Yes ah, I was planning to tell you something, now is the right time. Thank you for taking care of an orphan who has nowhere to go. Please recover quickly. Useless things. Sam Bok who listened, quietly moves back and, later, looking at the corpses around, he suddenly stops to put his hand into his pocket. The coin given from the Low-Down Sect Leader was in his hand. He is reminded of what the Sect Leader had said. Throw away the doctrine and get a new life. Sam Bok stands blankly and ponders for a moment. What nonsense is that? He looked around and the sky felt so clear, but he couldnt figure out the answer. Even though he felt things turning sour, he continued to think about what it meant to throw the doctrine of a cult away. As he tried to think of something, his head felt heated up. . . . What are you doing! Sam bok! . Sam Bok, who had a headache at the sight of the coin, enters the side of the road and picks up the young lord on his back and runs at full speed, the young lord says, Put me down! Where are you taking me! If you stay here, you will die. So where are you going in this situation? Sam Bok keeps silent as he continues to run. After a while, the young lord starts nagging and Sam Bok opens his mouth. Young lord, please go silent. What? Sam Bok says while running, I will take you to a safe place for now, so shut up. In the end, Sam Bok abandoned the doctrine for a coin. But he had no choice but to believe that it was the only way to save the life of himself and the young lord. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 200 After taking the leftovers from the kitchen from the previous day, I have a late lunch outside the guest house. It was a cold snack, but I didnt care. If one has tasteless food every time, it will feel like proper food from time to time. I accumulate the tasteless food in my stomach. As I mumble with the cold meat in my mouth, a man comes running. Tatak I watch the man approach as I continue to chew. . Why was he running like this in broad daylight? Well, I dont know. His clothes arent native to this area, and it feels like he is being chased but he soon disappears. Its because of Ghost Demon and Pervert Demon who spent the night here, but I feel like my throat is clogged, so I drink a little of the strong alcohol that Sword Demon brought. Kuak! I had a simple lunch consisting of the pork sirloin and two sips of alcohol. I dont like washing dishes, so I simply look up at the sky in a position where I could fall off the chair. If I take a nap after this, it would be hard to find any other server who is as pathetic as me. At that moment, I heard a short scream in the direction of the guy who was running. I cant tell if it was the scream of the one who was running or if the guy who was running was hitting someone. After a while, a man in a familiar outfit comes to me with someone on his back. Sect Leader, are you good? Sam Bok, carrying the fainted man on the back, greets me and continues to run left and I answer him. You have been through so much. Well, why is Sam Bok even running this way? it would be better to head north if one wants to stay in a crowded place. After a while, Sam Bok reappears as if he had chosen to move back down the road. Did he run for more than an hour or what? I could see his hair all wet with sweat. His expression was also worth seeing. I couldnt tell if he was crying or smiling but as soon as I met his eyes, I smiled. Haha. I passed by. I nod my head. Right. You worked hard. I cant help but look at the man whom Sam Bok was carrying. Just as I am turning my head, the guy who has dark circles under his eyes, and must be poisoned, opens his eyes. As if he hadnt lost consciousness, I hear him mumbling. Let me down. Better to die than move. At the words of the third young lord, Sam Bok shouts, Shut up for a while! I applaud him for the act. Yah, being able to tell the young lord of the Demonic Cult to shut up takes a lot of guts. You brat. You are moving past your role huh. Past the role isnt the right word for this situation, but it did seem right. And he did succeed in breaking past the chains. Subsequently, the group of people dressed in various costumes appear from the left side and run towards where Sam Bok had fled. It is good news for Sam Bok that their attire wasnt that of the typical uniform. After all, that would mean they werent from the Demonic Cult. However, chances are high that they are clinging to a Demonic Cult member. This means that he wasnt out of the weeds completely, so this wasnt entirely good news either. Thanks to that, I was able to see a rare scene in which those belonging to the Cult were being chased. It seems that even the Demonic Cult isnt impervious to the laws of this world. If one is weak, this happens. Still, looking at Sam Bok risking his life like that to save the third young lord, it didnt seem like they were the ones who got the right escort. In the meantime, the sound of bones being broken, and screams being shouted could be heard. I was no longer looking at the sky, but at the people. Sam Bok, who appears for the third time running, is smiling this time as he asks, Sect Leader? What? Why did you call? Can I have some water? I am a bit thirsty Sam Bok, holding the young lord on his back, stops in front of the guest house and coughs in a dry manner. I point to the guest house. There is water inside. Go in. There are people sleeping, so go quietly. With the young lord on his back, Sam Bok bows. Thank you. Sect Leader. Sam Bok enters the guest house with the guy on his back and I just look around with a puzzled expression. He is having it tough. Giving water to the thirsty is a serious thing. As I let out a few sighs, various groups of people whose identities one couldnt be sure of, came rushing in. Some were limping and some had their faces wounded. While chasing, it seems like they got attacked back by Sam Bok, but the number felt too high. I thought I would be used to these guys by now. I was going to give them water if they asked, but one of them yelled, Where did he go! Did you not see? There is a guy on his back! I point north. Those who try to move to the left shout at the top of their lungs and move to the north and I smile silently. Such funny ones. At this time, one guy turns his head and sees my expression and then he says, Smiling? Everyone stop. The guys, who are flocking in, talk to each other while catching their breath. He smiled after he pointed in this direction. Actually, there is no reason for all of us to move north, right? So odd. Shall we divide in half then? No. Check the guesthouse. This guys expression is surely weird. It wasnt just my expression that is weird, I am weird as a whole. Those who were moving to the north, slowly moved back to the guest house. And looking at them approach, I say, are you approaching the place to die? Just stop right there. Taking down my smile, I glare at them. Those coming closer go still. Since this wasnt something a server would say, everyone looks at me like I am absurd. They believed in their strength and talked. Now, server. Do you know what you are intervening with? This is a matter of our Cult. Think carefully and speak. I nod. You people, first lower your voices when warning. There are people who are sleeping inside. And what kind of crazy server would interfere in the work of the Cult? But I will. I chuckled as I picked up the chopsticks. Guys, be it a Cult or something else, stop making a mess in this inn. And you are not of the Demonic Cult. You must be the idiots who were commissioned. The ones after money, just another henchman. And one speaks in a gentle tone, Look, the person you are hiding is the young lord of the Demonic Cult. I promise that you will have no problems if you give him up. Are you going to intervene in the battle of the young lords? The two of them who went are the ones I spared. I cannot just let them live and then tell you it is alright to kill. And they shouldnt die here. You people dont know because youre paid to kill, but because of his origin, there is a huge difference in the situation which will happen later, so step back. Do you want to get involved in the fight of the young lords just for the sake of money? Even if the Sect Leader is a bystander, he wouldnt have expected a fight like this. And now, I hear a sigh from the inside of the guest house. Like I thought, Pervert Demon appears with a seriously angry expression. Ah I cannot even sleep. When a persons sleep is disturbed by such things, it is the law to become angry 20 times more than usual. Pervert Demon takes a deep breath and shakes his head as he drinks from the bottle on the table. Master told me to keep him alive, if not he would be dead in my hands. After drinking alcohol, he suddenly runs to them and leaps into the air as he kicks one of them. He flies off with a puak- sound, spins in the air and then falls headfirst on the ground. Pervert Demon moves to the table before I know it and eats a piece of the pork sirloin as he says, If you dont leave, I will kill everyone this time. I look at him. Is there any person in the world more evil than this? To kick without a warning. As the people step back, they say, We will see you again. What? In an instant, I throw the chopsticks at them. Swish! The flying chopsticks pierce the shoulder of the guy who acted smug. And then comes the scream along with a rumbling sound and they vanish. I look at Pervert Demon, but we have nothing to say, so I turn my gaze to the outside. . And Sam Bok was the first to speak by bowing. Sect Leader, young lord Mong. Thank you. We will leave once the young lord drives out the poison. It seems like a warrior of the First Heavenly Alliance is close by. I ask along with Pervert Demon, First Heavenly Alliance? Why would they come here? Sam Bok explains, A person of their alliance was mixed in the group that attacked the safe house. There should be others. It seems like the other young lords had hired famous unorthodox swordsmen. We did too, so we cannot speak much about that. Is that so? Sam Bok and Pervert Demon look at me. I take out a bag from my pocket and say to Sam Bok. Sam Bok. Yes, Sect Leader. I understand, so go buy some meat while you are here. We didnt get to eat properly. When I hand the money over, Sam Bok receives it with both hands and asks with a serious expression. Why eat meat all of a sudden I roughly point to the guest house with my finger and say, The weather outside is nice to grill meat. And buy various drinks too. A variety of meat pieces. Put them on the fire and heat the wood, you understand what I am saying right? Buy vegetables too. Whether you fight or run, shouldnt your stomach have its share? Sam Bok mumbles. It is hard to buy, but the young lord should cultivate I understand so go out and shut up already. With fresh ones and delicious meat. Let us do that, okay? Yes. After receiving the money, Sam Bok, stares blankly at the guest house before saying, do cultivate. I will run the errands. As Sam Bok spreads his footwork and runs, Pervert Demon asks me, Why are you suddenly saying that you want to eat grilled meat? Is this even the time? I nod my head while observing him. without casting out the needy. We need to give water to those who are thirsty. Why? Turning a blind eye twice is fine, but a third time is difficult. What do you mean? Sam Bok carried that guy on his back, four times or so. Pervert Demon smiles. Ah that is absurd. Three times is hard for me too. If we drive out the needy and turn away from those who are thirsty, we are no different from the Demonic Cult. Even though he is the son of the Cult Leader, I can do this, and you can too, give water and feed him. I dont know if the Cult Leader knows that his son is running away looking for shelter. Even if he knew, he isnt the kind to care. After a moments silence, Pervert Demon speaks in a quiet tone. Come to think of it, I am craving meat. I nod. Confirm. Three tables are put close together and a large stone is placed next to them as a stove. There, Sam Bok grills meat in various ways. He grills it on an iron plate, brings in kitchen utensils, and makes stir fried meat. Looking at it, it seems like Sam Bok seems to have the qualities of a great hostess. I wasnt sure why he was acting like an escort. The vegetables are spread out on the table, the drinks are placed, and the grilled meat is brought to share. In the end, Ghost Demon, who couldnt hold back at the smell of meat, gets up and joins us with his ugly face and begins to eat the meat. Demonic Cult members come rushing in. It is a situation where a group of unorthodox swords and those who were hired would come. We grilled and ate the meat while smearing the oil off of our mouths and, after a while, Ghost Demon began to skewer thin pieces of meat over the flame. Suddenly he snaps his fingers and nods. Nice. As if he was done with his experiment, he begins to put the various types of meat that Sam Bok brought onto the thin skewers. I speak to Ghost Demon who is standing next to Sam Bok and Pervert Demon. Wow, seems delicious. Pervert Demon nods his head. The second one is a genius. Sam Bok, who is paying attention, asks, Second one? Is there a hierarchy? When Pervert Demon doesnt answer he turns to me. I say, If you ask us about our identities, then it is natural for us to answer. We are the Four Great Evils who have occupied a historic place in the central plains. Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon smile at my words. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 201 Thinking about it while eating, I seemed to have enough sleep. This means that we will be able to fight nonstop for the next three days and nights. The unpredictable nature of Kangho made me prepare for everything with a full stomach. I work hard with Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon to eat the meat. Even though Sam Bok was eating meat like a beggar, he often took out one or two pieces and put them in a bowl to feed the young lord. At the end of the long-awaited meat feast After finishing our breakfast at the guest house, the third young lord appears looking messed up. . I sit side by side in front of the guest house with Ghost Demon, Pervert Demon and gnawed at my teeth without saying anything. Sam Bok looks at him and asks, Young lord, are you fine? The guy sits down a little far from us with a sigh and says to Sam Bok. Sam Bok, did you bring me here on purpose? Yes. Why? I did it because I wanted to live. I apologize if this offended you. Did you drive out all the poison? Poison is well, I am not in a rush. Yes. I think I asked you several times. What were you thinking? I stop grinding my teeth and glare at the third young lord. Yah, third young lord. . Shut your mouth and eat. I want you to stop nagging before I smash you to the floor. He was carrying this worthless bastard on his back all the way here, can you not shut up? Does this bastard need to have his mouth ripped to come to his senses? You want to cultivate again? And naturally the air turns cold, but I wasnt the only one in this mood. Ghost Demon looks at third young lord and then opens his mouth with a subdued tone. Third young lord. Anyway, since you needed time to cultivate, the three of us were standing guard and eating meat. Hmm. If you bought time and got rid of the poison, wouldnt it be right to look at the situation first instead of scolding your subordinate? I dont know how you wanted to compete to be the sub cult leader with such thoughts. I nod at Ghost Demons words. Right. Pervert Demon doesnt bother with that and speaks to Sam Bok in a sarcastic tone. Why did you carry this guy on your back? If you look closely, you arent sane either. It is a waste of all the meat we gathered, just have it yourself. Sam Bok respectfully puts his hands together and looks at us all. When young lord is unable to say anything, Sam Bok brings the meat he had set aside. Young lord, please have this meat. It is delicious. What is this now? I, Ghost Demon, and Pervert Demon all turn our heads ahead and blankly to the side. The young lord takes the bowl of meat and put it aside like he didnt want to eat. After craving it for so long we were shoveling it in, but this meat wouldnt easily go down our throats. With my consciousness alive, I turn to see young lord, but then Ghost Demon taps me on the knee. He asks me to stay still, so I look ahead. When the uncomfortable silence passes, the young lord speaks. Low-Down Sect Leader, young lord Mong and Master Yukhap. Thanks to you, I was able to buy time and take care of myself. Sam Bok. Yes. Thanks to you, I lived. I would have died if I had been in the safe house. Come to think of it, the harsh words you told me, were nothing. It is fine. Sam Bok nods and says, Ah, yes. I was able to live because Low-Down Sect Leader let me into the guest house. Pervert Demon tells Sam Bok. Pour the young lord a drink or two. It is so frustrating that the meat wont go down my throat. Ah, right. I understand. Pervert Demon says, Anyway, the fight between the young lord is quite bloody. One side hires the Butcher, and his sahyungs, and the other recruits the Heavenly Alliance. I dont know what the intention of the Cult Leader is to do this with his sons when he can just gather them together and decide everything with a single fight. Who does such things? I answer without much thought. You must have fought so hard to get the position, is that inheritance? Ghost Demon answers, As far as I know, I heard that the situation of the Cult is a mess when the leaders fight for succession. It is said that all the factions within will divide up. Now, in a way, only the great young lords have things under control, so the Cult wouldnt be affected by much. Even if the great young lords mothers powers are suppressed, one will have to obey the final words of the Cult Leader, so it is a pretty useless fight. Why? Will the Cult Leader even step down? In terms of age and skill, he is reaching his prime age. And he even earned a title in the past, but his skills must have improved now. Generally, strong people belonging to the warrior side enter their prime in their 40s and 50s. This is because they get a huge time to shine. However, contrary to such thoughts, warriors can appear in their 20s and sometimes be the best in the world in their 60s. In any case, Kangho sees the Cult Leader to be reaching his prime. Although I expected it, the overall level for people to develop had grown. Since one didnt know when things would change, even Im So-baek must be training hard. Only then did the third young drink the alcohol. Actually, this guy had no place to turn to. Sam Bok, who was running around, was so tired that he too looked exhausted. I look around outside the guest house with people who had nothing to do and laugh. all the pathetic batch had gathered here. It isnt easy to meet like this. Ghost Demon says, It isnt so bad. I look at the sight ahead and say, The scenery of the guest house. Enjoy it. If we dont enjoy this movement, it will be gone forever. We cannot enjoy this forever, so let us enjoy this moment. Pervert Demon nods, Such bullshit. Do you really think so? I shake my head. That is the duty of the eldest. The three of us are so far from that. Ghost Demon asks me curiously, Does Sect Leader think that senior Sword Demon is the best? Well, he is the best of us. In what way? In an instant, I turn my head. Everyone is waiting for my words. I explain my thoughts about Sword Demon. At a time in the past, he was known as the best in the Demonic Cult. A man who doesnt take orders from anyone other than the Cult Leader. Isnt that the same position as the best? Sam Bok responds. Yes. Even though he isnt there now, they would be equals. It seems that the guy was in an honorary position. How many men in Kangho can throw away such a position in a strong Cult? This means that greed for power isnt the priority, it is said that the Sword Demon possessed the best strength and is one of the Four Great Swords holder of the Demonic Cult. He put it down and practiced the wooden sword. This meant that he was wary of becoming stronger in the wrong way, even if it was the more difficult path to choose. Everyone listens. But apart from these things, what is the true intention of senior? Cult Leader, the doctrine, and the swords, nothing could suppress his will. He thinks and acts alone, but he doesnt interact with the complicated things of life, so he is a great warrior in his own way. Even if he is defeated by the leader, or has just one disciple who doesnt listen, even if persecuted by many, Sword Demon is Sword Demon. I look ahead. It isnt easy to go through with the thoughts of oneself without causing harm for others. Even so, the young lord fights and having such a senior is touching. How a man should live. It isnt just the thoughts of wanting to please or follow orders. It means that following the doctrine and bowing down to words isnt the Demonic way. I glare at young lord from the corner of my eye and say, If you stop going insane you should be able to differentiate between what is slavery and the Demonic way. Stop doing these meaningless things. Killing your brothers with butchers. You cannot be the successor of the Cult. Do you think your father would pass it down to such an idiot? Third young lord is unable to open his mouth and Sam Bok asks cautiously, Then who should this be passed onto? Not passed down, you bastard. Why? I speak with a grin. I am not the spokesperson for the Demonic Cult speaking what I think, I will either kill the Cult Leader or pass it to someone capable. Isnt that the Demonic way? Why fight like that at all fucking bastard? Skills are fucked up things. A bastard who is being carried on the back of a weaker escort wants to be the subCCult Leader? Get yourself together. Eat the meat Sam Bok grilled. You must be hungry right? I chuckle and even the other two demons made faces. Third young lord glares at me, and then stretches his hand out to feed himself. For a moment, he takes the meat with his hand not saying anything and then pours the glass of alcohol with his oiled hands. Pervert Demon asks me like he is curious about something. Third one. What? Why are you this hard on people? Where did you even learn to talk? In the past, you fell off a cliff and did something bad. Who taught you how to make people cough up blood with words instead of martial arts? I point my finger at him. Well, this bastard is worse. You just need to stay still but see you doing all this. What does the second one think? Ghost Demon nods his head. Right. If I were third young lord, the meat would just be stuck in my throat listening to you two. ! Suddenly, I heard a squeak, so I turned to see Sam Bok patting the young lord. Young lord, please eat slowly. Eat with chopsticks. The young lord hurriedly drinks alcohol. I too dont understand people like me. Why did I have to be born like this? It wasnt my job to understand the world with all its twists and turns. As everyone eagerly waits, third young lord sees the dark clouds hanging around the guest house. It was the people in dark robes. The guys sent to silence him, but stronger people than before were coming out. In the meantime, the third young lord, who tries to gulp down a piece of meat stuck in his throat, continues to eat meat with his hand despite people coming for him. And I could see many of them. The crowd was close to a siege and the people in the center split into left and right. From there, a tall person in black robe came and said, Introduce who they are. One guy of his said, From the right, Low-Down Sect Leader, Master Yukhap, Mong Rong of the Mong family and the last one seems to be the escort of the third young lord. The man in the robe speaks with a bored tone. Why is this such a pathetic group? I answer, I was thinking the same thing. The black robe one says, Low-Down Sect Leader. I am Won Ga-sung of the Primary Commanding Alliance. I nod my head at his words. You look similar to a monkey. What is this? Won Ga-sung glares at me for a moment and then sighs, I hope you decide to hand over the third young lord to someone else. There is no reason for you to protect him, just hand him to us. It isnt like I would kill him right after I catch him, I will just hand him over to the client. It isnt good to intervene in the affairs of the Cult and not wise to touch our alliance either. You belong to the Six Dragons and your name is just spreading. Can you make such a choice? Young lord continues to chew on the meat. Is it the great young lord or the second one? Start with that. Won Ga-sung looks at the third young lord and says, You shut up. I am talking to Low-Down Sect Leader. Won Ga-sung tells me, Low-Down Sect Leader, if it wasnt for this incident, our alliance would have invited you. From what I heard, there are a lot of unorthodox troops under his command. I think you are a better fit with us than with Leader Im. Oh my, another one trying to recruit But not in such a time. I look at the third young lord. Had your share? Young lord responds by tapping his chest with his hand. Wait. I have no choice but to speak with Won Ga-sung first. Look here, Won Ga-sung. If this favor will continue ah, wait. Is there anyone in Kangho who can tell me what to do? There is no one. Won Ga-sung says, Tell me your decision. I look at him. Not you. If your alliance wasnt blind, then information wouldnt be neglected. Didnt you hear how I worked with the alliance in the past? Won Ga-sung, looks at his subordinates around and says, I heard that Im So-baek killed them all, didnt he? Yes. I see. Then what about you? I sighed. It seems like I am still lacking in skills in Kangho. Then, it is my fault. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 202 I look at Won Ga-song, the subordinates he had with him, as well as the others. It wouldnt be so difficult to kill him in anger. However, it makes me feel bad to think that the ordinary guest house would turn into a mess as a result. All for money. I jump into the air from my seated position and land lightly on the roof of the guest house. Not only the besiegers, but also the Four Great Evils, the third young lord, and Sam Bok all look at me. I must have looked insane when I jumped onto the roof. I speak to the people gathered with a serious expression. Righteous ones, listen. . I acknowledge that the border between life and death hasnt been this close. The man you want to take away is the third son of the Cult Leader. Are you doing this because you think you can do better than him? Are you saying the members of your troops can handle the Cult Leader? Nope. Be it that the Great Young Lord ordered it or not, the fact that you are down here at the order of him, the son of the Cult Leader, will not change. If you can handle it, come hit the guy. Some might not know who I am, but I am Low-Down Sect Leader, who sided with Im So-Baek. If something difficult happens to Leader Im, I will join him and if I am persecuted by someone, Leader Im will come. Does this mean that we are in a hyung- little brother relationship? No. The guy sitting under the roof with a grumpy expression is the child of the Mong family. The Mong family is a family that has produced people that have become generals, strong warriors and soldiers. Regardless of his fame as the stupid second son of the family, he isnt one who will die in your hands. Won Ga-sung, who was listening to it all quietly till then, snorts like this is absurd. I mention Yukhap too. The man with the frightening face over there is Master Yukhap. He is a man who has trained with a sword in hand with the sole purpose of avenging his sect. As a result, he has single handedly annihilated 3-4 unorthodox sects. There must be some people who havent heard the title of Master Yukhap till now. But those who heard the name of his will have to say that he is one mad with revenge. I tell the two people in front who are silent. You people. These are the people you are trying to attack right now. And only I know exactly what kinds of warriors the Low-Down Sect has, and how much strength is held. I will admit that the Heavenly Alliance is one of the stronger unorthodox groups out there. However, if you can afford to go against the Low-Down Sect, Mong family and Six Equilibrium Sect, then come on. . I look at the guys who have serious looks. I assure you, that you will be annihilated. While sitting cross legged, I copy the hand movements of a statue of Buddha I saw in a shabby temple one day. After joining my thumb and forefinger in with my right hand, I wrap myself in white flame. After infusing my dantian to my left hand, a bright red flame soon shines around my thumb and forefinger. Now, I have embodied the image of a man mumbling nothing but the will of Buddha. Amitabhas last warning that he would send the Moon and Sun down to those who dont listen to his warnings and then beat them all to death. If Im able to put my hands in a state like this, then I am sure that the technique will explode with everyone dying. Come to think of it, it seems like Amitabha is also a senior of Kangho who has deep compassion. I mumble, like I am reciting the prayer of Buddha. senior, I will take over from here. Amitabha. Under the roof, Pervert Demon sighs. When will that guy go crazy enough to be seriously called crazy? Pervert Demon stands up with his hands on his waist and speaks to the alliance. Now, now. If that guy decides to put his palms together everyone here will die. Low-Down Sect Leader is the craziest person that I have ever seen. I have yet to meet someone who is on his level. I seriously suggest that Won Ga-sung, go and tell the family that sent you, that you failed. This is not a problem someone at the level of a leader/captain like you can solve. Pervert Demon points his finger at me. Third one, calm down now. Do not do that. I will get mad. I told you not to do that. At that time, Ghost Demon jumps into the air and lands on the edge of the roof and draws his sword out. Srng! Pervert Demon asks Ghost Demon with a surprised look. What? To which Ghost Demon answers. I wont stop him because some other person can come rushing in. Wouldnt it be better to just kill them all? They will continue to come again. I nod. A. M. I. T. H. A. B. H. A. Ahh, shit. Pervert Demon lets out a soft groan and then leaps into the air. As I gaze at the people of the alliance and join the Light Sky of Sun and Moon technique, a roar pierces through the air. Pajjjikkk! The entire guest house began to shake like it was about to collapse. In an instant, the group that realized that I had decided to kill them all, begins to run, leaving Won Ga-sung behind. At first it was just one or two people, but fear is like a communicable disease, and it spread around as they all escaped as a group. The screams of those fleeing only grew louder and louder. Even Won Ga-sung, who stepped in front as the leader of the troops, was taking steps back with an absurd look. No. In an instant, I pull my hands back and then order the demons and the young lord. Get a hold of that bastard. In an instant, all three of them soar high into the air at the same time and they chase after Won Ga-sung who is running back. They use their martial arts and then they immediately surround Won Ga-sung. From what Pervert Demon said, this guy is a leader/captain level warrior. However, I wasnt able to determine his skill level because the four of us were fiercely ready to fight. Did everyone understand what I meant to say? Well, Ghost Demon strikes Won Ga-sungs shoulder at once. Huek! Pervert Demon uses palm technique on the chest. Euk. And the third young lord kicks the guys chin. Puak I take advantage of this and hit the guy on the head as he staggers back. Puak! After knocking Won Ga-sung down with a kick, I step on his body as he struggles. How dare you believe in the flow around you, and come, com Puak! puak! Puak! Understand how to read the air. You bastard. When I lose my temper, Ghost Demon and Pervert Demon come ahead and trample the guy. Soon Sam Bok too joins in and does the same. Because of you, I had to piggyback, piggyback him! You fucking dog! Once Won Ga-sung is covered in blood, we stop stomping on him. We truly are merciful people. I ordered Sam Bok. Take this. Yes, Sect Leader. Sam Bok grabs the guy by the ankles and drags him. We return back to the guesthouse and look around like idiots. Sam Bok throws the guy. Won Ga-sung, who is roiling on the ground and trembling, doesnt say anything for a moment. Having inhaled so much dirt, we drink silently and rinse our mouths with alcohol. After spitting out, I approach Won Ga-sung and grab him by his hair. I look at the half-conscious guy and say, Captain Won. What a nice sight this is. Captain Won, Captain Won I slap the guys face since he doesnt respond. With a slap-sound, I can see his teeth fall out of his mouth onto the ground. And I called him again. Captain Won. Captain Won glares at me while breathing heavily. I reach out and check his eyes. Your eyes seem alive. This bastard. You are alive. As expected of an evil one. Fucking insane. I slap his face again as he glares at me. Puak! This time, it seems that I hit him too hard because his head jerks back and he faints. Pervert Demon asks in a calm tone, Dead? I stretch my hands out to check his pulse and say, He is still alive. Sam Bok, give me a drink. Yes. After getting alcohol from him, I pour it onto the guys face. If strong alcohol flows down his nose and mouth, he is bound to come to his senses. I call him again, in a toneless voice. I can do this all night. Why me? Well, cause I have nothing to do and I am bored. I will call again. Captain Won. Won Ga-sung replies as he gulps, Yes. I point my finger at him and then look back. Wow, now he answers me. If only he had answered earlier, would it have been so wrong? Are you an idiot? Is it that hard to answer? You are so funny. Hahaha. I leave him alone for a while and then get up to pour myself a drink. We bring chairs one after another and place them around the guy and sit down to savor the drink and the cooled meat. Kuak. Pervert Demon, Ghost Demon, young lord, and Sam Bok naturally join in, not feeling a tad bit odd about the situation. If you want to drink, then drink. Want meat, grill it. Want to say something, then say it. While looking at the scenery, they quickly fall back into the rhythm of the daily life of a guest house. Sam Bok asks me, Sect Leader. Shall we grill more meat? Do it. Didnt you buy ramen? I forgot ramen. So sad. Sam Bok smiles. I will make sure to buy some later and make a bowl of ramen just for you. I clap for him. Look at this jerk, so wild. Nice. I had never seen an escort as good as you in all my life. Sam Bok. Thank you. Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon too praise him. So flexible. He is doing a lot of work. Sam Bok smiles and asks the young lord, Would you like to have something? To which he responds with a stiff face. None. Yes. Sam Bok finally says, If you think of anything you want to eat, please let me know. . Only then did I look at the trembling guy on the ground. What was this monkeys name again? Pervert Demon answers, Won Ga-sung? Ah, right. I remember something and ask him, Doesnt the Heavenly Alliance have the largest number of captains? Right. If one is an outside force and then joins them, they are given the title of captain. That is why the skills of each captain are different. Only the name their alliance holds is strong, not them individually. The leader of the alliance is great. Because he gathered everyone under him. According to the Murim Alliance, there are small and medium troops which have had to cease their activities because of a lack of funds, and so, they were provided shelter under the alliance. At this point, it would be normal for Won Ga-sung to threaten us by mentioning the name of his leader. But was it because we are insane? Won Ga-sung doesnt speak. He seems to have realized the severity of his mistake. I take my chopsticks and grab a piece of meat which was still cooking before approaching Won ga-sung. Captain Won, open your mouth now. Ahhh. Won Ga-sung glares at me with a tired look. And I speak in a cold tone. Open your mouth. Before being beaten to death. This is my last warning. As soon as I see Won Ga-sung open his mouth, I put the meat in his mouth, and he glares at me with a serious look. Captain Won. Yes. I would have told you that you arent the type of man to do what you are asked. Were my words funny to you? Anyway, even if I killed you now, your leader would come, and I would kill your leader. What do you think of this situation? Listen. I throw my chopsticks and touch his head with my left hand. Answer me now. Depending on his answer, I was thinking of breaking Won Ga-sungs head. Won Ga-sung looks into my eyes He speaks to me with eyes that were saying that he clearly wanted to hit me. Sect Leader, please spare me. I clench my right hand with qi. I should spare you? Why? Why does everyone want to be spared only after it gets this far? Is it a mans life to bully the weak and ask for mercy from the strong? You bastards change so easily. I hit Won Ga-sung on his forehead with a flick. With the sound of a thud, the guy falls back. He could have died or still be alive, but I dont bother checking. While I am the only one dealing with him, I wondered if the others would understand the meaning behind my words. I turn and look around at them. Second son, Yukhap, third son, and the escort. You cannot live like these people. This one is not even a man. I dont expect an answer, and everyone just looks at me with their mouths closed. a Buddha who rules over paradise, enjoying endless and infinite bliss. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 203 Not caring, I mumble looking at the guesthouse sign. Ehhh, it is so difficult to keep a small guest house running smoothly. This place was at risk of being touched by the Demonic Sect or teacher Baek Wei, and now the heavenly Alliance has joined the list. It would be stranger if a battle didnt break out. Sam Bok. Yes. It is so hard to run a store man. It was a sudden statement, but Sam Bok nods as if he understands the meaning of my words. Right. I didnt realize it before. I smile and say, You wouldnt know. You must have thought that being an owner of a guest house, and the shop holders who didnt master martial arts, were all such meaningless beings in life. However, it isnt something to criticize or look down on as a weakness. Young lord, being born as the son of Demonic Cult Leader and being born into a normal family isnt a matter of choice. Am I wrong? Young lord nods. I continue to talk. I was born in a town like this. If a worker is working at the guest house, then his son would also help along. When would they have had the time to get strong? Sam Bok responds, Right. You four people I dont know how your relationship with me will be. Please do not even ask. I am glad I met you like this. Killing and dying with the strong by my side is a matter of pride. It is a fair fight to an extent, but do not bully people who work in such places. It was because of this that I, who was a server, ended up as Low-Down Sect Leader. Sam Bok looks shocked as he checks his ears to see if he had heard me properly, and Pervert Demon confirms with me, You were a server? I nod my head with a calm look. There was a time. Looking at the guest house, he continues the conversation. I had a guest house like this, but it got burned down. The Butcher probably wouldnt have built such an inn. He must have just killed one person and took over the place. It is so hard that things continue to happen in one place. I turned to Won Ga-sung who was wriggling. Your eyes are alive, but only for now. I return to my place and look at Won Ga-Sung who is struggling to rise. And a trickle of blood flows down his forehead. Won Ga-sung kneels down looking horrible as he turns toward us. He had a half-scared look. Ghost Demon asks me my opinion, Sect Leader, what do we do with this one now? I think it is right to ask the opinion of a third person to solve the situation. Fourth one, what do you think? Pervert Demon answers, Why am I fourth? Ugh! Ghost Demon says, You dont like being the fourth, turn into the fifth. Or maybe the sixth. Im not in the mood to deal with this so I tell him, If you dont like it, you should have been born earlier. What did you do before being born? And with Won Ga-sung, we dont need to be the ones to make the decision. Since he came to capture the young lord, young lord will decide if he dies or lives as he pleases. This will strengthen his destiny and the flow of it. I look at third young lord and he nods. Who ordered this? Won Ga-sung looks at the face of the guy. This wasnt a good reaction. That is because the third young lord, like any other kid of the Cult Leader, was trained to kill. So, he could kill this guy in no time. So, he answers, Second young lord ordered it. With what hopes? Won Ga-sung speaks as if he has something to say. They knew the third young lord was recruiting someone to help. And since he was busy training, he requested the alliance to take care of it, or that it would be nice if you were captured alive and brought back. Instead, I was asked to take down all the people around you. We look at third young lord who doesnt answer. After thinking for a moment, third young lord tells him, Captain Won. Yes. Tell him that the four people I used died in the hands of Low-Down Sect Leader and that I was driven to the brink of death by Low-Down Sect Leader, but he unexpectedly forgave me and Sword Demon released me. Did you get it? Yes. One might ask why Sword Demon suddenly appeared, but it was quite shocking for me too. It would be enough if you say these two hold a close relationship. The situation is set as such. Now pass this down to the second young lord. I will step down from the fight of inheritance. I swear that there will be no attacks on either of the two young lords with any assassins. Won a-sung nods. Hmm. The third young lord speaks his decision. Just tell them not to touch my mother or her family. I will step down from the heir run, and as a Kangho person I will live. Tell them that I will train in martial arts and challenge them one day. I will not be heading down to the Cult for a while. Captain Won, I want you to convey this carefully. Won Ga-sung replies, I will do my best. Third young lord nods. If Low-Down Sect Leader is fine with it, I want to let you go back alive. Won Ga-sung looks at me nervously. Sect Leader. What? Can I head back? I sit down on the chair and gesture to Won Ga-sung. Come here. We need to say our goodbyes. Won Ga-sung comes closer and he stands with his arms crossed. After seeing his face again, I speak. Captain Won, you see Yes. I know that your skills might not be as good as the leader or some other ones in your alliance. I will speak honestly. Yes. I look into his eyes as I say, But if a war breaks out with your alliance. I declare that I will rip the alliance down with my own two hands. You are now a messenger who will relay the words of ours. I hope our judgment and words will not cause a war. You must have seen with your own eyes the end I was about to bring to the guest house, right? Yes, I saw that light. I am a man who constantly changes, so I dont show mercy with each action. Now that this happened, the alliance should take into consideration my actions even more. I came this far killing people. And you are a lucky one. Only then did Won ga-sung exhale in a trembling manner and bow to me and the others around me. Sect Leader, young lord Mong, Master Yukhap and third young lord. I will be back. Thank you for sparing me. Sam Bok snorts as he was excluded. And Won Ga-sung looks at him as he says in a condescending tone, Sorry for making you feel like that. Thanks to you too. Then. Sam Bok mumbles at Won Ga-sung who turned. Is that bastard saying he is sorry or that he will come for revenge At the awkward atmosphere, Sam Bok apologizes to third young lord, realizing he was doing too much. I am sorry. Young lord. Third young looks at the sky and says, What do you have to be sorry for? You are saying something wrong. He turns to Sam Bok. I can do that much. Yes. For a moment, no one opens their mouths, and the guesthouse goes silent. It was at this moment that I could say that I did nothing and stayed still. Sam Bok moves alone and wanders around pouring alcohol. Apparently, Sam Bok wanted a sip to drink, so he poured himself a drink first. When his thirst became quenched, the young lord spoke. the first thing I learned when I was young was to reduce joy, anger, and sorrow. If one is happy then the emotions build up and if the emotions build up, they get in the way for training. If one gets angry and loses their cool and if they lose their cool, they lose their opponent. When you have joy, you will go after it, and training will become neglected. You get stronger only by reducing the emotions of joy and sorrow. You survive only when you get strong. This is something I learned before I learned martial arts. I look at the third young lord. Looking at him, there seemed to be no emotion on his face. A man who had learned to control his emotions. Of course, I dont know why he was saying this while drinking. However, since everyone was drinking, they listened to the guy. And I speak to young lord, So. He looks ahead and sighs. So it happened as such. I didnt feel much sadness when someone around me suddenly died. There was nothing to be joyful about. The left and right elders taught us that they were also those without emotions for a while. It was the same with other instructors. However, all the men who lacked emotion were afraid of the Cult Leader too, or they found him difficult, so I ended up thinking as such. Do I have to be the same someday? Is that the right thing? He looks at us with blank eyes. To be honest, I dont know how to live my life from now on. I burst into laughter. After I laughed, young lord asks, Why are you laughing? When one laughs, there doesnt have to be a reason. You laugh because you want to. Third young lord tells me. I know all too well about anger. But right now, it is hard to tell if my emotions are sadness or not. I have a drink and then step ahead and stand in front of them like an old man about to act, or even a teacher about to lecture the evil ones. Well, after thinking for a while, I say what I want to. What is sorrow? I walk back and forth, with my hands behind my back and point to the guest house. The name of the guest house that my grandfather left for me was the Purple Cloud Guest House. One day, I suddenly realized that my grandfather had gotten old. Only then did I get a look at his life and realize that, from the time he opened his eyes to the moment he closed them, he was always worried for me. His life had never shown signs of getting better. I realized this too late, and soon he was leaving for heaven. One day, after wandering around, I came home and, before I even went into the room, I noticed the guesthouse was silent. I knew it then. I knew that I was alone. I realized the fact that the reason I wasnt alone before was because of my grandfather. And I realized in that silence that I was now truly alone. Most of the time, sadness is the moment when all such emotions come together. I look into the eyes of the third young lord. Do you know a little bit of what sadness is? He nods at that. Now I explain my anger to them. there are many memories left in the guest house, but actually, there wasnt much money left. I often fought with money lenders, but then one day I heard this strange noise and ran out only to find the guest house was on fire. It was in flames. The guest house was weak against fire. While looking at the guesthouse burning in fire, I thought of my grandfather and my emotions felt complicated. My heart when I was looking at the guy who set the fire was clearly angry. You understand that? Third young lord nods. I briefly describe joy, which wasnt really my forte. Still, I am happy because I told you people, at least roughly, what sadness is. Sam Bok asks me with a dry smile. Sect Leader, what is pleasure? I answer Sam Bok with a smile. That, even I dont know. Cannot even guess it. I am trying to guess what the worlds greatest pleasure is the odds of such a day coming for us men is rather small. Difficult too. Sam Bok nods. Right. I stop smiling and say, There are still many people I need to beat to death, let us think about it later. Who, who can explain what pleasure is? Is someone here? I look at Pervert Demon, Ghost Demon and third young lord too. Everyone either stays silent or shakes their heads. I nod and then say, Things are fine even without it. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 204 After I came back from the dead, I thought I was doing well in keeping Pervert Demon from committing to the Demonic Cult. However, this was a battle I was still constantly fighting. Even if the words such as Evil and the Four Great Evils were just my joke to them, it is my goal that these people do not join the Demonic Cult or do evil things. Originally, I thought the most important person was Pervert Demon, who was one of the crazier ones, but it was thanks to him that I came to know Sword Demon. And because Ghost Demon became inspired by him to an extent, he also luckily came to join my cause. I was catching the bad ones and turning them towards the light. Normal ways of persuasion didnt work well, so I had to throw in a couple talks of useless nonsense. Even so, my intent remains the same. Evil ones The side where the light shines down is warmer. Do not go over to the darkness. If I take advantage of these people, wouldnt I be the evil one? Actually, I dont care if they are evil or not. Because I am a crazy man in the first place. On the outside, I curse, beat, and laugh at the smallest things, but on the inside, I am one who is looking after these jerks 12 times a day. To do it together. With me, who is staggering between the boundaries of black and white. Well, it isnt easy to turn away from the dark towards the light all at once. In that sense, what did the third young lords walk out mean? It is something I dont know. Its because in the previous life, it was obvious he would have died once the second or great young lord had caught him. Pervert Demon and Ghost Demon would also be there. Even though Sam Bok was exhausted from all the running and began to doze off, the third young lord just stared at the guesthouse. There is nothing special to say, nothing much to say, and talking is bothersome. He watched the sunset and so did I. The sun went down, and the sunset was covering the world. Soon the dark night came. When the stars began to shine against the darkness of the night Both the third young lord and I looked at the night sky and the stars. If the stars in the night sky felt beautiful, it must mean that there was a change in the perception of joy and sorrow in the third young lord. And if those stars look like nothing much, then he must not have changed much. But I dont bother asking. Anyone can see that he had been staring at the starry sky for a long time and, thanks to that, I too looked at the sky. Sword Demon puts down the wooden sword for a moment and sits on a bench as he looks at the night sky. Looking at the shape of the scattering and gathering stars, he was getting dizzy wondering if there were traces of the sword held within the stars. Looking at the star, which is shining alone, he begins to feel envious. One can imagine that it might be the star of Im So-baek or Cult Leader. Well, it is because he is not someone who can be compared with those two. So, for a while, Sword Demon searches the night sky to see if there is a star which matches his skills. It was funny to think that he thought that the size and brightness of the stars represented different martial arts. Regardless, he seriously counted them. However, it wasnt easy to find a star that accurately represented him. Before being able to find the star, he lowers his eyes and looks towards the entrance. . After a while, a voice echoes out. Hong Mok-han, the messenger to the right elder. Sword Demon answers, Come in. Once the door opens, the messenger comes in with red clothes and kneels down. Have you been well? Sword Demon nods. It isnt much. It has been a while since we met, messenger Hong. The messenger known as Hong Mok- han raises his head and makes eye contact with Sword Demon. I do not know what to address you as. You dont have to worry about that, just call me freely. Hong Mok- han reveals the purpose of his visit. Senior, there was an order from the Cult Leader to retrieve the Light Sword for those who want the position of Light Left Elder, which has been vacant for too long. As a result, those who belonged to the Cult, and the elders who stepped back, all expressed their interest in this. In addition, people from the allied sects have come in as well. When the Right Elder heard this news, he proclaimed that the sword should be retrieved. Is that so? Right Elder warned us to determine the location first and then to carry out the order. If senior decides the place, I will pass it on to those interested to come compete and take it. Messenger Hong. Yes. Are there loads of troops? Hong Mak- han purses his lips and answers, It is difficult for me to get an accurate estimate. We even had people of the allied families coming up. Sword Demon looks around. Is that so? It will be difficult to meet around here. You need the time and date right now? If senior accepts and decides it, I will head back and deliver it. Sword Demon looks at the night sky and asks him, Messenger Hong, do you think it will rain? Hong Mak- han answers after checking the sky. It looks like it will continue to be normal sunny days for the upcoming 10 days. Then just go with that. I will relay the message. Where would you like it to be? There is a guest house in a secluded place to the southwest direction from here. Theres only one guesthouse around, so it will not be difficult to find it. Yes. I will inform them. After he is done, the messenger gets up and looks around. Is the stay convenient? Sword Demon nods. It is quiet, so it isnt exactly a bad thing. Is the Right Elder doing alright? He seems to be exhausted and is busy with a lot of work. I see. The Cult Leader didnt say anything? To which the messenger cautiously says, He did. Speak it then. That is a bit It is fine. This wouldnt be the first time that Ive heard harsh words from the Cult Leader. Hong Mok-han lowers his head as he says, wooden sword is not suitable for those who are training. I understand. Yes. Messenger Hong, you and the Right Elder will appease the volunteers well so that there will be fewer casualties. It seems like the Cult Leader is bored. There are still many people. I will take this into consideration. Then, I should leave. When Sword Demon nods, Hong Mok-han walks to the entrance and turns around. He bows his head as he leaves. Sword Demon mumbles as he hears the brief sigh of Hong Mok-han as he begins to go back. messenger Hongs footwork has improved. Suddenly, Sword Demon looks at the night sky and predicts that sooner or later, the big and small stars will lose their light. Well, it was time to take out the Light Sword which had been kept in the closet for a long time. Should this emotion be called anger? Or bitterness? Sword Demon couldnt understand it, so he sighed. Before taking out the sword, Sword Demon goes into the house and tidies up the furniture. While looking at the night sky, I turn to the side facing the town. Even though I cant see clearly in the dark, I realize someone is coming and, after a while, from the darkness approaches a man who looks at me and the others. Senior has come. Sword Demon looked like a person going on a trip from the way he was dressed. This wasnt his usual leisure outfit. Sword Demon approaches and looks at the third young lord who is puzzled. Elder, you came. Sword Demon sits down next to me without saying a word and puts his sword, which I had never seen before, onto the table. I knew this long black sword is the Demon Sword but why is this man suddenly here with this sword? I couldnt help but ask. Senior, why are you so angry? To even bring this sword out. Sword Demon pours the alcohol on the table into a glass. I received a call asking for the sword back. Aha. I brought it here because I thought the fight would escalate here. Oho. If Sect Leader isnt comfortable, I can fight elsewhere. Hmm? As I exclaim, Sword Demon glares at me. After clearing my throat, I encourage Sword Demon. Good job. It would be better to meet here. Come to think of it, the guest house stinks of blood. It is better to break it down once in a while and rebuild it again. I am thinking of making it again as a branch of the Low-Down Sect so, there is nothing to be so concerned about. And it wasnt my guesthouse to start with, so there is no reason for senior to feel that bad about it. Sword Demon nods and says, I am sorry. You should have said it, but anyone who belongs to the evil side will become my enemies. I cannot let them come and take away elder hyungs sword like some item on a mortgage. Right? I look at the third young lord. When his eyes move around as if he is looking for an answer, Sam Bok, who just got up from his nap, answers instead. Right. Sect Leader is right. I ask, Did you dream of something? No. I didnt sleep. Normally, escorts shouldnt sleep, so I just let it go. Sword Demon asks the third young lord, Third young lord, what are you doing in here? I feel caught in the middle of them and so I turn my head to the left and right. I want to see their faces while theyre talking, but being in the middle doesnt allow it. When I look at third young lord, he says, I was being chased and Sect Leader here saved me, so I decided to stick with him for a while. Look at the night sky. I nod and look at Sword Demon. I see. Actually, I saved several lives. I saved shit face and then the ugly one and even saved the son of the Cult Leader. And. It has been a while since I congratulated myself. No one responds so I mumble. Who am I talking to? Sword Demon asks me, Who chased after him? A member of the Heavenly Alliance, but he sent the man back after threatening him. I watched, but if I had a choice, I would have killed all of them. If teacher Baek Wei sends his disciples or subordinates again, I will have no choice but to kill. If the Demonic Cult comes to retrieve the sword given to senior, I have no choice but to kill them all. As if my state seemed volatile, Sword Demon holds me by the shoulder. Sect Leader, calm down now. I am always calm. I always keep a cool heart. Sword Demon says, Do not talk nonsense and go cultivate. I get up from where I was sitting. I confirm. While I was entering the guest house, Sword Demon spoke to the third young lord. You do not need to be involved, so leave with the escort. I enter the guesthouse and listen to the conversation between the two for a while. Third young lord responds, I have nowhere else to go. Sect Leader saved my life once and I will recover here till then. Forces of the Cult will come here in 10 days. Are you going to kill a member of the Cult and become a sinner? Elder, that is the wrong way to phrase it. What is? Those that attacked me are the sinners. In other words, the troops that got involved in the fight between brothers. I am curious too. Who are the people who are coming for your position? A couple of things about this dont sit right with me. Come to think of it, the third young lord is still a member of the Demonic Cult. In fact, what his title is, is unknown. It didnt seem like an honorary position but just one title given to those in line to take the role. The situation of the guesthouse couldnt get any worse than this. I sit cross legged on a chair that I am used to and think about things. Is this true war? It cannot be. It was a good way to have a competition like this where people following the Demonic Way will compete. To be precise, the Demonic Cult and the Crazy Demon Alliance fight or the Demonic Cult and the Heavenly Alliance fight against us Four Evils. At the center, there will be the Sword Demon and the third young lord who arent welcomed ones. Suddenly, I cant hold back and ask Sword Demon, Senior, when will they come to take the sword? In 10 days, I cannot be sure if It is night or day. Right. I understand. I am going to have to cultivate for a while then. I think of us four and begin to cultivate for a long time. In order to keep the qi within me in balance, I focus on my cultivation. It isnt easy for a long time. I had to forget the place I was in, forget about the other four, the Demonic Cult, and turn a blind eye to the bloody smell. In the end, disregarding the warriors and the concerns and the hopes I spoke about, I began to cultivate. Maybe it was because I stared at the night sky for a long time. Fortunately, the darkness that takes over when I close my eyes feels like the darkness of the night sky. And in the blackness of my heart, I manage to grab onto the shining stars one by one and stack them within my dantian. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 205 Never in my life have I done cultivation with such peaceful mind like now. However, the third day, my internal qi wasnt the same. Sometimes it felt cold, and at times I shivered and there were times when I thought I would freeze to death. Concentrating the mind sometimes resembles dreaming and sometimes presents me with hallucinations which are more vivid than the dreams. Like now. To say that hallucinations were felt vivid made no sense, when one learns martial arts there are times when we enter into another realm which Is difficult to explain in words. I wish this was just a feeling of mind but, I was actually feeling cold. It was as if I was being pushed into hell of ice before being harassed further. In my hallucinations, my feet froze first. Then pushing back the snow which was till my waist, I headed for the top of the snowy mountain. How long was it? I dont know. I wasnt sure iin such situations. I got caught in the blizzard, and walked with my eyes, nose and mouth all stiff. In such cases, there is a chance that if I rushed with the help of martial arts, I can find an easy way to climb, or could fall off the cliff or freeze and not wake up from the dream. So I choose to take the hard way. The cold, lonely and sorrowful ways, but sometimes I climbed with smiles. I climbed up a snow mountain with nothing but a snowstorm for half day or more and arrived at a snowy plateau. The air felt thin and difficult to breath, and the win was dying down. I sighed out as I expected that the level of ice qi has risen with each step. I thought I had arrived at the end of the realm of the ice. That is enough for today. I never dreamed of a full moon. Although the realm wasnt divided in detail. It was clear to me that it would be as vast as the combination many stages of land. After lying on my back on the snowy land, I closed my eyes with a sense of comfort and at the same time, after opening my eyes to reality, I let out a long exhale. Phew. Cold breath flowed along my exhale and I tried to open my eyes and felt the tearing sensation of eyes. Actually, I felt the body was entirely damp, as if the aftermath of ice qi had spread all over the body. When I finally opened my eyes, the Four Great Evils were looking me. Ahhh, fuck. You shocked me. I was upset. It was because I had been surrounded by Pervert Demon, Ghost Demon and Sword Demon and my sense of reality I was hoping for, hadnt even returned fully yet. While I barely came to senses, Ghost Demon sighed and said, Sect leader, are you alright? I thought you fell into a state of sleep. No. I am fine. I experienced enough of it in my past life as a crazy man. It was an experience I never thought I would head into again. And Pervert Demon glared at me for a moment and then turned around without saying anything. After Sword Demon nodded, he said. You worked so hard. I checked the expressions of three people. It seemed like they were watching to see what happened. It was evident that the cultivation was begun when it got dark but now the sun was in the middle of the sky and it was clear around. How long did the cultivation last? Ghost demon answered. You took about a day and a half. Time continued to increase. I nodded. Nice. I was about to freeze. The cultivation should also be done in a limit. One cannot be as ignorant as me. The Ghost Demon smiled. Now head up and wash yourself. The cultivation is done for the time being then? Recover. Wash up and come. I couldnt stand it because there was this wet feeling around the body. I was going to wash up behind the guesthouse but I heard a clatter from the kitchen and checked in. while Sam Bok was cooking, he looked shocked Sect leader, you are awake? Ah, you werent sleeping right. lunch is being pepared. I confirm. I went out the back door and took my clothes off as I headed for the well. When I touched the water, it wasnt that warm. After connecting the two tables, Pervert Demon, Ghost Demon, Sword Demon, the third young lord sat around and looked at te chopsticks. Looking at the table prepared by Sam Bok, I thought. If it wasnt for Sam Bok, we would have all starved to death. Pervert Demon responded. You are going till death? I said in a confident manner. Die of hunger. Everyone must have been holding on here because it is annoying to go buy food outside. Or while eating the food I made, it felt bad. Ghost Demon laughed. Is your cooking skills that bad? I answered while holding the chopsticks. I once made noodles for a customer, and after eating one pair of chopsticks, he threw the bowl at me. Ghost Demon asked with an absurd expression. So what about it? What do you mean, what? After kicking off, I grabbed him by the hair and fought. Hahahaha. When Sam Bok burst into laughter alone, everyone looked at Sam Bok blankly and spoke with a puzzled expression. Why am I the only one laughing? Sorry. Actually, I was holding back my laughter, but I held it back. Lets eat. yes. Sword Demon whow as eating with a dull expression asked if he was curious. Who won? There is a saying in our neighbourhood that we scared each other off. If you hit together, the fight will stop right there. We fought over a bowl of noodles but it was his fault for throwing the bowl and it was my fault for making it tasteless. Noodles cannot be the reason to murder even if one was enraged. Not far there. So, should it be a draw? That is how it ended. Sword Demon nodded. There are fights which ended with draw. While eating, I asked Sword Demon. What about you? the time has come for the sword to be taken away. Sword Demon said, Retrieving the sword. This is probably an order with no idea. The meaning must be to kill the former left guardian. Pervert Demon frowned, Is that so? Sword Demon nodded. There must be those who know that it is a trap by cult leader. There will be those who come knowing that. in the end, because they are hunans they want to look good. Some will want head on fight and the other with come in groups. There wll be those who come late too steal the sword. There will be those who came from the allied families of the cult and want to take this chance for their family to be known in the cult. So, this is no different from cleaning all of that, and the cult leader entrusted that to me. Ghost Demon asked looking curious. Why clean up? To which Sword Demon answered. The left guardian needs to be appointed by the cult leader. The third young lord who was listening to the story nodded. Right. well, everything that happens iin the cult is upto the hands of the cult leader. One day, if we bring a man unseen before and introduces them as the left guardian from then, who will even go against his decision? After hearing this far, I asked Sword Demon. if the cult leader so bored? Sword Demon looked at me like I asked a strange question. What do you mean? I am asking about there being any possibility that the cult leader will come watch a fight like this. Will third young lord know it better? Third young lord explained the character of his father. He will not come if there are many people. Dont expect many people to come and he will be here. It is something I dont know or can predict. I looked at Sword Demon. What does Senior think? Sword Demon answered. I dont think he will come. Why. Sword Demon looked around and said, he doesnt have the heart to kill us all yet. These results are just curious. What is clear is that when sect leader comes here, it is better for everyone not to act out and just scatter in all directions. He probably wont come, but make sure to listen to my words. If Sword Demon recommended running away, it would be right to run. I answered simply. I get it. As I was about to finish my eating, Sword Demon put his chopsticks down and said, We have guests. Already? Like people who hate washing dishes would speak, we got up and left leaving Sam Bok behind. Three carriages arrived at the empty lot on the left side, a little far from the guesthouse, and people got off and bowed their heads toward us. A man in the group looked at me and said, Low Down Sect leader, we arent here to fight. We will just set up tempoerary barracks for a while. From the carriage in the back, the tools needed to build the barracks and wooden frames were taken out, people clung to them and began too build the barracks. Some of them set up pillars ahead and installed sun shades, there were tables and chairs placed under, and even put four staff to work. I asked Sword Demon. A referee-like person from Demonic Cult? None. Then do they want to record or observe it? As far as I know, none. Looks like an ally. I looked at the Four Evils at the entrance of the guest house and then walked alone with hands behind the back to the men at barracks. you all are working hard. Those who were setting the barracks up, stopped moving at the same time. Low Down Sect leader. I shook my hand in limit and rejected their bows. I see. Looking at the faces and color of he skin, they were dark which meant they were farmers or workers. What is more is that all of them seemed pretty skilled that they were setting up the barracks at a high pace. I said to the man in the 30s. Where did you hear the news about the fight and come about like ghosts? The man answered. We only took the orders. We didnt expect to arrive here first. Sect leader. Which sect? The man answered lowering the head. Forgive us for not being able to answer that. I see, you did a good job. Yes. Can I look inside the barracks? The guy said pointing to the barracks being put. Ah, you can look at them whenever you want to. I went around the barracks and checked to see if there were any flags or symbols of sect around. However, the shape of the carriage and the sword on the waist of the workers were closely examined but nothing was sure. So, there was no evidence to guess. But it is fine. Like a young man from a remote village, I looked around at the movements and expressions of the workers. I held my breath to listen to their breathing, and told the guy in charge. didnt master Baek Wi come to watch? I saw the guy in the back, who was working, go a little shocked. I confirmed the other guy who looked at me but avoided my gaze. No one answered my question. Such a question If no one responded in an instant, the silence answered. And I asked the head. He wants to come and see? Or fight? I want to confirm one thing, I cannot kill all of you without a reason. Only then did the man stand up. Sect leader, of course, we arent here to fight. We received a call from the cult and when we found out the situations, and the party of the left guardian One of the workers interrupted in low tone. So noisy. Yes. The man who had his back turned and tied the rope connecting barracks to something like a stake, answered. Since we are here to watch, there is no need to kill us. Sect leader. If we talk too much, our tongues will be cut, so be kind to us. I nodded. I understand. Your tongues are precious. There is fun in living with a tongue. Taste and talk. If the tongues are pulled ugh, that is terrible. I giggled and laughed alone in the gap between the workers and kept snooping around on purpose. Everyime I went closer, they were sweat out, probably because of the heat or nervousness. In the first place, they knew that I am one who sided with evil once. Of course, I had no idea that they were allies of Demonic Sect. if I think about it, it shouldnt be strange. Anyway, after looking around for a while, I went back to the guest house and told them. Senior, it seems like they are onlookers who claim to hold a neutral ground. Sword Demon nodded. Who is that? It has to be the teacher Baek Wei we talked about. So creepy. I rubbed my forearms in an instant, while they looked at me, I said. Come to think of it, even master Baek Wei has some share in our guest house. Well, the last owner Butcher, I took it from him. He cannot think I stole the guesthouse, right? Even after saying that, I felt that my ideas were a little off. Seeing the people setting up the barracks, pervert Demon asked. Master, wouldnt it be better to just kill them all? Sword Demon shook his head. Leave it alone. If we had masters like that as workers, it would be correct to say that they just came to watch. There is no need to make enemies in here. Yes. We each digested the meal we had just then and workers continued to set the place feeling confused. I brushed my teeth and said, Anyway, there are a lot of crazy bastards in the world. Ugh, crazy bastards. Tsk tsk. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 206 There is no way to immediately confirm whether or not the man Ive been thinking of is the Evil Emperor. But at this time, he seems like a mad man with the possibility of being a Mad Emperor rather than simply being the Evil Emperor. I think about this for a while watching the people build the barracks. There are so many crazy people that the meaning of being crazy seems diluted. In a place where everyone is insane, being crazy doesnt mean much. If that were the case, the craziest thing would have been for me to act like a normal person in the crowd of lunatics. I think of Master Baek Wei through the eyes of a normal person. What on earth is he thinking, watching all the fights happen here? After thinking about it, I came to a conclusion. It could be because watching the fight is fun, just like it is in our childhoods. Then the fact that master Baek Weis attitude is pure madness doesnt change. As the name suggests, he possesses a madness which fits his character. However, the Four Great Evils, including me, look at the approaching men with even more surprise than when we watched the guys set up the barracks. What is this now? The Murim Alliance people have appeared. Dan Hyuk-san and the members of the Seven Sword troops, whom we met before, have come. First, we greet them. Warrior Dan and warrior Yun, welcome. After looking around at us with nervous faces they bow. Sect Leader, we greet you again. You are here for? Dan Hyuk-san asks, We received news from the alliance, but were worried about the Sect Leader, so we came. What news? Dan Hyuk-san looks around as he says, I received a kind of report that there would be a fight between the Four Great Evils around this guest house. According to the letter, they claimed they would fight others and that there would be no damage to the people living close by. It was a report which said they hoped no orthodox sect would get involved because such attempts would be stopped in advance at the thought of the village being damaged. I look a bit shocked. Which is why we reported about the fight here in advance. Yun Ji-hak answers with a puzzled look. Yes. For now you did. We consider it to be from an ally so the man will look into it himself, do not worry. Ally? Dan Hyuk-san looks at me blankly. Ally, of course, Sect Leader. There was confusion for a while because it was written in a letter, but when we looked further into it, it had Sect Leaders name in it. I nod and answer. Right. The factions think of me as an ally? The guy looks at me and says, Reading Prison. Do you know what that is? I shake my head. They are an ally we didnt know we had. And it is reassuring too. I look at the Four Great Evils and they are silent. A group which the Murim Alliance knows? Dan Hyuk-san shakes his head. We dont know either. We will investigate it. I look towards the barracks. I dont know and the Murim Alliance doesnt know, it is most likely that they are the ones. I point to the men setting up the barracks. The Four Great Evils and the Murim Alliance members turn their gazes at once. Those who completed the barracks in an instant were putting their tools back into the carriage. Originally, the words said Reading Prison- reading referring to a reading room and prison meaning an enclosed space. And so, it can be labeled as a reading prison. And the next three are the Three Pleasures. And it would be the pleasures of a gentleman. Both parents alive. The brothers untouched. And to acquire and educate children. They are the three pleasures of the gentleman. Of course, master Baek Wei wouldnt have normal warriors under him because he is a demon. For example, rather than acquiring and educating the worlds children, he would rather capture the evilest people in the world and torture to educate them. Like a butcher with a broken mind. While I am lost in these thoughts, Yun Ji-hak asks me, Sect Leader, should I ask them? I shake my head. Dont bother. When these people talk too much, their tongues are cut out. Just then a man walks over from the barracks and speaks as if reporting to me, Sect Leader, we have completed setting up the barracks. There is just one person left, and the rest will be leaving. It must have been uncomfortable to see but thank you for letting us do our work. Then, good luck. The guy bows down deeply. I nod. Everyone had a hard time setting up those barracks in the hot sun. Those are very encouraging words, thank you. The man turns around, joins the men who set up the barracks, and soon starts the carriage. Certainly, judging from their expressions they carried an air that told me that they didnt get to live like normal people before. Everyone was very polite, so it seemed like they were captured and made to live like slaves. I look at Dan hyuk-san. Warrior Dan. Yes. Somehow, I ended up fighting here. I will look around to make sure there is no damage around, so do not worry too much. As the letter said, the demons will continue to fight here amongst themselves, so there will not be a loss of life here. They are probably controlling the outside, so there shouldnt be a problem anymore. Do not get involved. Because they are insane people. Dan Hyuk-san and the others have nothing to do here. Dan Hyuk-san who understands what I am saying, says, Sect Leader. Yes. I am not sure if I should say this, but Sect Leader often refers to us in such a friendly manner, like younger siblings. I dont know what kind of fight is happening here, but we also wish the best of luck to the Sect Leader. To those words, I respond. Give my regards to the Alliance Leader. Yes. While the Murim Alliance members are stepping back, Dan Hyuk-san comes closer to me and whispers. Sect Leader, is there anything I can help you with? This is a question without reference to my post. This is no order from the Alliance Leader, but we came with the intention to help and join. I think for a moment and then tap him on the shoulder. Umm, warrior Dan. Thank you, but I can handle this from here. I understand. Dan Hyuk-San takes a step back and looks at the Four Evils. Everyone, then again. I wave my hands at them. It was nice to see you. Take care. Yes, Sect Leader. I feel drained even before fighting. On the other hand, what were people saying for a report to be sent to the Murim Alliance and for them to reach a conclusion to not intervene here? For a while, we sit on the chairs in front of the guest house and do not say a thing. However, there are several snorts at the absurd situation. Feeling bored, I get up and head to the barracks. The young man there guarding the barracks looks flustered at my sight. Sect Leader, welcome. I nod and point to the table. Is it fine if I sit down? Yes. Such cold people. Not a response. Never doing anything they dont want to. I look at the ink stone, brush and paper on the table and then look at the Four Evils in front of the guest house. Do they look like this? I dont think I am the only one who would want to watch this fight. First of all, one will be able to see the rare chance of Sword Demon fighting. If a really strong enemy appears then Sword Demon will pull out his true nature. Furthermore, if one didnt know about the existence of Pervert Demon, they would also see the unfamiliar ice arts in person. There will be a chance to check my skills with master Yukhap, so even if I was Master Baek Wei, I would want to come here. I confirm. That is how it feels. I ask the man, Looks like the owner is drawing something. The paper isnt for a book but for an image, a painting. The man says, Yes. Are you saying yes to answer or just to respond? It isnt like that. Give me a long answer. I am cautious about answering because I was asked to be polite to Sect Leader. Knowing your enemy and knowing yourself increases the chances of winning a battle. It is the rule and principle one should know when they have a superior who grinds over his subordinates. I ask the guy. Your name? Chil Geom (Seventh Sword) You are the seventh then? Yes. Ah, show me your weapon. Chil Geom picks out a scythe from his waist and shows it to me. I nod looking at the familiar one. Six harmonies of the Three, and Seven Swords it is the same whether people are trying to be ambiguous or not. Do you get what I mean? I dont know. It is fine. A lot of times, I dont know things either. Yes. I ask while looking at the items on the table. When will this painter come? I dont know. Ah, so you admit your master is a painter? Chil Geoms face goes pale, and he goes silent. Looking at his reaction, I turn my head and look at the road. A carriage is approaching. I ask Chil Geom who is looking at it. master? No. Then he must be a candidate who came to die. The carriage slows down in front of the barracks and the coach man completely ignores me. The carriages curtains move and a middle-aged man glares at me. He must be having an upset stomach judging by his pale and dark eyes. He looks a bit like a ghost, but since I cant back down in a staring fight, I glare too. The pale ghost smiles and then passes by lowering the curtain. Of course, he isnt someone I know, so I ask Chil Geom. Who is he? Seems like a bad one. Chil Geom answers, He is the head of the Ghost Spirit Demon family which is associated with the Cult. I nod and then ask for more information. Right. Is the man skilled enough to challenge the position? Chil Geom answers, He is one of the best out of those who would come, he deserves to be here. Am I understanding this right? Are they an allied force that isnt inside the Cult but active outside? Chil Geom shakes his head. They are different from the allied factions because they carry out orders. Allies are requested to cooperate and do not carry out orthodox orders. Like you? Yes. I applaud Chil Geon for the time being. Yaaah, you are young and smart. And also, a disciple to master Baek Wei. Nice. Thank you. The carriage with the head of the Ghost Spirit Demon family stops in front of the guest house and the ghost-like man who I saw earlier, gets out of it. He is a skilled one and I can feel it. One who appears without a subordinate, stands in front of the guest house, and looks at Sword Demon. It is a sight that impresses me. For a moment, like a possessed guy in white robes, I spread the paper on the desk and picked the brush up. Get some food. Yes. While Chil Geom goes to eat, I take a breath and hold the brush. For a moment, I have a thought. This I am doing the same thing as Master Baek Wei. I ask Chil Geom who is making the food. Chil Geom. Yes, Sect Leader. Just curious. Did your master expect me to sit here and paint? Chil Geom holds back his laughter. Yes, he did. Maybe he will be delighted. Are you happy because he predicted my actions or because I tried to paint? Chil Geom says, He expected Sect Leader to have a pure side, so when I saw you sitting there at the desk, it was something about painting or writing something looking at the guest house. I admired it. Your teacher is above me. Amazing. I look up at the barracks and something passes over it. Soon a man in black, who is excellent in footwork, lands on the ground. I cant see his face as his back is turned to me, but his movements when he landed on the ground feel so calm it was like he mastered the arts of stealth. This one too, walks to the guest house not caring about the barracks. So, I ask Chil Geom. Who is that assassin? Chil Geom shakes his head. I dont know either. Putting down the brush, I get up and head for the guest house. Sam Bok. From inside, Sam Bok jumps out. Yes. I point to the Ghost Spirit Demon family head. Take the guest. Sam Bok wipes the water off his hand with his apron and then the Ghost Spirit Demon is approached. May I take your order? But the guy glares at Sam Bok. Not needed. Yes. And Sam Bok asks the man in black, May I take your order? No need. Yes. Ghost Spirit Demon family head says to Sword Demon, Sir, please introduce yourself. Have you had a change of heart after living alone all your life? You seem to be hanging around some weirdos. Sword Demon speaks in a calm tone. They are a disciple and younger ones I met in Kangho. I watched the expression of Sword Demon with Ghost Demon and Pervert Demon. Strangely, when he says it like that It feels like Sword Demon has become a little warmer than before. Out of boredom, I take over the duty of responding from Sword Demon and introduce myself. I am Lee Zaha, the third brother. Dont cause a stink in someone elses place. Place an order. Please note that only silver coins are accepted. Turn away if you dont have any. I am waiting for you before I make you roll on the ground. Before breaking you down. The Ghost Spirit Demon and man in black glares at me. . I am sure that the air just turned heavy because of me. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 207 As the Ghost Spirit Demon family head and the man in black seethe their killing intent towards me, Sword Demon opens his mouth. Ghost Spirit family head. The gloomy looking guy looks at Sword Demon. Left guardian, please speak. Sword Demon speaks with an expressionless face that doesnt change at all. If you came with other intentions, tell me now. Perhaps the family head too had some relationship with the guy and, while looking at Sword Demon, his eyes trembled. While the Ghost Spirit family head carefully chooses how to respond, Sword Demon continues. If you came here to broaden your knowledge, then I wont kill you. It is true that I severely injured the former head, but at that time we competed for the position, so we didnt have any ill feelings during the fight. Unfortunately, I experienced all of the familys martial arts then. So do you mean to say that you have surpassed the ability of the former head? As soon as Sword Demon says that everyone who was silent realizes the reality of the situation. The Ghost Spirit family head, stands up quietly and speaks. As the left guardian said, I came here because I was curious to fight you. Sword Demon tells him, Thank goodness. I have no grudge against you or the family. But I dont want you to come fight without a reason. If you challenge me or use your head with other intentions, I will make sure to find your family and make them souls tied to the demon sword. I am not looking down on your skills, but the time to challenge me isnt right. Go back right now. This time silence falls. The family head asks, Will you not allow me to watch? Sword Demon nods. I cannot imagine how many will come. One cannot look between friends and enemies and may end up killing them. It is good that one isnt forced to do it. Ghost Spirit family head, who had a gloomy atmosphere around, clears his throat as if he feels suffocated by the atmosphere. Elder, then, let us meet next time. My eyes widened in shock. What, is he scared? How could such a fiend get away with just these words? I could see that the fame of the name Sword Demon is of huge importance in the Demonic Sect. Even if the Ghost Spirit Demon family head is a head, the pride the man holds cannot be normal and yet he decided that backing away would be best. No one spoke while the man quietly walked into the carriage. It was always a bit funny when one of them decided to run, but this man walked away in an elegant manner. Sword Demon looks at the man in black. Who are you? You arent on the level to challenge for the role yet. The man in black answers. I am known as the one who was responsible for tracking down troops when the left guardian left. Cheol Saeng. Cheol Saeng cannot be this persons real name. Since it holds the meaning that he has to cut to live, it had to be a suitable title for an assassin. Sword Demon answers, But. The tracking team I led was annihilated by the elder. So. There are no personal emotions here. I just came because I cant die then. As soon as I check the sword on his belt, I notice that the wooden sword I had was the same length as his. The only difference was that his sword was black instead of a wooden sword. As soon as I check the sword of the assassin, I tell Cheol Saeng. Cheol Saeng, you. He looks at me like I am absurd, and I speak. This isnt a place for the long away junior. A young man who cannot afford to joke here. Be polite to seniors of the Sect and then make fun of them. Cheol Saeng says, What nonsense is this? A disciple of Heo Gyeom, a guy who is the same as the disciples disciple. Dont speak recklessly. I am Lee Zaha, the last direct descendant of Heo Gyeom. In terms of ranking, I am a master in the Sect you are in. What? Cheol Saeng looks at me with a surprised look and then at Sword Demon. Sword Demon is a man with no expression in the first place, so there was nothing that could make him change his expression. I grab the wooden sword with my left hand and raise It and then ask Cheol Saeng. What Sword is this? The guy answers with eyes open wide. One kill? Right. Cheol Saeng stands up and speaks to me in a polite tone. I will challenge you. I let the cursed words in my mouth come out. Ehhh, fuck . Inspired by the fact that Sword Demon appeared to the Ghost Spirit Demon family and sent the guy back, I tried to do the same, but now this guy wants to challenge me? This is why these bastards are from the Demonic Sect. Actually, it was a mistake because I used a technique that works for na?ve people. While thinking of the right words to find my way to escape Third one, take care of it. I glare at Sword Demon. What? I am a bit too flustered at the eldest hyung, so I continue to stare at him. Reluctantly, I point to the wide space ahead of the guest house and tell Cheol Saeng, Nice. lets go. Ah, this has been blown a bit out of proportion. As soon as the confrontation is decided, I head to the place with Cheol Saeng. After all, Demonic Cult is mainly about life and death. There is no need to set specific details. I win, I win and I lose, I lose. However, this place is in front of the guesthouse, not the Demonic Sect. When I arrive at the place and stand there, Cheol Saeng widens the distance and says, You ready? Well. Cheol Saeng, who had been walking with his back exposed, stops outside three or four steps, and then turns around. I have never competed with a warrior of the Demonic Cult, and suddenly I feel curious. Is this a battle of life and death? Cheol Saeng answers, Are you the elders disciple? I suspect that the one kill sword is fake. I scold Cheol Saeng. You pitiful bastard. That man also had a change of heart in his later years of life, so he didnt try to kill recklessly. It means that the gap has widened since then when people had to die if they were fought. You should know that your life is precious, so you will not carelessly consider other peoples lives. Stupid, bastard throwing around senseless words, walking around in dark clothes on a hot day. Honestly, it isnt something I wanted to say, but well, it is important for him to be put in his place, so it doesnt matter in what way I scold him. The guy asks me again, Are you ready? Well. When will you be ready? I yell at Sam Bok who is watching. Sam Bok! Yes, Sect Leader! I am thirsty. Sam Bok snatches the kettle there and then approaches me with nimble movements. After drinking, I glare at Cheol Saeng and say, Do we draw? I dont want to. Of course. I wrap the Shadow Moon Martial Arts in my left hand and cover my face. When the cold qi touches my face, my senses become heightened and I look at the guy through my fingers and say, I am ready. As soon as I finish speaking, the dust under Cheol Saengs feet rises and spreads around in a circular shape. Cheol Saeng steps into the air and draws his sword and moves in one breath. I stretch my hand out, which is covering my face, and grab the sword which comes close to my neck. I move my hand from my face to my neck. In the meantime, Cheol Saeng narrows 3 to 4 steps into one step, and even pulls out his sword. However, since it is the hand which has Shadow Moon Martial Arts, I try to infuse ice qi into the guy. This is the realm of the mountain trail which started from the guesthouse and reached the plateau of a snowy mountain. Cheol Saeng freezes with the sword the moment he tries to swing it. I push my head to the side to check the state of Cheol Saeng. A long time ago, when I was strong in martial arts, there was something I always wanted to try. It was to hold the sword of a warrior right between my index and middle finger. The level of Supreme nature. If one cant hold the sword between the two fingers to stop it, ones fingers and hand can be cut off. Thanks to that, I grab the sword with five fingers and my palm. I probably wouldnt have tried it if I hadnt learned the ice martial arts. Only then did I release the blade from my palm and say to Cheol Saeng, whose body is cold, How many times did you have to be saved to live? As he is frozen, there is no answer. . I grab the collar of the guy and throw him into the barracks with all my energy. As the body of the guy rushes at Chil Geom, the poor guy is so startled that he swings his scythe. The body of Cheol Saeng gets split with it. I glare at Chil Geom covered in blood. I checked what happened and his expression too. Chil Geom glares at me with a bloody face and I say, Who told you to watch this freely? Get rid of that body. I think about it and then feel goosebumps rise. The name of the dead guy is Cheol Saeng, and it meant the end of life when the body is slashed. After entrusting the process of disposing of the body to Chil Geom. I finally look at the carriage. Finally, the coachman swings the whip and starts the carriage. It was as if the Ghost Spirit Demon family head was watching this fight from within. And I tell the guy who is leaving, Family head, where in this world is anything you get for free? Stop before I chase after you. Normally in such circumstances, assassination needles would be convenient. *Swish!* This time, I use ice arts with the middle and index finger of my right hand and catch an object that rushes towards me. It is a coin. Maybe spectator fee. I confirm. After placing the coin into my pocket, I head for the guest house and the Four Evils rush to me and look at me like I am some monkey. Sword Demon speaks in a dry tone. You did good. Ghost Demon too speaks in a similar tone, You did good. Before Pervert Demon can speak, I tell him, Shut up. Pouring a glass of alcohol at the table, I say, One win streak. Not bad. Sam Bok. Every time Sam Bok is called out, he would breathe heavily, and I tell him, That is not normal. Yes. You never know when some of them will come. We might be surrounded so bring us plenty of food. Also, get us some beef jerky in case of emergencies. Isnt it too troublesome for us to break through the siege and go out to eat? Right. Be entrusted with the task of breaking through the siege. Why? We are too bothered to do it. Sam Bok nods his head like he realizes my intent. It would be better for me to leave now. Go then Sam Bok nods. Please give me some money. I gave it the other day. I used all of it. I tried to recall how much I gave Sam Bok the other day and how much he spent on the alcohol and sides, but I couldnt remember anything. I am pretty bad at such things. So, reluctantly, I take out a slip and give it to him and put a silver coin in his palm. This one is for your errands. Get dressed. Sam Bok smiles and looks at me. I confirm, What? did it. I said I confirm, like you do. I will come back safe. Sam Bok suddenly disappears with light footwork technique, and I see the other four there and look inside. The third young lord was asleep on the side of the table. Did he stand guard last night? Pervert Demon nods. Right. I was going to say confirm, but I didnt want to after Sam Bok did. I sit next to the Four Evils and watch the peaceful daily life occurrences by clearing out unnecessary thoughts. The problem is that I am clearing out my emotions and that couldnt be peaceful. Then, it means that the ordinary life here will turn into a mess soon. So, I stay silent, and Sword Demon says, The Ghost Spirit Demon family head, the former one, retired because of me. I killed the members of the troops of the guy called Cheol Saeng too. Actually, I even forgot that I didnt kill him. The other day, killing those who fight back is normal. I thought it was the end, but the people involved couldnt possibly think that. Normally, I thought the Cult Leader just wanted the sword retrieved out of boredom, but that doesnt seem to be the case. To realize that those who were once victims wouldnt forget their emotions. We listen to his recollection and then, Sword Demon says, They will come to retrieve the sword, but it seems like those with a grudge against me will come too. The Cult Leader is sending them one by one, smiling. I ask Sword Demon, For what will the Cult Leader be smiling? To which he answers, How dare you think about living a peaceful life? I can already hear the ridicule in his voice. Even though I left the Cult, the Cult Leader doesnt allow me to lead a normal life. I sigh as I hear Sword Demons lonely memories. However, after coming to my senses, I analyze his thoughts and this guy is clearly depressed. In the meantime, I turn my head and look at the people who had nothing to do around here. There was depression, obsession, a nymphomaniac, and I had mania. I handle this new information with a trembling heart. We arent normal. Suddenly, I want to call Moyong Baek. . . . Come to think of it, having him here is a bit dangerous. I think about how if he were to get confined into such an extreme environment, Moyong Baek would also end up giggling and making poison in the kitchen. That cannot happen. So, I come back to my senses. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 208 When it gets dark, I decide to stand guard. It is because everyone besides me already took turns standing guard while the others cultivated. The Evil ones protected me before, so it is my turn to do it now. When standing guard, it is right to set a patrol route and walk around. But now, there was no need to patrol because the guest house was isolated, and the surrounding areas were deserted. In the first place, we arent ones to hold back, so being in an isolated area was better for us. As soon as the evil ones go in, I jump onto the roof of the guest house and sit cross legged. I look up at the darkening sky. In the guest house, everyone except me would probably rest. Maybe it is because of the quiet night, a holy night where nothing stands out, I hum a song like an old man with the moon as my friend. There arent many songs I can sing. Its because I struggle to memorize the lyrics of songs, and, even if I try to listen, the songs I retain are limited. Maybe that is why I tend to repeat just the songs I liked. Among them, several choruses of rhythmless songs come to mind, but today, I remember the song View the Sea by Jojo. Jojo built the View the Sea tower after defeating the five major ones who opposed him. This is the song that was recited when looking at the wide sea. I sit on the roof of the guest house and continue to look into the darkness spreading around me. The song had a part that made me think of the following- I climbed the mountain and looked at the wide sea. The sun and moon seem to rise from the center of the sea. Brilliant stars and galaxies that spread out in the sky. Of course, I dont know if this is even the right interpretation. Its not like I can ask the poet. Regardless, these are my thoughts while interpreting the text, so I just think what I want. And like that, I watch the darkness move from on top of the roof. I feel like I can somehow understand why Jojo was into killing so many. I am not excusing him or his actions, but I still understand. Because neither of us are good people. It is said that the guy was not right in the head. In terms of a person of Kangho, he is equivalent to a skilled warrior. In any case, I think that all the events of the days and nights and the universe originates from the sea. And if I had to apply this logic to me, it is as if all the qi of the sun and moon came from my dantian. Originally, the sun and moon and the qi appear as if they are shifting the work peacefully. This is what martial arts also shows. Therefore, I cant help but worry about my situation. This is because everything starts at the sea, but I had dantian which fluctuates like the sea. And since it is night I lay back on the roof and watch the stars in the night sky to my hearts content. A star exists alone, and the universe is a group of stars. Brilliant means of shining light. That is the night view I am looking at right now. Jojo probably didnt write the poem for his descendants to gain enlightenment about martial arts, but I couldnt help but think about martial arts when reading his poem. If I look up at this dazzling night sky and close my eyes, the vast black sea will spread out before me. When I open my eyes again, it feels like the stars are falling onto me and I feel dizzy. I somehow manage to correlate the concept of martial arts, which stems from the brightness of the stars and the universe, to killing a specific person without having to kill many. If the Light Sky of the Sun and Moon is to sweep the majority of people as if changing the flow of the sea, I wanted the Heavenly Shining Light to be a beam of light. The point is this. A martial arts which is dazzlingly bright is difficult to block. Suddenly, I remembered the words of Alliance Leader. The reason why the sword technique of his is wonderful is because it looks ordinary on the surface. With a seemingly normal hit, the wooden sword wielded by the Sword Demon also broke in an instant. I can never think of that as ordinary. It is because it is a sword technique which holds the qi of Im So-baek. All of a sudden, I have a paradoxical thought. To hide ones killing intent behind the brightness of ones technique. Zaha Divine Arts is a martial art that needs to be defended against. That is because the realm of mine isnt yet suitable to unfold such an unstable martial arts. The reason being due to the fact that my martial arts fluctuates like the sea. That one time I unleashed it after peeing, it nearly turned my insides upside down. Therefore, its reasonable to conclude that Zaha Divine Arts only comes out stronger as I get stronger. I wonder if any martial arts gets stronger the angrier I get, but this was all I knew. Perhaps the martial arts is one based on anger. When an ordinary person gets angry, the aftermath of that anger remains embedded in the body and mind. Of course, Zaha Divine Martial Arts, which shakes my dantian and uses my qi, leaves an aftereffect on my body and mind so I try to refrain from unleashing it. Therefore, during my battles so far, I just stuck with alternating between embedding qi energy into the wooden sword and utilizing the Light Sky of Sun and Moon. The trick was simple. Freely switch between my Yin and Yang qi. The trick is simple but there are only a few people in Kangho who can use this technique. This is because it is rare for people to possess both positive and negative qis in the first place. I look up at the night sky, calmly organizing and establishing my martial arts. Zaha Divine Arts is at the top, and Sun and Moon Divine Arts is at the bottom. The two martial arts are derived from Light Sky and Sun and Moon and the Zaha Sword Energy. In addition, there was the new addition of the technique I wanted to master- Meteor Falling from Galaxy. After making the decision, I jump down from the guesthouse and train the arts holding onto my sword. It is always lame when trying to attempt something for the first time. One has to be swift in the moment to be able to cut anything down. I swing my sword into the night towards the pool statue ahead. I embrace the darkness of the night and try to imitate the motion of a meteor falling from the sky with the swift movement of my sword. To imitate a meteor, I have to be as fast as a beam of light, so I continued to increase the speed of my movements to match the speed of light. Suddenly, while holding the sword and unleashing my technique, the movements of the Blood Palace Lord comes to mind. And I decided to implement it. By the time my intentions begin to manifest and take shape I wander around the area with the Light Sky of Sun and Moon wrapped around my blade. The glow of the white light resembling flowers against the darkness of the night shines like the stars in the night sky. After pouring out the meaningless stars all night, at some point I establish an imaginary goal. I push the qi of my Yin and Yang energy and focus it all towards the tip of the blade. Ice qi wraps around the blade and from the tip of the sword Im able to see the red glow of my sword qi. The black night with white flowers and red lines. This feels like a painting. ! I got this far without a clear image of what I wanted to accomplish. It feels too advanced for a martial arts, so I feel like Im unable to make this complicated technique fully my own. Well, I temporarily named this the Meteor Falling from the Galaxy. I know its unrealistic to think that I would get it down immediately when I only just started training, so I decide to put away my sword and light the guest house that had been covered in darkness. In the meantime, I reinforce my technique by introducing a bit of killing intent this is to make sure the martial arts holds conviction and meaning. A single thrust of the sword to block the vision of the enemy and melt them down. A lethal sword technique. The martial arts was strangely difficult to accomplish and the meaning behind it is ambiguous too, so I decided to go with a simpler name. Meteor Sword. A man who makes up his own special move. That is me. After creating the martial arts, I feel dizzy, so I head to the roof of the guesthouse. Ah, is this why cats climb up? I slap myself on the cheek thinking that I was trying to relate to the heart of a cat. Let us act in limits. As I am checking out the sun rising from the guesthouse, Sam Bok gets up and comes to the front of the guesthouse and begins to sweep the place. As Sam Bok begins to sweep, Chil Geom comes out from the enemy camp on the left and sweeps the barracks there. The two, who are holding brooms, glare at each other and Sam Bok says, What are you looking at? Lower those eyes. Chil Geom snorts and continues to sweep. I say to Sam Book from the roof, Sam Bok. Ah, fuck! That shocked me! When he spots me he asks, What are you doing on the roof? Watching the world. The moon setting and the sun rising. The stars are gone, and I dont know where they went. You worked so hard. Sam Bok resumes sweeping and says, Go in and sleep sir. Sam Bok, you are a server. It isnt like that. Are you belittling servers now? If you are a man, shouldnt you start up as a server like Sect Leader did, run a guesthouse, earn money and then be a service escort for things, charge high prices, marry a pretty woman, and dream big? You have a plan. Ambitious I see. Do you have any plans, Sect Leader? I do. It is my plan to make sure people like you live as planned. That is good. Sam Bok lowers the broom and looks up at me. I respect you, Sect Leader. Why do I feel like slapping those who flatter me like this? It is not flattery. Flattery is what those people there in the barracks do. Look at the mess. I say to Chil Geom, Chil Geom, good morning. To which he replies. Yes, Sect Leader. I say to Chil Geom without much thought, Want to have breakfast together? To which he says, I am fine. Are you ignoring my kindness? I apologize. I deliberately ask Sam Bok to prepare breakfast. After that, the food was placed on the table outside the guesthouse and then we proceeded to grill yesterdays meat on the coal. Occasionally I would look over towards the barracks. Chil Geom was sitting at the table and would look over at us while chewing on beef jerky. I grab the greasy meat with my chopsticks and wave it at Chil Geom. Chil Geom Yes, Sect Leader. I simply called you. I put the meat into my mouth and looked at him. I hear the sound of something sizzling and turn to the side where the meat is being grilled and it seems like a whole pork leg was placed. Yah, do it right. Sam Bok waves the leg he was grilling to Chil Geom. Since we were all warriors who were learning martial arts, it is only right that we eat breakfast in huge quantities. According to Sword Demon, there is a high chance that the enemies will arrive in 10 days, so various people of Demon Cult will come today or tomorrow. So, I overindulge myself with the food. It looks like these people slept soundly because of me, and the evil ones and the third young lord, who is still recovering, are eating well. Well, I dont want anything in particular. Just to share a meal with these people. Sword Demon is eating so well that I wondered if this one was the same man who lived on porridge. It was my understanding that people get more depressed when they eat porridge. If a person drinks more alcohol than rice, there is a high chance they go off the rails. If one person eats alone for ten years, there is a high chance they will turn out like this. In that sense, we all looked at Chil Geom from time to time. After eating without a word, we sit in silence and Sword Demon almost seems bored. Holding onto the thick piece of meat with his chopsticks, he looks at Chil Geom. Sword Demon shakes the meat and says to Chil Geom, Come eat with us. Chil Geom glares at him. It is alright. I glare at the meat Sword Demon is holding and then hold out my chopsticks for a surprise attack. But Sword Demon turns his wrist as if using a technique and dodges my attack. As he shoves it into his mouth he says, Cannot do that. I sneer at Pervert Demon and the moment our eyes meet; he begins to laugh like a madman. While we eat, we look at this guy who is laughing alone and Sword Demon says, Lets eat. Yes. Pervert Demon stops laughing and begins to eat again. Come to think of it, Pervert Demon laughed because of Sword Demon. Their relationship is that of a teacher and disciple. I decided to drop it because I didnt want to see someone get beaten up at this peaceful table. That is how nice I am. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know via our discord so we can fix it as soon as possible.